Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C2026-011 - 1/27/2026 - Approved
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF CITYWIDE LIFT STATION REPAIR FY 2019 - 2020 PROJECT 19029A Plummer Associates, Inc 1320 South University Drive, Suite 300/Fort Worth, Texas 817-806-1700 TBPE Firm No. 13 ISSUED FOR BID Record Drawing Number September 2025 STL-238 CONFORMED PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Table of Contents 00 01 00- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 Addendum Revision Notes Addendum 1 N/A Prebid Site Visit Schedule. Addendum 2 N/A Bid Extension. Addendum 3 Revision 1 The entire Plan Set and Specification Book were reissued under this addendum. No revision triangles or clouds will be seen for Revision 1. Addendum 4 Revision 2 Updates can be seen with clouds and revision triangles with the number"2". Addendum 5 Revision 3 Updates can be seen with clouds and revision triangles with the number"3". END OF SECTION Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division/ Title Section DIVISION 00-CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 2 00 01 00 Table of Contents 000101 Seals Sheet 2 000102 List of Drawings 00 52 23 Agreement 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions DIVISION 01-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 Summary of Work 23 10 Alternates and A lowances F1 � s 2 1�2901 Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 33 01 Submittal Register 01 35 00 Special Procedures 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 00 Temporary Controls 01 12 16 Sequence of Construction 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 53 30 Temporary Bypass Pumping Table of Contents 00 01 00-1 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 017000 Execution Requirements 01 75 25 Equipment Testing and Startup 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documentation 01 79 00 Demonstration and Testing PART S STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 02-SITEWORK 21020 Site Clearing and Stripping 21040 Site Grading 21080 Removing Abandoned Structures 22020 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 22021 Control of Groundwater 22022 Trench Safety for Excavations 22040 Street Excavation 22080 Embankment 22100 Select Material 22420 Silt Fence 25202 Scarifying and Reshaping Base Course 25205 Pavement Repair, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalk, and Driveway Replacement 25223 Crushed Limestone Flexible Base 25402 Planning Asphaltic Surfaces(S-27A) 25404 Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions 25412 Prime Coat(5-30) (Asphalt Material Only) 25424 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement (Class A) 25610 Concrete Curb and Gutter Table of Contents 00 01 00-2 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 25612 Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways 25620 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 25802 Temporary Traffic Controls During Construction 25805 Work Zone Pavement Markings 25807 Pavement Markings(Paint and Thermoplastic) 25816 Raised Pavement Markers 25818 Pavement Markers (Reflectorized) 25828 Bituminous Adhesive for Pavement Markers 26202 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Systems(5-89) 26214 Grouting Abandoned Utility Lines 26404 Water Service Lines (5-87) 26409 Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves(5-84) 27202 Manholes 27203 Vacuum Testing of Wastewater Manholes and Structures 27205 Fiberglass Manholes 27602 Gravity Wastewater Lines 27604 Disposal of Waste from Wastewater Cleaning Operations 27606 Sanitary Service Lines 27611 Cleaning and Televised Inspection of Conduits 28020 Seeding 28040 Sodding Table of Contents 00 01 00-3 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 DIVISION 03-CONCRETE 30020 Portland Cement Concrete 32020 Reinforcing Steel 36020 Stucco and Plaster(5-123) 37040 Epoxy Compounds (S-44) 38000 Concrete Structures DIVISION 04-MASONRY 41020 Structural Clay Tile Floor and Sidewalks (5-22) 41080 Brick Pavers 42020 Concrete Masonry Unit(5-121) DIVISION 05-METALS 55420 Frames,Grates, Rings and Covers 55440 Aluminum Grating (5-110) DIVISION 06-WOOD AND PLASTIC 61810 Shelter Construction (5-102) DIVISION 11-EQUIPMENT 113120 Wet Well Ventilation Systems (5-113) DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL 2 150620 Plumbing (5-90) 151030 Eccentric Plug Valves and Electric Motor Actuators (5-105) 151040 Surge Relief Valves(5-106) Table of Contents 00 01 00-4 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 PART T TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 00 Demolition 02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition & Decommissioning 02 82 33 Removal and Disposal of Asbestos Containing Materials 2 02 90 00 Manhole and Wet ell Restoration with Protecti e oa in 03 60 00 Grouting 05 05 33 Anchor Systems 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05 52 15 Aluminum Handrails and Railings 09 91 00 Painting and Protective Coatings 10 14 19 Safety Signs 10 90 00 Identification,Stenciling, and Tagging 26 01 26 Electrical Testing 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19.01 Wire Connections and Devices 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 73 Electrical Power System Studies 26 22 00 Low Voltage Transformers 26 24 16 Panelboards Table of Contents 00 01 00-5 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 29 23 Variable-Frequency Drives 26 36 00 Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 13 Manual Transfer Switch 26 64 19 Motor Control Centers 31 23 16 Excavation Support and Protection 32 31 13 Chain-link Fences and Gates 323140 Precast Concrete Fence 33 14 19 Drains, Cleanouts, Hydrants, and Hose Stations 33 32 13 Pre-Engineered Lift Station 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 31.10 Piping System, PVC and CPVC Pipe 40 05 36.13 Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork 2 0 05 52 Miscel aneous Valves and Appurtenan es 40 05 61 Gate Valves 40 05 64.43 Fiberglass Dampers 40 05 65 Valves for Flow Control and Check Service 40 05 78.23 Air Vacuum Valves for Wastewater Service 40 39 80 Pump Controls PLC Based 40 39 80-01 Pump Controls 40 61 13 Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 15 Process Control System Submittals 40 61 21 Process Control System Testing 40 61 21.71 Factory Witness Test 40 61 21.72 Field Testing Table of Contents 00 01 00-6 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 40 61 21.73 Final Acceptance Test 40 61 23 Signal Coordination Requirements 40 61 24 Quality Assurance 40 61 26 Process Control System Training 406193 Process Control System Input 40 61 96 Process Control Descriptions 40 62 63 Operator Interface Terminals (OIT) 40 63 43 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) 40 67 00 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 67 63 Uninterruptible Power Systems 40 69 80 Level Transmitter 40 69 90 Flow Meter 40 70 00 Instrumentation for Process Systems 40 72 76.26 Level Switches (Floats) 40 73 29.13 Submersible Level (Pressure) Sensors 40 73 99 Pressure Gauges and Thermometers 40 78 00 Panel Mounted Instruments 40 78 56 Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers, and Surge Suppressors 40 78 59 Power Supplies 40 94 43 Programmable Logic Controllers 41 22 13.19 Jib Crane 41 22 18 Bridge Cranes,Trolleys, and Hoists 43 22 10-PS Common Requirements for Pumps 43 25 00-PS Pumps(Submersible- Immersible) 44 31 19 Packaged Odor Control Systems Table of Contents 00 01 00-7 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 APPENDIX Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation and ecommendations or the Proposed Boat Haul Out Facility—September 2023, Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, LLC. 2 Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation and Recommendations For The Proposed Cooper's Boat Facility Structure—October 2023, Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, LL . END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 01 00-S Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 ou GilAkrtSanche- DATE(MM/DDIYYYY) A�o CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE F2/5/2026 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Sarah Mharlwa Acrisure South Insurance Services, LLC PHONE FAX 1317 Citizens Blvd AIC No Ext: 214-989-7100 AIc,No:210-696-8414 Leesburg FL 34748 ADDRESS: Service@ib-tx.com INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# License#:BR-1796553 INSURERA: Hartford Fire Insurance Company 19682 INSURED INSURERS:Trumbull Insurance Company 27120 Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. 215 W. Bandera Rd. Ste. 114-461 INSURERC: Hartford Casualty Insurance Company 29424 Boerne TX 78006 INSURERD:Texas Mutual Insurance Company 22945 INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:829221081 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR ADDLSUBRTYPE OF INSURANCE INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LTR MM/DDIYYYYJ fMM1DDIYYYYJ LIMITS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 46UEABJ5URP 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 DAMAGE TO RENTED CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR PREMISES Ea occurrence $500,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $15,000 X XCU PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 POLICY PRO- JECT LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $2,000,000 OTHER: $ B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 46UEABJ60GL 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 Ea accident X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED X SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS X HIRED X NON-OWNED PROPERTYDAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident C X UMBRELLALIAB X OCCUR 46HHABJ60JW 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 EACH OCCURRENCE $10,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $10,000,000 DED X RETENTION$1 n nnn $ D WORKERS COMPENSATION 0002120491 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 X PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY YIN STATUTE ER ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? FNJ NIA (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 A GL-Ltd Pollution Liab Worksites 46UEABJ5URP 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 Per Occurrence 1,000,000 General Aggregate 2,000,000 Deductible 10,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) The General Liability and Auto policies include blanket additional insured endorsements(HG0001 06/05&HA9916 03/12)as required in a written contract with the Named Insured.The General Liability,Auto&Work Camp policies include a blanket waiver of subrogation endorsement(HG0001 06/05, HA9916 03/12& WC42030413)as required in a written contract with the Named Insured.Primary Non-Contributory per attached(HG0001 06/05&HA9916 03/12).Cancellation provisions-see attached(IH0307 06/11 &WC420601).Umbrella is follow form of the General Liability,Auto and Work Comp policies subject to policy terms and conditions. No exclusion for boom and overload coverage. Additional Insureds as per Written Contract:Plummer Associates, Inc.and City of Corpus Christi—Engineering Services. Contract#6687; Project#19029A-RFB-Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020). CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Plummer Associates, Inc. 500 N. Shoreline Blvd, Suite 700 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi, TX 78401 - �-1 y Irwin @ 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD NAMED INSURED:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. POLICY NUMBER:46UEABJ5URP COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM Various provisions in this policy restrict coverage. Read (2) The "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurs the entire policy carefully to determine rights, duties and during the policy period; and what is and is not covered. (3) Prior to the policy period, no insured listed Throughout this policy the words "you" and "your" refer to under Paragraph 1. of Section II — Who Is An the Named Insured shown in the Declarations, and any Insured and no "employee" authorized by you to other person or organization qualifying as a Named give or receive notice of an "occurrence" or Insured under this policy. The words "we", "us" and "our" claim, knew that the "bodily injury" or "property refer to the stock insurance company member of The damage" had occurred, in whole or in part. If Hartford providing this insurance. such a listed insured or authorized "employee" The word "insured" means any person or organization knew, prior to the policy period, that the "bodily qualifying as such under Section II —Who Is An Insured. injury" or "property damage" occurred, then any continuation, change or resumption of such Other words and phrases that appear in quotation marks "bodily injury" or "property damage" during or have special meaning. Refer to Section V—Definitions. after the policy period will be deemed to have SECTION I—COVERAGES been known prior to the policy period. COVERAGE A BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY c. "Bodily injury" or"property damage" will be deemed DAMAGE LIABILITY to have been known to have occurred at the 1. Insuring Agreement earliest time when any insured listed under Paragraph 1. of Section II — Who Is An Insured or a. We will pay those sums that the insured becomes any "employee" authorized by you to give or legally obligated to pay as damages because of receive notice of an "occurrence" or claim: "bodily injury" or "property damage" to which this insurance applies. We will have the right and duty (1) Reports all, or any part, of the "bodily injury" or to defend the insured against any "suit" seeking "property damage"to us or any other insurer; those damages. However, we will have no duty to (2) Receives a written or verbal demand or claim defend the insured against any "suit" seeking for damages because of the "bodily injury" or damages for "bodily injury" or"property damage" to "property damage"; or which this insurance does not apply. We may, at (3) Becomes aware by any other means that our discretion, investigate any "occurrence" and "bodily injury" or "property damage" has settle any claim or"suit"that may result. But: occurred or has begun to occur. (1) The amount we will pay for damages is limited d. Damages because of "bodily injury" include as described in Section III — Limits Of damages claimed by any person or organization for Insurance; and care, loss of services or death resulting at any time (2) Our right and duty to defend ends when we from the "bodily injury". have used up the applicable limit of insurance in e. Incidental Medical Malpractice the payment of judgments or settlements under Coverages A or B or medical expenses under (1) "Bodily injury" arising out of the rendering of or Coverage C. failure to render professional health care No other obligation or liability to pay sums or services as a physician, dentist, nurse, emergency medical technician or paramedic perform acts or services is covered unless explicitly shall be deemed to be caused by an provided for under Supplementary Payments — "occurrence", but only if: Coverages A and B. (a) The physician, dentist, nurse, emergency b. This insurance applies to "bodily injury" and medical technician or paramedic is "property damage" only if: employed by you to provide such services; (1) The "bodily injury" or "property damage" is and caused by an "occurrence" that takes place in (b) You are not engaged in the business or the "coverage territory"; occupation of providing such services. HG 00 01 06 05 Page 1 of 18 ©2005 The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. with its permission.) (2) For the purpose of determining the limits of d. Workers' Compensation And Similar Laws insurance for incidental medical malpractice, Any obligation of the insured under a workers' any act or omission together with all related acts compensation, disability benefits or unemployment or omissions in the furnishing of these services compensation law or any similar law. to any one person will be considered one "occurrence". e. Employer's Liability 2. Exclusions "Bodily injury"to: This insurance does not apply to: (1) An "employee" of the insured arising out of and in the course of: a. Expected Or Intended Injury "Bodily injury" or "property damage" expected or (a) Employment by the insured; or intended from the standpoint of the insured. This (b) Performing duties related to the conduct of exclusion does not apply to "bodily injury" or the insured's business; or "property damage" resulting from the use of (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of reasonable force to protect persons or property. that "employee" as a consequence of b. Contractual Liability Paragraph (1) above. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for which the This exclusion applies: insured is obligated to pay damages by reason of (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an the assumption of liability in a contract or employer or in any other capacity; and agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability (2) To any obligation to share damages with or for damages: repay someone else who must pay damages (1) That the insured would have in the absence of because of the injury. the contract or agreement; or This exclusion does not apply to liability assumed (2) Assumed in a contract or agreement that is an by the insured under an "insured contract". "insured contract", provided the "bodily injury" or f. Pollution "property damage" occurs subsequent to the 1 "Bodily " "property dama e" out execution of the contract or agreement. Solely ( ) injury" or g arising for the purposes of liability assumed in an of the actual, alleged or threatened discharge, "insured contract", reasonable attorney fees and dispersal, seepage, migration, release or necessary litigation expenses incurred by or for escape of"pollutants": a party other than an insured are deemed to be (a) At or from any premises, site or location damages because of "bodily injury" or "property which is or was at any time owned or damage", provided: occupied by, or rented or loaned to, any (a) Liability to such party for, or for the cost of, insured. However, this subparagraph does that party's defense has also been assumed not apply to: in the same "insured contract"; and (1) "Bodily injury" if sustained within a (b) Such attorney fees and litigation expenses building and caused by smoke, fumes, are for defense of that party against a civil or vapor or soot produced by or originating alternative dispute resolution proceeding in from equipment that is used to heat, cool which damages to which this insurance or dehumidify the building, or equipment applies are alleged. that is used to heat water for personal C. Liquor Liability use, by the building's occupants or their q y guests; "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for which any (ii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for insured may be held liable by reason of: which you may be held liable, if you are a (1) Causing or contributing to the intoxication of any contractor and the owner or lessee of person; such premises, site or location has been (2) The furnishing of alcoholic beverages to a added to your policy as an additional person under the legal drinking age or under the insured with respect to your ongoing influence of alcohol; or operations performed for that additional insured at that premises, site or location (3) Any statute, ordinance or regulation relating to and such premises, site or location is not the sale, gift, distribution or use of alcoholic and never was owned or occupied by, or beverages. rented or loaned to, any insured, other This exclusion applies only if you are in the than that additional insured; or business of manufacturing, distributing, selling, serving or furnishing alcoholic beverages. Page 2 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 (iii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" (e) At or from any premises, site or location on arising out of heat, smoke or fumes from which any insured or any contractors or a "hostile fire"; subcontractors working directly or indirectly (b) At or from any premises, site or location on any insured's behalf are performing which is or was at any time used by or for operations if the operations are to test for, any insured or others for the handling, monitor, clean up, remove, contain, treat, storage, disposal, processing or treatment of detoxify or neutralize, or in any way respond waste; to, or assess the effects of, "pollutants". (c) Which are or were at any time transported, (2) Any loss, cost or expense arising out of any: handled, stored, treated, disposed of, or (a) Request, demand, order or statutory or processed as waste by or for: regulatory requirement that any insured or (1) Any insured; or others test for, monitor, clean up, remove, (ii) Any person or organization for whom you contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in may be legally responsible; any way respond to, or assess the effects of, "pollutants"; or (d) At or from any premises, site or location on (b) Claim or suit by or on behalf of a which any insured or any contractors or governmental authority for damages subcontractors working directly or indirectly because of testing for, monitoring, cleaning on any insured's behalf are performing operations if the "pollutants" are brought on up, removing, containing, treating, or to the premises, site or location in detoxifying or neutralizing, or in any way connection with such operations by such responding to, or assessing the effects of, "pollutants". insured, contractor or subcontractor. However, this subparagraph does not apply However, this paragraph does not apply to to: liability for damages because of "property damage" that the insured would have in the (i) Bodily injury or property damage absence of such request, demand, order or arising out of the escape of fuels, statutory or regulatory requirement, or such lubricants or other operating fluids which claim or"suit" by or on behalf of a governmental are needed to perform the normal authority. electrical, hydraulic or mechanical functions necessary for the operation of g• Aircraft, Auto Or Watercraft "mobile equipment" or its parts, if such "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of fuels, lubricants or other operating fluids the ownership, maintenance, use or entrustment to escape from a vehicle part designed to others of any aircraft, "auto" or watercraft owned or hold, store or receive them. This operated by or rented or loaned to any insured. Use exception does not apply if the "bodily includes operation and "loading or unloading". injury" or "property damage" arises out of This exclusion applies even if the claims against the intentional discharge, dispersal or any insured allege negligence or other wrongdoing release of the fuels, lubricants or other in the supervision, hiring, employment, training or operating fluids, or if such fuels, monitoring of others by that insured, if the lubricants or other operating fluids are "occurrence" which caused the "bodily injury" or brought on or to the premises, site or "property damage" involved the ownership, location with the intent that they be maintenance, use or entrustment to others of any discharged, dispersed or released as part aircraft, "auto" or watercraft that is owned or of the operations being performed by operated by or rented or loaned to any insured. such insured, contractor or subcontractor; This exclusion does not apply to: (ii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" (1) A watercraft while ashore on premises you own sustained within a building and caused or rent; by the release of gases, fumes or vapors (2) A watercraft you do not own that is: from materials brought into that building (a) Less than 51 feet long; and in connection with operations being (b) Not being used to carry persons for a performed by you or on your behalf by a contractor or subcontractor; or charge; (iii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" (3) Parking an "auto" on, or on the ways next to, arising out of heat, smoke or fumes from premises you own or rent, provided the "auto" is a "hostile fire"; or not owned by or rented or loaned to you or the insured; HG 00 01 06 05 Page 3 of 18 (4) Liability assumed under any "insured contract" working directly or indirectly on your behalf are for the ownership, maintenance or use of performing operations, if the "property damage" aircraft or watercraft; arises out of those operations; or (5) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out (6) That particular part of any property that must be of the operation of any of the equipment listed in restored, repaired or replaced because "your Paragraph f.(2) or f.(3) of the definition of work"was incorrectly performed on it. "mobile equipment"; or Paragraphs (1), (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not (6) An aircraft that is not owned by any insured and apply to "property damage" (other than damage by is hired, chartered or loaned with a paid crew. fire) to premises, including the contents of such However, this exception does not apply if the premises, rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer insured has any other insurance for such "bodily consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance injury" or "property damage", whether the other applies to Damage To Premises Rented To You as insurance is primary, excess, contingent or on described in Section III — Limits Of Insurance. any other basis. Paragraph (2) of this exclusion does not apply if the h. Mobile Equipment premises are "your work" and were never occupied, "Bodily injury"or"property damage" arising out of: rented or held for rental by you. (1) The transportation of "mobile equipment" by an Paragraphs (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not "auto"owned or operated by or rented or loaned apply to "property damage" arising from the use of to any insured; or elevators. (2) The use of "mobile equipment" in, or while in Paragraphs (3), (4), (5) and (6) of this exclusion do practice for, or while being prepared for, any not apply to liability assumed under a sidetrack prearranged racing, speed, demolition, or agreement. stunting activity. Paragraphs (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not i. War apply to "property damage" to borrowed equipment "Bodily injury" or "property damage", however while not being used to perform operations at the caused, arising, directly or indirectly, out of: job site. (1) War, including undeclared or civil war; Paragraph (6) of this exclusion does not apply to property damage included in the products- (2) Warlike action by a military force, including completed operations hazard". action in hindering or defending against an k. Damage To Your Product actual or expected attack, by any government, sovereign or other authority using military "Property damage"to "your product" arising out of it personnel or other agents; or or any part of it. (3) Insurrection, rebellion, revolution, usurped I. Damage To Your Work power, or action taken by governmental "Property damage"to "your work" arising out of it or authority in hindering or defending against any any part of it and included in the "products- of these. completed operations hazard". j. Damage To Property This exclusion does not apply if the damaged work "Property damage" to: or the work out of which the damage arises was (1) Property you own, rent, or occupy, including any performed on your behalf by a subcontractor. costs or expenses incurred by you, or any other m. Damage To Impaired Property Or Property Not person, organization or entity, for repair, Physically Injured replacement, enhancement, restoration or "Property damage" to "impaired property" or maintenance of such property for any reason, property that has not been physically injured, including prevention of injury to a person or arising out of: damage to another's property; (1) A defect, deficiency, inadequacy or dangerous (2) Premises you sell, give away or abandon, if the condition in "your product" or"your work"; or "property damage" arises out of any part of (2) A delay or failure by you or anyone acting on those premises; your behalf to perform a contract or agreement (3) Property loaned to you; in accordance with its terms. (4) Personal property in the care, custody or control This exclusion does not apply to the loss of use of of the insured; other property arising out of sudden and accidental (5) That particular part of real property on which physical injury to "your product" or"your work" after you or any contractors or subcontractors it has been put to its intended use. Page 4 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 n. Recall Of Products, Work Or Impaired kind to persons or property which would not Property have occurred in whole or in part but for the Damages claimed for any loss, cost or expense "asbestos hazard"; incurred by you or others for the loss of use, (b) Arise out of any request, demand, order or withdrawal, recall, inspection, repair, replacement, statutory or regulatory requirement that any adjustment, removal or disposal of: insured or others test for, monitor, clean up, (1) "Your product"; remove, encapsulate, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize or in any way respond to or (2) Your work"; or assess the effects of an "asbestos hazard"; (3) "Impaired property"; or if such product, work, or property is withdrawn or (c) Arise out of any claim or suit for damages recalled from the market or from use by any person because of testing for, monitoring, cleaning or organization because of a known or suspected up, removing, encapsulating, containing, defect, deficiency, inadequacy or dangerous treating, detoxifying or neutralizing or in any condition in it. way responding to or assessing the effects o. Personal And Advertising Injury of an "asbestos hazard". "Bodily injury" arising out of "personal and Damage To Premises Rented To You — Exception advertising injury". For Damage By Fire, Lightning Or Explosion p. Electronic Data Exclusions c. through h. and j. through n. do not apply Damages arising out of the loss of, loss of use of, to damage by fire, lightning or explosion to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or permission of the owner. A separate limit of insurance inability to manipulate electronic data. applies to this coverage as described in Section III — As used in this exclusion, electronic data means Limits Of Insurance. information, facts or programs stored as or on, COVERAGE B PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING created or used on, or transmitted to or from INJURY LIABILITY computer software, including systems and applications software, hard or floppy disks, CD- 1. Insuring Agreement ROMS, tapes, drives, cells, data processing a. We will pay those sums that the insured becomes devices or any other media which are used with legally obligated to pay as damages because of electronically controlled equipment. "personal and advertising injury" to which this q. Employment-Related Practices insurance applies. We will have the right and duty "Bodily injury"to: to defend the insured against any "suit' seeking those damages. However, we will have no duty to (1) A person arising out of any "employment— defend the insured against any "suit' seeking related practices"; or damages for "personal and advertising injury" to (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of which this insurance does not apply. We may, at that person as a consequence of "bodily injury" our discretion, investigate any offense and settle to that person at whom any "employment- any claim or"suit'that may result. But: related practices" are directed. (1) The amount we will pay for damages is limited This exclusion applies: as described in Section III — Limits Of (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an Insurance; and employer or in any other capacity; and (2) Our right and duty to defend end when we have (2) To any obligation to share damages with or used up the applicable limit of insurance in the repay someone else who must pay damages payment of judgments or settlements under because of the injury. Coverages A or B or medical expenses under Coverage C. r. Asbestos No other obligation or liability to pay sums or (1) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out perform acts or services is covered unless explicitly of the "asbestos hazard". provided for under Supplementary Payments — (2) Any damages, judgments, settlements, loss, Coverages A and B. costs or expenses that: b. This insurance applies to "personal and advertising (a) May be awarded or incurred by reason of injury" caused by an offense arising out of your any claim or suit alleging actual or business but only if the offense was committed in threatened injury or damage of any nature or the "coverage territory"during the policy period. HG 00 01 06 05 Page 5 of 18 2. Exclusions (2) Slogan, unless the slogan is also a trademark, This insurance does not apply to: trade name, service mark or other designation a. Knowing Violation Of Rights Of Another of origin or authenticity; or Personal and advertising injury arising out of an (3) Title of any literary or artistic work. offense committed by, at the direction or with the j• Insureds In Media And Internet Type consent or acquiescence of the insured with the Businesses expectation of inflicting "personal and advertising "Personal and advertising injury" committed by an injury". insured whose business is: b. Material Published With Knowledge Of Falsity (1) Advertising, broadcasting, publishing or "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of oral, telecasting; written or electronic publication of material, if done (2) Designing or determining content of web sites by or at the direction of the insured with knowledge for others; or of its falsity. (3) An Internet search, access, content or service c. Material Published Prior To Policy Period provider. "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of oral, However, this exclusion does not apply to written or electronic publication of material whose Paragraphs 17.a., b. and c. of "personal and first publication took place before the beginning of advertising injury" under the Definitions Section. the policy period. For the purposes of this exclusion, placing an d. Criminal Acts "advertisement"for or linking to others on your web "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of a site, by itself, is not considered the business of criminal act committed by or at the direction of the advertising, broadcasting, publishing or telecasting. insured. k. Electronic Chatrooms Or Bulletin Boards e. Contractual Liability "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of an "Personal and advertising injury" for which the electronic chatroom or bulletin board the insured insured has assumed liability in a contract or hosts, owns, or over which the insured exercises agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability control. for damages that the insured would have in the I. Unauthorized Use Of Another's Name Or absence of the contract or agreement. Product f. Breach Of Contract "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of a unauthorized use of another's name or product in breach of contract, except an implied contract to use your e-mail address, domain name or metatags, or another's"advertising idea" in your"advertisement". any other similar tactics to mislead another's g. Quality Or Performance Of Goods — Failure To potential customers. Conform To Statements m. Pollution "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the failure of goods, products or services to conform actual, alleged or threatened discharge, dispersal, with any statement of quality or performance made seepage, migration, release or escape of in your"advertisement". "pollutants" at any time. h. Wrong Description Of Prices n. Pollution-Related "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the Any loss, cost or expense arising out of any: wrong description of the price of goods, products or (1) Request, demand, order or statutory or services. regulatory requirement that any insured or i. Infringement Of Intellectual Property Rights others test for, monitor, clean up, remove, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in any Personal and advertising injury arising out of any way respond to, or assess the effects of, violation of any intellectual property rights such as "pollutants"; or copyright, patent, trademark, trade name, trade secret, service mark or other designation of origin (2) Claim or suit by or on behalf of a governmental or authenticity. authority for damages because of testing for, However, this exclusion does not apply to monitoring, cleaning up, removing, containing, treating, detoxifying or neutralizing, or in any infringement, in your"advertisement", of: way responding to, or assessing the effects of, (1) Copyright; "pollutants". Page 6 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 o. War (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of "Personal and advertising injury", however caused, that person as a consequence of "personal and arising, directly or indirectly, out of: advertising injury" to that person at whom any (1) War, including undeclared or civil war; "employment-related practices" are directed. This exclusion applies: (2) Warlike action by a military force, including action in hindering or defending against an (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an actual or expected attack, by any government, employer or in any other capacity; and sovereign or other authority using military (2) To any obligation to share damages with or personnel or other agents; or repay someone else who must pay damages (3) Insurrection, rebellion, revolution, usurped power, because of the injury. or action taken by governmental authority in v. Asbestos hindering or defending against any of these. (1) "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of p. Internet Advertisements And Content Of Others the "asbestos hazard". "Personal and advertising injury"arising out of: (2) Any damages, judgments, settlements, loss, (1) An "advertisement"for others on your web site; costs or expenses that: (2) Placing a link to a web site of others on your (a) May be awarded or incurred by reason of web site; any claim or suit alleging actual or (3) Content, including information, sounds, text, threatened injury or damage of any nature or graphics, or images from a web site of others kind to persons or property which would not displayed within a frame or border on your web have occurred in whole or in part but for the "asbestos hazard"; site; or (4) Computer code, software or programming used (b) Arise out of any request, demand, order or statutory or regulatory requirement that any to enable: insured or others test for, monitor, clean up, (a) Your web site; or remove, encapsulate, contain, treat, detoxify (b) The presentation or functionality of an or neutralize or in any way respond to or "advertisement" or other content on your assess the effects of an "asbestos hazard"; web site. or q. Right Of Privacy Created By Statute (c) Arise out of any claim or suit for damages "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the because of testing for, monitoring, cleaning violation of a person's right of privacy created by up, removing, encapsulating, containing, any state or federal act. treating, detoxifying or neutralizing or in any way responding to or assessing the effects However, this exclusion does not apply to liability of an "asbestos hazard". for damages that the insured would have in the COVERAGE C MEDICAL PAYMENTS absence of such state or federal act. r. Violation Of Anti-Trust law 1. Insuring Agreement a. We will pay medical expenses as described below Personal and advertising injury arising out of a for"bodily injury" caused by an accident: violation of any anti-trust law. S. Securities (1) On premises you own or rent; "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the (2) On ways next to premises you own or rent; or fluctuation in price or value of any stocks, bonds or (3) Because of your operations; other securities. provided that: t. Discrimination Or Humiliation (1) The accident takes place in the "coverage "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of territory" and during the policy period; discrimination or humiliation committed by or at the (2) The expenses are incurred and reported to us direction of any "executive officer", director, within three years of the date of the accident; stockholder, partner or member of the insured. and u. Employment-Related Practices (3) The injured person submits to examination, at "Personal and advertising injury"to: our expense, by physicians of our choice as (1) A person arising out of any "employment— often as we reasonably require. related practices"; or HG 00 01 06 05 Page 7 of 18 b. We will make these payments regardless of fault. e. All costs taxed against the insured in the "suit". These payments will not exceed the applicable limit f. Prejudgment interest awarded against the insured of insurance. We will pay reasonable expenses for: on that part of the judgment we pay. If we make an (1) First aid administered at the time of an accident; offer to pay the applicable li mit of insurance, we will (2) Necessary medical, surgical, x-ray and dental not pay any prejudgment interest based on that services, including prosthetic devices; and period of time after the offer. (3) Necessary ambulance, hospital, professional g• All interest on the full amount of any judgment that nursing and funeral services. accrues after entry of the judgment and before we 2. Exclusions have paid, offered to pay, or deposited in court the part of the judgment that is within the applicable We will not pay expenses for"bodily injury": limit of insurance. a. Any Insured These payments will not reduce the limits of insurance. To any insured, except"volunteer workers". 2. If we defend an insured against a "suit" and an b. Hired Person indemnitee of the insured is also named as a party to To a person hired to do work for or on behalf of any the "suit", we will defend that indemnitee if all of the insured or a tenant of any insured. following conditions are met: C. Injury On Normally Occupied Premises a. The "suit" against the indemnitee seeks damages for which the insured has assumed the liability of To a person injured on that part of premises you the indemnitee in a contract or agreement that is an own or rent that the person normally occupies. "insured contract"; d. Workers Compensation And Similar Laws b. This insurance applies to such liability assumed by To a person, whether or not an "employee" of any the insured; insured, if benefits for the "bodily injury" are payable c. The obligation to defend, or the cost of the defense or must be provided under a workers' compensation of, that indemnitee, has also been assumed by the or disability benefits law or a similar law. insured in the same "insured contract"; e. Athletics Activities d. The allegations in the "suit" and the information we To a person injured while practicing, instructing or know about the "occurrence" are such that no participating in any physical exercises or games, conflict appears to exist between the interests of sports, or athletic contests. the insured and the interests of the indemnitee; f. Products-Completed Operations Hazard e. The indemnitee and the insured ask us to conduct Included within the "products-completed operations and control the defense of that indemnitee against hazard". such suit and agree that we can assign the same counsel to defend the insured and the indemnitee; g. Coverage A Exclusions and Excluded under Coverage A. f. The indemnitee: SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — COVERAGES (1) Agrees in writing to: A AND B (a) Cooperate with us in the investigation, 1. We will pay, with respect to any claim we investigate or settlement or defense of the "suit"; settle, or any "suit" against an insured we defend: (b) Immediately send us copies of any a. All expenses we incur. demands, notices, summonses or legal b. Up to $1,000 for cost of bail bonds required papers received in connection with the "suit"; because of accidents or traffic law violations arising (c) Notify any other insurer whose coverage is out of the use of any vehicle to which the Bodily available to the indemnitee; and Injury Liability Coverage applies. We do not have (d) Cooperate with us with respect to to furnish these bonds. appeal bonds or bonds to release coordinating other applicable insurance c. The cost of a pp available to the indemnitee; and attachments, but only for bond amounts within the (2) Provides us with written authorization to: applicable limit of insurance. We do not have to furnish these bonds. (a) Obtain records and other information related d. All reasonable expenses incurred by the insured at to the "suit"; and our request to assist us in the investigation or (b) Conduct and control the defense of the defense of the claim or "suit", including actual loss indemnitee in such "suit". of earnings up to $500 a day because of time off So long as the above conditions are met, attorneys' from work. fees incurred by us in the defense of that indemnitee, Page 8 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 necessary litigation expenses incurred by us and However, none of these "employees" or "volunteer necessary litigation expenses incurred by the workers" are insureds for: indemnitee at our request will be paid as (1) "Bodily injury" or "personal and advertising Supplementary Payments. Notwithstanding the injury": provisions of Paragraph 2.b.(2) of Section I — Coverage A — Bodily Injury And Property Damage (a) To you, to your partners or members (if you Liability, such payments will not be deemed to be are a partnership or joint venture), to your damages for"bodily injury" and "property damage" and members o you are a limited liability t will not reduce the limits of insurance. company), to a co-"employee" while in the course of his or her employment or Our obligation to defend an insured's indemnitee and performing duties related to the conduct of to pay for attorneys' fees and necessary litigation your business, or to your other "volunteer expenses as Supplementary Payments ends when: workers" while performing duties related to a. We have used up the applicable limit of insurance the conduct of your business; in the payment of judgments or settlements; or (b) To the spouse, child, parent, brother or sister b. The conditions set forth above, or the terms of the of that co-"employee" or that "volunteer agreement described in Paragraph f. above, are no worker" as a consequence of Paragraph longer met. (1)(a) above; SECTION II —WHO IS AN INSURED (c) For which there is any obligation to share 1. If you are designated in the Declarations as: damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the injury a. An individual, you and your spouse are insureds, described in Paragraphs (1)(a) or (b) above; but only with respect to the conduct of a business or of which you are the sole owner. (d) Arising out of his or her providing or failing to b. A partnership or joint venture, you are an insured. provide professional health care services. Your members, your partners, and their spouses are also insureds, but only with respect to the If you are not in the business of providing conduct of your business. professional health care services, Paragraph (d) c. A limited liability company, you are an insured. does not apply to any nurse, emergency medical technician or paramedic employed by Your members are also insureds, but only with you to provide such services. respect to the conduct of your business. Your managers are insureds, but only with respect to (2) "Property damage" to property: their duties as your managers. (a) Owned, occupied or used by, d. An organization other than a partnership, joint (b) Rented to, in the care, custody or control of, venture or limited liability company, you are an or over which physical control is being insured. Your "executive officers" and directors are exercised for any purpose by insureds, but only with respect to their duties as you, any of your "employees", "volunteer your officers or directors. Your stockholders are workers", any partner or member (if you are a also insureds, but only with respect to their liability partnership or joint venture), or any member (if as stockholders. you are a limited liability company). e. A trust, you are an insured. Your trustees are also b. Real Estate Manager insureds, but only with respect to their duties as trustees. Any person (other than your "employee" or "volunteer worker"), or any organization while 2. Each of the following is also an insured: acting as your real estate manager. a. Employees and Volunteer workers c. Temporary Custodians of Your Property Your "volunteer workers" only while performing Any person or organization having proper duties related to the conduct of your business, or temporary custody of your property if you die, but your "employees", other than either your "executive only: officers" (if you are an organization other than a partnership, joint venture or limited liability (1) With respect to liability arising out of the company) or your managers (if you are a limited maintenance or use of that property; and liability company), but only for acts within the scope (2) Until your legal representative has been of their employment by you or while performing appointed. duties related to the conduct of your business. d. Legal Representative If You Die Your legal representative if you die, but only with respect to duties as such. That representative will HG 00 01 06 05 Page 9 of 18 have all your rights and duties under this Coverage 5. Nonowned Watercraft Part. With respect to watercraft you do not own that is less e. Unnamed Subsidiary than 51 feet long and is not being used to carry Any subsidiary, and subsidiary thereof, of yours persons for a charge, any person is an insured while which is a legally incorporated entity of which you operating such watercraft with your permission. Any own a financial interest of more than 50% of the other person or organization responsible for the voting stock on the effective date of the Coverage conduct of such person is also an insured, but only Part. with respect to liability arising out of the operation of the watercraft, and only if no other insurance of any The insurance afforded herein for any subsidiary kind is available to that person or organization for this not named in this Coverage Part as a named liability. insured does not apply to injury or damage with respect to which an insured under this Coverage However, no person or organization is an insured with Part is also an insured under another policy or respect to: would be an insured under such policy but for its a. "Bodily injury" to a co-"employee" of the person termination or the exhaustion of its limits of operating the watercraft; or insurance. b. "Property damage"to property owned by, rented to, 3. Newly Acquired or Formed Organization in the charge of or occupied by you or the employer Any organization you newly acquire or form, other than of any person who is an insured under this a partnership, joint venture or limited liability company, provision. and over which you maintain financial interest of more 6. Additional Insureds When Required By Written than 50% of the voting stock, will qualify as a Named Contract, Written Agreement Or Permit Insured if there is no other similar insurance available The following person(s) or organization(s) are an to that organization. However: additional insured when you have agreed, in a written a. Coverage under this provision is afforded only until contract, written agreement or because of a permit the 180th day after you acquire or form the issued by a state or political subdivision, that such organization or the end of the policy period, person or organization be added as an additional whichever is earlier; insured on your policy, provided the injury or damage b. Coverage A does not apply to "bodily injury" or occurs subsequent to the execution of the contract or "property damage" that occurred before you agreement. acquired or formed the organization; and A person or organization is an additional insured under c. Coverage B does not apply to "personal and this provision only for that period of time required by advertising injury" arising out of an offense the contract or agreement. committed before you acquired or formed the However, no such person or organization is an insured organization. under this provision if such person or organization is 4. Mobile Equipment included as an insured by an endorsement issued by With respect to mobile equipment registered in your us and made a part of this Coverage Part. name under any motor vehicle registration law, any a. Vendors person is an insured while driving such equipment Any person(s) or organization(s) (referred to below along a public highway with your permission. Any other as vendor), but only with respect to "bodily injury" person or organization responsible for the conduct of or "property damage" arising out of "your products" such person is also an insured, but only with respect to which are distributed or sold in the regular course liability arising out of the operation of the equipment, of the vendor's business and only if this Coverage and only if no other insurance of any kind is available Part provides coverage for "bodily injury" or to that person or organization for this liability. However, "property damage" included within the "products- no person or organization is an insured with respect to: completed operations hazard". a. "Bodily injury" to a co-"employee" of the person (1) The insurance afforded the vendor is subject to driving the equipment; or the following additional exclusions: b. "Property damage"to property owned by, rented to, This insurance does not apply to: in the charge of or occupied by you or the employer (a) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for of any person who is an insured under this which the vendor is obligated to pay provision. damages by reason of the assumption of liability in a contract or agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability for damages that the vendor would have in the absence of the contract or agreement; Page 10 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 (b) Any express warranty unauthorized by you; c. Lessors of Land or Premises (c) Any physical or chemical change in the Any person or organization from whom you lease product made intentionally by the vendor; land or premises, but only with respect to liability (d) Repackaging, except when unpacked solely arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of for the purpose of inspection, demonstration, that part of the land or premises leased to you. testing, or the substitution of parts under With respect to the insurance afforded these instructions from the manufacturer, and then additional insureds the following additional repackaged in the original container; exclusions apply: (e) Any failure to make such inspections, This insurance does not apply to: adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor 1. Any "occurrence" which takes place after you has agreed to make or normally undertakes cease to lease that land; or to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of the 2. Structural alterations, new construction or products; demolition operations performed by or on behalf of such person or organization. (f) Demonstration, installation, servicing or d. Architects, Engineers or Surveyors repair operations, except such operations performed at the vendor's premises in Any architect, engineer, or surveyor, but only with connection with the sale of the product; respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property (g) Products which, after distribution or sale by damage" or "personal and advertising injury" you, have been labeled or relabeled or used caused, in whole or in part, by your acts or as a container, part or ingredient of any omissions or the acts or omissions of those acting other thing or substance by or for the on your behalf: vendor; or (1) In connection with your premises; or (h) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising (2) In the performance of your ongoing operations out of the sole negligence of the vendor for performed by you or on your behalf. its own acts or omissions or those of its With respect to the insurance afforded these employees or anyone else acting on its additional insureds, the following additional behalf. However, this exclusion does not exclusion applies: apply to: This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury", (1) The exceptions contained in Sub- "property damage" or "personal and advertising paragraphs (d) or(f); or injury" arising out of the rendering of or the failure (ii) Such inspections, adjustments, tests or to render any professional services by or for you, servicing as the vendor has agreed to including: make or normally undertakes to make in 1. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare the usual course of business, in or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, connection with the distribution or sale of reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or the products. drawings and specifications; or (2) This insurance does not apply to any insured 2. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or person or organization, from whom you have engineering activities. acquired such products, or any ingredient, part or container, entering into, accompanying or e. Permits Issued By State Or Political containing such products. Subdivisions b. Lessors of Equipment Any state or political subdivision, but only with respect to operations performed by you or on your (1) Any person or organization from whom you behalf for which the state or political subdivision lease equipment; but only with respect to their has issued a permit. liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" caused, in With respect to the insurance afforded these whole or in part, by your maintenance, operation additional insureds, this insurance does not apply or use of equipment leased to you by such to: person or organization. (1) "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal (2) With respect to the insurance afforded to these and advertising injury" arising out of operations additional insureds this insurance does not performed for the state or municipality; or apply to any "occurrence" which takes place (2) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" included after the equipment lease expires. within the "products-completed operations hazard". HG 00 01 06 05 Page 11 of 18 f. Any Other Party c. Persons or organizations making claims or bringing Any other person or organization who is not an "suits". insured under Paragraphs a. through e. above, but 2. General Aggregate Limit only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", The General Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay "property damage" or "personal and advertising for the sum of: injury" caused, in whole or in part, by your acts or omissions or the acts or omissions of those acting a. Medical expenses under Coverage C; on your behalf: b. Damages under Coverage A, except damages (1) In the performance of your ongoing operations; because of "bodily injury" or "property damage" (2) In connection with your premises owned by or included in the "products-completed operations rented to you; or hazard , and (3) In connection with "your work" and included c. Damages under Coverage B. within the "products-completed operations 3. Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit hazard", but only if The Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit (a) The written contract or agreement requires is the most we will pay under Coverage A for damages you to provide such coverage to such because of "bodily injury" and "property damage" additional insured; and included in the "products-completed operations hazard". (b) This Coverage Part provides coverage for "bodily injury" or "property damage" included 4. Personal and Advertising Injury Limit within the "products-completed operations Subject to 2. above, the Personal and Advertising hazard". Injury Limit is the most we will pay under Coverage B With respect to the insurance afforded to these for the sum of all damages because of all "personal additional insureds, this insurance does not apply and advertising injury" sustained by any one person or to: organization. "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and 5. Each Occurrence Limit advertising injury" arising out of the rendering of, or Subject to 2. or 3. above, whichever applies, the Each the failure to render, any professional architectural, Occurrence Limit is the most we will pay for the sum engineering or surveying services, including: of: (1) The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare a. Damages under Coverage A; and or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, b. Medical expenses under Coverage C reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; or because of all "bodily injury" and "property damage" arising out of any one "occurrence". (2) Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. 6. Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit Subject to 5. above, the Damage To Premises Rented The limits of insurance that apply to additional insureds To You Limit is the most we will pay under Coverage A under this provision is described in Section III — Limits for damages because of"property damage"to any one Of Insurance. premises, while rented to you, or in the case of How this insurance applies when other insurance is damage by fire, lightning or explosion, while rented to available to the additional insured is described in the you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of Other Insurance Condition in Section IV — Commercial the owner. General Liability Conditions. In the case of damage by fire, lightning or explosion, No person or organization is an insured with respect to the the Damage to Premises Rented To You Limit applies conduct of any current or past partnership,joint venture or to all damage proximately caused by the same event, limited liability company that is not shown as a Named whether such damage results from fire, lightning or Insured in the Declarations. explosion or any combination of these. SECTION III— LIMITS OF INSURANCE 7. Medical Expense Limit 1. The Most We will Pay Subject to 5. above, the Medical Expense Limit is the The Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations and most we will pay under Coverage C for all medical the rules below fix the most we will pay regardless of expenses because of "bodily injury" sustained by any the number of: one person. a. Insureds; 8. How Limits Apply To Additional Insureds b. Claims made or"suits" brought; or If you have agreed in a written contract or written agreement that another person or organization be Page 12 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 added as an additional insured on your policy, the (3) Cooperate with us in the investigation or most we will pay on behalf of such additional insured is settlement of the claim or defense against the the lesser of: "suit"; and a. The limits of insurance specified in the written (4) Assist us, upon our request, in the enforcement of contract or written agreement; or any right against any person or organization which b. The Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations. may be liable to the insured because of injury or Such amount shall be a part of and not in addition to damage to which this insurance may also apply. Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations and d. Obligations At The Insureds Own Cost described in this Section. No insured will, except at that insured's own cost, The Limits of Insurance of this Coverage Part apply voluntarily make a payment, assume any separately to each consecutive annual period and to any obligation, or incur any expense, other than for first remaining period of less than 12 months, starting with the aid, without our consent. beginning of the policy period shown in the Declarations, e. Additional Insureds Other Insurance unless the policy period is extended after issuance for an If we cover a claim or "suit" under this Coverage additional period of less than 12 months. In that case, the Part that may also be covered by other insurance additional period will be deemed part of the last preceding available to an additional insured, such additional period for purposes of determining the Limits of Insurance. insured must submit such claim or "suit" to the SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY other insurer for defense and indemnity. CONDITIONS However, this provision does not apply to the 1. Bankruptcy extent that you have agreed in a written contract or Bankruptcy or insolvency of the insured or of the written agreement that this insurance is primary insured's estate will not relieve us of our obligations and non-contributory with the additional insured's under this Coverage Part. own insurance. 2. Duties In The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim f. Knowledge Of An Occurrence, Offense, Claim Or Suit Or Suit a. Notice Of Occurrence Or Offense Paragraphs a. and b. apply to you or to any additional insured only when such "occurrence", You or any additional insured must see to it that we offense, claim or"suit" is known to: are notified as soon as practicable of an "occurrence" or an offense which may result in a (1) You or any additional insured that is an claim. To the extent possible, notice should include: individual; (1) How, when and where the "occurrence" or (2) Any partner, if you or an additional insured is a offense took place; partnership; (2) The names and addresses of any injured (3) Any manager, if you or an additional insured is a persons and witnesses; and limited liability company; (3) The nature and location of any injury or damage (4) Any "executive officer" or insurance manager, if arising out of the "occurrence"or offense. you or an additional insured is a corporation; b. Notice Of Claim (5) Any trustee, if you or an additional insured is a If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against any trust; or insured, you or any additional insured must: (6) Any elected or appointed official, if you or an (1) Immediately record the specifics of the claim or additional insured is a political subdivision or ublic entity. "suit" and the date received; and p y. This duty applies separately to you and any additional (2) Notify us as soon as practicable. insured. You or any additional insured must see to it that we 3. Legal Action Against Us receive written notice of the claim or "suit" as soon g g as practicable. No person or organization has a right under this C. Assistance And Cooperation Of The Insured Coverage Part: a. To join us as a party or otherwise bring us into a You and any other involved insured must: "suit" asking for damages from an insured; or (1) Immediately send us copies of any demands, b. To sue us on this Coverage Part unless all of its notices, summonses or legal papers received in terms have been full lied with. connection with the claim or"suit"; y complied A person or organization may sue us to recover on an (2) Authorize us to obtain records and other agreed settlement or on a final judgment against an information; insured; but we will not be liable for damages that are not payable under the terms of this Coverage Part or HG 00 01 06 05 Page 13 of 18 that are in excess of the applicable limit of insurance. (7) When You Add Others As An Additional An agreed settlement means a settlement and release Insured To This Insurance of liability signed by us, the insured and the claimant or Any other insurance available to an additional the claimant's legal representative. insured. 4. Other Insurance However, the following provisions apply to other If other valid and collectible insurance is available to insurance available to any person or the insured for a loss we cover under Coverages A or organization who is an additional insured under B of this Coverage Part, our obligations are limited as this coverage part. follows: (a) Primary Insurance When Required By a. Primary Insurance Contract This insurance is primary except when b. below This insurance is primary if you have agreed applies. If other insurance is also primary, we will in a written contract or written agreement share with all that other insurance by the method that this insurance be primary. If other described in c. below. insurance is also primary, we will share with b. Excess Insurance all that other insurance by the method described in c. below. This insurance is excess over any of the other insurance, whether primary, excess, contingent or (b) Primary And Non-Contributory To Other on any other basis: Insurance When Required By Contract (1) Your Work If you have agreed in a written contract, written agreement, or permit that this That is Fire, Extended Coverage, Builder's Risk, insurance is primary and non-contributory Installation Risk or similar coverage for "your with the additional insured's own insurance, work"; this insurance is primary and we will not (2) Premises Rented To You seek contribution from that other insurance. That is fire, lightning or explosion insurance for Paragraphs (a) and (b) do not apply to other premises rented to you or temporarily occupied insurance to which the additional insured has by you with permission of the owner; been added as an additional insured. (3) Tenant Liability When this insurance is excess, we will have no That is insurance purchased by you to cover duty under Coverages A or B to defend the insured your liability as a tenant for "property damage" against any "suit" if any other insurer has a duty to to premises rented to you or temporarily defend the insured against that "suit". If no other occupied by you with permission of the owner; insurer defends, we will undertake to do so, but we will be entitled to the insured's rights against all (4) Aircraft, Auto Or Watercraft those other insurers. If the loss arises out of the maintenance or use When this insurance is excess over other of aircraft, "autos" or watercraft to the extent not insurance, we will pay only our share of the amount subject to Exclusion g. of Section I — Coverage of the loss, if any, that exceeds the sum of: A— Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability; (1) The total amount that all such other insurance (5) Property Damage to Borrowed Equipment Or would pay for the loss in the absence of this Use Of Elevators insurance; and If the loss arises out of "property damage" to (2) The total of all deductible and self-insured borrowed equipment or the use of elevators to amounts under all that other insurance. the extent not subject to Exclusion j. of Section - Coverage A - Bodily Injury And Property We will share the remaining loss, if any, with any Damage Liability; other insurance that is not described in this Excess Insurance provision and was not bought specifically (6) When You Are Added As An Additional to apply in excess of the Limits of Insurance shown Insured To Other Insurance in the Declarations of this Coverage Part. Any other insurance available to you covering c. Method Of Sharing liability for damages arising out of the premises or operations, or products and completed If all of the other insurance permits contribution by operations, for which you have been added as equal shares, we will follow this method also. Under an additional insured by that insurance; or this approach each insurer contributes equal amounts until it has paid its applicable limit of insurance or none of the loss remains, whichever comes first. Page 14 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 If any of the other insurance does not permit insured will bring "suit" or transfer those rights to us contribution by equal shares, we will contribute by and help us enforce them. limits. Under this method, each insurer's share is b. Waiver Of Rights Of Recovery (Waiver Of based on the ratio of its applicable limit of Subrogation) insurance to the total applicable limits of insurance of all insurers. If the insured has waived any rights of recovery 5. Premium Audit against any person or organization for all or part of any payment, including Supplementary Payments, a. We will compute all premiums for this Coverage we have made under this Coverage Part, we also Part in accordance with our rules and rates. waive that right, provided the insured waived their b. Premium shown in this Coverage Part as advance rights of recovery against such person or premium is a deposit premium only. At the close of organization in a contract, agreement or permit that each audit period we will compute the earned was executed prior to the injury or damage. premium for that period and send notice to the first 9. When We Do Not Renew Named Insured. The due date for audit and If we decide not to renew this Coverage Part, we will retrospective premiums is the date shown as the mail or deliver to the first Named Insured shown in the due date on the bill. If the sum of the advance and Declarations written notice of the nonrenewal not less audit premiums paid for the policy period is greater than 30 days before the expiration date. than the earned premium, we will return the excess to the first Named Insured. If notice is mailed, proof of mailing will be sufficient c. The first Named Insured must keep records of the proof of notice. information we need for premium computation, and SECTION V—DEFINITIONS send us copies at such times as we may request. 1. "Advertisement" means the widespread public 6. Representations dissemination of information or images that has the purpose of inducing the sale of goods, products or a. When You Accept This Policy services through: By accepting this policy, you agree: a. (1) Radio; (1) The statements in the Declarations are accurate (2) Television; and complete; (3) Billboard; (2) Those statements are based upon representations you made to us; and (4) Magazine; (3) We have issued this policy in reliance upon your (5) Newspaper; or representations. b. Any other publication that is given widespread b. Unintentional Failure To Disclose Hazards public distribution. If unintentionally you should fail to disclose all However, "advertisement" does not include: hazards relating to the conduct of your business a. The design, printed material, information or images that exist at the inception date of this Coverage contained in, on or upon the packaging or labeling Part, we shall not deny coverage under this of any goods or products; or Coverage Part because of such failure. b. An interactive conversation between or among 7. Separation Of Insureds persons through a computer network. Except with respect to the Limits of Insurance, and any 2. "Advertising idea" means any idea for an rights or duties specifically assigned in this Coverage "advertisement". Part to the first Named Insured, this insurance applies: 3. "Asbestos hazard" means an exposure or threat of a. As if each Named Insured were the only Named exposure to the actual or alleged properties of Insured; and asbestos and includes the mere presence of asbestos b. Separately to each insured against whom claim is in any form. made or"suit" is brought. 4. "Auto" means a land motor vehicle, trailer or semitrailer 8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To designed for travel on public roads, including any Us attached machinery or equipment. But "auto" does not a. Transfer of Rights Of Recovery include "mobile equipment". If the insured has rights to recover all or part of any 5. "Bodily injury" means physical: payment, including Supplementary Payments, we a. Injury; have made under this Coverage Part, those rights b. Sickness; or are transferred to us. The insured must do nothing c. Disease after loss to impair them. At our request, the sustained by a person and, if arising out of the above, mental anguish or death at any time. HG 00 01 06 05 Page 15 of 18 6. "Coverage territory" means: rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with a. The United States of America (including its territories permission of the owner is subject to the Damage and possessions), Puerto Rico and Canada; to Premises Rented To You Limit described in b. International waters or airspace, but only if the Section III — Limits of Insurance; injury or damage occurs in the course of travel or b. A sidetrack agreement; transportation between any places included in a. c. Any easement or license agreement, including an above; or easement or license agreement in connection with c. All other parts of the world if the injury or damage construction or demolition operations on or within arises out of: 50 feet of a railroad; (1) Goods or products made or sold by you in the d. An obligation, as required by ordinance, to territory described in a. above; indemnify a municipality, except in connection with (2) The activities of a person whose home is in the work for a municipality; territory described in a. above, but is away for a e. An elevator maintenance agreement; short time on your business; or f. That part of any other contract or agreement (3) "Personal and advertising injury" offenses that pertaining to your business (including an take place through the Internet or similar indemnification of a municipality in connection with electronic means of communication work performed for a municipality) under which you provided the insured's responsibility to pay damages is assume the tort liability of another party to pay for "bodily injury" or "property damage" to a third determined in the United States of America (including its person or organization, provided the "bodily injury" territories and possessions), Puerto Rico or Canada, in a or"property damage" is caused, in whole or in part, suit on the merits according to the substantive law in by you or by those acting on your behalf. Tort such territory or in a settlement we agree to. liability means a liability that would be imposed by 7. "Employee" includes a "leased worker". "Employee" law in the absence of any contract or agreement. does not include a "temporary worker". Paragraph f. includes that part of any contract or 8. "Employment-Related Practices" means: agreement that indemnifies a railroad for "bodily a. Refusal to employ a person; injury" or "property damage" arising out of b. Termination of a person's employment; or construction or demolition operations, within 50 feet of any railroad property and affecting any railroad c. Employment-related practices, policies, acts or bridge or trestle, tracks, road-beds, tunnel, omissions, such as coercion, demotion, evaluation, underpass or crossing. reassignment, discipline, defamation, harassment, However, Paragraph f. does not include that part of humiliation or discrimination directed at a person. any contract or agreement: 9. "Executive officer" means a person holding any of the (1) That indemnifies an architect, engineer or officer positions created by your charter, constitution, surveyor for injury or damage arising out of: by-laws or any other similar governing document. 10."Hostile fire" means one which becomes uncontrollable (a) Preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or or breaks out from where it was intended to be. approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders 11."Impaired property" means tangible property, other or drawings and specifications; or than "your product" or"your work", that cannot be used (b) Giving directions or instructions, or failing to or is less useful because: give them, if that is the primary cause of the a. It incorporates "your product" or "your work" that is injury or damage; or known or thought to be defective, deficient, (2) Under which the insured, if an architect, engineer inadequate or dangerous; or or surveyor, assumes liability for an injury or b. You have failed to fulfill the terms of a contract or damage arising out of the insured's rendering or agreement; failure to render professional services, including if such property can be restored to use by: those listed in (1) above and supervisory, a. The repair, replacement, adjustment or removal of inspection, architectural or engineering activities. "your product" or"your work"; or 13."Leased worker" means a person leased to you by a b. Your fulfilling the terms of the contractor agreement. labor leasing firm under an agreement between you and the labor leasing firm, to perform duties related to 12."Insured contract" means: the conduct of your business. "Leased worker" does a. A contract for a lease of premises. However, that not include a "temporary worker". portion of the contract for a lease of premises that 14."Loading or unloading" means the handling of property: indemnifies any person or organization for damage a. After it is moved from the place where it is accepted by fire, lightning or explosion to premises while for movement into or onto an aircraft, watercraft or "auto"; Page 16 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 b. While it is in or on an aircraft, watercraft or "auto"; 16."Occurrence" means an accident, including continuous or or repeated exposure to substantially the same general c. While it is being moved from an aircraft, watercraft harmful conditions. or"auto" to the place where it is finally delivered; 17."Personal and advertising injury" means injury, but "loading or unloading" does not include the including consequential "bodily injury", arising out of movement of property by means of a mechanical one or more of the following offenses: device, other than a hand truck, that is not attached to a. False arrest, detention or imprisonment; the aircraft, watercraft or"auto". b. Malicious prosecution; 15."Mobile equipment" means any of the following types c. The wrongful eviction from, wrongful entry into, or of land vehicles, including any attached machinery or invasion of the right of private occupancy of a room, equipment: dwelling or premises that a person occupies, a. Bulldozers, farm machinery, forklifts and other committed by or on behalf of its owner, landlord or vehicles designed for use principally off public lessor; roads; d. Oral, written or electronic publication of material b. Vehicles maintained for use solely on or next to that slanders or libels a person or organization or premises you own or rent; disparages a person's or organization's goods, c. Vehicles that travel on crawler treads; products or services; d. Vehicles, whether self-propelled or not, maintained e. Oral, written or electronic publication of material primarily to provide mobility to permanently that violates a person's right of privacy; mounted: f. Copying, in your "advertisement", a person's or (1) Power cranes, shovels, loaders, diggers or organization's "advertising idea" or style of drills; or "advertisement"; (2) Road construction or resurfacing equipment g• Infringement of copyright, slogan, or title of any such as graders, scrapers or rollers; literary or artistic work, in your"advertisement"; or e. Vehicles not described in a., b., c. or d. above that h. Discrimination or humiliation that results in injury to are not self-propelled and are maintained primarily the feelings or reputation of a natural person. to provide mobility to permanently attached 18."Pollutants" mean any solid, liquid, gaseous or thermal equipment of the following types: irritant or contaminant, including smoke, vapor, soot, (1) Air compressors, pumps and generators, fumes, acids, alkalis, chemicals and waste. Waste including spraying, welding, building cleaning, includes materials to be recycled, reconditioned or geophysical exploration, lighting and well reclaimed. servicing equipment; or 19."Products-completed operations hazard": (2) Cherry pickers and similar devices used to raise a. Includes all "bodily injury" and "property damage" or lower workers; occurring away from premises you own or rent and f. Vehicles not described in a., b., c. or d. above arising out of"your product" or"your work" except: maintained primarily for purposes other than the (1) Products that are still in your physical transportation of persons or cargo. possession; or However, self-propelled vehicles with the following (2) Work that has not yet been completed or types of permanently attached equipment are not abandoned. However, "your work" will be "mobile equipment" but will be considered "autos": deemed completed at the earliest of the (1) Equipment, of at least 1,000 pounds gross following times: vehicle weight, designed primarily for: (a) When all of the work called for in your (a) Snow removal; contract has been completed. (b) Road maintenance, but not construction or (b) When all of the work to be done at the job resurfacing; or site has been completed if your contract (c) Street cleaning; calls for work at more than one job site. (2) Cherry pickers and similar devices mounted on (c) When that part of the work done at a job site has been put to its intended use by any automobile truck chassis and used to raise or person or organization other than another lower workers; ; and contractor or subcontractor working on the (3) Air compressors, pumps and generators, same project. including spraying, welding, building cleaning, Work that may need service, maintenance, geophysical exploration, lighting and well correction, repair or replacement, but which is servicing equipment. otherwise complete, will be treated as completed. HG 00 01 06 05 Page 17 of 18 b. Does not include "bodily injury" or "property 22."Temporary worker" means a person who is damage" arising out of: furnished to you to substitute for a permanent (1) The transportation of property, unless the "employee" on leave or to meet seasonal or short- injury or damage arises out of a condition in or term workload conditions. on a vehicle not owned or operated by you, 23."Volunteer worker" means a person who and that condition was created by the "loading a. Is not your"employee"; or unloading" of that vehicle by any insured; b. Donates his or her work; (2) The existence of tools, uninstalled equipment or abandoned or unused materials; or c. Acts at the direction of and within the scope of duties determined by you; and (3) Products or operations for which the classification, listed in the Declarations or in a d. Is not paid a fee, salary or other compensation by policy schedule, states that products- you or anyone else for their work performed for completed operations are subject to the you. General Aggregate Limit. 24."Your product": 20."Property damage" means: a. Means: a. Physical injury to tangible property, including all (1) Any goods or products, other than real resulting loss of use of that property. All such loss property, manufactured, sold, handled, of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the distributed or disposed of by: physical injury that caused it; or (a) You; b. Loss of use of tangible property that is not (b) Others trading under your name; or physically injured. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the "occurrence" (c) A person or organization whose business or assets you have acquired; and that caused it. As used in this definition, computerized or (2) Containers (other than vehicles), materials, electronically stored data, programs or software are parts or equipment furnished in connection not tangible property. Electronic data means with such goods or products. information, facts or programs: b. Includes a. Stored as or on; (1) Warranties or representations made at any b. Created or used on; or time with respect to the fitness, quality, durability, performance or use of "your c. Transmitted to or from; product"; and computer software, including systems and (2) The providing of or failure to provide warnings applications software, hard or floppy disks, CD- or instructions. ROMS, tapes, drives, cells, data processing devices c. Does not include vending machines or other or any other media which are used with electronically property rented to or located for the use of others controlled equipment. but not sold. 21."Suit" means a civil proceeding in which damages because of "bodily injury", "property damage" or 25."Your work": "personal and advertising injury" to which this a. Means: insurance applies are alleged. "Suit" includes: (1) Work or operations performed by you or on a. An arbitration proceeding in which such damages your behalf; and are claimed and to which the insured must submit (2) Materials, parts or equipment furnished in or does submit with our consent; or connection with such work or operations. b. Any other alternative dispute resolution b. Includes proceeding in which such damages are claimed (1) Warranties or representations made at any and to which the insured submits with our consent. time with respect to the fitness, quality, durability, performance or use of "your work", and (2) The providing of or failure to provide warnings or instructions. Page 18 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 NAMED INSURED:Associated Construction Partners,Ltd. POLICY NUMBER:46UEABJ60GL COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE HA99160312 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE BROAD FORM ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM To the extent that the provisions of this endorsement provide broader benefits to the "insured" than other provisions of the Coverage Form, the provisions of this endorsement apply. 1. BROAD FORM INSURED d. Any "employee" of yours while using a A. Subsidiaries and Newly Acquired or covered "auto" you don't own, hire or Formed Organizations borrow in your business or your The Named Insured shown in the personal affairs. Declarations is amended to include: C. Lessors as Insureds (1) Any legal business entity other than a Paragraph A.I. - WHO IS AN INSURED - of partnership or joint venture, formed as a Section II - Liability Coverage is amended to subsidiary in which you have an add: ownership interest of more than 50% on e. The lessor of a covered "auto" while the the effective date of the Coverage Form. "auto" is leased to you under a written However, the Named Insured does not agreement if: include any subsidiary that is an "insured" under any other automobile (1) The agreement requires you to policy or would be an "insured" under provide direct primary insurance for the lessor and such a policy but for its termination or the exhaustion of its Limit of Insurance. (2) The "auto" is leased without a driver. (2) Any organization that is acquired or Such a leased "auto" will be considered a formed by you and over which you covered "auto" you own and not a covered maintain majority ownership. However, "auto"you hire. the Named Insured does not include any D. Additional Insured if Required by Contract newly formed or acquired organization: (1) Paragraph A.I. - WHO IS AN INSURED (a) That is a partnership or joint - of Section II - Liability Coverage is venture, amended to add: (b) That is an "insured" under any other f. When you have agreed, in a written policy, contract or written agreement, that a (c) That has exhausted its Limit of person or organization be added as Insurance under any other policy, or an additional insured on your (d) 180 days or more after its business auto policy, such person or acquisition or formation by you, organization is an "insured", but only unless you have given us notice of to the extent such person or the acquisition or formation. organization is liable for "bodily Coverage does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused injury" or "property damage" that results by the conduct of an "insured" under from an "accident" that occurred before paragraphs a. or b. of Who Is An you formed or acquired the organization. Insured with regard to the B. Employees as Insureds ownership, maintenance or use of a covered "auto." Paragraph A.I. - WHO IS AN INSURED - of SECTION II - LIABILITY COVERAGE is amended to add: ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 1 of 5 The insurance afforded to any such E. Primary and Non-Contributory if additional insured applies only if the Required by Contract "bodily injury" or "property damage" Only with respect to insurance provided to occurs: an additional insured in 1.D. - Additional (1) During the policy period, and Insured If Required by Contract, the (2) Subsequent to the execution of such following provisions apply: written contract, and (3) Primary Insurance When Required By (3) Prior to the expiration of the period Contract of time that the written contract This insurance is primary if you have requires such insurance be provided agreed in a written contract or written to the additional insured. agreement that this insurance be (2) How Limits Apply primary. If other insurance is also If you have agreed in a written contract primary, we will share with all that other or written agreement that another insurance by the method described in person or organization be added as an Other Insurance 5.d. additional insured on your policy, the (4) Primary And Non-Contributory To Other most we will pay on behalf of such Insurance When Required By Contract additional insured is the lesser of: If you have agreed in a written contract (a) The limits of insurance specified in or written agreement that this insurance the written contract or written is primary and non-contributory with the agreement; or additional insured's own insurance, this insurance is primary and we will not (b) The Limits of Insurance shown in seek contribution from that other the Declarations. insurance. Such amount shall be a part of and not Paragraphs (3) and (4) do not apply to other in addition to Limits of Insurance shown insurance to which the additional insured in the Declarations and described in this has been added as an additional insured. Section. When this insurance is excess, we will have no (3) Additional Insureds Other Insurance duty to defend the insured against any "suit" if If we cover a claim or "suit" under this any other insurer has a duty to defend the Coverage Part that may also be covered insured against that "suit". If no other insurer by other insurance available to an defends, we will undertake to do so, but we will additional insured, such additional be entitled to the insured's rights against all insured must submit such claim or "suit" those other insurers. to the other insurer for defense and When this insurance is excess over other indemnity. insurance, we will pay only our share of the However, this provision does not apply amount of the loss, if any, that exceeds the sum to the extent that you have agreed in a of: written contract or written agreement (1) The total amount that all such other that this insurance is primary and non- insurance would pay for the loss in the contributory with the additional insured's absence of this insurance; and own insurance. (2) The total of all deductible and self-insured (4) Duties in The Event Of Accident, Claim, amounts under all that other insurance. Suit or Loss We will share the remaining loss, if any, by the If you have agreed in a written contract method described in Other Insurance 5.d. or written agreement that another person or organization be added as an 2. AUTOS RENTED BY EMPLOYEES additional insured on your policy, the Any "auto" hired or rented by your "employee" additional insured shall be required to on your behalf and at your direction will be comply with the provisions in LOSS considered an "auto"you hire. CONDITIONS 2. - DUTIES IN THE The OTHER INSURANCE Condition is amended EVENT OF ACCIDENT, CLAIM , SUIT by adding the following: OR LOSS — OF SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, in the same manner as the Named Insured. ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 2 of 5 If an "employee's" personal insurance also 5. PHYSICAL DAMAGE - ADDITIONAL applies on an excess basis to a covered "auto" TEMPORARY TRANSPORTATION EXPENSE hired or rented by your "employee" on your COVERAGE behalf and at your direction, this insurance will Paragraph AA.a. of SECTION III - PHYSICAL be primary to the "employee's" personal DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended to provide a insurance. limit of $50 per day and a maximum limit of 3. AMENDED FELLOW EMPLOYEE EXCLUSION $1,000. EXCLUSION 5. - FELLOW EMPLOYEE - of 6. LOAN/LEASE GAP COVERAGE SECTION II - LIABILITY COVERAGE does not Under SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE apply if you have workers' compensation COVERAGE, in the event of a total "loss" to a insurance in-force covering all of your covered "auto", we will pay your additional legal "employees". obligation for any difference between the actual Coverage is excess over any other collectible cash value of the "auto" at the time of the "loss" insurance. and the "outstanding balance"of the loan/lease. 4. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE "Outstanding balance" means the amount you If hired "autos" are covered "autos" for Liability owe on the loan/lease at the time of "loss" less Coverage and if Comprehensive, Specified any amounts representing taxes; overdue Causes of Loss, or Collision coverages are payments; penalties, interest or charges provided under this Coverage Form for any resulting from overdue payments; additional "auto" you own, then the Physical Damage mileage charges; excess wear and tear charges; Coverages provided are extended to "autos"you lease termination fees; security deposits not hire or borrow, subject to the following limit. returned by the lessor; costs for extended warranties, credit life Insurance, health, accident The most we will pay for "loss" to any hired or disability insurance purchased with the loan or "auto" is: lease; and carry-over balances from previous (1) $100,000; loans or leases. (2) The actual cash value of the damaged or 7. AIRBAG COVERAGE stolen property at the time of the "loss"; or Under Paragraph B. EXCLUSIONS - of (3) The cost of repairing or replacing the SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE damaged or stolen property, COVERAGE, the following is added: whichever is smallest, minus a deductible. The The exclusion relating to mechanical breakdown deductible will be equal to the largest deductible does not apply to the accidental discharge of an applicable to any owned "auto" for that airbag. coverage. No deductible applies to "loss" caused g, ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT - BROADENED by fire or lightning. Hired Auto Physical Damage COVERAGE coverage is excess over any other collectible insurance. Subject to the above limit, deductible a. The exceptions to Paragraphs BA - and excess provisions, we will provide coverage EXCLUSIONS - of SECTION III - PHYSICAL equal to the broadest coverage applicable to any DAMAGE COVERAGE are replaced by the covered "auto"you own. following: We will also cover loss of use of the hired "auto" Exclusions 4.c. and 4.d. do not apply to if it results from an "accident", you are legally equipment designed to be operated solely liable and the lessor incurs an actual financial by use of the power from the "auto's" loss, subject to a maximum of $1000 per electrical system that, at the time of"loss", "accident". is: This extension of coverage does not apply to (1) Permanently installed in or upon any "auto" you hire or borrow from any of your the covered "auto"; "employees", partners (if you are a partnership), (2) Removable from a housing unit members (if you are a limited liability company), which is permanently installed in or members of their households. or upon the covered "auto"; (3) An integral part of the same unit housing any electronic equipment described in Paragraphs (1)and (2) above; or ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 3 of 5 (4) Necessary for the normal If another Hartford Financial Services Group, operation of the covered "auto"or Inc. company policy or coverage form that is not the monitoring of the covered an automobile policy or coverage form applies to "auto's"operating system. the same "accident", the following applies: b.Section III — Version CA 00 01 03 10 of the (1) If the deductible under this Business Auto Business Auto Coverage Form, Physical Coverage Form is the smaller (or smallest) Damage Coverage, Limit of Insurance, deductible, it will be waived; Paragraph C.2 and Version CA 00 01 10 01 of (2) If the deductible under this Business Auto the Business Auto Coverage Form, Physical Coverage Form is not the smaller (or Damage Coverage, Limit of Insurance, smallest) deductible, it will be reduced by Paragraph C are each amended to add the the amount of the smaller (or smallest) following: deductible. $1,500 is the most we will pay for "loss" in 12. AMENDED DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF any one "accident" to all electronic ACCIDENT, CLAIM, SUIT OR LOSS equipment(other than equipment designed solely for the reproduction of sound, and The requirement in LOSS CONDITIONS 2.a. - accessories used with such equipment) DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF ACCIDENT,CLAIM, that reproduces, receives or transmits SUIT OR LOSS - of SECTION IV - BUSINESS audio, visual or data signals which, at the AUTO CONDITIONS that you must notify us of time of"loss", is: an "accident" applies only when the "accident" is known to: (1) Permanently installed in or upon the covered "auto" in a housing, (1) You, if you are an individual; opening or other location that is not (2) A partner, if you are a partnership; normally used by the "auto" (3) A member, if you are a limited liability manufacturer for the installation of company; or such equipment; (4) An executive officer or insurance manager, if (2) Removable from a permanently you are a corporation. installed housing unit as described 13. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE in Paragraph 2.a. above or is an HAZARDS integral part of that equipment; or (3)An integral part of such equipment. If you unintentionally fail to disclose any hazards existing at the inception date of your policy, we c.For each covered "auto", should loss be limited will not deny coverage under this Coverage to electronic equipment only, our obligation to Form because of such failure. pay for, repair, return or replace damaged or 14. HIRED AUTO -COVERAGE TERRITORY stolen electronic equipment will be reduced by the applicable deductible shown in the Paragraph e. of GENERAL CONDITIONS 7. - Declarations, or $250, whichever deductible is POLICY PERIOD, COVERAGE TERRITORY - less. of SECTION IV - BUSINESS AUTO 9. EXTRA EXPENSE - BROADENED CONDITIONS is replaced by the following: COVERAGE e. For short-term hired "autos", the coverage Under Paragraph A. -COVERAGE -of SECTION territory with respect to Liability Coverage is III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, we will anywhere in the world provided that if the pay for the expense of returning a stolen covered "insured's" responsibility to pay damages for "bodily injury" or "property damage" is "auto"to you. determined in a "suit,"the "suit" is brought in 10. GLASS REPAIR-WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE the United States of America, the territories Under Paragraph D.-DEDUCTIBLE-of SECTION and possessions of the United States of III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, the America, Puerto Rico or Canada or in a following is added: settlement we agree to. No deductible applies to glass damage if the 15. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION glass is repaired rather than replaced. TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY 11. TWO OR MORE DEDUCTIBLES AGAINST OTHERS TO US - of SECTION IV - Under Paragraph D.-DEDUCTIBLE-of SECTION BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS is amended by III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, the adding the following: following is added: ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 4 of 5 We waive any right of recovery we may have c.Regardless of the number of autos deemed a against any person or organization with whom total loss, the most we will pay under this you have a written contract that requires such Hybrid, Electric, or Natural Gas Vehicle waiver because of payments we make for Payment Coverage provision for any one damages under this Coverage Form. "loss" is $10,000. 16. RESULTANT MENTAL ANGUISH COVERAGE For the purposes of the coverage provision, The definition of "bodily injury" in SECTION V- a.A "non-hybrid" auto is defined as an auto that DEFINITIONS is replaced by the following: uses only an internal combustion engine to "Bodily injury" means bodily injury, sickness or move the auto but does not include autos disease sustained by any person, including powered solely by electricity or natural gas. mental anguish or death resulting from any of b.A "hybrid" auto is defined as an auto with an these. internal combustion engine and one or more 17. EXTENDED CANCELLATION CONDITION electric motors; and that uses the internal Paragraph 2. of the COMMON POLICY combustion engine and one or more electric CONDITIONS - CANCELLATION - applies motors to move the auto, or the internal combustion engine to charge one or more except as follows: electric motors, which move the auto. If we cancel for any reason other than 19. VEHICLE WRAP COVERAGE nonpayment of premium, we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured written notice of In the event of a total loss to an "auto" for which cancellation at least 60 days before the effective Comprehensive, Specified Causes of Loss, or date of cancellation. Collision coverages are provided under this 18. HYBRID, ELECTRIC, OR NATURAL GAS Coverage Form, then such Physical Damage VEHICLE PAYMENT COVERAGE Coverages are amended to add the following: In addition to the actual cash value of the "auto", In the event of a total loss to a "non-hybrid" auto we will pay up to $1,000 for vinyl vehicle wraps for which Comprehensive, Specified Causes of which are displayed on the covered "auto" at the Loss, or Collision coverages are provided under time of total loss. Regardless of the number of this Coverage Form, then such Physical autos deemed a total loss, the most we will pay Damage Coverages are amended as follows: under this Vehicle Wrap Coverage provision for a.lf the auto is replaced with a "hybrid" auto or any one "loss" is $5,000. For purposes of this an auto powered solely by electricity or natural coverage provision, signs or other graphics gas, we will pay an additional 10%, to a painted or magnetically affixed to the vehicle are maximum of$2,500, of the "non-hybrid" auto's not considered vehicle wraps. actual cash value or replacement cost, whichever is less, b.The auto must be replaced and a copy of a bill of sale or new lease agreement received by us within 60 calendar days of the date of"loss," ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 5 of 5 NAMED INSURED:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. POLICY NUMBER:46UEABJ5URP,46UEABJ60GL&46HHABJ60JW it THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. NOTICE OF CANCELLATION TO CERTIFICATE HOLDER(S) This policy is subject to the following additional days of the cancellation effective date to the Conditions: certificate holder(s) with mailing addresses on file A. If this policy is cancelled by the Company, other with the agent of record or the Company. than for nonpayment of premium, notice of such If notice is mailed, proof of mailing to the last known cancellation will be provided at least thirty (30) mailing address of the certificate holder(s) on file with days in advance of the cancellation effective date the agent of record or the Company will be sufficient to the certificate holder(s) with mailing addresses proof of notice. on file with the agent of record or the Company. Any notification rights provided by this endorsement B. If this policy is cancelled by the Company for apply only to active certificate holder(s) who were nonpayment of premium, or by the insured, notice issued a certificate of insurance applicable to this of such cancellation will be provided within (10) policy's term. Form IH 03 07 06 11 Page 1 of 1 © 2011, The Hartford TeX,qSMutuar WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND WC 42 03 04 B EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Insured copy TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ( ) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization (X)Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: All Texas operations 3. Premium: The premium charge for this endorsement shall be 2.00 percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s)or organization(s)arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium: Included, see Information Page This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on 10/4/25 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no.0002120491 of Texas Mutual Insurance Company effective on 10/4/25 Issued to: ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS LTD This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 9/22/25 PO Box 12058, Austin, TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com 1 (800)859-5995 1 Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 03 04 B TeX,qSMutuar WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND WC 42 06 01 EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Insured copy TEXAS NOTICE OF MATERIAL CHANGE ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A. of the Information Page. In the event of cancellation or other material change of the policy, we will mail advance notice to the person or organization named in the Schedule. The number of days advance notice is shown in the Schedule. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. Schedule 1. Number of days advance notice: 30 2. Notice will be mailed to: PER LIST ON FILE This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on 10/4/25 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no.0002120491 of Texas Mutual Insurance Company effective on 10/4/25 Issued to: ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS LTD This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 9/22/25 PO Box 12058, Austin, TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com 1 (800)859-5995 1 Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 06 01 72/5/2026 E(MM/DDIYYYY) A�" CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Sarah Mharlwa Acrisure South Insurance Services, LLC PHONE FAX 1317 Citizens Blvd AIC No Ext: 214-989-7100 AIc,No:210-696-8414 Leesburg FL 34748 ADDRESS: Service@ib-tx.com INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# License#:BR-1796553 INSURERA: Hartford Fire Insurance Company 19682 INSURED INSURERS:Trumbull Insurance Company 27120 Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. 215 W. Bandera Rd. Ste. 114-461 INSURERC: Hartford Casualty Insurance Company 29424 Boerne TX 78006 INSURERD:Texas Mutual Insurance Company 22945 INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:1129462782 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR ADDLSUBRTYPE OF INSURANCE INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LTR MM/DDIYYYYI iMMIDDIYYYYI LIMITS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 46UEABJ5URP 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 DAMAGE TO RENTED CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR PREMISES Ea occurrence $500,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $15,000 X XCU PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 � PRO- POLICY LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $2,000,000 OTHER: $ B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 46UEABJ60GL 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 Ea accident X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED X SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS X HIRED X NON-OWNED PROPERTYDAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident C X UMBRELLALIAB X OCCUR 46HHABJ60JW 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 EACH OCCURRENCE $10,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $10,000,000 DED X RETENTION$1 n nnn $ D WORKERS COMPENSATION 0002120491 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 X PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY YIN STATUTE ER ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? FNJ NIA (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 A GL-Ltd Pollution Liab Worksites 46UEABJ5URP 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 Per Occurrence 1,000,000 General Aggregate 2,000,000 Deductible 10,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) The General Liability and Auto policies include blanket additional insured endorsements(HG0001 06/05&HA9916 03/12)as required in a written contract with the Named Insured.The General Liability,Auto&Work Camp policies include a blanket waiver of subrogation endorsement(HG0001 06/05, HA9916 03/12& WC42030413)as required in a written contract with the Named Insured.Primary Non-Contributory per attached(HG0001 06/05&HA9916 03/12).Cancellation provisions-see attached(IH0307 06/11 &WC420601).Umbrella is follow form of the General Liability,Auto and Work Comp policies subject to policy terms and conditions. No exclusion for boom and overload coverage. Additional Insureds as per Written Contract:City of Corpus Christi—Engineering Services and Plummer Associates,Inc. Contract#6687; Project#19029A-RFB-Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020). CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. City of Corpus Christi—Engineering Services 1201 Leopard Street AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi, TX 78401 - y Irwin @ 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD NAMED INSURED:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. POLICY NUMBER:46UEABJ5URP COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM Various provisions in this policy restrict coverage. Read (2) The "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurs the entire policy carefully to determine rights, duties and during the policy period; and what is and is not covered. (3) Prior to the policy period, no insured listed Throughout this policy the words "you" and "your" refer to under Paragraph 1. of Section II — Who Is An the Named Insured shown in the Declarations, and any Insured and no "employee" authorized by you to other person or organization qualifying as a Named give or receive notice of an "occurrence" or Insured under this policy. The words "we", "us" and "our" claim, knew that the "bodily injury" or "property refer to the stock insurance company member of The damage" had occurred, in whole or in part. If Hartford providing this insurance. such a listed insured or authorized "employee" The word "insured" means any person or organization knew, prior to the policy period, that the "bodily qualifying as such under Section II —Who Is An Insured. injury" or "property damage" occurred, then any continuation, change or resumption of such Other words and phrases that appear in quotation marks "bodily injury" or "property damage" during or have special meaning. Refer to Section V—Definitions. after the policy period will be deemed to have SECTION I—COVERAGES been known prior to the policy period. COVERAGE A BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY c. "Bodily injury" or"property damage" will be deemed DAMAGE LIABILITY to have been known to have occurred at the 1. Insuring Agreement earliest time when any insured listed under Paragraph 1. of Section II — Who Is An Insured or a. We will pay those sums that the insured becomes any "employee" authorized by you to give or legally obligated to pay as damages because of receive notice of an "occurrence" or claim: "bodily injury" or "property damage" to which this insurance applies. We will have the right and duty (1) Reports all, or any part, of the "bodily injury" or to defend the insured against any "suit" seeking "property damage"to us or any other insurer; those damages. However, we will have no duty to (2) Receives a written or verbal demand or claim defend the insured against any "suit" seeking for damages because of the "bodily injury" or damages for "bodily injury" or"property damage" to "property damage"; or which this insurance does not apply. We may, at (3) Becomes aware by any other means that our discretion, investigate any "occurrence" and "bodily injury" or "property damage" has settle any claim or"suit"that may result. But: occurred or has begun to occur. (1) The amount we will pay for damages is limited d. Damages because of "bodily injury" include as described in Section III — Limits Of damages claimed by any person or organization for Insurance; and care, loss of services or death resulting at any time (2) Our right and duty to defend ends when we from the "bodily injury". have used up the applicable limit of insurance in e. Incidental Medical Malpractice the payment of judgments or settlements under Coverages A or B or medical expenses under (1) "Bodily injury" arising out of the rendering of or Coverage C. failure to render professional health care No other obligation or liability to pay sums or services as a physician, dentist, nurse, emergency medical technician or paramedic perform acts or services is covered unless explicitly shall be deemed to be caused by an provided for under Supplementary Payments — "occurrence", but only if: Coverages A and B. (a) The physician, dentist, nurse, emergency b. This insurance applies to "bodily injury" and medical technician or paramedic is "property damage" only if: employed by you to provide such services; (1) The "bodily injury" or "property damage" is and caused by an "occurrence" that takes place in (b) You are not engaged in the business or the "coverage territory"; occupation of providing such services. HG 00 01 06 05 Page 1 of 18 ©2005 The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. with its permission.) (2) For the purpose of determining the limits of d. Workers' Compensation And Similar Laws insurance for incidental medical malpractice, Any obligation of the insured under a workers' any act or omission together with all related acts compensation, disability benefits or unemployment or omissions in the furnishing of these services compensation law or any similar law. to any one person will be considered one "occurrence". e. Employer's Liability 2. Exclusions "Bodily injury"to: This insurance does not apply to: (1) An "employee" of the insured arising out of and in the course of: a. Expected Or Intended Injury "Bodily injury" or "property damage" expected or (a) Employment by the insured; or intended from the standpoint of the insured. This (b) Performing duties related to the conduct of exclusion does not apply to "bodily injury" or the insured's business; or "property damage" resulting from the use of (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of reasonable force to protect persons or property. that "employee" as a consequence of b. Contractual Liability Paragraph (1) above. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for which the This exclusion applies: insured is obligated to pay damages by reason of (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an the assumption of liability in a contract or employer or in any other capacity; and agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability (2) To any obligation to share damages with or for damages: repay someone else who must pay damages (1) That the insured would have in the absence of because of the injury. the contract or agreement; or This exclusion does not apply to liability assumed (2) Assumed in a contract or agreement that is an by the insured under an "insured contract". "insured contract", provided the "bodily injury" or f. Pollution "property damage" occurs subsequent to the 1 "Bodily " "property dama e" out execution of the contract or agreement. Solely ( ) injury" or g arising for the purposes of liability assumed in an of the actual, alleged or threatened discharge, "insured contract", reasonable attorney fees and dispersal, seepage, migration, release or necessary litigation expenses incurred by or for escape of"pollutants": a party other than an insured are deemed to be (a) At or from any premises, site or location damages because of "bodily injury" or "property which is or was at any time owned or damage", provided: occupied by, or rented or loaned to, any (a) Liability to such party for, or for the cost of, insured. However, this subparagraph does that party's defense has also been assumed not apply to: in the same "insured contract"; and (1) "Bodily injury" if sustained within a (b) Such attorney fees and litigation expenses building and caused by smoke, fumes, are for defense of that party against a civil or vapor or soot produced by or originating alternative dispute resolution proceeding in from equipment that is used to heat, cool which damages to which this insurance or dehumidify the building, or equipment applies are alleged. that is used to heat water for personal C. Liquor Liability use, by the building's occupants or their q y guests; "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for which any (ii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for insured may be held liable by reason of: which you may be held liable, if you are a (1) Causing or contributing to the intoxication of any contractor and the owner or lessee of person; such premises, site or location has been (2) The furnishing of alcoholic beverages to a added to your policy as an additional person under the legal drinking age or under the insured with respect to your ongoing influence of alcohol; or operations performed for that additional insured at that premises, site or location (3) Any statute, ordinance or regulation relating to and such premises, site or location is not the sale, gift, distribution or use of alcoholic and never was owned or occupied by, or beverages. rented or loaned to, any insured, other This exclusion applies only if you are in the than that additional insured; or business of manufacturing, distributing, selling, serving or furnishing alcoholic beverages. Page 2 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 (iii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" (e) At or from any premises, site or location on arising out of heat, smoke or fumes from which any insured or any contractors or a "hostile fire"; subcontractors working directly or indirectly (b) At or from any premises, site or location on any insured's behalf are performing which is or was at any time used by or for operations if the operations are to test for, any insured or others for the handling, monitor, clean up, remove, contain, treat, storage, disposal, processing or treatment of detoxify or neutralize, or in any way respond waste; to, or assess the effects of, "pollutants". (c) Which are or were at any time transported, (2) Any loss, cost or expense arising out of any: handled, stored, treated, disposed of, or (a) Request, demand, order or statutory or processed as waste by or for: regulatory requirement that any insured or (1) Any insured; or others test for, monitor, clean up, remove, (ii) Any person or organization for whom you contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in may be legally responsible; any way respond to, or assess the effects of, "pollutants"; or (d) At or from any premises, site or location on (b) Claim or suit by or on behalf of a which any insured or any contractors or governmental authority for damages subcontractors working directly or indirectly because of testing for, monitoring, cleaning on any insured's behalf are performing operations if the "pollutants" are brought on up, removing, containing, treating, or to the premises, site or location in detoxifying or neutralizing, or in any way connection with such operations by such responding to, or assessing the effects of, "pollutants". insured, contractor or subcontractor. However, this subparagraph does not apply However, this paragraph does not apply to to: liability for damages because of "property damage" that the insured would have in the (i) Bodily injury or property damage absence of such request, demand, order or arising out of the escape of fuels, statutory or regulatory requirement, or such lubricants or other operating fluids which claim or"suit" by or on behalf of a governmental are needed to perform the normal authority. electrical, hydraulic or mechanical functions necessary for the operation of g• Aircraft, Auto Or Watercraft "mobile equipment" or its parts, if such "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of fuels, lubricants or other operating fluids the ownership, maintenance, use or entrustment to escape from a vehicle part designed to others of any aircraft, "auto" or watercraft owned or hold, store or receive them. This operated by or rented or loaned to any insured. Use exception does not apply if the "bodily includes operation and "loading or unloading". injury" or "property damage" arises out of This exclusion applies even if the claims against the intentional discharge, dispersal or any insured allege negligence or other wrongdoing release of the fuels, lubricants or other in the supervision, hiring, employment, training or operating fluids, or if such fuels, monitoring of others by that insured, if the lubricants or other operating fluids are "occurrence" which caused the "bodily injury" or brought on or to the premises, site or "property damage" involved the ownership, location with the intent that they be maintenance, use or entrustment to others of any discharged, dispersed or released as part aircraft, "auto" or watercraft that is owned or of the operations being performed by operated by or rented or loaned to any insured. such insured, contractor or subcontractor; This exclusion does not apply to: (ii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" (1) A watercraft while ashore on premises you own sustained within a building and caused or rent; by the release of gases, fumes or vapors (2) A watercraft you do not own that is: from materials brought into that building (a) Less than 51 feet long; and in connection with operations being (b) Not being used to carry persons for a performed by you or on your behalf by a contractor or subcontractor; or charge; (iii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" (3) Parking an "auto" on, or on the ways next to, arising out of heat, smoke or fumes from premises you own or rent, provided the "auto" is a "hostile fire"; or not owned by or rented or loaned to you or the insured; HG 00 01 06 05 Page 3 of 18 (4) Liability assumed under any "insured contract" working directly or indirectly on your behalf are for the ownership, maintenance or use of performing operations, if the "property damage" aircraft or watercraft; arises out of those operations; or (5) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out (6) That particular part of any property that must be of the operation of any of the equipment listed in restored, repaired or replaced because "your Paragraph f.(2) or f.(3) of the definition of work"was incorrectly performed on it. "mobile equipment"; or Paragraphs (1), (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not (6) An aircraft that is not owned by any insured and apply to "property damage" (other than damage by is hired, chartered or loaned with a paid crew. fire) to premises, including the contents of such However, this exception does not apply if the premises, rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer insured has any other insurance for such "bodily consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance injury" or "property damage", whether the other applies to Damage To Premises Rented To You as insurance is primary, excess, contingent or on described in Section III — Limits Of Insurance. any other basis. Paragraph (2) of this exclusion does not apply if the h. Mobile Equipment premises are "your work" and were never occupied, "Bodily injury"or"property damage" arising out of: rented or held for rental by you. (1) The transportation of "mobile equipment" by an Paragraphs (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not "auto"owned or operated by or rented or loaned apply to "property damage" arising from the use of to any insured; or elevators. (2) The use of "mobile equipment" in, or while in Paragraphs (3), (4), (5) and (6) of this exclusion do practice for, or while being prepared for, any not apply to liability assumed under a sidetrack prearranged racing, speed, demolition, or agreement. stunting activity. Paragraphs (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not i. War apply to "property damage" to borrowed equipment "Bodily injury" or "property damage", however while not being used to perform operations at the caused, arising, directly or indirectly, out of: job site. (1) War, including undeclared or civil war; Paragraph (6) of this exclusion does not apply to property damage included in the products- (2) Warlike action by a military force, including completed operations hazard". action in hindering or defending against an k. Damage To Your Product actual or expected attack, by any government, sovereign or other authority using military "Property damage"to "your product" arising out of it personnel or other agents; or or any part of it. (3) Insurrection, rebellion, revolution, usurped I. Damage To Your Work power, or action taken by governmental "Property damage"to "your work" arising out of it or authority in hindering or defending against any any part of it and included in the "products- of these. completed operations hazard". j. Damage To Property This exclusion does not apply if the damaged work "Property damage" to: or the work out of which the damage arises was (1) Property you own, rent, or occupy, including any performed on your behalf by a subcontractor. costs or expenses incurred by you, or any other m. Damage To Impaired Property Or Property Not person, organization or entity, for repair, Physically Injured replacement, enhancement, restoration or "Property damage" to "impaired property" or maintenance of such property for any reason, property that has not been physically injured, including prevention of injury to a person or arising out of: damage to another's property; (1) A defect, deficiency, inadequacy or dangerous (2) Premises you sell, give away or abandon, if the condition in "your product" or"your work"; or "property damage" arises out of any part of (2) A delay or failure by you or anyone acting on those premises; your behalf to perform a contract or agreement (3) Property loaned to you; in accordance with its terms. (4) Personal property in the care, custody or control This exclusion does not apply to the loss of use of of the insured; other property arising out of sudden and accidental (5) That particular part of real property on which physical injury to "your product" or"your work" after you or any contractors or subcontractors it has been put to its intended use. Page 4 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 n. Recall Of Products, Work Or Impaired kind to persons or property which would not Property have occurred in whole or in part but for the Damages claimed for any loss, cost or expense "asbestos hazard"; incurred by you or others for the loss of use, (b) Arise out of any request, demand, order or withdrawal, recall, inspection, repair, replacement, statutory or regulatory requirement that any adjustment, removal or disposal of: insured or others test for, monitor, clean up, (1) "Your product"; remove, encapsulate, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize or in any way respond to or (2) Your work"; or assess the effects of an "asbestos hazard"; (3) "Impaired property"; or if such product, work, or property is withdrawn or (c) Arise out of any claim or suit for damages recalled from the market or from use by any person because of testing for, monitoring, cleaning or organization because of a known or suspected up, removing, encapsulating, containing, defect, deficiency, inadequacy or dangerous treating, detoxifying or neutralizing or in any condition in it. way responding to or assessing the effects o. Personal And Advertising Injury of an "asbestos hazard". "Bodily injury" arising out of "personal and Damage To Premises Rented To You — Exception advertising injury". For Damage By Fire, Lightning Or Explosion p. Electronic Data Exclusions c. through h. and j. through n. do not apply Damages arising out of the loss of, loss of use of, to damage by fire, lightning or explosion to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or permission of the owner. A separate limit of insurance inability to manipulate electronic data. applies to this coverage as described in Section III — As used in this exclusion, electronic data means Limits Of Insurance. information, facts or programs stored as or on, COVERAGE B PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING created or used on, or transmitted to or from INJURY LIABILITY computer software, including systems and applications software, hard or floppy disks, CD- 1. Insuring Agreement ROMS, tapes, drives, cells, data processing a. We will pay those sums that the insured becomes devices or any other media which are used with legally obligated to pay as damages because of electronically controlled equipment. "personal and advertising injury" to which this q. Employment-Related Practices insurance applies. We will have the right and duty "Bodily injury"to: to defend the insured against any "suit' seeking those damages. However, we will have no duty to (1) A person arising out of any "employment— defend the insured against any "suit' seeking related practices"; or damages for "personal and advertising injury" to (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of which this insurance does not apply. We may, at that person as a consequence of "bodily injury" our discretion, investigate any offense and settle to that person at whom any "employment- any claim or"suit'that may result. But: related practices" are directed. (1) The amount we will pay for damages is limited This exclusion applies: as described in Section III — Limits Of (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an Insurance; and employer or in any other capacity; and (2) Our right and duty to defend end when we have (2) To any obligation to share damages with or used up the applicable limit of insurance in the repay someone else who must pay damages payment of judgments or settlements under because of the injury. Coverages A or B or medical expenses under Coverage C. r. Asbestos No other obligation or liability to pay sums or (1) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out perform acts or services is covered unless explicitly of the "asbestos hazard". provided for under Supplementary Payments — (2) Any damages, judgments, settlements, loss, Coverages A and B. costs or expenses that: b. This insurance applies to "personal and advertising (a) May be awarded or incurred by reason of injury" caused by an offense arising out of your any claim or suit alleging actual or business but only if the offense was committed in threatened injury or damage of any nature or the "coverage territory"during the policy period. HG 00 01 06 05 Page 5 of 18 2. Exclusions (2) Slogan, unless the slogan is also a trademark, This insurance does not apply to: trade name, service mark or other designation a. Knowing Violation Of Rights Of Another of origin or authenticity; or Personal and advertising injury arising out of an (3) Title of any literary or artistic work. offense committed by, at the direction or with the j• Insureds In Media And Internet Type consent or acquiescence of the insured with the Businesses expectation of inflicting "personal and advertising "Personal and advertising injury" committed by an injury". insured whose business is: b. Material Published With Knowledge Of Falsity (1) Advertising, broadcasting, publishing or "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of oral, telecasting; written or electronic publication of material, if done (2) Designing or determining content of web sites by or at the direction of the insured with knowledge for others; or of its falsity. (3) An Internet search, access, content or service c. Material Published Prior To Policy Period provider. "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of oral, However, this exclusion does not apply to written or electronic publication of material whose Paragraphs 17.a., b. and c. of "personal and first publication took place before the beginning of advertising injury" under the Definitions Section. the policy period. For the purposes of this exclusion, placing an d. Criminal Acts "advertisement"for or linking to others on your web "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of a site, by itself, is not considered the business of criminal act committed by or at the direction of the advertising, broadcasting, publishing or telecasting. insured. k. Electronic Chatrooms Or Bulletin Boards e. Contractual Liability "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of an "Personal and advertising injury" for which the electronic chatroom or bulletin board the insured insured has assumed liability in a contract or hosts, owns, or over which the insured exercises agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability control. for damages that the insured would have in the I. Unauthorized Use Of Another's Name Or absence of the contract or agreement. Product f. Breach Of Contract "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of a unauthorized use of another's name or product in breach of contract, except an implied contract to use your e-mail address, domain name or metatags, or another's"advertising idea" in your"advertisement". any other similar tactics to mislead another's g. Quality Or Performance Of Goods — Failure To potential customers. Conform To Statements m. Pollution "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the failure of goods, products or services to conform actual, alleged or threatened discharge, dispersal, with any statement of quality or performance made seepage, migration, release or escape of in your"advertisement". "pollutants" at any time. h. Wrong Description Of Prices n. Pollution-Related "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the Any loss, cost or expense arising out of any: wrong description of the price of goods, products or (1) Request, demand, order or statutory or services. regulatory requirement that any insured or i. Infringement Of Intellectual Property Rights others test for, monitor, clean up, remove, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in any Personal and advertising injury arising out of any way respond to, or assess the effects of, violation of any intellectual property rights such as "pollutants"; or copyright, patent, trademark, trade name, trade secret, service mark or other designation of origin (2) Claim or suit by or on behalf of a governmental or authenticity. authority for damages because of testing for, However, this exclusion does not apply to monitoring, cleaning up, removing, containing, treating, detoxifying or neutralizing, or in any infringement, in your"advertisement", of: way responding to, or assessing the effects of, (1) Copyright; "pollutants". Page 6 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 o. War (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of "Personal and advertising injury", however caused, that person as a consequence of "personal and arising, directly or indirectly, out of: advertising injury" to that person at whom any (1) War, including undeclared or civil war; "employment-related practices" are directed. This exclusion applies: (2) Warlike action by a military force, including action in hindering or defending against an (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an actual or expected attack, by any government, employer or in any other capacity; and sovereign or other authority using military (2) To any obligation to share damages with or personnel or other agents; or repay someone else who must pay damages (3) Insurrection, rebellion, revolution, usurped power, because of the injury. or action taken by governmental authority in v. Asbestos hindering or defending against any of these. (1) "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of p. Internet Advertisements And Content Of Others the "asbestos hazard". "Personal and advertising injury"arising out of: (2) Any damages, judgments, settlements, loss, (1) An "advertisement"for others on your web site; costs or expenses that: (2) Placing a link to a web site of others on your (a) May be awarded or incurred by reason of web site; any claim or suit alleging actual or (3) Content, including information, sounds, text, threatened injury or damage of any nature or graphics, or images from a web site of others kind to persons or property which would not displayed within a frame or border on your web have occurred in whole or in part but for the "asbestos hazard"; site; or (4) Computer code, software or programming used (b) Arise out of any request, demand, order or statutory or regulatory requirement that any to enable: insured or others test for, monitor, clean up, (a) Your web site; or remove, encapsulate, contain, treat, detoxify (b) The presentation or functionality of an or neutralize or in any way respond to or "advertisement" or other content on your assess the effects of an "asbestos hazard"; web site. or q. Right Of Privacy Created By Statute (c) Arise out of any claim or suit for damages "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the because of testing for, monitoring, cleaning violation of a person's right of privacy created by up, removing, encapsulating, containing, any state or federal act. treating, detoxifying or neutralizing or in any way responding to or assessing the effects However, this exclusion does not apply to liability of an "asbestos hazard". for damages that the insured would have in the COVERAGE C MEDICAL PAYMENTS absence of such state or federal act. r. Violation Of Anti-Trust law 1. Insuring Agreement a. We will pay medical expenses as described below Personal and advertising injury arising out of a for"bodily injury" caused by an accident: violation of any anti-trust law. S. Securities (1) On premises you own or rent; "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the (2) On ways next to premises you own or rent; or fluctuation in price or value of any stocks, bonds or (3) Because of your operations; other securities. provided that: t. Discrimination Or Humiliation (1) The accident takes place in the "coverage "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of territory" and during the policy period; discrimination or humiliation committed by or at the (2) The expenses are incurred and reported to us direction of any "executive officer", director, within three years of the date of the accident; stockholder, partner or member of the insured. and u. Employment-Related Practices (3) The injured person submits to examination, at "Personal and advertising injury"to: our expense, by physicians of our choice as (1) A person arising out of any "employment— often as we reasonably require. related practices"; or HG 00 01 06 05 Page 7 of 18 b. We will make these payments regardless of fault. e. All costs taxed against the insured in the "suit". These payments will not exceed the applicable limit f. Prejudgment interest awarded against the insured of insurance. We will pay reasonable expenses for: on that part of the judgment we pay. If we make an (1) First aid administered at the time of an accident; offer to pay the applicable li mit of insurance, we will (2) Necessary medical, surgical, x-ray and dental not pay any prejudgment interest based on that services, including prosthetic devices; and period of time after the offer. (3) Necessary ambulance, hospital, professional g• All interest on the full amount of any judgment that nursing and funeral services. accrues after entry of the judgment and before we 2. Exclusions have paid, offered to pay, or deposited in court the part of the judgment that is within the applicable We will not pay expenses for"bodily injury": limit of insurance. a. Any Insured These payments will not reduce the limits of insurance. To any insured, except"volunteer workers". 2. If we defend an insured against a "suit" and an b. Hired Person indemnitee of the insured is also named as a party to To a person hired to do work for or on behalf of any the "suit", we will defend that indemnitee if all of the insured or a tenant of any insured. following conditions are met: C. Injury On Normally Occupied Premises a. The "suit" against the indemnitee seeks damages for which the insured has assumed the liability of To a person injured on that part of premises you the indemnitee in a contract or agreement that is an own or rent that the person normally occupies. "insured contract"; d. Workers Compensation And Similar Laws b. This insurance applies to such liability assumed by To a person, whether or not an "employee" of any the insured; insured, if benefits for the "bodily injury" are payable c. The obligation to defend, or the cost of the defense or must be provided under a workers' compensation of, that indemnitee, has also been assumed by the or disability benefits law or a similar law. insured in the same "insured contract"; e. Athletics Activities d. The allegations in the "suit" and the information we To a person injured while practicing, instructing or know about the "occurrence" are such that no participating in any physical exercises or games, conflict appears to exist between the interests of sports, or athletic contests. the insured and the interests of the indemnitee; f. Products-Completed Operations Hazard e. The indemnitee and the insured ask us to conduct Included within the "products-completed operations and control the defense of that indemnitee against hazard". such suit and agree that we can assign the same counsel to defend the insured and the indemnitee; g. Coverage A Exclusions and Excluded under Coverage A. f. The indemnitee: SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — COVERAGES (1) Agrees in writing to: A AND B (a) Cooperate with us in the investigation, 1. We will pay, with respect to any claim we investigate or settlement or defense of the "suit"; settle, or any "suit" against an insured we defend: (b) Immediately send us copies of any a. All expenses we incur. demands, notices, summonses or legal b. Up to $1,000 for cost of bail bonds required papers received in connection with the "suit"; because of accidents or traffic law violations arising (c) Notify any other insurer whose coverage is out of the use of any vehicle to which the Bodily available to the indemnitee; and Injury Liability Coverage applies. We do not have (d) Cooperate with us with respect to to furnish these bonds. appeal bonds or bonds to release coordinating other applicable insurance c. The cost of a pp available to the indemnitee; and attachments, but only for bond amounts within the (2) Provides us with written authorization to: applicable limit of insurance. We do not have to furnish these bonds. (a) Obtain records and other information related d. All reasonable expenses incurred by the insured at to the "suit"; and our request to assist us in the investigation or (b) Conduct and control the defense of the defense of the claim or "suit", including actual loss indemnitee in such "suit". of earnings up to $500 a day because of time off So long as the above conditions are met, attorneys' from work. fees incurred by us in the defense of that indemnitee, Page 8 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 necessary litigation expenses incurred by us and However, none of these "employees" or "volunteer necessary litigation expenses incurred by the workers" are insureds for: indemnitee at our request will be paid as (1) "Bodily injury" or "personal and advertising Supplementary Payments. Notwithstanding the injury": provisions of Paragraph 2.b.(2) of Section I — Coverage A — Bodily Injury And Property Damage (a) To you, to your partners or members (if you Liability, such payments will not be deemed to be are a partnership or joint venture), to your damages for"bodily injury" and "property damage" and members o you are a limited liability t will not reduce the limits of insurance. company), to a co-"employee" while in the course of his or her employment or Our obligation to defend an insured's indemnitee and performing duties related to the conduct of to pay for attorneys' fees and necessary litigation your business, or to your other "volunteer expenses as Supplementary Payments ends when: workers" while performing duties related to a. We have used up the applicable limit of insurance the conduct of your business; in the payment of judgments or settlements; or (b) To the spouse, child, parent, brother or sister b. The conditions set forth above, or the terms of the of that co-"employee" or that "volunteer agreement described in Paragraph f. above, are no worker" as a consequence of Paragraph longer met. (1)(a) above; SECTION II —WHO IS AN INSURED (c) For which there is any obligation to share 1. If you are designated in the Declarations as: damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the injury a. An individual, you and your spouse are insureds, described in Paragraphs (1)(a) or (b) above; but only with respect to the conduct of a business or of which you are the sole owner. (d) Arising out of his or her providing or failing to b. A partnership or joint venture, you are an insured. provide professional health care services. Your members, your partners, and their spouses are also insureds, but only with respect to the If you are not in the business of providing conduct of your business. professional health care services, Paragraph (d) c. A limited liability company, you are an insured. does not apply to any nurse, emergency medical technician or paramedic employed by Your members are also insureds, but only with you to provide such services. respect to the conduct of your business. Your managers are insureds, but only with respect to (2) "Property damage" to property: their duties as your managers. (a) Owned, occupied or used by, d. An organization other than a partnership, joint (b) Rented to, in the care, custody or control of, venture or limited liability company, you are an or over which physical control is being insured. Your "executive officers" and directors are exercised for any purpose by insureds, but only with respect to their duties as you, any of your "employees", "volunteer your officers or directors. Your stockholders are workers", any partner or member (if you are a also insureds, but only with respect to their liability partnership or joint venture), or any member (if as stockholders. you are a limited liability company). e. A trust, you are an insured. Your trustees are also b. Real Estate Manager insureds, but only with respect to their duties as trustees. Any person (other than your "employee" or "volunteer worker"), or any organization while 2. Each of the following is also an insured: acting as your real estate manager. a. Employees and Volunteer workers c. Temporary Custodians of Your Property Your "volunteer workers" only while performing Any person or organization having proper duties related to the conduct of your business, or temporary custody of your property if you die, but your "employees", other than either your "executive only: officers" (if you are an organization other than a partnership, joint venture or limited liability (1) With respect to liability arising out of the company) or your managers (if you are a limited maintenance or use of that property; and liability company), but only for acts within the scope (2) Until your legal representative has been of their employment by you or while performing appointed. duties related to the conduct of your business. d. Legal Representative If You Die Your legal representative if you die, but only with respect to duties as such. That representative will HG 00 01 06 05 Page 9 of 18 have all your rights and duties under this Coverage 5. Nonowned Watercraft Part. With respect to watercraft you do not own that is less e. Unnamed Subsidiary than 51 feet long and is not being used to carry Any subsidiary, and subsidiary thereof, of yours persons for a charge, any person is an insured while which is a legally incorporated entity of which you operating such watercraft with your permission. Any own a financial interest of more than 50% of the other person or organization responsible for the voting stock on the effective date of the Coverage conduct of such person is also an insured, but only Part. with respect to liability arising out of the operation of the watercraft, and only if no other insurance of any The insurance afforded herein for any subsidiary kind is available to that person or organization for this not named in this Coverage Part as a named liability. insured does not apply to injury or damage with respect to which an insured under this Coverage However, no person or organization is an insured with Part is also an insured under another policy or respect to: would be an insured under such policy but for its a. "Bodily injury" to a co-"employee" of the person termination or the exhaustion of its limits of operating the watercraft; or insurance. b. "Property damage"to property owned by, rented to, 3. Newly Acquired or Formed Organization in the charge of or occupied by you or the employer Any organization you newly acquire or form, other than of any person who is an insured under this a partnership, joint venture or limited liability company, provision. and over which you maintain financial interest of more 6. Additional Insureds When Required By Written than 50% of the voting stock, will qualify as a Named Contract, Written Agreement Or Permit Insured if there is no other similar insurance available The following person(s) or organization(s) are an to that organization. However: additional insured when you have agreed, in a written a. Coverage under this provision is afforded only until contract, written agreement or because of a permit the 180th day after you acquire or form the issued by a state or political subdivision, that such organization or the end of the policy period, person or organization be added as an additional whichever is earlier; insured on your policy, provided the injury or damage b. Coverage A does not apply to "bodily injury" or occurs subsequent to the execution of the contract or "property damage" that occurred before you agreement. acquired or formed the organization; and A person or organization is an additional insured under c. Coverage B does not apply to "personal and this provision only for that period of time required by advertising injury" arising out of an offense the contract or agreement. committed before you acquired or formed the However, no such person or organization is an insured organization. under this provision if such person or organization is 4. Mobile Equipment included as an insured by an endorsement issued by With respect to mobile equipment registered in your us and made a part of this Coverage Part. name under any motor vehicle registration law, any a. Vendors person is an insured while driving such equipment Any person(s) or organization(s) (referred to below along a public highway with your permission. Any other as vendor), but only with respect to "bodily injury" person or organization responsible for the conduct of or "property damage" arising out of "your products" such person is also an insured, but only with respect to which are distributed or sold in the regular course liability arising out of the operation of the equipment, of the vendor's business and only if this Coverage and only if no other insurance of any kind is available Part provides coverage for "bodily injury" or to that person or organization for this liability. However, "property damage" included within the "products- no person or organization is an insured with respect to: completed operations hazard". a. "Bodily injury" to a co-"employee" of the person (1) The insurance afforded the vendor is subject to driving the equipment; or the following additional exclusions: b. "Property damage"to property owned by, rented to, This insurance does not apply to: in the charge of or occupied by you or the employer (a) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for of any person who is an insured under this which the vendor is obligated to pay provision. damages by reason of the assumption of liability in a contract or agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability for damages that the vendor would have in the absence of the contract or agreement; Page 10 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 (b) Any express warranty unauthorized by you; c. Lessors of Land or Premises (c) Any physical or chemical change in the Any person or organization from whom you lease product made intentionally by the vendor; land or premises, but only with respect to liability (d) Repackaging, except when unpacked solely arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of for the purpose of inspection, demonstration, that part of the land or premises leased to you. testing, or the substitution of parts under With respect to the insurance afforded these instructions from the manufacturer, and then additional insureds the following additional repackaged in the original container; exclusions apply: (e) Any failure to make such inspections, This insurance does not apply to: adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor 1. Any "occurrence" which takes place after you has agreed to make or normally undertakes cease to lease that land; or to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of the 2. Structural alterations, new construction or products; demolition operations performed by or on behalf of such person or organization. (f) Demonstration, installation, servicing or d. Architects, Engineers or Surveyors repair operations, except such operations performed at the vendor's premises in Any architect, engineer, or surveyor, but only with connection with the sale of the product; respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property (g) Products which, after distribution or sale by damage" or "personal and advertising injury" you, have been labeled or relabeled or used caused, in whole or in part, by your acts or as a container, part or ingredient of any omissions or the acts or omissions of those acting other thing or substance by or for the on your behalf: vendor; or (1) In connection with your premises; or (h) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising (2) In the performance of your ongoing operations out of the sole negligence of the vendor for performed by you or on your behalf. its own acts or omissions or those of its With respect to the insurance afforded these employees or anyone else acting on its additional insureds, the following additional behalf. However, this exclusion does not exclusion applies: apply to: This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury", (1) The exceptions contained in Sub- "property damage" or "personal and advertising paragraphs (d) or(f); or injury" arising out of the rendering of or the failure (ii) Such inspections, adjustments, tests or to render any professional services by or for you, servicing as the vendor has agreed to including: make or normally undertakes to make in 1. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare the usual course of business, in or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, connection with the distribution or sale of reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or the products. drawings and specifications; or (2) This insurance does not apply to any insured 2. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or person or organization, from whom you have engineering activities. acquired such products, or any ingredient, part or container, entering into, accompanying or e. Permits Issued By State Or Political containing such products. Subdivisions b. Lessors of Equipment Any state or political subdivision, but only with respect to operations performed by you or on your (1) Any person or organization from whom you behalf for which the state or political subdivision lease equipment; but only with respect to their has issued a permit. liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" caused, in With respect to the insurance afforded these whole or in part, by your maintenance, operation additional insureds, this insurance does not apply or use of equipment leased to you by such to: person or organization. (1) "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal (2) With respect to the insurance afforded to these and advertising injury" arising out of operations additional insureds this insurance does not performed for the state or municipality; or apply to any "occurrence" which takes place (2) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" included after the equipment lease expires. within the "products-completed operations hazard". HG 00 01 06 05 Page 11 of 18 f. Any Other Party c. Persons or organizations making claims or bringing Any other person or organization who is not an "suits". insured under Paragraphs a. through e. above, but 2. General Aggregate Limit only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", The General Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay "property damage" or "personal and advertising for the sum of: injury" caused, in whole or in part, by your acts or omissions or the acts or omissions of those acting a. Medical expenses under Coverage C; on your behalf: b. Damages under Coverage A, except damages (1) In the performance of your ongoing operations; because of "bodily injury" or "property damage" (2) In connection with your premises owned by or included in the "products-completed operations rented to you; or hazard , and (3) In connection with "your work" and included c. Damages under Coverage B. within the "products-completed operations 3. Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit hazard", but only if The Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit (a) The written contract or agreement requires is the most we will pay under Coverage A for damages you to provide such coverage to such because of "bodily injury" and "property damage" additional insured; and included in the "products-completed operations hazard". (b) This Coverage Part provides coverage for "bodily injury" or "property damage" included 4. Personal and Advertising Injury Limit within the "products-completed operations Subject to 2. above, the Personal and Advertising hazard". Injury Limit is the most we will pay under Coverage B With respect to the insurance afforded to these for the sum of all damages because of all "personal additional insureds, this insurance does not apply and advertising injury" sustained by any one person or to: organization. "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and 5. Each Occurrence Limit advertising injury" arising out of the rendering of, or Subject to 2. or 3. above, whichever applies, the Each the failure to render, any professional architectural, Occurrence Limit is the most we will pay for the sum engineering or surveying services, including: of: (1) The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare a. Damages under Coverage A; and or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, b. Medical expenses under Coverage C reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; or because of all "bodily injury" and "property damage" arising out of any one "occurrence". (2) Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. 6. Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit Subject to 5. above, the Damage To Premises Rented The limits of insurance that apply to additional insureds To You Limit is the most we will pay under Coverage A under this provision is described in Section III — Limits for damages because of"property damage"to any one Of Insurance. premises, while rented to you, or in the case of How this insurance applies when other insurance is damage by fire, lightning or explosion, while rented to available to the additional insured is described in the you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of Other Insurance Condition in Section IV — Commercial the owner. General Liability Conditions. In the case of damage by fire, lightning or explosion, No person or organization is an insured with respect to the the Damage to Premises Rented To You Limit applies conduct of any current or past partnership,joint venture or to all damage proximately caused by the same event, limited liability company that is not shown as a Named whether such damage results from fire, lightning or Insured in the Declarations. explosion or any combination of these. SECTION III— LIMITS OF INSURANCE 7. Medical Expense Limit 1. The Most We will Pay Subject to 5. above, the Medical Expense Limit is the The Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations and most we will pay under Coverage C for all medical the rules below fix the most we will pay regardless of expenses because of "bodily injury" sustained by any the number of: one person. a. Insureds; 8. How Limits Apply To Additional Insureds b. Claims made or"suits" brought; or If you have agreed in a written contract or written agreement that another person or organization be Page 12 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 added as an additional insured on your policy, the (3) Cooperate with us in the investigation or most we will pay on behalf of such additional insured is settlement of the claim or defense against the the lesser of: "suit"; and a. The limits of insurance specified in the written (4) Assist us, upon our request, in the enforcement of contract or written agreement; or any right against any person or organization which b. The Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations. may be liable to the insured because of injury or Such amount shall be a part of and not in addition to damage to which this insurance may also apply. Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations and d. Obligations At The Insureds Own Cost described in this Section. No insured will, except at that insured's own cost, The Limits of Insurance of this Coverage Part apply voluntarily make a payment, assume any separately to each consecutive annual period and to any obligation, or incur any expense, other than for first remaining period of less than 12 months, starting with the aid, without our consent. beginning of the policy period shown in the Declarations, e. Additional Insureds Other Insurance unless the policy period is extended after issuance for an If we cover a claim or "suit" under this Coverage additional period of less than 12 months. In that case, the Part that may also be covered by other insurance additional period will be deemed part of the last preceding available to an additional insured, such additional period for purposes of determining the Limits of Insurance. insured must submit such claim or "suit" to the SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY other insurer for defense and indemnity. CONDITIONS However, this provision does not apply to the 1. Bankruptcy extent that you have agreed in a written contract or Bankruptcy or insolvency of the insured or of the written agreement that this insurance is primary insured's estate will not relieve us of our obligations and non-contributory with the additional insured's under this Coverage Part. own insurance. 2. Duties In The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim f. Knowledge Of An Occurrence, Offense, Claim Or Suit Or Suit a. Notice Of Occurrence Or Offense Paragraphs a. and b. apply to you or to any additional insured only when such "occurrence", You or any additional insured must see to it that we offense, claim or"suit" is known to: are notified as soon as practicable of an "occurrence" or an offense which may result in a (1) You or any additional insured that is an claim. To the extent possible, notice should include: individual; (1) How, when and where the "occurrence" or (2) Any partner, if you or an additional insured is a offense took place; partnership; (2) The names and addresses of any injured (3) Any manager, if you or an additional insured is a persons and witnesses; and limited liability company; (3) The nature and location of any injury or damage (4) Any "executive officer" or insurance manager, if arising out of the "occurrence"or offense. you or an additional insured is a corporation; b. Notice Of Claim (5) Any trustee, if you or an additional insured is a If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against any trust; or insured, you or any additional insured must: (6) Any elected or appointed official, if you or an (1) Immediately record the specifics of the claim or additional insured is a political subdivision or ublic entity. "suit" and the date received; and p y. This duty applies separately to you and any additional (2) Notify us as soon as practicable. insured. You or any additional insured must see to it that we 3. Legal Action Against Us receive written notice of the claim or "suit" as soon g g as practicable. No person or organization has a right under this C. Assistance And Cooperation Of The Insured Coverage Part: a. To join us as a party or otherwise bring us into a You and any other involved insured must: "suit" asking for damages from an insured; or (1) Immediately send us copies of any demands, b. To sue us on this Coverage Part unless all of its notices, summonses or legal papers received in terms have been full lied with. connection with the claim or"suit"; y complied A person or organization may sue us to recover on an (2) Authorize us to obtain records and other agreed settlement or on a final judgment against an information; insured; but we will not be liable for damages that are not payable under the terms of this Coverage Part or HG 00 01 06 05 Page 13 of 18 that are in excess of the applicable limit of insurance. (7) When You Add Others As An Additional An agreed settlement means a settlement and release Insured To This Insurance of liability signed by us, the insured and the claimant or Any other insurance available to an additional the claimant's legal representative. insured. 4. Other Insurance However, the following provisions apply to other If other valid and collectible insurance is available to insurance available to any person or the insured for a loss we cover under Coverages A or organization who is an additional insured under B of this Coverage Part, our obligations are limited as this coverage part. follows: (a) Primary Insurance When Required By a. Primary Insurance Contract This insurance is primary except when b. below This insurance is primary if you have agreed applies. If other insurance is also primary, we will in a written contract or written agreement share with all that other insurance by the method that this insurance be primary. If other described in c. below. insurance is also primary, we will share with b. Excess Insurance all that other insurance by the method described in c. below. This insurance is excess over any of the other insurance, whether primary, excess, contingent or (b) Primary And Non-Contributory To Other on any other basis: Insurance When Required By Contract (1) Your Work If you have agreed in a written contract, written agreement, or permit that this That is Fire, Extended Coverage, Builder's Risk, insurance is primary and non-contributory Installation Risk or similar coverage for "your with the additional insured's own insurance, work"; this insurance is primary and we will not (2) Premises Rented To You seek contribution from that other insurance. That is fire, lightning or explosion insurance for Paragraphs (a) and (b) do not apply to other premises rented to you or temporarily occupied insurance to which the additional insured has by you with permission of the owner; been added as an additional insured. (3) Tenant Liability When this insurance is excess, we will have no That is insurance purchased by you to cover duty under Coverages A or B to defend the insured your liability as a tenant for "property damage" against any "suit" if any other insurer has a duty to to premises rented to you or temporarily defend the insured against that "suit". If no other occupied by you with permission of the owner; insurer defends, we will undertake to do so, but we will be entitled to the insured's rights against all (4) Aircraft, Auto Or Watercraft those other insurers. If the loss arises out of the maintenance or use When this insurance is excess over other of aircraft, "autos" or watercraft to the extent not insurance, we will pay only our share of the amount subject to Exclusion g. of Section I — Coverage of the loss, if any, that exceeds the sum of: A— Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability; (1) The total amount that all such other insurance (5) Property Damage to Borrowed Equipment Or would pay for the loss in the absence of this Use Of Elevators insurance; and If the loss arises out of "property damage" to (2) The total of all deductible and self-insured borrowed equipment or the use of elevators to amounts under all that other insurance. the extent not subject to Exclusion j. of Section - Coverage A - Bodily Injury And Property We will share the remaining loss, if any, with any Damage Liability; other insurance that is not described in this Excess Insurance provision and was not bought specifically (6) When You Are Added As An Additional to apply in excess of the Limits of Insurance shown Insured To Other Insurance in the Declarations of this Coverage Part. Any other insurance available to you covering c. Method Of Sharing liability for damages arising out of the premises or operations, or products and completed If all of the other insurance permits contribution by operations, for which you have been added as equal shares, we will follow this method also. Under an additional insured by that insurance; or this approach each insurer contributes equal amounts until it has paid its applicable limit of insurance or none of the loss remains, whichever comes first. Page 14 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 If any of the other insurance does not permit insured will bring "suit" or transfer those rights to us contribution by equal shares, we will contribute by and help us enforce them. limits. Under this method, each insurer's share is b. Waiver Of Rights Of Recovery (Waiver Of based on the ratio of its applicable limit of Subrogation) insurance to the total applicable limits of insurance of all insurers. If the insured has waived any rights of recovery 5. Premium Audit against any person or organization for all or part of any payment, including Supplementary Payments, a. We will compute all premiums for this Coverage we have made under this Coverage Part, we also Part in accordance with our rules and rates. waive that right, provided the insured waived their b. Premium shown in this Coverage Part as advance rights of recovery against such person or premium is a deposit premium only. At the close of organization in a contract, agreement or permit that each audit period we will compute the earned was executed prior to the injury or damage. premium for that period and send notice to the first 9. When We Do Not Renew Named Insured. The due date for audit and If we decide not to renew this Coverage Part, we will retrospective premiums is the date shown as the mail or deliver to the first Named Insured shown in the due date on the bill. If the sum of the advance and Declarations written notice of the nonrenewal not less audit premiums paid for the policy period is greater than 30 days before the expiration date. than the earned premium, we will return the excess to the first Named Insured. If notice is mailed, proof of mailing will be sufficient c. The first Named Insured must keep records of the proof of notice. information we need for premium computation, and SECTION V—DEFINITIONS send us copies at such times as we may request. 1. "Advertisement" means the widespread public 6. Representations dissemination of information or images that has the purpose of inducing the sale of goods, products or a. When You Accept This Policy services through: By accepting this policy, you agree: a. (1) Radio; (1) The statements in the Declarations are accurate (2) Television; and complete; (3) Billboard; (2) Those statements are based upon representations you made to us; and (4) Magazine; (3) We have issued this policy in reliance upon your (5) Newspaper; or representations. b. Any other publication that is given widespread b. Unintentional Failure To Disclose Hazards public distribution. If unintentionally you should fail to disclose all However, "advertisement" does not include: hazards relating to the conduct of your business a. The design, printed material, information or images that exist at the inception date of this Coverage contained in, on or upon the packaging or labeling Part, we shall not deny coverage under this of any goods or products; or Coverage Part because of such failure. b. An interactive conversation between or among 7. Separation Of Insureds persons through a computer network. Except with respect to the Limits of Insurance, and any 2. "Advertising idea" means any idea for an rights or duties specifically assigned in this Coverage "advertisement". Part to the first Named Insured, this insurance applies: 3. "Asbestos hazard" means an exposure or threat of a. As if each Named Insured were the only Named exposure to the actual or alleged properties of Insured; and asbestos and includes the mere presence of asbestos b. Separately to each insured against whom claim is in any form. made or"suit" is brought. 4. "Auto" means a land motor vehicle, trailer or semitrailer 8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To designed for travel on public roads, including any Us attached machinery or equipment. But "auto" does not a. Transfer of Rights Of Recovery include "mobile equipment". If the insured has rights to recover all or part of any 5. "Bodily injury" means physical: payment, including Supplementary Payments, we a. Injury; have made under this Coverage Part, those rights b. Sickness; or are transferred to us. The insured must do nothing c. Disease after loss to impair them. At our request, the sustained by a person and, if arising out of the above, mental anguish or death at any time. HG 00 01 06 05 Page 15 of 18 6. "Coverage territory" means: rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with a. The United States of America (including its territories permission of the owner is subject to the Damage and possessions), Puerto Rico and Canada; to Premises Rented To You Limit described in b. International waters or airspace, but only if the Section III — Limits of Insurance; injury or damage occurs in the course of travel or b. A sidetrack agreement; transportation between any places included in a. c. Any easement or license agreement, including an above; or easement or license agreement in connection with c. All other parts of the world if the injury or damage construction or demolition operations on or within arises out of: 50 feet of a railroad; (1) Goods or products made or sold by you in the d. An obligation, as required by ordinance, to territory described in a. above; indemnify a municipality, except in connection with (2) The activities of a person whose home is in the work for a municipality; territory described in a. above, but is away for a e. An elevator maintenance agreement; short time on your business; or f. That part of any other contract or agreement (3) "Personal and advertising injury" offenses that pertaining to your business (including an take place through the Internet or similar indemnification of a municipality in connection with electronic means of communication work performed for a municipality) under which you provided the insured's responsibility to pay damages is assume the tort liability of another party to pay for "bodily injury" or "property damage" to a third determined in the United States of America (including its person or organization, provided the "bodily injury" territories and possessions), Puerto Rico or Canada, in a or"property damage" is caused, in whole or in part, suit on the merits according to the substantive law in by you or by those acting on your behalf. Tort such territory or in a settlement we agree to. liability means a liability that would be imposed by 7. "Employee" includes a "leased worker". "Employee" law in the absence of any contract or agreement. does not include a "temporary worker". Paragraph f. includes that part of any contract or 8. "Employment-Related Practices" means: agreement that indemnifies a railroad for "bodily a. Refusal to employ a person; injury" or "property damage" arising out of b. Termination of a person's employment; or construction or demolition operations, within 50 feet of any railroad property and affecting any railroad c. Employment-related practices, policies, acts or bridge or trestle, tracks, road-beds, tunnel, omissions, such as coercion, demotion, evaluation, underpass or crossing. reassignment, discipline, defamation, harassment, However, Paragraph f. does not include that part of humiliation or discrimination directed at a person. any contract or agreement: 9. "Executive officer" means a person holding any of the (1) That indemnifies an architect, engineer or officer positions created by your charter, constitution, surveyor for injury or damage arising out of: by-laws or any other similar governing document. 10."Hostile fire" means one which becomes uncontrollable (a) Preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or or breaks out from where it was intended to be. approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders 11."Impaired property" means tangible property, other or drawings and specifications; or than "your product" or"your work", that cannot be used (b) Giving directions or instructions, or failing to or is less useful because: give them, if that is the primary cause of the a. It incorporates "your product" or "your work" that is injury or damage; or known or thought to be defective, deficient, (2) Under which the insured, if an architect, engineer inadequate or dangerous; or or surveyor, assumes liability for an injury or b. You have failed to fulfill the terms of a contract or damage arising out of the insured's rendering or agreement; failure to render professional services, including if such property can be restored to use by: those listed in (1) above and supervisory, a. The repair, replacement, adjustment or removal of inspection, architectural or engineering activities. "your product" or"your work"; or 13."Leased worker" means a person leased to you by a b. Your fulfilling the terms of the contractor agreement. labor leasing firm under an agreement between you and the labor leasing firm, to perform duties related to 12."Insured contract" means: the conduct of your business. "Leased worker" does a. A contract for a lease of premises. However, that not include a "temporary worker". portion of the contract for a lease of premises that 14."Loading or unloading" means the handling of property: indemnifies any person or organization for damage a. After it is moved from the place where it is accepted by fire, lightning or explosion to premises while for movement into or onto an aircraft, watercraft or "auto"; Page 16 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 b. While it is in or on an aircraft, watercraft or "auto"; 16."Occurrence" means an accident, including continuous or or repeated exposure to substantially the same general c. While it is being moved from an aircraft, watercraft harmful conditions. or"auto" to the place where it is finally delivered; 17."Personal and advertising injury" means injury, but "loading or unloading" does not include the including consequential "bodily injury", arising out of movement of property by means of a mechanical one or more of the following offenses: device, other than a hand truck, that is not attached to a. False arrest, detention or imprisonment; the aircraft, watercraft or"auto". b. Malicious prosecution; 15."Mobile equipment" means any of the following types c. The wrongful eviction from, wrongful entry into, or of land vehicles, including any attached machinery or invasion of the right of private occupancy of a room, equipment: dwelling or premises that a person occupies, a. Bulldozers, farm machinery, forklifts and other committed by or on behalf of its owner, landlord or vehicles designed for use principally off public lessor; roads; d. Oral, written or electronic publication of material b. Vehicles maintained for use solely on or next to that slanders or libels a person or organization or premises you own or rent; disparages a person's or organization's goods, c. Vehicles that travel on crawler treads; products or services; d. Vehicles, whether self-propelled or not, maintained e. Oral, written or electronic publication of material primarily to provide mobility to permanently that violates a person's right of privacy; mounted: f. Copying, in your "advertisement", a person's or (1) Power cranes, shovels, loaders, diggers or organization's "advertising idea" or style of drills; or "advertisement"; (2) Road construction or resurfacing equipment g• Infringement of copyright, slogan, or title of any such as graders, scrapers or rollers; literary or artistic work, in your"advertisement"; or e. Vehicles not described in a., b., c. or d. above that h. Discrimination or humiliation that results in injury to are not self-propelled and are maintained primarily the feelings or reputation of a natural person. to provide mobility to permanently attached 18."Pollutants" mean any solid, liquid, gaseous or thermal equipment of the following types: irritant or contaminant, including smoke, vapor, soot, (1) Air compressors, pumps and generators, fumes, acids, alkalis, chemicals and waste. Waste including spraying, welding, building cleaning, includes materials to be recycled, reconditioned or geophysical exploration, lighting and well reclaimed. servicing equipment; or 19."Products-completed operations hazard": (2) Cherry pickers and similar devices used to raise a. Includes all "bodily injury" and "property damage" or lower workers; occurring away from premises you own or rent and f. Vehicles not described in a., b., c. or d. above arising out of"your product" or"your work" except: maintained primarily for purposes other than the (1) Products that are still in your physical transportation of persons or cargo. possession; or However, self-propelled vehicles with the following (2) Work that has not yet been completed or types of permanently attached equipment are not abandoned. However, "your work" will be "mobile equipment" but will be considered "autos": deemed completed at the earliest of the (1) Equipment, of at least 1,000 pounds gross following times: vehicle weight, designed primarily for: (a) When all of the work called for in your (a) Snow removal; contract has been completed. (b) Road maintenance, but not construction or (b) When all of the work to be done at the job resurfacing; or site has been completed if your contract (c) Street cleaning; calls for work at more than one job site. (2) Cherry pickers and similar devices mounted on (c) When that part of the work done at a job site has been put to its intended use by any automobile truck chassis and used to raise or person or organization other than another lower workers; ; and contractor or subcontractor working on the (3) Air compressors, pumps and generators, same project. including spraying, welding, building cleaning, Work that may need service, maintenance, geophysical exploration, lighting and well correction, repair or replacement, but which is servicing equipment. otherwise complete, will be treated as completed. HG 00 01 06 05 Page 17 of 18 b. Does not include "bodily injury" or "property 22."Temporary worker" means a person who is damage" arising out of: furnished to you to substitute for a permanent (1) The transportation of property, unless the "employee" on leave or to meet seasonal or short- injury or damage arises out of a condition in or term workload conditions. on a vehicle not owned or operated by you, 23."Volunteer worker" means a person who and that condition was created by the "loading a. Is not your"employee"; or unloading" of that vehicle by any insured; b. Donates his or her work; (2) The existence of tools, uninstalled equipment or abandoned or unused materials; or c. Acts at the direction of and within the scope of duties determined by you; and (3) Products or operations for which the classification, listed in the Declarations or in a d. Is not paid a fee, salary or other compensation by policy schedule, states that products- you or anyone else for their work performed for completed operations are subject to the you. General Aggregate Limit. 24."Your product": 20."Property damage" means: a. Means: a. Physical injury to tangible property, including all (1) Any goods or products, other than real resulting loss of use of that property. All such loss property, manufactured, sold, handled, of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the distributed or disposed of by: physical injury that caused it; or (a) You; b. Loss of use of tangible property that is not (b) Others trading under your name; or physically injured. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the "occurrence" (c) A person or organization whose business or assets you have acquired; and that caused it. As used in this definition, computerized or (2) Containers (other than vehicles), materials, electronically stored data, programs or software are parts or equipment furnished in connection not tangible property. Electronic data means with such goods or products. information, facts or programs: b. Includes a. Stored as or on; (1) Warranties or representations made at any b. Created or used on; or time with respect to the fitness, quality, durability, performance or use of "your c. Transmitted to or from; product"; and computer software, including systems and (2) The providing of or failure to provide warnings applications software, hard or floppy disks, CD- or instructions. ROMS, tapes, drives, cells, data processing devices c. Does not include vending machines or other or any other media which are used with electronically property rented to or located for the use of others controlled equipment. but not sold. 21."Suit" means a civil proceeding in which damages because of "bodily injury", "property damage" or 25."Your work": "personal and advertising injury" to which this a. Means: insurance applies are alleged. "Suit" includes: (1) Work or operations performed by you or on a. An arbitration proceeding in which such damages your behalf; and are claimed and to which the insured must submit (2) Materials, parts or equipment furnished in or does submit with our consent; or connection with such work or operations. b. Any other alternative dispute resolution b. Includes proceeding in which such damages are claimed (1) Warranties or representations made at any and to which the insured submits with our consent. time with respect to the fitness, quality, durability, performance or use of "your work", and (2) The providing of or failure to provide warnings or instructions. Page 18 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 NAMED INSURED:Associated Construction Partners,Ltd. POLICY NUMBER:46UEABJ60GL COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE HA99160312 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE BROAD FORM ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM To the extent that the provisions of this endorsement provide broader benefits to the "insured" than other provisions of the Coverage Form, the provisions of this endorsement apply. 1. BROAD FORM INSURED d. Any "employee" of yours while using a A. Subsidiaries and Newly Acquired or covered "auto" you don't own, hire or Formed Organizations borrow in your business or your The Named Insured shown in the personal affairs. Declarations is amended to include: C. Lessors as Insureds (1) Any legal business entity other than a Paragraph A.I. - WHO IS AN INSURED - of partnership or joint venture, formed as a Section II - Liability Coverage is amended to subsidiary in which you have an add: ownership interest of more than 50% on e. The lessor of a covered "auto" while the the effective date of the Coverage Form. "auto" is leased to you under a written However, the Named Insured does not agreement if: include any subsidiary that is an "insured" under any other automobile (1) The agreement requires you to policy or would be an "insured" under provide direct primary insurance for the lessor and such a policy but for its termination or the exhaustion of its Limit of Insurance. (2) The "auto" is leased without a driver. (2) Any organization that is acquired or Such a leased "auto" will be considered a formed by you and over which you covered "auto" you own and not a covered maintain majority ownership. However, "auto"you hire. the Named Insured does not include any D. Additional Insured if Required by Contract newly formed or acquired organization: (1) Paragraph A.I. - WHO IS AN INSURED (a) That is a partnership or joint - of Section II - Liability Coverage is venture, amended to add: (b) That is an "insured" under any other f. When you have agreed, in a written policy, contract or written agreement, that a (c) That has exhausted its Limit of person or organization be added as Insurance under any other policy, or an additional insured on your (d) 180 days or more after its business auto policy, such person or acquisition or formation by you, organization is an "insured", but only unless you have given us notice of to the extent such person or the acquisition or formation. organization is liable for "bodily Coverage does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused injury" or "property damage" that results by the conduct of an "insured" under from an "accident" that occurred before paragraphs a. or b. of Who Is An you formed or acquired the organization. Insured with regard to the B. Employees as Insureds ownership, maintenance or use of a covered "auto." Paragraph A.I. - WHO IS AN INSURED - of SECTION II - LIABILITY COVERAGE is amended to add: ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 1 of 5 The insurance afforded to any such E. Primary and Non-Contributory if additional insured applies only if the Required by Contract "bodily injury" or "property damage" Only with respect to insurance provided to occurs: an additional insured in 1.D. - Additional (1) During the policy period, and Insured If Required by Contract, the (2) Subsequent to the execution of such following provisions apply: written contract, and (3) Primary Insurance When Required By (3) Prior to the expiration of the period Contract of time that the written contract This insurance is primary if you have requires such insurance be provided agreed in a written contract or written to the additional insured. agreement that this insurance be (2) How Limits Apply primary. If other insurance is also If you have agreed in a written contract primary, we will share with all that other or written agreement that another insurance by the method described in person or organization be added as an Other Insurance 5.d. additional insured on your policy, the (4) Primary And Non-Contributory To Other most we will pay on behalf of such Insurance When Required By Contract additional insured is the lesser of: If you have agreed in a written contract (a) The limits of insurance specified in or written agreement that this insurance the written contract or written is primary and non-contributory with the agreement; or additional insured's own insurance, this insurance is primary and we will not (b) The Limits of Insurance shown in seek contribution from that other the Declarations. insurance. Such amount shall be a part of and not Paragraphs (3) and (4) do not apply to other in addition to Limits of Insurance shown insurance to which the additional insured in the Declarations and described in this has been added as an additional insured. Section. When this insurance is excess, we will have no (3) Additional Insureds Other Insurance duty to defend the insured against any "suit" if If we cover a claim or "suit" under this any other insurer has a duty to defend the Coverage Part that may also be covered insured against that "suit". If no other insurer by other insurance available to an defends, we will undertake to do so, but we will additional insured, such additional be entitled to the insured's rights against all insured must submit such claim or "suit" those other insurers. to the other insurer for defense and When this insurance is excess over other indemnity. insurance, we will pay only our share of the However, this provision does not apply amount of the loss, if any, that exceeds the sum to the extent that you have agreed in a of: written contract or written agreement (1) The total amount that all such other that this insurance is primary and non- insurance would pay for the loss in the contributory with the additional insured's absence of this insurance; and own insurance. (2) The total of all deductible and self-insured (4) Duties in The Event Of Accident, Claim, amounts under all that other insurance. Suit or Loss We will share the remaining loss, if any, by the If you have agreed in a written contract method described in Other Insurance 5.d. or written agreement that another person or organization be added as an 2. AUTOS RENTED BY EMPLOYEES additional insured on your policy, the Any "auto" hired or rented by your "employee" additional insured shall be required to on your behalf and at your direction will be comply with the provisions in LOSS considered an "auto"you hire. CONDITIONS 2. - DUTIES IN THE The OTHER INSURANCE Condition is amended EVENT OF ACCIDENT, CLAIM , SUIT by adding the following: OR LOSS — OF SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, in the same manner as the Named Insured. ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 2 of 5 If an "employee's" personal insurance also 5. PHYSICAL DAMAGE - ADDITIONAL applies on an excess basis to a covered "auto" TEMPORARY TRANSPORTATION EXPENSE hired or rented by your "employee" on your COVERAGE behalf and at your direction, this insurance will Paragraph AA.a. of SECTION III - PHYSICAL be primary to the "employee's" personal DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended to provide a insurance. limit of $50 per day and a maximum limit of 3. AMENDED FELLOW EMPLOYEE EXCLUSION $1,000. EXCLUSION 5. - FELLOW EMPLOYEE - of 6. LOAN/LEASE GAP COVERAGE SECTION II - LIABILITY COVERAGE does not Under SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE apply if you have workers' compensation COVERAGE, in the event of a total "loss" to a insurance in-force covering all of your covered "auto", we will pay your additional legal "employees". obligation for any difference between the actual Coverage is excess over any other collectible cash value of the "auto" at the time of the "loss" insurance. and the "outstanding balance"of the loan/lease. 4. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE "Outstanding balance" means the amount you If hired "autos" are covered "autos" for Liability owe on the loan/lease at the time of "loss" less Coverage and if Comprehensive, Specified any amounts representing taxes; overdue Causes of Loss, or Collision coverages are payments; penalties, interest or charges provided under this Coverage Form for any resulting from overdue payments; additional "auto" you own, then the Physical Damage mileage charges; excess wear and tear charges; Coverages provided are extended to "autos"you lease termination fees; security deposits not hire or borrow, subject to the following limit. returned by the lessor; costs for extended warranties, credit life Insurance, health, accident The most we will pay for "loss" to any hired or disability insurance purchased with the loan or "auto" is: lease; and carry-over balances from previous (1) $100,000; loans or leases. (2) The actual cash value of the damaged or 7. AIRBAG COVERAGE stolen property at the time of the "loss"; or Under Paragraph B. EXCLUSIONS - of (3) The cost of repairing or replacing the SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE damaged or stolen property, COVERAGE, the following is added: whichever is smallest, minus a deductible. The The exclusion relating to mechanical breakdown deductible will be equal to the largest deductible does not apply to the accidental discharge of an applicable to any owned "auto" for that airbag. coverage. No deductible applies to "loss" caused g, ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT - BROADENED by fire or lightning. Hired Auto Physical Damage COVERAGE coverage is excess over any other collectible insurance. Subject to the above limit, deductible a. The exceptions to Paragraphs BA - and excess provisions, we will provide coverage EXCLUSIONS - of SECTION III - PHYSICAL equal to the broadest coverage applicable to any DAMAGE COVERAGE are replaced by the covered "auto"you own. following: We will also cover loss of use of the hired "auto" Exclusions 4.c. and 4.d. do not apply to if it results from an "accident", you are legally equipment designed to be operated solely liable and the lessor incurs an actual financial by use of the power from the "auto's" loss, subject to a maximum of $1000 per electrical system that, at the time of"loss", "accident". is: This extension of coverage does not apply to (1) Permanently installed in or upon any "auto" you hire or borrow from any of your the covered "auto"; "employees", partners (if you are a partnership), (2) Removable from a housing unit members (if you are a limited liability company), which is permanently installed in or members of their households. or upon the covered "auto"; (3) An integral part of the same unit housing any electronic equipment described in Paragraphs (1)and (2) above; or ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 3 of 5 (4) Necessary for the normal If another Hartford Financial Services Group, operation of the covered "auto"or Inc. company policy or coverage form that is not the monitoring of the covered an automobile policy or coverage form applies to "auto's"operating system. the same "accident", the following applies: b.Section III — Version CA 00 01 03 10 of the (1) If the deductible under this Business Auto Business Auto Coverage Form, Physical Coverage Form is the smaller (or smallest) Damage Coverage, Limit of Insurance, deductible, it will be waived; Paragraph C.2 and Version CA 00 01 10 01 of (2) If the deductible under this Business Auto the Business Auto Coverage Form, Physical Coverage Form is not the smaller (or Damage Coverage, Limit of Insurance, smallest) deductible, it will be reduced by Paragraph C are each amended to add the the amount of the smaller (or smallest) following: deductible. $1,500 is the most we will pay for "loss" in 12. AMENDED DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF any one "accident" to all electronic ACCIDENT, CLAIM, SUIT OR LOSS equipment(other than equipment designed solely for the reproduction of sound, and The requirement in LOSS CONDITIONS 2.a. - accessories used with such equipment) DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF ACCIDENT,CLAIM, that reproduces, receives or transmits SUIT OR LOSS - of SECTION IV - BUSINESS audio, visual or data signals which, at the AUTO CONDITIONS that you must notify us of time of"loss", is: an "accident" applies only when the "accident" is known to: (1) Permanently installed in or upon the covered "auto" in a housing, (1) You, if you are an individual; opening or other location that is not (2) A partner, if you are a partnership; normally used by the "auto" (3) A member, if you are a limited liability manufacturer for the installation of company; or such equipment; (4) An executive officer or insurance manager, if (2) Removable from a permanently you are a corporation. installed housing unit as described 13. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE in Paragraph 2.a. above or is an HAZARDS integral part of that equipment; or (3)An integral part of such equipment. If you unintentionally fail to disclose any hazards existing at the inception date of your policy, we c.For each covered "auto", should loss be limited will not deny coverage under this Coverage to electronic equipment only, our obligation to Form because of such failure. pay for, repair, return or replace damaged or 14. HIRED AUTO -COVERAGE TERRITORY stolen electronic equipment will be reduced by the applicable deductible shown in the Paragraph e. of GENERAL CONDITIONS 7. - Declarations, or $250, whichever deductible is POLICY PERIOD, COVERAGE TERRITORY - less. of SECTION IV - BUSINESS AUTO 9. EXTRA EXPENSE - BROADENED CONDITIONS is replaced by the following: COVERAGE e. For short-term hired "autos", the coverage Under Paragraph A. -COVERAGE -of SECTION territory with respect to Liability Coverage is III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, we will anywhere in the world provided that if the pay for the expense of returning a stolen covered "insured's" responsibility to pay damages for "bodily injury" or "property damage" is "auto"to you. determined in a "suit,"the "suit" is brought in 10. GLASS REPAIR-WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE the United States of America, the territories Under Paragraph D.-DEDUCTIBLE-of SECTION and possessions of the United States of III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, the America, Puerto Rico or Canada or in a following is added: settlement we agree to. No deductible applies to glass damage if the 15. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION glass is repaired rather than replaced. TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY 11. TWO OR MORE DEDUCTIBLES AGAINST OTHERS TO US - of SECTION IV - Under Paragraph D.-DEDUCTIBLE-of SECTION BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS is amended by III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, the adding the following: following is added: ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 4 of 5 We waive any right of recovery we may have c.Regardless of the number of autos deemed a against any person or organization with whom total loss, the most we will pay under this you have a written contract that requires such Hybrid, Electric, or Natural Gas Vehicle waiver because of payments we make for Payment Coverage provision for any one damages under this Coverage Form. "loss" is $10,000. 16. RESULTANT MENTAL ANGUISH COVERAGE For the purposes of the coverage provision, The definition of "bodily injury" in SECTION V- a.A "non-hybrid" auto is defined as an auto that DEFINITIONS is replaced by the following: uses only an internal combustion engine to "Bodily injury" means bodily injury, sickness or move the auto but does not include autos disease sustained by any person, including powered solely by electricity or natural gas. mental anguish or death resulting from any of b.A "hybrid" auto is defined as an auto with an these. internal combustion engine and one or more 17. EXTENDED CANCELLATION CONDITION electric motors; and that uses the internal Paragraph 2. of the COMMON POLICY combustion engine and one or more electric CONDITIONS - CANCELLATION - applies motors to move the auto, or the internal combustion engine to charge one or more except as follows: electric motors, which move the auto. If we cancel for any reason other than 19. VEHICLE WRAP COVERAGE nonpayment of premium, we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured written notice of In the event of a total loss to an "auto" for which cancellation at least 60 days before the effective Comprehensive, Specified Causes of Loss, or date of cancellation. Collision coverages are provided under this 18. HYBRID, ELECTRIC, OR NATURAL GAS Coverage Form, then such Physical Damage VEHICLE PAYMENT COVERAGE Coverages are amended to add the following: In addition to the actual cash value of the "auto", In the event of a total loss to a "non-hybrid" auto we will pay up to $1,000 for vinyl vehicle wraps for which Comprehensive, Specified Causes of which are displayed on the covered "auto" at the Loss, or Collision coverages are provided under time of total loss. Regardless of the number of this Coverage Form, then such Physical autos deemed a total loss, the most we will pay Damage Coverages are amended as follows: under this Vehicle Wrap Coverage provision for a.lf the auto is replaced with a "hybrid" auto or any one "loss" is $5,000. For purposes of this an auto powered solely by electricity or natural coverage provision, signs or other graphics gas, we will pay an additional 10%, to a painted or magnetically affixed to the vehicle are maximum of$2,500, of the "non-hybrid" auto's not considered vehicle wraps. actual cash value or replacement cost, whichever is less, b.The auto must be replaced and a copy of a bill of sale or new lease agreement received by us within 60 calendar days of the date of"loss," ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 5 of 5 NAMED INSURED:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. POLICY NUMBER:46UEABJ5URP,46UEABJ60GL&46HHABJ60JW it THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. NOTICE OF CANCELLATION TO CERTIFICATE HOLDER(S) This policy is subject to the following additional days of the cancellation effective date to the Conditions: certificate holder(s) with mailing addresses on file A. If this policy is cancelled by the Company, other with the agent of record or the Company. than for nonpayment of premium, notice of such If notice is mailed, proof of mailing to the last known cancellation will be provided at least thirty (30) mailing address of the certificate holder(s) on file with days in advance of the cancellation effective date the agent of record or the Company will be sufficient to the certificate holder(s) with mailing addresses proof of notice. on file with the agent of record or the Company. Any notification rights provided by this endorsement B. If this policy is cancelled by the Company for apply only to active certificate holder(s) who were nonpayment of premium, or by the insured, notice issued a certificate of insurance applicable to this of such cancellation will be provided within (10) policy's term. Form IH 03 07 06 11 Page 1 of 1 © 2011, The Hartford TeX,qSMutuar WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND WC 42 03 04 B EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Insured copy TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ( ) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization (X)Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: All Texas operations 3. Premium: The premium charge for this endorsement shall be 2.00 percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s)or organization(s)arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium: Included, see Information Page This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on 10/4/25 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no.0002120491 of Texas Mutual Insurance Company effective on 10/4/25 Issued to: ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS LTD This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 9/22/25 PO Box 12058, Austin, TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com 1 (800)859-5995 1 Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 03 04 B TeX,qSMutuar WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND WC 42 06 01 EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Insured copy TEXAS NOTICE OF MATERIAL CHANGE ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A. of the Information Page. In the event of cancellation or other material change of the policy, we will mail advance notice to the person or organization named in the Schedule. The number of days advance notice is shown in the Schedule. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. Schedule 1. Number of days advance notice: 30 2. Notice will be mailed to: PER LIST ON FILE This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on 10/4/25 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no.0002120491 of Texas Mutual Insurance Company effective on 10/4/25 Issued to: ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS LTD This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 9/22/25 PO Box 12058, Austin, TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com 1 (800)859-5995 1 Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 06 01 CM j 00 61 13 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND NO. 2377855 Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Associated Construction Partners Ltd. Name:Swiss Re Corporate Solutions America Insurance Corporation Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 215 Bandera Rd. 1200 Main St., Suite 800 Ste. 114-461 Kansas City, MO 64105 Boerne,TX 78006 Physical address (principal place of business): Owner 1200 Main St., Suite 800 Kansas City, MO 64105 Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Mailing address (principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Missouri Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020) 816-235-3700 Project No. 19029A Telephone(for notice of claim): 816-235-3702 Local Agent for Surety Name: Acrisure, LLC Award Date of the Contract:January 27,2026 Address:32335 US Highway 281 N, Ste. 1101 Bulverde,TX 78163 Contract Price: $16,811,532.00 Bond Telephone: 210-697-2203 Email Address:kigonzalez@acrisure.com Date of Bond: February 5,2026 The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the of the Contract) following toll free number:1-800-252-3439 Performance Bond 00 61 13-1 Citywide Lift Station Repair(FY 2019-2020), Project 19029A Rev 5/2025 Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves,and their heirs, administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work through the Warranty Period required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. The Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor is incorporated by reference into this Statutory Performance Bond,pursuant to Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code,as amended,and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Surety agrees to be bound by the mediation clause in Article 22 of the Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor,said Contract Documents are incorporated by reference in this Bond. Associated Con Auction Partners Ltd. Swiss Re Corporate Solutions America Insurance Corporation Contractor as Pr' ci Surety Signature: Signature: Name: l Name: Kimberly Roc elle Gonzalez Title: DWI Title: Attorney In-Fact Email Address: 1 �Q Email Address: kigonzalez@acrisure.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Performance Bond 00 61 13-2 Citywide Lift Station Repair(FY 2019-2020), Project 19029A Rev 5/2025 CM 00 61 16 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO. 2377855 Contractor as Principal Surety Swiss Re Corporate Solutions America Name: Associated Construction Partners Ltd. Name: Insurance Corporation Mailing address (principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 215 Bandera Rd. 1200 Main St., Suite 800 Ste. 114-461 Kansas City, MO 64105 Boerne,TX 78006 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner 1200 Main St., Suite 800 Kansas City, MO 64105 Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Mailing address(principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Missouri Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020) 816-235-3700 Proiect No. 19029A Telephone (for notice of claim): 816-235-3702 Local Agent for Surety Name: Acrisure, LLC Award Date of the Contract:January 27,2026 Address:32335 US Highway 281 N, Ste. 1101 Bulverde,TX 78163 Contract Price:$16,811,532.00 Bond Telephone: 210-697-2203 Email Address: kigonzalez@acrisure.com Date of Bond: February 5,2026 The address of the surety company to which any (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date notice of claim should be sent may be obtained of Contract) from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll free number.1-800-252-3439 Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020), Project 19029A 5/2024 Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs,administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contracto as Pri cipal Surety Signature Signature: itili Name: top Name: Kimberly Rochelle onzalez Title: YLA I(,A& 14 Title: Attorney In-Fact Email Address: 'Q, Email Address: kigonzalezaacrisure.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020), Project 19029A 5/2024 SWISS RE CORPORATE SOLUTIONS SWISS RE CORPORATE SOLUTIONS AMERICA INSURANCE CORPORATION("SRCSAIC") SWISS RE CORPORATE SOLUTIONS PREMIER INSURANCE CORPORATION("SRCSPIC") WESTPORT INSURANCE CORPORATION("WIC") C EN ERALPO W EROF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,THAT SRCSAIC,a corporation duly organized and existing under laws of the State of Missouri, and having its principal office in the City of Kansas City,Missouri, and SRCSPIC,a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Missouri and having its principal office in the City of Kansas City,Missouri,and WIC,organized under the laws of the State of Missouri,and having its principal office in the City ofKansas City,Missouri,each does hereby make,constitute and appoint: JOHN R.WARD,THOMAS DOUGLAS MOORE,EMILY ALLISON MIKESKA,ALLYSON W.DEAN,TROY RUSSELL KEY,DEBRA LEE MOON,ANDREA ROSE CRAWFORD,SANDRA LEE RONEY, FAITH ANN HILTY,ANDREW GARETH ADDISON,ELIZABETH ORTIZ,ANA OWENS,ANDREW PATRICK CLARK,KIMBERLY ROCHELLE GONZALEZ,CRYSTAL GAIL LANGHORN, STEVEN WAYNE LEWIS,SHERI RENEE ALLEN,PEGGY GRADEL HOGAN,TERESA AYALA.,KELU A GORHAM,MARK ROBERT ADAMS,CORY KIPER,AND ROSS RUDOLPH LARIS JOINTYLY OF SEVERALLY Its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact,to make,execute,seal and deliver.for and on its behalf and as its act and deed,bonds or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies,as surety,on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law,regulation,contract or otherwise,provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the amount of: TWO HUNDRED MILLION (200,000,000.00) DOLLARS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the fbllowing Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors ofboth SRCSAIC and SRCSPIC at meetings duly called and held on the 18th ofNovember2021 and WIC by written consent of its Executive Committee dated July 18,2011. "RESOLVED,that any two ofthe President,any Managing Director,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President,the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary be,and each or any of them hereby is,authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Corporation bonds,undertakings and all contracts of surety,and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seal of the Corporation; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Corporation may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile,and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Corporation when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond,undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached." ^tpNSAMEgp.4 r^ 1t5PRE ' - . •'ryd•''C.°R •R4r<c`•,. `v�''�,Oa RAF`•• By ?�•i��• S E A L - t~' S E A L � -alury,Senlor s t S:AI�.error ce Presidem �r �.� .m° �� .ax ofSRCSP[C&Senior Via dent of N'IC o'• •0 3 s:a:: •n a S 1973 %.'s'r!!SSO�P�'ya,° ;''b .:tqS 1j0' By e• # �;�"° �•'9 * i o`• Ca rielo.l acyurz,Senlor VicePVe4,1dlt RCSAI demr�s. „HsfSRCSPIC&Sniorident of WIC 1 N W ITN ESS WHEREOF,SRCSAIC,SRCSPIC,and W IC have caused their official seals to be hereunto affixed,and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 29th day of APRIL 20 2025 Swiss Re Corporate Solutions America Insurance Corporation State of Illinois Swiss Re Corporate Solutions Premier Insurance Corporation County of Cook Westport Insurance Corporation 2025 On this 29th day of APRIL 20__before me, a Notary Public personally appeared David Satm,Senior Vice Presidentof SRCSAIC and Senior Vice President of SRCSPIC and Senior Vice President of WIC and Gabriel Jacguez,Senior Vice President of SRCSAIC and Senior Vice President of SPCSPIC and Senior Vice President of WIC,personally known tome,who being by me duly sworn,acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and acknowledged said instrumeyt to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies. Karen zvv.da,Notary 1,Jeffrey Goldberg.the duly elected Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary ofSRCS,IC and SRCSPIC and WIC,do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy ofa Power of Attorney given by said SRCSAIC and SRCSPIC and WIC,Which is still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies this 5th day of February .20 26 . OFFICIAL SEAL KAREN M SZWEDA Notary Public,State at Illetois Jeffrey Goldberg,SeniorT'�ident& CamasiDnNo 978628 Assistant Secretary ofSRCSAIC and illy Cannri"n Espires Septeftw 26.202.' SRCSPIC and WIC IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE In order to obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener information o para someter un queja: You may contact the Surety Claims Department Puede comunicarse con Surety Claims Department at 1-816-235-3702 al 1-816-235-3702. You may call Swiss Re Corporate Solutions America Insurance Corporation or Swiss Re Usted puede llamar Swiss Re Corporate Solutions Corporate Solutions Premier Insurance America Insurance Corporation o Swiss Re Corporation for information or to make a complaint Corporate Solutions Premier Insurance at: Corporation para information o para someter una queja al: 1-816-235-3702 1-816-235-3702 You may also write to Swiss Re Corporate Solutions America Insurance Corporation or Swiss Re Usted tambien puede escribir a Swiss Re Corporate Corporate Solutions Premier Insurance Solutions America Insurance Corporation o Swiss Corporation at the following address: Re Corporate Solutions Premier Insurance Corporation al: 1200 Main Street,Suite 800 1200 Main Street,Suite 800 Kansas City,MO 64105 Kansas City,MO 64105 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance Puede escribir al Departmento de Seguros de Texas to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights para obtener information acerca de companias, or complaints at: coberturas, derechos o quejas al: 1-800-252-3439 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: Puede escribir al Departmento de Seguros de Texas: P.O. Box 149104 P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Fax: (512)475-1771 Fax: (512)475-1771 Web: hit p:/hvww.tdi.state.tx.us Web: http://www.tdi.state.tx.us E-mail:ConsumerProteetion&..tdi.state.tx.us E-mail:Cons umerProtection(a.tdi.state.tx.us PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS O RECLAMOS: Si Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or tiene una disputa concerniente a su prima o a un about a claim you should first contact the Swiss Re reclamo,debe comunicarse con el Swiss Re Corporate Corporate Solutions America Insurance Solutions America Insurance Corporation o Swiss Corporation or Swiss Re Corporate Solutions Re Corporate Solutions Premier Insurance Premier Insurance Corporation. If the dispute is not Corporation primero. Si no se resuelve la disputa, resolved,you may contact the Texas Department of puede entonces comunicarse con el Departmento de Insurance. Seguros de Texas. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This UNA ESTE AVISO A SU POLIZA: notice is for information only and does not become a Este aviso es solo para proposito de infromacion y no se part or condition of the attached document. converte en parte o condition del documento adjunto. 'SUS o � ''�COflYOFP'fE0 18`52 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on January 27,2026, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents.The Work is generally described as: Project Name: Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project Number: 19029A ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Plummer Associates, Inc. 500 N.Shoreline Blvd,Suite 700 Corpus Christi,TX 78401 Contact: Erika "Rikki"Anderson (rnderson@plummer.com) 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Jiangang (Daniel) Deng, P.E. City of Corpus Christi—Engineering Services 4917 Holly Road, Bldg. No. 5 Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 Jiangang@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 550 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 580 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. Agreement 00 52 23- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. C. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $950.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $950.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 16,811,532.00 Agreement 00 52 23-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the Owner's Authorized Representative (OAR) as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-3 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress,and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-4 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications,forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. b. Wastewater Consent Decree 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-5 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Jeff Q1;VEamon (FebD 6 08:24:08 CST) 02/1 8/2026 Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E Date Director of Engineering Services M2026-005 AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL 1/27/2026 02/17/2026 RH/SB Francis Youn — eb 17, 6 16.52.09 GSTI Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. (Seal Below) By: l�� sll'yl �DYI 02/17/2026 J'X�nnpscii Teb�l7. Bz9-IrrOfl-15 BST' Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: President person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President Vice President Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 215 Bandera Rd.Suite 114-461 Financial Officer Address Boerne,Texas 78006 City State Zip 210-698-8714 Phone Fax jill@acpartners.org email Agreement 00 52 23-6 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 WASTEWATER CONSENT DECREE Special Conditions Special Project procedures are required from the CONTRACTOR as specified herein.The CONTRACTOR shall implement and maintain these procedures at the appropriate time, prior to and during performance of the work. The following special conditions and requirements shall apply to the Project: I. Consent Decree Notice Provision — The City of Corpus Christi ("City"), the United States of America and the State of Texas have entered into a Consent Decree in Civil Action No. 2:20-cv-00235, United States of America and State of Texas v. City of Corpus Christi in the United States District Court for the Southern District of Texas,Corpus Christi Division (the"Consent Decree").A copy of the Consent Decree is available at https://www-cdn.cctexas.com/sites/defau It/files/CC-Consent-Decree.pdf By signature of the Contract, CONTRACTOR acknowledges receipt of the Consent Decree. II. Performance of work. CONTRACTOR agrees that any work under this Contract is conditioned upon CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work in conformity with the terms of the Consent Decree. All Work shall be performed in accordance with the Design Criteria for Wastewater Systems under Title 30 Chapter 217 of the Texas Administrative Code, 30 Tex.Admin. Code Ch. 217, and using sound engineering practices to ensure that construction, management,operation and maintenance of the Sewer Collection System complies with the Clean Water Act. Work performed pursuant to this contract is work that the City is required to perform pursuant to the terms of the Consent Decree. In the event of any conflict between the terms and provisions of this Consent Decree and any other terms and provisions of this Contract or the Contract Documents,the terms and provisions of this Consent Decree shall prevail. III. Retention of documents — CONTRACTOR shall retain and preserve all non- identical copies of all documents, reports, research, analytical or other data, records or other information of any kind or character (including documents, records, or other information in electronic form) in its or its sub- contractors' or agents' possession or control, or that come into its or its sub-contractors' or agents' possession or control, and that relate in any manner to this contract, or the performance of any work described in this contract (the "Information"). This retention requirement shall apply regardless of any contrary city, corporate or institutional policy or procedure. CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR's Agreement 00 52 23-7 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 sub-contractors and agents shall retain and shall not destroy any of the Information until five years after the termination of the Consent Decree and with prior written authorization from the City Attorney. CONTRACTOR shall provide the City with copies of any documents, reports, analytical data, or other information required to be maintained at any time upon request from the City. IV. Liability for stipulated penalties — Article IX o f the Consent Decree provides that the United States of America, the United States Environmental Protection Agency and the State of Texas may assess stipulated penalties including interest against the City upon the occurrence of certain events. To the extent that CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's agents or sub-contractors cause or contribute to, in whole or in part,the assessment of any stipulated penalty against the City, CONTRACTOR agrees that it shall pay to City the full amount of any stipulated penalty assessed against and paid by City that is caused or contributed to in whole or in part by any action,failure to act, or failure to act within the time required by any provision of this contract. CONTRACTOR shall also pay to City all costs, attorney fees, expert witness fees and all other fees and expenses incurred by City in connection with the assessment or payment of any such stipulated penalties, or in contesting the assessment or payment of any such stipulated penalties. In addition to any and all other remedies to which City may be entitled at law or in equity, CONTRACTOR expressly authorizes City to withhold all amounts assessed and paid as stipulated penalties, and all associated costs, fees, or expenses from any amount unpaid to CONTRACTOR under the terms of this contract, or from any retainage provided in the contract. END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-8 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 CIVCAST RFB 6687 Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020) Report Created On: 10/29/2025 7:34:43 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total Part A-General $2,211,100.00 Part B- Laguna Shores $1,409,000.00 Part C-People's St.T-Head $590,000.00 Part D-Lawrence St.T-Head $595,000.00 Part E-Cooper's Alley L-Head $2,025,325.00 Part F-Clarkwood South $956,668.00 Part G-Highway Nine $631,180.00 Part H-Cole Park $574,680.00 Part I -Country Club $2,951,284.00 Part]-Military/Jester $2,964,520.00 Part K-Waldron $1,257,775.00 Part L-Sugar Tree $645,000.00 Total $16,811,532.00 Part A-General No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price A-1 MOBILIZATION (MAX 5%ITEMS B-L) LS 1 $500,000.00 $500,000.00 A-2 ALLOWANCE FOR BONDS AND LS 1 $201,600.00 $201,600.00 INSURANCE(MAX 2% ITEMS B-L) A-3 TRENCH SAFETY PROTECTION LF 1800 $10.00 $18,000.00 A-4 STORM WATER POLLUTION LS 1 $15,000.00 $15,000.00 PREVENTION PLAN(SWPPP) A-5 ALLOWANCE FOR UNANTICIPATED AL 1 $1,070,000.00 $1,070,000.00 WORK A-6 ALLOWANCE FOR ELECTRICAL WORK- AL 1 $60,000.00 $60,000.00 COOPER'S ALLEY A-7 TRAFFIC CONTROL LS 1 $5,500.00 $5,500.00 A-8 ALLOWANCE FOR ELECTRICAL AL 1 $321,000.00 $321,000.00 A-9 ALLOWANCE FOR MILITARY/JESTER AL 1 $20,000.00 $20,000.00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION CIVCAST RFB 6687 Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020) Report Created On: 10/29/2025 7:34:43 PM FEASEMENT Subtotal: $2,211,100.00 Part B-Laguna Shores No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price B-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 $1,100,000.00 $1,100,000.00 B-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 $95,000.00 $95,000.00 B-3 ULTRASONIC DOPPLER FLOWMETER EA 1 $16,000.00 $16,000.00 AND RECORDER B-4 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND LS 1 $198,000.00 $198,000.00 CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS Subtotal: $1,409,000.00 Part C-People's St.T-Head No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price C-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 $435,000.00 $435,000.00 C-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 $20,000.00 $20,000.00 C-3 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND LS 1 $135,000.00 $135,000.00 CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS Subtotal:$590,000.00 Part D-Lawrence St.T-Head No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price D-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 $445,000.00 $445,000.00 D-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 $20,000.00 $20,000.00 D-3 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND LS 1 $130,000.00 $130,000.00 CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS Subtotal:$595,000.00 Part E-Cooper's Alley L-Head No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price E-1 LIFT STATION REPLACEMENT LS 1 $1,300,000.00 $1,300,000.00 E-2 TEMPORARY PUMPING AND HAULING WK 8 $1,875.00 $15,000.00 CIVCAST RFB 6687 Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020) Report Created On: 10/29/2025 7:34:43 PM E-3 YACHT CLUB TEMPORARY BYPASS LS 1 $35,000.00 $35,000.00 PUMPING E-4 FORCE MAIN INSTALLATION LF 890 $345.00 $307,050.00 E-5 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND LS 1 $210,000.00 $210,000.00 CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS E-6 TEMPORARY RESTROOM FACILITIES WK 8 $625.00 $5,000.00 E-7 MILL AND OVERLAY SY 4075 $37.00 $150,775.00 E-8 PAVEMENT MARKINGS LS 1 $2,500.00 $2,500.00 Subtotal: $2,025,325.00 Part F-Clarkwood South No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price F-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 $705,000.00 $705,000.00 F-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 $30,000.00 $30,000.00 F-3 PERIMITER FENCING-CHAIN LINK LF 136 $232.00 $31,552.00 SECURITY FENCE F-4 CONCRETE ACCESS DRIVEWAY SF 1092 $23.00 $25,116.00 F-5 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND LS 1 $165,000.00 $165,000.00 CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS Subtotal:$956,668.00 Part G-Highway Nine No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price G-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 $335,000.00 $335,000.00 G-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 $40,000.00 $40,000.00 G-3 PERIMITER FENCING-CHAIN LINK LF 170 $254.00 $43,180.00 SECURITY FENCE G-4 CONCRETE ACCESS DRIVEWAY&TXDOT LS 1 $53,000.00 $53,000.00 PERMIT G-5 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND LS 1 $160,000.00 $160,000.00 CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS Subtotal:$631,180.00 Part H-Cole Park CIVCAST RFB 6687 Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020) Report Created On: 10/29/2025 7:34:43 PM No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price H-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 $405,000.00 $405,000.00 H-2 PERIMITER FENCING-8' PRECAST LF 70 $424.00 $29,680.00 CONCRETE H-3 TEMPORARY RESTROOM FACILITIES WK 4 $750.00 $3,000.00 H-4 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND LS 1 $137,000.00 $137,000.00 CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS Subtotal:$574,680.00 Part I-Country Club No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 1-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 $1,584,000.00 $1,584,000.00 1-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 $109,500.00 $109,500.00 1-3 ULTRASONIC DOPPLER FLOWMETER EA 1 $17,000.00 $17,000.00 AND RECORDER 1-4 PERIMITER FENCING-8' PRECAST LF 276 $147.00 $40,572.00 CONCRETE- REPAIRS 1-5 PERIMITER FENCING-8' PRECAST LF 276 $37.00 $10,212.00 CONCRETE-CLEANING AND PAINTING 1-6 ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM LS 1 $715,000.00 $715,000.00 1-7 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND LS 1 $475,000.00 $475,000.00 CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS Subtotal: $2,951,284.00 Part J-Military/Jester No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price J-1 LIFT STATION REPLACEMENT LS 1 $2,580,000.00 $2,580,000.00 J-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 $35,000.00 $35,000.00 J-3 ULTRASONIC DOPPLER FLOWMETER EA 1 $22,000.00 $22,000.00 AND RECORDER AND MANHOLE J-4 CONCRETE ACCESS DRIVEWAY SF 730 $24.00 $17,520.00 J-5 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND LS 1 $310,000.00 $310,000.00 CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS Subtotal: $2,964,520.00 CIVCAST RFB 6687 Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020) Report Created On: 10/29/2025 7:34:43 PM Part K-Waldron No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price K-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 $448,000.00 $448,000.00 K-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 $83,000.00 $83,000.00 K-3 ULTRASONIC DOPPLER FLOWMETER EA 1 $22,000.00 $22,000.00 AND RECORDER K-4 PERIMITER FENCING-CHAIN LINK LF 215 $185.00 $39,775.00 SECURITY FENCE K-5 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND LS 1 $665,000.00 $665,000.00 CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS Subtotal: $1,257,775.00 Part L-Sugar Tree No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price L-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 $448,000.00 $448,000.00 L-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 $40,000.00 $40,000.00 L-3 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND LS 1 $157,000.00 $157,000.00 CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS Subtotal:$645,000.00 CIVCAST RFB 6687 Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020) Report Created On: 10/29/2025 7:34:43 PM ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA NAME ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DATE 19029A RFB 6687 Addendum No. 1 09/25/2025 14:38:13 PM 19029A RFB 6687 Addendum No.2 09/25/2025 14:38:13 PM 19029A RFB 6687 Addendum No.3 09/25/2025 14:38:14 PM 19029A RFB 6687 Addendum No.4 10/10/2025 12:02:28 PM 19029A RFB 6687 Addendum No. 5 10/27/2025 11:43:49 AM CIVCAST RFB 6687 Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020) Report Created On: 10/29/2025 7:34:43 PM REQUIRED DOWNLOADS TYPE NAME DOWNLOAD DATE Invitation To Bid DO NOT USE-SEE ADDENDUM 3- 8/4/2025 1:30:20 PM 19029A RFB 6687 Invitation to Bid Plans DO NOT USE-SEE ADDENDUM 3- 8/4/2025 1:29:49 PM 19029A RFB 6687 Drawings Addenda 19029A RFB 6687 Addendum No. 1 8/7/2025 6:24:20 AM Addenda 19029A RFB 6687 Addendum No.2 8/13/2025 11:13:27 AM Addenda 19029A RFB 6687 Addendum No.3 9/18/2025 6:02:43 AM Addenda 19029A RFB 6687 Addendum No.4 10/10/2025 5:48:49 AM Other 19029A 2-Day Site Visit Sign-In Sheet 8/1 3/2025 1 0:14:10 AM Other 19029A RFB 6687 NOTICE TO BIDDERS 10/23/2025 5:59:42 AM Addenda 19029A RFB 6687 Addendum No. 5 10/27/2025 6:13:02 AM 00 30 of BID FORM ADDENDUM NO.5 Page 7 of 9 Project Name: Citywide Lift Station Repairs Project Number: 19029A Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: Jiangang(Daniel)Deng,P.E. Designer:I Plummer Associates,Inc. By its signature below,Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement,acknowledges receipt of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees,if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: Associated Construction Partners, Ltd (full legal name of Bidder) Signature: C (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name: Jill Simpson (printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title: President (title of person signing Bid Form) Attest: (signature) State of Residency:Texas Federal Tx ID No.2 6-219 7 7 7 3 Address for Notices: 215 Bandera Rd. ,Ste.114-4 6 1 Boerne, TX 78006 Phone: 210-698-8714 Email: jill@acpartners.org Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 1 of 3 Citwide Lift Station Repairs Rev 8/2019 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF CITYWIDE LIFT STATION REPAIR FY 2019 - 2020 PROJECT 19029A Plummer Associates, Inc 1320 South University Drive, Suite 300/Fort Worth, Texas 817-806-1700 TBPE Firm No. 13 ISSUED FOR BID Record Drawing Number September 2025 STL-238 CONFORMED PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Table of Contents 00 01 00- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 Addendum Revision Notes Addendum 1 N/A Prebid Site Visit Schedule. Addendum 2 N/A Bid Extension. Addendum 3 Revision 1 The entire Plan Set and Specification Book were reissued under this addendum. No revision triangles or clouds will be seen for Revision 1. Addendum 4 Revision 2 Updates can be seen with clouds and revision triangles with the number"2". Addendum 5 Revision 3 Updates can be seen with clouds and revision triangles with the number"3". END OF SECTION Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division/ Title Section DIVISION 00-CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 2 00 01 00 Table of Contents 000101 Seals Sheet 2 000102 List of Drawings 00 52 23 Agreement 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions DIVISION 01-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 Summary of Work 23 10 Alternates and A lowances F1 � s 2 1�2901 Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 33 01 Submittal Register 01 35 00 Special Procedures 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 00 Temporary Controls 01 12 16 Sequence of Construction 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 53 30 Temporary Bypass Pumping Table of Contents 00 01 00-1 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 017000 Execution Requirements 01 75 25 Equipment Testing and Startup 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documentation 01 79 00 Demonstration and Testing PART S STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 02-SITEWORK 21020 Site Clearing and Stripping 21040 Site Grading 21080 Removing Abandoned Structures 22020 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 22021 Control of Groundwater 22022 Trench Safety for Excavations 22040 Street Excavation 22080 Embankment 22100 Select Material 22420 Silt Fence 25202 Scarifying and Reshaping Base Course 25205 Pavement Repair, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalk, and Driveway Replacement 25223 Crushed Limestone Flexible Base 25402 Planning Asphaltic Surfaces(S-27A) 25404 Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions 25412 Prime Coat(5-30) (Asphalt Material Only) 25424 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement (Class A) 25610 Concrete Curb and Gutter Table of Contents 00 01 00-2 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 25612 Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways 25620 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 25802 Temporary Traffic Controls During Construction 25805 Work Zone Pavement Markings 25807 Pavement Markings(Paint and Thermoplastic) 25816 Raised Pavement Markers 25818 Pavement Markers (Reflectorized) 25828 Bituminous Adhesive for Pavement Markers 26202 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Systems(5-89) 26214 Grouting Abandoned Utility Lines 26404 Water Service Lines (5-87) 26409 Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves(5-84) 27202 Manholes 27203 Vacuum Testing of Wastewater Manholes and Structures 27205 Fiberglass Manholes 27602 Gravity Wastewater Lines 27604 Disposal of Waste from Wastewater Cleaning Operations 27606 Sanitary Service Lines 27611 Cleaning and Televised Inspection of Conduits 28020 Seeding 28040 Sodding Table of Contents 00 01 00-3 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 DIVISION 03-CONCRETE 30020 Portland Cement Concrete 32020 Reinforcing Steel 36020 Stucco and Plaster(5-123) 37040 Epoxy Compounds (S-44) 38000 Concrete Structures DIVISION 04-MASONRY 41020 Structural Clay Tile Floor and Sidewalks (5-22) 41080 Brick Pavers 42020 Concrete Masonry Unit(5-121) DIVISION 05-METALS 55420 Frames,Grates, Rings and Covers 55440 Aluminum Grating (5-110) DIVISION 06-WOOD AND PLASTIC 61810 Shelter Construction (5-102) DIVISION 11-EQUIPMENT 113120 Wet Well Ventilation Systems (5-113) DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL 2 150620 Plumbing (5-90) 151030 Eccentric Plug Valves and Electric Motor Actuators (5-105) 151040 Surge Relief Valves(5-106) Table of Contents 00 01 00-4 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 PART T TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 00 Demolition 02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition & Decommissioning 02 82 33 Removal and Disposal of Asbestos Containing Materials 2 02 90 00 Manhole and Wet ell Restoration with Protecti e oa in 03 60 00 Grouting 05 05 33 Anchor Systems 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05 52 15 Aluminum Handrails and Railings 09 91 00 Painting and Protective Coatings 10 14 19 Safety Signs 10 90 00 Identification,Stenciling, and Tagging 26 01 26 Electrical Testing 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19.01 Wire Connections and Devices 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 73 Electrical Power System Studies 26 22 00 Low Voltage Transformers 26 24 16 Panelboards Table of Contents 00 01 00-5 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 29 23 Variable-Frequency Drives 26 36 00 Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 13 Manual Transfer Switch 26 64 19 Motor Control Centers 31 23 16 Excavation Support and Protection 32 31 13 Chain-link Fences and Gates 323140 Precast Concrete Fence 33 14 19 Drains, Cleanouts, Hydrants, and Hose Stations 33 32 13 Pre-Engineered Lift Station 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 31.10 Piping System, PVC and CPVC Pipe 40 05 36.13 Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork 2 0 05 52 Miscel aneous Valves and Appurtenan es 40 05 61 Gate Valves 40 05 64.43 Fiberglass Dampers 40 05 65 Valves for Flow Control and Check Service 40 05 78.23 Air Vacuum Valves for Wastewater Service 40 39 80 Pump Controls PLC Based 40 39 80-01 Pump Controls 40 61 13 Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 15 Process Control System Submittals 40 61 21 Process Control System Testing 40 61 21.71 Factory Witness Test 40 61 21.72 Field Testing Table of Contents 00 01 00-6 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 40 61 21.73 Final Acceptance Test 40 61 23 Signal Coordination Requirements 40 61 24 Quality Assurance 40 61 26 Process Control System Training 406193 Process Control System Input 40 61 96 Process Control Descriptions 40 62 63 Operator Interface Terminals (OIT) 40 63 43 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) 40 67 00 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 67 63 Uninterruptible Power Systems 40 69 80 Level Transmitter 40 69 90 Flow Meter 40 70 00 Instrumentation for Process Systems 40 72 76.26 Level Switches (Floats) 40 73 29.13 Submersible Level (Pressure) Sensors 40 73 99 Pressure Gauges and Thermometers 40 78 00 Panel Mounted Instruments 40 78 56 Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers, and Surge Suppressors 40 78 59 Power Supplies 40 94 43 Programmable Logic Controllers 41 22 13.19 Jib Crane 41 22 18 Bridge Cranes,Trolleys, and Hoists 43 22 10-PS Common Requirements for Pumps 43 25 00-PS Pumps(Submersible- Immersible) 44 31 19 Packaged Odor Control Systems Table of Contents 00 01 00-7 Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 APPENDIX Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation and ecommendations or the Proposed Boat Haul Out Facility—September 2023, Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, LLC. 2 Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation and Recommendations For The Proposed Cooper's Boat Facility Structure—October 2023, Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, LL . END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 01 00-S Citywide Lift Station Repair, Project#19029A Rev 1/2022 SECTION 00 0101 SEALS PAGE AMY MIDDLETON, P.E., PMP THE SEAL THAT ORIGINALLY APPEARED ON THIS DOCUMENT WAS AUTHORIZED BY CIVIL, MECHANICAL AMY LYNN MIDDLETON For all technical Plummer Associates, Inc. TEXAS P.E.NO. 107560 TBPE Firm 13 ON 09/05/2025 specifications not ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT listed by others in 12500 San Pedro Ave., Suite 401 WITHOUT PROPER NOTIFICATION OF San Antonio,Texas 78216 THE RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER IS A these seal pages. OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXAS ENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT. Office: (210) 510.0888 Email: amiddleton@plummer.com Division 40 LYNSY D. NAGLE, P.E. THE SEAL THAT ORIGINALLY APPEARED 40 05 31.10 ON THIS DOCUMENT WAS AUTHORIZED 40 05 36.13 ODOR CONTROL MECHANICAL LYNSY NAGLE 40 05 64.43 Plummer Associates, Inc. TEXAS P.E.NO. 113139 443119 TBPE Firm 13 ON 09/05/2025 ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT 14755 Preston Rd.,Suite 420 WITHOUT PROPER NOTIFICATION OF Dallas,Texas 75254 THE RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER IS A OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXAS ENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT. Office: (817) 806-1700 Email: Ivarner@plummer.com Division 40 JUSTIN C. FAURE, P.E. THE SEAL THAT ORIGINALLY APPEARED 43 25 00-PS ON THIS DOCUMENT WAS AUTHORIZED MECHANICAL BY Plummer Associates, Inc. JUSTIN FAURE TEXAS P.E.NO. 147805 TBPE Firm 13 ON 09/05/2025 8911 N Capital of Texas Hwy, Suite ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUT PROPER NOTIFICATION OF 1250 THE RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER IS A OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXAS Austin,Tx 78759 ENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT. Office: (512)452-5905 Email: ifaure@plummer.com KENNETH W. HANKS, P.E. THE SEAL THAT ORIGINALLY APPEARED ON THIS DOCUMENT WAS AUTHORIZED BY STRUCTURAL KENNETH W.HANKS Jose I. Guerra, Inc. TEXAS P.E.NO. 97528 ON 09/05/2025 1701 Directors Blvd, Suite 400 ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT Austin,TX 78744 WITHOUT PROPER NOTIFICATION OF THE RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER IS A OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXAS ENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT. Office: (512)445-2090 Email: khanks@i;uerra.com Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 1 of 2 00 01 01 Project#19029A Division 26 26 01 26 26 05 00 26 05 19 26 05 19.01 26 05 26 26 05 29 26 05 33 26 05 43 26 05 44 26 05 53 26 05 73 26 22 00 26 24 16 26 27 26 26 28 16 26 29 23 THE SEAL THAT ORIGINALLY APPEARED 26 36 00 ON THIS DOCUMENT WAS AUTHORIZED JOE B. MARTINEZ, P.E. BY 26 36 13 JOSE B.MARTINEZ 26 64 19 TEXAS P.E.NO. 89385 ELECTRICAL ON 09/05/2025 Division 40 Bath Group, LLC ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT 40 39 80 WITHOUT PROPER NOTIFICATION OF TBPE Firm 829 THE RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER IS A 40 39 80-01 OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXAS 5656 S. Staples St, Suite 110 ENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT. 4061 13 Corpus Christi,TX 78411 40 61 15 40 61 21 Office: (361) 992-2284 40 61 21.71 40 61 21.72 Email: imartinez@bathgroup.com 40 61 21.73 40 61 23 40 61 24 40 61 26 406193 406196 40 62 63 40 63 43 40 67 00 40 67 63 40 69 80 40 69 90 40 70 00 40 72 76.26 40 73 29.13 40 78 00 40 78 56 40 78 59 40 94 43 END OF SECTION Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 2 of 2 00 01 01 Project#19029A 00 01 02 LIST OF DRAWINGS Sheet No. DRAWING TITLE Plans Corpus Christi Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 CS COVER SHEET G-01 SHEET INDEX G-02 ABBREVIATIONS AND LEGEND G-03 LOCATION MAP 1 G-04 LOCATION MAP 2 G-05 LOCATION MAP 3 G-06 GENERAL NOTES G-07 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES I G-08 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES II G-09 GENERAL NOTES& LEGENDS LS-C-01 SITE LAYOUT LS-C-02 DEMOLITION PLAN 2 LS-C-O O R QENO IT12N PLAN is LS-C-04 SITE IMPROVEMENT LS-C-OS DOOR AND EXTERIOR ELECTRICAL BUILDING IMPROVEMENT PLAN LS-E-01 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN LS-E-02 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN LS-E-03 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PHOTOS LS-E-04 ELECTRICAL SITE IMPROVEMENT PLAN LS-E-05 LIGHTING PLAN LS-E-06 ELECTRICAL SECTION LS-E-07 ELECTRICAL ELEVATIONS 2 L -E-08 EL C RICAL ONE-L E DI R M LS-E-09 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS LS-E-10 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS LS-E-11 PUMP CONTROL PANEL DETAILS LS-E-12 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES LS-E-13 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 2 L -M-01 MECHANICAL PLAN P -C-01 SITE LAYOUT PS-C-02 DEMOLITION PLAN I PS-C-03 SITE IMPROVEMENT I PS-C-04 DOOR DEMOLITION PLAN PS-C-05 DOOR SCHEDULES PS-E-01 DEMOLITION PLAN PS-E-02 DEMOLITION PHOTOS PS-E-03 SITE IMPROVEMENT PLAN List of Drawings 00 01 02-1 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 1/2023 19029A Sheet No. DRAWING TITLE PS-E-04 SECTION & ELEVATIONS PS-E-05 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM PS-E-06 SCHEMATICS PS-E-07 SCADA PANEL DETAILS PS-E-08 PUMP CONTROL PANEL DETAILS PS-E-09 SCHEDULES PS-E-10 DETAILS LW-C-01 SITE LAYOUT LW-C-02 DEMOLITION PLAN LW-C-03 DOOR DEMOLITION PLAN LW-C-04 SITE IMPROVEMENT LW-C-05 DOOR SCHEDULES LW-E-01 DEMOLITION PLAN LW-E-02 DEMOLITION PHOTOS LW-E-03 SITE IMPROVEMENT PLAN LW-E-04 SECTION LW-E-05 ONE-LINE DIAGRAMS LW-E-06 SCHEMATICS LW-E-07 SCADA PANEL DETAILS LW-E-08 PUMP CONTROL PANEL DETAILS LW-E-09 SCHEDULES LW-E-10 DETAILS CA-C-01 EXISTING SITE LAYOUT CA-C-02 DEMOLITION PLAN CA-C-03 PROPOSED SITE LAYOUT CA-C-04 SITE IMPROVEMENT- FLYGT TOP SYSTEM CA-C-05 PROPOSED LIFT STATION DETAILS AND NOTES CA-S-01 PLAN VIEW CA-S-02 SECTION VIEW CA-S-03 DETAILS CA-FM-01 OVERALL SITE PLAN CA-FM-02 FORCE MAIN ALIGNMENT AND UTILITIES PLAN CA-FM-03 PROPOSED FORCE MAIN DETAILS AND NOTES CA-MO-01 PROPOSED MILL AND OVERLAY CA-PM-01 P V M NT M R IN S L 2 CA-D-01 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN A-D- 2 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PEA CA-E-01 SITE ELECTRICAL PLAN CA-E-02 ELECTRICAL ELEVATIONS AND SECTION List of Drawings 00 01 02-2 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 1/2023 19029A Sheet No. DRAWING TITLE CA-E-03 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM CA-E-04 SCHEMATICS SHEET 1 OF 2 CA-E-05 SCHEMATICS SHEET 2 OF 2 CA-E-06 PUMP CONTROL PANEL DETAILS CA-E-07 SCADA PANEL DETAILS CA-E-08 SCHEDULES CA-E-09 DETAILS CS-C-01 SITE LAYOUT CS-C-02 DEMOLITION PLAN CS-C-03 SITE IMPROVEMENT CS-C-04 PAVING AND FENCE PLANS CS-E-01 DEMOLITION PLAN CS-E-02 DEMOLITION PHOTOS CS-E-03 SITE IMPROVEMENTS PLAN 2 QS E- 4 TC A E I CS-E-05 SWITCHRACK ELEVATIONS CS-E-06 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM CS-E-07 SCHEMATICS CS-E-08 SCADA PANEL DETAILS CS-E-09 PUMP CONTROL PANEL DETAILS CS-E-10 SCHEDULES CS-E-11 DETAILS HN-C-01 SITE LAYOUT HN-C-02 DEMOLITION PLAN HN-C-03 SITE IMPROVEMENT HN-C-04 PAVING AND FENCE PLANS HN-E-01 DEMOLITION PLAN HN-E-02 DEMOLITION PHOTOS HN-E-03 SITE IMPROVEMENT PLANS HN-E-04 ENLARGED PLAN HN-E-OS SECTION HN-E-06 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM HN-E-07 SCHEMATICS HN-E-08 SCADA PANEL DETAILS HN-E-09 PUMP CONTROL PANEL DETAILS HN-E-10 SCHEDULES HN-E-11 DETAILS CP-C-01 SITE LAYOUT CP-C-02 DEMOLITION PLAN List of Drawings 00 01 02-3 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 1/2023 19029A Sheet No. DRAWING TITLE CP-C-03 SITE IMPROVEMENT CP-E-01 DEMOLITION PLAN CP-E-02 DEMOLITION PHOTOS CP-E-03 PLANS CP-E-04 SECTION CP-E-05 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM CP-E-06 SCHEMATICS CP-E-07 SCADA PANEL DETAILS CP-E-08 PUMP CONTROL PANEL DETAILS CP-E-09 SCHEDULES CP-E-10 DETAILS CC-C-01 SITE LAYOUT CC-C-02 DEMOLITION PLAN CC-C-03 SITE IMPROVEMENT CC-C-04 CONCRETE FENCE AND EXTERIOR DOOR DETAILS CC-C-05 ODOR CONTROL 1 OF 2 CC-C-06 ODOR CONTROL 2 OF 2 CC-S-01 ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOUNDATION PLAN AND SECTION CC-E-01 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN CC-E-02 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN CC-E-03 LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN CC-E-04 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PHOTOS CC-E-05 ELECTRICAL SITE IMPROVEMENT PLAN CC-E-06 LIGHTING PLANS CC-E-07 ELECTRICAL SECTION CC-E-08 ELECTRICAL ELEVATIONS CC-E-09 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAM CC-E-10 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS SHEET 1 OF 2 CC-E-11 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS SHEET 2 OF 2 CC-E-12 PUMP CONTROL PANEL DETAILS CC-E-13 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES CC-E-14 ELECTRICAL DETAILS CC-M-01 MECHANICAL SCHEDULE, DIAGRAMS & DETAILS MJ-C-01 SITE LAYOUT MJ-C-02 DEMOLITION PLAN MJ-C-03 SITE IMPROVEMENT PLAN MJ-C-04 SITE IMPROVEMENT SECTION MJ-C-05 PAVING PLAN MJ-S-01 PLAN List of Drawings 00 01 02-4 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 1/2023 19029A Sheet No. DRAWING TITLE MJ-S-02 PLAN MJ-S-03 SECTION MJ-S-04 SECTION MJ-E-01 DEMOLITION PLAN MJ-E-02 DEMOLITION PHOTOS MJ-E-03 SITE IMPROVEMENT PLAN MJ-E-04 ENLARGED PLAN MJ-E-05 ELEVATIONS AND SECTION MJ-E-06 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM MJ-E-07 SCHEMATICS MJ-E-08 SCADA PANEL DETAILS MJ-E-09 PUMP CONTROL PANEL DETAILS MJ-E-10 SCHEDULES MJ-E-11 DETAILS WD-C-01 SITE LAYOUT WD-C-02 DEMOLITION PLAN WD-C-03 SITE IMPROVEMENT WD-S-01 PIPE STRUCTURAL SUPPORT AND VAULT BACKFILL WD-E-01 DEMOLITION PLAN WD-E-02 DEMOLITION PHOTOS WD-E-03 SITE IMPROVEMENT PLAN WD-E-04 ENLARGED PLAN W D-E-05 SECTION W D-E-06 ELEVATIONS WD-E-07 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM WD-E-08 SCHEMATICS WD-E-09 SCADA PANEL DETAILS WD-E-10 PUMP CONTROL PANEL DETAILS WD-E-11 SCHEDULES W D-E-12 DETAILS ST-C-01 SITE LAYOUT ST-C-02 DEMOLITION PLAN ST-C-03 SITE IMPROVEMENT ST-E-01 DEMOLITION PLAN ST-E-02 DEMOLITION PHOTOS ST-E-03 SITE IMPROVEMENTS PLAN ST-E-04 SECTION AND ELEVATIONS ST-E-05 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM ST-E-06 SCHEMATICS List of Drawings 00 01 02-5 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 1/2023 19029A Sheet No. DRAWING TITLE ST-E-07 SCADA PANEL DETAILS ST-E-08 PUMP CONTROL PANEL DETAILS ST-E-09 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES ST-E-10 DETAILS CCSD-01 COCC CURB, GUTTER AND SIDEWALK STANDARD DETAILS CCSD-02 DRIVEWAY STANDARD DETAILS I CCSD-03 DRIVEWAY STANDARD DETAILS II CCSD-04 DRIVEWAY STANDARD DETAILS III CCSD-05 CONCRETE PAVEMENT STANDARD DETAILS CCSD-06 WATER STANDARD DETAILS I CCSD-07 WATER STANDARD DETAILS II CCSD-08 WATER STANDARD DETAILS III CCSD-09 WATER STANDARD DETAILS IV CCSD-10 WASTEWATER STANDARD DETAILS I CCSD-11 WASTEWATER STANDARD DETAILS II CCSD-12 WASTEWATER STANDARD DETAILS III CCSD-13 WASTEWATER STANDARD DETAILS IV SW3P-01 SWPPP PLAN NOTES SW3P-02 SWPPP EPIC SW3P-03 SWPPP STANDARD DETAILS SD-01 CIVIL STANDARD DETAILS SD-02 CIVIL STANDARD DETAILS II SD-03 CIVIL STANDARD DETAILS III SD-04 CIVIL STANDARD DETAILS IV SD-05 CIVIL STANDARD DETAILS V SD-06 CIVIL STANDARD DETAILS VI SD-07 STRUCTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS I SD-08 STRUCTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS II TXDOT-01 SAFETY END TREATMENT I SHEET 1 OF 2 TXDOT-02 SAFETY END TREATMENT 11 SHEET 2 OF 2 TXDOT-03 CONCRETE HEADWALLS TXDOT-04 DRIVEWAY DETAILS PRIVATE (RESIDENTIAL-COMMERCIAL) TCP-01 TCP ONE-LANE TWO-WAY TRAFFIC CONTROL TCP-02 TCP LANE CLOSURES ON MULTILANE CONVENTIONAL ROADS TCP-03 B&C GENERAL NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS TCP-04 B&C PROJECT LIMITS TCP-05 B&C WORK ZONE SPEED LIMIT TCP-06 B&C TEMPORARY SIGN NOTES TCP-07 B&C TYPICAL SIGN SUPPORT List of Drawings 00 01 02-6 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 1/2023 19029A Sheet No. DRAWING TITLE TCP-08 B&C PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN TCP-09 B&C ARROW PANEL, REFLECTORS, WARNING LIGHTS&ATTENUATOR TCP-10 B&C CHANNELIZING DEVICES I TCP-11 B&C CHANNELIZING DEVICES II TCP-12 B&C CHANNELIZING DEVICES III TCP-13 B&C PAVEMENT MARKINGS TCP-14 B&C PAVEMENT MARKING PATTERNS TCP-15 LOW PROFILE CONCRETE BARRIER TYPE TCP-16 LOW PROFILE CONCRETE BARRIER TYPE II END OF SECTION List of Drawings 00 01 02-7 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 1/2023 19029A 00 30 01 BID FORM Project Name: Citywide Lift Station Repairs Project Number: 19029A Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: Jiangang(Daniel)Deng,P.E. Designer:I Plummer Associates,Inc. By its signature below,Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement,acknowledges receipt of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees,if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: (full legal name of Bidder) Signature: (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name: (printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title: (title of person signing Bid Form) Attest: (signature) State of Residency: Federal Tx ID No. Address for Notices: Phone: Email: Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 1 of 3 Citwide Lift Station Repairs Rev 8/2019 00 30 01 BID FORM Basis of Bid Item DESCRIPTION UNIT ESTIMATED I UNIT PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT QUANTITY Base Bid Part A-GENERAL A-1 MOBILIZATION(MAX 5%ITEMS B-L) LS 1 `Z A-2 ALLOWANCE FOR BONDS AND INSURANCE(MAX 2%ITEMS B-L) LS 1 A-3 TRENCH SAFETY PROTECTION LF 1800 A-4 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN(SWPPP) LS 1 A-5 ALLOWANCE FOR UNANTICIPATED WORK AL 1 $ 1,070,000.00 $ 1,070,000.00 A-6 ALLOWANCE FOR ELECTRICAL WORK-COOPER'S ALLEY AL 1 $ 60,000.00 $ 60,000.00 A-7 TRAFFIC CONTROL LS 1 A-8 ALLOWANCE FOR ELECTRICAL AL 1 $ 321,000.00 $ 321,000.00 A-9 ALLOWANCE FOR MILITARY/JESTER TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION EASEMENT AL 1 $ 20,DDD.00 $ 20,DDD.00 SUBTOTAL PART A-GENERAL(Items Al thru A9) Part B-LAGUNA SHORES B-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 B-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 B-3 ULTRASONIC DOPPLER FLOWMETER AND RECORDER EA 1 B-4 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART B-Laguna Shores(Items Bl thru 134) Part C-PEOPLE'S ST.T-HEAD C-1 I LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 C-2 ITEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 C-3 JELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART C-PEOPLE'S ST.T-HEAD(Items Cl thru C3) Part D-LAWRENCE ST.T-HEAD D-1 I LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 D-2 ITEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 D-3 JELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART D-LAWRENCE ST.T-HEAD(Items Dl thru 133) Part E-COOPER'S ALLEY L-HEAD E-1 LIFT STATION REPLACEMENT LS 1 E-2 TEMPORARY PUMPING AND HAULING WK 8 E-3 YACHT CLUB TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 3 E-4 FORCE MAIN INSTALLATION LF 8 0 E-5 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 E-6 TEMPORARY RESTROOM FACILITIES WK 8 E-7 MILL AND OVERLAY SY 4075 E-8 IPAVEMENT MARKINGS I LS 1 1 SUBTOTAL PART E-COOPER'S ALLEY L-HEAD(Items El thru ES) Part F-CLARKWOOD SOUTH F-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 F-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 F-3 PERIMITERFENCING-CHAINLINKSECURITYFENCE LF 136 F-4 CONCRETE ACCESS DRIVEWAY SF 1092 F-5 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART F-CLARKWOOD SOUTH(Items Fl thru FS) Part G-HIGHWAY NINE G-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 G-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 G-3 PERIMITERFENCING-CHAINLINKSECURITYFENCE LF 170 G-4 CONCRETE ACCESS DRIVEWAY&TXDOT PERMIT LS 1 G-5 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART G-HIGHWAY NINE(Items GI thru GS) Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 2 of 3 Citwide Lift Station Repairs Rev 8/2019 00 30 01 BID FORM Item DESCRIPTION UNIT ESTIMATED UNIT PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT QUANTITY Part H-COLE PARK H-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 H-2 PERIMITER FENCING-8'PRECASTCONCRETE LF 70 H-3 TEMPORARY RESTROOM FACILITIES WK 4 H-4 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART H-COLE PARK(Items Hl thru 1-14) Part I-COUNTRY CLUB 1-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 1-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 1-3 ULTRASONIC DOPPLER FLOWMETER AND RECORDER EA 1 1-4 PERIMITER FENCING-8'PRECAST CONCRETE- REPAIRS LF 276 1-5 PERIMITER FENCING-8'PRECAST CONCRETE-CLEANING AND PAINTING LF 276 1-6 ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM LS 1 1-7 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART I-COUNTRY CLUB(Items 11 thru 17) Part J-MILITARY/JESTER J-1 LIFT STATION REPLACEMENT LS 1 J-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 J-3 ULTRASONIC DOPPLER FLOWMETER AND RECORDER AND MANHOLE EA 1 J-4 CONCRETE ACCESS DRIVEWAY SF 730 J-5 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART J-MILITARY/JESTER(Items Jl thru J5) Part K-WALDRON K-1 LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 K-2 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 K-3 ULTRASONIC DOPPLER FLOWMETER AND RECORDER EA 1 K-4 PERIMITERFENCING-CHAIN LINK SECURITY FENCE LF 215 K-5 ELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART K-WALDRON(Items Kl thru K5) Part L-SUGAR TREE L-1 I LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 L-2 ITEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING LS 1 L-3 JELECTRICAL,INSTRUMENTATION,AND CONTROLS IMPROVEMENTS LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART L-SUGAR TREE(Items Ll thru 1-3) BID SUMMARY SUBTOTAL PART A-GENERAL(Items Al thru A9) SUBTOTAL PART B-LAGUNA SHORES(Items Bl thru B4) SUBTOTAL PART C-PEOPLE'S ST.T-HEAD(Items Cl thru C3) SUBTOTAL PART D-LAWRENCE ST.T-HEAD(Items Dl thru D3) SUBTOTAL PART E-COOPER'S ALLEY L-HEAD(Items E1 thru E8) SUBTOTAL PART F-CLARKWOOD SOUTH(Items Fl thru FS) SUBTOTAL PART G-HIGHWAY NINE(Items G1 thru GS) SUBTOTAL PART H-COLE PARK(Items H1 thru H4) SUBTOTAL PART I-COUNTRY CLUB(Items 11 thru 17) SUBTOTAL PARTJ-MILITARY/JESTER(Items J1 thru JS) SUBTOTAL PART K-WALDRON(Items K1 thru KS) SUBTOTAL PART L-SUGAR TREE(Items Ll thru 1-3) TOTAL PROJECT BASE BID(PARTS A THRU L) Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 3 of 3 Citwide Lift Station Repairs Rev 8/2019 o � �N�6RAORPI�'O 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on , is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Project Name: Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project Number: 19029A ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Plummer Associates, Inc. 500 N. Shoreline Blvd, Suite 700 Corpus Christi,TX 78401 Contact: Erika "Rikki" Anderson (rnderson@plummer.com) 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Jiangang(Daniel) Deng, P.E. City of Corpus Christi—Engineering Services 4917 Holly Road, Bldg. No. 5 Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 Jiangang@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 550 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 580 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. Agreement 00 52 23- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. C. Milestones,and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $950.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$950.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ Agreement 00 52 23-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the Owner's Authorized Representative (OAR) as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-3 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations,tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-4 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions,drawings, receipts,vouchers,memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. b. Wastewater Consent Decree 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-5 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta Date Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E Date City Secretary Director of Engineering Services AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President Vice President Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Address City State Zip Phone Fax email Agreement 00 52 23-6 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 WASTEWATER CONSENT DECREE Special Conditions Special Project procedures are required from the CONTRACTOR as specified herein. The CONTRACTOR shall implement and maintain these procedures at the appropriate time, prior to and during performance of the work. The following special conditions and requirements shall apply to the Project: I. Consent Decree Notice Provision — The City of Corpus Christi ("City"), the United States of America and the State of Texas have entered into a Consent Decree in Civil Action No. 2:20-cv-00235, United States of America and State of Texas v.City of Corpus Christi in the United States District Court for the Southern District of Texas, Corpus Christi Division (the "Consent Decree"). A copy of the Consent Decree is available at https://www-cdn.cctexas.com/sites/default/files/CC-Consent-Decree.13df By signature of the Contract, CONTRACTOR acknowledges receipt of the Consent Decree. II. Performance of work. CONTRACTOR agrees that any work under this Contract is conditioned upon CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work in conformity with the terms of the Consent Decree. All Work shall be performed in accordance with the Design Criteria for Wastewater Systems under Title 30 Chapter 217 of the Texas Administrative Code,30Tex.Admin.Code Ch.217,and using sound engineering practices to ensure that construction, management, operation and maintenance of the Sewer Collection System complies with the Clean Water Act. Work performed pursuant to this contract is work that the City is required to perform pursuant to the terms of the Consent Decree. In the event of any conflict between the terms and provisions of this Consent Decree and any other terms and provisions of this Contract or the Contract Documents,the terms and provisions of this Consent Decree shall prevail. III. Retention of documents — CONTRACTOR shall retain and preserve all non- identical copies of all documents, reports, research, analytical or other data, records or other information of any kind or character (including documents, records, or other information in electronic form) in its or its sub- contractors' or agents' possession or control, or that come into its or its sub-contractors' or agents' possession or control,and that relate in any manner to this contract,or the performance of any work described in this contract (the "Information"). This retention requirement shall apply regardless of any contrary city, corporate or institutional policy or procedure. CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR's Agreement 00 52 23-7 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 sub-contractors and agents shall retain and shall not destroy any of the Information until five years after the termination of the Consent Decree and with prior written authorization from the City Attorney. CONTRACTOR shall provide the City with copies of any documents, reports, analytical data, or other information required to be maintained at anytime upon request from the City. IV. Liability for stipulated penalties — Article IX of the Consent Decree provides that the United States of America, the United States Environmental Protection Agency and the State of Texas may assess stipulated penalties including interest against the City upon the occurrence of certain events. To the extent that CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's agents or sub-contractors cause or contribute to, in whole or in part,the assessment of any stipulated penalty against the City, CONTRACTOR agrees that it shall pay to City the full amount of any stipulated penalty assessed against and paid by City that is caused or contributed to in whole or in part by any action,failure to act, or failure to act within the time required by any provision of this contract. CONTRACTOR shall also pay to City all costs, attorney fees, expert witness fees and all other fees and expenses incurred by City in connection with the assessment or payment of any such stipulated penalties, or in contesting the assessment or payment of any such stipulated penalties. In addition to any and all other remedies to which City may be entitled at law or in equity, CONTRACTOR expressly authorizes City to withhold all amounts assessed and paid as stipulated penalties, and all associated costs, fees, or expenses from any amount unpaid to CONTRACTOR under the terms of this contract, or from any retainage provided in the contract. END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-8 Citywide Lift Station Repairs FY2019-2020 Project#19029A Rev 12/2021 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology.....................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology................................................................................................................................15 Article 2—Preliminary Matters...................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents..................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse.................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents.................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents...................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work..............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress..................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions...............................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site .............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..................................................................................28 General Conditions 00 72 00- 1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage...............................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice .......................................................36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities.....................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence..............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties...........................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee .........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work.................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination ...............................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 00 72 00-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities...........................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor ..................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications..............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities.........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR'S and Designer's Status During Construction ..................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives...........................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments.........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ....................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents.......................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times.......................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ...................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management..............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification...................................................................55 General Conditions 00 72 00-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 12.04 Substitutions...........................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements.......................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates.........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense.........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work;Allowances; Unit Price Work......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work.....................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances..............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work.......................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work....................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work.......................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work.......................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment.........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values..................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments..................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.......................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs ...........................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment.........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative...........................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................76 General Conditions 00 72 00-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.11 Substantial Completion...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection.......................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment.................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims.....................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination.....................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management...............................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits ....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site ..........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations..............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements ...............................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points.........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction.................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control..............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires.......................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements...................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources...............................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies..........................................................................................88 General Conditions 00 72 00- 5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 20—Project Coordination................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project...............................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings.....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article 21—Quality Management...............................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ..................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT..................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports..................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation.......................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards ................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects..............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work.......................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan ......................................................................100 Article 22—Final Resolution of Disputes..................................................................................................101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations.....................................................................................................101 22.02 Mediation..............................................................................................................................101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy................................................................................102 23.01 Policy.....................................................................................................................................102 23.02 Definitions.............................................................................................................................102 23.03 Goals......................................................................................................................................103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................104 24.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................104 24.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................104 General Conditions 00 72 00-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................105 24.05 Document Numbering ..........................................................................................................105 24.06 Document Requirements......................................................................................................106 Article25—Shop Drawings.......................................................................................................................107 25.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................107 25.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures....................................................................................110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures..........................................................................112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products...............................................................................................113 25.10 Requests for Deviation..........................................................................................................113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities......................................................................................................114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements.................................................................................................116 Article26—Record Data...........................................................................................................................117 26.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................117 26.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................117 26.04 Record Data Requirements...................................................................................................118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures.......................................................................................119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities....................................................................................................120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................121 27.03 Schedule Requirements........................................................................................................121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................123 27.05 Float Time..............................................................................................................................123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation ..............................................................................124 General Conditions 00 72 00-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................124 28.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................124 28.04 Photographs..........................................................................................................................125 28.05 Video Recording....................................................................................................................125 Article 29-Execution and Closeout.........................................................................................................125 29.01 Substantial Completion.........................................................................................................125 29.02 Final Inspections....................................................................................................................126 29.03 Reinspection Fees.................................................................................................................126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ...............................................................................................................127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.........................................................................127 Article30-Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................128 30.01 Computation of Times...........................................................................................................128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records.......................................................................128 30.03 Independent Contractor.......................................................................................................129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ...........................................................................................................129 30.05 Limitation of Damages..........................................................................................................129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................129 30.08 Survival of Obligations ..........................................................................................................130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................................130 30.10 Assignment of Contract.........................................................................................................130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity........................................................................................130 30.12 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue...................................................................................130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury...........................................................................................................130 30.15 Attorney Fees........................................................................................................................130 30.16 Compliance with Laws...........................................................................................................131 30.17 Enforcement..........................................................................................................................131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation.......................................................................................................131 30.19 Contract Sum.........................................................................................................................131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy....................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.21 Notices. .................................................................................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi(City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; C. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00- 10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; C. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act,42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous,toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications,and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and C. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00- 11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work -The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or C. Has been damaged or stolen prior to CAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes,rules, regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies,agencies,authorities, and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 00 72 00- 12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; C. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed -A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner -The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use- Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00- 13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents -A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings,whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion -The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions -The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or C. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 00 72 00- 14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive -A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to "at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense,"or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day" mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 00 72 00- 15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 00 72 00- 16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; C. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00- 17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00- 18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall,therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; C. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 00 72 00- 19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling,or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed, disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph.These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 00 72 00-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLES—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 00 72 00-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site,except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 00 72 00-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site,and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or C. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 00 72 00-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statementto Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 00 72 00-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods,techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 00 72 00-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 00 72 00-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to havefurnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-Vill or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 00 72 00-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers'compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 00 72 00-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 00 72 00-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations,whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 00 72 00-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Includethe OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief, mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 00 72 00-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor,named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance bythe OPT,named insureds,or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds"for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 00 72 00-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 City of Corpus Christi— Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project,for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors,subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 00 72 00-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to: 1. Provide coverage,based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage,the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 00 72 00-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent,suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 00 72 00-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors,Suppliers,or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 00 72 00-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products,or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 00 72 00-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating, maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacentto the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 00 72 00-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections,tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 00 72 00-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 00 72 00-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released, waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or C. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 00 72 00-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy ofthe performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 00 72 00-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. General Conditions 00 72 00-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays,disruptions, and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods,techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 00 72 00-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 00 72 00- 50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions,or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 00 72 00- 51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00- 52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or C. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended,forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 00 72 00- 53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. C. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies,fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 00 72 00- 54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 00 72 00- 55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 00 72 00- 56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Any time extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line orfirst sentence. Notice must also listthe date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity makingthe Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 00 72 00- 57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim,the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents,the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex.Gov't Code§2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 00 72 00- 58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b)— Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or C. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus,time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00- 59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits,which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers' compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave,vacations, and holidays; and C. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays,to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers'field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 00 72 00-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at 50%of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities,fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 00 72 00-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 00 72 00-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 00 72 00-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of CAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds maybe used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means,methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained bythe Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 00 72 00-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION, REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections,tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work, 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Pay claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work;and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work,whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 00 72 00-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR;SET-OFFS;COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 00 72 00-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; C. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 00 72 00-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim,demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up,training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; General Conditions 00 72 00-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, C. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 00 72 00-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical,temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority/ MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 00 72 00-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion, show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 00 72 00-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made forthe invoice amount, up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 00 72 00-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 00 72 00-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment Cto document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format(PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 00 72 00-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 for this part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 00 72 00-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 00 72 00-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, C. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or General Conditions 00 72 00-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor's performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR'S request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 00 72 00-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen, skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches,recordings,and computations made bythe Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 00 72 00-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports,including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees' vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 00 72 00-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum)for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 00 72 00-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 00 72 00-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store lightweight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 00 72 00-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 00 72 00-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 00 72 00-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. C. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. C. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use "Notification by Contractor"form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 00 72 00-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions,traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 00 72 00-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 00 72 00-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 00 72 00-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 00 72 00-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 00 72 00-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 00 72 00-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 00 72 00-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Workto ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00- 100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. C. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties' senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 00 72 00- 101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit, either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy,the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 00 72 00- 102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power,direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy,women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual: Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident)of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities.The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example,a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate work force on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 00 72 00- 103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project,the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 00 72 00- 104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. C. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CP Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 00 72 00- 105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological orderfor each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Article 25 for approval of product Certified Test Report Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 00 72 00- 106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general,to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 00 72 00- 107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials,catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 00 72 00- 108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors,textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 00 72 00- 109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. C. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 00 72 00- 110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, C. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 00 72 00- 111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color,texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 00 72 00- 112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. C. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. C. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 00 72 00- 113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. C. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 00 72 00- 114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 00 72 00- 115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 00 72 00- 116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 00 72 00- 117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impactthe installation of the products have been broughtto the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement, model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00- 118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. C. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00- 119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, C. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate thatthe document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 00 72 00- 120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. C. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Cancel -Not Required." No further action is required,and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 00 72 00- 121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 00 72 00- 122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and C. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.05 Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path,the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 00 72 00- 123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter, utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials,trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication,or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00- 124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest,do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 00 72 00- 125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 00 72 00- 126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required bythe Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; C. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 00 72 00- 127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract,then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to:accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 00 72 00- 128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty,obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B. Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 00 72 00- 129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys' fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. General Conditions 00 72 00- 130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein,and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year, the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments, is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. General Conditions 00 72 00- 131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.22 Public Information A. The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION General Conditions 00 72 00- 132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the Owner's Project Team as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.38 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Plummer Associates, Inc. Bath Group, LLC Jose I. Guerra, Inc. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 4/2022 3. A total of 65 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 43 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS.- HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. Delete Paragraph 5.03 entirely and insert the following: "5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. No reports of explorations or tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site, or drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, are known to Owner." SC-5.04 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.05 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. No reports of explorations or tests for Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to Owner. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Form 2. Premises—Completed Operations 3. Explosions and Collapse Hazard 4. Underground Hazard 5. Products/Completed Operations Hazard $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 6. Contractual Liability $2,000,000 Aggregate 7. Broad Form Property Damage 8. Independent Contractors 9. Personal &Advertising Injury Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-2 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 4/2022 Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- Owned, Rented and Leased $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental X Required Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation >3 ft Builder's Risk(All Perils including Collapse) Equal to Full Replacement Cost of Structure and Contents Required for vertical structures and bridges X Required Not Required Installation Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment X Required Not Required ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.02 LABOR; WORKING HOURS B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of person or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are from sunrise to sunset Monday through Friday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS,AND OTHERS B. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor must perform at least [50] percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-3 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 4/2022 SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: "General Decision Number: TX20250021 01/03/2025 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20240021 State: Texas Construction Type: Heavy Counties: Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) Note: Contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act are generally required to pay at least the applicable minimum wage rate required under Executive Order 14026 or Executive Order 13658. Please note that these Executive Orders apply to covered contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but do not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(1). JIf the contract is entered Executive Order 14026 linto on or after January 30, generally applies to the 12022, or the contract is contract. renewed or extended (e.g., an The contractor must pay loption is exercised) on or all covered workers at after January 30, 2022: least $17.75 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in 2025. JIf the contract was awarded onl . Executive Order 13658 for between January 1, 2015 andl generally applies to the January 29, 2022, and the contract. contract is not renewed or The contractor must pay alll lextended on or after January covered workers at least 1 130, 2022: 1 $13.30 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed) on this wage determination, 1 if it is higher) for all Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-4 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 4/2022 hours spent performing on that contract in 2025. The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. If this contract is covered by one of the Executive Orders and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must still submit a conformance request. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the Executive Orders is available at http://www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/03/2025 SUTX1987-001 12/01/1987 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (Excluding Form Setting).......................................................$ 9.05 ** Concrete Finisher. .................................$ 7.56 ** ELECTRICIAN. ...............................................$ 13.37 ** 2.58 Laborers: Common. ...............................................$ 7.25 ** Utility. ............................................$ 7.68 ** Power equipment operators: Backhoe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 9.21 ** Motor Grader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 8.72 ** --------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ** Workers in this classification may be entitled to a higher minimum wage under Executive Order 14026 ($17.75) or 13658 ($13.30). Please see the Note at the top of the wage determination for more information. Please also note that the minimum wage requirements of Executive Order 14026 are not currently being enforced as to any contract or subcontract to which the states of Texas, Louisiana, or Mississippi, including their agencies, are a party. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-5 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 4/2022 Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (iii)). --------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classifications and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the type(s) of construction and geographic area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order under rate identifiers indicating whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate), a survey rate, a weighted union average rate, a state adopted rate, or a supplemental classification rate. Union Rate Identifiers A four-letter identifier beginning with characters other than ""SU"", '"UAVG'", ?SA?, or ?SC? denotes that a union rate was prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2024. PLUM is an identifier of the union whose collectively bargained rate prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-6 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 4/2022 used in processing the wage determination. The date, 07/01/2024 in the example, is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all changes over time that are reported to WHD in the rates in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing the classification. Union Average Rate Identifiers The UAVG identifier indicates that no single rate prevailed for those classifications, but that 100% of the data reported for the classifications reflected union rates. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 01/01/2024. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the State of Ohio. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. The date, 01/01/2024 in the example, indicates the date the wage determination was updated to reflect the most current union average rate. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January, to reflect a weighted average of the current rates in the collective bargaining agreements on which the rate is based. Survey Rate Identifiers The ""SU"" identifier indicates that either a single non-union rate prevailed (as defined in 29 CFR 1.2) for this classification in the survey or that the rate was derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As a weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SUFL2022-007 6/27/2024. SU indicates the rate is a single non-union prevailing rate or a weighted average of survey data for that classification. FL indicates the State of Florida. 2022 is the year of the survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. The date, 6/27/2024 in the example, indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. ?SU? wage rates typically remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. However, the Wage and Hour Division (WHD) has the discretion to update such rates under 29 CFR 1.6(c)(1). Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-7 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 4/2022 State Adopted Rate Identifiers The ""SA"" identifier indicates that the classifications and prevailing wage rates set by a state (or local) government were adopted under 29 C.F.R 1.3(g)-(h). Example: SAME2023-007 01/03/2024. SA reflects that the rates are state adopted. ME refers to the State of Maine. 2023 is the year during which the state completed the survey on which the listed classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. The date, 01/03/2024 in the example, reflects the date on which the classifications and rates under the ?SA? identifier took effect under state law in the state from which the rates were adopted. ---------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1) Has there been an initial decision in the matter?This can be: a) a survey underlying a wage determination b) an existing published wage determination c) an initial WHD letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter d) an initial conformance(additional classification and rate) determination On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be directed to the WHD Branch of Wage Surveys. Requests can be submitted via email to davisbaconinfo@dol.gov or by mail to: Branch of Wage Surveys Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 Regarding any other wage determination matter such as conformance decisions, requests for initial decisions should be directed to the WHD Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Requests can be submitted via email to BCWD- Office@dol.gov or by mail to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-8 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 4/2022 2) If an initial decision has been issued,then any interested party(those affected by the action)that disagrees with the decision can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Requests for review and reconsideration can be submitted via email to dba.reconsideration@ndol.gov or by mail to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-9 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 4/2022 the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable,an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210. ----------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------- ____= END OF GENERAL DECISION" ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES C. For the Contractor's convenience,the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Plummer Associates 361-356-8412 Erika "Rikki" Anderson 210-510-0888 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 Water/Wastewater/Stormwater 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks & Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div. for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department(City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AEP 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00- 10 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 4/2022 Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number Ce ntu ryl-i nk 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Specification Section Shop Drawing Description SEE SECTION 0133 01- SUBMITTAL REGISTER Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00- 11 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 4/2022 SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: Staff Rates per Hour Admin Staff I & II $95.00 Admin Staff III $110.00 Designer/Technician I & II $120.00 Designer/Technician III $135.00 Engineer-in-Training 11 $140.00 Engineer-in-Training 111 $160.00 Project Engineer $175.00 Project Manager 1 $190.00 Project Manager 11 $245.00 Sr. Project Manager $275.00 Principal $310.00 ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: Specification Section Record Data Description 00 72 00 Art 26 Record Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documentation VARIOUS See section 0133 01- Submittal Register SC-30.21 Notices. B. Strict compliance is required for all notice provisions in this Contract. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00- 12 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 4/2022 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment,tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. This project includes, but is not limited to,the rehabilitation of nine lift stations and installation of two replacement lift stations for a total of 11 lift stations which require bypass pumping,the replacement of discharge piping and appurtenances,the replacement of submersible pumps, epoxy coatings, chain-link and concrete fencing, asphalt and concrete paving, pump control panels, main electrical disconnects, canopies, cranes, abandonment of pipe and wet wells, and other miscellaneous items of work required to complete this project in accordance with the plans, specifications and Contract Documents. 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. 21025 New Coopers boaters Facility 2. 23050 L-Head Parking Lot Improvements 3. 21028 Boat Haul Out/Office/Retail Facility B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents,the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. Summary of Work 01 11 00- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 10/2018 100%Design Set 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. None. B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power and water, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01 11 00-2 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 10/2018 100%Design Set 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate,and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed,or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. Allowances: 1. Include specified allowance amount in the Contract Price. 2. The amount of each allowance includes: a. The cost of the product to the Contractor less any applicable trade discounts. b. Delivery to the Site. c. Applicable taxes. 3. Include in the Contract Price all costs for: a. Handling at the Site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage per Article 19 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. b. Cost for labor and equipment for installation and finishing. C. Cost for related products not specifically listed in the allowance required for installation, including consumable supplies and materials. d. All overhead, profit, and related costs. 4. Assist Owner in the selection of products. a. Identify qualified Suppliers. b. Obtain bids from qualified Suppliers. c. Present available alternates to the Owner through the OAR. Notify OAR of: 1) Any objections to a particular Supplier or product. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-1 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 5/2020 BID SET 2) Effect on the Construction Schedule anticipated by the selection of each option. 3) Cost of each option. 5. Upon selection of the product: a. Purchase and install the product. b. Contractor's responsibilities for products shall be the same as for products selected by the Contractor. 6. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS to adjust Contract Price if the net cost of the product is more or less than the specified amount. a. Adjust the unit cost applied to the quantities installed per the method of payment described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for products specified as Unit Price Work. b. Do not perform Work until selection of alternate has been approved by the Owner. C. Provide actual invoices for the materials. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate A—NOT USED 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES 0 A. Allowance for Unanticipated Work(A-5) 1. Payment for work that is required but not noted in the Contract Documents or work discovered during the rehabilitations that was not anticipated. 2 2. Payment for unanticipated work will be based on a change modification proposal from the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the costs incurred by the Contractor. Contractor will be reimbursed for actual costs, not to exceed the change modification proposal amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific incurred by the Contractor. B. Allowance for Electrical Work—Cooper's Alley(A-6) 1. Payment shall include all electrical work required to support the new Coopers Alley lift station in the event the Marina projects are not underway, and the electrical has not been replaced/upgraded prior to the start of Cooper's Alley. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-2 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 5/2020 BID SET 2. Payment for electrical will be based on a change modification proposal from the Contractor.The Contractor will be provided plans from the other projects to develop the change modification. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the costs incurred by the Contractor. Contractor will be reimbursed for actual costs, not to exceed the change modification proposal amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific incurred by the Contractor. C. Allowance for Electrical (A-8) 2 1. Payment shall include electrical expenses that arise and are not known through the Project Contract Documents but required to make the project complete and usable under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for electrical will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the electrical costs incurred by the Contractor. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost incurred for electrical item required under this contract, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific electrical expenses incurred by the Contractor. D. Allowance for Military/Jester Temporary Construction Easement (A-9) 1. A maximum of$20,000 is to be used for Real Estate expenses that arise and are not known through the Project Contract Documents but required to make the project complete and usable under the Contract Documents. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-3 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 5/2020 BID SET 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value foreach item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1: Mobilization (Maximum 5%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; c. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A-2: Bonds and Insurance Allowance (Maximum 2%) 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically for this Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor,whichever is less. C. Bid Item A-3: Trench Safety Protection 1. These items includes furnishing the design, all materials,tools, labor, equipment and all other incidental items necessary, including removal of the system,to provide for worker safety and protection during excavation in accordance with OSHA requirements. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by linear foot of trench safety system installed. D. Bid Item A-4: Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP) 1. This item shall include all material, labor, and equipment to design, install, and maintain an approved Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP), in accordance with project standard details and specifications.The SWPPP must be approved by Engineer and erosion control measures must be installed prior to any construction. This item shall include filing the Notice of Intent (NOI) and the Notice of Termination (NOT) with the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ).The cost of permitting, SWPPP preparation, installation, maintenance and removal of erosion control devices, sediment handling and all other incidental items necessary to restore the ground surface are included in this item. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: The initial pay application will include 50%of the lump sum bid amount minus retainage.The balance will be paid according to the percent of construction completion after 50%completion has occurred, minus retainage. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET E. Bid Item A-7: Traffic Control 1. Payment shall include all Contractors providing a Traffic Control Plan (TCP) signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas for each site as well as installation, monitoring and removal as needed per site. Contractor shall provide the barricades, signs, and any other requirements shown in the (TCP) designed for each respective site where traffic control is needed.The cost of the design and related permits for the driveways will be accounted for in the cost of the TCP. This is not to include the permitting work noted elsewhere, but does include the traffic control to support the TxDOT Permits. 2. Payment for traffic control will be based on lump sum basis. F. Bid Items B-1, C-1, D-1, F-1,G-1, H-1, 1-1,J-1, K-1, & L-1: Lift Station Improvements 1. These items shall include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for the complete and workable construction of all lift station, pipeline, and manhole related modifications, installations, and related demolition as indicated in the project drawings and specifications, complete and in- place. No separate payment shall be made for excavation, paintings and coatings, dewatering, backfill, compaction, cleaning, storage of materials and equipment, laydown or equipment staging areas outside the Limits of Construction, disposal or handling of materials (including hazardous materials where applicable), coatings, abandonment of infrastructure, site restoration, site clearing and stripping, ROW preparation, site grading, silt fencing or other erosion control measures, improvements to buildings and structures (where applicable), or any incidental items necessary for the complete and workable construction of lift station, pipeline, and manhole modifications, installations, and demolition indicated in the project drawings and/or specifications. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. G. Bid Items B-2, C-2, D-2, E-3, F-2, G-2, 1-2, K-2, & L-2:Temporary Bypass Pumping 1. These items shall include furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to create a control of flow plan and to provide bypass pumping or alternate control of flow measures as shown in the project drawings, as indicated in the project specifications,or as necessary to provide adequate control of flow measures necessary to complete all work identified in the project drawings and specifications. There shall be no separate payment for incidental items including, but not limited to, design, planning, coordination, installation, operation, maintenance, and removal of control of flow measures. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-3 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET H. Bid Items B-3, 1-3, & K-3: Ultrasonic Doppler Flowmeter and Recorder 1. These items shall include the furnishing and installation of ultrasonic doppler flowmeters and recorders.These items shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the installation of ultrasonic doppler flowmeters and recorders as indicated in the project drawings and specifications complete in place. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a per each basis. 1. Bid Items J-3: Ultrasonic Doppler Flowmeter and Recorder and Manhole 1. These items shall include the furnishing and installation of ultrasonic doppler flowmeters, recorders, and manhole. These items shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the installation of ultrasonic doppler flowmeters, recorders, and manholes as indicated in the project drawings and specifications complete in place. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a per each basis. J. Bid Items B-4, C-3, D-3, E-5, F-5, G-5, H-4, 1-7,J-5, K-5, & L-5: Electrical, Instrumentation, and Controls Improvements 1. These items shall include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for the complete and workable construction of all lift electrical, instrumentation and controls, and communication system modifications, installations, and related demolition as indicated in the project drawings and specifications, complete and in-place. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. K. Bid Items F-3, G-3 & K-4—Perimeter Fencing—Chain Link Security Fence 1. These items shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary to furnish and install chain link security perimeter fencing complete-in-place as indicated in the project drawings and specifications.This includes, but is not limited to, demolition and disposal of the existing fence as well as installing the posts, footings, chain link fence with vinyl slats,vinyl coating,vehicle gates, man gates, and razor wire. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by the linear foot of fencing furnished and installed. L. Bid Items H-2—Perimeter Fencing—8' Precast Concrete 1. These items shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary to furnish and install 8' precast concrete fencing complete-in-place as indicated in the project drawings and specifications.This includes, but is not limited to, demolition and disposal of the existing fence as well as furnishing and installing fence posts, fence panels, and concrete footings. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by the linear foot of fencing furnished and installed. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-4 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET M. Bid Items 1-4—Perimeter Fencing—8' Precast Concrete- Repairs 1. These items shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary to furnish and install 8' precast concrete fencing to match the existing precast concrete fencing complete-in-place as indicated in the project drawings and specifications. This includes, but is not limited to,This includes, but is not limited to, demolition and disposal of the existing fence as well as furnishing and installing fence posts, fence panels, and concrete footings. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by the linear foot of fencing furnished and installed. N. Bid Items 1-5—Perimeter Fencing—8' Precast Concrete-Cleaning and Painting 1. These items shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary to clean, prepare, and paint proposed and existing 8' precast concrete fencing. This includes, but is not limited to, pressure washing, surface preparation, priming, and painting the precast concrete fencing with suitable outdoor weather resistant paint approved by the OWNER AND ENGINEER. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by the linear foot of fencing cleaned, prepared, and painted. O. Bid Items F-4&J-4—Concrete Access Driveway 1. This item shall include furnishing all materials, labor, and equipment to properly install concrete access driveways in accordance with the plans, standard details, and specifications.This includes preparation of a Traffic Control Plan in accordance with the City of Corpus Christi code using the Texas Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices.The Traffic Control Plan will be sealed by a licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas.The cost of concrete, aggregate base, subgrade preparation, compaction,formwork, rebar, concrete,and all other incidental items necessary for a complete and workable installation are included in this pay item. 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the square feet of concrete pavement installed. P. Bid Items G-4—Concrete Access Driveway per TxDOT Requirements 1. This item shall include furnishing all engineering, materials, labor, and equipment to properly install concrete access driveway in accordance with the TXDOT permit, plans, standard details, and specifications.The Traffic Control Plan will be sealed by a licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas and the documents to obtain a permit including engineering work will be accounted for under this pay item. The cost of concrete, aggregate base, subgrade preparation, compaction, formwork, rebar, concrete, and all other incidental items necessary for a complete and workable installation are included in this pay item. 2. This item shall be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. Q. Bid Items 1-6: Odor Control System 1. These items shall include all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for the furnishing and installation of an odor control system, complete in place, as indicated in the project drawings and specifications.This item includes, but Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-5 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET is not limited to, removal and disposal of the existing odor control system, demolition and replacement of the existing concrete structural pad, piping, controls, and instrumentation. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. R. Bid Item E-6, H-3:Temporary Restroom Facilities 1. These items shall include all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items to provide temporary restroom facilities to the public in a quantity as noted on the plans.This item includes, but is not limited to,furnishing of the temporary restroom facilities, required maintenance of the restroom facilities, removal of the restroom facilities, and disposal of wastes. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a per-week basis of temporary restroom facilities furnished and available to the public. S. Bid Items E-1 &J-1: Lift Station Replacement 1. This item shall include removal and replacement for all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for the complete and workable construction of this lift station and any related modifications, installations, and demolition as indicated in the project drawings and specifications, complete and in-place. No separate payment shall be made for excavation, dewatering, backfill, compaction, cleaning, storage of materials and equipment, laydown or equipment staging areas outside the Limits of Construction, disposal or handling of materials (including hazardous materials where applicable), coatings, abandonment of infrastructure, site restoration, site clearing and stripping, ROW preparation, site grading, silt fencing or other erosion control measures, improvements to buildings and structures (where applicable), or any incidental items necessary for the complete and workable construction of lift station, pipeline, and manhole modifications, installations, and demolition indicated in the project drawings and/or specifications. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. T. Bid Item E-2:Temporary Pumping and Hauling 1. These items shall include all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items to provide waste hauling services from the pump and haul manhole as noted on the plans.This item includes, but is not limited to,furnishing of the personnel, equipment, hauling, cleaning and disposal of wastes. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a per-week basis until flows can be received by the lift station. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-6 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET U. Bid Item E-4: Force Main Installation 1. These items shall include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for the complete and workable construction of the force main, utility locates, utility crossings and adjustments, and related abandonment, as indicated in the project drawings and specifications, complete and in-place. No separate payment shall be made for excavation, dewatering, backfill, compaction, cleaning, storage of materials and equipment, laydown or equipment staging areas outside the Limits of Construction, disposal or handling of materials (including hazardous materials where applicable), coatings, abandonment of infrastructure, site restoration, site clearing and stripping, ROW preparation, site grading, silt fencing or other erosion control measures, improvements to buildings and structures (where applicable), or any incidental items necessary for the complete and workable construction of the force main, air release valve in manhole, isolation valves and vaults, manhole modifications,tie in to lift station and shoreline manhole installations, and demolition indicated in the project drawings and/or specifications. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a per linear foot basis. V. Bid Item E-7—Mill and Overlay 1. These items shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary to mill and overlay Cooper's Alley Road and a section of the L-Head per the limits shown and in accordance with the Contract Documents.This will include planning, cleaning, loading, hauling, placing HMAC, labor,tools, equipment and incidentals required to complete the work. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by the square yard of mill and overlay placed. W. Bid Item E-8—Pavement Markings 1. These items shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary to apply pavement markings and symbols to Cooper's Alley road and a section of the L- Head per the limits shown and in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by on a lump sum basis. X. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections, Construction Drawings and/or SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-7 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET 0133 01 Submittal Register Specification Paragraph Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description No. Product Sample or Operations Information Mockup Data 01 23 10 00 72 00-Article 24-GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.02-A 01 57 00 100 72 00-Article 25-GENERAL CONDITION 1.02-A Shop Drawing 01 57 00 00 72 00-Article 26-GENERAL CONDITION 1.02-B Record Data 02 72 00 Bypass Pumping Plan Form&Schematic 1.2-A,B 05 52 15 Aluminum Handrails and Railings 1.4-A Shop Drawing Sample 11 31 20 Wet Well Ventilation System 3 Shop Drawing 15 10 30 Eccentric Plug Valves and Electric Motor Actuators 3 Shop Drawing 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation-Submittal 1.4-A: 1,2, Schedule 3,4,5,6 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation-Preliminary 1.4-B Network Diagram 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation-Contractor's 1.4-C Construction Schedule 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation-CPM Reports 1.4-D:1,2, 3 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation-Daily 1.4-E Construction Reports 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation-Field 1.4-F Construction Reports 01 32 33 Photograpic Documentation-Key Plan 1.3-A 01 32 33 Photograpic Documentation-Construction Photographs 1.3-B 014000 Quality Requirements-Qulification Data 1.5-A Record Data 01 53 30 Temporary Bypass Pumping-Bypass Pumping Plan 1.4-A:1,2 01 53 30 Temporary Bypass Pumping-Certificate of Compliance 1.4-B:1 01 75 25 Equipment Testing and Startup-Review,start-up,and 1.4-A test schedule 0175 25 Equipment Testing and Startup-Field test data and test 1.4-B records 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data-Initial Submittal 1.4-A 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data-Final Submittal 1.4-B:1,2 01 78 39 Project Record Documentation-Record Drawings 1.3-A Shop Drawing 01 78 39 Project Record Documentation-Record Product Data 1.3-B Record Data 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training-Instruction Program 1.2-A 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training-Demonstration and 1.2-B Training Videotapes 02 41 00 Demolition-Proposed Protection Measures 1.5-A 02 41 00 Demolition-Schedule of Facilities Demolition Activities 1.5-B:1,2, 3 02 41 00 Demolition-Facility Demolition Plans 1.5-C 02 41 00 Demolition-Inventory 1.5-D 02 41 00 Demolition-Pre-demolition Photographs or Video 1.5-E 02 58 02 Temporary Traffic Controls During Construction 3 Shop Drawing 02 82 33 Removal and Disposal of Abestos Containing Materials 1.3-A 02 90 00 Manhole and Wet Well Restoration with Protective 1.3-A Record Data Coatings-Technical data sheet,MSDS,and project specific guidelines and recommendations 02 90 00 Manhole and Wet Well Restoration with Protective 1.3-B Coatings-Applicator Qualifications Submittal Register 01 33 01-1 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 7/2025 0133 01 Submittal Register Specification Paragraph Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description No. Product Sample or Operations Information Mockup Data 03 60 00 Grouting 1.4-A Shop Drawing 05 05 33 Anchor Systems 1.4-A Shop Drawing Sample 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 1.3-A Shop Drawing 09 91 00 Painting and Protective Coatings-Product 1.3-A 09 91 00 Painting and Protective Coatings-Samples for Initial 1.3-B Selection 09 91 00 Painting and Protective Coatings-Samples for 1.3-C Verification 09 91 00 Painting and Protective Coatings-Product List 1.3-D 09 91 00 Painting and Protective Coatings-Certification from 1.3-E Coating Supplier 09 91 00 Painting and Protective Coatings-Certification from 1.3-F Blast Cleaning Supplier 09 91 00 Painting and Protective Coatings-Manufacturer's 1.3-G Sample Instructions 09 91 00 Painting and Protective Coatings-Field quality-control 1.3-H reports 09 91 00 Painting and Protective Coatings-Pre-installation 1.3-1 Conference 10 14 19 Safety Signs-Product Data 1.6-A Record Data 10 90 00 Identification,Stenciling,and Tagging-Submit 1.3-A identification register 10 90 00 Identification,Stenciling,and Tagging-Develop and 1.3-B submit full identification register 10 90 00 Identification,Stenciling,and Tagging-Submit 1.3-C assurances 10 90 00 Identification,Stenciling,and Tagging-Update 1.3-D identification register 10 90 00 Identification,Stenciling,and Tagging-Pipe Markers and 1.3-E Safety Signs 26 29 23 Variable Frequency Drives 1.3-A Shop Drawing O&M Manual 3123 16 Excavation Support and Protection-Delegated Design 1.4-A Submittal 32 31 13 Chain Fence and Gates-Shop Drawings 1.4-A Shop Drawing 32 31 13 Chain Fence and Gates-Product Data 1.4-B Record Data 32 31 40 Precast Concrete Fence-Color Selection 1.3-D:1 32 31 40 Precast Concrete Fence-Shop Drawings 1.3-D:2 Shop Drawing 32 31 40 Precast Concrete Fence-Design Calculations 1.3-D:3 32 31 40 Precast Concrete Fence-Soil Conditions 1.3-D:4 32 31 40 Precast Concrete Fence-Samples 1.3-D:5 33 14 19 Drains,Cleanouts,Hydrants,and Hose Stations-Product 1.4-A:1 Record Data Data 3332 13 Prefabricated Sewage Pump Station with 2 Submersible 1.4-A Pumps 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe-Comply with Section 0133 00 1.4-A 4005 19 Ductile Iron Pipe-Product Data 1.4-B Record Data Sample 4005 19 Ductile Iron Pipe-Shop Drawings 1.4-C Shop Drawing 4005 19 Ductile Iron Pipe-Material Certificates 1.4-D 4005 19 Ductile Iron Pipe-Field quality-control test reports 1.4-E 40 05 31.10 Piping System,PVC and CPVC Pipe-Product Data 1.4-A Record Data 40 05 31.10 Piping System,PVC and CPVC Pipe-Shop Drawings 1.4-B Shop Drawing 40 05 31.10 Piping System,PVC and CPVC Pipe-Material Certificates 1.4-C Submittal Register 01 33 01-2 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 2/2024 0133 01 Submittal Register Specification Paragraph Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description No. Product Sample or Operations Information Mockup Data 40 05 31.10 Piping System,PVC and CPVC Pipe-Field quality-control 1.4-D test reports 40 05 36.13 Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork-Shop Drawings 1.5-A Shop Drawing 40 05 52 Miscellaneous Valves and Appurtenances-Product Data 1.4-A Record Data 40 05 52 Miscellaneous Valves and Appurtenances-Product 1.4-B Certificates 40 05 52 Miscellaneous Valves and Appurtenances-O&M Data 1.4-C 40 05 52 Miscellaneous Valves and Appurtenances-Field Quality 1.4-D Control 40 05 52 Miscellaneous Valves and Appurtenances- 1.4-E Manufacturer's Warranty 40 05 61 Gate Valves-Product Data 1.2-A Record Data 40 05 61 Gate Valves-Product Certificates 1.2-B O&M Manual 40 05 61 Gate Valves-Field Quality Control 1.2-C 40 05 64.43 Fiberglass Dampers-Drawings and Data 1.4-A Shop Drawing 40 05 65 Valves for Flow Control and Check Service-Product Data 1.3-A Record Data 40 05 65 Valves for Flow Control and Check Service-Product 1.3-B Certificates 40 05 65 Valves for Flow Control and Check Service-O&M Data 1.3-C 40 05 65 Valves for Flow Control and Check Service-Field Quality 1.3-D Control 40 05 65 Valves for Flow Control and Check Service- 1.3-E Manufacturer's Warranty 40 05 78.23 Air Vacuum Valves for Wastewater Service-Shop 1.3-A Record Data Drawings and Product Data 40 05 78.23 Air Vacuum Valves for Wastewater Service-Affidavits 1.3-B O&M Manual 40 05 78.23 Air Vacuum Valves for Wastewater Service-O&M 1.3-C Manual 40 73 99 Pressure Gauges and Thermometers-Product Data 1.3-A Record Data 40 73 99 Pressure Gauges and Thermometers-Provide 1.3-B Manufacturer's Warranty 40 94 43 Programmable Logic Controllers 1.3-A Record Data O&M Manual 4122 13.19 Jib Crane 1.6-B Shop Drawing O&M Manual 41 22 18 Bridge Cranes,Trolleys,and Hoists 1.2-B Shop Drawing O&M Manual 43 22 10-PS Common Requirements for Pumps-Pump Submittal 1.2-A Requirements 43 22 10-PS Common Requirements for Pumps-Information 1.2-B O&M Manual Submittals 43 22 10-PS Common Requirements for Pumps-O&M Data 1.2-C 43 22 10-PS Common Requirements for Pumps-Field Quality 1.2-D Control 43 22 10-PS Common Requirements for Pumps-Manufacturer 1.2-E Installation Instructions 43 22 10-PS Common Requirements for Pumps-Guarantees 1.2-F 43 22 10-PS Common Requirements for Pumps-Manufacturer's 1.2-G O&M Manual Warranty 43 22 10-PS Common Requirements for Pumps-Previous 1.2-H Installations List Submittal Register 01 33 01-3 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 7/2025 0133 01 Submittal Register Specification Paragraph Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description No. Product Sample or Operations Information Mockup Data 43 25 00-PS Pumps,Submersible-Immersible-"Supplier's 1.3-A Submittals" 43 25 00-PS Pumps,Submersible-Immersible-Informational 1.3-B Submittals 43 25 00-PS Pumps,Submersible-Immersible-Closeout Submittals 1.3-C 4431 19 lPackaged Odor Control Systems-Product Data 1.4-A:1 Record Data 4431 19 Packaged Odor Control Systems-Design Data 1.4-A:2 Record Data 4431 19 Packaged Odor Control Systems-Shop Drawings 1.4-A:3 Shop Drawing 4431 19 Packaged Odor Control Systems-I&C Submittals 1.4-A:4 4431 19 Packaged Odor Control Systems-Test and Evaluvation 1.4-A:5 Reports 4431 19 Packaged Odor Control Systems-Field/Site Quality 1.4-B:1 Control Submittals 4431 19 Packaged Odor Control Systems-Qualification 1.4-B:2 Statements 44 31 19 Packaged Odor Control Systems-Certificates 1.4-B:3 44 31 19 Packaged Odor Control Systems-O&M Data 1.4-C:1 44 31 19 Packaged Odor Control Systems-Warranty 1.4-C:2 Documentation Submittal Register 01 33 01-4 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 2/2024 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence stipulated below: B. Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items: Description Time Substantial Completion of Entire Project 550 days Final Completion of Entire Project 580 days C. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. D. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times. 1.02 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines,water or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and C. Submit plan 2 weeks prior to beginning the Work. Special Procedures 01 35 00- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 10/2018 100%Set 1.03 CRITICAL OPERATIONS A. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum time out of service and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in the table below: Max.Time Hours Operation Liquidated Critical Operation Damages Out of Operation can be Shut Down ($ per hour) N/A B. Submit a written plan of action per Paragraph 1.02 for approval for critical operations. C. Work affecting critical operations is to be performed on a 24-hour a day basis until Owner's normal operations have been restored. D. Provide additional manpower and equipment as required to complete the Work affecting critical operations within the allotted time. 1.04 OWNER ASSISTANCE A. The Owner will assist the Contractor in draining the existing lift stations as much as possible through operation of existing pumps. The Contractor will be responsible for providing dewatering pumps, etc. required to completely dewater the facilities and handle any leakage past closed valves,gates or adjacent structures. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures 01 35 00-2 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 10/2018 100%Set 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including OPT's field office and the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT's field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. 3. Prevent freezing of pipes,flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 8/2019 BID SET B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES (NOT APPLICABLE) 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times,and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor's and the OPT's field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00-2 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 8/2019 BID SET B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the "Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS (NOT APPLICABLE) 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings,sheds,and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping) for the OPT's field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00-3 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 8/2019 BID SET B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT's field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00-4 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 8/2019 BID SET 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 25 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 01 57 00- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 8/2019 BID SET B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOL 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Temporary Controls 01 57 00-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 8/2019 BID SET Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent,SWPPP,and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods,techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an Temporary Controls 01 57 00-3 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 8/2019 BID SET uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. Temporary Controls 01 57 00-4 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 8/2019 BID SET C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream,the Corpus Christi Bay,Oso Creek, Laguna Madre or CC Ship Channel. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a "no cost" permit from the Owner's Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER A. An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials, tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. Suggested disposal facilities would be US Ecology(USET)in Robstown,Texas or Texas Molecular in Corpus Christi,Texas. B. The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering, which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for Temporary Controls 01 57 00-5 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 8/2019 BID SET disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, Contractor shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 01 57 00-6 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 8/2019 BID SET SECTION 0112 16 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a project schedule within 10 days of the project Notice of Award. The project schedule shall outline the dates and time requirements for each item involving an existing treatment unit, piece of equipment, and conveyance system. No payment shall be made until these items are received. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide written notification to the OWNER at least fourteen (14) days in advance and again three (3) days prior to beginning work on a particular area, and coordinate with the OWNER the specific items to be isolated and duration for each. Obtain written approval from the OWNER prior to each shutdown. High flow conditions or equipment outages may require the rescheduling of an approved shutdown. Any cost associated with rescheduling will be subsidiary to Project. C. Recommended sequence of construction due to outside projects to be constructed shall be in the following order: 1. Cooper's Alley L-Head 2. Laguna Shores Country Club 4. Military&Jester 5. Sugar Tree & Waldron 7. People's Street T-Head S. Lawrence Street T-Head Cole Park 10. Highway Nine 11. Clarkwood South D. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the OWNER prior to commencement of any work on Cooper's Alley L-Head.The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in the Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion 1. 21025 New Coopers boaters Facility 2. 23050 L-Head Parking Lot Improvements 1 21028 Boat Haul Out/Office/Retail Facility E. CONTRACTOR shall not begin construction on Highway Nine until TxDOT permit is obtained by the City of Corpus Christi. TxDOT permit is anticipated within 6 months of Bid Opening. F. After startup and transfer of operation to the OWNER,the CONTRACTOR shall not operate PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0112 16-PAGE 1 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION SEPTEMBER 2025 any valves or equipment in the facility unless directed to do so by the OWNER. G Prior to beginning work,the CONTRACTOR shall have on-site all materials, equipment, and personnel necessary to complete the work in the time scheduled. The CONTRACTOR shall also perform all possible tasks to the most complete state possible prior to shutdowns. All exposed bolts and nuts on valves or fittings which are to be disassembled shall be removed and replaced one at a time prior to shutdown to assure as timely progress as possible. H. Existing plugged pipelines, in which water has been standing, shall have to be cleaned of debris prior to connecting to a new pipeline.The sequencing may require the CONTRACTOR to perform work such as installing temporary or permanent plugs and/or diversion facilities in structures that are online.The specifics related to flow diversion and temporary plugging means and methods are the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, however,the CONTRACTOR'S proposed work operations and schedules shall be submitted to the OWNER for review. All costs for temporary piping and pumping, pipe connections, and all related work shall be included in the Base Bid of the project. All testing of pipes to be connected shall be completed and test reports furnished to the ENGINEER prior to making connections. J. Reduce the number of shutdowns required for piping systems by combining as many connections at the same time as feasible. K. Time shall be allowed for shutting down the process and dewatering the existing pipe and/or structure in addition to the actual connection time. CONTRACTOR shall provide all equipment,tools and labor to dewater the pipes for connections. This process water shall not be allowed to discharge over the ground or to the surface drainage systems. L. Potable water piping shall be cleaned, disinfected, and tested prior to placing into service. CONTRACTOR shall provide taps, flushing, and blow-off connections to flush and disinfect each pipe section and treatment unit. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. See Section 01 11 00 "Summary of Work" and General Conditions. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A� Deliver, handle, and store all components to be installed under this section in accordance with the SUPPLIER'S written Pre-Installation Delivery, Storage, and Handling Instructions. 1.5 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval on shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, . Control power, 1 Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0112 16-PAGE 2 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Work to be performed; 1 Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; & Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; , Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and 10. Submit plan 14 calendar days prior to beginning the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION CONSTRUCTION PHASING A. Throughout construction the CONTRACTOR will need to keep lift stations in operation unless active work on the lift station is occurring in order to minimize the impact on the operations of the collection system.The CONTRACTOR will strive to have a lift station out of service for the minimum amount of time possible, but once rehabilitation or construction has commenced at a site,the contractor will keep the CONSTRUCTION moving until Substantial Completion for that site is achieved. 3.2 SYSTEM START UP A. Startup of the lift station facility will be in accordance with Section 0175 00. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0112 16-PAGE 3 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0112 16-PAGE 4 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION SEPTEMBER 2025 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate,and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed,or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. Allowances: 1. Include specified allowance amount in the Contract Price. 2. The amount of each allowance includes: a. The cost of the product to the Contractor less any applicable trade discounts. b. Delivery to the Site. c. Applicable taxes. 3. Include in the Contract Price all costs for: a. Handling at the Site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage per Article 19 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. b. Cost for labor and equipment for installation and finishing. C. Cost for related products not specifically listed in the allowance required for installation, including consumable supplies and materials. d. All overhead, profit, and related costs. 4. Assist Owner in the selection of products. a. Identify qualified Suppliers. b. Obtain bids from qualified Suppliers. c. Present available alternates to the Owner through the OAR. Notify OAR of: 1) Any objections to a particular Supplier or product. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-1 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 5/2020 BID SET 2) Effect on the Construction Schedule anticipated by the selection of each option. 3) Cost of each option. 5. Upon selection of the product: a. Purchase and install the product. b. Contractor's responsibilities for products shall be the same as for products selected by the Contractor. 6. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS to adjust Contract Price if the net cost of the product is more or less than the specified amount. a. Adjust the unit cost applied to the quantities installed per the method of payment described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for products specified as Unit Price Work. b. Do not perform Work until selection of alternate has been approved by the Owner. C. Provide actual invoices for the materials. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate A—NOT USED 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES 0 A. Allowance for Unanticipated Work(A-5) 1. Payment for work that is required but not noted in the Contract Documents or work discovered during the rehabilitations that was not anticipated. 2 2. Payment for unanticipated work will be based on a change modification proposal from the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the costs incurred by the Contractor. Contractor will be reimbursed for actual costs, not to exceed the change modification proposal amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific incurred by the Contractor. B. Allowance for Electrical Work—Cooper's Alley(A-6) 1. Payment shall include all electrical work required to support the new Coopers Alley lift station in the event the Marina projects are not underway, and the electrical has not been replaced/upgraded prior to the start of Cooper's Alley. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-2 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 5/2020 BID SET 2. Payment for electrical will be based on a change modification proposal from the Contractor.The Contractor will be provided plans from the other projects to develop the change modification. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the costs incurred by the Contractor. Contractor will be reimbursed for actual costs, not to exceed the change modification proposal amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific incurred by the Contractor. C. Allowance for Electrical (A-8) 2 1. Payment shall include electrical expenses that arise and are not known through the Project Contract Documents but required to make the project complete and usable under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for electrical will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the electrical costs incurred by the Contractor. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost incurred for electrical item required under this contract, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific electrical expenses incurred by the Contractor. D. Allowance for Military/Jester Temporary Construction Easement (A-9) 1. A maximum of$20,000 is to be used for Real Estate expenses that arise and are not known through the Project Contract Documents but required to make the project complete and usable under the Contract Documents. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-3 Citywide Lift Station Repair FY2019-2020 Rev 5/2020 BID SET 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value foreach item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1: Mobilization (Maximum 5%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; c. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A-2: Bonds and Insurance Allowance (Maximum 2%) 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment fo bo ds an in urance will be ruRgeRtat0en 9 2 m�deer ump sum on the ollow�ir sis: Contractor shall furnish satisfactory e o e ra a r a s II bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically for this Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor, whichever is less. C. Bid Item A-3: Trench Safety Protection 1. These items includes furnishing the design, all materials, tools, labor, equipment and all other incidental items necessary, including removal of the system,to provide for worker safety and protection during excavation in accordance with OSHA requirements. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by linear foot of trench safety system installed. D. Bid Item A-4: Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP) 1. This item shall include all material, labor, and equipment to design, install, and maintain an approved Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP), in accordance with project standard details and specifications.The SWPPP must be approved by Engineer and erosion control measures must be installed prior to any construction.This item shall include filing the Notice of Intent (NOI) and the Notice of Termination (NOT)with the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ).The cost of permitting, SWPPP preparation, installation, maintenance and removal of erosion control devices, sediment handling and all other incidental items necessary to restore the ground surface are included in this item. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: The initial pay application will include 50%of the lump sum bid amount minus retainage.The balance will be paid according to the percent of construction completion after 50%completion has occurred, minus retainage. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET E. Bid Item A-7: Traffic Control 1. Payment shall include all Contractors providing a Traffic Control Plan (TCP) signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas for each site as well as installation, monitoring and removal as needed per site. Contractor shall provide the barricades, signs, and any other requirements shown in the (TCP) designed for each respective site where traffic control is needed.The cost of the design and related permits for the driveways will be accounted for in the cost of the TCP.This is not to include the permitting work noted elsewhere, but does include the traffic control to support the TxDOT Permits. 2. Payment for traffic control will be based on lump sum basis. 2 F. Bid Items B-1, C-1, D-1, F-1, G-1, H-1, I-1�,�DK-1, & L-1: Lift Station Improvements 1. These items shall include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for the complete and workable construction of all lift station, pipeline, and manhole related modifications, installations, and related demolition as indicated in the project drawings and specifications, complete and in- place. No separate payment shall be made for excavation, paintings and coatings, dewatering, backfill,compaction, cleaning, storage of materials and equipment, laydown or equipment staging areas outside the Limits of Construction, disposal or handling of materials (including hazardous materials where applicable), coatings, abandonment of infrastructure, site restoration, site clearing and stripping, ROW preparation, site grading, silt fencing or other erosion control measures, improvements to buildings and structures(where applicable), or any incidental items necessary for the complete and workable construction of lift station, pipeline, and manhole modifications, installations, and demolition indicated in the project drawings and/or specifications. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. 2 G. Bid Items B-2, C-2, D-2, E-3, F-2, G-2, I-2G- )K-2, & L-2:Temporary Bypass Pumping 1. These items shall include furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to create a control of flow plan and to provide bypass pumping or alternate control of flow measures as shown in the project drawings, as indicated in the project specifications,or as necessary to provide adequate control of flow measures necessary to complete all work identified in the project drawings and specifications.There shall be no separate payment for incidental items including, but not limited to, design, planning, coordination, installation, operation, maintenance, and removal of control of flow measures. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-3 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET H. Bid Items B-3, 1-3, & K-3: Ultrasonic Doppler Flowmeter and Recorder 1. These items shall include the furnishing and installation of ultrasonic doppler flowmeters and recorders.These items shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the installation of ultrasonic doppler flowmeters and recorders as indicated in the project drawings and specifications complete in place. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a per each basis. I. Bid Items J-3: Ultrasonic Doppler Flowmeter and Recorder and Manhole 1. These items shall include the furnishing and installation of ultrasonic doppler flowmeters, recorders, and manhole.These items shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the installation of ultrasonic doppler flowmeters, recorders, and manholes as indicated in the project drawings and specifications complete in place. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a 2pereach basis. A -4,J. Bid Items B C-3, D-3, E-5, F-5, G-5, HA 1-7,J-5, K-5, &�LMM alectrical, Instrumentation, and Controls Improvements 1. These items shall include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for the complete and workable construction of all lift electrical, instrumentation and controls, and communication system modifications, installations, and related demolition as indicated in the project drawings and specifications, complete and in-place. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. K. Bid Items F-3,G-3 & K-4—Perimeter Fencing—Chain Link Security Fence 1. These items shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary to furnish and install chain link security perimeter fencing complete-in-place as indicated in the project drawings and specifications.This includes, but is not limited to, demolition and disposal of the existing fence as well as installing the posts, footings, chain link fence with vinyl slats,vinyl coating,vehicle gates, man gates, and razor wire. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by the linear foot of fencing furnished and installed. L. Bid Items H-2—Perimeter Fencing—8' Precast Concrete 1. These items shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary to furnish and install 8' precast concrete fencing complete-in-place as indicated in the project drawings and specifications.This includes, but is not limited to, demolition and disposal of the existing fence as well as furnishing and installing fence posts, fence panels, and concrete footings. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by the linear foot of fencing furnished and installed. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-4 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET M. Bid Items 1-4—Perimeter Fencing—8' Precast Concrete- Repairs 1. These items shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary to furnish and install 8' precast concrete fencing to match the existing precast concrete fencing complete-in-place as indicated in the project drawings and specifications. This includes, but is not limited to,This includes, but is not limited to, demolition and disposal of the existing fence as well as furnishing and installing fence posts, fence panels, and concrete footings. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by the linear foot of fencing furnished and installed. N. Bid Items 1-5—Perimeter Fencing—8' Precast Concrete-Cleaning and Painting 1. These items shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary to clean, prepare, and paint proposed and existing 8' precast concrete fencing.This includes, but is not limited to, pressure washing, surface preparation, priming, and painting the precast concrete fencing with suitable outdoor weather resistant paint approved by the OWNER AND ENGINEER. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by the linear foot of fencing cleaned, prepared, and painted. O. Bid Items F-4&J-4—Concrete Access Driveway 1. This item shall include furnishing all materials, labor, and equipment to properly install concrete access driveways in accordance with the plans, standard details, and specifications.This includes preparation of a Traffic Control Plan in accordance with the City of Corpus Christi code using the Texas Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices.The Traffic Control Plan will be sealed by a licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas. The cost of concrete, aggregate base, subgrade preparation, compaction,formwork, rebar, concrete, and all other incidental items necessary for a complete and workable installation are included in this pay item. 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the square feet of concrete pavement installed. P. Bid Items G-4—Concrete Access Drivewav per TxDOT Requirements 1. This item shall include furnishing all engineering, materials, labor, and equipment Mhr Mee rete access driveway in accordance with the TXDOT permit tans, standard details, and specifications.The Traffic Control licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas.a444- „ndeF this pay item. The cost of concrete, aggregate base, subgrade preparation, compaction,formwork, rebar, concrete, and all other incidental items necessary for a complete and workable installation are included in this pay item. 2. This item shall be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. Q. Bid Items 1-6: Odor Control System 1. These items shall include all labor, materials,equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for the furnishing and installation of an odor control system, complete in place, as indicated in the project drawings and specifications.This item includes, but Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-5 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET is not limited to, removal and disposal of the existing odor control system, demolition and replacement of the existing concrete structural pad, piping, controls, and instrumentation. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. R. Bid Item E-6, H-3:Temporary Restroom Facilities 1. These items shall include all labor, materials,equipment, and miscellaneous items to provide temporary restroom facilities to the public in a quantity as noted on the plans.This item includes, but is not limited to, furnishing of the temporary restroom facilities, required maintenance of the restroom facilities, removal of the restroom facilities, and disposal of wastes. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a per-week basis of temporary restroom facilities furnished and available to the public. S. Bid Items E-1 &J-1: Lift Station Replacement 1. This item shall include removal and replacement for all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for the complete and workable construction of this lift station and any related modifications, installations, and demolition as indicated in the project drawings and specifications,complete and in-place. No separate payment shall be made for excavation, dewatering, backfill, compaction, cleaning, storage of materials and equipment, laydown or equipment staging areas outside the Limits of Construction, disposal or handling of materials(including hazardous materials where applicable), coatings, abandonment of infrastructure, site restoration, site clearing and stripping, ROW preparation, site grading, silt fencing or other erosion control measures, improvements to buildings and structures(where applicable), or any incidental items necessary for the complete and workable construction of lift station, pipeline, and manhole modifications, installations, and demolition indicated in the project drawings and/or specifications. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. T. Bid Item E-2:Temporary Pumping and Hauling 1. These items shall include all labor, materials,equipment, and miscellaneous items to provide waste hauling services from the pump and haul manhole as noted on the plans.This item includes, but is not limited to, furnishing of the personnel, equipment, hauling, cleaning and disposal of wastes. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a per-week basis until flows can be received by the lift station. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-6 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET U. Bid Item E-4: Force Main Installation 1. These items shall include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for the complete and workable construction of the force main, utility locates, utility crossings and adjustments, and related abandonment, as indicated in the project drawings and specifications, complete and in-place. No separate payment shall be made for excavation, dewatering, backfill, compaction, cleaning, storage of materials and equipment, laydown or equipment staging areas outside the Limits of Construction, disposal or handling of materials(including hazardous materials where applicable), coatings, abandonment of infrastructure, site restoration, site clearing and stripping, ROW preparation,site grading, silt fencing or other erosion control measures, improvements to buildings and structures (where applicable), or any incidental items necessary for the complete and workable construction of the force main, air release valve in manhole, isolation valves and vaults, manhole modifications,tie in to lift station and shoreline manhole installations, and demolition indicated in the project drawings and/or specifications. 2. These items shall be measured for payment on a per linear foot basis. V. Bid Item E-7—Mill and Overlay 1. These items shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary to mill and overlay Cooper's Alley Road and a section of the L-Head per the limits shown and in accordance with the Contract Documents.This will include planning, cleaning, loading, hauling, placing HMAC, labor,tools, equipment and incidentals required to complete the work. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by the square yard of mill and overlay placed. W. Bid Item E-8—Pavement Markings 1. These items shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary to apply pavement markings and symbols to Cooper's Alley road and a section of the L- Head per the limits shown and in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. These items shall be measured for payment by on a lump sum basis. X. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections, Construction Drawings and/or SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-7 Citywide Lift Station Repairs Rev 5/2020 BID SET SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A, This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on the Project including project meetings. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENT A. Division 1 sections including but not limited to "General Conditions" and 0178 39 "Project Record Documents." 1.3 PROJECT COORDINATION A, Construction Operations: 1. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, which depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. a, Schedule construction operations in sequence required obtaining the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. b, Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. C. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. d. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. P. Administrative Procedures: 1, Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. b, Preparation of the Schedule of Values. C. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. d, Delivery and processing of submittals. e. Progress meetings. f. Project closeout activities. 2. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS A� The CONTRACTOR will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 31 00-PAGE 1 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. . Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned within 7 days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: 1. OWNER will schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to OWNER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR, but no later than 15 days after Notice of Award. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. a. Attendees: Authorized representatives of OWNER, ENGINEER, and their consultants; CONTRACTOR and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. b. Minutes: CONTRACTOR will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Pre-installation Conferences: 1, CONTRACTOR will conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. a, Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. b, Reporting: CONTRACTOR shall distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present, as well as to the OWNER and ENGINEER. [ , Progress Meetings: 1. Unless otherwise specified,CONTRACTOR shall conduct progress meetings at bi- weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. a. Attendees: In addition to representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. b. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. 1) Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. C, Minutes: CONTRACTOR will record and distribute to OWNER, ENGINEER the meeting minutes. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 31 00-PAGE 2 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SEPTEMBER 2025 d. Reporting: CONTRACTOR shall distribute minutes of the meeting to each subcontractor present and to parties who should have been present. 1) Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. E. Facility Startup Meetings: 1. Schedule a minimum of eleven facility startup meetings, one for each lift station site. The initial meeting will be held prior to submitting Facility Startup and Performance Demonstration Plan as specified in Division 1 Section 0175 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup."The meeting shall initiate the preliminary discussions regarding the Plan. 2, Agenda items will include as a minimum;the objectives of the equipment testing and facility startup,what actions and work will be included,the coordination between the various parties, and potential problems associated with startup. I Attendees will include: a. CONTRACTOR. b, CONTRACTOR'S designated quality control representative. C. Subcontractors and manufacturer's representatives designate by CONTRACTOR. d, ENGINEER'S representatives. e. OWNER'S operating and maintenance personnel. f. Others as required by Contract Documents. g. Other Meetings: As requested by OWNER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR. PART 2 - PRODUCTS—NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION—NOT USED END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 31 00-PAGE 3 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 31 00-PAGE 4 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 0132 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2, Submittals Schedule. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Field condition reports. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section "General Conditions" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0132 00-PAGE 1 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 C, Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either OWNER or CONTRACTOR, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. E, Fragment: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. F. Major Area: An area of construction, a separate facility, or a similar significant construction element. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit per City of Corpus Christi E-Builder. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2, Specification Section number and title. 3, Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5, Description of the Work covered. E. Scheduled date for ENGINEER'S final release or approval. B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Transmit submittals per City of Corpus Christi E- Builder, large enough to show entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit per City of Corpus Christi E-Builder. D, CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit per City of Corpus Christi E- Builder. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0132 00-PAGE 2 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. E, Daily Construction Reports: Submit per City of Corpus Christi E-Builder. F, Field Condition Reports: Submit per City of Corpus Christi E-Builder. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE & Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2, Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0132 00-PAGE 3 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 , Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion. 1, Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each facility or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than approximately 20 days. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include time for equipment testing and facility startup as specified in Division 1 Section 0175 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup." 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion and allow time for ENGINEER'S administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: . Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0132 00-PAGE 4 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. D, Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Plant Start up, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. E, Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragments to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt- chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer completing, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 7 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0132 00-PAGE 5 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 C� CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, cost- and resource-loaded, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. L Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse CONTRACTOR from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of ENGINEER'S approval of the schedule. 2, Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule. D� CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. L Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c, Purchase of materials. i. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by OWNER that may affect or be affected by CONTRACTOR'S activities. i. Testing and commissioning. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0132 00-PAGE 6 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 2, Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. I Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time- scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. . Sub-networks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1, CONTRACTOR or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. . Principal events of activity. I Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 4, Early and late start dates. 5, Early and late finish dates. 6. Activity duration in workdays. , Total float or slack time. . Average size of workforce. F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. I Changes in early and late finish dates. 4, Changes in activity durations in workdays. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0132 00-PAGE 7 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 5. Changes in the critical path. b. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. 2.5 CONTRACT TIME A. Contract time cannot be changed by the submission of progress changes. Contract time can only be modified by approved Change Order. 2.6 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. Equipment at Project site. 3, Material deliveries. 4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 5� Accidents. b. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. T Meter readings and similar recordings. . Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Services connected and disconnected. 10. Equipment or system tests and startups. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0132 00-PAGE 8 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to ENGINEER, OWNER, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by CONTRACTOR with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0132 00-PAGE 9 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0132 00-PAGE 10 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 0132 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final completion construction photographs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or stage of construction of structure or area. Include same label information as corresponding set of photographs. B. Construction Photographs: Submit two (2) USB Flash drives each containing a complete set of digital image files within seven days of taking photographs in addition to submitting a copy to eBuilder. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.5 COORDINATION A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities, including temporary lighting required to produce clear,well-lit photographs without obscuring shadows. 1.6 USAGE RIGHTS A, Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to OWNER for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPEG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 10.0 mega pixels, and at an image resolution of up to 3072 by 2304 pixels, capable of producing 8 x 10 photo reproductions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A� Photographer: A commercial photographer or a member of the CONTRACTOR'S staff may PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0132 33-PAGE 1 OF 2 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 take the initial, monthly, and final progress photographs. I General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field,and that are in focus,to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-ROM or USB Flash drive in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to ENGINEER. D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction,take color photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by ENGINEER. Preconstruction photographs must be submitted to OWNER prior to the first application for payment. 1, Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take a minimum of ten (10) photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. S. Take photographs of existing facilities either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. E. Additional Photographs: ENGINEER may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to periodic photographs specified. 1. Three days notice will be given,where feasible. 2. In emergency situations,take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. S. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. C. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit bid items. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. f, Owner's request for special publicity photographs. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0132 33-PAGE 2 OF 2 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 2. Division 1 Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data"for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. Division 1 Section 0178 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Division 1 Section 0179 00 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. S. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A� Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires ENGINEER'S responsive action. I Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require ENGINEER'S responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing,testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that requires sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. ENGINEER reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 0132 00 "Construction Progress Documentation"for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0133 00-PAGE 1 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on ENGINEER'S receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 21 business days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. ENGINEER will advise CONTRACTOR when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 21 business days for review of each resubmittal. U. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. . Provide a space approximately on label or beside title block to record CONTRACTOR'S review markings (green in color). 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b, Date. C. Name and address of ENGINEER. d, Name and address of CONTRACTOR. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number shall be by means of a specification number, a chronological order, and a letter suffices to indicate number of times submitted. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a hyponym and then a sequential number (e.g., 33 05 61-01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another hyponym (e.g., 33 05 61-01- A). 2) Operational and Maintenance Manuals submitted shall be identified with the same number as its corresponding equipment submittal. (e.g., 22 14 29-DRAFT), indicates preliminary O&M Manual for equipment submitted under Section 22 14 29. i, Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate. I. Other necessary identification. E. Deviations from Contract Documents: CONTRACTOR shall highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations (green in color) from the Contract Documents on submittals. Requests for deviation shall be by Contractor's Modification Request in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions. F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0133 00-PAGE 2 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 ENGINEER observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. G, Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit submittals per City of Corpus Christi E-Builder. ENGINEER will return submittals,without review, if received from sources other than Contractor. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. a. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "REVIEWED." 4. For resubmittals, Contractor shall provide the entire and complete submittal for project documentation. If the contractor provides only the portions required by the previous shop drawing review,then the engineer may elect to return the submittal without review. L Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors,suppliers, fabricators, installers, and authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Ji Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating"REVIEWED" or "Furnish As Corrected." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. I Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2, Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 1 When pre-printed catalog information is submitted, clearly identified item to be submitted with arrow or other mark. Catalog information not marked clearly shall be returned. 4. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C, Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. f- Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0133 00-PAGE 3 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 i, Testing by recognized testing agency. 5. Number of Copies: Submit Product Data electronically in the City of Corpus Christi E- Builder. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of ENGINEER'S CAD Drawings is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a, Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C„ Fabrication and installation drawings. d, Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e„ Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g, Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. L Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. I. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. m, Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field- installed wiring. n. Electrical requirements. 0. Limits of or range of operation. p. Performance curves. qi,, When multiple products or materials are allowed, CONTRACTOR shall clearly indicate which product or material is being used at each location throughout the project. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit Shop Drawings electronically in the City of Corpus Christi E- Builder. In addition, submit two hard copies to ENGINEER. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. Original hard copies must be provided for color selection or items with various finishes. Electronic submittals are not acceptable. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0133 00-PAGE 4 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 b, Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 1 Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures, and patterns available. a, Number of Samples: Submit three full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern,texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. ENGINEER will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to,the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color,texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. ENGINEER will retain one Sample set; CONTRACTOR will retain one Sample Set; remainder will be returned to the vendor/supplier. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. 1. Number of Copies: Submit one electronic product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 0132 00 "Construction Progress Documentation." G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in the 00 70 00 General Conditions. H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in 00 70 00 General Conditions. I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. 1. Number of Copies: Submit one electronic copy of the subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A� General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit per City of Corpus Christi E-Builder, unless otherwise indicated. ENGINEER will not return copies. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0133 00-PAGE 5 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. An officer shall sign certificates and certifications, or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements." I Coordination Drawings: As required, comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 0132 00 "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on American Welding Society forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and,where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. F Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Ji Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. M, Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0133 00-PAGE 6 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 Ni Operational and Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." O� Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. P. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations,guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. C. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. . Summary of installation procedures being followed,whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 1 Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. R. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. S, Construction Photographs and Videotapes: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 0132 33 "Photographic Documentation." T. Safety Data Sheets (SDS): Submit information directly to OWNER; do not submit to ENGINEER. 1. ENGINEER will not review submittals that include SIDS and will return them for resubmittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of CONTRACTOR by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to ENGINEER. P. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit per City of Corpus Christi E-Builder, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, licensed in the State of Texas,for each product and system specifically assigned to CONTRACTOR to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0133 00-PAGE 7 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in each submittal and shall insure the values, material, equipment, or method of work shall be as described. I CONTRACTOR shall insure there is no conflict with other submittals and shall notify ENGINEER of each case where a conflict may occur. C. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp (green in color) before submitting to ENGINEER. [ , Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp (green in color). Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of CONTRACTOR'S approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ENGINEER'S ACTION A. General: ENGINEER will not review submittals that do not bear CONTRACTOR'S approval stamp and will return them without action. I Action Submittals: ENGINEER will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. ENGINEER will either stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, or use the Shop Drawing Review Comments Form to indicate the action taken for each submittal as follows: 1. REVIEWED a. CONTRACTOR may incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal. 2. FURNISH AS CORRECTED a. CONTRACTOR may incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal, in accordance with ENGINEER'S notations. I REVISE AND RESUBMIT a. Make corrections or obtain missing portions and resubmit. 4. REJECTED a, Contractor may not incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal. C. Informational Submittals: ENGINEER will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. ENGINEER will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D, Partial submittals are not acceptable,will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0133 00-PAGE 8 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. 3.3 SUPPLEMENTS A. Forms are provided using an electronic format provided by OWNER. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0133 00-PAGE 9 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 THIS PAGE IS LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0133 00-PAGE 10 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. R. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services to not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1, Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2, Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit CONTRACTOR'S other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Provisions of this Section do not limit requirements for CONTRACTOR to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by ENGINEER, OWNER, or authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. R. Related Sections include the following: 1, Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures" 2. All other Contract Document sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 40 00-PAGE 1 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by ENGINEER. C. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. D. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. E, Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. F. Independent Testing Agency: An entity engaged by separate contract with the CONTRACTOR and approved by the OWNER to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. The terms Independent Testing Laboratory and Independent Testing Agency shall have equivalent meaning. C, Testing Agency: An entity engaged by the CONTRACTOR to perform specific tests, inspections, or both identified as the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility by the Contract Documents. Testing Laboratory shall mean the same as Testing Agency. H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: CONTRACTOR or another entity engaged by CONTRACTOR as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1, Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter", must perform certain construction activities. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of the corresponding generic name. I. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0140 00-PAGE 2 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS & General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to ENGINEER for a decision before proceeding. B, Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to ENGINEER for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 SUBMITTALS & Qualification Data: For Testing Agencies specified in Paragraph 1.6 "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE & General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D, Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E, Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0140 00-PAGE 3 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Laboratory facilities, including personnel, and equipment, utilized shall meet the criteria detailed in ASTM E329 "Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing", ASTM D3666 "Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials," and ASTM D3740 "Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction." 2. Testing Agency shall be accredited by the American Association of Laboratory Accreditation (AALA), National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), NVLAP, the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)), or other nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 3. Comply with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL & Owner Responsibilities: The OWNER is required by law (Governmental Code Title 10, Subtitle F, Chapter 2269, Subchapter B, Section 2269.058) to provide quality-control services using an Independent Testing Agency. The CONTRACTOR will engage and pay for a qualified Independent Testing Agency to perform these services. OWNER to approve Independent Testing Agency. 1. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be paid by the CONTRACTOR. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0140 00-PAGE 4 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 2, The OWNER shall provide field and laboratory services in connection with verification surveying, geotechnical analysis and construction materials testing required by separate contract with an Independent Testing Agency or other consultant. OWNER to approve of Independent Testing Agency or other consultant. Such work includes but is not limited to the following: a, Testing of concrete mix designs, design of asphalt mixtures, lime stabilization of subgrade, flowable mix design, and related design parameter determinations. b. Determination of soil test for classifications of on-site and off-site borrow materials, soil densities and moisture determination of subgrade and embankment materials, cement or lime stabilization of subgrade, and other related testing required during construction. c. Weld inspection, coating inspections, torque requirements for steel erection, and other non-destructive testing required by the Contract Documents. d. Vacuum and pressure testing of pipelines, manholes, and related work, including disinfection testing of potable water lines and CCTV of lines directed by the Contract Documents. e. All inspection and testing work not specifically stated to be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility. f. Verification elevation of final constructed grades, basin elevations (top of walls, finished floors, and weir elevations) to confirm proper construction and critical hydraulics. 3, Where quality-control services are indicated as OWNER'S responsibility, the independent testing agency or other consultant shall be required by contract with the OWNER to prepare certified written reports to be submitted in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures" for each quality- control service. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Only such tests and inspections that are explicitly assigned to the CONTRACTOR shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, the OWNER shall provide both the quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform the following quality-control services. 1. Where services are specifically indicated as CONTRACTOR'S responsibility, PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 40 00-PAGES OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. CONTRACTOR shall not employ same entity engaged for Independent Testing as the OWNER approved, unless agreed to in writing by OWNER. 2, Notify Testing Agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3, Where quality-control services are specifically indicated as CONTRACTOR'S responsibility, the selected Testing Agency shall prepare certified written reports to be submitted by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting desired by CONTRACTOR and not required by the Contract Documents are CONTRACTOR'S responsibility. S, Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they are so direct. 6. The CONTRACTOR shall provide construction surveying required to construct the improvements as depicted on the plans. C, Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures." D, Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were CONTRACTOR'S responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction of replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. Should laboratory services provided by the OWNER approved Independent Testing Agency under Paragraph 1.7 A of this Section indicate the work does not meet Contract Document requirements, the cost of any testing or surveying shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR per Section 00 70 00 "General Conditions". The testing or surveying services required shall be performed by the Independent Testing Agency or other consultant under separate contract with the CONTRACTOR and approved by the OWNER. E, Independent Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. The Independent Testing Agency shall: 1. Notify ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR promptly of irregularities or deficiencies PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0140 00-PAGE 6 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2, Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in- situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, distribution as indicated, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service in accordance with Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for each quality-control service. S. Not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. . Not perform any duties of CONTRACTOR. P. Associated Services: CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with all agencies, whether under contract with the OWNER or CONTRACTOR, performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify all agencies, whether under contract with the OWNER or CONTRACTOR, sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2, Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3, Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. S. Delivery of samples to testing agencies as applicable. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. C. Coordination: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0140 00-PAGE 7 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2, Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to ENGINEER. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for ENGINEER'S reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C, Repair and protection are CONTRACTOR'S responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0140 00-PAGE 8 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 0153 30 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This special specification governs bypass pumping of wastewater. The work covered by this item consists of bypass pumping operations in order to temporarily reroute sewer flows to prevent a sanitary sewage overflow (SSO) and to provide adequate and reliable sewer flow at all times during construction,while the tasked scope of work is executed.This item includes all requirements for implementing a temporary pumping system for the purpose of diverting sewage flow around any construction-related activity to an approved reintroduction point within the sanitary sewer system.The CONTRACTOR shall minimize the health, safety, and regulatory risks by taking all reasonable measures to avoid an SSO. Therefore,the OWNER requires the CONTRACTOR to manage the flow of wastewater in a planned and proactive manner. Suction piping location vents with high-efficiency particulate arrestance (HEPA)filters will be required at manholes upstream and downstream of the project area. It is expected that sound attenuation be used to maintain construction noise/pump noises below 70 decibels (dB). B. The normal practice will be to setup bypass pumping at the beginning of each workday and pump around to allow for the day's wastewater construction activities. However, continuous bypass pumping for longer than one day may be necessary, depending on the CONTRACTOR's means and methods. With normal practice,the preferred suction point will be at a manhole or structure upstream of the relay section. Discharge of bypass must be into an existing manhole or lift station. C. The work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all labor, supervision,tools, equipment, appliances, and materials to perform all operations in connection with pumping of wastewater and wet weather flows around construction areas The purpose of bypass pumping is for the CONTRACTOR to provide a safe work environment free of flowing wastewater,to prevent wastewater overflows, and provide reliable wastewater service at all times.The CONTRACTOR shall maintain wastewater flow in the construction area in order to prevent back-up and/or overflow into upstream pipe segments and laterals, adjacent ditches, storm sewers, and waterways. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Bypass pumping is the installation and operation of bulkheads, plugs, hoses, piping, pumps, and reliable power for pumping to maintain wastewater flow and prevent backup and overflow. 2. Bypass pumping provides continuous wastewater service to the users while maintenance or construction operations are in progress by diverting flow when necessary around the construction location and pumping it to a downstream manhole, lift station, or treatment unit. 3. A sanitary sewer surcharge is herein defined as any bypassed flows entering the manhole or structure (above the crown of the pipe) due to lapses in the CONTRACTOR's Bypass Pumping Plan (BPP). PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0153 30-PAGE 1 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SEPTEMBER 2025 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Special Coordination Requirements 1. The CONTRACTOR shall report any bypass pumping activities not included in the submitted plan to the ENGINEER prior to proceeding with these activities. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall cease bypass pumping operations when directed by the ENGINEER or OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall perform leakage and pressure tests of the bypass pumping discharge piping using clean water prior to actual operation.The ENGINEER will be given a 24-hour notice prior to testing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. For all projects requiring bypass pumping,the CONTRACTOR shall submit a bypass pumping plan (BPP). The BPP shall be submitted a minimum of two weeks prior to commencing any portion of the proposed scope of work. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a BPP which includes a written description and exhibit for implementation and sequencing of bypass pumping for review and approval by the ENGINEER and OWNER prior to installation of the bypass system.The plan shall include sufficient detail to show the location, number and size of pumps,the number, location, size, and type of hoses and/or rigid piping, and the location of the downstream discharge. Show any special features where pipes or hoses cross roadways, such as temporary trenches, support bridges, etc. A plan for each line segment(s), structure(s) or treatment unit(s) around which flows are being bypassed is required.The plan must be signed and sealed by a Professional ENGINEER licensed in the State of Texas, and shall include but not be limited to details of the following: a. A cover letter containing the following information: 1) The Project Name and location 2) The name and address of the CONTRACTOR 3) Contact information of the CONTRACTOR's project manager, superintendent, foreman/supervisor, safety professional, etc. 4) A description and location of the planned bypass pumping work to be performed 5) Emergency "24/7" contact information for the bypass pumping subcontractor, if applicable. Make sure to include the name, phone number, and title of the person(s) onsite responsible for the bypass pumping operation. 6) The name, phone number,title, and signature of the person preparing the BPP. b. Staffing plan including name and qualifications for on-site operators.Trained bypass pumping personnel (pump operator) shall be present during the entire bypass operation. Logs shall be maintained by the bypass pumping personnel. Submit bypass pumping personnel qualifications for agency review and approval. C. Staging areas for pumps including a schematic showing the arrangement and PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 53 30-PAGE 2 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SEPTEMBER 2025 layout of the pumping and bypassing facilities at various stages in the work. d. Sewer plugging method and types of plugs. e. A description of how the maximum amount of sewer flows to be bypassed was obtained including calculations for selection of bypass pump and pipe size(s) based on wastewater flows.The maximum velocity in the bypass pumping pipes shall be 10 feet/second. f. Length, size, material, location, and method of installation of suction piping. g. Length, size, material, location, method of installation and location of discharge piping. h. Pump manufacturer model and pump curve showing operating range. i. Calculations of static lift,friction losses, and flow velocity (pump curves showing pump operating range shall be submitted). j. Location of engine generator(one plus backup). k. Fuel tank storage with sufficient capacity to operate the engines for four (4) days continuously. I. Containment pad for engine generators. M. Method of protecting discharge manholes or structures from erosion, damage, and unauthorized entry. n. Method of noise control for each pump and generator, and their expected decibel levels. o. Any temporary pipe supports and anchoring, if required. p. Any vehicular ramps for road crossing if required. q. Information on a secondary source of water for self-priming pumps. r. Schedule for installation and maintenance of bypass pumping lines. S. Valves and header to operate bypass pumping plus back-up pump when needed without removing primary pump before starting back-up pump(s). t. Clear photographs of the manholes, lift stations, or treatment units proposed to be used for suction and discharge. U. Wet weather event procedures. V. Emergency Plan detailing procedures to be followed in the event that any portion of the bypass operation fails and causes either surcharging or discharge. This plan must include the containment, notification, and equipment failure procedures. W. Schedule for bypass pumping operations, including dates and durations for each sequence. Indicate if bypass pumping will take place outside normal work hours. X. Protection method for existing utilities. y. A Traffic Control Plan that pertains solely to the bypass pumping operations, if applicable. CONTRACTOR shall maintain pedestrian and vehicular traffic and comply with ADA regulations for access to all residential and commercial property unless written approval is otherwise obtained from the property OWNER allowing for reduced access. Z. Date and time of BPP testing prior to pipeline work commencing at the peak PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 S3 30-PAGE 3 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 OS37-036-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SEPTEMBER 2025 flow time. B. Informational Submittals 1. Qualifications Statement a. CONTRACTOR shall submit a Certificate of Compliance signed and sealed by the CONTRACTOR's ENGINEER that the bypass pumping plan meets the requirements of this specification 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications:The CONTRACTOR or SUBCONTRACTOR performing the bypass pumping shall have a minimum of 5 projects with the maximum pumped flow of this project and equal in scope and complexity within the last 10 years. 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. The bypass pumping systems shall allow for the conveyance of each lift station's firm capacity at a minimum. Based on available data provided by the Owner's Master Plan,the anticipated site conditions at each of the lift stations which require bypass pumping is as follows: 1. Laguna Shores Lift Station firm capacity:4,400 GPM =6.3 MGD 2. People's Street T Head Lift Station firm capacity:480 GPM =0.72 MGD 3. Lawrence Street T Head Lift Station firm capacity: 480 GPM =0.72 MGD 4. Yacht Club in Cooper's Alley L-Head Lift Station firm capacity:480 GPM =0.72 MGD 5. Clarkwood South Lift Station firm capacity: 1,100 GPM = 1.58 MGD 6. Highway 9 Lift Station firm capacity: 1,400 GPM = 2.02 MGD 7. Cole Park Lift Station firm capacity: 350 GPM =0.5 MGD 8. Country Club Lift Station firm capacity: 5,500 GPM =7.92 MGD 9. Military/Jester Lift Station firm capacity: 2,000 GPM = 2.9 MGD 10. Waldron Lift Station firm capacity:4,000 GPM = 5.8 MGD 11. Sugar Tree Lift Station firm capacity: 1,300 GPM = 1.87 MGD B. All other locations requiring bypass pumping for construction,the CONTRACTOR shall perform flow calculations assuming a full-pipe flow. Calculations must be submitted to the ENGINEER for review and approval prior to beginning bypass pumping setup. C. If the CONTRACTOR sees flows exceeding those provided, CONTRACTOR must immediately notify the ENGINEER. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary pumping equipment, piping, and all other necessary appurtenances in order to maintain adequate and reliable sanitary sewer flow in the sewer system (excluding manholes) at all times during construction. All materials, equipment, etc., must be in good condition, and should not have visible damage such as cracks, holes, foreign material, blisters, etc. B. The pump and bypass pumping lines shall be of adequate capacity and size to handle peak PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 53 30-PAGE 4 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SEPTEMBER 2025 wet weather flows as shown in this specification. All piping,joints, and accessories shall be designed to withstand at least twice the maximum system pressure, or a minimum of 50 psi, whichever is greater. C. Internal and or external bypass pumping operations shall use 100% leak proof pipe such as PVC or HDPE. Pipe shall be restrained as necessary to prevent joint separation. In order to prevent accidental spillage of flows all discharge systems shall be temporarily constructed of rigid pipe with positive, restrained joints. Under no circumstances will aluminum "irrigation" type piping or glued PVC pipe be allowed. Discharge hose will only be allowed in short sections and by specific permission from the ENGINEER. D. Pumps shall be self-priming or submersible electric, in good working order,with a working pressure gauge on the discharge. A back-up pump of the same capacity as the primary pump shall be maintained on site at all times to be used in the event that the primary pump fails. Back-up pumps shall be on-line, isolated from the primary system by a valve. No wastewater shall be allowed to drain or stand in earthen sump pits. E. Any wastewater back-ups and/or overflows as a result of inadequate equipment are the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. F. The CONTRACTOR shall be required to have all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to complete the bypass pumping on the job site prior to isolating the wastewater main, manhole, lift station, or treatment unit and beginning bypass pumping. G. Extra Materials: 1. Spare parts for pumps and piping shall be kept on site. 2. Adequate hoisting equipment for each pump and accessories shall be maintained on the site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLER A. It is the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to locate and identify all existing sewer lines and services and to provide all labor, material, equipment,techniques and methods to bypass pump as necessary for construction methods and to monitor the effectiveness of this installed system and its effect on adjacent facilities. B. Operate, maintain, and modify the system(s) as required to conform to this specification. Upon completion of the Construction, CONTRACTOR shall remove the system(s). C. Assume sole responsibility for bypass pumping systems and for all loss or damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures and any spills or resultant damage caused by his operation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The following options have been reviewed and discussed as viable options for performing the bypass pumping operation for the existing lift stations.The CONTRACTOR may use one of these options, or submit a different plan for review and approval by the ENGINEER: 1. Installation shall be in accordance with the bypass pumping plan approved by ENGINEER and OWNER and the manufacturer-provided equipment installation guidelines and recommendations. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 53 30-PAGE 5 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SEPTEMBER 2025 3.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Maintain sewage flow to prevent backup of sewage in the collection system with the goal of preventing an overflow onto streets,yards and unpaved areas or into buildings, adjacent ditches, storm sewers, and waterways. Do not divert sewage outside of the sanitary sewer system.The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary steps to prevent flooding of public or private property. Maintaining flow inside the existing pipe during construction is required. B. The Contractor shall have full time (24-hour), onsite qualified pump personnel including supervision for monitoring the entire bypass installation while it is in operation.The entire length of bypass piping shall be walked and inspected hourly to monitor for leaks. High- level alarm notification to pagers or cell phones shall not eliminate this requirement. C. Remove manhole sections or make connections to existing sewer and construct temporary bypass pumping structures at access location as required to provide adequate suction conduit. D. Plugging or blocking of sewage flows shall incorporate a primary and secondary plugging device. Plugs shall be redundantly tethered to ensure they are not lost within the piping system. When plugging or blocking is no longer needed for performance and acceptance of work, it is to be removed in a manner that permits the sewage flow to slowly return to normal without surge, to prevent surcharging or causing other major disturbances downstream. E. When working inside manhole or force main,the CONTRACTOR shall exercise caution and comply with OSHA requirements when working in the presence of sewer gases, combustible or oxygen-deficient atmospheres, and confined spaces. F. Any time the bypass pump(s) are operating, an experienced operator shall be on site to monitor the operation: adjust pump speed,valves, etc.; maintain and make minor repairs to the system; and report problems. G. Where work requires bypassing beyond working hours,the CONTRACTOR shall operate bypass pumping and man the system for twenty-four hours per day. H. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that no damage will be caused to private property as a result of bypass pumping operations. Access to adjacent properties and treatment facilities shall be maintained at all times including driveways. Ramps, steel plates, or other methods shall be employed by the CONTRACTOR to facilitate traffic over surface piping and hose. High traffic areas may require alternate methods to maintain access. I. CONTRACTOR is responsible for retrieving any bypass pumping equipment, including temporary plugs,that enter the system. J. CONTRACTOR shall complete the Work as quickly as possible and satisfactorily pass all tests, inspections, and repair all deficiencies prior to discontinuing bypass pumping operations and returning flow to the sewer manhole or line segment. K. During bypass pumping, do not allow sewage to be leaked, dumped, or spilled in or onto any area outside of the existing sanitary sewer system. Spill protection and secondary containment is required for the bypass pumping system (pumps and piping), including diapers at all pipe joints. L. In the event of accidental spill or overflow, immediately stop the discharge and take action PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 53 30-PAGE 6 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SEPTEMBER 2025 to clean up and disinfect the spill. Promptly notify the OWNER so that required reporting can be made to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) by the OWNER. M. In the event of accidental spill or overflow,the CONTRACTOR shall compensate the OWNER for the cost of any fines levied as the result of a spill or unauthorized discharge.The CONTARCTOR is also responsible for damages that may have occurred to public or private property including cleaning, disinfection, and other corrections to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER at no cost to the OWNER. N. CONTRACTOR shall not intentionally damage, alter, or remove portions of the existing sewer system structures for the purpose of installing a bypass pumping system without specific approval from the ENGINEER. If a structure is damaged, it shall be reconstructed or replaced to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER at no additional cost to the OWNER. O. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all damage that results directly or indirectly from the interference of storm water runoff to bypassing equipment, piping, and/or appurtenances. P. When bypass pumping operations are complete, piping shall be drained into the sanitary sewer prior to disassembly, and all pumps and lines shall be flushed with clean water until all discharge is clear. After the receipt of written permission from ENGINEER, remove piping, restore property to pre-construction condition and restore pavement. 3.4 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall perform leakage and pressure tests of the bypass pumping discharge piping using clean water prior to actual operation.The ENGINEER will be given 24 hours' notice prior to testing. 2. For any bypass operations proposed to be conducted during normal business hours only (8 am to 5 pm), a test run of at least two (2) hours must be satisfactorily performed, prior to commencing any construction work. For a bypass pumping operation that will be required to run continuously (24 hours) and over multiple days, a 24-hour test run must be satisfactorily performed prior to commencing any construction work. In both cases,the Inspector must provide acknowledgment first. CONTRACTOR shall provide both a strobe light type high level alarm, as well as alarm notification to their pager(s) and/or cell phones, as well as other appointed personnel to be identified by the OWNER, and insure adequate alarm notification is attained prior to actual startup of the test period. 3. During the testing period,the CONTRACTOR shall install a Float Monitoring System in the upstream manhole and/or pipe to confirm that the bypass pumping flow data shown in their BPP remains applicable. The float monitoring system shall remain in the manhole and/or pipe for the duration of the bypass operation. The data collected during the test and duration of the bypass operation shall be provided to the OWNER for evaluation and recording. It will be required of the CONTRACTOR to have personnel remain onsite at the flow monitoring system in order to continuously record (every 30 minutes)the flows during both the test and actual bypass pumping periods. 4. Any failure of equipment, or activities associated with the bypass pumping operations contributing to either a surcharge or SSO, shall be deemed a failed test.The test shall PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 53 30-PAGE 7 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SEPTEMBER 2025 then be stopped and any necessary cleanup or reporting efforts performed. The BPP will need to be revised, resubmitted, and acknowledged prior to the test initiating again. Any effort by the OWNER or other third parties to mitigate damages resulting from any surcharging or SSOs shall be the direct and sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.This includes any related fines, penalties,or damages. B. Inspection: 1. CONTRACTOR shall inspect bypass pumping system every two hours to ensure that the system is working correctly. C. Maintenance Service: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the temporary pumping system is properly maintained and a responsible operator shall be on hand at all times when pumps are operating. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 S3 30-PAGE 8 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 OS37-036-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 0170 00 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A, This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Construction layout. 2, Field engineering and surveying. General installation of products. Progress cleaning. 5., Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7, Correction of the Work. 8. Basin dewatering and cleaning. 9. Workmanship. 10 Firearms. 11, Handling materials not approved. 12, Salvaged material. 13, Archeological discoveries. 14, Endangered species. 15. Blasting and burning. 1& Pipe closure and buoyancy of structures. 1.7, OSHA Standards R. Related Sections include the following: 1. None. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A, Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. B, Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials,for hazardous waste disposal. C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. D. Final Property Survey: Submit two copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A, Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 70 00-PAGE 1 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 PART 2 -PRODUCTS—NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A, Existing Conditions and Utilities: When appropriate,the existence and location of site improvements, underground and other utilities,and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction,verify the location and points of connection of utility services. I Before construction,verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer,storm sewer,and water-service piping;and underground electrical services. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. I Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates,areas,and conditions,with Installer or Applicator present where indicated,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. I Examine rough-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. I Examine walls,floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move,or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines,services,or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. R. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction,verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. G. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D� Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents,submit a request for information to ENGINEER. Include a detailed description of problem encountered,together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A� Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work,verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify ENGINEER promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 70 00-PAGE 2 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3, Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb,of every major element as the Work progresses. 5, Notify ENGINEER when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,grading,fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes,and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations,column grids,and floor levels,including those required for mechanical and electrical work.Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys,weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by ENGINEER. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING , Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points,and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. R. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations,with horizontal and vertical data,on Project Record Documents. C. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features(real property)for Project. Include on the survey a certification,signed by land surveyor,that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. I Where space is limited,install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes,ducts,and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D� Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produces harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 70 00-PAGE 3 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 1, Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by ENGINEER. 2, Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings,templates,and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,concrete inserts, anchor bolts,and items with integral anchors,that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING P, General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning forjoint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 1 Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80'F. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally,according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 1 Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area,as appropriate. D� Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F, Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. During handling and installation,clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. Limiting Exposures:Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful,dangerous,damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A, Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation in accordance with Section 0175 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup" and the following: 1. Remove malfunctioning components, replace with new components,and retest. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 70 00-PAGE 4 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. 3, Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A, Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A, Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces,touching up with matching materials,and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. G. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped,scratched,and broken glass or reflective surfaces. 3.10 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENT/CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PLANS A, CONTRACTOR shall develop and implement Hazardous Environment/Confined Space Entry Plans for this Project. Plans shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for record purposes prior to the pre- construction conference. Plans shall include all local,state and federal requirements for entrance to and working in hazardous environments and confined spaces and shall include a written safety plan for the Project. B. CONTRACTOR shall have a safety officer present at the jobsite whenever the CONTRACTOR'S activities require entering or working in a hazardous environment or confined space. 3.11 PLAN OF ACTION A. CONTRACTOR shall prepare a detailed,written plan of action covering all shutdowns, material deliveries, confined space/hazardous environment entries, plant protection system,construction sequence for major facilities and modifications to existing facilities,trench/excavation protection, for review and coordination with the OWNER and ENGINEER at the pre-construction conference. The pre-construction conference will be held prior to beginning construction activities. 3.12 BASIN DEWATERING AND CLEANING A, The CONTRACTOR shall clean basins, pipelines and equipment as specified and,when necessary to complete the work. No additional payment will be made for such work. Washdown water shall be contained and disposed of properly. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 70 00-PAGE 5 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 3.13 WORKMANSHIP A. Specifications contain detailed instructions and descriptions of the major items of construction and workmanship necessary for building and completing the various elements of the Project. The Specifications are intended to be written so that only first class workmanship and finish of the best grade and quality will result. The fact that these Specifications may fail to be so complete as to cover all details will not relieve the CONTRACTOR of full responsibility for providing a completed project of high quality,first class finish and appearance and satisfactory for operation, all within the apparent intent of the Plans and Specifications. 3.14 FIREARMS A. Neither the Contractor nor any of his employees shall be allowed to carry firearms on the Project, either on their persons or within their automobiles. Any violation of this requirement will result in the permanent removal from the Project of the employee committing the violation. 3.15 HANDLING MATERIALS NOT APPROVED A, The CONTRACTOR shall remove from the site any materials found to be damaged,and any materials not meeting the specifications. These materials shall be removed promptly, unless the ENGINEER will accept the materials after repairing. Materials found to be damaged,or not acceptable to the ENGINEER,shall be removed. Examination before installation shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from any responsibility to furnish good quality materials. 3.16 SURPLUS AND SALVAGED MATERIAL A. Surplus equipment or material,which is removed by the CONTRACTOR as specified in the Drawings and Specifications,shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR.The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the disposal of salvage material offsite. R. Equipment and material designated to be salvage shall be transported by the CONTRACTOR to a location as directed by the Resident Project Representative. 3.17 ARCHEOLOGICAL DISCOVERIES A, No activity,which may affect a State Archeological Landmark, is authorized until the OWNER has complied with provisions of the Antiquities Code of Texas. The OWNER has previously coordinated with the appropriate agencies and impacts to known cultural or archeological deposits have been avoided or mitigated. However,the CONTRACTOR may encounter unanticipated cultural or archeological deposits during construction. B. In the event the Contractor discovers any artifacts,cultural materials, or suspected cultural remains during construction,the Contractor shall contact the Resident Project Representative and American Archaeology Group LLC(512-843-0135) immediately.Any construction in the immediate vicinity of the suspected cultural deposits shall cease until they can be examined. Contractor shall in no instance make contact with any parties other than those referenced above.Contractor shall only restart construction activities in the vicinity of the suspected cultural deposit upon receipt of written notice from ENGINEER or OWNER after the issues have been resolved. 3.18 ENDANGERED SPECIES A. No activity is authorized that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence,or a threatened, or endangered species as listed,or proposed for listing, under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA),and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 70 00-PAGE 6 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 R. If a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction,the CONTRACTOR shall immediately cease work in the area of the encounter and notify the Resident Project Representative, who will immediately implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. These actions shall include reporting the encounter to the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service and the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department,obtaining any necessary approvals or permits to enable the continuation of work, or implement other mitigate actions. C. The CONTRACTOR shall not resume construction in the area of the encounter until authorized to do so by the Resident Project Representative. 3.19 BLASTING AND BURNING A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. B, Burning and Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.Trees and brush removed shall be shredded onsite with disposal off-site. 3.20 PIPE CLOSURE AND BUOYANCY OF STRUCTURES A, At the end of each working day,the CONTRACTOR shall plug the ends of all exposed pipeline to prevent any material or objects from entering the pipeline. B. The CONTRACTOR shall anchor all pipelines and structures to prevent their flotation should rain occur prior to the completion of backfilling to proposed final grade. 3.21 OSHA STANDARDS A. All work performed under this Contract shall meet the applicable requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to become familiar with the provisions of regulations published by OSHA in the Federal Register and to perform all of the responsibilities thereunder. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to see that the Project is constructed in accordance with OSHA regulations and to indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from any penalties resulting from the CONTRACTOR's failure to so perform. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 70 00-PAGE 7 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 70 00-PAGE 8 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 0175 25 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. SUPPLIER'S scope of work to be performed under this specification shall be to support installation,testing and startup of all supplied equipment systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Service of SUPPLIER'S/MANUFACTURER's Representative 1. SUPPLIER's/MANUFACTURER'S contracted cost for the equipment shall include the cost of furnishing competent and experienced personnel who shall represent the manufacturers and shall assist the CONTRACTOR,when required,to renovate or install, adjust, and test the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation by the CONTRACTOR, SUPPLIER'S/MANUFACTURER'S personnel shall make all adjustments and tests required to prove that such equipment is in proper and satisfactory operating condition and shall instruct the OWNER'S representatives in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment or system. Training must be adequate and acceptable to OWNER'S representative. The preliminary Equipment O&M must be approved prior to start of training. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to ENGINEER, for review, start-up and test schedule a minimum of 60 days prior to commencing Work specified in this section. B. Submit to ENGINEER an electronic copy and a minimum of two (2) hard copies of field test data and test records for all equipment and systems. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FURNISH INITIAL LUBRICANTS AND OTHER CONSUMABLES A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install initial supply of oil,grease or other consumable required per SUPPLIER'S/MANUFACTURER'S instructions to startup,test and place into service the supplied equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING AND STARTUP PLAN A. Submit a plan that includes a schedule for testing and startup of all equipment and systems provided as part of the Work. Specific Tests for each piece of equipment are detailed in the Equipment Specification Section. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 7S 25-PAGE 1 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 OS37-036-01 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP SEPTEMBER 2025 B. Include in the startup plan: 1. Sequences. 2. Lock-out procedures and safety precautions. 3. Utility requirements. 4. Related items and piping which must be complete and the schedule for completion. 5. Instrumentation settings. 6. Operation Support C. SUPPLIER/MANUFACTURER shall provide a schedule and outline for training of OWNER's personnel. Equipment shall not be turned over to OWNER prior to training of OWNER's personnel. Specifically identify adjustment and maintenance items that must be done in initial 30-day period. 3.2 PREPARATION A. SUPPLIER/MANUFACTURER shall verify that the CONTRACTOR has performed the following work prior to testing and startup: 1. Complete equipment installation with controls, safety devices and auxiliary support systems necessary to start the equipment and verify that the equipment functions correctly under no load conditions. 2. Remove temporary bracing supports and other construction debris that may damage equipment. 3. Remove protective coatings and oils from new equipment used for protection during shipment and installation. 4. Flush and fill lubricated systems in equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. 5. On new equipment, install temporary connections and devices required to fill, operate, checkout and drain the system. 6. Check equipment for correct direction of rotation and freedom of moving parts. 7. Align equipment to Manufacturer's tolerances. 8. Check installation prior to start-up for conformance to Manufacturer's instructions. 9. Adjust or modify equipment to make equipment properly operational. 10. Correct any deficiencies or problems noted in Manufacturer's representative's installation reports. 11. Complete testing of related piping systems and furnish test reports to ENGINEER. 3.3 TESTING AND STARTUP A. SUPPLIER shall perform the following: 1. SUPPLIER/MANUFACTURER with CONTRACTOR assistance as required shall begin checkout,testing, and startup procedures after training of OWNER's personnel and approval by ENGINEER of testing and startup plan. SUPPLIER/MANUFACTURER'S installation report shall be submitted within 48 hours of startup. 2. Make final connections to equipment and complete the system installation necessary to apply the system loads to the equipment and verify the equipment functions correctly. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 75 25-PAGE 2 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP SEPTEMBER 2025 3. Perform all tests as required by the specifications prior to startup. 4. Start equipment according to manufacturer's instructions. 5. Place each piece of equipment in the system in operation until the entire system is functioning. 6. Operate the system through the design performance range consistent with available flows. Adjust, balance, and calibrate and, in general, check out the equipment, safety devices, controls, and process system to operate within the design conditions. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 75 25-PAGE 3 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 75 25-PAGE 4 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 0177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Final cleaning. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 13. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 0170 00 "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Section 0178 39 "Project Record Documentation" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 1 Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data"for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Section 0179 00 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 5. All other Contract Document sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list),the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise OWNER of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties,workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4, Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits,operating certificates, and similar releases. S. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. C. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to the location designated by OWNER. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to OWNER. Advise OWNER'S personnel of changeover in security provisions. . Complete startup testing of systems. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 77 00-PAGE 1 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise OWNER of changeover of other utilities. 1 . Submit changeover information related to OWNER'S occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 11 Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14, Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. P. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, ENGINEER will either proceed with inspection or notify CONTRACTOR of unfulfilled requirements. ENGINEER will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify CONTRACTOR of items, either on CONTRACTOR'S list or additional items identified by ENGINEER,which must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A, Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to the provisions in the Agreement Form. . Submit certified copy of ENGINEER'S Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by ENGINEER. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. a. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty, as applicable. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. I Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, ENGINEER will either proceed with inspection or notify CONTRACTOR of unfulfilled requirements. ENGINEER will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. C. The retainage and its interest earnings, if any, shall not be paid to the Contractor until the OWNER, and/or TWDB or other funding agency, has authorized a reduction in, or release of, PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 77 00-PAGE 2 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 retainage on the contract work. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three (3) copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. 13. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each Project site, equipment, structures, buildings and related facilities. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a, Clean Project site,yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C, Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,free of stains,films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g, Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 77 00-PAGE 3 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. L Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable,vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass,taking care not to scratch surfaces. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. 0. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps,globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs,and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. q, Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D� Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0177 00-PAGE 4 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 0178 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of systems and equipment. I Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Section 0170 00 "Execution Requirements" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Section 0178 39 "Project Record Documentation" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. All other Contract Documents for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 REFERENCES A� Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. I Definitions 1. Preliminary Data: Initial and subsequent submissions for ENGINEER'S review. 2. Final Data: ENGINEER accepted data, submitted as specified herein. 3. Maintenance Operation: As used on Maintenance Summary Form is defined to mean any routine operation required to ensure satisfactory performance and longevity of equipment. Examples of typical maintenance operations are lubrication, belt tensioning, adjustment of pump packing glands, and routine adjustments. 4o System: An organized collection of parts, equipment,or subsystems united by regular interaction. S. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. Instructional Manual: Equipment and Operating Data submitted prior to the testing and startup of the equipment, subsystem, or system. 7. Operation and Maintenance Data:The operation and maintenance data submitted to be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual for the Project. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 1 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SEPTEMBER 2025 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A� Sequencing and Scheduling 1. Equipment and System Data (Instructional manual): a, Preliminary Data: 1) Do not submit until ENGINEER has approved Shop Drawings. 2) Submit prior to shipment date. b, Final Data: Submit Instructional Manual Formatted data not less than 30 days prior to equipment or system field functional testing. Submit Compilation Formatted and Electronic Media Formatted data prior to Substantial Completion of Project. I Coordination 1. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A, Initial Submittal: Submit draft copy of each Operation and Maintenance Data (Manual) at least 60 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion in accordance with Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. ENGINEER will review and provide electronic comments on whether general scope and content of Manual is acceptable. 13. Final Submittal: Submit a copy of each Manual in final form at least 30 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. ENGINEER will review and return copy with comments in accordance with 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures". 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with ENGINEER'S comments. Submit an electronic copy of each corrected manual within 21 days of receipt of ENGINEER'S comments. 2. Provide a PDF and two (2) hardcopies of the final full operations and maintenance manual in accordance with 0133 00 " Submittal Procedures " and this specification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. I List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically or by treatment area as directed by ENGINEER. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system or by treatment area as directed by ENGINEER. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 2 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SEPTEMBER 2025 alphabetically in separate list. U. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: L Title page. 2. Table of contents. 1 Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 1 Name and address of OWNER. 4. Name, address, and telephone number of CONTRACTOR. 5. Name and address of ENGINEER. . Subcontractor, Supplier, Manufacturer, Installer, or Maintenance Contractor's name, address, and telephone number, as appropriate. a. Identify area of responsibility of each. b, Provide name and telephone number of local source of supply for parts, replacement, and service. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. [ , Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents,sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper;with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a, If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 3 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SEPTEMBER 2025 components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine,with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,VOLUME NO._OF_" , Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. C. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typed. d. Three-hole punch data for binding and composition; arrange printing so punched holes do not obliterate data. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4, Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch 20-POUND MINIMUM,white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a, If oversize drawings are necessary,fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts,fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 6. Electronic Media Format: a, Portable Document format(PDF) 1) After all preliminary data has been found to be acceptable, submit operational and maintenance data in PDF format on USB drive. 2) Files to be exact duplicates of accepted preliminary data. Arrange by specification Section number. Bookmark sections. 3) Include table of contents, section numbers, and page numbers for ease of navigation. 4) Include factory and field test reports and calibration certificates. ) Include warranty certificates from contractor and from manufacturer(s). 6) All copies shall be manufacturer original quality. Scanned and/or photocopies are not acceptable. 7) Files to by fully functional and viewable in most recent version of Adobe Acrobat. 8) Searchable with Table of Contents bookmarked to include sections,tables, figures, and appendices. 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS A, Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 4 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SEPTEMBER 2025 1, System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria. I Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8, Piped system diagrams. . Precautions against improper use. 10, License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. P. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 1 Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4, Equipment function. 5, Operating characteristics. . Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. S. Engineering data and tests. , Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 1 Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. S. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. S. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed and identifies color-coding where required for identification. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 5 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SEPTEMBER 2025 B. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross- reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. U. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A, Content: For each system,subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 1 Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. U. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 6 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SEPTEMBER 2025 maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 1 Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. E. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1, Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers'forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. C , Maintenance Service Contracts: If applicable, include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H, Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. U. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 7 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SEPTEMBER 2025 include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F, Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Section 0178 39 "Project Record Documents." G, Comply with Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. H, Maintenance Summary: 1, Compile individual Maintenance Summary Form for each applicable equipment item, respective unit or system and for components or sub-units. 2. Format: a, Use Maintenance Summary Form include with this Section as a guide. b. Use only 8-1/2 by 11-inch size paper. 1 Include detailed lubrication instructions and diagrams showing points to be greased or oiled, recommended type,grade, and temperature range of lubricants and frequency of lubrication. 4. Recommended Spare Parts: a. Data to be consistent with manufacturer's Bill of Materials/Parts List furnished with the Operation and Maintenance Data. b. "Unit" is the unit of measure for ordering part. C. "Quantity" is the number of units recommended. d. "Unit Cost" is the current purchase price. 3.2 DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Content for Architectural Products,Applied Materials, and Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data,giving full information on products: a. Catalog number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c, Information required for reordering special-manufactured products. 2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: a, Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 8 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SEPTEMBER 2025 b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to product. C. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. B. Content for Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: 1. Manufacturer's data,giving full information on products: a. Applicable standards. b. Chemical composition. C, Details of installation. 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. 3.3 SUPPLEMENTS A, Sample forms included after "End of Section" are considered part of this Section. 1. Maintenance Summary Form. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 9 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SEPTEMBER 2025 MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM PROJECT: CONTRACT NO: EQUIPMENT ITEM: MANUFACTURER: EQUIPMENT TAG NOS.: WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (Over 100 Pounds) NAME PLATE DATA (HP, Voltage, Speed, etc.): Manufacturer's Local Representative: Name: Telephone No. Address: Maintenance Operation Requirements Frequency Lubricant List briefly each maintenance operation required and refer to specific information in manufacturer's maintenance manual, if List frequency of each Refer by symbol to applicable. Also note tools needed for each maintenance operation. lubricant required. maintenance operation and safety considerations. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 10 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SEPTEMBER 2025 MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM (CONTINUED) LUBRICANT LIST Reference Symbol Mfgr Mfgr Mfgr List symbols used in maintenance List equivalent lubricants of several manufacturers requirements RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS FOR OWNER'S INVENTORY Part No. Description Unit Quantity Unit Price PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 11 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SEPTEMBER 2025 THIS PAGE IS LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 12 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 0178 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings (as-builts). 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Preselection Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Preselection Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. I Related Sections: 1. Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data"for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Remaining Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Submit an electronic set of marked-up full size redlined Record Prints with each Pay Application and at Project Close Out. B. Record Product Data: Submit an electronic copy of each Product Data submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A, Record Prints: CONTRACTOR shall maintain electronically one set of blue-or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1, Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity,to prepare the marked-up as-built Drawings. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b, Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings,whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 3, Mark record sets with red. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 78 39-PAGE 1 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification,where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each As-Built; include the designation "AS-BUILT DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Include identification on cover sheets. 2, Identification: As follows: a. Date. b, Designation "PROJECT AS-BUILT DRAWING." C. Name of CONTRACTOR. 2.2 RECORD DRAWINGS A. ENGINEER to prepare corrected CAD drawings. 1. Each sheet stamped "RECORD DRAWING'. 2. ENGINEER to submit to City of Corpus Christi. Confirm quantities with City of Corpus Christi prior to printing. Scanned and/or photocopies are not acceptable. a. One (1) searchable electronic PDF copy b, Up to three (3) half scale 11"x17" C, Two (2)full scale 22"x34" simplex printed and bound copies of the corrected CAD drawings. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A, Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Prior to Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and found or filed, ready for use and reference. Miscellaneous records include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Field records on excavations and foundations. 2. Field records on underground construction and similar work. 3. Surveys showing locations and elevations of underground lines. 4a Invert elevations of drainage pipes. 5. Surveys establishing building lines and levels. 6. Records of equipment testing, start-up, and operation. 7. Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products. . Batch mixing and bulk delivery tickets. 9e Documented qualifications of installation firms. M Inspections and certification of governing agencies. 11. Load and performance testing. 12, Results of pressure testing of lines. 1 . Final inspection and correction procedures. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 78 39-PAGE 2 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. 13. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for ENGINEER'S reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 78 39-PAGE 3 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 39-PAGE 4 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTATION SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 0179 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. . Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 1 Demonstration and training videotapes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program B. Demonstration and Training Videotapes 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: Field representatives shall be factory-employed personnel and have a minimum of two (2)years of experience with the operation of and training on this type of equipment. Sales representatives will only be considered acceptable service technicians if they have three (3)years of experience with the operation of and training on this type of equipment from the SUPPLIER being supplied and have started up 15 units of a similar size and type from the SUPPLIER.The field representative shall submit a resume for approval before startup assistance can be provided. C. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training. U. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by ENGINEER. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A� Submit copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates,times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module per Section 01 31 00"Project Management and Coordination." Include learning objective and outline for each training module. B, Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 79 00-PAGE 1 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include system and equipment descriptions,operating standards, regulatory requirements, equipment function, operating characteristics, limiting conditions, and performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review emergency, operations, and maintenance manuals; Project Record Documents; identification systems; warranties and bonds; and maintenance service agreements. 3. Emergencies: Include instructions on stopping; shutdown instructions; operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits; instructions on meaning of warnings,trouble indications, and error messages; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 4. Operations: Include startup, break-in, control, and safety procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; operating procedures for emergencies and equipment failure; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Adjustments: Include alignments and checking, noise,vibration, economy, and efficiency adjustments. . Troubleshooting: Include diagnostic instructions and test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include inspection procedures,types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, procedures for preventive and routine maintenance, and instruction on use of special tools. . Repairs: Include diagnosis, repair, and disassembly instructions; instructions for identifying parts; and review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTRUCTION A, Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules,to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between CONTRACTOR and OWNER for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct OWNER'S personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 1. Schedule training with OWNER,through ENGINEER,with at least twenty-one days' advance notice. 2. Provide two training sessions, one in the early morning and one in the late afternoon. D, Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a written performance-based test. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEOTAPES OR DVD'S A. OWNER may choose to videotape, or otherwise record,training sessions. SUPPLIER and PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 79 00-PAGE 2 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SEPTEMBER 2025 CONTRACTOR shall not limit the ability of OWNER to record training. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 79 00-PAGE 3 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SEPTEMBER 2025 THIS PAGE IS LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0179 00-PAGE 4 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 021020 SITE CLEARING AND STRIPPING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for clearing, grubbing and stripping of objectionable matter as required to complete the project, and shall include removing and disposing of trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from the project site. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The site shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter as indicated on the drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer or his designated representative. Tree stumps and roots shall be grubbed to a minimum depth of 2 feet below natural ground or 2 feet below base of subgrade, whichever is lower. Areas that underlie compacted backfill shall be stripped of all vegetation, humus and other objectionable matter encountered within the top six (6) inches of the soil. All material removed from the site under this operation shall become the Contractor's responsibility. The material shall be disposed of either at a disposal site indicated on the drawings or at a disposal site obtained by the Contractor. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, site clearing and stripping or clear right-of-way shall be measured by the acre. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary for removing, handling, and disposing of objectionable matter from the site as indicated above. 021020 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 021040 SITE GRADING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for backfill and grading of the site to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to site grading, the site shall be cleared in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 021020 "Site Clearing and Stripping". Unless specified otherwise on the drawings, the existing surface shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than six (6)inches. The loosened material shall be recompacted with fill required to bring the site to the required grades and elevations indicated on the plans. Fill shall be uniform as to material, density and moisture content. Fill shall be free of large clods, large rocks, organic matter, and other objectionable material. No fill that is placed by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated into a layer in that position; all such piles and windrows shall be moved by blading or similar method. All fill shall be placed in layers approximately parallel to the finish grade in layers not to exceed six (6) inches of uncompacted depth, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The fill shall be compacted to a density which approximates that of natural ground unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The Engineer may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction. All irregularities, depressions and soft spots that develop shall be corrected by the Contractor. Excess material from excavation, which is not incorporated into the site as fill, shall be become property of the Contractor and disposed of away from the job site, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, site grading shall not be measured for pay, but shall be considered subsidiary to other work. 021040 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 021080 REMOVING ABANDONED STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall provide for the demolition, removal and disposal of abandoned structures or portions of abandoned structures, as noted on the drawings, and shall include all excavation and backfilling necessary to complete the removal. The work shall be done in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. 2. METHOD OF REMOVAL Culverts or Sewers. Pipe shall be removed by careful excavation of all dirt on top and the sides in such manner that the pipe will not be damaged. Removal of sewer appurtenances shall be included for removal with the pipe. Those pipes which are deemed unsatisfactory for reuse by the Engineer may be removed in any manner the Contractor may select. Concrete Structures. Unwanted concrete structures or concrete portions of structures shall be removed to the lines and dimensions shown on the drawings, and these materials shall be disposed of as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Any portion of the existing structure outside of the limits designated for removal which is damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be restored to its original condition at the Contractor's entire expense. Explosives shall not be used in the removal of portions of the existing structure unless approved by the Engineer, in writing. Portions of the abandoned structure shall be removed to the lines and dimensions shown on the plans, and these materials shall be disposed of as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Any portion of the existing structure, outside of the limits designated for removal, damaged during the operations of the Contractor, shall be restored to its original condition entirely at the Contractor's expense. Explosives shall not be used in the removal of portions of the existing structure unless approved by the Engineer, in writing. Concrete portions of structures below the permanent ground line, which will not interfere in any manner with the proposed construction, may be left in place, but removal shall be carried at least five (5) feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off. Reinforcement shall be cut off close to the concrete. Steel Structures. Steel structures or steel portions of structures shall be dismantled in sections as determined by the Engineer. The sections shall be stored if the members are to be salvaged and reused. Rivets and bolts connecting steel railing members, steel beams of beam spans and steel stringers of truss spans, shall be removed by butting the heads with a "cold cut" and punching or drilling from the hole, or by such other method that will not injure the members for re-use and will meet the approval of the Engineer. The removal of rivets and bolts from connections of truss 021080 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 members, bracing members, and other similar members in the structure will not be required unless specifically called for on the plans or special provisions, and the Contractor shall have the option of dismantling these members by flame-cutting the members immediately adjacent to the connections. Flame-cutting will not be permitted, however, when the plans or special provisions call for the structure unit to be salvaged in such manner as to permit re-erection. In such case, all members shall be carefully matchmarked with paint in accordance with diagrams furnished by the Engineer prior to dismantling, and all rivets and bolts shall be removed from the connections in the manner specified in the first portion of this paragraph. Timber Structures. Timber structures or timber portions of structures to be reused shall be removed in such manner as to damage the timber for further use as little as possible. All bolts and nails shall be removed from such lumber as deemed salvable by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, timber piles shall be either pulled or cut off at the point not less than five (5) feet below ground line, with the choice between these two methods resting with the Contractor, unless otherwise specified. Brick or Stone Structures. Unwanted brick or stone structures or stone portions of structures shall be removed. Portions of such structures below the permanent ground line, which will not in any manner interfere with the proposed construction, may be left in place, but removal shall be carried at least five(5)feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off. Salvage. All material such as pipe, timbers, railings, etc., which the Engineer deems as salvable for reuse, and all salvaged structural steel, shall be delivered to a designated storage area. Materials, other than structural steel, which are not deemed salvable by the Engineer, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed to suitable disposal sites off of the right-of-way arranged for by the Contractor, or otherwise disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Where temporary structures are necessary for a detour adjacent to the present structure, the Contractor will be permitted to use the material in the old structure for the detour structure, but he shall dismantle and stack or dispose of the material as required above as soon as the new structure is opened for traffic. Backfill. All excavations made in connection with this specification and all openings below the natural ground line caused by the removal of abandoned structures or portions thereof shall be backfilled to the level of the original ground line, unless otherwise provided on the drawings. Backfill in accordance with applicable requirements of Sections 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities" and 022080 "Embankment". All open ends of abandoned pipe or other structures shall be filled or plugged as specified. That portion of the backfill which will support any portion of the roadbed, embankment, levee, or other structural feature shall be placed in layers of the same depth as those required for placing 021080 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 embankment, maximum 10" loose lifts unless otherwise specified. Material in each layer shall be wetted uniformly, if required, and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density, unless otherwise specified. In places inaccessible to blading and rolling equipment, mechanical or hand tamps or rammers shall be used to obtain the required compaction. That portion of the backfill which will not support any portion of the roadbed, embankment, or other structural feature shall be placed as directed by the Engineer in such manner and to such state of compaction as will preclude objectionable amount of settlement, maximum 10" loose lifts to minimum 95% Standard Proctor density unless otherwise specified. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the work governed by this specification shall not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiary to the project. 021080 Page 3of3 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 022020 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for excavation and backfill for utilities required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION (1) Unless otherwise specified on the drawings or permitted by the Engineer, all pipe and conduit shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical sides. Trenches shall be sheathed and braced as necessary throughout the construction period. Sheathing and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor (refer to Section 022022 "Trench Safety for Excavations" of the City Standard Specifications). Trenches shall have a maximum width of one foot beyond the horizontal projection of the outside surfaces of the pipe and parallel thereto on each side unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall not have more than 200 feet of open trench left behind the trenching operation and no more than 500 feet of ditch behind the ditching machine that is not compacted as required by the plans and specifications. No trench or excavation shall remain open after working hours. For all utility conduit and sewer pipe to be constructed in fill above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than one foot above the top of the pipe or conduit, after which excavation for the pipe or conduit shall be made. If quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material is encountered during the excavation, the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are called for on the drawings. If the unstable condition is a result of ground water,the Contractor,prior to additional excavation, shall control it. After stable conditions have been achieved,unstable soil shall be removed or stabilized to a depth of 2 feet below the bottom of pipe for pipes 2 feet or more in height;and to a depth equal to the height of pipe, 6 inches minimum,for pipes less then 2 feet in height. Such excavation shall be carried at least one foot beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with suitable stable material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Engineer,and each layer shall be wetted, if necessary, and compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable condition. For unstable trench conditions requiring outside forms, seals, sheathing and bracing, any additional excavation and backfill required shall be done at the Contractor's expense. (2) Shaping of Trench Bottom. The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the class of bedding indicated on the plans and specifications. 022020 Pagel of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 (3) Dewatering Trench. Pipe or conduit shall not be constructed or laid in a trench in the presence of water. All water shall be removed from the trench sufficiently prior to the pipe or conduit planing operation to insure a relatively dry (no standing water), firm bed. The trench shall be maintained in such dewatered condition until the trench has been backfilled to a height at lease one foot above the top of pipe. Removal of water may be accomplished by bailing,pumping, or by installation of well-points, as conditions warrant. Removal of well- points shall be at rate of 1/3 per 24 hours (every third well-point). The Contractor shall prevent groundwater from trench or excavation dewatering operations from discharging directly into the storm water system. Groundwater from dewatering operations shall be sampled and tested, if applicable, and disposed of, in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022021 "Control of Ground Water". (4) Excavation in Streets. Excavation in streets,together with the maintenance of traffic where specified, and the restoration of the pavement riding surface, shall be in accordance with drawing detail or as required by other applicable specifications. (5) Removing Abandoned Structures. When abandoned masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. When abandoned inlets or manholes are encountered and no plan provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new utility, such manholes and inlets shall be removed completely to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. In each instance,the bottom to the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided hereinafter for backfill. Where the trench cuts through utility lines which are known to be abandoned, these lines shall be cut flush with the sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. (6) Protection of Utilities. The Contractor shall conduct his work such that a reasonable minimum of disturbance to existing utilities will result. Particular care shall be exercised to avoid the cutting or breakage of water and gas lines. Such lines,if broken, shall be restored promptly by the Contractor. When active wastewater lines are cut in the trenching operations, temporary flumes shall be provided across the trench while open, and the lines shall be restored when the backfilling has progressed to the original bedding line of the sewer so cut. The Contractor shall inform utility owners sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute, provide temporary detours, or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay. The Contractor shall not hold the City liable for any expense due to delay or additional work because of utility adjustments or conflicts. (7) Excess Excavated Material. All materials from excavation not required for backfilling the trench shall be removed by the Contractor from the job site promptly following the completion of work involved. 022020 Page 2 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 (8) Backfill A. Backfill Procedure Around Pipe Initial Backfill) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes or conduits are properly laid. In addition to the specified pipe bedding material, the backfill around the pipe as applicable shall be granular material as shown on the standard details or as described in the applicable specification section, and shall be free of large hard lumps or other debris. If indicated on the plans, pipe shall be encased with cement-stabilized sand backfill as described below. The backfill shall be deposited in the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench,in layers not to exceed ten(10)inches (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to a density comparable to the adjacent undisturbed soil or as otherwise specified on the plans,but not less than 95%Standard Proctor density. A thoroughly compacted material shall be in place between the external wall of the pipe and the undisturbed sides of the trench and to a level twelve (12)inches above the top of the pipe. B. Backfill Over One Foot Above Pipe Final Backfill) UNPAVED AREAS: The backfill for that portion of trench over one(1)foot above the pipe or conduit not located under pavements (including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains and reinforced concrete storm water pipe) shall be imported select material or clean, excess material from the excavation meeting the following requirements: Free of hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris, No clay lumps greater than 2" diameter Moisture Content: +/-3% Backfill material shall be placed in layers not more than ten (10) inches in depth (loose measurement),wetted if required to obtain proper compaction,and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95%Standard Proctor density, unless otherwise indicated. Flooding of backfill is not allowed. Jetting of backfill may only be allowed in sandy soils and in soils otherwise approved by the Engineer. Regardless of backfill method, no lift shall exceed 10 inches and density shall not be less than 95% Standard Proctor density. A period of not less than twenty-four(24) hours shall elapse between the time of jetting and the placing of the top four (4) feet of backfill. If jetting is used, the top four (4) feet of backfill shall be placed in layers not more than 10 inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). PAVED AREAS: At utility line crossings under pavements (including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains, and reinforced concrete storm water pipe), and where otherwise indicated on the drawings, trenches shall be backfilled as shown below: From top of initial backfill (typically twelve (12)inches above top of the pipe)to three (3)feet below bottom of road base course, backfill shall be select material meeting the requirements of 022100 "Select Material". 022020 Page 3 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 Asphalt Roadways The upper three (3)feet of trench below the road base course shall be backfilled to the bottom of the road base course with cement-stabilized sand containing a minimum of 2 sacks of Standard Type I Portland cement per cubic yard of sand and compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Concrete Roadways The Contractor may elect to backfill the upper three (3) feet of trench below the road base course with cement stabilized sand as noted above, or in the case of storm water pipe or box installation the Contractor may backfill and compact select material to 98% Standard Proctor density(ASTM D698)following City Standard Specification Section 022100. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, excavation and backfill for utilities, including select material or cement-stabilized sand backfill, shall not be measured and paid for separately. It shall be considered subsidiary to the items for which the excavation and backfill is required. 022020 Page 4 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 022021 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dewatering, depressurizing, draining, and maintaining trenches, shaft excavations, structural excavations, and foundation beds in a stable condition, and controlling ground water conditions for tunnel excavations. B. Protection of excavations and trenches from surface runoff. C. Disposing of removed ground water by approved methods. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5-lb (2.49 kg)Rammer and 12-inch (304.8 mm)Drop. B. Federal Regulations, 29 CFR Part 1926, Standards-Excavation, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). C. Federal Register 40 CFR(Vol. 55, No. 222)Part 122, EPA Administered Permit Programs (NPDES), Para.122.26(b)(14) Storm Water Discharge. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Ground water control includes both dewatering and depressurization of water-bearing soil layers. I. Dewatering includes lowering the water table and intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from slopes or bottoms of excavations, or into tunnels and shafts, and disposing of removed ground water by approved methods. The intent of dewatering is to increase the stability of tunnel excavations and excavated slopes; prevent dislocation of material from slopes or bottoms of excavations; reduce lateral loads on sheeting and bracing; improve excavating and hauling characteristics of excavated material; prevent failure or heaving of the bottom of excavations; and to provide suitable conditions for placement of backfill materials and construction of structures, piping and other installations. 2. Depressurization includes reduction in piezometric pressure within strata not controlled by dewatering alone, as required to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom or instability of tunnel excavations. B. Excavation drainage includes keeping excavations free of surface and seepage water. 022021 Page 1 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 C. Surface drainage includes the use of temporary drainage ditches and dikes and installation of temporary culverts and sump pumps with discharge lines as required to protect the Work from any source of surface water. D. Equipment and instrumentation for monitoring and control of the ground water control system includes piezometers and monitoring wells, and devices, such as flow meters, for observing and recording flow rates. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct subsurface investigations as needed to identify ground water conditions and to provide parameters for design, installation, and operation of ground water control systems. B. Design a ground water control system, compatible with requirements of Federal Regulations 29 CFR Part 1926 and City Standard Specification Section 022022 - Trench Safety for Excavations, to produce the following results: 1. Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure affecting: a) Excavations (including utility trenches); b) Tunnel excavation, face stability or seepage into tunnels. 2. Develop a substantially dry and stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations. 3. Preclude damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities, installed facilities, and other work. 4. Prevent the loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick condition, or softening of the foundation strata. 5. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavations. C. Provide ground water control systems which may include single-stage or multiple-stage well point systems, eductor and ejector-type systems, deep wells, or combinations of these equipment types. D. Provide drainage of seepage water and surface water, as well as water from any other source entering the excavation. Excavation drainage may include placement of drainage materials, such as crushed stone and filter fabric, together with sump pumping. E. Provide ditches, berms, pumps and other methods necessary to divert and drain surface water away from excavations. F. Locate ground water control and drainage systems so as not to interfere with utilities, construction operations, adjacent properties, or adjacent water wells. 022021 Page 2 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 G. Assume sole responsibility for ground water control systems and for any loss or damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures, and any settlement or resultant damage caused by the ground water control operations. Modify ground water control systems or operations if they cause or threaten to cause damage to new construction, existing site improvements, adjacent property, or adjacent water wells, or affect potentially contaminated areas. Repair damage caused by ground water control systems or resulting from failure of the system to protect property as required. H. Provide an adequate number of piezometers installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide meaningful observations of the conditions affecting the excavation, adjacent structures, and water wells. I. Provide environmental monitoring wells installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide adequate observations of hydrostatic conditions and possible contaminant transport from contamination sources into the work area or into the ground water control system. J. Decommission piezometers and monitoring wells installed during design phase studies and left for Contractors monitoring and use, if applicable. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. B. Comply with Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ)regulations and Texas Water Well Drillers Association for development, drilling, and abandonment of wells used in dewatering system. C. Prior to beginning construction activities, file Notice of Intent(NOI)for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under the Texas Pollutant Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000, administered by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ). The general permit falls under the provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Chapter 26 of the Texas Water Code. D. Prepare submittal form and submit to TCEQ along with application fee. E. Upon completion of construction, file Notice of Termination (NOT)for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under the TPDES General Permit with the TCEQ. F. Obtain all necessary permits from agencies with control over the use of ground water and matters affecting well installation, water discharge, and use of existing storm drains and natural water sources. Because the review and permitting process may be lengthy, take early action to pursue and submit for the required approvals. G. Monitor ground water discharge for contamination while performing pumping in the vicinity of potentially contaminated sites. 022021 Page 3 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 H. Conduct sampling and testing of ground water and receiving waters as outlined in Article 3 below. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Equipment and materials are at the option of Contractor as necessary to achieve desired results for dewatering. B. Eductors, well points, or deep wells, where used, shall be furnished, installed and operated by an experienced contractor regularly engaged in ground water control system design, installation, and operation. C. All equipment must be in good repair and operating order. D. Sufficient standby equipment and materials shall be kept available to ensure continuous operation, where required. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 GROUND WATER CONTROL A. Perform a subsurface investigation by borings as necessary to identify water bearing layers, piezometric pressures, and soil parameters for design and installation of ground water control systems. Perform pump tests, if necessary to determine the drawdown characteristics of the water bearing layers. B. Provide labor, material, equipment, techniques and methods to lower, control and handle ground water in a manner compatible with construction methods and site conditions. Monitor effectiveness of the installed system and its effect on adjacent property. C. Install, operate, and maintain ground water control systems in accordance with the ground water control system design. Notify the City's Construction Inspector in writing of any changes made to accommodate field conditions and changes to the Work. Revise the ground water control system design to reflect field changes. D. Provide for continuous system operation, including nights, weekends, and holidays. Arrange for appropriate backup if electrical power is primary energy source for dewatering system. E. Monitor operations to verify that the system lowers ground water piezometric levels at a rate required to maintain a dry excavation resulting in a stable subgrade for prosecution of subsequent operations. F. Where hydrostatic pressures in confined water bearing layers exist below excavation, depressurize those zones to eliminate risk of uplift or other instability of excavation or installed 022021 Page 4 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 works. Allowable piezometric elevations shall be defined in the ground water control system design. G. Remove ground water control installations. 1. Remove pumping system components and piping when ground water control is no longer required. 2. Remove piezometers and monitoring wells when directed by the City Engineer. 3. Grout abandoned well and piezometer holes. Fill piping that is not removed with cement- bentonite grout or cement-sand grout. H. During backfilling, dewatering may be reduced to maintain water level a minimum of 5 feet below prevailing level of backfill. However, do not allow that water level to result in uplift pressures in excess of 80 percent of downward pressure produced by weight of structure or backfill in place. Do not allow water levels to rise into cement stabilized sand until at least 48 hour after placement. I. Provide a uniform diameter for each pipe drain run constructed for dewatering. Remove pipe drain when it has served its purpose. If removal of pipe is impractical, provide grout connections at 50-foot intervals and fill pipe with cement-bentonite grout or cement-sand grout when pipe is removed from service. J. Extent of construction ground water control for structures with a permanent perforated underground drainage system may be reduced, such as for units designed to withstand hydrostatic uplift pressure. Provide a means for draining the affected portion of underground system, including standby equipment. Maintain drainage system during operations and remove it when no longer required. K. Remove system upon completion of construction or when dewatering and control of surface or ground water is no longer required. L. In unpaved areas, compact backfill to not less than 95 percent of Standard Proctor maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D 698. In paved areas (or areas to receive paving), compact backfill to not less than 98 percent of Standard Proctor maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D 698. 3.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCTOR, WELL POINTS, OR DEEP WELLS A. For above ground piping in ground water control system, include a 12-inch minimum length of clear, transparent piping between every eductor well or well point and discharge header so that discharge from each installation can be visually monitored. B. Install sufficient piezometers or monitoring wells to show that all trench or shaft excavations in water bearing materials are pre-drained prior to excavation. Provide separate piezometers for 022021 Page 5 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 monitoring of dewatering and for monitoring of depressurization. Install piezometers and monitoring wells for tunneling as appropriate for Contractor's selected method of work. C. Install piezometers or monitoring wells not less than one week in advance of beginning the associated excavation (including trenching). D. Dewatering may be omitted for portions of underdrains or other excavations, but only where auger borings and piezometers or monitoring wells show that soil is pre-drained by an existing system such that the criteria of the ground water control system design are satisfied. E. Replace installations that produce noticeable amounts of sediments after development. F. Provide additional ground water control installations, or change the methods, in the event that the installations according to the ground water control system design do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the ground water control system design and by these specifications. 3.3 EXCAVATION DRAINAGE A. Contractor may use excavation drainage methods if necessary to achieve well drained conditions. The excavation drainage may consist of a layer of crushed stone and filter fabric, and sump pumping in combination with sufficient wells for ground water control to maintain stable excavation and backfill conditions. 3.4 MAINTENANCE AND OBSERVATION A. Conduct daily maintenance and observation of piezometers or monitoring wells while the ground water control installations or excavation drainage are operating in an area or seepage into tunnel is occurring. Keep system in good condition. B. Replace damaged and destroyed piezometers or monitoring wells with new piezometers or wells as necessary to meet observation schedule. C. Cut off piezometers or monitoring wells in excavation areas where piping is exposed, only as necessary to perform observation as excavation proceeds. Continue to maintain and make observations, as specified. D. Remove and grout piezometers inside or outside the excavation area when ground water control operations are complete. Remove and grout monitoring wells when directed by the City Engineer. 3.5 MONITORING AND RECORDING A. Monitor and record average flow rate of operation for each deep well, or for each wellpoint or eductor header used in dewatering system. Also monitor and record water level and ground water recovery. These records shall be obtained daily until steady conditions are achieved, and twice weekly thereafter. 022021 Page 6 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 B. Observe and record elevation of water level daily as long as ground water control system is in operation, and weekly thereafter until the Work is completed or piezometers or wells are removed, except when City Engineer determines that more frequent monitoring and recording are required. Comply with Construction Inspector's direction for increased monitoring and recording and take measures as necessary to ensure effective dewatering for intended purpose. 3.6 SAMPLING, TESTING AND DISPOSAL OF GROUND WATER A. It is the intent that the Contractor discharge groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system in accordance with City Ordinance, Article XVI, Section 55-203, only if the groundwater is uncontaminated and the quality of the ground water is equal to or better than the quality of the receiving stream. B. The Contractor shall prevent ground water from trench or excavation dewatering operations from discharging directly into the storm water system prior to testing and authorization. Ground water from dewatering operations shall be sampled and tested, and disposed of by approved methods. C. Laboratory analysis of groundwater and receiving water quality is to be performed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge, and groundwater analysis shall be performed by the Contractor at a minimum of once per week. Contractor shall coordinate with the City Storm Water Department on all laboratory analysis. Laboratory analysis of groundwater shall also be performed at each new area of construction prior to discharge from that location. D. Sample containers, holding times, preservation methods, and analytical methods, shall either follow the requirements in 40 CFR Part 136 (as amended), or the latest edition of"Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater." Any laboratory providing analysis must be accredited or certified by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality according to Title 30 Texas Administrative Code (30 TAC) Chapters 25 for the matrices, methods, and parameters of analysis, if available, or be exempt according to 30 TAC §25.6. E. Analysis of the ground water discharge shall show it to be equal to or better than the quality of the first natural body of receiving water. This requires testing of both the receiving water and a sample of the ground water. All parts of this procedure shall be complete prior to any discharge of ground water to the storm water system. F. Steps to Determine Legitimate Discharge: 1. Identify the First Receiving Water. a) When the first body of water is a fresh water system (Nueces River or Oso Creek), the analysis typically fails because the local ground water will likely be too high in Total Dissolved Solids (TDS). In the case of a perched aquifer, the ground water may turn out fairly fresh, but local experience shows this to be unlikely. b) If the receiving water is a marine environment, proceed with Step 2 below to compare the ground water quality to receiving water quality. 022021 Page 7 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 2. Compare Ground Water Discharge Quality to Receiving Water Quality. The following table, Ground Water Discharge Limits, indicates that the parameters to compare to the receiving water are Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) and Total Suspended Solids (TSS). If the ground water results are equal to or better than the receiving water, then the discharge may be authorized as long as the discharge does not exceed the other parameters which would indicate hydrocarbon contamination. Note that the receiving water only needs to be tested initially as a baseline and the ground water shall be tested weekly to ensure compliance. GROUND WATER DISCHARGE LIMITS Ground Receiving Water Water Monitoring Monitoring Maximum Parameter Frequency Frequency Limitation Total Dissolved Once Prior to Solids (TDS) Initial +Weekly Discharge <Receiving Water Total Suspended Once Prior to Solids (TSS) Initial +Weekly Discharge <Receiving Water Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons Initial +Weekly 15 m /L Total Lead Initial +Weekly 0.1 m Benzene Initial +Weekly 0.005 m Total BTEX Initial +Weekly 0.1 m Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons Initial +Monthly 0.01 m 3. Analyze Ground Water for Hydrocarbon Contamination. All other parameters listed on the Ground Water Discharge Limits table must be analyzed prior to ground water discharge to the storm water system. If no limits are exceeded, ground water discharge to the storm water system may be authorized following notification to the MS4 operator(City of Corpus Christi) and all Pollution Prevention Measures for the project are in place. Analytical results shall be on-site or readily available for review by local, state or federal inspectors. Note that this step is frequently done simultaneously with Step 2 above to shorten analytical processing time. 4. Pollution Prevention Measures. A storm water pollution prevention plan or pollution control plan shall be developed and implemented prior to any ground water discharges to the storm water system. The plan's objectives are to limit erosion and scour of the storm water system, and minimize Total Suspended Solids (TSS) and other forms of contamination, and prevent any damage to the storm water system. Note that ground water discharges must cease immediately upon the first recognition of contamination, either by sensory or analytical methods. If the discharge of groundwater results in any damages to the storm water system, the responsible party 022021 Page 8 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 shall remediate any damage to the storm water system and the environment to the satisfaction of the Storm Water Department and/or any State or Federal Regulatory Agency. 5. MS4 Operator Notification. The MS4 operator shall be notified prior to ground water discharge to the storm water system. Contractor shall contact the designated City MS4 representative to request authorization to discharge ground water to the storm water system. Notification shall include: Proj ect Name: Responsible Party: Discharge Location: Receiving Water: Estimated Time of Discharge: Linear Proj ect: Yes/No Pollution Prevention Measures Implemented: Statement indicating all sampling and testing has been conducted and meets the requirements of a legitimate discharge. G. Discharges to Wastewater System In the event that the groundwater does not equal or exceed the receiving water quality, an alternative disposal option would include pumping to the nearest sanitary sewer system. Discharge to the sanitary sewer system requires a permit from the Wastewater Department. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a sanitary sewer or wastewater treatment plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Contractor shall contact the Pretreatment Group for City Utility Operations to obtain a Wastewater Discharge Permit Application for authorization to discharge to the wastewater system. Authorization approval will include review of laboratory analysis of the ground water and estimated flow data. Note that groundwater discharges must cease immediately upon the first recognition of contamination, either by sensory or analytical methods. If the discharge of groundwater results in any damages to the wastewater collection system or wastewater overflows, the responsible party shall remediate any damage to the wastewater collection system and the environment to the satisfaction of the Wastewater Department and/or any State or Federal Regulatory Agency. H. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Engineer on a case by case basis. 3.7 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A. Intercept surface water and divert it away from excavations through the use of dikes, ditches, curb walls, pipes, sumps or other approved means. B. Divert surface water into sumps and pump into drainage channels or storm drains, when 022021 Page 9 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 approved by the City Engineer. Provide settling basins when required by the City Engineer. C. Storm water that enters the excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by manmade berm(s)prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is required to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering the storm water system. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, control of ground water will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items. 022021 Page 10 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 022022 TRENCH SAFETY FOR EXCAVATIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for providing for worker safety in excavations and trenching operations required to complete the project. 2. REQUIREMENTS Worker Safety in excavations and trenches shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P - Excavations. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor, and not the City or Engineer or Consultant, to determine and monitor the specific applicability of a safety system to the field conditions to be encountered on the job site during the project. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City and Engineer and Consultant from all damages and costs that may result from failure of methods or equipment used by the Contractor to provide for worker safety. Trenches, as used herein, shall apply to any excavation into which structures, utilities, or sewers are placed regardless of depth. Trench Safety Plan, as used herein, shall apply to all methods and materials used to provide for worker safety in excavation and trenching operations required during the project. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Measurement of Trench Safety shall be by the linear foot of trench, regardless of depth. Measurement shall be taken along the centerline of the trench. Measurement for Excavation Safety for Utility Structures shall be per each excavation. Excavations include, but are not limited to, those for manholes, vaults, pits and other such structures that are incidental to utility work. Measurement for Excavation Safety for Special Structures shall be per each excavation or by the lump sum for each special structure identified in the Proposal. Payment shall be at the unit price bid and shall fully compensate the Contractor for all work, equipment, materials, personnel, and incidentals as required to provide for worker safety in trenches and excavations for the project. Revision current for Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C. Trench Safety. 022022 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 022040 STREET EXCAVATION 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for Street Excavation required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS (A) Stripping and Excavation Strip the top 6 inches in all areas to underlay compacted fill, curbs, base or pavement, by removing all humus, vegetation and other unsuitable materials. Unless otherwise noted, remove existing trees, shrubs, fences, curb, gutter, sidewalk, drives, paving, pipe and structures and other items within the graded area which interfere with new construction of finished grading. All suitable excavated materials shall be utilized, insofar as practicable, in constructing the required roadway sections or in uniformly widening embankments, flattening slopes, etc., as directed by the Engineer, provided that the material meets the requirements for roadway embankment as specified in Article 3 below. Unwanted or unsuitable roadway excavation and roadway excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall become the property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him outside the limits of the right-of-way at a location suitable to the Engineer. "Unsuitable" material encountered below subgrade elevation in roadway cuts, when declared unwanted by the Engineer, shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer with suitable material from the roadway excavation or with other suitable material. Maintain moisture and density until covered and protected by the subbase or base course. Remove soft or wet areas found at any time, replace with suitable material, and recompact(especially utility trenches). (B) Subgrade Preparation That area shown on the drawings for street construction shall be cut to grade, scarified to a depth not less than 6 inches, or as otherwise indicated on the drawings, and compacted to 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698) to within 0 to +3% of optimum moisture. The section may be accepted if no more than 1 in 5 of the most recent moisture or density tests is beyond±1% deviation from the required moisture or density requirement. Irregularities exceeding 1/2 inch in 16 feet shall be corrected. Soft areas found at anytime shall be removed, replaced with suitable material and compacted (especially at utility trenches). The correct moisture density relationship shall be maintained until the subgrade is protected. Excessive loss of moisture shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing, or covering with a subsequent layer. Should the subgrade, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density, or moisture before it is protected by placement of the next layer, it shall be re-compacted and refinished and retested at the expense of the Contractor until acceptable to the City. 022040 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 (C) Curb Backfill and Topsoil (Sidewalks, Parkways, Islands, etc.) Fill and compact areas behind curbs and adjacent to sidewalks and driveways within 48 hours after completion of concrete work. The top 6 inches (where disturbed by construction or where unsatisfactory material is exposed by excavation) of finish earth grade shall be clean excavated material or topsoil capable of supporting a good growth of grass when fertilized and seeded or sodded. It shall be free of concrete, asphalt, shell, caliche, debris and any other material that detracts from its appearance or hampers the growth of grass. Topsoil shall meet the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Section 028020 "Seeding". (D) Matching Grades at Right-of-Way Line Finish grade at the property line shall be as shown on the drawings. The Engineer may require a reasonable amount of filling on private property where the sidewalk grade is above the property elevation. Use suitable material from the excavation. Unless otherwise directed, cuts at right-of- way lines shall be made at a slope of three horizontal to one vertical (3:1) or flatter. (E) Drainage During construction, the roadbed and ditches shall be maintained in such condition as to insure proper drainage at all times, and ditches and channels shall be so constructed and maintained as to avoid damage to the roadway section. All slopes which, in the judgment of the Engineer, require variation, shall be accurately shaped, and care shall be taken that no material is loosened below the required slopes. All breakage and slides shall be removed and disposed of as directed. 3. SELECTION OF ROADBED MATERIALS Where shown on the plans, Select Material shall be utilized to improve the roadbed, in which case the work shall be performed in such manner and sequence that suitable materials may be selected, removed separately, and deposited in the roadway within limits and at elevations required. Material used for roadway embankment shall meet the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 022100 Select Material. 4. GEOGRID If indicated on the drawings, geogrid shall be placed in the base layer according to the pavement details to provide a mechanically-stabilized aggregate base layer within the pavement structure. Geogrid shall be "Tensar TX5 Triaxial Geogrid", or pre-approved equivalent. Use (and approval) of a different product must be supported by documentation showing that the alternate pavement section will meet or exceed the required number of 18-kip equivalent single axle loads (ESAL) and structural number (SN) over the stated pavement design life, and the pavement design must be sealed and signed by a Texas professional engineer. Documentation must also include the structural design value used for the geogrid structural contribution, based on and supported by 022040 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 validated test data. Alternate pavement designs shall utilize the same structural design values for other pavement structural components (HMAC, base, sub-base) as used in the original pavement design, and the pavement designs must be approved by the Engineer and the geotechnical consultant. Contractor shall take care to protect geogrid from damage. Overlap edges of geogrid in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, but not less than 12 inches. Do not drive tracked equipment directly on the geogrid. Provide at least 6 inches of compacted aggregate base material over the geogrid before driving any tracked equipment over the geogrid area. Standard highway- legal rubber-tired trucks may drive over the geogrid at very slow speeds (less than 5 mph). Avoid turns and sudden starts and stops when driving on the geogrid. Any damaged geogrid shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City. Proper replacement shall consist of replacing the affected area adding 3 feet of geogrid in each direction beyond the limits of the affected area. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, street excavation shall be measured and paid for by the square yard to the limits shown on the drawings including excavation for street transitions. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, borrow material and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, compacted subgrade shall be measured and paid for by the square yard to the limits shown on the drawings. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, borrow material and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, geogrid shall be measured and paid for by the square yard to the limits shown on the drawings, excluding overlaps. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work. All work required for disposing of waste, including hauling will not be paid for directly but shall be considered subsidiary to the various contract items. 022040 Page 3of3 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 022080 EMBANKMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for Embankment required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to placing embankment, the area to be covered shall be stripped of all vegetation and the material so removed shall be disposed of off the job site. Washes, gulleys, wet areas, and yielding areas shall be corrected as directed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, the surface of the ground which is to receive embankment shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than 6 inches. The loosened material shall be recompacted with the new embankment as hereinafter specified. Embankment shall be placed in layers not to exceed ten (10)inches uncompacted (loose) depth for the full width of the embankment, unless otherwise noted. Where embankment is adjacent to a hillside or old roadbed, the existing slope shall be cut in steps to not less than the vertical depth of an uncompacted layer. The fill material shall be placed from the low side and compacted. Each layer shall overlap the existing embankment by at least the width indicated by the embankment slope. Trees, stumps, roots, vegetation, debris or other unsuitable materials shall not be placed in embankment. Each layer of embankment shall be uniform as to material, density and moisture content before beginning compaction. Where layers of unlike materials abut each other, each layer shall be feather-edged for at least 100 feet or the material shall be so mixed as to prevent abrupt changes in the soil. No material placed in the embankment by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated in a layer in that position, but all such piles or windrows shall be moved by blading or similar methods. Clods or lumps of material shall be broken and the embankment material mixed by blading, harrowing, disking or similar methods to the end that a uniform material of uniform density is secured in each layer. Except as otherwise required by the drawings, all embankments shall be constructed in layers approximately parallel to the finished grade and each layer shall be so constructed as to provide a uniform slope of 1/4 inch per foot from the centerline of the embankment to the outside. Each layer shall be compacted to the required density and moisture by any method, type and size of equipment that will give the required compaction. Prior to and in conjunction with the rolling operation, each layer shall be brought to the moisture content necessary to obtain the required density and shall be kept leveled with suitable equipment to insure uniform compaction over the entire layer. For each layer of earth embankment and select material, it is the intent of this specification to provide the density as required herein, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Soils for 022080 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 embankment shall be sprinkled with water as required to provide not less than optimum moisture and compacted to the extent necessary to provide not less than 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). Field density determinations will be made in accordance with approved methods. After each layer of earth embankment or select material is complete, tests, as necessary, will be made by the Engineer. If the material fails to meet the density specified, the course shall be reworked as necessary to obtain the specified compaction, and the compaction method shall be altered on subsequent work to obtain specified density. Such procedure shall be determined by, and subject to, the approval of the Engineer. The Engineer may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction of the embankment layers. All irregularities, depressions, weak or soft spots which develop shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor. Should the embankment, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density or moisture before the pavement structure is placed, it shall be recompacted and refinished at the sole expense of the Contractor. Excessive loss of moisture in the subgrade shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing or covering with a subsequent layer of granular material. 3. SELECTION OF MATERIAL In addition to the requirement in the excavation items of the specifications covering the general selection and utilization of materials to improve the roadbed, embankments shall be constructed in proper sequence to receive the select material layers shown on drawings, with such modifications as may be directed by the Engineer. The layer of embankment immediately preceding the upper layer of select material shall be constructed to the proper section and grade within a tolerance of not more than 0.10 foot from the established section and grade when properly compacted and finished to receive the select material layer. Select material, when specified, shall meet the requirements in City Standard Specification Section 022100 "Select Material". 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, embankment shall not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be subsidiary to other items of work. 022080 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 022100 SELECT MATERIAL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the use of Select Material to be used to treat designated sections of roadways, embankments, trenches, etc. Select material shall be non-expansive sandy clay (CL) or clayey sand (SC), in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487). Select Material shall meet the following requirements: Free of vegetation, hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris No clay lumps greater than 2" diameter Liquid Limit(L.L.): <35 Plasticity Index (P.I.)Range: 8 to 20 Moisture Content: as specified in the drawings 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Select material shall be mixed uniformly and placed in layers as indicated, not to exceed 10 inches loose depth (or 12 inches maximum for sanitary sewer trench backfill per City Standard Details for Sanitary Sewers). Unless otherwise specified, the material shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density. Each layer shall be complete before the succeeding layer is placed. The finished surface of the select material shall conform to the grade and section shown on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, select material shall not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 022100 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 022420 SILT FENCE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for providing and installing silt fencing required to control sedimentation and erosion during construction of the project. 2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Geotextile shall meet the requirements for temporary silt fence per AASHTO M288. B. Fence Reinforcement Materials: Silt fence reinforcement shall be one of the following systems. Type 1: Self-Supported Fence - This system consists of fence posts, spaced no more than 8- 1/2 feet apart, and geotextile without net reinforcement. Fence posts shall be a minimum of 42 inches long, embedded at least one (1) foot into the ground, and constructed of either wood or steel. Soft wood posts shall be at least 3 inches in diameter or nominal 2 x 4 inches in cross section and essentially straight. Hardwood posts shall be a minimum of 1.5 x 1.5 inches in cross section. Fabric attachment may be by staples or locking plastic ties at least every 6 inches, or by sewn vertical pockets. Steel posts shall be T or L shaped with a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per foot. Attachment shall be by pockets or by plastic ties if the posts have suitable projections. Type 2: Net-Reinforced Fence - This system consists of fence posts, spaced no more than 8-1/2 feet apart, and geotextile with an attached reinforcing net. Fence posts shall meet the requirements of Self-Supported Fence. Net reinforcement shall be galvanized welded wire mesh of at least 12.5-gauge wire with maximum opening size of 4 x 2 inches. The fabric shall be attached to the top of the net by crimping or cord at least every 2 feet, or as otherwise specified. Type 3: Triangular Filter Dike - This system consists of a rigid wire mesh, at least 6-gauge, formed into an equilateral triangle cross-sectional shape with sides measuring 18 inches, wrapped with geotextile silt fence fabric. The fabric shall be continuously wrapped around the dike, with a skirt extending at least 12 inches from its upslope corner. C. Packaging Requirements: Prior to installation, the fabric shall be protected from damage due to ultraviolet light and moisture by either wrappers or inside storage. 022420 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 D. Certification and Identification: Each lot or shipment shall be accompanied by a certification of conformance to this specification. The shipment must be identified by a ticket or by labels securely affixed to the fabric rolls. This ticket or label must list the following information: a. Name of manufacturer or supplier b. Brand name and style C. Manufacturer's lot number or control number d. Roll size(length and width) e. Chemical composition 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, silt fence shall be measured by the linear foot. Payment shall be at the bid price for the unit of measurement specified and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, placing, maintaining and removing the silt fence. 022420 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 025202 SCARIFYING AND RESHAPING BASE COURSE 1. DESCRIPTION "Scarifying and Reshaping Base Course" shall consist of scarifying and reshaping the existing base course (with or without asphalt surface)to the line, grade and section as indicated on the drawings. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The existing base and surface shall be scarified to the width and depth indicated on the drawings. Subgrade shall remain undisturbed, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Any asphalt surfacing shall be broken into particles no larger than 2 '/2 inches. The asphalt surfacing shall then be uniformly mixed with the existing base. Additional base material, where required to achieve the lines and grades shown on the drawings, shall also be added to and uniformly mixed with the existing scarified base material. If indicated on the drawings, geogrid shall be installed in the pavement section. The base material shall be shaped and rolled after mixing and allowed to set at least 48 hours before final compaction. Moisture content shall be maintained in the material during the 48-hour period. Material shall be sprinkled with water or aerated to optimum moisture content, and compacted in layers (10-inch maximum loose depth) to a minimum density of 98% Modified Proctor density (AASHTO T180), at a moisture content on the wet side of optimum (+3% maximum). Use mechanical tamps in areas inaccessible to rollers. Upon completion of compaction, the surface shall be smooth and shall conform to line, grade and section as shown on the drawings. Areas with any deviation in excess of 1/4 inch in cross-section, and in lengths of 16 feet measured longitudinally, shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping, and re-compacting by sprinkling and rolling. Moisture content shall be maintained on the wet side of optimum (+3%maximum)until paving is complete. If required, lime shall be applied in the amount indicated on the drawings. Lime shall be applied and the treated base mixed, cured, compacted and finished in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 025210 "Lime Stabilization." 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, scarifying and reshaping base course shall not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be subsidiary to other work. 025202 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 025205 PAVEMENT REPAIR, CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK AND DRIVEWAY REPLACEMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the removal and replacing of all types of pavements and surfacing required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, materials and proportions used along with this specification shall conform to the respective following specifications: City Standard Specifications Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities" Section 022100 "Select Material" Section 025223 "Crushed Limestone Flexible Base" Section 025424 "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement" Section 025610 "Concrete Curb and Gutter" Section 025612 "Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways" Section 025620 "Portland Cement Concrete Pavement" Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Class "A" Concrete Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel" Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 3. METHOD OF CUTTING The outline of the trench shall be marked upon the surface of the pavement to be cut,and all cuts into the pavement shall be saw-cut as nearly vertical as it is possible to make them. All unwanted materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor and shall not be used as backfill material. 4. BACKFILL OF TRENCH Excavation and backfilling of trench shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." 025205 Pagel of 4 Rev.11-9-2016 5. REPLACING STREET AND OTHER PAVEMENT All pavements, driveways, sidewalks, and curbs and gutters which are cut shall be replaced in a workmanlike manner,with like or better materials or per pavement repair details to be provided on the drawings. Pavement cuts in a street for any utility requires a permit from the Director of Development Services in accordance with City Ordinance 030040, Article III Cuts and Excavations (12-17-2013). The installation of a utility that crosses the ROW at a perpendicular or near perpendicular angle and has an OD of 6" or less will not be permitted to be installed by cutting the road section. Street excavation/cut for a utility in an asphalt roadway shall include a full lane overlay or pavement repair for parallel cuts, or a 12' wide pavement repair for perpendicular cuts. Street excavation/cut for a utility in a concrete roadway shall include full panel replacement. The drawings and/or permit application should include a site specific pavement cut and restoration plan that indicates the general nature of the pavement and roadway (for examples, concrete arterial, asphalt residential)to be cut and restored, the existing pavement section (if known), the location and approximate area of the excavation/pavement repair, including the approximate length and width of the pavement repair in relation to the roadway travel lane(s). 6. REPLACING DRIVEWAY PAVEMENT On all concrete driveway pavements,the replacement shall consist of a reinforced Class"A"concrete slab with a minimum thickness of six(6)inches. The type of finish for the replaced section shall be the same as that appearing on the old pavement. Reinforcement shall be#4 bars at 12 inches each way with additional diagonal bars as indicated on the drawings. Any other type shall be replaced with like or better replacement. Replacement shall, in general, be to original joint or score mark. 7. REPLACING SIDEWALKS On all sidewalk pavements,the replacement shall consist of a reinforced Class"A" concrete slab four (4)inches thick The type of finish for the replaced section shall be the same as that appearing on the old sidewalk. Replacement shall,in general,be to original joint or score marks. Reinforcement shall be 4" x 4" -W2.9 x W2.9 welded wire fabric located at mid-depth in the slab. 8. REPLACING CURB AND GUTTER On all curb and gutter, the replacement shall consist of a section conforming in all details to the original section or to City of Corpus Christi Standard curb and gutter section, if required by the Engineer. Cuts through the curb shall be replaced with Class "A" concrete. Preserve the original steel reinforcing and reinforce all new curbs with three#4 bars. Adjust grades for positive drainage. Replacement shall,in general,be to original j oint or score mark. For j ointed concrete roadways,the joints in curb or in curb and gutter should match the concrete roadway joints. 025205 Page 2 of 4 Rev.11-9-2016 9. REPAIRING STREET SHOULDERS AND UNIMPROVED STREETS On streets or roads without curb and gutter where a shoulder is disturbed,it shall be restored to like or better condition. The shoulder surface shall be rolled to an acceptably stable condition. The requirements of City Ordinance 030040 as stated above apply also to unimproved streets unless a specific variance is granted by the Director of Development Services. 10. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,pavement repair shall be measured by the square yard of the type of repair specified; curb and gutter replacement shall be measured by the linear foot; and sidewalk and driveway replacement shall each be measured by the square foot. Payment will be made at the unit price bid for the completed work and shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, equipment,tools,and incidentals required to complete the work. No separate measurement or payment will be made for subgrade compaction, sand leveling course, geogrid, ordinary backfill, cement-stabilized sand backfill, flexible base, prime coat, hot-mix asphaltic concrete, etc. 025205 Page 3 of 4 Rev.11-9-2016 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 025205 Page 4 of 4 Rev.11-9-2016 SECTION 025223 CRUSHED LIMESTONE FLEXIBLE BASE 1. DESCRIPTION This Specification shall govern all work for furnishing and placing Crushed Limestone Flexible Base required to complete the project. 2. MATERIAL Crushed Limestone Flexible Base shall consist of crushed limestone produced from oversize quarried aggregate, sized by crushing and produced from a naturally occurring single source, meeting the requirements for Type `A' material as specified in Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Specification Item 247 "Flexible Base". Crushed gravel or uncrushed gravel shall not be acceptable. No blending of sources and/or additive materials will be allowed. The material shall be free of vegetation and shall be approved by the Engineer. All acceptable material shall be screened and the oversize shall be crushed and returned to the screened material in such a manner that a uniform product will be produced which meets all of the physical requirements for Grade 1-2 as specified in TxDOT Specification Item 247"Flexible Base". 3. TESTING The City will engage a laboratory and pay for one test each gradation, liquid limit, plasticity index, modified proctor, moisture-density relation, CBR, and necessary field densities. The Engineer may call for additional tests at any time. The cost of all retests, in case of failure to meet specifications, will be deducted from the Contractor's payment. The City will pay for proctor and soil constants and abrasion tests at the rate described in the materials testing schedule. If material changes, the Contractor shall pay the cost of additional tests required by the Engineer. The Engineer may waive testing and/or lime admix for small amounts for unimportant uses. 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to placement of flexible base, the surface of the previous underlying course shall be finished true to line and grade as established, and in conformity with the typical section shown on the drawings. Grade tolerance shall be generally 1/2 inch, and highs and lows must approximately balance. If called for in the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents, geogrid, as specified in City Standard Specification Section 022040 "Street Excavation", shall be placed as indicated. Flexible base shall be delivered and spread the same day if possible(no later than the next day). Base shall be mixed as required to produce a uniform mixture with water. Base shall be placed in uniform lifts not to exceed 10 inch loose lifts or 8 inch compacted lifts. Moisture and density requirements shall be as indicated on the drawings, typical minimum 98% Modified Proctor 025223 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 (ASTM D1557) under flexible pavements or typical minimum 98% Standard Proctor (ASTM D698) under concrete pavement and to within + 2% of optimum moisture. The section may be accepted if no more than 1 of the 5 most recent moisture or density tests is outside of the specified limits, and the failed test is within+1% deviation from specified moisture or density requirements. The surface of the compacted base, after meeting moisture and density requirements, shall be primed in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 025412 "Prime Coat". On completion of compaction and priming, the surface shall be smooth and conform to lines, grades, and sections shown on the drawings. Areas with any deviation in excess of 1/4 inch in cross-section and in lengths of 16 feet measured longitudinally shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping, and recompacting by repriming and rolling. Moisture and density shall be maintained until the paving is complete. Excessive loss of moisture shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing, or covering with a subsequent layer. Should the base, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density, or moisture before it is protected by placement of the next layer, it shall be re-compacted, refinished, and retested at the expense of the Contractor until acceptable to the City. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, crushed limestone flexible base shall be measured by the square yard complete in place. Payment shall be full compensation for all materials, royalty, hauling, placing, compacting, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for the completion of work. Prime shall be measured and paid under separate bid item if specified on the Bid Form. Geogrid shall be measured and paid under separate bid item if specified on the Bid Form. 025223 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 025402 PLANING ASPHALTIC SURFACES (S-27A) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for planing an existing asphaltic concrete pavement required to complete the project. 2. EQUIPMENT Planer shall be a self propelled planing machine capable of removing, in one pass, a.c. surface to any required thickness less than 9 inches, in a minimum of 6-foot width. The planer shall be capable of accurately and automatically establishing profile grades along each edge of the machine by referencing from the existing pavement or curb and shall have an automatic system for controlling cross slope. The machine shall be equipped with an integral loader to remove material being cut from the surface of the roadway and discharge the cuttings into a truck, all in one operation. Adequate back-up equipment (street sweepers, loaders, water trucks, etc. ) and personnel will also be provided to minimize dust and remove all cuttings. The planer shall be equipped with means to control dust created by the cutting action and shall have a manual system providing for uniformly varying the depth of cut while the machine is in motion thereby making it possible to cut flush to all inlets, manholes, or other obstructions within the paved area. Any machine that is incapable, in the opinion of the Engineer, of meeting these requirements will not be permitted to be used. Various machines may be permitted to make trial runs to demonstrate to the Engineer the capabilities of that machine. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The pavement surface shall be removed to the depth, width, grade and cross section as shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer may require that the pavement planing operation be referenced from an independent grade control in those areas where he deems this type of control to be appropriate. For this type of operation, the independent grade control shall be established and maintained by the Contractor in a manner acceptable to the Engineer, and the final position of it shall be acceptable to the Engineer. In the event the entire pavement width along a section of street has not been planed to a flush surface by the end of a work period resulting in a vertical or near vertical longitudinal face extending more that 1.25 inches in height, this longitudinal face shall be sloped in a manner acceptable to the Engineer so as not to create a hazard to traffic. Traverse faces that are present at the end of a work period shall be tapered in a manner approved by the Engineer to avoid creating a hazard for traffic. The loose material resulting from the operation shall become property of the Contractor and disposed of by the Contractor in an acceptable manner. When located adjacent to steep curbs, pavement that cannot be removed by the planing machine shall be removed by other methods acceptable to the Engineer and the pavement and curb surface shall be cleaned of all debris and left in a neat and presentable condition. 025402 Rev 11/2/99 Page 1 of 2 In planed areas where traffic is permitted, "Grooved Pavement Ahead" Signs shall be erected in advance of the planed areas. Signs shall be erected prior to planing in the areas and shall be maintained in place while the planed area is overlaid. Signs shall be in accordance with the "Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways" and "Standard Highway Sign Designs for Texas". In planed areas where traffic is permitted, a safe and satisfactory riding surface shall exist. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the grade reference used by the Contractor may be of a type approved by the Engineer. Control points, if required by the plans or Engineer, will be established for the finished grade by the Engineer. These points will be set at intervals not to exceed 50 feet. The Contractor shall set the grade reference for the sensor of the automatic control to follow from the control points established by the Engineer, and this grade reference shall have sufficient support so that the maximum deflection shall not exceed 1/16 inch per 25 feet. The planed surface shall be smooth and true to the established line, grade and section, When tested with a 10 foot straightedge placed parallel to the centerline of the roadway or tested by equivalent or acceptable means, except as provided herein, the maximum deviation shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Any point in the planed surface not meeting this requirement shall be corrected as directed by the Engineer. 4. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Planning Asphalt shall be measured by the square yard of pavement surface area planed. Measurement will be made only one time for an area, regardless of the number of passes required to be made in order to achieve the desired results. Payment will be made at unit price bid and shall include, but not be limited to, all planing, cleaning, loading, hauling, signs, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals required to complete the work. 025402 Rev 11/2/99 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 025404 ASPHALTS, OILS AND EMULSIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for asphalt cement, cut-back and emulsified asphalts, performance-graded asphalt binders, and other miscellaneous asphaltic materials required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS When tested according to Texas Department of Transportation Test Methods,the various materials shall meet the applicable requirements of TxDOT Specification Item 300, "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions" (Latest Edition). 3. STORAGE, HEATING AND APPLICATION TEMPERATURES Store and apply asphaltic materials in accordance with TxDOT Item 300 (Latest Edition) at the lowest temperature yielding satisfactory results. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for any agitation requirements in storage and in application and storage temperatures. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, asphalts, oils and emulsions shall not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 025404 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 025412 PRIME COAT (5-30) (Asphalt Material Only) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of an application of asphalt material on the completed base course and/or other approved area in accordance with this specification. Prime Coat shall not be applied when the air temperature is below 60°F and falling, but it may be applied when the air temperature is above 50°F and is rising, the air temperature being taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. Asphalt material shall not be placed when general weather conditions, in the opinion of the Engineer, are not suitable. 2. MATERIALS The asphalt material used for the prime coat shall be MC-70, unless otherwise specified, and when tested by approved laboratory methods shall meet the requirements of the specification 025404 - Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS When, in the opinion of the Engineer, the area and/or base is satisfactory to receive the prime coat, the surface may be cleaned by sweeping or other approved methods. If found necessary by the Engineer, the surface shall be lightly sprinkled just prior to application of the asphalt material. The asphalt material shall be applied on the clean surface by an approved type of self-propelled pressure distributor so operated as to distribute the material in the quantity specified, evenly and smoothly under a pressure necessary for proper distribution. The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities for determining the temperature of the asphalt material in all of the heating equipment and in the distributor, for determining the rate at which it is applied, and for securing uniformity at the junction of two distributor loads. All storage tanks, piping, retorts, booster tanks and distributors used in storing or handling asphalt material shall be kept clean and in good operating condition at all times, and they shall be operated in such manner that there will be no contamination of the asphalt material with foreign material. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and maintain in good working order a recording thermometer at the storage-heating unit at all times. The distributor shall have been recently calibrated and the Engineer shall be furnished an accurate and satisfactory record of such calibration. After beginning of the work, should the yield on the asphalt material applied appear to be in error, the distributor shall be calibrated in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer before proceeding with the work. Prime shall be applied at a temperature within the recommended range per Standard Specification 025404 "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions with that range being 125 to 175 OF for MC-70. Application rate shall be 0. 15 GAL/SY, unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the surface until the Engineer accepts the work. No traffic hauling or placement of any subsequent courses shall be permitted over the freshly applied prime coat until authorized by the Engineer. 025412 11/29/00 Page 1 of 2 4. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, PRIME COAT shall be measured by the gallon of prime applied. Payment shall include furnishing, heating, hauling and distributing the asphalt material as specified; for all freight involved; and for all manipulation, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025412 11/29/00 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 025424 HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT (Class A) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for furnishing and laying Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete (HMAC) surface, binder and base courses required to complete the project. All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. A"r� egate. The aggregate shall consist of a blend of course aggregate, fine aggregate and, if required, a mineral filler. 2.1.1. Coarse Aggregate shall consist of that fraction of aggregate retained on a No. 10 sieve and shall consist of crushed furnace slag, crushed stone, or crushed gravel. Deleterious material in course aggregate shall not exceed 2% per TxDOT Test Method TEX-217-F. Course aggregate shall be crushed such that a minimum of 85%of the particles have more than one crushed face, unless noted otherwise on the plans. Los Angeles abrasion losses for course aggregate shall not exceed 40%by weight for the surface course and 45%for the binder and base courses per TxDOT Test Method TEX-410-A. Polish Value not less than 30 for aggregate used in the surface course per TxDOT Test Method TEX-438-A. 2.1.2. Fine Aggregate is defined as the fraction passing a No. 10 sieve and shall be of uniform quality. Fine aggregate shall consist of screenings of material that pass the Los Angeles abrasion requirements in paragraph 2.1.1 above. Screenings shall be blended with a maximum of 15% uncrushed aggregate or field sand for Type D mixes, or a maximum of 10%uncrushed aggregate or field sand for Type A, B, and C mixes. Grading of fine aggregate shall be as follows: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight No. 10 100 No. 200 0-15 025424 Pagel of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 2.1.3 Filler shall consist of dry stone dust,Portland cement, hydrated lime, or other mineral dust approved by the Engineer. Grading of filler shall be as follows: Sieve Size Minimum Percent Passing by Weight No. 30 95 No. 80 75 No. 200 55 2.2. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement(RAP). Reclaimed asphalt pavement may be incorporated into the hot mix asphalt concrete furnished for the project, provided that the mixture is designed per the TxDOT Methods and meets the applicable provisions of said TxDOT Item 340 and this specification. 2.3. Asphalt. Asphalt Material shall be in accordance with Standard Specification Section 025404 "Asphalt, Oils and Emulsions" and AASHTO. 2.3.1. Paving Mixture: APPLICATION ASPHALT GRADE Residential or low volume PG 64-22 Collector Surface Course PG 70-22 Binder Course PG 64-22 Arterial Surface Course PG 76-22 Binder Course PG 64-22 Base Courses PG 64-22 2.3.2. Tack Coat shall consist of an emulsion, SS-1 diluted with equal volume of water and applied at a rate ranging from 0.05 to 0.15 gallon per square yard. 3. PAVING MIXTURE 3.1. Mix Design. The mixture shall be designed in accordance with TxDOT Bulletin C-14 and TxDOT Test Method TEX-204-F to conform to the requirements of this specification. The Contractor shall furnish the mix design for the j ob-mix to be used for the project,unless shown otherwise on the drawings. The mix design shall be submitted prior to placement of the mixture. The design procedures are actually intended to result at a job-mix with properties in compliance with these specifications, and when properly placed the j ob-mix will be durable 025424 Page 2 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 and stable. The sieve analysis of the job-mix shall be within the range of the Master Gradation and Tolerances specified herein. The job-mix shall meet the density and stability requirements as specified and shall be included with the mix design as submitted per above. If the specific gravity of any of the types of aggregates differs by more than 0.3,use volume method. Plot sieve analysis of job-mix; percent passing versus size on four-cycle semi-log paper or other appropriate type paper. Show tolerance limits and Limits of Master Gradation. 3.2. Master Gradation of A"m ante. The aggregate for the type of mix specified shall be within the following tabulated limits per TxDOT Test Method TEX-200-F (Dry Sieve Analysis): Type Sieve A B C D Size Course Fine Course Fine Base Base Surface Surface 1-1/2" 100 1-1/4" 95-100 1" 100 7/8" 70-90 95-100 100 5/8" 75-95 95-100 1/2" 50-70 100 3/8" 60-80 70-85 85-100 1/4" No. 4 30-50 40-60 43-63 50-70 No. 10 20-34 27-40 30-40 32-42 No. 40 5-20 10-25 10-25 11-26 No. 80 2-12 3-13 3-13 4-14 No. 200 1-6* 1-6* 1-6* 1-6* VMA minimum 11 12 13 14 025424 Page 3 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 *2-8 when TxDOT Test Method Tex-200-F,Part H(Washed Sieve Analysis)is used. 3.3. Tolerances. The mixture delivered to the job site shall not vary from the j ob-mix by more than the tolerances specified below. The gradation of the produced mix shall not fall outside the Master Grading Limits, with the following exceptions: for Type B material coarser than 3/8" and for Type D material coarser than#4. Variations from j ob-mix shall not exceed the following limits, except as noted above: Item: Tolerances Percent by Weight or Volume V to No. 10 Plus or Minus 5.0 No. 40 to No. 200 Plus or Minus 3.0 Asphalt Weight Plus or Minus 0.5 Asphalt Volume Plus or Minus 1.2 3.4. Mix Properties. The mixture shall have a minimum Hveem stability of 40 for Type A, B, and C mixes, and 35 for Type D mixes per TxDOT Test Method TEX-208-F at an optimum density of 96% (plus or minus 1.5) of theoretical maximum density per TxDOT Test Methods TEX-227-F and TEX-207-F. 3.5. Sampling and Testing of Raw Materials. The Contractor shall sample materials as necessary to produce a mix in compliance with these specifications. 4. EQUIPMENT 4.1. Mixin Plants.lants. Mixing plants shall be either the weigh batching type or the drum mix type. Both types shall be equipped with satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment, aggregate screens and bins (weigh batch only), and pollution control devices as required. 4.2. Truck Scales. A set of truck scales, if needed for measurement, shall be placed at a location approved by the Engineer. 4.3. Asphalt Material Heating Equipment. Asphalt material heating equipment shall be adequate to heat the required amount of material to the desired temperature. Agitation with steam or air will not be permitted. The heating apparatus shall be equipped with a recording thermometer with a 24-hour continuous chart that will record the temperature of the asphalt at the highest temperature. 4.4. Surge-Storage System. A surge-storage system may be used provided that the mixture coming out of the bins is of equal quality to that coming out of the mixer. The system shall be equipped with a gob hopper, rotating chute or other devices designed to minimize segregation of the asphalt mixture. 4.5. Laydown Machine. The laydown machine shall be capable of producing a surface that will meet the requirements of the typical cross section, of adequate power to propel the 025424 Page 4 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 delivery vehicles, and produce the surface tolerances herein required. It shall be wide enough to lay a 28-foot street(back-to-back of curbs)in a maximum of two passes. 4.6. Rollers. All rollers shall be self-propelled and of any type capable of obtaining the required density. Rollers shall be in satisfactory operating condition and free from fuel, hydraulic fluid, or any other fluid leaks. 5. STORAGE, PROPORTIONING AND MIXING 5.1. Storage and Heatingof f Asphalt Materials. Asphalt cement shall not be heated to a temperature in excess of that recommended by the producer. Asphalt storage equipment shall be maintained in a clean condition and operated in such a manner that there will be no contamination with foreign matter. 5.2. Feeding and Drying of Aggregates. The feeding of various sizes of aggregate to the dryer shall be done in such a manner that a uniform and constant flow of materials in the required proportions will be maintained. In no case shall the aggregate be introduced into the mixing unit at a temperature in excess of 350 degrees F. 5.3. Proportioning. All materials shall be handled and proportioned in a manner that yield an acceptable mixture as herein specified and as defined by the 'o) b-mix. 5.4. Mixinz. 5.4.1. Weigh Batch Plant. In charging the weigh box and in charging the pugmill from the weigh box, such methods or devices shall be used as necessary to minimize segregation of the mixture. 5.4.2. Drum Mix Plant. The amount of aggregate and asphalt cement entering the mixer and the rate of travel through the mixer shall be coordinated so that a uniform mixture of the desired gradation and asphalt content will be produced. 5.4.3. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall not vary from the job-mix by more than the tolerances and restrictions herein specified. The mixture when discharged from the plant shall have a moisture content not greater than one percent by weight of total mix when determined by TxDOT Test Method TEX-212-F. 5.4.4. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall be at a temperature between 250 and 325 degrees F. After a target mixing temperature has been established, the mixture when discharged from the mixer shall not vary from this temperature by more than 25 degrees F. 6. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 6.1. Construction Conditions. For mat thicknesses greater than 1.5 inches, the asphalt material may be placed with a laydown machine when the air temperature is 40 degrees F and 025424 Page 5 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 rising but not when the air temperature is 50 degrees F and falling. In addition,mat thickness less than and including 1.5 inches shall not be placed when the temperature of the surface on which the mat is placed is below 50 degrees F. All subsurface utilities shall be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to paving. 6.2. Prime Coat. If a prime coat is required, it shall be applied and paid for as a separate item conforming to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 025412 "Prime Coat", except the application temperature shall be as provided above. The tack coat or asphaltic concrete shall not be applied on a previously primed flexible base until the primed base has completely cured to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 6.3. Tack Coat. Before the asphalt mixture is laid,the surface upon which the tack coat is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The surface shall be given a uniform application of tack coat using materials and rates herein specified and/or as shown on the plans. The tack coat shall be rolled with a pneumatic tire roller as necessary. Tack coat is required before any pavement course not placed immediately following the previous course placement. 6.4. Transporting Asphalt Concrete. The asphalt mixture shall be hauled to the job site in tight vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign matter. In cool weather or for long hauls, canvas covers and insulated truck beds may be necessary. The inside of the bed may be given a light coating of lime water or other suitable release agent necessary to prevent from adhering. Diesel oil is not allowed. 6.5. Placinz. The asphalt mixture shall be spread on the approved prepared surface with a laydown machine or other approved equipment in such a manner that when properly compacted, the finished surface will be smooth and of uniform density, and meet the requirements of the typical cross section as shown on the plans. 6.5.1. Flush Structures. Adjacent to flush curbs, gutters, liners and structures, the surface shall be finished uniformly high so that when compacted, it will be slightly above the edge of the curb and flush structure. 6.5.2. Construction joints of successive courses of asphaltic material shall be offset at least six inches. Construction joints on surface courses shall coincide with lane lines, or as directed by the Engineer,but shall not be in the anticipated wheel path of the roadway. 6.6. Compacting. The asphalt mixture shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly with the necessary rollers to obtain the required density and surface tolerances herein described and any requirements as shown on the plans. Regardless of the method of compaction control followed, all rolling shall be completed before the mixture temperature drops below 175 degrees F. 025424 Page 6 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 6.7. In-Place Density. In-place density control is required for all mixtures except for thin, irregular level-up courses. Material should be compacted to between 96% and 92% of maximum theoretical density or between 4% and 8% air voids. Average density shall be greater than 92%and no individual determination shall be lower than 90%. Testing shall be in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods TEX-207-F and TEX-227-F. Pavement specimens,which shall be either cores or sections of the compacted mixture,will be tested as required to determine the percent air voids. Other methods, such as nuclear determination of in-place density,which correlate satisfactorily with actual project specimens may be used when approved by the Engineer. 6.8. Thickness. The total compacted average thickness of the combined HMAC courses shall not be less than the amount specified on the drawings. No more than 10% of the measured thickness(es)shall be more than 1/4 inch less than the plan thickness(es). If so,the quantity for pay shall be decreased as deemed appropriate by the Engineer. 6.9. Surface Smoothness Criteria and Tests. The pavement surface after compaction, shall be smooth and true to the established lines, grade and cross-section. The surface shall be tested by the City with the Mays Roughness Meter. The Mays Roughness Value for each 600-foot section shall not exceed ninety inches per mile per traffic lane. For each 600-foot section not meeting this criteria, the Engineer shall have the option of requiring that section to be reworked to meet the criteria, or paying an adjusted unit price for the surface course. The unit price adjustment shall be made on the following basis: Adjusted Unit Price= (Adjustment Factor) X Surface Course Unit Bid Price The adjustment factor shall be: For Residential Streets: Adjustment Factor= 1.999 - 0.0111 M For All Other Class Streets (Non Residential) Adjustment Factor= 1.287 - 0.0143 M Where M=Mays Roughness Value In no case shall the Contractor be paid more than the unit bid price. If the surface course is an inverted penetration (surface treatment) the Mays Roughness Value observed will be reduced by ten inches per mile, prior to applying the above criteria. Localized defects (obvious settlements, humps, ridges, etc.) shall be tested with a ten-foot straightedge placed parallel to the roadway centerline. The maximum deviation shall not 025424 Page 7 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 exceed 1/8 inch in ten feet. Areas not meeting this criteria shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Pavement areas having surface irregularities, segregation, raveling or otherwise deemed unacceptable by the Engineer shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor in a manner approved by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the City. 6.10. Opening to Traffic. The pavement shall be opened to traffic when directed by the Engineer. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that all construction traffic allowed on pavement open to the public will be subj ect to the State laws governing traffic on highways. If the surface ravels, it will be the Contractor's responsibility to correct this condition at his expense. 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, hot mix asphaltic concrete pavement shall be measured by the square yard of the type and thickness of"Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete" as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with copies of the "pay ticket" identifying the truck and showing the gross empty weight of the truck with driver as it arrives at the plant and the gross loaded weight of the truck with driver as it leaves the plant. The measured amount will be the difference of the loaded and empty trucks converted to tons. Payment shall be full compensation for quarrying,furnishing all materials,freight involved; for all heating, mixing, hauling, cleaning the existing base course or pavement, tack coat, placing asphaltic concrete mixture, rolling and finishing; and for all manipulations, labor, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work except prime coat when required. Prime coat,performed where required,will be measured and paid for in accordance with the provisions governing City Standard Specification Section 025412 "Prime Coat". All templates, straightedges, scales, and other weight and measuring devices necessary for the proper construction, measuring and checking of the work shall be furnished, operated and maintained by the Contractor at his expense. Any paving placed prior to inspection, testing, and acceptance of underground utilities may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor's expense after correcting any subsurface utility defects. Pavement that fails to meet the in place density criteria may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor's expense, or such pavement may, at the City's discretion, be accepted by the City and the unit price for payment shall be reduced as deemed appropriate by the Engineer. 025424 Page 8 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 025610 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of Portland cement concrete combined concrete curb and gutter or separate concrete curb with or without reinforcing steel as required, constructed on an approved subgrade or foundation material in accordance with these specifications, in conformity with the lines and grades established by the Engineer and details shown on the drawings. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this specification shall conform to the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements as specified in City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Expansion joint filler shall be redwood material meeting the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The foundation shall be excavated and shaped to line, grade and cross-section, and hand tamped and sprinkled. If dry, the subgrade or foundation material shall be sprinkled lightly with water and compacted to not less than 98% Standard Proctor density, or as required on the drawings. Flexible base shall be compacted to specified density and moisture immediately before concrete is deposited thereon. Outside forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Engineer, straight, free of warp, and of a depth equal to the depth of the curb and gutter. They shall be securely staked to line and grade, and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. Inside forms for the curb shall be approved material, shall be of such design as to provide the curb required, and shall be rigidly attached to the outside forms. For reinforced concrete roadways, all jointing must be reflected through the curb, including redwood expansion j oints and construction j oints. Driveway gutter shall be placed integrally with the driveway as shown on the City Standard Details. The reinforcing steel shall be placed in position as shown on the typical details. Care shall be exercised to keep all reinforcing steel in its proper location. Concrete for curb and gutter shall be mixed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The curb and gutter shall be placed in sections of the length indicated on the plans, and each section shall be separated by a premolded insert or board j oint of cross-section specified for the curb and gutter, and of the thickness indicated on the drawings. 025610 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 After the concrete has been struck off and after it has become sufficiently set, the exposed surfaces shall be thoroughly worked with a wooden float. The exposed edges shall be rounded by the use of an edging tool to the radius indicated on the drawings. All exposed surfaces of curb and gutter, or curb, shall be brushed to a smooth and uniform surface. The completed curb and gutter shall be cured with Type 2, white pigmented curing compound unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Other methods of curing as outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. The area behind the curb shall be backfilled,tamped, and sloped as directed as soon as possible and no later than 48 hours after the removal of forms. Backfill shall be placed to the full height of the curb, or as otherwise specified. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, concrete curb and gutter or concrete curb will be measured by the linear foot for each type of curb, complete in place. Payment shall be full compensation for preparing the subgrade; for furnishing and placing all materials including reinforcing steel and expansion j oint material; for furnishing,placing, shaping and tamping backfill; and for all manipulation, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025610 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 025612 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of sidewalks and driveways, with or without reinforcing steel, composed of Portland cement concrete, constructed as herein specified on an approved subgrade,in conformity with the lines and grades established by the Engineer and the details shown on the drawings. 2. MATERIALS Materials and proportions used in construction under this item shall conform to the requirements as specified for Class "A" concrete under City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete". Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements as specified in City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Expansion j oint filler shall be redwood meeting the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Section 038000"Concrete Structures". Cap seal shall be"Greenstreak" or approved equal. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The subgrade shall be excavated, compacted and shaped to line, grade and cross-section and hand tamped and sprinkled with water. Subgrade under concrete sidewalks and driveways shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. The subgrade shall be within 0-3% of optimum moisture content at the time the concrete is placed. Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Engineer, straight, free from warp, and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. They shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. The reinforcing steel shall be placed in position as shown on the drawings. Care shall be exercised to keep all reinforcing steel in its proper location. Driveways shall incorporate the gutter in a unified concrete placement as shown in the City Standard Detail for driveways. Sidewalks shall be constructed in sections of the lengths shown on drawings. Unless otherwise provided by the drawings, no section shall be of a length less than 8 feet, and any section less than 8 feet shall be removed by the Contractor at his own expense. 025612 Pagel of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 The different sections shall be separated by a premolded insert or board j oint of the thickness shown on the drawings, placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the sidewalks. Where the sidewalk or driveways abut a curb or retaining wall, approved expansion joint material shall be placed along their entire length. Similar expansion joint material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through sidewalks or driveways. Concrete shall be mixed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. The top surface shall be floated with a wooden float to a gritty texture. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with approved tools to the radii shown on drawings. 5-foot wide sidewalks shall be marked into separate sections, each 5 feet in length, by the use of approved jointing tools. For other widths of sidewalk,joints to be spaced longitudinally to match the transverse width. When completed, the sidewalks and driveways shall be cured with Type 2,white pigmented curing compound. Other methods of curing as outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, concrete sidewalks and driveways shall be measured by the square foot of surface area of completed sidewalks, driveways, or sidewalks and driveways, as indicated on the drawings. Payment shall be full compensation for preparing and compacting the subgrade; for furnishing and placing all materials including concrete, reinforcing steel and expansion joint material; and for all manipulation, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025612 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 025620 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the construction of Portland cement concrete pavement on a prepared subgrade or base course, in accordance with the typical sections shown on the drawings. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water, proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, Type II or Type III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and II cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram (Wagner Turbidimeter— TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement, expressed in square centimeters per gram, for each shipment. For concrete pavements, strength requirements shall be demonstrated using flexural (beam) or compressive (cylinder)tests as required in the drawings. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement shall be used when high early strength concrete pavement is specified on the drawings. Different types of cement may be used in the same project, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement of concrete pavement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type of cement will be permitted in any one project unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. 025620 Page 1 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete". (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete", Grade No. 2. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete", Grade No. 1. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar(Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete pavements shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". (8) Reinforcing Steel Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all steel reinforcement shall be deformed bars, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace new billet steel in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Dowels shall be plain billet steel smooth bars conforming to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall have hot-dip galvanized finish. 3. STORAGE OF MATERIALS All cement and aggregate shall be stored and handled in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete". 025620 Page 2 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 4. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS Measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 5. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design to comply with the requirements herein and in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. In lieu of the above mix design responsibility, the Contractor may accept a design furnished by the Engineer; however, this will not relieve the Contractor of providing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. This specification section incorporates the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete". 6. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be 025620 Page 3 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements shall be as specified in Table 1. TABLE 1 Slump Requirements Construction Method Desired Slump Minimum Slump Maximum Slump Concrete Pavement(slipformed) 1.5 inches 1 inch 3 inches Concrete Pavement(formed) 4 inches 2.5 inches 6.5 inches NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximum shown. 7. QUALITY OF CONCRETE The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio, desired slump, minimum slump, maximum slump, and the strength requirements of the class of concrete for concrete pavement shall conform to the requirements of Table I and Table 2 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer will cast test beams or cylinders as a check on the flexural or compressive strength of the concrete actually placed. Testing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". If the required flexural or compressive strength is not secured with the cement specified in Table 2, changes in the batch design will be made. The concrete shall meet either the minimum flexural (beam) strength (7-day or 28-day) or minimum compressive strength(7-day or 28-day) shown in Table 2. TABLE 2 Class of Concrete for Concrete Pavement Class Minimum Minimum Maximum of Flexural(Beam) Compressive Water-Cement Coarse Concrete Strength Strength Ratio Aggregate P* 450 psi(7 days) 3200 psi(7 days) 5.6 gal./sack No. 2(1'V2") 570 psi(28 days) 4000 psi(28 days) 0.50 * 5% entrained air 8. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article 'Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Re-tamping of concrete will not be permitted. 025620 Page 4 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 Mixing conditions shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 9. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT Mixing and mixing equipment shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete". 10. READY-MIX PLANTS The requirements for ready-mix plants shall be as specified in City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete". 11. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. Subgrade preparation shall be as specified on the plans. The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". For membrane curing, curing material shall conform to Type 2, Class A curing compound, or as otherwise shown on the drawings. 12. JOINTS IN CONCRETE PAVEMENT The placing of joints in concrete pavement shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" and as detailed on the drawings. 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete for concrete pavement(s), which will constitute the completed and accepted pavement(s) in-place, will be measured by the square yard or square foot for the indicated thickness and type of cement. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing reinforcing steel and steel dowels as shown on the plans; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material, joint filler and sealants, and contraction (control) joints required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Any paving placed prior to inspection, testing, and acceptance of underground utilities may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor's expense after correcting any subsurface utility defects. 025620 Page 5 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 025802 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROLS DURING CONSTRUCTION 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for Temporary Traffic Controls during construction. The work shall include furnishing, installing, moving, replacing, and maintaining all temporary traffic controls including, but not limited to, barricades, signs, barriers, cones, lights, signals, temporary detours, temporary striping and markers, flagger, temporary drainage pipes and structures, blue business signs, and such temporary devices as necessary to safely complete the proj ect. 2. MATERIALS Traffic control devices shall conform to the latest edition of the "Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices", unless indicated otherwise on the Traffic Control Plan. 3. METHODS Sufficient traffic control measures shall be used to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and pedestrians. If the Traffic Control Plan (TCP) is included in the drawings, any changes to the TCP by the Contractor shall be prepared by a Texas licensed professional engineer and submitted to the City Traffic Engineer for approval, prior to construction. If the TCP is not included in the drawings, the Contractor shall provide the TCP prepared by a Texas licensed professional engineer and submit the TCP to the City Traffic Engineer for approval, prior to construction. The Contractor is responsible for implementing and maintaining the traffic control plan and will be responsible for furnishing all traffic control devices, temporary signage and ATSSA certified flaggers. The construction methods shall be conducted to provide the least possible interference to traffic so as to permit the continuous movement of traffic in all allowable directions at all times. The Contractor shall cleanup and remove from the work area all loose material resulting from construction operations at the end of each workday. All signs, barricades, and pavement markings shall conform to the BC standard sheets, TCP sheets and the latest version of the "Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices". The Contractor may be required to furnish additional barricades, signs, and warning lights to maintain traffic and promote motorists safety. Any such additional signs and barricades will be considered subsidiary to the pay item for traffic control. All signs, barricades, and posts will be either new or freshly painted. The contractor and any traffic control subcontractor must be ATSSA certified for Traffic Control. 025802 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 A competent person, responsible for implementation of the TCP and for traffic safety, shall be designated by the Contractor. The name and off-hours phone number of the competent person shall be provided in writing at the Pre-Construction Conference. The competent person shall be on site, during working hours and on call at all times in the event of off-hour emergency. The contractor must provide temporary blue sign boards that direct traffic to businesses and driveways during each phase of construction — see example below. The sign boards may be either skid mounted or barrel mounted. The City will assist the contractor in determining which businesses and driveways will receive signage during various construction phases. The provision, installation, and removal of signage will be considered to be subsidiary to the contract items provided for"Traffic Control." Example Blue Sign 2VtoW ANDARIN GARDE 2" to 18` 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, temporary traffic controls during construction shall be measured as a lump sum. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing, installing, moving, replacing and maintaining all temporary traffic controls including, but not limited to, barricades, signs, barriers, cones, lights, signals, temporary striping and markers, flaggers, removable and non-removable work zone pavements markings and signage, channelizing devices, temporary detours, temporary flexible-reflective roadway marker tabs, temporary traffic markers, temporary drainage pipes and structures, blue business signs, and such temporary devices and relocation of existing signs and devices. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, personnel, and incidentals necessary to provide a safe condition during 025802 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 construction of all phases and elements of the project and to complete the work. Payment will be made on the following basis: The initial monthly estimate will include 50% of the lump sum bid amount minus retention (typically 5%). The balance will be paid with the final estimate, upon completion of the project. 025802 Page 3 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 025805 WORK ZONE PAVEMENT MARKINGS 1. SCOPE. This specification covers the placement, maintenance and removal of work zone pavement markings, which are temporary pavement markings to be placed on roadways that are open to traffic during various work phases, as required to complete the project. 2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. The pavement marking material shall consist of an adhesive-backed reflective tape that can be applied to the pavement, Markings are to be 3M Staymark or approved equal. Markings shall be of good appearance, have straight, unbroken edges and have a color that complies with all FHWA regulations. 3. DIMENSIONS. Pavement markings shall be minimum of 3-7/8 inches wide. Lengths and spacing will be as specified. 4. COLOR. The markings, as well as retroreflected light from the markings, shall be white or yellow as called for on the drawings. 5. VISIBILITY. When in place, the pavement markings (during daylight hours) shall be distinctively visible for a minimum of 300 feet. When in place, the pavement markings (when illuminated by automobile low-beam headlights at night) shall be distinctively visible for a minimum of 160 feet. The above day and night visibility requirements shall be met when viewed from an automobile traveling on the roadway. 6. PLACEMENTS AND MAINTENANCE. At sunrise and sunset of each day and before each phase change, work zone pavement markings meeting all specification requirements shall be in place on all roadways on which traffic is allowed and where suitable permanent pavement markings are not in place. The transverse location of the line(s) formed by the markings shall be as determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, work zone markings shall be placed as follows: Condition Spacing Length of Stripe Straight 80 feet(approximate) 24 inches Curve<2 80 feet(maximum) 24 inches Curve>2 40 feet(maximum) 24 inches The spacing of stripes may be modified by the Engineer. However, the maximum spacing specified above shall not be exceeded in any case. 025805 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining the work zone pavement markings for a maximum period of two weeks. If, however, the Contractor is also responsible for placing the standard pavement markings, the Contractor will be responsible for maintaining the work zone pavement markings until permanent pavement markings are in place. 7. REMOVAL. Where removal is required, it will be accomplished in accordance with instructions of the Engineer or as called for on the drawings. 8. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, work zone pavement markings shall not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 025805 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 025807 PAVEMENT MARKINGS (PAINT AND THERMOPLASTIC) 1. DESCRIPTION This item shall consist of markings and stripes on the surface of the roadways or parking facilities applied in accordance with this specification and at the locations shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 2. MATERIALS Type I Pavement Marking Materials shall be in accordance with TxDOT Departmental Material Specification DMS-8220 "Hot Applied Thermoplastic". All roadway markings shall be thermoplastic. Type II Pavement Marking Materials shall be in accordance with TxDOT Departmental Material Specification DMS-8200 "Traffic Paint" and are not to be used for roadway markings except as primer/sealer for Type I markings. Type II Pavement Markings shall be allowed for parking facilities if called for in the plans. Glass Traffic Beads shall be drop-on glass beads conforming to TxDOT Departmental Material Specification DMS-8290 "Glass Traffic Beads". 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 3.1 Weather Limitations -Pavement marking shall be performed only when the existing surface is dry and clean, when the atmospheric temperature is above 40°F., and when the weather is not excessively windy, dusty, or foggy. The suitability of the weather will be determined by the Engineer. 3.2 Equipment- All equipment for the work shall be approved by the Engineer and shall include the apparatus necessary to properly clean the existing surface, and mechanical marking machine, and such auxiliary hand painting equipment as may be necessary to satisfactorily complete the job. The mechanical marker shall be an approved atomizing spray-type marking machine suitable for application of pavement markings. It shall produce an even and uniform film thickness at the required coverage and shall be designed so as to apply markings of uniform cross-sections and clear-out edges without running of spattering and within the limits for straightness set forth herein. 025807 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 Suitable adjustments shall be provided on the sprayer(s) of a single machine or by furnishing additional equipment for marking the width required. 3.3 Preparation of Existing Surface - Immediately before application of the paint or thermoplastic, the existing surface shall be dry and entirely free from old pavement markings and markers, dirt, grease, oil, acids, laitance, or other foreign matter which could reduce the bond between the marking and the pavement. The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping and blowing as required to remove all dirt, laitance and loose materials. Areas that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned by brooming and blowing shall be scrubbed as directed with a water solution of trisodium phosphate (10% Na3PO4 by weight) or an approved equal solution. After scrubbing, the solution shall be rinsed off and the surface dried prior to marking. 3.4 Layouts and Alignments - Suitable layouts and lines of proposed stripes shall be spotted in advance of the marking application. Control points shall be spaced at such intervals as will insure accurate location of all markings. The Contractor shall provide an experienced technician to supervise the location, alignment, layout, dimensions, and application of the markings. At least 72 hours prior to applying the permanent pavement markings, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and City Construction Inspector to obtain City approval for the location, alignment and layout of the pavement markings. 3.5 Application - Markings shall be applied at the locations and to the dimensions and spacing indicated on the plans or as specified. Markings shall not be applied until the layouts, indicated alignment, and the condition of the existing surface have been approved by the Engineer. In the application of straight stripes, any deviation of the edges exceeding 1/2 inch in 50 feet shall be obliterated and the marking corrected. The width of the markings shall be as designated within a tolerance of 5%. All markings shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Paint shall be applied uniformly by suitable equipment at a rate of not less than 105 or more than 115 square feet per gallon. The Contractor shall furnish a certified report on the quality of materials ordered for the work. This report shall not be interpreted as a basis for final acceptance. The Engineer shall be notified upon arrival of shipment for inspecting and sampling of the materials. When required, all emptied containers shall be returned to the paint material storage or made available for tallying by the Engineer. The containers shall 025807 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 not be removed from the job site or destroyed without permission. The Contractor shall make an accurate accounting of the paint materials used in the accepted work. 3.6 Protection - After application, all markings shall be protected while drying. The fresh markings shall be protected from damage of any kind. The Contractor shall be directly responsible for protecting the markings and shall erect or place suitable warning signs, flags or barricades, protective screens or coverings as required. All surfaces shall be protected from disfiguration by spatter, splashes, spillage, drippings of paint or other materials. 3.7 Defective Workmanship or Material - When any material not conforming to the requirements of the specifications or drawings has been delivered to the project or incorporated in the work, or any work performed is of inferior quality, such material or work shall be corrected as directed by the Engineer, at the expense of the Contractor. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, pavement markings shall be measured by the square foot or linear foot of each type of marking. Eliminating existing pavement markings and markers will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be subsidiary to the pavement marking items. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials and for eliminating existing pavement markings and markers, for all preparation, layout and application of the materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025807 Page 3of3 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 025816 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for furnishing and installing Raised Pavement Markers required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS shall conform to Reference Specification Section 025818 "Pavement Markers (Reflectorized)" (TxDOT Departmental Material Specification 4200). Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, raised pavement markers and traffic buttons shall be of the type to be applied to the roadway surface with a non-integral adhesive. Types of raised pavement markers shall be as follows: TYPE DESCRIPTION I-A One face shall reflect amber light and the body other than the reflective face shall be yellow. I-C One face shall reflect white light and the body other than the reflective face shall be white, silver or light gray. I-R One face shall reflect red light and the body other than the reflective face shall be white, silver or light gray, or may be one-half red on the side that reflects red light. H-A-A Shall contain two reflective faces, each of which shall reflect amber light and the body other than the reflective faces shall be yellow. H-B-B Shall contain two reflective faces, each of which shall reflect blue light and the body other than the reflective faces shall be blue. (Fire Hydrant Application.) H-C-C Shall contain two reflective faces, each of which shall reflect white light and the body other than the reflective faces shall be white, silver or light gray. 025816 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 H-C-R Shall contain two reflective faces, one of which shall reflect white light and the other face shall reflect red light, and the body other than the reflective faces shall be white, silver or light gray, or may be one- half red on the side that reflects red light. ADHESIVE for securing raised pavement markers to asphalt or concrete surfaces shall conform to Reference Specification Section 025828 `Bituminous Adhesive for Pavement Markers" (TxDOT Departmental Materials Specification 6130). 3. METHODS PAVEMENT SURFACE to receive raised pavement markers shall be prepared such that the surface is free of loose material, grease, moisture, and other foreign material that could impair the bond with the adhesive. ALIGNMENT AND POSITIONING of raised pavement markers shall be such that the reflective faces are aligned for proper visibility. ADHESIVE shall be applied such that 100% of the lower surface of the marker is in contact with the adhesive and in sufficient quantity to serve as a cushion between the marker and the paved surface. Any surplus adhesive shall be removed so that the visibility of the marker is not impaired. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, raised pavement markers shall be measured as individual units for each type installed, if included as a bid item in the Bid Form. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and installing markers complete with adhesive, and shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals required to complete the work. 025816 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) SECTION 025818 DMS - 4200 PAVEMENT MARKERS (REFLECTORIZED) EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 2010 4200.1. Description. This Specification governs for the pre-qualification, testing, and field evaluation requirements for reflectorized pavement markers (RPMs). 4200.2. Units of Measurements. The values given in parentheses (if provided) are not standard and may not be exact mathematical conversions. Use each system of units separately. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the standard. 4200.3. Material Producer List. The Materials and Pavements Section of the Construction Division (CST/M&P) maintains the Material Producer List(MPL) of all materials conforming to the requirements of this specification. Materials appearing on the MPL, entitled "Ji"le Bar Tiles, Pavement Markers, and Traffic Buttons," require no further testing, unless deemed necessary by the Project Engineer or CST/M&P. 4200.4. Bidders' and Suppliers' Requirements. Before any material is allowed for use on Department projects, it must be of manufacture and product code or designation shown on the MPL. 4200.5. Pre-Qualification Procedure. The pre-qualification procedure consists of several steps, listed below, which are described in more detail in the following subsections: • Pre-qualification request, • Laboratory testing, • Field testing, • Provisional qualification, • Project evaluations, • Full qualification, • Periodic evaluation, • Disqualification, and • Re-Qualification. CST/M&P will provide notification at the completion of each step and will require confirmation from the supplier's contact person before proceeding to the next step. Costs of sampling and testing are normally borne by the Department; however, the costs to sample, test, and conduct field evaluations for materials failing to conform to the requirements of this specification are borne by the supplier. This cost will be assessed at the rate established by the Director of CST/M&P and in effect at the time of testing and will be billed directly to the Contractor or supplier. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 1-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY 2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) A. Pre-Qualification Request. Prospective suppliers interested in submitting their product for evaluation must submit a written request to the Texas Department of Transportation, Construction Division, Materials & Pavements Section (CP51), 125 East 1 lth Street, Austin, TX 78701-2483. Include the following items with the request: • Name and contact information, including email address for the person who will be the primary contact during the qualification process; • Laboratory test results, from the manufacturer's lab or an independent test laboratory, showing actual test results that meet the requirements of ASTM D 4280; • Product data sheets; • List of locations and applications dates where the product is being evaluated or is in current use; and • Test results from the National Transportation Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP), if available. B. Laboratory Testing.Provide CST/M&P with 350 RPMs of each color and type for laboratory and field testing. Submit materials for laboratory testing and field evaluations at no cost to the Department. CST/M&P will acknowledge receipt of materials and specify a tentative completion date for laboratory testing. CST/M&P will test RPMs in accordance with Article 4200.6 and will send notification of results once laboratory testing is complete. If laboratory testing conducted by TxDOT or by NTPEP shows RPMs do not meet the requirements of this specification, evaluation will cease, and RPMs will not be qualified. Suppliers may resubmit materials for qualification after providing documentation identifying the cause and corrective action taken. C. Field Testing. Upon satisfactory completion of laboratory testing, CST/M&P will specify the location of one or more roadways selected for the 12-month field test and suggested application dates. The roadways will include: • a concrete surface, • a hot-mix asphalt surface, and • a Grade 3 sealcoat. The concrete and asphalt roadways will be full-access controlled freeways with a minimum average daily traffic (ADT) count of 35,000 vehicles, a minimum of 20% average daily truck traffic volume, and a minimum posted speed limit of 65 mph. The Grade 3 road test will be conducted on a four-lane divided highway with a minimum ADT count of 4,000 vehicles per lane, a minimum of 20% average daily truck traffic volume, and a minimum posted speed limit of 50 mph. Providing NTPEP test results meeting the requirements of this specification may replace the concrete and hot-mix asphalt field tests on a deck for deck basis. If TxDOT or NTPEP field testing shows RPMs do not meet the requirements of this specification, evaluation will cease, and RPMs will not be qualified. Suppliers may TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 2-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY 2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) resubmit materials for qualification after providing documentation identifying the cause and corrective action taken. 1. NTPEP Testing. Submit NTPEP test data to CST/M&P for review if available. CST/M&P will acknowledge receipt of NTPEP data and will provide results of review within one month of receipt. The 12-month NTPEP test results for the pre-qualification of RPMs must meet the following: • all the requirements specified in ASTM D 4280 for the tests performed by NTPEP; • a retention rate equal or greater than 90 % of the placed RPMs (excluding the RPMs removed for testing); • a visual evaluation of 3 or greater, as defined by the most recent NTPEP Project Work Plan for Field Evaluations of Raised Pavement Markers and Marker Adhesives, for the marker case and marker lens for a minimum of 90 % of the placed RPMs (excluding the RPMs removed for testing); and • the minimum retroreflectivity values required after 12 months on the roadway listed in Table 1. 2. Application. Provide the name of the contractor, the traffic control plan, and the manufacturer and product code for the adhesive at least two weeks prior to the application for CST/M&P review and approval. CST/M&P will confirm the date and location of the field evaluation installation and resolve any problems as necessary. CST/M&P will provide between fifty and one hundred RPMs of each submitted type for application from the samples submitted for laboratory testing. Testing of submitted markers occurs concurrently with a set of control RPMs, for compliance with the requirements of this specification. Control markers are those RPMs currently listed on the MPL; if the MPL is reorganized and no marker exists to act as a control, an RPM that has undergone the most recent NTPEP testing on both asphalt and concrete will be used. Supplier is responsible for application of the RPMs in the presence of CST/M&P. Application must meet all Department specifications for RPM application and traffic control as well as the manufacturer's recommendations. Notify CST/M&P of any problems or concerns with the installation within one week of application and request a re-installation, if necessary. 3. Evaluation. CST/M&P will notify supplier of a suggested date for field testing evaluation at least one month prior to completion of the 12-month field trial. Provide the name of the contractor and traffic control plan for the evaluation at least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled evaluation date. Materials must meet the following requirements: a. Retention Rate. The retention rate of the test RPMs must be no less than 5%below that of the control RPMs. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 3-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY 2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) b. Body Damage. The test RPMs must not exhibit discoloration or body damage exceeding that of the control RPMs. They must not exhibit a repetitive form of damage or mode of failure (indicative of a design flaw)in a large percentage of the test RPMs. Body damage will be visually assessed according to NTPEP criteria. c. Functionality.Four RPMs placed at 80 foot spacing or eight RPMs placed at 40 foot spacing must be functional when viewed at night from a vehicle using the low beam headlight setting. They must be functional when viewed at a minimum distance of approximately 400 ft. in the daytime. A functional marker is both visible and conspicuous. d. Retroreflectivity. CST/M&P will remove twenty test RPMs from the pavement to undergo laboratory testing for retroreflectivity in accordance with Tex-842-B. Fifteen of the twenty RPMs pulled must pass the minimum reflective values shown in Table 1 (measured at 0.2° observation angle and 0° horizontal entrance angle). Table 1 Minimum Retroreflectivity(cd/fc)After 12 Months on the Roadway Face 12 Mo. Crystal 1.0 Amber 0.7 Red 0.2 D. Provisional Qualification. CST/M&P will grant provisional qualification after successful completion of the laboratory and field evaluations including NTPEP testing, when applicable. CST/M&P will send notification of provisional qualification, including the date of placement on the MPL, within one month after completion of the field evaluations. Failure to complete all project evaluation requirements successfully is grounds for cancellation of provisional qualification. E. Project Evaluation. Once the material is provisionally qualified and listed on the MPL, provide CST/M&P with project information for the first three jobs supplied with the RPMs and additional projects if requested. RPMs must meet the same performance criteria as for the field evaluation to receive full qualification. CST/M&P will return the project evaluation results after the 12-month evaluation of each project. 1. Full Qualification. CST/M&P will grant full pre-qualification and continue to list materials meeting all requirements of this specification on the MPL. Pre-qualification requires extensive field evaluations. It is critical that no significant changes are made to the RPMs' composition, manufacturing process, or design during or after pre-qualification without notifying CST/M&P. It is also critical that the RPMs provided be uniform, with minimum variations from marker to marker. Significant changes not reported by the manufacturer or variations in product, as determined by the Director of CST/M&P, may be cause for removal from the MPL. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 4-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY 2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) 2. Failure. CST/M&P will revoke provisional qualification for RPMs that do not meet the performance criteria and will remove the RPMs from the MPL. Producers not qualified under this Specification may not furnish materials for Department projects and must show evidence of correction of all deficiencies before reconsideration for qualification. F. Periodic Evaluation. Periodic evaluation consists of random department-initiated laboratory testing, audits, and periodic required submittals or field testing. 1. Department-Initiated Laboratory Testing and Audits. The Department may conduct random sampling (per Tex-729-I) and testing on pre-qualified RPMs to identify changes in the material or nonconformity in production and to perform random audits of test reports. 2. Required Submittals or Field Testing. Every 5 years, provide NTPEP data showing continued compliance with the requirements of this specification. G. Disqualification. Causes for disqualification and removal from the MPL include, but are not limited to, the following: • material fails to meet the requirements stated in this specification; the producer fails to report changes in the composition, manufacturing process, or design to CST/M&P; the producer has unpaid charges for failing samples; or qualified RPMs demonstrate repeated and large-scale performance problems in the field. H. Re-Qualification. Suppliers disqualified and removed from the MPL may submit materials for requalification after submitting documentation identifying the cause of the problem and corrective action taken. 4200.6. Material Requirements. All RPMs must meet all requirements, except for requirements specified for a specific type. A. Reflectorized Types. • Type I-A must contain one face that reflects amber light. The body, other than the reflective face, must be yellow. • Type I-C must contain one face that reflects white light. The body, other than the reflective face, must be white or silver-white. • Type I-R must contain one face that reflects red light. The body, other than the reflective face, must be white or silver-white. • Type II-A-A must contain two reflective faces oriented 180' to each other, each of which must reflect amber light. The body, other than the reflective faces, must be yellow. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 5-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY 2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) • Type II-C-R must contain two reflective faces oriented 180' to each other, one of which must reflect white light and one of which must reflect red light. The body, other than the reflective faces, must be white or silver-white. B. Appearance Requirements. The outer surface of the RPMs must be smooth except for the molding or stamping of the manufacturer's unique imprint. All corners and edges exposed to traffic must be rounded. C. Optical Requirements. The RPMs must be capable of providing amber, red, or white light reflection as required by the requisition or plans. The reflected light of each reflective face must conform to the minimum reflective specific intensity (SI)requirements listed in Table 2, measured in candelas per foot-candle (cd/fc). Table 2 Minimum SI per Reflective Face at 0.21 Observation Angle(cd/fc) Horizontal Entrance Angle Crystal Amber Red 00 3.00 2.00 0.75 200 1.50 1.00 0.30 D. Physical Requirements. When tested in accordance with Tex-434-A, the minimum strength of five markers must be 2,000 lb. with none exhibiting a deformation of more than 0.125 in. before achieving the minimum strength. A random sample of five markers will be tested in accordance with Tex-434-A. The average compression results must have a quality index value equal to or greater than 1.23. The quality index value will be calculated from the lower specification limit of 2,000 lb. load. The following equation is used to determine the quality index value: CAL = (X — LSL) / s Where: QL= quality index value X= average result from test LSL =lower specification limit s = standard deviation from test. E. Heat Resistance. The RPMs must show no change in physical or optical properties when subjected to the requirements of Tex-846-B. The temperature will be 140OF with the marker in a vertical position. The SI of the pavement marker must not be less than 80% of its initial value after being subjected to the heat test. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 6-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY 2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) F. Impact Test. The RPMs will be impact tested during the pre-qualification process. They will be impacted with a 20-lb. weight in the form of a 2-in. solid right-circular cylinder with a flat impact face having rounded edges falling freely through a vertical guide. The RPMs will be impacted while resting on a solid, flat, steel plate that is at least 1/2 in. thick. The RPMs will be tested at increasing heights until failure occurs. Failure will occur when the lens or body cracks. The height at which failure occurs -6 in. will be the acceptance threshold for RPMs supplied after pre-qualification. 4200.7. Archived Versions. Archived versions are available. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 7-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY 2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE FOR PAVEMENT MARKERS SECTION 025828 DMS - 6130 BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE FOR PAVEMENT MARKERS EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 2008 6130.1. Description. This Specification establishes the requirements for bituminous type hot- melt adhesive used for the placement of pavement markers. Two types are addressed: standard bituminous marker adhesive consisting of an asphalt base with homogeneously mixed mineral filler; and flexible bituminous marker adhesive consisting of a highly polymer modified asphalt. Either adhesive must be suitable for bonding ceramic and plastic markers to hydraulic cement concrete, asphaltic concrete, and chip-sealed road surfaces and be applicable when road surface and marker temperatures are in the approximate range of 4-71°C (40-160°F). The composition of the adhesive must be such that its properties will not deteriorate when heated to and applied at temperatures up to 218°C (425°F)using either air or oil jacketed melters. 6130.2. Units of Measurements. The values given in parentheses (if provided) are not standard and may not be exact mathematical conversions. Use each system of units separately. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the standard. 6130.3. Material Requirements. A. Adhesive Properties. The adhesive must be smooth and homogeneous, containing no visible particles, and must comply with the requirements in Table 1. Table 1 Adhesive Properties Material Standard Adhesive Flexible Adhesive Property Test Method min max min max Softening Point, °F ASTM D 36 200 200 Penetration, 100 g, 5 s,25°C(77F),0.1 mm ASTM D 5 10 20 15 254 Flow,5 hr.,70'C(158°F),mm 5 54 Heat Stability Flow,5 hr.,70°C(158'F),mm 5 5 Viscosity, 10 rpm,204°C(400°F),Pa-s 7.5 7.5 Flash Point,C.O.C., °F ASTM D 92 550 550 Ductility, 5 cm/min,77°F,cm AASHTO T 51 - 15 - Flexibility, 1 in. mandrel,90'bend, 10 s ASTM D 3111 pass 1.Exception to ASTM D 5329;heat the sample as described in ASTM D 5, Section 7.1. 2.Exception to ASTM D 5329;condition the sample as described in"Test Methods." 3.As modified in"Test Methods" 4.Maximum penetration of 30 is allowed provided the result of the flow test is less than 1 nun. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 1-3 LAST REVIEWED:SEPTEMBER 2014 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE FOR PAVEMENT MARKERS B. Asphalt Properties. This applies to standard bituminous adhesive only. The filler-free asphalt, obtained from the Extraction and Abson recovery process, as explained in Section 6130.4, must have the properties in Table 2. Table 2 Filler-Free Asphalt Properties Property Minimum Maximum Test Method Penetration, 100 g, 5 s,25°C,(77 °F), 25 ASTM D 5 0.1 mm(in.) Viscosity, 135°C(275°F)Pa-s 1.2(12) ASTM D 2171 (Poises) Viscosity Ratio, 135°C(275°F) 2.2 ASTM D 1754 and ASTM D 2171 C. Filler Properties. This applies to standard bituminous adhesive only. The filler material, obtained using the filler separation technique described in Section 6130.4, must have the properties in Table 3. Table 3 Filler Properties Property Minimum Maximum Test Method Filler Content,wt. % 50 75 As in Section 6130.4. Filler Fineness,%passing: ASTM C 430,as modified in 45 µm(No. 325) 75 -- Section 6130.4. 75 µm(No. 200) 95 -- 100 -- 150 µm(No. 100) 6130.4. Test Methods. A. Heat Stability Flow. To determine the heat stability flow, place 1000 g of adhesive in a loosely-covered quart can, heat to 218°C (425°F) and maintain at this temperature 4 hours before performing the flow test. B. Extraction and Abson Recovery. Use this procedure to separate and recover the base asphalt from the adhesive. Heat the adhesive just to the point where it will easily flow. Transfer between 125 and 150 g into a 1000-mL (I-qt.)Erlenmeyer flask containing 400 mL (13.5 fl. oz.) of trichloroethylene with a temperature of 52-66°C (125-150°F). Stir this mixture thoroughly to dissolve the asphalt. Decant the solvent-asphalt mixture. Recover the base asphalt from solvent according to Tex-211-F, but begin with the centrifuge step; the primary distillation is not necessary. Repeat the above extraction- recovery method as necessary to obtain the desired quantity of asphalt. C. Filler Separation Technique. Use this procedure to separate the filler material from the asphalt and determine the filler content of the adhesive. Weigh 10.00 ± 0.01 g of solid adhesive, broken into small pieces, into a centrifuge flask with approximately 100 mL (3.5 fl. oz.)volume such as that specified in ASTM D 1796. Add 50 mL (1.7 fl. oz.) of trichloroethylene to the adhesive. Swirl or stir the mixture with a fine rod, taking care not TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 2-3 LAST REVIEWED:SEPTEMBER 2014 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE FOR PAVEMENT MARKERS to lose any solids. Place the sample flask in a balanced centrifuge and spin using a minimum relative centrifugal force of 150 (as determined in ASTM D 1796, Section 6.) Remove the sample flask and decant the solvent, taking care not to lose any solids. Repeatedly add more solvent, centrifuge, and decant until the solvent becomes clear and the filler appears free of asphalt. Dry the recovered filler at 71 ± 3°C (160± 5°F)to remove solvent. Weigh the dried filler. Filter the decanted solvent through a filter paper with a 20-25 µm retention factor to verify there is no loss of filler. Calculate the filler content as a percentage of the original sample weight. D. Filler Fineness. Use this procedure to determine the filler fineness. Use the same apparatus as described in ASTM C 430, except also use 75µm (No. 200) and 150 µm (No. 100) sieves. Prepare a water solution containing 1 wt. percent of a nonionic, water- soluble surfactant, such as Triton X-100, beforehand. Thoroughly wet the 1 g dry sample in the surfactant solution and allow it to soak for 30 min. Transfer the filler completely into the 45 µm (No. 325) sieve cup. Wash the sample with the water spray, as described in ASTM C 430, Section 5, for 2 min., adding surfactant solution as needed to disperse any clumped particles. Dry and weigh the sample and perform calculations as directed in ASTM C 430. Repeat the procedure using the other two sieve sizes. 6130.5. Acceptance. Bituminous adhesives are pre-qualified in accordance with Tex-538-C. Consult"Bituminous Marker Adhesive" for a list of materials currently pre-qualified under this procedure. 6130.6. Packaging and Labeling. Package the adhesive in self-releasing cardboard containers with essentially flat and parallel top and bottom surfaces such that the packages will stack properly. Each package must have a net weight of either 23 or 27 kg (50 or 60 lb.) and must weigh within 1 kg (2 lb.) of the stated quantity. Self-releasing cardboard dividers, which will separate each package into sections weighing no more than 7 kg (15 lb.) each, must be part of the packaging. Each package must display: • the manufacturer's name, • net weight, • lot or batch number, and • a product name that clearly identifies the material as either standard or flexible bituminous marker adhesive. 6130.7. Archived Versions. Archived versions are available. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 3-3 LAST REVIEWED:SEPTEMBER 2014 SECTION 026202 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE SYSTEM (S-89) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for hydrostatic testing the completed pressure system. The Contractor shall provide all equipment, materials, labor, etc. , as necessary, except as noted, and accomplish all testing under this specification. 2. MATERIALS Water for filling the line and making tests shall be furnished by the Contractor through a standard meter connection. A meter and gauges for testing shall be supplied by the Contractor. A test pump with appropriate connector points as approved by the Water Superintendent for the installation of meter and gauge shall be furnished by the Contractor. The meter shall be directly connected to the main or pipe being tested by the use of copper tubing or an approved reinforced hose. The meter shall be protected against extreme pressures by the use of a one inch (1") safety relief valve set at the test pressure plus ten pounds per square inch and furnished by the Contractor. 3. TEST PROCEDURE Tests shall be made only after completion of backfill as specified, and not until at least thirty-six (36) hours after the last concrete thrust block has been cast. Each section of pipeline shall be slowly filled with water and the specified test pressure, measured at the point of lowest elevation, shall be applied. During the filling of the pipe, and before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipeline. During the test, all exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and joints shall be carefully examined. If found to be leaking, they shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor. If the leaking is due to cracked or defective material, the defective material shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with sound material. All pipes shall be subjected to two hydrostatic tests. The first hydrostatic test shall be a two-hour test at a pressure of 150 P.S.I. The second test shall be no less than 48 hours after successful completion of the first hydrostatic test. The second hydrostatic test shall be for a 24-hour period at City operating pressure for waterlines or at 50 P.S.I. for sanitary sewer force mains. 026202 Rev 11/9/99 Page 1 of 2 The maximum allowable leakage shall be as follows: Ductile Iron Pipe, AWWA C600 L = SD✓P or L = N D✓P 133,200 7,400 Asbestos - Cement Pipe, AWWA C603 L = N D✓P 4, 000 PVC Pipe - Uni-bell equation 99 L = N D✓P 7,400 WHERE L = Maximum Allowable Leakage (Gal./Hr. ) S = Length of Pipe Tested (Feet) N = Number of Joints in Tested Line (Pipe & Fittings) D = Nominal Diameter of Pipe (In. ) P = Average Test Pressure (P.S.I. ) If the pressure system fails to meet the leakage requirements, the Contractor shall make the required repairs to the system and the system shall be retested. This procedure shall be repeated until the system complies with leakage requirements. The cost of each retest shall be $100. 4. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Syatem will not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiary. 026202 Rev 11/9/99 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 026214 GROUTING ABANDONED UTILITY LINES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work and materials required for grouting abandoned utility lines in place. 2. MATERIALS A. Flowable Grout: Flowable grout (or flowable fill) shall consist of a mixture containing Portland cement, fly ash, sand, water, and "Darafill" admixture (or approved equivalent), in the amounts shown below (or otherwise proportioned to provide 100 psi compressive strength at 28 days), to achieve a paste-like consistency immediately prior to placing the flowable grout. The flowable grout mixture shall be supplied by an approved ready-mix supplier. The manufacturer's representative shall be consulted for any final adjustments to improve the flowability of the mixture. Commercially produced flowable grout may be used with approval of the Engineer. 100 lbs/CY Portland Cement 300 lbs/CY Fly Ash 2100 lbs/CY Sand 250 lbs/CY Water 6 oz/CY "Darafill" admixture, as manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or approved equivalent. B. Raw Soil: Soil shall be typical clayey soil of the area. It shall be from the project site or other approved source not suspected of being contaminated. The soil shall have a Plasticity Index over 15 and a Liquid Limit not to exceed 65. C. Lime: Lime shall be hydrated lime, calcium hydroxide, in accordance with AASHTO M 216. D. Water: Water shall be potable. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Flowable Grout: Mix Portland cement, sand, fly ash, "Darafill" and water in the amounts shown above to achieve a paste-like consistency immediately prior to placing flowable grout. B. Soil-Lime Mix Design: The following is given as a typical mix design for soil-lime mixture for trial mix. The mix design is based on damp soil with an initial water content of about 15%. The proportions of soil and lime shall not be altered. The Contractor shall determine the amount of water to be added as required to produce a mix at its liquid limit. 026214 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 Trial Mix Design: Damp Soil 1000 lb. Lime 50 lb. Water(approximate) 48 gal. Consistency shall be checked with liquid limit apparatus. C. Placement: The Contractor shall grout abandoned lines as indicated on the drawings. Temporary pumping and venting ports shall be placed as required to provide complete filling of the abandoned line and proper placement of the grout. If segregation or "sand packing" is experienced during pumping, the Contractor shall reduce the water content of the mix or obtain other soil source (for soil-lime mixture), as required. Any damage resulting from pumping operation shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, grouting abandoned utility lines shall be measured by the linear foot of abandoned-in-place pipe. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials and incidentals required to mix, transport, and place the grout and restore surface at pump ports. 026214 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 026404 WATER SERVICE LINES (S-87) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing and installing water service lines required to complete the project. Water Service lines are those lines from the City main to the meter at the property line 2 . MATERIALS GENERAL Service fittings shall have a minimum of 150 psi working pressure rating, unless indicated otherwise. Fittings and materials shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWWA C-800. All service connections shall require service clamps. SERVICE CLAMP Service clamps shall be brass saddle with two silicone bronze straps with I .P. thread and have a minimum working pressure rating of 200 psi. The saddle and nuts shall be of 85-5-5-5 brass alloy per ASTM B-62 and AWWA C800. The Nuts shall have unitized washers. Straps shall be 5/8" high quality silicone bronze flattened and contoured to provide a wider bearing surface against pipe. Clamps shall be comparable to: Ford 202B, Smith Blair 323, Rockwell 323 CORPORATION STOP Corporation Stop shall be of brass with I.P. thread inlet and Muller 110 Compression connection outlet designed for type K copper pipe and be comparable in design to the following: Muller H-15028 for 1" sizes Muller H-15023 for 10" & 2" sizes ANGLE METER STOP Angle Meter Stop shall have a Teflon coated bronze ball which rotates within two Buna-N rubber seats. Inlet shall be packed joint for Type K copper and be comparable in design to the following: Ford BA43-342 for 1" Service Line with 5/811x3/4" or 3/4" meter size Brass gate valve req. for 10" and 2" sizes SERVICE LINE Service line shall be of type K copper tube. Other products of comparable featured and equal quality may be substituted for the above items with approval of the Engineer. 026404 Rev 10/11/2000 Page 1 of 2 3 . CONSTRUCTION METHODS See Section 022020. 9, "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and Sewers" . Service lines shall be placed by the Contractor as indicated on the drawings and as directed by the Engineer. Relocation of existing meters and change overs to the new system shall be done only under the direct supervision of the City Water Department. 4 . MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Water Service Lines shall be measured with the units indicated in the proposal for each size of service line. Payment for service lines shall include but not be limited to the following: copper tubing, corporation stop, service clamp, angle meter stop, trenching, trench safety, testing, flushing, clean-up, site restoration, all labor, all equipment, and incidentals required for the proper installation. 026404 Rev 10/11/2000 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 026409 TAPPING SLEEVES AND TAPPING VALVES (5-84) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work and materials required for furnishing and installing of tapping sleeves, sleeves and valves. Required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Tapping sleeves shall have a Class 125 ANSI B 16. 1 outlet flange of cast iron, ductile iron, or stainless steel. Sleeves shall be of ductile iron, gray cast iron, or 304 or 316 stainless steel. Lugs, bolts, washers, and nuts shall be of 304 or 316 stainless steel. Iron sleeves shall be of the mechanical joint or caulked joint type as manufactured by Mueller, Clow, or approved equal. Stainless steel sleeves shall be of the compression gasket type capable providing full support of the tapped pipe as manufactured by Ford, Smith Blair, Romac, or approved equal. Gasket materials shall be of material suitable for potable water systems. Tapping sleeves shall be sized for the type and size of pipe to be tapped. The class of asbestos cement pipe that will most likely be encountered in the water will be class 200 for pipes 6" in diameter and less, and class 150 for larger pipes. It should be understood that existing pipes to be tapped might not be of the type of material and/or size that is shown on the drawings. The proper size and type of tapping sleeve shall be provided and installed regardless of what is encountered. Tapping Valves shall conform to AWWA Standards and City Standard Specification Section 026411. Valve boxes shall be as described in Section 026411.2, "Gate Valves for Water Lines". 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Construction methods shall adhere to those set out in Section 026402 "Waterlines", and Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and Sewers". 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Tapping sleeves and Tapping sleeves shall be made on a per each basis and shall include payment for all labor, material, and equipment for installation of the fittings and all other related items such as bolting, wrapping, sand encasing, valves complete in place including joint materials and cast iron valve box, box extension, cover, concrete collar, all as required to install the valves as indicated and specified. 026409 Rev 11/12/99 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 027202 MANHOLES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing of all materials and construction of manholes composed of a concrete base and concrete walls as shown on the drawings, to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on drawings or established by the Engineer. 2. MATERIALS Concrete for cast-in-place storm water manholes and storm water junction boxes shall be Class C (3,600 psi at 28 days). Manholes for wastewater shall be made from fiberglass only,in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 027205 "Fiberglass Manholes". Mortar for plastering shall be one (1) part Portland cement to three (3) parts clean hard and sharp mortar sand, free of all foreign substances or injurious alkalis. Reinforcing steel, where used, shall conform to the requirements of Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". All wastewater manhole rings and covers for streets shall be East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. product V 1430 CV or V 1420/1480 Z 1, or pre-approved equal, and shall have the seating surface of ring and cover machined to secure a snug fit per the City Standard Wastewater Details. All storm water manholes shall be East Jordan Iron Works,Inc.product V1168 assembly,and for school zones shall be a bolted assembly per the City Standard Storm Water Details. Steps are not required for wastewater and storm water manholes. Joint material for precast concrete manholes shall be Ram-Nek Flexible Plastic Gaskets as manufactured by K. T. Snyder Company, Houston, Texas, or an approved equal. 3. EXCAVATION The Contractor shall do all necessary excavation for the various manholes, conforming to size and dimensions shown on plans plus a maximum of four(4)feet working room. Excavation shall not be carried to greater depth than required. Subgrade under manhole footings shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Shoring shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be installed as necessary. Shoring shall not be removed or backfilled around until entire manhole is completed, unless authorized by the Engineer. Shoring shall remain in place at least twenty-four(24) hours after concrete work has been completed. 027202 Pagel of 3 Rev.3-25-2015 4. CONCRETE MANHOLES (STORM WATER ONLY) (1) Formed-in-Place Manholes: Where formed concrete is used, forms shall be built to dimensions shown on the standard details. Inserts and openings shall be formed so concrete will not be injured during process of stripping forms. Forms shall be braced and tied to prevent spreading or bulging, and shall meet approval of the Engineer prior to placing concrete. Forms shall remain in place for minimum of twenty-four(24)hours, and shall be removed within a maximum time of seven (7) days after completion of concrete work. Reinforcing steel, if required, shall be as shown on the plans. The bottom of manholes shall be carefully formed and inverted smoothly when finished, with pipes cut to fit inside surface of walls. (2) Precast Manholes Precast manholes shall allow unobstructed view of all pipes connected to the manhole. Precast manholes shall be designed to support HS-20 traffic loading and designed by a Texas licensed professional engineer. The upper 18 inches of the corbel shall be brick to facilitate subsequent grade adjustment. Either concentric or eccentric cones may be required. Where not specified, eccentric cones shall be used. Manhole designs shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer. 5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION METHODS All items shall be installed as the work progresses and as shown on the standard details. Work shall be completed and finished in a careful workmanlike manner,with special care being given to sealing joints around all pipe extending through walls of the manholes. After finishing walls,the bottom of the manhole shall be completed by adding sufficient concrete to shape the bottom in conformity with requirements on the plans. Where old manholes are adjusted to meet new lines and grades, all old masonry or concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted before j oining new masonry or concrete to it. HDPE adjustment rings are to be used to match roadway grade. A maximum of 18" of adjustment rings may be utilized. 6. BACKFILLING/LEAKAGE TESTING Backfilling around the manholes shall commence as soon as concrete or masonry has been allowed to cure the required time and forms and shoring have been removed. Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than six inches (6") and compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density before next layer is installed. Wastewater manholes shall withstand a leakage test not to exceed the values stated in City Standard Specification Section 027205 "Fiberglass Manholes", except that an additional 10 percent of loss will be permitted for each additional two feet head over a basic two-foot internal head. 027202 Page 2 of 3 Rev.3-25-2015 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, manholes shall be measured by each individual structure built, and paid for at the unit price bid per each, of the size, type and depth specified, complete in-place, and meeting the approval of the Engineer. "Complete in-place" shall mean all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to furnish and install the manholes, excavation, compaction,backfilling,dewatering,concrete foundation,connections,adjustment rings, ring and cover, concrete work, leakage testing,video inspection, and adjust the manholes to finish grade. Extra depth for wastewater manholes over six feet in depth shall be measured by the vertical foot and shall be paid for at the price bid per vertical foot for "Extra Depth for Manholes". Rehabilitation of existing manholes with fiberglass inserts shall be measured by each individual structure rehabilitated, and paid for at the unit price bid per each, of the size, type and depth specified, complete in-place, and meeting the approval of the Engineer. "Complete in-place" shall mean all labor, materials,tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to furnish and install the rigid fiberglass manhole inserts,make connections,grout the annular space,backfilling,adjustment rings, ring and cover, concrete work, leakage testing, and adjust the manholes to finish grade. 027202 Page 3 of 3 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 027203 VACUUM TESTING OF WASTEWATER MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification governs all work and materials necessary to perform vacuum testing of new or existing wastewater manholes. Manholes may be tested after installation with all connections (existing and/or proposed)in place. Vacuum testing may be performed prior to or after backfilling by the installer. Final acceptance, in accordance with the requirements of this specification, will consist of vacuum testing of the completed and installed structure (manhole) in place to include manhole/adjustment rings and manhole casting. 2. MATERIALS Vacuum testing shall consist of a minimum of the following: (a) Engine. (b) Vacuum Pump. (c) Hose. (d) Test Head device capable of sealing opening in manhole casting as required. (e) Pneumatic Test Plugs - these plugs shall have a sealing length equal to or greater than the diameter of the connecting pipe to be sealed. 3. PROCEDURE (a) The test head shall be placed at the top of the manhole in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. (b) A vacuum of 10 inches of mercury shall be drawn on the manhole,the valve on the vacuum line of the test head closed, and the vacuum pump shut off. The time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to 9 inches of mercury. (c) The manhole shall pass if the time for the vacuum reading to drop from 10 inches of mercury to 9 inches of mercury meets or exceeds the values indicated in Table 1. (d) If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made by an approved method. The manhole shall then be retested until a satisfactory test is obtained. 027203 Pagel of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE 1 - Minimum Test Times for Various Manhole Diameters (ASTM C1244) Depth Diameter(inches) (feet) 42 48 54 60 72 Time(seconds) 8 17 20 23 26 33 10 21 25 29 33 41 12 25 30 35 39 49 14 30 35 41 46 57 16 34 40 46 52 67 18 38 45 52 59 73 20 42 50 53 65 81 22 46 55 64 72 89 24 51 59 64 78 97 26 55 64 75 85 105 28 59 69 81 91 113 30 68 74 87 98 121 4. TESTING AND CERTIFICATION (a) Testing shall be done by the Contractor and witnessed by the Engineer or his designated representative. All manholes and structures shall be tested as finished and completed for final acceptance. (b) ANY DEFECTIVE WORK OR MATERIALS shall be corrected or replaced by the Contractor and retested. This shall be repeated until all work and materials are acceptable. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise indicated on the Bid Form, vacuum testing of wastewater manholes and structures will not be measured for pay. Such items shall be considered subsidiary to pay items applicable for Fiberglass Manholes, complete and in-place. 027203 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 027205 FIBERGLASS MANHOLES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for providing, installing and adjusting fiberglass manholes required to complete the project. 2. GENERAL Fiberglass manholes shall be installed at the locations indicated on the drawings. 3. MATERIALS A. Manholes Fiberglass manholes shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM D3753"Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes and Wetwells,"latest edition, and the referenced design criteria as follows: 1. ASTM C581 Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service 2. ASTM D695 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics 3. ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials 4. ASTM C923 Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals 5. ASTM D2412 Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading 6. ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor 7. ASTM D2584 Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins 8. ASTM D3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 9. ASTM F794 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter 10. ASTM C32 Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made From Clay or Shale) The minimum wall thickness for all fiberglass manholes at all depths shall be 0.50 inch. The inside diameter of the manhole barrel shall be a minimum of 48 inches or as otherwise specified on the drawings, but shall not be less than 1.5 times the nominal pipe diameter of the largest pipe, whichever is larger. A concentric reducer over the barrel shall have a 027205 Pagel of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 minimum inside diameter of 31.75 inches at the top, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. B. Manhole Pipe Connectors Manhole pipe connectors for Sanitary Sewer Application shall be made of corrosion resistant plastic. The connector shall eliminate leaks around the pipe entering the manhole wall and shall permit pipe movement without loss of seal integrity, and shall be in conformance with ASTM D3212. Material for elastomeric seal in push-on joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. Material for rubber sleeve shall meet the requirements of ASTM C443. Manhole pipe connectors between 4 inches and 15 inches shall be Inserta Tee from Fowler Mfg., or approved equal. Manhole pipe connection for Storm Sewer Application shall be made with Ram-Nek flexible plastic gasket material as manufactured by K.T. Snyder Company of Houston, Texas, or approved equal, and wrapped with Class `A' Subsurface Drainage Geotextile, AASHTO M288. C. Manhole Base Concrete shall be Class `A' in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Caulk for seal between fiberglass manhole and concrete cast-in-place base shall be Epo-Flex epoxy(gun grade consistency)as manufactured by Dewey Supply of Corpus Christi, Texas, or approved equal. Precast reinforced concrete manhole base shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C478, as shown on the construction plans and detail drawings. D. Inflow Inhibitors Inflow inhibitors shall be installed insanitary manholes. They shall be of 316 stainless steel with an equivalent thickness of not less than 18 gauge, and load tested in excess of 3000 pounds. The inhibitor shall rest on the lip of the seating surface of the manhole ring and shall not exceed a depth of 6.5 inches. The seating surface of the inhibitor shall have an attached gasket on the weight-bearing side. The inhibitor shall have a gas relief valve made of Nitrite and shall operate at a one(1)psi differential pressure. The inhibitor shall be fitted with a handle of 3/16 plastic coated stainless steel cable attached to the insert body with a 6# 316 stainless steel rivet. The inhibitor shall be constructed of materials that withstand highly corrosive sewer gases. E. Ring and Cover Manhole ring and cover for all manholes shall be for street application and shall be as indicated on the drawings. Manholes 5 feet in diameter and larger shall require a nominal 3- foot ring and cover, as specified on the drawings. HDPE adjustment rings are to be used for 027205 Page 2 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 grade adjustments. A maximum of 18" of adjustment rings may be utilized. F. Flowable Grout Flowable grout(or flowable fill) shall consist of a mixture containing Portland cement, fly ash, sand, water, and"Darafill" admixture(or approved equivalent), in the amounts shown below (or otherwise proportioned to provide 100 psi compressive strength at 28 days), to achieve a paste-like consistency immediately prior to placing the flowable grout. The flowable grout mixture shall be supplied by an approved ready-mix supplier. The manufacturer's representative shall be consulted for any final adjustments to improve the flowability of the mixture. Commercially produced flowable grout may be used with approval of the Engineer. 100 lbs/CY Portland Cement 300 lbs/CY Fly Ash 2100 lbs/CY Sand 250 lbs/CY Water 6 oz/CY "Darafill" admixture, as manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or approved equivalent. 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS General: The limits of excavation shall allow for placing and removing forms, installing sheeting, shoring,bracing, etc. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work and will avoid obstructing sidewalks, driveways, power poles, drainage structures, streets, etc. Subgrade under manhole footings shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Vertical Sides: When necessary to protect other improvements, the Contractor shall maintain vertical sides on the excavation. The limits shall not exceed three feet outside the footing on a vertical plane parallel to the footing except where specifically approved otherwise by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring, and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, power poles, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and adequacy of all sheeting, shoring and bracing. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed as the excavation is backfilled. Sloping Sides: In unimproved areas where sufficient space is available,the Contractor will be allowed to back slope the sides of the excavation. The back slope shall be such that the excavation will be safe from caving. Safety requirements shall govern the back slope used. De-watering: The Contractor shall keep the excavation free from water by use of cofferdams,bailing,pumping,well pointing, or any combination, as the particular situation may warrant. All de-watering devices shall be installed in such a manner as to provide clearance for construction, removal of forms, and inspection of exterior of form work. It is the intent of these specifications that the foundation be placed on a firm dry bed. The foundation bed shall be kept in a de-watered condition for a sufficient period of time to 027205 Page 3 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 insure the safety of the structure,but in no case shall de-watering be terminated sooner than seven(7)days after placing concrete. All de-watering methods and procedures are subj ect to the approval of the Engineer. The excavation shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before work on the structure is started. The Contractor shall provide a relatively smooth,firm foundation bed for footings and slabs that bear directly on the undisturbed earth without additional cost to the City, regardless of the soil conditions encountered. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to whether these conditions have been met. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not create an unsafe condition. Unauthorized Over-Excavation: Excavation for slabs, footings, etc., that rest on earth, shall not be carried below the elevation shown on the drawings. In the event the excavation is carried below the indicated elevation, the Contractor shall bring the slab, footing, etc., to the required grade by filling with concrete. Wall Preparation for Pipe Penetrations: For sanitary sewer application,pipe penetrations for pipe sizes 4-inch through 15-inch shall be made with appropriately sized core drill bits recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe penetrations other than described above and as authorized by the Engineer shall be made as follows: cut shall be equal to the outside diameter of pipe to pass through it, plus 1/2 inch. Cuts are to be made using electric or gasoline powered circular saw with masonry blade. Impact type tools shall not be used. Handling: Manholes shall be handled and stored in a safe manner as necessary to prevent damaging either the manhole or the surroundings. If manhole must be moved by rolling,the ground which it traverses shall be smooth and free of rocks, debris, etc. Manholes shall be lifted as specified by the manufacturer. Height Adjustment: If necessary, utilize HDPE adjustment rings to adjust the manhole to the correct grade elevation. A maximum of 18" of adjustment rings may be utilized. Installation: Lower manhole into wet concrete until it rests at the proper elevation, and a minimum of six (6)inches into concrete, then plumb. Backfill Material: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, initial backfill around manholes (from subgrade to five feet (5') above the top of the concrete footing) shall be flowable grout. The remaining final backfill around manholes shall be cement-stabilized sand, or approved equal, containing a minimum of 2 sacks of standard Type I or Type II Portland cement per cubic yard of sand, free of large hard lumps, rock fragments or other debris. The material shall be free of large lumps or clods which will not readily break down under compaction. This material shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Backfill material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. Topsoil should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading around the structure, if necessary. 027205 Page 4 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 Schedule of Backfillin2: The Contractor may begin backfilling around manhole as soon as the concrete has been allowed to cure and the forms removed. Compaction: Backfill shall be placed in layers not to exceed 6 inches compacted thickness and mechanically tamped to at least 95% Standard Proctor density(ASTM D698). Backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the structure. Contractor shall follow operational requirements for bypass pumping as set forth in City Standard Specification Section 027200 "Control of Wastewater Flows". 5. TESTING Manholes shall be tested for leakage by either of two tests as specified by the Engineer. Water Leakage Test: The Contractor shall provide water, labor, and materials for testing. Testing shall be as follows: I. With sewers plugged, the manhole shall be filled with water. 2. The manhole shall be checked after 24 hours have elapsed. 3. Water loss shall not exceed 2.4 gallons per foot of depth for the 24-hour period for 4-foot diameter manholes, or 3.0 gallons per foot of depth for the 24-hour period for 5-foot diameter manholes. Water loss shall not exceed 0.6 gallon per foot of diameter per foot of depth for the 24-hour period for all sizes of sanitary manholes. 4. If the manhole is within 9 feet of a waterline that is not or cannot be encased, the manhole shall be tested for no leaks and no noticeable loss of water shall be experienced for the 24-hour period. If water loss is excessive,the Contractor shall correct the problem and the manhole shall be retested. Vacuum Test: Vacuum testing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 027203 "Vacuum Testing of Wastewater Manholes and Structures". 6. GRADE ADJUSTMENT OF EXISTING FIBERGLASS MANHOLES The adjustment of the ring and cover is to be achieved by removal or addition of HDPE grade adjustment rings that rest above the fiberglass corbel. If the ring and cover must be lowered to the extent that the new elevation cannot be achieved by removal of adjustment rings and it is necessary to remove a section of the fiberglass manhole, this work shall be done as described below. Note that manhole repair kits are available for this work. Remove the appropriately sized section of the existing manhole from the vertical manhole wall at least 6 inches below the seam where the corbel meets the vertical wall. 027205 Page 5 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 Excavate evenly around the manhole as required. Mark, cut and remove the required section of the manhole. Make a square cut as necessary for a good butt splice. Grind and clean ends of fiberglass that are to be re-united. Replace and align the top. Fiberglass a 6-inch strip along the outside seam all around with two layers of mat with one layer of woven roving sandwiched between. After the outside has set, go on the inside and fill any voids in the seam with epoxy or material provided by the manhole manufacturer for use in such application. After the putty has set, fiberglass a 6-inch strip on the inside as previously done on the outside. After curing,backfill with cement-stabilized sand, as described above,compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698) or as directed by the Engineer or his designated representative. 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,fiberglass manholes shall be measured per each for each size (diameter) of manhole indicated. Payment shall be made at the unit price bid and shall fully compensate the Contractor for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and incidentals required to complete the work. Payment shall include, but not be limited to; excavation, dewatering, compaction, concrete foundation, manhole assembly, connections, cast iron frame and cover,adjustment to finish grade,concrete work,backfill, leakage testing, bypass pumping, and other work as required to complete the fiberglass manhole. Extra depth for a sanitary manhole over 6 feet in depth will be measured by the vertical foot of depth in excess of 6 feet and bid as "Extra Depth for Manhole (Wastewater)". Rehabilitation of existing manholes with fiberglass inserts shall be measured by each individual structure rehabilitated, and paid for at the unit price bid per each, of the size, type and depth specified, complete in-place, and meeting the approval of the Engineer. "Complete in-place" shall mean all labor, materials,tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to furnish and install the rigid fiberglass manhole inserts, make connections, grout the annular space with flowable grout, backfilling, leakage testing, and adjust the manholes to finish grade. 027205 Page 6 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 027602 GRAVITY WASTEWATER LINES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for furnishing, handling and installing gravity wastewater lines required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS A. Pipe and Fittings: 1. POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE and fittings shall be in accordance with the following: 6" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 8" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 10" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 12" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 15" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 18" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR 26 24" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR 26 30" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR 26 36" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR 26 PS115 42" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR35 PS46 48" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR35 PS46 Pipe and fittings shall have push-on compression gasket joints in accordance with ASTM D3212 and shall be a non-blue color. 2. POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE shall be AWWA C900 or C905 integral green (non-blue color) with a minimum pressure rating of not less than 150 psi, made of Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin compounds, as defined in ASTM D1784. One (1) 20-ft. section of PVC pressure pipe, with appropriate adapters or as an encasing pipe over the carrier pipe, shall be used for gravity wastewater lines at all waterline crossings, and shall be centered under/over the waterline as indicated on the drawings. Maintain a minimum of 2 feet vertical clearance between outsides of pipes where a new waterline crosses over a new non-pressurized wastewater line. Maintain a minimum of 6 inches vertical clearance between outsides of pipes where a new waterline crosses over a pressurized wastewater line. In all instances of water crossing wastewater, center a joint of water pipe over the wastewater pipe such that a minimum of 9 feet of horizontal offset exists from each water joint to the wastewater carrier pipe. 027602 Page 1 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 Alternatively, at waterline crossings, the PVC gravity wastewater pipe may be encased in a 20-ft.joint of pressure pipe with a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi that is at least two nominal sizes larger than the carrier pipe. The carrier pipe shall be supported in the casing at five foot(5)intervals with spacers, or shall be filled to the spring line with clean washed sand. The casing pipe shall be centered under/ over the waterline as indicated on the drawings, and both ends of the casing shall be sealed with cement grout or manufactured seal. B. Bedding and Backfill Materials: 1. BEDDING AND INITIAL BACKFILL is that material from beneath the pipe to an elevation 12 inches above the top of the pipe. The bedding and initial backfill material shall be in accordance with Table I on Wastewater Standard Details, Sheet 3, unless otherwise specified. 2. FINAL BACKFILL is that material placed on the initial backfill. The material shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities" and as shown on the standard details. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Trench Excavation: See City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." B. Handling of Materials: 1. HANDLING AND CARE of pipe shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Pipe shall be unloaded at the point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the site by the Contractor. Materials shall be handled with care and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. STORAGE AND SECURITY of materials shall be provided by the Contractor. Any material delivered to the site that is not to be incorporated into the work within 10 working days shall be properly stored off the ground. Stacking and handling of materials shall be done as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. REJECTED OR DEFECTIVE materials are those having cracks, flaws or other defects. Rejected materials shall be marked by the Engineer and removed from the job site by the end of the day by the Contractor. 4. DISTRIBUTION OF MATERIALS at the work site shall be allowed provided that they are incorporated into the work within 10 working days. Materials shall not be placed on private property, unless written permission has been obtained from the owner by the Contractor. Materials shall not be placed within five feet of the back of curb or edge of pavement without permission of the Engineer or the designated representative. 027602 Page 2 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 C. Alignment and Grade: 1. All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required line and grade. 2. NO DEVIATIONS from design line and grade shall be allowed, unless authorized by the Engineer. 3. The Contractor shall provide offsets and cut sheets. The Contractor may use batter boards, laser, or other approved methods necessary to construct the wastewater line to design line and grade. D. Pipe Placement: 1. GENERAL: Proper implements, tools, etc., shall be used by the Contractor for safe and efficient execution of work. All pipes shall be carefully lowered into the trench by suitable equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage. Under no circumstances shall pipe be dropped or dumped into the trench. The Contractor shall not lay pipe in the trench until the bedding and condition of the trench have been approved by the Engineer. The trench shall be free of water and maintained in that condition until the pipe has been laid, the joints have been completed, and the initial backfill has been completed. All pipe markings shall be placed face up for inspection prior to backfill. 2. CLEAN PIPE: All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering pipe into trench. The interior of pipe shall be maintained free of dirt during the remaining installation operations. E. Jointing Pipe: POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE(PVC) PIPE shall have mating surfaces of the gasketed joint wiped clean of dirt and foreign matter. A lubricant recommended by the coupling manufacturer shall be applied to the bell and spigot mating surfaces just prior to joining. The spigot shall then be centered on grade into the bell of the previous pipe and shall be shoved home to compress the joint and to assure a tight fit between the inner surfaces. Pipe shall not be assembled in reverse order by pushing bell onto spigot. When the pipe is being thusly installed, bell holes shall be excavated in the bedding material. When the joint has been made, the bell hole shall be carefully filled with material to provide for adequate support of the pipe. The spigot shall be centered within 1/4 inch of the home line marked on the spigot. F. Bedding and Initial Backfill: POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: Bedding and initial backfill of PVC pipe shall be in accordance with the details provided in the drawings. Bedding shall be well tamped regardless of type. The type of bedding required shall depend upon the depth of cut and ground water condition and shall be as specified below: 027602 Page 3 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 BOTTOM OF TRENCH IN GROUNDWATER Depth of Cut Required Bedding Less than 20 feet Gravel or Crushed Stone Over 20 feet Crushed Stone BOTTOM OF TRENCH NOT IN GROUND WATER Depth of Cut Required Bedding Less than 15 feet Sand, Gravel, or Crushed Stone Less than 20 feet Gravel or Crushed Stone Over 20 feet Crushed Stone G. Final Backfill: See City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." H. Bypass Pumping: Contractor shall follow operational requirements for bypass pumping as set forth in Specification Section 027200 Control of Wastewater Flows. 4. TESTING AND CERTIFICATION A. Leakage Testing: (Required for all types of pipe) 1. EQUIPMENT FOR LEAKAGE TESTING shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall test the entire system for leaks. This work shall be witnessed by the Engineer. 2. POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE(PVC)PIPE shall be tested in accordance with Uni- Bell Plastic Pipe Association - Standard UNI-B-6 'Recommended Practice for Low- Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe"; the requirements of which are summarized by the following equation: T=0.00237D2L [Equation 1] Where: T=Minimum allowable time (seconds)for a pressure drop of one (1)psi gage pressure D=Nominal pipe diameter(inches) L=Length of pipe run (feet) The test section shall be plugged and subjected to a test pressure not in excess of five (5)psi. The time required for a one (1)psi pressure drop shall be measured and shall not exceed the value obtained in Equation 1 above. 027602 Page 4 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 B. Deflection Testing: (Required for PVC Pipe) 1. EQUIPMENT FOR DEFLECTION TESTING shall be provided by the Contractor. Mandrels shall be provided by the Contractor and will be of machined rigid corrosion-resistant pipe with a length not less than 1.5 diameters. Mandrels will be sized for SDR 26 PVC pipe at 5% deflection. The outside diameter of the standard mandrels shall be as follows: Nominal Size (inches) Mandrel O.D. (inches) 8 7.11 10 8.87 12 10.55 15 12.90 18 15.76 21 18.56 24 20.87 27 23.51 30 27.14 2. TESTING shall be done by the Contractor and witnessed by the Engineer. All pipe shall be tested for deflection no less than 30 days after placement of backfill. The Contractor may wish to check pipe immediately after backfilling for job control. However, this shall not qualify as acceptance testing. No pipe can be tested for formal acceptance until it has been in place, complete with backfill, for at least 30 days. 3. Belly: Pipe shall be rejected if belly exceeds 5%based on the readings from the video inspection. C. Retesting: ANY DEFECTIVE WORK OR MATERIALS shall be corrected or replaced by the Contractor and retested. This shall be repeated until all work and materials are acceptable D. Cleaning and Televising: All wastewater lines and manholes installed on this project shall be cleaned and televised in accordance with Standard Specification Section 027611 "Cleaning and Televised Inspection of Conduits". 5. SOIL BORINGS The City does not assume responsibility for subsurface information. Soil data and other subsurface information, if shown on the drawings or in the appendix, are without warranty as to correctness of fact or interpretation. 027602 Page 5 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 6. BRACING AND SHORING Trenching operation shall comply with Worker Safety Requirements for Excavation and Trenching Operations. If, for whatever reason, the trench width at the top of pipe must exceed that width indicated in the bedding details, the Contractor shall modify bedding as required by the Engineer to accommodate the additional load on the pipe. 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, gravity wastewater lines shall be measured by the linear foot for each size and depth of wastewater line installed, as follows: A. Between centers of manholes. B. From the center of a manhole to the end of the line. C. From the end of an existing stub to the end of the line or center of the existing manhole. Depth shall be measured from flow line of pipe to ground surface over centerline of the pipe at the time of construction. Measurements to be made at manholes, at intervals not to exceed fifty feet, and at breaks in ground profile. Bedding shall not be measured for pay, but shall be considered subsidiary to pipe, unless included as a separate bid item in the Bid Form. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, de-watering shall not be measured for pay, but shall be considered subsidiary unless included as a separate bid item in the Bid Form for well-pointing. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, equipment, pipe, bedding, de-watering, hauling, trench excavation and backfill, leakage and deflection testing, cleaning, televising, bypass pumping, and all cleaning up and other incidentals necessary to install the pipe complete in-place. 027602 Page 6 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 SECTION 027604 DISPOSAL OF WASTE FROM WASTEWATER CLEANING OPERATIONS 1. SCOPE: This specification governs all work required for disposal of waste from wastewater cleaning operations required to complete the project. 2. METHODS: Grit,rubble, dislodged bricks and other such inorganic waste that is removed during cleaning shall not be allowed to continue down stream of the operation. Organic solids that remain in suspension would be allowed to continue downstream through the wastewater system. A weir or other suitable trap shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor for the collection of such waste. This material shall be de-watered and delivered by the Contractor to a facility that is authorized to receive it. If this material is free of organic sludge and is sufficiently de-watered to pass the paint filter test,it would be acceptable for disposal at the Elliott Sanitary Landfill subj ect to prior approval of the facility and the associated disposal fees. The Contractor has the option of using the City's de-watering facilities. The City has six drying beds, each with a 1-foot high containment wall each with an area of about 2,300 square feet. These drying beds are at the Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant, 1541 Saratoga. The Contractor would be required to haul and handle the material to, at and from the facility as well as the restoration of drying beds. Restoration of the drying beds includes the removal of all the de- watered material and the replacement of the existing sand bed with new sand. All work required within the treatment plant, including the replacement of sand shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth by the Plant Supervisor. The use of the drying beds would be subject to prior approval of the facility and the associated de-watering fees. If the City's facilities are used for de-watering or disposal of waste, the Contractor shall be responsible for making contact with the appropriate Solid Waste or Wastewater Officials or both, making all arrangements for the use of City facilities, scheduling of delivery and pickup, etc. Materials and handling operations shall meet the requirements set forth by said Officials. Failure to meet these requirements shall be cause for rejection of the materials by either the landfill or the treatment plant operations. Proper disposal of this waste shall be responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with written documentation of the proper disposal of this waste. 3. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT: Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,this work shall be considered subsidiary to the project. 027604 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 027606 SANITARY SERVICE LINES 1. SCOPE: This specification governs all work and materials necessary to construct the Sanitary Services Lines required to complete the project. Sanitary Service Lines are those lines, constructed in public ROW, from the service tee on the main up to and including the clean-out at the property line. 2 . MATERIALS: Pipe and fittings for sanitary service lines shall be PVC in accordance with ASTM D2665 and ASTM D3311 with a minimum size of 4 inches. Solvent cement for PVC shall comply with ASTM D2564 . No cc-mingling of different materials except through the use of proper adaptors. Adaptors shall have a stainless steel or fiberglass shear ring. 3 . CONSTRUCTION METHODS: Where possible, service tees or wys shall be placed along the main as required for services (no taps) . The minimum size pipe for services shall be 4" diameter for residential and 6" for commercial. Minimum slopes for 4" and 6" pipes shall be 1/8 (5=0.01) and 1/16 (S= 0.005) inches per foot respectively. Sanitary sewer service lines shall cross under water mains The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing alignment and maintaining grade for the proposed service. Trenches shall be excavated in such a manner which will minimize damage to surface improvements. After installation, the excavated material shall be tamped into the trench to a minimum of 95s Std. Proctor and the surface restored to a condition acceptable to the Engineer. Lines shall be bored, jetted, or jacked under sidewalks, driveways, and other such improved surfaces; unless authorized by the Engineer. Service lines shall be leakage tested with the main sewer. 4 . MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT: Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Sanitary Service Lines shall be measured as individual units for each connection made to the main. Measurement shall include but not be limited to; the line from the tee on the main to, and including, the clean-out at the property line. Payment shall include all labor, materials, equipment, trench safety and incidentals necessary for Sanitary Service Lines required to complete the project. 027606 Rev. 11/15/99 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 027611 CLEANING AND TELEVISED INSPECTION OF CONDUITS 1. SCOPE This specification shall govern for all work, equipment, supervision and materials required to provide for cleaning and remote CCTV inspection and documentation of wastewater or other lines and manholes as required. 2. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 2.1 General Closed circuit television inspection will typically be done under one or more of the conditions listed below. Requirements for on-screen labeling during each line segment set up, televising, video file labeling and hard copy inspection reports will be specifically addressed. The Contractor shall neither request nor receive assistance from the City, in the performance of work described in this specification. Unless otherwise specified and at Contractors expense, the Contractor shall provide for the control of wastewater flows and monitoring of the collection system for back-ups and surcharges, while flow control devices are in place. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor(s) to adhere to all applicable OSHA rules and regulations while performing any and all City-related projects or j obs (to include, but not necessarily limited to "Confined Space Entry". 2.2 Inspection Equipment and Methods Electronic media shall be used to record the condition of all the segments of the mains and the manholes, tap locations and unusual situations during inspection. The inspection imaging shall be made on color professional grade DVD format for each line segment. All observations will require both audio and on-screen display. The camera shall transit through the wastewater line in either direction at a speed not greater than 30 feet per minute, stopping as necessary to permit proper documentation of the wastewater line's condition. Lighting for the camera shall be suitable to allow a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. A television camera with pan and tilt capability will be required. The camera, television monitor, and other components of the video systems shall be capable of producing picture quality to the satisfaction of the City. The capture system shall have the capability of recording, digitizing and storing single frames of video images and "real time" live video, as well as collecting, storing and printing wastewater line inspection data for graphic display and report generation. The imaging capture system shall store digitized picture images, have the ability to export picture files to industry standard formats Opg, bmp, and tif), be transferable to DVD and be printed at no cost to the City. Use of proprietary software is discouraged; however, if the Contractor provides the software and 027611 Page 1 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 three licenses to the City, proprietary software COMPATIBLE with the City's GIS and existing database systems in use may be approved. However, in every case all observations will be recorded using the City approved PACP codes. 2.3 Flow Control/By-Passing This procedure will be used on all previously accepted (City owned) line segments. Except for new wastewater line acceptance inspections, the line shall be dewatered during inspection. A water jet cleaning unit will normally be running in the line in advance of the television camera to allow the highest quality picture available. Dewatering shall remove standing water and fog from the line segment to provide 360 degree view of the pipe being televised. Too high water level or the camera being submerged will be grounds for rejection of the inspection. All wastewater flows from intersecting lines shall typically be controlled through the use of in-line plugs for vacuum trucks and are considered subsidiary to the inspection for all line sizes. Plugs in intersecting lines shall be installed by the Contractor with no assistance from the City. The Contractor shall also monitor the upstream system for back-ups and surcharges, which may lead to Sanitary Sewer Overflows (SSOs). The Contractor shall immediately report to the City Call Center (361) 826-2489 all sanitary sewer overflows. Flow Control devices shall be installed in accordance with all applicable OSHA requirements, including, but not necessarily limited to confined space protocol. 2.4 Evaluation of Existing Lines for Potential Repairs/Rehabilitation—Pre CCTV: Cleaning and televising using a CCTV camera may be needed to traverse each line segment from manhole to manhole as specified in the work order. When an obstruction prevents the camera from proceeding, the obstruction will be recorded on the initial setup and a reverse setup will be attempted to view the pipe and obstruction from the other side. If the camera fails to pass through the entire section, the inspection shall be considered complete and no additional inspection will be required. However, the line segment evaluation form, as well as the graphic report, shall note full line length and the length traveled from each manhole set-up. All inspection efforts on the line segment will be recorded on the same tape / disk. The Contractor must exert all reasonable effort to televise the entire length of a segment of wastewater line, or to assist the repair crews with usable information for point repair. Prior to transiting the line the video display initially is to include upstream and downstream manhole numbers, pipe size / material, adjacent street names and the date. During the transit the display must show the continuous distance from the insertion manhole with an accuracy of +1% of the actual length to help mark observations on the report form. The video must have narrative documentation of notable observations. The Inspection Report shall consist of condition observations recorded using City-approved computer software generated formats, generally conforming to NASSCO and PACP codes. Specifically, items considered notable include: deviations in alignment and grade; abnormal conditions of the pipe barrel and joints; locations 027611 Page 2 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 and quantities of any sources of infiltration or inflow; dropped, broken, properly / improperly installed service taps; debris, roots or other impediments to now and any other condition that may prevent either the proper completion of the inspection, or affect any proposed rehabilitation process. Evaluation of existing lines includes associated manhole inspection. 2.5 Evaluation After Repairs/Rehabilitation Post CCTV: Following repairs or rehabilitation to existing lines (by Contractor), a CCTV camera shall travel through required line segment to televise. The intent of this process is to inspect the interior of the line to determine the location of repairs, and extent of any unacceptable work. Prior to transiting the line the video display initially is to include upstream and downstream manhole numbers, pipe size / material, adjacent street names and the date. During the transit the display must show the continuous distance from the insertion manhole with an accuracy of+/- 1% of the actual length to help mark observations on the report form. Specifically, items such as detailed inspection of the repaired area using pan-and- tilt equipment will be shown in the Inspection Report, including digital photographs of acceptable or inadequate and/or questionable work. The video must include narrative documentation of notable observations, and be cross referenced to the Inspection Report. The Inspection Report shall consist of condition observations recorded using City-approved computer-software generated formats conforming to NASSCO and PACP codes. 2.6 New Pipeline Inspection: Upon completion of the installation of new lines, including any appurtenances such as manholes, service connections, etc., a CCTV camera shall traverse through each completed line segment. The intent of this process is to inspect the interior of the completed line to determine the location of service taps and extent of omissions and/or any unacceptable work on the pipeline or manholes, such as sags, infiltration, gapped joints, protruding gaskets, etc. Prior to transiting the line, the initial video shall initially include the upstream and downstream manhole designations, pipe size, project name and other pertinent information. When inspecting / documenting new wastewater line conditions, the Contractor must conduct a specific inspection for the presence of sags in the newly installed line. The approved method involves the use of an inclinometer on the camera. The belly tolerance is 5% or less for acceptable pipe installation. Any deviation from the 5% belly tolerance limit must be approved by the applicable Utility Operating Department. The graphic report will note the start and stop of sags and approximate maximum depth. During the transit the display must show the continuous distance from the insertion manhole with an accuracy of +1% of the actual length to help mark observations on the Inspection Report form. The video must include narrative documentation of notable observations, and be cross referenced to the Inspection 027611 Page 3 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 Report. The Inspection Report shall consist of condition observations recorded using approved computer-software generated formats. Specifically, items such as deviations in alignment and grade causing bellies / sags; abnormal conditions of the pipe barrel and joints; locations and quantities of any sources of infiltration or inflow; dropped, broken, properly / improperly installed service taps or any other condition that may assist the Utilities Department in determining the quality of the pipeline installation. 2.7 Manhole Inspection: A CCTV camera shall traverse the manhole from top to bottom to record the condition of the manhole and invert for structural condition and sources of infiltration on the manhole and invert. The initial video display must show the entry manhole number, location/ street address, date and depth. a. The requirement is to commence capturing video at ground level. The video must be steady while panning and lowering to clearly record condition of the ring, corbel, the walls, and pipeline penetrations. The camera is to rotate during descent to inspect typical conditions and all penetrations. At the bottom of the manhole the complete invert will be inspected / viewed for infiltration and general condition. A washed out picture due to sunlight or shaking will be rejected for payment b. This manhole information may be retained on the same DVD if the line segment is also being investigated, or, if inspection is issued as a separate work order, a separate DVD and report will be required. As with pipeline inspection, digital photographs of key points of note must accompany the report and DVD. These would include seals on pipeline penetration, infiltration locations and other anomalies. c. The format of the Manhole Inspection Report will be as proposed by the Contractor and, following discussion, mutually approved by the Utilities Department and the Contractor. A sample form is included at the end of this specification. It will contain as a minimum: location& I.D.number manhole diameter manhole material depth of manhole condition of ring/cover evidence of infiltration condition of walls presence of inflow inhibitor condition of pipe mouths presence of coatings condition of invert location: street/easement above invert penetrations 2.8 CCTV Set-up: a. A CCTV set-up includes all of the work, equipment, supervision, personnel, and materials needed to traverse a line segment. 027611 Page 4 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 2.9 CCTV Reverse Set-up: A CCTV reverse set-up is an attempt to view the line segment from the other side due to an obstruction encountered during the initial set-up. 3. CLEANING REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Clean ALL debris such as dirt, gravel, rocks, grease, roots and other organic/inorganic debris from existing lines and manholes to allow for inspection to proceed. The Contractor will be required to clean the line segment using hydraulic equipment. The debris being removed from the pipeline shall be removed from the collection system at the receiving manhole, and not be allowed to be merely moved to the next line segment. Debris shall be properly disposed of in accordance with local, state and federal regulations. The Contractor shall have the option of dewatering debris removed from cleaning operations on this project at the Greenwood WWTP, located at 1541 Saratoga Blvd., Corpus Christi, Texas 78415. The Contractor shall coordinate with the City Utilities Department at all times (see also City Standard Specification Section 027604 Disposal of Waste from Wastewater Cleaning Operations. The City has six drying beds, each with a 1-foot high containment wall each with an area of about 2,300 square feet. The Contractor would be required to haul and handle the material to, at and from the facility as well as the restoration of drying beds. Restoration of the drying beds includes the removal of all the de-watered material and the replacement of the existing sand bed with new sand. All work required within the treatment plant, including the replacement of sand shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth by the Plant Supervisor. The use of the drying beds would be subject to prior approval of the facility and the associated de-watering fees. If the City's facilities are used for de-watering or disposal of waste, the Contractor shall be responsible for making contact with the appropriate Solid Waste or Wastewater Officials or both, making all arrangements for the use of City facilities, scheduling of delivery and pickup, etc. Materials and handling operations shall meet the requirements set forth by said Officials. Contractor shall coordinate with the Wastewater Pre-Treatment Coordinator to acquire the appropriate manifest documentation and shall also provide a copy of the landfill disposal weight ticket/receipt to the Engineer. Failure to meet these requirements shall be cause for rejection of the materials by either the landfill or the treatment plant operations. Proper disposal of this waste shall be responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with written documentation 027611 Page 5 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 of the proper disposal of this waste. The Contractor shall not be paid until this documentation is provided. 4. DELIVERABLES 4.1 The Contractor is required to provide the Engineer both narrated CCTV DVD and computer software-generated Inspection Report products, as a result of each inspection. Acceptable submissions become the property of the City. a. Quality Control: camera distortion, inadequate lighting, dirty or submerged lens and blurry or hazy pictures determined to be the fault of the Contractor will be cause for rejection of the inspection effort. If the quality of the deliverables does not meet with City approval, the Contractor shall repeat the documenting process at no cost to the City. b. DVD: for each inspection, one properly labeled color, professional grade, DVD, recorded in standard play (SP) mode, will be required. The DVD will display continuous distance from the insertion manhole, and include narrative observations at notable points, with correlating information shown in the Inspection Report. Labeling of the DVD(s)will include, either typed or neatly printed the following information on the dust cover: Project Name Street Name Tape Number Contractor Upstream MH# Downstream MH# Date Survey/Post/New Work Order# Pipe Size Material Project# c. Inspection Reports: inspection reports are to be from City-approved and software-generated formats on 81/2" x I F paper, in color to improve definition of problem areas, and delivered with the DVD. Each report shall include the same information as noted for the DVD labels, plus the following additional information: pipe diameter, pipe material, manhole diameters & depths, whether this is a "reverse" set-up, direction of flow arrow, and total length of the pipeline. Notable observations are to be shown in the report as digital color photos, with up to four images per page. One report is required for each line segment. Note that the final approval for the use of the Contractor's proposed software will be needed before the first inspection. The Contractor shall submit to the City a sample of the proposed report for review and approval by the City. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Proposal, Pre-CCTV (Cleaning and Televised Inspection of existing lines to potentially be rehabilitated) and Post CCTV (Televised Inspection for acceptance of new lines or rehabbed lines) of Wastewater Lines shall not be measured for pay, but will be considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 027611 Page 6 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 Cleaning and Televised Inspection of Wastewater Lines includes an inspection of all manholes entered, crossed, or associated with the line being inspected. Reverse CCTV Set-Up shall not be allowed for acceptance televising as obstructions should not be encountered in new pipe that would require the Contractor to relocate to another manhole (upstream or downstream) of the original manhole. 027611 Page 7 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 028020 SEEDING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for tilling, fertilizing, planting seeds, mulching, watering and maintaining vegetation required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS 2.1 FERTILIZER: All fertilizer shall be delivered in bags or clearly marked containers showing the analysis, name, trademark and warranty. The fertilizer is subject to testing by the State Chemist in accordance with the Texas fertilizer law. Fertilizer shall have an analysis of 12-12-12 (percent of nitrogen, phosphoric acid and potash) as determined by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. Fertilizer shall be free flowing and uniform in composition. 2.2 SEED: Seed shall be labeled and meet the requirements of the Texas Seed Law. Labels shall indicate purity, germination, name and type of seed. Seed furnished shall be of the previous season's crop, and the date of analysis shown on each bag shall be within twelve months of delivery to the project. The quantity of"Commercial Seed" required to equal the quantity of"Pure Live Seed" shall be computed by the following formula: Commercial Seed=Pure Live Seed x 10,000 %Purity x% Germination The quantity of pure live seed and type required are indicated below. Mixture A or C shall be used for this project, depending on the time of the year planting is performed. LB/ACRE OF PURE LIVE SEED FOR MIXTURES COMMON NAME SCIENTIFIC NAME A B C Green Sprangletop Leptochloa Dubia 1.4 1.4 - Sideoats Grama(premier) Bouteloua Curtipendula 0.6 - 0.6 Bermudagrass (Hulled) Cynodon Dactylon 7.0 7.4 - Bermudagrass (Unhulled) Cynodon Dactylon - - 30.0 K-R Bluestem Andropogon Ischaemum 1.2 1.2 1.5 Buffalograss Buchloe Dactyloides - 4.2 - Annual Ryegrass Lolium Multiflorum 5.0 5.0 20.0 Mixture -A: Recommended for clay or tight soil planted between December 1 thru May 1. Mixture -B: Recommended for sandy soil planted between December 1 thru May 1. Mixture - C: Recommended for all soils planted between May 2 thru November 30. 028020 Page 1 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 2.3 MULCH: Mulch shall be either the straw type or wood cellulose fiber type. Straw Type mulch shall be of straw from stalks of domestic grain, Bermudagrass or cotton hulls, or other approved by the Engineer. Wood Cellulose Fiber Type mulch shall have no growth inhibiting ingredients and shall be dried with a moisture content less that 10% by weight. Fibers shall be dyed an appropriate color to facilitate visual metering and application of mulch. The cellulose fiber shall be manufactured so that after addition and agitation in slurry tank with fertilizers, seeds and other approved additives, the fibers in the material will become uniformly suspended to form a homogeneous slurry; when sprayed on the ground, the material shall form a uniform cover impregnated with seeds; the cover shall allow added water to percolate to the underlying soil. The fiber material shall be supplied in packages of not more than 100 lb. gross weight and shall be marked by the manufacturer to indicate the dry weight content. 2.4 EQUIPMENT: The fertilizing, seeding and/or mulching operations shall be accomplished with equipment suitable to the required function. It shall be of current design and in good operating condition. Special seeding and mulching equipment must also meet the following requirements: Seeder - Equipment for applying a seed-fertilizer mix shall be a hydraulic seeder designed to pump and discharge a waterborne, homogeneous slurry of seed and fertilizer. The seeder shall be equipped with a power driven agitator and capable of pressure discharge. Straw Mulch Spreader - Equipment used for straw mulch application shall be trailer mounted, equipped with a blower capable of 2000 r.p.m. operation, and that will discharge straw mulch material through a discharge boom with spout at speeds up to 220 feet per second. The mulch spreader shall be equipped with an asphalt supply and application system near the discharge end of the boom spout. The system shall apply asphalt adhesive in atomize form to the straw at a predetermined rate. The spreader shall be capable of blowing the asphalt-coated mulch, with a high velocity airstream, over the surface at a uniform rate, forming a porous, stable erosion-resistant cover. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Spreader - Equipment used for this application of fertilizer, seeds, wood pulp, water and other additives shall have a built-in agitation system with sufficient capacity to agitate, suspend and homogeneously mix a slurry containing up to 40 lbs. of fiber plus the required fertilizer solids for each 100 gallons of water. It shall have sufficient agitation and pump capacity to spray a slurry in a uniform coat over the area to be mulched. 028020 Page 2 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 3.1 PREPARATION OF SEEDBED: The area to be treated along with requirements for seed, fertilizer and other treatments, shall be done as indicated on the drawings and as specified below. Clearin&—Refer to City Standard Specification Section 021020, "Site Clearing and Stripping". Grading -Refer to City Standard Specification Section 021040, "Site Grading". Tilling - The area to be seeded shall be tilled to a depth of 4 to 6 inches by disking plowing, or other approved methods until soil condition is acceptable. Topsoiling — If the native soils are not conducive to the establishment and maintenance of grass growth, or if called for on the drawings, topsoil shall be placed over the area to be seeded to a depth of 5 inches after tilling. Topsoil shall have a pH range of 5.5 to 7; shall contain between 2 and 20 percent organic material content in accordance with ASTM D5268; and shall be free of stones larger than one inch, debris, and extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 3.2 FERTILIZING: Fertilizer shall be uniformly applied at a rate of 400 lb/acre, after tilling. Fertilizing and seeding shall be done concurrently. If seeds and fertilizer are distributed in a water slurry, the mixture shall be applied to the area to be seeded within 30 minutes after all the components have come into contact. 3.3 SEEDING: The seed mixture shall be uniformly distributed at the rate specified above. Broadcast Seeding - Seed shall be placed with fertilizer, after tilling. After planting, the area shall be rolled on contour with a corrugated roller. Straw Mulch Seeding- Seed shall be placed with fertilizer, after tilling. After placement of the seed and fertilizer mixture, straw mulch shall be uniformly placed at a rate of 2 tons per acre. As soon as the mulch has been spread, it shall be anchored to the soil a minimum depth of 3 inches by use of a heavy, dulled disk harrow, set nearly straight. Disks shall be set approximately 9 inches apart. Straw Mulch With Asphalt Seeding - Seed, fertilizer and straw mulch shall be placed as described in "Straw Mulch Seeding" with the following two exceptions: 1) An asphalt-water emulsion shall be applied to the mulch near the discharge end of the boom spout at a rate of 300 to 600 gallons per acre. 2)Mechanical anchoring by disking will not be required. Asphalt Mulch Seeding - The seed and fertilizer shall be placed as described for 'Broadcast Seeding". After the area has been rolled, the area shall be watered sufficiently to assure a uniform moisture to a minimum depth of 4 inches. An asphalt-water emulsion shall be applied at a rate of 1500 to 1800 gallons per acre, immediately after watering. Asphalt shall be applied to the area in such a manner that a complete film is obtained and the finished surface shall be 028020 Page 3 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 comparatively smooth. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding - After tilling, mulch shall be applied. Wood cellulose fibers shall be added to the hydraulic seeder after the proportionate amounts of seed, fertilizer, water and other approved materials are added. Application shall be 1500 lb./acre on flats, 2000 lb./acre on slopes up to 3:1, and 2500 lb./acre on slopes steeper than 3:1. One hundred (100)pounds of fiber per acre shall be used when asphalt is to be applied over cellulose mulch. The mulch shall provide a uniform cover over the soil surface. Asphalt Over Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding - "Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding" shall be done as described above. After mulch has been placed, an asphalt-water emulsion shall be uniformly spread over the mulch at a rate of 1200 gallons per acre. 3.4 MAINTENANCE: The Contractor shall water, repair and reseed areas as required for a period of 45 days or until growth has been established, whichever is longer. This includes erosion damage. Maintenance does not include mowing or weed control, unless indicated on the plans. If at any time the seeded area becomes gullied or otherwise damaged, or the seeds have been damaged or destroyed, the affected portion shall be re-established to the specified condition prior to acceptance of the work. 3.5 GUARANTEE: The Contractor shall assure 95% of the seeded area has established grass growth at 45 calendar days after seeding, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Where established, grass growth is defined as at least one plant per square foot with no bare spots larger than three (3) square feet. The Contractor shall re-establish grass growth as directed by the Engineer during the one-year warranty period. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, seeding will be measured by the horizontal square yard of area seeded within the areas designated on the drawings. Areas disturbed by the Contractor that are outside of the designated areas (such as field office, laydown/ storage area, stockpile areas, etc.) shall be seeded by the Contractor for erosion control per the stormwater pollution prevention plan but will not be measured for payment. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work, and shall include, but not be limited to, tilling soil, topsoiling, fertilizing, planting, mulching, watering and maintaining vegetation. Payment shall be due and payable only after grass growth has been established as described above. 028020 Page 4 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 028040 SODDING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing and placing sod as required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Fertilizer: All fertilizer used shall be delivered in bags or containers with clearly marked analysis. A granulated fertilizer shall be used with an analysis of 10-20-10. These figures represent the percent of nitrogen, phosphoric acid and potash nutrients, respectively, as determined by the methods of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. The rate of application shall be not less than 350 pounds per acre (7.23 lb. per 100 SY). In the event that it is necessary to substitute a fertilizer with a different analysis, it shall be granulated fertilizer with a lower concentration. The total nutrients applied per unit area shall not be less that the specified amount of each nutrient. Sod: Sod shall consist of live Bermuda grass with thickly matted roots throughout the soil and with a minimum thickness of 3 inches or 0.25 foot, or live St. Augustine with thickly matted roots throughout the soil with a minimum thickness of 1 inch or 0.08 foot. The Contractor shall not use sod where grass is thinned out. Grass shall be mowed and raked to remove all weeds and long stems prior to extraction at the source. Sod and soil shall be kept moist at all times during the sodding process. Care must be taken at all times to retain native soil on the root system. Water: Water shall be free from oils, acids, alkalis, and salts that may inhibit grass growth. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, water shall be provided by the City and shall be transported and applied by the Contractor. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Spot Sodding: Prior to planting, the area to be sodded shall be graded and shaped. Squares of sod with a minimum width of 3 inches shall be planted in rows on 15-inch centers in both directions. Sod shall be placed so that it is firmly against the bottom of the hole, and the top of the sod shall not be more than 1/2 inch below finished grade. Soil shall be firmly packed against all sides of the sod. Soil shall not be allowed to cover the sod except for soil incidental to raking, provided that the quantity of soil is not enough to hinder the growth. Areas to be spot sodded shall be indicated on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer in field. After sod has been planted, the area shall be fertilized and watered. 028040 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 Block Sodding: Prior to planting, the area to be sodded shall be graded and shaped. Sod blocks shall be uniformly placed over the prepared area. The sodded area shall then be fertilized and watered. After the area is sufficiently dry, the area shall be rolled or tamped to form a thoroughly compacted mat. Any voids in the mats shall be filled with additional sod and tamped. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, slopes may cause displacement, areas to be block sodded shall be indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer in the field. Mulch Sodding: The sod source shall be disked in two directions cutting the sod thoroughly to a depth of not less than 4 inches or more than 10 inches, being careful to avoid having soil containing no grass roots. The disked sod may be windrowed or otherwise handled in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The material shall be rejected if not kept in a moist condition. Prior to placing mulch sod, the cut slopes shall be scarified by plowing furrows 4 inches to 6 inches deep along horizontal slope lines at 2-foot vertical intervals. Excavated material from the furrows shall not protrude more than 3 inches above the original surface of the cut. Fertilizer shall be distributed uniformly over the area. The sod shall then be dumped upon the prepared area and spread uniformly to the required approximate thickness shown on the plans. Any section not true to lines and cross section shall be remedied by the addition of sod material. After the sod material has been spread and shaped, it shall be compacted with a corrugated roller of the "Cultipacker" type. All rolling of slope areas shall be on the contour. The area to be mulch sodded shall be indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer in the field. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, spot sodding and block sodding shall be measured by the square yard taken in a horizontal plane. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, excavation, transporting, storing and placing of sod, and application of fertilizer and water. 028040 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 030020 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the materials used; for the storing and handling of materials; and for the proportioning and mixing of concrete for culverts, manholes, inlets, curb and gutter, sidewalks, driveways, curb ramps, headwalls and wingwalls, riprap, and incidental concrete construction. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water, proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, II or III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and II cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram (Wagner Turbidimeter— TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). For concrete piling, the above limit on specific surface area is waived for Type II cement only. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer, with each shipment, a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement expressed in square centimeters per gram. For cement strength requirements, either the flexural or compressive test may be used. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement may be used in all precast prestressed concrete, except in piling when Type II cement is required for substructure concrete. Different types of cement may be used in the same structure, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type will be permitted in any one structure unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. 030020 Page 1 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1000 parts per million of chlorides as CL nor more than 1000 parts per million of sulfates as SO4. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use in structural concrete. Tests shall be made in accordance with the "Method of Test for Quality of Water to be Used in Concrete" (AASHTO Method T26), except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this specification. (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combinations thereof, free from frozen material or injurious amount of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material either free or as an adherent coating; and its quality shall be reasonably uniform throughout. It shall not contain more than 0.25 percent by weight of clay lumps, nor more than 1.0 percent by weight of shale, nor more than 5 percent by weight of laminated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-413-A. It shall have a wear of not more than 40 percent when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-410-A. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, coarse aggregate will be subjected to five cycles of the soundness test in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-411-A. The loss shall not be greater than 12 percent when sodium sulfate is used, or 18 percent when magnesium sulfate is used. Permissible sizes of aggregate shall be governed by Table 4 and Table 1, except that when exposed aggregate surfaces are required, coarse aggregate gradation will be as specified on the plans. When tested by approved methods, the coarse aggregate, including combinations of aggregates when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 1. 030020 Page 2 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE 1 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Nominal 2-'/2 2 1-'/2 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 Grade No. Size In. In. In. In. In. In. In. No. 4 No. 8 1 2 in. 0 0 to 15 60 to 95 to 20 to 80 100 50 2 (467)* 1-'V2 in. 0 0 30 to 70 95 to to 65 to 100 5 90 4 (57)* 1 in. 0 0 40 90 to 95 to to to 100 100 5 75 8 3/8 in. 0 0 to 35 to 90 to 5 80 100 *Numbers in parenthesis indicate conformance with ASTM C33. The aggregate shall be washed. The Loss by Decantation (TxDOT Test Method Tex-406-A) plus the allowable weight of clay lumps, shall not exceed one percent, or the value shown on the plans, whichever is smaller. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable and uncoated particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof, with or without a mineral filler. It shall be free from frozen material or injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable material and it shall not contain more than 0.5 percent by weight of clay lumps. When subjected to the color test for organic impurities (TxDOT Test Method Tex-408-A), it shall not show a color darker than standard. The fine aggregate shall produce a mortar having a tensile strength equal to or greater than that of Ottawa sand mortar when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-317-D. Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand for slab concrete subject to direct traffic, the acid insoluble residue of the fine aggregate shall be not less than 28 percent by weight when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-612-J. When tested by approved methods, the fine aggregate or combination of aggregates, including mineral filler, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2. 030020 Page 3 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE 2 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve A�2 regate Grade No. 3/8 In. No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200 1 0 0 to 5 0 to 20 15 to 50 35 to 75 70 to 90 90 to 100 97 to 100 NOTE 1: Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand, the percent retained on the No. 200 sieve shall be 94 to 100. NOTE 2: Where the sand equivalent value is greater than 85, the retainage on the No. 50 sieve may be 70 to 94 percent. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test (TxDOT Test Method Tex-203-F). The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80 nor less than the value shown on the plans, whichever is greater. For concrete Classes `A' and `C', the fineness modulus as defined below for fine aggregates shall be between 2.30 and 3.10. The fineness modulus will be determined by adding the percentages by weight retained on the following sieves, and dividing by 100; Nos. 4, 8, 16, 30, 50 and 100. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar(Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium Chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the following requirements: A "water-reducing, retarding admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and will retard the initial set of the concrete. A "water-reducing admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a 030020 Page 4 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 given consistency. (a) Retarding and Water-Reducing Admixtures. The admixture shall meet the requirements for Type A and Type D admixture as specified in ASTM Designation: C494, modified as follows: (1) The water-reducing retarder shall retard the initial set of the concrete a minimum of 2 hours and a maximum of 4 hours, at a specified dosage rate, at a temperature of 90°F. (2) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (3) Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced and test concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. (b) Air-Entraining Admixture. The admixture shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: C260, modified as follows: (1) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (2) Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. 3. STORAGE OF CEMENT All cement shall be stored in well-ventilated weatherproof buildings or approved bins, which will protect it from dampness or absorption of moisture. Storage facilities shall be ample, and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide easy access for identification and inspection. The Engineer may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the open for a maximum of 48 hours on a raised platform and under waterproof covering. 4. STORAGE OF AGGREGATE The method of handling and storing concrete aggregate shall prevent contamination with foreign materials. If the aggregates are stored on the ground, the sites for the stockpiles shall be clear of all vegetation and level. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used without recleaning. 030020 Page 5 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 When conditions require the use of two or more sizes of aggregates, they shall be separated to prevent intermixing. Where space is limited, stockpiles shall be separated by physical barriers. Methods of handling aggregates during stockpiling and subsequent use shall be such that segregation will be minimized. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, all aggregate shall be stockpiled at least 24 hours to reduce the free moisture content. 5. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS The measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be by weight. The fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and mineral filler shall be weighed separately. Where bulk cement is used, it shall be weighed separately, but batch weighing of sacked cement will not be required. Where sacked cement is used, the quantities of material per batch shall be based upon using full bags of cement. Batches involving the use of fractional bags will not be permitted. Allowance shall be made for the water content in the aggregates. Bags of cement varying more than 3 percent from the specified weight of 94 pounds may be rejected, and when the average weight per bag in any shipment, as determined by weighing 50 bags taken at random, is less than the net weight specified, the entire shipment may be rejected. If the shipment is accepted, the Engineer will adjust the concrete mix to a net weight per bag fixed by an average of all individual weights which are less than the average weight determined from the total number weighed. 6. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design, using a coarse aggregate factor acceptable to the Engineer, for the class(es) of concrete specified. The mix shall be designed by a qualified concrete technician to conform with the requirements contained herein and in accordance with the THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that 030020 Page 6 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be more than 0.82, except that when the voids in the coarse aggregate exceed 48 percent of the total dry loose volume, the coarse aggregate factor shall not exceed 0.85. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be less than 0.70 for Grades 1, 2 and 3 aggregates. If the strength required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the cement specified in Table 4, the Contractor may use an approved water-reducing or retarding admixture, or he shall furnish aggregates with different characteristics which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until the redesign is checked. Water-reducing or retarding agents may be used with all classes of concrete at the option of the Contractor. When water-reducing or retarding agents are used at the option of the Contractor, reduced dosage of the admixture will be permitted. Entrained air will be required in accordance with Table 4. The concrete shall be designed to entrain 5 percent air when Grade 2 coarse aggregate is used and 6 percent when Grade 3 coarse aggregate is used. Concrete as placed in the structure shall contain the proper amount as required above with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percentage points. Occasional variations beyond this tolerance will not be cause for rejection. When the quantity of entrained air is found to be above 7 percent with Grade 2 coarse aggregate or above 8 percent for Grade 3 coarse aggregate, additional test beams or cylinders will be made. If these beams or cylinders pass the minimum flexural or compressive requirements, the concrete will not be rejected because of the variation in air content. 7. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements will be as specified in Table 3. 030020 Page 7 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE 3 Slump Requirements Concrete Desi ng ation Desired Slump Max. Slump Structural Concrete: (1) Thin-Walled Sections (9" or less) 4 inches 5 inches (2) Slabs, Caps, Columns,Piers, Wall Sections over 9", etc. 3 inches 4 inches Underwater or Seal Concrete 5 inches 6 inches Riprap, Curb, Gutter and Other Miscellaneous Concrete 2.5 inches 4 inches NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximums shown. 8. QUALITY OF CONCRETE General The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio, the desired and maximum slump and the strength requirements of the various classes of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Table 3 and Table 4 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer or his designated representative will cast test cylinders or beams as a check on the compressive or flexural strength of the concrete actually placed. Test cylinders must be picked up by the testing lab within 24 hours. A test shall be defined as the average of the breaking strength of two cylinders or two beams, as the case may be. Specimens will be tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods Tex-418-A or Tex-420-A. Test beams or cylinders will be required as specified in the contract documents. For small placements on structures such as manholes, inlets, culverts, wingwalls, etc., the Engineer may vary the number of tests to a minimum of one for each 25 cubic yards placed over a several day period. All test specimens, beams or cylinders, representing tests for removal of forms and/or falsework shall be cured using the same methods, and under the same conditions as the concrete represented. "Design Strength" beams and cylinders shall be cured in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall provide and maintain curing facilities as described in THD Bulletin C-11 for the purpose of curing test specimens. Provision shall be made to maintain the water in the curing tank at temperatures between 70°F and 90°F. When control of concrete quality is by twenty-eight-day compressive tests, job control will be by seven-day compressive tests which are shown to provide the required twenty-eight-day strength, based on results from trial batches. If the required seven-day strength is not secured with the 030020 Page 8 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 cement specified in Table 4, changes in the batch design will be made. TABLE 4 Classes of Concrete Minimum Class Compressive Min. Beam Maximum Coarse of Sacks Cement Strength(fc) Strength Water-Cement Aggregate Concrete per C.Y. (min.) 28-Day(psi) 7-Day(psi) Ratio (gal/sack) No. A* 5.0 3000 500*** 6.5 2-4-8**** B* 4.5 2500 417 8.0 2-4-8**** C* 6.0 3600 600*** 6.0 1-2-4** D 6.0 3000 500 7.0 2-4 S 6.5 4000 570 5.0 2-4 *Entrained Air(slabs, piers and bent concrete). **Grade 1 Coarse Aggregate may be used in foundation only(except cased drilled shafts). ***When Type H Cement is used with Class C Concrete, the 7-day beam break requirement will be 550 psi; with Class A Concrete, the minimum 7-day beam break requirement will be 460 psi. ****Permission to use Grade 8 Aggregate must have prior approval of the Engineer. 9. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article 'Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Retamping of concrete will not be permitted. In threatening weather, which may result in conditions that will adversely affect the quality of the concrete to be placed, the Engineer may order postponement of the work. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures, the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall, or from freezing temperatures. If necessary to continue operations during rainfall, the Contractor shall also provide protective coverings for the material stockpiles. Aggregate stockpiles need be covered only to the extent necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregates to adequately control the consistency of the concrete. 10. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT All equipment, tools, and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work underway without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. The mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform 030020 Page 9 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 distribution of the material throughout the mass. Mixers may be either the revolving drum type or the revolving blade type, and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. After all the ingredients are assembled in the drum, the mixing shall continue not less than 1 minute for mixers of one cubic yard or less capacity plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. The mixer shall operate at the speed and capacity designated by the Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. The mixer shall have a plate affixed showing the manufacturer's recommended operating data. The absolute volume of the concrete batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer for each placement shall contain an extra quantity of sand, cement and water sufficient to coat the inside surface of the drum. Upon the cessation of mixing for any considerable length of time, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. The concrete mixer shall be equipped with an automatic timing device which is put into operation when the skip is raised to its full height and dumping. This device shall lock the discharging mechanism and prevent emptying of the mixer until all the materials have been mixed together for the minimum time required, and it shall ring a bell after the specified time of mixing has elapsed. The water tank shall be arranged so that the amount of water can be measured accurately, and when the tank starts to discharge, the inlet supply shall cut off automatically. Whenever a concrete mixer is not adequate or suitable for the work, it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Engineer and a suitable mixer provided by the Contractor. Pick-up and thro-over blades in the drum of the mixer which are worn down more than 10 percent in depth shall be repaired or replaced with new blades. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in the structure. Job mix concrete shall be concrete mixed in an approved batch mixer in accordance with the requirements stated above, adjacent to the structure for which the concrete is being mixed, and moved to the placement site in non-agitating equipment. 11. READY-MIX PLANTS A. General. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish concrete meeting all requirement of the governing specification sections, and concrete not meeting the slump, workability and consistency requirements of the governing specification sections shall not 030020 Page 10 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 be placed in the structure or pavement. Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be mixed and delivered by means of one of the following approved methods. (1) Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and transported to the point of delivery in a truck agitator or a truck mixer operating at truck agitator or truck mixer agitation speed. (Central-Mix Concrete) (2) Mixed complete in a truck mixer and transported to the placement site at mixing and/or agitating speed (Transit-Mix Concrete), subject to the following provisions: (a) Truck mixers will be permitted to transport concrete to the job site at mixing speed if equipped with double actuated counters which will separate revolutions at mixing speed from total revolutions. (b) Truck mixers equipped with a single actuated counter counting total revolutions of the drum shall mix the concrete at the plant not less than 50 nor more than 70 revolutions at mixing speed, transport it to the job site at agitating speed and complete the required mixing before placing the concrete. (3) Mixed completely in a stationery mixer and transported to the job site in approved non-agitating trucks with special bodies. This method of transporting will be permitted for concrete pavement only. B. Equipment. (1) Batching Plant. The batching plant shall be provided with adequate bins for batching all aggregates and materials required by the specifications. Bulk cement shall be weighed on a scale separate from those used for other materials and in a hopper entirely free and independent of that used for weighing the aggregates. (2) Mixers and Agitators. (a) General: Mixers shall be of an approved stationary or truck-type capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection, cleaning and repair of blades. Mixers and agitators shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades, and any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced with new in 030020 Page 11 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 accordance with the manufacturer's design and arrangement for that particular unit when any part or section is worn as much as 10 percent below the original height of the manufacturer's design. (b) Stationary Mixers: These shall conform to the requirements of Article "Mixing and Mixing Equipment". Truck mixers mounted on a stationary base will not be considered as a stationary mixer. (c) Truck Mixers: In addition, truck mixers shall comply with the following requirements: An engine in satisfactory working condition and capable of accurately gauging the desired speed of rotation shall be mounted as an integral part of the mixing unit for the purpose of rotating the drum. Truck mixers equipped with a transmission that will govern the speed of the drum within the specified revolutions per minute (rpm)will not require a separate engine. All truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the proper number of revolutions of the drum, as specified in Article 11. A. above, may be readily verified. The counters shall be read and recorded at the start of mixing at mixing speeds. Each until shall have adequate water supply and accurate metering or gauging devices for measuring the amount used. (d) Agitators: Concrete agitators shall be of the truck type, capable of maintaining a thoroughly mixed and uniform concrete mass and discharging it within the same degree of uniformity specified for mixers. Agitators shall comply with all of the requirements for truck mixers, except for the actual mixing requirements. C. Operation of Plant and Equipment. Delivery of ready-mixed concrete shall equal or exceed the rate approved by the Engineer for continuous placement. In all cases, the delivery of concrete to the placement site shall assure compliance with the time limits in the applicable specification for depositing successive batches in any monolithic unit. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate standby trucks are available. A standard ticket system will be used for recording concrete batching, mixing and delivery date. Tickets will be delivered to the job inspector. Loads arriving without ticket and/or in unsatisfactory condition shall not be used. When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing operation, the mixing time for one cubic yard of concrete shall be one minute plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. This mixing time shall start when all cement, aggregates and initial water have entered the drum. 030020 Page 12 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 The mixer shall be charged so that some of the mixing water will enter the drum in advance of the cement and aggregate. All of the mixing water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one- fourth of the specified mixing time. Water used to flush down the blades after charging shall be accurately measured and included in the quantity of mixing water. The introduction of the initial mixing water, except blade wash down water and that permitted in this Article, shall be prior to or simultaneous with the charging of the aggregates and cement. The loading of truck mixers shall not exceed 63 percent of the total volume of the drum. When used as an agitator only, the loading shall not exceed 80 percent of the drum volume. When Ready-Mix Concrete is used, additional mortar (one sack cement, three parts sand and sufficient water) shall be added to the batch to coat the drum of the mixer or agitator truck, and this shall be required for every load of Class C concrete only and for the first batch from central mix plants. A portion of the mixing water, required by the batch design to produce the desired slump, may be withheld and added at the job site, but only with permission of the Engineer and under his supervision. When water is added under the above conditions, it shall be thoroughly mixed as specified below for water added at the job site. Mixing speed shall be attained as soon as all ingredients are in the mixer, and each complete batch (containing all the required ingredients) shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed except that when water is added at the job site, 25 revolutions (minimum) at mixing speed will be required to uniformly disperse the additional water throughout the mix. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. The agitating speed shall be not less than one (1) nor more than five (5) rpm. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. 12. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete of the various classifications which will constitute the completed and accepted structure(s) in-place will be measured by the cubic yard, per each, square foot, square yard or linear foot, as the case may be. Measurement will be as shown on the drawings and/or in the Bid Form. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 030020 Page 13 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 032020 REINFORCING STEEL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel, deformed and smooth, of the size and quantity designated on the plans and in accordance with these specifications. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all bar reinforcement shall be deformed, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 615, Grades 60 or 75, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace new billet steel. Large diameter new billet steel (Nos. 14 and 18), Grade 75, will be permitted for straight bars only. Where bending of bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18 of Grade 60 is required, bend testing shall be performed on representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM Specification. The required bend shall be 90 degrees around a pin having a diameter of 10 times the nominal diameter of the bar. Spiral reinforcement shall be smooth (not deformed) bars or wire of the minimum diameter shown on the plans, and shall be made by one or more of the following processes: open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace. Bars shall be rolled from billets reduced from ingots and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 306, Grade 65 minimum (references to ASTM Designation: A 29 is voided). Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with ASTM Designation: A 615, or ASTM Designation: A 615, Grade 60, except for deformations. Wire shall be cold-drawn from rods that have been hot-rolled from billets and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 185. In cases where the provisions of this specification are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM Designation to which reference is made, the provisions of this specification shall govern. Report of chemical analysis showing the percentages of carbon, manganese, phosphorus and sulphur will be required for all reinforcing steel when it is to be welded. 032020 Page 1 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 The nominal size and area and the theoretical weight of reinforcing steel bars covered by this specification are as follows: Nominal Weight per Bar Size Diameter, Nominal Area, Linear Foot, Number In. Sq. In. Pounds 2 0.250 0.05 0.167 3 0.375 0.11 0.376 4 0.500 0.20 0.668 5 0.625 0.31 1.043 6 0.750 0.44 1.502 7 0.875 0.60 2.044 8 1.000 0.79 2.670 9 1.128 1.00 3.400 10 1.270 1.27 4.303 11 1.410 1.56 5.313 14 1.693 2.25 7.6 18 2.257 4.00 13.60 Smooth round bars shall be designated by size number through No. 4. Smooth bars larger than No. 4 shall be designated by diameter in inches. When wire is ordered by gauge numbers, the following relation between gauge number and diameter, in inches, shall apply unless otherwise specified: Equivalent Equivalent Gauge Diameter, Gauge Diameter, Number Inches Number Inches 0 0.3065 8 0.1620 1 0.2830 9 0.1483 2 0.2625 10 0.1350 3 0.2437 11 0.1205 4 0.2253 12 0.1055 5 0.2070 13 0.0915 6 0.1920 14 0.0800 7 0.1770 032020 Page 2 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 3. BENDING The reinforcement shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated on the plans. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the inside diameter of bar bends, in terms of the nominal bar diameter(d), shall be as follows: Bends of 90 degrees and greater in stirrups, ties and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the bend: Grade 60 #3, #4, #5 4d #6, #7, #8 5d All bends in main bars and in secondary bars not covered above: Grade 60 Grade 75 #3 thru#8 6d -- #9, #10 8d -- #11 8d 8d #14, #18 10d -- 032020 Page 3 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 4. TOLERANCES Fabricating tolerances for bars shall be within 3 percent of specified or as follows: Plan Dimon. = 3/4" 7/8" Bar or Smaller--Plan. Dirnen_ 1** Bar or Larger--Pfau_ DAenen_ * !` t 3/ ll c over 6"--D omen.-r- Zero or -1/Z� 6 a—`nd less-0irssen. • Zero or H 7/8- Bow- or Smaller--Plan Diemen_ l" Bar or Larger—Plan Diemen. ; 1" piral or Circular Tie Tie air - Stirslsp�' P/on Diemen_=1Y Plan Chimp . 5. STORING Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids or other supports, and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, paint, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause for rejection, provided the minimum dimensions, cross- sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire crushed specimen meets the physical requirements for size and grade of steel specified. 6. SPLICES No splicing of bars, except when provided on the plans or specified herein, will be permitted without written approval of the Engineer. Splices will not be permitted in main reinforcement at points of maximum stress. When permitted in main bars, splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered a minimum of two splice lengths. 032020 Page 4 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE 1 Minimum Lap Requirements Lap Uncoated Coated Lap in inches > 40d 60d Where: d=bar diameter in inches Welding of reinforcing bars may be used only where shown on the plans or as permitted herein. All welding operations, processes, equipment, materials, workmanship and inspection shall conform to the requirements of the drawings and industry standards. All splices shall be of such dimension and character as to develop the full strength of bar being spliced. End preparation for butt welding reinforcing bars shall be done in the field. Delivered bars shall be of sufficient length to permit this practice. For box culvert extensions with less than one foot of fill, the existing longitudinal bars shall have a 20-diameter lap with the new bars. For box culvert extensions with more than one foot of fill, a minimum of 6 inches lap will be required. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dowel bars transferring tensile stresses shall have a minimum embedment equal to the minimum lap requirements shown in Table 1. Shear transfer dowels shall have a minimum embedment of 12 inches. 7. PLACING Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-twelfth of the spacing between bars. In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-quarter inch. Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one inch or as otherwise shown on the plans. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tension members and be attached securely thereto. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved galvanized metal spacers, metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers, or approved pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. For approval of plastic spacers on the project, representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5 percent solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections, except that where spacing is less than one foot in each direction, alternate intersections only need be tied. Before any concrete is placed, all mortar shall be cleaned from the reinforcement. Precast mortar or concrete blocks to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in molds meeting the approval of the Engineer and shall be cured by covering with wet burlap or 032020 Page 5 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 cotton mats for a period of 72 hours. The blocks shall be cast in the form of a frustum of a cone or pyramid with the smaller face placed against the forms. A suitable tie wire shall be provided in each block, to be used for anchoring to the steel. Except in unusual cases, and when specifically otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall not exceed two and one-half inches square or the equivalent thereof in cases where circular or rectangular areas are provided. Blocks shall be cast accurately to the thickness required, and the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of surface imperfections. Reinforcement shall be supported and tied in such manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, overturning of truss bars or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with the first paragraph of Article 7 of this specification. Mats of wire fabric shall overlap each other sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be fastened securely at the ends and edges. No concrete shall be deposited until the Engineer has inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel and given permission to proceed. 8. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, reinforcing steel is considered subsidiary to the various items shown in the Bid Form and shall not be measured and paid for as a separate item. 032020 Page 6 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 036020 STUCCO AND PLASTER (5-123) 1. GENERAL This work includes lath, furring and stucco including all accessories conforming to details. This Applicator shall show evidence of experience and competency in accomplishing plaster work of the highest workmanship, which is the requirement herein. All improper workmanship shall be removed and be replaced with proper workmanship at any stage of the work. All manufactured materials shall be delivered in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand name. All cementitious material must be kept dry until ready for use, and must be kept off the ground, under cover, and away from any sweating walls or other damp surfaces. 2. LATHING MATERIALS All lath for exterior stucco shall be galvanized, self-furring diamond lath weighing not less than 2.5 lbs. per square yard. Tie wires shall be No. 16 gauge galvanized wire. Apply lath over continuous 6 mil. polyethylene vapor barrier film. 3. ACCESSORIES Accessories shall be zinc, and equal, in total value, to U.S.G. No. 1-A expanded corner bead; No. 60 or 66 expanded square casing bead; No. 10-A expanded bull nose corner bead; No. 15 and other expansion joints and other accessories as necessary for stopping plaster at all changes of plane or backup material. Use 1/2" beads on masonry; 3/4" beads on metal lath. 4. STUCCO MATERIALS Stucco shall be applied in 3 coats, 3/4" thick on metal lath. 5. PORTLAND CEMENT EXTERIOR PLASTER Portland cement exterior plaster (where stucco is called for) shall be a 3 coat system, buff colored. Submit samples to Engineer's satisfaction. Approximate color sample may be seen at Engineer's office by interested parties. Submit sample to match. 6. SCRATCH COAT Scratch Coat - one sack Portland cement, two sacks equal to U.S.G. Bondcrete lime, 72 cubic feet sand and 2 lbs. fiber. Scratch surface and damp cure for 48 hours minimum. 7. BROWN COAT Brown Coat - same proportions and materials as scratch coat except use 9 cu. ft. sand finish. Damp cure 48 hours minimum. 036020 Page 1 of 2 8. FINISH COAT Finish Coat - 1/8" thick, equal, in total value, to U.S.G. Exterior Stucco, with color added, receiving sand finish. 9. PATCHING AND POINTING Upon completion of the building and when directed, all loose, cracked, damaged, or defective plastering shall be cut out and replastered in a satisfactory and approved manner. All pointing and patching of plastered surfaces, and where plastering abuts or adjoins any other finished work, shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. Plaster droppings or spatterings shall be removed from all surfaces. Exposed plastered surfaces shall be left in clean, unblemished condition ready to receive paint or other finish. Protective covering shall be removed from floors and other surfaces, and all rubbish and debris shall be removed from the building. Finish coat of all plaster work shall be properly damp cured according to directions of the manufacturer of the materials used. The repairing of damage to plaster work caused by other trades shall be done by this Applicator and shall be paid for by the trade responsible for the damage. Do not apply plaster below 55E F. temperature. 10. CLEANING AND PATCHING Clean floors of droppings immediately after each coat is applied. At any exterior locations, remove droppings or splashes from all concrete, masonry or other finish surfaces. Patch after all other work except painting has been completed. Cut out damaged or broken plaster to straight lines with clean, sharp edges. Cut out cracks to width of at least 1-inch. Fill areas to be patched with vase materials, then give a finish coat of same material as adjoining plaster. Patched areas shall match adjoining work in finish and texture. Joinings shall be flush and smooth so joints between patch and existing plaster are imperceptible. 036020 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 37040 EPDXY COMPOUNDS (5-44) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary to provide and apply Epoxy compounds. 2. MATERIALS (USE - TYPE) (1) Epoxy Bonding Compound for bonding new concrete to hardened concrete or other structural material: Epoxy Bonding Compound shall be a two component, 100o solids, moisture insensitive system. Epoxy shall be "FX- 752 Bonding Agent" as manufactured by Fox Industries Inc. of Baltimore, Maryland or "Sikastix 370, Sikadur Hi-Mod" as manufactured by Sika Chemical Corporation of Lyndhurst, New Jersey or approved equal. (2) Epoxy Grout for Epoxy patch on non-horizontal surfaces to concrete: Epoxy Compound shall be a low-modulus, high viscosity, moisture insensitive system. Epoxy shall be "Sikastix 360, Skadur Lo-Mod Gel" as manufactured by Sika Chemical Corporation, or approved equal. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS (1) Bond new concrete to existing concrete: a. Surface Preparation: The existing concrete or structural surface to which the new concrete is to be bonded shall be cleaned. The existing surface shall be made free from dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds, waxes and all foreign material. Cleaning shall be done by sandblasting, mechanical abrasion, or (by washing only if authorized by the Engineer) . During application of bonding compound, surface may be dry, moist, or wet, but surface shall be free of standing water. b. Proportioning and Mixing: The epoxy shall be proportioned and mixed in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions. The epoxy shall be used in a neat condition (without aggregate filler) . C. Application of Epoxy: The epoxy bonding compound shall be applied to the prepared surface with the minimum allowable coverages as follows: Concrete (float finished, cleaned by washing) 75 SF/gal Concrete (rough finish, cleaned by sandblast or mechanical abrasion) 50 SF/gal Other surfaces as specified on the drawings d. Concrete Overlay: The concrete overlay shall be in accordance with the drawings or 030020 of standard specifications. The concrete overlay shall be applied over the epoxy within a period of time which SHALL NOT EXCEED 60% of the tack free time of the epoxy. It is important for the Contractor to note that these times vary with the temperature and pot time. The following allowable times (600 of tack free time, where the tack free time is the period of time from initial mixing of the two components until the thin film of epoxy hardens) are provided below. The allowable times must be 037040 2/20/9 Page 1 of 2 determined from the tack free times which are provided by the manufacturer. The following allowable times are averages and provided only as an aid to the Contractor: Temperature Allowable Elapse Time from Mixing Epoxy Until Placing Concrete Overlay 90OF 40 min. 80OF 12 hrs. 70OF 22 hrs. 60OF 32 hrs. If the allowable period of time is allowed to elapse before concrete overlay can be placed, another layer of epoxy shall be applied prior to placement of the concrete. (2) Epoxy Grout for patch to non-horizontal surfaces to concrete: a. Surface Preparation: The surface shall be prepared as described in (1) Bond new concrete to existing concrete Part a. b. Proportioning and Mixing: The epoxy shall be proportioned and mixed in strict accordance with the manufacturer instruction. The epoxy may be mixed with dry masonry sand. Sand shall conform to A.S.T.M. C-144 with 100o passing a No. 8 sieve and not more than 15% to 35% passing a No. 50 mesh sieve. The amount of sand filler shall not exceed 3/4 to 1 (loose sand to epoxy by volume) . C. Application: Epoxy shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. Area adjacent to work shall be cleaned free of epoxy spills as to provide a neat appearance before work will be accepted. 4. GENERAL PRECAUTION The Contractor is advised to become familiar with type of epoxy, method of application, and its basic limitations prior to using the epoxy. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Epoxy Compounds shall be considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 037040 2/20/9 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 038000 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for construction of all types of structures involving the use of structural concrete, except where the requirements are waived or revised by other governing specifications. All concrete structures shall be constructed in accordance with the design requirements and details shown on the plans; in conformity with the pertinent provisions of the items contracted for; the incidental specifications referred to; and in conformity with the requirements herein. 2. MATERIALS (1) Concrete. All concrete shall conform to the provisions of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". The class of concrete for each type of structure or unit shall be as specified on the plans or by pertinent governing specifications. (2) Expansion Joint Material. (a) Preformed Fiber Material. Preformed fiber expansion joint material shall be of the dimensions shown on the plans. The material shall be one of the following types, unless otherwise noted on the plans: 1. Preformed Bituminous Fiber Materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)". 2. Preformed Non-Bituminous Fiber Material shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)", except that the requirements pertaining to bitumen content, density and water absorption shall be voided. 3. Redwood. (b) Joint Sealing Materials. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, joint sealing material shall conform to the following requirements. The material shall adhere to the sides of the concrete joint or crack and shall form an effective seal against infiltration of water and incompressibles. The material shall not crack or break when exposed to low temperatures. 038000 Page 1 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 1. Class 1-a. (Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold-Extruded Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. This type is specifically designed for vertical or sloping joints and hence not self-leveling. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 24 hours. For performance requirements see under 2.(2)(b)2. below. 2. Class 1-b. (Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold-Pourable, Self-Leveling Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 3 hours. Performance Requirements: Class 1-a and Class 1-b joint materials,when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-525-C, shall meet the above curing times and the following requirements: It shall be of such consistency that it can be mixed and poured, or mixed and extruded into joints at temperatures above 60 degrees F. Penetration, 77'F.: 150 gm. cone, 5 sec., max., cm.................. 0.90 Bond and Extension 75%, O°F, 5 cycles: Dry Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Wet Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Steel Blocks...(Primed if specified by manuf.). Pass Flow at 200'F................................. None Water Content%by weight, max................. 5.0 Resilience: Original sample min. % (cured)................. 50 Oven aged at 158°F min. % .................... 50 For Class 1-a Material Only: Cold Flow (10 min.)............................ None (c) Asphalt Board. Asphalt Board shall consist of two liners of 0.016-inch asphalt impregnated paper,filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. Boards shall be smooth,flat and sufficiently rigid to permit installation. When tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-524-C,the asphalt board shall not deflect from the horizontal more than one inch in three and one-half inches (1" in 31/2"). (d) Rebonded Neoprene Filler. Rebonded neoprene filler shall consist of ground closed- cell neoprene particles, rebonded and molded into sheets of uniform thickness, of the dimensions shown on plans. Filler material shall have the following physical properties and shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D 1752"Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction", Type 1, where applicable: 038000 Page 2 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 PROPERTY METHOD REQUIREMENT Color ASTM D1752, Type 1 Black Density ASTM D1752, Type 1 40 lb./ft3 Min. Recovery ASTM D1752, Type 1 90%Min. Compression ASTM D1752, Type 1 50 to 500 psi Extrusion ASTM D1752, Type 1 0.25 inch Max. Tensile Strength ASTM D1752, Type 1 20 psi Min. Elongation 75%Min. The manufacturers shall furnish the Engineer with certified test results as to compliance with the above requirements and a 12 inch x 12 inch x 1 inch sample from the shipment for approval. (3) Curing Materials. (a) Membrane curing materials shall comply with ASTM Designation: C 309 "Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete",Type 1 clear or translucent, or Type 2 white-pigmented. The material shall have a minimum flash-point of 80 degrees F when tested by the "Pensky-Martin Closed Cup Method". It shall be of such consistency that it can be satisfactorily applied as a fine mist through an atomizing nozzle by means of approved pressure spraying equipment at atmospheric temperatures above 40 degrees F. It shall be of such nature that it will not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete or its components. Type 1 compound shall contain a fugitive dye that will be distinctly visible not less than 4 hours nor more than 7 days after application. The compound shall produce a firm, continuous,uniform moisture impermeable film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. It shall, when applied to the damp concrete surface at the rate of coverage specified herein,be dry to the touch in not more than 4 hours, and shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciable sagging. It shall not disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the required curing period. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration. The compound shall be delivered to the job only in the manufacturer's original containers, which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, the trade name of the material, and a batch number or symbol with which test samples may be correlated. The water retention test shall be in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-219-F. Percentage loss shall be defined as the water lost after the application of the curing material was applied. The permissible percentage moisture loss (at the rate of coverage specified herein) shall not exceed the 038000 Page 3 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 following: 24 hours after application............2 percent 72 hours after application............4 percent Type 1 (Resin Base Only)curing compound will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. (b) Mat curing of concrete is allowed where permitted by Table 1 in this specification or where otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3. EXPANSION JOINTS Joints and devices to provide for expansion and contraction shall be constructed where and as indicated herein or on the plans. All open j oints and j oints to be filled with expansion j oint material, shall be constructed using forms adaptable to loosening or early removal. To avoid expansion or contraction damage to the adjacent concrete, these forms shall be loosened as soon as possible after final concrete set to permit free movement without requiring full form removal. Prior to placing the sealing material, the vertical facing the joint shall be cleaned of all laitance by sandblasting or by mechanical routing. Cracked or spalled edges shall be repaired. The j oint shall be blown clean of all foreign material and sealed. Where preformed fiber j oint material is used,it shall be anchored to the concrete on one side of the joint by light wire or nails, to prevent the material from falling out. The top one inch (1") of the joint shall be filled with joint sealing material. Finished joints shall conform to the indicated outline with the concrete sections completely separated by the specified opening or joint material. Soon after form removal and again where necessary after surface finishing, all projecting concrete shall be removed along exposed edges to secure full effectiveness of the expansion joints. 4. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS The j oint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact with concrete that has attained its initial set shall be deemed a construction joint. The term "monolithic placement" shall be interpreted to mean at the manner and sequence of concrete placing shall not create construction joints. Construction j oints shall be of the type and at the locations shown on the plans. Additional j oints will not be permitted without written authorization from the Engineer, and when authorized, shall have details equivalent to those shown on the plans for joints in similar locations. Unless otherwise provided, construction joints shall be square and normal to the forms. Bulkheads shall be provided in the forms for all joints, except when horizontal. Construction j oints requiring the use of j oint sealing material shall be as detailed on the plans. The 038000 Page 4 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 material will be specified on the plans without referenced to joint type. A concrete placement terminating at a horizontal construction joint shall have the top surface roughened thoroughly as soon as practicable after initial set is attained. The surfaces at bulkheads shall be roughened as soon as the forms are removed. The hardened concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material, laitance, dirt or foreign material, and saturated with water so it is moist when placing fresh concrete against it. Forms shall be drawn tight against the placing of the fresh concrete. 5. FORMS (1) General. Except where otherwise specified, forms may be of either timber or metal. Forms for round columns exposed to view shall be of steel, except that other materials will be allowed with written permission of the Engineer. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval as specified. Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. The rate of placing the concrete shall betaken into consideration in determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. For j ob fabricated forms, an additional live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be allowed on horizontal surfaces. The maximum unit stresses shall not exceed 125 percent of the allowable stresses used by the Texas Department of Transportation for the design of structures. Commercially produced structural units used in formwork shall not exceed the manufacturer's maximum allowable working load for moment, shear or end reaction. The maximum working load shall include a live load of 35 pounds per square foot of horizontal form surface, and sufficient details and data shall be submitted for use in checking formwork details for approval. Forms shall be practically mortar-tight,rigidly braced and strong enough to prevent bulging between supports, and maintained to the proper line and grade during concrete placement. Forms shall be maintained in a manner that will prevent warping and shrinkage. Offset at form joints shall not exceed one-sixteenth of an inch(1/16"). Deflections due to cast-in-place slab concrete and railing shown in the dead load deflection diagram shall be taken into account in the setting of slab forms. All forms and footing areas shall be cleaned of any extraneous matter before placing concrete. Permission to place concrete will not be given until all such work is completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging,the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately,if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 038000 Page 5 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 (2) Timber Forms. Lumber for forms shall be properly seasoned, of good quality, and free from imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. The lumber used for facing or sheathing shall be finished on at least one side and two edges and shall be sized to uniform thickness. Form lining will be required for all formed surfaces, except for the inside of culvert barrels, inlets and manholes; surfaces that are subsequently covered by backfill material or are completely enclosed; and, any surface formed by a single finished board. Lining will not be required when plywood forms are used. Form lining shall be of an approved type such as Masonite or plywood. Thin membrane sheeting, such as polyethylene sheets, shall not be used for form lining. Forms may be constructed of plywood not less than one-half inch in thickness,with no form lining required. The grain of the face plies on plywood forms shall be placed parallel to the span between the supporting studs or joists. Plywood used for forming surfaces that remain exposed shall be equal to that specified as B-B Plyform Class I or Class H Exterior, of the U. S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards and Technology, latest edition. Forms or form lumber to be reused shall be maintained clean and in good condition. Any lumber which is split, warped, bulged, marred, or has defects that will produce inferior work, shall not be used and, if condemned, shall be promptly removed from the work. Studs and j oists shall be spaced so that the facing form material remains in true alignment under the imposed loads. Wales shall be spaced close enough to hold forms securely to the designated lines and scabbed at least 4 feet on each side of joints to provide continuity. A row of wales shall be placed near the bottom of each placement. Facing material shall be placed with parallel and square joints and securely fastened to supporting studs. Forms for surfaces receiving only an ordinary finish and exposed to view shall be placed with the form panels symmetrical,i.e., long dimensions set in the same direction. Horizontal joints shall be continuous. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of materials of a grade that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. Wood molding shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. Unless otherwise provided, forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and edges with triangular chamfer strips measuring three-quarter inch (3/4") on the sides. Forms for railing and ornamental work shall be constructed to standards equivalent to first-class millwork. All moldings, panel work and bevel strips shall be straight and true with nearly mitered joints designed so the finished work is true, sharp and clean cut. 038000 Page 6 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 All forms shall be constructed to permit their removal without marring or damaging the concrete. The forms may be given a slight draft to permit ease of removal. Metal form ties of an approved type or a satisfactory substitute shall be used to hold forms in place and shall be of a type that permits ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter specified. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2") from the concrete surface. They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling, and when removed, shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. Burning off of rods, bolts or ties will not be permitted. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch (1/2")from the face of the concrete. Devices holding metal ties in place shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie and adjustable to allow for proper alignment. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be removed entirely as the concrete is being placed. Adequate clean-out openings shall be proved for narrow walls and other locations where access to the bottom of the forms is not readily attainable. Prior to placing concrete, the facing of all forms shall be treated with oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface. Care shall be exercised to prevent coating of the reinforcing steel. (3) Metal Forms. The foregoing requirements for timber forms regarding design,mortar-tightness, filleted corners,beveled projections,bracing, alignment,removal,reuse and wetting shall also apply to metal forms, except that these will not require lining, unless specifically noted on the plans. The thickness of form metal shall be as required to maintain the true shape without warping or bulging. All bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk. Clamps, pins or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. Metal shall be kept free from rust, grease or other foreign materials. 6. PLACING REINFORCEMENT Reinforcement in concrete structures shall be placed carefully and accurately and rigidly supported as provided in the City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Reinforcing steel supports shall not be welded to I-beams or girders. 7. PLACING CONCRETE-GENERAL The minimum temperature of all concrete at the time of placement shall be not less than 50 degrees F. 038000 Page 7 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for finishing,the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only,and shall be held to a minimum amount. Fog spray for this purpose may be applied with hand operated fogging equipment. The maximum time interval between the addition of cement to the batch and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following: Air or Concrete Temperature Maximum Time Non-Agitated Concrete: Above 80 degrees F 15 minutes Up to 80 degrees F 30 minutes Agitated Concrete: Above 90 degrees F 45 minutes 75 degrees F to 90 degrees F 60 minutes 35 degrees F to 74 degrees F 90 minutes The use of an approved retarding agent in the concrete will permit the extension of each of the above temperature-time maximums by 30 minutes for direct traffic culverts, and one hour for all other concrete except that the maximum time shall not exceed 30 minutes for non-agitated concrete. Before starting work,the Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the construction methods he proposes to use, the adequacy of which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give the Engineer sufficient advance notice before placing concrete in any unit of the structure to permit the inspection of forms,reinforcing steel placement,and other preparations. Concrete shall not be placed in any unit prior to the completion of formwork and placement of reinforcement therein. Concrete mixing, placing and finishing shall be done during daylight hours, unless adequate provisions are made to light the entire site of all operations. Concrete placement will not be permitted when impending weather conditions will impair the quality of the finished work. If rainfall should occur after placing operations are started,the Contractor shall provide ample covering to protect the work. In case of drop in temperature,the provisions set forth in Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of this specification shall be applied. The placing of concrete shall be regulated so the pressures caused by the plastic concrete shall not exceed the loads used in form design. 038000 Page 8 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 The method of handling, placing and consolidation of concrete shall minimize segregation and displacement of the reinforcement, and produce a uniformly dense and compact mass. Concrete shall not have a free fall of more than 5 feet, except in the case of thin walls such as in culverts. Any hardened concrete spatter ahead of the plastic concrete shall be removed. The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Engineer. Concrete may be transported by buckets, chutes, buggies, belt conveyors, pumps or other acceptable methods. When belt conveyors or pumps are used, sampling for testing will be done at the discharge end. Concrete transported by conveyors shall be protected from sun and wind,if necessary,to prevent loss of slump and workability. Pipes through which concrete is pumped shall be shaded and/or wrapped with wet burlap, if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. Concrete shall not be transported through aluminum pipes, tubes or other aluminum equipment. Chutes,troughs, conveyors or pipes shall be arranged and used so that the concrete ingredients will not be separated. When steep slopes are necessary,the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or made in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement, or the chute ends shall terminate in vertical downspouts. Open troughs and chutes shall extend,if necessary, down inside the forms or through holes left in them. All transporting equipment shall be kept clean and free from hardened concrete coatings. Water used for cleaning shall be discharged clear of the concrete. Each part of the forms shall be filled by depositing concrete as near its final position as possible. The coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the face and the concrete forced under and around the reinforcement bars without displacing them. Depositing large quantities at one point and running or working it along the forms will not be allowed. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms in layers of suitable depth but not more than 36 inches in thickness, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The sequence of successive layers or adjacent portions of concrete shall be such that they can be vibrated into a homogenous mass with the previously placed concrete without a cold j oint. Not more than one hour shall elapse between adjacent or successive placements of concrete. Unauthorized construction joints shall be avoided by placing all concrete between the authorized joints in one continuous operation. An approved retarding agent shall be used to control stress cracks and/or unauthorized cold j oints in mass placements where differential settlement and/or setting time may induce stress cracking. Openings in forms shall be provided, if needed, for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. All forms shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. All concrete shall be well consolidated and the mortar flushed to the form surfaces by continuous working with immersion type vibrators. Vibrators which operate by attachment to forms or reinforcement will not be permitted, except on steel forms. At least one stand-by vibrator shall be 038000 Page 9 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 provided for emergency use in addition to those required for placement. The concrete shall be vibrated immediately after deposit. Prior to the beginning of work, a systematic spacing of the points of vibration shall be established to insure complete consolidation and thorough working of the concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures, and into the corners and angles of the forms. Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted vertically,at points 18 to 30 inches apart, and slowly withdrawn. The vibrator may be inserted in a sloping or horizontal position in shallow slabs. The entire depth of each lift shall be vibrated, allowing the vibrator to penetrate several inches into the preceding lift. Concrete along construction joints shall be thoroughly consolidated by operating the vibrator along and close to but not against the j oint surface. The vibration shall continue until thorough consolidation,and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures is produced,but not long enough to cause segregation. Vibration may be supplemented by hand spading or rodding,if necessary,to insure the flushing of mortar to the surface of all forms. Slab concrete shall be mixed in a plant located off the structure. Carting or wheeling concrete batches over completed slabs will not be permitted until they have aged at least four(4)full curing days. If carts are used,timber planking will be required for the remainder of the curing period. Carts shall be equipped with pneumatic tires. Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of wheeling concrete over finished slabs. After concrete has attained its initial set, at least one(1)curing day shall elapse before placing strain on projecting reinforcement to prevent damage to the concrete. The storing of reinforcing or structural steel on completed roadway slabs generally shall be avoided and, when permitted, shall be limited to quantities and distribution that will not induce excessive stresses. 8. PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATHER (1) Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete may be placed when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 35 degrees F. Concrete shall not be placed in contact with any material coated with frost or having a temperature less than 32 degrees F. Aggregates shall be free from ice, frost and frozen lumps. When required, in order to produce the minimum specified concrete temperature,the aggregate and/or the water shall be heated uniformly, in accordance with the following: The water temperature shall not exceed 180 degrees F,and/or the aggregate temperature shall not exceed 150 degrees F. The heating apparatus shall heat the mass of aggregate uniformly. The temperature of the mixture of aggregates and water shall be between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F before introduction of the cement. All concrete shall be effectively protected as follows: (a) The temperature of slab concrete of all unformed surfaces shall be maintained at 50 degrees F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement and above 40 degrees F for an additional 72 hours. 038000 Page 10 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 (b) The temperature at the surface of all concrete in piers, culverts walls,retaining walls,parapets,wingwalls,bottoms of slabs, and other similar formed concrete shall be maintained at 40 degrees F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. (c) The temperature of all concrete, including the bottom slabs of culverts placed on or in the ground, shall be maintained above 32 degrees F for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. Protection shall consist of providing additional covering, insulated forms or other means, and if necessary, supplementing such covering with artificial heating. Curing as specified under Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall be provided during this period until all requirements for curing have been satisfied. When impending weather conditions indicate the possibility of the need for such temperature protection, all necessary heating and covering material shall be on hand ready for use before permission is granted to begin placement. Sufficient extra test specimens will be made and cured with the placement to ascertain the condition of the concrete as placed, prior to form removal and acceptance. (2) Precast Concrete. A fabricating plant for precast products which has adequate protection from cold weather in the form of permanent or portable framework and covering, which protects the concrete when placed in the forms, and is equipped with approved steam curing facilities,may place concrete under any low temperature conditions provided: (a) The framework and covering are placed and heat is provided for the concrete and the forms within one hour after the concrete is placed. This shall not be construed to be one hour after the last concrete is placed,but that no concrete shall remain unprotected longer than one hour. (b) Steam heat shall keep the air surrounding the concrete between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F for a minimum of three hours prior to beginning the temperature rise which is required for steam curing. (c) For fabricating plants without the above facilities and for j ob site precast products,the requirements of the Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall apply. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of concrete placed under any and all weather conditions. Permission given by the Engineer for placing concrete during freezing weather will in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing concrete equal in quality to that placed under normal conditions. Should concrete placed under such conditions prove unsatisfactory,it shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost. 038000 Page 11 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 9. PLACING CONCRETE IN WATER Concrete shall be deposited in water only when specified on the plans or with written permission by the Engineer. The forms or cofferdams shall be sufficiently tight to prevent any water current passing through the space in which the concrete is being deposited. Pumping will not be permitted during the concrete placing, nor until it has set for at least 36 hours. The concrete shall be placed with a tremie, closed bottom-dump bucket, or other approved method, and shall not be permitted to fall freely through the water nor shall it be disturbed after it has been placed. The concrete surface shall be kept approximately level during placement. The tremie shall consist of a water-tight tube 14 inches or less in diameter. It shall be constructed so that the bottom can be sealed and opened after it is in place and fully charged with concrete. It shall be supported so that it can be easily moved horizontally to cover all the work area and vertically to control the concrete flow. Bottom-dump buckets used for underwater placing shall have a capacity of not less than one-half cubic yard. It shall be lowered gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed and raised very slowly during the upward travel; the intent being to maintain still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. The placing operations shall be continuous until the work is complete. 10. PLACING CONCRETE IN BOX CULVERTS In general, construction joints will be permitted only where shown on the plans. Where the top slab and walls are placed monolithically in culverts more than 4 feet in clear height, an interval of not less than one (1) nor more than two (2) hours shall elapse before placing the top slab to allow for shrinkage in the wall concrete. The base slab shall be finished accurately at the proper time to provide a smooth uniform surface. Top slabs which carry direct traffic shall be finished as specified for roadway slabs in Article"Finish of Roadway Slabs". Top slabs of fill type culverts shall be given a reasonably smooth float finish. 11. PLACING CONCRETE IN FOUNDATIONS AND SUBSTRUCTURE Concrete shall not be placed in footings until the depth and character of the foundation has been inspected by the Engineer and permission has been given to proceed. Placing of concrete footings upon seal concrete courses will be permitted after the caissons or cofferdams are free from water and the seal concrete course cleaned. Any necessary pumping or bailing during the concreting operation shall be done from a suitable sump located outside the forms. All temporary wales or braces inside cofferdams or caissons shall be constructed or adjusted as the work proceeds to prevent unauthorized construction joints in footings or shafts. 038000 Page 12 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 When footings can be placed in a dry excavation without the use of cofferdams or caissons, forms may be omitted,if desired by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer,and the entire excavation filled with concrete to the elevation of the top of footing; in which case, measurement for payment will be based on the footing dimensions shown on the plans. 12. TREATMENT AND FINISHING OF HORIZONTAL SURFACES EXCEPT ROADWAY SLABS All unformed upper surfaces shall be struck off to grade and finished. The use of mortar topping for surfaces under this classification will not be permitted. After the concrete has been struck off, the surface shall be floated with a suitable float. Sidewalks shall be given a wood float or broom finish, or may be striped with a brush, as specified by the Engineer. Other surfaces shall be wood float finished and striped with a fine brush leaving a fine- grained texture. 13. FINISH OF ROADWAY SLABS As soon as the concrete has been placed and vibrated in a section of sufficient width to permit working,the surface shall be approximately leveled, struck off and screeded,carrying a slight excess of concrete ahead of the screed to insure filling of all low spots. The screed shall be designed rigid enough to hold true to shape and shall have sufficient adjustments to provide for the required camber. A vibrating screed may be used if heavy enough to prevent undue distortion. The screeds shall be provided with a metal edge. Longitudinal screeds shall be moved across the concrete with a saw-like motion while their ends rest on headers or templates set true to the roadway grade or on the adjacent finished slab. The surface of the concrete shall be screeded a sufficient number of times and at such intervals to produce a uniform surface, true to grade and free of voids. If necessary, the screeded surface shall be worked to smooth finish with a long handled wood or metal float of the proper size, or hand floated from bridges over the slab. When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall perform sufficient checks with a long handled 10-foot straightedge on the plastic concrete to insure that the final surface will be within the tolerances specified below. The check shall be made with the straightedge parallel to the centerline. Each pass thereof shall lap half of the preceding pass. All high spots shall be removed and all depressions over one-sixteenth inch(1/16")in depth shall be filled with fresh concrete and floated. The checking and floating shall be continued until the surface is true to grade and free of depressions, high spots, voids or rough spots. Rail support holes shall be filled with concrete and finished to match the top of the slab. Surface Texturing. Perform surface texturing using a either carpet drag or metal tining as indicated on the drawings. Complete final texturing before the concrete has attained its initial set. Draw the carpet drag 038000 Page 13 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 longitudinally along the pavement surface with the carpet contact surface area adjusted to provide a satisfactory coarsely textured surface. A metal-tine texture finish is required using a tining machine unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide the metal-tine finish immediately after the concrete surface has set enough for consistent tining. Operate the metal-tine device to obtain grooves spaced at 1 in., approximately 3/16 in. deep, with a minimum depth of 1/8 in., and approximately 1/12 in. wide. Do not overlap a previously tined area. Use manual methods for achieving similar results on ramps and other irregular sections of pavements. Repair damage to the edge of the slab and joints immediately after texturing. Do not tine pavement that will be overlaid. Upon completion of the floating and/or straight edging and before the disappearance of the moisture sheen, the surface shall be given a broom or burlap drag finish. The grooves of these finishes shall be parallel to the structure centerline. It is the intent that the average texture depth resulting from the number of tests directed by the Engineer be not less than 0.03 5 inch with a minimum texture depth of 0.030 inch for anyone test when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-436-A. Should the texture depth fall below that intended, the finishing procedures shall be revised to produce the desired texture. After the concrete has attained its final set, the roadway surface shall be tested with a standard 10- foot straightedge. The straightedge shall be placed parallel to the centerline of roadway to bridge any depressions and touch high spots. Ordinates of irregularities measured from the face of the straightedge to the surface of the slab shall not exceed one-eighth of an inch(1/8"), making proper allowances for camber,vertical curvature and surface texture. Occasional variations,not exceeding three-sixteenth of an inch (3/16") will be acceptable, if in the opinion of the Engineer it will not affect the riding qualities. When directed by the Engineer, irregularities exceeding the above requirements shall be corrected. In all roadway slab finishing operations,camber for specified vertical curvature and transverse slopes shall be provided. 14. CURING CONCRETE The Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the methods and procedures proposed for curing; shall provide the proper equipment and material in adequate amounts; and shall have the proposed methods, equipment and material approved prior to placing concrete. Inadequate curing and/or facilities,therefore, shall be cause for the Engineer to stop all construction on the j ob until remedial action is taken. All concrete shall be cured for a period of four(4) curing days except as noted herein. 038000 Page 14 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 EXCEPTIONS TO 4-DAY CURING Description Required Curing Upper Surfaces of Bridge Slabs and 8 curing days (Type I or III) cement Top Slabs of Direct Traffic Culverts 10 curing days (Type 11 cement) Concrete Piling (non-prestressed) 6 curing days When the air temperature is expected to drop below 35 degrees F,the water curing mats shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene blankets or other material to provide the protection required by Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of these specifications. A curing day is defined as a calendar day when the temperature, taken in the shade away from artificial heat, is above 50 degrees F for at least 19 hours (colder days if satisfactory provisions are made to maintain the temperature of all surfaces of the concrete above 40 degrees F for the entire 24 hours). The required curing period shall begin when all concrete therein has attained its initial set. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subj ect to the restrictions of Table 1 and the following requirements for each method of curing. (1) Form Curing. When forms are left in contact with the concrete, other curing methods will not be required except for cold weather protection. (2) Water Curing. All exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet continuously for the required curing time. The water used for curing shall meet the requirements for concrete mixing water as specified in the specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Seawater will not be permitted. Water which stains or leaves an unsightly residue shall not be used. (a) Wet Mat. Cotton mats shall be used for this curing method. They shall be placed as soon as possible after the surface has sufficiently hardened to prevent damage to the concrete. (See Article, "Placing Concrete" of this specification.) Damp burlap blankets made from nine-ounce stock may be placed on the damp concrete surface for temporary protection prior to the application of the cotton mats which may be placed dry and wetted down after placement. The mats shall be weighted down adequately to provide continuous contact with all concrete surfaces where possible. The surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet for the required curing time. Surfaces which cannot be cured by contact shall be enclosed with mats and anchored positively to the forms or to the ground so that outside air cannot enter the enclosure. Sufficient moisture shall be provided inside the enclosure to keep all surfaces of the concrete wet. (b) Water Spray. This curing method shall consist of overlapping sprays or sprinklers that keep all unformed surfaces continuously wet. (c) Ponding. This curing method requires the covering of the surfaces with a minimum of two inches (2") of clean granular material, kept wet at all times, or a minimum of one-inch 038000 Page 15 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 (1") depth of water. Satisfactory provisions shall be made to provide a dam to retain the water or saturated granular material. (3) Membrane Curing. This consists of curing concrete pavement,concrete pavement(base),curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, islands, concrete riprap, cement-stabilized riprap, concrete structures and other concrete as indicated on the plans by impervious membrane method. Unless otherwise provided herein or shown on the plans, either Type 1-D or Type 2 membrane curing compound may be used where permitted except that Type 1-D (Resin Base Only) will be required for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. TABLE 1 REQUIRED PERMITTED MEMBRANE MEMBRANE STRUCTURE UNIT WATER FOR WATER FOR DESCRIPTION FOR INTERIM FOR INTERIM CURING CURING CURING CURING 1 Top slabs of direct traffic culverts X X 2 Top surface of any concrete unit upon which concrete is to be placed and bonded at a later interval (Stub walls, risers, etc.). X Other superstructure concrete (wing walls, parapet walls, etc.) 3 Concrete pavement (base), curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, X* X* islands, concrete structures, concrete riprap, etc. 4 All substructure concrete, culverts, box sewers, inlets, X* X* manholes, retaining walls *Polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene mats or laminated mats to prevent outside air from entering will be considered equivalent to water or membrane curing for items 3 and 4. 038000 Page 16 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 Membrane curing shall not be applied to dry surfaces,but shall be applied just after free moisture has disappeared. Formed surfaces and surfaces which have been given a first rub shall be dampened and shall be moist at the time of application of the membrane. When membrane is used for complete curing, the film shall remain unbroken for the minimum curing period specified. Membrane which is damaged shall be corrected immediately by reapplication of membrane. Unless otherwise noted herein or on the plans,the choice of membrane type shall be at the option of the Contractor. Only one type of curing compound will be permitted on any one structure. The membrane curing compound shall be applied after the surface finishing has been completed,and immediately after the free surface moisture has disappeared. The surface shall be sealed with a single uniform coating of curing compound applied at the rate of coverage recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Engineer, but not less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. The Contractor shall provide satisfactory means and facilities to properly control and check the rate of application of the compound. The compound shall be thoroughly agitated during its use and shall be applied by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers. The sprayers used to apply the membrane to concrete pavement or concrete pavement (base) shall travel at uniform speed along the forms and be mechanically driven. The equipment shall be of such design that it will insure uniform and even application of the membrane material. The sprayers shall be equipped with satisfactory atomizing nozzles. Only on small miscellaneous items will the Contractor be permitted to use hand-powered spray equipment. For all spraying equipment, the Contractor shall provide facilities to prevent the loss of the compound between the nozzle and the concrete surface during the spraying operations. The compounds shall not be applied to a dry surface. If the surface of the concrete has become dry, it shall be moistened prior to application of membrane by fogging or mist application. Sprinkling or coarse spraying will not be allowed. At locations where the coating shows discontinuities,pinholes or other defects, or if rain falls on the newly-coated surface before the film has dried sufficiently to resist damage,an additional coat of the compound shall be applied immediately at the same rate of coverage specified herein. To insure proper coverage, the Engineer shall inspect all treated areas after application of the compound for the period of time designated in the governing specification for curing, either for membrane curing or for other methods. Should the foregoing indicate that any area during the curing period is not protected, an additional coat or coats of the compound shall be applied immediately, and the rate of application of the membrane compound shall be increased until all areas are uniformly covered. When temperatures are such as to warrant protection against freezing, curing by this method shall be supplemented with an approved insulating material capable of protecting the concrete for the specified curing period. If at any time there is reason to believe that this method of curing is unsatisfactory or is detrimental 038000 Page 17 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 to the work,the Contractor,when notified, shall immediately cease the use of this method and shall change to curing by one of the other methods specified under this contract. 15. REMOVAL OF FORMS Except as herein provided, forms for vertical surfaces may be removed when the concrete has aged not less than one day(24 hours)when Type I and Type 11 cement is used, and not less than one-half day (12 hours) when Type III cement is used, provided it can be done without damage to the concrete. Forms for inside curb faces may be removed in approximately three hours provided it can be done without damage to the curb. 16. FINISHING EXPOSED SURFACES Concrete shall be finished as required in the specification Section for the respective item or as otherwise specified on the plans. An ordinary surface finish shall be applied to all concrete surfaces either as a final finish or preparatory to a higher finish. Ordinary Surface Finish shall be as follows: After form removal, all porous or honey-combed areas and spalled areas shall be corrected by chipping away all loose or broken material to sound concrete. Feather edges shall be eliminated by cutting a face perpendicular to the surface. Shallow cavities shall be repaired using adhesive grout or epoxy grout. If judged repairable by the Engineer, large defective areas shall be corrected using concrete or other material approved by the Engineer. Holes and spalls caused by removal of metal ties, etc., shall be cleaned and filled with adhesive grout or epoxy grout. Exposed parts of metal chairs on surfaces to be finished by rubbing, shall be chipped out to a depth of one-half inch (1/2") and the surface repaired. All fins, runs, drips or mortar shall be removed from surfaces which remain exposed. Form marks and chamfer edges shall be smoothed by grinding and/or dry rubbing. Grease, oil, dirt, curing compound, etc., shall be removed from surfaces requiring a higher grade of finish. Discolorations resulting from spillage or splashing of asphalt,paint or other similar material shall be removed. Repairs shall be dense, well bonded and properly cured, and when made on surfaces which remain exposed and do not require a higher finish, shall be finished to blend with the surrounding concrete. 038000 Page 18 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 17. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,no direct measurement or payment will be made for the work to be done or the equipment to be furnished under this specification,but it shall be considered subsidiary to the particular items required by the plans and the contract documents. 038000 Page 19 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 041020 STRUCTURAL CLAY TILE FLOOR AND SIDEWALK (5-22) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work and materials necessary for placement of clay tile required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Clay Tile shall meet the requirements of Grade FT2 of ASTM C-57. Mortar shall be in accordance with ASTM C-270 and shall be Grade M, unless indicated otherwise in the drawings. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Tile shall be set in a full bed of mortar not exceeding 2 inch in thickness. Tile shall be placed in a workmanlike manner. The exposed face of the tile shall be cleaned upon completion. In extreme cases, a 5% solution of muratic acid may be used for cleaning tile. If acid is used, it shall be preceded and followed by a generous bath of fresh clean water. 4. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Structural Clay Tile Floor and Sidewalk shall not be measured and shall be considered subsidiary to other work. 041020 Revised 2/20/9 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 041080 BRICK PAVERS 1. Scope: The work under this section consists of furnishings of materials, labor, transportation, tools and service required for the execution of all brick paving on a concrete setting bed and installing other brick units as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. 2. Related Work Included Under Other Sections: Pedestrian concrete setting base - 4" concrete sidewalk conforming to City Standard Specification Section 025612—Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways and Section 038000 Concrete Structures. Vehicular concrete setting base — concrete pavement conforming to City Standard Specification Section 025620 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement and Section 038000 Concrete Structures 3. Materials: 1. Pedestrian Brick Pavers (Clay)-Nominal 4x8x1 as manufactured by Endicott Clay Products Company, Medium/Iron Spec, or approved equal, to match existing pavers at existing walks and plaza at site. Units shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 2. Pedestrian Brick Pavers (Concrete) — Nominal 4"x8"xl 3/4" Holland 4.5 cm paver from Pavestone, or approved equal, to match existing pedestrian pavers on Chaparral St. 3. Vehicular Grade Pavers (Concrete) — Nominal 4" x 8" x 3 1/8" Holland 8 cm paver from Pavestone, or approved equal, to match existing vehicular pavers on Chaparral St. and/or Shoreline Blvd. 4. Joint Filler-for expansion joints shall be as specified on the drawings. 5. Caulking-for expansion joints shall be as specified on the drawings. 6. Concrete Setting Bed for pedestrian pavers- shall be conventional mortar leveling bed with Laticrete 3701 admixture installed over concrete walks or as shown on drawings. 7. Adhesive Material for pedestrian pavers - Paving brick shall be set with Laticrete 4237 thin set mortar suitable for exterior use or as shown on drawings. See drawings for location of pavers. 8. Concrete bed for vehicular pavers to be as shown on drawings. 041080 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 9. Jointing material for vehicular pavers to be as shown on drawings. 4. Sample: Construct a sample area of each type of brick pavement not less than 200 square feet in size. Sample will be constructed as part of the project and if approved, will be accepted as part of the final paving. However, should the sample fail to meet the Engineer's approval, it shall be removed and reconstructed until approved. 5. Installation of Paving Brick: 1. Brick shall be installed in accordance with the scale and dimensions on the drawings. Brick shall be laid in running bond with tight joints. 2. Setting beds shall be smoothed and leveled. Pavers will then be laid in a trowled adhesive bed. 3. No chipped or cracked brick units shall be incorporated into the work. Where brick units must be cut, they shall be saw cut to provide sharp, clean edges. Angled cuts and gaps at the edges of the pavement will not be acceptable. 4. Cleaning of the brick paving surface shall be done within 24 hours after removal of surface mortar by scrubbing the surface with one or more muriatic acid solutions using a long handled brush with stiff fiber bristles, continuing until the brick paving is clean, free of mortar and showing its true color. After the surface has been cleaned thoroughly with the acid solution, it shall be flushed with clear water to prevent further action of the acid. Muriatic acid solution shall be one part acid, fifteen (15)parts water. 5. Expansion joint filler shall be installed where indicated and where brick paving abuts walls, concrete paving, or other restraining items. Expansion joint material shall never be carried through the brick paving. 6. Measurement&Payment Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, work and accepted material as prescribed for this specification will be measured by the square foot of surface of completed brick paver sidewalk or roadway as indicated in the drawings. The work performed and materials furnished as prescribed by this specification and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit bid for "Brick Pavers" which prices shall 041080 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 each be full compensation for preparing the subgrade; for furnishing and placing all materials, including all reinforced steel and expansion joint materials; and all manipulation, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 041080 Page 3 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 042020 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT (5-121) 1. GENERAL Scope: Furnish all labor, materials, transportation, services, tools and equipment to properly execute work for Concrete Masonry Unit. 2. MATERIALS Concrete masonry units shall conform to ASTM C90 and C129 and shall include hollows, solids, closers, jamb units, headers and special shapes and sizes required. Linear shrinkage as determined by ASTM C426 shall not exceed .030. Mortar shall be Type S consisting of 1 part Portland cement, 1 part Type S hydrated lime and 6 parts sand. Portland cement shall be Type I, II, or III as per ASTM C150. Hydrated lime shall be Type S as per ASTM C207. Sand shall be as per ASTM C144. Water shall be drinkable. Mortar shall be natural. Joint reinforcement shall be made from cold drawn steel wire as per ASTM A82, and shall consist of two deformed side rods welded at 16" intervals to a continuous diagonal cross road forming a truss design and shall be galvanized after fabrication. Provide bolts and rods fabricated from not less than 16 ga. sheet metal or 3/8" diameter rod stock, unless otherwise indicated. 3. EXECUTION Mixing Mortar: All materials shall be mixed a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. All mortar shall be used within 2 1/2 hours of initial mixing. Erection: Bond pattern shall be running bond. Joints shall be 3/8". Mortar joints which are exposed and have become "thumbprint" hard shall be tooled with a round jointer. Masonry units shall be laid plumb and true to lines. Joint reinforcement in all concrete masonry unit walls shall be in every other horizontal course and shall be continuous. Side rods shall be lap 6" at splices. Cleaning: a. Holes in exposed masonry shall be pointed and defective joints cut out and repaired. b. Exposed masonry shall be protected against staining by wall coverings, and excess mortar shall be wiped off as work progresses. All exposed masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned. 4. Measurement & Payment Concrete Masonry Unit shall be measured and paid at the unit price bid. 042020 R 2/20/9 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 055420 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS AND COVERS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the furnishing and installation of frames, grates, rings and covers for inlets, manholes and other structures in accordance with those details. Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A36 "Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel". 2. MATERIALS Welded steel grates and frames shall conform to the member size, dimensions and details shown on the plans and shall be welded into an assembly in accordance with those details. Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A36. Castings, whether Carbon-Steel, Gray Cast Iron or Ductile Iron, shall conform to the shape and dimensions shown on the plans and shall be clean substantial castings, free from burnt-on sand or blow holes, and shall be reasonable smooth. Runners, risers, fins, and other cast-on pieces shall be removed from the castings and such areas ground smooth. Bearing surfaces between manhole rings and covers or grates and frames shall be cast or machined with such precision that uniform bearing shall be provided throughout the perimeter contact area. Pairs of machined castings shall be matchmarked to facilitate subsequent identification at installation. Steel castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A27 "Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application". Grade 70-36 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified. Cast Iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A48 "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings", Class 30. Ductile iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A536 "Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings". Grade 60-40-18 shall be used otherwise specified. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Frames, grates, rings and covers shall be constructed of the materials as specified and in accordance with the details shown on the plans, and shall be placed carefully to the lines and grades indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. All welding shall conform to the requirements of the latest American Welding Society Specifications. Frames, grates, rings and covers shall be given one coat of a commercial grade red lead and oil paint and two coats of commercial grade aluminum paint. 055420 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 Painting on gray iron castings will not be required, except when used in conjunction with structural steel shapes. Commercial grade galvanized bolts and nuts shall be used. The zinc coating shall be uniform in thickness, smooth and continuous. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, frames, grates, rings and covers will not be measured for payment, but shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items. 055420 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 055440 ALUMINUM GRATING (5-110) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary to provide and install all aluminum grating required for this project. 2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS After installation, the grating shall be capable of withstanding a uniformly distributed load of 200 PSF or a concentrated load of 600 pounds with a maximum deflection of 3 inch. Grating shall meet federal specification RR-G-661-C and standards set by OSHA of 1975. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall submit four sets of detailed shop drawings for the Engineer's review and approval. 3. MATERIAL Corrosion Resistance. All materials incorporated into the grating system shall be of an aluminum alloy which is corrosion resistant and recommended for use in an environment to include chlorine treated wastewater. Walking surface. Walking surface shall have a non-skid surface. Fasteners, Anchor Bolts and Supports. All fasteners, additional structural supports shall be provided by the manufacturer or in accordance with his recommendations. 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS All fabrication shall be done in a workmanlike manner, to provide a structurally sound product. All connections, supports, clips, etc. shall be properly aligned and installed. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in Proposal, aluminum grating shall be measured by the square foot of aluminum grating installed. Measurement shall include but not be limited to furnishing and installing all grating, supports, clips and connections. 055440 Rev 11/24/99 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 061810 SHELTER CONSTRUCTION (5-102) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing and constructing the shelter as required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Reinforced Concrete: All concrete shall be Class A as described in Specification Section 030020. Rebar shall be Grade 40 as described in Specification Section 032020. Laminated Beam: Laminated beams shall be of a size as indicated on the construction drawings. The beams shall be capable of supporting a 120 lb/linear foot dead load and a 240 lb/linear foot live load when connected as indicated in the construction drawings. Laminating lumber shall be kiln-dried southern pine, stress graded to meet the requirements of Standard Specifications for Structural Glued Laminated Timber AITC 117. The beams shall be manufactured in accordance with The American Institute of Timber construction Standards AITC 100, and Standard Specification of Structural Glue Laminated Timber, AITC 117. Adhesives shall be waterproof conforming to ASTM D2559-70. Quality control shall be provided in accordance with PS-56-73 Voluntary Products Standard for Structural Glued Laminated Timber and The American Institute of Timber Construction Manual, AITC 200. A certificate of conformance to these requirements shall be furnished and the AITC quality marks shall appear on all beams. Decking: Shall be 2 x 6 or 2 x 8, nominal, single tongue and groove with V joint bottom. Lumber shall be #2 Grade of better kiln dried southern pine. Facer & Drip Cap: Facer and drip cap shall be 1 inch (nominal) #1 Grade southern pine and shall be treated with PENTA or CCA to a minimum retention of .6 lbs. per cubic foot. Roof: The roof shall consist of a minimum 235 lb. per square asphalt shingle with a U.L. rating of Class C or better. One layer of 15 lbs. per square felt conforming to ASTM D226 shall be placed under shingles. Nails, Fasteners and Metal Connectors: All nails, fasteners, metal connectors and flashing shall be galvanized or corrosion resistant. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS General: The Contractor shall provide all temporary bracers, supports, etc. , as required during construction. The Contractor shall obtain all the necessary permits and pay all fees required for construction. Contractor shall meet requirements set forth in the southern building code as adopted by the City with amendments, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Wood Treatment: All exposed ends of decking at overhangs, ends of beams, and ends of facers and drip cap shall be treated with a brushed-on PENTA wood preservative after ends are cut. Reinforced Concrete: Concrete shall be placed in accordance with Section 061810 Rev 11/24/99 Page 1 of 2 038000. Concrete columns shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 3 days prior to placement in the foundation; and 7 days prior to connecting the timber beam. Placement of deck and roof shall not begin until the concrete column has cured for a minimum of 14 days. No heavy equipment shall be allowed on the concrete slab. Laminated Beam: The laminated beams shall be protected by the Contractor. If temporary storage is required, the beams shall be blocked off ground and separated with spacers. Non-marring slings shall be used when handling. The holes for the column connection shall be made with the beam resting in place on top of column with treated wood spacers set. Decking: Decking shall be placed with all joints at alternate beams as indicated in plans. The deck shall be secured to beam with 16d nails. 2 x 6 decking shall require 2 nails at each beam. 2 x 8 decking shall require 3 nails at beams without joint (or at center) and 2 nails at each end or at the joints. Roof: Saturated felt shall be applied shingle fashion parallel to and starting from the eave and lapped six inches, fastened only as necessary to hold in place. Asphalt shingles shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's require- ments. Nails shall not extend through the bottom of decking. Facer and Drip Cap: Facer, drip cap and flashing shall be placed around the structurer. Flashing and nails for flashing shall be of like metals. Facer shall be secured to beams with three 8d mails at each beam. 4. CERTIFICATION OF QUALITY The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the evidence of tests conducted which verify that the materials meet the require- ments set forth under Section 061810.2. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the proposal, Shelter Construction shall be subsidiary and not measured for pay. 061810 Rev 11/24/99 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 113120 WET WELL VENTILATION SYSTEM (5-113) 1. Description This specification shall govern all materials and work necessary for wet well ventilation system required to complete the project. 2. Materials 1. Duct: PVC Pipe ASTM D3034, DR 35 or 41, solvent joint 2. Fasteners: 316 Stainless steel 3. Exhaust Fan: 550 CFM at .25 inches of water The exhaust fan shall be sidewall mounting, centrifugal belt driven type. The fan shall be designed for use in a corrosive environment of hydrogen sulfide and be constructed of fiberglass, stainless steel and other such materials required for the application. The fan wheel and inlet cone shall be of the centrifugal blower type. The fan wheel shall be of non-overloading, backward inclined type, statically and dynamically balanced. Blades, find, inlet cones and back plates shall be securely fastened together for rigid assembly. Fan wheels and shaft seals shall be rated non-sparking in accordance with standards of the Air Movement and Control Association. Motors and drives shall be isolated from the exhaust airstream. Electric motors, wiring, controls, and monitors shall meet NEC requirements for Class 1, Division 1, Group D hazardous areas. Motors shall be of heavy duty type with permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearings. Air for cooling the motor shall be taken into the motor compartment by means of an air tube from a location free of discharge contaminants. The entire drive assembly and wheel, as a unit, shall be removable thru the support structure without dismantling the fan housing. The wheel shaft shall be mounted in heavy duty, permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearing pillow blocks. Drives shall be sized for 1650 of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be keyed securely to the fan and motor shafts. Motor pulleys shall be of the adjustable type to allow for final balancing. 3. Submittals: The contractor shall submit 5 sets of detailed drawings and specifications and parts lists for the engineer's review and approval. 4. Measurement and Payment: Unless specifically included in the proposal, work and materials for the ventilation system shall not be measured for pay but shall be subsidiary to other pay items. 113120 6/27/90 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 150620 PLUMBING (5-90) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for the installation of plumbing required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Pipe shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel water pipe schedule 40. Fittings shall be threaded type using galvanized malleable iron fittings. All joints shall be coated with an appropriate epoxy and up to 3 inches of the adjoining pipe, after installation. Pipe Supports shall rigidly support pipe to concrete bulkhead. Clamps shall be galvanized steel with an epoxy coating applied both before and after installation. Perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. Water Faucet shall be 3/4" hose connection, rough brass, T-handle and of good quality. 3. PERMITS AND BUILDING CODES The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining plumbing permit and work shall comply with applicable requirements of the City. 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS (1) Handling Materials The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of all materials furnished to or by him and accepted by him until it has been incorporated into the completed project. The interior of all pipes shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter. All materials found during the progress of work to have defects will be rejected, and the Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site. (2) Sterilization Fittings: Valves and fittings shall be kept clean. Where soil or other substances come in contact with the water surface of the fittings, the interior shall be washed and sterilized with 20 solution of calcium hypochlorite. Pipe: As each joint of pipe is placed the contractor, unless specified otherwise by the Engineer, shall throw powered calcium hypochlorite (700) through the length of the joint. (One pound for each 1680 gallons of water to give 50 mg./1. ) After the line is assembled, it shall be slowly filled with water and allowed to stand for 48 hours. After sterilization is completed, lines shall be flushed. The Engineer will take a sample test 2 hours after refilling. If the sample does not pass State Health Department purification standards, the procedure shall be repeated. The entire procedure shall be coordinated with and under the supervision of the Water Division Superintendent/Engineer. During the sterilization, process valves shall be operated only under the supervision of the Water Division Superintendent/Engineer. There shall be a fee of $100 paid by the Contractor to the City for each retest that is required. 150620 Page 1 of 2 2 (3) Hydrostatic Testing Water System See Section 026202 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure System. 5. MEASUREMENT Unless specified otherwise in the special provisions, measurement shall be made as follows: Pipe will be measured by the linear foot along the centerline for each size of pipe installed. Measurement shall be up to but not include the fittings. Fittings will be measured as individual units for each type and size installed. 6. PAYMENT Payment shall include but not limited to all materials, labor, equipment, support clamps, testing, sterilization, and all other incidentals necessary to complete the job. 150620 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 151030 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES & ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS (5-105) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for furnishing eccentric plug valves & electric actuators required to complete the job. 2. MATERIALS Plug valves shall be of the tight closing resilient faced, non-lubricated variety and shall be of eccentric design such that the plug rises off the seat contact area during shaft rotation while opening and closing valve. In the closed position the plug shall press firmly into the seat for a dead-tight shutoff. Valves shall be drip-tight rated at pressures up to 175 p.s.i. through 12" and 150 p.s.i. for larger. The valve closing member should rotate approximately 90 degrees from open to closed position. Valve body - cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B End style - flanged Seat - 304 stainless steel or nickel Bearings - stainless steel Plug - cast iron Resilient facing - Buna N or Fluorinated Hydrocarbon Packing - Buna Vee Actuator - electric motor Electric motor modulating valve actuator shall comply with AWWA C540 and the following: Rotation - 90 degree reversible Torque rating - for 125 p.s.i. differential Cycle time - less than 100 seconds Duty - 15 minutes continuous Manual operation - integral with declutching device Hand switch - integral 5 position to permit local operation Mechanical stops - internal to prevent over travel Gearing - for 30 to 60 second opening/closing Auxiliary limit switches - 4 SPDT: 2 full open, 2 full closed Heater - 8 watt minimum Control wiring - 120 VAC, 1 phase, 60 Hz Equipment actuator with zero and span adjustments Provide actuator with a field set choice of valve position on loss of signal Submersible design required Electrical Characteristics: Power: 120 VAC. 1 phase, 60 Hz Rating: NEMA 4 Local Control: Push button station equipped with: Remote/local switch Position indication lights Reversible, intermittent contact Close - stop - open switch Contact closure for remote/local indication where indicated in schedule Enclosure - NEMA 4 Mounting - at inflow and outflow valves adjacent to tank 151030 1/90 Page 1 of 2 Manual Operation: Type: Handwheel, lever, or (operating nut required below ground unless specified otherwise) . General: Comply with AWWA C504 Maximum torque at 80 lb. input Worm gear for handwheel operation Totally enclosed worm gear 3. SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit 5 sets of detailed drawings and specifications and maintenance instruction for the Engineer's review and approval, prior to construction. 4. SUPPORT FROM MANUFACTURER Field Service: The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified factory field service engineer at the site to inspect the installation and instruct the City's Wastewater personnel of the operation and maintenance of the unit. O&M Manual: The manufacturer shall furnish the Engineer with 4 sets of complete operation and maintenance manuals (including wiring diagrams) . 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the proposal, plug valves shall not be measured for pay but shall be subsidiary to other work. 151030 1/90 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 151040 SURGE RELIEF VALVES (5-106) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for providing surge relief valves required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Valves shall be full metal body, mechanical pinch type with flange joint ends on both the body and flexible sleeve. Port areas shall be 100 0 of the full pipe area at the valves ' ends. The valve area shall be 1000 of the full pipe area through the entire length of the valve. Integral flanges shall be drilled and tapped to ANSI B16. 1 Class 125 standard. The pinch valve shall be one piece construction with integral flanges drilled to be retained by the flange bolts. The pinch tube shall be reinforced with nylon. The pinch tube shall be connected to the pinch bar by rubber tabs embedded in the tube reinforcing ply. All internal valve metal parts are to be isolated from the wastewater by the flexible elastomer pinch tube. The steel mechanism shall be double-acting, closing the pinch tube, sleeve, from both the bottom and the top. The mechanism shall be supported in the valve body. The pinch mechanism shall be adjustable on line. The mechanism shall be connected to the cylinder actuator by a stainless steel stem. A cylinder housing shall fully enclose the spring. The cylinder assembly shall be mounted on the valve body by means of an open yoke. The spring shall be externally adjustable for set pressure. The yoke shall be used to limit swishes, stem position indicator, and accessories. The valve shall normally be closed. The valve will be factory set at and easily adjusted in the field. Valve shall meet the following: Valve Size: 2" Factory set cracking pressure: 40 PSI 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Surge relief valves shall not be measured for pay, but shall be considered subsidiary to other work. 151040 5/89 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 02 4100 DEMOLITION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of facilities,including buildings,structures,and othersite facilities. 2. Either abandoning in place and/or removing below-grade construction as designated on Drawings. 3. Disconnecting, capping, or sealing, and either abandoning in-place or removing site utilities as designated on Drawings. 4. Salvaging items for reuse byOWNER. B. Related Sections include thefollowing: 1. Division 2Sections for site clearingand removal of above-and below-grade site improvements not part of facility demolition. 2. Division 15 Sections for demolishing or relocating site mechanical items. 3. Division 16 Sections for demolishing or relocating site electrical items. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Demolish: Completely remove and legally dispose of off-site. B. Recycle: Recovery of demolition waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. C. Salvage:Ca ref ul ly detach from existing construction,in a man nerto prevent damage,and deliver to OWNER. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated,demolition waste becomes property of CONTRACTOR. B. Historic items,relics,antiques,and similar objects including,but not limited to,cornerstones and their contents,commemorative plaques and tablets,and other items of interest orvalueto OWNER that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of OWNER.Carefully salvage in a mannerto prevent damage and promptly return to OWNER. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures:Submit informational report, including drawings,that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property,for environmental protection, for dust control,and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. Adjacent Facilities: Detail special measures proposed to protect adjacent facilities to remain. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 41 00-PAGE 1 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DEMOLITION SEPTEMBER 2025 B. Schedule of Facilities Demolition Activities: Indicate thefollowing: 1. Detailed sequence of demo Iitionwork,with starting and end ingdatesforeachactivity. 2. Temporary interruption of utility services. 3. Shutoff and capping or re-routing of utility services. C. Facility Demolition Plans: Drawings indicating the locations of temporary protection and means of egress for adjacent occupied facilities, if applicable. D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliverto OWNER priortostart of demolition. E. Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by facility demolition operations.Submitbeforethe Work begins. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Complywith haulingand disposal regulationsof authorities havingjurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Facilitiesto be clemolishedwill bevacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work. B. Facilities immediately adjacent to demolition area will be in use. Conduct demolition so operations of these facilities will not bedisrupted. 1. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent facilities. 2. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings and/or operations of adjacent facilities.Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits,or other facilities used by occupants of adjacent facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. OWNER assumes no responsibilityfor buildings,structures,and otherfacultiesto be demolished. 1. OWNERwill maintain conditions existing attimeof inspection for bidding purpose asfaras practical. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expectedthat hazardous materialswillbe encountered inthe Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered,do not disturb; immediately notify ENGINEER and OWNER. OWNER will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. E. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with OWNER's on-site operations. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 41 00-PAGE 2 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DEMOLITION SEPTEMBER 2025 PART 2- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verifythat utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by OWNER and ENGINEER. OWNER or ENGINEER does notguarantee that existing conditions are same asthose indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. D. Perform an engineering survey of condition of facilities to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during demolition operations. Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de-tensioning, if applicable. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utilities: Locate,identify,disconnect,and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving facilities to be demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent occupied buildings or operating facilities,then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings, structures, and facilities. 3. Cutoff pipe orconcluita minimum of 24 inches belowgracle.Remove cables orwires from conduit back to power source. Cap,valve,or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing accordingto requirements of authorities havingjurisdiction. 4. At power surface remove any identification and installed plate identifying as'Spare'or'Not in Service.' B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural supportto preserve stabilityand prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished.Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition. C. Salvaged Items: Comply with thefollowing: 1. Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to OWNER. 4. Transport items to storage area designated by OWNER. S. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways,loading docks,building entries,and otherfacilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existingfacilities. B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 41 00-PAGE 3 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DEMOLITION SEPTEMBER 2025 demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by OWNER and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to OWNER and authorities having jurisdiction. a. Provide at least 72 hours'notice to OWNER if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection,such as walks,fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways,where required byauthorities havingjurisdiction,and as indicated. 1. Protect adjacent buildings and facilitiesfrom damage dueto demolition activities. 2. Protect existingsite improvements,appurtenances,and landscapingto remain. 3. Providetemporary barricades and other protection requiredto preventinjuryto people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 4. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures. 5. Protect walls,windows,roofs,and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain and that are exposed to building demolition operations. D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain,leave temporary barriers and protections in place. 3.4 DEMOLITION,GENERAL A. General: Demolish indicated existing buildings,structures,and site improvements completely. Use methods requiredtocompletetheWorkwithinlimitationsofgoverningregulationsandas follows: 1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 2. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 4 hours after flame cutting operations. 3. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 4. Locate demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls,floors,or framing. B. Engineering Surveys: During demolition,perform surveysto detect hazards that may result from facilities demolition activities. C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads,streets,walks,walkways,and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets,walks,walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from OWNER and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use waterwhen it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions,such as ice, PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 4100-PAGE 4 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DEMOLITION SEPTEMBER 2025 flooding, and pollution. D. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. 3.5 DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS A. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically,from higherto lower level. Complete demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. B. Remove debris from elevated portions of the facilities by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 1. Remove structural framing membersand lowerto ground by method suitableto minimize ground impact and dustgeneration. C. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction that are within footprint of new construction as indicated in the plans. Abandon below-grade construction outside this area. D. Existing Utilities: Demolish and remove existing utilities and below-grade utility structures. 1. Remove existing utilities and pipingthat are within 5feetoutside footprint indicated for new construction. 2. Abandon utilities outside this area by plugging pipes and removing cables within conduits back to motor control centers orsource. 3. Remove nameplate from motor starters or panelboards and replace with new nameplate identified as"Spare." 4. Remove all underground utility structures and fill in accordance with Section 02300 "Earthwork." If within roadways,replace with like paving materials. E. Lift Station Abandonment 1. Prior to commencing lift station wet well abandonment, CONTRACTOR shall dewater, clean,and disinfect the wet well.CONTRACTOR shall pump the wet well dry and dispose of sewage material in accordance with current regulatory standards.Upon removalofall raw sewage,sludge,grit,grease,and other debris from the wet well,CONTRACTOR shall pressure wash clean the wet well walls and floor.Wetwell shall then be disinfected with a HTH chlorine(or bleach) and water solution. Cleaning and disinfection fluids shall be removed from wet well and disposed of properly prior todemolition. 2. Following wet well cleaning, disinfection, and equipment removal, CONTRACTOR shall commence wet well abandonment. 3. Afterall demolition and removal items have been completed as indicated on the Plans, the remaining lift station shall be backfilled with controlled low strength material (CLSM). CLSM shall be per specification Section022020 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.CLSM shall be placed in liftsofno more than 5 feet. 3.6 SITE RESTORATION A. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfiII requirements in Section 022020 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 41 00-PAGE 5 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DEMOLITION SEPTEMBER 2025 free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 3.7 REPAIRS A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations. 3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA- approved landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Do not burn demolished materials. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent areasto condition existing before demolition operations began. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 41 00-PAGE 6 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DEMOLITION SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 02 4113 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION & DECOMISSIONING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 3. Decommissioning and removal of the existing lift station from service including, but not limited to: a. Dewatering and cleaning of wet well, including removal and disposal of sewage and solids in accordance with all local, state,and federal laws and regulations. b. Bypass pumping while decommissioning of the lift station is being performed. C. Removal of all above-ground structures and appurtenances. d. Demolition of the existing wet well structure and/or dry well structure to limits as indicated on plans. e. Backfill of wet well structure with appropriate materials as specified, including compaction. f. Removal of all pumps, piping, piping supports, valves,water services, control systems, odor control facilities, electrical equipment,electrical services and power poles. g. Bypass pumping or pumping and hauling while decommissioning of the lift station is being performed. 4. Removal of existing access driveways, impervious surfaces, and fencing, and replacement with topsoil and hydromulch and/or sodding. 5. Disconnecting, capping, plugging and/or removing associated sewer mains, including force mains, and other utilities. 6. Offsite disposal of all debris, waste, and rubbish in accordance with all local, state, and federal laws, regulations, and ordinances. B. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00—Procurement and Contracting Requirements 2. Division 01—General Requirements 3. Section 0150 00—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 021020—Site Clearing and Stripping 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. See Measurement and Payment Section 0129 01. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 4113-PAGE 1 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION&DECOMISSIONING SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 2. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to OWNER. 3. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. 4. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed, and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the OWNER prior to delivery. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTAL/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work,with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit an informational report, including drawings,that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property,for environmental protection,for dust control, and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. Adjacent Facilities: Detail special measures proposed to protect adjacent facilities to remain. C. Pre-demolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces,which might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. D. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. E. Submit demolition and removal plan for approval a minimum of one week prior to demolition activities. Submit 1 electronic copy in Adobe PDF format to the OWNER and ENGINEER. Plan shall include a complete description and schedule for all demolition and removal work, including at a minimum the following tasks: 1. Diversion of flow to newly installed infrastructure. 2. Shut-off of lift station pumping units. 3. Deactivation and removal of electric power service, controls, and equipment to ensure uninterrupted sewage conveyance. 4. Evacuation of sewage from force mains to be abandoned and/or plugged. 5. Dewatering and cleaning of wet well, including removal and disposal of sewage and solids. 6. Plugging of gravity mains, force mains, and service lines associated with the lift station. 7. Demolition and Backfill of wet well and/or dry well. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 4113-PAGE 2 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION&DECOMISSIONING SEPTEMBER 2025 8. Site Restoration Activities F. Submit flow management/bypass pumping plan. G. Submit pumping and hauling plan including subcontractor contact information. H. Submit temporary restroom facilities information including subcontractor contact information. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. E. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS A. OWNER will maintain conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose as far as practical. B. Notify ENGINEER of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Prior to starting demolition, CONTRACTOR shall inspect construction designated for demolition and report observable defects and structural weaknesses. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence demolition until appropriate determinations and remedies have been made. D. Existing lift station facilities pump raw sewage from the city gravity sewer collection system. CONTRACTOR shall assume that all lift station piping,gravity sewer mains,wet wells and associated appurtenances are filled with raw sewage, including sludge, grease,grit, and debris. Prior to commencing demolition of lift station facilities, CONTRACTOR shall dewater, clean, and disinfect said facilities and dispose of materials appropriately and as specified herein. E. Before beginning demolition work,the CONTRACTOR shall visit the site and verify the nature and extent of demolition and restoration required. CONTRACTOR shall visually examine the site, drawings, specifications, and as-built records, if available,to determine the extent of the work required. CONTRACTOR shall verify project limits with OWNER and ENGINEER prior to start of demolition operations. F. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify ENGINEER and OWNER. OWNER will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 4113-PAGE 3 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION&DECOMISSIONING SEPTEMBER 2025 G. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. H. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate, and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to ENGINEER. E. Engage a professional ENGINEER to survey condition of facility to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. H. During the demolition work,the CONTRACTOR shall continuously evaluate the condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the demolition site. No area, section, or component of structural element will be allowed to be left standing without sufficient bracing, shoring,or lateral support to prevent collapse or failure while workers remove debris or perform other work in the immediate area. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 4113-PAGE 4 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION&DECOMISSIONING SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. D. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways,where required by authorities having jurisdiction, and as indicated. Comply with requirements in Section 3123 16 Excavation Support and Protection. 1. Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities. 2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 3. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 4. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures. 5. Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain and that are exposed to building demolition operations. E. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. F. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. G. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. H. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated,or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. I. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap,valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 3.3 EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND APPURTENANCES A. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be disconnected and removed. B. Equipment, appurtenances, and materials not designated for salvage shall be considered waste and shall be properly disposed of by the CONTRACTOR. C. Mechanical equipment shall be disconnected at flanges or other obvious disconnection points. All equipment shall be unbolted for removal. Torch cutting is not allowed unless approved by OWNER on a case-by-case basis. D. All equipment, piping, and appurtenances inside the wet well shall be removed, including but not limited to submersible sewage pumping units, including base elbows,guide rails and support brackets, access stabilizer, bubbler and float switches, discharge piping, pipe supports, odor control appurtenances, and all related items. E. Wet well piping (other than force mains and sewer mains) embedded in remaining wet well PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 4113-PAGE 5 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION&DECOMISSIONING SEPTEMBER 2025 wall sections (deeper than three feet) shall be plugged and abandoned in-place. F. The existing sewer mains and force mains shall be abandoned and plugged per Specification No. 862. Force mains shall be plugged, and pressure grouted the full length from the lift station site to the discharge manhole locations.The gravity sewer main shall be cut and plugged at the lift station, manhole and all intermediate manholes. G. All above grade pumps, piping, piping supports, valves, water services, odor control systems, and other appurtenances shall be removed. Below grade horizontal piping runs deeper than 36 inches shall be abandoned in-place.The appropriate blind flanges, caps, plugs, etc. shall be provided at the ends of all abandoned piping. H. All miscellaneous above grade mechanical and electrical appurtenances such as air valves, pipe supports, electrical receptacles, light fixtures, poles, and foundations shall be removed. I. All electrical conductors shall be disconnected from the associated equipment and removed from the conduit. All above grade conduit shall be removed. Vertical conduit risers shall be removed to below grade transition with horizontal conduit. Below grade horizontal conduit runs deeper than 36 inches shall be abandoned in-place. Conduit caps shall be provided at the ends of all abandoned conduit. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows. B. Manhole Demolition 1. At lift station installations where gravity sewage will no longer enter the site,the onsite inlet manhole shall be demolished,which shall consist of removal of the manhole roof/cone and the upper 4 feet of the manhole. C. Wet Well Demolition 1. Prior to commencing lift station wet well demolition, CONTRACTOR shall dewater, clean, and disinfect the wet well. CONTRACTOR shall pump the wet wells dry and dispose of sewage material in accordance with current regulatory standards. Upon removal of all raw sewage,sludge,grit, grease, and other debris from the wet well, CONTRACTOR shall pressure wash clean the wet well walls and floor. Wet well shall then be disinfected with a HTH chlorine (or bleach) and water solution. Cleaning and disinfection fluids shall be removed from wet well and disposed of properly prior to demolition. 2. Following wet well cleaning, disinfection, and equipment removal, CONTRACTOR shall commence wet well demolition. CONTRACTOR shall remove wet well surface slab and upper wet well shaft sections to a minimum depth of three feet below existing or ultimate finished grade,whichever is greater. CONTRACTOR shall core drill the wet well foundation in 4 places, equally spaced. Each core drill hole shall be a minimum of 4 inches in diameter. CONTRACTOR shall fill the remaining wet well shaft with compacted gravel (no separate pay item).The remaining wet well excavation (upper 4 feet or more) shall be backfilled with select fill material in layers not to exceed 12 inches in loose depth and compacted to 95 percent minimum relative compaction. D. Remove Sidewalk PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 4113-PAGE 6 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION&DECOMISSIONING SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Remove sidewalk to nearest existing dummy, expansion, or construction joint. 2. Sawcut when removing to nearest joint is not practical. E. Remove Driveway 1. Sawcut existing drive, curb and gutter and pavement prior to drive removal. 2. Remove drive to nearest existing dummy, expansion, or construction joint. 3. Sawcut when removing to nearest joint is not practical. 4. Remove adjacent sidewalk to nearest existing dummy, expansion,or construction joint on existing sidewalk. F. Remove Fence 1. Remove all fence components above and below ground and backfill with acceptable fill material. 2. Use caution in removing and salvaging fence materials. 3. Salvaged materials may be used to reconstruct fence as approved by City or as shown on Drawings. 4. CONTRACTOR responsible for keeping animals (livestock, pets, etc.)within fenced areas during construction operation and while removing fences. G. Remove Guardrail 1. Remove rail elements in original lengths. 2. Remove fittings from the posts and the metal rail and then pull the posts. 3. Do not mar or damage salvageable materials during removal. 4. Completely remove posts and any concrete surrounding the posts. 5. Furnish backfill material and backfill the hole with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding soil unless otherwise directed. 6. Cut off or bend down eyebolts anchored to the dead man to an elevation at least 1- foot below the new subgrade elevation and leave in place along with the dead man. H. Remove Retaining Wall (less than 4 feet tall) 1. Remove wall to nearest existing joint. 2. Sawcut when removing to nearest joint is not practical. 3. Removal includes all components of the retaining wall including footings. I. Remove Rip Rap 1. Remove rip rap to nearest existing dummy, expansion, or construction joint. 2. Sawcut when removing to nearest joint is not practical. J. Remove Miscellaneous Concrete Structure 1. Remove portions of miscellaneous concrete structures including foundations and slabs that do not interfere with proposed construction to 2 feet below the finished ground line. 2. Cut reinforcement close to the portion of the concrete to remain in place. 3. Break or perforate the bottom of structures to remain to prevent the entrapment of water. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 4113-PAGE 7 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION&DECOMISSIONING SEPTEMBER 2025 K. Sawcut 1. Sawing Equipment a. Power-driven b. Manufactured for the purpose of sawing pavement. C. In good operating condition d. Shall not spall or fracture the pavement to the removal area. 2. Sawcut perpendicular to the surface completely through existing pavement. L. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to OWNER. 4. Transport items to OWNER'S storage area designated by OWNER. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. M. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, support, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. N. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by ENGINEER, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain OWNER'S property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. B. Demolition debris, rubbish, and other materials shall be removed from the project site daily, unless otherwise directed,to avoid accumulation at the site. Storage of materials at the demolition site is not allowed except when the final disposition of the material is used as backfill. Materials that cannot be removed daily shall be stored in areas specified by the OWNER. C. Demolition and removal of debris shall be conducted in a manner to prevent interference with roads, streets,walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities and private property. Roads, streets, sidewalks, and adjacent properties and facilities shall not be closed or obstructed without permission from the City. D. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. E. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off OWNER'S property and legally dispose them. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 4113-PAGE 8 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION&DECOMISSIONING SEPTEMBER 2025 3.6 SITE RESTORATION A. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in Section 02 20 20. B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to the condition existing before demolition operations began. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 4113-PAGE 9 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION&DECOMISSIONING SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 4113-PAGE 10 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION&DECOMISSIONING SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 02 82 33 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This item shall govern the uncovering, dislodging, handling, removing, transporting, and disposing of asbestos cement (AC) pipe and other asbestos containing materials (ACM). AC pipe is also known as transite pipe.AC pipe typically contains from 15 percent to 20 percent chrysotile and crocidolite asbestos and is an asbestos- containing material. It is the intent of this specification to define procedures that maintain the AC pipe in an intact state. B. Definitions used and incorporated as part of this specification are located in Appendix One. 1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS: A. All work under these specifications shall be done in strict accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations,standards, and codes governing asbestos disturbance, handling, removal, and disposal. Work activities shall also comply with the City of Corpus Christi Specifications related to safety and health. 1. The most recent edition of any relevant regulation,standard,or code shall be in effect. Where there is a conflict between the regulations, standards, codes, and/or these specifications,the most stringent requirements shall apply. 2. The disturbance and/or removal of this material is governed by the National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants(NESHAP)40 Code of Federal Regulations(CFR) 61; by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29 CFR 1926.1101; the State of Texas Occupation Code, Chapter 1954 and Health and Safety Code Chapters 361 and 363; and the Texas Administrative Code (TAC), 25 TAC Chapter 295 and 30 TAC Chapter 330.3 and 330.171. 3. The material is classified by definition under 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, Section 61.141 as Category II, non-friable ACM, unless, when dry, it can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure. At that time, it becomes classified as regulated ACM (RACM) and subject to regulation under Subpart M. 4. As a minimum, the Contractor shall comply with the applicable portions of the following: a. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1) ASTM C 150-Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 2) ASTM C 494-Standard Specification for Chemical Admixture for Concrete. 3) ASTM C 618-Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for use as Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 4) ASTM C 937-Standard Specification for Grout Fluidifier for Pre- placed Aggregate Concrete. 5) ASTM C 940-Standard Test Method for Expansion and Bleeding of Freshly Mixed Grout for Replaced Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory. 6) ASTM C 1017-Standard Specification for Chemical Admixture for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 82 33-PAGE 1 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS SEPTEMBER 2025 7) ASTM C 1107-Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink) b. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) including but not limited to: 1) Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Section 1926—Safety and Health Regulations for Construction 2) Title 29 CFR Section 1926.1101—Safety and Health Regulations for Construction -Asbestos. 3) Title 29 CFR Section 1910.134—Occupational Health and Safety Standards- Respiratory Protection. 4) Title 29 CFR Section 1910.1020—Occupational Health and Safety Standards-Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records. 5) Title 29 CFR Section 1910.1200—Occupational Health and Safety Standards- Hazard Communication. C. Environmental Protection Agency(EPA) including but not limited to: 1) Title 40 Code of Federal Regulations Part 61 Subpart M —National Emission Standard for Asbestos. d. Texas Statutes, including but not limited to: 1) Occupation Code, Chapter 1954,Asbestos Health Protection 2) Health and Safety Code Chapters 361 and 363, Solid Waste e. Texas Administrative Code including but not limited to: 1) Department of State Health Services,Title 25, Chapter 295, Subchapter C—Texas Asbestos Health Protection. 2) Texas Administrative Code,Title 30, Chapter 330 Municipal Solid Waste. f. The governing documents for City of Corpus Christi asbestos-cement (AC) pipe are as follows: 1) U.S. Environmental Protection Agency(EPA),40 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Part 61, Subpart M —National Emission Standards for Asbestos. 2) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), 29 CFR 1926.1101,Asbestos. 3) The State of Texas Statute, Health and Safety Code, Chapter 363. 4) Texas Administrative Code (TAC) 30 TAC Chapter 330. 5) Department of Transportation—Hazardous Materials Regulations 49 CFR, Parts 170—180. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. The Contractor shall develop an Asbestos Removal Work Plan, herein referred to as "the Plan", (see Appendix Two, Example Procedures) that provides specific and detailed procedures they and/or any of their subcontractors will follow to maintain the AC pipe in an intact state. 1. The contractor shall have and follow a written Plan that describes their detailed handling and disposal procedures of the AC pipe. 2. The contractor shall submit copies of the Plan for Engineer's approval. 3. The Plan shall specify the wet techniques to be followed when the pipe collars are dislodged. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 82 33-PAGE 2 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS SEPTEMBER 2025 4. The Plan shall include procedures/actions to be followed if the intact AC pipe becomes broken and the possibility exists of asbestos fibers becoming airborne. 5. Plans submitted with insufficient detail will be returned requesting more information be provided. 6. OSHA classifies the handling and removal of asbestos containing material (ACM) as Class II asbestos work. a. Contractor shall acknowledge that their program complies with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.1101 b. Contractor shall describe how their program complies with that standard. 7. The plan submitted shall contain the following: a. The scope of work to be accomplished shall be described in detail. b. Be specific as to the involvement with the existing AC pipe. 1) For example: abandoning/removing X feet of AC pipe;tying into one or more joint(s)/section(s) of an existing water main and replacing one or more joints/sections (X feet) of pipe to make the connection; removing X feet of buried AC pipe encased in concrete crossing a drainage way not accessible by road; or connecting to an existing joint/section of AC pipe by tapping into the AC pipe. 8. Detailed procedures that describe the methods/techniques to be employed to uncover, dislodge, handle, remove, secure,transport, and dispose of the AC pipe and any generated ACM waste. a. For illustrative purposes only the following is an example of the level of detail expected in a plan. b. The contractor could use them as a basis for preparing their plan. 9. The Plan shall state or reference procedures in the contractor's Safety and health program document that they will follow to comply with the federal OSHA asbestos standard. Finally,the Plan shall contain provisions for the environmentally compliant disposal of the intact AC pipe and any RACM created during the removal process. 10. The Plan shall be provided to the OWNER at the pre-construction (pre-con) meeting for its review and approval prior to initiating uncovering operations to verify the contractor has met the contractual requirements. 11. Preparation and submission of the Plan shall be considered subsidiary to the work required and no direct payment will be made. 12. See Appendix Two for an example of the detailed general work practices a contractor could use in preparing an Asbestos Removal Work Plan. a. If the contractor uses the example,they must expand upon the provisions in the appendix to describe its specific procedures. b. The appendix is provided for illustrative purposes only. 13. At the Pre-construction Conference/Meeting the following shall be submitted for review and approval to the OWNER. a. The Plan in accordance with: NESHAP, OSHA,this Special Specifications, and State requirements. 1) The number of copies submitted of the Plan is the same as the number of copies required under other bid submittal requirements with one copy being submitted electronically. 14. The contractor shall incorporate working with ACM and complying with mandated OSHA requirements for Class II, asbestos work in their project specific Safety and Health Plan. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 82 33-PAGE 3 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS SEPTEMBER 2025 15. The guidance provided in these special specifications is not intended and does not constitute an asbestos abatement project design as described under 25 TAC, Chapter 295. 16. Submit proof satisfactory to the OWNER, that required permits, site location, and arrangements for transport and disposal of asbestos containing waste material (ACWM) have been made that meet Texas environmental statutes and regulations. 17. Include the name of the transporter,their Texas asbestos transporter license number, and the name of the approved landfill where the AC pipe and ACM waste will be buried. 18. Submit copies to the OWNER of all transport manifests, trip tickets, and disposal receipts for all ACWM removed from the work area during the project. 19. Any project involving AC pipe, the Contractor shall comply with OSHA standards and shall develop a Safety and Health Plan. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION: A. The following procedures shall apply when removing or handling non-friable asbestos containing material (ACM). 1. No handling and disposing of the AC pipe will begin without approval from the OWNER. 2. The Contractor shall uncover, dislodge, handle, remove, transport, and dispose of all AC pipe specified in the contract documents for this project using wet technique procedures. 3. All work involving AC pipe and other ACM products must be addressed in the Plan. 4. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent damage to adjacent structures and material/finished material not required for AC pipe handling 5. All projects involving AC pipe require that NESHAP and OSHA standards are met and/orexceeded. 6. The contractor shall perform all work in a manner that meets or exceeds those standards 7. To comply with NESHAP and OSHA requirements, this project will require workers trained in using wet technique procedures to dislodge and remove AC pipe, AC pipe joints, valves (any type) containing ACM, and any surrounding soils that may contain ACM. 8. OSHA requires that during any ACM disturbance, regardless of amount,the asbestos worker(s) shall be protected from potential airborne asbestos exposure in excess of the permissible exposure limit or excursion limit as stipulated in 29 CFR 1926.1101. 9. Contractors shall not use procedures that subject the AC pipe to forces that will crumble, pulverize, or reduce to powder the AC pipe. a. Once the pipe becomes crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder it becomes classified as regulated ACM. (40 CFR 61.141)ACM (RACM) and subject to NESHAP. 10. The following work practices and engineering controls shall not be used for work related to AC pipe or for work which disturbs ACM, regardless of asbestos exposure or the results of Initial Exposure Assessments: a. High-speed abrasive disc saws and sanders not equipped with point of cut ventilator or enclosures with HEPA filtered exhaust air. b. Carbide-tipped cutting blades. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 82 33-PAGE 4 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Electrical drills, chisels, and rasps used to make field connections in AC pipe. d. Shell cutters used to cut entry holes in AC pipe. e. A hammer and chisel without using wet techniques to remove pipe connections. f. Compressed air used to remove asbestos or material containing asbestos. g. Dry sweeping, dry shoveling, or other dry clean-up of dust and ACM debris. h. Employee rotation as a means of reducing employee exposure to asbestos. 11. These procedures will protect workers from the health risk associated with airborne asbestos. 12. Refer to Appendix Three of this specification for more specific guidance addressing an acceptable procedure for handling AC pipe. 13. To meet and/or exceed NESHAP and OSHA guidelines,the contractor may subcontract the AC pipe handling plan and work to an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) accredited and Texas Department of State Health Services (DSHS) licensed asbestos abatement contractor, DSHS licensed asbestos consultant, and DSHS air monitoring technician. 14. NESHAP guidelines apply to facility projects in which the combined amount of regulated asbestos containing material (RACM) is at least 260 linear feet (LF) or 35 cubic feet or 160 square feet. a. If the combined amount of RACM is at least 260 linear feet of the AC pipe, including AC collars, and it is expected to become or becomes crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder,then the project is subject to the NESHAP provisions of reporting and asbestos emission control paragraphs in 40 CFR Section 61.145. b. If the scope of the project involves the threshold amount (260 linear feet or greater), a Demolition/Renovation Notification Form is required to be sent to DSHS by the Contractor. 1) This form shall be post-marked no later than 10 working days prior to the start of any asbestos handling work. 15. The Contractor shall notify the OWNER at least 72 hours prior to beginning uncovering, dislodging, handling, and removing the AC pipe. 16. Disposal bags for RACM shall be 6-mil polyethylene and labeled as required by EPA Regulation 40 CFR 61.150 (a)(1)(iv) or OSHA requirement 29 CFR 1926.1101(k)(8). 17. The Contractor shall remove and double bag with 6-mil polyethylene sheeting to yield a total of at least 12-mil,the asbestos pipe in the trench or immediately when it comes out of the trench,seal, label,transport,and dispose of all non-friable ACM and RACM in compliance with applicable current Federal, State and local regulations, laws, ordinances, rules, standards and regulatory agency recommended requirements. 18. Time is of the essence in removing the ACM from the project area. 19. All notifications required to state regulatory agencies will be made by the Contractor with copies provided to CMMA, including but not limited to the DSHS Demolition/Renovation Notification Form. 20. The Contractor shall have an on-site supervisor, who is an OSHA Competent Person, present on the job site at all times that the AC pipe work is in progress. a. Supervisor shall be thoroughly familiar with and experienced at asbestos pipe handing using wet techniques and shall be familiar with and shall enforce the use of all safety procedures and equipment. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 82 33-PAGE 5 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS SEPTEMBER 2025 b. Supervisor shall be knowledgeable of all applicable EPA, OSHA, and DSHS asbestos requirements and guidelines. 21. The Contractor has sole and primary responsibility for the "means and/or methods" of the work; an obligation to the OWNER to inspect all stages of the work; and sole responsibility to supervise the performance of the work. 22. Certain work practices for AC pipe disturbance are prohibited as per this Specification. 23. The Contractor shall be responsible for site safety and for taking all necessary precautions to protect all personnel and the public from airborne asbestos exposure and/or injury. 24. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the integrity of the work area. 25. The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to the area requiring interface with the AC pipe and the general site area in close proximity to the project. 26. If ACWMs are required to be stored overnight in a secured area, the waste material and waste containers shall be labeled according to OSHA and EPA, and the State of Texas requirements, & containerized to preclude unauthorized disturbance of the ACWMs. 27. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and coordinating waste disposal and transport of ACWM to a Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) permitted asbestos waste landfill. 28. Waste manifests shall be generated for the transport of the AC pipe and ACWMs from the project site to the landfill disposal site. 29. The Contractor shall demarcate the area of AC pipe interface ("regulated area")with barrier tape and warning signs, per OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101. a. Access to the regulated area will be limited to authorized personnel and visitors. b. The contractor shall identify in their site-specific safety and health plan how they intend to limit access and who is authorized to be in the demarcated area. 30. Abandonment of AC water mains/pipes: a. The Contractor is responsible for isolating the existing mains to remain in place by capping, plugging, and blocking as necessary. b. The opening of an abandoned AC water main and all other openings or holes shall be blocked off by manually forcing cement grout or concrete into & around the openings in sufficient quantity to provide a permanent watertight seal. C. Valves to be abandoned,that contain ACM, in the execution of the work shall have the valve box and extension packed with sand to within eight inches (8") of the street surface. 1) The remaining eight inches (8") shall be filled with 3,000 psi concrete or an equivalent sand-cement mix and finished flush with the adjacent pavement or ground surface. 31. The Contractor's on-site Competent Person shall inspect the work area, verify, and certify that no residual AC pipe fragments and debris remain. 32. Submit copies of all transport manifests, trip tickets, and disposal receipts for all asbestos waste materials removed from the work area during the project. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 82 33-PAGE 6 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS SEPTEMBER 2025 1.5 PAYMENT: A. No payment shall be made for the Plan. B. Removal and Abandonment of AC water and wastewater mains will be considered subsidiary to the work required, and no direct payment will be made. C. Abandonment of valves containing ACM is considered subsidiary to the work required, and no direct payment will be made. D. If the DSHS RACM limit of 260 LF is exceeded, the contractor is responsible for any DSHS administrative fees and fines at no additional cost to owner. E. Any uncovering, dislodging, handling, or disposing of AC pipe and associated written handling and removal plans,such as an abatement plan, required by another agency will be paid for by that agency. 1.6 STANDARD PLAN NOTE: A. Asbestos Cement (AC) pipe, also known as transite pipe, contains asbestos-containing material (ACM) and is located within the project limits. Special waste management procedures and health and safety requirements are applicable when handling, removing, and disposing of this pipe. PART 2-APPENDICES 2.1 APPENDIX ONE: A. DEFINITIONS: 1. Amended Water: Water to which a surfactant (wetting agent) has been added to increase the ability of the liquid to penetrate ACM. 2. Approval: Means the OWNER's contract requirements have been met but does not mean that the OWNER stipulates any written documents adequately comply with federal and state occupational safety and health regulatory requirements. 3. Asbestos: A group of naturally occurring silicate minerals and includes chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite asbestos, and any of these minerals that has been chemically treated and/or altered. 4. Asbestos Containing Material (ACM): Material or products that contain more than 1.0%of any kind of asbestos. 5. Asbestos Containing Waste Material (ACWM): Asbestos containing material or asbestos contaminated objects requiring disposal. 6. Authorized Personnel:Any person authorized by the Contractor and required by work duties to be present in the regulated area. 7. Authorized Visitor:OWNER representatives,and any representative of a regulatory or other agency having jurisdiction over the project. 8. Asbestos Consultant: A person licensed by the Texas Department of State Health Services to perform the following asbestos abatement related functions in public buildings: a. Project design. b. Asbestos surveys and condition assessment of ACM. C. Asbestos Management Planning. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 82 33-PAGE 7 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS SEPTEMBER 2025 d. The collection of bulk material samples, airborne substance samples and the planning of sampling strategies. e. Owner-representative services for asbestos abatement projects or O&M programs, including air monitoring and project management. f. Consultation regarding regulatory compliance and all aspects of technical specifications and contract documents. g. The selection,fit testing, and appropriate use of personal protection equipment&the development of asbestos related engineering controls. 9. Abatement Contractor: The company, agency, or entity licensed by the Texas Department of State Health Services that has been retained to perform asbestos abatement and other associated functions. 10. Class II Asbestos Work (OSHA Standard): Activities involving the removal of ACM, which is not thermal system insulation or surfacing material. This includes, but is not limited to, the removal of asbestos containing wallboard, floor tile and sheeting, roofing and siding shingles, and construction mastics. 11. Competent Person: An individual who can identify existing asbestos hazards in the workplace, can select the appropriate control strategy for asbestos exposure, and who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. 12. Friable Asbestos: Asbestos containing material, that when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure and includes previously non- friable material that has become damaged to the extent that, when dry, it may be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure. 13. NESHAP: The National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (40 CFR Part 61). 14. OSHA: The Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 15. Regulated Area: An area established by the Contractor or employer to demarcate areas where asbestos work is conducted and any adjoining area where debris and waste from such asbestos work accumulate; and an area within which airborne concentrations of asbestos exceed or there is a reasonable possibility they may exceed the permissible exposure limit. 16. Regulated Asbestos Containing Material (RACM): (1) Friable asbestos material; (2) Category I non-friable ACM that has become friable; (3) Category I non-friable ACM that will be or has been subjected to sanding, grinding, cutting, or abrading; or, (4) Category 11 non-friable ACM that has a high probability of becoming or has become crumbled, pulverized,or reduced to powder by forces expected to act on the material in the course of the demolition or renovation operations regulated by 40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M. 17. Staging area: A pre-selected area where wrapped or containerized asbestos containing waste material will be placed prior to removal from the project site. 18. Surfactant: A chemical wetting agent added to water to improve penetration. 19. Uncovering operations:The use of mechanical,pneumatic,and/or manual procedures that disturb the material and/or soil above and/or around the AC pipe that would expose personnel to the AC pipe. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 82 33-PAGE 8 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS SEPTEMBER 2025 2.2 APPENDIX TWO: A. EXAMPLE OF PROCEDURES FOR HANDLING CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI AC PIPE: The following is an example of procedures for handling the OWNER's AC pipe.A contractorcould use them as a basis for preparing an Asbestos Removal Work Plan.The contractor must expand upon the provisions of this appendix to describe its specific procedures. B. This appendix is provided for illustrative purposes only. The contractor is required to develop a site-specific Asbestos Removal Work Plan that complies with the provisions of this specification. If the contractor employs this example, the OWNER will require greater site-specific detail to be included in the plan submitted for approval. C. Scope of Work: Describe the work and be specific as to the intended involvement with the existing AC pipe. For example: abandoning/removing X feet of AC pipe;tying into a section of an existing waterline and replacing one section (X feet) of pipe to make the connection; or connecting into an existing section of AC pipe by tapping into the AC pipe. 1. Excavation to Pipe: a. Excavate to within X inches/feet of the section of AC pipe to be replaced/removed. Depending upon the depth of the excavation, shoring may be needed following company procedures (provide or reference those procedures). b. Once the pipe is located, excavate (by machine or hand) on one/both sides of the pipe to expose the collars and pipe. Dig the earth from around the collars by hand to create a clearance space completely around the collar. DO NOT SCRAPE OR ABRADE THE PIPE WITH THE EXCAVATION DEVICE(S). C. Set up pumps to evacuate any residual water when the AC pipe is dislodged. 2. Wet Method Use: a. Make the amended water solution by mixing 1 ounce of liquid detergent (Dawn,Joy, other)with 2 to 3 gallons of water in a 2-to-3-gallon mist sprayer. Other size sprayers may be used. b. Wet each portion of the pipe, normally just the collar,to be removed with the amended water(water/soap) solution. C. Use the mist sprayer to produce a "mist" application and continuously wet the collars throughout the wrapping, cracking, and removal process. A worker shall be assigned to and will be responsible for this procedure during the entire dislodging process. 3. Only Cracking AC Pipe Collars is Approved: a. Wrap wet towels/burlap/other defined absorbent material around the collar. Wrap the collar with at least two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting to provide a total of at least 12-mil. It is recommended that additional poly be used on the collars to minimize possible tearing of the plastic. b. Place another layer of wet towels/burlap/other defined absorbent material on the wrapped collar. C. Use the flat head end of a sledgehammer to crack the collar while continuously"misting'the collar. Strike the collar on the side of the section of pipe to be removed to prevent the remaining section of pipe from being broken. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 82 33-PAGE 9 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS SEPTEMBER 2025 d. Put all the pieces of collar into a 6-mil polyethylene waste bag. Look for small pieces that may have been generated during the cracking process,wet them, and place them in the waste bag. NOTE: When the collars are cracked and removed from a shutdown waterline, residual water may drain from the dislodged AC pipe. Follow company safety procedures to control the water(provide or reference those procedures). 4. Double Bag All AC Waste Materials: a. All visible AC pipe materials including collars,towels, rubber gloves,gaskets, and other items suspected of containing asbestos shall be double bagged using 2, 6-mil AC waste bags. The inner bag contents shall be mist sprayed with amended water or mixed with water from the trench prior to closing to maintain the contents wet. Close the bag when it is half full by twisting the top of the bag and sealing with moisture resistant tape. b. If the asbestos waste bag is small enough, it may be placed inside the section of intact pipe before the pipe is wrapped in at least two layers of 6-mil poly. If placing the waste bag inside the pipe, do not force it causing it to tear. C. Removal of Pipe and Waste Bag from Trench: d. All sections of"intact" pipe shall be wrapped in a minimum of 2 layers of 6-mil poly sheets (12-mil total)while in the trench and lifted out of the trench using only nylon slings. If the trench contains water,the pipe shall be lifted out of the trench using only nylon slings and placed on a minimum of 2 layers of 6- mil poly sheets (12-mil total) on the ground next to the trench. e. Wrap each pipe segment in at least 12-mil of poly and secure with tape. f. Lift the ACM waste bag(s) from the trench and move it/them to a secure location to prevent accidental contact with the bag(s)that would cause it/them to tear. NOTE: Any valves, bends,tees,fittings, or other items that have AC pipe connected shall be wrapped whole as required with the same minimum total of 12-mil of poly material. 5. AC Pipe and Waste Storage/Transfer: a. Wrapped AC pipe and ACM waste bags shall be stored in a secure area away from traffic that could damage the wrapped pipe and/or waste bags while awaiting transport to the permitted landfill. b. If daily transport to a permitted landfill cannot be provided, a roll-off type dumpster/disposal container may be used to hold only the wrapped AC pipe and bagged RACM waste to prevent damage to the wrapping. 1) DO NOT TOSS THE PIPE OR WASTE BAGS INTO THE ROLL-OFF OR DISPOSAL CONTAINER. 2) DO NOT MIX SPOILS WITH AC WRAPPED PIPE AND AC WASTE. C. All wrapped or bagged materials shall be moved to the AC pipe/waste fenced holding area for storage. If a roll-off or other type disposal container is used, place the wrapped pipe and waste bags in the roll-off/container using methods that do not cause the wrapping/bagging to be torn. d. Any bagged or wrapped materials that are torn in handling shall be mended and taped. If the tear is too extensive for a simple tape repair,wrap/bag with an additional equivalent of 12-mil minimum thickness of poly wrap/bagging. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 82 33-PAGE 10 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS SEPTEMBER 2025 6. AC Pipe and Waste Disposal: The wrapped AC pipe and ACM bagged waste shall be transported to an approved AC waste landfill with the manifests being generated at the time of transfer. Include the name of the transporter, their Texas asbestos transporter license number,and the name of the permitted landfill where the AC pipe and ACM waste will be buried. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 82 33-PAGE 11 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 82 33-PAGE 12 OF 12 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 02 90 00 MANHOLE AND WET WELL RESTORATION WITH PROTECTIVE COATING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: all work, materials and equipment required for protecting and/or rehabili- tating concrete structures by spray-application of a monolithic high-build epoxy coating to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and enhance structural in- tegrity. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM D4541 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhe- sion Testers B. ASTM D4414-Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness of Organic Coat- ings by Notched Gages C. ASTM C 1244 Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative Air Pres- sure (Vacuum)Test Prior to Backfill D. ACI-506.2-77—Specifications for Shotcrete E. NACE Standard No. 5/SSPC-SP12-Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by High-and Ultrahigh-Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating F. NACE RPO 188-99- Discontinuity(Holiday)Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conduc- tive Substrates 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The following items shall be submitted: 1. Technical data sheet on each product used, including ASTM test results indicating the product conforms to and is suitable for its intended use per these specifications. 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)for each product used. 3. Project specific guidelines and recommendations. B. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer certification that applicator has been trained and approved in the han- dling, mixing and application of the products to be used. 2. Certification by the protective coating manufacturer that the equipment to be used for applying the products has been approved and applicator personnel have been trained and certified for proper use of the equipment. 3. Three (3)years experience and five (5) recent references of projects of similar size and scope and applicator must provide references indicating successful application on un- derground concrete or masonry substrates of a minimum 5,000 of of the specified 100%solids, high-build solvent-free epoxy coating by heated, plural component spray application. 4. Proof of any necessary federal, state or local permits or license necessary for the pro- ject. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 90 00-PAGE 1 OF 10 BID SET OS37-036-01 MANHOLE AND WET WELL RESTORATION WITH PROTECTIVE COATING SEPTEMBER 2025 5. Design details for any additional ancillary systems and equipment to be used in site and surface preparation, application and testing. 6. Or equal submittal: In order to be considered as an equal product, said product will have to meet the minimum characteristics as measured by the applicable ASTM s n r d n h T h .c D to h t of h a r e r d ct . a. NOTE: 99biai pF dbiets must be appF.yed . iiniim, im ,f. this.,....,.eks pFiBF to laid date In order for a product to be considered equal the submitted product must 2 have successfully passed the Nueces County evaluation of pro- tective coatings for concrete or the product must be tested and meet or exceed the minimum standards included in this specification. A bonded third-party testing company must perform the testing. A contractor that has been licensed and trained by the manufacturer must install all products. Prior pre-approval is required to determine if the prospective product may be bid on this project. Without prior pre-approval within the specified time frame a product may be rejected as unacceptable.This time frame allows the engineer ample time to determine if the proposed product is an acceptable alternative. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Applicator shall initiate and enforce quality control procedures consistent with applicable ASTM, NACE and SSPC standards and the protective coating manufacturer's recommenda- tions. B. (Optional)A NACE certified coating inspector shall be provided by the owner.The inspector will observe daily operations, procedures and final product to ensure adherence to the specifications by applicator. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials are to be kept dry, protected from weather and stored under cover. B. Protective coating materials are to be stored between 50 deg. F. and 90 deg. F. do not store near flame, heat or strong oxidants. C. Protective coating materials are to be handled according to their material safety data sheets. 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. Applicator shall conform with all local, state and federal regulations including those set forth by OSHA, RCRA and the EPA and any other applicable authorities. B. Method statements and design procedures are to be provided by owner when confined space entry, flow diversion, debris removal or bypass is necessary in order to applicator to perform the specified work. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Applicator shall warrant all work against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year, unless otherwise noted,from the date of final acceptance of the project. Ap- plicator shall,within a reasonable time after receipt of written notice thereof, repair de- fects in materials or workmanship which may develop during said one year period, and any damage to other work caused by such defects or the repairing of same, at his own expense PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 90 00-PAGE 2 OF 10 BID SET OS37-036-01 MANHOLE AND WET WELL RESTORATION WITH PROTECTIVE COATING SEPTEMBER 2025 and without cost to the owner. 1.8 MATERIAL A. Standard Portland Cement or new concrete (not quick setting high strength cement) must be well cured prior to application of the protective coating. Generally, 28 days is adequate cure time for standard Portland. If earlier application is desired, compressive or tensile strength of the concrete can be tested to determine if acceptable cure has occurred. Note: Bond strength of the coating to the concrete surface is generally limited to the tensile strength of the concrete itself. B. Cementitious patching and repair materials should not be used unless their manufacturer provides information as to its suitability for top coating with an epoxy coating. Project spe- cific submittals and procedures should be provided including application, cure time and sur- face preparation procedures which permit optimum bond strength with the epoxy coating. C. Remove existing coatings prior to application of the new protective coating. Applicator is to maintain strict adherence to applicable NACE and SSPC recommendations with regard to proper surface preparation and compatibility with existing coatings. 1.9 MANUFACTURERS A. Corrosion Protective Coating: Raven Lining Systems, Inc.,Tulsa, OK 800-324-2810 or 918- 584- 2810 or FAX 918-582-4311. B. Cementitious Repair Material: Structural Rehab. Products, Pasadena,Texas 713-473-1701 or FAX 713-473-1253 or QUADEX, Inc., North Little Rock,AR 888-831-1650 or 501-945-3424 or FAX 501-945-3544. C. Or pre-approved equal. 1.10 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair materials shall be used to fill voids, structurally reinforce and/or rebuild surfaces, etc., as determined necessary by the engineer and protective coating applicator. Repair materials must be compatible with the specified epoxy coating and shall be applied in ac- cordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. As an example,the following products may be accepted and approved by the protective coating manufacturer and could be used within the specifications: C. 100%solids, solvent-free epoxy grout that can be trowelled or sprayed and specifically for- mulated for optimum epoxy top coating compatibility.The epoxy grout manufacturer shall provide instructions for epoxy top coating procedures. D. Factory blended, rapid setting, high early strength,fiber reinforced, non-shrink repair mor- tar that can be trowelled or pneumatically spray applied may be approved if specifically formulated to be suitable for epoxy top coating. Such repair mortars should not be used unless their manufacturer provides information as to its suitability for top coating with an epoxy coating. Project specific submittals should be provided including application, cure time and surface preparation procedures which permit optimum bond strength with the epoxy coating. E. Shotcrete shall conform to all requirements of ACI-506.2-77 as published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, MI except as modified by these specifications. Shotcrete com- PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 90 00-PAGE 3 OF 10 BID SET OS37-036-01 MANHOLE AND WET WELL RESTORATION WITH PROTECTIVE COATING SEPTEMBER 2025 posed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. Shotcrete ingredients shall be selected and propor- tioned in such a manner as will produce sound concrete that is strong,dense and suitable for polymer top coating. Cured shotcrete shall have a minimum surface tensile strength of 300 psi. NO coatings shall be applied prior to a full 28 days cure unless test patches of coat- ings exhibit acceptable bonding characteristics and no outgassing as prescribed herein or the repair mortar manufacturer certifies acceptable top coating parameters. 1.11 PROTECTIVE COATING MATERIALS A. Raven Lining System's Raven 405 Coating System: a 100%solids,solvent-free two- component epoxy resin system thixotropic in nature and filled with select fillers to minimize permeability and provide sag resistance acceptable to these specifications(up to 200 mils in a singlecoat.) 1. Product type: Amine cured epoxy 2. Color: Light blue 3. Solids Content(vol %): 100 4. Mix. Ratio: 3:1 5. Flexural modulus 600,000 psi 6. Flexural strength 13,000 psi 7. Compressive strength 18,000 psi 8. Tensile strength 7,600 psi 9. Tensile elongation 1.50% 10. Hardness,Type D 88 11. Bond strength-concrete >Tensile strength of concrete Chemical resistance to: (ex- amples) 12. Sulfuric Acid, 10% Immersion service 13. Sodium Hydroxide, 20% Immersion service 14. MEK Incidental contact (include reagents relevant to the project) 1.12 PROTECTIVE COATING APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer heated plural component spray equipment shall be used in the application of the specified protective coating. 1.13 REPAIR MORTAR SPRAY APPLICATION EQUIPMENT(IF SPRAY APPLIED) A. Spray applied repair mortars shall be applied with manufacturer approved equipment. 1.14 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Acceptable Applicators: 1. Repair mortar applicators shall be trained to properly apply the cementitious mortar according to manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Protective coating must be applied by a Certified Applicator of the protective coating manufacturer and according to manufacturer specifications. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 90 00-PAGE 4 OF 10 BID SET OS37-036-01 MANHOLE AND WET WELL RESTORATION WITH PROTECTIVE COATING SEPTEMBER 2025 B. Examination 1. All structures to be coated shall be readily accessible to applicator. 2. Appropriate actions shall be taken to comply with local, state and federal regulatory and other applicable agencies with regard to environment, health and safety. 3. Any active flows shall be dammed, plugged or diverted as required to ensure that the liquid flow is maintained below the surfaces to be coated. 4. Installation of the protective coating shall not commence until the concrete substrate has properly cured and been prepared in accordance with these specifications. 5. Temperature of the surface to be coated should be maintained between 40 deg. F and 120 deg F. during application. Prior to and during application, care should be taken to avoid exposure of direct sunlight or other intense heat source to the structure being coated. Where varying surface temperatures do exist, care should be taken to apply the coating when the surface temperature is falling versus rising(i.e., late afternoon into evening as opposed to morning into afternoon). C. Surface Preparation 1. Applicator shall inspect all surfaces specified to receive a protective coating prior to surface preparation.Applicator shall notify owner of any noticeable disparity in the surfaces which may interfere with the proper preparation or application ofthe repair mortar and protective coating. 2. All contaminants including: oils,grease, unsound or incompatible existing coatings, waxes, form release,curing compounds, efflorescence,sealers, salts,or other contam- inants shall be removed. 3. All concrete that is not sound or has been damaged by chemical exposure shall be re- moved to a sound concrete surface or replaced. 4. Surface preparation method(s) should be based upon the conditions of the substrate and the requirements of the epoxy protective coating to be applied. 5. Surface to receive protective coating shall be cleaned and abraded to produce a sound concrete surface with adequate profile and porosity to provide a strong bond be- tween the protective coating and the substrate. Generally,this can be achieved with a low-pressure water cleaning using equipment capable of 5,000 psi at 5 gpm,using a zero-degree rotating nozzle. Other methods such as high-pressure water jetting (re- fer to NACE Standard No. 5/SSPC-SP12), abrasive blasting, shot blasting,grinding, scar- ifying or acid etching may also be used. Detergent water cleaning and hot water blast- ing may be necessary to remove oils, grease or other hydrocarbon residues from the concrete.Whichever method(s) are used,they shall be performed in a manner that provides a uniform, sound clean neutralized surface that is not excessively damaged. 6. Infiltration shall be stopped by using a material which is compatible with the specified repair mortar and is suitable for top coating with the specified epoxy protectivecoat- ing. 7. Test prepared surfaces after cleaning, but prior to application of the epoxy coating to determine if a specific pH or moisture content of the concrete is required according to manufacturer's recommendation. 8. All surfaces should be inspected during surface prep and before the repair mortar is applied. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 90 00-PAGE 5 OF 10 BID SET 0537-036-01 MANHOLE AND WET WELL RESTORATION WITH PROTECTIVE COATING SEPTEMBER 2025 D. Application of Repair Materials 1. Areas where structural steel has been exposed or removed shall be repaired in accord- ance with the Project Engineer's recommendations. 2. Repair materials shall meet the specifications contained herein.The materials shall be trowel or spray applied utilizing proper equipment on to specified surfaces.The mate- rial thickness shall be specified by the Project Engineer according to owner's require- ments and manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Cementitious repair materials shall be trowelled to provide a smooth surface with an average profile equivalent to coarse sandpaper to optimally receive the protective coating. No bugholes or honeycomb surfaces should remain after the final procedure of the repair mortar. 4. The repair materials shall be permitted to cure according to manufacturer recommen- dations. 5. Application of the repair materials, if not performed by the coating certified applica- tor, should be inspected by the protective coating manufacturer's representative or certified applicator to ensure proper finishing for suitability to receive the specified coating. 6. After abrasive blast and leak repairs have been performed, all surfaces shall be in- spected for remaining laitance prior to protective coating application. Any evidence of remaining contamination or laitance shall be removed by additional abrasive blast, shot blast or other approved method. If repair materials are used, refer to these speci- fications for surface preparation.Areas to be coated must also be prepared in accord- ance with these specifications after receiving a cementitious repair mortar and prior to application of the epoxycoating. 7. All surfaces should be inspected during and after preparation and before the protec- tive coating is applied. E. Application of Coating 1. The Engineer shall determine type of coating to be used according to the following: Condition 1: Manhole is considered structurally sound with no indications of settle- ment, cracking or other signs of structural fatigue. Infiltration or exfiltration through precast joints, mortar joints, or around the pipe connection exists. Specified coatings: Structural Rehab. Products SRP CA-12500, Calcium Aluminate Cementitious Product 1" thick or QUADEX, Inc.,Aluminaliner 1"thick or Raven 405 80 mils thick. 2. Condition 2: Manhole is exhibiting early signs of structural fatigue evidenced by minor cracks, loss of mortar or brick, corrosion (less than 0.5" in depth), minor cross- sectional distortion (less than 10 percent); however,the existing structure is currently supporting the soil and live load.Specified coatings: Raven 405, 100%solids, solvent- free, high build epoxy lining system, 125 mils thick. 3. Condition 3: Manhole is exhibiting severe structural fatigue and collapse is eminent. Conditions indicating this degree of deterioration would be distortion beyond 10%, severe corrosion (exposed reinforcing) or large sections (greater than 30 percent) of the structure are missing. Specified coating systems: Structural Rehab. Products, SRP 12000 Cementitious Product 1/2" thick or QUADEX, Inc., Hyperform 1/2" thick, or QUADEX, Inc., Aluminaliner 1/2" thick followed by 125 mils of Raven 405 100%solids, solvent free, high build epoxy lining system. A letter from the manufacturer will be PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 90 00-PAGE 6 OF 10 BID SET OS37-036-01 MANHOLE AND WET WELL RESTORATION WITH PROTECTIVE COATING SEPTEMBER 2025 submitted certifying the compatibility of the structural liner with the corrosion re- sistant protective coating. 4. Areas where structural steel has been exposed or removed shall be repaired in ac- cordance with Engineer's recommendations. 5. Is using approved cementitious materials as a base coat, such shall be trowelled to provide a smooth surface with an average profile equivalent to coarse sandpaper to optimally receive the coating. No bugholes or honeycomb surfaces should remain af- ter the final trowel procedure of the repair mortar. 6. After cleaning and leak repair is performed, all surfaces shall be inspected for remain- ing laitance prior to coating application. Any evidence of remaining contamination or laitance shall be removed. Areas to be coated must also be prepared in accordance with these specifications after receiving a cementitious repair mortar and prior to ap- plication of the epoxy coating. F. Application of Protective Coating 1. Application procedures shall conform to the recommendations of the protective coat- ing manufacturer, including material handling, mixing, environmental controls during application, safety, and spray equipment. 2. The spray equipment shall be specifically designed to accurately ratio and apply the specified protective coating materials and shall be regularly maintained and in proper working order. 3. The protective coating materials must be spray applied by a Certified Applicator of the protective coating manufacturer. 4. Specified surfaces shall be coated by spray application of a moisture tolerant, solvent- free, 100%solids, epoxy protective coating as further described herein. Spray applica- tion shall be to a minimum wet film thickness of 100 mils and an average wet film thicknesses of 125 mils. Concrete,New/Smooth: 60-100 mils for immersion,30-80 mils for atmospheric, splash and spill exposure. Concrete,Rough: 60-125+mils Masonry/Brick: 60-150+mils Steel: 25-80 mils for immersion, 16-40 mils for atmospheric, splash and spill exposure; also profile dependent. Fiberglass Systems: 40-60 mils tack coat,9 oz/yd2 fabric, 40-60 mils top coat.Varies with circumstances. (Thickness shown above are for general purposes only,each project should be evaluated independent- ly and thickness of system determined upon product,service environment,protection and restoration requirements.) 5. Airless spray application equipment approved by the coating manufacturer shall be used to apply each coat of the protective coating.Air assisted spray application equipment may be acceptable, especially for thinner coats (<10 mils), only if the air source is filtered to completely remove all oil and water. 6. If necessary, subsequent top coating or additional coats of the protective coating should occur as soon as the base coat becomes tack free, ideally within 12 hours, but no later than the recoat window for the specified product.Additional surface prepara- tion procedures will be required if this recoat window is exceeded. 7. (Optional) Fiberglass woven-roving fabric may be rolled into the resin or chopped PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 90 00-PAGE 7 OF 10 BID SET OS37-036-01 MANHOLE AND WET WELL RESTORATION WITH PROTECTIVE COATING SEPTEMBER 2025 glass spray applied with the resin for added tensile and flexural strength where de- sired, such as the crown of pipes. Sloped surfaces of the floor may be made non-skid by broadcasting aluminum oxide or silica sand into the surface prior to gelatin. G. Testing and Inspection 1. Thickness Testing: During application a wet film thickness gage, such as those availa- ble through Paul N. Gardner Company, Inc. (Gardco), meeting ASTM D4414-Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness of Organic Coatings by Notched Gag- es, shall be used to ensure a monolithic coating and uniform thickness during applica- tion. 2. Leakage Testing:A.The Contractor shall notify Inspector and Engineer 48 hours prior to beginning of wet well and manhole testing.The Contractor shall perform the test- ing for all sanitary sewer wet wells and manholes in accordance with the following: a. All wet wells and manholes must pass a leakage test.The Contractor shall test each wet well (after rehabilitation)for leakage, separate and independent of all other sanitary sewer piping, by means of a hydrostatic test. b. Hydrostatic testing shall be conducted by utilizing approved plugs to seal all in- fluent and effluent pipes in the wet well and filling the wet well to the top of the wall with water. Additional water may be added over a 24-hour period to com- pensate for absorption and evaporation losses. C. At the conclusion of the 24-hour saturation period, the wet well shall be filled to the top and observed. Any measurable loss within a 30 minute period shall be considered an unsuccessful test and thus require the Contractor to assess the needed repairs, perform such repairs (subject to the approval of the Engineer), and notify the Inspector when the retest will be performed. d. All effort, materials, or other costs shall be solely at the Contractor's expense. 3. Holiday Testing:After the protective coating has set hard to the touch it shall be in- spected with high-voltage holiday detection equipment. Surfaces shall first be dried, an induced holiday shall then be made on to the coated concrete surface and shall serve to determine the minimum/maximum voltage to be used to test the coating for holidays at that particular area.The spark tester shall be initially set at 100 volts per 1 mil (25 microns) of film thickness applied, but may be adjusted as necessary to detect the induced holiday (refer to NACE RPO 188-99). All detected holidays shall be marked and repaired by abrading the coating surface with grit disk paper or other hand tool- ing method. After abrading and cleaning, additional protective coating material can be hand applied to the repair area.All touch-up/repair procedures shall follow the pro- tective coating manufacturer's recommendation. 4. Bond Strength: Measurement of bond strength of the protective coating to the sub- strate can be made at regular intervals and along different sections of the structure (i.e., crown of pipe,wall, invert-every 200 ft.). Bond strength can be measured in ac- cordance with ASTM D4541. Any areas detected to have inadequate bond strength shall be evaluated by the Project Engineer. Further bond tests may be performed in that area to determine the extent of potentially deficient bonded area and repairs shall be made by applicator in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommenda- tions. 5. Vacuum Testing: Manholes lined in their entirety may be vacuum tested. All pipes en- PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 90 00-PAGE 8 OF 10 BID SET OS37-036-01 MANHOLE AND WET WELL RESTORATION WITH PROTECTIVE COATING SEPTEMBER 2025 tering the manhole should be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from be- ing drawn into the manhole.The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in ac- cordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.A vacuum pump of ten inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed,the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine inches. Following are minimum allowable test times for manhole acceptance at the specified vacuum drop: DEPTH(FEET) TIME(SECONDS) (Manhole Depth) 48"diameter 60"diameter 72" diameter 4 10 13 16 8 20 26 32 12 30 39 48 16 40 52 64 20 50 65 80 24 60 78 96 Add for 2 ft.more depth: 5 6.5 8 Note:These numbers have been taken from ASTM C 924-85. a. If the manhole fails the initial test, repairs and adjustments necessary due to ex- tenuating circumstances (i.e., pipe joint, liner, plug sealing) should be made. Re- testing shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. 6. Visual Inspection: A final visual inspection shall be made by the inspector and manu- facturer's representative. Any deficiencies in the finished coating shall be marked and repaired according to the procedures set forth herein by applicator. 7. The municipal sewer system may be put back into non-severe operational service as soon as the final inspection has taken place. However,for sever corrosion duty such as high concentrations of acids, bases or solvent, 3 to 7 days and/or force cure by heat induction to the coated surfaces may be necessary prior to returning to service. Con- sult coating manufacturer for further details. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 90 00-PAGE 9 OF 10 BID SET OS37-036-01 MANHOLE AND WET WELL RESTORATION WITH PROTECTIVE COATING SEPTEMBER 202S PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 90 00-PAGE 10 OF 10 BID SET OS37-036-01 MANHOLE AND WET WELL RESTORATION WITH PROTECTIVE COATING SEPTEMBER 202S SECTION 03 60 00 GROUTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install grout and perform grouting Work. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before grouting Work. 2. Notify other contractors in advance of grouting to provide other contractors with sufficient time for installing items included in their contracts to be installed with or before grouting Work. C. Application and Grout Material: 1. The following is a listing of grouting applications and the corresponding type of grout material to be provided for the associated application. Unless shown or indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, provide grout in accordance with the following: Table 03 60 00-A-GROUT APPLICATIONS AND MATERIAL TYPES Application Required Grout Material Type Beam and column (one-or two-story height) Class II Non-Shrink base plates and precast concrete bearing less than 16 inches in the least dimension Column base plates and precast concrete Class I Non-Shrink bearing(greater than two-story height or larger than 16 inches in the least dimension) Base plates for storage tanks and other non- Class I Non-Shrink (unless otherwise motorized equipment, and motorized recommended by equipment manufacturer) equipment or machinery less than 50 horsepower Motorized equipment or machinery equal to Class III Non-Shrink Epoxy(unless otherwise and greater than 50 horsepower, and recommended by equipment manufacturer) motorized equipment or machinery equipment less than 50 horsepower subject to severe shock loads or high vibration Filling blockout spaces for embedded items Class II Non-Shrink(Class I where placement such as railing posts,guide frames for time exceeds 15 minutes) hydraulic gates, and similar applications Grout fill or grout toppings less than four Grout Fill inches thick Grout fill greater than four inches thick Class "B" Concrete Grout for setting filter underdrain blocks, and 1 Filter Underdrain Blocks Grout for filling voids between filter underdrain PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 03 60 00-PAGE 1 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 GROUTING SEPTEMBER 2025 Application Required Grout Material Type blocks, and for filling voids between filter underdrain blocks and walls Applications not listed above, where grout is Class I Non-Shrink, unless shown or indicated indicated on the Drawings otherwise 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ACI 211.1, Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete. 2. ACI 301, Structural Concrete for Buildings. 3. ASTM C33/C33M, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 4. ASTM C109/C109M,Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens). 5. ASTM C230/C230M, Specification for Flow Table for Use in Tests of Hydraulic Cement. 6. ASTM C531,Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 7. ASTM C579,Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 8. ASTM C827,Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures. 9. ASTM C882/C882M,Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used With Concrete By Slant Shear. 10. ASTM C939,Text Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method). 11. ASTM C1107/C1107M, Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 12. ASTM C1181,Test Methods for Compressive Creep of Chemical-Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts. 13. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Shall have a minimum of five years experience of producing products substantially similar to that required and shall be able to submit documentation of at least five satisfactory installations that have been in successful operation for at least five years each. 2. Manufacturer's Field Service Technician: When required, provide services of manufacturer's full-time employee,factory-trained in handling, use, and installing the products required, with at least five years of experience in field applications of the products required. B. Trial Batch: 1. Each grout fill and construction joint grout mix proportion and design shall be verified PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 03 60 00-PAGE 2 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 GROUTING SEPTEMBER 2025 by laboratory trial batch or field experience methods. Comply with ACI 211.1 and submit to ENGINEER a report with the following data: a. Complete identification of aggregate source of supply. b. Tests of aggregates for compliance with specified requirements. C. Scale weight of each aggregate. d. Absorbed water in each aggregate. e. Brand,type, and composition of cement. f. Brand,type, and amount of each admixture. g. Amounts of water used in trial mixes. h. Proportions of each material per cubic yard. i. Unit weight and yield per cubic yard of trial mixtures. j. Measured slump. k. Measured air content. I. Compressive strength developed at seven days and 28 days,from not less than three test specimens cast for each seven-day and 28-day test, and for each design mix. 2. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select grout proportions, prepare test specimens and conduct strength tests as specified in ACI 301. 3. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select grout proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule of Project-specific grout applications, installation locations, and the grout type proposed for each. b. List of grout materials and proportions for the proposed mix designs. Include data sheets, test results, certifications, and mill reports to qualify the materials proposed for use in the mix designs. Do not start laboratory trial batch testing until submittal is approved by ENGINEER. C. Trial Batch Reports: Submit laboratory test reports for grout materials and mix design tests. 2. Product Data: a. Data sheets, certifications, and manufacturer's specifications for all materials proposed for use. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: a. Special instructions for shipping, storing, protecting, and handling. b. Installation instructions for the materials. 2. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Report field testing results for each required time period. (e.g., seven-day tests, PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 03 60 00-PAGE 3 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 GROUTING SEPTEMBER 2025 28-day tests). Submit within 24 hours after completion of associated test. Each test report shall include results of all testing required at time of sampling. 3. Supplier Reports: a. Submit written report of results of each visit to Site by Supplier's field service technician, including purpose and time of visit,tasks performed, and results obtained. Submit within two days of completion of visit to the Site. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Testing laboratory, when not submitted under other Sections. b. Manufacturer,when submittal of qualifications is required by ENGINEER. C. Manufacturer's field service technician, when submittal of qualifications is required by ENGINEER. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage of Materials: Store grout materials in a dry location, protected from weather and protected from moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All grout materials, admixtures, cementitious materials, and other materials used in grout that contact potable water or water that will be treated to become potable shall be listed in NSF/ANSI 61. 2.2 NON-SHRINK GROUT MATERIALS A. General: Non-shrink grout shall be a prepackaged, inorganic,flowable, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic, cement-based grout requiring only the addition of water. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each bag or container in which the materials are packaged. Specific formulation for each type or class of non-shrink grout specified in this Section shall be that recommended by the grout manufacturer for the particular application. B. Class I Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Class I non-shrink grouts shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7,000 psi. Use grout for precision grouting and where water-tightness and non-shrink reliability in both plastic and hardened states is critical, in accordance with Table 03 60 00-A in this Section. 2. Products and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. MasterFlow 928, by Master Builders, Inc. b. Five Star Grout, by Five Star Products, Inc. C. Hi-Flow Grout, by Euclid Chemical Company. d. Or equal. 3. Comply with ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade C and B (as modified below) when tested using amount of water required to achieve the following properties: a. Fluid consistency(20 to 30 seconds) shall be in accordance with ASTM C939. b. At temperatures of 45, 73.4, and 95 degrees F. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 03 60 00-PAGE 4 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 GROUTING SEPTEMBER 2025 4. Length change from placing to time of final set shall not have shrinkage greater than the expansion measured at three or fourteen days. Expansion at three or fourteen days shall not exceed the 28-day expansion. 5. Non-shrink property shall not be based on chemically-generated gas or gypsum expansion. 6. Fluid grout shall pass through the flow cone, with continuous flow, one hour after mixing. C. Class II Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Class II non-shrink grouts shall have minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7,000 psi. Use grout for general-purpose grouting applications. 2. Products and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. MasterFlow 100, by Master Builders, Inc. b. FSP Construction Grout, by Five Star Products, Inc. C. NS Grout, by Euclid Chemical Company. d. Or equal. 3. Comply with ASTM C1107/C1107M and the following when tested using the quantity of water required to achieve the following properties: a. Flowable consistency (140 percent flow in accordance with ASTM C230/C230M, five drops in 30 seconds). b. Fluid working time of at least 15 minutes. C. Flowable for at least 30 minutes. 4. When tested, grout shall not bleed at maximum allowed water. 5. Non-shrink property shall not be based on chemically-generated gas or gypsum expansion. D. Class III Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: 1. Epoxy grout shall be a pourable, non-shrink, 100-percent solids system. 2. Products and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. E3G, by Euclid Chemical Company. b. Sikadur 42 Grout Pak LE, by Sika Corporation. C. HP Epoxy Grout, by Five Star Products, Inc. d. Or equal. 3. Epoxy grout system shall have three components: resin, hardener, and specially blended aggregate, all pre-measured and prepackaged. Resin component shall not contain non-reactive diluents. Resins containing butyl glycidyl ether(BGE) or other highly volatile and hazardous reactive diluents are unacceptable. Variation of component ratios is not allowed without specific recommendation by manufacturer. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each container in which products are packaged. 4. The following properties shall be attained with the minimum quantity of aggregate allowed by epoxy grout manufacturer. a. Vertical volume change at all times before hardening shall be between zero percent shrinkage and 4.0 percent expansion when measured in accordance PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 03 60 00-PAGE 5 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 GROUTING SEPTEMBER 2025 with ASTM C827 (modified for epoxy grouts by using an indicator ball with specific gravity between 0.9 and 1.1). b. Length change after hardening shall be less than 0.0006-inch per inch and coefficient of thermal expansion shall be less than 0.00003-inch per inch per degree F when tested in accordance with ASTM C531. C. Compressive creep at one year shall be less than 0.001-inch per inch when tested under a 400-psi constant load at 140 degrees F in accordance with ASTM C1181. d. Minimum seven-day compressive strength shall be 14,000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C579 e. Grout shall be capable of maintaining at least a flowable consistency for minimum of 30 minutes at 70 degrees F. f. Shear bond strength to portland cement concrete shall be greater than shear strength of concrete when tested in accordance with ASTM C882/C882M. g. Minimum effective bearing area shall be 95 percent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine substrate and conditions under which grouting will be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Place grout as shown and indicated, and in accordance with Laws and Regulations and grout manufacturer's instructions. If manufacturer's instructions conflict with the Contract Documents, obtain clarification or interpretation from ENGINEER before proceeding. 2. Consistency of non-shrink grouts shall be as required to completely fill the space to be grouted for the particular application. Do not install grout for dry-packing without approval of ENGINEER. When dry-packing is approved by ENGINEER, dry-pack consistency shall be such that grout has sufficient water to ensure hydration and grout strength development, and remains plastic, moldable, and that does not flow. 3. Grouting shall comply with temperature and weather limitations. 4. Cure grout in accordance with grout manufacturer's instructions for prepackaged grout. B. Columns and Beams: 1. After shimming columns and beams to proper elevation, securely tighten anchors. Properly form around base plates allowing sufficient room around edges for placing grout. Provide adequate depth between bottom of base plate and top of concrete base to assure that void is completely filled with non-shrink grout. C. Equipment Bases: 1. Install equipment in accordance to manufacturer's recommendations, Laws, and PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 03 60 00-PAGE 6 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 GROUTING SEPTEMBER 2025 Regulations, and the Contract Documents. After shimming equipment to proper elevation, securely tighten anchors. Properly form around base plates, allowing sufficient room around edges for placing grout. Provide adequate depth between bottom of equipment base and top of concrete base to ensure that voids are completely filled with non-shrink grout. D. Handrail Posts: 1. After posts have been properly inserted into holes or sleeves,fill annular space between posts and sleeve with non-shrink grout. Bevel grout at juncture with post so that water will flow away from post. E. Construction Joints: 1. Place a six-inch minimum thick layer of construction joint grout over contact surface of concrete at interface of horizontal construction joints. F. Grout Fill: 1. All mechanical, electrical, and finish work shall be completed prior to placing grout fill. Base slab shall be provided with a scratched finish. Roughen existing slabs shall by abrasive blasting or hydroblasting exposing aggregates to ensure bonding to base slab. 2. Minimum thickness of grout fill shall be one-inch. Where finished surface of grout fill is to form an intersecting angle of less than 45 degrees with concrete surface against which grout will be placed, form a key in the concrete surface at the intersection point. Key shall be minimum of 3.5 inches wide by 1.5 inches deep. 3. Thoroughly clean and wet base slab prior to placing grout fill. Do not place grout fill until slab is completely free of standing water. A thin coat of neat Type II cement slurry shall be broomed into surface of slab. Place grout fill while slurry is wet. Grout fill shall be compacted by rolling or tamping, brought to elevation, and floated. In tanks and basins where scraping-type equipment will be installed, grout fill shall be screeded by blades attached to revolving mechanism of equipment in accordance with procedures recommended by equipment manufacturer after grout is brought to elevation. 4. Grout fill placed on sloping slabs shall be installed uniformly from bottom of slab to top, for full width of placement. 5. Test grout fill surface with a straight edge to detect high and low spots; immediately correct high and low spots in grout fill. When grout fill has hardened sufficiently, grout fill shall be steel troweled to provide a smooth surface free of bug holes and other imperfections. While an acceptable type of mechanical trowel may be used in this operation,the last pass over the grout fill surface shall be by hand-troweling. During finishing, do not apply the following to the grout fill surface: water, dry cement, or mixture of dry cement and sand. 6. Cure and protect grout fill. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Testing Services: 1. OWNER will employ testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing for grout. ENGINEER will direct the testing requirements. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 03 60 00-PAGE 7 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 GROUTING SEPTEMBER 2025 B. Quality Control Testing During Construction: 1. Grout Fill: Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during grout fill placing as follows: a. Sampling Fresh Grout Fill:ASTM C172. b. Slump: ASTM C143; one test for each load of grout at point of discharge. C. Air Content:ASTM C231; one sample for every two grout loads at point of discharge, and when a change in the grout is observed. d. Compression Test Specimens: 1) In accordance with ASTM C109/C109M; make one set of compression cubes for each 50 cubic yards of grout, or fraction thereof, of each mix design placed each day. Each set shall be four standard cubes, unless otherwise directed by ENGINEER. 2. Non-shrink Grout: Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during non- shrink grout placing as follows: a. Perform compression testing of non-shrink grout in accordance to ASTM C109/C109M at intervals during construction as selected by ENGINEER. Make a set of four specimens for testing compressive strength at a period of time selected by the ENGINEER. b. Perform compression tests on epoxy grout and fabricate specimens for epoxy grout testing in accordance with ASTM C579, Method B, at intervals during construction as selected by the ENGINEER. Make a set of four specimens for testing compressive strength at a period of time selected by ENGINEER. C. Evaluation of Field Quality Control Tests: 1. Do not use grout, delivered to final point of placement, having slump or total air content that does not comply with the Contract Documents. 2. Compressive strength tests for laboratory-cured cubes will be acceptable if averages of all sets of three consecutive compressive strength test results equal or exceed the required 28-day design compressive strength of the associated type of grout. 3. If the compressive strength tests do not comply with the requirements in the Contract Documents,the grout represented by such tests will be considered defective and shall be removed and replaced, or subject to other action required by ENGINEER, at CONTRACTOR'S expense. D. Manufacturer's Services: 1. Manufacturers of proprietary materials shall make available upon 72 hours notification the services of qualified, full time employee, experienced in serving as a field service technician for the products required,to aid in assuring proper use of products under the actual conditions at the Site. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 03 60 00-PAGE 8 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 GROUTING SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 05 05 33 ANCHOR SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials,equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install anchor systems. 2. This Section includes all anchor systems required for the Work, but not specified under other Sections. I Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before anchor systems Work. 2. Notify other contractors in advance of installing anchor systems to provide other contractors with sufficient time for installing items included in their contracts to be installed with or before anchor systems Work. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: L ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures. 3. ACI 355.2, Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete. 4. ASTM A194/A194M, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. 5. ASTM A276, Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 6. ASTM A493, Specification for Stainless Steel Wire and Wire Rods for Cold Heading and Cold Forging. 7. ASTM A563, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. S. ASTM A1011/A1011M, Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. 9, ASTM B633, Specification for Electrode posited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 10. ASTM C307,Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. 11. ASTM C579,Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 12. ASTM C881/C881M, Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 13. ASTM D695,Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. 14, ASTM D790,Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 15. ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 1 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 16. ASTM E488,Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements. 17. ASTM F593, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 1 , ASTM F594, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 19. ASTM F1554, Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55 and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 20 FS A-A-1922A, Shield, Expansion (Caulking Anchors, Single Lead). 21. FS A-A-1923A, Concrete Expansion Anchors. 22. FS A-A-1925A, Shield, Expansion (Nail Anchors). 2 , FS A-A-55614, Shield, Expansion (non-drilling expansion anchors). 24. ICC-ES AC01, Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements. 25. ICC-ES AC58, Acceptance Criteria for Adhesive Anchors in Masonry Elements. 26. ICC-ES AC193,Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements. 27. ICC-ES AC308,Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements. 2 . ISO 3506-1, Mechanical Properties of Corrosion-Resistant Stainless Steel Fasteners-- Part 1: Bolts, Screws and Studs. 29. ANSI/MSS SP-58, Pipe Hangers and Supports—Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation. 30. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components—Health Effects. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Testing Laboratory: Shall comply with ASTM E329 and shall be experienced in tension testing of post-installed anchoring systems. 2. Post-installed Anchor Installer: Shall be experienced and trained by post-installed anchor system manufacturer in proper installation of manufacturer's products. Product installation training by distributors or manufacturer's representatives is unacceptable unless the person furnishing the training is qualified as a trainer by the anchor manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A� Action Submittals: Submit the following: L Shop Drawings: a. Listing of all anchor systems products intended for use in the Work including product type, intended location in the Project, and embedded lengths. 2, Product Data: a. Manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, acceptable base material conditions, acceptable drilling methods, and acceptable bored hole conditions. b, When required by ENGINEER, copies of valid ICC ES reports that presents load- carrying capacities and installation requirements for anchor systems. 1 Samples: a, Representative Samples of anchor systems proposed for use in the Work. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 2 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 Review will be for type and finish only. Compliance with all other requirements is CONTRACTOR'S exclusive responsibility. I Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. For each type of anchor bolt or threaded rod, submit copies of laboratory test reports and other data required to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1) Reports shall demonstrate compliance with ductile steel element definition of ACI 350, Appendix D, Section D.1. b. Post-installed anchor system manufacturer's certification that installer received training in the proper installation of manufacturer's products required for the Work. 2, Manufacturer's Instructions: a. Installation instructions for each anchor system product proposed for use, including bore hole cleaning procedures and adhesive injection,cure and gel time tables, and temperature ranges (storage, installation and in-service). 1 Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit results of field quality control testing and inspections performed by testing laboratory. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: 1, Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. 2. Store adhesive materials within manufacturer's recommended storage temperature range. 3. Protect anchor systems from damage at the Site. Protect products from corrosion and deterioration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. General: 1. At locations where conditions dictate that Work specified in other Sections is to be of corrosion resistant materials, provide associated anchor systems of stainless steel materials, unless other corrosion-resistant anchor system material is specified. Provide anchor systems of stainless steel materials where stainless steel materials are required in the Contract Documents. 2. Stainless Steel Nuts: a, For anchor bolts and adhesive anchors, provide ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts for stainless steel anchors used for anchoring equipment,gates, and weirs, and other locations, if any, where the attachment will require future removal for operation or maintenance. Provide lock washer or double nuts on each anchorage device provided for equipment, as required by equipment manufacturer. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 3 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 b, For other locations, provide for each anchorage device a nut as specified or as required by anchor manufacturer. When ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) nuts are not required for anchor bolts and adhesive anchors as specified in this Section, provide anti-seizing compound where stainless steel rods are used with stainless steel nuts of the same type. 3. Materials that can contact potable water or water that will be treated to become potable shall be listed in NSF/ANSI 61. I Design Criteria 1. Size, Length, and Load-carrying Capacity: Comply with the Contract Documents. When size, length or load-carrying capacity of anchor system is not otherwise shown or indicated, provide the following: a, Anchor Bolts: Provide size, length, and capacity required to carry design load based on values and requirements of Paragraph 3.2A of this Section. For conditions outside limits of critical edge distance and spacing in Paragraph 3.2A of this Section, minimum anchor bolt embedment as shown or indicated in Paragraph 3.2A of this Section apply and capacity shall be based on requirements of Laws and Regulations, including applicable building codes. b, Adhesive Anchors, Expansion Anchors, or Concrete Inserts: Provide size, length, type, and capacity required to carry design load. Anchor capacity shall be based on the procedures required by the building code in effect at the Site. Where Evaluation Service Reports issued by the ICC Evaluation Service are required in this Section, anchor capacities shall be based on design procedure required in the applicable ICC Evaluation Service Report. 1) General: Determine capacity considering reductions due to installation and inspection procedures, embedment length, strength of base fastening materials, spacing, and edge distance, as indicated in the manufacturer's design guidelines. For capacity determination, concrete shall be assumed to be in the cracked condition, unless calculations demonstrate that the anchor system will be installed in an area that is not expected to crack under any and all conditions of design loading. 2) Concrete Adhesive Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or approved by ENGINEER, provide minimum embedment depth of the greater of the following: required to develop tensile strength of anchor, or a minimum embedment of 10 anchor diameters; and minimum anchor spacing and edge distance of 12 anchor diameters. 3) Concrete Masonry Adhesive Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or approved by ENGINEER, provide minimum anchor spacing and edge distance as indicated in anchor manufacturer's instructions. 4) Concrete Expansion Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or approved by ENGINEER, provide minimum embedment depth of six anchor diameters, and minimum anchor spacing and edge distance of seven anchor diameters. S) Concrete Masonry Expansion Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. OS OS 33-PAGE 4 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 OS37-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 indicated in the Contract Documents or approved by ENGINEER, provide minimum anchor spacing and edge distance as indicated in anchor manufacturer's instructions. Concrete Undercut Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or approved by ENGINEER, provide minimum anchor spacing and edge distance as tabulated in anchor manufacturer's instructions. 2. Design Loads. Comply with the Contract Documents. When design load of supported material, equipment, or system is not otherwise shown or indicated, provide the following: a, Equipment Anchors: Use design load recommended by equipment manufacturer. When equipment can be filled with fluid, use loads that incorporate equipment load and load imposed by fluid. b. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Use full weight of pipe, and fluid contained in pipe that are tributary to the support plus the full weight of valves and accessories located between the hanger or support being anchored and the next hanger or support. C. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems, and HVAC, Plumbing, and Fire Suppression Systems and Piping: Use the full weight of supported system that is tributary to the support plus the full weight of accessories located between the hanger or support being anchored and the next hanger or support. When piping or equipment is to be filled with fluid, anchor systems shall be sized to support such loads in addition to the weight of the equipment, piping, or system, as applicable. d, Delegated Design: When anchor systems are used for supporting materials, equipment, or systems delegated to a design professional retained by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, or Supplier, provide anchor system suitable for loads indicated in delegated design documents and consistent with the design intent expressed in the Contract Documents. C. Application: 1. Anchor Bolts: a. Where anchor bolt is shown or indicated, use cast-in-place anchor bolt unless another anchor type is approved by ENGINEER. b, Provide anchor bolts as shown or indicated,or as required to secure structural element to appropriate anchor surface. 2. Concrete Adhesive Anchors: a. Use where adhesive anchors are shown or indicated for installation in concrete. b, Suitable for use where subject to vibration. C. Suitable for use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. d. Suitable for use in submerged, intermittently submerged, or buried locations. e. Do not use in overhead applications, unless otherwise shown or approved by ENGINEER. f. Do not use for pipe hangers, unless otherwise shown or approved by ENGINEER. . Grout-filled Concrete Masonry Adhesive Anchors: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 5 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 a, Use where adhesive anchors are shown or indicated for installation in grout- filled concrete masonry units. b. Suitable for use where subject to vibration. C, Suitable for use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. d. Do not use for pipe hangers, unless otherwise shown or approved by ENGINEER. 4. Hollow Concrete Masonry Adhesive Anchors: a, Use where adhesive anchors are shown or indicated for installation in hollow concrete unit masonry. b. Suitable for use where subject to vibration. C, Suitable for use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. d. Do not use for pipe hangers, unless otherwise shown or approved by ENGINEER. 5. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: a. Use where expansion anchors are shown or indicated for installation in concrete. b. Do not use where subject to vibration. C. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. d. Do not use in submerged, intermittently submerged,or buried locations. e. Suitable for use in overhead applications. * Grout-filled Concrete Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: a, Use where expansion anchors are shown or indicated for installation on the interior face of grout-filled unit masonry. b. Do not use where subject to vibration. C, Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. * Hollow Concrete Masonry Sleeve Expansion Anchors: a. Use where expansion anchors are shown or indicated for installation in hollow concrete unit masonry or solid brick. b, Do not use for attaching safety-related systems, such as piping conveying hazardous or potentially hazardous materials, or fire suppression systems. C. Do not use where subject to vibration. d. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. S. Drop-in Expansion Anchors: a. Use drop-in expansion anchors installed in concrete where light-duty anchors are required to support piping or conduit two-inch diameter or smaller. b. Do not use for attaching safety-related systems, such as piping conveying hazardous or potentially hazardous materials, or fire suppression systems. C. Do not use where subject to vibration. d. Do not use at submerged, intermittently submerged,or buried locations. e. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. f. Suitable for use in overhead applications. . Concrete Undercut Anchors: a, Use where undercut anchors are shown or indicated for installation in concrete. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 6 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 b. Suitable for use where subject to vibration. C. Do not use in submerged, intermittently submerged,or buried locations. d. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. e. Suitable for use in overhead applications. 10. Concrete Inserts: a, Use only where shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. b. Allowed for use to support pipe hangers and pipe supports for pipe size and loading recommended by the concrete insert manufacturer. 11, Drive-In Expansion Anchors: a. Use drive-in expansion anchors installed in concrete, precast concrete,grouted masonry units, or brick,where light-duty anchors are required to support piping or conduit one-inch diameter and smaller. b, Do not use for attaching safety-related systems, such as piping conveying hazardous or potentially hazardous materials, or fire suppression systems. C, Do not use in overhead applications. 12. For Use in Precast Concrete Planks: a, To support piping or conduit six-inch diameter and smaller, use low-profile drop-in anchors, hollow concrete masonry adhesive anchors, or through-bolts. b. For piping greater than six-inch diameter, or to support safety-related systems, use through-bolts. Each through-bolt shall consist of threaded rod, nuts, washers, and bearing plate. 2.2 MATERIALS A� Anchor Bolts: 1. Interior Dry Non-Corrosive Locations: Provide straight threaded carbon steel rods complying with ASTM F1554, Grade (--1--), with heavy hex nuts complying with ASTM A563 Grade (--2--), unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. Hooked anchor bolts are unacceptable. 2. Exterior, Buried, Submerged Locations, or When Exposed to Wastewater: Provide stainless steel straight threaded rods complying with ASTM F593, AISI Type 316, Condition A,with ASTM F594, AISI Type 316, stainless steel nuts. Provide ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts where required. Other AISI types may be used when approved by ENGINEER. Hooked bolts are unacceptable. a. Stainless steel straight threaded rod shall comply with ductility requirements of ACI 350 or ACI 318 Appendix D,Section D.3.3. 1 Equipment: Provide anchor bolts complying with material requirements of this Section and equipment manufacturer's requirements relative to size, embedment length, and anchor bolt projection. Anchor bolts shall be straight threaded rods with washers and nuts as specified in this Section. Hooked bolts are unacceptable. 4. Anchoring of Structural Elements: Provide anchor bolts of size, material, and strength shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. &. Concrete Adhesive Anchors: 1, General: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 7 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 a, Adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods anchored into hardened concrete using an adhesive system. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: HIT-RE 500 V3 with Safe Set Technology Injection Epoxy Adhesive Anchoring System, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b, SET-3G Adhesive, by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. C. No substitutes will be considered. 3. Adhesive: a. Adhesive system shall use two-component adhesive mix. b, Epoxy adhesives shall comply with physical requirements of ASTM C881/C881M, Type IV, Grade 2 and 3, Class A, B, and C, except gel times. C. Adhesives shall have a current evaluation report by ICC Evaluation Service for use in both cracked and uncracked concrete with seismic recognition for SDC A through F as tested and assessed in accordance with ICC-ES AC308. d, Adhesives shall have minimum bond strength and minimum design bond strength (bond strength multiplied by strength reduction factor) in accordance with Table 05 05 33-A: TABLE 05 05 33-A:-ADHESIVE BOND STRENGTH 1,2 Anchor Uncracked Concrete Cracked Concrete Rod Diameter/ Bond Strength Design Bond Bond Strength Design Bond Dowel Size (psi) Strength (psi) (psi) Strength (psi) 3/8-inch/#3 2040 1300 1090 700 1/2-inch/#4 1920 1200 920 560 5/8-inch/#5 1830 1150 710 390 3/4-inch/#6 1760 1050 710 460 7/8inch/#7 1670 900 610 340 1-inch/#8 1650 1050 850 460 -/#9 1900 1000 800 400 1.25-inch/#10 1580 1000 730 400 Table Notes: 1. Bond strengths listed for hammer-drilled, dry hole. 2. Bond strengths listed for maximum short term concrete temperature of 110 degrees F and maximum long term concrete temperature of 75 degrees F. 4o Anchor: a, Provide continuously-threaded,AISI Type 316 stainless steel adhesive anchor rod. Threaded rods shall comply with the concrete adhesive anchor manufacturer's specifications as included in the ICC Service Evaluation Report for the anchor submitted. Nuts shall have specified proof load stresses equal to or greater than the minimum tensile strength of the stainless steel threaded rod used. Provide ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts where required. b, Stainless steel threaded rod shall comply with ductility requirements of ACI 350 PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 8 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 or ACI 318 Appendix D, Section D.3.3. Grout-filled Concrete Masonry Adhesive Anchors: L General: a, Adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods anchored into grout-filled concrete block masonry using an adhesive system. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. HIT-HY 270 with Safe Set Tech nologyAd hesive Anchoring System, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b, AT-XP, by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. C. No substitutes will be considered. 3. Adhesive: a. Adhesive system shall use two-component adhesive mix. b, Acrylate hybrid adhesives shall comply with the following: 1) ASTM C579 compressive strength greater than 7,252 psi, or ASTM D695 compressive yield strength greater than or equal to 10,210 psi. 2) ASTM C307 modulus of elasticity greater than 507,000 psi or ASTM D695 compressive modulus of elasticity greater than 660,800 psi. C, Adhesives shall have current ICC Evaluation Service Report for use in grout-filled concrete masonry, tested and assessed in accordance with ICC-ES 58. 4. Anchor: a, Provide stainless steel adhesive anchor rod complying with ASTM F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW,with ASTM F594,AISI Type 316 stainless steel nuts. Provide ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts where required. D� Hollow Concrete Masonry Adhesive Anchors: 1. General: a. Adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods with a cylindrical mesh steel or plastic screen tube anchored into hollow concrete block masonry using an adhesive system. . Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. HIT-HY 270 with Safe Set Tech nologyAnchoring System, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b, SET-XP Anchoring Adhesive, by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. C. No substitutes will be considered. 1 Adhesive: a, Adhesive system shall use two-component adhesive mix. b. Hybrid adhesives shall comply with the following: 1) ASTM D695 compressive strength, greater than 7,410 psi. 2) ASTM D790 modulus of elasticity: 0.33 x 10e6 psi or ASTM D695 compressive modulus of elasticity greater than 0.668 x10e6 psi. C. Adhesives shall have a current ICC Evaluation Service Report for use in hollow PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 9 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 concrete masonry as tested and assessed in accordance with ICC-ES AC58. 4. Anchor: a, Provide stainless steel adhesive anchor rod complying with ASTM F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW,with ASTM F594,AISI Type 316, stainless steel nuts. Provide ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts where required. 5. Mesh Screen Tube: a. Provide with mesh size, length, and diameter as specified by adhesive anchor manufacturer. b, Mesh shall be AISI 304 stainless steel. E. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: 1. General: a, Concrete wedge expansion anchors shall consist of stud, wedge, nut, and washer. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Kwik Bolt TZ Wedge Anchor, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b, Or equal. 1 Anchors shall comply with physical requirements of FS A-A-1923A,Type 4. Provide concrete wedge expansion anchors suitable for use in cracked and uncracked concrete in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350,Appendix D. Demonstrate suitability of cracked concrete wedge anchors in accordance with ACI 355.2 prequalification tests. 4, Interior Dry Non-corrosive Locations: Provide carbon steel anchors complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM B633. 5. Other Locations: Provide expansion anchors complete with nuts and washers, AISI Type 304 stainless steel anchor body, in accordance with ASTM A276 or ASTM A493. Anchor shall comply with ductility requirements of ACI 350 or ACI 318 Appendix D, Section D.3.3. 7. Concrete wedge expansion anchors shall have a current ICC Evaluation Service Report for use in both cracked and uncracked concrete with seismic recognition in seismic design Categories A through F when tested and assessed in accordance with ICC-ES AC193. F, Grout-filled Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: L General: a, Grout-filled masonry wedge expansion anchors shall each consist of stud, wedge, nut, and washer. 2. Product and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Kwik-Bolt 3 Expansion Anchors, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b, Wedge-All Wedge Anchors, by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. C. Or equal. 3... Anchors shall comply with physical requirements of FS A-A-1923A,Type 4. Anchors shall be non-bottom bearing type with single-piece steel expansion clip providing 360- degree contact with base material and shall not require oversized holes for PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 10 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 installation. 4. Interior Dry Non-corrosive Locations: Provide carbon steel anchors complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM B633. 5. Other Locations: Provide AISI Type 316 stainless steel anchor, complete with nut and washer, in accordance with ASTM A276 or ASTM A493. 6, Grout-filled masonry wedge expansion anchors shall have a current ICC Evaluation Service report for use in fully-grouted concrete masonry construction when tested and assessed in accordance with ICC-ES AC01. G, Hollow Concrete Masonry Sleeve Expansion Anchors: 1. General: a, Sleeve expansion anchors shall each consist of an externally threaded stud with full length expanding sleeve. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a, HLC Sleeve Anchors, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Dynabolt Sleeve Anchors, by ITW Red Head. C. Or equal. 3. Anchors shall comply with physical requirements of FS A-A-1922A. Anchors shall be non-bottom bearing type with single-piece steel expansion sleeve providing 360- degree contact with base material, and shall not require oversized holes for installation. 4. Interior Dry Non-corrosive Locations: Provide carbon steel anchors complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM 13633. 5. Other Locations: Provide expansion anchors complete with nuts and washers,Type 304 stainless steel, in accordance with ASTM A276 or ASTM A493. H. Drop-in Expansion Anchors: 1. General: a. Drop-in expansion anchors shall each consist of an internally threaded, deformation-controlled expansion anchor with pre-assembled expander plug. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. HDI Drop-In Anchors, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b, Drop-In Anchor, by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. C. Or equal. 3. Provide carbon steel anchors complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM B633, complying with physical requirements of FS A-A-55614, Type I. Anchors shall be flush or shell type. Provide low-profile anchors for use in precast concrete planks. I. Concrete Undercut Anchors: 1. General: a. Each concrete undercut anchor shall consist of threaded stud,thick-walled expansion sleeve, expander coupler, and nut and washer. Anchors shall be pre- set type or through-set type, as shown on the Drawings. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 11 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 . HDA Undercut Anchor, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. DUC Ductile Undercut Anchor, by USP Structural Connectors. C. Or equal 1 Provide concrete undercut expansion anchors in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350, Appendix D. Demonstrate suitability of cracked concrete undercut anchors in accordance with ACI 355.2 prequalification tests. a. Anchor shall comply with ductility requirements of ACI 350 or ACI 318 Appendix D, Section D.3.3. 4. Installed anchor shall exhibit form fit between bearing elements and the undercut in the concrete. 5. Interior Dry Non-Corrosive Locations: Provide carbon steel anchors, complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM 13633. 6, Other Locations: Provide stainless steel anchors, complete with nuts and washers, manufactured of AISI Type 316 stainless steel or materials complying with ISO 3506-1 and having corrosion resistance equivalent to AISI Type 316 stainless steel. 7. Concrete undercut anchors shall have a current ICC Evaluation Service Report for use in both cracked and uncracked concrete for seismic recognition for seismic design Categories A through F when tested and assessed in accordance with ICC-ES AC193. Ji Concrete Inserts: L. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a, Unistrut Corporation. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. C. Anvil International, Inc. d, Or equal. 2. Spot Concrete Inserts: a, Provide inserts recommended by insert manufacturer for required loading. Inserts shall comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58, malleable iron, Type 18. Spot inserts shall allow for lateral adjustment and have means for attachment to forms. Provide nuts compatible with insert and to suit threaded hanger rod sizes. I Continuous Concrete Inserts: a. Provide inserts recommended by insert manufacturer for required loading. Inserts shall be continuous type and shall be manufactured from minimum 12- gage cold-formed channel sections, complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M, stainless steel, Grade 33, complete with styrofoam inserts, end caps, and means for attaching to forms. Provide channel nuts compatible with insert suitable for threaded hanger rod sizes. 4. Provide inserts with plain finish. K. Drive-In Expansion Anchors: 1. General: a, Drive-In expansion anchors shall each consist of stainless steel drive pin and expanding alloy body. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 12 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 a, Metal HIT Anchor, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Zinc Nailon Anchor, by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. C, Or equal. 1 Provide Type 304 stainless steel drive pin with zinc alloy body. Anchor shall comply with physical requirements of FS A-A-1925A,Type 1. L. Unless approved by ENGINEER, do not use power-actuated fasteners or other types of bolts and fasteners not specified in this Section. K Anti-Seizing Compound: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a, Pure Nickel Never-Seez, by Bostik. b. Nickel-Graf, by Anti-Seize Technology. C, Or equal. 2. Provide pure nickel anti-seizing compound. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A, Examine conditions under which materials will be installed and advise ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A� Anchor Bolts: 1. Provide anchor bolts as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or as required to secure structural element to the appropriate anchor surface. . Locate and accurately set anchor bolts using templates or other devices as required, prior to placing concrete. Wet setting of anchor bolts is unacceptable. 3. Protect threads and shank from damage during installation and subsequent construction operations. 4. Unless otherwise shown or approved by ENGINEER anchor bolts shall comply with Table 05 05 33-B: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 13 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 TABLE 05 05 33-13: SINGLE ANCHOR ALLOWABLE LOADS ON ANCHOR BOLTS' s F1554 Grade 36 F1554 c F593 Type 316, Condition A Grade 55 i N N _ C E S C a) c m � m CU U N M C 1/2 6 9 1,262 2,420 8.5 12.75 1,660 3,190 5/8 7.5 11.25 2,010 3,860 10.5 15.75 2,640 5,080 3/4 9 13.5 2,974 5,720 13 19.5 3,910 7,520 7/8 10.5 15.75 4,106 7,890 15 22.5 5,400 10,390 1 12 18 5,386 10,360 17 25.5 7,090 13,450 1 13.5 20.25 6,787 13,052 19 28.5 8,930 16,580 1/8 1 15 22.5 8,617 16,572 21 31.5 11,340 20,040 1/4 TABLE 05 05 33-13: SINGLE ANCHOR ALLOWABLE LOADS ON ANCHOR BOLTS' s F1554 Grade 36 F1554 c F593 Type 316, Condition A Grade 55 L Qj Qj +1 E C -0 C U C -0 U �^ E E S E a) � m � C m C C L a) N M C CO 1= (..) l7A L U U 17A L c o w 0 0 N I � w 0 0 m 1/2 6 9 947 1,815 8.5 12.75 1,245 2,393 5/8 7.5 11.25 1,508 2,895 10.5 15.75 1,980 3,810 3/4 9 13.5 2,231 4,290 13 19.5 2,933 5,640 7/8 10.5 15.75 3,080 5,918 15 22.5 4,050 7,793 1 12 18 4,040 7,770 17 25.5 5,318 10,088 11/8 13.5 20.25 5,090 9,789 19 28.5 8,930 12,435 1.1/4 15 22.5 6,463 12,429 21 31.5 8,505 15,030 Table Notes: 1. Table is based on ACI 318 and ACI 350, Appendix D, f'c =4000 psi. Table 05 05 33-B is not applicable to anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry. 2. Critical edge distance and spacing are indicated in the table. Capacity of anchor bolts for other combination of edge distances and spacing shall be evaluated in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350,Appendix D. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 14 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 3. Values for shear and tension listed are not considered to act concurrently. Interaction of tension and shear will be evaluated by ENGINEER in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350, Appendix D. I Adhesive Anchors, Undercut Anchors, and Expansion Anchors—General: 1. Prior to drilling, locate existing reinforcing steel in vicinity of proposed holes. If reinforcing conflicts with proposed hole location, obtain ENGINEER's approval of alternate hole locations to avoid drilling through or damaging existing reinforcing bars. C. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and the following. . Drill holes to adhesive system manufacturer's recommended drill bit diameter to the specified depth. Drill holes in hammering and rotation mode with carbide-tipped drill bits that comply with the tolerances of ANSI B212.15. Core-drilled holes are unacceptable. 3. Before setting adhesive anchor, hole shall be made free of dust and debris by method recommended by adhesive anchor system manufacturer. Hole shall be brushed with adhesive system manufacturer-approved brush and blown clean with clean, dry,oil- free compressed air to remove all dust and loose particles. Hole shall be dry as defined by adhesive system manufacturer. 4o Before injecting adhesive, obtain ENGINEER's concurrence that hole is dry and free of oil and other contaminants. S. Prior to injecting adhesive into the drilled hole, dispense,to a location appropriate for such waste, an initial amount of adhesive from the mixing nozzle, until adhesive is uniform color. . Inject adhesive into hole through injection system-mixing nozzle and necessary extension tubes, placed to bottom of hole. Discharge end shall be withdrawn as adhesive is placed but kept immersed to prevent formation of air pockets. Fill hole to depth that ensures that excess material is expelled from hole during anchor placement. 7. Twist anchors during insertion into partially-filled hole to guarantee full wetting of rod surface with adhesive. Insert rod slowly to avoid developing air pockets. 8. Provide adequate curing in accordance to adhesive system manufacturer's requirements prior to continuing with adjoining Work that could place load on installed adhesive anchors. Do not begin adjoining Work until adhesive anchors are successfully tested or when allowed by ENGINEER. , Limitations: a. Installation Temperature: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation temperature requirements. Provide temporary protection and other measures, such as heated enclosures, necessary to ensure that base material temperature complies with anchor systems manufacturer's requirements during installation and curing of adhesive anchor system. b, Oversized Holes: Advise ENGINEER immediately if size of drilled hole is larger than recommended by anchor system manufacturer. Cost of corrective measures, including but not limited to redesign of anchors due to decreased PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 15 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 anchor capacities, shall be paid by CONTRACTOR. C. Embedment depths shall be based on installation in normal-weight concrete with compressive strength of 2,500 psi when embedded in existing concrete, and 4,000 psi when embedded in new concrete. D, Expansion Anchors: 1. Comply with expansion anchor manufacturer's written installation instructions and the following: 2. Drill holes using anchor system manufacturer's recommended drill bit diameter and to the specified depth. Drill holes in hammering and rotation mode with carbide-tipped drill bits complying with tolerances of ANSI B212.15. Core drilled holes are unacceptable. I Before installing anchor, hole shall be made free of dust and debris by method recommended by anchor system manufacturer. Hole shall be brushed with anchor system manufacturer-approved brush and blown clean with clean, dry, oil-free compressed air to remove all dust and loose particles. 4. Before installing anchor, obtain ENGINEER'S concurrence that hole is dry and free of oil and other contaminants. 5. Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Drive anchors not less than four threads below surface of the attachment. Set anchors to anchor manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench. E. Concrete Undercut Anchors: 1. Comply with undercut anchor manufacturer's written installation instructions and the following. . Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. S. Drill hole to anchor manufacturer's specified depth and diameter using a drill bit matched to the specific anchor. 4. Before setting the undercut anchor, hole shall be free of dust and debris using method recommended by undercut anchor system manufacturer. Hole shall be blown clean with clean, dry, oil-free compressed air to remove all dust and loose particles. 5. Insert the anchor by hand until anchor reaches bottom of hole. & Set anchor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using anchor manufacturer's specified setting tool. 7. Verify that the setting mark is visible on the threaded rod above the sleeve. S. Anchor shall be set to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. F. Concrete Inserts: L. Comply with concrete insert manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Inserts shall be flush with slab bottom surface. 1 Protect embedded items from damage during concrete placing. Ensure that embedded items are securely fastened to prevent movement during concrete placing, and ensure that embedded items do fill with concrete during concrete placing. 4. Inserts intended for piping greater than four-inch diameter shall be provided with hooked rods attached to concrete reinforcing. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 16 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 G, Anti-Seizing Compound: 1. Provide anti-seizing compound in accordance with anti-seizing compound manufacturer's installation instructions, at locations indicated in Paragraph 2.16 of this Section. 2. Do not use anti-seizing compound at locations where anchor bolt or adhesive anchor will contact potable water or water that will be treated to become potable. 3.3 CLEANING A. After embedding concrete is placed, remove protection and clean bolts and inserts. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A, Site Tests: 1. OWNER Will employ testing agency to perform field quality tensile testing of post- installed anchors at the Site. a. Testing shall comply with ASTM E488. b, Test at least ten percent of all types of post-installed anchors. If one or more post-installed anchors fail the test, CONTRACTOR shall pay cost of testing, or at ENGINEER's option CONTRACTOR may arrange for testing paid by CONTRACTOR,for all post-installed anchors of same diameter and type installed on the same day as the failed anchor. If anchors installed on the same day as the failed anchor also fail the test, ENGINEER may require retesting of all anchors of the same diameter and type installed in the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for retesting costs. C, Test post-installed anchors to 50 percent of ultimate tensile capacity of post- installed anchor. ENGINEER will direct which anchors are to be tested. d. Apply test loads with hydraulic ram. e. Displacement of post-installed anchors shall not exceed D/10,where D is nominal diameter of anchor being tested. 2. Correct defective Work by removing and replacing or correcting, as directed by ENGINEER. 3. CONTRACTOR shall pay for all corrections and subsequent testing required to confirm integrity of post-installed anchors. 4. Testing agency shall submit test results to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER within 24 hours of completion of test. 1 Manufacturer's Services: 1. Provide at the Site services of qualified adhesive manufacturer's representative during initial installation of adhesive anchor systems to train CONTRACTOR's personnel in proper installation procedures. Manufacturer's representative shall observe to confirm that installer demonstrates proper installation procedures for adhesive anchors and adhesive material. 2. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 17 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 05 33-PAGE 18 OF 18 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ANCHOR SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 05 50 00 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish miscellaneous metal fabrications, including surface preparation and shop priming. B. The extent of miscellaneous metal fabrications Work is shown on the Drawings and includes items fabricated from iron,steel and aluminum shapes, plates, bars, castings and extrusions, which are not a part of the structural steel or other metal systems covered by other Sections of these Specifications. C. The types of miscellaneous metal items include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Aluminum ladders. 2. Ships ladders. 3. Extruded aluminum stair nosings. 4. Bollards. 5. Access hatches. 6. Miscellaneous framing and supports. 7. Miscellaneous accessories and fasteners. 8. Seat Angles, supports and brackets. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 05 33,Anchor Systems. 2. Section 05 52 15,Aluminum Handrails and Railings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown and specified: 1. ASTM A 36,Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 153, Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3. ASTM A 240, Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels. 4. ASTM A 276, Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes. 5. ASTM A 320, Specification for Alloy Steel Bolting Material for Low Temperature Service. 6. ASTM B 209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 7. ASTM B 211, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bars, Rods and Wire. 8. ASTM B 221, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Shapes and Tubes. 9. ANSI A14.3,Safety Requirements for Fixed Ladders. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 1 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS SEPTEMBER 2025 10. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code. 11. NAAMM, Metal Finishes Manual. 12. OSHA. B. Field Measurements: 1. Take field measurements where required prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting of the Work. C. Shop Assembly: 1. Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at the project site. Disassemble units only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Fabrication and erection details of all assemblies of miscellaneous metal Work. Include plans, elevations, and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include setting drawings and templates for location and installation of miscellaneous metal items and anchorage devices. 2. Copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions for products to be used in miscellaneous metal Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Aluminum: 1. Alloy and Temper: Provide alloy and temper as shown on the Drawings or specified, or as otherwise recommended by the aluminum producer or finisher. 2. Extruded Shapes and Tubes: ASTM B 241. 3. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209. 4. Bars, Rods and Wire: ASTM B 211. C. Stainless Steel Plates, Sheets and Bars: ASTM A 276,Type 316 stainless steel. 1. Use Type 316 stainless steel unless shown otherwise in the Drawings. D. Stainless Steel Fasteners and Fittings: ASTM A 320. E. Surface Preparation and Shop Priming: All steel shall be primed in the shop. F. Galvanizing:All galvanizing of fabricated steel items shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A 123. G. Aluminum Finish: Provide an Architectural Class I anodized finish for all aluminum work unless specifically shown or specified to be mill or other finish. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 2 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS SEPTEMBER 2025 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS A. Aluminum Ladders: 1. Fabricate ladders for the locations shown on the Drawings, with dimensions, spacings, details and anchorages as shown on the Drawings, and specified. Comply with the requirements of ANSI A14.3, except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified. a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide 1 1/2-inch diameter Schedule 40 side rails, spaced 18-inches apart, minimum. b. Provide extruded square rungs, spaced 12-inches on centers, maximum with non-slip surface on the tap of each rung. Adhesive strips for non-slip surfaces will not be allowed. 2. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 3. Support each ladder at tap and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than five feet on centers. Use welded or bolted brackets, designed for adequate support and anchorage, and to hold the ladder clear of the wall surface with a minimum of 7-inches clearance from wall to centerline of rungs. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, or approved by the ENGINEER, extend rails 42-inches above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure, unless other secure handholes are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, goose neck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder access. 4. Use extruded aluminum conforming to alloy and temper of the 5000 series alloys. B. Ships Ladders: 1. Ladders shall be fabricated to dimensions shown on the Drawings. 2. Ladders shall have 75 degree rake. 3. Ladders shall have a minimum 24-inch clear width. 4. Ladders shall be fabricated from aluminum. All hardware and anchorages shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 5. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Alaco. b. Surespan. C. Or approved equal. C. Fall Prevention System: All ladders greater than 12-feet-0-inches in height shall be provided with a fall prevention system. The system shall meet OSHA standards. 1. The system shall consist of a rail permanently attached to the ladder to which a harness belt is attached. The rail shall be notched and constructed of aluminum. Ladder attachments shall be provided as required by the manufacturer. A removable extension section shall be provided at the top of the ladder. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Saf-T-Climb by Norton Company. b. Vi-Go Ladder Climbing Safety System by Miller Fall Protection D. Aluminum Stairs: 1. Stringers: 6061-T6 aluminum alloy. 2. Stair Treads: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 3 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS SEPTEMBER 2025 a. Aluminum of same type specified under Aluminum Grating. b. Of sizes indicated on the Drawings and 1-3/4 inch minimum depth with cast abrasive type safety nosings. 3. Handrails and Guardrails:Aluminum pipe specified under Aluminum Handrails and Guardrails (Nonwelded Pipe). 4. Fasteners:Type 316 stainless steel. E. Extruded Aluminum Stair Nosings: 1. Fabricate of sizes and configurations required for the Work. a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide ribbed abrasive filled type, using black abrasive filler. 2. Provide anchors for embedding in concrete, either integral or applied to treads, as standard with the manufacturer. 3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide stair nosings by one of the following: a. American Abrasive Metals Company. b. Wooster Products Incorporated. F. Bollards: Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, provide 8-inch diameter, Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe,4-feet-0-inches above grade, 4-feet-0-inches below grade. Fill with concrete and mound top. Bollards shall be primed in the shop. G. Access Hatches: 1. Hatches shall be fabricated to dimensions shown on the Drawings. 2. Hatches shall be fabricated from aluminum. All hardware and anchorages shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 3. Provide lockable hasp at all hatches. 4. All hatches shall be watertight. 5. Product and Manufacturer: a. Bilco. b. Or approved equal. H. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous metal framing and supports, which are not a part of the structural steel framework and are required to complete the Work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to the sizes, shapes and profiles shown on the Drawings or, if not shown on the Drawings, of the required dimensions to receive adjacent grating, plates,tanks, doors, or other work to be retained by the framing. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings,fabricate from structural shapes, plates, and bars, of all welded construction using mitered corners,welded brackets and splice plates and a minimum number of joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items to be anchored to the Work. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 4 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS SEPTEMBER 2025 3. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. a. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings, space anchors, 24-inches on centers, and provide units the equivalent of 1-1/4 by 1/4 by 8-inch strips. b. All material shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless noted otherwise in the Drawings. I. Fasteners and Fittings: Provide Type 316 stainless steel,for all aluminum fabrications, and zinc coated hardware for all galvanized fabrications, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified. J. Surface Preparation and Shop Priming: All miscellaneous metal fabrications shall be primed in the shop. K. Aluminum Finish: Provide an Architectural Class 1 anodized finish, AA M32C22 A41, clear, as specified in NAAMM Manual. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level,true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Brace temporarily or anchor temporarily in formwork where fabrications are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. B. Anchor securely as shown on the Drawings or as required for the intended use, using concealed anchors wherever possible. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld steel connections, which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind steel joints smooth and touch up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units, which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Protection of Aluminum from Dissimilar Materials: 1. Coat all surfaces of aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials, such as concrete, grout, masonry and steel or other dissimilar metals with the following: a. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. b. Extruded Aluminum:Two coats of clear lacquer. 2. Do not extend coating beyond contact surfaces. Remove coating where exposed-to- view in the finished Work. E. All welds to be coated shall be grinded smooth according to NACE "Surface Preparation of Welds Prior to Coating". END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 5 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS SEPTEMBER 2025 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 6 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 05 52 15 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials,tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install aluminum handrail and railing systems. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in, and attachments to, aluminum handrail and railing systems to accommodate the Work under this and other Specification Sections. Provide all items for aluminum handrails and railings, including anchorages, fasteners,studs, and other items required for which provision for is not specifically included under other Sections. b. Provide openings in and attachments to aluminum handrails and railings to accommodate work under other contracts. Assist other contractors in building on or attaching to aluminum handrails and railings all items such as fasteners and other items required for which provision is not specifically included under other contracts. 2. Aluminum handrails and railings Work shall include components and features shown and specified, and all components and features available from specified manufacturers required for providing complete aluminum handrail and railing system in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before aluminum handrails and railings Work. 2. Notify other contractors in advance of installing aluminum handrail and railings to provide them with sufficient time to install items included in their contracts that are to be installed with or before aluminum handrails and railings Work. 3. Aluminum handrail and railing locations shall comply with Laws and Regulations. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 60 00, Grouting. 2. Section 05 05 33,Anchor Systems. 3. Section 05 50 00, Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. AA, Aluminum Design Manual. 2. ASTM 1326/1326M, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings. 3. ASTM B117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray(Fog)Apparatus. 4. ASTM 13136, Standard Method for Measurement of Stain Resistance of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 1 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 5. ASTM B137, Standard Test Method for Measurement of Coating Mass per Unit Area on Anodically Coated Aluminum. 6. ASTM B221, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. 7. ASTM 13241/13241M, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube. 8. ASTM B244, Standard Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum and of Other Nonconductive Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with Eddy-Current Instruments. 9. ASTM B247, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Die Forgings, Hand Forgings, and rolled Ring Forgings. 10. ASTM B429, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 11. ASTM E 935, Standard Test Methods for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings. 12. NAAMM/Architectural Metal Products Division (AMP), Pipe Railing Manual. 13. NAAMM/AMP AMP 501 Finishes for Aluminum. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Upon request manufacturer shall submit document at least five years successful experience in fabricating aluminum handrail and railing systems of scope and type similar to that required. b. Manufacturer shall be capable of providing custom detail drawings for the products required. 2. Professional Engineer: a. CONTRACTOR or handrail and railing manufacturer shall retain a registered professional engineer legally qualified to practice in same state as the Site. Professional engineer shall have at least five years experience designing aluminum handrails and railings. b. Responsibilities include: C. Reviewing aluminum handrail and railing system performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. d. Preparing written requests for clarifications or interpretations of performance or design criteria for submittal to ENGINEER by CONTRACTOR. e. Preparing or supervising preparation of design calculations verifying compliance of aluminum handrail and railing system with requirements of the Contract Documents. f. Signing and sealing all calculations. g. Certifying that: 1) Design of aluminum handrail and railing system was performed in accordance with performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents, and 2) Design conforms to all applicable local, state, and federal Laws and Regulations, and to prevailing standards of practice. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 2 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 3. Installer: a. Retain a single installer trained and with record of successful experience in installing aluminum handrail and railing systems. b. Installer shall have record of successfully installing aluminum handrail and railing systems in accordance with recommendations and requirements of manufacturer,or shall provide evidence of being acceptable to the manufacturer. C. Installer shall employ only tradesmen with specific skill and successful experience in the type of Work required. d. When requested by ENGINEER, submit name and qualifications of installer with the following information for at least three successful, completed projects: e. Names and telephone numbers of owner and architect or engineer responsible for each project. f. Approximate contract cost of the aluminum handrail and railing systems for which installer was responsible. g. Amount(linear feet) of aluminum handrail and railing installed. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all materials furnished under this Section regardless of component manufacturer, from a single aluminum handrail and railing system manufacturer. 2. Aluminum handrail and railing system manufacturer shall review and approve or prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals (except for delegated design submittals,when professional engineer is retained by other than handrail and railing manufacturer)for all components furnished under this Section. 3. Components shall be specifically constructed for specified service conditions and shall be integrated into overall assembly by aluminum handrails and railings manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Laws and Regulations including: 1. OSHA Part 1910.23, Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes. D. Certifications: 1. Submit certification, signed by authorized officer of manufacturer and notarized, stating that handrail and railing systems comply with the design prepared by the professional engineer. 2. Submit certification, signed by authorized officer of CONTRACTOR and notarized, stating that all components and fittings are furnished by the same manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Drawings for fabrication and installation of aluminum handrail and railing systems with sizes of members, pipe wall thickness, information on components, and anchorage devices. Show all anchorages. Provide details drawn at scale of 1.5-inch equal to one foot. b. Indicate required location of posts. C. Indicate locations and details of all expansion joints, if any. d. Indicate locations and details of gaps across seismic joints, if any. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 3 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 e. Profile drawings of aluminum handrail and railing system components. f. Custom detail drawings. Details of forming,jointing, sections, connections, internal supports, trim and accessories. Provide details drawn at scale of 1.5- inch equal to one foot. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's specifications, standard detail drawings, and installation instructions for aluminum handrail and railing systems. b. Manufacturer's catalogs showing complete selection of standard and custom components and miscellaneous accessories for selection by ENGINEER. 3. Delegated Design Submittals: a. Design Data: Design computations or complete structural analysis of handrail and railing systems, signed and sealed by professional engineer. Professional engineer's seal shall be clearly legible, including state of registration, registration number, and name on seal. b. Certification by professional engineer that professional engineer has performed design of aluminum handrail and railing systems in accordance with performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents, and that design conforms to all local, state, and federal Laws and Regulations, and to prevailing standards of practice. 4. Samples: a. Full-size Sample,two feet long, of assembled railing system at post and rail intersections. Sample shall have all associated components including typical connections, mounted toeboard and sleeve, and handrail at wall return, complete with mounting brackets, all with specified controlled uniform metal finish. b. Color Samples: Maximum range of clear anodized aluminum that shall appear in finished Work. Prepare range Samples, to show highest level of color control feasible for actual handrail and railing systems, as determined by licensor of finishing process specified,on actual extrusions and castings of the Work. C. ENGINEER will review Samples for finish, color,joint tolerances, workmanship, and general component assembly only. Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. 5. Test Procedure: Submit detailed description of proposed shop testing procedures. Do not perform shop testing until ENGINEER approves shop test procedure: B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certification on source of supply, as specified in Article 1.3 of this Section. b. Manufacturer certification specified in Article 1.3 of this Section. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Manufacturer's load testing report in accordance with ASTM E935 for completed aluminum handrail and railing systems, demonstrating compliance with applicable requirements of building codes, safety codes, and other Laws and Regulations. C. Qualifications Statements: Submit qualifications for the following: a. Manufacturer,when requested by ENGINEER. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 4 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 b. Professional engineer. C. Installer, when requested by ENGINEER. Qualifications statement shall include record of experience with references specified. D. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Maintenance Manuals: Furnish detailed maintenance manuals that include the following: a. Product name and number. b. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning, including cleaning materials, application methods and precautions in use of products that may be detrimental to finish when improperly applied. C. Handrail and railings systems manufacturer's current catalog including individual parts. 2. Guarantee: Provide in maintenance manual the guarantee specified. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 5 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. System Description: Aluminum handrail and railing system shall consist of equally spaced horizontal rails with totally concealed mechanical fasteners, internally threaded tubular rivets and components fastened to posts spaced no more than five feet on centers and system of handrails supported from adjacent construction by mounting brackets spaced at no more than five feet on centers. B. System Description: Aluminum handrail and railing system shall consist of top and bottom rail with vertical pickets with totally concealed mechanical fasteners, internal threaded tubular rivets, and components fastened to posts spaced no more than five feet on centers and system of handrails supported from adjacent construction by mounting brackets spaced at no more than five feet on centers. C. Design Criteria and Performance Criteria: 1. Design,fabricate, and install aluminum handrail and railing systems to withstand the most critical effects resulting from the following loads(loads listed below do not act concurrently): a. Uniform Load: 50 pounds per foot, applied at top in any direction. b. Concentrated Load: 200 pounds single load, applied at any point along the top in any direction. C. Components: Intermediate rails(all rails except the handrail), balusters, and panel fillers, if any, shall withstand horizontally-applied normal load of 50 pounds on an area equal to one square foot, including openings and space between rails. Reactions due to this loading are not required to be superimposed to loading specified for main supporting members of handrails and railings. d. Comply with AA Aluminum Design Manual for determining allowable stresses and safety factors for aluminum structural components. e. Limit deflection in each single span of railing and handrail to 1.5-inch maximum, and to 1/4-inch maximum on railing posts. Applied loads shall not produce permanent deflection in the completed Work when loads are removed. 2. Thermal Control: Provide adequate expansion within fabricated systems that allows for thermal expansion and contraction caused by material temperature change of 140 degrees F to-20 degrees F without warp or bow of system components. Distance between expansion joints shall be based on providing 1/4-inch wide joint at 70 degrees F,which accommodates movement of 150 percent of calculated amount of movement for specified temperature range. 3. Where handrail and railing systems cross expansion joints in the building or structure, provide expansion joints in handrail and railings systems. 4. For posts located at or near end of runs as shown, uniformly space intermediate posts as required to conform to loading and deflection criteria specified, at intervals no greater than maximum post spacing specified. Where posts are shown for handrails along both sides of walkways and other similar locations, locate posts opposite each other; do not stagger post locations. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 6 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Custom Fabricated Connectorail System, by Julius Blum & Company, Inc. 2. Custom Fabricated Series 500 Non-Welded Aluminum Pipe Aluminum handrails and railing systems, by Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. 3. Or approved equal. B. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Wesrail, by Moultrie Manufacturing Company. 2. Alumaguard, by Alumaguard—A division of Bettinger West, Inc. 3. Or approved equal. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum Architectural and Ornamental Shapes:ASTM B221,Alloy 6063-T52. B. Aluminum Forgings: ASTM B247. C. Extruded or Drawn Aluminum Pipe and Tube: 1. ASTM B429 or ASTM 13241/13241M,Alloy 6063-T5, 6063-T52,or 6063-T832 as required by loadings, deflections, and post spacing specified. 2. Provide Schedule 40 pipe, minimum, unless conditions of detail and fabrication require extra-heavy pipe to comply with Specifications. Rails and posts shall have minimum outside diameter of 1.90 inches. D. Reinforcing Bars: Solid, circular profile,two feet long, 6061-T6 aluminum reinforcing bars with same outside diameter as inside diameter of post. E. Reinforcing Bars: Urethane foam-filled, Schedule 80, 23 inches long 6061-T6 aluminum reinforcing bars or tubes with outside diameter same as inside diameter of post. F. Anchors and Fastenings: 1. For anchors and fasteners, use Type 316 stainless steel; minimum 3/8-inch diameter. 2. Provide minimum of four bolt fasteners per post where surface-mounted posts are shown. Components shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as approved or accepted (as applicable) by ENGINEER on submittals. 3. Anchors: In accordance with Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. G. Castings: 1. Provide high-strength aluminum alloy brackets,flanges, and fittings suitable for anodizing as specified. 2. Aluminum alloy sand castings:ASTM 1326/1326M. H. Connector Sleeves: Schedule 40, five-inch long by 1.610-inch diameter. I. Sockets: Provide six-inch deep by 2.5-inch outside diameter aluminum sockets with 3.5-inch wide socket cover on bottom of each socket and on top and bottom of removable post sockets. J. Chain, Snaps, and Eye Bolts: Provide oblong 1/4-inch welded link,Type 316 stainless steel chain weighing 57 pounds per cubic foot, each link 1.25-inch by 7/16-inch. Provide Type 316 stainless steel eyebolts, 1/4-inch stainless steel threaded quick links and heavy-duty swivel PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 7 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 snaps with spring loaded latch. K. Gates: For each gate in handrail or railing system, provide the following: 1. Hinges:Two-self closing aluminum hinges. 2. Latches and Stops: One latch and stop with rubber bumper and one-inch diameter plastic knobs. L. Custom Cover Flanges: 1/4-inch high by four-inch diameter, aluminum. M. Adhesive:Two-part waterproof epoxy-type as recommended by handrail and railing systems manufacturer. N. Non-shrink Grout: Comply with Section 03 60 00, Grouting. O. Toeboards: 1. Provide extruded Alloy 6063-T5 or T52 aluminum alloy toeboards, unless railing is mounted on curbs or other construction of sufficient height and type to comply with OSHA 1910.23. Bars or plates are not acceptable. 2. Unless otherwise specified,toeboards shall comply with OSHA 1910.23, Section (e). P. System Components and Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide complete selection of manufacturer's standard and custom aluminum handrail and railing systems components and miscellaneous accessories required. Show type and location of all such items on Shop Drawings and other submittals as applicable. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Unless otherwise shown or specified, provide typical non-welded construction details and fabrication techniques recommended in NAAMM/AMP Pipe Railing Manual and NAAMM/AMP AMP 501. B. Fabricate handrail and railing systems true to line and level,with accurate angles surfaces and straight edges. Fabricate corners without using fittings. Provide bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. Form elbow bends and wall returns to uniform radius,free from buckles and twists, with smooth finished surfaces, or use prefabricated bends. Provide not less than four-inch outside radius. C. Provide chains across openings in railings where shown. Attach one end of each chain to an eyebolt in post and other end attached by means of swivel eye snap hook to similar eyebolt in opposite post. D. Remove burrs from exposed edges. E. Close aluminum pipe ends by using prefabricated fittings. F. Weep Holes: 1. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather to exclude water. 2. Provide 15/64-inch diameter weep holes at lowest possible point on each post in handrail and railing systems. 3. Provide pressure relief holes at closed ends of handrail and railing systems. G. Toeboards: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard toeboard,that accommodates movement caused by thermal change specified without warping or bowing toeboards. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 8 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Provide manufacturer's standard toeboard,which accommodates storage for removable socket covers. 3. Coordinate and cope toeboard as required to accommodate cover flanges at posts. 4. Toeboards shall follow curvature of railing. Where railing is shown to have curved contours at corners, or other locations, toeboard shall likewise be curved to follow line of railing system. H. Reinforcing Bars: Provide reinforcing bar friction-fitted at each post in railing system. Extend reinforcing bars of tubes six inches into cast-in-place sleeves or other types of supporting brackets. I. Mechanically Fitted Component Pipe Handrail and Railing System: 1. Use non-welded pipe handrail and railing system with posts,top and intermediate rail(s), and flush joints. 2. Provide a top and two intermediate horizontal rail(s), equally spaced. 3. Provide top and bottom rail with 0.675-inch diameter pickets. Pressure fit pickets in shop fabricated channel adapters by hydraulic ram. Loose fit is not acceptable. Fasten picket sections into top and bottom rails by using tubular rivets 12 inches on centers maximum, but uniformly spaced between posts beginning 6.0 inches from centerline of post. 4. Do not use blind rivets, pop rivets, or other exposed fastening devices in the Work under this Section. Fasteners used for side-mounting fascia flanges where shown or specified may be exposed in the Work. Provide internal threaded aluminum rivets, stainless steel through-bolts with lock nuts, stainless steel sheet metal screws with lock washers, and epoxy adhesive for fastening components of the Work. 5. Use Type 304/305 stainless steel blind rivets and Type 304/305 stainless steel self- tapping screws in assembling components of the Work. 2.5 FINISHES A. General: 1. Prepare surfaces for finishing in accordance with recommendation of aluminum producer and the aluminum finisher or processor. 2. Adjust and control direction of mechanical finishes specified to achieve best overall visual effect in the Work. 3. Color and Texture Tolerance: Provide uniform color and continuous mechanical texture for aluminum components. ENGINEER reserves the right to reject aluminum materials because of color or texture variations that are visually objectionable, but only where variation exceed range of variations established by manufacturer prior to fabrication, by means of range of Samples approved by ENGINEER. 4. Anodize aluminum components. B. Finish: 1. Mechanically finish aluminum by wheel or belt polishing with aluminum oxide grit of 180 to 220 size, using peripheral wheel speed of 6,000 feet per minute; AA Designation - M32 Medium Satin Directional Texture. 2. Hand-Rubbed Finish: Where required to complete the Work and provide uniform, continuous texture, provide hand-rubbed finish to match medium satin directional texture specified to even out and blend satin finishes produced by other means. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 9 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Cleaning: 1. Provide non-etching chemical cleaning by immersing aluminum in inhibited chemical solution, as recommended by coating applicator, to remove lard oil, fats, mineral grease, and other contamination detrimental to providing specified finishes. 2. Clean and rinse with water between steps as recommended by aluminum manufacturer. D. Exposed Aluminum Anodic Coating: Provide anodic coatings as specified that do not depend on dyes, organic or inorganic pigments,or impregnation processes to obtain color. Apply coatings using only the alloy,temperature, current density, and acid electrolytes to obtain specified colors in compliance with designation system and requirements of NAAMM/AMP Pipe Railing Manual and NAAMM/AMP AMP 501. Comply with the following: 1. Provide Architectural Class I high density anodic treatment by immersing the components in tank containing solution of 15 percent sulfuric acid at 70 degrees F with 12 amperes per square foot of direct current for minimum of sixty minutes;AA Designation A41. 2. Physical Properties: a. Anodic Coating Thickness,ASTM B244: Minimum of 0.7-mils thick. b. Anodic Coating Weight, ASTM B137: Minimum of 32 mg/sq. in. C. Resistance to Staining, ASTM B136: No stain after five minutes dye solution exposure. d. Salt Spray,ASTM B117: 30,000 hours exposure with no corrosion or shade change. 3. Seal finished anodized coatings using deionized boiling water to seal pores and prevent further absorption. 4. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Alumilite 215 Clear by Aluminum Company of America, Inc. b. Or equal. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Limit variation of cast-in-place inserts, sleeves and field-drilled anchor and fastener holes to the following: a. Spacing: Plus-or-minus 3/8-inch. b. Alignment: Plus-or-minus 1/4-inch. C. Plumbness: Plus-or-minus 1/8-inch. 2. Minimum Handrails and Railings Systems Plumb Criteria: a. Limit variation of completed handrail and railing system alignment to 1/4-inch in 12 feet with posts set plumb to within 1/16-inch in 3.0 feet. b. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of stairs and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4-inch in 12.0 feet. 3. Provide "pencil-line"thin butt joints. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 10 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 B. Factory Testing: 1. Perform load test on completed handrail and railing systems. Extent of handrail and railing systems to be factory-tested shall be as shown and specified. 2. Load test completed handrail and railing systems in accordance with requirements of ASTM E935. Provide written report to ENGINEER identifying and documenting testing methods used, magnitude and location of loads superimposed, and results of such tests on actual completed handrail and railing systems, including all anchors and fasteners to be used in the Work. Testing setup shall simulate actual conditions of installation to be used in the Work. 3. Do not ship products from factory until ENGINEER accepts load testing report. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which Work will be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Do not erect components that are scarred, dented, chipped, discolored, otherwise damaged, or defaced. Remove from Site railing and handrail system components that have holes, cuts, gouges, deep scratches, or dents of any kind. Repairs to correct such Work will not be accepted. Remove and replace with new material. 2. Comply with installation and anchorage recommendations of NAAMM/AMP Pipe Railing Manual and NAAMM/AMP AMP 501 in addition to requirements specified and approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. B. Fastening to In-Place Construction: 1. Remove protective plastic immediately before installing. 2. Adjust handrails and railings prior to securing in place,to ensure proper matching at butting joints and correct alignment throughout their length. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building or structure as follows: a. Anchor posts in concrete by providing sockets set and anchored into concrete floor slab. Provide closure secured to bottom of sleeve. Before installing posts, remove debris and water from sleeves. Verify that reinforcing bars or tubes have been inserted into posts before installation. Do not install posts without reinforcing bar. For all non-removable handrail and railing systems sections, after posts have been inserted into sockets,fill annular space between posts and sockets solid with grout as specified in Section 03 60 00, Grouting. Crown the grout and slope grout to drain away from posts. b. Anchor posts to stair stringers with stringer or support flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, shop-connected to posts and bolted to steel supporting members. Flanges shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Verify that reinforcing bars are inserted into posts before installation. Do not install posts without reinforcing bar. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 11 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Side-mount posts by fastening them securely in brackets attached to steel or concrete fascia as shown and in accordance with approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. d. Provide removable railing sections where shown. Provide removable railing system posts with friction-fitted reinforcing bar in each post. Provide sockets with socket covers stored in extruded toeboard. Provide aluminum pipe collars for all removable posts. Accurately locate sleeves to match post spacing. e. Provide posts set in concrete with an aluminum floor cover flange. 3. Use devices and fasteners recommended by handrail and railing systems manufacturer and as shown on approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. C. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: 1. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation. Set the Work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, plumb, level, true, and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. 2. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Do not cut or abrade surfaces of units that have been finished after fabrication, and are intended for field connections. 3. Make permanent field splice connections using manufacturer's recommended epoxy adhesive and five-inch minimum length connector sleeves. Tight press-fit field splice connectors and install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Follow epoxy manufacturer's recommendations for requirements of installation and conditions of use. 4. Make permanent field splice connections using stainless steel blind rivets and five-inch minimum length connector sleeves. Tight press-fit field splice connectors and install in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction. Install two blind rivets per joint on 180-degree centers. 5. Make splices as near as possible to posts, but not exceeding 12 inches from nearest post. 6. Field welding is not allowed. Make splices using pipe splice lock employing a single allen screw to lock joint. 7. Provide hinged gates as shown. 8. Provide chain sections as shown. Provide one chain length with fastening accessories for top and each intermediate rail. 9. Secure handrails to walls with wall brackets and end fittings as shown. Drill wall plate portion of the bracket to receive one bolt, unless otherwise shown for concealed anchorage. Locate brackets as shown or, if not shown, at not more than five feet on centers. Provide flush type wall return fittings with same projection shown for wall brackets. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building or structure. Refer to Section 05 05 33,Anchor Systems. 10. Securely fasten toeboards in place with not more than 1/4-inch clearance above floor level. 11. Drill one 15/64-inch diameter weep hole not more than 1/4-inch above top of location of solid reinforcing bar or tube in each post. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 12 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 D. Fastening to Existing Construction: 1. Provide heavy-duty floor flange and anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrail and railing systems components to existing construction; including stainless steel threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts,toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts and other connectors as required. Refer to Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 2. Use devices and fasteners recommended by handrail and railing systems manufacturer and as shown on approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. E. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide slip joint with internal sleeve extending not less than two inches beyond joint on each side. 2. Construct expansion joints as for field splices, except fasten internal sleeve securely to one side of rail only. 3. Locate joints within six inches of posts. F. Protection from Dissimilar Materials: 1. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials such as concrete, masonry, and steel, in accordance with Section 05 50 00, Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications. 2. Do not extend coating beyond contact surfaces. Remove coating where exposed-to- view in the finished Work. 3.3 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Cleaning: 1. Clean exposed surfaces of handrail and railing systems after completion of installation. Comply with recommendations of both handrail and railing system manufacturer and finish manufacturer. Do not use abrasives or unacceptable solvent cleaners. Test cleaning techniques on an unused section of railing before employing cleaning technique. 2. Remove stains, dirt,grease, and other substances by washing handrails and railings systems thoroughly using clean water and soap; rinse with clean water. 3. Do not use acid solution, steel wool, or other harsh abrasives. 4. If stain remains after washing, remove defective sections and replace with new material complying with this Section. B. Handrails and railings shall be free of dents, burrs, scratches, holes, and other blemishes. Replace damaged or otherwise defective Work with new material that complies with this Section at no additional cost to OWNER. C. Prior to Substantial Completion, replace adjacent work marred by the Work of this Section. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 13 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 52 15-PAGE 14 OF 14 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 09 9100 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates: 1. Exterior substrates: a, Concrete,vertical, and horizontal surfaces. b. Clay masonry. C, Concrete masonry units (CMU). d. Steel. e. Galvanized metal. f. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). g, Wood. h. Plastic trim fabrications. L Exterior Portland cement(stucco). 1, Exterior gypsum board. k. PVC pipe and fiberglass tanks. . Interior Surfaces: a. Concrete. b, Clay masonry. C, Concrete masonry units (CMU). d. Steel. e. Galvanized metal. f. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). g. Wood. h. Gypsum board. Plaster. j. Spray-textured ceilings. k. Cotton or canvas insulation covering. R. Related Sections: 1, Applicable equipment Sections for manufacturer's special coatings of equipment. Related Documents: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS A� References: 1. ASTM International (ASTM) PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 1 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 a. D16- Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint,Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. b. D2016-Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. , The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) , SSPC Painting Manual, "Good Painting Practice" b. SSPC Painting Manual, "Systems and Specifications" C, SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning d, SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning e. SSPC-SP5 White Metal Blasting f. SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning g. SSPC-SP7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning h. SSPC-SP10 Near-White Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP12 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Water jetting Prior to Recoating j, SSPC-SP13 Surface Preparation of Concrete k. SSPC-SP14 Industrial Blast Cleaning I. SSPC-VIS 189 Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel 1 NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) a, RP0287-95 "Field Measurements of Surface Profile of Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel Surfaces Using Replica Tape" b. RP0188-99 "Discontinuity(Holiday)Testing of Protective Coatings" C, TM-01-70 "Visual Comparator for Surfaces of New Steel Airblast Cleaned with Sand Abrasive" d, TM-01-70 "Visual Comparator for Surfaces of New Steel Airblast Cleaned with Slag Abrasive" e. RP0178-95 "Fabrication Details, Surface Finish Requirements, and Proper Design Considerations for Tanks and Vessels to be Lined for Immersion Service" f, RPO 892-92 "Linings Over Concrete for Immersion Service" g, RPO 591-96 "Coatings for Concrete Surfaces in Non-Immersion" h, 6G186 "Surface Preparation of Contaminated Steel Surfaces" i. 6G191 "Surface Preparation of Contaminated Concrete" j, RPO 178 "Weld preparation Visual Comparator" 4, National Science Foundations (NSF) B. Definitions: 1. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. . Exposed Surfaces: Used to define painting locations and requirements it shall include all visible interior or exterior surfaces,top of walls, ceilings, and inside surfaces to V-0" below grade or the weir level or to floor level,whichever applies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data,warranty, certificates, and application instructions for PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 2 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 each type of product indicated. I Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D, Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1, Show where each coating is to be used on the Project,with cross reference to this Section paragraphs and Painting Schedule. 2. Product date and information submitted shall demonstrate compliance with this Section. . Provide the surface preparation required or recommended by coating manufacturer for each type of coating application if different from that specified in this Section. E. Provide ENGINEER with certification from coating supplier that sufficient paint has been purchased to provide required quantity of coatings for Project. 1, Certificate shall list the quantities and types of paint purchased. F, Provide ENGINEER with certification from the blast cleaning supplier that sufficient materials have been purchased to provide for the surface preparation specified for Project. 1. Certificate shall list the quantities and gradation purchased. G, Manufacturer's Instructions: 1, Provide manufacturer's instructions for the application of the coating system for the purpose intended by these specifications.The instructions shall provide the limitations, precautions, and requirements that may adversely affect the coating system; that may cause unsatisfactorily results after the application; or that may prevent the coating system from serving the purpose for which it was intended,which is to provide coverage and protection from corrosion, shall be clearly stated. 2. The instructions shall include, but not limited to: a. Surface preparation. b, Methods of Application. C. Number of coats. d. Thickness of each coat. e. Total Thickness. f- Drying time of each coat, including primer. g. Drying time of final oat before placement in service. h. Time allowed between coats. Primers required to be used. j. Primers not permitted. k. Use of a primer. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 3 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 I. Compatible topcoats. m, Thinner and use f thinner. n. Weather limitations during and after application (temperature, humidity,wind velocity). 0; Protection from sun. 1pp Physical properties of paint, including percent solids content by volume, ingredient analysis, and weight per unit surface per dry mil thickness. qi,, Cathodic disbonding limitations, if any. r. Equipment settings (air cap,fluid tip, equipment pressure settings, etc.) H. Field quality-control reports: Provide temperature and humidity readings,testing for coating dry mil thickness and bonding, surface preparation, and related coating testing. I. Pre-installation Conference: Provide minutes of the pre-installation conference. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Ao Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality coating products with 10 years' experience. I Applicator: Company specializing in industrial painting and finishing with five (5)years' documented experience, approved by product manufacturer. C. CONTRACTOR shall apply coatings systems from only one manufacturer for each type of application. D, CONTRACTOR shall coordinate materials to be painted, shop primers,field primers, and finish coating systems to ensure compatibility for all materials and coatings in this project. E. All coatings in contact with potable water and water being treated for use as potable water shall conform to ANSI/NSF Standard 61 and shall be certified by an organization accredited by ANSI. All process, service water, potable, and chemical piping,fittings,tanks,valves, equipment, and structures in contact with the water being treated are included in this requirement. F. Coating system manufacturer shall review actual job conditions prior to purchase of any materials. Manufacturer shall submit to ENGINEER a statement listing any exceptions to the specifications regarding preparation requirements or coating applicability. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements for finishes. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A, Deliver, store, and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I Deliver products to site in the original, sealed, labeled,and unopened containers; inspect to verify acceptance. Damaged containers will not be accepted. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 4 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name,type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials in well ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and not more than 90 degrees F(32 degrees Q. E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. Remove oily rags, waste, or other fire hazards from facilities each night. Place cloths and cotton waste, which might constitute a fire hazard, in metal containers or destroy at the end of each work day. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. P. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 95 degrees F (10 and 35 degrees C). C. Do not apply coatings in; 1. snow, rain, mist or fog; 2. or when relative humidity meets or exceeds 85 percent; 3. or at temperatures less 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point; 4. or when it is predicted the air temperature will drop below 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) or less than 5 degrees F(3 degrees C) above the dew point is forecast within 8 hours after application of coating unless it is enclosed and heated; 5. or to damp or wet surfaces. D, Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 degrees C)for interiors; 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes: 65 degrees F (18 degrees C)for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Comply with all manufacturer's instructions for coating application and environmental conditions,which may be more stringent than the minimum requirements listed in this specifications. G. Provide lighting level of 80-foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. H. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for personnel safety during painting operations. 1. Display caution signs in necessary areas advising of spray painting and warning against open flames. 2. Provide barriers or shelters on windy days to protect equipment and facilities. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 5 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 1, Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gallon of each material and color applied. 2. The material shall be delivered in unopened labeled containers as delivered from the manufacturer. If the manufacturer does not delivered in gallon containers, and in the case of special colors,the new gallon containers, properly closed with typed labels indicating brand,type, color, location used, etc. 1 Where multiple component materials are used, provide an unopened kit of the necessary materials in the manufacturer's smallest standard packaging size. Provide 3 copies of the manufacturer's instructions describing the materials and directions for their use. 4� Provide a typed inventory list of the extra materials furnished at time of delivery. 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Warranty inspection of the coating systems shall be conducted during the eleventh month following completion and acceptance of all coating system work.The personnel or their representatives present at the pre-installation conference are requested to attend. All defective coating systems shall be repaired in accordance with this Section and to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and OWNER. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another, and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. I Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions;these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. C, Antimony. d. Benzene. e„ Butyl benzyl phthalate. f- Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 6 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. L Dimethyl phthalate. m, Ethylbenzene. Pao Formaldehyde. 0, Hexavalent chromium. p, Isophorone. q, Lead. r, Mercury. $. Methyl ethyl ketone. t, Methyl isobutyl ketone. U, Methylene chloride. V. Naphthalene. w, Toluene (methyl benzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride. 2.2 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Color Selection: 1. Colors: As selected by OWNER from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2. Colors selected may or may not be the manufacturer's standard color. 3. Submit color charts to OWNER at least 60-days prior to coating application to allow time for color selection. 4. Different colors will be selected for concrete structures; building columns,framing, walls, window and door frames, and other areas;various items of equipment; piping and conduit; safety colors will be used for fire equipment locations, protective covers for rotating or moving equipment,walkways, and other related items; architectural treatment, both interior and exterior of buildings; and for all other items of Work. 5. Colors for equipment shall be selected by OWNER during submittal process. 0. Colors selection for piping systems and identification of piping systems shall be in accordance with Section 10 90 00. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A, Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide a coating products from one of the manufacturers listed, if not listed under each Painting System Application: 1. Carboline Protective Coatings and Linings, St. Louis, MO. 2. PPG Protective and Marine Coatings (formerly Ameron Coatings). 3. Tnemec Company, Inc., Kansas City, MO. 4. Valspar. 2.4 MATERIALS PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 7 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. B. CONTRACTOR shall have complete responsibility for ensuring that each coating applied is compatible with its substitute and/or its intended finish coat, and that the completed coating system is suitable for its intended service. C. Accessory Materials: Thinning of paint and all accessory type materials used shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations covering material types, solvents, mix ratios, and methods. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Applicator present,for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry(Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D, Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes CONTRACTOR's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface of substrates to be coated shall be prepared in accordance with the SSPC specification as listed in Part 3.6 and as described in the paragraphs below. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. C. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. U. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil,grease, PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 8 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove unknown primers or coatings systems and incompatible primers of shop painted work and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. a. When removal is not feasible and with approval of ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR may apply a barrier coat in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions prior to application of the designated coating system. . When sandblasting, use a source of compressed air,which is free of detrimental water and oil and capable of delivering the required volume and pressure. 1 Subject to review by ENGINEER, any substrate in which SPPC-SP6 or SPPC-SP10 sandblasting cannot be accomplished shall be cleaned in accordance with SPPC-SP3 removing loose mill scale, rust, paint, and other foreign matter. E. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Allow new concrete to cure for 28-days. F. Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content of surfaces or alkalinity of mortar joints to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. G. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. H. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale if work has not been shop primed with coating system compatible primer. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. L Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. Ji Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation. K. Wood Substrates: L. Scrape and clean knots and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. . Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 1 Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. L. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. M, Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry. N. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Do not begin paint application until surfaces are dry. 0, Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 9 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B, Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D� Remove empty paint containers from site and dispose of all excess materials and empty containers in full accordance with all applicable state, federal, and local laws. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (MDF). Where applicable,the Coating Schedule includes the minimum dry film thickness required for the various coating systems specified.The film thickness is measured in mils. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions regarding drying time between coats,technique of application,ventilation, paint thinning, and safety precautions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. C. Allow applied coat to dry for the time period specified by the coating manufacturer before next coat is applied. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry to touch. [ , Apply each coat to uniform finish, free from runs, drips, ridges,waves, laps, brush marks and variations in color,texture and finish. E. Where multiple coats are specified; apply each coat in a different color,which compliments the following coat and is different than the proceeding coat. Each coat must be free of shadows and uniform in appearance. F. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish G. Double-lap all welds. Apply prime coat by brush to all weld areas;then apply prime coat to entire surface, including weld areas. H, Where clear finishes are required,tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. L Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. Ji Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. K. Paint all items throughout the project except for surfaces listed below unless shown otherwise in the plans or specifications: 1. Concrete walkways, pavement, sidewalks, and stair treads. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 10 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Interior fiberglass items unless specified otherwise. Exterior fiberglass shall be painted. I Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel,or chromium plate. 4� Operating parts, unless otherwise specified. 5. Existing structures or equipment, unless otherwise specified. 6. Equipment,valve, and other items nameplates or serial numbers. 7. Valve operator stems. L, Repair any damage or overspray to paint on existing structures caused by construction work. Match existing colors with touch-up paint. K New concrete and rubbed finish and mortar joints shall age a minimum of 30 days before application of coatings. Concrete surfaces to be painted shall be coated prior to installation of equipment, piping, conduit and supports and touched up following installation of these items. Components which cannot be adequately painted due to space limitations following installation, shall be coated prior to installation, and touched up after installation as well. O� Where inspection shows that the specified thickness is not developed, apply additional coats in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and cure schedule requirements to produce the required dry film thickness. 3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A� Refer to Section 10 90 00 and Section 26 05 53 for requirements for color-coding and identification banding of ductwork, piping, conduit, and identification systems. P. Paint shop primed equipment. Touchup paint equipment furnished with factory coatings with manufacturer's correct color. C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. D. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports. For insulated pipe, provide shop and field primer coats on pipe and surface preparation and final coat on insulation jacket. E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint,to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers,grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. G. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. K Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. L Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows and names. Ji Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 11 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 K. Coating systems applied at the factory shall be protected against damaged during transit, delivery, storage, and erection. Damaged areas shall be refinished as the original so that end of the Project the finish will be in perfect shape. L. The following items shall receive factory applied coatings: a. Electrical panels, motor control centers,transformers, and related items. b, Light fixtures. C. Pressure gauges. d. Instrumentation. 3.6 SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATING SCHEDULE A. Cast-in Place Concrete Walls and Ceilings, Precast Concrete Surfaces, Equipment Bases, Pipe Supports, and Similar Surfaces, all with "smooth rubbed finish," Interior, Non-submerged, where painting is specified: 1. Surface preparation: SSPC-SP13 Surface Preparation of Concrete. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a, Tnemec: 1) Primer: 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline - 1 coat, 5.0 MDF. 2) Finish: 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline - 1 coat,4.0 MDF. b, Carboline: 1) Primer: Carboline 890- 1 coat, 5.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Carboline 890- 1 coat,4.0 MDF. C. PPG: 1) Primer: Amercoat 385 - 1 coat, 5.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Amercoat 385 - 1 coat,4.0 MDF. d, Valspar: 1) Primer: 89 Series- 1 coat-5.0 MDF. 2) Finish: 89 Series- 1 coat-4.0 MDF. I New and Existing Concrete, Exposed, Exterior, Not Submerged or Not Intermittently Submerged where painting is required. 1, Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13 Surface Preparation of Concrete. 2. Product and Manufacturer: a, Tnemec: 1) Finish: Series 52 Tneme-Crete, 1 coat, 9.0 MDF. b. Carboline: 1) Primer: 954HB, 1 coat, 120 sf. ft/gallon. 2) Finish: 954HB, 1 coat, 9.0 MDF. C. PPG: 1) Primer: Amerlock 400, 1 coat, 9.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Amercoat 450HS, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. d. Valspar: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 12 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 1) Finish: 46 Series V-Fill, 1 coat, 9.0 MDF. Concrete Block Walls and Cast-In-Place Concrete not conforming to smooth rubbed finish, Interior,where painting is specified: 1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13 Surface Preparation of Concrete. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a, Tnemec: 1) Primer: 54-660 Epoxy Polyamide Masonry Filler - 1 coat, 100 square feet per gallon for lightweight and haydite block. 2) Finish: 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline- 2 coats, 5.0 MDF per coat. b. Carboline: 1) Primer: Carboguard 954HB- 1 coat, 85-125 sf/gallon. 2) Finish: Carboline 890-2 coats, 5.0 MDF per coat. C, PPG: 1) Primer: Amerlock 400BF, Epoxy Block Filler- 1 coat, 100 sf/gallon. 2) Finish: Amercoat 385 -2 coats, 5.0 MDF per coat. d. Valspar: 1) Primer:46-x-29 1 coat, 100 square feet per gallon. 2) Finish: 89 Series-2 coats, 5.0 MDF per coat. D. Concrete Floors and Walks, Interior,where painting is required: L. Surface preparation: Acid etch. . Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Primer: Series 203 Enviroprime LV- 1 coat, 3.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Series 280 Tneme-Glaze - 1 coat, 4.0 MDF. Add 5 pounds of 50 mesh dry wash silica sand to topcoat to provide a non-skid surface in walkway areas. b. Carboline: 1) Primer: Carboline 1340 clear- 1 coat, 3.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Carboline 890 - 1 coat, 4.0 MDF with clean, dry sand broadcast into the film and back rolled to encapsulate. C. PPG: 1) Primer: Nu-Klad 105A, - 1 coat, 250-400 square feet per gallon theoretical. 2) Finish: Amershield-1 coat,5.0 MDF. Add 5 pounds 50 mesh dry wash silica sand to topcoat to provide a non-slip surface for walkway areas. d. Valspar: 1) Primer: 89 Series 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 2) Finish: 89 Series w/sand 2 coats, 2.0 MDF per coat. E. Submerged or intermittently submerged Concrete, Interior and Exterior, except for potable water service, and where special protective coatings are required: 1. Surface Preparation: Remove all surface contaminates such as old coatings, loose PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 13 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 concrete, chemical salts, dust, etc., by brush-blast cleaning as required; remove all grease, oils, and grime by washing with an emulsifying alkaline base cleaner; follow with through rinsing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Finish: 46-H-413 Tneme-Tar, 1 coat, 16 MDF per coat. b. Carboline: 1) Finish: Carbomastic 300, 2 coats, 8-10 MDF per coat. C. PPG: 1) Finish: Amercoat 78HV Coal Tar Epoxy, 2 coats, 8-10 MDF per coat. d. Valspar: 1) Finish: 64-J-5 Coal Tar Epoxy, 2 coats, 8-10 MDF per coat. F. Masonry, Exterior,where painting is required: L Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP7 Brush off Blast Cleaning. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Finish: Series 52 Tneme-Crete, 2 coats, 8.0 MDF per coat. b. Carboline: 1) Primer: 954HB, 1 coat, 120 sf/gallon. 2) Finish: 954HB, 2 coats, 35-45 sf/gallon depending on texture. C. PPG: 1) Primer: Amerlock 400 primer, 1 coat, 8 MDF. 2) Finish: Amercoat 450HS, 2 coats, 2.0-3.0 MDF per coat. d. Valspar: 1) 46 Series V-Fill & Finish, 2 coats, 8.0 MDF per coat. Ferrous Steels including Structural Metal Bar Joists, Miscellaneous Metals and Piping, including piping to be insulated, Interior: L Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. 2, Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Shop Primer: Series 37H Chem-Prime, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 2) Shop Primer for Bar Joists: Series 37H Chem-Prime, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. ) Field primer or field touch-up: Series 37H Chem-Prime, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 4) Finish: Series 66 Epoxoline, 1 coat, 4.0 MDF. b. Carboline: 1) Shop primer for bar joists, field primer or touch-up: Rustbond Penetrating Sealer, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Carboline 890, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 14 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 C, PPG: 1) Shop primer: Amercoat 68HS, 1 coat, 3.0 MDF. 2) Shop primer for Bar Joists, Field, or Field touch-up is the same as the shop primer. ) Finish: Amercoat 385 Polyamide Epoxy, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. d, Valspar: 1) Primer: 13-R-28 Phenolic-Alkyd Primer, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 2) Finish: 89 Series- 1 coat,4.0 MDF. H, Ferrous Metals Encased in Concrete, Plaster, Fireproofing and Similar Materials: 1, Surface preparation: SSPC SP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a, Tnemec: 1) Shop Primer and Field Touch-up: Series 46H-413 red, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. b, Carboline: 1) Shop Primer and Field Touch-up: Carboline GH818 Red, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. C. PPG: 1) Shop Primer and Field Touch-up: Amercoat 5105, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. d. Valspar: 1) Shop Primer and Field Touch-up: 13-4-78 Primer, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 1 Verify the compatibility of primer with fireproofing manufacturer. I. Ferrous Metals, Interior and Exterior, Submerged or Intermittently Submerged, except in potable water: 1, Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10, Near-White Blast. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Shop Primer: Series 66 Hi-Build, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: 46-H-413 Tneme-Tar, 1 coat, 16.0 MDF per coat, b, Carboline: 1) Shop Primer: Carboline 893, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Bitumastic 300M, 2 coats, 8.0 MDF per coat. C, PPG: 1) Shop Primer: Amercoat 370 Polyamide Epoxy Primer, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Amercoat 78HB Coal Tar Epoxy,applied in 1 or 2 coats cross hatched to achieve 16 MDF for the Coal Tar Epoxy. d, Valspar: 1) Shop Primer: 89 Series Epoxy or 64-R-3, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: 64-J-5 Coal Tar Epoxy, 2 coats, 8.0 MDF per coat. J. All surfaces in contact with potable water: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 15 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Surface Preparation: a. Interior Ferrous Metals, submerged or intermittently submerged: 1) SSPC-SP10, Near White Blast. b. Interior Ferrous Metals dry: 1) SSPC-SP6, Commercial Blast. Cl Concrete: 1) Brush Blast. 2. Products and Manufacturer: a. Tnemec: 1) Primer:Series 20-1255 Pota Pox Primer, 1 coat, 5.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Series 20-2000 Pota Pox Finish, 1 coat, 5.0 MDF. b. Or approved equivalent by named manufacturers. K. Ferrous Metals, Exterior: 1. Shop Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. 2. Field Surface Preparation: Sandblasting of field welds and other imperfections. ENGINEER may require all areas to be blasted at his discretion, in accordance with SSPC-SP6, commercial blast. 3. Products and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Shop Primer: Series 66 Epoxoline, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 2) Field Primer: Series 66 Epoxoline, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 3) Finish: Series 74 Endura-Shield, 1 coat, 3.0 MDF. b. Carboline: 1) Shop Primer: Carboline 893, 1 coat, 3.0 MDF. 2) Field Primer: Carboline 893, 1 coat, 3.0 MDF. 3) Finish: Carboline 134, 2 coats, 1.5 MDF per coat. C, PPG: 1) Shop/Field primer: Amercoat 385 Polyamide Epoxy 1 coat,4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Amercoat 450HS High Solids Aliphatic Polyurethane, 2 coats, 1.5 MDF per coat. d. Valspar: 1.) 89 Series, 1 coat, 2.5 MDF. 2) 89 Series, 1 coat, 2.5 MDF. 3) V40 Series Urethane, 2 coats, 1.5 MDF per coat. L. Galvanized Metal and Non-Ferrous Metal, Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Solvent Cleaning, SPPC-SP1. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Finish: 66 Epoxoline, 1 coat, 5.0 MDF. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 16 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 b, Carboline: 1) Finish: Carboline 890, 1 coat, 5.0 MDF. C, PPG: 1) Finish: Amercoat 385 Polyamide Epoxy, 1 coat, 5.0 MDF. d. Valspar: 1) Finish: 89 Series, 1 coat, 5.0 MDF. M, Galvanized Metal and Non-Ferrous Metal, Exterior,where painting is required: L Surface Preparation: Solvent Cleaning, SSPC-SP1. 2, Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Primer: 66 Epoxoline, 1 coat, 4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Series 71 Endura-Shield, 1 coat, 1.5 MDF. b, Carboline: 1) Primer: Carboline 893, 1 coat, 4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Carboline 134, 1 coat, 1.5 MDF. C, PPG: 1) Primer: Amercoat 385 Polyamide Epoxy, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Amercoat 450HS High Solids Aliphatic Polyurethane, 1 coat, 1.5 MDF. d. Valspar: 1) Primer: 89 Series, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: V40 Series, 1 coat, 1.5 MDF. N, Galvanized Ferrous Metal, Interior, Non-Ferrous Metal Submerged or Intermittently Submerged: L Surface Preparation: Solvent Cleaning SSPC-SP1 or hand tool clean, SSPC-S82,to remove insoluble contaminants. . Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Primer: 66-1211 Epoxoline primer, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. b, Carboline: 1) Primer: Carboline 893, 1 coat, 4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Carboline 890, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. C. PPG: 1) Primer: Amercoat 385 Polyamide Epoxy, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Amercoat 385 Polyamide Epoxy, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. d, Valspar: 1) Primer: 89 Series, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: 89 Series, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 17 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 I Brush all weld seams, rivets, bolt and nuts, etc.with 50 percent thinned solution prior to first full coat. O) All Metal Surfaces Exposed to Temperatures Over 250 degrees F. L. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10 Near-White Blast. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a, Tnemec: 1) Finish: 39-1261 Silicone Aluminum, 2 coats, 1.0 MDF. b. Carboline: 1) Finish: Carboline 4700 Aluminum,- 2 coats, 1.0 MDF per coat. C, PPG: 1) Finish: Amercoat 878 Silicone Aluminum, 2 coats, 1.0 MDF per coat. d. Valspar: 1) 37-A-10 Heat Resisting Aluminum, 2 coats, 1.0 MDF per coat. P. All Aluminum in Contact with Dissimilar Materials: L. Surface Preparation: Remove all foreign matter. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 2 coats,4.0 MDF per coat b. Carboline: 1) Carboline 893, 2 coats,4.0 MDF per coat. C, PPG: 1) Amercoat 385 Polyamide Epoxy, 2 coats,4.0 MDF per coat. d. Valspar: 1) 89 Series, 2 coats,4.0 MDF per coat. e. Sigma: 1) #7456 Hi Build High Solids Epoxy, 2 coats,4 MDF per coat. C1. Mill-Coated Steel Pipe (Exterior): 1, Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10 Near-White Blast Cleaning. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Primer: 66-1211 Epoxoline Primer, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. ) Exterior Finish (UV Exposure): Series 74 Endura-Shield, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. b, Carboline: 1) Primer: Carboline 893, 1 coat, 4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Carboline 890, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. ) Exterior Finish: Similar to TNEMEC. C. PPG: 1) Primer: Amercoat 385 Polyamide Epoxy, 1 coat,4 MDF. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 18 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 2) Finish: Amercoat 385 Polyamide Epoxy, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. 3) Exterior Finish: Similar to TNEMEC. d. Valspar: 1) Primer: 89 Series, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: 89 Series, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. ) Exterior Finish: Similar to TNEMEC. I Plaster and Dry Wall Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Sand and seal. . Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Primer: 51-792 PVA Sealer, 1 coat, 1.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 2 coats,4.0 MDF per coat. b, Carboline: 1) Primer: Carboline 120, 1 coat, 1.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Carboline 890, 2 coats,4.0 MDF per coat. C, PPG: 1) Primer: Amerlock 400 High-Solids Epoxy Coating, 1 coat, 4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Amerlock 400 High-Solids Epoxy Coating, 2 coats,4.0 MDF per coat. d. Valspar: 1) Primer: 79-W-9 thinned 25 percent, 1 coat, 1.0 MDF. 2) Finish: 89 Series, 2 coats,4.0 MDF per coat. S. Wood Surfaces, Interior and Exterior: 1. Surface Preparation: Sand and seal. . Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Primer: 151 Elasto Grip, 1 coat, 200 to 400 square feet per gallon. 2) Finish: Series 2H Hi-Build Tneme-Gloss, 2 coats, 1.5 MDF per coat. b, Carboline: 1) Primer: Carbocrylic 120, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Carbocrylic 3359, 2 coats, 2.5 MDF per coat. C. PPG: 1) Primer: Amercoat 148 Synthetic Universal Primer, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Amercoat 220, 2 coats, 2.0 MDF per coat. d, Valspar: 1) Primer: 17-10-4 Undercoater, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 2) Finish: 12 Series, 2 coats, 1.5 mils MDF per coat. T. Insulated Ferrous Metal Pipe, Interior,Temperatures below 200oF: 1, Surface Preparation: Solvent Clean, SSPC-SP1. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 19 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Products and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Primer: Series 37H Chem-Prime, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Series 66 Epoxoline, 1 coat, 4.0 MDF per coat. b. Carboline: 1) Primer: Rustland Penetrating Sealer, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Carboline 890, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. C, PPG: 1) Primer: Amercoat 68HS, 1 coat, 3.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Amercoat 385 Polyamide Epoxy, 1 coat,4.0 MDF per coat. d, Valspar: 1) Primer: 13-F-28, 1 coat, 2.0 MDF. 2) Finish: 89 Series, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. U� Exposed Uninsulated PVC Piping and FRP Components, Interior and Exterior where painting is required. 1. Surface Preparation: As recommended by coating manufacturer. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Finish: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. b. Carboline: 1) Finish: Carboline 890, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. C. PPG: 1) Finish: Amercoat 385 Polyamide Epoxy, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. d. Valspar: 1) 89 Series, 1 coat,4.0 MDF. a. A second finish coating of epoxy urethane, 3.0 MDF, shall be applied on all exterior PVC and FRP components (TNEMEC Series 74). Metal Pipe, Interior and Exterior,with Temperatures up to 2502F: L. Surface Preparation: a, Immersion Service: 1) SSPC-SP10 Near-White Blast Cleaning. b, Non-Immersion Service 1) SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. 2. Products and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a, Exterior Surfaces: 1) Tnemec: ,) Primer: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline at 4.0 mils dit. b) Finish: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline at 5.0 mils dit. c) Finish (UV Exposure): Series 74 Endura-Shield, 4 mils dit. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 20 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 2) Carboline: a) Primer: Carboline 893 at 3.0 mils dit, 1 coat. b) Finish: Carboline 890 at 4.0 mils dit, 1 coat. c) Finish (UV Exposure): Similar to TNEMEC above. ) PPG: a) Primer/Finish: Amerlock 400 High Solids Epoxy Coating at 5.0 mils dit, 1 coat. b) Finish (UV Exposure): Similar to TNEMEC above. 4) Valspar: a) 37A10 at 2 mils dit, 1 coat. b) Finish (UV Exposure): Similar to TNEMEC above. b. Interior Surfaces (SP10 Surface Preparation): 1) Tnemec: a) Primer:Tnemec 120-5002 at 15 mils dit, 1 coat. b) Finish:Tnemec 120-5001 at 15 mils dit, 1 coat. 2) Or Approved Equivalent. W. For Interior Concrete Floors (sealed): 1. Glidden: a, Manufacturer's standard "water clear" emulsion-type breathing coating of acrylic resins (based on methyl methacrylate) in water recommended by manufacturer for application to interior concrete as a water-repellent coating; minimum 20 percent solids content. b. Ashford Formula manufactured by Cure-Crete Chemical Company to seal and harden concrete floor. All outdoor fiberglass items including FRP protective tank shell on steel tanks, and structural components shall be coated as follows: 1. Surface Preparation: a, Brush off cleaning, SSPC-SP7. b. Solvent cleaning, SSPC-SP1. . Products and Manufacturer: a. Tnemec: 1) Primer: Series 66-Highbuild Epoxoline, 3.0-4.0 dry mils dit. Broom surface after coating has cured. 2) Intermediate coat: Series-Highbuild Epoxoline, 3.0-4.0 dry mils dit. ) Finish: Series 75-Endura Shield, 3.0-5.0 mils dit. b, Caroline, Valspar, PPG and Sigma equivalent coatings. I The intent of this coating specification is to obtain a polyurethane top coat for UV protection and cosmetic purposes. Primer and intermediate coats, as well as initial surface preparation shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer for proper adhesion and serviceability on the fiberglass items to be painted. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 21 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A� CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the following testing during coating operations: 1. Prior to start and during the coating application each day,temperature and humidity readings will be obtained. If the values obtained are not within the recommended temperature and humidity range described herein or as required by the coating manufacture,the coating application will not be allowed. 2. Periodically check the wet film thickness during coating applications. 3. Prepared records of the above tests and readings. P. Testing Agency: OWNER will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (MDF) readings will be obtained after each coat of paint has been applied, and after final coat has been applied. A test will be made for every 25 square feet of surface and at locations designated by the ENGINEER. A minimum of three readings of the area around the location will be obtained. If the average of these readings indicates the MDF for the final coat is below the specified minimum, CONTRACTOR shall apply another coat in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2. The interiors of liquid containing structures and tanks will be tested for holidays after final coat application. Areas found to be defected shall have an additional coat applied. C. The coating system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. When this occurs,the ENGINEER will specify corrective measures.The coating system will be retested,with the additional expense occurred charged to the CONTRACTOR. Refer to 0140 00 for addition information regarding retesting and reinspection and 0170 00 for correction of work. D, Testing of Paint Materials: OWNER reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as OWNER deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. OWNER will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of CONTRACTOR. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product requirements. 1 OWNER may direct CONTRACTOR to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. CONTRACTOR shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. CONTRACTOR will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 COLOR CODING FOR PIPE A, Comply with the requirements of the TCEQ as defined by Section 217.329 of the Texas Administrative Code. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 22 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 I See Schedule A in Section 10 90 00. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A, At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. 0. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D, At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. E. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. F. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. Upon completion of the work remove all staging and scaffolding. Dispose of all sand, containers, ad rubbish in a suitable manner. Remove overspray, paint spots, oil, or stains on adjacent surfaces. Leave the entire Project clean and acceptable. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 23 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 24 OF 24 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 10 14 19 SAFETY SIGNS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish all labor, materials,tools, equipment, and perform all work and services for furnishing and installing safety signage as shown on the drawings and as specified. 2. Provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items, including connections and mounting hardware, necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section 10 14 19 "Safety Signs" for street and highway control devices. 2. Division 10 Section 10 90 00 "Identification, Stenciling, and Tagging" for signage for interior and exterior of buildings and structures, such as facility identification signs; room, access, and other related signage. 1.3 ALLOWANCES A. Delete if a safety signage allowance is not required and all signs can either be listed or shown on the Drawings. B. Except where specifically designated on the Drawings or in the Specifications,the type, number, and locations of signs shall be determined by the OWNER. C. The CONTRACTOR shall include an allowance in the Base Bid of$5,000 for safety sign materials either not listed in the Safety Sign Schedule or indicated in the Drawings. Labor for sign installation, costs for ordering and accepting delivery, as well as overhead and profit shall be included in the Base Bid and shall not be part of the Allowance. 1.4 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A13.1—Schemes for the Identification of Piping Systems 2. Z53.1—Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards B. Federal Specification (FS): 1. L-P-387A(1) Plastic Sheet, Laminated,Thermosetting (For Designation Plates) C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 49-75 Hazardous Chemical Data 2. 704-90 Standard System for the Identification of the Fire Hazards of Materials D. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA): 1. §1910.144 Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 10 14 19-PAGE 1 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SAFETY SIGNS SEPTEMBER 2025 2. §1910.145 Specifications for accident Prevention Signs and Tags 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Safety signage shall be installed at non-potable water locations, equipment that automatically starts, covers for rotating machinery, electrical control centers,firefighting apparatus locations, eye and noise protection, hazardous material locations, chlorine and chemical areas, and other designated locations. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit copies of manufacturer's technical brochure including color chart and list of standard signs. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following available manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation, Milwaukee, WI 2. Seton Name Plate Corp., New Haven, CT 2.2 SAFETY SIGNS A. Plastic Signs (Type A): 1. 60-mil rigid plastic for indoor/outdoor use, endures temperatures of-40 degrees F to 176 degrees F. 2. Rounded corners with mounting holes. B. Signs, Self-Sticking(Type B): 1. Flexible 4-mil peel and stick vinyl for indoor/outdoor use, endures temperatures of- 40 degrees F to 176 degrees F. 2. Adhesive backing shall adhere quickly and firmly to smooth surfaces. C. Fiberglass Signs (Type Q 1. Material: Multi-ply laminated fiberglass, minimum 0.100-inch thick,with guaranteed not to chip, fade, rust, shatter, or peel for 15 years. 2. Message encapsulated between two clear weather-resistant surface layers. 3. Indoor/outdoor use endures temperatures of-40 degrees F to 190 degrees F and graffiti resistance. D. Metal Signs (Type D): 1. Material: Silk-screened, baked enamel finish or synthetic film laminate, 0.040 aluminum panels. 2. Round-cornered and punched for application to wall surfaces. E. Painted Signs (Type E): 1. Stencils: Standard stencils prepared with letter sizes complying with PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 10 14 19-PAGE 2 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SAFETY SIGNS SEPTEMBER 2025 recommendations in ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 1-1/4 inches for ducts, and 3/4 inch for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 2. Material: Fiberboard. 3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd-gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 4. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. F. Exit Signs (Type F): 1. Material: Plastic, 1/8-inch (minimum)thickness. 2. Description: 6-inch high, 3/4-inch stroke, red letters on white background. 3. Illumination: As required by applicable jurisdictional agency fire code. 4. Available Manufacturers: a. Brady Corporation, Milwaukee, WI b. Seton Name Plate Corp., New Haven, CT G. Safety Sign Message: 1. Consists of two parts:the OSHA Heading and the Specific Message. 2. OSHA Heading will consist of one of the following: a. DANGER. White letters on red oval surrounded by a rectangular black field. b. NOTICE. White letters on a blue field. C. SAFETY FIRST. White letters on a green field. d. CAUTION. Yellow letters on a black field. e. RADIATION.Yellow letters on a purple field. f. THINK. White letters on a green field. g. BE CAREFUL. White letters on a green field. 3. Safety signs shall comply with the requirements of OSHA 1920.145 with respect to size, color, and symbols. 4. Information regarding message, location, and related items shall be shown on the Drawings or in the Sign Schedule at end of the SectionEXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Safety Signage: Provide and install at the following locations as applicable: 1. Non-potable Water Faucets: CAUTION/Do Not Drink Water. 2. Automatic Equipment Operation: CAUTION/Equipment Starts and Stops Automatically. 3. Electrical Entrance and Fence Surrounding Electrical Equipment: DANGER/ High PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 10 14 19-PAGE 3 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SAFETY SIGNS SEPTEMBER 2025 Voltage. 4. Safety Shower: EMERGENCY/Safety Shower Keep Area Clean. 5. Fence Surrounding Property: NOTICE/No Trespassing. 6. Adjacent to Vertical Ladders: SAFETY FIRST/Remember Wear Safety Harness. 7. No Smoking: At designated locations. B. Warning Labels: Apply warning labels to equipment, machinery, electrical equipment, storage containers, and related items to the items as designated below. Label size shall be according to the space available. Do not apply label to concrete or masonry surfaces, use Type A or C signs. 1. Electrical Disconnects: DANAGER/480 Volts (Provide correct voltage or use High Voltage). 2. Equipment Belt Guards: CAUTION/Keep Guard in Place. 3. Flammable Material Storage: Flammable Liquids. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 10 14 19-PAGE 4 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 SAFETY SIGNS SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 10 90 00 IDENTIFICATION,STENCILING,AND TAGGING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials,tools, equipment, and perform all work and services for all identifications, stenciling and tagging as shown on the drawings and as specified. B. Items include but are not necessarily limited to the following areas of work: 1. Paint and provide identification signs for all exposed piping, ductwork, and conduits. 2. Provide identification tags and stenciling for all equipment,valves, instrumentation, and electrical components, including existing equipment and valves. Specific valve and equipment tag information shall be furnished by the OWNER. C. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified, all supplementary or miscellaneous items, including connections and mounting hardware, necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation shall be furnished and installed as part of this work. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment and valves including mechanical, process, electrical, and instrumentation are required to be identified. P. Unless otherwise specified, openings, accesses and related locations are required to be identified. Coordination, development, and initiation of identification, marking, and tagging systems and determination of separation of subcontractor's and manufacturer's corresponding responsibilities is the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. D. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1, ANSI A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2. Great Lakes- Upper Mississippi River Board of State Sanitary Engineers (Ten States Standards). Recommended Standards of Waste Treatment Works latest edition, Recommended Color Scheme for Piping.Three Great Lakes- Upper Mississippi River Board of State Sanitary, 1968 Edition,Addendum No. 6, Painting of Water Works Piping for Public Water Supplies. 3. OSHA 1910.144, Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards. 4o SSPC Volume 2,System and Specifications, Surface Preparation Guide and Paint Application Specifications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit identification register acknowledging all designated or scheduled equipment, instruments, gauges,valves, HVAC equipment, mechanical and electrical equipment. All items on register shall be tagged. Numbering system will be as shown on P&ID drawings. B. Develop and submit full identification register acknowledging equipment,valves, PLUMMER ASSOCIATES INC. 10 90 00-PAGE 1 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 IDENTIFICATION,STENCILING,AND TAGGING SEPTEMBER 2025 instruments, mechanical equipment and electrical equipment which is not designated or scheduled in drawings and specifications. Provide identifications compatible but not conflicting with designated or scheduled equipment and related items. All items on register shall be tagged. C. Submit assurances that subcontractors and manufacturers have been advised of register requirements. D, Update identification register immediately prior to final acceptance of work. E. Pipe Markers and Safety Signs: 1. Submit for approval samples of each type of marker and sign specified. 2. Submit copies of manufacturer's technical brochure including color chart and list of standard signs. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. Seton Identification Products. 3. Or approved equal. I General: 1. Pipe marker and safety sign materials shall withstand normal washing as required to remove grease, oil, chemicals, etc.,without showing discoloration, loss of gloss, staining or other damage. 2. Piping markers shall be formed from laminated plastic. All printing shall be sealed with a formed butyrate plastic film. Markers for piping up to 6-inch diameter shall be pre-formed to completely wrap around the pipe requiring no adhesive. Markers for pipes over 6-inch diameter shall be performed to the contour of the pipe and attached with stainless steel spring fastener. 3. Each marker shall consist of at least one legend descriptive of the function of the pipe, as listed in Schedule A, and a directional arrow. 4. The size of lettering and marker shall conform to ANSI A13.1. 5. Location of markers: a. Adjacent to each valve and "T" connection. b. At each branch and riser takeoff. e, At each pipe passage through a wall,floor and ceiling. d. On all horizontal and vertical pipe runs at 20-foot intervals. 6. Safety signs shall be 18 inches by 24 inches formed from semi-rigid butyrate or polyethylene. They shall be attached with 4 stainless steel screws or similar fastener for substrate. 2.2 COLORS AND FINISHES A. Color Schedule: Paint colors will be selected by the ENGINEER from the approved PLUMMER ASSOCIATES INC. 10 90 00-PAGE 2 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 IDENTIFICATION,STENCILING,AND TAGGING SEPTEMBER 2025 manufacturer's color chips. I Color Coding: In general, all color coding of piping, ducts and equipment shall comply with applicable standards of ANSI A13.1 and OSHA 1910.144 and shall meet the TCEQ requirements of 30 TAC 217. 2.3 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS A. Tagging system and stenciling system shall be selected by the CONTRACTOR. Valve tags shall include identification number, process,valve type, direction to open and number of turns to open. P. Tagging of Equipment: L. Yard Valves: Identify with brass marking plate (minimum 1/8-inch thick)with embedment for placement in concrete. . Yard Slide Gates: Provide stainless steel plates with black enamel filled embossed lettering. Provide minimum plate of 2-1/2 inches with minimum letter height of 2 inches. Attach to gate frames at visible location by stainless steel fasteners. 1 Process valves, mechanical valves, instrumentation, and mechanical and process equipment(interior/exterior): a, Provide minimum 2-1/2-inch stainless steel plate with black enamel filled lettering. b. Attach to valves by nylon strap or stainless steel nonremovable beaded chains or to equipment by stainless steel fasteners. C. Provide general color scheme of tagging for listed items with black letter and numbers on background as follows: 1) Instrumentation tags-White 2) Process valves and equipment tags- Red ) Water valves tags- Blue 4) Mechanical valve and equipment tags-Green 5) Electrical equipment-Yellow 4. Electrical Equipment: Observe requirements and provisions stated in Division 26 of these specifications. Identification of piping, process tanks, galleries, pits, chemical liquid or solid storage tanks and silos, storage vessels, air ducts and similar items. 1. Use Tagging Systems by W. H. Brady Company, as follows: a. Vinyl film cloth for interior non-insulated piping systems (Category B-500). b. Thin film for insulated piping systems (Category B-350). C, All weather film for outdoor exposed piping(Category B-350). Provide flow arrows, banding tape, and numbering and lettering of same materials for corresponding applications. 2. Use stenciling systems in accordance with accepted practices. 1 Tagging and stenciling letter and number heights shall be: a, Minimum 1/2 inch for piping less than 1-inch diameter. b. Minimum 1-1/8 inches for piping 1 inch to 3-inch diameter. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES INC. 10 90 00-PAGE 3 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 IDENTIFICATION,STENCILING,AND TAGGING SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Minimum 2-1/4 inches for piping greater than 3-inch diameter to 24-inch. d. Minimum 3-1/2 inches for piping greater than 24-inch diameter and all process tanks,galleries, pits, chemical, liquid, or solid storage tanks and silos, storage vessels, mechanical heat exchangers, ducts, blowers, and similar related items. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Protected printed surfaces and adjacent work and materials by suitable covering during progress of work. B. Insure hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures,finished work and similar items are removed or protected. C. Paint or apply not less than one band on any length of pipe. Follow a clean-cut line around entire pipe. U. Install piping markers and safety signs only after all painting and finish work has been completed. This does not include temporary"wet paint" or construction safety signs. E. Provide arrows and identification stickers: 1. At 20'-0" maximum centers along continuous lines. At changes in direction (route),valves, risers,joints, machinery, or equipment. 1 Where pipes, ducts pass through floor,wall, ceiling, cladding assemblies and the like obstruction on both sides of assembly. 4. Apply markers on both sides of pipe and where view is not obstructed. 5. Arrow markers must point away from pipe markers and in flow direction, if flow in both directions use double-headed arrow markers. F, Identify piping and ductwork including interior or exterior, exposed or covered, insulated or not, including pipes and ducts in open or covered floor or ceiling ducts or spaces. G, Apply tapes in uniform manner and parallel to piping and ducts. 3.2 ATTACHMENTS A. Schedule A—Piping and Sign Color Code 0161 • a • � —4 . . 1 L, w[citels] r, • • . • , WATER Raw Water Tan Black Yellow Air Conditioning Water Blue White Green Domestic Hot Water Blue w/ Black Yellow 6" Red Bands Plant Purple Black Green Water/Reclaimed/NPW Potable Water Light Blue Black Green PLUMMER ASSOCIATES INC. 10 90 00-PAGE 4 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 IDENTIFICATION,STENCILING,AND TAGGING SEPTEMBER 2025 Effluent after clarification Dark Green Black Green AIR AND GAS Blower Air Green White Blue Chlorine Gas Yellow Yellow Black Compressed Air Light Green Yellow Black Instrument Air Light Green w/ Dark Green Bands Mixed Gas Red Black Yellow Natural Gas Red Black Yellow Propane Gas Red Black Yellow Sulfur Dioxide Lime Green Black Yellow Yellow Bands Sludge Gas, HP Red Black Yellow Sludge Gas, LP Red Black Yellow Waste Gas Red Black Yellow Blower Lube White White Blue Grease White Black Green Foul (odorous)Air Beige Yellow Black Oxygen Gas N/A Green White Ozone Stainless steel White Bands CHEMICALS Aluminum Sulfate Black (Solution) Yellow w/ Green Bands Yellow Aluminum Sulfate (Liquid) Yellow w/ Black Yellow Orange Bands Chlorine Liquified Yellow Black Yellow Chlorine Solution Yellow Black Yellow Black Ferric Chloride Light Brown w/ Red Bands Yellow Ferric Sulfate Brown w/ Yellow Bands Ferric Sulfide Yellow Black Yellow Ferrous Chloride Yellow Black Yellow Sodium Hypochlorite Yellow Black Yellow Sulphur Dioxide Lime Green w/ Black Yellow Yellow Bands Polymer White w/ Green Bands PROCESS Grit Brown Black Green Groundwater Drain Tan White Black Drain Green Black Green Scum Brown Brown Green Sewage Gray Black Green Sludge Brown Black Green PLUMMER ASSOCIATES INC. 10 90 00-PAGE 5 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 IDENTIFICATION,STENCILING,AND TAGGING SEPTEMBER 2025 Digester Tank Vent Brown Black Green Oxygenated Wastewater Grey White Green VENTS High and Low Yellow Black Yellow Temperature B. Colors listed above shall be similar to the following standard colors by Tnemec Company: 1. Light Blue: 17BL "Horizon Blue" 2. Blue: 59HT "Safety Blue" 3. Red: 06SF "Safety Red" 4o Gray: 33GR "Gray" 5. Green: BS28 "Safety Green" & Lime Green: 46GN "Limeade" 7. Light Green 09SF "Spearmint/Safety Green" 8. Tan: 68BR "Twine" 9. Yellow: 02SF "Safety Yellow" 1C. White: OOWH "White" 11. Purple: 13SF "Purple Mountain's Majesty" 12. Brown: 15SF "Safety Brown" 1 . Light Brown: 06BR "Amber Canyon" END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES INC. 10 90 00-PAGE 6 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 IDENTIFICATION,STENCILING,AND TAGGING SEPTEMBER 2025 26 01 26 ELECTRICAL TESTING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, material, equipment and incidentals of a NETA certified independent testing agency. Testing shall be inclusive of all medium voltage and low voltage equipment including conductors for the pump station. Testing shall include all relay protective schemes and operation of the low and medium voltage equipment. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Independent testing agency shall be NETA certified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00, "Document Management" and shall include: A. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REPORT A written report shall be submitted by the testing agency performing installation checks, operation and testing of the medium voltage equipment. This report shall certify that 1)the equipment has been properly installed, 2) is in accurate alignment, 3) meets the acceptance testing specifications of NETA and the equipment manufacturer, and 4) NETA certification of the testing agency. B. ASSESSMENT REPORT A written report shall be submitted by the testing agency performing maintenance checks, operation and testing of the electrical equipment. The report shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. The report shall summarize the results of the analysis and include recommendations of equipment repair or replacement. The report shall also establish a timeframe to repair/replace equipment by giving a target date. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Standards for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) Electrical Testing 26 01 26- 1 2.00 EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. Perform all testing identified in the latest edition of NETA Standard for Accepting Testing Specifications B. All testing shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative. Types of equipment required to be tested by these specifications shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Low voltage cables 2. Grounding 3. CT's 4. Surge arresters 5. 600V VFD's C. All testing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for energization and start-up of the equipment. D. Testing shall include a complete functionality testing of electrical equipment under all the different operating parameters identified by the OWNER and ENGINEER. E. Testing shall be in accordance with NETA Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications, latest edition. F. The following is a listing of the major equipment test to be performed. 1. Low Voltage Cables a. Insulation -resistance test. 2. 600V VFD's a. Bolted Connections resistance test and torque verifications b. Operation and sequence testing for electrical and mechanical interlocks c. Perform ground system cable testing. 3. Surge Arresters a. Doble Test END OF SECTION Electrical Testing 26 01 26-2 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for complete and operational electrical systems, as specified herein. B. This Section, as well as Division 01, incorporate to all other Sections in Division 26, and shall be considered a part of each of those Sections as if written in their entirety. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Contractors' Qualifications: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen,trained and experienced in their crafts, and who are familiar with the specifications and methods of performing the work in this Division. B. Workmanship: Work shall be performed in accordance with quality, commercial practices. The appearance of finished work shall be of equal importance with its operation. Materials and equipment shall be installed based upon the actual dimensions and conditions at the project site. Locations for materials or equipment requiring an exact fit shall be field measured. Conduit and motors shall be isolated to avoid unacceptable noise levels from objectionable vibrations from all systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in PDF format with proposed items clearly marked. Unmarked submittals shall be rejected. Submittals shall include: 1. Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet, indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as specified. 2. Component drawings showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details. 3. Complete control schematics and point to point wiring diagrams. 4. Unless other additional information is required by the detailed equipment specifications,the following information shall be included for motors: a. Motor identification number and nomenclature as specified. b. Make and motor type. c. Brake horsepower of the motor. d. Locked rotor current at full load. e. Motor efficiency at full load (three-phase motors only). f. Starting torque. g. Method of insulating and impregnating motor coils (three-phase only). h. Speed of the motor at full torque. i. Full load current. Common Work Results For Electrical 26 05 00- 1 j. Service factor. k. Number of poles I. Motor temperature rise measured by resistance over 40 C ambient. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Electrical work shall be executed in accordance with local, State and national codes, ordinances and regulations which have jurisdiction or authority over the work. If the standards and codes conflict with each other, the most stringent shall apply. The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in their entirety: National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) National Electrical Code (NEC) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Uniform Building Code (UBC) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Local Utility Companies Local Electrical Ordinance Rural Electrification Association (REA) Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) Association Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) B. Electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician who holds a valid license in the State of Texas. C. Contractor shall submit the company names of the electrical contractor with the bid documents. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Follow the Manufacturer's directions for the delivery, storage and handling of equipment and materials.Tightly cover equipment and materials and protect it from dirt,water, chemical or mechanical injury and theft. Damaged equipment shall not be acceptable. Upon installation, protect the materials until the work is completed and accepted by the Owner. Common Work Results For Electrical 26 05 00-2 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Permits, licenses and inspections shall be secured and paid for as required by law for the completion of the work. Certificates of approval shall be secured, paid for, and delivered to the Owner before receiving the final acceptance of the work. B. The location of materials, equipment, devices and appliances indicated are approximate and subject to revisions at the time the work is installed.The Contractor shall utilize approved manufacturer shop drawings for final layouts of equipment and raceways. Final location shall be as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. C. Should project conditions require any rearrangement of work, or if equipment or accessories can be installed to a better advantage than the general arrangement of work on the plans,the Contractor shall before proceeding with the work prepare and submit plans of the proposed rearrangement for the Engineer's review and approval. D. Motor Horsepower ratings identified are anticipated ratings. If the actual equipment is a different size,the contractor shall provide the appropriate wiring, conduit, over current protection, starters and accessories for a complete and working system at no cost to the owner. E. All enclosures for equipment unless specifically identified otherwise shall be NEMA 4X, 304 Stainless Steel for exterior installations, NEMA 1 for indoor enclosures. 2.00 EXECUTION 2.01 INSTALLATION A. Maintain the waterproof integrity of conduit penetrations through the roof, exterior walls and floors. B. Submit location drawings and obtain Engineer approval prior to installing conduit penetrations through slabs, beams, and walls. The complete installation shall be watertight and the fire rating of penetrations through walls,floors and ceilings shall be maintained. C. Install steel reinforced concrete foundations, (housekeeping pads), below floor mounted switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers,transformers, and other floor mounted electrical equipment. Concrete foundations shall not be less than 4 inches high. Neatly chamfer top edges. Concrete foundations shall be 6 inches wider and 6 inches longer than the base of the equipment being installed. Concrete shall be in accordance with Division 03, and shall be reinforced with a minimum of 6-by-6-inch #6 welded wire mesh. 2.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide adequate support during cutting operations to prevent any damage to the affected masonry. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintels or structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. The cutting of structural members shall not be permitted without the specific written approval of the Engineer. Common Work Results For Electrical 26 05 00-3 2.03 PAINTING A. Painting shall be in accordance with Division 09. Maintain the original factory finish on material and equipment installed, unless specifically indicated on the plans or specifications. If the finish is marred in transit or during installation, re-finish to a neat, workmanlike appearance. Leave equipment and raceway systems clean and free of grease, dirt, rust, and in a suitable condition for painting. 2.04 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING A. Prior to any excavation or trenching, notify the Owner's representative, utility companies and Owner's facilities department. Allow sufficient time for utilities to be located prior to excavation to avoid disruption of services. Provide a minimum of 72 hours written notice to the Owner prior to trenching or excavation. Do not proceed with trenching or excavation until authorized by the Owner. Utilities or services which are damaged, which are identified prior to excavation or trenching, or where confirmation by utility companies has not been obtained verifying that utilities are marked, shall be repaired to operable condition immediately, at no cost to the Owner. B. Barricade open trenches and excavations for the entire duration of the project. Barricades for excavations shall have warning lights maintained during hours of darkness. Trenches shall be marked with warning tape, or access to trenches shall be prohibited with readily identifiable sawhorses, warning tape or other acceptable means. Barriers shall be illuminated or recognizable during hours of darkness. Barriers and tape shall be properly maintained at all times. C. Protect all adjacent work, structures and properties. Damage to adjacent work, structures or properties shall be repaired, or the cost of repair reimbursed in full. D. All construction areas shall be finally graded as indicated on the contract documents or to the conditions of the site prior to construction. Grading shall bring the site back to the existing conditions as close as practical. Turfed areas shall be sodded, or hydro-mulched with matching turf. Landscaping shall be replaced with identical shrubbery,ground cover, or plants as existed. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining water on new turf and landscaping until established. If new turf and landscaping is impractical due to weather conditions, contractor shall provide satisfactory arrangements to have turf and landscaping furnished and installed at the earliest opportunity thereafter. Provide a 90-day warranty on new turf and landscaping. E. Determine if irrigation systems exist prior to trenching and excavation. Obtain record or as- built drawings and locate control wiring and pressure main branches and devices. Determine by actual operation that systems are functional and repair or replace damaged systems to their original condition prior to beginning construction. 2.05 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. The identification of electrical equipment shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify electrical equipment in accordance with the NEC,the local authorities, and as specified. Common Work Results For Electrical 26 05 00-4 B. Use laminated three-ply engraved plastic nameplates with black surface and white interior core, at least 1/16 inch thick. Engraved lettering shall be condensed gothic at least 1/4 inch high and properly spaced for legible and easy reading. Attach plates to equipment with stainless steel screws. Adhesive attachment is only acceptable on NEMA 4X enclosures. Identify the following items with engraved nameplates, located as follows: 1. Each switch/fuse unit or circuit breaker in each main panel and each distribution panel - adjacent to switch/fuse unit or circuit. 2. Spares shall be labeled "Spare". 3. Each branch circuit panel -on panel trim cover immediately above panel door. 4. Each safety disconnect switch, relay cabinet, control panel -on outside of cover. 5. Each exhaust fan switch -custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate (high and low if required). 6. Instrument transmitters and sensors. 7. Each motor starter-on outside cover. 8. Each Variable Frequency Drive. 9. Outside light switches-custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. 10. Any switch for load that cannot be seen from the control point-custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. C. Branch circuit panelboard directories shall be completely and properly typewritten. Cover with plastic and attach to the inside of the cabinet door. Spares shall be labeled as "Spare." D. Refer to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables"for conductor coding requirements. E. Install special custom engraved switch cover plates with engraving on the outside of the cover plate at outside light switches, and at any switch for equipment which is out of sight from the control point. F. Install same brand/manufacturer fittings throughout the project. Install UL listed products. Fasteners, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel. 2.06 LOCKING OF ELECTRICAL FACILITIES A. Install locks immediately upon the installation of the electrical facility. Provide padlocks for exterior electrical facilities subject to unauthorized entry. Furnish the Owner with two keys per lock up to a quantity of 10 keys. Furnish locks to match the Owner's locking system. Key all locks alike. 2.07 ACCESS DOORS A. Wherever access is required in walls, ceilings, or soffits to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes or other electrical equipment, provide and install access doors. Install panels in locations approved by the Engineer. Paint as directed. B. Refer to Division 08 for access door requirements. Common Work Results For Electrical 26 05 00- 5 2.08 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Remove shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from equipment. Remove debris as it accumulates. Upon completion of work, clean electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation. 2.09 TESTING A. See each section for particular testing requirements for each type of equipment. END OF SECTION Common Work Results For Electrical 26 05 00-6 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install 600-volt wires and cables. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical." B. Work shall include building wire, cable, wiring connections and terminations, and modular wiring systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing: Megger test circuits for continuity and ground. Verify phasing at connection points. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to the Manufacturer's recommended values. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA and/or NRTL C. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Div 01 and shall include: 1. Product Data for each type of product 2. Field Test/Quality Control Reports 3. Qualification Data for Testing Agency 1.04 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA)Standards: NEMA WC-3 Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy NEMA WC-5 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver cable and wire to the project site in the original packages. Conductors with damaged insulation or exposed nylon jacketing shall not be permitted. 2.00 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19- 1 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division 2. Alpha Wire 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation 6. Southwire Incorporated 7. Okonite Company(Preferred) B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA 5-95-658. C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA 5-95-658 for Type THHN,Type THWN, and Type XHHW or as indicated on the drawings. D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA 5-95-658 for Tray Cable,Type TC with ground wire. E. Conductors: Soft-drawn, annealed copper with a conductivity of not less than that of 98 percent pure copper bearing the U.L. label. The minimal size shall be#12. F. Single Conductors: Conductor with thermoplastic insulation rated at 600 volts and insulated with type THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation. Wire in light fixture channels and other special locations shall be as specifically noted for temperature in NEC Article 300. G. Ground Wire: Tinned, Class B stranded conductor without insulation H. Paired Shielded Cable: 18 gauge, 7/28 stranded,tinned copper conductors with 0.015-inch extruded PVC; 0.004-inch nylon insulation twisted into pairs, stranded into a core and enclosed by a non-hygroscopic core tape, 100 percent coverage, helically wound, aluminum foil shield, drain wire, and 0.045-inch minimum extruded PVC jacket. Pairs shall be black/red or black/white numbered. Cables shall be 600 volts in accordance with NEC-725 and IEEE 383. I. Triad Shielded Cable (RTD Cable): RTD cable shall have the following characteristics: 1. Eight triads each with three 18 AWG conductors 2. Triads shall each have individual shield and overall shield. 3. Each conductor insulated for 600 V and entire cable rated for 90 C. Primary Insulation 15 mils nominal; PVC;4 mils nylon Number of Conductors 3 Color Code Black and white and red Group Identification Each triad numbered Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2605 19-2 100%coverage; .35 mil aluminum x .5 mil Mylar tape and Pair Shield 20 gauge 7 strand tinned copper drain wire; shield tape to be applied to give a total shield isolation from all other triad shields. Cable Shield 100%coverage; 2.35 mil aluminum Mylar tape shield and an 18 gauge 7 strand tinned copper drain wire. Jacket Black 90 C FR PVC J. Tray Cable: Type TC; multi-conductor cable specifically approved for the installation in cable trays, in accordance with NEC Article 340. Each cable conductor shall be insulated with THHN/THWN or XHHW type insulation rated at 600 volts. The individual conductors shall be twisted together and jacketed with a PVC outer covering containing a U.L. label and necessary identification, including the Manufacturer,the number of conductors, size, insulation type, sun-resistance, and other pertinent information. K. Telephone Wire: Telephone station wire conductors shall be bare solid, annealed copper, 22 AWG insulated with high density polyethylene. Insulated conductors shall be twisted and assembled in a weather and flame resistant compound of polyvinyl chloride. Color coding shall be one red, one green, one yellow, and one black. The wire shall comply with REA Specification PE-20. 2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation 6. NSi Industries LLC 7. O-Z/Gedney: a brand of the EGS Electrical Group 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division 9. Tyco Electronics/ Raychem (Preferred) B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, Ampacity rating, material, type and class for application and service indicated. 2.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2605 19-3 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation. 3.02 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Stranded Copper B. Branch Circuits: Stranded Copper 3.03 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway B. Exposed Feeders:Type XHHW single conductors in raceway C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings,Walls, Partitions and Crawlspaces: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade and Underground: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC F. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade and Underground: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway H. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC 3.04 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Unless necessary for pulling purposes, conductors shall be continuous from terminal block to terminal block without splice. Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. No splicing of conductors shall be performed in any below ground structure. 2. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. Neatly train wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. Pull conductors into a raceway at the same time and use U.L. listed,wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wire. Install raceway first as a complete system without conductors. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place. 3. Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures as follows: a. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers are not acceptable. b. Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 10 AWG and below with legible permanent sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking, Raychem TMS sleeves or approved equal. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19-4 c. Provide tags for cables and for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger consisting of permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the plate. Attach these marker plates to conductors and cables with plastic wire wraps. Tags shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or approved equal. d. Tags shall be imprinted with panelboard and panelboard position number(e.g. LA3- 23)for conductors fed from panelboards. Other conductors shall have tags imprinted with the MCC which feeds the conductors (e.g. MCC 1). e. Switchlegs shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus an "S" suffix. Travelers shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus a "T" suffix. f. Where more than one neutral is present with a group of conductors, a tag shall be applied to each neutral indicating which phase conductors are served by each neutral (e.g. HA-2, 4, 6). 4. Wire other than telephone station wire shall be stranded. The minimum size conductor permitted is#12 AWG, except as specifically indicated on the plans. Wire shall bear the approval of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Conductors terminated on a screw termination shall have a crimp on type spade connector applied on the wire end, Panduit PanTerm or approved equal. 5. Color coding of cables shall comply with the local city codes. In the absence of a local color coding requirement,the following shall be used: a. For 480/277-V, 3-phase wiring: Phase A Brown Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow Neutral Gray Equipment Grounding Conductor Green b. For 208/120 or 240/120-V, 3-phase wiring: Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Equipment Grounding Conductor Green c. For 240/120-V, 1-phase wiring: Leg A Black Leg B Red Neutral White Equipment Grounding Conductor Green Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2605 19- 5 6. Colored, vinyl marking tape shall be allowed only on conductors greater than 8 AWG. Under no condition shall conductors of a different color be spliced together. 7. Grouping conductors together into one conduit shall not be allowed where the plans indicate the conductors to be placed in separate conduits. Each home run shown on the plans shall be in its own conduit. B. Single Conductors: Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made except at outlets. Sufficient wire shall be left at outlets to make connections to equipment without straining. C. Paired Shielded and Triad Shielded Cable: Ground paired shielded and triad shielded cables at the instrument panel end only and insulate from ground elsewhere. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run. The paired shielded and triad shielded cable shall not be laced with or placed in the same conduit with power cables. Each termination of paired shielded or triad shielded cable shall be coated with silicone jelly after termination. The shield of pair shielded cable and triad shielded cable shall only be broken when the conductors are terminated on terminal strips. D. Ground Conductors: 1. Conduits and other raceway shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets, and other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with National Electric Code requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid aluminum conduit. Make connections to equipment with solderless connections. Wire connections to the ground rods of the ground mat shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld process. 2. Ground metallic material, including but not limited to metallic raceway, metallic boxes and metallic enclosures. Where metallic material is not connected by raceway to a solid ground, connect the metallic material to the largest equipment grounding conductor which it houses. Clean the metal surface under the grounding lug to bright metal. Connections to motors shall be to the grounding stud which shall be threaded into the stationary frame; Burndy KC Servit, or approved equal and not an end bell. The ground wire shall not be lugged to a mounting bolt. 3. Ground wire shall be uninsulated tinned copper sized as shown on the plans in all cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate ground wire with insulation as specified for low voltage wire. END OF SECTION Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19-6 26 05 19.01 WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install wire connections and devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical." 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. 600-volt connectors shall comply with the specifications and the following Manufacturers will be acceptable: a. Burndy. b. Thomas& Betts. c. Ideal Industries. d. Ilsco e. Gould Shawmut f. Allen Bradley g. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Div 01 and shall include all applicable wire connectors and devices. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. Connectors, Compression: For splicing and termination; 600-volt wiring; connectors for cable sizes 250 MCM and larger shall be the long barrel type for double indentation (soldered connections shall not be permitted). B. Connectors, 600-Volt Twist-On: Spring insulated, properly sized and resistant to vibration; may be used for No. 14 through No. 10 gauge conductors. C. Connectors, 600-Volt Terminal: Of the appropriate hole sizes and spacing which are in accordance with NEMA standards;two holes in the tongue for use on conductor sizes 250 MCM or larger; not required for connections to the circuit breakers in the lighting and/or receptacle panels. D. 600-Volt Plastic Tape: Minnesota Mining& Manufacturing Company, No. 35. Wire Connections and Devices 26 05 19.01- 1 E. Wirenuts: Buchannan B-Cap, Ideal, ITT or Panduit spring wire connecting devices with plastic covering; shall be reusable after initial installation and removal. 3M Scotchloks shall not be installed on this project. F. Mechanical Set Screw Connector: Blackburn HPS, ADR-ALCUL, GP or GT, Burndy or Ilsco; consisting of an aluminum body which has openings on opposite ends for insertion of the conductors. Conductors inserted into these holes shall each be clamped by two set screws. Connectors shall be suitable for use with copper conductors. G. Rubber Tape: Scotch 2210. H. Vinyl Tape: Scotch 88. I. Insulating Resin: Scotch 3576, 3577, or 3578. J. Power Distribution Blocks: Gould Shawmut, Ilsco or Allen Bradley; rated for 600 VAC and termination of copper conductors. Individual poles shall be constructed of tin plated aluminum and mounted on an insulating base. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Insulate connections made with non-insulated connectors with a minimum of three layers of plastic tape. Half-lap each layer. B. Splice 600-volt conductors in junction boxes or at outlets only. C. For No. 10 and smaller, connect conductors with a twist-on spring wirenut. If a splice or tap is below 3 feet above the final grade,fill the spring connectors with an electrical insulating resin so that conductor and spring materials are encapsulated by the resin. Conductor splices and taps inside the VFD's shall be on the terminal strips or power distribution blocks. D. For No. 8 and larger, connect conductors with a mechanical, set screw type connector. Wrap splices and taps with a single half-lapped layer or rubber tape followed by successive layers of vinyl tape until a vinyl tape layer thickness of twice the original conductor insulation thickness is achieved. If splice or tap is below 3 feet above the finished grade,the tape or splice shall have a final outer coating or insulating resin. E. Furnish and install power distribution blocks as shown on the plans for tapping conductors at their load connection point with conductors of smaller size. Install power distribution blocks with the number of poles and sizes needed for connecting the phase, neutral, and ground conductors. F. Pair shielded cable shield and triad shielded cable (RTD cable)shield shall be broken at terminal strips only. END OF SECTION Wire Connections and Devices 26 05 19.01-2 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete grounding system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical." 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal shall include: 1. Grounding materials, equipment and processes. 2. Product Data: For each type of product supplied. 3. Field quality-control test reports. 4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 5. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Measure the ground grid resistance with the earth test megger and install additional ground rods and conductors as required until the resistance to the ground conforms to National Electrical Code requirements. Ground resistance measurement shall not exceed 5 ohms. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad, having a diameter of 3/4 inch and a minimum length of 10 feet. B. Ground Cables: Stranded, bare tinned copper of 98 percent conductivity and as specified in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Conduit Ground Fittings: Fittings for bonding ground cable to the conduit shall be FCI Burndy Corp.,type NE or Thomas& Betts No. 3951 series or approved equal. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 26 05 26- 1 D. Ground Rod Boxes: Precast Box with cast iron lid. Lid shall read "ground rod" on lid. Brooks Precast Model. "3-RT" or approved equal. Ground rod boxes located in driveway areas shall have an AASHO H-20 rating. E. Ground Plate Electrodes: 20 gauge copper with terminated 2-foot welded pigtail connection. 2.02 PROCESSES A. All grounding system connections to building steel and ground rods shall be exothermically welded including all cable connections, and cable steel terminations. B. All materials involved must be from the same sources to insure compatibility. Connections made from this process shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standards 80 and 837 and as listed in MIL 419 and other standards, National Electrical Code, etc. C. All welding materials used shall be Cadweld Materials—as manufactured by ERICO Products, Inc., or approved equal. 2.03 GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Provide a grounding system that includes all connections and the testing of ground rods, ground cables, ground buses, conduits,fittings, anchor supports,thermite process materials and equipment and other materials required for a complete installation. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted/clamp type connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Exothermically welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Exothermically welded connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermically welded connectors. B. Ground electrical work in accordance with NEC Article 250 and local codes. C. Install ground cables in conduits above grade or directly buried in earth to a depth of not less than 12 inches below grade. Installation to provide sufficient mechanical protection so as not to break ground cables or connections. D. Install ground cables continuously between connections. Splices shall not be permitted, except where indicated on the plans. Where ground cables pass through floor slabs, buildings, etc., and when not in metallic enclosures, provide a sleeve of approved, non- metallic materials. E. Install a green-colored, equipment grounding conductor in raceways. Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 26 05 26-2 F. Where ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete, use standard bare tinned copper cable, in all other cases install a green-colored insulation, equipment grounding conductor in accordance with Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. Provide grounding conductors as required per the NEC. G. Metal conduits stubbed up into switchgear, motor control center or other electrical equipment shall be terminated with insulated grounding bushings and connected to the equipment ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance with applicable sections of the National Electrical Code. H. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC. 2. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure,taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 3. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 4. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. I. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus,to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. J. Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install a copper bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. K. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes 1 foot to 1 foot-2 inches or larger shall have bonding jumpers. Bonding jumpers shall be external, run in parallel (not spiraled) and fastened with plastic tie wraps. L. All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, conduit systems, cable armor, exposed structural steel and all other equipment and materials required by the NEC to be grounded, shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the NEC. Provide grounding and bondingjumpers as required per the NEC. M. Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a conductor sized in accordance with NEC Article 250. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 26 05 26-3 N. Run a grounding cable the full length of each cable tray section and bond to each cable tray section. Provide#4/0 bare copper in cable tray. O. Where exothermic bonding is used, molds shall be of the appropriate size for the wire and rod used. All bonds shall remain exposed for inspection of the Owner's Representative. P. Ground rod shall be installed such that the top of the ground rod is 6 inches below grade and enclosed by a ground rod box. Q. Install#4/0 AWG bare tinned copper ground cable that follows the route of the underground duct banks on top of the duct bank envelop, but in no case is embedded in the concrete. Run ground through the manholes. Tie ground cable to pump station main grounding system at both ends. R. At each convenience outlet, install a grounding clip attached to the outlet box and leave a sufficient length of#12 wire with green-colored insulation to connect to the grounding terminal at the receptacle. S. Signal and Communication Equipment: 1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No.4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location,terminal cabinet,wiring closet, and central equipment location. 2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus. 3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Inspect the grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Use Biddle Direct Reading Earth Resistance Tester or equivalent to measure resistance to ground of the system. Perform testing in accordance with the test instrument manufacturer's recommendation using the fall of potential method in accordance with IEEE 81. C. All test equipment shall be provided under this section and approved by the Engineer. D. Resistance to ground testing shall be performed during dry season. Submit test results in the form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the numerical resistance to ground. E. Testing shall be performed before energizing the distribution system. F. A separate test shall be conducted for each building or system. G. Notify the Engineer immediately if the resistance to ground for any building or system is greater than the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA or less: 5 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity more than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 26 05 26-4 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards serving electronic equipment: 1 ohm. 5. Substations and Pad Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Owner's Representative promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. Provide additional ground rods and conductors as required to bring the resistance to required level. END OF SECTION Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 26 05 26- 5 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install supporting devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical." 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code—Steel". B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified together with Concrete Specifications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Div 01 and shall include all applicable units, materials and appurtenances for the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze Hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel Slotted Channel Systems. Include Product Data for Components. 3. Equipment Supports. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT,ANCHORAGE AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4,factory fabricated components for field assembly. For this project, all steel supports shall be 316 stainless steel or aluminum materials where approved. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Allied Tube&Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29- 1 d. GS Metals Corporation. e. Thomas& Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut;Tyco International, Ltd. (Preferred) g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to M F MA-4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Stainless Steel and aluminum hangers, clamps and associated fittings designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36A 36M, steel plates, shapes and bars; black and hot dipped galvanized. E. Mounting, Anchoring and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-316 stainless steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, steel or wood with tension, shear and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Hilti Inc. (Preferred) b. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. c. MKT Fastening, LLC. d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, 316 stainless steel for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Hilti Inc. (Preferred) d. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29-2 3. Concrete Inserts: Stainless Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, stainless steel type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: 316 Stainless steel Structural type, hex head and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: 316 Stainless steel All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded galvanized steel. 2.02 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions and bare weight of supported equipment. Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacing less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall % Inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps or single bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2 inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in the Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 2001b. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29-3 D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface Mounted Equipment Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard weight concrete, 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25 or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers and other devices on slotted channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Section (05 50 00 ?) "Metal Fabrications"for site fabricated metal supports. B. Cut,fit and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.04 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than the supported unit and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from the edge of the concrete base. B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive strength. Install concrete materials, reinforcement and placement requirements as per drawings and details. C. Anchoring Equipment to Concrete Base: 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings,templates, diagrams, instructions and directions furnished with items to be embedded/mounted. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts in accordance with anchor bolt manufacturer's written instructions. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29-4 3.05 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching-up field painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29- 5 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits,tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits,tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Surface raceways. 6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 43 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems"for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. RGS: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. EMT: Electrical Metalic Tubing. D. RNC: Rigid Non Metallic conduit. E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit F. FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, standard floor boxes, standard hinged-cover enclosures, and standard cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33- 1 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. C. Source quality-control reports. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUITS,TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. 13. Approved Equal B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits,tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. RGS: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum. 3. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-2 G. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum. H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. J. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS,TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp. 6. Carlon 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. Kraloy. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO; a Hubbell company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 13. Approved equal. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits,tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. ENT: Comply with NEMATC 13 and UL 1653. D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-3 F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 65113. H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485. I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14. J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 51413. L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.03 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric—(Preferred). 5. Approved equal. B. Description: Stainless steel, hot dipped galvanized, or aluminum, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250,Type 1,Type 3R,Type 4X, as indicated on drawings unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type NEMA 3R, Screw-cover type NEMA 1, NEMA 4X flanged-and- gasketed as indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.04 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-4 1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 4. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 5. Approved equal. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with stainless steel captive screws. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets. D. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners. E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.05 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a Pentair company—(Preferred). 7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33- 5 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand. 18. Approved equal. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum,Type FD, with gasketed cover. E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep) or 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep). J. Gangable boxes are prohibited. K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250,Types as indicated with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel,finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid Aluminum. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-6 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid Aluminum. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC,Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased. 4. Underground Conduit Stub-ups to Equipment Pads, Concrete Floors or Other: Utilize Long Radius Sweeps for transition from underground ductbank to above ground. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment(Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures,Aboveground: NEMA 250,Type 4X SS as indicated. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum 4. Exposed in Electrical Room: Rigid Aluminum C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm)trade size except for lighting circuit taps not longer than 72". D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid Aluminum Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 2. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm)away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-7 F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits,for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. G. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached or as otherwise dictated by Code. I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm)trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Engineer for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to PVC coated RGS or Rigid Aluminum as per conditions before rising above floor. J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No.4 AWG. M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm)trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm)trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm)trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg)tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-8 each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. R. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm)radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. V. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground aluminum that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Revise list below to include all locations in Project with environmental conditions that require considering expansion-joint fittings in conduit runs. For each Project, consider only locations with PVC conduit with straight-run length exceeding 25 feet (7.6 m) or metal conduit in lengths over 100 feet(30 m). Also revise temperature change for each location so it safely represents conditions anticipated. Temperature-change figures below are examples of maximum total swings from the lowest to the highest environmental temperatures at the indicated types of locations and must be revised to represent temperature swings or changes that may occur at Project locations. b. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. c. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C)temperature change. 2. Install fitting(s)that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s)that provide expansion and Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-9 contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure with stainless steel hardware. Do not support boxes by conduits. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Duct Bank—Install duct bank per drawing and details. B. Direct-Buried Conduit: Not Permitted for this Project 3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4(4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm)above finished grade. D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33- 10 3.05 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 44"Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings,finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33- 11 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for concrete-encased duct banks. 2. Handholes and boxes. 1.03 DEFINITION A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends,fittings, and solvent cement. 3. Accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes, and other utility structures. 4. Warning tape. 5. Warning planks. B. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following: 1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Reinforcement details. 3. Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. 4. Ladder details. 5. Grounding details. 6. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps. 7. Joint details. C. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following: 1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43- 1 2. Cover design. 3. Grounding details. 4. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures. 1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings. 2. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. B. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes, as required by ASTM C 858. C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency. D. Source quality-control test reports. E. Field quality-control test reports. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Comply with ANSI C2. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming. B. Store precast concrete and other factory-fabricated underground utility structures at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible. C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission. 1.09 COORDINATION Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-2 A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field. B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to and handholes, and as approved by Architect. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, insulators, and associated fasteners in quantities equal to 5 percent of quantity of each item installed. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT A. As per section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems". 2.02 HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 1. Color: Green. 2. First option in first subparagraph below facilitates bottom duct entry. Second option may be provided by a separate slab placed in the excavation under an open-bottom enclosure;third option is obtained by molding or fabricating the bottom integrally with the body of the unit. 3. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." Or as indicated for each service. 7. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure,fixed installation in enclosure wall. 8. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure,fixed installation in enclosure wall. B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-3 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation. d. NewBasis. e. Approved equal. C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. Christy Concrete Products. d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast. e. Approved equal. D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of fiberglass. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carson Industries LLC. b. Christy Concrete Products. c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. d. Approved equal. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037. B. Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-4 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or the manufacturer. A City provided qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. 3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION A. Ducts for Electrical Cables Over 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete- encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. C. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. D. Underground Ducts Crossing paved paths, walks, driveways, roadways or railroads: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete. 3.02 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less, Including Telephone, Communications, and Data Wiring: 1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating. 2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77,Tier 15 structural load rating. 3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77,Tier 8 structural load rating. 4. Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf(13 345-N)vertical loading. 3.03 EARTHWORK A. Excavation and Backfill: Do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment. B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed. C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling,fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43- 5 3.04 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to drain in both directions. B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated. C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane. D. Duct Entrances to Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches (250 mm) o.c.for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes. 1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m)from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line. 2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. 3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances. E. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet(3 m) outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to- conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in F. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure. G. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf-(445-N-)test nylon cord in ducts, including spares. H. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators. 1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 2. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation. a. Start atone end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-6 b. If more than one pour is necessary,terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch (19-mm) reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches (450 mm) into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope. 3. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. 4. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 5. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms. 6. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches (50 mm) between ducts for like services, and 4 inches (100 mm) between power and signal ducts. 7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches (600 mm) below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches (750 mm) below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Extend concrete encasement throughout the length of the elbow. 9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete. b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm)from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 10. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES A. Precast Concrete Handhole Installation: 1. Comply with ASTM C 891, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-7 3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,graded from 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) sieve to No. 4(4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure. E. Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. F. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving or earth and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading,form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth. 1. Concrete: 3000 psi (20 kPa), 28-day strength, complying with Section 033000 "Cast-in- Place Concrete," with a troweled finish. 1. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep (250 mm wide by 300 mm deep). 3.07 GROUNDING A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures. 2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-8 3. Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance. 3.09 CLEANING A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner,with graduated washer sizes,through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts. B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material. END OF SECTION Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-9 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Round sleeves. 2. Rectangular sleeves. 3. Sleeve-seal systems. 4. Sleeve-seal fittings. 5. Grout. 6. Pourable sealants. 7. Foam sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical" for additional abbreviations, definitions, submittals, qualifications, testing agencies, and other Project requirements applicable to Work specified in this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ROUND SLEEVES A. Steel Wall Sleeves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Flexicraft Industries. b. GPT; an EnPro Industries company. 2. General Characteristics: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends and integral waterstop. B. PVC Pipe Sleeves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. GPT; an EnPro Industries company. b. Metraflex Company(The). Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 44- 1 2. General Characteristics: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40. C. PVC Molded Sleeves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. ABB, Electrification Business. b. American Polywater Corporation. 2. General Characteristics: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. D. Round, Galvanized-Steel, Sheet Metal Sleeves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Specified Technologies, Inc. 2. General Characteristics: Galvanized-steel sheet; thickness not less than 0.0239 inch; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board. 2.2 RECTANGULAR SLEEVES A. Rectangular, Galvanized-Steel, Sheet Metal Sleeves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Specified Technologies, Inc. b. Wiremold; Legrand North America, LLC. 2. General Characteristics: a. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. b. Minimum Metal Thickness: 1) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inch and with no side larger than 16 inch,thickness must be 0.052 inch. 2) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter not less than 50 inch or with one or more sides larger than 16 inch,thickness must be 0.138 inch. 2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Advance Products&Systems, LLC. 2. American Polywater Corporation. 3. Flexicraft Industries. B. General Characteristics: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable or between raceway and cable. C. Options: Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 44-2 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Holdrite; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation. B. General Characteristics: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit must have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 2.5 GROUT A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Specified Technologies, Inc. 2. W. R. Meadows, Inc. B. General Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors. 1. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. 2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SLEEVES FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade, Non-Fire-Rated, Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: a. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall or floor so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. b. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 07 90 00 "Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking." 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 44-3 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless sleeve-seal system is to be installed or seismic criteria require different clearance. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inch above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Wall Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for wall assemblies. C. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. D. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve-seal systems. Use PVC sleeves where subject to H2S corrossion. Size sleeves to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. E. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: 1. Install steel pipe sleeves with integral waterstops. Size sleeves to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. Install sleeve during construction of floor or wall. 2. Install steel pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. Grout sleeve into wall or floor opening. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF RECTANGULAR SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS A. Install sleeves in existing walls without compromising structural integrity of walls. Do not cut structural elements without reinforcing the wall to maintain the designed weight bearing and wall stiffness. B. Install conduits and cable with no crossings within the sleeve. C. Fill opening around conduits and cables with expanding foam without leaving voids. D. Provide metal sheet covering at both wall surfaces and finish to match surrounding surfaces. Metal sheet must be same material as sleeve. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building. Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 44-4 B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. END OF SECTION 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 44-5 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, are not acceptable. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures as follows: Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53- 1 1. Tags relying on adhesives or tapes-on markers are not acceptable. 2. Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 10 AWG and below with legible permanent sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking, Raychem TMS sleeves or approved equal. 3. Provide tags for cables and for conductors No. 8 AVWG and larger consisting of permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the plate. Attach these marker plates to conductors and cables with plastic wire wraps. Tags shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or approved equal. 4. Tags shall be imprinted with panelboard and panelboard position number(e.g. LA3-23) for conductors fed from panelboards. Other conductors shall have tags imprinted with the MCC which feeds the conductors (e.g. MCC 1). 5. Switchlegs shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus an "S" suffix. Travelers shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus a "T" suffix. 6. Where more than one neutral is present with a group of conductors, a tag shall be applied to each neutral indicating which phase conductors are served by each neutral (e.g. HA-2, 4, 6). 2.02 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by Ito 2 inches wide. 2.03 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE 2.04 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53-2 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches. D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to,the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER- ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING -OSHA REGULATION -AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with stainless steel mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53-3 1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service,feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral: White c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. B. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. C. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive warning labels 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to,the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. D. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. E. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations,terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53-4 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: stainless steel screws and nuts, engraved and laminated nameplates. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment,fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be laminated acrylic or melamine label and placed in a clear plastic sleeve. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Switchgear. d. Switchboards. e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer,feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. f. Motor-control centers. g. Enclosed switches. h. Enclosed circuit breakers. i. Enclosed controllers. j. Push-button stations. k. Contactors. I. Monitoring and control equipment. m. UPS equipment. n. Junction and Pull Boxes. END OF SECTION Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53- 5 26 05 73 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION General: This section specifies that the CONTRACTOR prepare a short circuit and protective device coordination study, and an arc flash hazard analysis for the electrical power system as shown on the plans. NO EQUIPMENT IS TO BE ENERGIZED UNTIL THE POWER SYSTEM STUDIES HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER, THE PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND BREAKERS HAVE BEEN SET PER THE SHORT CIRCUIT AND RELAY COORDINATION STUDY AND THE ARC FLASH LABELS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED ON THE EQUIPMENT. NO EXCEPTIONS. .Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study, and Arc Flash Analysis The studies shall provide an evaluation of the electrical power system and the model numbers and settings of the protective relays or devices and metering or motor monitoring devices for setting by the CONTRACTOR. The Studies shall include settings for all protective relays and electric system monitoring. The Contractor shall obtain any needed data or information for the electrical equipment from Contract Documents, various suppliers, and from conducting his own field investigations. A. Scope: 1. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing all pertinent information necessary for the successful completion of the Short Circuit and Relay Coordination Study, and Arc Flash Analysis. All cable and raceway data, data from all new Switchgear, motor control centers, transformers, panelboards, and separately mounted fuses, starters or circuit breakers shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR. Obtain all existing or new protective device information to include all present settings. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain any needed data or information from Contract Documents, various suppliers, the Electric Utility and from conducting his own field investigations. The data obtained shall be organized and submitted to the ENGINEER to show that all the necessary data gathering work has been done. 2. Calculations shall utilize actual X/R and three phase short circuit values obtained by the CONTRACTOR from the Electric Utility. The use of infinite bus fault current calculation is not acceptable. 3. The studies shall include both scenarios: under normal power. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73-1 4. Provide a complete short circuit study. Include three phase and phase-to-ground calculations. Provide an equipment interrupting or withstand evaluation based on the actual equipment and model numbers provided on this project. Generic devices are not acceptable. Normal system operating method, alternate operation, and operations that could result in maximum fault conditions shall be thoroughly addressed in the study. The study shall assume all motors operating at rated voltage with the exception that motors identified as "standby" shall not be included. Electrical equipment bus impedance shall be assumed zero. Short circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the basis of maximum available fault current at the electrical equipment busses. The Study shall be performed using actual available short circuit currents available and system impedances as obtained from the Electric Utility. An assumption of infinite bus for the purposes of the Study is not acceptable. Study shall use actual motor X/R and subtransient reactance data obtained from equipment suppliers. 5. A protective device coordination study shall be performed to determine appropriate relay settings. The study shall include all electrical equipment provided under this contract and any up-stream equipment that has an impact on the coordination study. The study shall show transformer damage curves, generator damage curves, cable short circuit withstand curves and motor curves. Include all medium and low voltage switchgear, distribution switchboards, motor control centers, starters, and panelboards main circuit breakers. Complete the short circuit study down to the main breaker or main lugs on all panelboards. Panelboard branch circuit devices need not be considered. The phase over current and ground-fault protection shall be included as well as settings for all other adjustable protective devices. All motor monitoring relays and protective or monitoring devices that are a part of a supplier's equipment (such as soft starters, switchgear) shall be in included. Include the last protective device in the Electric Utility's system feeding each facility being considered. 6. Provide Time-Current Curves on 11X17 log-log paper. Do not put more than one branch of protective devices on any one coordination curve. Include a one-line diagram and the names of each protective device in the branch. Use the names designated in the Contract Documents. Include motor and transformer damage curves, and cable short circuit withstand curves. Coordination study time-current curves (11x17 log-log type) including the instrument transformer ratios, model numbers of the protective relays, and the relay settings associated with each breaker. Organize the curves as specified here in. Ground fault time current curves shall be on a separate sheet. 7. An equipment evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of the fault bracing of all bus from the panelboard level up to the main Switchgear or protective device. Include circuit breakers, controllers, surge arresters, busway, switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of these devices with the available fault currents. 8. Provide arc flash hazard analysis in accordance with the applicable NFPA, ANSI, and IEEE standards. 9. The studies shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Texas. 10. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment shall be promptly brought to the ENGINEER'S attention. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73-2 11. Use industry standard short circuit software, SKM CAPTOR and DAPPER or an equal approved by the ENGINEER. 12. The report shall include a comparison of short circuit duties of each bus to the interrupting capacity of the equipment that is protecting that bus. 13. The report shall include all data that was used as input to the report. This data shall include cable impedance, conduit type, source impedance, equipment ratings, motor X/R and subtransient reactance data,etc. 14. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Utility for electrical data required for the studies. 15. The studies shall include and model the different operating configurations that may be encountered. This includes different transformers operating individually with various main and tie breakers open and closed. The studies shall clearly identify the particular operating configuration being evaluated. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This Section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents,the requirements of this Section shall prevail. .Reference. Title IEEE 141 Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants IEEE 242 Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems NFPA 70E Handbook for Electrical Safety in the Workplace IEEE 1584 IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations NEC National Electrical Code 1.03 SCHEDULE A. The report shall be provided to the ENGINEER NO LATER THAN 60 days before the equipment is shipped to the Work site. SHIPMENT AND DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED AT THE JOBSITE UNTIL THE STUDY HAS BEEN COMPLETED, SUBMITTED AND APPROVED BYTHE ENGINEER. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall include: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study. Time current curves shall be on 11x17 log-log type paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time current curves on 8%x 11 log-log type paper as a supplement but not as a replacement. 2. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73-3 a. Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard, switchboard,switchgear, disconnect, Motor Control Center, VFDs, starters,transfer switches, including all existing electrical equipment—switchgear, starters, motor control center, panelboards, starters,etc. b. Provide a copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident ranges& clothing classifications at each bus. The one-line shall be on 11x17 paper and shall be separated out across three (3)-11x17 sheets. 1) Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each incident range &clothing classification. The one-line shall also include the information specified in section 2.03 below. The following is a recommended color coding for the following Hazard/Risk Category numbers: a) Green to indicate a Category 0 b) Blue to indicate a Category 1 c) Brown to indicate a Category 2 d) Yellow to indicate a Category 3 e) Orange to indicate a Category 4 f) Red to indicate Above a Category 4 B. Provide PDF copies of the completed studies to be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. Each hard copy of studies shall be bound in a 3-ring binder. C. The Contractor shall redo the Power System Studies if any changes are made during the field testing checkout and/or start-up. The Contractor shall submit the Power System Studies for Engineer Approval. The Studies shall include an updated copy of the color copy Arc Flash Labels. D. A CD with all SKM input files and a PDF of all output files is required for both the preliminary and final power system studies submittals. 1. Two Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data files burned in on a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of all files used to develop the electrical system model in the power system analysis program and all files for the written study analysis and summary data tables. For instance if SKM software is used for the power system studies, then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit breakers, fuses, etc.for the power system analysis. 2.00 EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide a short-circuit and relay coordination study load flow and motor starting study, and arc flash hazard analysis on the electrical power distribution system, as specified. The studies shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Standards 141 and 242, IEEE 1584, ANSI, and the NEC and shall utilize the ANSI method of short circuit analysis in accordance with ANSI C37.010. The studies shall be performed using actual equipment data for all equipment. The coordination studies shall use the data from the manufacturer of protective devices. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73-4 2.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. The studies shall be performed by the by an electrical manufacturer/consultant service/electrical testing agency who is regularly engaged in power system studies. A Licensed Professional Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall conduct the studies and shall seal and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER shall be licensed to practice engineering in the State of Texas. A study submitted without a Professional ENGINEER's seal will not be reviewed and returned Not Approved, Revise& Resubmit. 2.03 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining and verifying all data needed to perform the study. B. As a minimum, each short circuit study shall include the following: 1. One-Line Diagram: a. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as relays, direct- acting trips,fuses, etc. b. Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's style and catalog number for all protective devices. c. Power and voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections of all transformers. Use the ratings (ie. Impedence, X/R, etc.) of the actual transformers being provided where available. d. Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transformers energizing each relay. e. Nameplate ratings of all motors and generators with their subtransient reactances. Transient reactances of synchronous motors and generators and synchronous reactances of all generators. Obtain data on the actual equipment being provided. Generic or average data numbers are not acceptable. f. Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators, synchronous motors, and induction motors. Provide short circuit studies using each source of power separately. The study shall determine if there is sufficient short circuit current to adequately cause interruption of a protective device using the weaker power source (typically local generation), and shall determine if the equipment can safely interrupt the fault if the greater power source is connected. Additional short circuit calculations shall include emergency as well as normal switching conditions as well as normal and emergency power sources described here in. 1) Show short circuit calculations listing short circuit levels at each bus. Provide the same data in tabular from. g. All significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers, fuses, reactors, etc shall be included. h. The time-current setting of existing adjustable relays and direct-acting trips, if applicable. i. One-Line showing available fault current at each bus all the way down to the 208Y/120V panelboards. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73-5 2. Impedance Diagram: a. Available MVA or impedance from the utility company. b. Local generated capacity impedance. c. Bus impedance. d. Transformer and/or reactor impedances. e. Cable impedances. f. Equipment impedances. g. System voltages. h. Grounding scheme (resistance grounding, solidly grounding, or no grounding). i. Motor contribution assuming the new and existing motors as shown on the plans all running at the same time. 3. Calculations: a. Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the greatest. Assume bolted faults and calculate the 3-phase and line-to-ground short circuits of each case. b. Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents. c. A discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment method of calculation and formulas used such that all calculations can be verified manually by the ENGINEER,with recommendations as required for improvements to the system. d. Any inadequacies shall be called to the attention of the ENGINEER and recommendation made for improvements. 2.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. As a minimum, the coordination study for the power distribution system shall include the following on 5-cycle, log-log graph paper: 1. The time-current coordination analysis shall be performed with aid of a digital computer. a. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing, but still maintain a low incident energy level. Where selectivity cannot be achieved,the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 2. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 3. Time-current curves and points for cable and equipment damage. 4. Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times. 5. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph. 6. Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement. 2.05 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS A. The study shall be performed in accordance with the NEC and all applicable OSHA, ANSI, and IEEE standards. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73-6 B. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust all adjustable time-current devices such that the trip settings lower the arc flash exposure and minimizing the clearing time. However, the CONTRACTOR shall adjust the time-current devices to avoid nuisance tripping. C. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize fault current values from the short circuit analysis to determine the Incident energy, limited approach boundary, restricted approach boundary, prohibited approach boundary and appropriate PPE required. D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide project specific arc-flash labeling. The arc-flash labeling shall be placed on the outside of the cover of the switchgear, motor control centers, combination motor starters, panelboard, switchboard, distribution panel, and all electrical panels, etc. such that it can be read without opening the electrical equipment. Mount arc-flash labels a maximum of 6'-6" AFF, include the housekeeping pad in the mounting height. The CONTRACTOR shall provide arc-flash labeling on all existing panelboards, switchboards, distribution panel, etc. where breakers are added or work is performed in or on the electrical equipment. E. Arc Flash Labels shall be chemical resistant, UV resistant,water resistant, scratch resistant, and made of 3.0 mil vinyl tape as manufactured by Dural-abel, Brady or approved equal. The lettering shall be performed by thermal transfer print. 1. Arc Flash labels and label lettering shall be sized large enough to be legible at a distance outside the hazard area. 2. Arc Flash Labels shall be placed on the door(s) of the room if the hazard area reaches or extends beyond the electrical room door(s). 3. The arc flash label shall include a DANGER header when the incident energy is above 40ca1/cm2, and a WARNING header for all other incident energy levels. F. To ensure a safe workplace, and that the labeling meets NEC, OSHA, IEEE, and NFPA requirements, use specialized arc flash software to calculate protection boundaries. These protection boundaries shall include the Flash Protection Boundary, Limited Approach Boundary, Restricted Approach Boundary and the Prohibited Approach Boundary. G. The arc-flash analysis shall be based on calculated fault from the Short Circuit Study at each respective bus. The arc-flash software program shall be used to calculate the available arcing fault at each bus in the system,the resultant flash protection boundary based on the applicable protective device operating times and the associated incident energy that workers may be exposed to at the specified working distances. H. The report shall include the following information: Arc-flash evaluation table, arc-flash and shock hazard label definitions, arc-flash evaluation information, arc-flash and shock hazard labels and definitions of terms used in the arc-flash hazard analysis. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73-7 I. Arc Flash labels shall be similar to the following example: WARNING Arc Flash and Shock Hazard Appropriate PRE Required 13 inch Flash Hazard Boundary 0.67 callcm2 Flash Hazard at 18 inches Category 1 Hazard/Risk Category, Per NFPA 70E 480 VAC Shock Hazard when cover is removed 0 Glove Class 42 inch Limited Approach 12 inch Restricted Approach 1 inch Prohibited Approach 10.692 kA Calculated Available Fault Current Equip. ID: Panel LP1 Protected By: 125A CB: TX1 (480V MCC1) Study Date: August 9, 2012 END OF SECTION Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73-8 Attachment A SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST SPECIFICATION: 26 05 73.01 Electrical Power INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Prior to sending submittal fill out checklist and verify all of the following information is included and clearly identified by highlighting, circling or other method. The items below are the minimum required and the Engineer may require additional information. 2. Indicate any substitutions or deviations from the specification and provide additional information as required per Specification 0133 00, "Submittal Procedures." 3. Sign form prior to submittal and include with submittal. Submittals provided without"Submittal Checklist"will be returned without review. CHECK BOX IF ITEM HAS BEEN ADDRESSED: ❑ 1. Provide Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study. Time current curves shall be on 11x17 log- log type paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time current curves on 8%x 11 log-log type paper as a supplement but not as a replacement. ❑ 2. Provide Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. ❑ 3. Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard,switchboard, switchgear, disconnect, Motor Control Center, VFDs, starters,transfer switches, including all existing electrical equipment— switchgear,starters, motor control center, panelboards, starters, etc. ❑ 4. Provide a copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident ranges&clothing classifications at each bus. The one-line shall be on 11x17 paper and shall be separated out across three (3)-11x17 sheets. 1) Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each incident range&clothing classification. The one-line shall also include the information specified in section 2.03 below. The following is a recommended color coding for the following Hazard/Risk Category numbers: a) Green to indicate a Category 0 b) Blue to indicate a Category 1 c) Brown to indicate a Category 2 d) Yellow to indicate a Category 3 e) Orange to indicate a Category 4 f) Red to indicate Above a Category 4 ❑ 5. A CD with all SKM input files and a PDF of all output files is required for both the preliminary and final power system studies submittals. Provide Two Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data files burned in on a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of all files used to develop the electrical system model in the power system analysis program and all files for the written study analysis and summary data tables. For instance if SKM software is used for the power system studies, then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit breakers, fuses, etc.for the power system analysis. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73-9 ❑ 8. Provide letter of qualification for studies being performed by the electrical manufacturer/consultant service/electrical testing agency who is regularly engaged in power system studies. A Licensed Professional Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall conduct the studies and shall seal and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER shall be licensed to practice engineering in the State of Texas. A study submitted without a Professional ENGINEER's seal will not be reviewed and returned Not Approved, Revise& Resubmit. CONTRACTOR NOTES/COMMENTS TO ENGINEER: STATEMENT: I have reviewed and certify that the submittal is complete and that the submittal is legible, accurate, and complete in a clear, easily understood manner. Signature: Date: Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73-10 26 22 00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA: 1. Distribution transformers 2. Buck-boost transformers 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Electrical Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Source quality-control test reports. D. Field quality-control test reports. Low Voltage Transformers 26 22 00- 1 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency,with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated,that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency,with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated,that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers." 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit,throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast stainless steel anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Acme Electric Corporation. Low Voltage Transformers 26 22 00-2 b. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. c. Controlled Power Company. d. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. e. Federal Pacific Transformer Company. f. General Electric Company. g. Hammond Co. h. Magnetek Power Electronics Group. i. Micron Industries Corp. j. Myers Power Products, Inc. k. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. I. Sola/Hevi-Duty. m. Square D Co./Groupe Schneider NA; Schneider Electric. 2.02 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel. C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper. 2.03 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B. Cores: One leg per phase. C. Enclosure:Ventilated, NEMA 250,Type 2. 1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air. D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. 1. Finish Color: ANSI 49 gray. 2.04 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. The identification of electrical equipment shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify electrical equipment in accordance with the NEC,the local authorities, and as specified. B. Use laminated three-ply engraved plastic nameplates with black surface and white interior core, at least 1/16 inch thick. Engraved lettering shall be condensed gothic at least 1/4 inch Low Voltage Transformers 26 22 00-3 high and properly spaced for legible and easy reading. Attach plates to equipment with stainless steel screws. Adhesive attachment is only acceptable on NEMA U enclosures. Identify the following items with engraved nameplates, located as follows: 1. Each switch/fuse unit or circuit breaker in each main panel and each distribution panel - adjacent to switch/fuse unit or circuit. 2. Spares shall be labeled "Spare". 3. Each branch circuit panel -on panel trim cover immediately above panel door. 4. Each safety disconnect switch, relay cabinet, control panel -on outside of cover. 5. Each exhaust fan switch -custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate (high and low if required). 6. Instrument transmitters and sensors. 7. Each motor starter-on outside cover. 8. Each Variable Frequency Drive. 9. Outside light switches-custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. 10. Any switch for load that cannot be seen from the control point-custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. C. Branch circuit panelboard directories shall be completely and properly typewritten. Cover with plastic and attach to the inside of the cabinet door. Spares shall be labeled as "Spare." D. Refer to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables"for conductor coding requirements. E. Install special custom engraved switch cover plates with engraving on the outside of the cover plate at outside light switches, and at any switch for equipment which is out of sight from the control point. F. Install same brand/manufacturer fittings throughout the project. Install UL listed products. Fasteners, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel. 2.05 LOCKING OF ELECTRICAL FACILITIES A. Install locks immediately upon the installation of the electrical facility. Provide padlocks for exterior electrical facilities subject to unauthorized entry. Furnish the Owner with two keys per lock up to a quantity of 10 keys. Furnish locks to match the Owner's locking system. Key all locks alike. 2.06 ACCESS DOORS A. Wherever access is required in walls, ceilings, or soffits to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes or other electrical equipment, provide and install access doors. Install panels in locations approved by the Engineer. Paint as directed. B. Refer to Division 08 for access door requirements. Low Voltage Transformers 26 22 00-4 2.07 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Remove shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from equipment. Remove debris as it accumulates. Upon completion of work, clean electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation. 2.08 TESTING A. See each section for particular testing requirements for each type of equipment. END OF SECTION Low Voltage Transformers 26 22 00-5 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Load centers. 4. Electronic-grade panelboards. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. B. TVSS:Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers'technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250,Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Panelboards 26 24 16- 1 A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. 1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys:Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP)Types: Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Panelboards 26 24 16-2 E. Comply with NEMA PB 1. F. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard)to prevent condensation. Store inside building or enclosed storage unit. B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C)to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet(2000 m). B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 3300 feet (2000 m). C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. Panelboards 26 24 16-3 B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast stainless steel anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location unless ortherwise noted on the drawings. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250,Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 4X 316 grade SS. c. Corrosive Locations: NEMA 250,Type 4X, 316 grade SS. d. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250,Type 12. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions;for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body.Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 6. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: Steel,factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components. 7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. Card to be type written with circuit service. Hand written legends are not allowed. B. Incoming Mains Location:Top and bottom. Panelboards 26 24 16-4 C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material:Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Equipment Ground Bus:Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus:Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads. 5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections. D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity neutral bus. E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections,filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL. H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with UL 1449 SPD Type 1. 2.03 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. Panelboards 26 24 16-5 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (Preferred) 5. Approved equal B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike. D. Mains: As indicated. E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (Preferred) 5. Approved equal. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. C. Mains: Circuit breaker. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. F. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover,to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 2.05 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (Preferred) Panelboards 26 24 16-6 5. Approved equal. A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. C. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and Izt response. 4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground- fault protection (6-mA trip). 6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration. 8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker(MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high- intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices. e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit B. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1,Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. Panelboards 26 24 16-7 1. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles. 2. Auxiliary Contacts:Two normally open and normally closed contact(s)that operate with switch handle operation. 2.06 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. C. Mount top of trim 72 inches (1828 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. F. Install filler plates in unused spaces. G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. H. Comply with NECA 1. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. Panelboards 26 24 16-8 C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. E. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning:After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments and Equipment: 1). Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.05 ADJUSTING Panelboards 26 24 16-9 A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. C. Load Balancing:After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed.Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing,transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads,within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions. Store in a building or eclosed storage unit unit ready for installation. END OF SECTION Panelboards 26 24 16- 10 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Weather-resistant receptacles. 4. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 5. Communications outlets. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. E. TVSS:Transient voltage surge suppressor. F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. Wiring Devices 26 27 26- 1 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass &Seymour/Legrand (Pass& Seymour). B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.02 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. 2.03 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single). HBL5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass &Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex). 2.04 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: 1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Wiring Devices 26 27 26-2 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass &Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton; 7590. 2.05 TOGGLE SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Single Pole: 1). Cooper; AH1221. 2). Hubbell; HBL1221. 3). Leviton; 1221-2. 4). Pass &Seymour; CSB20AC1. b. Two Pole: 1). Cooper; AH1222. 2). Hubbell; HBL1222. 3). Leviton; 1222-2. 4). Pass &Seymour; CSB20AC2. c. Three Way: 1). Cooper; AH1223. 2). Hubbell; HBL1223. 3). Leviton; 1223-2. 4). Pass &Seymour; CSB20AC3. d. Four Way: 1). Cooper; AH1224. 2). Hubbell; HBL1224. 3). Leviton; 1224-2. Wiring Devices 26 27 26-3 4). Pass &Seymour; CSB20AC4. C. Tamper-Resistant and Weather-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Cooper;TWRBR15. b. Hubbell; DR15TR. c. LevitonTRW15. d. Pass &Seymour;TRW26252. 2. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section,when installed in wet and damp locations. D. GFCI Non-Feed -Through Type, Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Cooper; VGF15. b. Hubbell; GF15LA. c. Leviton; 8599. d. Pass &Seymour; 1594. E. GFCI,Tamper-Resistant and Weather-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Cooper;TWRVGFI5. b. Hubbell; GFTR15. c. Pass &Seymour; 1594TRWR. 2. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section. F. Toggle Switches, Square Face, 120/277 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W- S-896. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Cooper; 7621 (single pole), 7623 (three way). b. Hubbell; DS115 (single pole), DS315 (three way). Wiring Devices 26 27 26-4 c. Leviton; 5621-2 (single pole), 5623-2 (three way). d. Pass &Seymour; 2621 (single pole), 2623 (three way). 2.06 FINISHES A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Engineer otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. TVSS Devices: Blue. B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. 3.00 EXECUTION 4.00 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose.Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: Wiring Devices 26 27 26-5 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals.Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise,two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15-or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. 4.02 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles. 4.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 4.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections[with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative]: 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: Wiring Devices 26 27 26-6 1. Line Voltage:Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance:Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip:Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug,verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION Wiring Devices 26 27 26-7 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Enclosures. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections,weights, and manufacturers'technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250,Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Field quality-control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 2628 16- 1 A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers:Two for each size and type. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories,within same product category,from single source from single manufacturer. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet(2010 m). B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service if required. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 FUSIBLE SWITCHES Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 2628 16-2 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. E. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Auxiliary Contact Kit:Two NO/NC(Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. 6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 7. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 2.02 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation. Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 2628 16-3 B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. E. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Auxiliary Contact Kit:Two NO/NC(Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. 4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 2.03 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50,to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250,Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 4X SS. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 4X SS. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250,Type 12. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 28 16-4 C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D. Install fuses in fusible devices. E. Comply with NECA 1. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. B. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 2628 16- 5 SECTION 26 29 23 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes separately enclosed, preassembled, combination VFDs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. CPT: Control power transformer. B. DDC: Direct digital control. C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. D. LED: Light-emitting diode. E. NC: Normally closed. F. NO: Normally open. G. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. H. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative. I. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. J. VFD: Variable-frequency drive. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFD indicated. 1. Include dimensions and finishes for VFDs. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 3. Certification that all electronic circuits and printed circuit boards are conformally coated. B. Shop Drawings: For each VFD indicated. 1. Include mounting and attachment details. Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 - 1 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Required working clearances and required area above and around VFDs. 2. Show VFD layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. 3. Show support locations,type of support, and weight on each support. 4. Indicate field measurements. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for each VFD, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Certificate of compliance. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based, and their installation requirements. D. Product Certificates: For each VFD from manufacturer. E. Harmonic Analysis Report: Provide Project-specific calculations and manufacturer's statement of compliance with IEEE 519. F. Source quality-control reports. G. Field quality-control reports. H. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFDs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and motor-circuit protector trip settings. Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 -2 b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. C. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points. B. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Power Fuses: Equal to percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.8 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store in space that is permanently enclosed and heated and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside drives and connect factory-installed space heaters to temporary electrical service. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFDs, including clearances between VFDs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer shall agree to repair or replace VFDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 -3 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR DRIVES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Danfoss, Inc. 2. Eaton. 3. Allen-Bradley. 4. Siemens-Robicon. 5. Schneider Electric. 6. ABB/GE. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General Requirements for VFDs: 1. VFDs and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508A. B. Application: Constant torque and variable torque. C. The Contractor is fully responsible for the review of the full Contract Documents to determine specified motor speed, horsepower and full load ampere requirements for each motor-driven load. In addition,the Contractor shall size and select the VFD and components as follows: 1. Each VFD shall provide, continuously, motor load current equal to 100%of the direct on- line motor nameplate full load current. 2. Each VFD shall be selected for Variable Torque (Normal Duty) or Constant Torque (Heavy Duty) based on its respective load type served as shown in the Load Type tables below. 3. Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 -4 Variable Torque(Normal Duty) Constant Torque(Heavy Duty) Load Types Load Types Vertical Turbine Pumps OR Rotary Lobe Pumps OR [Not included Under this [Not included Under this Contract] Contract] Horizontal Non-Clog Pumps Progressive Cavity Pumps Horizontal Self-Priming Horizontal Centrifugal Chopper Centrifugal Pumps Pumps Submersible Non-Clog Pumps Positive Displacement Blower Packages Dewatered Sludge Screw Vertical Non-Clog Pumps Conveyors&Live Bottom Screws Vertical Turbine Mixers Screw Pumps Submersible Propeller(Window) Horizontal Recessed Impeller Pumps Pumps 4. [etc] [etc] D. VFD Description: Variable-frequency motor drive, consisting of power converter that employs pulse-width-modulated inverter, factory built and tested in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency. 1. Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors, as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable-Frequency Controls or Both." 2. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors." 3. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection. F. Output Rating: Three phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range for variable torque and 66 Hz, with torque constant as speed changes for constant torque; maximum voltage equals input voltage. G. Unit Operating Requirements: 1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 10 percent of VFD input voltage rating. 2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 5percent. 3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFD frequency rating. 4. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load. Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 -5 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent under any load or speed condition. 6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 22 kA. 7. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 32 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 8. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 9. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 4000 feet. 10. Vibration Withstand: Comply with NEMA ICS 61800-2. 11. Overload Capability: 1.1 for variable torque and 1.5 for constant torque times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8 times the base load current for three seconds. 12. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz. 13. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent. 14. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15 kHz. 15. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast,free-wheel, and do injection braking. H. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 32bit, isolated from all power circuits. I. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFDs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1 speed range. 1. Signal: Electrical. J. Internal Adjustability Capabilities: 1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating. K. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: 1. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of the VFD, complying with UL 1449 SPD,Type 2. 2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm. 3. Under-and overvoltage trips. 4. Inverter overcurrent trips. 5. VFD and Moto r-Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal protection system for monitoring VFDs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFD overtemperature and motor-overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad. 6. Critical frequency rejection,with three selectable, adjustable deadbands. 7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 8. Loss-of-phase protection. 9. Reverse-phase protection. 10. Short-circuit protection. 11. Motor-overtemperature fault. Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 -6 L. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts. M. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFD into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive, motor, or load. N. Forward and reverse capable: VFD shall be capable of switching direction of rotation based on reverse input setting automatically via input terminal blocks or manually via HMI screen. O. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds. P. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds. Q. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: UL 489, thermal-magnetic circuit breaker with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism. 1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of NFPA 70 motor full-load current rating or VFD input current rating,whichever is larger. 2. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with circuit-breaker handle. 3. NC/NO alarm contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped. 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: VFDs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. The designated VFDs shall be tested and certified by an NRTL as meeting the ICC-ES AC 156 test procedure requirements. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2.4 CONTROLS AND INDICATION A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions: 1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault. Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 -7 B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English-language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability. 1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes. 2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service. a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFD, local automatic control at VFD, and automatic control through a remote source. C. Historical Logging Information and Displays: 1. Real-time clock with current time and date. 2. Running log of total power versus time. 3. Total run time. 4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each. S. D. Indicating Devices: Digital display mounted flush in VFD door and connected to display VFD parameters including, but not limited to: 1. Output frequency(Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop,fault). 4. Motor current(amperes). S. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (V dc). 9. Set point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V ac). E. Control Signal Interfaces: 1. Electric Input Signal Interface: a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: 4- to 20-mA do Operator- selectable "x"-to "y"-mA dc. b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs or as indicated in wiring diagrams on drawings. 2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the SCADA system: a. 4-to 20-mA dc. b. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs. 3. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of three programmable analog output signal(s) (4- to 20-mA do operator-selectable "x"- to "y"-mA dc), which can be configured for any of the following: a. Output frequency(Hz). b. Motor speed (rpm). Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 -8 C. Set point frequency (Hz). 4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of two programmable dry-circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following: a. Motor running. b. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). F. PID Control Interface: Provides closed-loop set point, differential feedback control in response to dual feedback signals. Allows for closed-loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation. 1. Number of Loops: Two. G. Interface with SCADA System: Factory-installed hardware and software shall interface with SCADA system to monitor, control, display, and record data for use in processing reports. VFD settings shall be retained within VFD's nonvolatile memory. 1. Hardwired Points: a. Monitoring: On-off status, running,fault, breaker open/close. b. Control: On-off operation, speed, frequency. 2. Communication Interface: Communication shall interface with SCADA system to remotely control and monitor from SCADA HMI's. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at VFD Panel shall be available through SCADA system. 2.5 LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING A. Input Line Conditioning: Based on the manufacturer's harmonic analysis study and report, provide input filtering, as required, to limit total demand (harmonic current) distortion and total harmonic voltage demand at the defined point of common coupling to meet IEEE 519 recommendations. B. Provide results of study for all VFD motor loads. Refer to motor lead lengths on drawings. C. Filtering: 1. Minimum 3 percent input line reactor or as recommended by harmonic analysis. 2. Provide active filter for VFD's rated for 60 to 500 horsepower. 3. Minimum 3 percent output load reactor or as recommended by harmonic analysis. 4. dV/dt filter: a. Common mode reduction: 30 percent minimum. b. Motor terminal peak voltage limit: 150 percent of do bus voltage with a motor lead length up to 1,000 feet. C. Carrier frequency range: up to 12 khz. d. Efficiency: 98 percent minimum. e. Class H insulation minimum. 5. Sine wave filter: a. 3-phase, 3-wire. b. Rated for motor voltage within 10 percent. C. Full load efficiency: 99.5 percent. d. 115 degrees Celsius temperature rise. Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 -9 e. Open enclosure: 1) Mount filter in the VFD enclosure. 6. Reactors: Balanced to within 3 percent of nominal value. 7. Capacitors: a. Temperature rated for 85 degrees Celsius. b. Within 4 percent tolerance. 8. Compatible with the carrier frequency range of the VFD. 9. Maximum output distortion at full load and speed: 5 percent. 10. Derate filter for Project altitude and temperature as specified in Section 26 00 11 "Facility Performance Requirements for Electrical." D. EMI/RFI Filtering: 1. CE marked; certify compliance with IEC 61800-3 for Category C2. 2.6 COMMUNICATIONS A. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of connecting a printer and a notebook computer. B. Provide Ethernet/IP fieldbus communications module. 2.7 ENCLOSURES A. VFD Enclosures: NEMA 250,to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Type 12. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Supplemental Digital Meters: 1. Elapsed-time meter. 2. Kilowatt meter. 3. Kilowatt demand meter 4. Kilowatt-hour meter. B. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in NEMA 250,Type 12 enclosures. C. Space heaters, with NC auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosures powered from VFD power source. D. Cooling Fan and Exhaust System: For NEMA 250, Type 12; UL 508 component recognized: Supply fan, with composite intake and exhaust grills and filters; 120-Vac; obtained from integral CPT. E. Spare control-wiring terminal blocks;wired. Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 - 10 F. Conformal coating: 1. Provide conformal coating material applied to electronic circuitry and printed circuit boards to act as a protection against moisture, dust, temperature extremes, and chemicals such as H2S and chlorine. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing:Test and inspect VFDs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2. 1. Test each VFD while connected to its specified motor. 2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFDs according to operation of functions and features specified. B. VFDs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFDs,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine VFD before installation. Reject VFDs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFD installation. D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Units to be installed as indicated on drawings. B. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment. C. Comply with NECA 1. Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 - 11 3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between VFDs and remote devices and control and monitoring monitoring system. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 23 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables." B. Bundle,train, and support wiring in enclosures. C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify VFDs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each VFD with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFDs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFD units. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect VFD, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust drives, components, and equipment. 2. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at VFD locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner's representative before starting the motor(s). Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 - 12 S. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Adjustable Speed Drives stated in NETAAcceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections, and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each VFD. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each VFD 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. C. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. VFDs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFD and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion. B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays,time-delay relays, and timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. C. Adjust the trip settings of instantaneous-only circuit breakers and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to 6 times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed 8 times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 - 13 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Engineer before increasing settings. D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers. E. Retain option in first paragraph below unless settings are included on Drawings. F. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 26 OS 73.16 "Power System Studies." G. Set field-adjustable pressure switches. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until drives are ready to be energized and placed into service. B. Replace VFDs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. 3.9 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFDs. END OF SECTION 26 29 23 Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 23 - 14 26 36 00 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 1.00 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A This section includes the following items from a single supplier: 1. Automatic transfer switch 2. Related Accessories as specified B Related Requirements 1. It is the intent of this specification to secure an automatic transfer switch that has been prototype tested,factory built, production-tested, and site-tested together with all accessories necessary for a complete installation as shown on the plans and drawings and specified herein. 2. Any exceptions to the published specifications shall be subject to the approval of the engineer and submitted minimum 10 days prior to the closing of the bid with a line by line summary description of all the items of compliance, any items that have been are omitted or have been taken exception to, and a complete description of all deviations. 3. It is the intent of this specification to secure an automatic transfer switch that has been tested during design verification, in production, and at the final job site.The automatic transfer switch will be a commercial design and will be complete with all of the necessary accessories for complete installation as shown on the plans, drawings, and specifications herein.The equipment supplied shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code and applicable local codes and regulations. 4. All equipment shall be new and of current production by an international, power system manufacturer of generators,transfer switches, and paralleling switchgear. The manufacturer shall be a supplier of a complete and coordinated system.There will be single-source responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a factory-authorized representative with factory-trained technicians. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A Action Submittals 1. Product Data a) The submittal shall include specification sheets showing all standard and optional accessories to be supplied; schematic wiring diagrams, dimension drawings, and interconnection diagrams identifying by terminal number each required interconnection between the generator set,the transfer switch, and the remote annunciator panel if it is included elsewhere in these specifications. 2. Shop Drawings B Informational Submittal 1. Certificates 2. Test and Evaluation Reports Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 00- 1 3. Manufacturer's Instruction 4. Source Quality Control Submittals 5. Field or Site Quality Control 6. Manufacturer's Report 7. Special Procedure Submittal 8. Qualification Statement 9. Operation And Maintenance Data 10. Warranty Documentation 11. Record Documentation C Maintenance Material Submittals 1. Literature 2. Spare Parts 3. Extra Stock Materials 4. Tools 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Regulatory Agency 1. The automatic transfer switch shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards: a) UL 1008-Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment b) IEC 947-6-1 Low-voltage Switchgear and Control gear; Multifunction equipment; Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment EN55011, Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Industrial, Scientific and Medical Equipment. c) NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code d) NFPA 99 - Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities e) NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems f) IEEE Standard 446- IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications g) NEMA Standard ICS 10-2005, Electromechanical AC Transfer Switch Equipment. h) EN61000-4-4 Fast Transient Immunity Severity Level 4 i) EN61000-4-5 Surge Immunity Class 4(voltage sensing and programmable inputs only) j) IEEE 472 (ANSI C37.90A) Ring Wave Test k) IEC Specifications for EMI/EMC Immunity(CISPR 11, IEC 1000-4-2, IEC 1000-4-3, IEC 1000-4-4, IEC 1000-4-5, IEC 1000-4-6, IEC 1000-4-8, IEC 1000-4-11) 1) CSA C22.2 No. 178 certification 2. Qualifications Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 00-2 a) The automatic transfer switch shall be produced by a manufacturer who is ISO 9001 certified for the design, development, production and service of its complete product line. b) A manufacturer who has produced this type of equipment for a period of at least 10 years and who maintains a service organization available twenty-four hour a day throughout the year shall produce the automatic transfer switch. 3. Manufacturers a) The automatic transfer switch shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and testing of the complete system. The entire system shall be installed as shown on the plans, drawings, and specifications herein. b) The manufacturer shall maintain a national service organization of employing personnel located throughout the contiguous United States.The Service center's personnel must be factory trained and must be on call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. c) The manufacturer shall maintain records of each switch, by serial number,for a minimum of 20 years. 4. Suppliers a) The supplier of the generator shall also be the supplier of the transfer switch. Acceptable manufacturers are still responsible for meeting all requirements of this spec: 1. ASCO 2. Generator supplier 3. Approved equal 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Delivery and Acceptance Requirements B Storage and Handling Requirements C Packaging Waste Management 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A Ambient Conditions 1. Automatic transfer switch shall operate in the following conditions without any damage to the unit or its loads. a) Ambient Temperature: -4 to 158 Degrees F b) Relative Humidity: 5%to 95% noncondensing Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 00-3 B Existing Conditions 1.6 WARRANTY OR BOND A Manufacturer's Warranty 1. The ATS shall include a standard warranty covering five (5)years to guarantee against defective material and workmanship in accordance with the manufacturer's published warranty from the date of initial startup. Labor,travel and parts shall be included for the duration of this warranty. 2. The ATS manufacturer and its distributor shall maintain a 24-hour parts and service organization. This organization shall regularly engage in maintenance contract programs to perform preventive maintenance and service on equipment similar to that specified. A service agreement shall be available and shall include system operation under simulated operating conditions; adjustment to the generator set,transfer switch, and switchgear controls as required, and certification in the owner's maintenance log of repairs made and functional tests performed on all systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A Equipment 1. Furnish and install an automatic transfer switches system(s)with ratings indicated on drawings, Solid Neutral, 60Hz. Each automatic transfer shall consist of an inherently double throw power transfer switch mechanism and a microprocessor controller to provide automatic operation. All transfer switches and controllers shall be the products of the same manufacturer. B Construction 1. The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held with double throw construction, and operated by a momentarily energized solenoid-driven mechanism. 2. All transfer switch sizes shall use only one type of main operator for ease of maintenance and commonality of parts. 3. The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentarily outages, so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and contact temperature rise is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life. 4. All main contacts shall be silver composition. Switches rated 600 amperes and above shall have segmented, blow-on construction for high withstand and close-on capability and be protected by separate arcing contacts. 5. Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. Switches rated 800 amperes and higher shall have front removable and replaceable Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 00-4 contacts. All stationary and moveable contacts shall be replaceable without removing power conductors and/or bus bars. 6. Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts thereof, which are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching or transfer between two active power sources, are not acceptable. 7. For two and three pole switches, where neutral conductors are to be solidly connected as shown on the plans, a neutral conductor plate with fully rated AL-CU pressure connectors shall be provided. 8. For four pole switches with a switching neutral, where neutral conductors must be switched as shown on the plans,the contactor shall be provided with fully rated switched neutral transfer contacts. Overlapping neutral contacts may be used as an alternative. 9. Automatic transfer switch shall be open transition transfer switch. C Enclosure 1. The ATS shall be furnished open style to be mounted in Motor Control Center as indicated on drawings. 2. All standard door mounted switches and indicating LEDs shall be integrated into a flush- mounted, interface membrane or equivalent in the enclosure door for easy viewing & replacement. The panel shall be capable of having a manual locking feature to allow the user to lockout all membrane mounted control switches to prevent unauthorized tampering.This cover shall be mounted with hinges and have a latch that may be padlocked.The membrane panel shall be suitable for mounting by others when furnished on open type units. 2.2 OPERATION A Operators B Controls 1. A four line, 20 character LCD display and dynamic 4 button keypad shall be an integral part of the controller for viewing all available data and setting desired operational parameters. Operational parameters shall also be available for viewing and control through the communications interface port or USB.The following parameters shall only be adjustable via a password protected programming on the controller: a Nominal line voltage and frequency b Single or three phase sensing c Operating parameter protection d Transfer operating mode configuration (Standard transition, Programmed transition, or Closed transition) C Voltage and Frequency Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 00-5 1. Voltage (all phases) and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources shall be continuously monitored. Voltage on both normal and emergency sources and frequency on the emergency sources shall be adjustable with the following pickup, dropout, and trip setting capabilities (values shown as%of nominal unless otherwise specified): a) Parameter Dropout/Trip Pickup/Reset b) Under voltage 75 to 98% 85 to 100% c) Over voltage 06 to 135% 95 to 100%of trip d) Under frequency 95 to 99% 80 to 95% e) Over frequency 01 to 115% 105 to 120% f) Voltage unbalance 5 to 20% 3 to 18% 2. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within ±0.5%over an operating temperature range of-20°C to 70°C. 3. An adjustable dropout time for transient voltage and frequency excursions shall be provided.The time delays shall be 0.1 to 9.9 seconds for voltage and .1 to 15 seconds for frequency. 4. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1%increments either locally with the display and keypad, remotely via the communications interface port or USB. 5. The controller shall be capable of sensing the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency sources.The source shall be considered unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected (ABC or BAC). Unacceptable phase rotation shall be indicated on the LCD;the service required LED and the annunciation through the communication protocol and dry contacts. In addition,the phase rotation sensing shall be capable of being disabled, if required. 6. The controller shall be capable of detecting a single phasing condition of a source, even though a voltage may be regenerated by the load.This condition is a loss of phase and shall be considered a failed source. 7. Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to provide digital readout of voltage on all 3 phases (phase to phase and phase to neutral),frequency, and phase rotation. D Time Delays 1. An adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting signals. Capability shall be provided to extend this time delay to 60 minutes by providing an external 12 or 24 VDC power supply. 2. A time delay shall be provided on transfer to the emergency source, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes,for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency. 3. A time delay shall be provided on re-transfer to normal. The time delays shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable. 4. A time delay shall be provided on shut down of engine generator for cool down, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 00-6 5. A time delay activated output signal shall also be provided to drive external relay(s)for selective load disconnect and reconnect control. The controller shall be capable of controlling a maximum of 9 individual output time delays to step loads on after a transfer occurs. Each output may be individually programmed for their own time delay of up to 60 minutes. Each sequence shall be independently programmed for transferring from normal to emergency and transferring from emergency to normal. 6. All time delays shall be adjustable in 1 second increments. 7. All time delays shall be adjustable by using the display and keypad, with a remote device connected to the communications interface port or USB. 8. Each time delay shall be identified and a dynamic countdown shall be shown on the display. Active time delays can be viewed with a remote device connected to the communications interface port or USB. E Additional Features 1. The controller shall have 3 levels of security. Level 1 shall allow monitoring of settings and parameters only. The Level 1 shall be capable of restricted with the use of a lockable cover. Level 2 shall allow test functions to be performed and Level 3 shall allow setting of all parameters. 2. The display shall provide for the test functions, allowed through password security. The test function shall be load, no load or auto test. The auto test function shall request an elapsed time for test. At the completion of this time delay the test shall be automatically ended and a retransfer sequence shall commence. All loaded tests shall be immediately ended and retransfer shall occur if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable. 3. A contact closure shall be provided for a low-voltage engine start signal. The start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the engine by requiring the generator set to reach proper output, and run for the duration of the cool down setting, regardless of whether the normal source restores before the load is transferred. 4. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided consisting of a minimum of two contacts, closed when the ATS is connected to the normal source and two contacts closed, when the ATS is connected to the emergency source. 5. LED indicating lights shall be provided; one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the normal source (green) and one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the emergency source(red). 6. LED indicating lights shall be provided and energized by controller outputs.The lights shall provide true source availability of the normal (green) and emergency sources (red), as determined by the voltage,frequency and phase rotation sensing trip and reset settings for each source. 7. A membrane switch shall be provided on the membrane panel to test all indicating lights and display when pressed. 8. Provide the ability to select "commit/no commit to transfer"to determine whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load. 9. Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact which opens to signal the ATS to transfer to emergency and for remote contacts which closes to inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal. Both of these inhibit signals can be activated Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 00-7 through the keypad, communications interface port or USB. A"not-in-auto" LED shall indicate anytime the controller is inhibiting transfer from occurring. 10. An in-phase monitor shall be a standard feature in the controller.The monitor shall control transfer so that motor load inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents, and shall not require external control of power sources. The in-phase monitor shall be specifically designed for and be the product of the ATS manufacturer.The in- phase monitor shall be capable of being enabled or disabled from the user interface, communications interface port or USB. 11. A time based load control feature shall be available to allow the prioritized addition and removal of loads based during transfer.This feature may be enabled for either or both sources.The user shall be able to control up to nine loads with independent timing sequences for pre and post transfer delays in either direction of transfer. 12. The controller shall provide 2 inputs for external controls that can be programmed from the following values: a Common fault, Remote test, Inhibit transfer, Low battery voltage, Peak shave,Time delay bypass, Load shed forced to OFF position (Programmed transition only) 13. The controller shall provide two form "C" contact outputs rated for up to 12A @ 240VAC or 2A @ 480VAC that can be programmed from the following values: a Aux switch open,Transfer switch aux contact fault, Alarm silenced, Alarm active, 1/0 communication loss, Contactor position, Exercise active,Test mode active, Fail to transfer, Fail to acquire standby source, Source available, Phase rotation error, Not in automatic mode, Common alarm, In phase monitor sync, Load bank control active, Load control active, Maintenance mode active, Non-emergency transfer, Fail to open/close, Loss of phase, Over/under voltage, Over/under frequency, Voltage unbalance, Start signal, Peak shave active, Preferred source supplying load, Standby source supplying load 14. The controller shall be capable of expanding the number of inputs and outputs with additional modules. 15. Optional input/output modules shall be furnished which mount on the inside of the enclosure to facilitate ease of connections. 16. Engine Exerciser-The controller shall provide an internal engine exerciser. The engine exerciser shall allow the user to program up to 21 different exercise routines based on a calendar mode. For each routine,the user shall be able to: a) Enable or disable the routine b) Enable or disable transfer of the load during routine. c) Set the start time,time of day, day of week,week of month (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, alternate or every) d) Set the duration of the run. e) At the end of the specified loaded exercise duration the switch shall transfer the load back to normal and run the generator for the specified cool down period. All loaded exercises shall be immediately ended and retransfer shall occur if the standby source fails. The next exercise period shall be displayed on the main screen with the type of exercise,time and date. The type of exercise and the time remaining shall be display when the exercise is active. It shall be possible of ending the exercise event with a single button push. Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 00-8 17. Date and time-The date shall automatically adjust for leap year and the time shall have the capability of automatically adjusting for daylight saving and standard times. 18. System Status -The controller shall have a default display the following on: a) System status b) Date,time and type of the next exercise event c) Average voltage of the preferred and standby sources d) Scrolling through the displays shall indicate the following: I. Line to line and line to neutral voltages for both sources II. Frequency of each source III. Load current for each phase IV. Single or three phase operation V. Type of transition VI. Preferred source VI I. Commit or no commit modes of operation Vill. Source/source mode IX. In phase monitor enable/disable X. Phase rotation XI. Date and time 19. Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or display "coded" system status messages, which must be explained by references in the operator's manual, are not permissible. 20. Self-Diagnostics -The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for the purpose of detecting system errors. This screen shall provide information on the status input signals to the controller which may be preventing load transfer commands from being completed. 21. Communications Interface-The controller shall be capable of interfacing,through a standard communications with a network of transfer switches and generators. It shall be able to be connected via an RS-485 serial communication (up to 4000 ft. direct connect or multi-drop configuration). This module shall allow for seamless integration of existing or new communication transfer devices and generators. 22. The controller shall contain a USB port for use with a software diagnostic application available to factory authorized personnel for downloading the controller's parameters and settings; exercise event schedules; maintenance records and event history. The application can also adjust parameters on the controller. 23. Data Logging-The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the last 2000 events, even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in a non-volatile memory. The controller shall be able to display up to the last 99 events. The remaining events shall be accessible via the communications interface port or USB. a) Event Logging 1. Data, date and time indication of any event b) Statistical Data 1. Total number of transfers* 2. Total number of fail to transfers* Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 00-9 3. Total number of transfers due to preferred source failure* 4. Total number of minutes of operation* 5. Total number of minutes in the standby source* 6. Total number of minutes not in the preferred source* 7. Normal to emergency transfer time 8. Emergency to normal transfer time 9. System start date 10. Last maintenance date 11. The statistical data shall be held in two registers. One register shall contain data since start up and the second register shall contain data from the last maintenance reset. 24. External DC Power Supply-An optional provision shall be available to connect up to two external 12/24 VDC power supply to allow the LCD and the door mounted control indicators to remain functional when both power sources are dead for extended periods of time. This module shall contain reverse battery connection indication and circuit protection. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A Test and Inspection 1. Upon request,the manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying compliance with all of the requirements of this specification including compliance with the above codes and standards.The certification shall identify, by serial number(s),the equipment involved. No exceptions to the specifications, other than those stipulated at the time of the submittal, shall be included in the certification. 2. The ATS manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and the manufacturer shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation and servicing in accordance with ISO 9001. B Non-Conforming Work C Manufacturer's Services D Coordination of Other Tests and Inspections 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Unit shall be mounted as indicated on drawings. 3.2 CONNECTIONS B. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring. C. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 00- 10 D. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL E. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. F. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. G. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized,test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation- resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. 4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings. e. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles. H. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized,test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation- resistance tester. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 00- 11 a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation. 4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch operations. f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles. g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting,transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool- down and shutdown. 5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources. a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors. I. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently. J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. K. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. L. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION M. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. N. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment. O. Perform a power failure test on the entire installed system as specified in Section 26 32 13 Diesel Engine Generator. Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 00- 12 END OF SECTION Automatic Transfer Switches 26 36 00- 13 26 36 13 MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Furnish and install the low voltage manual transfer switches with cam-loks suitable for use as a generator quick connect having the ratings, features/accessories and enclosures as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1.03 REFERENCES A. The transfer switch shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the following latest applicable standards: 1. UL 1008: Standard for Safety-Transfer Switch Equipment 2. CSA C22.2 No. 178: Automatic Transfer Switches 3. UL 991: Standard for Tests for Safety-Related Controls Employing Solid-State Devices 4. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code 5. NFPA 99: Essential Electrical Systems of Health Care Facilities 6. NFPA 110: Emergency and Standby Power Systems 7. NEMA ICS 10: Electromechanical AC Transfer Switch Equipment 8. IEEE 446: Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems 1.04 SUBMITTALS—FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Front view and plan view of the assembly 2. Schematic diagram 3. Conduit space locations within the assembly. 4. Assembly ratings including: a. Voltage rating b. Continuous current rating c. Withstand and closing current ratings 5. Cable terminal sizes 6. Product Data Sheets. 1.05 SUBMITTALS—FOR CONSTRUCTION A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in section 1.04 and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process. 2. Wiring diagrams Manual Transfer Switch 26 36 13 - 1 3. Certified production test reports 4. Installation information 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. B. For the equipment specified herein,the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (S)years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide a certificate of compliance with UL 1008 for the transfer switches furnished under this section. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. B. Equipment being stored prior to installation shall be maintained in a clean and dry condition. If stored outdoors, indoor equipment shall be covered and heated, and outdoor equipment shall be heated. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction bulletins for the complete assembly and each major component. 1.11 EXTRA PRODUCTS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton B. Power Temp Systems C. ASCO D. Approved Equal E. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings,features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre-approved by the engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date. 2.02 RATINGS Manual Transfer Switch 26 36 13 -2 A. Voltage and amperage ratings shall be as indicated on the drawings. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Transfer switches shall be UL 1008 listed for application in their intended enclosures at 100%of continuous ampere rating and shall meet or exceed UL 1008 endurance test criteria to include rate of operation and number of operation cycles. 1. The transfer switch shall be designed and intended for switching the load connection between two power sources. 2. The transfer switch shall include mechanical interlocks to prevent unintentional paralleling of the power sources. 3. The transfer switch shall be of double throw construction and include molded case switches and/or circuit breakers in a fixed mount configuration, Eaton series or approved equal,with high-endurance characteristics capable of no-load and full-load interruptions at rated current equal to or exceeding UL 1008 endurance ratings. 4. Molded case switches/circuit breakers shall include a fixed instantaneous override trip element providing protection against high fault currents. 5. Molded case switches/circuit breakers shall be encased in a rigid housing constructed of durable high-strength insulating material with excellent dielectric characteristics capable of withstanding high-dynamic and thermal stresses. The molded case switch/circuit breaker interrupt current rating shall equal or exceed the transfer switch short-circuit withstand closing current rating. 6. Molded case switches/circuit breakers shall include arc extinguishers that confine, divide and extinguish an arc that may develop between the main contacts. 7. The transfer switch shall include a reliable mechanical operator mechanism that is capable of opening and closing the main contacts. 8. Front access to all molded case switch/circuit breaker connection points shall be provided for ease of troubleshooting. 9. The transfer switch main contacts shall be of silver composition, manually operated and mechanically held in position. 10. A removeable, steel dead-front panel shall be mounted in front of each molded case switch/circuit breaker providing a physical barrier when the front door is open. 11. The transfer switch shall include a permanently affixed handle for manually initiating and operating a load transfer between the power sources under full-rated load conditions. 12. The transfer switch shall provide colored, mechanical indication of source 1 and source 2 main contact position (open/closed). 13. A copper ground bus shall be furnished firmly secured to the enclosure structure. 14. Control wire bundles shall be secured to the assembly with nylon ties, pre-punched lances or anchors. All current transformer secondary leads shall first be connected to shorting terminal blocks with shorting screws. Control wire shall be marked with an origin and destination over the entire length of the wire using a cured ink process to the maximum extent possible. Where ink marking is not possible, printed sleeve wire markers at each end of control wire shall be provided. 15. Cam-Lok type lugs shall be provided for all source 1, source 2, and load terminations suitable for copper or aluminum cable. Manual Transfer Switch 26 36 13 -3 B. Transfer switches shall be open transition (break-before-make), and permit the manual operator to pause in the load disconnect ("neutral') position. C. Transfer switches requiring a switched neutral shall include a fully rated fourth pole that is identical to the other power poles. Switched neutral poles which are add-on, overlap, or not capable of breaking full rated load current are not acceptable. D. Transfer switches requiring a solid neutral shall include a fully rated, solid neutral plate. E. Transfer switches shall be capable of being operated manually under full-rated load conditions. Manual operation shall be accomplished by use of a permanently affixed handle. Removable handles are not acceptable. Manual operators requiring power source disconnection or de-energization prior to manual operation are not acceptable. F. Transfer switches intended for use as service equipment shall meet the following: 1. UL1008 listed as a complete assembly to include the transfer switch, service disconnect, and overcurrent protection device(s). UL1008 listed transfer switches with a separately attached compartment or enclosure,for housing the service disconnect and/or overcurrent protection device(s),that has not passed UL 1008 temperature rise testing and is UL 891 listed only will not be accepted. 2. UL1008 listed and marked "continuous load current not to exceed 100 percent of switch rating". Transfer switches marked as 80 percent will not be accepted. 3. Provide integral overcurrent protection in the form of a molded case circuit breaker equipped with a thermal-magnetic for source 1 and source 2. 4. Provide a fused disconnect for control power. 5. Provide a ground bus, neutral disconnect link, and neutral-to-ground bonding jumper as required for service entrance equipment. 6. Provide ground fault protection for use with solidly grounded wye electric services of more than 150 volts to ground where the service disconnect rating is 1000A or more. 2.04 ENCLOSURE A. Each transfer switch shall be provided in a NEMA 4X enclosure suitable for use in environments indicated by the drawings. B. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be constructed of 316 stainless-steel with a mill finish. C. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of being moved into installation position and mounted using the anchor points shown on the as- built drawings. 2.05 WITHSTAND AND CLOSING CURRENT RATINGS A. Short-circuit 1. The transfer switch shall be UL1008 listed and rated for use in a circuit capable of delivering the short-circuit current shown on the drawings. 2. The transfer switch shall have a short-circuit withstand and closing current rating of 100KA at 240 volts and 65KA at 480 volts. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 3.02 FACTORY TESTING Manual Transfer Switch 26 36 13 -4 A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA standards. 1. Insulation check to ensure the integrity of insulation and continuity of the entire system 2. Visual inspection to ensure that the switch matches the specification requirements and to verify that the fit and finish meet quality standards 3. Mechanical tests to verify that the switch's power sections are free of mechanical hindrances 4. Electrical tests to verify the complete electrical operation of the switch and to set up time delays and voltage sensing settings of the logic B. The manufacturer shall provide a certified copy of factory test reports. C. Transfer switch shall include a label indicating order number, catalog number and date 3.03 INSTALLATION A. The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings B. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the contractor 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.05 FIELD SERVICE ORGANIZATION A. The manufacturer of the ATS shall also have a national service organization that is available throughout the contiguous United States and is available on call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. END OF SECTION 26 36 13 Manual Transfer Switch 26 36 13 -5 26 64 19 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes MCCs for use with ac circuits rated 600 V and less and having the following factory-installed components: 1. Incoming main lugs and OCPDs. 2. Full-voltage magnetic controllers. 3. Feeder-tap units. 4. TVSS. 5. Instrumentation. 6. Auxiliary devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BAS: Building automation system. B. CE: Conformite European (European Compliance). C. CPT: Control power transformer. D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. E. GFCI: Ground fault circuit interrupting. F. IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor. G. LAN: Local area network. H. LED: Light-emitting diode. I. MCC: Motor-control center. J. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker. K. MCP: Motor-circuit protector. Motor Control Center 26 64 19- 1 L. NC: Normally closed. M. NO: Normally open. N. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. O. PCC: Point of common coupling. P. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative. Q. PT: Potential transformer. R. PWM: Pulse-width modulated. S. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. T. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier. U. TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion. V. THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand. W. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of controller and each type of MCC. Include shipping and operating weights, features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EA 5: For continuous metering equipment for energy consumption. C. Shop Drawings: For each MCC, manufacturer's approval drawings as defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL845, include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. 1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. C. Enclosure types and details. d. Nameplate legends. Motor Control Center 26 64 19-2 e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of complete MCC, and for bus structure and each unit. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed controller and feeder device, and installed devices. g. Specified optional features and accessories. 2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for each installed controller. 3. Nameplate legends. 4. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities. 5. Features, characteristics, ratings,and factory settings of each installed unit. D. Standard Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845. E. Production Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845. F. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around MCCs where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show MCC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements. G. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. H. Product Certificates: For each MCC,from manufacturer. I. Source quality-control reports. J. Field quality-control reports. K. Operation and Maintenance Data: For MCCs, all installed devices, and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's Record Drawings: As defined in UL845. In addition to requirements specified in UL845, include field modifications and field-assigned wiring identification incorporated during construction by manufacturer, Contractor,or both. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced- voltage, solid-state controllers. 5. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. 6. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points. Motor Control Center 26 64 19-3 L. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents. M. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. N. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing shall be as per NETA standards. B. Source Limitations: Obtain MCCs and controllers of a single type from single source from single manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver MCCs in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery paths. B. Handle MCCs according to the following: 1. NEMA ICS 2.3, "Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600 Volts." 2. NECA 402, "Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers." C. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside MCCs; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per vertical section. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) or exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C),with an average value exceeding 95 deg F(35 deg C) over a 24-hour period. Motor Control Center 26 64 19-4 2. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C). 3. Humidity: Less than 95 percent(noncondensing). 4. Altitude: Exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m), or 3300 feet (1000 m) if MCC includes solid-state devices. B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service or Distribution Systems: Do not interrupt electrical service to, or distribution systems within, a facility occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions, and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven (7) days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for MCCs, including clearances between MCCs and adjacent surfaces and other items. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Cast or drill and epoxy stainless steel anchor- bolts. B. Coordinate features of MCCs, installed units, and accessory devices with remote pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect. C. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each MCC, each controller, and each installed unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuits, motors, required control sequences, and duty cycle of motors and loads. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace TVSS that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Motor Control Center 26 64 19-5 1. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller installed. 4. Power Contacts: Furnish one spare for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.. 2. Rockwell Automation, Inc.;Allen-Bradley Brand. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc.; Power Distribution. 4. Square D;a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements for MCCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 18 and UL 845. 2.2 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES A. Description: Modular arrangement of main units, controller units, control devices, feeder-tap units, instruments, metering, auxiliary devices, and other items mounted in vertical sections of MCC. B. Controller Units: Combination controller units. 1. Install units up to and including Size 3 on drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions. 2. Equip units in Type B and Type C MCCs with pull-apart terminal strips for external control connections. C. Feeder-Tap Units: Through 225-A rating shall have drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions. Motor Control Center 26 64 19-6 D. Future Units: Compartments fully bused and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, ready for insertion of drawout units. E. Spare Units: Installed in compartments indicated "spare." 2.3 INCOMING MAINS A. Incoming Mains Location: Bottom or as indicated on contract drawings. B. Main Lugs Only: Conductor connectors suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: copper. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. C. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted,field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field- replicable electronic trip;and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long-and short-time pickup levels. C. Long-and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level,time delay, and IZt response. 4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door. 6. MCCB Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes,trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application;Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature,and ground-fault indicator. e. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function. Motor Control Center 26 64 19-7 f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay. g. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. h. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. D. Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker: 100 percent rated, sealed, insulated-case power circuit breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current. 1. Drawout circuit-breaker mounting. 2. Two-step,stored-energy closing. 3. Standard-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating plug, trip indicators,and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long-and short-time time adjustments. C. Ground-fault pickup level,time delay, and IZt response. 4. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function. 5. Remote trip indication and control. 2.4 COMBINATION CONTROLLERS A. Full-Voltage Controllers: 1. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Enclosed Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A. 2. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held. a. Configuration: Nonreversing. B. Disconnecting Means and OCPDs: 1. MCP Disconnecting Means: a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. C. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. d. NC alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped. e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rating to 100 kA. Motor Control Center 26 64 19-8 2. MCCB Disconnecting Means: a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. C. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle. e. NC alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped. 3. Molded-Case Switch Disconnecting Means: a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with in-line fuse block for Class J or L power fuses (depending on ampere rating), providing an interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. C. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with molded-case switch handle. d. NC alarm contact that operates only when molded-case switch has tripped. C. Overload Relays: 1. Bimetallic Overload Relays: a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. C. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Ambient compensated. e. Automatic resetting. D. Control Power: 1. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT control power source of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA. 2.5 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES A. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in, solid- state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking Motor Control Center 26 64 19-9 suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the MCC short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories: 1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 3. Integral disconnect switch. 4. Redundant suppression circuits. 5. Redundant replaceable modules. 6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 8. Audible alarm,with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 9. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one NO and one NC, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. 10. Six-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges. B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per mode/320 kA per phase. Retain "Withstand Capabilities" Paragraph below for MCCs located at or near Category C locations. C. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2.6 MCC CONTROL POWER A. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from CPT. B. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied from remote branch circuit. C. Electrically Interlocked Main and Tie Circuit Breakers: Two CPTs in separate compartments, with interlocking relays, connected to the primary side of each CPT at the line side of the associated main circuit breaker. 120-V secondaries connected through automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail-safe automatic transfer scheme. D. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits. Motor Control Center 26 64 19- 10 E. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. 2.7 ENCLOSURES A. Indoor Enclosures: Freestanding steel cabinets unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. B. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface. 1. Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color; undersurfaces treated with corrosion-resistant undercoating. 2. Enclosure: Flat roof; bolt-on rear covers for each section,with provisions for padlocking. C. Compartments: Modular; individual lift-off doors with concealed hinges and quick-captive screw fasteners. Interlocks on units requiring disconnecting means in off position before door can be opened or closed,except by operating a permissive release device. D. Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in MCC; same size compartments to permit interchangeability and ready rearrangement of units, such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or welding. E. Wiring Spaces: 1. Vertical wireways in each vertical section for vertical wiring to each unit compartment; supports to hold wiring in place. 2. Horizontal wireways in bottom and top of each vertical section for horizontal wiring between vertical sections; supports to hold wiring in place. 2.8 AUXILIARY DEVICES A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type. a. Push Buttons: Recessed types; momentary contact unless otherwise indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; RED RUN; GREEN STOPPED; push to test. C. Selector Switches: Rotary type. 2. Elapsed-Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours; nonresettable. Motor Control Center 26 64 19- 11 3. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and plus or minus 2 percent accuracy with selector switches having an off position. B. Reversible NC/NO contactor auxiliary contact(s). C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays. D. Space heaters, with NC auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings. E. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures. 2.9 CHARACTERISTICS AND RATINGS A. Control and Load Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No.8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. B. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V, three phase,three wire. C. Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Unit: Fully rated; 65 kA. D. Short-Circuit Current Rating of MCC: Fully rated with its main overcurrent device; 65 kA. E. Environmental Ratings: 1. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 0 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F, with an average value not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a 24-hour period. 2. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F(60 deg C) 3. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent(noncondensing). F. Main-Bus Continuous Rating: as noted on drawings. G. Vertical-Bus Minimum Continuous Rating: 300 A. H. Horizontal and Vertical Bus Bracing (Short-Circuit Current Rating): Match MCC short-circuit current rating. I. Main Horizontal and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of MCC's main and vertical sections. Provide for future extensions. J. Vertical Phase and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable height of vertical sections, except for sections incorporating single units. K. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible MCCs: Motor Control Center 26 64 19- 12 1. Main Devices: Fixed mounted. 2. Controller Units: Drawout mounted. 3. Sections front and rear aligned. L. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic MCC. M. Pull Box on Top of an MCC: 1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as MCC. 2. Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism. 3. Removable covers forming top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear easily removable for drilling and cutting. 4. Insulated bottom of fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into MCC. 5. Cable supports arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables, including those for future installation. 6. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness. N. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of unit. O. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant,spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C. P. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for OCPDs and other components including instruments and instrument transformers. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. MCC Testing: Inspect and test MCCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 18. B. MCCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive MCCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged,or mold damaged. Motor Control Center 26 64 19- 13 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of MCCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install MCCs on 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 2. For supported equipment, install stainless steel anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D. Install fuses in each fusible switch. E. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed. F. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment. G. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 05 53 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification of MCC, MCC components, and control wiring. 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label MCC and each cubicle with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. 4. Mark up a set of manufacturer's connection wiring diagrams with field-assigned wiring identifications and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings. Motor Control Center 26 64 19- 14 B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for MCCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of MCCs. 3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Bundle,train, and support wiring in enclosures. B. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches within enclosed controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high- temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Division 26 05 33 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties. B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. E. Tests and Inspections: Motor Control Center 26 64 19- 15 1. Test system in de-energized state as recommended by manufacturer. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. 2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, component, connecting motor supply,feeder,and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s). 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multipole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multipole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. C. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 10. Mark up a set of manufacturer's drawings with all field modifications incorporated during construction and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings. F. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken,and observations after remedial action. 3.7 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Motor Control Center 26 64 19- 16 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. B. Adjust overload relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays. C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Engineer before increasing settings. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service. B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,operate, and maintain enclosed controllers. END OF SECTION Motor Control Center 26 64 19- 17 SECTION 3123 16 EXAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design,furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and construction loads. 1. Delegated Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional ENGINEER, licensed to practice in the state of Texas, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. As a minimum, the Excavation Support and Protection Plan shall address the followingitems: 1. Provide details of shoring, bracing, sheet piling, soldier piles and lagging, tie backs, and other support systems and provisions for worker protection from hazards of caving ground. 2. Methods and sequencing of installing excavation support. 3. Proposed locations for excavated materials. 4. Minimum lateral distance from the crest of slopes for vehicles, equipment, and stockpiled materials. 5. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or othermeans. 6. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 7. Monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For excavation support and protection system indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional ENGINEER, licensed to practice in the state where the Project is constructed, responsible for their preparation. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only.The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical ENGINEER's and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical ENGINEER's. OWNER and ENGINEER will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES INC. 3123 16-PAGE 1 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EXCAVATION SUPPORT&PROTECTION SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation support and protection. 2. The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in the Project Manual. B. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional ENGINEER to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify ENGINEER if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered. B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from OWNER and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that forming and finishing of concrete surfaces are not impeded. D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection systems remain stable. E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection systems. 3.2 TRENCHES A. For excavations exceeding 5 feet in depth, provide adequate safety system meeting requirements of applicable state and local construction safety orders,and Federal requirements. 3.3 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements,facilities, and utilities. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES INC. 3123 16-PAGE 2 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EXCAVATION SUPPORT&PROTECTION SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in Division 2 Section 02 2100"Select Material." 2. Repair or replace, as approved by ENGINEER, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems. B. If the support or stability of existing structures or site improvements is dependent, leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches below overlaying construction and abandon remainder. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES INC. 3123 16-PAGE 3 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EXCAVATION SUPPORT&PROTECTION SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES INC. 3123 16-PAGE 4 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 EXCAVATION SUPPORT&PROTECTION SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 32 3113 CHAIN-LINK FENCE AND GATES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for chain-link fences and gates. B. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00—Procurement and Contracting Requirements 2. Division 01-General Requirements 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. See Measurement and Payment Section 0129 00. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this specification unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel b. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products C. A392, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric d. A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes e. F626, Standard Specification for Fence Fittings f. F668, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated Chain Link Fence Fabric g. F1043, Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework h. F1083, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Welded,for Fence Structures i. F1183, Specification for Aluminum Alloy Chain Link Fence Fabric B. Definitions: 1. Posts:Vertical members of the fence. a. End, corner, and pull posts are posts at which chain link fence terminates. b. Gate posts are posts at which gates are either attached or latched. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 31 13-PAGE 1 OF S ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CHAIN FENCE AND GATES SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Line posts are posts that occur in a line of fence in which the chain link fabric passes and to which it is tied. Rails: Horizontal members of the fence; may be top, bottom, intermediate or brace rails. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings 1. Show locations, components, materials, dimensions, sizes,weights, and finishes of components. Include plans,gate elevations, sections, details of post anchorage, attachment, bracing, and other required installation and operational clearances. B. Product data 1. Manufacturer's catalog cuts indicating material compliance and specified options. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Emergency Access Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic gate operators serving as a required means of access. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS/MATERIALS A. Manufacturer 1. Minimum of 5 years of experience manufacturing galvanized coated chain link fencing. B. Materials 1. Chain Link Fence a. General 1) Posts, gate frames, braces, rails, stretcher bars, truss rods and tension wire shall be of steel. 2) Gate hinges, post caps, barbed wire supporting arms, stretcher bar bands and other parts shall be of steel, malleable iron, ductile iron or equal 3) Post tops, rail end,ties and clips may be of aluminum. 4) Use only new material, or salvaged/existing material if approved by Owner or noted on Drawings. b. Steel Fabric 1) Fabric a) No. 9 gauge b) 2-inch mesh i. Commercial: both top and bottom selvages twisted and barged Residential: match existing or both top and bottom PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 31 13-PAGE 2 OF S ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CHAIN FENCE AND GATES SEPTEMBER 2025 selvages knuckled ii. Furnish 1-piece fabric widths. 2) Fabric Finish: Galvanized, ASTM A392, Class I, with not less than 1.2 oz. zinc per square foot of surface. C. Aluminum Fabric 1) Fabric a) ASTM F1183 b) No. 9 gauge c) 2-inch mesh, with both top and bottom selvages twisted and barged. d) Furnish 1-piece fabric widths. d. PVC Coated Steel Chain Link Fabric 1) ASTM F 668 2) The base metal of the chain link fence fabric is composed of commercial quality, medium-carbon galvanized (zinc coated) steel wire. 3) The vinyl coating is extruded to galvanized steel wire.This process ensures a coating free of voids, as well as a smooth surface appearance. 4) The wire is PVC coated before weaving and is free and flexible at all joints 5) Unless otherwise specified a) fabric woven in 2 in. (50 mm) mesh, under 72" (1,830 mm) in height, is knuckled at both selvages b) fabric 72" (1,830mm) high and over is knuckled at one selvage and twisted at the other. c) All fabrics woven into meshes under 2 in. (50 mm) have both selvages knuckled 6) Select a color that complies with ASTM F934: Green, Brown , Black e. Steel Framing 1) Steel pipe-Type I a) ASTM F1083 b) Standard weight schedule 40 c) Minimum yield strength: 30,000 psi d) Sizes as indicated e) Hot-dipped galvanized with minimum average 1.8 oz/ftz of coated surface area PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 3113-PAGE 3 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CHAIN FENCE AND GATES SEPTEMBER 2025 2) Steel pipe-Type II a) ASTM F1043,Group IC b) Minimum yield strength: 50,000 psi c) Sizes as indicated on Drawings d) Protective coating per ASTM F1043 i. External coating Type B 0 Zinc with organic overcoat 0 0.9 oz/ft2 minimum zinc coating with chromate conversion coating and verifiable polymer film ii. Internal coating Type B 0 Minimum 0.9 oz/ft2 zinc or Type D, zinc pigmented,81 percent nominal coating, minimum 3 mils 3) Formed steel ("C") sections: a) Roll formed steel shapes complying with ASTM F1043, Group II b) Minimum yield strength: 45,000 psi (310 MPa) c) Sizes as indicated on Drawings d) External coating per ASTM F1043,Type A i. Minimum average 2.0 oz/ft2 of zinc per ASTM A123 4) Steel square sections a) ASTM A500, Grade B b) Minimum yield strength: 40,000 psi c) Sizes as indicated on Drawings d) Hot-dipped galvanized with minimum 1.8 oz/ft2 of coated surface area f. Accessories 1) Chain link fence accessories a) ASTM F626 b) Provide items required to complete fence system. c) Galvanize each ferrous metal item and finish to match framing. 2) Post caps a) Formed steel or cast malleable iron weather tight closure cap for tubular posts. b) Provide 1 cap for each post. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 3113-PAGE 4 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CHAIN FENCE AND GATES SEPTEMBER 2025 c) Cap to have provision for barbed wire when necessary. d) "C" shaped line post without top rail or barbed wire supporting arms do not require post caps. e) Where top rail is used, provide tops to permit passage of top rail. 3) Top rail and rail ends a) 15/8 inch diameter galvanized round pipe for horizontal railing b) Pressed steel per ASTM F626 c) For connection of rail and brace to terminal posts 4) Top rail sleeves a) 7-inch expansion sleeve with a minimum 0.137 inch wire diameter and 1.80 inch length spring, allowing for expansion and contraction of top rail 5) Wire ties a) 9 gauge galvanized steel wire for attachment of fabric to line posts b) Double wrap 13 gauge for rails and braces. c) Hog ring ties of 12-1/2 gauge for attachment 6) Brace and tension (stretcher bar) bands a) Pressed steel b) Minimum 300-degree profile curvature for secure fence post attachment c) At square post provide tension bar clips. 7) Tension (stretcher) bars: a) 1-piece lengths equal to 2 inches less than full height of fabric b) Minimum cross-section of 3/16 inch x 3/4 inch c) Provide tension (stretcher) bars where chain link fabric meets terminal posts. 8) Tension wire a) Galvanized coated steel wire, 6 gauge, [0.192 inch] diameter wire b) Tensile strength: 75,000 psi 9) Truss rods&tightener a) Steel rods with minimum diameter of 5/16 inch b) Capable of withstanding a tension of minimum 2,000 pounds 10) Nuts and bolts are galvanized. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 31 13-PAGE 5 OF S ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CHAIN FENCE AND GATES SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Wrought Iron Fence: specified per Drawings. 3. Steel Tube Fence: specified per Drawings. 4. Setting Materials a. Concrete 1) Minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,000 psi 2) Bagged concrete allowed. b. Drive Anchors 1) Galvanized angles 2) ASTM A 36 steel 3) 1 inch x 1 inch x 30-inch galvanized shoe clamps to secure angles to posts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions 1. Verify areas to receive fencing are completed to final grades and elevations. 2. Ensure property lines and legal boundaries of work are clearly established. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Chain Link Fence Framing 1. Locate terminal post at each fence termination and change in horizontal or vertical direction of 30 degrees or more. 2. Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet on center. 3. Set all posts in concrete a. Drill or hand-excavate holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil to a diameter 4 times greater than outside dimension of post. b. Set mid-post bottom 36 inches below surface when in firm, undisturbed soil. C. Set end-post bottom 48 inches below surface wen in firm, undisturbed soil. d. Excavate deeper as required for adequate support in soft and loose soils, and for posts with heavy lateral loads. e. Place concrete around posts in a continuous pour. Trowel finish around post. Slope to direct water away from posts. 4. Check each post for vertical and top alignment and maintain in position during placement and finishing operations. 5. Bracing: Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts. 6. Tension wire PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 31 13-PAGE 6 OF S ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CHAIN FENCE AND GATES SEPTEMBER 2025 a. Provide tension wire at bottom of fabric and at top, if top rail is not specified. b. Install tension wire before stretching fabric and attach to each post with ties. C. Secure tension wire to fabric with 12-1/2 gauge hog rings 24 inches on center. 7. Top rail a. Install lengths, 21 feet b. Connect joints with sleeves for rigid connections for expansion/contraction. 8. Center Rails for fabric height 12 feet and taller. a. Install mid rails between posts with fittings and accessories. 9. Bottom Rails: Install bottom rails between posts with fittings and accessories. B. Chain Link Fabric Installation 1. Fabric a. Install fabric on security side and attach so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. b. Leave approximately 2 inches between finish grade and bottom selvage. C. Attach fabric with wire ties to line posts at 15 inches on center and to rails, braces, and tension wire at 24 inches on center. 2. Tension (stretcher) bars a. Pull fabric taut. b. Thread tension bar through fabric and attach to terminal posts with bands or clips spaced maximum of 15 inches on center. 3. Accessories a. Tie wires: Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons and clothing. b. Fasteners: Install nuts on side of fence opposite fabric side for added security. C. Slats: Install slats in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Wrought Iron Installation: install per Drawings D. Steel Tube Fence: install per Drawings E. Barbed Wire: When indicated on Drawings, installed barbed wire uniformly spaced, angled toward security side of fence. Pull wire taut and install securely to extension arms and secure to end post or terminal arms. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 31 13-PAGE 7 OF S ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CHAIN FENCE AND GATES SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 3113-PAGE 8 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 CHAIN FENCE AND GATES SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 32 3140 PRECAST CONCRETE FENCE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section provides requirements for precast concrete fencing and includes: 1. Precast concrete panels and posts, 8' tall 2. Concrete ratings 3. Post footings 4. Color B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" 1.3 STANDARDS A. Applicable ASTM Standards, latest revision,as published by the American Society for Testing and Materials and indicated hereinafter. B. Contractor responsibilities: 1. Fence contractor is responsible for laying out the fence lines, including fence corners and gate locations. 2. Fence contractor is responsible for clearing all trees & underbrush, which may be in the fence lines. All cleared trees and underbrush shall be removed from the job site by the fence contractor. 3. Fence contractor is responsible for contacting appropriate personnel for locating all underground utilities within the work area. Owner to provide assistance when requested by Contractor. 4. Fence contractor is responsible for providing a competent crew with a minimum of three workers on the job at all times. C. SAFETY 1. The work shall be performed in accordance with all applicable federal,state,and local safety laws and regulations, including the Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 as amended (OSHA). 2. The contractor shall be responsible for the observance of proper safety practices and the avoidance of damage to property by all personnel engaged in the work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to be aware of and observe any recommended practice or regulations concerning the handling of construction materials called for on this project. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 31 40-PAGE 1 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRECAST CONCRETE FENCE SEPTEMBER 2025 3. The Contractor shall take all steps necessary to prevent damage to or interference with the existing power lines, communication facilities, roadways, railroads, waterways, buried cables, pipelines, and other facilities on, adjacent to, or crossing the project property. D. SUBMITTALS 1. Color to be selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Shop Drawings: Owner or Contractor, if requested, to provide working drawings indicating all information necessary for precast fence elements. Drawings shall illustrate the shape and dimension of precast components; the size, quantity and details of the reinforcing steel; the quantity, type, size and details of connection and lifting hardware (if needed); the size and location of drain openings; and any additional details necessary. Drawings shall bear the seal of a licensed professional engineer in the State of Texas. 3. Design Calculations: If requested, Contractor to furnish design calculations which include a summary of all design parameters used, including material types, strength values, allowable stresses, assumed loads and load combinations. Calculations shall be submitted covering the range of heights and loading conditions on the project. Calculations shall bear the seal of a licensed professional engineer in the State of Texas. 4. Soil Conditions:Owner to provide soil samples or a copy of a soils report to Contractor and/or engineer for design of piers/posts based on wind load calculations. 5. Samples: Manufacturer to furnish samples of each type,texture and color of concrete screening wall of interest where applicable. E. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has experience with architectural precast concrete fence projects with same material and of similar scope to the Project. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing precast concrete fence units in accordance with those indicated for the Project, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. F. PROJECT CONDITIONS 1. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for fences and gates shown on the Drawings in relation to the property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements. 2. All existing fence or fence line obstructions are to be removed by fence contractor prior to commencement of work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Suppliers: subject to compliance with requirements, that may be incorporated in the work include the following: 1. Fencecrete America Ltd., Rock Style and Brick PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 31 40-PAGE 2 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRECAST CONCRETE FENCE SEPTEMBER 2025 2. An approved equal B. Precast Concrete Fence Wall System (panels and posts) 1. 8'-0"tall unless otherwise noted on plans 2. Panels and posts to have same texture on both sides. 3. Includes textured post caps (line, end and corner) and/or panel caps. 4. Panel, Posts and caps shall be normal weight concrete having sand and gravel or crushed stone aggregates mixed with ASTM-C150,Type I,Type IL, or Type III Portland Cement and shall have a compression strength of 5,000 psi @ 28 days. 5. Concrete to be thoroughly mixed and vibrated. 6. Steel reinforced panels and rebar reinforced posts and rails. Rebar conforms to ASTM A615,grade 60. 7. Wall posts set five feet apart, or per manufacturer's recommendations. 8. Post footings: 5' on center(maximum). 9. Loading: Wind loading and surcharge loads will be applied to the panels, columns, and foundation components per local building code requirements and per section G (Design Loading). 2.2 PRECAST FENCE COMPONENTS DIMENSIONS A. Posts shall have a minimum cross-sectional dimension of 5" as measured from face-to-face. B. Posts up to 8' high shall be reinforced with 1 #4 rebar, each face. 9' and 10' posts to have 2 #4 rebar each face. C. Method of post attachment to concrete footing / pier shall be by embedment in poured concrete. Depth of concrete pier, and embedment of post shall be as shown on Shop Drawing from manufacturer. D. Panels shall have an interlock construction. 2.3 COLOR A. As selected from manufacturer's range of standard colors. 2.4 PIERS(POST FOOTINGS) DESIGN A. 5' on center(maximum) B. Diameter: 12" minimum and per design calculations. C. Depth: 24" minimum and per design calculations. D. Reinforcement: None, unless required per design calculations. E. Where a precast fence post shares the same pier with a steel gatepost, size of pier shall be increased to accommodate both posts. Concrete for this pier shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi @ 28 days. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 31 40-PAGE 3 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRECAST CONCRETE FENCE SEPTEMBER 2025 F. Concrete for line post piers shall be normal weight concrete having sand and gravel or crushed stone aggregates mixed with ASTM-C150,Type I,Type IL,orType III Portland Cement and shall have a minimum compression strength of 2,500 psi @ 28 days. 2.5 HEIGHT A. 8'-0" height (min) above grade, i.e.,above top of crushed rock. B. Lower panel shall be supported by concrete pier, existing grade or with a 1-1/4" outdoor grade PVC spacer pipe embedded in pier 2" (min),which has concrete filled to the top where and if applicable. 2.6 DESIGN LOADING A. Loads Criteria below must be provided in the submittal and in accordance with loadings listed in the contract documents. 1. Wind velocity(V) 2. Exposure 3. Importance Factor(1) 4. Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient (KZ) 5. Wind Directionality Factor(KD) 6. Topographical Factor(KZT) 7. Wind Pressure 8. Working Design Stress 9. Seismic Design 2.7 CONCRETE A. Concrete Material 1. Concrete shall be normal weight concrete having sand and gravel or crushed stone aggregates, mixed with ASTM-C150, Type 1, Type IL or Type III Portland Cement to meet the minimum compressive strengths as follows. a. Panels& posts: 5,000 psi @ 28 days b. Line post piers: 3,000 psi @ 28 days c. Gate post/line post shared pier: 3,000 psi @ 28 days 2. Water used for concrete shall be clean water and free from injurious amounts of oils, alkalis, organic or other deleterious substances. 3. All concrete permanently exposed to the weather shall contain an air entraining admixture resulting in 3 to 6%entrained air or as recommended by the manufacturer. B. REINFORCING MATERIALS: 1. All reinforcing steel shall be deformed type bars and conform to ASTM—A615,Grade 60, placed as shown on the drawings. 2. All ties and stirrups shall conform to the requirements of ASTM-A615,Grade 60. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 3140-PAGE 4 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRECAST CONCRETE FENCE SEPTEMBER 2025 3. All wire mesh shall be 9 gauge galvanized having 2 horizontal bars and at least 4 vertical bars. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install precast concrete fence per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Reinforcement steel, bars and wire fabric shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing and again before the concrete is placed, shall be accurately positioned and secured in place. Provide standard bar charts for all beam steel off the ground. C. Install all reinforcement with the following clearances between reinforcing steel and face of concrete: 1. Footing, pier or beam bottom: 3" 2. Earth-formed pier of beam sides: 2" 3. Formed footing, pier or beam sides exposed: 1" 4. Precast exposed to weather: panels%"; post 1%" D. Splices within continuous unscheduled reinforcing steel shall have a minimum lap of 30 bar diameters. E. Footing size shall be based on soil properties at the site. F. Fresh poured concrete shall be tamped into place by steel rammer, slicing tools or mechanical vibrator until concrete is thoroughly compact and without void. G. Make excavations for footing to undisturbed soil or to the depth noted on the drawings. Leave the bottom-bearing surface clean and smooth. If footing excavations are made deeper than intended, only concrete shall be used for fill. Remove all loose material from grade beam excavations prior to concrete pour. H. Align and level posts and panels to be plumb. 3.2 TESTING OF CONCRETE A. The contractor shall be responsible for the following concrete tests (varies according to customer requirements): 1. 1 air entrainment test of fence and also each gate opening. 2. 2 slump tests of fence and also at each gate opening. 3. 4 test cylinders of fence and also at each gate opening including 1-7 day break, 2-28 day breaks, 1-spare B. Slump test shall be done under the direct supervision of Owner. Slump of concrete shall be determined in conformity with ASTM, Standard Method C-143. The contractor shall be responsible for securing, transporting and testing of all concrete test specimens. Concrete test reports shall be forwarded to and shall become the property of the Owner. C. Owner reserves the right to make any tests necessary to ensure that the concrete conforms to the specifications. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 31 40-PAGE 5 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRECAST CONCRETE FENCE SEPTEMBER 2025 D. All costs involving the testing of concrete by the contractor shall be the responsibility of the contractor, if included in price. 3.3 DAMAGED UNITS A. Contractor shall replace panels and other components of work that have been damaged. B. Cleaning: Prior to substantial completion of fence, Contractor shall clean surfaces of fence as recommended by fence manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANUP A. Contractor shall clean up site and dispose of all debris, trash, excavated soil, etc. to the satisfaction of the construction inspector. 3.5 WARRANTIES A. General 1. The fence manufacturer shall furnish written warranties covering materials and workmanship and color finish of precast elements. Such warranties shall cover the full cost of materials to replace or repair defective materials per the conditions of the manufacturer. B. Durations of Warranties 1. All materials and workmanship shall be warranted for a period of 5 years from the date of shipment. 3.6 LIMITATIONS A. Product is intended for exterior fencing applications. B. Product shall not be used alone as a retaining wall forthe support of soils and other structural elements unless otherwise noted by the structural engineer. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 31 40-PAGE 6 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRECAST CONCRETE FENCE SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 33 14 19 DRAINS, CLEANOUTS, HYDRANTS,AND HOSE STATIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Floor drains. 2. Hub drains. 3. Trench drains. 4. Cleanouts. 5. Fire Hydrants 6. Yard Hydrants and Hose Stations. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 0 2. Division 1 3. Section 09 9100- Painting and Protective Coatings 1.2 REFERENCES(NOT USED) 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and product specifications for each product. b. Provide manufacturer's data sheet and warranty information for each type of product indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Suppliers: a. Company specializing in supplying products specified in this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. b. All equipment of each type specified in this section shall be supplied by a single SUPPLIER who is fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods. C. SUPPLIER shall maintain a complete stock of spare parts commonly needed for the equipment specified and shall be capable of shipping spare parts within 48 hours of request. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 14 19-PAGE 1 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DRAINS,CLEANOUTS,HYDRANTS&HOSE STATIONS SEPTEMBER 2025 A. Deliver, handle, and store all components to be installed under this section in accordance with the SUPPLIER'S written Pre-Installation Delivery, Storage, and Handling Instructions. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: 1. All equipment including controls and drives specified herein shall be specifically designed to be installed for this service and the environment encountered in this installation, unless noted otherwise. 2. All equipment shall be designed and capable of operation outdoors at ambient temperatures of 10 degrees F to 110 degrees F. B. Existing Conditions: 1. CONTRACTOR shall verify actual dimensions of openings, adjacent facilities and equipment, utilities, and related items by field measurements before fabrication, as applicable. 1.8 WARRANTY(NOT USED) PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (NOT USED) 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Floor Drains: 1. Floor Drain, Round Top, FD-1: Corresponds to drains that are directly connected to 10- inch and 12-inch pipe. Furnish duracoated cast iron floor drain, medium duty application,with bottom outlet, seepage pan and combination membrane flashing clamp and frame, approximately 21-inch round double slotted grate similar to Zurn Series Z547. Drain outlet shall be same size as drain piping shown on Drawings. 2. Floor Drain, Round Top, FD-2: Corresponds to drains that are directly connected to 6- inch and 8-inch pipe. Furnish duracoated cast iron floor drain, medium duty application,with bottom outlet, seepage pan and combination membrane flashing clamp and frame, approximately 12-inch round double slotted grate similar to Josam Series 32300 and Zurn Series Z500. Drain outlet shall be same size as drain piping shown on Drawings. 3. Floor Drain, Round top, FD-3: Corresponds to drains that are directly connected to 4- inch and smaller pipe. Furnish duracoated cast iron floor drain, medium duty application,with bottom outlet, seepage pan and combination membrane flashing clamp and frame, approximately 8-inch round double slotted grate similar to Josam Series 32100 and Zurn Series Z500. Drain outlet shall be same size as drain piping shown on Drawings. a. Septage Receiving Station drain grate shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 4. Floor Drain, Rectangular Top, FD-4: Furnish rectangular adjustable strainer top with duracoated cast iron head, polished nickel bronze frame and secured slotted grate. Size shall be 5"x 17" or as indicated on the Drawings. Rectangular floor drain shall be similar to Zurn Type "J" rectangular strainer with slotted opening. 5. Floor Drain, Square Top, FD-5: Furnish coated cast iron floor drain with 14-inch square PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 14 19-PAGE 2 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DRAINS,CLEANOUTS,HYDRANTS&HOSE STATIONS SEPTEMBER 2025 grate set in square frame,grate support collar with double drainage flange and weepholes, bottom outlet, adjustable collar, support ring, large sump body, removable sediment bucket and heavy duty iron grate similar to Josam Series 37900. 6. Hub Drain, FD-5: Furnish duracoated cast hub drain adapter with standard cast iron soil pipe hub and female threaded outlet, similar to Josam Series 88550. Pipe size shall be same size as drain piping shown on Drawings. B. Trench Drain System: 1. Trench Drain System,TD-1: a. Provide modular channel sections, 80" long, 17" wide, and a 12" wide throat constructed of HDPE,with interlocking ends and radius bottom. b. Channels shall be provided with 1.0% built-in slope and inverts ranging from 9.25"to 34.21". C. Channels shall have clips for anchoring to vertical re-bar and a heavy-duty steel frame for securing the grate. d. Provide a ductile iron grate design for H-20 loadings with mechanical lock down devices. e. Provide bottom outlet in 8-inch diameter. f. Trench drain similar to Zurn Flo-Thru Model 874-12. 2. Trench Drain System,TD-2: a. Provide modular channel sections, 40" long, 6"wide, and a 4" wide throat constructed of HDPE,with interlocking ends and radius bottom. b. Channels shall be provided with flat bottom and a 3-1/2" invert. C. Channels shall have clips for anchoring to vertical re-bar and a heavy-duty steel frame for securing the grate. d. Provide a ductile iron grate design for H-20 loadings with mechanical lock down devices. e. Provide end outlet in 2" diameter and bottom outlets in 4" diameter. f. Trench drain similar to Zurn Flo-Thru Model 883. C. Cleanouts: 1. Finished Floors and Concrete Floors, CO-1: Provide duracoated cast-iron, adjustable cleanout with gas and watertight ABS tapered thread plug, and secured cover and frame, similar to Zurn Model Z1402. Pipe size shall be as the drain piping shown on the Drawings. 2. Finished and Unfinished Walls, CO-2: Provide duracoated cast iron cleanout tea with gas and watertight ABS tapered thread plug and a square, smooth nickel-bronze secured wall access cover and frame, similar to Zurn Model Z1447. 3. Outside Location: Provide duracoated, cast iron cleanout with gas and watertight ABS tapered thread plug, an adjustable housing, and heavy-duty tractor-type cover with vandal-proof screws, cast flush in a circular, 24" diameter by 6" thick concrete pad in non-surface areas. D. Fire Hydrants: 1. Provide fire hydrants according to the standard details at the locations indicated on PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 14 19-PAGE 3 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DRAINS,CLEANOUTS,HYDRANTS&HOSE STATIONS SEPTEMBER 2025 the Drawings. E. Yard Hydrants and HOSE STATIONS 1. Provide yard hydrants according to the standard details at the locations indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide hose station according to the standard details at the locations indicated on the Drawings. Hose station shall consist of hydrant, hose of the size and type indicated, spray nozzle, and bracket. 2.3 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.4 FABRICATION/ASSEMBLY(NOT USED) 2.5 SYSTEMS COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.6 ACCESSORIES (NOT USED) 2.7 MOTORS (NOT USED) 2.8 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (NOT USED) 2.9 FINISHES A. Coating systems shall be as specified in Section 09 9100. Stainless steel materials shall not be coated. B. Shop Selections: 1. Finish: Color and finish as selected by OWNER from samples submitted by CONTRACTOR. 2. Primer: When factory prime coat is included only, color as selected by OWNER from samples submitted by CONTRACTOR. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL(NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLER (NOT USED) 3.2 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.3 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Floor Drains: Install of the size and at the locations shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide hub drains at equipment for the collection of wastewater. B. Trench Drains: 1. Install to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Cleanouts: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 14 19-PAGE 4 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DRAINS,CLEANOUTS,HYDRANTS&HOSE STATIONS SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Provide drainage lines with properly specified cleanouts. Locate cleanouts in runs not more than 90 feet on centers or as required by local authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide cleanouts at the base of each soil or waste stack and wherever necessary to make accessible all parts of the drainage soil or waste systems. 3. Extend cleanouts within chases to near wall and provide wall access cover compatible with wall construction. 4. Provide cleanouts of required size with flashing flange,where installed with membrane water proofing. D. Fire Hydrants,Yard Hydrants, Hose Stations: 1. Provide where shown on the Drawings and in accordance with Drawings Detail. 3.5 FIELD/SITE QUALITY CONTROL(NOT USED) 3.6 SYSTEM STARTUP (NOT USED) 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Adjust surface as needed to ensure floor drains and trench drains are flush with the surrounding surface. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean as recommended by MANUFACTURER. Do not use materials or methods which may damage finish, surface, or surrounding construction. 3.9 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES (NOT USED) 3.10 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 3.11 ATTACHMENTS (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 14 19-PAGE 5 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DRAINS,CLEANOUTS,HYDRANTS&HOSE STATIONS SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 14 19-PAGE 6 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DRAINS,CLEANOUTS,HYDRANTS&HOSE STATIONS SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 33 32 13 PRE-ENGINEERED LIFT STATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A, The work in this section shall include furnishing and placing into operation Pre- engineered, prefabricated fiberglass sewage pump station(s) complete with 2 submersible pumps, internal piping, lifting chains,guide rails,vent,valve vault and aluminum watertight access covers and appurtenances as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings to make a complete lift station. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A� Section 0133 00 Submittal Procedures 1 Section 0175 25 Equipment Testing and Startup Section 40 05 52 Miscellaneous Valves and Appurtenances D. Section 43 22 10 PS Common Requirements for Pumps E. Section 43 25 00 PS Pumps, Submersible—Immersible F, Division 26 , Division 40 1.3 REFERENCES A, American Society for testing and material (ASTM) International 1. A 48: Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. A743: Standard Specification Iron-Chromium Nickel, Corrosion Resistant 3. D3753: Standard Specification for Fiberglass Manholes and Wetwells B. Hydraulic Institute: Current Standards. 1. HI 14.6: Hydrodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests. 2. HI 11.6: Submersible Pump Tests 1.4 SUBMITTALS A, Submittal data shall be provided to show compliance with Section 0133 00 Submittal Procedures. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 32 13-PAGE 1 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRE-ENGINEERED LIFT STATION SEPTEMBER 2025 B. Standard submittal data for approval must consist of the following and in compliance with 43 25 00-PS Pumps, Submersible- Immersible: 1. Pump Curve-Q in GPM, H in FEET 2. Power Input Curve- KILOWATT 3. Efficiency Curve (including motor)wire to water 4. N.P.S.H. Curve S. Model, Impeller size, serial number 6. Motor rated HP,Voltage 7. Date and location of test 8. Customer for whom test was conducted 9. Data in English units (gallons, feet, etc.) a. Pump Outline Drawing. b. RFP Pre-Engineered Fiberglass Pump Station C, Station Drawing for Accessories. d. Electrical Motor Data. e„ Typical Installation Guides. f. Technical Manuals and Parts List. g. Printed Warranty. h, Management system certificate ISO 9001. Manufacturer's Equipment Storage Recommendations. j. Manufacturer's Standard Recommended Start-Up Report Form. k. Training Materials I. Test Reports 1.5 QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Unless otherwise specified in the individual specification sections; PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 32 13-PAGE 2 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRE-ENGINEERED LIFT STATION SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Acceptable EQUIPMENT SUPPPLIERS are subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following equipment suppliers are acceptable. a, Xylem/Flygt Corporation. 2. Like equivalent, "or-equal" item or substitution is permitted pending approval from the ENGINEER and OWNER. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store pumping system components in accordance with equipment supplier's written instructions and shop drawings. 1.7 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND WARRANTY A. The contractor shall supply and install 1 prefabricated and preassembled sewage pump station. I . Each sewage pump station shall be completely issued with discharge connections, discharge pipes,guide bars, safety grit and cable holder to assemble 2 submersible wastewater pumps. C. The contractor shall supply and install a separate valve vault as shown on the plans. D, The contractor shall supply and install 2 submersible sewage pumps duplex system. E. Guarantees: After completion,the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the OWNER the manufacturer's written guarantees,that the pumping units will operate within the published efficiencies, heads, and flow ranges and meet these specifications. F. Manufacturer's Warranty:The pump manufacturer shall furnish the City with a written guarantee to warrant pumps and components against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years after full operation and acceptance by the City. The warranty shall include 100%coverage of manufacturer's shop labor and parts for the first year,then 50%coverage through the 5th year. Pumps repaired under warranty shall be returned to the City's Wastewater Department with prepaid freight. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PREFABRICATED SEWAGE PUMP STATION (FLYGT TOP 5 OR EQUIVALENT) A. The sewage pump station shall be made of Fiberglass reinforced polymer (FRP) equipped with discharge connections, discharge pipes,valves,guide bars and cable holder to assemble 2 submersible wastewater pumps.The material of the complete station shall be applicable for wastewater with a PH value from 5.5 to 8.0. The Inner diameter shall be a minimum of 60". B. All dimensions incl. inlet and outlet positions shall be made according drawings. C. The station cylinder shall be affixed to the station bottom such that the assembled PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 32 13-PAGE 3 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRE-ENGINEERED LIFT STATION SEPTEMBER 2025 components are structurally integrated, resulting in a watertight vessel which is capable of withstanding the full hydrostatic head from the exterior of the station while the station is completely empty. D. The cylinder shall be made of FRP using the filament winding process. A safety factor of two (2) on the minimum ultimate tensile strength of the laminate bottom shall be used in designing the basin and cylinder wall thicknesses for the station,taking into account all normally imposed loads arising from flotation, soil pressures, normal backfill, handling loads, operating loads and static loads imposed by equipment used in hoisting the pumps in and out of the station. All inside surfaces shall be smooth and free of cracks and crazing. The inside surface shall be pigmented or gel coated to a bright white finish. All surfaces other than those made in contact with the mold surface shall be coated with air-inhibited resin or gel coat;this includes any cut edges of laminate. E. The bottom part,the inlet and the outlet connection pipes shall be laminated to the station cylinder. The station shall have an anti-flotation flange and be approved to withstand the full hydrostatic head from the exterior of the station and to withstand the forces acting upon the station due to the subsoil water pressure while the station is completely empty. F. The manufacturer shall provide with the delivery a manual with detailed installation and safety instructions. The manual shall include information about the backfill material to provide adequate ballast against buoyancy under full hydrostatic head conditions. G. The sloping walls of the pump station bottom shall transport all solids,trash and sludge, normally found in sewage and wastewater,to the suction of the submersible pumps to facilitate removal and effectively clean the bottom.The maximum volume left in the station after the pumps have stopped shall be 70 US gallons or 35 US gallons if the pumps are connected to an electronic sump cleaning device. H. The discharge connections shall be mounted on a sloped wall so solids can't settle below the discharge pipes. I. Lifting eyes and anchoring steel bars shall enable a quick and easy installation of the station. J. The station must be protected against electrical shock according the IEC regulation 61140. K. The pump station shall be ready for operation and be furnished with following equipment: a. All fasteners shall be made of stainless steel AISI 316. b. 2x 4" discharge connections made of cast iron ASTM A-48, Class 35B with MULTI/JOINT coupling. C. 2 x 2" guide bars per discharge connection made of stainless steel AISI 316. d. 2 upper guide bar holder made of stainless steel 316. e. 2 x 4" discharge pipe made of PE 100, PVC or stainless steel 316.The length of the pipes shall be sufficient to connect these pipes to the valves in the valve vault. f- 1 Cable holder with 4 hooks made in Stainless steel AISI 316. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 32 13-PAGE 4 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRE-ENGINEERED LIFT STATION SEPTEMBER 2025 L. The station cover shall be of%-inch thick Type-5086 aluminum diamond plate with an integral Safe-Hatch access cover and able to withstand a 3001b live load. All bars, angles and shapes shall be type 6061-T6 aluminum. The access cover frame shall be a minimum of 4-inches deep and shall be adequately sized to allow for easy passage of the submersible pumps. The Safe- Hatch access cover shall be designed to support the weight of the pump unit plus pedestrian traffic. The access door(s) shall be equipped with a hold-open arm, held open in the 90-degree position. Cover door hinges shall be heavy-duty design and be cast 1/4-inch thick Type 316 stainless steel with 3/8-inch diameter stainless steel hinge pins. All fasteners shall be type-316 stainless steel. Each hatch shall be supplied with a type-316 stainless steel slam lock, having a key-way protected by a threaded plug. The plug shall be flush with the diamond plate cover. The hatch shall be equipped with an aluminum lift handle that shall be flush to the top of the diamond plate cover. The station lid shall have an integral four-inch diameter stub-pipe connection for the purpose of venting the pump station. The inverted J-shaped vent pipe shall be schedule 40 PVC pipe and shall end at a point at least 3-foot above the elevation of the station cover. There shall also be an option for a second vent to accommodate positive ventilation of the wet well. The access cover unit shall be equipped with a Safe-Hatch hinged safety grate to provide protection against fall-through and to control access into the confined space.Grate openings shall be sized to allow for routine maintenance inspection without having to open the safety grate. The closed safety grate shall be designed to support the weight of one pump to facilitate site pump wash-down and inspection. The hatch opening will have a 4" elevated toe board to prevent tools from being kicked into the wet well (per OSHA 1926.502). CONTRACTOR to submit documentation from the PUMP SUPPLIER that the specified pump fits through the wet well hatch that is submitted. Hatch suppliers in accordance with Section 43 25 00-PS. 2.2 VALVE VAULT A, Each discharge pipe from the sewage pump station shall be connected to a check valve and a gate valve in a separate valve vault. The valve vault shall be fabricated in FRP and shall be large enough to allow entry for routine maintenance and inspection.The valve vault shall be equipped with an integral drain and check valve to facilitate drainage from the valve vault back into the pump station. B. The check valves shall be Ball-type or ValMatic flap-type.The gate valves shall be%- turn eccentric plug-type.All valves shall be made of cast iron with flanges according ANSI and be connected to a single 4" discharge pipe which shall last at least 5 feet outside the valve vault. The pipes shall be made of either of PE 100 or Stainless steel AISI 316. C. The valve vault cover shall be of%-inch thick Type-5086 aluminum diamond plate with an integral Safe-Hatch access cover and able to withstand a 3001b live load. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 32 13-PAGE 5 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRE-ENGINEERED LIFT STATION SEPTEMBER 2025 2.3 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS(FLYGT NP 3102 SH3 OR EQUIVALENT) A. Refer to specifications 43 25 00-PS PUMPS (SUBMERSIBLE—IMMERSIBLE), HATCHES, AND ACCESSORIES and 43 22 10-PS COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS 2.4 SUMP MIXING VAVLE (FLYGT 4901 OR EQUIVALENT) A, One pump unit in each pump station shall be equipped with an automatically operating flush valve mounted directly to the pump volute. During the starting the valve shall redirect a portion of the pumped media into the sump to re-suspend solids and grease by the turbulent action of its discharge. B. The valve shall be equipped with an adjustable,wear-resistant discharge nozzle that can be used to direct flow within the sump. The valve shall operate by differential pressure across the valve and shall not require any electric or pneumatic power source to operate. The valve shall be suitable for use in Class I, Division 1 hazardous locations. C. The valve shall open at the beginning of each pumping cycle and shall automatically close during the pump operation after a pre-set time.A method of adjusting the valve operating time shall be provided. 2.5 SUBMERSIBLE CABLE CONNECTION BOX ACC. NEMA 6P (IP 68) (INTEX, RALSTON OR SIMILAR) A, The submersible cable of the pump shall be connected to the cable from the Control panel in a floor or wall mounted cable connection box to ease the installation and disassembling of the pumps and keep the submersible cables as short as possible. B. The cable connection box shall be submersible NEMA 6P (IP 68)to secure that no water can enter the motor via the cables even when the complete area is flooded. 2.6 PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM A, The shall furnish a control panel for with 2 submersible wastewater pumps as shown in the Drawings and according to Project Specification Divisions 26 and 40. B. The controller shall alternate the pumps and operate the pumps always at its best efficiency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A, Perform installation in accordance with Contract Documents and manufacturers specifications. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 32 13-PAGE 6 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRE-ENGINEERED LIFT STATION SEPTEMBER 2025 3.2 EXAMINATION A, A factory trained technician shall examine the work area prior to beginning work and check the following: 1. The environment is safe to begin working in 2. All surfaces are ready to receive work 3. All tools are in the proper location and are in good condition 4. Grounding of the system 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A, The follow field tests shall be performed by a factory trained technician 13. Point to point wiring verification C. Utility power verification D� Site acceptance testing F. System demonstration F. Point to Point 1/0 Verification G, After installation of the pumps and the control panel, a factory trained technician shall prepare the 1/0 checklist.The checklist shall include the following: a, All inputs and outputs connected to the control panel b, All alarms that can be generated by the control panel H. The technician shall follow a test procedure to test all 1/0 and alarms. a, All digital inputs shall be tested from point of origin unless it is unsafe. b, All digital outputs shall be tested by running a simulation test from the controller or by simulating the fault condition. C, All analog inputs shall be tested from the point of origin where possible and by use of a signal generator otherwise. d. All analog outputs shall be tested by running a simulation program or by forcing the output to a value. L The technician shall follow a test procedure to ensure the system operation parameters are met. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 32 13-PAGE 7 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRE-ENGINEERED LIFT STATION SEPTEMBER 2025 J� Configuration Verification K. The factory trained technician shall document the settings using a factory provided configuration checklist. Each parameter shall be verified prior to the beginning of testing and then again after testing is completed. L. The configuration of the pump station manager as well as the IPS gateways shall be documented. M, The pump station manager configuration shall be saved to a factory provided SD card after testing is completed. 3.4 FACTORY TRAINED SUPERVISION A, The contractor shall procure a factory trained technician to check over equipment prior to putting the equipment into operation. R. Point to point test of all wiring. C. Functional test of all equipment alarms and controls. 3.5 CERTIFICATION OF TESTING A, All tests shall be performed in the presence of a duly authorized representative of the Owner. If the presence is waived, certified results shall be provided by the Contractor. B. Written notice of all tests shall be given two weeks in advance. 3.6 TEST EQUIPMENT A, All test equipment shall be provided by the Contractor. 3.7 TRAINING A� Training shall be a minimum of four(4) hours and cover the complete Pumping System and related controls. B. Instruction material shall be provided for four (4)trainees. END SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 32 13-PAGE 8 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRE-ENGINEERED LIFT STATION SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 40 05 19 DUCTILE IRON PIPE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section provides requirements for ductile iron piping system for exposed and buried applications and includes: 1. Mechanical joint, push-on and flanged ductile iron pipe, sizes 4-inch through 64-inch. 2. Mechanical joint and flanged ductile iron and cast-iron fittings, sizes 4-inch through 64-inch. 3. Gaskets and fasteners. 4. Protective coatings, linings,and encasements. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures" 2. Section 40 05 52 "Miscellaneous Valves and Appurtenances" 3. Section 40 05 61 "Gate Valves" 4. Section 40 05 65 "Valves for Flow Control and Check Service" 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C104/A21.4-Cement-Motor Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. C105/21.5- Polyethylene Encasement for Gray and Ductile Cast-Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids. 3. C110-C21.10-American National Standard for Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3- inch through 48-inch for Water and Other Liquids. 4. C111/A21.11-American National Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 5. C115/A21.15-American National Standard for Flanged Cast-Iron and Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. 6. C150/A21.50-American National Standard for the Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe. 7. C151/A21.51-American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds,for Water and Other Liquids. 8. C153/A21.10- Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service. 9. C600- Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. 10. C606-Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 11. M41 - Manual Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 19-PAGE 1 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 B. ASTM International, Inc. (ASTM): 1. A48-Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. A193 -Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel bolting Materials for High Temperature or High-Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. 3. A194-Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, of Both. 4. A307 -Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60000 PSI Tensile Strength. 5. A320-Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low Temperature Service. 6. A536-Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 7. A563 -Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 8. A674-Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or other Liquids. 9. D1330-Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets. C. National Science Foundation (NSF): 1. NSF/ANSI 61 - Drinking Water Components—Health Effects. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures." B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Pipe layout drawings shall include plan, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Pipe layout schedule/drawings including pipeline stationing, elevation, and restrained joint locations. 3. Schedule of materials furnished. 4. Pipe layout drawings and data shall clearly indicate where pipe requiring special provisions are to be located, connections to equipment,valves, and related items. D. Material Certificates: 1. Certificate of Compliance with all applicable and appropriate reference standards certifying that all pipe,fittings, and specials, and other products and materials furnished, comply with the applicable provision of the Specification. 2. Certification of Adequacy of Design: The Certificate of Adequacy of Design shall show the necessary provisions required in the design of the pipe to comply with applicable sections of this Specification. A Professional Engineer registered in the state where the Project is located shall seal the Certificate of Adequacy of Design. E. Field quality-control test reports. 1.5 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. Restrained Pipe and Fitting Joints, Buried Piping: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 19-PAGE 2 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Restrained joints shall be used for a sufficient distance from each bend, tee, elbow, plug, or other fitting to resist thrust that will develop at the design pressure. 2. CONTRACTOR shall provide restraint length calculations in accordance with AWWA M41 based on the laying conditions, soil conditions, depth of cover, and pressures to determine the number of restrained joints that will be required. 3. For the purposes of thrust restraint, design pressures shall be the working pressure shown, plus the additional surge allowance for potable water, service water, and pump discharge piping.The design pressure shall be 1.5 times the design test pressure indicated for all other piping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: 1. Pressure Class: Unless otherwise noted in the pipe schedule or on individual drawing sheets, use the following pressure classes for each size of pipe. Nominal Pipe Size Pressure Class (inches) (psi) 3 350 4 350 6 350 8 350 10 350 12 350 14 250 16 250 18 250 20 250 24 200 30 150 36 150 42 150 48 150 54 150 60 150 64 150 2. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: a. Exposed: ASTM A307, carbon steel, Grade A hex head bolts;ASTM A563, Grade A hex head nuts; and ASTM F436 hardened steel washers. b. Submerged or Buried: ASTM A193 or ASTM A320,Type 316 stainless steel bolts; ASTM A194,Type 316, nuts; and washers of the same material as the bolts. 3. Contractor is not required to restrain ductile-iron pipe that is concrete encased under structures. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 19-PAGE 3 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 4. Contractor is not required to poly-wrap ductile iron pipe that is concrete encased under structures. 5. Ductile iron with a thickness design for the pressures and laying conditions complying with the requirements of AWWA C150 and the manufactured in accordance with AWWA C151. B. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 2. Glands and Gaskets: AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets. C. Flanged-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151,flanged ends. 1. Flange Joints: Comply with the requirements of AWWA C115. 2. Gaskets: a. Flange, Flat Face: Full-faced,AWWA C111, 1/8-inch-thick rubber, factory cut. D. Thickness Class Pipe Sizes: Where thickness design is indicated in lieu of pressure class design in the Drawings or Pipe Schedule, ductile iron with a thickness design shall comply with the requirements of AWWA C150 and be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C151. Comply with the following minimum thickness class, unless otherwise indicated in the Pipe Schedule. 1. Class 51: For pipe 6-inch and smaller. 2. Class 50: For pipe 8-inch and larger. 3. Class 53: For pipe with threaded flanged joints. 4. Class 53: For pipe with grooved ends;grooved in accordance with AWWA C606. 2.2 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS A. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include 2 gasketed ball-joint sections and 1 or more gasketed sleeve sections, rated for system pressures and for offset and expansion indicated. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. b. Romac Industries, Inc. C. Star Pipe Products. B. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with ball joint,flexing section, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include rating for 250-psig minimum working pressure and for up to 15 degrees of deflection. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. C. Ductile-Iron Expansion Joints: Three-piece assembly of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include rating for 250-psig minimum working pressures and for expansion indicated. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 19-PAGE 4 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div. b. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. C. JCM Industries. D. Flange adapter: For joining steel pipe to cast iron, provide Dresser Style 127 or equal. Gasket to be BUNA-S, Grade 27. E. Dismantling Joint: Double-ended flange adapter, allowing longitudinal adjustment in piping system, similar to Dresser Style 131 or equal. F. Reducing and Transition Coupling: Required for making reduction is sizes of piping; changing classes of piping; or joining steel and cast-iron pipe, provide Dresser Style 62 or equal. 2.3 PROTECTIVE COATINGS, LININGS, AND ENCASEMENT A. Pipe and Fittings Interior: 1. Mortar: Unless otherwise specified in the Piping Schedule, all ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be provided with a cement-mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C104.A bituminous seal coat shall be applied over the cement-mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C104. 2. Epoxy:When specified in the Piping Schedule, apply a high build, fusion bonded epoxy lining per AWWA C116, minimum 16 mils dry film thickness, per AWWA C116. Epoxy lining shall be suitable for potable water service per NSF 61. 3. Glass Lining: a. Consist of glass completely fused above 1,450 degrees F, with a thickness of 6 to 10 mils and defects,which exposed base metal not greater than 0.1 percent of total lined surface. b. Hardness shall be greater than 5 on the Mohs scale and lining bonded sufficiently to withstand a metal strain of 0.001-inch/inch without damage to the glass lining. C. Finished lined pipe shall not deviate more than 0.0125-inch per foot of length from a centerline perpendicular to the flange face or square end of the pipe. d. Available Manufacturers: Water Works Supply Co., Ferrock MEH-32; Ceramic Coating Co., SL-31; or Ervite Corp.,SG-14. 4. Amine-Cured Epoxy: When specified in the Piping Schedule,the inside of pipe, bells, and fittings shall be coated with an amine-cured Novalac epoxy with at least 20 percent by volume of ceramic quartz pigment, 40 mils nominal DFT after the pipe has been solvent cleaned and abrasive blasted. Use Protecto 401 or approved equal. B. Pipe and Fittings Exterior: 1. Exposed Piping: Provide shop coat primer required for the coating system specified in Section 09 9100 "Painting and Protective Coatings." 2. Buried Piping: Provide shop applied 1-mil bituminous coating system per AWWA C151 for pipe and AWWA C110 for fittings. C. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 1. Form: Sheet or tube. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 19-PAGE 5 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness or high-density, cross- laminated PE film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness. 3. Color: Black. 2.4 VENT AND DRAIN VALVES A. Pipelines 2-1/2-Inch Diameter and Larger: 3/4-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. B. Pipelines 2-Inch Diameter and Smaller: 1/2-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. C. Install vents and drains at piping system high points(vents) and low points(drains) as required by final installation configuration. Provide line size ball valves for all vents and drains. 2.5 INSULATED CONNECTIONS A. Provide dielectric insulation kits, including gaskets, insulating sleeves and washers for each bolt and nuts,where flanges are to be cathodically insulated. Metal hardware such as backup washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Refer to Section 40 05 05 "Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods"for description and additional information. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings, and specialties. B. Laying Buried Pipe: 1. Install pipe to the lines, grades and elevations shown on the Drawings, complying with the requirements of AWWA C600. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,within the plant site, bury piping with a minimum cover of 3-feet. Off-site, bury lines 12-inches and smaller with a minimum cover of 4-feet and lines 14-inches and larger with a minimum cover of 5-feet. 3. Do not lay pipe in water, or when the trench or weather is unsuitable for work. Keep water out of trench until jointing is complete. When work is not in progress, close ends of pipe and fittings securely so no trench water,earth or other substances will enter pipes or fittings. 4. Keep the inside of the pipe free from foreign matter during operations by plugging or other approved method. 5. Provide pipe bedding in accordance with the Drawings and Section 3123 00 "Excavation,Trenching, and Backfilling for Utilities." Place pipe so that the full length of each section rests solidly upon the pipe bed, with recesses excavated to accommodate bells and joints. Take up and relay pipe when the grade orjoint is disturbed after laying. 6. Lay pipe with bells facing the direction of the laying except when making enclosures. 7. Buried pipe and fittings shall be polyethylene wrapped in accordance with AWWA C105. 8. Provide a restrained push-on joint or mechanical joint ten feet from outside face of PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 19-PAGE 6 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 structures. C. Restrained Joints: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall use mechanical restrained pipe joints and fittings (no thrust blocks). The length of pipe requiring thrust restraint shall be calculated as described in Chapter 13 of AWWA M-11. 1. All joints requiring thrust restraint shall be welded (buried) in accordance with AWWA C-206 or restrained with mechanical systems (exposed). 2. CONTRACTOR shall design restrained joints based on the specified pressures as shown in the Piping Schedule or Drawings and in accordance with AWWA M-11. 3. The design for restrained joints, including the length necessary to resist the design thrust,for the embedded conditions, shall be performed and sealed by a Professional Engineer in the state where the Project is being constructed. 4. CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs for the design and will not receive reimbursement from the OWNER. 3.2 CLEANING A. All piping systems shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed, and all construction debris or foreign material removed.The CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary connections, equipment, and the like for cleaning. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Sterilization: Clean and sterilized potable water lines in accordance with Section 40 01 05 "Field Testing of Piping Systems." B. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. C. Hydrostatic Tests: Conduct testing in accordance with Section 40 0105 "Field Testing of Piping Systems." D. Prepare reports of testing activities. 3.4 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Piping Schedule is provided in the Drawings. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 19-PAGE 7 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 19-PAGE 8 OF 8 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 40 05 31.10 PIPING SYSTEM,POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC)AND CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(CPVC) PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section provides requirements for PVC and CPVC piping systems for exposed and buried applications, pressure and gravity applications and includes: 1. Polyvinyl chloride(PVC)and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride(CPVC) pressure pipe and fittings in sizes 1/2-inch through 36-inch. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride(CPVC) pressure pipe and fittings. 3. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC),Schedule 40 and 80, pressure pipe and fittings. B. Related Sections: 1. Refer to Section 40 05 01 "Piping Systems, Basic Materials and Methods" for information regarding submittals; coordination; material delivery, handling, and storage; project conditions; design requirements; other materials; installation of piping systems; field testing; and related work. 2. This Section contains material requirements for pipe,fittings, specials, and appurtenances for PVC and CPVC piping systems, as well as Part 1- General and Part 3- Execution additional requirements not specified in the above referenced Section. 1.3 REFERENCES A. References: 1. American Waterworks Association (AWWA): a. C110 — Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-In. Through 48-In. (76 mm Through 1,219 mm)for Water b. C111 - American National Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings C. C153—Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service d. C219—Standard for Bolted,Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe e. C900 — Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4-in.Through 12-in.(100 mm-300 mm)for Water Distribution f. C907 —Standard for Injection-Molded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Fittings, 4-in. Through 12-in. (100 mm Through 300 mm) 2. ASTM International, Inc. (ASTM): a. D1785 —Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and 120 b. D2241—Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series) PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 31.10-PAGE 1 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PIPING SYSTEM,PVC AND CPVC PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 C. D2466—Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,Schedule 40 d. D2467—Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,Schedule 80 e. D2564 — Specifications for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems f. D2846 — Specifications for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic and Hot- and Cold-water Distribution Systems g. D3034—Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Sewer Pipe and fittings h. F437—Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,Schedule 80 i. F438 — Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Fittings,Schedule 40 j. F439 — Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Fittings, Schedule 80 k. F441—Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 and 80 I. F442- Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe(SDR-PR) M. F477—Specification for Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets)for Joining Plastic Pipe n. F679 — Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Large-Diameter Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings 0. F794 — Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter P. F891 - Specification for Coextruded POly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe With a Cellular Core q. F493 — Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings r. F1417 —Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air S. F1668—Guide for Construction Procedures for Buried Plastic Pipe t. F1674—Test Method for Joint Restraint Products Used With PVC Pipe. 3. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF): a. NSF/ANSI 61—Drinking Water Systems Components—Health Effects 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Pipe layout drawings shall include plan, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 2. Pipe layout schedule/drawings including pipeline stationing, elevation, and restrained joint locations. 3. Schedule of materials furnished. 4. Pipe layout drawings and data shall clearly indicate where pipe requiring special provisions are to be located,connections to equipment,valves,and related items. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 OS 31.10-PAGE 2 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PIPING SYSTEM,PVC AND CPVC PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Material Certificates: 1. Certificate of Compliance with all applicable and appropriate reference standards certifying that all pipe, fittings, and specials, and other products and materials furnished, comply with the applicable provision of the Specification. 2. Certification of Adequacy of Design: The Certification of Adequacy of Design shall show the necessary provisions required in the design of the pipe to comply with applicable sections of this Specification. D. Field quality-control test reports. 1.5 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. Restrained Pipe and Fitting Joints, Buried Piping: 1. Restrained joints shall be used for a sufficient distance from each bend, tee, elbow, plug, or other fitting to resist thrust that will develop at the design pressure. 2. Contractor shall provide restraint length calculations in accordance with AWWA M41 based on the laying conditions, soil conditions, depth of cover, and pressures to determine the number of restrained joints that will be required. 3. For the purposes of thrust restraint, design pressures shall be the working pressure shown, plus the additional surge allowance for potable water, service water, and pump discharge piping, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. The design pressure shall be 1.5 times the design test pressure indicated for all other piping, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. B. Hangers and Supports, Exposed Piping: Refer to Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping"for requirements for engineered hangers and supports for piping systems to be provided by Contractor. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with the Manufacturer's handling and storage recommendations. B. All pipe ends shall be covered with a weather resistant cap, plug, or blind flange prior to shipment, which shall remain in place until installation of the pipe. C. All pipe and fittings shall be stored on blocking,at least 4 inches off the ground and shall be kept free of debris and dirt until installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS,4-INCH THROUGH 12-INCH, PRESSURE A. PVC Pressure Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150 and/or Class 200 (as shown on Drawings or in Pipe Schedule),with bell end with gasket, and with spigot end. 1. Comply with UL 1285 for fire-service mains, if indicated. 2. PVC Fabricated Fittings: AWWA C900, with bell-and-spigot or double-bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. 3. PVC Molded Fittings: AWWA C907, Class 150, with bell-and-spigot or double-bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. 4. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 5. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110,ductile-or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 31.10-PAGE 3 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PIPING SYSTEM,PVC AND CPVC PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and 316 SS bolts. 6. PVC Integral Joint Restraint System: a. Integral join restraint system located in the bell designed for integration into PVC pipe manufactured to AWWA C900 and performance when tested in accordance with ASTM F1674. b. Consists of a ductile iron casing that sits adjacent to the ASTM F477 gasket in the bell; casing is molded into the raceway of the bell during pipe belling; and a ductile iron grip-ring is inserted into the casing after factory hydro-testing. C. Available Manufacturer: BuIIDog'" Integral Joint Restraint System. 2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS, 14-INCH THROUGH 48-INCH, PRESSURE A. PVC Pressure Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150 and/or Class 200 (as shown on Drawings or in Pipe Schedule),with bell end with gasket, and with spigot end. 1. PVC Fabricated Fittings: AWWA C900, with bell-and-spigot or double-bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. 2. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 3. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110,ductile-or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 4. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and 316 SS bolts. 2.3 CPVC/PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS,4-INCH AND SMALLER, PRESSURE A. PVC Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 pipe, with plain ends for solvent- cemented joints or threaded ends conforming to ASTM D 2466, Schedule 40 or ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80,socket-type or threaded fittings. Use Schedule 80 for all pipes to be threaded. B. CPVC Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F441, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 pipe, with plain ends for solvent- cemented joints or threaded ends conforming to ASTM F438, Schedule 40 or ASTM F439, Schedule 80,socket-type or threaded fittings. Use Schedule 80 for all pipes to be threaded. C. Solvent Cement: 1. As recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer conforming to D2564 for PVC piping systems and ASTM F493 for CPVC piping systems. NSF/ANSI 61 certified. 2. All pipe and fittings utilized in chemical piping systems shall utilize a heavy duty, industrial grade solvent cement that complies with ASTM F493 and is NSF/ANSI 61 certified. The product shall be for use on CPVC and PVC piping system, be orange in color, and shall be Weld-On 724 CPVC or approved equivalent. 2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS,GRAVITY SEWER AND DRAIN A. PVC Cellular-Core Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 891, Sewer and Drain Series, PS 50 minimum stiffness pipe with ASTM D 3034,SDR 35,socket-type fittings for solvent-cemented joints. B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NIPS 18 and Larger: ASTM F 679,T-1 wall thickness,with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 31.10-PAGE 4 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PIPING SYSTEM,PVC AND CPVC PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 D. PVC Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 794 pipe, with bell-and-spigot ends; ASTM D 3034 fittings,with bell ends;and ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2.5 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to Section 40 05 01 "Piping Systems, Basic Materials and Methods"for commonly used joining materials. B. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as,with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings: 1. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings,and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined. a. Standard: AWWA C219. 2.7 CORROSION-PROTECTION PIPE FITTINGS ENCASEMENT A. Encasement for Underground Metal Pipe Fittings: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 1. Form: Sheet or tube. 2. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness or high-density, cross-laminated PE film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness. 3. Color: Black. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, CLEANING,AND TESTING A. Comply with the requirements of Section 40 05 01 "Piping Systems, Basic Materials and Methods". B. PVC and CPVC piping systems shall be tested per Section 40 08 00 "Field Testing of Process Interconnections". 3.2 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Piping Schedule is provided in the Drawings. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 31.10-PAGE 5 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PIPING SYSTEM,PVC AND CPVC PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 31.10-PAGE 6 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PIPING SYSTEM,PVC AND CPVC PIPE SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 40 05 36.13 FOUL AIR FIBERGLASS DUCTWORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. This specification covers requirements for fiberglass ductwork for the conveyance of foul air as indicated on the plans and schedules. The duct system shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings,transitions,jointing materials, expansion joints, dampers, and all other necessary appurtenances. B. Duct and appurtenances will be continuously exposed to a humid environment containing hydrogen sulfide and will be used in interior and exterior location, as well as above and below grade. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Related Sections 1. Section 0133 00, "Submittal Requirements." 2. Section 09 9100, "Painting and Protective Coatings." 3. Section 40 05 31.13, "Polyvinyl Chloride and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Process Pipe." 4. Section 40 05 64.43, "Fiberglass Dampers." 5. Section 44 3119, "Packaged Odor Control System." C. Reference Standards 1. ASTM D1599 Standard test Method for Short-Time Hydraulic Failure Pressure of Plastic Pipe,Tubing and Fittings. 2. ASTM D2105 Standard test Method for Longitudinal Tensile Properties of 'Fiberglass' (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Tube. 3. ASTM D2412 Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading. 4. ASTM D2992 Standard Practice of Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure Design Basis for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings. 5. ASTM D2996 Standard Specification for Filament Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe. 6. ASTM D2997 Standard Specification for Centrifugal Cast "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe. 7. ASTM D3567 Standard Practice for Determining Dimensions of "Fiberglass" (Glass- Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe. 8. AWWA C-950 American Water Works Association Standard for Fiberglass Pressure Pipe. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 36.13-PAGE 1 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 FOUL AIR FIBERGLASS DUCTWORK SEPTEMBER 2025 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Duct manufacturer shall provide the services of a trained factory representative to oversee and coordinate duct installation. This factory representative shall make a minimum of one trip to the project site and shall spend a minimum of one 8-hour day at the project site, not including travel time. The factory representative shall have at least 5 years of experience with installation of fiberglass duct systems similar to those required for this project. The factory representative shall certify that the ductwork, supports,joints, and fittings have been installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, specifications, and other applicable standards. B. Minimum Duct Wall Stiffness: The minimum duct wall stiffness, at 5 percent deflection, determined in accordance with ASTM D2412 and Section 3 of AWWA C950, shall not be less than the following: Nominal Duct Diameter Duct Stiffness(psi) (inches) 1-8 36 10 18 12-16 9 18 and larger, buried 10 18 and larger, other locations 5 C. C. Buried duct and fittings shall be designed in accordance with AWWA C950 and AWWA M45. Calculations using the AWWA M45 methodology shall be provided for each buried duct size indicated on the drawings. D. Temperature and Pressure: All duct, fittings, and appurtenances shall be suitable for the following conditions: Design Condition Minimum Temperature 07 Maximum Temperature 1157 Internal Pressure 25 psig Internal Vacuum 20 inches water column E. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: All ductwork,fittings and appurtenances shall have a coefficient of thermal expansion not exceeding: 9.6 x 10-6 in/in degrees F for centrifugally cast pipe, 10.5 x 10-6 in/in degrees F filament wound pipe. F. Expansion Joint Performance: Expansion joints shall be furnished in sufficient number to accommodate the coefficient of thermal expansion based on the minimum and maximum air temperatures specified in this Section. Duct shall be protected from excessive solar heating during storage and installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All thermal expansion and contraction throughout the duct system shall PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 36.13-PAGE 2 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 FOUL AIR FIBERGLASS DUCTWORK SEPTEMBER 2025 be accommodated in expansion joints to be provided by the duct manufacturer,and as shown on the Drawings. G. All Type 316 stainless steel materials shall include the following components: 1. Molybdenum: 2—3 percent 2. Chromium: 16—18 percent 3. Nickel: 10—14 percent 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of fiberglass ductwork and fittings including, but not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs,wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between ductwork and proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform to local practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not reduced. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling as recommended by the manufacturer. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings. B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Comply with manufacturer's requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Vinyl Ester Duct 1. Centrifugally Cast, 14-inch and smaller - ASTM D2997, RTRP-21B, centrifugally cast, reinforced vinyl ester resin duct with 30 mil liner, a. Smith/Fibercast or NOV, "Centricast CL 1520" 2. Filament-Wound, 16-inch and smaller - ASTM D2996, RTRP-I2ED-101, -12EF-311, and -12EQ-311, or-12EU-311,with at least a 20 mil reinforced liner b. Ameron "Bondstrand Series 5000" C. Smith/Fibercast or NOV, "F-Chem-V" d. Beetle "Series 5000". E?. Belco Manufacturing Co. Inc. f, Daniel Company 3. Filament-Wound, 18-inch and larger-ASTM D2310, RTRP-12ED, -11EQ, or-12EU, with at least a 20 mil reinforced liner g. Ameron "Bondstrand Series 5000" h. Smith/Fibercast or NOV, "F-Chem-V" Beetle "Series 5000". j, Belco Manufacturing Co. Inc. k. Daniel Company PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 36.13-PAGE 3 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 FOUL AIR FIBERGLASS DUCTWORK SEPTEMBER 2025 B. Fittings and Flanges 1. Manufacturer's standard, glass fiber reinforced, compatible with the duct provided and with chemical resistance equal to or greater than the duct. Flanges shall comply with PS-1569, Table 5, at a design pressure of 25 psi, and shall have a minimum of ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 25 diameter, and drilling. All bends and elbows shall have a centerline radius of at least 1.5 times the inside diameter of the duct. An eccentric reducer shall be installed on the main or primary duct immediately upstream of the wye fitting to increase the main duct size prior to the intersection with the lateral duct in locations where size changes occur at intersections. Alternate bend and fitting configurations may be considered by ENGINEER on a case-by-case basis where existing site constraints prohibit installation of fittings shown on the Drawings. C. Flange Bolts or Studs and Nuts 1. Type 316 stainless steel sized such that, after installation, bolts will project 1/8- to 3/8-inch beyond the outer face of the nut. D. Flat Washers-Type 316 stainless steel. E. Flange Gaskets- Full face,ASTM D2240,Type A durometer 50-70, 1/8-inch minimum thickness, EPDM. F. Bell-and-Spigot Joints- Matched tapered bell-and-spigot ends bonded with adhesive. G. Butt Joints- Butt and wrap, resin bonded, PS-15,with pressure rating equal to the duct. H. Expansion Joints-As shown on the Drawings and specified herein. I. Adhesive- Duct manufacturer's standard. J. Straight Socket—Straight socket bonded with adhesive. K. All duct, fittings, and appurtenances shall contain ultraviolet (UV) inhibitors. All duct, fittings, supports and appurtenances shall be painted to match the color of existing ductwork. Painting shall be done in accordance with specification Section 09 9100 "Painting and Protective Coatings". L. Caulking—Polyurethane-based, 1-part elastomeric sealant,Vulkem 921 by Maneco International or equal. Use with compressible polyethene foam backer rod. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Joint Method: Unless otherwise specified, duct shall have straight socket, match tapered bell and spigot or butt joints. Shop fabricated assemblies should be provided to the maximum extent possible,to minimize the number of field joints. 1. Flanged joints shall be provided at each damper and item of equipment to facilitate disassembly, at each change in material, at road crossings and where indicated on the drawings. 2. Field butt joints, when needed, shall be made at locations at least 12 inches from any increasing or decreasing cross-section of duct where the duct to be jointed has the same diameter. All bolts, nuts, washers, and gaskets required for all connections of the ductwork system, including connections to equipment, shall be provided. B. Transitions: Fiberglass reinforced plastic transition sections shall be furnished for connecting round duct to rectangular openings on equipment. Transitions shall have a pressure rating and wall stiffness equal to that of the duct. Internal lining shall be of the same type of material and thickness as specified for the duct. Transitions shall have flanged end connections compatible with the connecting duct and equipment. Transitions will be constructed to provide for draining condensate in the direction of the airflow. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 36.13-PAGE 4 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 FOUL AIR FIBERGLASS DUCTWORK SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Expansion Joints: Expansion joints shall be furnished and installed at locations required for proper duct installation. Expansion joints shall be resistant to ultraviolet light and shall be suitable for the service conditions. All expansion joint materials in contact with the foul air shall be manufactured of EPDM or other materials suitable for sustained contact in wet hydrogen sulfide concentrations and dilute sulfuric acid. The duct manufacturer shall be responsible for selecting locations and quantities of expansion joints based on the longitudinal and lateral movement capability of the specific expansion joint product selected. D. Expansion joints shall be flanged type, as manufactured by Red Valve Co., Inc., Mercer Rubber, or approved equivalent. Hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2.3 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Details of construction of pipe support anchors and guides shall be as shown on the plans. Manufacturer's pipe shall be suitable for the support spacing shown on the plans. Duct support spacings greater than 20 feet may be considered by ENGINEER if modifications are made to anchor bolts and to concrete support pads at no additional cost to OWNER. Duct support spacings shall be as shown on the plans. All ductwork,guides, and anchors supplied by manufacturer shall be capable of withstanding a 120-mile per hour lateral wind load and shall be capable of withstanding a 200-pound concentrated vertical load (applied over a 1 square foot bearing area) at mid-span between any two supports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which fiberglass ductwork is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air-tight and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections,within 1/8-inch misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers, and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor or as recommended by manufacturer. B. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop- fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements. C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs as indicated in the plans. D. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, equipment, controls,weir area covers, and other associated work of ductwork system. E. Ductwork runs shall slope to the blower with the lowest point of the suction duct at the entrance to the blower. F. A condensate drain shall be provided at the low point in the suction ductwork and at locations shown on the plans and shall be connected to the plant drain system. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 36.13-PAGE 5 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 FOUL AIR FIBERGLASS DUCTWORK SEPTEMBER 2025 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Any ductwork found to be improperly installed shall be removed and replaced with ductwork, liner or fittings meeting these specifications. Improper installation shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. Fiberglass duct smaller than specified. 2. Construction joints not properly sealed. 3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. General: Connect ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of fiberglass or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 36.13-PAGE 6 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 FOUL AIR FIBERGLASS DUCTWORK SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 40 05 52 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves: 1. Ball Valves, Bronze, 2-1/2 inches and smaller. 2. Ball Valves, Ferrous-Alloy, 2-1/2 inches and smaller. 3. Ball Valves, PVC, 6 inches and smaller. 4. Ball Valves, Stainless Steel, 12 inches and smaller. 5. Check Valves, Bronze 3-inch and smaller. 6. Check Valves, PVC,4 inches and smaller. 7. Check Valve, Iron Body, 3-inch and smaller. 8. Gate Valves, Bronze, 3-inch and smaller. 9. Gate Valve, Iron Body, 3-inch and smaller. 10. Globe Valves, Bronze, 3-inch and smaller. 11. Globe Valves, Cast Iron, 10-inch and smaller. 12. Angle valve, Bronze, 3 inches and smaller. 13. Angle Valve, Iron body, 8-inch and smaller. 14. Angle Type Hose Valve. 15. Angle Pattern Hose Valve. 16. Diaphragm Valves, 1/2-inch and larger. 17. Backflow Preventer, Reduce Pressure. 18. Instrument Air Shutoff Valve. 19. Gauge Cock 20. Corporation Stop. 21. Combination Balancing and Shutoff Valve. 22. Sampling valve. 23. Shear Gate Valve. 24. Mud valves. 25. Pressure Relief Valves. 26. Flap Gate. 27. Telescoping Valves. 28. Pressure Reducing Valves. 29. Solenoid Valves. 30. Valve appurtenances. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 1 OF 16 BID SET 0537-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 Refer W Ce�rieV. nn n5 nr fer mRfeF ffl-A+oAFe r a ing e. ela+ien with p ng op stern P2L. 2 ; design FequiFernents; etheic mateFials; installatien ef p.ping Systems;field testing; and ela+e.J . Ark rcra-cc a-vv�'vr� C. Valve and Related Lists: Lists are included for the convenience of the Engineer and Contractor and are not complete listings of all valves, devices, and material to be provided under this Contract.The Contractor agrees to prepare his own material and valve takeoff lists as necessary to meet the requirements of the Project. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Following are standard abbreviations used for valves: 1. CWP: Cold working pressure. 2. EDPM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 3. NRS: Nonrising stem. 4. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. 5. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 6. SWP: Steam working pressure. 7. WOG: Water, oil and gas (Cold working pressure) 8. TFE:Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS- NOT USED 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For each type of valve indicated, include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. B. Product Certificates: 1. For each type of valve,from manufacturer. 2. Compliance with AWWA,ASTM, and ANSI standards including hydrostatic tests, operational tests and other testing required by the standards. C. Provide all relevant Operation and Maintenance data. D. Field Quality Control: Provide field testing and performance reports. E. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for all indicated products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain all valves of the same style and type, along with the associated manual operators, from a single manufacturer. B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61, "Drinking Water Systems Components—Health Effects"for valve materials for potable-water service. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 2 OF 16 BID SET 0537-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Valve manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five years of experience is similar applications for size of valves furnished. References shall be provided upon request. D. Valve supplier shall maintain a complete stock of parts in the state where the Project is constructed or shall indicate that parts will be delivered upon 48-hour after receipt of request. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces,grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle,gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. 3. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed in the valve descriptions. 2.2 GENERAL A. Valve to include operator, actuator, handwheel, chain wheel, extension stem,floor stand, worm and gear operator, operating nut, chain, wrench,valve boxes, and all accessories and related equipment for a complete operating system. B. Comply with the following: 1. Service: Suitable for intended service,with valve pressure and temperature ratings not less than indicated and as required for the system pressures and temperatures. 2. Valve Sizes: Same size as connection to upstream piping, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Valve Ends (Unless otherwise specified): a. Compatible with adjacent piping or equipment connections. b. Bronze Valves: 2-inch and Smaller;threaded or soldered ends depending on application. C. Ferrous valves, 3-inch and Smaller:Threaded ends. d. Ferrous Valves, 3-inch and Larger: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 3 OF 16 BID SET 0537-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 1) Exposed Valves: Flanged ends. 2) Buried Valves: Mechanical joint ends. C. Valve Actuators: 1. Operator sized to operate valve for full range of pressures and velocities. 2. Open by turning counterclockwise, clockwise to close, unless otherwise specified. 3. Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article in Part 3. 4. Gear Drive Operator: For quarter-turn valves 8-inch and larger. 5. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 6. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves 6-inch and smaller. 7. Wrench: For valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with one wrench for every 10 valves, for each size square plug head. D. Valves in Insulated Piping: Valves shall have 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Gate Valves: Shall be rising-stem type. 2. Ball Valves: Shall have extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation, and memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. 3. Butterfly Valves: Shall have extended necks. E. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves. F. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606. G. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 1. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check,gate, and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves. H. Threaded: With threads according to ASME 131.20.1. I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. J. Factory assemble valve with operator, actuator and accessories. K. Fasteners for flanged valves shall be as follows: Comply with pipe joining material requirements of Section 40 05 05 "Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods." L. Obtain all valves of the same type and materials of construction with associated manual operators from a single manufacturer. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Brass and bronze valve components and accessories shall be made with dezincification- resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy(brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. B. Approved alloys are of the following ASTM designations: 1. B61, B62, B98 (Alloy No. C65100, C65500, or C66100), B127, B139 (Alloy No. C51000), PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 4 OF 16 BID SET 0537-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 B584 (Alloy UNS No. C90300 or C94700), B164, and B194. 2. Stainless steel,ANSI Type 316 may be substituted for bronze. 2.4 BALL VALVE, BRONZE A. Bronze Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110 and have bronze body complying with ASTM B 584, except for Class 250 which shall comply with ASTM B 61,full-depth ASME B1.20.1 threaded or solder ends, and blowout-proof stems. 1. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: Chrome-plated bronze ball and bronze stem and; reinforced TFE seats;threaded body packnut design (no threaded stem designs allowed)with adjustable stem packing, solder or threaded ends; and 150 psig SWP 600 psig CWP rating. a. Manufacturers: 1) Crane Valve Group. 2) NIBCO. 3) Milwaukee Valve. 2. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: Type 316 stainless- steel vented ball and stem, reinforced TFE seats, threaded body packnut design (no threaded stem designs allowed)with adjustable stem packing, soldered or threaded ends; 150 psig SWP and 600-psig CWP ratings. a. Manufacturers: 1) Crane Valve Group. 2) NIBCO. 3) Milwaukee Valve. B. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valve, 3-inch and Smaller: 1. Split-body construction,ASTM A-216 Type WCB, carbon-steel body;ASTM A-351,Type CF8M vented stainless-steel ball; and ASTM A-276,Type 316 stainless-steel stem; carbon-filled TFE seats; 285 psig CWP rating. 2. Fire rated according to API 607 (4th edition); and having flanged ends and blowout- proof stem. 3. Conforms to MSS SP-72. 4. Manufactures: a. Crane Valve Group b. NIBCO C. Milwaukee Valve C. PVC/CPVC Ball Valve, 3 inches and Smaller: 1. True union type manufactured to ATSM F 1970 and constructed from PVC Type 1, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 12454 or CPVC Type IV,ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 23447; O-rings shall be EDPM or Viton®; ball seats of PTFE; handles of polypropylene; supplied with solvent-welded or threaded ends; approved for potable water service; having replaceable valve components; rated at 150 psi at73oF; and shall be full port and block flow in both directions. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 5 OF 16 BID SET 0537-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Manufacturer: a. ASAHI-America. b. Hayward. C. NIBCO. d. Spears. e. Georg Fisher f. IPEX. D. PVC/CPVC Ball Valve,4 inches through 6 inches: 1. True union type manufactured to ATSM F 1970 and constructed from PVC Type 1, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 12454 or CPVC Type IV,ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 23447; O-rings shall be EDPM; ball seats of PTFE; handles of polypropylene; supplied with solvent-welded connections or flanged ends drilled to ASME B16.4; approved for potable water service; provide a pressure relief hole drilled on the low pressure side of ball; rated at 150 psi at 73 degrees F; and shall be full port and block flow in both directions. 2. Manufacturers: a. ASAHI-America. b. NIBCO. C. Spears. d. Georg Fisher e. IPEX E. Stainless Steel Ball Valve, %-inch to 2 inches: 1. Three-piece body,full port,vented ball, block-out proof stem,Type 316 stainless steel trim, reinforced TFE seat and seal,threaded ends, lever operator, rated 1000-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-110. 2. Manufacturers: a. Contromatics. b. Crane Valve Group C. NIBCO. F. Stainless Steel Ball Valve, 2 inches to 12 inches: 1. Unibody design, blowout-proof stem,Type 316 stainless steel trim, mounting pad,fire safe,vented ball,flanged ends, rated 275-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-72 and MSS SP-25. 2. Manufacturers: a. NIBCO. 2.5 CHECK VALVE, IRON BODY A. Class 125 Iron Body Check Valve, 3-inch and Smaller: 1. Class 125, iron body, horizontal swing, regrinding type,Y-pattern, renewable seat and disc, 2-inch, and smaller rated 125-psi SWP and 200-pound CWP, size 2-1/2-inch and 3-inch rated 150-psi SWP and 300-CWP, Conforms to MSS SP-70. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 6 OF 16 BID SET 0537-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane b. NIBCO C. Powell,Wm. Co. 2.6 GATE VALVES A. Gate Valve,4 Inches and Larger: Comply with the requirements of Section 40 05 61 "Gate Valves." B. Gate Valve, Bronze, 3-inch and Smaller: 1. Class 125 bronze construction, screwed bonnet, solid wedge disc, non-rising stem, with threaded or soldered ends depending on application, rated for 125-psi SWP, 200- psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-80. 2. Use rising stem gate valves when piping is to be insulated. 3. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group. b. NIBCO. C. Milwaukee Valve. C. Gate Valve, Bronze, 3-inch and Smaller: 1. Class 150 bronze construction, union bonnet, solid wedge disc, non-rising stem with threaded ends, rated for 150-psi SWP, 300-psi CWP.Conforms to MSS SP-80,Type 1. 2. Use rising stem gate valves when piping is to be insulated. 3. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group. b. NIBCO. C. Milwaukee Valve. D. Gate Valve, Iron Body, 3-Inch and Smaller: 1. Class 125, iron body with bronze trim, tapered solid wedge disc, renewable bronze seat rings, non-asbestos packing, and gaskets, bolted bonnet, threaded ends, rated 125-psi SWP, 200-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS-SP-70 Type 1. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group. b. NIBCO. C. Milwaukee Valve. 2.7 GLOBE VALVES A. Globe Valves: Class 125 Bronze Globe Valve, 3-inch and Smaller: 1. All bronze, screw-in bonnet, integral seat, renewable disc and seat,TFE seat,threaded or soldered ends depending on application, rated 125-psi SWP and 200-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-80. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 7 OF 16 BID SET 0537-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 b. NIBCO. C. Milwaukee Valve. B. Class 150 Bronze Globe Valve, 3-inch and Smaller: 1. All bronze, union bonnet, integral seat, renewable disc and seat, threaded or soldered ends depending on application,TFE disc, rated 150-psi SWP, 300-psi CWP. Conform to MSS SP-80. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group. b. NIBCO. C. Milwaukee Valve. C. Class 125 Iron Body Globe Valve, 2-inch to 10-inch: 1. Cast iron, bolted bonnet, renewable seat and disc, bronze mounted, bronze disc and seat ring,flanged ends, rated 125-psi SWP and 200-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-85. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group b. NIBCO D. Class 125 Bronze Angle Valve, 3 inches and Smaller: 1. All bronze, union bonnet, integral seat, renewable seat and disc,TFE disc,threaded or soldered ends depending on application, rated 125-psi SWP, 200-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-80. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group b. NIBCO E. Class 150 Bronze Angle Valve, 3 inches and Smaller: 1. All bronze, union bonnet, integral seat, renewable seat and disc,TFE disc,threaded ends, rated 150-psi SWP, 300-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-80. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group b. NIBCO C. Powell,Wm. Co. F. Class 125 Iron Body Angle Valve, 2-inch to 8-inch: 1. Cast iron, bolted bonnet, renewable seat and disc, bronze mounted, bronze disc and seat ring,flanged ends, rated 125-psi SWP and 200-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-85. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group b. NIBCO C. Powell,Wm. Co. G. Angle Type Hose Valve: 1. Bronze, angle sillcock type body,threaded or soldered inlet as applicable, 1/2-inch or PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 8 OF 16 BID SET 0537-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 3/4-inch male hose thread outlet, rated 125-psi CWP. 2. Manufacturer: a. NIBCO H. Angle Type Hose Valve: 1. 3/4-inch NPT female inlet, 3/4-inch male hose thread outlet, heavy rough brass body, rated 125-psi CWP, lockshield bonnet, removable handle, atmospheric vacuum breaker conforming to CSA and IAPMO code. 2. ACORN Engineering Co. a. Mounting on structure walls: 1) 8120, bent nose with flange, without vacuum breaker. 2) 8121, bent nose with flange, with vacuum breaker. b. Installation on stand pipes: 1) 8131, pipe and pedestal mounted valve located above 6 inches, straight nose. 2) 8136, pipe and pedestal mounted valve lower than 6 inches, inverted nose. I. Angle Pattern Hose Valve, 1-inch through 3-inch: 1. All-bronze, screwed ends, inside screw, rising stem,TFE disc, outlet of cast brass NHT by NPT, male by male, nipple adapter with hexagonal wrench feature, brass cap with chain, rated 300-psi CWP. 2. Manufacturer and Product: a. Crane Valve Group; 7TF and 17TF b. James Jones Co.;J-300 Series, angle fire hydrant valve with NPT inlet and NHT outlet. C. ITT Kennedy; Figure 936 angle fire hydrant valve with NPT inlet and NHT outlet 2.8 DIAPHRAGM VALVES A. Diaphragm Valves, 1/2-Inch and Larger: 1. Type: Weir type, polypropylene-lined cast iron body,ANSI B16.1 flanged ends, manual operator indicating rising stem type with handwheel,diaphragm neoprene, in accordance with MSS-SP-88, Category B. 2. Manufactures: a. ITT Engineered Valves. b. Saunders Valve, Inc. B. Diaphragm Valves, 1/2-Inch and Larger: 1. Type: Straight-through type, polypropylene-lined cast iron body,ANSI B16.1 flanged ends, manual operator indicating rising stem type with handwheel, diaphragm neoprene, in accordance with MSS-SP-88, Category B. 2. Manufacturers: a. ITT Engineered Valves. b. Saunders Valve, Inc. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 9 OF 16 BID SET 0537-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Diaphragm Valve, Plastic Body, 1/2-Inch and Larger Suitable for Sodium Hypochlorite Service: 1. Type: Weir Type, constructed from CPVC Type IV, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 23447; multiple layers of EPDM, PTFE, PVDF, or Viton®;flanged end connections; built-in position indicator with polypropylene handwheel; reinforced polypropylene bonnet, stainless steel hardware. 2. Pressure Rating: a. 1/2-inch through 4-inch: 150-psi at 73 degrees F. b. 6-inch: 100-psi at 73 degrees F. C. 8-inch: 75-psi at 73 degrees F 3. Manufacturer: a. ASAHI America. b. Spears. 2.9 MUD VALVES: A. Description: Heavy-duty flanged type designed to provide positive seal under both seating and unseating head conditions. 1. Floor Box and Position Indicator: a. A position indicator shall be provided which shall be installed in a cast iron floor box. The floor box shall be designed with internal flat sides to prevent rotation of the position indicator during operations. The adapter shall be provided with a bronze bushing to support and center the extension stem. A non-corrosive debris shield shall be furnished and installed into the cast iron floor box. The debris shield shall be designed to fit tightly inside of the cast iron floor box. The top scale plate of the position indicator shall have marking representing the number of turns, contain the word "Closed" and a directional arrow. The markings shall be permanently recessed, embossed, or engraved in the scale plate. The use of adhesive labels is not acceptable. The "open" line shall be marked on a transparent polycarbonate window, which will be field adjusted to the exact number of turns of each valve. The position indicator shall be sealed with 2 Neoprene 0-rings. The position indicator shall not admit more than 0.5 ounce of water, after 7 days of submergence.The position indicator shall be cycle tested by the manufacturer to insure successful operation of minimum 1 million revolutions. Drop testing shall be performed by dropping an 18 pound weight from 4 feet, to insure accidental impact will not crack or damage the position indicator. The manufacturer shall support submergence, cycle, and impact testing with a report from an independent test laboratory. 2. Stem Guide: a. The stem guide shall be of the adjustable design for plumb alignment. The adjusting bolt and washer shall be type 316 stainless steel. Stem guides shall be spaced so that the unsupported length between extension stems shall not exceed 5 feet. Mud valves shall be operated with extension stems, stem guides, and position indicators. B. Materials: Body flange,yoke,guide,gate, extension stem,top nut, bottom coupling, and PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 10 OF 16 BID SET OS37-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 connection couplings shall be stainless steel,type 316. After machining, all components shall be passivated in accordance with ASTM A-380; seat ring of resilient seated configuration; cover seat consists of molded ring of Buna-N, nonrising stem, 316 stainless steel extension stem, 2-inch square operating nut for floor box or floor stand operation. Flange drilling 125- Ib ANSI. C. As shown on the Drawings, provide pedestal lifts, stem guide,wall brackets and related components for a complete operating assembly. D. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Clow Valve Co.; F-3075-T. 2. M&H Valve; Style 140-02 3. Waterman; MV 11. 4. Trumbull Industries, Inc.; 1367 Series 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND RELATED ITEMS A. Reduced Pressure backflow Preventer: 1. Description:Two check valves, independent relief between the valves; NRS isolation gate valves or ball valves,testing cock in accordance with AWWA C511, rated 175-psi CWP, meet requirements of USC Cross connection Control Laboratory. 2. Manufacturers: a. Cla-Val Company, Model RP Series b. FEBCO; Model 825Y, 825YD. C. Watts 909-QT RPZ B. Instrument Air Shutoff Valve: 1. Stainless steel body and ball, nylon handle. 2. Manufacturer and Product: a. Whitey; Series 40. b. Imperial Eastman; Series 200. C. Gauge Cock: 1. Description: 1/4-inch bronze body, hexagon end pattern, tee head, male ends, rated 125-psi CWP. 2. Manufacture and Product: United brass Works; Figure 973. D. Corporation Stop: 1. AWWA C800 type,tapered threaded inlet, except when connecting to tapped fittings which require IPS tapered threads, outlet compression connection or IPS threads to suit connecting pipe, stop 1-inch and smaller rated 100-psi, larger stop rated 80-psi. 2. Manufacturers: a. Ford Meter Box Co. b. Mueller Co. E. Combination Balancing and Shutoff Valve, 2 inches and Smaller for Heating, Chilled, and Cooling Water Service: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 11 OF 16 BID SET OS37-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Description: Non-lubricated plug valve, cast iron or semi-steel body,wrench lever manual operator, EPT resilient plug facing, adjustable memory stop,threaded ends, rated 175-psi CWP. 2. Manufacturer: a. DeZurick F. Sampling Valve: 1. Description: Insertion type,Type 304 stainless steel bonnet,Type 316 stainless steel piston and stem,threaded end connections, hand crank, rated 600-psig CWP. 2. Manufactures and Products: a. Strahman; SV700. G. Shear Gate Valve: 1. Description: Full opening, circular port, standard frame, unless otherwise shown. Cast iron body,ASTM A126, Class B, with integral flange, drilled for mounting; cast iron gate, STM A126, Class B, replaceable wedges,two per gate, with adjustable stop; bronze trim,Type 319 stainless steel bolts and hardware. 2. Manufactures and Products: a. Clow Valve Co.; F3000 H. Pressure Relief Valves: 1. Wall Type,4-Inch, and 6-Inch: a. Description: Hydrostatic pressure relief for side wall installation in structures and basins.Valve shall be of the 100 offset with offset single pivoted hinge. b. Materials: Body and flap gate, stainless steel.Type 316, cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B, or cast bronze, ASTM B584, Alloy 844,with integral ANSI 125-lb flange; bronze trim, neoprene,ASTM D2000, rubber seat either retained by cast iron retainer plate or mounted in a dovetail type groove; hinge arms cast integrally with cover and attached utilizing a stainless-steel spring pin. C. Provide mating cast iron wall pipe shall be flange by plain end with internal perforated plate. d. Manufacturers and Products: 1) CLA-VALVE Model 750B-4KG1 2) CLA-VALVE Model 750-20 2. Floor Type,4-Inch, and 6-Inch: a. Description: Hydrostatic pressure relief valve designed for installing in the bottom of concrete structures and basins. b. Materials: 1) Body, cover, and grate shall be either stainless steel,type 316, cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B, or cast bronze,ASTM B584,Alloy 844. Provide neoprene,ASTM D2000, seat or seal either bonded to cover mating with bronze seat in body or mounted in groove in cover. 2) Valve shall have either an integral PVC receiver or cast-iron receiver, including a water stop, to accept a plastic pipe extension which shall be field cut to desired length. Provide either a cast iron or cast bronze debris PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 12 OF 16 BID SET OS37-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 screen. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) CLA-VALVE Model 750B-4KG1 2) CLA-VALVE Model 750-20 I. Flap Gate (Gravity Flow): 1. Description: Circular opening for gravity flow conditions; body and flap, cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B; bronze trim, neoprene seat; each hinge arm shall have two pivot points, upper pivot point shall be adjustable to vary flap sensitivity to unseating heads;Type 316 stainless steel bolts and hardware. 2. Manufacturers: a. Rodney Hunt. b. Waterman. J. Flap Gate, Pressure Rated: 1. Description: Circular opening designed for pump discharge service; body and flap, cast iron,ASTM A126, Class B; bronze trim, neoprene seat; each hinge arm shall have two pivot points, upper pivot point shall be adjustable to vary flap sensitivity to unseating heads; provide anti-locking bar between the two hinge pins to prevent excessive rotation about the lower hinge pin; Type 316 stainless steel bolts and hardware. 2. Manufacturers: a. Rodney Hunt. b. Waterman. K. Telescoping Valves: 1. Description:Assembly consists of a drain tube which can slip up and down inside a stationary vertical pipe utilizing a lifting device to maintain the desired level. Primarily used for sludge removal or liquid level control. 2. Rack and pinion type with offset floor stand and cast iron offset floor stem incorporating the rack guides, pinion, and handwheel supports. Rack and pinion and connecting rods Type 304 stainless steel, slip pipe brass with flared type skimming funnel, cast iron pipe companion flange, 0-ring seal, and gasket for connection to discharge pipe. a. Skimming Pipe Diameter: as shown on drawings. b. Skimming Pipe Tap Configuration: C. Valve Adjustment Height: 3. Provide pedestal, mounting brackets, stainless steel extension stem, stem guides, Type 316 anchor bolts and hardware, and all related components for a complete assembly. 4. Manufactures and Products: a. Waterman;TS-2 b. Link-Belt C. Envirex PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 13 OF 16 BID SET OS37-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 2.11 SELF-CONTAINED AUTOMATIC VALVES A. Pressure-Reducing Valve, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller. 1. Type: Direct diaphragm operated, spring controlled, bronze body. 2. Size(s) and Rating(s): As shown in valve Schedule. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Fisher;Type 75A. b. Mueller; Series H-93 10. B. Pressure-Reducing Valve, 3 inches and Larger: 1. Function: a. Automatically reduces a higher inlet pressure to a steady lower downstream pressure, regardless of changing flow rate and/or varying inlet pressure. b. Pilot-operated regulator capable of holding downstream pressure to a pre- determined limit. When downstream pressure exceeds the pressure setting of the control pilot, the main valve and pilot valve close bubble tight. 2. Main Valve: Hydraulically operated, single diaphragm-actuated, pilot controlled,globe valve, consisting of: a. Ductile iron, ASTM A536, or cast steel,ASTM A216-WCB, body and bolted cover. All working parts shall be accessible without removal of the valve from the line. b. Disc Retainer and Diaphragm Washer: Cast Iron. C. Trim: Disc guide, seat and cover bearing, bronze, or stainless steel. d. Disc: Buna-N rubber. e. Stem, Nut and Spring: Stainless steel. f. End Connections: Flange, 150 ANSI. g. Flows: See Valve Schedule. 3. Pilot Control System: Direct-acting, adjustable, spring-loaded, normally open, diaphragm valve, designed to permit flow when pressure is less than the spring setting. a. Pilot Control: Bronze, ASTM B62. b. Trim: Type 303 stainless steel. C. Disc: Buna-N rubber. d. Adjustment Ranges: See Valve Schedule. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. CLA-VAL; Model 90 b. Bermad; Model 720 C. GA Industries C. Solenoid Valve, 2-Inch and Smaller: 1. Type:Two-way internal pilot operated diaphragm type, brass body, resilient seat suitable for air or water, solenoid coil molded epoxy, NEMA Class A, 120 volts ac, 60- Hz, unless otherwise indicated. Solenoid enclosure NEMA 250,Type 4, unless otherwise indicated. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 14 OF 16 BID SET OS37-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Sizes and normal position (OPEN or CLOSED) as indicated. 3. Minimum operating pressure differential no greater than 5-psig, maximum operating pressure differential not less than 125-psig. 4. Manufacturers: a. ASCO b. Skinner 5. Hazardous Location: Solenoid valves shown on the design drawings to be installed within Class I, Division 1 or 2 locations, shall be labeled for such area classifications. D. Ball Valves, Electric Operated, 2-Inch and Smaller: 1. Type: Continuous duty rated true union ball valve with manual override and NEMA 4X nonmetallic housing over actuator, closure time 6 seconds for 90o cycle. 2. Materials. a. Body: PVC or CPVC to match piping, minimum pressure rating 230-psi. b. Seals: EDPM or Vitron as applicable for intended service. C. Motor: Heavy duty gear train, reversible motor with thermal overload switch, 120-volt, 60-Hz, with position indicator. 3. Manufactures and Products: a. GF Model 346 ball valve with Type EA20 actuator and Type 126 bracket. 2.12 APPURTENANCES A. Refer to section 40 05 52 Miscellaneous Valves and Appurtenances. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 15 OF 16 BID SET OS37-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 OS S2-PAGE 16 OF 16 BID SET OS37-036-01 MISC.VALVES&APPURTENANCES SEPTEMBER 202S SECTION 40 05 61 GATE VALVES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following gate valves: 1. AWWA Ductile-Iron Resilient-Wedge Gate Valves, 3-inch and larger. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Section 40 05 19 "Ductile Iron Pipe" 1 Section 40 05 65 "Valves for Flow Control and Check Service" C. Contractor shall furnish and install all tools, materials, and supplies and shall perform all labor necessary for the installation,testing, and placing into operation of all valves and valve accessories, complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. B. Product Certificates: For each type of valve,from manufacturer. 1. Compliance with AWWA,ASTM, and ANSI standards including hydrostatic tests, operational tests and other testing required by the standards. C. Field Quality Control: Provide field testing and performance reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain all valves of the same style and type, along with the associated manual operators, from a single manufacturer. B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61, "Drinking Water Systems Components—Health Effects"for valve materials for potable-water service. C. Valve manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five years of experience in similar applications for size of valves furnished. References shall be provided upon request. D, Valve supplier shall maintain a complete stock of parts in the state where the Project is constructed or shall indicate that parts will be delivered upon 48-hour after receipt of request. F. The contractor shall prepare his own material and valve takeoff lists as necessary to meet the requirements of the Project. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 61-PAGE 1 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 GATE VALVES SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. I Set angle,gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Block valves in either closed or open position. I Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. 1 Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. ACIPCO American Flow Control 2. American R/D 3. Clow Valve Co. 4. Henry Pratt Company 5. Kennedy & Mueller 7. M&H 8, U.S. Pipe MetrosealValmatic 2.2 GENERAL A. Valve to include operator, actuator, handwheel, chain wheel, extension stem,floor stand, worm and gear operator, operating nut, chain,wrench,valve boxes, and all accessories and related equipment for a complete operating system as required per this Section. Refer to Drawings for valves requiring limit switches, electric or pneumatic operators, and related controls. I . Comply with the following: 1. Suitable for intended service. Renewable parts not to be of a lower quality than specified. 2. Same size as adjacent piping. . Ends to suit adjacent piping. 4. Operator sized to operate valve for full range of pressures and velocities. 5. Open by turning counterclockwise, unless otherwise specified. 6. Factory mount operator, actuator, and accessories. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 61-PAGE 2 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 OS37-036-01 GATE VALVES SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Valves shall be of non-rising stem type. D. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves,ASME B16.5 for steel valves and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves. E. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606. F, Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. K Factory assemble valve with operator, actuator and accessories. I. Obtain all valves and associated manual operators from a single manufacturer. J. Gate valves shall be of the resilient wedge seated design. 2.3 GATE VALVE DESCRIPTION A, AWWA C515 Gate Valves, 3-inch and Larger, Resilient-Wedge-Seated: 1. Construction: Ductile-iron body with full round port opening and integrally cast guides; smooth valve bottom with no recessed areas; bonnet cover. 2. Position: Vertical (unless otherwise shown on Construction plans) 1 Gate: Completely covered with rubber on all interior and exterior ferrous surfaces. The rubber shall be secured to the gate body, including the part which houses the stem nut. 4. Stem: Cast,forged, or rolled bronze. 5. Stem Seals: a. Double O-ring, Buna-N protected by grit and dust cap. b, All valves shall have O-ring type stem seals. At least two O-rings shall be in contact with the valve stem where it penetrates the valve body. . Stem Nut: Brass or bronze. 7. Seats: Resilient seats bonded to wedge for seating against a corrosion resistance surface. 8, Nylon bushing and Teflon washer for friction protection. Operating Pressure: a, 12-inch and smaller, 200 psig b. 16-inch and 20-inch, 150 psig 10. End Connections (Unless otherwise specified): a. Above Ground: Flanged, ANSI B16.1, Class 125. b, Buried Service: Mechanical joints,ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. 11. Coating: In accordance with Section 09 9100 "Painting and Protective Coatings." 12. Comply with requirements of AWWA C515 "Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service." 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Buried Service Operator: 1, 3-inch and Larger: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 61-PAGE 3 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 GATE VALVES SEPTEMBER 2025 a. Non-rising stem with stainless steel shaft extension and wrench nut. Minimum extension stem diameter shall be 1-inch or diameter of valve shaft,whichever is larger. All components shall have continuous welded joints. Provide stem guides or rock shields at 5-foot intervals and within 12" of grade. b, Valve Box: Three-piece screw type 5 1/2-inch diameter, cast iron construction. P. Above Ground Service Operator: 1. 3-inch and Larger: a, Non-rising stem, gear operators all valves 16-inch and larger unless otherwise noted. b. Chain Wheel Operator: Provide for valves having a centerline six feet or more above the floor, unless otherwise noted. C, Wrench nut, handwheel, and gear operator shall comply with the requirements of applicable AWWA Standard previously referenced. Operating Stands: 1. Provide fabricated steel or cast-iron operating stands in locations shown on the Drawings. 2. Support handwheel or operator approximately 36 inches above finish flow. 3. Handwheel diameter will not be less than 8 inches. 4. Provide sleeve made for opening in floor beneath each operating stand. 5. Provide suitable thrust bearing in each operating stand to carry weight of extension stem. D. Valve Boxes: 1. Cast iron, extension sleeve type, suitable for depth of cover required by Drawings. 2. Not less than 5 inches in diameter and minimum thickness at any point of 3/16-inch; provide valve boxes with suitable cast iron bonnets, bases and covers. 3. Provide covers; cast thereon an appropriate name designating service for which valve is used. 4. When located in traffic areas, designed for H-20 loadings. 5. Set valves and valve boxes plumb; place each valve box directly over valve it serves, with top of box flush with finished grade. . As shown on Drawings, provide concrete pad around valve surface box at ground surface. E. Extension Stem: 1. Provide extension stem when depth of valve is more than 3-feet below finish grade. 2. Provide extension stem with wrench nut locating the wrench nut 6 inches below ground surface and/or box cover. 1 Provide rock shield (stem protector) for top 12-inches of stem length. 4. Extension stem shall locate wrench nut in floor box. F.. Identification: Provide valve identification tags in accordance with Section 10 90 00 "Identification, Stenciling, and Tagging." PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 61-PAGE 4 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 GATE VALVES SEPTEMBER 2025 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A� Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Examine valve interior for cleanliness,freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully close. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D, Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size,that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install all valves,floorstands,valve boxes, and appurtenances in accordance with the Drawings and manufacturer's instructions. B. Flanged Ends: 1. Bolt holes shall straddle vertical centerline of pipe. . Clean flange faces, insert gasket and bolts, and tighten nuts progressively and uniformly. Valve installation: 1. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. 2. Install valves and operators to provide for ease of access and operation. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Provide access doors in finished walls and plaster ceilings for valve access. 3. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. a. Unless otherwise noted, install operating stem vertical in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less above finished floor. b. Unless otherwise noted, install operating stem horizontal in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevation between 4 feet 6 inches and 7 feet above finish floor. 4. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 5. Provide union or flanged connection within two feet of each threaded end valve unless valve can be otherwise easily removed from piping. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 0S 61-PAGE S OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 OS37-036-01 GATE VALVES SEPTEMBER 2025 3.3 FIELD/SITE QUALITY CONTROL A� Perform Tests and Inspections: 1. Valve may be either tested while testing pipelines, or as a separate step. 2. Test that valve opens and closes smoothly with operating pressure on one side and atmospheric pressure on the other, in both directions for two-way valve and applications. 3. Count and record the number of turns to open and close valve, account for any discrepancies with manufacturer's data. 4. Set,verify, and record set pressures for all relief and regulating valves. 5. Automatic valves to be tested in conjunction with control system testing and as specified under Manufacturer's services. 2. Prepare test and inspection reports. I . Field Coating 1. Contractor shall apply second (finish) coat with product described in Section 09 9100. 2. Valve coating shall be applied in accordance with Section 09 9100. 1 Manufacturer shall apply finish coat in factory. For exposed valves,the contractor shall field-apply a second finish coat to match adjacent piping. For buried valves, a second finish coat is not required. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 61-PAGE 6 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 GATE VALVES SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 40 05 64.43 FIBERGLASS DAMPERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering unless exceptions are noted by the ENGINEER. 2. Equipment furnished under this section shall be coordinated with other components of the applicable odor control systems. 3. The dampers will be installed to isolate equipment and balance air flows. The air flow through the odor control dampers will consist of malodorous air fully saturated with water vapor and hydrogen sulfide, and dilute sulfuric acid condensate. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Section 09 9100 "Painting and Protective Coatings." 3. Section 10 90 00 "Identification, Stenciling, and Tagging." 4. Section 40 05 36.13 "Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork." 1.2 REFERENCES(NOT USED) 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of 5 years of experience in similar applications for size of odor control duct system furnished. References shall be provided upon request. B. Single Manufacturer: Duct dampers of each type shall be the product of a single manufacturer. C. Each damper and control valve shall be designed for the following conditions: 1. Air Temperature, degrees F: 0-125 2. Design pressure, psi: 25 3. Design vacuum, inches water column:30 D. Where indicated in the Drawings and this Section, all Type 316 stainless steel materials shall include the following components: 1. Molybdenum: 2—3 percent 2. Chromium: 16—18 percent 3. Nickel: 10—14 percent 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Drawings and Data: Complete fabrication, assembly, and installation drawings,together with detailed specifications and data covering materials used, parts, devices, and other PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 64.43-PAGE 1 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 FIBERGLASS DAMPERS SEPTEMBER 2025 accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section. The data shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. Name of manufacturer. 2. Type and model. 3. Materials of construction. 4. Pressure rating. 5. Vacuum rating. 6. Overall dimensions. 7. Connection size. 8. Total weight, including actuator. 9. AMCA approved leakage test. 10. Position image indicator for each size. 11. Manufacturer's warranty for each product indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect dampers, accessories, and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling as recommended by the Manufacturer. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering. B. Storage: Where possible, store dampers inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping as recommended by the Manufacturer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUAL BALANCING DAMPER A. Dampers, unless otherwise indicated, shall be of the single-blade type complete with channel-type frame, close fitting blade, full-length axle, and bearings. The damper shall be constructed of fiberglass reinforced plastic using a vinyl ester resin and shall have the same inside dimensions as the connecting piping. All fiberglass reinforced plastic fabrications shall have a flame spread of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. The axles shall be not less than 3/4-inch in diameter and shall be continuous through the damper. B. Unless noted otherwise on the plans, dampers shall be installed with flanged connections. Dampers using slip-on connections in any manner are not acceptable. C. Dampers denoted for balancing service shall be equipped with a blade stop. Dampers denoted for isolation service shall be equipped with replaceable-type full-circumference blade edge seal, angle type blade stop, and shaft seal. D. Dampers shall have a minimum pressure rating of 30 inches water column. Isolation dampers shall have maximum leakage rate of 3 cubic feet per minute per square foot of damper area at minimum pressure rating. Current AMCA leakage and flow loss tests shall be furnished as part of the submittal. E. Materials 1. Frame: Fiberglass reinforced plastic with vinyl ester resin. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 64.43-PAGE 2 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 FIBERGLASS DAMPERS SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Blade: Fiberglass reinforced plastic with stiffeners as required. 3. Axle/Shaft:Type 316 stainless steel or continuous fiberglass reinforced plastic rod with stiffeners as required, 6-inch extension beyond frame stiffeners as required. 4. Bearings: Molded Teflon. 5. Blade Stop: Fiberglass reinforced plastic bar or angle. 6. Blade Seal: Neoprene or EPDM 7. Shaft Seal: Neoprene or EPDM 8. Flanges: Flanges shall comply with PS15-69 Table 5 at design pressure of 25 psi and have a minimum of ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 25 diameter drilling. Coordinate drilling pattern with connecting pipe or duct. F. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: 1. Belco Manufacturing 2. Daniel Mechanical 3. Engineered Composite Systems 4. Greenheck 5. Swartwout "Model 912" 6. Approved equivalent. G. Rating Conditions 1. Velocity through Damper:4,000 fpm. 2. Pressure Rating: 30-in water column. 3. Allowable Leakage: With a differential pressure of 12-in wg. Size Maximum Allowable (in Diameter) Leakage (cfm) 72 200 66 186 60 172 54 158 42 130 36 50 24 25 18 20 4. One damper of each size shall be shop tested at 12-in wg differential and shall meet the above leakage. Submit damper test report to the ENGINEER. Damper shall not be shipped until approved by the ENGINEER. 2.2 BUBBLE-TIGHT DAMPERS AND ISOLATION DAMPERS A. Furnish and install where indicated on the Drawings manually operated butterfly or parallel blade dampers,with handle for manual operation and positive locking quadrant for balancing purposes. B. Dampers shall have flanged connections and fabricated from materials specified herein. Dampers using slip-on connections in any manner are not acceptable. C. Locking quadrants shall have a positive method of holding the damper in its selected PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 64.43-PAGE 3 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 FIBERGLASS DAMPERS SEPTEMBER 2025 position, such as a bolt through both the quadrant and the lever arm. Systems using springs or other devices that can vibrate loose are not acceptable. D. Rating Conditions 1. Velocity through Damper:4,000 fpm. 2. Pressure Rating: 30-in water column. E. Materials 1. Bearings:Teflon. 2. Blade: FRP, angle reinforced. 3. Frame: FRP. 4. Axles/Shafts: Type 316 stainless steel,full length of damper size as shown on the Drawings. 5. Finish: FRP. 6. Handle:Type 316 stainless steel, or FRP. 7. Pins: Type 316 stainless steel. 8. Blade Stops: FRP angles with elastomer seals suitable for use at the design conditions. 9. Bushings: Teflon. 10. Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel. 11. Angles: FRP. F. Dimensions: As detailed on the Drawings G. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following. 1. Belco Manufacturing 2. Greenheck 3. Engineered Composite Systems 4. Daniel Mechanical 5. Approved Equivalent 2.3 PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS A. Pressure relief dampers shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings. Dampers shall be either parallel blade or butterfly type.The dimensions of each damper shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Dampers shall operate by allowing air to flow only from the pressurized system to the atmosphere. Dampers permitting airflow in both directions shall not be allowed. C. Dampers shall have flanged connections. Slip-on connections are not permissible. D. A counterbalance system shall be included to allow for manual operation and adjustment of the damper. E. Rating Conditions: 1. Maximum Temperature: 180 degrees F. 2. Maximum Differential Pressure: 2 inches water column. 3. Maximum Velocity: 2,000 fpm. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 64.43-PAGE 4 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 FIBERGLASS DAMPERS SEPTEMBER 2025 4. Start-to-Open Pressure: 0.05 inches water column. F. Dampers shall be constructed from the follow materials: 1. Frame: Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Blade: Type 316 stainless steel, minimum of 0.039 inches thick. 3. Blade Seal:Thermoplastic elastomer(TPE). 4. Axle:Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Axle Bearings:Type 316 stainless steel with acetal races. 6. Linkage Material:Type 316 stainless steel. 7. Jamb Seal: EPDM. G. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following. 1. Greenheck 2. Approved equal 2.4 VACUUM RELIEF DAMPERS A. Vacuum relief dampers shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings. Dampers shall be either parallel blade or butterfly type. The dimensions of each damper shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Dampers shall operate by allowing air to flow only from the atmosphere to the pressurized system. Dampers permitting airflow in both directions shall not be allowed. C. Dampers shall have flanged connections. Slip-on connections are not permissible. D. A counterbalance system shall be included to allow for manual operation and adjustment of the damper. E. Rating Conditions: 1. Maximum Temperature: 180degrees F. 2. Maximum Differential Pressure: 2 inches water column. 3. Maximum Velocity: 2,000 fpm. 4. Start-to-Open Pressure: 0.05 inches water column. F. Dampers shall be constructed from the follow materials: 1. Frame: Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Blade: Type 316 stainless steel, minimum of 0.039 inches thick. 3. Blade Seal:Thermoplastic elastomer(TPE). 4. Axle:Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Axle Bearings:Type 316 stainless steel with acetal races. 6. Linkage Material:Type 316 stainless steel. 7. Jamb Seal: EPDM. G. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following. 1. Greenheck 2. Approved equal PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 64.43-PAGE 5 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 FIBERGLASS DAMPERS SEPTEMBER 2025 2.5 OPERATORS A. Damper actuators shall be furnished and installed as indicated in the schedules. All required linkages and accessories required for a complete installation shall be furnished. B. Hand Operators: Each hand operator shall have a locking quadrant suitable for positioning the blade at any intermediate position. Any metallic components shall be Type 316 stainless steel. C. Dampers 24 inches in diameter or larger shall be supplied with a worm gear operator. D. Dampers installed 6 feet above finished floor or higher shall be supplied with a chain wheel operator. Chains shall be restrained in outdoor installations to prevent damage to surrounding equipment. E. Position indicator plates will be marked 0 to 100 percent in 10 percent increments. Pointers will be readable to 5 percent minimum. Position indicators shall be Type 316 stainless steel or FRP. 2.6 SPARE PARTS A. The following spare parts shall be furnished for each size and type of damper: Item QuantitV Flat Flange Gaskets 2 each Shaft Seals 2 each Blade Seal 2 each Position Indicator Plate One per damper installed B. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged in accordance with the General Equipment Stipulations,with labels indicating the contents of each package and equipment number designated. Spare parts shall be delivered to the OWNER as directed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The dampers shall be positioned to fit on the connecting piping. Unless otherwise necessary for proper operation of the damper,the axles shall be installed in the horizontal position. The inside of the dampers shall be smooth, clean, and free from blisters and dirt when installed. Dampers for isolation service shall be installed with the shaft side of the damper on the pressure side (or toward the equipment isolated). END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 64.43-PAGE 6 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 FIBERGLASS DAMPERS SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 40 05 65 VALVES FOR FLOW CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes the following valves: 1. AWWA Swing check valves, 2-inches through 30-inches. 2. Ball check, iron body, 3-inch and larger. 3. Double-disc check valves, 2-inches through 54-inches. 4. Rubber flapper check valves, 2-inches through 36-inches. 5. "Duckbill" elastomeric check valves, 2-inches through 84-inches. 6. Silent check valves, 1-inch and Larger. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Section 40 05 52 "Miscellaneous Valves and Appurtenances" 3. Section 43 22 10 "Common Requirements for Pumps" 4. Section 40 05 19 "Ductile Iron Pipe" S. Section 40 05 61 "Gate Valves" 1.2 REFERENCES—NOT USED 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. B. Product Certificates: For each type of valve,from manufacturer. 1. Compliance with AWWA,ASTM, and ANSI standards including hydrostatic tests, operational tests and other testing required by the standards. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." D. Field Quality Control: Provide field testing and performance reports. E. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for each indicated product. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain all valves of the same style and type, along with the associated manual operators,from a single manufacturer. B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61, "Drinking Water Systems Components—Health Effects"for valve materials for potable-water service. C. Valve manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five years of experience is similar applications for size of valves furnished. References shall be provided upon request. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 65-PAGE 1 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 VALVES FOR FLOW CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE SEPTEMBER 2025 D. Valve supplier shall maintain a complete stock of parts in the state where the Projectis constructed or shall indicate that parts will be delivered upon 48-hour after receipt of request. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces,grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle,gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. 3. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,those listed for the various valves. 2.2 GENERAL A. Check Valves: For 2 inches and smaller provide 300-lb bronze, Stockham B-634 or Jenkins 962A. For 2-1/2 inches and 3 inches, provide non-slam wafer type, Mission Duo-Check, Style K. B. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 1. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840°F for checkvalves. 2.3 CLASS 125 SWING CHECK VALVE A. Class 125 Iron Body Check Valve, 2-inch through 12-inch: 1. Cast Iron body, bolted bonnet, horizontal swing, renewable seat and disc,threaded or flange ends, outside lever and spring, rated 125-psi SWP and 200-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-71 Type 1. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Crane b. NIBCO C. Powell,Wm. Co. d. Valmatic 2.4 AWWA SWING CHECK VALVES A. AWWA Swing Check Valve, 2-inches through 30-inches: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 65-PAGE 2 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 VALVES FOR FLOW CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE SEPTEMBER 2025 1. AWWA C508, flanged end, cast iron body, bronze mounted,full opening swing type, solid bronze hinges,Type 316 stainless steel hinge shaft,fitted with adjustable outside lever and weight. 2. Disc constructed of bronze with a rubber seal recessed or cast iron, rubber faced. Valve construction shall permit removal of internal components without removal from the pipeline. 3. Valve, 2-inches through 12-inches rated 175-psi CWP and 14-inches and larger, 150 psi CWP. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. ACIPCO, American Flow Control b. Henry Pratt Company C. M&H Valve Co. d. Valmatic 2.5 BALL CHECK VALVE A. Ball Check Valve, 3-inches and Larger: 1. Flanged end, iron body,with cleanout and hollow steel ball, vulcanized nitrile rubber exterior, suitable for vertical up or horizontal flow, rated 150-psi CWP. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. FLYGT Corp. 2.6 DOUBLE DISC CHECK VALVE A. Double Disc Check Valve, 2-Inches through 54-Inches: 1. Wafer style, spring loaded,two piece Type 316 stainless steel disc,Type 316 stainless steel shaft,Type 316 stainless steel torsion spring and have an integrally molded elastomer seat vulcanized to the body. 2. Valve body shall be cast iron for 125-psi rating and cast steel for 150-psi rating, of the lugged wafer style. 3. Valve shall be designed to fit between ANSI flanges and valves, 5-inches and larger, shall be fitted with a lifting eye bolt for installation purposes. 4. Valve, 2-inches through 12-inches, rated 250-psi CWP,and 14-inches through 54- inches, rated 150-psi CWP. S. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. APCO; Series 9000 b. Crane Valve Group; Duo-Chek II C. Henry Pratt; Series 740 d. Valmatic 2.7 RUBBER FLAPPER CHECK VALVE A. Rubber flapper Check Valve, 2-inch through 36-inches: 1. Iron body and cover, steel-reinforced Buna-N disc, seat constructed at 45 degree angle,flanged ends, rated for 150-psi CWP. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. APCO Willamette; Series 100. b. Val-Matic; Swing-Flex C. Pratt; RD-Series 2.8 SPRING ASSISTED RUBBER FLAPPER SWING CHECK VALVE A. Class 125,ANSI/ASME B16.1 PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 65-PAGE 3 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 VALVES FOR FLOW CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE SEPTEMBER 2025 B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Val-Matic Surgebuster 2. Crispin RF-ASR 3. Golden Anderson Slaminator C. Materials: 1. Body and cover: ductile iron 2. Flapper: Buna-N, steel reinforced 3. Disc accelerator: stainless steel 2.9 "DUCKBILL" ELASTOMERIC CHECK VALVE A. "Duckbill" Elastomeric Check Valve, 2-Inches through 84-Inches: 1. Type:All rubber and flow operated check type with either a flanged end connectionor a slip-on end connection as indicated.The port area shall contour down to a duckbill, which allows the passage of flow in one direction. 2. Material: a. The flange and flexible duckbill sleeve shall be one piece Buna-N rubber construction with nylon reinforcement.The bill portion shall be thinner and more flexible to form into a curve of 180 degree. b. Flange drilling shall conform to ANSI B16.1 Class 125/ANSI B16.5 Class 150 standards. C. Slip-on check valves shall be secured to the pipe using stainless steel clamps. 3. Opening Requirements: 2-inches of water. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Tideflex Technologies: 1) Series TF-1 for slip-on. 2) Series 35 for flanged-end. b. General Rubber 1) Flex-Valve 4100 for slip-on style. 2) Flex-Valve 4200 for flanged-end. B. "Duckbill" Elastomeric Inline Check Valve, Fits Inside Pipe, 2-Inches through 72-Inches: 1. Type:All rubber and flow operated check type which fits inside pipe and fastened with internal expansion clamp.The port area shall contour into a circumferential sealing area that is concentric with the pipe which shall allow passage of flow in one direction while preventing reverse flow. 2. Material: Flexible duckbill sleeve shall be one piece Buna-N rubber construction with nylon reinforcement. Provide stainless steel expansion clamp for securing valve to inside of pipe. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Tideflex Technologies: Series CMUF-SL slip-in CheckMate Ultraflex 2.10 SILENT CHECK VALVE A. Silent Check Valve,Wafer Style, 10-Inch and Smaller: 1. Type: Class 125 cast iron body, ASTM A-126, Class B, bronze seat and plug, ASTM B584, stainless steel spring,wafer style. 2. Spring shall be helical or conical, seat and plug field replaceable, flow area through the body equal to or greater than the cross-section area of the equivalent pipesize. 3. Capable of silent operation when installed in the vertical or horizontal position. 4. Acceptable Manufactures: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 65-PAGE 4 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 VALVES FOR FLOW CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE SEPTEMBER 2025 a. APCO Series 300. B. Silent Check Valve, Globe Style, Flanged Ends, 3-Inch through 42-Inch: 1. Type" Class 125 and 150 cast iron body,ASTM A-126, Class B, or ductile iron body,ASTM A536, 65-45-12; bronze seat and plug,ASTM 13584, stainless steel spring,flanged ends. 2. Plug shall be center guided at both ends with a through integral valve shaft and spring loaded. 3. Spring shall be helical or conical, seat and plug field replaceable, flow area through the body equal to or greater than the cross-section area of the equivalent pipesize. 4. Capable of silent operation when installed in the vertical or horizontal position. S. Acceptable Manufactures: a. APCO Series 600. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 65-PAGE 5 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 VALVES FOR FLOW CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE SEPTEMBER 2025 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 65-PAGE 6 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3T 0537-036-01 VALVES FOR FLOW CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE SEPTEMBER 20255 SECTION 40 05 78.23 AIR/VACUUM VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install sewage air release and air/vacuum valves complete as shown on the Plans and specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: All materials of construction shall conform to ANSI and ASTM specifications. All air/vacuum and combination air valves shall be in accordance with AWWA Standards. B. Each valve shall have manufacturer's nameplate in stainless steel showing the pressure ratings, serial and model numbers,year manufactured and other pertinent data. C. Manufacturers of sewage air release valves shall demonstrate a minimum of 5 years of experience in similar applications for sizes of valves being furnished. References shall be furnished upon request. D. Valve supplier shall maintain a complete stock of spare parts in the State of Texas or shall indicate that parts will be delivered upon 48 hours of receipt of request. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Submit one drawing or illustration showing unit construction for each type and size valve used. 2. Submit the following information for each valve: a. Specific application in lift stations expressed in terms of service and contract drawing number where shown. b. Description including type of valve,type of mechanism and accessories included. C. Size and connection type. d. Maximum non-shock working pressure for which valve is designed. e. Materials of construction and coatings for valves and accessories. f. Manufacturer's make and model. B. Affidavits: 1. Submit affidavits of compliance with the reference standards when standards are specified in the valve specification sheets at the end of this Section. C. Operation and Maintenance Manual 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with the requirements of the General Conditions and manufacturer's recommendations. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 78.23-PAGE 1 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 AIR VACUUM VALVES FOR WW SERVICE SEPTEMBER 2025 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Obtain all valves for this specification from a single manufacturer. B. End connections to be compatible with those specified and shown on the drawings. All flanges shall conform to the standard specification of the American National Standard Institute (ANSI), Class 125. C. Paint valves as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Paint colors to be selected by Owner. D. All internal materials for valves shall withstand corrosion. E. Unless otherwise noted, all valves shall be rated for 100 psi working pressure and be capable of withstanding 300 psi instantaneous maximum surge pressure. F. Valves shall be non-slam cushioned. 2.2 COMBINATION AIR RELEASE AND AIR VACUUM VALVES A. Valve Type: Combination air release and air vacuum valve. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and models: a. A.R.I. D-025 or D-025 Short b. H-TEC Model 986 (SS) and 988 C. VENTO-O-MAT Model RGXII (St. Steel) d. VALMATIC VM 48S or VM 49AS 2. Operation: a. Automatically exhaust large quantities of air during filling at up to sonic velocity without blowing shut. b. Automatically release small amounts of accumulated air during operation. C. Automatically allow air to re-enter during negative pressure or draining. 3. Components: a. Sewage air and vacuum valve with outlet and inlet as shown. b. Use Isolation Valve as shown. C. All necessary piping and fittings for a complete system. 4. Materials of Construction: a. Body and Cover: 316 stainless steel. b. Seats: 316 stainless steel or Buna-N renewable. C. Cover Bolts: Steel ASTM A307. d. Float: 302 stainless steel. e. All Intervals: 316 stainless steel or Viton. f. 125 pound flanged connections for surge valve and air vacuum inlet, NPT for air vacuum outlet and air release. g. Surge Valve Disc Seat: 316 stainless steel ASTM A240/Buna-N. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 78.23-PAGE 2 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 AIR VACUUM VALVES FOR WW SERVICE SEPTEMBER 2025 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with the plans, approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Retain a qualified representative of the manufacturer to perform the following services: 1. Inspect the completed installation and note deficiencies. 2. Assist the CONTRACTOR during start-up, adjusting, and site testing of completed installation. 3. Instruct OWNER personnel in the operations and maintenance of the equipment. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 78.23-PAGE 3 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 AIR VACUUM VALVES FOR WW SERVICE SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 78.23-PAGE 4 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 AIR VACUUM VALVES FOR WW SERVICE SEPTEMBER 2025 40 39 80 PUMP CONTROLS PLC BASED PART 1- GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED A. This section Includes: 1. Pump controls B. Covers the furnishing and installation of controls, including all devices, accessories and appurtenances required for proper operation of the control equipment. This section is supplemented by Division 26 Electrical. Also supplementing this section are the drawings which indicate locations and arrangement of equipment. The drawings also provide one- lines and schematics regarding connection and interaction with other equipment. 1.2 COORDINATION Controls equipment supplied under this section shall be designed and coordinated for proper operation with related equipment and specifications. All equipment shall be applied in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the device manufacturer and the related equipment manufacturer. Review of drawings submitted prior to the final determination of related equipment shall not relieve the Contractor from supplying systems in full compliance with the specific requirements of the related equipment. Related equipment and materials may include, but will not be limited to, instrument/control devices, conduit, cable, and piping as described in other specifications associated with this project. Installation drawings shall be prepared for interconnecting wiring between the related equipment and the equipment furnished under this section. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITY The pump controls shall be provided and installed by the Contractor or his appointed subcontractors. The services of the controlled equipment supplier's technical representative shall be provided as necessary to calibrate,test, and advise others of procedures for adjustment and operation. 1.4 SUBMITTAL DATA The following data shall be submitted for approved to the Engineer prior to fabrication or assembly of the pump controls. Partial submittals of drawings or data will not be acceptable. No part of the control system shall be fabricated, assembled or shipped to the jobsite until the submittal data has been approved by the Engineer. 1. Outline drawings showing equipment arrangement, dimensions and weight. 2. Descriptive bulletins and catalog information on all components sufficient for the Engineer to determine whether the proposed item is in compliance with the drawings and specifications. Pump Controls PLC Based 40 39 80- 1 3. Schematic diagrams showing all breakers, switches, relays, etc. The diagrams shall also show all equipment sizes and ratings and for each control circuit showing device and terminal block numbers and all wire numbers. 5. Wiring diagram showing the relative physical location of all items in the back panel and all interconnecting wiring between devices. The wiring diagrams shall also show the identification of all device terminals,terminal blocks and wires, 6. Interconnection diagrams shall be furnished by the supplier of the control panels. These drawings shall show the interconnection field wiring between the control panel and any remote equipment, panels, devices, etc. The interconnection drawings shall show the termination of this wiring both at the back panel and at the remote location. These drawings shall also show wire numbers, terminal block numbers, wire groupings in conduits and conduit numbers corresponding to those used on the plan drawings. 7. Material list - listing the quantity, manufacturer, rating, type, and manufacturer's catalog number of all components in the panel. PART 2.0 MATERIALS 2.01. CONTROL COMPONENTS 1. PLC as specified in section 40 94 43 Programmable Logic Controllers. 2. Lift Pump Control Panel Devices: 1. PLC 2. Breakers/Fuses 3. Auxiliary Relays 4. Mini Cas Relays (By pump provider) 5. 24VDC Power Supply 6. Graphic Operator Interface 7. Surge Protection 8. Fused Terminals 9. Network devices 10. Wireway, wire management 11. Name Plates as required 12. Field wiring terminal blocks 3. Control Devices: All required control devices shall be furnished and installed as specified herein. All selector switches, push buttons, pilot lights, etc., for non- hazardous service shall be heavy duty, corrosion-resistant, NEMA 4X, Square D Class 9001,type SK or equal. Push- buttons shall be extended guard type. Pilot lights shall be push-to-test,transformer type. Pump Controls PLC Based 40 39 80-2 4. Circuit Breakers: Control and accessory circuits 240 volt and less shall be molded case circuit breakers for short circuit protection and switching. Breakers shall be U.L. listed for 120/240 volts with 10000 A.I.C. Switching or reset shall be accomplished without need to open the inner panel door. 5. Provide a separate D.C. power supply providing regulated D.C. power sources. Power supplies shall be sized to source all panel and field hardware burden plus fifty percent. Input of all power supplies shall be protected with DIN-rail mounted circuit breakers sized for 125% of Load. In no case shall any AC or DC power supply output exceed 10 Amperes. Power supplies/converters shall have an input to output efficiency rating exceeding 85%. Power supplies shall have an operating temperature range of -20' to 70' C. The drawings and specifications indicate the energy sources that will be provided. Any other devices or power supplies necessary to obtain proper operation of the supervisory control system or instrumentation from these energy sources shall be provided with the control panels. 5. Control Relays: Relays for 120 and 24 volt circuits shall be industry standard plug-in type with tube type connectors. Contacts shall be rated 10 amps resistive, continuous. An internal light shall be provided to indicate relay energization. Relay sockets shall be the single-tier type. 6. Wiring: Controls shall be completely factory assembled and pre-wired. The supplier shall thoroughly test the control system and level control system for proper operating sequence under all conditions before shipment of the panel to the job site. Control wiring shall be stranded copper, #14 AWG minimum size. Power wiring shall be stranded copper, #12 AWG minimum. All wiring insulation shall be dual rated for Type THHN and THWN applications. All control wiring terminations shall be made using vinyl insulated, crimp type connectors, with spade type lugs. Each control wire shall be labeled at each end with a preprinted, tube type or heat-shrink type wire marker, or shall be color coded. Screw type terminal strips shall be provided and suitably identified for termination of field wire control circuits. Submittal drawings shall include wire identification and terminal numbers. Control terminal blocks shall be rated 300 volts minimum and shall provide four unidentified spare sets. Incoming power terminals shall be lug type rated 600 volts minimum. Separate bare copper ground lugs shall be provided for incoming and pump ground wire. All wiring shall be neatly tie-wrapped and secured. 7. Legends and Nameplates: Provide an appropriately engraved laminated plastic nameplate for each control device in panel. Legend plate indicating the operating function of pilot devices (START, STOP, RESET etc.) shall be aluminum with black background and white lettering. Nameplates indicating the controlled device shall be black laminated plastic 1/2 inch wide with 1/4 inch white engraved lettering. Nameplates identifying the control panel and mounted on the exterior door shall be black laminated plastic one inch wide with 3/8 inch white lettering. Legends shall be mechanically attached with the pilot device. 8. Float Switches: Wet well liquid High level shall be signaled by non-metallic float switch with a normally open contact that closes on liquid level rise. Switch shall be the non- Pump Controls PLC Based 40 39 80-3 floating type with internal weighting to keep the switch below water after tilting. Float switch shall consist of a polypropylene float housing, mercury switch and neoprene jacketed control cable. Float housing shall be leakproof, shock and corrosion resistant. Mercury switch shall be metal-encased, shock resistant, with 10 amp, 120 volt contact, N.O. or N.C. as indicated by the control schematics. Power cables shall be of adequate length to prevent splicing prior to terminal connection but not less than 20 feet. Floats shall be the product of Anchor Scientific, Inc. or Flygt or an approved equal. 9. Field Wiring: Panel shall include terminal strip for field wiring for the following: a. Control Power b. Pump Controls C. Level Sensor 10. Operator Interface: Panel shall include 8" graphic Operator interface to show pump station status and adjustments. 11. Pump controls shall be installed in a NEMA 4X fiberglass or Stainless steel enclosure sized as required. 2.03 CONTROL SEQUENCE A. Lift Station Control Pumps 1. Coordinate with Owner prior to programming to review sequence of operation. The lift station pumps shall be controlled by a Hand-Off-Auto switch located in the motor control center. In the "hand" position the motor shall run continuously, regardless of wet well level. In the "auto" position, each pump shall be controlled by the PLC and wet well level signal. Pumps shall start, latch in, and run until level fall below cut off level. Final levels shall be determined in field or as recommended by City. LEVEL FUNCTION (Preliminary) RISING LEVEL FALLING LEVEL El. xx.xx High Level Alarm (Red) El. xx.xx High Level Alarm Off(Reset) El. xx.xx El. xx.xx Start 3rd Lag PUmp El. xx.xx Start 2nd Lag PUmp El. xx.xx Start 1st Lag PUmp El. xx.xx Start Lead Pump El. xx.xx All Pumps Off Pump Controls PLC Based 40 39 80-4 2. Lead pump to always start first at level set on operator interface. As level continues to rise, Lag pump shall start. As level continues to rise, the second, third, and fourth pumps shall start at each respective levels. All pumps shall latch in and operate until shut off level is reached. Pumps shall alternate Lead and Lag after each pump down cycle. 3. Auxiliary contacts in the HOA switch "Auto" position shall be provided for control monitoring. 4. A wet well high level alarm shall be routed to the SCADA RTU from float switch. 5. Elapsed time meters shall be located in the Motor Control Center and shall be interlocked with motor starter to indicate accumulated run time. A red pilot light shall be located in the MCC to indicate motor run status. 6. The pump run status, position of pump starter HOA switch, pump MCP trip, Motor Overload/ Leak, motor current, pump run status shall be routed to SCADA RTU via communcation. 7. Each pump motor shall have an adjustable time delay, 1-10 seconds between the automatic start signal and actual motor starting. Time shall be adjustable from Operator Interface. 8. MiniCAS units shall trigger alarms for pump seal leak and thermal overload and shall trigger a pump shutdown. MiniCAS alarms shall be routed to pump control panel. 9. System status and alarms shall be monitored as per 1/0 list. 10. Operator interface mounted on panel exterior door shall display Pump station status including wet well, level, pump run, motor current, and pump alarms. Operator interface shall operators to adjust pump START/STOP Setpoints. 11. Panel PLC shall communicate with Pump Station SCADA RTU Panel PLC and allow sharing of pump status and alarm information. 12. Any pump not in "Auto" mode, pump that has been shut down due to alarm or disabled due to alarm condition shall be removed from the sequence of rotation. PART 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Pump controls shall be installed in a Pump Control panel as indicated on drawings and as specified herein. 3.2 STARTUP AND FIELD TESTING: Pump Controls PLC Based 40 39 80-5 A. General: The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified factory field service engineer for one 8-hour working day at the site to inspect the installation and instruct the Owner's personnel on the operation and maintenance of equipment. The qualifications of the field service engineer are subject to the approval of the Engineer B. Installation Inspection: After the motors have been completely installed and wired the contractor shall: a. Megger stator and power cables b. Check for proper motor rotation C. Check power supply voltage d. Measure motor no load current e. Check control operation and sequence During this initial inspection, the manufacturer's service representative shall review recommended operation and maintenance procedures with the Owner's personnel. Any defects or improper operation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 CONTROL PANEL SECTION A. Labeling 1. Compartment: Labels shall be provided for control panel compartment as specified herein and on drawings. 2. Control devices: Limit switches, and similar pilot devices shall be labeled with stainless steel tags having 1/4" high indented lettering. The tags shall be permanently and securely attached with stainless steel tie wire. B. Wiring: All field control wiring shall be labeled with wire markers where entering control enclosures, terminal boxes, etc. Wire markers shall be tube type, heat-shrink type or write-on adhesive type. Single digit individual markers shall not be used. Wire numbers shall be in accordance with the approved schematic drawings. C. Voltage warning signs 1. Voltage warning signs shall be installed on all distribution enclosures or devices containing voltages over 120 volts to ground. Voltage warning signs on outdoor equipment shall be furnished and mounted by the supplier of the equipment. Signs shall read - "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE" and shall indicate the circuit voltage present within the enclosure. 2. Multiple source signs: Multiple source signs shall be provided for any enclosure containing voltage sources from more than a single disconnecting means. Signs shall be yellow laminated plastic with 1/4" high engraved lettering. "CAUTION: Pump Controls PLC Based 40 39 80-6 Energized wiring from sources is contained in this unit. Provide label indicating circuit and panel name from each source. END OF SECTION Pump Controls PLC Based 40 39 80-7 40 39 80-01 PUMP CONTROLS PART 1- GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED A. This section Includes: 1. Pump controls B. Covers the furnishing and installation of controls, including all devices, accessories and appurtenances required for proper operation of the control equipment. This section is supplemented by Division 26 Electrical. Also supplementing this section are the drawings which indicate locations and arrangement of equipment. The drawings also provide one- lines and schematics regarding connection and interaction with other equipment. 1.2 COORDINATION Controls equipment supplied under this section shall be designed and coordinated for proper operation with related equipment and specifications. All equipment shall be applied in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the device manufacturer and the related equipment manufacturer. Review of drawings submitted prior to the final determination of related equipment shall not relieve the Contractor from supplying systems in full compliance with the specific requirements of the related equipment. Related equipment and materials may include, but will not be limited to, instrument/control devices, conduit, cable, and piping as described in other specifications associated with this project. Installation drawings shall be prepared for interconnecting wiring between the related equipment and the equipment furnished under this section. Pump controls shall be installed in the Motor Control Center on a back-plane and shall be coordinated with the MCC provider for space requirements. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITY The pump controls shall be provided and installed by the Contractor or his appointed subcontractors. The services of the controlled equipment supplier's technical representative shall be provided as necessary to calibrate,test, and advise others of procedures for adjustment and operation. 1.4 SUBMITTAL DATA The following data shall be submitted for approved to the Engineer prior to fabrication or assembly of the pump controls. Partial submittals of drawings or data will not be acceptable. No part of the control system shall be fabricated, assembled or shipped to the jobsite until the submittal data has been approved by the Engineer. A. Outline drawings showing equipment arrangement, dimensions and weight. Pump Controls B. Descriptive bulletins and catalog information on all components sufficient for the Engineer to determine whether the proposed item is in compliance with the drawings and specifications. C. Schematic diagrams showing all breakers, switches, relays, etc.The diagrams shall also show all equipment sizes and ratings and for each control circuit showing device and terminal block numbers and all wire numbers. D. Wiring diagram showing the relative physical location of all items in the back panel and all interconnecting wiring between devices. The wiring diagrams shall also show the identification of all device terminals,terminal blocks and wires, E. Interconnection diagrams shall be furnished by the supplier of the control panels. These drawings shall show the interconnection field wiring between the control panel and any remote equipment, panels, devices, etc. The interconnection drawings shall show the termination of this wiring both at the back panel and at the remote location. These drawings shall also show wire numbers, terminal block numbers, wire groupings in conduits and conduit numbers corresponding to those used on the plan drawings. F. Material list - listing the quantity, manufacturer, rating, type, and manufacturer's catalog number of all components in the panel. PART 2.0 MATERIALS 2.01. CONTROL COMPONENTS A. Control Devices: All required control devices shall be furnished and installed as specified herein. All selector switches, push buttons, pilot lights, etc.,for non-hazardous service shall be heavy duty, corrosion-resistant, NEMA 4X, Square D Class 9001, type SK or equal. Push- buttons shall be extended guard type. Pilot lights shall be LED push-to-test. All devices shall be mounted on an internal hinged subpanel door. Lift stations in this contract may differ slightly. See specific site for applicable components. B. Circuit Breakers: Control and accessory circuits 240 volt and less shall be molded case circuit breakers for short circuit protection and switching. Breakers shall be U.L. listed for 120/240 volts with 10000 A.I.C. Switching or reset shall be accomplished without need to open the inner panel door. C. Alternator: An automatic, electronic alternator shall change pump sequence after each operating cycle to equalize run time. The alternator shall be equipped with selector switches to allow automatic alternation for one or two or three pumps. LED indicators shall be provided to show lead pump position. Unit voltage shall be 120 volt. Contact rating shall be 10 amps resistive at 120 volts. The alternator unit shall be U.L. listed and shall be manufactured by Time Mark, Diversified, or equivalent. D. Current Relay: Current relay shall accept a 4-20ma signal and provide alarm setpoints to trigger on a level setpoint. Contact rating shall be 10 amps resistive at 120 volts. Relay shall be as manufactured by Alpha Process AP90 series. Pump Controls E. Control Relays: Relays for 120 and 24 volt circuits shall be industry standard plug-in type with tube type connectors. Contacts shall be rated 10 amps resistive, continuous. An internal light shall be provided to indicate relay energization. Relay sockets shall be the single-tier type. F. Wiring: Controls shall be completely factory assembled and pre-wired. The supplier shall thoroughly test the control system and level control system for proper operating sequence under all conditions before shipment of the panel to the job site. Control wiring shall be stranded copper, #14 AWG minimum size. Power wiring shall be stranded copper, #12 AWG minimum. All wiring insulation shall be dual rated for Type THHN and THWN applications. All control wiring terminations shall be made using vinyl insulated, crimp type connectors, with spade type lugs. Each control wire shall be labeled at each end with a preprinted, tube type or heat-shrink type wire marker, or shall be color coded. Screw type terminal strips shall be provided and suitably identified for termination of field wire control circuits. Submittal drawings shall include wire identification and terminal numbers. Control terminal blocks shall be rated 300 volts minimum and shall provide four unidentified spare sets. Incoming power terminals shall be lug type rated 600 volts minimum. Separate bare copper ground lugs shall be provided for incoming and pump ground wire. All wiring shall be neatly tie-wrapped and secured. G. Legends and Nameplates: Provide an appropriately engraved laminated plastic nameplate for each control device in panel. Legend plate indicating the operating function of pilot devices (START, STOP, RESET etc.) shall be aluminum with black background and white lettering. Nameplates indicating the controlled device shall be black laminated plastic 1/2 inch wide with 1/4 inch white engraved lettering. Nameplates identifying the control panel and mounted on the exterior door shall be black laminated plastic one inch wide with 3/8 inch white lettering. Legends shall be mechanically attached with the pilot device. H. Float Switches: Level control and wet well liquid High level shall be signaled by non-metallic float switch with a normally open contact that closes on liquid level rise. Switch shall be the non-floating type with internal weighting to keep the switch below water after tilting. Float switch shall consist of a polypropylene float housing, mercury switch and neoprene jacketed control cable. Float housing shall be leakproof, shock and corrosion resistant. Mercury switch shall be metal-encased, shock resistant, with 10 amp, 120 volt contact, N.O. or N.C. as indicated by the control schematics. Power cables shall be of adequate length to prevent splicing prior to terminal connection but not less than 20 feet. Floats shall be the product of Anchor Scientific, Inc. or Flygt or an approved equal. I. Phase Monitor: Three phase monitor to monitor phase loss, phase reversal, undervoltage, overvoltage. Unit shall have 10A output auxiliary contacts,Trip Normal LED indication lights and shall automatically reset on failure correction. Monitor shall be manufactured by Time Mark or equal. J. Power Supply: Din rail mounted 120VAC input, 24VDC 60W Power supply, integral surge protection, LED indicator lights. Unit shall be manufactured by Phoenix or approved equal. Pump Controls K. Panel Display: NEMA 4X Four digit process meter, 4-20ma input, 120V, panel door mountable, configurable and scalable for process. Unit shall be manufactured by Red Lion, Precision Digital or equal. L. Field Wiring: Panel shall include terminal strip for field wiring for the following: a. Pump Power b. Level Sensor C. Alarm Status contacts 2.02 CONTROLS A. Lift Pump Control Panel Devices: 1. Motor Starters 2. Breakers/Fuses 3. Phase monitor 4. Auxiliary Control Relays 5. Alternating Relay 6. Current relays (Alpha Process Relay)for 4-20MA signals 7. 24VDC Power Supply 8. Panel Meter display 9. Wireway, wire management 10. Name Plates as required 11. Field wiring terminal blocks 2.03 CONTROL SEQUENCE A. Lift Station Control Pumps 1. The lift station pumps shall be controlled by a Hand-Off-Auto switch located in the pump control panel. In the "hand" position the motor shall run continuously, regardless of wet well level. In the "auto" position, each pump shall be controlled by the alternator and wet well level signal. Pumps shall start, latch in, and run until level fall below cut off level. Pumps shall alternate after each pump down. Auxiliary contacts in the HOA switch "Auto" position shall be provided for remote SCADA monitoring. 2. The pump run status, position of pump starter HOA switch, pump MCP trip, and Motor Overload, pump run status shall be routed to SCADA RTU. 3. Elapsed time meters shall be located in the pump control panel and shall be interlocked with motor starter to indicate accumulated run time. A red pilot light shall be located in the pump control panel to indicate motor run status. 4. Pump control current relays shall also be programmed for high level. Both alarms shall be paralleled and routed to SCADA input. The high level alarm shall self-reset. Pump Controls 5. MiniCAS units shall trigger alarms for pump seal leak and thermal overload and shall trigger a pump shutdown. MiniCAS alarms shall be routed to SCADA panel. 6. A wet well high level alarm shall be routed to the SCADA RTU from float switch. 7. The pump run status, position of pump starter HOA switch, pump MCP trip, and Motor Overload, pump run status shall be routed to SCADA RTU. 8. Provide time delayed staggered restart on lift station power loss. 9. System status and alarms shall be monitored as per 1/0 list. PART 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. General: Pump controls shall be factory tested simulating pump control sequence including pump alternation, status, alarms. Certified testing report shall be provided. B. Pump controls shall be installed as indicated on drawings and as specified herein. Any deviation from such must be approved by the Engineer. 3.2 STARTUP AND FIELD TESTING: A. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified factory field service engineer for one 8-hour working day at the site to inspect the installation and instruct the Owner's personnel on the operation and maintenance of equipment. The qualifications of the field service engineer are subject to the approval of the Engineer B. Installation Inspection: After the motors have been completely installed and wired the contractor shall: a. Megger stator and power cables b. Check for proper motor rotation C. Check power supply voltage d. Measure motor no load current e. Check control operation and sequence C. During this initial inspection, the manufacturer's service representative shall review recommended operation and maintenance procedures with the Owner's personnel. Any defects or improper operation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 CONTROL PANEL SECTION A. Labeling Pump Controls 1. Compartment: Labels shall be provided for control panel compartment as specified herein and on drawings. 2. Control devices: Limit switches, and similar pilot devices shall be labeled with stainless steel tags having 1/4" high indented lettering. The tags shall be permanently and securely attached with stainless steel tie wire. B. Wiring: All field control wiring shall be labeled with wire markers where entering control enclosures, terminal boxes, etc. Wire markers shall be tube type, heat-shrink type or write-on adhesive type. Single digit individual markers shall not be used. Wire numbers shall be in accordance with the approved schematic drawings. C. Voltage warning signs 1. Voltage warning signs shall be installed on all distribution enclosures or devices containing voltages over 120 volts to ground. Voltage warning signs on outdoor equipment shall be furnished and mounted by the supplier of the equipment. Signs shall read - "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE" and shall indicate the circuit voltage present within the enclosure. 2. Multiple source signs: Multiple source signs shall be provided for any enclosure containing voltage sources from more than a single disconnecting means. Signs shall be yellow laminated plastic with 1/4" high engraved lettering. "CAUTION: Energized wiring from sources is contained in this unit. Provide label indicating circuit and panel name from each source. END OF SECTION Pump Controls SECTION 40 6113 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall provide,through the services of an instrumentation and control system subcontractor, components, system installation services, as well as required and specified ancillary services in connection with the Instrumentation, Control and Information System. B. The System includes materials, labor,tools,fees, charges, and documentation required to furnish, install,test and place in operation a complete and operable instrumentation, control and information system. C. The system shall include measuring elements, signal converters,transmitters, local control panels, digital hardware and software, operator workstations,SCADA panels, signal and data transmission systems, interconnecting wiring, and pertinent accessories. D. The scope of the work to be performed under this Division includes but is not limited to the following: 1. The Contractor shall retain overall responsibility for the instrumentation and control system as specified herein. 2. Furnish and install process instrumentation and associated taps and supports as scheduled or shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise noted or supplied by equipment vendors. 3. Furnish and install local control panels,field panels and associated cabinets and panels as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. 4. Furnish and install digital control system hardware and software as specified in Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. S. Final termination and testing of instrumentation and control system signal wiring and power supply wiring at equipment furnished under Div 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. 6. Furnish, install and terminate special cables for devices (e.g., instruments, printers, radios). Furnish and terminate control system communication network cables. Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 13 - 1 7. Furnish and install surge protection devices for digital equipment, local control panels, remote telemetry units, and instrumentation provided under this Division, including connections to grounding system(s) provided under Division 26. 8. Coordinate grounding requirements with the electrical subcontractor for digital equipment, local control panels, remote telemetry units, and instrumentation provided under this Division. Terminate grounding system cables at equipment provided under this Division. 9. Provide system testing, calibration,training and startup services as specified herein and as required to make systems fully operational. E. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to construct a complete and working installation. Items of equipment or materials that may reasonably be assumed as necessary to accomplish this end shall be supplied whether or not they are specifically stated herein. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS A. Field mounted devices, and other instrumentation &controls furnished with mechanical or electrical equipment not listed in the instrument schedule shall be furnished, installed,tested, and calibrated as specified under other Divisions unless otherwise indicated. B. Additional and related work performed under Division 26 includes the following: 1. Instrument A.C. power source and disconnect switch for process instrumentation,A.C. grounding systems, and A.C. power supplies for equipment, control panels and accessories furnished under Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. 2. Conduit and raceways for instrumentation and control system signal wiring,grounding systems, special cables and communication network cables. 3. Instrumentation and control system signal wiring. 4. Install control system communication network cables. 5. Furnish and install grounding systems for digital equipment, local control panels, remote telemetry units,and instrumentation provided under Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. Grounding systems shall be complete to the equipment provided under Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive, and where included, ready for termination by the instrumentation subcontractor. 6. Termination of instrumentation and control system signal wiring at equipment furnished under other Divisions of the Specifications. 7. Final wiring and termination to A.C. grounding systems and to A.C. power sources (e.g., panelboards, motor control centers, and other sources of electrical power). Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 13 -2 1.03 GENERAL INFORMATION AND DESCRIPTION A. Where manufacturers are named for a particular item of equipment, it is intended as a guide to acceptable quality and performance and does not exempt such equipment from the requirements of these Specifications or Drawings. B. In order to centralize responsibility, it is required that equipment (including field instrumentation and control system hardware and software) offered under this Division shall be furnished and installed by the instrumentation subcontractor, or under the supervision of the instrumentation subcontractor,who shall assume complete responsibility for proper operation of the instrumentation and control system equipment, including that of coordinating signals, and furnishing appurtenant equipment. C. The Contractor shall retain total responsibility for the proper detailed design,fabrication, inspection,test, delivery, assembly, installation, activation, checkout, adjustment and operation of the entire instrumentation and control system as well as equipment and controls furnished under other Divisions of the Specifications.The Contractor shall be responsible for the delivery of detailed drawings, manuals and other documentation required for the complete coordination, installation, activation and operation of mechanical equipment, equipment control panels, local control panels,field instrumentation, control systems and related equipment/systems and shall provide for the services of a qualified installation engineer to supervise activities required to place the completed facility in stable operation under full digital control. D. The instrumentation and control system shall be capable of simultaneously implementing all real time control and information system functions, and servicing all operator service requests as specified,without degrading the data handling and processing capability of other system components. E. Control system inputs and outputs are listed on contract drawings.This information,together with the functional control descriptions, process and instrumentation diagrams,and electrical control schematics, describes the real time monitoring and control functions to be performed. F. The mechanical, process, and electrical drawings indicate the approximate locations of field instruments, control panels, systems and equipment as well as field mounted equipment provided by others.The instrumentation subcontractor shall examine the mechanical, process and electrical drawings to determine actual size and locations of process connections and wiring requirements for instrumentation and controls furnished under this Contract. The instrumentation subcontractor shall inspect equipment, panels, instrumentation, controls, and appurtenances, either existing or furnished on the Project to determine requirements for interfacing with the control and information system. The Contractor shall coordinate the completion of required modifications with the associated supplier of the item furnished. G. The instrumentation subcontractor shall review and approve the size and routing of instrumentation and control cable and conduit systems furnished by the electrical subcontractor for suitability for use with the associated cable system. Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 13 -3 H. The Contractor shall coordinate the efforts of each supplier to aid in interfacing systems.This effort shall include, but shall not be limited to,the distribution of approved shop drawings to the electrical subcontractor and to the instrumentation subcontractor furnishing the equipment under this Division. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a signal transmission system free from electrical interference that would be detrimental to the proper functioning of the instrumentation and control system equipment. J. The Owner shall have the right of access to the subcontractor's facility and the facilities of his equipment suppliers to observe materials and parts; witness inspections,tests and work in progress; and examine applicable design documents, records, and certifications during all stages of design, fabrication, and tests. The instrumentation subcontractor and his equipment suppliers shall furnish office space, supplies, and services required for these observation activities. K. The terms "Instrumentation," "Instrumentation and Control System," and "Instrumentation, Control and Information System" shall hereinafter be defined as equipment, labor, services, and documents necessary to meet the intent of the Specifications. 1.04 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM SUBCONTRACTORS A. Instrumentation and control system subcontractors shall be regularly engaged in the detailed design, fabrication, installation, and startup of instrumentation and control systems for water and wastewater treatment facilities. Instrumentation and control system subcontractors shall have a minimum of five years of such experience and shall have completed a minimum of three projects of similar type and size as that specified herein. Where specific manufacturers/models of major hardware or software products (PLC, HMI software, network,etc.) are specified to be used on this project,the instrumentation and control system subcontractor shall have completed at least one project using that specified hardware or software. As used herein,the term "completed" shall mean that a project has been brought to final completion and final payment has been made. B. Acceptable instrumentation and control system subcontractors shall be TBD.; or equal. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Solid State: Wherever the term solid state is used to describe circuitry or components in the Specifications, it is intended that the circuitry or components shall be of the type that convey electrons by means of solid materials such as crystals or that work on magnetic principles such as ferrite cores.Vacuum tubes, gas tubes, slide wires, mechanical relays, stepping motors or other devices will not be considered as satisfying the requirements for solid state components of circuitry. Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 13 -4 B. Bit or Data Bit:Whenever the terms bit or data bit are used in the Specification, it is intended that one bit shall be equivalent to one binary digit of information. In specifying data transmission rate,the bit rate or data bit rate shall be the number of binary digits transmitted per second and shall not necessarily be equal to either the maximum pulse rate or average pulse rate. C. Integrated Circuit: Integrated circuit shall mean the physical realization of a number of circuit elements inseparably associated on or within a continuous body to perform the function of a circuit. D. Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF): The MTBF shall be calculated by taking the number of system operating hours logged during an arbitrary period of not less than six months and dividing by the number of failures experienced during this period plus one. E. Mean Time to Repair(MTTR):The MTTR shall be calculated by taking the total system down time for repair over an arbitrary period of not less than six months coinciding with that used for calculation of MTBF and dividing by the number of failures causing down time during the period. F. Availability:The availability of a non-redundant device or system shall be related to its MTBF and MTTR by the following formula: A= 100 x(MTBF/(MTBF+ MTTR)) Percent The availability of a device or system provided with an automatically switched backup device or system shall be determined by the following formula: A=A2+ 1 - ((1 -Al) * (1 -Al)) where: Al =availability of non-redundant device or system A2 =availability of device or system provided with an automatically switched backup device or system G. Abbreviations: Specification abbreviations include the following: 1. A-Availability 2. ADC-Analog to Digital Converter 3. Al -Analog Input 4. AO -Analog Output 5. AVAIL-Available Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 13 -5 6. BCD - Binary Coded Decimal 7. CSMA/CD -Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect 8. CPU -Central Processing Unit 9. CRC-Cyclic Redundancy Check 10. CS-Control Strategy 11. DAC- Digital to Analog Converter 12. DBMS- Data Base Management System 13. DI - Discrete Input 14. DMA- Direct Memory Access 1S. DO - Discrete Output 16. DPDT- Double Pole, Double Throw 17. DVE- Digital to Video Electronics 18. EPROM - Erasable, Programmable Read Only Memory 19. FDM - Frequency Division Multiplexing 20. FSK- Frequency Shift Keyed 21. HMI - Human Machine Interface (Software) 22. 1/0 - Input/Output 23. LAN - Network and Communication Equipment 24. LCD- Liquid Crystal Display 2S. LDFW- Lead Follow 26. MCC- Motor Control Center 27. MTBF- Mean Time Between Failures 28. MTTR- Mean Time to Repair 29. OS-Operating System Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 13 -6 30. PAC- Programmable Automation Controller 31. PCB- Printed Circuit Board 32. PID - Proportional Integral and Derivative Control 33. PLC- Programmable Logic Controller or Programmable Controller 34. PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory 35. RAM - Random Access Memory 36. RDY- Ready 37. RMSS- Root Mean Square Summation 38. RNG - Running 39. ROM - Read Only Memory 40. RTU - Remote Telemetry Unit 41. SPDT-Single Pole, Double Throw 42. ST/SP-Start/Stop 43. TDM -Time Division Multiplexing 44. UPS- Uninterruptible Power Supply 45. VFD-Variable Frequency Drive H. To minimize the number of characters in words used in textual descriptions on displays, printouts and nameplates,abbreviations may be used subject to the Engineer's approval. If a specified abbreviation does not exist for a particular word, an abbreviation may be generated using the principles of masking and or vowel deletion. Masking involves retaining the first and last letters in a word and deleting one or more characters (usually vowels)from the interior of the word. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Instrumentation equipment and enclosures shall be suitable for ambient conditions specified. All system elements shall operate properly in the presence of telephone lines, power lines, and electrical equipment. B. Inside control rooms and climate-controlled electrical rooms,the temperature will normally be 20 to 25 degrees C; relative humidity 40 to 80 percent without condensation and the air will be Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 13 -7 essentially free of corrosive contaminants and moisture. Appropriate air filtering shall be provided to meet environmental conditions (e.g., dust). C. Other indoor areas may not be air conditioned/heated; temperatures may range between 0 and 40 degrees C with relative humidity between 40 and 95 percent. D. Field equipment including instrumentation and panels may be subjected to wind, rain, lightning, and corrosives in the environment,with ambient temperatures from -20 to 40 degrees C and relative humidity from 10 to 100 percent. All supports, brackets, interconnecting hardware, and fasteners shall be aluminum,type 316 stainless steel, or metal alloy as otherwise suitable for chemical resistance within chemical feed/storage areas shown on the installation detail drawings. PART 2—PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENT A. Payment to the Contractor for Control and Information System materials, equipment, and labor shall be in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions.The schedule of values submitted as required by the General and Supplementary Conditions shall reflect a breakdown of the work required for completion of the Control and Information System.The breakdown shall include sufficient detail to permit the Engineer to administer payment for the Control and Information System. B. The following payment schedule defines project milestones that will be used for establishing maximum partial payment amounts for the Control and Information System. Payment for field instruments, field wiring,fiber optic network cable and similar items will be made in addition to the payment for the scopes of services incorporated into the schedule below. 1. Task Completed - Maximum Cumulative% Request for Payment a. Mobilization -3% b. Preliminary Design Review- S% C. Approved Submittals- 20% d. Hardware Purchase (excludes field instruments) -40% e. Factory Witness Test-60% Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 13 -8 f. Loop Checkout-70% g. Control System Start-up and Test-80% h. Plant Start-up-90% i. Final System Acceptance Test-95% j. Final Acceptance- 100% C. Requests for payment for materials and equipment that are not installed on site, but are required for system construction and the factory witness test(e.g., digital hardware), or are properly stored as described in the General and Supplementary Conditions and herein, shall be accompanied by invoices from the original supplier to the instrumentation subcontractor substantiating the cost of the materials or equipment. D. Any balance remaining within the schedule of values for field instruments and other materials installed on the site, or for other materials for which payment is made by invoice,will be considered due upon completion of the Final Acceptance test. 3.02 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean soiled surfaces of installed equipment and materials. B. Upon completion of the instrumentation and control work,the Contractor shall remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris that has accumulated during the construction work. The entire area shall be left neat, clean, and acceptable to the Owner. 3.03 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance of the Instrumentation, Control and Information System will be determined complete by the Engineer, and shall be based upon the following: 1. Receipt of acceptable start up completion and availability reports and other documentation as required by the Contract Documents. 2. Completion of the Availability Demonstration. 3. Completion of control system training requirements. 4. Completion of punch-list items that are significant in the opinion of the Engineer. B. Final acceptance of the System shall mark the beginning of the warranty period. END OF SECTION Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 13 -9 SECTION 40 6115 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall submit for review complete Shop Drawings for all equipment in accordance with the General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 01 of the Specifications. All submittal material shall be complete, legible, and reproducible, and shall apply specifically to this project. B. All submittal materials shall be tailored to this project by highlighting relevant items or crossing out non-applicable items. Generic submittals without identified options will be returned the Contractor without review. C. Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) Letter: 1. Where a named manufacturer and product is specified and a substitution or an "or equal" product is submitted,the submittal shall be accompanied by a "Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter." If the required submittal is submitted without the letter, the submittal will be rejected. 2. The letter shall include all comments, deviations and exceptions taken to the Drawings and Specifications by the Contractor, subcontractor (if applicable), and the equipment Manufacturer/Supplier.This letter shall include a copy of the Specification Section to which the submittal pertains. In the left margin beside each and every paragraph/item, a letter"C", "D", or"E" shall be typed or written in. a. The letter"C" shall be for full compliance with the requirement. b. The letter"D" shall be for a deviation from the requirement. C. The letter"E" shall be for taking exception to a requirement. 3. Any requirements with the letter"D" or"E" beside them shall be provided with a full typewritten explanation of the deviation/exception. Handwritten explanation of the deviations/exceptions shall not be acceptable. 4. The CD&E letter shall also address deviations, and exceptions taken to each Drawing related to this Specification Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 0133 00—Submittal Procedures Process Control System Submittals 40 61 15 - 1 B. Section 40 6113— Process Control System General Provisions 1.03 EXISTING CONDITIONS/AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTAL A. Prior to modifying, demolishing, removing, or decommissioning equipment,thoroughly investigate and document the existing conditions. Please note that Owner's record drawings alone are not sufficient for documentation.The record drawings, if present, shall be verified in the field prior to submitting. Submit drawings, markup, sketches, information, or other materials for documenting the following existing conditions: 1. All 1/0 on PLC modules that have its wiring modified or new 1/0 terminated or for any PLC that is being decommissioned/removed/demolished. Document module number, point number, wire numbers,terminal numbers, destination, and function. 2. All wiring entering or leaving a PLC that is being decommissioned, removed, or demolished that is not otherwise accounted for. B. When all information has been gathered, it shall be submitted to Engineer along with a clear and unequivocal statement that the existing conditions have been documented and understood. Contractor shall be held responsible for all issues that arise due to Contractor's modifications, demolition, removal, or decommissioning of existing equipment, including necessary reversion back to previous conditions. 1.04 DIGITAL HARDWARE SUBMITTALS A. Submit system block diagram(s) showing: 1. All equipment to be provided. 2. All interconnecting cable. 3. Equipment names, manufacturer, and model numbers. 4. Equipment locations. B. Submit information for all digital equipment including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Bill of materials with equipment names, manufacturers, complete model numbers and locations. 2. Catalog cuts, including complete part number breakdown information. 3. Complete technical, material and environmental specifications. 4. Assembly drawings. 5. Mounting requirements. Process Control System Submittals 40 61 15 -2 6. Color samples. 7. Nameplates. 8. Environmental requirements during storage and operation. 1.05 SOFTWARE SUBMITTALS A. Software submittals shall include the following as a minimum: 1. Bill of materials with software names, vendors, and complete listings of included software modules. 2. Standard manufacturer's literature describing the products. 3. Description of function of software in Control and Information System. 4. Limitations or constraints of software. 5. Minimum system (processor and memory) requirements. 6. Operation and maintenance requirements. B. Submit information on the following software: 1. Third-party software, including: a. Operating system. b. Operator workstation (SCADA or HMI)software, including all add-in software provided to perform specific functions (alarm dialers, schedulers, backup creation software, etc.). C. Office-type products, such as spreadsheets, word processors, etc. d. Database management software. e. Communication software, including all applicable local and wide area network software. f. Programmable controller programming software (where applicable). 2. Software configuration, including: a. Graphic display organization. b. Database configuration for operator workstations and database management system. Process Control System Submittals 40 61 15 -3 C. Trends. d. System security. e. Formats for all reports, including all required calculations. f. Intercommunications between software products required to implement system functions. g. Equipment backup configuration and requirements. C. Control Strategies 1. Description of automatic logic and all non-standard manual logic using plain English,for non-technical persons, and written in Contractor's own words.The write-up shall include references to associated 1/0,tag/loop numbers, alarming/interlocks. 2. Submitting language verbatim to Section 40 6196—Process Control Descriptions shall not be acceptable. D. Application Software 1. Provide application software documentation that contains program descriptions for the operation, modification, and maintenance of all application programs provided for the digital system. 2. Application software includes all custom routines developed specifically for this project, or pre-written routines used for accomplishing specified functions for this project.This shall include any add-in custom software. E. Graphic Displays 1. Submit all graphic displays required to perform the control and operator interface functions specified herein. Submitted graphic displays shall be for both new and modified graphics. 2. Submit the complete set of graphic displays for review by the Owner and the Engineer at least 60 days prior to commencement of factory testing. 3. Where a large number of graphic displays are required, submit an initial set of example displays for review before the complete set of displays is submitted.This initial set shall include examples of all basic graphic display design features and parameters and is intended to allow the Contractor to obtain preliminary approval of these features and parameters prior to beginning main graphic display production. 4. The Contractor shall allow for one major cycle of revisions to the displays prior to factory testing and one minor cycle of revisions following factory test. A cycle of revisions shall be Process Control System Submittals 40 61 15 -4 defined as all revisions necessary to complete a single set of changes marked by the Engineer and the Owner. Additional corrections shall be performed during start-up as required to accommodate changes required by actual field conditions, at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. The required submittals in each revision cycle shall be full color prints of the entire set of displays. 6. Displays shall be printouts of actual process graphics implemented in the system. 1.06 CONTROL PANEL SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be provided for all control panels, and shall include: 1. Exterior panel drawings with front and side views,to scale. 2. Interior layout drawings showing the locations and sizes of all equipment and wiring mounted within the cabinet,to scale. 3. Panel area reserved for cable access and conduit entry. 4. Location plans showing each panel in its assigned location. B. Submit information for all exterior and interior panel mounted equipment including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Bill of materials with equipment names, manufacturers, complete model numbers and locations. 2. Catalog cuts, including complete part number breakdown information. 3. Complete technical, material and environmental specifications. 4. Assembly drawings. 5. Mounting requirements. 6. Color samples. 7. Nameplates. 8. Environmental requirements during storage and operation. C. Submit panel wiring diagrams showing power, signal, and control wiring, including surge protection, relays, courtesy receptacles, lighting, wire size and color coding, etc. Process Control System Submittals 40 61 15 -5 1.07 INSTRUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Submit information on all field instruments, including but not limited to the following: 1. Product(item) name and tag number used herein and on the Contract Drawings. 2. Catalog cuts, including complete part number breakdown information. 3. Manufacturer's complete model number. 4. Location of the device. 5. Input output characteristics. 6. Range, size, and graduations. 7. Physical size with dimensions, NEMA enclosure classification, and mounting details. 8. Materials of construction of all enclosures, wetted parts and major components. 9. Instrument or control device sizing calculations where applicable. 10. Certified calibration data on all flow metering devices. 11. Environmental requirements during storage and operation. 12. Associated surge protection devices. 13. Installation drawings/details. 1.08 WIRING AND LOOP DIAGRAMS A. Submit interconnection wiring and loop diagrams for all panels and signals in the Control and Information System. B. Electrical interconnection diagrams shall show all terminations of equipment, including terminations to equipment and controls furnished under other Divisions, complete with equipment and cable designations. Where applicable, interconnection wiring diagrams shall be organized by input/output card. Interconnecting diagrams shall be prepared in a neat and legible manner on 11 X 17-inch reproducible prints. C. Loop drawings shall conform to the latest version of ISA Standards and Recommended Practices for Instrumentation and Control. Loop Drawings shall conform to ISA S5.4, Figures 1-3, Minimum Required Items [Figures 4-6, Minimum Required Items plus Optional Items]. D. Loop drawings shall not be required as a separate document provided that the interconnecting wiring diagrams required in Paragraph B., above, contain all information required by ISA 5.4. Process Control System Submittals 40 61 15 -6 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall deliver equipment operation and maintenance manuals in compliance with Section 0133 00—Submittal Procedures. Operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals shall consist of two basic parts: 1. Manufacturer standard O&M manuals for all equipment and software furnished under this Division. 2. Custom O&M information describing the specific configuration of equipment and software, and the operation and maintenance requirements for this particular project. B. The manuals shall contain all illustrations, detailed drawings, wiring diagrams, and instructions necessary for installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment.The illustrated parts shall be numbered for identification. All modifications to manufacturer standard equipment and/or components shall be clearly identified and shown on the drawings and schematics.All information contained therein shall apply specifically to the equipment furnished and shall only include instructions that are applicable. All such illustrations shall be incorporated within the printing of the page to form a durable and permanent reference book. C. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc. that are required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment.The maintenance instructions shall include troubleshooting data and full preventive maintenance schedules. The instructions shall be bound in locking 3-D-ring binders with bindings no larger than 3.5 inches.The manuals shall include 15%spare space for the addition of future material.The instructions shall include drawings reduced or folded and shall provide the following as a minimum. 1. A comprehensive index. 2. A functional description of the entire system, with references to drawings and instructions. 3. A complete "as built" set of all approved shop drawings, which shall reflect all work required to achieve final system acceptance. 4. A complete list of the equipment supplied, including serial numbers, ranges, and pertinent data. 5. Full specifications on each item. 6. Detailed service, maintenance, and operation instructions for each item supplied. 7. Special maintenance requirements particular to this system shall be clearly defined, along with special calibration and test procedures. Process Control System Submittals 40 61 15 -7 8. Complete parts lists with stock numbers and name, address, and telephone number of the local supplier. 9. References to manufacturers' standard literature where applicable. 10. Warning notes shall be located throughout the manual where such notes are required to prevent accidents or inadvertent misuse of equipment. D. The operating instructions shall clearly describe the step by step procedures that must be followed to implement all phases of all operating modes.The instructions shall be in terms understandable and usable by operating personnel and maintenance crews and shall be useful in the training of such personnel. E. The maintenance instructions shall describe the detailed preventive and corrective procedures required, including environmental requirements during equipment storage and system operation,to keep the System in good operating condition. All hardware maintenance documentation shall make reference to appropriate diagnostics, where applicable, and all necessary wiring diagrams, component drawings and PCB schematic drawings shall be included. F. The hardware maintenance documentation shall include, as a minimum,the following information: 1. Operation Information:This information shall include a detailed description of how the equipment operates and a block diagram illustrating each major assembly in the equipment. 2. Preventive Maintenance Instructions:These instructions shall include all applicable visual examinations, hardware testing and diagnostic routines, and the adjustments necessary for periodic preventive maintenance of the System. 3. Corrective Maintenance Instructions:These instructions shall include guides for locating malfunctions down to the card replacement level.These guides shall include adequate details for quickly and efficiently locating the cause of an equipment malfunction and shall state the probable source(s) of trouble,the symptoms, probable cause, and instructions for remedying the malfunction. 4. Parts Information:This information shall include the identification of each replaceable or field repairable component. All parts shall be identified on a list in a drawing;the identification shall be of a level of detail sufficient for procuring any repairable or replaceable part. Cross references between equipment numbers and manufacturer's part numbers shall be provided. G. Software documentation shall conform to a standard format and shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. A program abstract that includes: Process Control System Submittals 40 61 15 -8 a. Program Name-The symbolic alphanumeric program name. b. Program Title- English text identification. C. Program Synopsis-A brief text shall be provided that specifies the need for the program, states when it shall be used and functionally describes all inputs, outputs and functions performed.This descriptive text shall be written in a language that is understandable by non-programming-oriented readers. 2. A program description that shall include, but not be limited to,the following: a. Applicable Documents - List all documents (standard manufacturer's literature, other program descriptions, etc.) by section, if practical,that apply to the program. One complete copy of all applicable reference material shall be provided. b. Input Output- Identify each input and output parameter, variable, and software element used by the program. State the purpose of all inputs, outputs, and variables. C. Processing-This section shall contain a description of the overall structure and function of the program. Describe the program run stream and present a detailed description of how the program operates. Describe the timing and sequencing of operations of the program relative to other programs. Describe all interactions with other programs. Processing logic that is not readily described without considerable background information shall be handled as a special topic with references to an appendix or to control strategy document that details the necessary information. Reference shall also be made to an appendix or control strategy document for equation and program algorithm derivations. d. System Configuration - Describe in detail the system configuration or status required for program implementation, if appropriate. e. Limitations and Constraints-Summarize all known or anticipated limitations of the program, if appropriate. f. Storage - Define program storage requirements in terms of disk or RAM memory allocation. g. Verification - Describe, as a minimum, a test that can be used by the operator to assure proper program operation. Define the required system configuration, input requirements and criteria for successful test completion. h. Diagnostics- Describe all program diagnostics, where applicable. Descriptions shall list each error statement, indicate clearly what it means, and specify what appropriate actions should be taken. Process Control System Submittals 40 61 15 -9 i. Malfunction Procedures-Specify procedures to follow for recovering from a malfunction due to either operator error or other sources. 1.10 FINAL SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION A. All documentation shall be delivered to the Owner prior to final system acceptance in accordance with the Contract Documents. As a minimum,final documentation shall contain all information originally part of the control system submittals. B. Provide a complete set of detailed electrical interconnection diagrams required to define the complete instrumentation and control system. All diagrams shall be 11 X 17-inch original reproducible prints. All diagrams shall be corrected to describe final "as built" hardware configurations and to reflect the system configuration and control methodology adopted to achieve final system acceptance. C. Provide system software documentation for the operation and maintenance of all system software programs provided as a part of the digital system. All system software documentation shall be amended as required to delineate all modifications and to accurately reflect the final as built software configurations. D. Provide application software documentation that contains program descriptions for the operation, modification, and maintenance of all application programs provided for the digital system. E. Provide control strategy documentation which shall include control strategy(block oriented or ladder logic) diagrams to describe the control of all processes. Control strategy documentation shall reflect the system configuration and control methodology adopted to achieve final system acceptance. Control strategy documentation shall conform to the submittal requirements listed hereinabove. F. O&M documentation shall be amended with all final, adjusted values for all setpoints and other operating parameters for Owner reference. G. The Owner recognizes the fact that not all possible problems related to real time events, software interlocks, and hardware maintenance and utilization can be discovered during the Acceptance Tests. Therefore,the instrumentation subcontractor through the Contractor shall investigate, diagnose, repair, update, and distribute all pertaining documentation of the deficiencies that become evident during the warranty period.All such documentation shall be submitted in writing to the Owner within 30 days of identifying and solving the problem. 1.11 PROGRAMS AND SOURCE LISTINGS A. Provide one copy of all standard, of-the-shelf system and application software (exclusive of firmware resident software) on original media furnished by the software manufacturer. Process Control System Submittals 40 61 15 - 10 B. Provide one copy of source listings on digital media, acceptable to Engineer,for all custom software/logic written specifically for this facility, all database files configured for this facility, and all control strategies. All source listings shall include a program abstract, program linkage and input/output data. Comments describing the program flow shall be frequently interspersed throughout each listing. C. All software/logic shall be in both its native format and in Adobe Portable Document Format. 1.12 SUBMITTAL/DOCUMENTATION FORMAT A. All drawing-type submittals and documentation shall be rendered and submitted in the latest version of AutoCAD. B. All textual-type submittals and documentation shall be rendered and submitted in the latest version of Microsoft Word or in searchable Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). Raster scans will not be accepted. 1.13 ELECTRONIC O&M MANUALS A. Subject to acceptance by the Engineer,the O&M information may be submitted in part or in whole in an electronic format on digital media. B. Electronic O&M manuals shall contain information in standard formats(searchable Adobe PDF, Word, AutoCAD, HTML, etc.) and shall be easily accessible using standard, "off-the-shelf" software such as an Internet browser. Raster scans will not be accepted. PART 2— PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Process Control System Submittals 40 61 15 - 11 SECTION 40 6121 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall test the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 21.71— Factory Witness Test C. Section 40 6121.72— Field Testing D. Section 40 6121.73— Final Acceptance Test 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. For each of the specified tests, submit a test plan to the Engineer at least one month in advance of commencement of the tests.The test plan shall contain the following at a minimum: 1. A schedule of all testing to be conducted. 2. A brief description of the testing to be performed 3. Test objectives. 4. Testing criteria per the Specifications. 5. Check lists and procedures for performing each of the specified tests. 6. Sample test result documentation. 7. Requirements for other parties. 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All system start-up and test activities shall follow detailed test procedures; check lists, etc., previously approved by the Engineer.The Engineer shall be notified at least 21 days in advance of any system tests and reserves the right to have his and/or the Owner's representatives in attendance. Process Control System Testing 40 61 21 - 1 B. The Contractor shall provide the services of experienced factory trained technicians,tools and equipment to field calibrate,test, inspect, and adjust all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions. C. The Contractor(or designee) shall maintain master logbooks for each phase of installation, startup and testing activities specified herein. Each logbook shall include signal, loop or control strategy tag number, equipment identification, description and space for sign-off dates, Contractor signature and Engineer signature. Example test documentation specific to each phase of testing shall be approved prior to initiation of that testing, as specified hereinabove. D. All test data shall be recorded on test forms, previously approved by the Engineer. When each test has been successfully completed, a certified copy of all test results shall be furnished to the Engineer together with a clear and unequivocal statement that all specified test requirements have been met and that the system is operating in accordance with the Contract Documents. E. The Engineer will review test documentation in accordance with the Contract Documents and will give written notice of the acceptability of the tests within 10 days of receipt of the test results. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Process Control System Testing 40 61 21 -2 SECTION 40 61 21.71 FACTORY WITNESS TEST PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform a Factory Witness Test on the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 21— Process Control System Testing C. Section 40 6121.72— Field Testing D. Section 40 6121.73— Final Acceptance Test 1.03 FACTORY WITNESS TEST A. The Control and Information System equipment shall not be shipped until the Contractor receives notice of acceptability of the factory tests. B. Each item of equipment shall be fully factory inspected, calibrated and tested for function, operation and continuity of circuits. Exceptions shall be approved in writing by the Engineer. C. Each subsystem shall be fully factory tested for function and operation. D. System performance shall be tested using a fully integrated system, including all software and hardware.To achieve this,the entire control system, including all peripheral devices and all interconnecting cables (field instruments are not included in this requirement), shall be assembled on the factory test floor and the complete operational program loaded and simulated inputs applied. E. All hardware and software required to perform the specified testing shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. F. The instrumentation subcontractor shall perform a 100-hour full system test, during which the entire system shall operate continuously without failure in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If a system component fails during the test,the 100-hour test period shall be restarted after its operation is restored. G. The factory testing shall demonstrate all aspects of system sizing and timing including: Factory Witness Test 40 6121.71 - 1 1. Monitoring and control scan times at the PLC level. 2. Response times at the operator workstation level. H. The overall system as well as individual component hardware shall be tested under conditions of power failure to ensure proper response as specified herein. I. Operator Workstation Operation -This demonstration shall provide proof of system operation on an individual subsystem basis first, and then in the expected operating environment. Both normal and abnormal operating modes shall be demonstrated. Operator workstation testing shall include the following: 1. Demonstrate proper operation, under both normal and abnormal conditions of the operator workstation application software(SCADA, remote alarm dial-up, etc.).This shall include demonstration of system on-line diagnostics,fail-over features, reconfiguration operations, system initialization and restart, software fault tolerance, error detection and recovery, communications, and all additional features necessary to assure the successful operation of the system. 2. Demonstrate the standard features of the system.This shall include proof of operation of the process control database generator,the display generator, data storage and retrieval functions, data acquisition and control,trending functions, and reporting functions. 3. Demonstrate the configuration of the system to verify conformance with the Contract Documents.This shall include graphic displays and vectoring, operator interface functions,trending, reports, alarm management, security system configuration, etc. 4. The system shall be operated with data input/output with the PLCs and associated panels to prove operation of all workstation functions. 5. The testing in Items 2 and 3 above may be performed concurrently(i.e.,the standard and configured features of the system may be demonstrated simultaneously). J. PLC Operation -All functions comparable to those demonstrated for the operator workstations shall be demonstrated on the PLCs. This shall include the following: 1. On-line and off-line diagnostics. 2. For redundant units,fail-over operation and reconfiguration. 3. System initialization and restart. 4. Network communications, including fieldbus communications where required. 5. Non-volatility of memory. 6. Operation of all control logic shall be demonstrated as described herein. Factory Witness Test 40 6121.71 -2 K. Process 1/0 Simulation - Process input/output simulation for PLCs shall be performed with a manual simulation control panel, a separate programmable logic controller, network-based simulation software, analog signal generators, and/or jumpering of discrete signals between outputs and associated inputs, or some combination of these. Alternate process 1/0 systems such as plug-in circuit cards or 1/0 test modules may be utilized subject to approval by the Engineer to provide the specified simulation functions.The simulation system shall provide analog and discrete 1/0 hardware devices in sufficient quantity to allow complete and thorough testing of the control strategies and functions of the system.The process 1/0 simulation system shall be used in several ways as follows: 1. To provide a means of communications checkout from the operator workstations through the various levels of software in the PLCs and to the process, i.e.,the simulation panel. Likewise, a discrete or analog input shall be initiated from the simulation panel and the result monitored at the workstations. 2. Alarm response to discrete status changes or analog value limits shall be verified. Database entries or attributes such as engineering units and conversion equations shall be verified by varying analog inputs. 3. To provide data for use at all levels of the control system at the time of system integration. L. Control Strategy Testing- Provision shall be made to test all control strategies to prove the integrity of each strategy and the process control language in which it is implemented. For each control strategy, all functions shall be tested individually(where possible) and collectively to verify that the control strategy performs as described herein and as required for overall functionality within the control system. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Factory Witness Test 40 6121.71 -3 SECTION 40 61 21.72 FIELD TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform field testing on the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing C. Section 40 61 21.71 - Factory Witness Test D. Section 40 61 21.73 - Final Acceptance Test E. Section 40 70 00 - Instrumentation for Process Systems 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Control system start-up and testing shall be performed to ensure that all plant processes shall be systematically and safely placed under digital control in the following order: 1. Primary elements such as transmitters and switch devices shall be calibrated and tested as specified in Section 40 70 00 - Instrumentation for Process Systems. 2. Each final control element shall be individually tested as specified hereinafter. 3. Each control loop shall be tested as specified hereinafter. 4. Each control strategy shall be tested under automatic digital control as specified hereinafter. 5. The entire control system shall be tested for overall monitoring, control, communication, and information management functions, and demonstrated for system availability as specified hereinafter. B. System start-up and test activities shall include the use of water, if necessary, to establish service conditions that simulate, to the greatest extent possible, normal operating conditions in terms of applied process loads, operating ranges and environmental conditions. Field Testing 40 6121.72 - 1 C. Each phase of testing shall be fully and successfully completed and all associated documentation submitted and approved prior to the next phase being started. Specific exceptions are allowed if written approval has been obtained in advance from the Engineer. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall ensure that all mechanical equipment, equipment control panels, local control panels, field instrumentation, control system equipment and related equipment and/or systems are tested for proper installation, adjusted and calibrated on a loop-by-loop basis prior to control system startup to verify that each is ready to function as specified. Each test shall be witnessed, dated and signed off by both the Contractor (or designee) and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of meetings with all affected trades. A meeting shall be held each morning to review the day's test schedule with all affected trades. Similarly, a meeting shall be held each evening to review the day's test results and to review or revise the next day's test schedule as appropriate. C. The Contractor shall ensure that the electrical subcontractor conforms to the start-up, test and sign-off procedures specified herein to assure proper function and coordination of all motor control center control and interlock circuitry and the transmission of all discrete and/or analog signals between equipment furnished by the electrical subcontractor and the control system specified herein. D. The Contractor shall ensure that the HVAC subcontractor conforms to the start-up, test and sign-off procedures specified herein to assure proper function of all HVAC system control and interlock circuitry and the transmission of all discrete and/or analog signals between HVAC equipment and controls and the control system specified herein. 1.05 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT TESTING A. The proper control of all final control elements shall be verified by tests conducted in accordance with the requirements specified herein. B. All modulating final control elements shall be tested for appropriate speed or position response by applying power and input demand signals, and observing the equipment for proper direction and level of reaction. Each final control element shall be tested at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of signal input level and the results checked against specified accuracy tolerances. Final control elements, such as VFDs, that require turndown limits shall be initially set during this test. Field Testing 40 6121.72 -2 C. All non-modulating final control elements shall be tested for appropriate position response by applying and simulating control signals, and observing the equipment for proper reaction. 1.06 LOOP CHECKOUT A. Prior to control system startup and testing, each monitoring and control loop shall be tested on an individual basis from the primary element to the final element, including the operator workstation or loop controller level, for continuity and for proper operation and calibration. B. Signals from transducers, sensors, and transmitters shall be utilized to verify control responses. Simulated input data signals may be used subject to prior written approval by the Engineer. All modes of control shall be exercised and checked for proper operation. C. The accuracy of all DACs shall be verified by manually entering engineering unit data values at the operator workstation and then reading and recording the resulting analog output data. D. The accuracy of all ADCs shall be verified using field inputs or by manually applying input signals at the final controller, and then reading and recording the resulting analog input data at the operator workstation. E. Each loop tested shall be witnessed, dated and signed off by both the Contractor (or designee) and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. 1.07 CONTROL SYSTEM STARTUP AND TESTING A. Control system startup and testing shall be performed to demonstrate complete compliance with all specified functional and operational requirements. Testing activities shall include the simulation of both normal and abnormal operating conditions. B. All digital hardware shall be fully inspected and tested for function, operation and continuity of circuits. All diagnostic programs shall be run to verify the proper operation of all digital equipment. C. Final control elements and ancillary equipment shall be tested under start-up and steady-state operating conditions to verify that proper and stable control is achieved using local area control panels, motor control center circuits, and local field mounted control circuits. All hardwired control circuit interlocks and alarms shall be operational. The control to final control elements and ancillary equipment shall be tested using both manual and automatic (where provided) control circuits. D. Signals from transducers, sensors, and transmitters shall be utilized to verify control responses for final control elements. Simulated input data signals may be used subject to prior written approval by the Engineer. Field Testing 40 6121.72 -3 E. Each control strategy shall be tested to verify the proper operation of all required functions. The control system start-up and test activities shall include procedures for tuning all control loops incorporating PID control modules, and for adjusting and testing all control loops as required to verify specified performance. F. The control system start-up and test activities shall include running tests to prove that the Instrumentation, Control and Information System is capable of continuously, safely and reliably regulating processes, as required by the Contract, under service conditions that simulate, to the greatest extent possible, normal plant operating ranges and environmental conditions. G. A witnessed functional acceptance test shall be performed to demonstrate satisfactory performance of individual monitoring and control loops and control strategies. At least one test shall be performed to verify that the control and instrumentation system is capable of simultaneously implementing all specified operations. H. Each loop and control strategy test shall be witnessed and signed off by both the Contractor (or designee) and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. 1.08 FACILITY STARTUP COORDINATION A. Facility start-up shall comply with requirements specified in the Contract Documents and those requirements specified herein. Facility start-up shall commence after all previously described start-up and test activities have been successfully completed and shall demonstrate that the Instrumentation, Control and Information System can meet all Contract requirements with equipment operating over full operating ranges under actual operating conditions. B. The control system start-up period shall be coordinated with process startup activities and shall be extended as required until all plant processes are fully operational and to satisfy the Engineer that all control system Contract requirements have been fulfilled in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. The instrumentation subcontractor's personnel shall be resident at the facility to provide both full time (eight hours/day, five days/week) and 24 hours on call (seven days/week) support of operating and maintenance activities for the duration of the start-up period. D. At least one qualified control systems technician shall be provided for control system startup and test activities and at least two when loop checkout is being performed. Field Testing 40 6121.72 -4 PART 2- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3- EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Field Testing 40 6121.72 -5 SECTION 40 61 21.73 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform the Final Acceptance Test on the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 21— Process Control System Testing C. Section 40 61 21.71— Factory Witness Test D. Section 40 6121.72— Field Testing 1.03 AVAILABILITY DEMONSTRATION AND FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. Upon completion of all control system startup activities and prior to final system acceptance, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the availability of the entire control system, including operation under conditions of digital equipment fail-over, initiated either automatically or manually, shall be not less than 99.8 percent during a 30-day availability test period.The Owner shall be given two (2) weeks' notice of the starting date of the 30-day availability test. B. For purposes of determining availability figures, downtime of each system or portions of each system resulting from the causes specified hereunder will not be considered system failures. 1. Downtime of any network-connected device that is automatically backed-up upon failure shall not be considered a system failure provided that the downtime of the failed component does not exceed 24 hours. 2. Downtime of a PLC that is not automatically backed-up shall be considered a system failure if the downtime of the failed controller exceeds one (1) hour. 3. Downtime of a portion of the system resulting from failure of any field sensor shall not be considered a system failure provided that the system operates as specified under this condition. 4. Downtime of the following devices shall not be considered a system failure provided the failed device is repaired within the specified time: Final Acceptance Test 40 6121.73 - 1 a. Hard disc(one day) b. Workstations (one day) C. Communication interfaces (eight hours) d. Printer(three days) e. Process control system networks (eight hours) f. Off-line (optical, etc.) storage units (one day) g. UPS unit (one day) 5. Total shutdown of a single PLC resulting from a software fault shall be considered a system failure. 6. An erroneous command to the process that can be specifically related to a software fault shall be considered as one (1) hour of downtime. 7. The inoperability of any subsystem resulting from a software fault shall be considered a system failure. 8. The failure of the same component more than one time during the 30-day test shall be considered a system failure. C. If the system fails the 30-day availability test,the 30-day test period shall be restarted after the failed component or software is repaired/replaced and full operation is restored.The system shall be demonstrated for the full 30-day period following the restart. D. The Contractor shall submit an availability demonstration report that shall state that all system availability requirements have been met. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Final Acceptance Test 40 6121.73 -2 SECTION 40 6123 SIGNAL COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall conform to the signal coordination requirements specified herein. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating signal types and transmission requirements between the various parties providing equipment under this Contract.This shall include, but not be limited to, distribution of appropriate shop drawings among the equipment suppliers,the electrical subcontractor,the HVAC subcontractor, and the instrumentation subcontractor. C. Analog signals shall be signals for transmitting process variables, etc.from instruments and to and from panels, equipment PLCs and Control System PLCs. D. Discrete signals shall consist of contact closures or powered signals for transmitting status/alarm information and control commands between starters, panels, equipment PLCs,the Control System, etc. 1.02 ANALOG SIGNAL TRANSMISSION A. Signal transmission between electric or electronic instruments, controllers, and all equipment and control devices shall be individually isolated, linear 4-20 milliamperes and shall operate at 24 VDC. B. Signal output from all transmitters and controllers shall be current regulated and shall not be affected by changes in load resistance within the unit's rating. C. All cable shields shall be grounded at one end only, at the control panel,with terminals bonded to the panel ground bus. D. Analog signal isolation and/or conversion shall be provided where necessary to interface with instrumentation, equipment controls, panels, and appurtenances. E. Non-standard transmission systems such as pulse duration, pulse rate, and voltage regulated shall not be permitted except where specifically noted in the Contract Documents. Where transmitters with nonstandard outputs do occur,their outputs hall be converted to an isolated, linear,4-20 milliampere signal. F. The Contractor shall provide 24 V power supplies for analog signals and instruments where applicable and as required inside panels, controls, etc. Signal Coordination Requirements 40 61 23 - 1 G. Where two-wire instruments transmit directly to the Control and Information System,the instrumentation subcontractor shall provide power supplies at the PLC-equipped control panels for those instruments. H. Where four-wire instruments with on-board loop power supplies transmit directly to the Control and Information System,the instrumentation subcontractor shall provide necessary signal isolators or shall otherwise isolate the input from the Control and Information System loop power supply. Similar provisions shall be made when a third element such as a recorder, indicator, or single loop controller with integral loop power supply is included in the loop. 1.03 DISCRETE INPUTS A. All discrete inputs to equipment and Control and Information System PLCs,from field devices, starters, panels, etc., shall be unpowered (dry) contacts in the field device or equipment, powered from the PLCs, unless specified otherwise. B. Sensing power (wetting voltage) supplied by the PLC shall be 24 VDC. 1.04 DISCRETE OUTPUTS A. All discrete outputs from local control panels and Control and Information System PLCs to field devices, starters, panels, etc., shall be 24 VDC powered (sourced)from PLC's dry contact relay outputs. B. PLC powered discrete outputs shall energize 24 VDC pilot relay coils in the field devices, starters, panels, etc. which in turn open or close contacts in the associated control circuit.The 24 VDC relay coil, contacts, and associated control circuitry shall be furnished integral with the field device, starter, panel, etc. by the supplier and contractor furnishing the field device, starter, or panel. C. Where required or specified herein, discrete outputs from equipment and Control and Information System PLC's to field devices, starters, panels, motor operated valves, etc., shall be dry contact or relay outputs. D. Outputs to solenoid valves shall be 120 VAC, powered from the PLC or control panel unless specified or shown otherwise. 1.05 OTHER DISCRETE SIGNALS A. Discrete signals between starters, panels, etc. where no 24 VDC power supply is available may be 120 VAC, as long as such contacts are clearly identified in the starter, panel, etc. as being powered from a different power supply than other starter/panel components. B. Where applicable, warning signs shall be affixed inside the starter, panel, etc. stating that the panel is energized from multiple sources. Signal Coordination Requirements 40 61 23 -2 C. Output contacts in the starter, panel, etc.,that are powered from other locations shall be provided with special tags and/or color-coding. Disconnecting terminal strips shall be provided for such contacts. D. The above requirements shall apply to all starters and panels, regardless of supplier. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Signal Coordination Requirements 40 61 23 -3 SECTION 40 6124 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. It is the intent of these Specifications and Drawings to secure high quality in materials, equipment and workmanship in order to facilitate operations and maintenance of the facility. The Contractor shall provide equipment and services to meet this intent. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. All Work shall be installed in accordance with the National Electric Code, National Electric Safety Code, OSHA, State/Commonwealth, local and other applicable codes. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE- GENERAL A. All equipment and materials shall be new and the products of reputable recognized suppliers having adequate experience in the manufacture of these particular items. B. For uniformity, only one manufacturer and model will be accepted for each type of product. Where differing models are required, equipment from a single manufacturer shall be provided. C. Equipment shall be designed for the service intended and shall be of rugged construction, of ample strength for stresses that may occur during fabrication,transportation, and erection as well as during continuous or intermittent operation.They shall be adequately stayed, braced and anchored and shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Appearance and safety, as well as utility, shall be given consideration in the design of details. D. All components and devices installed shall be standard items of industrial grade, unless otherwise noted, which shall be of sturdy and durable construction and be suitable for long, trouble-free service. E. Electronic components shall be de-rated to assure dependability and long-term stability. F. Printed circuit boards in field mounted equipment shall be suitable for the specified environmental conditions. G. Alignment and adjustments shall be non-critical, stable with temperature changes or aging and accomplished with premium grade potentiometers. H. Components of specially selected values shall not be inserted into standard electronic assemblies in order to meet the performance requirements of this specification. Quality Assurance 40 61 24- 1 1.04 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT A. Optional or substituted equipment or both requiring changes in details or dimensions required to maintain structural, mechanical, electrical, control, operating, maintenance or design features incorporated in these Specifications and Drawings shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. In the event that the changes are necessary, calculations and drawings showing the proposed revisions shall be submitted for approval.The Contractor shall coordinate changes with other affected trades and contracts and pay additional charges incurred. 1.05 GUARANTEE A. The instrumentation subcontractor through the Contractor shall install, maintain and guarantee the Instrumentation, Control and Information System as specified under the General Conditions and Division 01 of the Specifications. Maintenance personnel provided by the instrumentation subcontractor shall instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation, adjustment, calibration and repair of the equipment being serviced. Preventive and corrective activities shall be documented with service reports, which shall identify the equipment being serviced, state the condition of the equipment, describe Work performed and list materials used. A copy of service reports shall be delivered to the Owner on the day the Work is performed. B. The instrumentation subcontractor shall provide the services of factory-trained service technician(s) at least twice during the guarantee period,for the purpose of performing preventive hardware maintenance. C. Corrective hardware and software maintenance during the guarantee period shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 and, in addition, shall meet the following requirements: 1. Corrective hardware maintenance shall be performed by factory-trained service technician(s) specifically trained to service the digital equipment provided.Technicians possessing suitable training and experience shall be provided to perform corrective maintenance on other equipment.The hardware service technician(s) shall be available on-site within 24 working hours after notification by the Owner. 2. Corrective software maintenance shall be performed for software provided by the instrumentation subcontractor and incorporated into the system prior to the completion of system commissioning. Software service programmer(s) shall be available for consultation within four business hours and, if required, on-site within 16 business hours after notification by the Owner. Corrective software maintenance shall include the supply, installation and startup of application software upgrades released during the guarantee period. 3. Corrective hardware and software maintenance performed during the guarantee period shall be performed at no cost to the Owner. 4. As used herein,the term "working hours" shall be defined as those of the treatment facility(seven days per week, 24 hours per day).The term "business hours" shall be Quality Assurance 40 61 24-2 defined as the hours between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., local time, Monday through Friday; excluding holidays. 5. The guarantee period shall commence upon final acceptance of the completed treatment facility in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. D. The instrumentation subcontractor shall submit to the Owner a proposed maintenance agreement incorporating the following features: 1. Extension of preventive hardware maintenance services as described above for a period of up to five years from the expiration of the warranty period. 2. Provisions for corrective hardware or software maintenance Work on a will-call basis for a period of up to five years from the expiration of the warranty period. Corrective maintenance Work shall be performed by properly trained personnel as described above. E. The proposed agreement shall include provisions for payment based upon an annual fee for preventive maintenance and cost plus expenses for corrective maintenance Work.The portion dealing with corrective maintenance shall be written to include corrective maintenance caused by actions of the Owner during the warranty period and shall contain clauses for re-negotiation of contract prices based upon changes in recognized economic indicators published by the United States Department of Commerce. 1.06 SHIPPING HANDLING AND STORAGE A. In addition to shipping, handling and storage requirements specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, air conditioning/heating shall be provided for storage of field instrumentation, panels, digital equipment and ancillary devices to maintain temperatures between 20 and 25 degrees C and relative humidity 40 to 60 percent without condensation. The air shall be filtered and free of corrosive contaminants and moisture. 1.07 FABRICATION A. Fabrication of equipment shall conform to the codes and standards outlined in this Section, and other portions of the Contract Documents. B. The Engineer may inspect the fabricated equipment at the factory before shipment to job site. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with sufficient prior notice so that an inspection can be arranged at the factory. Inspection of the equipment at the factory by the Engineer will be made after the manufacturer has performed satisfactory checks, adjustments, tests and operations. C. Equipment approval at the factory only allows the equipment to be shipped to the project site. The Contractor shall provide for the proper storage, installation and satisfactory start-up and operation of the equipment to the satisfaction of the equipment manufacturer,the instrumentation subcontractor, and the Engineer. Quality Assurance 40 61 24-3 PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Instrumentation and control system installation Work, whether new construction or modifications to existing equipment/panels/structures, shall conform to the codes and standards outlined in this Section, and other portions of the Contract Documents. B. The instrumentation subcontractor shall assign a competent representative who shall provide full time coordination and supervision of on-site instrumentation and control system construction Work from commencement of construction through completion and final acceptance. C. Labor shall be performed by qualified craftsmen in accordance with the standards of workmanship in their profession and shall have had a minimum of three years of documented experience on similar projects. D. Equipment and materials shall fit properly in their installations. Work required to correct improperly fit installations shall be performed at no additional expense to the Owner. E. Work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Hardware and instrumentation shall be installed in accordance with requirements specified herein, in accordance with industry best practices, in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations, and in a manner suitable for ease of operation, inspection, and maintenance.Wiring shall be neatly bundled, run in wireway, and terminated. Spare wiring shall be neatly coiled and clearly labeled at both ends for future use by the Owner. Work not meeting these requirements shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner. F. Sufficient common-mode and differential-mode noise rejection shall be provided to ensure proper operation of the plant process control system. General practices shall include: 1. Maintaining crossings between noisy wires and signal wires at right angles. 2. Maintaining separation between noisy wires and signal wires as wide as practical. 3. Grounding all signals, shields and power supplies at the process control unit or local control panel. 4. Providing passive filters on signals with time constant compatible with scan intervals and overvoltage protection. 5. Eliminating cable splices. Splices in instrumentation and control system signal, network, and instrument manufacturer furnished cables shall be approved in advance by the Engineer. 6. Providing a floating output for transmitters that have their own power sources. Quality Assurance 40 61 24-4 G. DC and AC power grounding shall be performed in accordance with the digital hardware manufacturer's recommendations as well as all applicable code requirements. H. The case of each field instrument and control panel shall be grounded in compliance with the National Electric Code. I. Power wires shall be separated from parallel-running signal wires by the following minimum spacing: 1. 120 VAC: 12 in 2. 240 VAC: 18 in 3. 480 VAC: 18 in 4. 2000 VAC and above: 24 in J. The Contractor shall provide all required cutting, drilling, inserts, supports, bolts, and anchors, and shall securely attach all equipment and materials to their supports. Embedded supports for equipment furnished under this Division shall be provided and installed as shown specified herein and shown on the Drawings. K. Following acceptance of the factory tests by the Engineer, and in accordance with the construction schedule,the Contractor shall commence installation of the digital control system hardware. Digital system equipment items shall not be installed, however, until all architectural, mechanical, HVAC and electrical Work has been completed in the equipment rooms, MCCs, control rooms and all structural and mechanical Work has been completed within 50 feet of equipment locations. L. Upon completion of the above construction Work, the Contractor shall request an inspection of the above-named areas. The Engineer will issue a written approval to proceed with delivery and installation only after being satisfied that all Work described above has been properly performed. Digital equipment shall remain at the factory site or storage prior to approval for delivery to the project site. Partial shipments may be required to meet construction schedule requirements. END OF SECTION Quality Assurance 40 61 24-5 SECTION 40 6126 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TRAINING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. To familiarize the Owner's personnel with the process control system and field instrumentation, training shall be provided as detailed hereunder. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113— Process Control System General Provisions 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. A minimum of 60 days prior to beginning training, submit a detailed training plan describing the following: 1. A listing of all courses to be conducted. 2. Course content. 3. Applicability of each course to management, operations, maintenance, laboratory, etc., personnel. 4. Course schedules. 5. Qualifications and experience of individual(s) providing training. B. A minimum of 14 days prior to beginning each training course, submit documentation for use by the Owner's personnel during training.The training documentation shall be specific to the particular course, and shall include the following: 1. A listing of all subjects to be covered. 2. Course schedule. 3. Documentation/lesson plans covering all subjects to be covered during the course instruction. Information shall be in a "how to"format, with sufficient background documentation and references to manufacturer literature to provide a thorough and clear understanding of the materials to be covered. Process Control System Training 40 61 26 - 1 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All costs of providing the training courses shall be borne by the Contractor. B. As used herein,the term "day" shall mean an eight-hour day, and the term "week" shall mean a five-day, 40-hour week. C. Training courses, especially those for operator training, may be required to be scheduled during non-standard business hours (i.e., not between the hours of 8:00 am and 5:00 pm)to accommodate the working schedule of the Owner's personnel. No additional compensation will be awarded to the Contractor for training at non-standard hours. D. All training courses shall complement the experience and skill levels of the Owner's personnel. E. Training courses shall be structured in order of increasing capability or security levels.The purpose of this requirement is to allow personnel with lesser training requirements or security password levels to drop out of the training at certain times while the training continues for personnel with greater requirements or higher security levels. F. All training courses shall include lecture as well as "hands on" experience for each of the attending personnel.The Contractor shall provide sufficient equipment for this to be accomplished. For example,training in which the instructor uses the computer and the Owner's personnel passively observe as the instructor demonstrates system functions shall not be acceptable. G. Unless otherwise specified, all training courses shall be conducted in the Owner's facilities. H. All training shall be completed prior to system acceptance. I. Standard manufacturer training courses are acceptable pending approval by the Engineer and Owner. 1.05 SYSTEM SUPERVISOR/ENGINEER TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer standard training in the use and configuration of the specified operator workstation (HMI or SCADA) software. B. System supervisor/engineer training shall be performed a minimum of 30 days prior to system startup. C. Training shall be provided in the following subjects: 1. System overview and capabilities. 2. Database configuration. Process Control System Training 40 61 26 -2 3. Graphic display configuration, including linking of data to displays. 4. Historical data configuration (collection, manipulation, and display). 5. Real-time and historical trending. 6. Report configuration, generation, printing, and customization. 7. Alarm configuration and management. 8. System security. 9. 1/0 driver use and configuration. 10. System backup and recovery. 11. DDE linking,where applicable. 12. System command language. 13. Troubleshooting. 14. System optimization. 15. System startup and shutdown procedures. 16. LAN and WAN communications, as appropriate. D. The course shall be structured as follows: 1. Fundamentals—One four-day course(minimum) shall be provided for up to eight persons which shall serve as a digital control system familiarization course for project management personnel, engineers, and key operating/maintenance personnel.This course shall be a prerequisite for the advanced course described below in Item 2. 2. Advanced—One four-day(minimum) digital system configuration and operating course shall be provided for up to four persons.The level of training shall be sufficient to familiarize the Owner's personnel with the configuration and application of all system programs. All essential system operating procedures shall be described as required to enable the Owner's personnel to operate the system via the various workstations and local control panels. 3. Historical—One two-day course to instruct a minimum of four persons in the use and configuration of the historical data archival system.Training shall include creation, viewing, and printing of trends, charts, and reports.Training shall include all database Process Control System Training 40 61 26 -3 maintenance and archival functions necessary to maintain the facility's data on both short and long term basis, including periodic archival to optical media. 1.06 OPERATOR TRAINING A. Two two-week courses comprised of daily half-day(four-hour) sessions for up to ten persons each shall be conducted to provide instruction in the use of the Control and Information System to monitor and control the facility. B. Operator training shall include familiarization training covering the Control and Information System. Operators shall be instructed in the names, locations,functions, and basic operation of all items of digital equipment and associated software. C. Operator training shall cover process and equipment operation both individually and collectively as an operating system. Normal as well as abnormal operating conditions shall be covered, including the response to failure occurrences and system alarms. All operator/system interactions shall be described. D. Operators shall be trained to instruct other operators and shall be provided with all course materials. 1.07 MAINTENANCE TRAINING A. A three-day course shall be conducted for at least six persons prior to the start-up of digital equipment at the Owner's plant. Instruction shall be provided in the following: 1. Operating all digital equipment, including system start-up and shutdown procedures. 2. The use of hardware diagnostic routines,test equipment and test procedures as required to enable the Owner's personnel to detect and isolate system faults to the circuit board or module level and to implement repairs by replacing failed circuit boards or modules. 3. Calibration and routine maintenance procedures for all analog and digital equipment. B. Step by step written procedures shall be provided for all preventive maintenance tasks and for identifying hardware faults to the circuit board or module level for all items of digital equipment. C. All digital equipment preventive and corrective maintenance training activities shall be limited to the use of commercially available off-the-shelf test equipment and to the use of diagnostic routines and hardware items which are the same as those to be provided as part of the system. Process Control System Training 40 61 26 -4 1.08 INSTRUMENT TRAINING A. A three-day course shall be provided at the Owner's facilities no more than three months prior to system start-up to instruct a minimum of five persons each in the calibration and preventive maintenance of the field instruments provided under this Contract. 1.09 PLC TRAINING A. One minimum three-day manufacturer standard training course shall be provided in the programming and use of PLC's to implement monitoring and control functions such as those provided for this project.Training shall cover all aspects of the PLC hardware and software, including specified programming software.This training shall be provided by the PLC manufacturer or, as directed by the manufacturer, by the authorized distributor engaged by the manufacturer to perform this training. B. One three-day course of specific training shall be provided by the instrumentation subcontractor in the use and modification of all control strategies provided under this Division. 1.10 GENERAL REFRESHER TRAINING A. A one-week general refresher training course shall be provided for up to ten persons 3-6 months after final system acceptance. Instruction shall be given in all aspects of the complete instrumentation and control system. Instructor(s) shall be capable of answering questions related to all aspects and details of the complete system. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Process Control System Training 40 61 26 -5 SECTION 40 6193 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INPUT/OUTPUT LIST PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish,test, install and place in satisfactory operation all control system inputs and outputs as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6196— Process Control Descriptions PART 2—CONTROL SYSTEM INPUT/OUTPUT SCHEDULE See 1/0 list on drawings. 1. NOTES: Input/Output types are as follows: a. DI— Discrete Input b. DO— Discrete Output C. Al—Analog Input d. AO—Analog Output e. RS485—Serial Communications Link PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Process Control System Input/Output List 40 61 93 - 1 SECTION 40 6196 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS PART 1—GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish,test, install and place in satisfactory operation all equipment as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings.The contractor shall be responsible for furnishing complete functioning systems as described herein. B. Together with the control system input/output schedule,the equipment specifications (including functional descriptions for local equipment control panels), and the Drawings,the functional control descriptions describe the required operation, monitoring, and control of the facilities included in this Contract. C. The functional descriptions contain requirements for furnishing and installing labor and materials that may not appear elsewhere in the contract documents. D. All equipment and services required in equipment local control panels provided to implement the monitoring and control functions described herein or in the process input/output schedules shall be provided by the Contractor through individual equipment suppliers. E. Unless specifically stated otherwise, all interconnected wiring between all instruments, panels, controls, and other devices listed in the functional descriptions as required to provide all functions specified herein shall be furnished by the electrical subcontractor under Division 26. The electrical subcontractor shall provide all cable and conduit required to carry all signals listed in the process input/output schedules. Special cables that are required for interconnection between sensors or probes and transmitters or signal conditioners shall be furnished with the instrumentation devices by the equipment supplier. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 0114 00— Maintenance of Utility Operations during Construction B. Section 40 6190—Schedules and Control Descriptions, General C. Section 40 61 91— Process Control System Instrument List Process Control Descriptions 40 61 96 - 1 PART 2— FUNCTIONAL CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS, GENERAL 2.1 DEFINITIONS A. RUNNING status signals shall be from auxiliary contacts provided with the motor control equipment (i.e., starter, VFD, etc.). B. AUTO status signals shall be defined as HAND-OFF-AUTO (HOA) switch in the AUTO position or process control system in AUTO (versus MANUAL). C. REMOTE status signal shall be defined as LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE (LOR) switch in the REMOTE position. D. FAULT status signals shall be defined as motor overload and/or any other shut down mode such as overtorque, overtemperature, low oil pressure, high vibration, etc. E. READY status signal shall be defined as all conditions, including equipment control power, satisfied to permit remote control of the equipment. F. Plant PLC is either the existing or new PLC,furnished and programmed by the process control system integrator and located inside the SCADA room in the admin building. G. Vendor PLC is the local PLC furnished and programmed by the equipment manufacturer and located inside the Vendor Control Panel (VCP)either at the process equipment or inside the local control room or electrical room. H. SCADA HMI is the Human Machine Interface graphic screen available at the admin building or local control rooms as shown in the drawings. I. OIT screen is the Operator Interface Terminal graphic screen at the local vendor furnished PLC panel, or Remote Input-Output(RIO) panels as shown on the drawings. J. Hardwired Interlock is a safety or protective feature that will interrupt operation of the equipment in all operating modes with no required operator intervention. K. Software interlock is a safety or protective feature that will interrupt operation of the equipment when the PLC has control (when the equipment LOR switch is placed in Remote position). L. Permissive is a particular type of interlock used to prevent actions taking place until pre-defined criteria have been satisfied,for example prevents a pump starting until the discharge valve is open. M. Watchdog timer is a timer imposed to test components such as digital 1/0 point to verify the health of the 1/0 channel in the module. Process Control Descriptions 40 61 96 -2 N. Hardwired control is the control circuitry that does not utilize software to initiate functionality. 2.2 CONVENTIONS A. Operator workstation graphic display symbols and indicator lights on all MCC's, control panels, starter enclosures, etc. shall conform to the following color convention: 1. Running/On/Open: Red 2. Auto/Ready: White 3. Stopped/Off/Closed: Green 4. Fault/Alarm: Amber 5. Generic Status: Blue or White 2.3 GENERAL PROCESS CONTROL REQUIREMENTS A. Where setpoints, operating limits, and other control settings are provided by the functional descriptions,these settings shall be initial settings only and shall be used for assistance in the initial startup of the plant. All such settings shall be fully adjustable and, based on actual operating conditions,the instrumentation subcontractor shall make all necessary adjustments to provide smooth, stable operation at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Provision shall be made in PLC logic to suppress nuisance alarms and control actions by the following means: 1. For alarms and control actions derived from analog input signals, use adjustable time delays and deadbands. 2. For alarms and control actions derived from discrete input signals, use adjustable time delays. 3. Initial settings for time delays shall be 10 seconds (range 0-120 seconds). Initial settings for deadbands shall be 5%of span (range 0-100%). 4. Equipment that is started or stopped manually by the operator shall start or stop immediately, with no time delay. C. All setpoint control shall be by PID control algorithms. Where only proportional control is specified,tuning constants shall be used to reduce the Integral and Derivative functions to zero. All setpoints, sequence times, sequence orders, dead bands, PID tuning parameters, PLC delay timers, variable speed operating range limits, and similar control constants shall be accessible and alterable from the operator workstations. Process Control Descriptions 40 61 96 -3 D. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment shall automatically restart after a power failure utilizing adjustable start delay timers in PLC control logic. Unless otherwise specified, all PLC control strategies shall be based upon automatic restart after a power failure and shall return to a normal control mode upon restoration of power. E. The PLC shall be capable of receiving initial run-time values for existing and proposed equipment. Initial run-time shall not automatically be assumed to be zero. F. A control discrepancy alarm shall be generated through the PLC for any drive, motor, etc.for which a command has been issued, but for which the PLC is not receiving a confirming status signal (e.g., start command with no run feedback).The failure shall be logged. G. An instrument failure alarm shall be generated for any instrument which is generating a signal that is less than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA. H. Unless otherwise specified in an individual control description, an instrument failure or control discrepancy alarm shall cause the control strategy to maintain last values and to generate an alarm. Manual initiation of the automatic control strategy shall be required. I. A control program that controls multiple pieces of equipment shall not be prevented from running because not all of the equipment is in AUTO. If equipment within an equipment chain is required to be running for program operation and it is running in HAND or MANUAL,then the program shall run and control the other equipment that is in AUTO. J. All PLC wait states (internal time delays, etc.) after an operator action shall be displayed on the operator workstation. PART 3— FUNCTIONAL CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS 3.1 LIFT STATION PLC BASED(COUNTRY CLUB) A. Process Overview 1. A total of three (3) lift pumps,two duty and one standby, 2. The drywell pumps operate based on an analog signal in wet well routed to pump control system to start and stop pumps to maintain level in wet well. 3. An existing generator provides emergency power. 4. An ultrasonic flow meter measures the discharge flow from lift station. Process Control Descriptions 40 61 96 -4 B. Control Equipment 1. PLC based control panel with SCADA radio unit. 2. Level transducer in wetwell. C. Control Operations— Local Controls 1. Lift pumps: a. Each pump will have a reduced voltage soft starter installed in the motor control center. b. Each pump is controlled by an HOA switch in the MCC. When the HOA switch is placed in Hand,the pump will run continuously unless a low level is reached or failure occurs. When the HOA switch is in Auto,the pump shall be controlled by the PLC and shut off when level limits dictate or a failure occurs. When HOA is in Off or Hand position,the pump shall be removed from pumping sequence. HOA position shall be routed to PLC. 2. Operator interface (OIT) shall be located on PLC panel. At minimum OIT shall provide operator access to pump parameters, alarms, status, level set points, wet well level, discharge flow, motor amperes, and pump rotation sequence. Owner shall provide sample OIT screens of similar lift stations for coordination during construction. 3. Pumps shall Start and Stop based on wet well level. Final levels shall be determined in field or as recommended by City or Engineer. LEVEL FUNCTION (Preliminary) RISING LEVEL FALLING LEVEL El. xx.xx High Level Alarm (Red) El. xx.xx High Level Alarm Off(Reset) El. xx.xx Start 2nd Lag Pump El. xx.xx Start 1st Lag Pump El. xx.xx Start Lead Pump El. xx.xx All Pumps Off 4. Lead pump to always start first at level set on operator interface. As level continues to rise, Lag pump 1 shall start. As level continues to rise,the Lag pump 2 shall start. All Process Control Descriptions 40 61 96 -5 pumps shall latch in and operate until shut off level is reached. Pumps shall alternate Lead and Lag after each pump down cycle. 5. Elapsed time meters shall be located in the Motor Control Center and shall be interlocked with motor starter to indicate accumulated run time. A red pilot light shall be located in the MCC to indicate motor run status. 6. Each pump motor shall have an adjustable time delay, 1-10 seconds between the automatic start signal and actual motor starting. Time shall be adjustable from Operator Interface. 7. Panel PLC shall communicate to City's master site via Cradle Point radio (provided by City) to allow sharing of pump status and alarm information. 8. Pilot lights shall indicate Low, Lead, Lag, and High level. 9. Hardwired Interlocks: a. Minicas relay shall monitor motor winding high temperature and moisture leak and shall be hardwired to the starter to shut off the pump in both local and remote modes. Alarms shall be routed to PLC. 10. System status and alarms shall be monitored as per 1/0 list on drawings. 11. A wet well and dry well high level alarm shall be routed to the PLC from float switch. 3.2 LIFT STATION RELAY FLOAT BASED (COOPERS ALLEY, COLE PARK) A. Process Overview 1. A total of two (2) 1Ift pumps, one duty and one standby, 2. The submersible pumps operate based on float switches in wet well routed to pump control system to start and stop pumps to maintain level in wet well. B. Control Equipment 1. Relay logic based control panel with a separate SCADA panel with radio unit: 2. Float switches in wetwell. C. Control Operations— Local Controls 1. Lift pumps: Process Control Descriptions 40 61 96 -6 a. Each pump will have a full voltage starter installed in the pump control panel. Float switches in wet well shall send signals to the alternator which shall start and stop the Lead and Lag pump. The alternator shall allow for 1 or 2 pump alternation via toggle switch. b. Each pump is controlled by an HOA switch in the pump control panel. When the HOA switch is placed in Hand,the pump will run continuously unless a low level is reached or failure occurs. When the HOA switch is in Auto,the pump shall be controlled by the alternator and shut off when level limits dictate or a failure occurs. HOA position shall be routed to the SCADA panel. 2. Pumps shall Start and Stop based on wet well level. Final levels shall be determined in field or as recommended by City. LEVEL FUNCTION (Preliminary) RISING LEVEL FALLING LEVEL El. xx.xx High Level Alarm (Red) El. xx.xx High Level Alarm Off(Reset) El. xx.xx Start Lag Pump El. xx.xx Start Lead Pump F- El. xx.xx All Pumps Off 3. Lead pump to always start first at level set on operator interface. As level continues to rise, Lag pump 1 shall start. All pumps shall latch in and operate until shut off level is reached. Pumps shall alternate Lead and Lag after each pump down cycle. 4. Elapsed time meters shall be located in the pump control panel and shall be interlocked with motor starter to indicate accumulated run time. A red pilot light shall be located in the panel to indicate motor run status. 5. SCADA Panel shall communicate to City's master site via Cradle Point radio (provided by City)to allow sharing of pump status and alarm information. 6. Pilot lights shall indicate Low, Lead, Lag, and High level. 7. Hardwired Interlocks: a. Minicas relay shall monitor motor winding high temperature and moisture leak and shall be hardwired to the starter to shut off the pump in both local and remote modes. Alarms shall be routed to SCADA panel. Process Control Descriptions 40 61 96 -7 8. System status and alarms shall be monitored as per 1/0 list on drawings and routed to SCADA panel. 9. A wet well and dry well high level alarm shall be routed to the PLC from float switch. 10. A pilot light shall indicate Low, Lead, Lag 1, and High level. 3.3 LIFT STATION RELAY ANALOG BASED (CLARKWOOD SOUTH, HIGHWAY 9, LAWRENCE ST T- HEAD, PEOPLES ST T-HEAD,SUGAR TREE) A. Process Overview 1. A total of two (2) 1Ift pumps, one duty and one standby, 2. The submersible pumps operate based on level transducer in wet well routed to pump control system to start and stop pumps to maintain level in wet well. B. Control Equipment 1. Relay logic based control panel with a separate SCADA panel with radio unit: 2. Level transducer in wet well with current relays to control pumps. C. Control Operations— Local Controls 1. Lift pumps: a. Each pump will have a full voltage starter installed in the pump control panel. Level transducer in wet well shall send signal to the current relay and alternator which shall start and stop the Lead and Lag pump. The alternator shall allow for 1 or 2 pump alternation via toggle switch. b. Each pump is controlled by an HOA switch in the pump control panel. When the HOA switch is placed in Hand,the pump will run continuously unless a low level is reached or failure occurs. When the HOA switch is in Auto,the pump shall be controlled by the alternator and shut off when level limits dictate or a failure occurs. HOA position shall be routed to the SCADA panel. 2. Pumps shall Start and Stop based on wet well level. Final levels shall be determined in field or as recommended by City. Process Control Descriptions 40 61 96 -8 LEVEL FUNCTION (Preliminary) RISING LEVEL FALLING LEVEL El. xx.xx High Level Alarm (Red) El. xx.xx High Level Alarm Off(Reset) El. xx.xx Start Lag Pump El. xx.xx Start Lead Pump F_ El. xx.xx All Pumps Off 3. Level transducer to feed level signal to current relays with set-point signals routed to duplex alternator. Lead pump to always start first at level set on operator interface. As level continues to rise, Lag pump shall start. All pumps shall latch in and operate until shut off level is reached. Pumps shall alternate Lead and Lag after each pump down cycle. 4. Elapsed time meters shall be located in the pump control panel and shall be interlocked with motor starter to indicate accumulated run time. A red pilot light shall be located in the panel to indicate motor run status. 5. SCADA Panel shall communicate to City's master site via Cradle Point radio (provided by City)to allow sharing of pump status and alarm information. 6. Pilot lights shall indicate Low, Lead, Lag, and High level. 7. Hardwired Interlocks: a. Minicas relay shall monitor motor winding high temperature and moisture leak and shall be hardwired to the starter to shut off the pump in both local and remote modes. Alarms shall be routed to SCADA panel. 8. System status and alarms shall be monitored as per 1/0 list on drawings and routed to SCADA panel. 9. A wet well high level alarm shall be routed to the PLC from float switch. 3.4 LIFT STATION RELAY ANALOG BASED (MILITARY&JESTER) A. Process Overview 1. A total of three (3) lift pumps,two duty and one standby, 2. The submersible pumps operate based on level transducer in wet well routed to pump control system to start and stop pumps to maintain level in wet well. Process Control Descriptions 40 61 96 -9 B. Control Equipment 1. Relay logic based control panel with a separate SCADA panel with radio unit: 2. Level transducer in wetwell with current relays to control pumps. C. Control Operations— Local Controls 1. Lift pumps: a. Each pump will have a full voltage starter installed in the pump control panel. Level transducer shall send signals to the current relays and alternator which shall start and stop the Lead and Lag pump. The alternator shall allow for 1 or 2 or 3 pump alternation via toggle switch. b. Each pump is controlled by an HOA switch in the pump control panel. When the HOA switch is placed in Hand,the pump will run continuously unless a low level is reached or failure occurs. When the HOA switch is in Auto,the pump shall be controlled by the alternator and shut off when level limits dictate or a failure occurs. HOA position shall be routed to the SCADA panel. 2. Pumps shall Start and Stop based on wet well level. Final levels shall be determined in field or as recommended by City. LEVEL FUNCTION (Preliminary) RISING LEVEL FALLING LEVEL El. xx.xx High Level Alarm (Red) El. xx.xx High Level Alarm Off(Reset) El. xx.xx Start Lag 2 Pump El. xx.xx Start Lag 1 Pump El. xx.xx Start Lead Pump El. xx.xx All Pumps Off 3. Level transducer to feed level signal to current relays with set-point signals routed to triplex alternator. Lead pump to always start first at level set on operator interface. As level continues to rise, Lag pump 1 shall start. As level continues to rise Lag pump 2 shall start. All pumps shall latch in and operate until shut off level is reached. Pumps shall alternate Lead and Lag after each pump down cycle. Process Control Descriptions 40 61 96- 10 4. Elapsed time meters shall be located in the pump control panel and shall be interlocked with motor starter to indicate accumulated run time. A red pilot light shall be located in the panel to indicate motor run status. 5. SCADA Panel shall communicate to City's master site via Cradle Point radio (provided by City)to allow sharing of pump status and alarm information. 6. Pilot lights shall indicate Low, Lead, Lag 1, Lag 2, and High level. 7. Hardwired Interlocks: a. Minicas relay shall monitor motor winding high temperature and moisture leak and shall be hardwired to the starter to shut off the pump in both local and remote modes. Alarms shall be routed to SCADA panel. 8. System status and alarms shall be monitored as per 1/0 list on drawings and routed to SCADA panel. 9. A wet well high level alarm shall be routed to the PLC from float switch. 3.5 LIFT STATION RELAY ANALOG BASED (LAGUNA SHORES) A. Process Overview 1. A total of four (4) lift pumps,three duty and one standby, 2. The submersible pumps operate based on level transducer in wet well routed to pump control system to start and stop pumps to maintain level in wet well. B. Control Equipment 1. Relay logic based control panel with a separate SCADA panel with radio unit: 2. Level transducer in wetwell with current relays to control pumps. C. Control Operations— Local Controls 1. Lift pumps: a. Each pump will have a full voltage starter installed in the pump control panel. Level transducer shall send signals to the current relays and alternator which shall start and stop the Lead and Lag pump. The alternator shall allow for 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 pump alternation via toggle switch. b. Each pump is controlled by an HOA switch in the pump control panel. When the HOA switch is placed in Hand,the pump will run continuously unless a low level is Process Control Descriptions 40 61 96- 11 reached or failure occurs. When the HOA switch is in Auto,the pump shall be controlled by the alternator and shut off when level limits dictate or a failure occurs. HOA position shall be routed to the SCADA panel. 2. Pumps shall Start and Stop based on wet well level. Final levels shall be determined in field or as recommended by City. LEVEL FUNCTION (Preliminary) RISING LEVEL FALLING LEVEL El. xx.xx High Level Alarm (Red) El. xx.xx High Level Alarm Off(Reset) El. xx.xx Start Lag 3 Pump El. xx.xx Start Lag 2 Pump El. xx.xx Start Lag 1 Pump El. xx.xx Start Lead Pump El. xx.xx All Pumps Off 3. Level transducer to feed level signal to current relays with set-point signals routed to quadiplex alternator. Lead pump to always start first at level set on operator interface. As level continues to rise, Lag pump 1 shall start. As level continues to rise Lag pump 2 shall start. All pumps shall latch in and operate until shut off level is reached. Pumps shall alternate Lead and Lag after each pump down cycle. 4. Elapsed time meters shall be located in the pump control panel and shall be interlocked with motor starter to indicate accumulated run time. A red pilot light shall be located in the panel to indicate motor run status. 5. SCADA Panel shall communicate to City's master site via Cradle Point radio (provided by City)to allow sharing of pump status and alarm information. 6. Pilot lights shall indicate Low, Lead, Lag 1, Lag 2, Lag 3, and High level. 7. Hardwired Interlocks: a. Minicas relay shall monitor motor winding high temperature and moisture leak and shall be hardwired to the starter to shut off the pump in both local and remote modes. Alarms shall be routed to SCADA panel. Process Control Descriptions 40 61 96- 12 8. System status and alarms shall be monitored as per 1/0 list on drawings and routed to SCADA panel. 9. A wet well high level alarm shall be routed to the PLC from float switch. END OF SECTION Process Control Descriptions 40 61 96- 13 SECTION 40 62 63 OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINALS (OIT) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish,test, install and place in satisfactory operation all operator interface units, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 63 43— Programmable Logic Controllers PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 OPERATOR INTERFACE UNIT— LARGE A. An Operator Interface Unit (OIU) shall be provided to view and change PLC monitoring and control parameters and to display alarm messages using a graphical user interface.The OIL) shall provide the following features as a minimum: 1. Minimum of 10.4 inch diagonal display 2. 18-bit color TFT LCD 800 x 600 SVGA display 3. Backlit analog resistive touch screen interface w/ 1 million press actuation rating 4. Backlight w/min. 50,000 hour life to half brightness 5. Minimum of 512 MB internal storage 6. Minimum of 512 MB RAM application memory 7. Minimum of 80 MB nonvolatile user memory 8. Windows CE Operating System 9. Battery-backed real-time clock 10. Secure Digital (SD) card slot w/ min. 2 GB card Operator Interface Terminals (OIT) 40 62 63 - 1 11. One USB 2.0 high-speed Type A host port; one USB 1.0 high-speed Type B device port 12. One 10/10013ase-T Auto MDI/MDI-X Ethernet port 13. Windows-based configuration software complete with download cable 14. Operating Voltage: 120 VAC or 24 VDC(internal or via independent power supply) 15. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 12/4X to match the associated PLC cabinet rating 16. Environment: 0-55°C, 5-95% relative humidity, non-condensing B. The operator interface unit shall be Allen-Bradley PanelView Plus 7 Standard 1000, or equal. 2.02 OPERATOR INTERFACE UNIT—SMALL A. An Operator Interface Unit (OIU) shall be provided to view and change PLC monitoring and control parameters and to display alarm messages using a graphical user interface.The OIU shall provide the following features as a minimum. 1. Minimum of 6.5 inch diagonal display 2. 18-bit color TFT LCD 640 x 480 VGA display 3. Backlit analog resistive touch screen interface w/ 1 million press actuation rating 4. Backlight w/min. 50,000 hr life to half brightness 5. Minimum of 512 MB internal storage 6. Minimum of 512 MB RAM application memory 7. Minimum of 80 MB nonvolatile user memory 8. Windows CE Operating System 9. Battery-backed real-time clock 10. Secure Digital (SD) card slot w/ min. 2 GB card 11. One USB 2.0 high-speed Type A host port; one USB 1.0 high-speed Type B device port 12. One 10/10013ase-T Auto MDI/MDI-X Ethernet port 13. Windows-based configuration software complete with download cable 14. Operating Voltage: 120 VAC or 24 VDC(internal or via independent power supply) Operator Interface Terminals (OIT) 40 62 63 -2 15. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 12/4X to match the associated PLC cabinet rating 16. Environment: 0-55°C, 5-95% relative humidity, non-condensing B. The operator interface unit shall be Allen-Bradley PanelView Plus 7 Standard 700, or equal. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. The OIL) shall be configured to display all PLC 1/0, setpoints, and parameters. All equipment failures shall be alarmed. PLC 1/0 values and operator-entered setpoints shall be displayed with associated units and service descriptions. Menus shall be provided to navigate between screens of different equipment items. Displays shall be arranged in a hierarchical structure with displays for specific equipment items grouped together. Additional functionality shall be as specified elsewhere in this Division. B. All necessary configuration and programming software shall be provided on optical media and turned over to the Owner. C. Unless otherwise indicated, each OIL) shall be mounted between 48 and 60 inches above the floor or work platform. D. Refer to Section 40 6113—Process Control System General Provisions,for additional requirements. END OF SECTION Operator Interface Terminals (OIT) 40 62 63 -3 SECTION 40 63 43 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish,test, install and place in satisfactory operation all programmable logic controllers (PLC), with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 6123—Signal Coordination Requirements C. Section 40 62 63—Operator Interface Units D. Section 40 67 63— Uninterruptible Power Systems E. Section 40 67 00—Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 1.03 SPARE PARTS A. The following specific spare parts items shall be provided: 1. One of each type and size of module for PLC equipment furnished under this Contract. 2. One of each type and size of PLC and equipment power supply furnished under this Contract. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS-GENERAL A. The instrumentation subcontractor shall furnish programmable controllers (PLCs) as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. PLCs shall be provided complete with backplane, power supply, 1/0 cards, special function cards, instructions, memory, input/output capacity, and appurtenances to provide all features and functions as described herein. No substitutions will be permitted. B. All components of the PLC system shall be of the same manufacturer; who shall have fully tested units similar to those being furnished in an industrial environment with associated electrical Programmable Logic Controllers 40 63 43 - 1 noise.The PLC system shall have been tested to meet the requirements of NEMA Standard ICS 2-230 (Arc Test) and IEEE C37.90.1 (SWC).The processing unit shall perform the operations functionally described herein based on the program stored in memory and the status of the inputs and outputs. C. Programmable controllers shall be designed to operate in an industrial environment.The PLC shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0-60 deg C and a relative humidity of 5-95 percent, non-condensing.The PLC shall operate on supply voltages of 90-132 VAC at 47-63 Hz or 24 VDC if provided with a battery backup system. An integral fuse shall be provided on the power supply for short circuit protection and shall be front panel accessible. Integral overcurrent and undervoltage protection shall be provided on the power supply. D. Where applicable,the minimum PLC backplane size shall be 7 slots, not including power supply slots. E. System configuration shall be as shown on the Control System Architecture Drawing. PLC types shall be designated on the Control System Architecture Drawing and correspond to the specifications herein. Only a single type of processor shall be supplied for all PLCs of a designated type. Memory and processor shall be adequate for all control functions specified. PLCs shall be as manufactured by the following: 1. Allen-Bradley Control Logix With 1756-L Series Processor 2. Allen-Bradley Compact Logix With 5069-L Series Processor 3. See also Attached City IT PLC SCADA Standards 2.02 PROCESSORS A. The processor and its associated memory shall be enclosed in a modular enclosure. A multiple- position selector switch or equivalent shall be used to select processor operating mode. LED- type indicating lights shall be provided to indicate processor, memory, and battery status. Errors in memory shall be recognized and shall activate the memory error indicating lights.The PLC processor shall monitor the internal operation of the PLC for failure and provide an alarm output. Nonvolatile memory in the form of a manufacturer supplied industrial CompactFlash card or equivalent technology shall be required to maintain the entire current program and firmware of the controller in the event of power loss.The program shall be updated onto the flash memory each time a program change such as an online edit or tag value is changed. When nonvolatile memory(flash memory) is not available for certain controller models as offered by the PLC manufacturer, lithium batteries shall be used to maintain process RAM memory for at least one year in the event of power loss.The lithium battery unit shall be an externally mounted battery assembly with the highest available capacity.The PLC shall send an alarm to the plant control system if battery level is low. Programmable Logic Controllers 40 63 43 -2 B. The instruction set for the PLC shall conform to the requirements of IEC 61131-3. Each PLC shall have the capability to run all five of the standard IEC 61131-3 languages simultaneously.These five languages shall be: 1. Ladder Diagram 2. Structured Text 3. Instruction List 4. Function Block Diagram 5. Sequential Function Chart C. Additional co-processors or modules may be necessary and shall be furnished as required to meet the functions specified herein and in Section 40 6196— Process Control Descriptions. D. PLC processors shall be provided with substantial user program, data and logic memory to allow for future expansion of the overall system.The total memory used on each processor shall be less than 60%of available memory at project completion. 2.03 COMMUNICATIONS A. In addition to a communications port for the control system network, communication ports shall be provided for any other devices required (i.e., operator interface unit) plus an additional communication port for connection to a notebook computer. B. The PLC shall be able to support various types of fieldbus communication systems for data links to field instruments (where specified) in addition to connected equipment such as power monitors, motor protection monitors, etc. As a minimum, Profibus DP, Foundation Fieldbus, Modbus RTU Master and Slave,TCP/IP Ethernet shall be supported.The Contractor shall coordinate the efforts of the necessary parties (instrumentation subcontractor and equipment suppliers)to accomplish the required device and data table addressing between each PLC and the associated connected equipment. C. Additional communication modules or protocol gateways may be required to support specific communication protocols required under this Contract and shall be supplied at no extra cost to the Owner. 2.04 INPUT/OUTPUT SUBSYSTEMS A. Input/output hardware shall be plug-in modules in associated 1/0 backplane/chassis or DIN-rail mounting assemblies. Each unit shall handle the required number of process inputs and outputs plus a minimum of 10 percent active pre-wired spares for each 1/0 type furnished, plus a minimum of 20 percent spare 1/0 module space for the addition of future circuit cards or modules. Programmable Logic Controllers 40 63 43 -3 B. Discrete inputs shall be 24 VDC or 120 VAC signals (integral to the PLC)from dry field contacts. Discrete outputs shall be 24 VDC or 120 VAC outputs sourced from the PLC, or dry relay contacts (2A minimum) as required. Refer to Section 40 6123—Signal Coordination Requirements for further details of discrete signal type and voltage requirements.The PLC shall provide momentary and latched outputs as required to interface with motor controls and external devices. Interposing relays shall be provided where required to interface with field equipment. Interposing relays shall be as specified in Section 40 78 00—Panel Mounted Instruments. Electrical isolation shall be provided where required. Maximum density for discrete 1/0 modules shall be 32 per input module and 16 per output module. C. Analog input circuits shall be isolated, minimum 16-bit resolution type. Analog input hardware shall be provided as required for all types of analog inputs being transmitted to the PLC. In general, analog input modules shall be capable of receiving 4-20 mA signals. Where required, RTD input modules shall have a minimum resolution of 0.15IX and be capable of accepting signals from 100-ohm Platinum RTDs. Analog outputs shall be coordinated with the receivers but shall generally be isolated 24 VDC 4-20 mA outputs powered from the PLC. Each input/output circuit shall have optical isolation to protect the equipment against high voltage transients. Optical isolation shall be rated at not less than 1500 V RMS. Lightning/surge protection shall be provided as specified in Section 40 78 56— Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers, and Surge Suppressors. Maximum density for analog 1/0 modules shall be 8 per module. D. Input/output modules shall be configured for ease of wiring and maintenance.The modules shall be connected to wiring arms that can be disconnected to permit removal of a module without disturbing field wiring. Covers shall be provided to prevent operator personnel from inadvertently touching the terminals.The process interface modules shall be provided with screw-type terminal blocks with barriers between adjacent terminals for connection of field inputs.Terminals shall be suitable for accepting up to and including No. 14 AWG wire.All DC output circuits to the field shall include fuses, either integral or at the terminal strip. Output failure mode shall be selectable so that upon station or communication system failure all outputs shall be placed either in the non-conducting mode or remain as were prior to failure. Light-emitting diodes shall be provided for status indication for each input and output point. E. External power supplies shall be provided with the PLC as required to meet specified installed 1/0 power requirements plus spares. Power supplies shall be modular units, shall be fully redundant and shall alarm the PLC upon failure. Power supplies shall have a line regulation of 0.05%and meet the environmental and power requirements specified herein for the PLC. 2.05 REMOTE 1/0 SUBSYSTEMS A. Remote 1/0 shall be provided as designated on the Control System Architecture Drawing. Remote 1/0 shall be either PLC backplane type 1/0 or field modules as manufactured by the PLC manufacturer. Field modules shall meet the requirements of Subsection 2.04, Input/Output Subsystems. Remote 1/0 processor or communication modules shall be modular and individually replaceable. Programmable Logic Controllers 40 63 43 -4 B. Remote 1/0 shall communicate with the PLC using the PLC manufacturer's standard protocol or an open standard network such as DeviceNet, Ethernet IP, ProfiNet, Foundation Fieldbus, Modbus TCP/IP, or equal. 2.06 INPUT/OUTPUT CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT A. Signal and control circuitry to individual input/output boards shall be arranged such that board failure shall not disable more than one half of the control loops within any group of controlled equipment (e.g., one pump out of a group of three pumps,two pumps out of four, etc.). Where possible, individual control loops and equipment shall be assigned to individual boards such that failure of the board will disable only one loop or piece of equipment. 2.07 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE A. The PLC programming and configuration software shall be the manufacturer's latest, full- featured version, Windows-based, and shall be fully compliant with IEC 61131-3 standards. The software package shall consist of all programming, configuration, and documentation software needed to place the control and information system in satisfactory operation.The software shall allow on-line and off-line program development and documentation. PLC programming software shall include documentation on optical media. B. A minimum of one copy of the PLC programming software shall be purchased by the systems integrator subcontractor and registered to the Owner. C. All configuration and programming software necessary shall be provided on a laptop computer for connection to the PLC processor via a communications port.All necessary hardware required to allow the notebook computer to perform PLC configuration and programming shall be provided. Laptop shall be delivered to Owner upon completion of project . PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. PLC programming shall be furnished to perform all functions described in Section 40 6196— Process Control Descriptions, including global functions. In addition, PLCs shall be programmed to provide additional functions described in other Sections of this Division. B. PLC programming shall make use of the various IEC languages as appropriate to the specific task and shall be performed in a modular style making extensive use of program blocks (subroutines) and program variables to be passed to the program blocks for specific equipment. It is the intent of this requirement to allow for enhanced readability and ease of modification of the program code through the elimination of multiple instances of repeated code for the same function in a "hard-coded" style. Programmable Logic Controllers 40 63 43 -5 C. Extensive comments shall be placed in the program code to describe the functions of all elements of the program code. PLC code that does not contain comments shall be rejected. D. Refer to Section 40 6113—Process Control System General Provisions, Part 3 for additional requirements. 3.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR MANUFACTURER-SUPPLIED PLCS A. PLCs that are supplied for equipment local control panels by individual equipment manufacturers or suppliers shall, where so indicated on the Control System Architecture Drawing, be integrated into the plant control system.The manufacturer-supplied PLC shall be furnished, installed and programmed by the manufacturer.The PLC shall continuously monitor and control the associated system and at the same time shall provide all the required alarms, indications of system parameters, equipment status, etc.to the main control system at the plant. B. Each equipment manufacturer shall provide all monitoring and control data to be transferred between the PLC and the plant control system in contiguous blocks of PLC registers to facilitate block read and write commands for efficient scanning by the control system SCADA servers. These contiguous registers shall be arranged in a single data transfer area, which shall be divided into eight distinct areas with an emphasis on flexibility and future expansion.The distinct areas shall be arranged by data type (analog or discrete),transfer direction (server to PLC or PLC to server), and, where applicable, implementation schedule (current or future). Where required, peer-to-peer communication between PLCs shall likewise be accomplished using separate blocks of contiguous registers. Where individual equipment PLCs are not required to be connected to the plant control system via the data highway network,they shall provide the individual hardwired signals as specified in the Contract Documents. Data and commands for connection to the control system are described in the Drawings,the Input/Output Schedule,the individual equipment Specification Sections, and in Section 40 6196 —Process Control Descriptions. C. The operator interface for control of each individual system shall be performed by local operator interface units as specified in Section 40 62 63—Operator Interface Terminals or individual pilot devices on the equipment local control panel, as specified in the associated equipment Specification Section. Additional operator interface functions shall be provided through the plant control system as specified in the respective equipment specifications and in Section 40 6196—Process Control Descriptions. D. Where operator interface and control functions are required to be provided through the plant control system,the individual system supplier shall be responsible for coordination with the instrumentation subcontractor to provide a complete and working equipment control system. The individual equipment supplier shall also be responsible for limiting the access of the plant control system to the equipment PLC code so as to prevent malfunctions of the equipment and any failure to continuously perform its intended functions.The equipment supplier shall be responsible for ensuring that no actions by the plant control system can damage or otherwise adversely affect the operation of the associated equipment or the safety of personnel working Programmable Logic Controllers 40 63 43 -6 on or near that equipment.The equipment supplier shall also provide direction in the configuration of the SCADA software's security system by the instrumentation subcontractor to limit access to the control functions of the equipment control system to authorized personnel only.The equipment supplier shall coordinate testing of the completed system with the instrumentation subcontractor, which shall conform to the requirements of Section 40 6121.72 —Field Testing. E. The Contractor, equipment supplier and instrumentation subcontractor shall coordinate testing and startup of the equipment provided by the equipment supplier with the plant control system, including but not limited to the following tasks: 1. Provide assistance with control system testing of inputs, outputs, and control strategies as needed. 2. Provide support or interface work necessary to perform physical checkout and field testing to the final field devices.The schedule may require the instrumentation subcontractor and equipment manufacturer personnel to perform loop checks simultaneously, as directed by the Engineer. 3. Coordinate and assist as needed to maintain 1/0 connectivity throughout the system. 4. Ensure personnel safety while equipment is exercised via the plant control system. 5. Ensure that process, instrumentation, and control equipment are not damaged while equipment is exercised via the plant control system. 6. Provide temporary modifications to field devices and their terminations, if needed. 7. Providing labor and supervision, which may include, but is not limited to,the following: electricians, instrument technicians, manufacturer's representatives, and individual(s) knowledgeable about process startup and operation. 8. Operation of process equipment for verification of each plant control system input and output. Programmable Logic Controllers 40 63 43 -7 I �k e� Wastewater Dept . PLC SCADA Standards I.T. Department Revision 6 05/06/2024 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards Contents 1 Purpose and Scope....................................................................................................................................2 1.1 Purpose...............................................................................................................................................2 1.2 Scope ..................................................................................................................................................2 2 SCADA PLC Standards................................................................................................................................3 2.1 PLC Hardware Standards....................................................................................................................3 2.2 Network Connectivity.........................................................................................................................4 2.3 PLC Programming Standards ..............................................................................................................4 2.4 Control Panel PLC Wiring....................................................................................................................5 2.5 Relays..................................................................................................................................................5 2.6 PLC HMI Standards .............................................................................................................................5 3 Special Considerations...............................................................................................................................6 3.1 WW Lift Stations.................................................................................................................................6 3.2 OSO WWTP SCADA Upgrade ..............................................................................................................6 3.3 Additional WWTP Upgrades...............................................................................................................6 4 Revision History.........................................................................................................................................7 Page 1 of 8 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 1 Purpose and Scope 1.1 Purpose The purpose of implementing the SCADA PLC Standard is to standardize the brand and model of all SCADA equipment/devices which helps facilitate administrative duties, and improve: system functionality, support, and reliability. In addition, standardizing assists with Security Firmware Patching, Incident Response and Disaster Recovery procedures thus helping with overall security and recovery. This document specifies the City of Corpus Christi, I.T. Department's standards for PI-Cs (Programmable Logic Controllers) used at Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) and Wastewater Lift Stations (WWLS) throughout the city.This document includes the specifications of the new standards to be used for any PLC upgrade, replacement, and new installation at any WWTP or WWLS Facility.All deviations must be approved by the I.T. Department prior to installation, and preferably at design time. 1.2 Scope The scope is inclusive of all PI-Cs located at all WWTPs and WWLSs. This includes local HMI screens installed at any site, if applicable. Any PLC upgrade, replacement, or new installation is required to meet the standards listed in this document. Page 2 of 8 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 2 SCADA PLC Standards The SCADA PLC Standards are the minimum system requirements for new PI-Cs.All deviations must be approved by the City of Corpus Christi, I.T. Department prior to installation. All system firmware/software versions must be compatible with City's system at time of implementation. Versions must be verified prior or at design time to ensure compatibility. 2.1 PLC Hardware Standards The PLC used shall be in the CompactLogix family of PI-Cs manufactured by Rockwell Automation (Allen- Bradley) only. Details of the components of the CompactLogix PLC system are listed below: Controllers Control Logix 1756-L81 E Description: ControlLogix 5580 Controller with 3 MB User Memory, USB Port, 1 gigabit (Gb) Ethernet port, 100 EtherNet/IP Devices, 4 Character Alpha/Numeric Display. 1756-L82E Description: ControlLogix 5580 Controller with 5 MB User Memory, USB Port, 1 gigabit (Gb) Ethernet port, 175 EtherNet/IP Devices, 4 Character Alpha/Numeric Display. 1756-L83E Description: ControlLogix 5580 Controller with 10 MB User Memory, USB Port, 1 gigabit (Gb) Ethernet port, 250 EtherNet/IP Devices, 4 Character Alpha/Numeric Display. 1756-L84E Description: ControlLogix 5580 Controller with 20 MB User Memory, USB Port, 1 gigabit (Gb) Ethernet port, 250 EtherNet/IP Devices, 4 Character Alpha/Numeric Display. 1756-L85E Description: ControlLogix 5580 Controller with 40 MB User Memory, USB Port, 1 gigabit (Gb) Ethernet port, 300 EtherNet/IP Devices, 4 Character Alpha/Numeric Display. Compact Logix 5069-L310ER Description: Controller, CompactLogix 5380, 1MB User Memory, 8 1/0, 24 EtherNet/IP Devices 5069-L320ER Description: Controller, CompactLogix 5380, 2MB User Memory, 16 1/0, 40 Ethernet/IP Devices 5069-L330ER Description: Controller, CompactLogix 5380, 3MB User Memory, 31 1/O, 60 Ethernet/IP Devices (Only Select this Processor if Absolutely Necessary for the Application) 5069-L340ER Description: Controller, CompactLogix 5380, 4MB User Memory, 31 1/O, 90 Ethernet/IP Devices (Only Select this Processor if Absolutely Necessary for the Application) Page 3 of 8 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 1/0 Modules Discrete Input Modules: Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-11316, 16-point Discrete Input Modules Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 5069-11316, 16-point Discrete Input Modules Discrete Output Modules: Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-013161, 16-point Discrete Output Modules Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 5069-01316, 16-point Discrete Output Modules Analog Input Modules: Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-IF16, 16-point Analog Input Modules Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-IF8, 8-point Analog Input Modules Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 5069-IF8, 8-point Analog Input Modules Analog Output Modules: Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-OF8, 8-point Analog Output Modules Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 5069-OF8, 8-Point Analog Output Modules Communication Module Not Required— If Modbus is required, Protocol Converter will be used. See section 2.2 Network Connectivity. Power Supplies CompactLogix PLC 24-volt DC power supplies manufactured by Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) for CompactLogix PLC's. HMI Touch Screen (Optional) Allen-Bradley PANELVIEW PLUS 7 Touch Screen 2711P-T9W21D8S-B (Firmware Version must be compatible. Verify with I.T. Department at design time.) Please note that items listed above will be selected as needed and based on the requirements of the specific application and not all components will be used for each location. For example, not all Lift Stations will require a local HMI Touch Screen. 2.2 Network Connectivity The communications/networking devices selected for each location is dependent on the location and HMI Servers communicating with the PLC. Protocols allowed will be Modbus for PLCs connecting to Legacy HMI Server or Ethernet/IP for PLCs connecting to Rockwell HMI Servers.The following is the standard list of PLC components allowed for any system upgrade, replacement, or new installation. Protocol Converter (Required for PLCs using Modbus&connecting to Legacy SCADA HMI Servers) Red Lion Data Station Plus Part#: DSPLE000 SCADA Panel Switch Plant Facility-Moxa Managed Industrial Ethernet Switch Model EDS-508A-T Series (Fiber Port SC) Liftstations—Moxa Unmanaged Industrial Ethernet Switch Model EDS-205A-T Series (Fiber Port-SC) Cellular Network Devices (Only for Ethernet/IP Protocol) If Cellular communication is required for new installation,the I.T. Department will provide network connectivity via Cellular Device on a case-by-case basis. Devices used will be determined on a case- by-case basis. Fiber Page 4 of 8 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards If Fiber Connectivity is available,the I.T. Department will provide network connectivity via Fiber on a case-by-case basis. Devices used will be determined on a case-by-case basis. Radio Communications(For new installations and only for Ethernet/IP Protocol) If Radio is required for new installation,the I.T. Department will provide network connectivity via Radio on a case-by-case basis. Devices used will be determined on a case-by-case basis. Radio Communications(For existing WW Lift Stations connecting to Lookout System located at Greenwood WWTP using Modbus Protocol) MDS Transit NR-100 Radio (Re-use existing Radio's currently installed at Lift Station) 2.3 PLC Programming Standards The SCADA PLC Programming Standards are as follows: PLC Programming Software Studio 5000 Logix Designer(Firmware Versions must be compatible. Verify with I.T. Department at design time.) PLC Programming • Function Block Diagram Programming • Ladder Logic • Plant PAx for Process Objects (Firmware Versions must be compatible. Verify with I.T. Department at design time.) 2.4 Control Panel PLC Wiring All control panel PLC wiring shall be labeled and shall conform as follows: Wiring Color 24 VDC+ Blue 24 VDC- Brown 120 VAC(H or L1) Yellow 120 VAC(N or L2) White Ground Green Digital Input Purple Digital Output Red Analog Input White (Loop) Black(Signal) Analog Output Grey HART White (Loop) Orange (Signal) Digital Input (120 VAC) Pink 2.5 Relays The following are acceptable relays for DI/DO Modules: Page 5 of 8 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards Weidmuller, Cross Connectors, 1391600000,TERMSERIES, Cross-connector Weidmuller, Relay,1123580000,TRS 24-230VUC 2CO 2-pole Weidmuller, Relay,1984610000,TRS 24-230VUC 1CO C1D2 1-pole 2.6 PLC HMI Standards The local PLC HMI Screen Designs will use Plant PAx Graphics Library and follow standardized color schemes used by the Plant PAx. Page 6 of 8 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 3 Special Considerations 3.1 WW Treatment Plants and WW Lift Stations Currently,the majority of all Lift Station PI-Cs connect to one HMI Server located at Greenwood WWTP; all others connect to the OSO WWTP HMI Server that runs Rockwell Software and is designed for Liftstations upgraded to the new city standard PLC. All current Lift Station SCADA data is received by HMI Server at Greenwood via Radio communication using an isolated, dedicated network.This dedicated network is not connected to Corporate I.T. Network and will not be connected to Corporate I.T. Network. Please note that until all WW Lift Stations are upgraded, the current Lookout SCADA system running at Greenwood will continue to be used as required by the Utilities Treatment Department, which is currently administrating that particular Lookout SCADA System. If the PLC being replaced/upgraded corresponds to a WWTP HMI Server that has not been upgraded to the Rockwell System,then the new PLC must be able to communicate to the existing HMI Server at Greenwood WWTP using Modbus Protocol. However,the new PLC is still required to meet the I.T. SCADA PLC Standards. If the PLC being replaced/upgraded corresponds to a WWTP HMI Server that has been upgraded to the Rockwell System, then the new PLC must be able to communicate to the HMI Server running Rockwell SCADA Software via Ethernet/IP Protocol thru the Corporate Network and meet the I.T. SCADA PLC Standards. Network Connectivity devices will be determined by the I.T. Department on a case-by-case basis. Liftstations PI-Cs that are upgraded to the Rockwell System will need to communicate to the Server running Rockwell Software located at the OSO WWTP. 3.3 Additional WWTP Upgrades As other WWTP SCADA Systems are upgraded to Rockwell Solutions, corresponding PI-Cs at Lift Stations that feed into that WWTP will be configured to connect to the Rockwell HMI Server using Ethernet/IP Protocol and via Corporate I.T. Network. Page 7 of 8 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 4 Revision History Date Revised By Description of Changes 3/29/2021 Hector Leal, Document is created. IT SCADA Manager 04/20/2023 David Lopez Rev. 5 - PLC Compact Logix is Upgraded. IT SCADA Manager 05/06/2024 David Lopez, IT SCADA Manager Rev. 6 - PLC Compact Logix is Upgraded. Jin Bohannon, IT SCADA Administrator END OF SECTION Page 8 of 8 SECTION 40 67 00 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish,test, install and place, in satisfactory operation the control enclosures, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. B. Control enclosures shall be assembled,wired, and tested in the instrumentation subcontractor's own facilities, unless specified otherwise. All components and all necessary accessories such as power supplies, conditioning equipment, mounting hardware, signal input and output terminal blocks, and plug strips that may be required to complete the system shall be provided. C. Either manufacturer's standard or custom enclosures may be furnished subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents and favorable review by the Owner. D. Due consideration shall be given to installation requirements for enclosures in new and existing structures.The Contractor shall examine plans and field inspect new and existing structures as required to determine installation requirements and shall coordinate the installation of all enclosures with the Owner and all affected contractors.The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with installation of enclosures, including repair of damage to structures (incidental, accidental or unavoidable). E. The terms enclosure,cabinet, and panel shall be considered the same product and are used interchangeably. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be per Section 40 6115—Process Control System Submittals. B. Thermal calculations. C. Proof of circuit breaker selective coordination. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113—Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 78 00—Panel Mounted Instruments C. Section 40 78 56—Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers, and Surge Suppressors Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 67 00- 1 D. Section 40 70 00—Instrumentation for Process Systems E. Refer to Division 26 for additional requirements for conductors, circuit breakers,disconnect switches, etc. 1.04 PANEL LOCATION AND TYPE A. For locations inside buildings in areas other than climate controlled (i.e., heated and air conditioned) electrical or control rooms, panel shall be Type 316 stainless steel NEMA 4X construction, or as indicated for hazardous area classification (Class, Division, at a minimum), or submersible, NEMA 6, applications. Epoxy coated cast copper-free aluminum construction shall also be acceptable for NEMA 4, 6 and 7 applications. B. For locations in storage/feed areas for chlorine or other applicable corrosive chemicals, panel shall be of non-metallic construction, rated NEMA 4X, and be fully compatible with the associated chemical. C. For locations within climate controlled (i.e., heated and air-conditioned) electrical or control rooms, panel shall be Type 316L stainless steel NEMA 4X units with gasketed doors. D. For outdoor locations, panel shall be Type 316L stainless steel NEMA 4X construction unless located in chlorine environments. Chlorine environment shall be nonmetallic NEMA 4X construction. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS AND PANELS A. Cabinets and panels shall be formed or welded construction, reinforced with Unistrut, Powerstrut, or equal to facilitate mounting of internal components or equipment. Sufficient access plates and doors shall be provided to facilitate maintenance and testing of the cabinet's equipment. Doors shall be removable. Cabinets and panels with any dimension 36 inches or greater shall be provided with removable lifting lugs designed to facilitate safe moving and lifting of the panel during installation. All doors shall be fitted with common-keyed locks. B. Cabinets and panels shall be minimum 14 USS gauge. Cabinets and panels with any dimension greater than 36 inches shall be 12 USS gauge. C. Cabinets located outdoor areas shall have all pilot and control devices on interior swing out panel. D. Cabinets and panels shall have doors on the front and shall be designed for front access. NEMA 12 cabinets shall be fitted with three-point door latches. Doors for NEMA 4X cabinets shall be all stainless steel with three-point latches. Door hardware on NEMA 4X cabinets located in chemical storage/feed areas shall be non-corrosive in that environment. Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 67 00-2 E. Panels and cabinets located outside fence-secured areas shall be fitted with padlockable latch kits. Coordinate keying with Owner. F. All cabinets and panels shall be provided with drawing pockets for as-built panel drawings. One copy of the appropriate panel as-built drawings shall be furnished and left in the pocket of each panel. G. Panels with any dimension greater than 36 inches that contain a programmable controller(PLC) shall be provided with a folding laptop programmer shelf on the inside of the door. When deployed,the laptop shelf shall not be greater than 48 inches above finished floor. Laptop shelf shall be fitted to door with factory applied weld-studs. Weld discoloration and enclosure penetrations will not be accepted. H. Unless otherwise noted, panel-mounted control devices (OIUs, hand switches, etc.) requiring operator access shall be mounted between 48 and 60 inches above the floor or work platform. I. Cabinets and panels shall be prefabricated cabinets and panels by Hoffman or Saginaw Control and Engineering(SCE).The Contractor may optionally provide cabinets that are custom- fabricated by the instrumentation subcontractor or by a reputable panel fabrication shop acceptable to the Engineer. 2.02 FIELD PANELS A. Field panels for outdoor service shall be suitable for wall or pipe mounting. Panels shall have the following features: 1. Hinged and foamed-in-place continuous gasketed door(s). Door material shall match enclosure and shall have piano hinge(s) and three-point latches. 2. Field panels located outside fence-secured areas shall be fitted with staple and hasp. Provide padlock and coordinate keying with Owner. 3. Thermal insulation and thermostatically controlled space heaters where required to prevent condensation or maintain environmental conditions for installed components. 4. External sun shields or shades constructed of the same materials as the associated enclosure, unless otherwise specified. Sun shield or shade shall be fitted to enclosure supports and not to enclosure. Sun shield or shade shall have a slightly sloped top to shed water and shall extend past the front of the enclosure by at least 6 inches and extend down the side and back of enclosure. B. All external sample/process piping, including valves and appurtenances, shall be insulated with weather-proof insulation and heat-taped to prevent freezing. Heat taping shall be thermostatically controlled and self-regulating, and shall adjust its heat output to the temperature of the lines. Heat tape shall be powered from an equipment-safety GFCI circuit from within panel, unless otherwise shown or specified. Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 67 00-3 C. Field panels shall be adequately sized to house instruments, power supplies, surge protection, and appurtenant equipment required for operation. Sufficient space shall be provided for servicing instruments without removal of equipment from the enclosure. D. Field panels shall be as manufactured by Hoffman, Saginaw Control & Engineering (SCE), or equal. 2.03 CABINET AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Where indicated or required due to ambient conditions and panel component ratings, panel- mounted closed loop air conditioning units and thermostatically controlled space heaters shall be provided. B. Air conditioning units shall both cool and dehumidify the cabinet's internal air. Each air conditioner shall be sized to handle current and future (with specified spare capacity filled) heat loadings from all equipment mounted inside the cabinet. C. Air conditioners shall be provided with thermostats which operate the centrifugal evaporator blowers continuously to prevent stratification of air within the cabinet. Compressors shall operate as needed to maintain the temperature set at the thermostat. Compressors shall be provided with space heaters to maintain the compressor at a minimum temperature during cold ambient temperatures. D. Ambient air shall be completely separated from the air inside the cabinet. All air conditioner components exposed to the atmosphere outside the cabinets shall be coated to prevent corrosion. E. Power supply shall be 115VAC, 60 Hz. Units shall be provided with EMI/RFI noise suppressors. F. Air conditioner enclosures shall be constructed of stainless steel or cold rolled steel which is phosphatized and finished in baked enamel. G. Cabinet air conditioners shall be ProAir CR Series as manufactured by McLean Midwest of Brooklyn Park, MN, or equal. 2.04 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Terminal blocks shall be assembled on non-current carrying galvanized steel DIN mounting rails securely bolted to the cabinet subpanel.Terminals shall be of the screw down pressure plate type as manufactured by Phoenix Contact, Weidmuller, Wieland,Square D, or equal. B. Power terminal blocks for both 120 VAC and 24 VDC power shall be single tier with a minimum rating of 600 volts, 30 amps. C. Signal terminal blocks shall be single tier with a minimum rating of 600 volts, 20 amps. Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 67 00-4 2.05 NAMEPLATES A. Items of equipment installed in control panels shall be identified with nameplates. Each nameplate shall be located so that it is readable from the normal observation position and is clearly associated with the device or devices it identifies. Nameplates shall be positioned so that removal of the device for maintenance and repair shall not disturb the nameplate. Nameplates shall include, as necessary,the equipment identification number, description, calibrated range, and set point(s). Abbreviations of the description shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. B. Nameplates shall be made of 1/16-inch thick machine engraved laminated phenolic plastic having white numbers and letters not less than 3/16-inch high on a black background. Nameplates attached to instruments may be black laser etched 1/8-inch high text on stainless steel with sharp edges made smooth. Stamped text shall not be acceptable. C. Nameplates shall be attached to metal equipment by NEMA rated stainless steel screws and to other surfaces by an epoxy-based adhesive that is resistant to oil and moisture. In cases where the label cannot be attached by the above methods, it shall be drilled and attached to the associated device by means of a braided stainless steel wire affixed with a permanent crimp. D. Submit sample nameplate of each type. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. The cabinet itself and all interior and exterior equipment shall be identified with nameplates. The equipment shall be mounted such that service can occur without removal of other equipment. Face mounted equipment shall be flush or semi-flush mounted with flat black escutcheons. All equipment shall be accessible such that adjustments can be made while the equipment is in service and operating. All enclosures shall fit within the allocated space as shown on the Drawings. B. Enclosures shall provide mounting for power supplies, control equipment, input/output subsystems, panel-mounted equipment and appurtenances. Ample space shall be provided between equipment to facilitate servicing and cooling. C. Enclosures shall be sized to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment mounted inside the panel. If required, one or more of the following shall be provided to facilitate cooling: 1. For NEMA 12 cabinets only, louvered openings near the bottom and top or thermostatically controlled, low-noise cooling fans to circulate outside air into the enclosure, exhausting through louvers near the top of the cabinet. Air velocities through the enclosure shall be minimized to assure quiet operation. Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 67 00-S 2. Thermostatically controlled, low noise internal air blowers to circulate air within the enclosure, maintaining a uniform internal temperature. Initial setpoint shall be 75 degrees F. 3. All intake openings in cabinets and panels shall be fitted with dust filters. D. Enclosures shall be constructed so that no screws or bolt heads are visible when viewed from the front. Punch cutouts for instruments and other devices shall be cut, punched,or drilled and smoothly finished with rounded edges. E. The temperature inside each enclosure containing digital hardware (e.g., PLC, computer, Ethernet switch) shall be continuously monitored and shall generate an alarm to the nearest PLC if the temperature rises to an adjustable, preset high temperature.This thermostat shall be independent and separate from the thermostat used to control the temperature in the enclosure described above. Enclosure "high interior temperature" alarm shall be displayed on the HMI or CIT. F. Intrusion alarm switches shall be provided on all enclosures containing digital hardware and shall generate an alarm to the nearest PLC when any enclosure door is opened. If panel contains a service light, alarm switch shall also be wired to turn light on when door is opened. G. Terminals shall be marked with a permanent, continuous marking strip. One side of each terminal shall be reserved exclusively for field incoming conductors. Common connections and jumpers required for internal wiring shall not be made on the field side of the terminal. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, a vendor's pre-engineered and prefabricated wiring termination system will be acceptable. H. Wiring within cabinets, panels, and consoles shall be installed neatly and shall comply with accepted standard instrumentation and electrical practices. Power, control and signal wiring shall comply with Division 26 of the Specifications, except that the minimum wire size for discrete signal wiring may be 16 AWG, and for analog wiring may be 18 AWG. For each pair of parallel terminal blocks,the field wiring shall be between the blocks. I. Separate terminal strips shall be provided for each type of power and signal used within each cabinet. Where applicable,terminal strips for different voltages of discrete signal wiring shall also be separated. Terminal strips shall be labeled as to voltage and function. J. All wiring shall be bundled and run open or enclosed in vented plastic wireway as required. Wireways shall be oversized by a minimum of 10%; overfilled wireways shall not be acceptable. All conductors run open shall be bundled and bound at regular intervals, not exceeding 12 inches, with nylon cable ties. Care shall be taken to separate electronic signal, discrete signal, and power wiring when operating at differing voltages. K. Spare field wiring shall be bundled,tied, and labeled as specified above, or if terminals are provided, shall be terminated in cabinet. Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 67 00-6 L. All installed spare 1/0 hardware shall be wired along with live 1/0 wiring to the field wiring terminal blocks within the cabinet. Where space for spare 1/0 modules has been provided with the PLC backplane or DIN-rail mounting system, corresponding space for wiring, surge protection, and terminations shall be furnished within the cabinet. M. A copper ground bus shall be installed in each cabinet and shall be connected to the building power ground. N. Interior panel wiring shall be tagged at all terminations with machine-printed self-laminating labels. Labeling system shall be Brady TLS 2200 Printer with TLS 22000/TLS PC LinkT" labels, or equivalent system by Seton or Panduit. The wire numbering system and identification tags shall be as specified in Section 26 05 19—Low-Voltage Conductors and Cables. Field wiring terminating in panels shall be labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 19— Low-Voltage Conductors and Cables. Where applicable,the wire number shall be the ID number listed in the input/output schedules. 0. Wires shall be color coded as follows: 1. Equipment Ground—GREEN 2. 120 VAC Power—BLACK 3. 120 VAC Power Neutral—WHITE 4. 120 VAC Control (Internally Powered)—RED 5. 120 VAC Control (Externally Powered)—YELLOW 6. 24 VAC Control—ORANGE 7. DC Power(+)—RED 8. DC Power(-)—BLACK 9. DC Control —BLUE 10. Analog Signal —BLACK/WHITE or BLACK/RED P. Enclosures shall be provided with a main circuit breaker and a circuit breaker on each individual branch circuit distributed from the panel. Main breaker and branch breaker sizes shall be coordinated such that an overload in a circuit will trip only its immediate breaker and not the upstream breaker. Q. Enclosures with any dimension larger than 36 inches shall be provided with 120-volt duplex receptacles for service equipment and LED service lights. Power to these devices shall be independent from the PLC power supply and its associated uninterruptible power system. Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 67 00-7 R. Where applicable, enclosures shall be furnished with red laminated plastic warning signs in each section. The sign shall be inscribed "WARNING -This Device Is Connected to Multiple Sources of Power." Letters in the word "WARNING" shall be 0.75 inch high,white. S. The interconnection between equipment and panel shall be by means of flexible cables provided to permit withdrawal of the equipment from the cabinet without disconnecting the plugs. 3.02 PAINTING/FINISHING A. All steel enclosures shall be free from dirt,grease, and burrs and shall be treated with a phosphatizing metal conditioner before painting. All surfaces shall be filled, sanded, and finish coated by spraying a 1-2 mil epoxy prime coat and smooth, level, high grade textured finish between flat and semi-gloss shine.The colors shall be selected by the Owner from a minimum of six color samples provided. Refer to Division 09 for additional requirements. B. Materials and techniques shall be of types specifically designed to produce a finish of superior quality with respect to adherence, as well as impact and corrosion resistance. C. Panels fabricated from stainless steel shall not be painted. D. Panels fabricated from non-metallic materials (e.g., FRP) shall be gel-coated and shall not be otherwise painted. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 40 6113—Process Control System General Provisions for additional requirements. END OF SECTION Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 67 00-8 SECTION 40 67 63 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish,test, install and place in satisfactory operation all uninterruptible power systems,with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. One UPS shall be provided for each programmable logic controller(PLC) panel or SCADA panel and its appurtenant equipment provided under this Contract. However, courtesy receptacles in PLC and SCADA panels shall not be powered by the UPS. C. UPS units shall be mounted in or near enclosures containing digital hardware, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, as follows: 1. UPS units for operator's consoles shall be mounted within the consoles. 2. UPS units for control panels containing PLCs shall be mounted either within the cabinet or in an adjacent cabinet of suitable environmental rating. 3. UPS units for SCADA panels shall be mounted within the cabinet. D. Where the UPS is mounted within a dedicated enclosure,that enclosure shall be properly sized for heat dissipation and all other applicable requirements as specified in Section 40 67 00— Control System Equipment Panels and Racks and its subordinate Sections. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 63 43— Programmable Logic Controllers 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Sizing calculations, in Watts (W) or Volt-Amps (VA),for all UPS units. B. Heat dissipation calculations for all enclosures that contain a UPS unit. C. Run time calculation. Uninterruptable Power Systems 40 67 63 - 1 PART 2— EQUIPMENT 2.01 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS A. Each UPS shall consist of a freestanding UPS module and battery modules as required to meet backup run time requirements. B. UPS units shall be true on-line type. Each UPS shall be sized to match the maximum power requirements of the associated digital equipment, control panel power supplies and accessories. Under normal operation,the AC power shall be converted to DC.The DC power from the battery charger shall supply an inverter and maintain the battery module at full charge.The AC output from the inverter shall be fed to the associated digital equipment power supply unit and/or other equipment power supplies as appropriate. Upon loss of the AC supply,the inverter shall continue to supply normal power to the device, drawing DC from the batteries. C. An automatic bypass switch shall be provided with UPS units of greater than 2 kVA capacity.The transfer switch shall be of the solid state, make-before-break type and shall automatically transfer load from the inverter to the AC line in the event of an inverter malfunction.The total transfer time shall be 5 milliseconds or less. The transfer switch shall be provided with a manual override. D. A manually operated maintenance bypass switch shall be provided for each UPS installation, other than for computers,to allow the hardware to be powered while the UPS is removed for maintenance.The bypass switch shall be the make-before-break type to ensure continuous power to the load. E. Loss of AC power shall be monitored on the line side of the UPS and reported via normally closed (fail safe) unpowered contacts to the associated PLC/RTU. F. Each UPS shall meet the following requirements: 1. Input voltage shall be 117 VAC, single phase, 60 Hz. 2. Voltage regulation shall be +/-5 percent for line and load changes. 3. The output frequency shall be phase-locked to the input AC line on AC operation and shall be 60 hertz+/-0.5 percent when on battery operation. 4. The batteries shall be of the sealed, lead acid or lead calcium gelled electrolyte type, or VRLA absorbed glass mat(AGM)type.The battery modules shall have a minimum full load backup time of 30 minutes for PLC-based control panels, and 45 minutes for remote telemetry units. 5. The UPS capacity shall be sized for 150%of the connected load. 6. A status monitoring and control panel shall be provided and shall include the following: Uninterruptable Power Systems 40 67 63 -2 a. Status indicating lights for both normal and abnormal conditions. b. Individual alarm contacts that shall close upon: 1) Loss of the AC line 2) Low battery level 3) Fault condition. C. Contacts shall be wired to the closest discrete input subsystem. Alternatively, an RS-232 or USB port shall provide UPS status to an operator workstation. All required interface software and hardware shall be provided. d. Circuit breaker for the AC input. 7. Sound absorbing enclosure. 8. EMI/RF noise filtering. 9. Surge protection shall be provided on the AC input circuit, which shall have a UL TVSS clamping voltage rating of 400 V with a<5 ns response time. G. UPS systems shall be the 9PX series by Eaton, Smart-UPS On-line series by APC/Schneider- Electric, or equal. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Where the UPS is mounted within the PLC or RTU cabinet, it shall not interfere with access to other equipment or wiring within the panel (i.e., it shall not be necessary to move or remove the UPS to remove or service other panel-mounted equipment). For floor-mounted PLC cabinets with bottom wiring access (including those cabinets with legs),the UPS shall be placed on a dedicated shelf within the cabinet. B. Refer to Section 40 6113—Process Control System General Provisions for additional requirements. END OF SECTION Uninterruptable Power Systems 40 67 63 -3 40 69 80 LEVEL TRANSMITTER 1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 SCOPE This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish, install and place into operation all instruments required to complete the project. 1.02 SUPPLIERS All instruments shall be furnished and installed by the contractor as indicated on drawings and as specified herein for a complete and working system. 2.0 PRODUCTS/MATERIALS 2.01 LEVEL TRANSMITTER: The liquid level transmitter shall be a submersible hermetically sealed sensor suitable for water/waste water, and wet well depth measurement applications. Transmitter shall be as follows: a. Input 10-30Volt DC b. Output 4-20ma 2 wire C. Accuracy 0.5%of span d. Operating Temperature+15 deg F to 122 deg F e. Electrical connection Vented watertight cable connection f. Wetted parts 316 and 304 Stainless steel g. Transmitting fluid Silicon Oil h. Rated I P68 Provide cable clamp, cable junction box, vented tube filter, level guard anti clog attachment and sensor weight. Transmitter shall be Model #LS-10 as manufactured by Wika. PART 3.0 INSTALLATION 3.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: The manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer PDF sets of complete installation, operation and maintenance instructions for the equipment furnished under this specification. The information furnished shall include erection drawings, "as-built" drawings of electrical equipment, assembly details, and parts lists. Level Transmitter 40 69 80- 1 3.02 SUITABILITY CERTIFICATION As part of the submittal data required above, the General Contractor shall submit a certification stating that the manufacturer's authorized representative for the equipment furnished under this section has studied the Contract Documents (drawings and specifications), questioned the General Contractor and/or the Engineer to determine the conditions affecting this equipment and hereby certifies that they should be suitable for use on this project and should require no more than normal maintenance if not damaged or abused. END OF SECTION Level Transmitter 40 69 80-2 40 69 90 ULTRASONIC FLOW MEASURING EQUIPMENT 1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish and install flow meter to measure the wastewater flow. 1.02 SPECIFICATION TYPE This specification is a performance specification as defined in the Special Provisions. 1.03 GENERAL A. LIQUID TO BE MEASURED The liquid to be measured is raw wastewater. 1.04 FLOW RANGE A. 0-4000 GPM (To be confirmed) 1.05 SUBMITTAL DATA Before manufacture, the Contractor shall submit 8 sets of detailed drawings, detailed specifications, installation and other pertinent information for the Engineer's review and approval. As part of the submittal data required above,the Contractor shall submit a certification stating that the manufacturer's authorized representative for the equipment furnished under this section has studied the Contract Documents (drawings and specifications), questioned the Contractor and/or the Engineer to determine the conditions affecting this equipment, and hereby certifies that it should be suitable for use on this project and should require no more than normal maintenance if not damaged or abused. 1.06 OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL The manufacturer shall furnish the Engineer with 4 sets of complete operation and maintenance instructions. Flow Meter 40 69 90- 1 2.0 PRODUCTS/MATERIALS 2.01 FLOW METER The flow meter shall be a fixed ultrasonic flowmeter based on the transit time measurement method for measuring flow rates of relatively clean homogeneous liquids utilizing clamp-on sensors. System shall be composed of a converter and detector set. The flow meter shall provide a repeatable accuracy of ±0.5% of velocity for velocities greater than 1.0 FPS and ±1.5%to ±2.0%of velocity for velocities less than 1.0 FPS. The flow meter sensor shall be mounted on a pipe as per drawings. The flow meter shall be Sitrans Ultrasonic Flow Meter Model FS230 as manufactured by Siemens. 2.02 DIGITAL DISPLAY PANEL A. LCD Integral Digital Display with Back Light Configurable from keypad to display flow rate and totalizer values, velocity or output range. Flow shall be totalized on a 9 digit, non-resetable. It shall provide a cumulative total of the measured flow. The counter shall not reset or lose data in the event of a power failure or system shut down. 2.03 ULTRASONIC DETECTOR A single, surface-mounted "Submersible Detector Set" consisting of two [2] universal clamp- on sensors for 2" to 72" pipe diameters capable of transmitting and receiving the ultrasonic signal shall be provided. Each sensor shall mount on the outside of the pipe wall with stainless steel bands. No part of the sensor shall penetrate the pipe line. The detector shall have a Polyurethane housing with stainless steel cover plate and stainless steel mounting bracket. All necessary cable between the ultrasonic detector and the electronic processor and transmitter shall be provided by the manufacturer. 2.04 ENCLOSURE The converter shall be housed in a copper aluminum alloy, coated with epoxy paint, rated NEMA 6 with a hinged cover having a clear window for viewing the display panel. The converter enclosure shall be mounted inside an auxiliary enclosure (separate enclosure) which shall be of fiberglass construction and rated NEMA 3R. The auxiliary enclosure shall have stainless steel luggage latches and a piano hinge. 2.05 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS The flow meter converter shall have electrical connections for 120 volt, 60 hertz. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: Install the flowmeter according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 STARTUP: A representative of the flowmeter manufacturer shall assist the Contractor with the field checkout, calibration, startup, and testing. 3.03 FIELD TEST REPORT: Submit a written test report showing the tests performed and the results of each test. The manufacturer's representative shall make the statement on the test report that the field test data falls within the manufacturer's recommended limits and that flowmeter and associated equipment installation is acceptable to the representative. END OF SECTION Flow Meter 40 69 90-3 SECTION 40 70 00 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The instrumentation subcontractor shall furnish, install,test and place in operation instruments as scheduled together with all signal converters,transmitters, isolators, amplifiers, etc.to interface with the process control system as shown on the Drawings and as specified.The Contractor may elect to install sensors on process lines provided that the instrumentation subcontractor provides full on-site supervision during installation. Mounting of associated indicators, sensors, sampling pumps, power supplies, brackets and appurtenances shall be provided as indicated. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that all process taps, isolation valves, nipples, penetrations, embedded instrumentation supports, conduit,wiring,terminations, and the installation of process instrumentation on process lines shall be provided under this Contract. The Instrumentation Subcontractor shall supervise installation of equipment provided where installation is by other Subcontractors or Contractors. C. Tapping and connections for primary process sensors shall be sized to suit each individual installation and the requirements of the instrument served.The Contractor shall ensure that the location, supports, orientation and dimensions of the connections and tapping for instruments are such as to provide the proper bracing,the required accuracy of measurement, protection of the sensor from accidental damage and accessibility for maintenance while the plant is in operation. Isolation valves shall be provided at all process taps. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 67 00—Control System Equipment Panels and Racks C. Instruments furnished with mechanical equipment shall be furnished, installed,tested and calibrated as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All instrumentation supplied shall be the manufacturer's latest design. Unless otherwise specified, instruments shall be solid state, electronic, using enclosures to suit specified environmental conditions. Microprocessor-based equipment shall be supplied unless otherwise Instrumentation For Process Systems 40 70 00 - 1 specified. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor stands,wall brackets, or instrument racks as shown on the Drawings, or as required. B. Equipment installed in a hazardous area shall meet or exceed Class, Group, and Division requirements as shown on the Drawings,to comply with the National Electrical Code. C. All field instrumentation for outdoor service shall be provided with enclosures that are suitable for outdoor service, as follows: 1. Where the manufacturer's enclosures are suitable for outdoor service,they shall be provided with instrument sunshades. Sunshades shall be Style E as manufactured by O'Brien Corporation, or equal.Where possible,these instruments shall be mounted in a north facing direction. 2. Where the manufacturer's standard enclosures are not suitable for outdoor service, instruments shall be mounted in Field Panels in accordance with Section 40 67 00— Control System Equipment Panels and Racks, or may be furnished with Vipak instrument field enclosures as manufactured by O'Brien Corporation, equivalent by Intertec, or equal. It shall not be necessary to provide the manufacturer's NEMA 4 or 4X enclosures for instruments that will be subsequently mounted in separate field panels. D. All instruments shall return to accurate measurement without manual resetting upon restoration of power after a power failure. E. Unless otherwise shown or specified, local indicators shall be provided for all instruments. Where instruments are located in inaccessible locations, local indicators shall be provided and shall be mounted as specified in Paragraph 3.01 B herein. All indicator readouts shall be linear in process units. Readouts of 0 to 100%shall not be acceptable (except for speed and valve position). Isolated outputs shall be provided for all transmitters. F. Unless otherwise specified,field instrument and power supply enclosures shall be Type 316 stainless steel,fiberglass (or similar, per Engineer's judgement) or PVC coated copper-free cast aluminum NEMA 4X construction. G. Where separate elements and transmitters are required,they shall be fully matched, and unless otherwise noted, installed adjacent to the sensor. Special cables or equipment shall be supplied by the associated equipment manufacturer. H. Electronic equipment shall utilize printed circuitry and shall be coated (tropicalized)to prevent contamination by dust, moisture and fungus. Solid state components shall be conservatively rated for long term performance and dependability over ambient atmosphere fluctuations. Ambient conditions shall be-20 to 50 degrees C and 20 to 100 percent relative humidity, unless otherwise specified. Field mounted equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid, and corrosive service conditions. Instrumentation For Process Systems 40 70 00 -2 I. All devices furnished hereunder shall be heavy duty type, designed for continuous industrial service.The system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as possible, and shall consist of equipment models that are currently in production. All equipment provided, where applicable, shall be of modular construction and shall be capable of field expansion. J. All non-loop-powered instruments and equipment shall be designed to operate on a 60 Hz AC power source at a nominal 117 V, plus or minus 10 percent, except where specifically noted.All regulators and power supplies required for compliance with the above shall be provided. Where equipment requires voltage regulation, constant voltage transformers shall be supplied. K. All analog transmitter and controller outputs shall be isolated,4 to 20 milliamps into a load of 0 to 750 ohms, unless specifically noted otherwise. All switches shall have double pole, double throw contacts rated at a minimum of 600 VA, unless specified otherwise. L. Materials and equipment used shall be UL approved wherever such approved equipment and materials are available. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Equipment shall be located so that it is accessible for operation and maintenance.The instrumentation subcontractor shall examine the Drawings and shop drawings for various items of equipment in order to determine the best arrangement for the work as a whole and shall supervise the installation of process instrumentation supplied under this Division. 2. Work shall be performed in compliance with all applicable local codes and practices. Where the Contract Documents do not delineate precise installation procedures,the latest version of the American Petroleum Institute (API) Recommended Practice 551 manual (API RP 551) shall be used as a guide to installation procedures. B. Equipment Mounting and Support 1. Field equipment shall be wall mounted or mounted on two inch diameter pipe stands welded to a 10 inch square by 1/2 inch thick base plate unless shown adjacent to a wall or otherwise noted. Materials of construction shall be aluminum or 316 stainless steel. Instruments attached directly to concrete shall be spaced out from the mounting surface not less than 1/2 inch by use of phenolic spacers. Expansion anchors in walls shall be used for securing equipment or wall supports to concrete surfaces. Unless otherwise noted, field instruments shall be mounted between 48 and 60 inches above the floor or work platform. Instrumentation For Process Systems 40 70 00 -3 2. Embedded pipe supports and sleeves shall be Schedule 40, Type 316 stainless steel pipe, ASA B 36.19, with stainless steel blind flange for equipment mounting, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Materials for miscellaneous mounting brackets and supports shall be Type 316 stainless steel construction. 4. Pipe stands, miscellaneous mounting brackets and supports shall comply with the requirements of Division 05 of the specifications. 5. Transmitters shall be oriented such that output indicators are readily visible. C. Control and Signal Wiring 1. Electrical, control and signal wiring connections to transmitters and elements mounted on process piping or equipment shall be made through liquid tight flexible conduit. Conduit seals shall be provided where conduits enter all field instrument enclosures and all cabinetry housing electrical or electronic equipment. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. The instrumentation subcontractor shall comply with the requirements of Division 01 of these Specifications and all instrumentation and control system tests, inspection, and calibration requirements for all instrumentation and controls provided under this Contract and specified herein.The Engineer, or his/her designated representative(s), reserves the right to witness any test, inspection, calibration or start up activity. Acceptance by the Engineer of plans, reports, or documentation relating to testing or commissioning activity shall not relieve the Contractor of his/her responsibility for meeting all specified requirements. B. The instrumentation subcontractor shall provide the services of factory trained technicians, tools and equipment to field calibrate, test, inspect and adjust each instrument to its specified performance requirement in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Instruments which fails to meet Contract requirements, or published manufacturer performance specification for functional and operational parameters, shall be repaired or replaced, at the discretion of the Engineer, at no cost to the Owner.The Contractor shall bear all costs and provide all personnel, equipment and materials necessary to implement all installation tests and inspection activities for equipment specified herein. C. At least 60 days before the anticipated initiation of installation testing,the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed description of the installation test(s)to be conducted to demonstrate the correct operation of the instrumentation supplied hereunder. D. Field instrument calibration shall conform to the following requirements: 1. The instrumentation subcontractor shall provide the services of factory trained instrumentation technicians,tools and equipment to field calibrate or verify factory Instrumentation For Process Systems 40 70 00 -4 calibration of each instrument supplied under this Contract and existing instruments shown to its specified accuracy in accordance with the manufacturer's specification and instructions for calibration. Calibration and verification shall take place under actual process conditions. Forcing outputs shall not be acceptable. 2. Each instrument shall be calibrated/verified at 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent of span using test instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs.Test instruments shall be rated to an accuracy of at least five (5)times greater than the specified accuracy of the instrument being calibrated. Where applicable, such test instruments shall have accuracy's as set forth by the National Institute for Standards and Technology(NIST). 3. The instrumentation subcontractor shall provide a written calibration/verification sheet to the Engineer for each instrument, certifying that it has been calibrated to its published specified accuracy. The Contractor shall submit proposed calibration sheets for various types of instruments for Engineer approval prior to the start of calibration.This sheet shall include but not be limited to date, instrument tag numbers, brief description of how the calibration process was performed, calibration data for the various procedures described herein, name of person performing the calibration, a listing of the published specified accuracy, permissible tolerance at each point of calibration, calibration reading as finally adjusted within tolerance, defect noted, corrective action required and corrections made. For electronic or powered instruments,the calibration/verification sheet shall also list all configurable parameters that have been modified from their default factory setting. 4. If doubt exists as to the correct method for calibrating or checking the calibration/verification of an instrument,the manufacturer's printed recommendations shall be used as an acceptable standard, subject to the approval of the Engineer. 5. Upon completion of calibration, devices calibrated hereunder shall not be subjected to adjustments, sudden movements, accelerations, or shocks, and shall be installed in permanent protected positions not subject to moisture, dirt, and excessive temperature variations. Caution shall be exercised to prevent such devices from being subjected to over-voltages, incorrect voltages, overpressure or incorrect air. Damaged equipment shall be replaced and re-calibrated/verified at no cost to the Owner. Equipment that has been adjusted, modified, or moved or there is evidence of such activity shall be re- calibrated/verified at no cost to the Owner. 6. After completion of instrumentation installation,the instrumentation subcontractor shall perform a loop check.The Contractor shall submit final loop test results with all instruments listed in the loop. Loop test results shall be signed by all representatives involved for each loop test. END OF SECTION Instrumentation For Process Systems 40 70 00 -5 SECTION 40 72 76.26 LEVEL SWITCHES(FLOATS) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish,test, install and place in satisfactory operation the float level switches, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 70 00— Instrumentation for Process Systems PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 LEVEL SWITCHES (FLOATS) A. Level switches of the direct acting float-operated design shall be comprised of a hermetically sealed, approximately 5-inch diameter plastic casing float, containing microswitches and flexibly supported by means of a heavy neoprene or PVC jacket,with three-conductor cable a minimum of 20 feet in length. Unless otherwise specified, media specific gravity is 0.95 to 1.05. Microswitches shall be one normally open and one normally closed, 5A-115V AC capacity. Float hangers and supports shall be provided as shown on the installation detail drawings. B. Float switches shall be Model ENM as manufactured by Flygt, or equal. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 70 00—Instrumentation for Process Systems. END OF SECTION Level Switches (Floats) 40 72 76.26 - 1 SECTION 40 73 29.13 SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL (PRESSURE) SENSORS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish,test, install and place in satisfactory operation the submersible level (pressure) sensors, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 70 00— Instrumentation for Process Systems PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL(PRESSURE)SENSORS A. Submersible level (pressure) sensors shall consist of a pressure-sensing probe assembly with a depth cable molded directly to the probe body. Sensing probe housing shall be fabricated of titanium or 316 stainless steel.The depth support cable shall be polyurethane and shall contain a Kevlar strength member, a vent tube, and conductors for electrical power and signal. B. The sensor shall contain an encapsulated pressure sensing element which is electrically and physically isolated from the media via a ceramic or titanium isolation diaphragm.The pressure sensing connection shall be protected from damage by a removable acetal nose cone or equivalent guard. C. Each submersible level transducer shall be provided with a NEMA 4X termination/junction box, desiccant tube and aneroid bellows to prevent moisture from entering the vent tube. D. Sensor specifications shall be as follows: 1. Sensor Rating: NEMA 6 (IP68), loop-powered 2. Output Signal:4-20 mA, 2-wire design 3. Accuracy: ±0.25%, F.S. (full scale) 4. Long Term Stability: ± 0.1%F.S./year Submersible Level (Pressure)Sensors) 40 73 29.13 - 1 5. Zero Offset and Span Setting: ±0.25% F.S., max. 6. Operating Temperature: -20 to+60 degrees C 7. Compensated Temperature: -2 to+30 degrees C 8. Overpressure Limits:At least 2x full scale range 9. Cable Length:As required E. Submersible level (pressure) sensors shall be Wika LS-10 or equal. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 70 00—Instrumentation for Process Systems. END OF SECTION Submersible Level (Pressure)Sensors) 40 73 29.13 -2 SECTION 40 73 99 PRESSURE GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work includes the furnishing, installation,testing, and placing in service the pressure gauges,thermometers, and related accessories, as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. I Related Sections: 1. Division 0 2. Division 1 3, Section 44 3119, "Packaged Odor Control Systems". 1.2 REFERENCES (NOT USED) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product data sheets and catalog information for each type of pressure gauge. I Provide manufacturer's warranty for each product indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A, Deliver, handle, and store all components to be installed under this section in accordance with the preselected equipment supplier's written Pre-Installation Delivery, Storage, and Handling Instructions and the requirements of Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A, Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Ashcroft, Inc. 2. AMETEK® U.S.Gauge 3. Weksler, Division of Ashcroft, Inc. 4 Wika instrument Corporation 2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Description: Provide gauges of manufacturer's standard commercial product, new and shall embody the design characteristics stated for the respective class, size,type and service scheduled herein or on the Drawings. 1. Gauge Class Designations: a, Class 1: Pressure indicating. b, Class 2: Vacuum indications, designed for vacuum indications. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 73 99-PAGE 1 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PIPING SYSTEM,PRESSURE GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Class 3: Indicate pressure or vacuum. 2. Gauge Size and Style: a. 3-1/2 inches and smaller shall be glycerin filled in stainless steel cases. b. Larger than 3-1/2 inches shall be steel zinc coated and finished with black enamel. C. Unless otherwise indicated, minimum dial size shall be 4-1/2 inches. 3. Bourdon Tube and Socket Material:Type 316 stainless steel. 4. Connection: 1/2-inch. 5. Accuracy: ASME B40.1, Grade 2A, ±0.5%full scale. . No stop pin to mask false zero reading. 13. Range: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on Drawings, pressure gauges shall have a pressure range of 0 to 60 psi or a range covering the pressure of the piping, whichever is greater. 1. Maximum operating pressure should not exceed 75%of the full-scale range,with normal operating range in the middle half of the full-scale range, between 25%and 75%. 2. Temperature: 1507 maximum. C. Vibration: If present, provide glycerin filled gauge. 2.3 PULSATION DAMPENER A. Description: 1. Provide an adjustable snubber consisting of a ball check and an adjustable needle valve or fine thread choke valve, constructed of Type 316 stainless steel, 1/2-inch NPT size. 2. Provide on inlet to pressure gauges where fluctuations due to pulsations are present. 2.4 DIAPHRAGM SEALS A. Description: 1. Consists of a thin flexible diaphragm mounted between two flanges between the pressure gauge and the medium being measured. It serves a separating member stopping the medium from entering the gauge preventing clogging and corrosion. 2. Materials:Top and bottom housing Type 316 stainless steel; diaphragm material compatible with the process fluid. I Installation: Provide diaphragm seals ahead of pressure gauges for measuring pressure of chemicals,grit slurry, and fluids containing solids. 2.5 BALL VALVE A. Three-piece body,full port,vented ball, block-out proof stem,Type 316 stainless steel trim, reinforced TFE seat and seal,threaded ends, lever operator, rated 1000-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-110. B. Manufactures: 1. Contromatics. 2. Crane Valve Group I NIBCO PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 73 99-PAGE 2 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PIPING SYSTEM,PRESSURE GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS SEPTEMBER 2025 2.6 THERMOMETERS A� Thermometers: Process grade bimetal thermometers, all-angle swivel connection,Type 316 stainless steel case, in accordance with ASME B40.3 at locations shown on the Drawings. 1. Designed for direct or remote reading as shown on Drawings. . Accuracy: ±1%of scale. 3. Bulb: Stainless steel. 4. Stem Length: a, Less than 8-inches: 3-1/2 inch. b, 8-inches through 10-inches: 6-inch. c. Larger than 10-inches: 9-inch. 5. Dial: 4-1/2 inches diameter; dual scales,temperature both in Fahrenheit and Celsius, with black numbers on white dial. a. Range, Low Pressure Air Service: B. Thermowells. Provide at all thermometer locations,fitted with plug and chain, and conforming to the requirements specified for thermometers. Install all thermowells vertical or at a 45-degree vertical angle to permit filling with conducting liquid for tests. Extensions: Where thermometers are installed in insulated lines, use extension-neck separable sockets. D, Remote: Furnish remote bulb thermometers where specified and shown on the Drawings. Provide thermometers with corrosion-resistance movements set in cast aluminum cases with black enamel finish. 1: Dial: 4-1/2 inches diameter; dual scales,temperature both in Fahrenheit and Celsius, with black numbers on white dial, unless otherwise specified. 2. Cable: Stainless steel interlocked spiral armor over stainless steel capillary tubing. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, located cases 5-1/2 feet above finish floor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install instruments in accordance with the Drawings and the manufacturer's instructions. I Identification: Refer to P&ID Drawings for instrument identification and applicable Division 26 for electrical and 40 Sections for instrumentation. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 73 99-PAGE 3 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PIPING SYSTEM,PRESSURE GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 73 99-PAGE 4 OF 4 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PRESSURE GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 40 78 00 PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish,test, install and place in satisfactory operation the panel mounted instruments, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113—Control and Information System Scope and General Requirements B. Section 40 67 00—Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 1.03 GENERAL INFORMATION AND DESCRIPTION A. All equipment mounted on the face of a panel shall conform to the same NEMA rating specified for the panel construction. 1.04 SPARE PARTS A. The following specific spare parts items shall be provided: 1. One of each type of panel mounted equipment(i.e., indicators, signal converters, etc.) provided under this Contract. 2. Five of each type of interposing control relay provided under this Contract. 3. Five of each type of current relay provided under this Contract. 4. Five of each type of intrinsic relay provided under this Contract. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 OPERATORS A. Control operators shall be 30.5 mm, round, heavy-duty, oil tight NEMA 4X corrosion resistant. For Hazardous areas, control operators shall be rated NEMA 7. Panel Mounted Instruments 40 78 00 - 1 B. Pushbuttons shall be non-illuminated, spring release type. Pushbuttons shall include a full guard. Panic stop/alarm pushbuttons shall be red mushroom type with manual-pull release. Selector switches shall be non-illuminated, maintained contact type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Pilot lights shall be of the proper control voltage, push-to-test LED type with lens and LED lamp colors as specified below. 1. Green: stopped, off, or closed 2. Red: running, on, or opened 3. Amber:fault, alarm, or warning 4. White:generic non-alarm status 5. Blue: control power on D. Control operators shall have legend plates as specified herein, indicated on the Drawings, or otherwise directed by the Engineer. Legend plates shall be plastic, black field (background)with white lettering. Engraved nameplates shall be securely fastened above each control operator. If adequate space is not available,the nameplate shall be mounted below the operator. E. Control operators for all equipment under this Contract shall be of the same type and manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. Control operators such as pushbuttons (PB), selector switches (SS), and pilot lights (PL) shall be Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse Type E34, Square D Company Type SK, or equal 2.02 ELECTRONIC INDICATORS A. Electronic indicators shall be 3.5 or 6 digit, as appropriate,with 0.56" high red LED display. Indicators shall be provided with nameplate and scale calibrated to match the calibration of the primary element.The unit shall be designed primarily for use with 4-20 mA current loop signal circuits. Indicator operating voltage shall be 115 VAC 10%, 60 Hz. Indicator controls shall include three (3)front-panel pushbuttons for modifying alarm values and other indicator setup.Two (2) form-C relays shall be provided for each indicator. Relay contact outputs shall be rated 5A, 120/240 VAC, resistive load. Where required, a regulated and isolated 24 V excitation power supply shall be provided. Indicators shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor service as required and shall have the same NEMA enclosure rating as the associated enclosure. B. Indicators shall be Red Lion Model IMP or APLCL, Precision Digital, or equal. 2.03 RELAYS W N_ A. Interposing control relays (CR) Panel Mounted Instruments 40 78 00 -2 1. Where required to interface between motor control centers, equipment controls, and control panels, interposing relays and associated control wiring circuitry shall be furnished and installed to provide the monitoring and/or control functions specified herein. 2. Interposing relays shall be small format type, DPDT, minimum 10 amp, 120 VAC contact rating. 3. Relay coils shall be 120 VAC or 24 VDC as required to interface with equipment. 4. Relays shall have a flag indicator to show relay status, a pushbutton to allow manual operation of the relay, and an internal pilot light to indicate power to the coil. 5. Relays shall be as manufactured by Square D, Potter& Brumfield, Allen-Bradley, or equal. B. Timing Relays (TR) 1. Timing relays shall be electronic type with 120 VAC coils unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.Timers shall be provided with a minimum of two SPDT timed output contacts and instantaneous contacts where required. Contact ratings shall be the same as for interposing relays. 2. Timing relays shall be the general purpose plug-in type,Type JCK as manufactured by Square D Company, equivalent by Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, equivalent by Allen-Bradley, or equal. 2.04 RUN TIME METER A. Run time meter shall be a 6-digit DC hour meter panel-mounted with a round SAE bezel with a push-on retaining ring. Unit shall be non-resettable tamper proof and sealed with quartz-crystal time base. Unit shall feature: 1. Solid State Electronic Circuit 2. Quartz-Crystal for accurate timing 3. Absolutely will NOT lose count 4. High Impact,Tamperproof Plastic Case 5. Sealed against moisture and dirt 6. Indicates operating time in hours and tenths 7. UL&CSA Recognized B. Legend plates shall be provided for each of the run time meter with white letters on a black background. Panel Mounted Instruments 40 78 00 -3 C. Unit shall be as manufactured by Intermatic,Trumeter or equal. 2.05 ALTERNATOR: A. An automatic, electronic alternator shall change pump sequence after each operating cycle to equalize run time. The alternator shall be equipped with selector switches to allow automatic alternation for one or two or three or four pumps. LED indicators shall be provided to show lead pump position. Unit voltage shall be 120 volt. Contact rating shall be 10 amps resistive at 120 volts. The alternator unit shall be U.L. listed and shall be manufactured by Time Mark, Diversified, or equivalent. 2.06 PHASE MONITOR A. Phase Monitor:Three phase monitor to monitor phase loss, phase reversal, undervoltage, overvoltage. Unit shall have 10A output auxiliary contacts,Trip Normal LED indication lights and shall automatically reset on failure correction. Monitor shall be manufactured by Time Mark or equal. 2.07 ALARM HORNS A. Alarm horns shall be general-purpose type, panel-mounted, and shall be suitable for indoor or weatherproof service, as required. Power supply shall be either 115 VAC or 24 VDC. Horns shall be capable of producing 100 dB at 10 feet and shall have adjustable volume. B. Horns shall be Vibratone series as manufactured by Federal Signal Corporation, McMaster-Carr equivalent, Edwards Signaling Company equivalent, or equal. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 67 00—Control System Equipment Panels and Racks,for additional requirements. END OF SECTION Panel Mounted Instruments 40 78 00 -4 SECTION 40 78 56 ISOLATORS, INTRINSICALLY-SAFE BARRIERS,AND SURGE SUPPRESSORS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and place in satisfactory operation the isolators, intrinsically-safe barriers, and surge protection devices (SPDs) as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113—Control and Information System Scope and General Requirements B. Section 40 67 00—Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 1.03 SPARE PARTS A. The following specific spare parts items shall be provided: 1. Five of each type of surge protection device provided under this Contract. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 SURGE PROTECTION A. General 1. All electrical and electronic elements shall be protected against damage due to electrical transients induced in interconnecting lines from lightning discharges and nearby electrical systems. 2. Manufacturer's Requirements: All surge protection devices shall be manufactured by a company that has been engaged in the design, development, and manufacture of such devices for at least 5 years. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Phoenix Contact, Edco, Transtector,Weidmuller, or equal. 3. Surge protection device installations shall comply with UL 94,the National Electric Code (NEC), and all applicable local codes. 4. Surge protection devices shall be installed as close to the equipment to be protected as practically possible. Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers And Surge Suppressors 40 78 56 - 1 5. Device Locations: As a minimum, provide surge protection devices at the following locations: a. At connections between AC power and electrical/electronic equipment, including, but not limited to, panels, assemblies, and field mounted analog transmitters. b. At both ends of signal circuits that have any portion of the circuit extending outside of a building. C. At both ends of copper-based communication cables which extend outside of a building, including at field instruments and the field side of analog valve position signals. d. On all external telephone communication lines. B. AC power protection 1. Surge protection device assemblies for connections to AC power supply circuits shall: a. Be provided with two 3-terminal barrier terminal strips capable of accepting No. 12 AWG solids or stranded copper wire. One terminal strip shall be located on each end of the unit. b. Have a nonflammable enclosure that meets or exceeds UL 94 VO flammability requirements.The surge protection device shall be provided with provisions for mounting to interior of equipment racks, cabinets, or to the exterior of freestanding equipment. C. Be constructed as multistage devices consisting of gas tube arrestors, high energy metal oxide varistors, or silicon avalanche suppression diodes. Assemblies shall automatically recover from surge events and shall have status indication lights. d. Comply with all requirements of UL 1449, latest edition. e. Be able to withstand a peak surge current of 10,000 amps based on a test surge waveform with an 8-microsecond rise time and a 20-microsecond exponential decay time, as defined in UL 1449. f. Have the following characteristics: 1) Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: 150VAC 2) Maximum Operating Current: 20 amps 3) Ambient Temperature Range: -20 degrees C to+65 degrees C 4) Response Time: 5 nanoseconds Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers And Surge Suppressors 40 78 56 -2 C. Analog signal circuit protection 1. Surge protection device assemblies for analog signal circuits shall: a. Have four lead devices with DIN Rail mounting. b. Have a nonflammable enclosure that meets or exceeds UL 94 VO flammability requirements. C. Be constructed as multistage devices consisting of gas tube arrestors and silicon avalanche suppression diodes. Gas tube arrestors and diodes shall be separated by a series impedance of no more than 20 ohms. Assemblies shall automatically recover from surge events. d. Comply with all requirements of UL 497B. e. Be able to withstand a peak surge current of 10,000 amps based on a test surge waveform with an 8-microsecond rise time and a 20-microsecond exponential decay time, as defined in UL 1449. f. Limit line-to-line voltage to 40 volts on 24VDC circuits. g. Have the following characteristics: 1) Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: 28VDC 2) Ambient Temperature Range: -20 degrees C to+65 degrees C 3) Response Time (Line-to-Line): 5 ns D. Communication circuit protection 1. Surge protection devices for copper-based data communication circuits shall: a. Be designed for the specific data communication media and protocol to be protected (e.g.,telephone, serial, parallel, network, data highway, coax,twinaxial, twisted pair, RF). b. Provide protection of equipment to within the equipment's surge withstand levels for applicable standard test wave forms of the following standards: 1) IEC 60-1/ DIN VDE 0432 part 2 2) CCITT K17/ DIN VDE 0845 part 2 3) IEEE C62.31 Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers And Surge Suppressors 40 78 56 -3 C. Have a nonflammable enclosure that meets or exceeds UL 94 VO flammability requirements. d. Provide automatic recovery. 2.02 INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIERS AND RELAYS A. Intrinsically safe relays and barriers shall be provided where required to interface with equipment located in Classified (i.e., hazardous) areas. B. Intrinsically safe relays and barriers shall be FM approved. C. Manufacturer shall be 1. Pepperl+Fuchs 2. Crouse Hinds 3. Square D 4. Or equal. 2.03 ISOLATORS AND CONVERTERS A. Signal converters shall be provided as required to provide control functions and to interface instrumentation and controls, equipment panels, motor control centers and other instrumentation and controls supplied under other Divisions to the controls provided herein. B. General Requirements 1. Converters shall be of the miniature type, utilizing all solid-state circuitry suitable for mounting within new or existing cabinetry. Where sufficient cabinet space is not available, sub panels or supplemental enclosures shall be provided. 2. Power supply shall be 120V, 60 hertz where required by the converter, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Repeatability shall be 0.1%of span, deadband shall be 0.1%span, maximum. 4. Where specific converters are not listed, but are required to interface with the process control system,they shall comply with the general requirements stated herein. C. Current to Current (1/1) Isolators 1. Current to current isolators shall be furnished where necessary to provide an isolated current loop, calculations or signal amplification between the plant process control system and instrumentation and control loops. Isolators shall be sized such that resistance of existing loops shall not exceed maximum rated resistance. Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers And Surge Suppressors 40 78 56 -4 2. Isolators shall be as manufactured by AGM, Moore Industries, Rochester Instrument Systems (RIS), Phoenix Contact, Weidmuller, Acromag, or equal. D. Voltage to Current(E/1)Transducers 1. Voltage to current (or current to voltage)transducers shall convert a voltage signal of one magnitude to a 4 20 milliamp DC current signal.The output current shall be directly proportional to the input signal voltage. Transducers shall be sized such that loop resistance does not exceed maximum rated resistance. 2. Transducers shall be as manufactured by AGM, Moore Industries, Rochester Instrument Systems (RIS), Phoenix Contact, Weidmuller, Acromag, or equal. E. Frequency to Current (F/1)Transducers 1. Frequency to current transducers shall convert pulse rate and pulse duration signals to 4 20 mA, 24 VDC analog signals. Converters shall include field adjustable input frequency range. Converter power shall be 120 VAC, 60 hertz.Transducers shall be sized such that loop resistance does not exceed maximum rated resistance.Transducers shall be suitable for signal transmission via leased telephone lines. 2. Transducers shall be Series 5100 as manufactured by AGM, or equivalent by Moore Industries, Rochester Instrument Systems (RIS), Phoenix Contact, Weidmuller, Acromag, or equal. F. Current to Frequency (I/F)Transducers 1. Current to frequency transducers shall convert 4 20 mA, 24 VDC analog signals to pulse rate and pulse duration signals. Converters shall include field adjustable output frequency range. Converter power shall be 120 VAC, 60 hertz.Transducers shall be sized such that loop resistance does not exceed maximum rated resistance.Transducers shall be suitable for signal transmission via leased telephone lines. 2. Transducers shall be Series 5016 as manufactured by AGM, Moore Industries, Rochester Instrument Systems (RIS), Phoenix Contact,Weidmuller,Acromag, or equal. G. Integrators 1. Integrators shall be provided as interchangeable plug in modules with zero and span adjustment available on the front plate of the units. Output shall range from 0 to 0.1 through 0 to 10 pulses per second. Accuracy shall be+ 0.1%of input span. Integrators shall convert linear analog signals to pulse rate and provide a solid state output. 2. Integrators shall be as manufactured by AGM Electronics, Moore Industries, Rochester Instrument Systems (RIS), Phoenix Contact,Weidmuller,Acromag, or equal. H. Electronic Switches (Alarm Relays) Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers And Surge Suppressors 40 78 56 -5 1. Electronic switches shall be furnished with a calibrated dial for adjusting set points.The input to the switch shall be 4- 20 mA DC, and the set point shall be adjustable over the full range. Unless otherwise noted,the dead band shall be fixed at less than 2%of span. The set point stability shall be+0.1% per degree F.The repeatability shall be +0.1%of span.The units shall be furnished with SPDT relays rated at 10 amperes at 115 VAC. 2. Electronic switches shall be as manufactured by AGM, Moore Industries, Rochester Instrument Systems (RIS), Phoenix Contact,Weidmuller,Acromag, or equal. I. RTD to Current Signal Converters 1. RTD to current signal converters shall convert a 3-wire RTD input signal to an isolated 4 20 mADC output signal. Accuracy shall be 0.10%of span or better. Calibrated span of each converter shall be as indicated on the instrument list.The Contractor shall coordinate calibration of the signal converters with existing RTD elements. 2. Signal converters shall be as manufactured by AGM, Moore Industries, Rochester Instrument Systems (RIS), Phoenix Contact,Weidmuller,Acromag, or equal. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. See Section 40 78 00—Panel Instruments and Accessories,for additional requirements. END OF SECTION Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers And Surge Suppressors 40 78 56 -6 SECTION 40 78 59 POWER SUPPLIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish,test, install and place in satisfactory operation all power supplies, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. All power conditioners shall be mounted within consoles or control panels containing the associated digital equipment unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. C. One power conditioner shall be provided for each PLC cabinet provided under this Contract. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 6113—Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 63 43—Programmable Logic Controllers PART 2— EQUIPMENT 2.01 POWER CONDITIONERS A. Each power conditioner shall be sized to match the maximum power requirements of the associated digital equipment, control panel power supplies and accessories. B. Each power conditioner shall meet the following requirements: 1. Input voltage shall be 120 VAC, single phase, 60 Hz. 2. Voltage regulation shall be 3%for line changes of+10%/-20%. 3. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 3%of RMS. 4. Ambient operating temperature shall be from -20 to 50 degrees C. C. Power conditioners shall be Sola Model MCR, or equal. Power Supplies 40 78 59 - 1 PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 6113—Process Control System General Provisions. END OF SECTION Power Supplies 40 78 59 -2 SECTION 409443 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. References: 1. NFPA 70(NEC) 2. Programming Languages IEC 61131-3 3. City IT Wastewater Dept PLC SCADA Standards 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Programmable logic controllers for control of process equipment, process oriented machinery, and process systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of PLC include dimensions, mounting arrangements, and weights. Also include, manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and terminal connections. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide for each PLC component literature detailing routine maintenance requirements (if any). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer shall have, within 100 miles of Project site, a facility, distributor, system integrator, or panel shop capable of providing training, parts, and coordination of emergency maintenance and repairs. B. Source Limitations: 1. Provide all PI-Cs from a single manufacturer. If the PLC manufacturer has authorized third party vendors to provide modules that are compatible with their platforms, then products manufactured by these authorized third party vendors will be acceptable. 2. To insure reliability and compatibility with all aspects of the control system, all PLC equipment shall be from the same vendor as the SCADA software, Operator Interface Terminals, and Power Distribution Equipment. C. Comply with NFPA 70. Programmable Controllers 40 94 43-1 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver PLC components in packaging designed to prevent damage from static electricity, and physical damage. B. Store PI-Cs according to manufacturers' requirements. 1.6 SPARE 1/0 A. Each PLC will be sized to handle the required 1/0 plus a percentage of spares. When calculating spare 1/0 count,always round up. When configuring spare 1/0 counts, use the following criteria: 1. Analog Inputs(Al): Required for the PLC plus 15%. 2. Analog Ouputs(AO): Required for the PLC plus 15%. 3. Digital Inputs(DI): Required for the PLC plus 15%. 4. Digital Outputs(DO): Required for the PLC plus 15%. 1.7 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish spare parts as described below for each type of PLC. Material shall be packaged for long term storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 1/0 Cards: Provide as a minimum a spare of each type of card identified. Provide an additional spare for every 10 cards of a specific type installed. 2. Processors: Provide as a minimum a spare for each type of CPU identified. 3. PLC oriented Power Supplies: Provide as a minimum a spare of each type of power supply identified. Provide an additional spare for every 10 power supplies of a specific type installed. 4. Memory Cards: Provide as a minimum a spare of each type of card identified. Provide an additional spare for every 10 cards of a specific type installed 5. Specialty Modules: Provide as a minimum a spare of each type of module identified. Provide an additional spare for every 10 modules of a specific type installed PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Qualified Manufacturers: 1. Only manufacturers that have been selling PI-Cs for a minimum of 25 years will be considered acceptable. 2.2 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS A. GENERAL: Programmable Controllers 40 94 43-2 1. Description: A module based PLC designed for up to 8192 points of 1/0. Each module shall have a limited amount of 1/0, an ability to accept communication or processor card, and an integrated power supply for that module and communication or processor card. The PLC shall not require a chassis or rack. 2. The PLC shall: a. Collect data, perform process control functions, communicate with other PLCs, and distribute process information along the local area network. b. Be able to have its program downloaded from a remote workstation over a network, or locally programmed from a portable laptop computer. C. Allow for the expansion of the system by addition and configuration of hardware. 3. Executive firmware shall be stored in Flash memory and can be updated in the field using standard programming tools. Executive firmware files shall be readily available via a public web site. 4. Each discrete point shall have a light emitting diode to indicate point status. An illuminated LED shall indicate that the point is logic level "1",also referred to as"on"or"high". 5. The PLC shall utilize Ethernet protocols that meet the following: a. Protocols that are assigned to port 502 of the TCP/IP stack by the IANA(Internet Assigned Numbers Authority). b. Devices must utilize embedded web pages, or a physical means such as DIP switches, to be recognized and properly addressed on the network. Ethernet protocols that require network management software, or utilize configuration files that must be downloaded to Ethernet devices,for proper network addressing,and recognition are not acceptable. C. Will not rely on third party vendors to meet the above criteria. 6. Processor Features: a. Each processor shall have a RS-232 Modbus port for programming. Processor performance shall be rated at least 1ms/K. Acceptable processors are detailed below: 1) 512Kb of internal user RAM. Processor shall have a RS-232 Modbus port and an Ethernet port. 2) 512Kb of internal user RAM. Processor shall have a 1/0 bus port and an Ethernet port. 3) Stand alone processor with 512Kb of internal user RAM. Processor shall have a RS- 232 Modbus port and a 4 Ethernet port. b. The PLC shall utilize a battery to protect the memory in the case of power loss. C. The PLC shall have on board status lights to indicate the following various functions: 1) Program execution 2) Communication status 7. I/0: The PLC modules shall have embedded 1/0 capability. Modules will be available that supports the following: a. Analog Inputs: All Analog input cards will offer isolation between channels. 1) Four (4) +/- 25mV, +/- 100mV, Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T differential input 2) Eight(8)+/- 10V or 0-20mA differential input. Programmable Controllers 40 94 43-3 3) Sixteen (16)+/-10V or 0-20mA single ended input. b. Analog Outputs: All analog output cards will offer isolation between channels, 1) Four(4) channel+/-10V,0-20mA output C. Discrete Inputs: 1) Sixteen (16)channel sink 24VDC input cards 2) Sixteen (16)channel 120VAC input card d. Discrete Outputs: 1) Sixteen (16)channel 24VDC(0.5A/channel) solids state switch output card 2) Eight(8)channel 120VAC(0.5A/channel)output card. 3) Sixteen (16)channel 120VAC(0.5A/channel)output card. 8. Specialized 1/0 Cards:The PLC shall have a series of application specific 1/0 cards. These will be as follows: a. High speed counter card: Six(6)channels rated 24VDC at 10 KHz single ended,or Three (3) channels SVDC at 200Khz differential. b. Combination Card with Six (6) 120 VAC inputs, and Three (3) solid state switch output. Card will include a Modbus port. 9. Communication Capabilities: Each base module will be capable of mounting a communication card. Cards will be available for the following protocols: a. Ethernet TCP/IP utilizing Modbus TCP protocol b. Modbus Plus C. Modbus d. Fipio e. Interbus-S f. Profibus g. DeviceNet 10. Option Adapters: The PLC shall have a series of option adapters to enhance the communication capabilities of the processors. The option adapters shall fit between the module and processor card. The adapter will fit in the same spot reserved for processor or communication cards. The option adapters will be available with the following configurations: a. Single Modbus Plus port b. Redundant Modbus Plus ports C. Single serial port with RS-232 or RS-285 configuration via software. 11. Power Supplies: Each module shall have an integral power supply. The modules shall be available in both 24 VDC and 115 VAC models. The power supply should be capable of powering the 1/0 and communication adapter; 1/0 and processor; or 1/0, processor, and will be from 16 to 36W. B. PLC PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS: a. The system shall utilize manufacturer's standard programming software. C. PLC ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: 1. The PI-Cs must meet or exceed the following environmental requirements: a. Minimum temperature range: 1) Operating: 0-550C(+32 to+1310F) Programmable Controllers 40 94 43-4 2) Storage: -25 to+700 C(-13 to+158°F) b. Relative humidity: 30 to 95%non condensing. C. Altitude: 1) Operation 0-6,500 feet minimum 2) Storage 0-9,800 feet minimum d. Degree of protection: NEMA 1(I1320) D. MANUFACTURER: 1. The basis of design is the Allen Bradley 5069 series as per City Wastewater PLC SCADA Standards by IT Department. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Select PLC based upon 1/0, memory, communication, expansion, and system requirements. If multiple PLC panels from different vendors will be supplied, coordinate with other vendors to insure that PI-Cs are of similar brand and are equipped to utilize identical communication networks. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. PLC mounting shall be in accordance with manufacturers requirements. This includes anchorage within enclosures, spacing, wire sizing, and ventilation requirements. Before starting up, remove all temporary stickers used to cover ventilation holes. B. PLC lights, keys, communication ports, and memory card slots shall be accessible at all times. Lights shall be visible at all times when enclosure door is opened. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify PLC components, and wiring according to all applicable codes, standards and contract document sections. B. Each 1/0 point shall be identified on the door of PLC 1/0 cards. C. DEMONSTRATION 1. Control panel supplier shall provide a qualified service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain PI-Cs. Manufacturer's standard training will be sufficient unless specified elsewhere. END OF SECTION 40 94 43 Programmable Controllers 40 94 43-5 SECTION 4122 13.19 JIB CRANE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Jib crane. 2. Hoist and trolley. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 36—Specification for Gray Iron Castings 2. A 572 — Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. 1330.10 Hooks 2. 1330.11 Monorails and Underhung Cranes 3. 1330.16 Overhead Hoists (Underhung) C. Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA): 1. Specification No. 70—Single Girder Cranes D. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): MG-1, Motors and Generators. E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70, National Electric Code. F. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA): 1. 1910.179—Overhead and Gantry Cranes 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide jib crane system consisting of support frame system, hoist trolley unit, trolley drives, pendant push button control system, electrical control panel, if required, and all related appurtenances for a complete operating system. B. Specific Requirements:All information listed in Table 1 must be provided by the manufacturer in the submittal. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General:Jib crane shall be manufactured in accordance with current mandatory requirements of OSHA Section 1910.179, the appropriate standards of ANSI specifications, the National Electric Code, and the CMAA specifications. The jib crane must meet the minimum requirements of 10 foot boom Length with the ability to handle a 2-ton pump capacity with PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 13.19-PAGE 1 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 JIB CRANE SEPTEMBER 2025 the manufacturer's factor of safety or capacity to handle the pump submitted with the manufacturer's factor of safety. B. General configuration for the crane supporting framework shall not interfere with other equipment, electrical boxes, conduit or piping. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate final dimensions. C. Jib crane, hoist, trolley, and support frame system shall be capable of lifting and transporting rated load at any point along the specified travel area with deflection of the runway beams not exceeding length over 600 and support frame structural members deflection shall be limited to not impede trolley travel or exceed AISC requirements. 1. Jib crane mast limits, hook and trolley travel limits shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein. 2. The jib crane bumper shall be designed to limit stopping forces carrying the rated load at the specified speeds. D. CMAA Specification No. 74 has four classifications that are based on the level of service of the system. E. Class C— Moderate Service: Lifts 50% of rated load 5 to 10 times per hour, averaging 15 feet per lift. F. Crane design, including stress limitations, factors of safety, bearing life and contactor rating, shall be in accordance with applicable provisions of CMAA specifications, Class A"Stand-by or Infrequent Service" where capacity load is handled during installation and during infrequent maintenance service, unless otherwise specified. G. The crane must be capable of installation with adequate horizontal and vertical clearances from adjacent structural components. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,components,and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Modifications required for outdoor operating conditions, if applicable. 4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 5. Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA, motor manufacturer, and include any motor specifications. 6. Mounting systems: For wall mounting. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 1 Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." D. Information Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 13.19-PAGE 2 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 JIB CRANE SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 3. Manufacturer's instructions for installation. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 5. Location of nearest stocking distributor of spare parts. 6. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of one year. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current pricing information. 7. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer and factory-authorized service representative. 8. Welding certificates. 9. Factory Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer. 10. Field quality-control reports. 11. Product Certificates: For each jib crane furnished manufacturer's compliance with the specifications and suitable for the environment. 12. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Jibe crane shall be the product of a manufacturer having at least ten U.S. installations of the type being proposed each with a minimum of 5 years of satisfactory service. 2. A list of similar installations shall be furnished upon request with the shop drawing submittal, including names and telephone numbers of contacts. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain jib cranes from single source. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." 2. AWS D14.1 "Welding Industrial and Mill Cranes and Other Materials Handling Equipment." E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle and store the bridge crane system components in accordance with shop drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and the requirements of Division 1 "General Requirements." 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: 1. All equipment including controls and drives specified herein shall be specifically designed for this service and the environment encountered in this installation. 2. The environment will be moist, and corrosive, exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal wastewater treatment plants. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 13.19-PAGE 3 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 JIB CRANE SEPTEMBER 2025 3. Designed and capable of operation at ambient temperatures ofOoF to 110oF.Outdoor installations shall be capable of operation in the various weather conditions experienced at Project location. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of bridge crane that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2)years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Cost for the removal, shipment, repair and installation of components by CONTRACTOR shall be included in warranty, as well as correction of defective work. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Provide one (1) set of spare parts for all components exposed to operational wear during normal equipment service. 1. Special tools necessary to maintain the equipment. 2. Parts recommended by the manufacturer as typically needed in the first two years of operation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Ace Industries Crane & Hoist 2. ProservCrane Group, Irving,Texas. 3. KCI Kone Cranes, Rockwall,Texas. 4. Shannahan Crane & Hoist 2.2 JIB CRANE A. Mast and Boom: 1. Designed using ASTM A-36 or ASTM A-572, GR 50, structural steel beams, reinforced as required or fabricated plate box sections. 2. Designed for loadings, stresses, and stability in accordance with CMAA design specifications. 3. Gusset and End Plate Connections: Utilized high strength ASTM A-325 bolts. 4. Design Parameters: Capacity, boom length, rotation and related parameters shall be as shown on the drawings and as designated in the Performance paragraph. 5. Safety Factor: 3:1 6. Crane mounting shall be as shown on the Drawings, designated herein, and in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 7. Floor Mounted Jib Cranes: a. Boom fabricated using steel I-beam with removable end stops. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 13.19-PAGE 4 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 JIB CRANE SEPTEMBER 2025 b. Provide machined lower roller carriage housed in the jib crane head section, which is protected by steel side plates. Mount carriage of adjustable tension bolts permitting field adjustments. C. Mast constructed of steel pipe with heavy duty base plate and reinforcing gussets. 8. Wall Mounted Jib Cranes: a. Either full cantilevered wall mounted or overbraced tie rod wall mounted type constructed of steel components and designed for industrial use. b. Hinges: Equipped with self-lubricating Teflon bearings and hardened pins. C. Rotation: 180-degree manual rotation. B. Hoist, Chain Type: 1. Hoists shall be electric chain with chain container with a minimum lift of 30 feet. 2. All hoist hooks shall have safety latches. 3. The hoisting machinery shall consist of a chain, driven through suitable gear reductions by an electric motor operator, load blocks, hooks, and hoist braking. 4. Hoist gearing shall be helical or spur type made from rolled or cast steel and shall have machine cut teeth. Pinions shall be made from alloy steel and shall be heat-treated. 5. The load block shall be furnished with ball or roller bearing sheaves and a roller type hook thrust bearing. Hook block sheaves and running sheaves shall be rolled or forged steel,furnished with anti-friction type bearings. 6. Hooks shall have sufficient ductility to open noticeably before hook failure as a result of abuse or overload. The load hook shall be equipped with safety latch and shall be free to rotate 360 degrees with rated load, and shall be positively held in place with locknuts, collars, or other suitable devices. 7. A control circuit, upper limit switch shall be provided to stop the hoist when it reaches the highest lift position. 8. Factory Testing: Provide Certificate verifies that every hoist has been factory load tested to 125% rated capacity in accordance with ASME B30.16. 9. Color: Safety yellow baked enamel finish with load rating indicated in large black letters on the side of hoist. C. Hoist,Wire Rope Type: 1. Description: Hoists shall be electric, wire rope type consisting of a rope drum, driven through suitable gear reductions by an electric motor operator, load blocks, hooks, hoisting rope, sheaves, and hoist braking. 2. Hoist Gearing: a. Enclosed in an oil tight gear case having splash lubricated bearings and gears. b. Bearings selected to provide a B-10 life to equal or exceed CMAA requirements. C. Provide a bolt-on gear case cover for full access to bearings and gearing and an inspection cover to permit gear inspection without draining oil. The gear case shall be equipped with an oil level sight gauge. d. Gearing shall be helical or spur type made from rolled or cast steel and shall have machine cut teeth. Pinions shall be made from alloy steel and shall be heat-treated. 3. Hoist drum: a. Fabricated from seamless steel tubing, grooved to take the full length of each cable in one (1) layer. At least two (2) wraps of rope shall remain on the drum PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 13.19-PAGE 5 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 JIB CRANE SEPTEMBER 2025 when the bottom block is in the lowest position. Drum shall be grooved on the left and right side to provide true vertical lift. b. Diameter of the drum shall not be less than 24 times the diameter of the hoisting cable which shall be extra flexible improved plow steel having six (6) strands of 37 wires per strand. 4. The load block shall be furnished with ball or roller bearing sheaves and a roller type hook thrust bearing. Hook block sheaves and running sheaves shall be rolled or forged steel, furnished with anti-friction type bearings. Pitch diameter of the running sheaves to be minimum 24 times the rope diameter. 5. Hooks shall have sufficient ductility to open noticeably before hook failure as a result of abuse or overload. The load hook shall be equipped with safety latch and shall be free to rotate 360 degrees with rated load, and shall be positively held in place with locknuts, collars, or other suitable devices. 6. Factory Testing: Provide Certificate verifies that every hoist has been factory load tested to 125% rated capacity in accordance with ASME 1330.16. 7. Color: Safety yellow baked enamel finish with load rating indicated in large black letters on the side of hoist. D. Hoist Trolley: Rigid body trolley designed to ride inside monorail designed to carry hoist and load or constructed in combination with hoist. 1. Construction: Two-piece stamped steel body with two wheels each side and, if separate, a tapered clevis positioning hoist hook at center of trolley so load weight is evenly distributed to all four trolley wheels. 2. Wheels: Four, removable, self-centering wheels with sealed lifetime lubricated bearings. 3. Operation: Motorized or manually. 2.3 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Provide assembled electrical equipment on the crane, including motors, motor starters, pendant control and conduit. Cables furnished shall be cut to length and installed, as far as practical, for shipment. B. Electrical equipment shall be furnished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Article 610 of the latest issue of the National Electrical Code. Grounding on the equipment and provisions for grounding the equipment to external grounding systems shall be in accordance with the requirements of the NEC and state and local regulations. C. Motors shall be squirrel-cage type, NEMA Design B for crane and trolley motors and NEMA Design D for hoist motor, in accordance with NEMA Standards; rated on not less than a 60- minute basis,with temperature rise in accordance with the latest NEMA Standards for the class of insulation and enclosure used. Overload relays shall be provided in all phases of polyphase alternating current motor. D. Provide a pendant control having momentary contact pushbuttons and a device, which will disconnect motors from the line on failure of power, and will not permit any motor to be restarted until the controller handle is brought to the OFF position or actuation of a reset switch or button. Undervoltage protection shall be provided as a function of each motor controller, or by a magnetic main line contactor. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 13.19-PAGE 6 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 JIB CRANE SEPTEMBER 2025 E. Controls shall be fully magnetic of the plain reversing type, housed in NEMA Type 12 (Indoor service) or NEMA 4 (Outdoor service) enclosure. Each magnetic control shall have contactors of sufficient size and quantity for starting, accelerating, reversing and stopping duty for the specified crane service class. For variable speed motors, inverters for the hoist, and trolley controls shall be provided. F. Provide control transformers to supply 120 Volts ac to the pushbutton control stations. The pushbutton control stations shall be of heavy duty, oil-tight construction and suspended from the trolley or bridge. As required, the control station shall contain pushbuttons for control of the crane, hoist,and trolley and an ON/OFF switch to operate a main line contactor which shall remove all power from the control station. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Identification Plates:A 16-gauge stainless steel identification plate shall be securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. The plate shall bear 1/4-inch die- stamped equipment identification number indicated in this Section and/or on the Drawings. B. Lifting Lugs: Individual equipment and/or each field disassemble part weighing over 100 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs C. Anchor Bolts: Provide template and Type 316 stainless steel anchors in accordance with Division 5 Section "Anchor Bolts, Expansion Anchors, and Concrete Inserts" and as shown on the Drawings. Size as required by manufacturer. D. Initial Supply of Lubricants: Manufacturer shall indicate types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install the recommended lubricants and shall comply with all manufacturer recommended procedures. E. Grease Fittings: If applicable, manufacturer shall extend all grease fittings into one of three locations: each end truck (near access platform end) and on platform side of trolley (in one central location). It shall be possible to service all lubrication areas from these three locations. 2.5 FINISHES A. Select the finish coating for the equipment based on location, substrate, and environment. Refer to Division 9 Section 09 91 00 "Painting and Protective Coatings" and Coating System Schedule for information. 1. Provide polyurethane, pigmented (over epoxy zinc rich primer and high build epoxy. 2. Color: Safety Yellow, with the crane load rating indicated in large black letters on the side of the girders. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 1. Factory Tests: Equipment shall be fully assembled,subjected to no-load running tests and dismantled only as required to facilitate shipment. Hoist and trolley shall be load tested in the factory. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 13.19-PAGE 7 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 JIB CRANE SEPTEMBER 2025 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install and adjust equipment in accordance with the Drawings, approved shop drawings, and the manufacturer's instructions. Do not operate the equipment until the installation is approved by the manufacturer's representative. B. Comply with the requirements of Division 1 Section 0170 00 "Execution Requirements." 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Carefully handle and install the jib crane in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on the plans. 1. Install hoist trolley and stops. 2. Remove protective coatings and oils used for protection during shipment and installation. 3. Flush, fill, and grease lubricated systems in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Complete crane installation with controls, safety devices and auxiliary support systems necessary to start the equipment and verify that the crane functions correctly under no load conditions. C. Equipment 1. Check jib crane for correct operation and freedom of moving parts. 2. Align equipment to Manufacturer's tolerances. Adjust clearances and torques. 3. Check installation prior to start-up for conformance to Manufacturer's instructions. 4. Adjust or modify equipment to ensure proper operation. D. Correct any deficiencies or problems noted in Manufacturer's representative's installation reports. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Conduct field tests with the equipment in its installed position. 1. Perform a load test equal to 125 percent their rated capacity through the full range of travel motions and demonstrate to the Engineer that, under this load condition, the equipment shall perform satisfactorily throughout the complete range of operation. 2. Check crane operation for excessive noise, vibration, alignment, and general operation. The unit shall perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by the Owner B. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Project site or classroom designated by OWNER, for minimum person-days listed below,travel time excluded: No. Person Days Work Description 1/2 Installation assistance and inspection. 1/2 Functional and performance testing. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 13.19-PAGE 8 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 JIB CRANE SEPTEMBER 2025 1/4 Pre-startup classroom or site training. 1/2 Facility startup. 1/4 Post-startup training of OWNER'S personnel. B. Manufacturer's Representative For Startup And Testing: C. The services of the Manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided for pre-startup installation checks, startup assistance, training of Owner's operating personnel, troubleshooting and other services as required in Division 1 Section 01 75 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup". END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 13.19-PAGE 9 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 JIB CRANE SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 13.19-PAGE 10 OF 10 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 JIB CRANE SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 4122 18 BRIDGE CRANES,TROLLEYS,AND HOISTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide labor, material, equipment and incidentals to install,test and place in satisfactory operation the electric overhead traveling bridge cranes with controls and appurtenances, as specified herein.The work includes, but is not limited to, hoist, bridge, crane rail,trolleys, electrification, motor starters, limit switches and controls. I Crane runways, end stops and supports are outside the scope of this section and shall be provided and installed within Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA) specifications for straightness, span, and level. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with 0133 00 Submittal Procedures. I The following submittals are required, at a minimum, in addition to any other applicable requirements of Specification 0133 00. 1. Shop drawings specific to project and applicable product data bound neatly in a single package. The following information shall be included as a minimum: a. Manufacturer and model number of equipment. b. Layout drawings including all proposed system components with dimensions, clearances required and sizes indicated, and arrangement and size of connections. C, Listing of materials of construction, details of construction, specification and data for all components and coatings information. d. Complete information on electric motors furnished including make and type of motor, brake horsepower and locked rotor current at full voltage. e, Complete wiring diagrams and data on controls to be furnished. f, Layout, size,type and material for anchor bolts to be furnished. g, Color selection charts for coatings. 2. Location of nearest stocking distributor of spare parts. 1 Complete operation and maintenance data for all equipment in accordance with 0133 00 Submittal Procedures. 4. Startup and test schedule. 5. Equipment installation report with field test data and test records. . Warranties and service agreements. C. Submittal Quality Assurance/Control 1. All deviations from contract documents shall be clearly identified and approved in writing by the ENGINEER. 2. Any other information necessary for the ENGINEER to determine compliance with the specifications. I Partial or incomplete submittals will not be reviewed by ENGINEER 4. In the event it is not possible to conform to certain details of this Section, describe PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 18-PAGE 1 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 BRIDGE CRANES,TROLLEYS AND HOISTS SEPTEMBER 2025 completely all non-conforming aspects. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with all applicable Federal, State and local codes and with requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. B. Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA) 1. CMAA 74—Specification for Top Running& Under Running Single Girder Electric Traveling Cranes Utilizing Under Running Trolley Hoist 2. CMAA 70—Specification for Top Running Bridge &Gantry Type Multiple Girder Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes C. Hoist Manufacturer's Institute Specification No. HMI 100 U, National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-1984 National Electric Code. E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): ICS 2-1978 Industrial control devices, controllers and assemblies; ICS 6-1983 Enclosures for industrial controls. F. Where reference is made to one of the above standards,the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Professional Engineer: a. CONTRACTOR or crane and hoist manufacturer shall retain a registered professional engineer legally qualified to practice in same state as the Site. Professional engineer shall have at least five years experience designing hoist, bridge, crane rail,trolleys, electrification, motor starters, limit switches and controls. b. Responsibilities include: 1) Reviewing crane and hoist system performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. 2) Preparing written requests for clarifications or interpretations of performance or design criteria for submittal to ENGINEER by CONTRACTOR. ) Preparing or supervising preparation of design calculations verifying compliance of aluminum handrail and railing system with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4) Signing and sealing all calculations. C. Certifying that: 1) Design of crane system was performed in accordance with performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents, and 2) Design conforms to all applicable local, state, and federal Laws and Regulations,and to prevailing standards of practice. B. Design of the overhead bridge crane shall be in general conformance to CMAA 74 and 70. All structural steel members of the handling system shall be designed in accordance with AISC current edition and all welded construction shall be in accordance with the standards of the AWS. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 18-PAGE 2 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 BRIDGE CRANES,TROLLEYS AND HOISTS SEPTEMBER 2025 C. Certification of Compliance with OSHA, Part 1910 subpart N, section 1910.179, Overhead and Gantry Cranes shall also be submitted. D, Permanently mark the capacity of the hoist,trolley and crane on each unit, in easy to read letters in a prominent position. E. Warranty—The warranty period shall be 12 months from the date of commissioning of the crane by the manufacturer. In the event of failure of any part or parts of the equipment during the warranty period due to defects of design, materials, or workmanship;the provider shall replace affected parts promptly upon notification by the owner or contractor. All replacement parts shall be furnished, delivered, and installed at the expense of the equipment provider. 1.5 DESCRIPTION OF CRANES A. An overhead under running single girder industrial bridge crane system shall be installed at the Schertz Lift Station as shown on the Drawings. Bridge shall be designed/rated for outdoor use and exposure. Operating requirements are as follows: 1. Capacity: determined by pump selection (around 2-tons) 2. CMAA classification: Class C/Outdoor Service 1 Span: Approximately 25 feet max 4o Height of lift: As determined by Manufacturer 5. Hook height (elevation) required: EL-10.90 & Hoist: Capable of reaching pumps as shown on drawings 7. Top of runway beam elevation: As determined by Manufacturer 9, Hoist speed—determined by Manufacturer 9. Trolley speed—Manual 10. Bridge speed - Manual 11.. Length of runway:Approximately 25 feet max 12. Runway rail—ASCE crane rail with hook bolts and splice plates 11 Runway electrification—Shown on electrical drawings 14, Cross-bridge electrification—C-track with festooned flat cable 1 . Type of control—Independently festooned push button pendant 16. Power supply:480V/3ph/6OHz 17. Environment—Outdoors, anti-corrosive features 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Suitably cover equipment and crate to provide protection against weather and possible damage in handling,transporting, and storage. Protect controls and electrical equipment from moisture and block, brace and otherwise restrain to prevent damage. 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts 1. Spare parts shall be supplied per manufacturer recommendation. 2. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear, indelible identification markings and shall be stored in a dry,warm location until transferred to the OWNER at the conclusion of the project. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 18-PAGE 3 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 BRIDGE CRANES,TROLLEYS AND HOISTS SEPTEMBER 2025 I Spare parts per Division 26. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A, Crane components herein specified shall be manufactured by Columbus McKinnon,Yale, Shawbox, Konecranes, R& M, Stahl, Harrington, Detroit Hoist,Acco, Coffing or approved equal, and shall conform to the standards of CMAA and HMI. I The following crane manufacturers are listed as acceptable in order to set a definite standard of quality and performance. Listed manufacturers and products are expected to fully comply with the specifications. L Prosery Crane Group 2. Ace Industries, Inc., Gaffey I KCI Konecranes 2.2 CRANE RUNWAY A, The crane supplier is not responsible for the design and installation of the runways, supports, end stops, and bracing.The crane supplier will provide wheel loading and other data required for this design.This scope shall be furnished as specified elsewhere in the contract documents. 13, Runway beams, supports, end stops, and bracing shall be furnished and installed in accordance with CMAA standards. 2.3 BRIDGE A� Bridge girders shall be structural steel sections or fabricated plate boxes and shall be designed to resist all vertical, lateral, and torsional forces combined as specified in CMAA 74. B. Bridge girder shall be rigidly connected to the end truck with connections designed and constructed to keep the entire bridge structure square and aligned under all operating conditions. Cope bridge girders as required to meet headroom criteria. C. The end truck frames shall be welded from structural shapes into a single unit of such strength as to prevent distortion and misalignment of gears or shafts under maximum rated load. D, Under hung end trucks shall be equipped with restraining lugs so that the drop of the truck will be limited to 1 inch in case of axle or wheel failure. 2.4 HOIST AND TROLLEY A� Provide standard headroom type hoist as required with rigid construction designed to transmit load to bridge without undue deflection and provisions to prevent drop of more than 1 inch in case of axle failure. I Steel or high grade cast iron drum designed to withstand combined crushing and bending loads, and not less than two complete wraps of hoisting rope to remain in grooves on drum when the hook is at its lowest position for lift specified and no overlapping of rope when the hook is at its highest point. C. Provide adjustable limit switch at upper and lower limits of hook travel and block operated upper safety limit switch to prevent two blocking of hoist. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 18-PAGE 4 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 BRIDGE CRANES,TROLLEYS AND HOISTS SEPTEMBER 2025 U, Hoist motor to be furnished with AC or DC disc brake capable of stopping and holding 125% of capacity loads and is applied automatically on power removal. Brakes shall be easily accessible for inspection and adjustment by removing cover plates. E. Hoist,trolley and pump combination shall clear the top slab elevation. 2.5 MOTORS A. Motors for hoist shall be totally enclosed, reversible motors adapted to crane service. 2.6 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS A, Supply a complete integral electrical control system consisting of mainline contactor, crane disconnect mounted on bridge with lockout provision,transformers, overload protection, limit switches, control devices, and motor controls designed for specified crane. Electrical enclosures shall be NEMA 4X rated. 1 . Compliance:All electrical equipment plus all conduit,wiring, panels, and enclosures shall be in accordance with applicable requirements for materials,workmanship, construction and installation of NEC. 2.7 CRANE CONTROL A. Crane shall be operated from a manually operated festooned push button pendant station with clearly marked two position buttons to include: ON/OFF, Hoist UP/DOWN, 2.8 TOOLS A. All special tools or fittings required for normal operation and maintenance of the bridge crane and hoists shall be furnished with the equipment. 2.9 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINT A, Ferrous metal gears,wheel treads and other similar surfaces obviously no to be painted shall be provided with a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. 1 Surface preparation shall be in accordance with SSPC—SP3 power tool clean C. Paint shall be manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive Safety Yellow paint. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Identification Plates:A 16-gauge stainless teel identification plate shall be securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. The plate shall bear the%- inch die-stamped equipment identification number. B. Grease fittings: Manufacturer shall extend all grease fittings into one of three locations: each end truck(near access platform end) and on platform side of trolley(in one central location). It shall be possible to service all lubrication areas from these three locations. C. Lifting lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 18-PAGE 5 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 BRIDGE CRANES,TROLLEYS AND HOISTS SEPTEMBER 2025 A. Verify runway dimensions and clearances in field prior to erection. I Install crane in strict conformance with recommendations of the manufacturer and under direct supervision of manufacturer's representative. C. Obtain approval before attaching any rigging or hoisting equipment to any part of the building structure. 3.2 STARTUP AND TESTING A. After crane installation, electrical contractor shall provide electrical service to the crane runway at specified location. P. Crane installer shall connect runway electrification to provided electrical service and start up crane. All functions and safety devices shall be adjusted and tested for proper working condition to determine that the equipment will perform satisfactorily and safely. C. Perform a periodic inspection and load test of the crane system with a load of 101-125%of the rated capacity per OSHA requirements. Provide documentation per OSHA requirements. D, Any deficiencies, defects, or failure shall be corrected and retested. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4122 18-PAGE 6 OF 6 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 BRIDGE CRANES,TROLLEYS AND HOISTS SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 43 22 10-PS COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section provides requirements common to the pumping unit specification sections of Division 43 and 46. In addition to the specific requirements of the individual pumping unit specification sections. The Manufacturer and CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ensuring all pumping units comply with the requirements of this Section.The detailed equipment specifications shall govern where this section conflicts with detailed sections. I CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and shall perform all labor necessary for the installation,testing, and placing into operation of all pumps and pumping appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. C. Equipment and Related Lists: Lists are included for the convenience of the Engineer and Contractor and are not complete listings of all pumps, equipment, devices and material to be provided under this Contract. The Contractor agrees to prepare his own material and equipment takeoff lists as necessary to meet the requirements of the Project. D, Related Sections: 1. Section 43 25 00-PS "Pumps, Submersible-Immersible". 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Pump Submittal Requirements: Following are supplemental requirements for pumping unit submittals. 1, Manufacturer to indicate points on the head/capacity curves, and the limits recommended for stable operation which the pumps may be operated without surge, cavitation and vibration.The stable operating range shall be as wide as possible based on the pumps actual hydraulic and mechanical tests. . Pump detailed description and specification. 3. Electrical data, including power, signal, and control wiring diagrams,with terminals and numbers. 4 Assembly and installation drawings including shaft size, seal, coupling, anchor bolt plan, part nomenclature, material list, outline dimensions and shipping weights. 5. Pump drive (including variable frequency drives) and motor in accordance with applicable motor specification sections. 6. Bearing life calculations. 7. Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA, motor manufacturer, and include any motor specifications. S, Documentation demonstrating factory finish is equivalent to finish system specified in this Section. 13. Information Submittals: 1, Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 1 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 2, Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 1 Manufacturer's Instructions for installation. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 5. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and manufacturer's representative. & Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of two years. Include a list of special tools required for checking,testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current pricing information. 7. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. S. Warranties and service agreements. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 0178 23-PS "Operation and Maintenance Data." D, Field Quality Control: Provide field testing and performance reports. E. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Instructions for field procedures for erection, adjustments, inspection, and testing shall be provided prior to installation of the pumping units. F. Guarantees: After completion,the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the OWNER the manufacturer's written guarantees,that the pumping units will operate within the published efficiencies, heads, and flow ranges and meet these specifications. G, Manufacturer's Warranty 1. The pump manufacturer shall furnish the City with a written guarantee to warrant pumps and components against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years after full operation and acceptance by the City. The warranty shall include 100%coverage of manufacturer's shop labor and parts for the first year,then 50%coverage through the 5th year. Pumps repaired under warranty shall be returned to the City's Wastewater Department with freight prepaid. H. Previous Installations List:A list of similar installations demonstrating the experience requirement shall be furnished. List shall include Manufacturer name. Each installation shall include project State, project City, project name, project date, equipment model number, owner(end user) name(s), and owner phone number(s). 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A, Deliver, handle and store equipment components in accordance with shop drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and the requirements of Section 0160 00-PS"Product Requirements". Special requirements for the storage and handling of pumping units will be provided in the specified pumping unit section. P. Motors shall be stored as indicated in Section 40 05 93-PS"Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment". 1.4 REFERENCES A. Reference Specifications,Standards, Codes, and Regulations: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 2 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 1, Various Project sections contain references to specifications, standards, codes, regulations, and other documentation and shall be considered a part of those sections as specified and modified. 2. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards,those documents are included as references under this Section as if referenced directly. 1 In the event of conflict between the requirements of the Project specification sections and those of the listed documents,the requirements of the Project specification sections shall prevail. 4, Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Opening of Bid. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents,the last version of the document before it was discontinued. B. Commercial Standards: All equipment, products, and their installation shall be in accordance with the following standards, as applicable, and as specified in each Section of these specifications. 1, American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. American Public Health Association (APHA). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). S. American Water Works Association (AWWA). & American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 7, American Welding Society(AWS). 8, Federal Specifications (FS). 0. Rubber Manufacturers of America (RMA). 10. Manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 11. General Industry Safety Orders (OSHA). C. The following standards are referred to in the various Project specification sections: 1. American National standards Institute (ANSI): a. B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250, and 800. b, B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel, Nickel Alloy, and Other Special Alloys. 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B31.3 Process Piping Code. b, B73.1 Specifications for Horizontal End Suction Centrifugal Pumps for Chemical Process. C. B73.2 Specifications for Vertical In-Line Centrifugal Pumps for Chemical Process. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. E101 Deep Well Vertical Turbine Pumps-Line Shaft and Submersible Types. 4, ASTM International, Inc. (ASTM): PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 3 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 a, A48—Specification for Gray Iron Castings b. A108—Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished C, A470—Specification for Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Forgings for Turbine Rotors and Shafts. d, A519—Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing e. A532—Specification for Abrasion-Resistance Cast Irons f, A536—Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. g, A582—Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars h. E448—Recommended Practice for Scleroscope Hardness Testing of Metallic Materials. L B62—Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. 5. Hydraulic Institute Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary, and Reciprocating Pumps. 6. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): MG-1, Motors and Generators. 7, National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70, National Electric Code. S. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF): NSF 61, Drinking Water Components—Health Effects. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Curves: All centrifugal pumps shall have a continuously rising curve. In no case shall the required horsepower at any point on the performance curve exceed the rated horsepower or service factor of the motor or engine. 1, The Contractor shall furnish certified pump curves showing the results of test pumping units of identical design, size, and horsepower as those to be furnished. Catalog curves are not acceptable. Graphs shall include: a, Pump Curve-Q in GPM, H in FEET b. Power Input Curve- KILOWATT C, Efficiency Curve (including motor)wire to water d. N.P.S.H. Curve e. Model, Impeller size, serial number t Motor rated HP,Voltage g. Date and place of test h. Customer for whom test was conducted Data in English units (gallons, feet, etc.) I Manufacturer Qualifications: Unless otherwise specified in the individual specification sections; 1. Acceptable EQUIPMENT SUPPPLIERS are subject to compliance with the Contract Documents,the following equipment suppliers are acceptable. a. Xylem/Flygt Corporation. 2, Like equivalent, "or-equal" item or substitution is permitted pending approval from PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 4 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 the ENGINEER and OWNER. 3. The submersible pumps and accessories,with the possible exception of the discharge connection assembly which shall be Flygt or compatible, for each lift station shall be furnished by a single manufacturer/supplier who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacturer of the pumps to be furnished. C. Installer Qualifications: 1. Unless otherwise specified in the individual specification sections; CONTRACTOR shall provide a manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. . Manufacturer's representative shall be provided for each pumping unit, 2 HP and larger for the periods indicated in the individual specification section. D. Source Limitations: Pumping units of each type specified as specified in the individual specification sections shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. This does not require that all equipment be manufactured by a single manufacturer, but does require that the manufacturer of the system shall be responsible for the complete system. E. Prebid Submittals:The Contractor shall obtain tentative approval of the submersible pumps prior to bidding the project. Tentative approval does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of providing and installing pumps that will comply with all sections of these specifications and that will function properly. To obtain tentative approval for bidding,the Contractor shall submit the following pre-bid submittals at least 3 weeks prior to the bid opening. Failure to obtain tentative approval shall be considered grounds for rejection of bid. F, All equipment shall have a 316 stainless steel manufacturer's nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place on the equipment showing the ratings, serial number, model number, manufacturer and other pertinent nameplate data. Unless it can be demonstrated that local parts and service have been available through the same financially sound firm on a continuing basis for at least 10 years,the spare parts listed below must be furnished with the pumps at no additional costs to the City. 1. Spare Parts: (For each type of pump) Z. Impeller b. Service Tools C. Upper mechanical seal d, Lower mechanical seal e. Wear ring f. Cable entry assembly g, Complete set of o-rings and gaskets h, Power Cable L Set of Bearings H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: UL Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, and marked for intended location and application. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 5 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install only such equipment as the designated single manufacturer certifies is suitable for use with its equipment and the service conditions. B. All manufactured items provided under this Section shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall be the products of reputable manufacturers specializing in the manufacture of such products. C. All combinations of manufactured equipment which are provided under these specifications shall be entirely compatible, and the CONTRACTOR and the designated single manufacturer shall be responsible for the compatible and successful operation of the various components of the units conforming to specified requirements. Each unit of equipment shall incorporate all basic mechanisms, coupling, electric motor or engine drive and unit mounting. All necessary mountings and appurtenances shall be included. U, Where two or more units of the same type and/or size of equipment are required, such units shall all be produced by the same manufacturer. E. Tolerance:Tolerances and clearances shall be as shown on the shop drawings and shall be closely adhered to. Machine work shall in all cases be of high-grade workmanship and finish, with due consideration to the special nature or function of the parts. F, Machine Finish:The type of finish shall be the most suitable for the application and shall be shown in micro-inches in accordance with ANSI 1346.1.The following minimum finishes shall be used: 1. Surface roughness not greater than 63 micro-inches shall be required for all surfaces in sliding contact. 2. Surface roughness not greater than 250 micro-inches shall be required for surfaces in contact where a tight joint is not required. 3. Rough finish not greater than 500 micro-inches shall be required for other machined surfaces. 4. Contact surfaces of shafts and stems which pass through stuffing boxes and contact surfaces of bearings shall be finished to not greater than 32 micro-inches. G, Noise Level: 1. When the equipment is in operation, no single piece of equipment shall exceed: , The OSHA noise level requirements for a one hour exposure, and the regulatory agency having jurisdiction where the Project is located. b. Or 80 dBA at a distance of 5-ft from the unit. 2. The maximum allowable noise level shall correspond to the type of occupancy and area classification as specified and shown on the Drawings. H, For additional products requirements, refer to Section 0160 00-PS"Product Requirements" for administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in the Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. 2.2 PUMPING UNIT REQUIREMENTS PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 6 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 A. Materials: All materials furnished as part of the pumping equipment shall be suitable for its intended use and service. Materials not specifically called for shall be high-grade, standard commercial quality,free from all defects and imperfection that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended, and, unless otherwise specified in the individual specification section, shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Cast iron pump casings and bowls shall be of close-grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A48, or equal. 2. Stainless steel (Type 316) pump impellers shall conform to ASTM A743. 3, Stainless steel pump shafts shall be of Type 400, Series. Miscellaneous stainless steel parts shall be of Type 316. 4. All anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise specified. 5. Buried or submerged bolts, nuts and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. I Bearings: Unless otherwise specified, bearings shall comply with the requirements listed below. 1. Be oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller type, designed to withstand the stresses of the service specified. 2. Rated in accordance with the latest revisions of ABMA Methods of Evaluating Load Ratings of Ball and Roller Bearings. 3. Have a minimum L-10 rating life of 50,000 hours.The rating life shall be determined using the maximum equipment operating speed. 4. Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed and lubricated, shall be fitted with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain and relief fittings. Extension tubes shall be used when necessary. Grease supply fittings shall be standard hydraulic alumite type. 5. Oil lubricated bearings shall be equipped with either a pressure lubricating system or a separate oil reservoir type system. Each oil lubrication system shall be of sufficient size to safely absorb the heat energy normally generated in the bearing under a maximum ambient temperature of 60°C and equipped with a filler pipe and an external level indicator gage. C. Couplings: 1. General: Pumps with a driver greater than 1/2 HP, and where the input shaft of a driven unit is directly connected to the output shaft of the driver, shall have its two shafts connected by a flexible coupling. 2. Requirements: a. Accommodate angular misalignment, parallel misalignment and end float, and cushions shock loads and dampens torsion vibrations. b, Consist of a tire with synthetic tension members bonded together in rubber; flexible member attached to flanges by means of clamping rings and cap screws; and flanges attached to the stub shaft by means of taper lock bushings which provide the equivalent of a shrunk-on fit. C. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the driver and the driven unit. Each coupling shall be sized and provided as recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the specific application, considering horsepower, speed of PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 7 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 rotation, and type of service. d, Where torque or horsepower capacities of couplings of the foregoing type is exceeded, provide Thomas-Rex, Falk Steel Flex, or equal couplings will be acceptable. D, V-Belt Drives: 1. V-belts and sheaves shall be of the best commercial grade and shall conform to ANSI and RMA Standards. , Unless otherwise specified,sheaves shall be machined from the finest quality gray cast iron. 1 Sheaves shall be statically balanced. For high speed application,where vibration is a problem, sheaves shall be dynamically balanced. Sheaves operating at high belt speeds may be required to be constructed of special materials. 4. To facilitate installation and disassembly, sheaves shall be furnished complete with taper lock or QD bushings as required. . Finish bored sheaves shall be furnished complete with keyseat and set screws. 6. Sliding motor bases shall be provided to adjust the tension of V-belts. E. Flanges: Suction and discharge flanges shall conform to ANSI standard B16.1 or B16.5 dimensions. F. Lubrication: 1. Vertical pump shafts shall be product water-lubricated, unless otherwise specified. Deep-well pumps and pumps with dry barrels shall have water-or oil-lubricated bearings and seals. 2. For all vertical propeller, mixed-flow, and turbine pumps, other than deep well pumps, of bowl sizes 10-inch and larger,the Contractor shall provide a stainless steel tube attached to the column for grease lubrication of bottom bearing. , Handholes: Handholes on pump casings shall be shaped to follow the contours of the casing to avoid any obstructions in the water passage. H, Vortex Suppressors:Vertical pumps shall be furnished with vortex suppressors. Drains: All gland seals, air valves, and cooling water drains shall be piped to the nearest floor sink, or drain,with galvanized steel pipe or copper tube, properly supported with brackets. J. Seals: Seals for water and wastewater pump shafts shall be either stuffing box or mechanical seals. Unless specified otherwise, stuffing boxes and mechanical seals shall be selected for highest reliability and for rugged service, conforming to the requirements set forth in this paragraph. 1. Stuffing Boxes: Where stuffing boxes are specified for the pump seal,they shall be of the best quality, using the manufacturer's suggested materials best suited for the specific application. a. For sewage, sludge, drainage, and liquids containing sediments,the seals shall be fresh-water flushed, using lantern rings. b, Description:Stuffing boxes shall be tapped to permit introduction of seal liquid and shall hold a minimum of five rows of packing. C. Stuffing boxes shall be face attached. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 8 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 d. Stuffing box and shaft shall be suitable for field installation,without machining or other modifications, of the mechanical seal specified above for the applicable pump and operating conditions. e. Lantern Rings: Bronze or Teflon,two-piece construction, and provided with tapped holes to facilitate removal. f- Packing: Unless otherwise specified,the packing material shall be die-molded packing rings of interlaced Teflon braiding, containing 50 percent ultrafine graphite impregnation to satisfy the following specification: 1) Shaft speeds-up to 2500 fpm 2) Temperature- up to 500 degrees F ) pH range-0-14 g, Glands: Bronze,two piece split construction. h, Impeller end of the packing on all but line-shaft pumps with external source water lubricated bearings shall be fitted with a SpiralTrac, Version P packing protection system as manufactured by EnviroSeal Engineering Products, Ltd, Nova Scotia, Canada. . Mechanical Seals: a. Description: Mechanical seal shall be of a nondestructive (nonfretting)type requiring no wearing sleeve for the shaft. Shafts for pumps specified with mechanical seals shall be furnished with no reduction in size through the seal area. b, Mechanical seals shall be the split cartridge type, requiring no field assembly, other than assembly around the shaft and insertion into the pump. Metal parts shall be Type 316 or 316L stainless steel. Springs shall be Hastelloy C. C, Rotary Faces: Ceramic or silicon carbide. d. Stationary Faces: Ceramic,tungsten carbide, or silicon carbide. e, Elastomers: Ethylene propylene or fluorocarbon. f, Service Operation: Full vacuum to 200 percent of the maximum specified operating pressure, but in any event not less than 200 psig. g. Unless otherwise specified, mechanical seals for pumping equipment shall be self-aligning, self-centering, single, Chesterton 442,AES or equivalent. h. Mechanical seals for all pumps (except lineshaft pumps where the seal barrier fluid is used for lineshaft bearing lubrication) shall be fitted with SpiralTrac Version F, N or D, as recommended by EnviroSeal Engineering Products, Ltd, Nova Scotia, Canada. i. Unless the pump manufacturer recommends a better seal for a specific application,the following mechanical seals shall be furnished with the pumps: 1) Raw sewage, sludge, or wastewater pumps = Double Seals 2) Abrasives,git, lime slurry pumps = Double Seals ) Chemicals and corrosive liquid pumps =Single Seals 4) Clean water pumps (hot and cold) =Single Seals j, If required by manufacturer, seal arrangements must use a buffer fluid circulated at a minimum 20 psi above suction pressure in order to maintain PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 9 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 reliable seal performance. 1 Shaft Sleeve: a, Section of shaft or impeller hub extending through or into the stuffing box shall be fitted with a replaceable stainless steel sleeve, having a Brinell hardness of not less than 500. b, Sleeve held to the shaft to prevent rotation and gasketed to prevent leakage between the shaft and the sleeve. C. Minimum shaft sleeve thickness shall be 3/8 inch. 2.3 PUMP APPURTENANCES A, Manufacturer Nameplate: Each pump shall be equipped with a stainless steel nameplate indicating rated head and flow, impeller size, pump speed, manufacturer's name and model number, and other appurtenant information. I Equipment Identification Plates:A 16-gauge stainless steel identification plate shall be securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. The plate shall bear 1/4- inch die-stamped equipment identification number indicated in this Section and/or on the Drawings. C. Lifting Lugs: Individual equipment and/or each field disassemble part weighing over 80 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs D, Anchor Bolts: Provide template and Type 316 stainless steel anchors in accordance with Section 05 05 33 "Anchor System" and as shown on the Drawings. Size as required by manufacturer. E. Initial Supply of Lubricants: Manufacturer shall indicate types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. Contractor shall provide and install the recommended lubricants and shall comply with all manufacturer recommended procedures. E. Solenoid Valves:The pump manufacturer shall furnish and install solenoid valves on the water or oil lubrication lines and on all cooling water lines. Solenoid valve electrical rating shall be compatible with the motor control voltage and shall be furnished complete with all necessary conduit and wiring installation from motor control panel to solenoid. Solenoid valve voltage shall be 120 VAC, unless noted otherwise. , Pressure Gages: Gage taps shall be provided on the suction and discharge sides of pumps (except sample pumps, sump pumps, and hot water circulating pumps) and shall be equipped with pressure gages installed at pump suction and discharge lines. Pressure gauges, when shown, shall be provided by the Contractor, unless specifically stated otherwise in the pump specification. 1. Pressure gages shall be located in a representative location,where not subject to shock or vibrations, in order to achieve true and accurate readings. 2. Pressure gages shall be furnished in conformance with 40 73 99 "Pressure Gauges and Thermometers." 3, Pump suctions shall be equipped with compound gages. Where subject to shock or vibrations, provide a snubber,which is wall-mounted or attached to galvanized channel floor stands and connected by means of flexible connectors. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 10 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 H. Guards: Exposed moving parts shall be provided with guards which meet the requirements of OSHA. Guards shall be fabricated of minimum 14-gage galvanized steel or fiberglass; designed to be readily removable to facilitate maintenance of moving parts. L Safety Signs: Provide the following safety signs in accordance with: 1. Equipment with guarded moving parts which operates automatically or by remote control shall be identified signs reading"CAUTION - EQUIPMENT STARTS AND STOPS AUTOMATICALLY." 2. Place a caution sign on the guard reading"CAUTION - KEEP GUARD IN PLACE." 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the coordination of the following tests of each pump, motor controller, and motor: B. General:Tests shall be performed in accordance with the Test Code for Centrifugal Pumps of the Standards of the Hydraulic Institute, Inc.Tests shall be performed on the actual assembled unit from shut-off head condition to 150 percent of the required maximum design capacity. Prototype model tests will not be acceptable. C. Factory Tests of Pumps: 1. All pumps and motors that are 10 HP and larger shall be factory-tested in accordance with the above specifications. Submit the Certified test data to the Engineer. This data shall include, but not be limited to the following: a. Hydrostatic test with data recorded. b, Hydraulic test with a minimum of 5 readings between shutoff head and 125 percent of the maximum design capacity, recorded on data sheets as defined by the Hydraulic Institute, signed, dated, and certified. C. Certification that the pump HP demand will not exceed the rated motor hp beyond the 1.0 service rating at any point on the curve. 2. Vibration Test: For pumps and motors that are 50 HP or larger, dynamically balance rotating parts of each pump and its driving unit before final assembly. Complete rotating assembly, including drive unit and motor, shall be less than 90 percent of limits established in the Hydraulic Institute Standards. D. Factory Tests of Motors: Motors shall be factory tested as indicated in Section 40 05 93-PS "Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment" E. Factory Witnessed Tests: All pumps, and motors, 150 HP and larger, shall be factory-tested as complete, assembled units, as specified above, and witnessed by the Engineer and the Owner. 1. Manufacturer shall provide the Engineer a minimum of two (2)weeks notification prior to the test. 2. All costs for Owner and Engineer shall be borne by the Contractor and included in the bid price. Such costs shall include travel and subsistence for two people but shall exclude any salaries. Provide copies of the test results to the Engineer and no equipment shall be shipped until the test data have been approved. F, Acceptance: In the event of failure of any pump to meet any of the individual section requirements or efficiencies,the Contractor shall make all necessary modifications, repairs, PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 11 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 or replacements to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and the pump shall be re-tested at no additional compensation, until found satisfactory. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install and adjust equipment in accordance with the Drawings, approved shop drawings, and the manufacturer's instructions. Do not operate the equipment until the installation is approved by the manufacturer's representative. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the following: 1. Support all piping independently of the pump. 2. Provide flexible connections at suction and discharge. 3. Level baseplate by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge taper not greater the 1/4-inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level bearing surface. Accomplish wedging so that there is no change of level or springing of the base elbow when anchor bolts are tightened. 4. Adjust pump assemblies such that the driving units are properly aligned, plumb, and level with the driven units and all interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do not compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings. 5. After the pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to the proper elevation,grout the space between the bottom of the baseplate and the concrete foundation with a poured, non-shrinking grout of the proper category. Remove wedges after grout is set and pack void with grout. Complete equipment installation with controls, safety devices and auxiliary support systems necessary to start the equipment and verify that the equipment functions correctly under no load conditions. Turn rotating equipment by hand to check. Complete cleaning and testing of piping systems. Inspect and clean equipment, devices, piping, and structures of debris and foreign material. 7. Remove temporary bracing supports and other construction debris that may damage equipment. R, Remove protective coatings and oils used for protection during shipment and installation. , Flush, fill, and grease lubricated systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Seal Water Connections: Seal water supply and seal water connections are not shown in the plans. All pumps shall utilize mechanical seals per City of Marble Falls Design Guidelines. If any specific pump requires seal water,the contractor shall provide seal water piping,valves, flow indicator, pressure and flow control devices,to pump packing for units handling slurries, grit,water containing sand or solids. C. Base Plate Drains: If seal water is used, provide drain line from pumping unit base to the floor drain. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 12 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 D, Install temporary connections and devices required to fill, operate, checkout and drain the system. Provide temporary valves, gauges, piping,test equipment, and other materials and equipment necessary to conduct testing and startup. E. Equipment 1. Check equipment for correct direction of rotation and freedom of moving parts. 2. Align equipment to Manufacturer's tolerances. Adjust clearances and torques. 3. Check installation prior to start-up for conformance to manufacturer's instructions. 4, Adjust or modify equipment to ensure proper operation. F. Correct any deficiencies or problems noted in manufacturer's representative's installation reports. 3.3 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Provide polyurethane, pigmented (over epoxy zinc rich primer and high build epoxy) in accordance with Section 09 9100 "Painting and Protective Coatings." Pump shall receive surface preparation, prime coat and finish coat in factory. I Shop painted items which suffered damage to the shop coating shall be touched up as specified in Section 09 9100 "Painting and Protective Coatings." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each pump as described below and in accordance with Section 01 75 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup." 1, Pumping units shall be field tested after installation,to demonstrate satisfactory operation,without causing excessive noise,vibration, cavitation, and overheating of the bearings. 2, Alignment:Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation. 1 Vibration Test for Centrifugal Pumps: a, Test units installed and in normal operation, and discharging to the connected piping systems at rates between the low discharge head and high discharge head conditions specified, and with the actual facility structures and foundations provided, shall not develop at any frequency or in any plane, peak- to-peak vibration amplitudes exceeding the limits specified. b, Any vibration shall be within the amplitude limits recommended in the Hydraulic Institute Standards and it shall be recorded at a minimum of four(4) pumping conditions defined by the ENGINEER. C. If units exhibit vibration in excess of the limits specified adjust, or modify as necessary. Units which cannot be adjusted or modified to conform as specified shall be replaced. d, Flow Output: Measured by plant instrumentation and storage volumes. I Performance Test: In accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards. 1. Place each piece of equipment in the system in operation until the entire system is functioning. All components shall continue to operate without alarms or shut downs, except as intended, for eight consecutive hours to be considered started up. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 13 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Operate the equipment through the design performance range. Adjust, balance, and calibrate and verify that the equipment, safety devices, controls, and process system operate within the design conditions. 1 Each safety device shall be tested for proper setting and signal. Response shall be checked for each equipment item and alarm. Simulation signals may be used to check equipment and alarm responses. 4. Pump performance shall be documented by obtaining concurrent readings, showing motor voltage, amperage, pump suction head, and pump discharge head,for at least four(4) pumping conditions at each pump rpm. Each power lead to the motor shall be checked for proper current balance. 5. Bearing temperatures shall be determined by a contact-type thermometer.A running time of at least 20 minutes shall be maintained for this test, unless liquid volume available is insufficient for a complete test. C, A copy of all information from functional tests, including data, worksheets, and other materials shall be turned over to the OWNER at the completion of the testing program. 3.5 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturers services shall comply with the requirements of Section 0175 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup" and training shall comply with the requirements of Section 0179 00"Demonstration and Training." 1. Manufacturer's representative shall be provided present at Project site or classroom designated by OWNER, and depending on the Construction Schedule, provide the number of trips required to provide the minimum person-days listed in the individual specification sections,travel time excluded. 13. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that all equipment meets the specified performance requirements. CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of an experienced, competent, and authorized service representative of the manufacturer of each item of major equipment and shall visit the site of work to perform the following tasks. 1. Assist the CONTRACTOR in the installation of the equipment. . Inspect, check, adjust if necessary and approve the equipment installation. 1 Start-up and field-test the equipment for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity. 4. Perform necessary field adjustments during the test period until the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory to the ENGINEER. 5. Instruct OWNER's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Instruction prior to system testing of the equipment shall include step-by-step troubleshooting procedures with all necessary equipment testing. C. Manufacturer's Certificates: 1. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Installation stating that the equipment is installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. . Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Performance stating that the equipment meets or exceeds the performance requirements as defined hereinbefore. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 14 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 D, The equipment manufacturer shall conduct an 8 hour training workshop under the direction of a qualified factory field service representative.The workshop shall be conducted both at the job site and at a training room provided by the Wastewater Department. 3.6 FACILITY STARTUP A. Startup of the facility shall be in accordance with Section 0175 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup." After initial startup under the supervision of a qualified representative of the pump manufacturer, a preliminary"running-in" period will be provided for the CONTRACTOR, per the Contract Documents,to make field tests and necessary adjustments. At the end of the specified period of operation (30-days),the pumps will be accepted if, in the opinion of the ENGINEER,the pumps have operated satisfactorily without excessive power input,wear, lubrication, or undue attention required for this operation, and if all rotating parts operate without excessive vibration or noise at any operating speed and head, including shutoff. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 15 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 43 22 10-PS-PAGE 15 OF 16 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 43 25 00-PS PUMPS,SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This specification shall govern supplying submersible, non-clogging sewage pumps,for the nine (9) lift stations listed below, including all associated equipment and incidentals for installation.The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide installation guidance and assistance to the CONTRACTOR during equipment installation, check-out, startup,testing and commissioning of the submersible-immersible pumps. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish each pump with motors, pump and motor protection relay(s), and power/control cables; base elbows, anchors, guide rails and brackets,guide rail supports, lifting chains and accessories for raising and lowering pumps, and other incidental items required for a complete installation and operational pumping units. , Laguna Shores b. People's Street"T" Head c, Lawrence Street"T" Head d. Cooper's Alley"L" Head e. Cole Park f. Country Club g. Military/Jester h. Clarkwood South L Sugar Tree B. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and shall perform all labor necessary for the installation,testing, and placing into operation of all pumps and pumping appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. C. Equipment and Related Lists: Lists are included for the convenience of the Engineer and Contractor and are not complete listings of all pumps, equipment, devices and material to be provided under this Contract. The Contractor agrees to prepare his own material and equipment takeoff lists as necessary to meet the requirements of the Project. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. I Related Sections: 1. Section 43 22 10-PS "Common Requirements for Pumps" 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Copies of materials required to establish compliance with the specifications shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Section 0133 10-PS"Supplier's Submittals". Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 1 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 dimensions, anchor bolt size and locations, and field connections. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and catalogs of the equipment. 3. Complete pump data including rotating speed, selected impeller size, maximum impeller size to fit proposed pump case, minimum impeller size to fit proposed pump case, and certified performance pump curves with brake horsepower throughout the full operating range of the pump. a, The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish certified pump curves for each pump supplied. Catalog curves are not acceptable. Graphs shall include: 1) Pump Curve-Q in GPM, H in FEET 2) Power Input Curve- KILOWATT 3) Efficiency Curve (including motor) wire to water 4) N.P.S.H. Curve 5) Model, Impeller size, serial number ) Motor rated HP, Voltage 7) Date and location of test ) Customer for whom test was conducted 9) Data in English units (gallons,feet, etc.) 4. Total weight of the equipment including the weight of the single largest item. 5. A complete bill of materials for all equipment. 6. Type and materials of pump bearings, wear rings (impeller and case), and mechanical seals. 7. Literature, data, dimensions for lifting chains, guide rails, guide brackets, and guide rail supports. 8. Nearest location of factory maintenance and service facilities that will be available to service the equipment offered. 9. Complete warranty information. 10. Shop Drawings: a. Complete motor data including: 1) Name of Associated Driven Equipment 2) Horsepower of Motor 3) Voltage 4) Phase S) Efficiency at 1/2, 3/4, Full Load 6) Power Factor at 1/2, 3/4, Full Load 7) Speed (RPM) ) Slip 9) NEMA Design Starting Torque 10) Full Load Current 11) Locked Rotor Current 12) Insulation Class PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 2 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 1 ) Service Factor 14) Temperature Rise at 1.0 SF 15) Enclosure Rating 1 ) Bearing life design 17) Bearing Material and any bearing coatings used, ceramic or otherwise 1 ) Equipment Supplier shall provide a letter certifying that the motor is compatible with the variable frequency drive. 1 ) Motor Stator Winding Resistance b, Conductor cutsheets. c. Cut sheets of the following pump and motor monitoring devices 1) Equipment supplier provided pump leak/overtemperature relay 2) Stator temperature sensor ) Leak detection sensor d. Overvoltage/undervoltage recommendation settings of motor. e. Overload recommendation setting. f. Auxiliary Instrumentation and Devices: Datasheets and mounting locations/details for auxiliary instrumentation and devices furnished with equipment. The information shall include associated mounting brackets and hardware. g. Wiring Diagrams: If applicable,for power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 11. Test Reports:Supplied per this specification. Informational Submittals 1. Field Representative Resume 2. Qualifications Statement 3. Previous Installations List 4. Pre-Installation Delivery, Storage, and Handling Instructions 5. Installation Instructions 6. Fastener and Support Sizing Calculations C. Closeout Submittals 1. Paint 2. Lubricants 3. Spare Parts 4. Operation and Maintenance Data 5. Warranty Documentation 6. Testing Data 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to specification Section 43 22 10-PS "Common Requirements for Pumps". B. Field Representative: The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish a qualified field representative PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 3 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 for the time indicated in Paragraph 3.5.A of this Section. Field representatives shall be factory-employed personnel and have a minimum of two (2)years of experience with the operation of and training on this type of equipment. Sales representatives will only be considered acceptable service technicians if they have three (3)years of experience with the operation of and training on this type of equipment from the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER being supplied and have started up 15 units of a similar size and type from the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER.The field representative shall submit a resume for approval before startup assistance can be provided. For each training event two separate pre-startup training sessions shall be performed, one in the early morning and one in the late afternoon. Two separate post-startup training sessions shall be performed, one in the early morning and one in the late afternoon. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the scheduling of such training and startup assistance with OWNER'S personnel. A typed outline shall be handed out at each training session and, at a minimum,will include normal operating parameters, alarms, and maintenance. C. Qualifications: Equipment shall be the product of an EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER having at least five (5) similar system installations experience in the United States of the type proposed, each with a minimum of five (5) years of satisfactory service. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store pumping system components in accordance with equipment supplier's written instructions and shop drawings. 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to specification Section 43 22 10-PS "Common Requirements for Pumps" Part 1.7. 1.7 WARRANTY A, The pump manufacturer shall furnish the City with a written guarantee to warrant pumps and components against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years after full operation and acceptance by the City.The warranty shall include 100% coverage of manufacturer's shop labor and parts for the first year,then 50%coverage through the 5th year. Pumps repaired under warranty shall be returned to the City's Wastewater Department with freight prepaid. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents,for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. The cost of removal, shipment, repair,and installation by the CONTRACTOR shall be included in the warranty and correction of defective work. 1.8 ACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents,the following equipment suppliers are acceptable. 1. Xylem/Flygt Corporation. 2. Like equivalents, "or-equal" items, or substitutions require the approval of the OWNER and ENGINEER. Approval is at the is at the discretion of the OWNER and ENGINEER. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 4 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 1.9 PROCESS REQUIREMENTS A� The pump models referenced herein are provided as a basis for informed selection and are not intended to be prescriptive. Final pump selection shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, subject to approval by the Engineer. B. The Design Point defines the minimum required operating conditions for head and flow.The Contractor shall ensure that the selected pump meets or exceeds these conditions. C. The Duty Point is defined as the intersection of the informed selections pump's performance curve and the system curve.The Contractor shall verify that the proposed pump operates efficiently at the Duty Point and shall submit supporting documentation, including pump curves and system analysis,for review. D. For all submersible pump installations requiring motors rated at 10 horsepower(HP) or less, the Contractor shall provide a Flygt Concertor pump system or an approved equivalent 1. Laguna Shores Lift Station a. Quadraplex Pump Configuration b. Pump Configuration 1) Provide four (4) identical submersible non-clog centrifugal pumps model number NP 3231/615 3— 680 4p or approved equal. At minimum, the provided pump must supply head and flow at the Design Point head and flow conditions. 2) Design Point(Based on three pumps in operation) a) 4,300 gpm b) 100 ft TDH c) 61 %eff. (Hydraulic)—min. 3) Motor a) The pump shall not overload the motor at any point through the operating range of the pump. b) Motor Size—25 HP max. c;) Motor must be explosion-proof. d') Motor must have glycol cooling jacket. e) 1,200 RM, max. c, Discharge size—8" diameter min. d. Minimum solids size passing—3" e„ Wet Well Water Level Operation Elevations 1) Emergency High Water Level Alarm =TBD 2) Pump 2 on Elevation (Lag Pump) =TBD ) Pump 1 On Elevation (Lead Pump) = TBD 4) Pump Shutoff Elevation (All Pumps Off) =TBD 5) FM Discharge WSEL at Laguna Madre WWTP Bar Screen *-Contractor shall verify critical elevation and dimensions for the lift station such as, but PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 5 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE—IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 not limited to, inverts of pipes contributing to the elevation, wet well floor, top of wet well, dimensions of wet well, force main pipe internal diameter, final force main top of pipe elevation, and proposed pump elevation (if in a dry pit) prior to procuring equipment or starting construction. If a discrepancy is found Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer. Engineer will provide updated operational elevations and verify pump selections. 2. Peoples Street T Head Lift Station a, Duplex Pump Configuration b. Pump Configuration 1) Provide two (2) identical dry submersible non-clog centrifugal pumps model number NT 3102 MT 3—Adaptive 464 or approved equal. 2) Design Duty Points (Based on One Pump In Operation). At minimum, the provided pump must supply head and flow at the Design Point 1 head and flow conditions. ) Design Point 1 0 272 gpm 0 29.5 ft TDH, 19 ft static • 54.5 %eff. (Hydraulic)—min. b) Duty Point 1 0 276 gpm 0 30 ft TDH, 19 ft static 3) Motor a) The pump shall not overload the motor at any point through the operating range of the pump. b) Motor Size—5 HP max. c) Motor must be explosion-proof. c. Discharge size—3" diameter(min.) d, Minimum solids size passing—3" e. Wet Well Water Level Operation Elevations 1) Emergency High Water Level Elev. =3.0 ft 2) Pump 2 On Elevation (Lag Pump) =-3.0 ft 3) Pump 1 On Elevation (Lead Pump) =-4.0 ft 4) Pump Shutoff Elevation (All Pumps Off) =-9.0 ft *-Contractor shall verify critical elevation and dimensions for the lift station such as, but not limited to, inverts of pipes contributing to the elevation, wet well floor, top of wet well, dimensions of wet well, force main pipe internal diameter, final force main top of pipe elevation, and proposed pump elevation (if in a dry pit) prior to procuring equipment or starting construction. If a discrepancy is found Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer. Engineer will provide updated operational elevations and verify pump selections. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 6 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 3. Lawrence Street T Head Lift Station a. Duplex Pump Configuration b, Pump Configuration 1) Provide two (2) identical dry submersible non-clog centrifugal pumps model number NT 3102 SH 3—Adaptive 257 or approved equal. 2) Design Duty Points (Based on One Pump In Operation). At minimum, the provided pump must supply head and flow at the Design Point 1 head and flow conditions. a) Design Point 1 0 272 gpm (per pump) 0 31 ft TDH, 24 ft Static Head • 45%eff. (Hydraulic)—min. b) Duty Point 1 0 290 gpm (per pump) 0 32 ft TDH, 24 ft Static 3) Motor a) The pump shall not overload the motor at any point through the operating range of the pump. b) Motor Size—7.5 HP max. c) Motor must be explosion-proof. c, Discharge size—3" diameter(min.) d, Minimum solids size passing-3" e. Wet Well Water Level Operation Elevations 1) Emergency High Water Level =-2.5 ft 2) Pump 2 on Elevation (Lag Pump) =-11.0 ft 3) Pump 1 On Elevation (Lead Pump) =-12.0 ft 4) Pump Shutoff Elevation (All Pumps Off) =-15.0 *-Contractor shall verify critical elevation and dimensions for the lift station such as, but not limited to, inverts of pipes contributing to the elevation, wet well floor, top of wet well, dimensions of wet well, force main pipe internal diameter, final force main top of pipe elevation, and proposed pump elevation (if in a dry pit) prior to procuring equipment or starting construction. If a discrepancy is found Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer. Engineer will provide updated operational elevations and verify pump selections. 4. Coopers Alley T Head Lift Station a. Duplex Pump Configuration b, Pump Configuration 1) Provide two (2) identical submersible non-clog centrifugal pumps model number NP 3127 SH 3—Adaptive 446 or approved equal. 2) Design Duty Points (Based on One Pump In Operation). At minimum, the PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 7 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 provided pump must supply head and flow at the Design Point 1 head and flow conditions. a) Design Point 1 0 132 gpm (per pump) 0 34 ft TDH, 19 ft static 40%eff. (Hydraulic)—min. b) Duty Point 1 0 135 gpm (per pump) 0 35 ft TDH, 19 ft static 3) Motor a) The pump shall not overload the motor at any point through the operating range of the pump. b) Motor Size—7.5 HP max. C) Motor must be explosion-proof. C. Discharge size— 3" diameter d. Minimum solids size passing—3" Wet Well Water Level Operation Elevations 1) Emergency High Water Level = 3.0 ft 2) Pump 2 on Elevation (Lag Pump) =-3.0 ft 3) Pump 1 On Elevation (Lead Pump) =-4.0 ft 4) Pump Shutoff Elevation (All Pumps Off) =-9.0 ft *-Contractor shall verify critical elevation and dimensions for the lift station such as, but not limited to, inverts of pipes contributing to the elevation, wet well floor, top of wet well, dimensions of wet well, force main pipe internal diameter, final force main top of pipe elevation, and proposed pump elevation (if in a dry pit) prior to procuring equipment or starting construction. If a discrepancy is found Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer. Engineer will provide updated operational elevations and verify pump selections. S. Cole Park Lift Station a. Duplex Pump Configuration b, Pump Configuration 1) Provide two (2) identical submersible chopper pumps model number FP 3127 HT 3—489 or approved equal. 2) Design Duty Points (Based on One Pump In Operation). At minimum, the provided pump must supply head and flow at the Design Point 1 head and flow conditions. a) Design Point 1 0 130 gpm (per pump) 0 45.3 ft TDH, 35 ft static 0 25% Eff(Min.) PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 8 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 b) Duty Point 1 0 155 gpm (per pump) 0 49.3 ft TDH, 35 ft static 3) Motor a) The pump shall not overload the motor at any point through the operating range of the pump. b) Motor Size—10 HP max. c) Motor must be explosion-proof. c, Discharge size—4" diameter d'. Wet Well Water Level Operation Elevations 1) Emergency High Water Level = 12.0 ft 2) Pump 2 on Elevation (Lag Pump) = 2.75 ft 3) Pump 1 On Elevation (Lead Pump) = 1.75 ft 4) Pump Shutoff Elevation (All Pumps Off) =-1.0 ft *-Contractor shall verify critical elevation and dimensions for the lift station such as, but not limited to, inverts of pipes contributing to the elevation, wet well floor, top of wet well, dimensions of wet well, force main pipe internal diameter, final force main top of pipe elevation, and proposed pump elevation (if in a dry pit) prior to procuring equipment or starting construction. If a discrepancy is found Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer. Engineer will provide updated operational elevations and verify pump selections. 6. Country Club Lift Station a. Triplex Pump Configuration b, Pump Configuration 1) Provide three (3) identical dry submersible non-clog centrifugal pumps model number NT 3306/615 3-870— or approved equal. 2) Design Duty Points (Based on One Pump In Operation). At minimum, the provided pump must supply head and flow at the Design Point 1 and Design Point 2 head and flow conditions. a) Design Point 1 0 2,100 gpm 0 38.5 ft TDH, 21 ft Static Head 0 40% Eff(Min) b) Design Point 2 0 3,150 gpm 0 31 ft TDH, 21 ft Static Head 3) Design Duty Points (Based on Two Pumps In Operation). The provided pump must supply head and flow at the Design Point 3 head and flow conditions. a) Design Point 3 PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 9 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 0 4,100 gpm 0 38 ft TDH, 21 ft Static Head 0 60% Eff(Min) b) Duty Point 1 0 4,250 gpm 0 38.5 ft TDH, 21 ft Static Head 4) Motor a) The pump shall not overload the motor at any point through the operating range of the pump. b) Motor Size—80 HP max. c) Motor must be explosion-proof. d) Motor must have glycol cooling jacket. c, Discharge size—12" diameter max. d. Minimum solids size passing—3" e, Wet Well Water Level Operation Elevations 1) Emergency High Water Level Alarm = 25.25 ft 2) Pump 2 on Elevation (Lag Pump) =-0.5 ft 3) Pump 1 On Elevation (Lead Pump) =-1.5 ft 4) Pump Shutoff Elevation (All Pumps Off) =-5.0 ft *-Contractor shall verify critical elevation and dimensions for the lift station such as, but not limited to, inverts of pipes contributing to the elevation, wet well floor, top of wet well, dimensions of wet well, force main pipe internal diameter, final force main top of pipe elevation, and proposed pump elevation (if in a dry pit) prior to procuring equipment or starting construction. If a discrepancy is found Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer. Engineer will provide updated operational elevations and verify pump selections. 7. Military/Jester Lift Station a, Triplex Pump Configuration b. Pump Configuration 1) Provide three (3) identical dry submersible non-clog centrifugal pumps model number NP 3306/615 3 - 870 — or approved equal. Motor must include cooling jacket. 2) Design Duty Points (Based on One Pump In Operation). At minimum, the provided pump must supply head and flow at the Design Point 1 and Design Point 2 head and flow conditions. ) Design Point 1 0 720 gpm 0 105 ft TDH, 24 ft Static Head 0 60% Eff(Min) b) Design Point 2 PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 10 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 0 1,220 gpm 0 84 ft TDH, 21 ft Static Head 3) Design Duty Points (Based on Two Pumps In Operation). The provided pump must supply head and flow at the Design Point 3 head and flow conditions. a) Design Paint 3 0 1,410 GPM 0 101 ft TDH, 21 ft Static Head 0 60% Eff(Min) b) Duty Paint 1 0 1,430 GPM 0 105 ft TDH, 21 ft Static 4) Motor a) Motor Size—100 HP max. b) Motors must be explosion proof. c) Motor must have glycol cooling jacket. c, Discharge size—6" diameter min. d. Minimum solids size passing—3" e, Wet Well Water Level Operation Elevations 1) Emergency High Water Level Alarm = 17.8 ft 2) Pump 2 on Elevation (Lag Pump) = 1.05 ft ) Pump 1 On Elevation (Lead Pump) =-0.05 ft 4.) Pump Shutoff Elevation (All Pumps Off) =-2.2 ft *-Contractor shall verify critical elevation and dimensions for the lift station such as, but not limited to, inverts of pipes contributing to the elevation, wet well floor, top of wet well, dimensions of wet well, force main pipe internal diameter, final force main top of pipe elevation, and proposed pump elevation (if in a dry pit) prior to procuring equipment or starting construction. If a discrepancy is found Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer. Engineer will provide updated operational elevations and verify pump selections. 8. Clarkwood South Lift Station a. Duplex Pump Configuration b, Pump Configuration 1) Provide two (2) identical submersible non-clog centrifugal pumps model number NP 3153 LT 3 -413 2) Design Duty Points (Based on One Pump In Operation). At minimum, the provided pump must supply head and flow at the Design Point 1 head and flow conditions. a) Design Point 1 1,270 gpm PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 11 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 0 41 ft TDH, 25 ft Static Head 0 70% Eff(Min) 3) Motor a) The pump shall not overload the motor at any point through the operating range of the pump. b) Motor Size—20 HP max. c) Motor must be explosion proof. e. Discharge size—8" diameter d. Minimum solids size passing—3" Wet Well Water Level Operation Elevations 1) Emergency High Water Level Alarm =48.5 ft 2) Pump 2 on Elevation (Lag Pump) = 28.75 ft ) Pump 1 On Elevation (Lead Pump) =27.75 ft 4) Pump Shutoff Elevation (All Pumps Off) = 22.75 ft * - Contractor shall verify critical elevation and dimensions for the lift station such as, but not limited to, inverts of pipes contributing to the elevation, wet well floor, top of wet well,dimensions of wet well,force main pipe internal diameter,final force main top of pipe elevation, and proposed pump elevation (if in a dry pit) prior to procuring equipment or starting construction. If a discrepancy is found Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer. Engineer will provide updated operational elevations and verify pump selections. 9. Sugar Tree Lift Station a. Duplex Pump Configuration b, Pump Configuration 1) Provide two (2) identical submersible non-clog centrifugal pumps model number N 3153 MT 3—413 or approved equal. 2) Design Duty Points (Based on One Pump In Operation). At minimum, the provided pump must supply head and flow at the Design Point 1 head and flow conditions. a) Design Point 1 0 1,270 gpm 0 41 ft TDH, 25 ft Static Head 0 40% Eff(Min) 3) Motor a) The pump shall not overload the motor at any point through the operating range of the pump. b) Motor Size—20 HP max. c) Motor must be explosion proof. c, Discharge size—8" diameter min. d. Minimum solids size passing—3" PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 12 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 e. Wet Well Water Level Operation Elevations * 1) Emergency High Water Level Alarm = 10.0 ft 2) Pump 2 on Elevation (Lag Pump) =-4.65 ft 3) Pump 1 On Elevation (Lead Pump) =-5.65 ft ) Pump Shutoff Elevation (All Pumps Off) = 19.3 ft * - Contractor shall verify critical elevation and dimensions for the lift station such as, but not limited to, inverts of pipes contributing to the elevation, wet well floor, top of wet well,dimensions of wet well,force main pipe internal diameter,final force main top of pipe elevation, and proposed pump elevation (if in a dry pit) prior to procuring equipment or starting construction. If a discrepancy is found Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer. Engineer will provide updated operational elevations and verify pump selections. 1.10 ASSEMBLIES/MANUFACTURED UNITS/EQUIPMENT/PRODUCT TYPES A. General 1. Pumps shall be designed and constructed to pump raw unscreened sanitary sewage and capable of passing 3" diameter spheres. Design of mounting system shall facilitate removal and inspection of pumps. There shall be no need for personnel to enter wet well for inspection and maintenance of pumps. Lifting chain,guide rails and mounting system shall be provided and installed for each pump. Pumps shall be designed, built and installed in accordance with best available technology and practice, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. 2. Furnish and install the submersible pumps as required by this specification. Each pump, motor, and cable assembly shall be furnished in one integral unit,factory assembled by the equipment supplier. Pump assembly shall be listed as explosion proof, in Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D hazardous locations, by Underwriter Laboratories (U.L.), Factory Mutual (F.M.) or by C.S.A. 3. The pumps shall connect to the discharge piping when lowered into place. 4. All submersible pumps required by this Specification Section shall be compatible with the wet well and sump configurations, dimensions, etc. shown on the Drawings.Any revision in mechanical, electrical or structural systems should be noted and included in the bid packet. 5. Wetted parts shall be shop primed with water borne primer. Exterior of pumps, in addition to the above, shall receive two finish coats of epoxy. All exposed nuts or bolts shall be AISI type 316 stainless steel. 6. Sealing for the pump/motor assembly shall incorporate machined surfaces fitted with Nitrile (Buna-N) rubber or Viton O-rings. Sealing shall be the result of controlled compression of rubber O-rings in two planes of the sealing interface. Sealing shall be accomplished without requiring a specific torque limit. No secondary sealing compounds shall be required or used.There shall be no need for personnel to enter the wet well to remove or reinstall the pumps. I Impeller a. Screw type vane(s); non-clog type. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 13 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 b, Gray cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 4013. e. Impeller vane shall be smooth,finished throughout, and free from sharp edges. d. Dynamically balanced. e. Key driven and held to shaft by key and locknut or a streamlined impeller washer and bolt assembly designed to reduce friction in the suction eye of the impeller, such that the impeller cannot unscrew or be loosened by torque either forward or reverse rotation. 2. Each pump shall be fitted with a stainless steel lifting assembly consisting of at a minimum a stainless steel chain with a minimum length as described below and a stainless steel heavy-duty lifting bail on each pump of adequate strength to lift the entire pump and motor assembly with a 50%safety factor. Include one appropriately sized ITT Flygt Grip-Eye System (or Pump Supplier's equivalent). 1.11 FINISHES A� All equipment items except stainless steel shall receive surface preparation, prime coating and finish coating in the factory in accordance with Section 09 91 00-PS "Painting and Protective Coatings". Finish coating colors shall be selected by the OWNER from finish color charts to be provided in shop drawing submittals. Furnish one gallon of touch up paint for installation CONTRACTOR to apply. 13. All stainless steel surfaces shall be cleaned and welds shall be brushed with Type 316 stainless steel brushes. Electro bead blast or chemically treat all external non-welded stainless steel to a uniform finish. C. Motors and hydraulic units shall have a factory finish. D. Machined, polished, and non-ferrous surfaces shall be coated with a corrosion prevention compound. 1.12 MOTORS A. Motor and Cable 1. Motor shall be induction type with a squirrel-cage rotor, shell type design, housed in an air filled,watertight chamber. 2. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty while handling pumped media. 3. The motors shall be provided with motor thermal switches embedded in the windings to protect the motor from burnout due to excessive heating. 4. The stator shall be press fitted or heat-shrink fitted into the stator housing.The use of fastening devices that penetrate the stator housing are not acceptable. 5. The motor stator shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation. a. Temperature monitors shall be embedded in the motor windings for use in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor overload protection. The pump's control shall shut down the pump should any of the monitors detect high temperature.The monitors shall have a manual reset to restart the motors. b, Temperature sensor c, Leakage sensor PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 14 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE—IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 d. Monitors shall be embedded in the bearings for use in conjunction with and supplemental to other temperature warning systems. Bearing temperature sensors shall be included to shut the pump down if high temperature is detected. The monitors shall have a manual reset to restart the motors. 6. Motor shaft shall be one-piece, solid, stainless steel. Carbon steel shafts or shaft sleeves are not acceptable. Shaft shall be sufficient to transmit full driver output with a maximum deflection of 0.002 inches measured at the lower mechanical seal. Rotor is to be dynamically balanced to meet NEMA vibration limits; all external hardware is to be stainless steel. 7. Cable leads are to enter at the top of the motor, and are to allow the cable-to-motor connection to be accomplished in the field with by the equipment supplier or pump service company, or the use of an epoxy sealed entry system. Cable conductors shall be copper, sized and rated per NEC. Cable shall be sized using 125 %of motor nameplate. Motor power lead wires shall be permanently and thermally connected to the stator for structural strength. Motor lead wires shall be connected to the power cable in a watertight chamber and appropriate watertight seal cable entrance. Pump motor power cable shall be oil and watertight, rated for continuous submerged service. Motor control conductors for thermal and moisture leak sensory shall be rated for continuous submerged service and shall be run in a separate jacketed cable and conduit from the power cable. Power cable shall include a dedicated ground conductor. All conductors shall be permanently identified at both ends. Power/control cable shall be a minimum of 50 feet in length, shall be suitable for a continuous submersible application and sized in accordance with NEC requirements. 8. Power and control leads shall be 0-ring sealed and the lengths shall be appropriate for each application. 9. All 0-rings shall be Nitrile rubber 0-rings. 10. Pump(s) shall be provided with a mechanical seal system consisting of two totally independent seal assemblies.The seal shall be a double mechanical seal in a cast iron seal housing constructed in two sections with a registered fit. The seal shall be constructed of tungsten carbide or silicon carbide. The upper and lower seal assemblies shall operate in a lubricant reservoir that lubricates the lapped seal faces at a constant rate. 11. A mechanical seal leakage system shall be included in each motor. Mechanical seal system shall be monitored for leaking during pump operation and standby time. If sufficient water enters the motor the mechanical seal leakage system shall send a signal to the control panel and shut down the pump. 12. Inrush on starting shall be no more than allowed by NEC Code Letter G (5.6 KVA/HP) 13. The motor and cable on each pump shall be tested for moisture content or insulation defects. After the test,the pump cable end shall be fitted with a shrink-fit rubber boot to protect it from moisture or water. 14. Cooling System: a, Provide either a cast iron jacket or Type 304 stainless steel motor cooling jacket, encircling the stator housing,to provide for heat dissipation, regardless of the pump installation. b, The cooling system shall be self-contained, using a closed loop cooling system PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 15 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 and coolant to allow for running under full load conditions at 100%duty cycle with the motor exposed to air and/or in liquid temperatures up to 140°F. c. The internal circulation of the pumped liquid as coolant is not acceptable.The use of fans, blowers or exposed cooling systems is not acceptable. 1.13 PUMP PROTECTION AND MONITORING A. General Requirements 1. Equipment Supplier shall furnish the pump motor protection relays and power supplies, if needed for the Lift Station Pumps,to the CONTRACTOR for installation in the CONTRACTOR supplied VFDs. 2. Equipment Supplier, shall furnish and install pump motor protection relays and power supplies if needed,to the CONTRACTOR for mounting in the VFDs. 1.14 ACCESSORIES A. Wet Well Hatches: Floor/vault/sidewalk/wet well hatches 1. Description: Provide single or double leaf hinged covers, designed for corrosive environment, and sized with clear openings as indicated in the Drawings. 2. Construction Details: , Materials: Cover and Frame: 1/4-inch aluminum minimum. b. Cover:The door panels shall be 1/4"thick diamond plate designed to withstand a live load of 300 Ibs, per square foot. c, Frame: Extruded aluminum angle or channel frame with bend down tabs around perimeter. Frame shall be equipped with 1-1/2-inch drain coupling welded under frame for a pipe connection if designated on the Drawings. d. Gasket: EDPM gasket mechanically attached to frame. e. Hinges: Heavy stainless steel with 1/4-inch Type 316 stainless steel hinge pins. Hinges shall be attached to cover using tamper proof stainless steel hardware. f. Latch:Type 316 stainless steel slam lock with fixed interior handle and removable exterior turn/lift handle. Latch release protected by a flush, gasketed, remove screw plug. g, Lift Assistance: Stainless steel compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes with automatic hold-open device with grip handle release. h. Finish: Mill finish aluminum with bituminous coating applied to the exterior frame. i, Hardware: Engineered composite compression spring tubes; stainless steel compression springs; and all other components of door are aluminum or Type 316 stainless steel. ll, Watertight and locking k. CONTRACTOR to submit documentation from the PUMP SUPPLIER that the specified pump fits through the wet well hatch that is submitted. 3. Safety Grate: Provide a fall protection hinged safety grate installed with each leaf cover in accordance with the following requirements: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 16 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 a, Material:Aluminum grate sized for 300 psf live load. b. Hinges: Heavy stainless steel with 1/4-inch Type 316 stainless steel hinge pins. c, Lift Assistance: Automatic hold-open device with grip handle release. d, Finish: Mill finish aluminum with powder coated safety orange color. 4. Equipment Supplier: a, Bilco Company b. Halliday Products, Inc. c, ITT Flygt. d. USF Fabrication, Inc. 13. Anchor Bolts: Provide Type 316 stainless steel anchors and fasteners as shown on the Drawings, and as recommended by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. Size and locations as required by EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall size all anchor bolts and fasteners required of ample size and strength for the intended purpose, minimum of%-inch diameter. Fastener sizing calculations shall be provided as an informational submittal. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all anchor bolts and fasteners in accordance with the equipment supplier's installation instructions. C. Equipment Identification Plates: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish a 16-gauge stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. The plate shall bear 1/4-inch die-stamped equipment identification number indicated in this Section and/or on the Drawings. 1. Pump a, The pump shall have a stainless steel nameplate attached to its frame with stainless steel screws.The following information shall be displayed on the name plate: 1) Equipment supplier's name 2) Model number 3) Serial number 4) Rated capacity in gallons per minute S) Rated total dynamic head in feet ) Pump speed t) Bearing information 2. Motor a, The motor shall have a stainless steel name plate attached to its frame with stainless steel screws.The name plate must meet the requirements of NEMA MG 1.The following information as a minimum shall be displayed on the name plate: 1) Equipment supplier's name 2) Model number 3) Serial number 4) Frame description S) Motor enclosure type PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 17 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 ) Service factor 7) Motor speed ) Motor voltage, phase, and frequency ) Insulation class 1 ) Bearing information 11) Wiring diagram 12) Motor horsepower 1 ) Amperage at full and no load 1 ) Locked rotor amperes and/or letter code D, Lifting Lugs: Individual equipment and/or each field disassemble part weighing over 60 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs E. Initial Supply of Lubricants: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall indicate types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil,grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install the recommended lubricants and shall comply with all equipment supplier recommended procedures. F. Discharge Base -The installation shall include a rigid discharge base-elbow to support the total weight of the pumping unit.The base shall be bolted directly to the floor with the 90 degree elbow having a 125-lb. ANSI flange discharging vertically.The base shall be installed so that each pump will be automatically connected and sealed to its discharge connection elbow when lowered into place and shall be easily removable. Anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. CONTRACTOR to install a concrete mounting pad as required and designed by the pump supplier for the specific model selected. G Bearings- Each pump shaft shall rotate on high quality permanently lubricated, greased bearings.The upper bearing shall be either deep grooved ball bearing or ceramic coated cylindrical roller bearing and the lower bearing shall be heavy-duty bearings. Bearing life shall be a minimum of 50,000 hours (1310) at anticipated axial and radial loadings. Bearing houses to be designed so that water cannot enter housing. 1.15 TOOLS,SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall supply one (1) set of spare parts for each pump size for all components exposed to operational wear during normal equipment service. 1. Spare gaskets and o-rings shall be provided for each pump. One spare seal shall be provided in a sealed factory container for each pump. Provide one spare set of complete over-temperature sensory components. Provide one spare set of complete moisture leak detector sensory components. Any additional spare parts recommended by the Equipment supplier shall be provided. 2. Spare nameplates shall be provided for each pump/motor assembly to be mounted on the control panel. 3. Any special tools that are exclusive to the pump and/or equipment supplier shall be supplied. I Unless it can be demonstrated that local parts and service have been available through the same financially sound firm on a continuing basis for at least 10 years,the spare parts listed below must be furnished for each pump at no additional costs to the City. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 18 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 1. Impeller 2. Upper mechanical seal 3. Lower mechanical seal 4. Power cable 5. Set of bearings 6. Wear ring 7. Cable entry assembly C. Equipment Lubricants:The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall indicate and verify types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install the recommended lubricants. D. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear, indelible identification markings and shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the OWNER at the conclusion of the project. Each part shall be labeled with part numbers which correspond to the Operation and Maintenance Data submitted in accordance with Section 0178 23-PS Operation and Maintenance Data. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify structures, pipes, and equipment are compatible. 13. Each pump is to be tested at the factory to determine capacity, shut off head, rated head, minimum head (for continuous operation), net positive suction head, required power, efficiency and as required to develop an accurate performance curve. Pumps shall be tested for performance with the motor cables to be supplied with the pumps. Certified copies of a report for each test are to be submitted to the OWNER. All of the above tests are to be performed in conformity with the requirements and recommendations of the Hydraulic Institute 1U acceptance grade and NEMA MG-1 standards. 2.2 INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR to install equipment per this Section and the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's installation instructions. 13. Installation of the pumps shall be in strict accordance with the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's instructions and recommendations. C. All pumps and materials shall be appropriately protected from damage during delivery and construction. All equipment shall be covered and protected from the elements and kept dry at all times. Painted surfaces shall be protected from damage during shipment and construction or shall be re-painted to the satisfaction of the Owner. D, The precise placement and alignment of anchor bolts, discharge assembly,guide rails, access cover and associated connections shall be in accordance with the supplemental construction details provided by the pump supplier. The Equipment supplier shall check alignment during start up field testing. Improper alignment shall be corrected by the Contractor prior to continuation of testing. 2.3 FIELD/SITE QUALITY CONTROL PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 19 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 A. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Services 1. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative:The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative shall be present at the project site or classroom designated by OWNER for minimum person-days and trips provided in the table below. Each person-day shall be defined as eight (8) hours duration, exclusive of travel.The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary to correct deficiencies. Work Description Number of sPerson Number of Trips' Y Installation assistance and inspection 1 1 Functional and performance testing 1 1 Pre-startup classroom or site training 0.5 can be combined with facility startup Facility startup 2 1 Post-startup training of OWNER'S personnel 0.5 1 1 Days or trips per pump station. I After the pumps have been completely installed and wired,the Contractor shall remove the pumps to the wet pit top deck and an authorized representative of the pump supplier shall inspect each pump for proper installation. The authorized representative shall also inspect the following: 1. Megger(less than 500 volts DC) stator and power cable 2. Measure and record stator and power cable resistance 3. Check for proper rotation 4. Check power supply voltage 5. Measure motor no load current 6. Check level control operation and sequence 7. Review recommended operation and maintenance procedure 8. Review warranty with Owner's personnel 9. Operating Test C. Field Testing: 1. Each pump shall be field tested to verify that it will perform on its curve. Contractor, pump supplier, electrical contractor, controls contractor, and any others deemed necessary for the startup shall be present for the operating test.The operating test shall be scheduled with the Owner and Engineer a minimum of 1 week in advance of the test. 2. Each pump shall pump down the working volume of the wet well or basin. 3. Station shall be run at firm capacity. 4. Pumps will be run in automatic to check all level settings. 5. Each pump shall be run in automatic to check lag setting. 6. The test will be conducted measuring the pump run times to ensure pumps are operating as specified. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 20 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 7. A pump head curve shall be determined for each pump at design condition, at mid- point condition and at shut-off head. U. Report 1. On completion of initial inspection and operational checks,the pump supllier shall furnish the Engineer with a written report of the findings and data determined with regard to the pumps, motors, accessories, level control and electrical protection devices. The final report shall be signed by an equipment supplier's authorized field representative. A copy of the report shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals. 2.4 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Startup of the facility shall be in accordance with Section 0175 25-PS "Equipment Testing and Startup." Installation Assistance and Inspection. After Equipment Installation and before start up,the contractor and EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative shall inspect the installation of the equipment. A preliminary running period (as applicable)will be provided for the CONTRACTOR to make field adjustments with the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative. CONTRACTOR shall submit a report for EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER approval of equipment installation. I Functional Test. CONTRACTOR to start up equipment with EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative. Equipment shall be able to run in manual mode with all associated piping, electrical and equipment installed to show proper operation of the equipment. Functional Test shall be 5 days of uninterrupted service. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for equipment operation for the 5-day period. Any delays or additional person days and trips required for EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative to perform Functional Testing beyond what is specified is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. Functional Test can be run with clean water to demonstrate equipment operation. Performance Test and Initial Training. CONTRACTOR and EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative to start up equipment in Automatic Mode (Normal Operation). Equipment shall run in two modes, normal operation and peak flow conditions. Contractor and EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative should demonstrate any alarms, lead lag conditions, or total auto mode or other conditions related to equipment operation. Performance Test shall run with uninterrupted service for 30 days. Performance Test shall be run with wastewater under normal operating conditions. If equipment fails before 30 days,then EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall correct problems at their own expense and restart the 30-day Performance Test. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER and CONTRACTOR is responsible for equipment operation during the 30-day Performance Test. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall perform initial training at the end of the 30-day Performance Test for owner's representative. Training shall be with a draft of the full Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Upon completion of Performance Test and Training,The OWNER shall consider that equipment substantially complete and start the warranty period. U. Post-Startup Training. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER will perform additional training at a time mutually agreeable to the OWNER and EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER to take place no earlier than 30 days after equipment substantial completion and no later than 90 days after substantial completion. 2.5 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 21 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE—IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 A. A copy of all information from functional tests including data, worksheets, and other materials shall be turned over to the OWNER at the completion of the testing program. I Inspection Report: (four copies required) The results of the Installation Inspection and Operating Check shall be submitted as a written report of findings and data determined with regard to the pumps, motors, level control, sequence, accessories, electrical, etc.The report shall be prepared and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer employed or retained by the pump manufacturer. C. 8.2 Manual: (included with Inspection Report)The Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be included with the Inspection Report with one manual for each of the four copies of the report.The O&M Manual shall include a minimum of the following: 1. Service Location & phone 2. Fact Sheet (pump data) 3. Serial No. 4. Pump Curve 5. Maintenance instructions&schedule 6. A shop service manual 7. An assembly manual showing all parts by their catalog END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 43 25 00-PS-PAGE 22 OF 22 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PUMPS(SUBMERSIBLE-IMMERSIBLE),HATCHES,AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 2025 SECTION 44 3119 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A, Section Includes: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, startup, and test 1 Odor Control System (OCS), as specified herein for a complete and operable system. The OCS shall consist of a two-stage odor control unit, synthetic media (two types),vessel, media support plenum(s),foul air fan(s), conduit,wiring, instrumentation, irrigation panel,and control panel.The two-stage odor control unit shall consist of a biological scrubber stage with synthetic media,followed by a high-capacity adsorptive engineered media stage. Foul air fans shall include all equipment components, materials, accessories, wiring, controls, and incidentals as required for functional equipment. Control panel shall be compatible with the City's Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system. 2. The proposed system shall treat odors from the following location(s) in accordance with the requirements of this Section and the Drawings: , Existing Country Club Lift Station wet well. 3. To ensure system compatibility, a single SUPPLIER is responsible for the successful operation of each item of equipment and for the integrated system. The responsibility of the SUPPLIER shall include the approval of installation, system optimization, and warranties for the components and performance of the complete OCS. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 0—Procurement and Contracting 2. Division 1—General Requirements 3. Section 40 05 31.10—Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (AWWA C900 and C905) Pressure Pipe for Municipal Water Mains and Wastewater Force Mains 4, Section 09 9100—Painting and Protective Coatings 5. Section 10 14 19—Safety Signs 6, Section 40 05 36.13—Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork 7. Section 40 05 64.43—Fiberglass Dampers 8, Section 40 94 43—Programmable Logic Controllers 1.2 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Special Conditions and Division 1 specifications sections apply to this Section. B. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1. cfm—Cubic feet per minute 2. EBRT—Empty bed residence time 3. H2S—Hydrogen sulfide 4. MSL—Mean sea level PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 1 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 5. OCS—Odor Control System & ppm—Parts per million 7. rpm—Revolutions per minute 8. SCADA—Supervisory control and data acquisition 9., w.c. —Water column C. Standards: 1. The following testing procedures shall be used to verify performance of the OCS, most current edition: a. ASTM E679: Determination of Odor and Taste Threshold by a Forced-Choice Ascending Concentration Series Method of Limits. b, EN 13725: Air Quality—Determination of Odor Concentration by Dynamic Olfactometry. 2. ABMA, American Bearing Manufacturers Association. 3. AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. 4, AMCA 300, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. 5. ASHRAE 51 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. , ASTM C 582, Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic Laminates for Corrosion Resistant Equipment. 7. ASTM D 2563, Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts. 8. ASTM D4167, Standard Specifications for fiber-Reinforced Plastic Fans and Fans. 9. IEEE 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 10. NEC, National Electric Code. 11. NEMA, MG1- Motors and Generators. 12. NFPA, National Fire Protection Association. 13. SSPC, Steel Structures Painting Council. 14. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. 15. AMCA 211-94, Certified Ratings Program—Air Performance. 16. ANSI/AMCA 204-96, Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. 17. PS 15-69—Custom Contact-Molded Reinforced-Polyester Chemical-Resistance Process Equipment. 1 . ANSI/ASME B16.1—Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS—NOT USED 1.4 SUBMITTALS A, Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and product specifications for each product. Provide construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 2 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 b� Manufacturer model numbers of equipment. C. Safety Data Sheets (SDSs). d, Description of surface preparation and shop primer and shop finish coating systems for each equipment type. . Design Data: a. Process information. b, Loading rates at design conditions. C. Empty bed residence time at design conditions. d. Headloss (in inches of water column)through the odor control unit media(s), distribution plenum, and odor control system over range of flows. e. Structural design calculations, drawings, and associated items shall be SUPPLIER'S responsibilities, and shall include all odor control unit vessels, deflection of the vessel at the point of connection with the ductwork, thicknesses, anchor bolt sizes and locations, hold-down lugs, lifting hooks, and loads imposed by appurtenances such as inlet and outlet ducting and internal media(s).The OWNER and ENGINEER shall review the structural drawings and calculations for completeness only. All structural drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional ENGINEER (currently registered in the State of Texas) prior to submittal to the OWNER. f. Design of system shall be in accordance with applicable local, state, national, and international standards and codes. g, Fan sizing calculations. These shall include calculations of pressure loss through the media, and losses through the system. 1 Shop Drawings: Layout drawings including all proposed system components with dimensions, clearances required and sizes indicated, anchor locations and sizes, details of ductwork or piping connections, size and location of required electrical conduits and conduit openings, and total weights of each piece of equipment. Layout drawings shall be to scale in English units, provided on 11"x17" paper. Indicate flow directions on layout drawings. b, Water requirements, calculations for irrigation requirements, including recirculation rates. Descriptions and characteristics of media, anticipated media life at design conditions, and current replacement cost (material supply only)for each media type provided. d. Nutrient and nutrient feed system information, including SIDS, concentrations, dosage rates, range of operation, recipes, and information for ordering additional supply. e. Submit detailed drawings of special accessory components not included in the manufacturer's product data. f. Indicate extent of shop fabrication and field joint types and locations. g, Detailed specifications and data describing the materials of construction, material thickness, linings, and coatings for all components. h. Verification that system is capable of uniformly distributing flow throughout the PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 3 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 odor control unit without short-circuiting and will meet the specified treatment requirements. i, All required utility connection points and supply requirements, including power and plant water(quality, quantity, pressure). j. Any other information necessary for the OWNER and OWNER's Representative to determine compliance with the specifications. k. Motor(s): Complete submittal per Section 26 20 00.01, "NEMA Frame Induction Motors, 600 Volts and Below." L Panel(s): Complete submittal, per Section 40 94 43, "Programmable Logic Controllers." m. Auxiliary Instrumentation and Devices: Datasheets and mounting locations/details for auxiliary instrumentation and devices furnished with equipment.The information shall include mounting brackets and hardware. n, Wiring Diagrams: If applicable,for power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. p. Data on noise in accordance with AMCA#300. p. Results of factory dynamic balance of fan and field check of dynamic balance of fan. q, Specific design parameters for this project including flow rates and pressure losses for normal conditions. Include AMCA certified fan curves showing efficiency, cfm, outlet velocity,static pressure, brake motor horsepower, and decibel level ratings. 4 Instrumentation and Control Submittals: a. P&IDs and Process Flow Diagrams. b. Instrument specifications in ISA Format with catalogue cut sheets. C. Instrument list with tag names, ranges, alarm set points, and manufacturer contact information. d. Description of control system in written form including functions monitored, controlled, and alarmed. Include sequence of operation and interface requirements. e. For all subsystems that communicate with the Plant Control System,the system supplier shall coordinate with the Plant Control System Integrator data registers and protocol required for transmitting monitoring information and required control. 5. Test and Evaluation Reports: a. Submit results of routine factory motor tests. R. Informational Submittals: 1. Field/Site Quality Control Submittals: a. Startup and test schedule with test procedures. b, Equipment installation report with field test data and test records in accordance with Section 0133 00 (submit as record data after startup and with Final O&M manual). PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 4 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Qualification Statements: a. Provide a list of similar installations with reference and contact information for similarly operating systems. SUPPLIER shall have a minimum of 5 installations of similar size for acceptance and shall have at least 5 systems in continuous operation in similar applications for at least 5 years. Submittals received without current names and phone numbers for reference contacts may be deemed non- responsive. 1 Certificates: a. Supplier Certificates—Refer to Paragraph 3.9 in this Section. b. Certificate from the vessel manufacturer listing the nomenclature, composition, and characteristics of the resin or other plastics shall be supplied with the submittal data, as well as vessel and support calculations as specified, if fiberglass is used for the odor control unit vessel. C. Letter of Certification the motor is compatible with a variable frequency drives when specified as adjustable speed operation. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Complete Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals shall be provided per Division 1 requirements and shall include complete O&M information for all components of the system. O&M Manuals shall be submitted at least thirty (30) days prior to final acceptance of the system. In addition to standard information,the O&M manuals shall include: 1) Scrubber media handling information and safety data sheet, including replacement procedures. 2) Certification statement from manufacturer verifying that the media is nonhazardous. ) Blower sizing calculations. These shall include calculations of pressure loss through the proposed odor control unit, media, and losses through the system. 4) Complete point-to-point wiring diagrams. Complete component bill of material with manufacturers catalog cut sheets marked to show components provided. 5) Submit copies of final PLC and OIT program versions in native format. 2. Warranty Documentation: a. Warranties and service agreements. D. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Spare Parts/Extra Stock Materials supplied, per Paragraph 2.7. 2. Recommended equipment lubricants. 1 List of special tools and software provided. 4. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of one year. Include a list of special tools required for checking,testing, parts replacement, and maintenance,with current pricing information. 5. Location and telephone number of nearest stocking distributor of spare parts. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 5 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Suppliers: 1. SUPPLIER shall be of recognized and established in the design, production, and manufacturing of two-stage odor control systems. SUPPLIER shall have experience in the design and fabrication of similar systems operating in similar applications, as demonstrated by a list of at least 5 successful installations in continuous operation for at least 5 years,with at least 99-percent hydrogen sulfide (H2S) removal efficiency. References must include valid names and phone numbers that can be verified. 2. SUPPLIER shall maintain a complete stock of spare parts commonly needed for the equipment specified at a location with 500 miles of Corpus Christi, Texas or shall be capable of delivering spare parts within 48 hours of request. 3. SUPPLIER shall furnish all equipment with a Type 316 stainless steel nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place on the equipment showing the equipment ratings, serial number, model number, equipment supplier name, and other pertinent nameplate data. 4. The SUPPLIER shall provide an installation report prior to Final Acceptance. In addition to the requirements of Division 1,the equipment installation report shall state that the OCS is achieving the specified removal efficiencies.Test data on the installed system shall be included in the report. 5. Upon completion of the installation, each piece of equipment and the system shall be tested for satisfactory operation without excessive noise,vibration, overheating, alarms, etc. All equipment must be adjusted and checked for proper alignment, clearances, supports, and adherence to safety standards. Excessive vibration or noise from equipment while operating will be cause for rejection of equipment. E , Field Representative: 1. The SUPPLIER shall furnish a qualified field representative for the time indicated in Paragraph 3.5 of this Section. Field representatives shall be factory-employed personnel and have a minimum of 2 years' experience with the operation of and training of this type of equipment. 2. Sales representatives will only be considered acceptable service technicians if they have 3 years' experience with the operation of and training on this type of equipment from the SUPPLIER being supplied and have started up 15 units of a similar size and type from the SUPPLIER. 3. The field representative shall submit a resume for approval before startup assistance can be provided. Materials: 1. Where indicated in the Drawings and in this Section, all Type 316 stainless steel materials shall have the following makeup: . Molybdenum: 2-3 percent b. Chromium: 16-18 percent C. Nickel: 10-14 percent 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store all components to be installed under this Section in accordance PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 6 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 with the SUPPLIER's written Pre-Installation Delivery, Storage, and Handling Instructions and the requirements of Section 00 72 00. B. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1. Fabricated assemblies shall be shipped in the largest sections permitted by carrier regulations, property marked for ease of field erection. 2. SUPPLIER shall furnish and indicate types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, media, etc. necessary to startup equipment. SUPPLIER shall provide and install the recommended lubricants and shall comply with all manufacturer recommended procedures. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS A, General: 1. The equipment, sizes, materials, and arrangements described herein are based on recommendations by equipment suppliers and shall be considered minimum limits of acceptability. The SUPPLIER shall be responsible for design, arrangement, and performance of all equipment supplied under this Section. R. Environmental Conditions: 1, All equipment including controls and drives specified herein shall be specifically designed to be installed for this service and the environment encountered in this installation, unless noted otherwise. 2. The environment will be moist and corrosive at wastewater facilities exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal wastewater treatment facilities. 1 All equipment shall be designed and capable of operation outdoors at ambient temperatures listed in Table 1. 4. Equipment shall be compatible with heat tracing and insulation, which will be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR. SUPPLIER shall design piping systems with ample clearances and material compatibility to accept required heat tracing and insulation. If additional freeze protection beyond heat tracing and insulation is required, it shall be furnished by the SUPPLIER. SUPPLIER shall coordinate with the CONTRACTOR to provide direction on where heat tracing is required and shall verify that the CONTRACTOR has provided adequate heat tracing and insulation during startup activities. C. Existing Conditions: 1, CONTRACTOR shall verify actual dimensions of existing connections, openings, adjacent facilities and equipment, utilities, and related items by field measurements before fabrication, as applicable. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1, All equipment furnished under this Section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of 2 years after the date of Substantial Completion.The cost of removal, shipment, repair, and installation by CONTRACTOR shall be included in the warranty and correction of defective work. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 7 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 2. Media: Special media warranty for the synthetic bioscrubber media shall be for 10 years from final acceptance of the odor control equipment and shall provide for complete replacement of the media, including equipment, materials, labor,freight, and all costs associated with washing, replacing, or regenerating the synthetic media as needed. Media failure includes increase in pressure drop through the media such that the specified airflow rates are not achievable with the installed equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A, Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with all specified requirements, allowable manufacturers offering products include the following: L Foul Air Fans: a. Hartzell. b, Howden. 2. Odor Control Unit: a, BioAir Solutions, LLC b. Daniel Mechanical Company No substitutions shall be allowed. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Foul Air Source Characteristics: Expected odorant composition is given in Table 1. Table 1: Odor Control Unit Performance and Design Requirements Foul Air Parameters Value or Range Foul Air flow rate 1,250 cfm Average inlet H2S concentration range 120 ppm Inlet H2S concentration transient peak 1,000 ppm Other Inlet Odorants (Not quantified) Reduced sulfides, ammonia, mercaptans, skatoles, indoles, amines Ambient Air Temperature 10-120°F Empty Bed Residence Time: Bioscrubber Stage 15 seconds, minimum Adsorber Stage 3 seconds, minimum Maximum pressure drop (from inlet to 10.0 inches w.c.,total outlet flanges) Design Media Life: Bioscrubber Media 10 years Adsorption Media 1.5 years B, Performance Requirements: 1, Refer to Paragraph 3.6 of this Section for additional performance testing requirements. 2. Two-stage odor control system guarantee (at design conditions): a, Average H2S Removal: 1) Bioscrubber Stage: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 8 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 99 percent removal (minimum) or 0.5 ppm,whichever is higher. b) Capable of removing odorants without relying on the adsorption media for meeting the specified performance for the bioscrubber stage. 2) Adsorber Stage: ,,.1) 99 percent removal (minimum) or 0.05 ppm,whichever is greater. b) Provides additional removal as specified, performs as a polishing stage to the bioscrubber stage. b, Average Odor Removal: 1) Bioscrubber stage—For inlet dilution-to-threshold (D/T) concentrations, 90 percent removal (minimum) or 1,500 D/T,whichever is greater. 2) Adsorber stage-90 percent removal (minimum) or 500 D/T,whichever is greater. C. For influent odors with D/T concentrations equal to or greater than the laboratory's maximum value of 60,000 D/T,the sample may be diluted with nitrogen gas (per laboratory recommended procedures)to obtain measurable values. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Foul Air Fan(s): 1. Foul air fan(s) shall be sized as recommended by the SUPPLIER to handle foul air flow and system losses, as described in Table 1. 2. Provide each odor control fan complete with motor, drive,guard, and baseplate. 3. Foul air fan(s) shall be installed as indicated in the Drawings. Refer to Table 2 and Paragraph 2.4 for additional requirements. Table 2: Foul Air Fan Design Requirements Parameter Value or Range Quantity 2 (1 duty, 1 standby) Elevation, MSL 27 ft Ambient Temperature Range Refer to Table 1 Design Flow Rate Refer to Table 1 Static Pressure 16.0 in w.c.* Maximum Speed 2,000 rpm Maximum Outlet Velocity 2,600 ft/min Motor 10 HP Voltage/Phase/Hertz 230/3/60 Type Class I, Div II,Severe Duty Wheel Diameter 12 in Arrangement As determined by SUPPLIER Rotation As shown on the Drawings Discharge As shown on the Drawings Fan Wheel Backward curved, statically balanced for up to 3,500 rpm PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 9 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 Static pressure includes the following assumptions: 2.0" w.c., maximum,for the ductwork(inlet and interconnecting) • 6.0" w.c. for the bioscrubber stage (to be confirmed by Manufacturer) • 2.0" w.c for the adsorber stage (to be confirmed by Manufacturer) Prior to preparing shop drawings, static pressure shall be confirmed by the SUPPLIER based on the Drawings. 4. Type: Single width, single inlet, backward curved type impeller, minimum Class II centrifugal fan with fixed discharge. Each fan shall be tested and rated in accordance with ASHRAE 51-75,AMCA Standard 210 and shall be licensed to bear the AMCA 211-94 Certified Ratings Seal for air performance and be guaranteed by SUPPLIER to deliver rated performance. 5. Performance: Fan ratings shall be based on tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 210 and licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Air Performance. Fans not licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for performance shall be tested, at SUPPLIER's expense, in an AMCA Registered Laboratory. Fans shall have a sharply rising pressure characteristic extending throughout the operating range to assure quiet and stable operation. Fan brake horsepower shall be equal to or less than the BHP specified in the schedule at the listed static pressure and foul air flow rate. Sound: SUPPLIER shall provide a sound power level rating for fans tested and rated in accordance with AMCA Standards 300 and 301. Sound power ratings shall be in decibels (reference 10-12 watts) in eight octave bands. The maximum sound level shall be at or below 85 decibels at 5 feet. B. Inlet Vane Damper 1. Furnish and install a Type 316 stainless steel manually operated multiple blade inlet vane damper on the suction side of each odor control exhaust fan. 2. Rated for air velocities up to 6,000 fpm. 3. Materials of Construction: a. Frame: Type 316 stainless steel min. 10 ga. channel. b, Blades:Type 316 stainless steel min. 10 ga. Bearings: Relubricable ball, mounted externally with stainless steel sleeve bearings and stainless steel thrust washers at hub and frame. d, Axles:Type 316 stainless steel full length rod. e. Linkage:Type 316 stainless steel. Swivels and bearings are epoxy-coated steel. f. Hub: Type 316 stainless steel flat panel. g, Operating Lever: Lever arm with locking manual quadrant Type 316 stainless steel construction. 4. Ends: Flanged with bolt holes drilled to match fan inlet. 5. Manually operated with quadrant locking mechanism. & Provide Type 316 stainless steel nuts, bolts, and washers for flanged connections to fan and fan inlet box or flexible connector flange as required. 7, Mill Finish—No painting. 8, Confirm that manufacturers and product models are valid and acceptable for this PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 10 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 project. . Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Swartout, Model 851FG. b. Ruskin, Model HD-IVD. (�. Or approved equivalent. C. Irrigation system:The system shall include an irrigation system. 1. Irrigation system shall provide water for biological activity. Irrigation shall be monitored and controlled by the PLC, as appropriate for the Manufacturer's process. The PLC shall be capable of remote adjustment of irrigation flow. 2. All exposed irrigation piping shall include insulation and heat tracing provided and installed by the CONTRACTOR to protect against freezing weather conditions. 3. Indicate in the submittal what the water requirements are for operation, including water type (potable/non-potable) and maximum instantaneous flow rate in gallons per minute (gpm). Provide an in-line filter or strainer on the water supply line. 4� At the discharge stack of the tower, provide a tee with removable blind flange, as shown on the Drawings,for access. D. Nutrient System (Required): 1. The nutrient system shall supply nutrients to the irrigation water to promote biological activity. If the irrigation water does not contain sufficient nutrients to promote biological activity,a nutrient system shall be included. 2. The SUPPLIER, except where indicated, shall furnish all components necessary to provide nutrients to the irrigation water, including but not limited to: a. One (1) nutrient tank. 1) The nutrient tank shall have a volume of 55-gallons. 2) The nutrient tank shall have a level indicator that is tied to the plant control system.The level indicator will allow plant personnel to monitor the nutrient level in the tank. b. One (1) nutrient feed pump. The pump shall be capable of manual or remote operation through the plant control system as described in this Section. C. Nutrient supply. d. Piping, provided and installed by the CONTRACTOR,to connect the nutrient tank to the nutrient feed pump and to the irrigation system. 3. The nutrient feed tank and piping shall have insulation and heat tracing, provided, and installed by the CONTRACTOR,to protect against freezing weather conditions. E. Recirculation system: 1. The recirculation system shall take irrigation water that has passed through the biotrickling filter and pump this water back to the top of the unit to be passed through the system again.The recirculation system shall consist of the following components at a minimum: a. One (1) recirculation pump.The recirculation pump shall be sized to pump the drain water from the system back to the top of the system and maintain the required water pressure.The pump shall be connected to the plant control PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 11 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 system, so that manual and remote operations are possible. A wye strainer shall be provided for the pump. b. Piping to collect the drain water, connect to the recirculation pump, and convey the recirculated water to the top of the system. All piping shall have insulation and heat tracing to protect against freezing temperatures. Piping, insulation, heat tracing shall be provided and installed by the CONTRACTOR. F, Water Panel: The system shall include a water panel provided by the SUPPLIER. 1. The water panel shall serve to connect the irrigation system with the nutrient system and recirculation system, if applicable. 2. Where the irrigation system line enters the water panel, a check valve and wye strainer shall be provided. I Valves and controls shall be provided to allow for only recirculated or non-recirculated water to pass through the water panel to the top of the system. 4. A drain line shall be provided for emergency or extreme weather conditions. 5. A motor operated valve shall be supplied for the irrigation line.This valve shall be connected to the plant control system. 6. All piping in the water panel shall have insulation and heat tracing to protect against freezing weather conditions, which shall be provided and installed by the CONTRACTOR. 2.4 MATERIALS , Foul Air Fan(s): 1. The fan housing, wheel, and flange(s) shall be such that all surfaces and materials in contact with the corrosive gas stream are solid, corrosion resistant materials. All nuts, bolts, and fasteners in contact with the gas stream shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Note: AMCA Arrangement 4, which places the motor shaft in the corrosive gas stream, is unacceptable. 1 Construction: Fan shall be constructed in accordance with the ASTM D-4167 standard specification for fiber-reinforced plastic fans and fans to ensure structural integrity. All parts exposed to the gas stream shall be constructed of, or encapsulated in, an FRP laminate capable of resisting continuous airstream temperatures of 250 percent F. Fan housing must be fabricated of polyester resins; and "C" grade or better surface veil;To prevent premature deterioration of airstream components a Hartkoate abrasive/erosive resistant coating of 50-60 mils thickness shall be applied or an equivalent coating. �4 Housing: Fan housing shall be designed so that air leakage through joints and seals is negated. All bolted pieces shall be EPDM gasketed for airtightness. Fan housing shall be made of FRP construction and electrically grounded. b. Fan Wheel: Fiberglass construction, backward curved wheel, non-loading, high efficient, one-piece, resin transfer mold. An assembly of component-type wheel is not acceptable. C. Fan Shaft: Shaft shall be of Type 316 stainless steel or fiberglass designed to operate 25 percent below first critical speed. Shaft and impeller shall be electromechanically, statically and dynamically balanced to the requirements of PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 12 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 Fan Application Category BV-3, AMCA 204 and shall receive an operational test prior to shipment. Provide Teflon or equivalent double lip seal with Type 316 stainless steel mounting plate between shaft and housing. Seal shall positively prevent liquid and gas leakage. d, Fan Bearing Base: Provide Type 316 stainless steel fan bearing base. e. Fan Bearings: 1) Each fan shaft shall be supported by approved,grease lubricated, self- aligning ball or roller bearings made of vacuum degassed 52100 steel. Ball or roller bearings shall be made by manufacturers who are members of the American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) and shall be selected for a minimum rating life (L-10) of 100,000 hours at the fans maximum rated speed and based on Basic Dynamic Load Ratings calculated from ABMA formulas (ABMA Standards,Section No. 9, and Section No. 11, Latest Revisions). Material factors used in formula calculations shall be based on values assuming a conventional good quality, hardened bearing steel without benefit of vacuum degassing. Specifically,for pound and inch units, factor"f' shall be as given in the tables of ABMA Standards cited above. 2) The operating internal temperature of ball bearings with ambient temperature of 80 percent F shall not exceed 200 percent F. Temperature measurements shall be made with a thermal imaging thermometer. (Thermometers shall have an accuracy at 130 percent F of±2 percent F). Where thermometer wells are not provided or required,the surface temperature of the bearing housing shall be measured by a thermometer pressed firmly against the surface and sealed with a suitable plastic putty. Temperature readings during inspection and start-up after 3 hours of run time that exceed 1407 as measured by the thermometer-surface method, shall be deemed presumptive evidence that the operating internal temperature of the bearings exceed 200 percent F, unless SUPPLIER can conclusively prove otherwise with a bearing temperature analysis to the satisfaction of the OWNER or OWNER'S representative. In the absence of such proof, it shall be incumbent to reduce the temperature at or below 140 percent F with no additional cost to the OWNER. 3) Bearing temperature shall not exceed 225 percent F at the fan's maximum rated speed. 4) Computations on bearing selection shall be submitted for approval and shall show complete details of loading. A dynamic factor of 2.0 shall be applied to loading. Ball and roller bearings shall be enclosed in oil-tight housings equipped with approved shaft seal rings and shall be suitably arranged for high pressure grease lubrication. 5) The bearing supports for the shaft shall be of rigid design and shall be securely fastened to the base to ensure the proper alignment of the main shaft bearings. Bearings located in the corrosive gas stream are not acceptable. 6) Bearings shall be factory lubricated with a premium quality NLGI 2 or 3- PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 13 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 grade multi-purpose ball bearing grease having corrosion inhibitors, anti- oxidant additives and mechanical stability for high speed operation. Bearing grease shall be multi-purpose lithium soap grease. The grease shall also have a minimum base oil viscosity of 500 SUS at 100 percent F and shall be suitable to operate continuously at 225 percent F. Heavy, long fibered greased will not be acceptable for use in bearings. 7) Product and Manufacturer: Provide bearings as manufactured by one of the following: a) Link Belt f. Fan impeller and driving pulley shall be secured to shaft with keys and set screws. g. Fan housing shall have flanged discharge and inlet drilled connection and companion flanges (ANSI dimensions). Fan shall be separated from ductwork at inlet and outlet by flanged flexible connections. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate flange drilling with duct. h. Access Doors: Raised, bolted type, held in place with Type 316 stainless steel bolts with gaskets. Bolts shall be embedded and encapsulated in FRP housing. i. Odor control fan mounting shall be AMCA standard Arrangement 10 up to 15 horsepower, 20 horsepower and above shall be Arrangement 1 with fabricated Type 316 Stainless Steel Channel Sub-base and slide rail type motor mounting. Fan base shall be bolted directly to equipment slab and shop painted with an epoxy coating for outside/corrosive application. j, Drive: Matched V-belts and adjustable sheave pulleys shall be cast steel or cast iron, sized for 1.5 service factor. k. Belt and Shaft Guard: Type 316 stainless steel construction epoxy painted with tachometer hole, OSHA approved. Provide shaft and bearing guard. B. Odor Control Unit Vessel: 1, All materials used in the vessel shall be inherently corrosion resistant or shall have a corrosion resistant coating. 2. Acceptable materials include: a. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP)vinyl ester resin in accordance with ASTM D3299 and ASME RTP-1. 1) Provide a gel coat on all surfaces and UV inhibitor on all external surfaces. 2) Submit certificate from the vessel manufacturer listing the nomenclature, composition, and characteristics of the resin, as well as vessel and support/anchorage calculations. ) Minimum Properties of Resin(s): The 1/8-inch thick unfilled clear casting strength properties of the resin used will affect the total laminate strength and service life.The following are minimum acceptable room temperature (77 percent F) properties for vinyl ester resin: fir) Property: Vinyl ester resin b) Tensile Strength: 11,000 psi c) Tensile Modulus: 490,000 psi PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 14 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 d') Elongation: 5 percent e) Flexural Strength: 160,000 psi f) Flexural Modulus: 450,000 psi g) Heat Distortion Temperature: 210 degrees F h) Barcol Hardness: 35 b, Type 2205 Duplex stainless steel. C. Hastelloy C d, High-density polyethylene (HDPE) e. Other materials may be utilized on a case-by-case basis subject to approval by OWNER and ENGINEER. 3. Vessel openings shall be secured tightly and made of materials compatible with the project conditions. Galvanized materials are not acceptable. 4. Each odor control unit shall be provided with media support structure composed of FRP or HDPE grating and polypropylene screen. The grating shall be removable and fully accessible. Anchorage shall be integral to the vessel and shall not have metal components directly exposed to the foul air stream nor irrigation stream (nor condensate). 5. Design of system shall be in accordance with applicable local, state, national, and international standards and codes. . System shall meet the following loading criteria: a. Wind load limit when anchored: 150 mph b. Seismic zone: 0 C. Concentrated top load limit: 250 lb. on a 16-square-inch area. 7. Provide sampling ports (minimum 1-inch diameter)for the air inlet, exhaust, and minimum of one (1) intermediate stage to measure airflows and odorants between the biological and adsorption stages. Ports shall be easily accessible by OWNER's personnel and shall be routed to ground level and shall include a drip leg with ball valve. 8. Provide sample ports with ball valves on condensate and leachate drains to measure pH. Ports shall be easily accessible by OWNER's personnel. Media Requirements: L. Bioscrubber Stage Media: , Inorganic type, capable of being removed and replaced without full disassembly of the odor control unit. . Adsorption Stage Media: . Media shall be virgin, granulated or pelletized, single use, engineered activated carbon media for adsorption of hydrogen sulfate and other odorants listed in Table 1 of this Section. b, The adsorption media shall be non-toxic, UL classified, and able to be disposed of in a municipal landfill once exhausted and shall comply with the requirements listed in Table 3, below. Table 3: Adsorption Media Requirements PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 15 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 Parameter Value Apparent Density 0.39-0.50 g/cc Hardness No. (Minimum) 95 Hydrogen Sulfide Capacity 0.30 g-HZS/cc Nominal Diameter 4 mm 2.5 FABRICATION/ASSEMBLY Flanges shall be glass fiber reinforced, compatible with the duct material provided, and have a chemical resistance greater than or equal to the duct material. Flanges shall comply with PS-1569,Table 5, at a design pressure of 25 psi, and have a minimum of ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 25 diameter and drilling. B. Odor Control Fans shall be located in outdoor and corrosive areas. All mechanical and electrical equipment and material shall conform to NEMA 4X, non-metallic requirements. Provide panels with a three-point latch door system. Mounting hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel including fasteners and unistrut. C. Drain: 1. Each odor control unit and foul air fan shall have a drain connection with a valve at the base of the unit, sized as required by the Manufacturer. Drain valve shall be supplied by the SUPPLIER or Manufacturer. 2. Drains:The fan shall be properly sealed to prevent condensate leaks and shall be provided with a condensate drain. Provide drains at low point of scroll, minimum 1-inch pipe coupling welded to housing with threaded corrosion resistant plug. CONTRACTOR shall install a trap in the drain of necessary length to prevent foul air from blowing into the drain system. D. SUPPLIER shall furnish and install a sticker identifying the foul air fan maximum operating speed. Speed changes that exceed this value are not permitted. E. Particulate Removal: 1. The SUPPLIER's design shall consider particulates such as windblown dust that may be in the airstream and shall provide for their removal if equipment performance will be hampered by their presence. 2.6 SYSTEMS COMPONENTS A, SUPPLIER shall: 1. Supply all materials and equipment exposed to the airstream or condensate with protection from corrosion damage. Corrosion resistant materials and equipment are required unless specifically permitted in this Section. . Inlet vane damper(s)to foul air fan(s). 3. Inlet transition piece for connection to odor control unit from foul air duct. 4o Provide a neoprene or felt pad for placement under the odor control unit vessel (minimum 1/8"thick), as required by the Manufacturer for installation by CONTRACTOR. R. CONTRACTOR shall: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 16 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all required piping, fittings (except where noted), and hardware for removal and replacement of the existing CPVC connections to and from the existing wet well odor control connection, including fittings, adapters, anchors, and supports.The proposed foul air duct shall convey foul air from the wet well to the odor control system with fittings and adapters as needed to make the connections. . Provide and install all hardware, anchors, embedded anchors, and miscellaneous metals that are Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Provide and install all required small-diameter PVC pipe, fittings, and supports from the odor control unit to the drain, plant water, and irrigation connections as shown on the Drawings and as required by Manufacturer. 4. Provide and install all required foul air duct, fittings, adapters (except as noted), and supports. Refer to Section 40 05 36.13 and Section 40 05 64.43. 5. Heat trace and insulate (with aluminum jacketing) all exposed water and drain lines. Valves and appurtenances shall also be insulated and heat traced. Air sample lines are not required to be insulated or heat traced. & Provide field connections between instruments and panels, as necessary. 7. All drains from a pressure area shall include a trap with flush connection and cleanout. Trap shall have a depth of water sufficient to escape of foul air from the system. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. The following spare parts shall be provided: 1, One set of special tools required for maintenance or adjustment. 2. One particulate prefilter(if recommended by SUPPLIER). 3. Other items as recommended by the Manufacturer. 4, Two sets of fuses of each type and size used. 5. Two spare relays of each type used. 6. One spare bulb of each type and color used on panel fronts. 7. One set of spare parts for the nutrient feed pump (if used). 8. Two sets of strainers for each type and size supplied. . Furnish and deliver the following spare parts for each fan size. a. Two (2) sets of spare belts. b. Two (2) sets of bearings. C. Two (2) replacement Teflon seals. 10. Furnish list of solvents for cleaning dirt,grease, and oil from surface of non-metallic parts. R. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear indelible identification markings, referencing the equipment that they are intended for, and shall be stored in a dry,warm location until transferred to the OWNER at the conclusion of the project. Provide complete ordering information including manufacturer, part number, part name and equipment for each part to be used. Each part shall be labeled with part numbers which correspond to the Operation and Maintenance Data submitted in accordance with Section 0178 23, "Operation and Maintenance Data." PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 17 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 1, Initial Supply of Consumables: a. SUPPLIER shall indicate types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary for starting up equipment. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install the recommended lubricants and shall comply with all SUPPLIER recommended procedures. b. If nutrients are required,SUPPLIER shall provide a 1-year supply (beginning at acceptance of the odor control unit) of nutrients in addition to supplies for startup and testing. . Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear, indelible identification markings and shall be stored in a dry,warm, location, until transferred to the OWNER at the conclusion of the Project. Each part shall be labeled with part numbers which correspond to the Operation and Maintenance Data submitted in accordance with Section 0178 23, "Operation and Maintenance Data." , Provide an aluminum or FRP ladder with cage and landings fastened to each odor control unit to access exhaust stack, in accordance with applicable local, state,and national standards and codes,when shown on the Drawings. D� Lifting Lugs: Individual equipment and/or each field disassembled part weighing over 60 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs. 2.8 MOTORS A, Foul Air Fan Motor(s): 1. Direct drive, heavy-duty ball bearing type, UL approved, and totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). Motor(s) shall have the parameters as listed in Table 2. B. Fan Motors: 1. Comply with NEMA designation,temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 26 20 00.01, "NEMA Frame Induction Motors, 600 Volts, and Below" for motors, 600 volts and lower, and 250 HP and smaller. Requirements of this Section supersede any conflicting requirements of Section 26 20 00.01, "NEMA Frame Induction Motors, 600 Volts, and Below." . Motor Sizes: Properly size so that enough driven loads will not require the motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0 along the complete operating range. Motor size(s) listed in Table 2 shall be confirmed for compliance with this requirement. 1 If a motor horsepower rating larger than specified is offered as a substitute and accepted, provided required changes in conductors, motor controllers, overload relays,fuses, switches, and other related items with no change in the Contract price." 4. Motors shall be rated for Class I, Division II locations. 5. Motors shall be in accordance with all current applicable standards of NEMA, IEEE, AFBMA, NEC,ANSI and NFPA 820. 6. Motors shall be normal starting torque, normal slip, squirrel cage induction type. 7. Motor thrust bearings shall be adequate to carry continuous thrust loads under all conditions of fan operation. 8, Motor efficiencies shall be determined in accordance with NEMA Standard MG1- 12.53a and IEEE Standard 112,Test Method B. Nominal and guaranteed efficiencies PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 18 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 shall be included on motor nameplates in compliance with NEMA Standard MG1- 12.53.b. 2.9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS A. A selector switch shall be provided for each foul air fan with LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE operation options. Each selector switch shall be integrated into the Odor Control Panel. 1, LOCAL allows the fan to be run from the Plant Control System. 2, OFF turns the fan off. I REMOTE allows the fan to be run in automatic mode. Local control shall be included, so the foul air fan can be manually adjusted when in REMOTE operation. R. Each foul air fan shall have an LED indicator light(s)to indicate the current fan operational status. C. Provide a pressure gauge to measure the pressure in the distribution plenum at the base of the odor control unit. D. All instrumentation, control and electrical components provided under this section shall comply with the requirements on the Drawings and Divisions 26 and 40. E. Control Panels 1, General Requirements Refer to Section 40 05 91, "Common Control Panel Requirements for Process Equipment" for general requirements of control panels requirements. Control panel shall be provided with main circuit breaker, PLC, OIT, starters, control power transformer, lights,switches, relays,terminal strips, etc. for a complete and operational system.The SUPPLIER shall provide all additional instrumentation and controls necessary to produce a safe and operable system. b. Control Panel shall be furnished fully assembled,wired, and pre-programmed in a NEMA 4X and UL certified Type 316 stainless steel enclosure with a white powder coating oversized enclosure, with a three point latching handle and rated for 230V, 3-Phase, 60 Hz. C. Control panel shall include an uninterruptible power supply manufactured by APC,Tripp Lite, Phoenix Contact, or approved equivalent to protect the PLC and operator interface. Battery life shall be a 15-minute minimum. d, Provide power for each field instruments. Each instrument shall have its own protected circuit. e. Provide power for water panel. Water panel shall have its own protected circuit. f. Provide panel drip leg to drain off any moisture accumulated inside control panel. g. Provide thermostatically and humidity-controlled heaters and close loop air conditioning in the panel if required to maintain proper operating temperature range for the equipment minimize condensation. h. All internal components shall be mounted and secured to the removable back plane assembly. i. Furnish 1 control panel for the Odor Control System. Panel shall be provided with 1 PLC based control system with operator interface terminal (OIT) PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 19 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 furnished by the SUPPLIER. The OIT shall be a 15-inch color touch screen. Odor control system shall be furnished, configured, and completely commissioned by SUPPLIER. j, Provide NEMA 4X Type 316 stainless steel OIT window kits to cover the OIT. The OIT window kits shall have oil resistant gasket for water tight seal for outdoor application. k. Plant Control System (SCADA) Interface: 1) The odor control system PLC shall be capable of communicating all instrument readings and system alarms to the plant control system via Ethernet/IP multimode fiber optic connection. 2) The foul air fans, recirculation pump, nutrient feed pump (if used), and applicable valves shall have ON/OFF indicators in the SCADA interface. ) All odor control system PLC registers shall be made available to the plant control system integrator. 4) The SUPPLIER shall provide complete electronic copies of all PLC, 1/0 and configuration program data before shipment of the equipment for use in configuring the plant control system and shall provide updated versions of this information during the field commissioning start up and testing, if necessary, including final version before acceptance of the system. SUPPLIER shall supply the software program and all necessary software components compatible with the PLC to provide the OWNER with the capability to troubleshoot PLC. 2. Odor Control Panel a. Provide control system for equipment system, but not limited to the odor control fans, recirculation pump, nutrient feed pump (if used), and required valves.This list is not intended to completely depict all of the functional requirements of the control system provided under this Section. The SUPPLIER shall provide all additional instrumentation and controls necessary to produce a safe and operable system. b� Panel shall have the following controls mounted on the panel face: 1) ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC for each piece of equipment a) ON allows the equipment to be started from the panel b) OFF allows the equipment to be stopped from the panel c) AUTO allows the equipment to be started, stopped, from the described sequence of operation 2) OPEN/CLOSE/AUTOMATIC for each valve a) OPEN allows the valve to be opened from the panel b) CLOSE allows the valve to be closed from the panel c) AUTO allows the valve to be opened, closed,from the described sequence of operation ) RUN, FAIL, and OFF push-to-test LED indicating lights for each piece of equipment. 4) Fail reset button for each piece of equipment PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 20 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 5) Power On indication light 6) OIT color touch screen C. The minimum shall be provided with the panel. 1) Main circuit protective device 2) PLC with Ethernet/IP communications, over multimode fiber optic. 3) NEMA rated CONTRACTOR's for each piece of equipment 4) Fused sealed oversized control power transformer. 5) Combined sounder and LED beacon for annunciating of failure. Beacon/horn shall be mounted separately from enclosure by CONTRACTOR. 6) Ambient temperature controlled. 7) Condensate drain. ) Provide engraved nameplates for each function. ) Provide terminal strips in enclosure for termination of device, no direct termination to relays, starters, etc. allowed. 10) One (1)temperature sensor shall be mounted inside control panel to continuously sense the temperature of control panel. The reading shall be displayed on the OIT panel and relayed to the SCADA system. 3. Sequence of Operation a. General 1) The Odor Control System is a stand-alone control system monitored by the Plant PCS System. The control panel provides monitoring and manual control through the panel's OIT and is used by the Plant Operators to make adjustments to foul air blower and bioscrubber controls. All monitoring and control shall be from the OIT. 2) Blowers shall restart upon power restoration after delay. The PLC shall monitor normal power source and shall restart blowers upon delay. 3) All control actions at the Odor Control System control panel are performed using the Odor Control PLC. F, Control Panel Wiring and Assembly 1. All control enclosures shall be custom assembled and wired in an Underwriters Laboratories (UL) certified cabinet shop using quality materials and labor. 2. All control panel wire shall be multi-strand tinned-copper machine tool wire minimum,with MTW insulation. Discrete IO cable shall be No. 14 AWG and analog IO cable shall be No. 16 TSP shielded cable. Wire colors are as follows: a. 230 VAC or higher Black b. 120 VAC control power Red C. Neutral White d, Ground Green e, Power from remote source Yellow f. 24 VDC (+) Orange g, 24 VDC(-) Gray PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 21 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 3. All wires shall be clearly marked with an identification number consistent with the wiring schematic drawing. 4, Wiring inside the control panel shall be run in white PVC wiring duct rated for continuous temperatures up to 140 degrees F. Devices mounted in the enclosure door shall have wires run in spiral wrap to avoid pinch points when opening and closing the door. 5. Control components mounted internal and external to the enclosure shall be mounted with Type 316 stainless steel hardware and clearly labeled with a plastic identification nametag. The tag shall be white with black lettering. 6. Control panels, as well as components installed, shall comply with environmental fabrication requirements of Specification Section 40 05 91 "Common Control Panel Requirements." 7, All wiring outside panels shall have XHHW-2 insulation. Wiring and conduits shall be sized to meet NEC 2020 Code. G. Field Instrumentation 1. General Requirements Section includes field instruments, unscheduled devices, auxiliary equipment and installation components required for an installation and operational devices. As part of this system,the instruments specified in this Section shall be provided by the SUPPLIER. b. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of 5 years. When requested by the OWNER/ENGINEER, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. Unscheduled Devices 1) Provide stainless steel 1/2 inch ball valves when indicated in P&IDs. 2) Provide diaphragm pressure seals when indicated in P&IDs. 3) Provide instrument manifolds for all static pressure, liquid level and differential pressure application. 4) Provide an external weatherproof on-off switch for each instrument obtaining power from an external power source (non-loop powered). 5) Provide field surge protection on all 4-20ma instrument signals. Protection device shall be NEMA 4X and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 6) Provide sun-shields on all instruments mounted outdoors. d. Commissioning: 1) Commissioning of instruments shall be in accordance with manufacturers' instructions,the product data and shop drawings and Division 1 specifications. 2. Instrumentation Paddlewheel Flow Meter 1) Description: Flow sensor shall be paddlewheel with open collector signal, polypropylene/black PVDF/Titanium material wet-tap sensor. Transmitter PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 22 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 shall be constructed of PBT,with a 4 button keypad, LCD display. Transmitter shall be 120 VAC with a 4-20 mA output. Manufacturer and model: Signet 2536 sensor with 3-9950-2 transmitter. 2) Quantity: 1 b. Differential Pressure Transmitter 1) Description: Transmitter shall be housed NEMA 4X enclosure with LCD display that can be programmed to read in pressure,velocity or flow. Transmitter shall be rated Classification I, Division I. Transmitter shall be 10-35 VDC with a 4-20 mA output. 2) Manufacturer and model: Dwyer, ISDP Series. ) Quantity: 3 C. Side Mount Level Switch 1) Description: Horizontally mounted level switch, rated NEMA 6. Switch shall be SPST, rated at 50 VA. Switch shall be constructed of CPVC. 2) Manufacturer and model: Omega, LVN-90. ) Quantity: 1 d, Pressure Indicating Transmitter 1) Description: Transmitter shall be constructed on die cast aluminum,with a LCD, 4-20 mA (Hart) output signal, 24 VDC loop powered, and ceramic diaphragm. Manufacturer and model, Endress+Hauser PMC71. 2) Quantity: 1 2.10 FINISHES A, Comply with requirements of Section 09 9100. 13. Shop Selections: 1. Finish: Color and finish as selected by OWNER from samples submitted by CONTRACTOR. 2. Primer: When factory prime coat is included only, color as selected by OWNER from samples submitted by CONTRACTOR. Foul Air Fan Coatings: 1. Baked epoxy phenolic or"cold set" epoxy-phenolic amine cured, brush or spray coats in accordance with SUPPLIER'S specifications. D7 All gears, bearing surfaces, machined surfaces and other surfaces which are to remain unpainted shall receive a heavy application of grease or other rust/corrosion resistant coating. The coating shall be maintained during storage and until the equipment is placed into operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLER A, CONTRACTOR to install equipment per this Section and the SUPPLIER'S installation instructions. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 23 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 3.2 EXAMINATION A, A thorough inspection of each piece of equipment shall be conducted by the CONTRACTOR upon arrival at the construction site to inspect for damage incurred in transit. Any damage shall be immediately repaired by respective equipment fabricator's personnel, not a sales representative, or the equipment shall be returned to the SUPPLIER. B. OWNER or OWNER'S representative reserves right to reject all items of equipment found to have following: blisters, chips, crazing, exposed glass, dry cracks, burned areas, dry spots, foreign matter, or entrapped air at the laminate surfaces which does not satisfy the tolerances specified in ASTM D 2563 Table 1,Acceptance Level II for inside and outside surfaces or meet the specified requirements. C. INSPECTION AND START-UP ADJUSTMENTS 1. The SUPPLIER Field Representative shall perform the following inspection of equipment with the Owner's Representative. a. Verify proper equipment mounting and setting. b. Verify that control, interlock, and power wiring is complete. C. Verify alignment of each motor and drive. d. Verify proper piping connections and accessories. e. Verify that lubrication is completed. f. Verify direction of rotation. g, Verify setting of safety controls. h. Monitor heat buildup in bearings. i. Check motor loads against nameplate data. j, Verify proper starter overload heater sizes. k. Verify function of safety and operating controls. I. Verify proper operation of equipment. ni. Remove all loose materials and obstructions from interior of ducts and fans. n. Remove debris and waste materials resulting from installation. 2. The SUPPLIER shall conduct the following Start-up Adjustments: , Adjust fan for proper alignment and flow. b. Set volume control devices for approximate positions in preparation for final testing and balancing. C. Balance system for CFM provided on the Drawings and in accordance with this section. 3.3 PREPARATION A. SUPPLIER shall assure that all equipment furnished under this Section is suitable for installation as specified. The SUPPLIER is responsible for determining the necessary clearances and headroom required to move all equipment to its final location. 3.4 INSTALLATION A, Refer to Section 0170 00. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 24 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 B. CONTRACTOR shall install OCS in accordance with SUPPLIER's procedures and recommendations. C. SUPPLIER shall verify installation and test all odor control fan equipment. D. SUPPLIER's installation report shall be required prior to final acceptance. E. Odor control fan equipment shall be installed as specified herein and as shown on Drawings, and in accordance with the SUPPLIER's recommendations and instructions. Equipment shall be installed in such a manner that connecting piping shall not impose any strain whatsoever on any equipment. Equipment shall be set upon grouted foundations, level or perpendicular so that connecting flanges, screwed connections, or flexible connections shall meet without strain or distortion. Base leveling nuts shall be blocked out during grouting of foundations,the grout allowed to set for not less than three days, leveling nuts loosened and followed by grouting of block-outs,with non-shrink grout. F. In every case where a drive motor is connected to a driven piece of equipment by a flexible coupling,the coupling halves shall be disconnected and alignment between motor and equipment checked and corrected. Machinery shall first be perfectly aligned and leveled by means of Type 316 stainless steel wedges and shims near anchor bolts. Anchor bolts shall be tightened against shims on wedges and equipment shall again be checked for level and alignment before placing grout. Equipment bases shall not be grouted, nor foundation bolts finally tightened until all piping connections are complete and in satisfactory alignment with no strain transmitted to the equipment. W. Examine pads or supports to receive odor control fans for: 1. Proper anchor bolt locations. 2. Unevenness, irregularities, and incorrect dimensions. I. Supervise installation in accordance with odor control fan manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. J. Provide flanged flexible connections at air inlet and discharge of odor control fans. K. All equipment shall be installed on concrete bases and secured with anchor bolts in accordance with the SUPPLIER's recommendations. CONTRACTOR shall accurately shim base to grade and spaces between shims filled with an approved non-shrink grout. After grout has reached its initial set, exposed edges shall be cut back 1/2-inch and edges neatly finished with 1:2 cement mortar. L. SUPPLIER shall include furnishing and applying an initial supply of grease and oil, recommended by the respective manufacturer. M. Connect all piping, valves, and accessories as necessary to complete the installation. N. Install all conduit and wiring and complete all connections. 3.5 FIELD/SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Equipment that has mechanical defects and does not meet SUPPLIER's vibration requirements shall be rejected and shall be replaced at SUPPLIER's full expense for furnishing, installing, removal, and replacement. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 25 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 B. Mechanical defects shall include excessive vibration, improper balancing of rotative parts, improper tolerances, binding, excessive bearing heating, defective materials, improper fitting of parts, and any other defect which shall in time damage the equipment or impair its operation. C. Requirements must be met concerning minimum and maximum dimensions and the specifications for materials. If it is found upon delivery that materials do not agree with the requirements of these Specifications as to materials, size,type, quality, or metallurgy,they shall be rejected as unfit for use. U. The field installed and operating fan inboard and outboard bearing motions shall not exceed the in-situ operation levels for Fan Application Category BV-3 of ANSI/AMCA 204-96. The instrument system used must have a flat response down to 120 rpm. SUPPLIER Field Representative shall measure the vibrations after start-up in the presence of the OWNER'S representative. E. Fan vibrations that exceed the ANSI/AMCA 204-96 in-situ operation levels, as described above, during operation in the warranty period shall be reduced by SUPPLIER Field Representative. SUPPLIER Field Representative can choose to dynamically balance the fan in place using a recognized specialist, replace bearings or make structural modifications to reduce the vibrations, as approved by the OWNER. F, Manufacturer Services 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 0143 33. . Equipment Supplier Services: 1, The SUPPLIER Field Representative shall be present at the project site or classroom designated by OWNER for minimum person-days and trips provided in Table 4, below. Each person-day shall be defined as 8 hours duration, exclusive of travel.The SUPPLIER Field Representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary to correct deficiencies. Table 4: Field Representative Requirements Work Description No. Person Days No.Trips Installation assistance and 1 1 inspection Functional and performance 1 Can be combined with testing training Pre-startup classroom or site 1 1 training Facility startup 2 Can be combined with training Post-startup training of 1 1 OWNER's personnel 2. SUPPLIER's services shall comply with the requirements of Section 0175 25, "Equipment Testing and Startup." I SUPPLIER shall coordinate the scheduling of training and startup assistance with OWNER. OWNER may videotape training session. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 26 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 4. A typed outline shall be handed out at the training session and, at a minimum,will include normal operating parameters, alarms, and maintenance. 3.6 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Startup of the facility shall be in accordance with Section 0175 00. 13. Installation Assistance and Inspection: 1. After Equipment Installation and before startup,the CONTRACTOR and SUPPLIER Field Representative shall inspect the installation of the equipment. A preliminary running period (as applicable)will be provided for the CONTRACTOR to make field adjustments with the SUPPLIER Field Representative. CONTRACTOR shall submit a report for SUPPLIER approval of equipment installation. 2. In the presence of the OWNER and ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall test the operation of the OCS. Final Acceptance will not be made until after successful completion of the performance testing and receipt of the final installation report, indicating that at least 99 percent removal of 1-12S has been accomplished. C. After Final Acceptance,the SUPPLIER shall collect, ship, and analyze media samples to determine the remaining media service life. Collection, shipment, and analysis shall be performed at the cost of the SUPPLIER. D. Functional Test: 1. CONTRACTOR to start up equipment with SUPPLIER Field Representative. Equipment shall be able to run in manual mode with all associated piping, electrical and equipment installed to show proper equipment operation. Functional Test shall be a minimum of 5 days of uninterrupted service. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for equipment operation for the 5-day period. Any delays or additional person days and trips required for SUPPLIER Field Representative to perform Functional Testing beyond what is specified is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. 2. After SUPPLIER and OWNER'S representative have mutually agreed that the equipment installation is complete and ready for continuous operation,SUPPLIER Field Representative shall conduct an operating test of the equipment and controls in the presence of OWNER or OWNER'S representative to demonstrate that the equipment and its controls shall function correctly. E. Performance Test and Initial Training: 1. CONTRACTOR and SUPPLIER Field Representative to start up equipment in Automatic Mode (Normal Operation). Equipment shall run in 2 modes: normal operation and peak flow conditions. CONTRACTOR and SUPPLIER Field Representative should demonstrate any alarms, lead lag conditions, or total auto mode or other conditions related to equipment operation. Performance Test shall run with uninterrupted service for 30 days. Performance Test shall be run with wastewater under normal operating conditions. If equipment fails before 30 days, SUPPLIER shall correct problems at their own expense and restart the 30-day Performance Test. SUPPLIER and CONTRACTOR are responsible for equipment operation during the 30-day Performance Test. SUPPLIER shall perform initial training at the end of the 30-day Performance Test for OWNER's representative. Training shall be with a draft of the full Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Upon completion of Performance Test and Training,the OWNER shall consider equipment substantially complete and start the PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 27 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 warranty period. 2. Testing Equipment: CONTRACTOR shall supply the equipment listed below for the duration of the performance testing. Equipment shall remain on site until performance testing has been accepted by the OWNER or OWNER'S representative. Submit current calibration certificates for each piece of equipment used along with test results. CONTRACTOR shall comply with equipment manufacturer's recommendations for equipment use. . Jerome 631-X(or newer model) Hydrogen Sulfide Analyzer by Arizona Instruments. Range 0.003-50 ppm (intended for in-field grab sampling analysis only). b, Acrulog Hydrogen Sulfide Gas Logger by Detection Instruments. One each Range 0-1000 ppm or 0-200 ppm (adequate range to monitor inlet concentration), and 0-50 ppm Acrulogs;two low-range 0.001-2.0 ppm Acrulogs; one Low-Range Sampling System (LRSS-2), each with sufficient PVC or Teflon hose for testing. C. Alnor AXD 540 Micromanometer by TSI Incorporated, Range 250-15,500 fpm, with 18-inch pitot tube and hoses, or equal. d. Accuro gas detector pump by Drager Safety. Include 10 tubes for Hydrogen Sulfide 0-200 ppm. e. Odor sampling shall commence one hour after the H2S monitoring equipment has been installed and is determined to be stable. Two (2) sample sets, each consisting of the bioscrubber inlet and outlet. Each sample set shall be taken one hour apart. The inlet and outlet samples shall be taken concurrently and the sampling time and inlet and outlet H2S levels logged in the field prior to shipment. The 4 samples shall be shipped to the laboratories for analysis to be received within 24 hours. The analyses and respective laboratories shall include: ODOR UNITS TESTING: St. Croix Sensory 1150 Stillwater Blvd. North Stillwater, MN 55082 1-800-879-9231 REDUCED SULFIDES TESTING: ALS Environmental (formerly Columbia Analytical Services, Inc.) 2655 Park Center Drive, Suite A Simi Valley, CA 93065 805-526-7161 1 Testing Procedure: , The OCS shall be balanced per Section 44 3183, "Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing", prior to testing. b. Measure the airflow velocity (feet per minute (fpm)), static pressure (inches water column (in. wc)), and velocity pressure (in.wc) into each odor scrubber/adsorption unit. Airflows shall be within five percent(5%) of the PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 28 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 specified value before testing may commence. C. Measure the airflows into each individual scrubber/adsorption unit. Airflows shall be within 5 percent of equal or specified distribution before testing may commence. d. Using the Draeger pump and H2S tubes,verify the inlet H2S concentration is less than 1,000 ppm. e. Connect the low range Acrulog control pump tube to the exhaust of each scrubber/adsorption unit being tested. Connect the high range (0-200 or 0- 1000 ppm as appropriate)Acrulog control pump tube to the foul air collection system at the inlet of the bioscrubber(s) being tested. Coordinate sampling locations with the OWNER or OWNER'S Representative. Acrulogs shall be set to log time,temperature (degrees F), and H2S concentration at two-minute intervals for high-range Acrulogs and ten-minute intervals for low-range Acrulogs. Log data continuously for a minimum of two weeks for each pair of scrubber/adsorption units. Comply with the Acrulog manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for use. Acrulogs must be logging data during the duration of the tests. Testing shall comply with Section 0175 25, "Equipment Testing and Startup," and Section 44 3183, "Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." f. Using the Jerome 631-X meter or low-range Acrulogs,to measure grab samples of bioscrubber exhaust H2S concentrations in the field prior to sending the samples to the lab. 4. Testing Report: CONTRACTOR shall submit the following: a, CD-ROM containing the original Acrulog data files and files exported into Microsoft Excel format. Written report shall include graphs of Acrulog data. b, Dimensioned drawing showing locations and identification of samples taken. C. Date,time, sample and results of each sample taken. d, Airflow rate, static and velocity pressures at the time of sampling. e. Any deviations from the test procedure with an explanation. f. Original log of sample information including but not limited to duration of each sampling event and overall performance test, equipment type used for each sampling event,type of constituent measured in each sampling event. 5. Acceptance: Determination of satisfactory performance will be made by the OWNER or OWNER'S representative based on the above performance testing or additional testing as needed. Acceptable H2S removal will be determined by averaging the continuously logged inlet H2S concentrations and averaging the continuously logged outlet concentrations measured by the Jerome meter and Acrulogs, as appropriate. Odor sampling shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E679 and EN 13729. If the sampling results do not meet the requirements of Paragraph 2.2.13 of this Section, the SUPPLIER will be given four weeks to make necessary modifications to the odor control system before a retest is conducted at no expense to the OWNER. The OWNER may withhold the cost of any retest from the CONTRACTOR's final payment. If the system fails two retests,the SUPPLIER shall remove and replace the odor control system with one that meets the requirements, at its sole cost. 6, SUPPLIER may conduct concurrent testing at their option at no cost to the OWNER. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 29 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 Concurrent testing by the SUPPLIER will not be used as a basis for acceptance of the unit. T All warranty and guarantee periods shall be in accordance with Paragraph 1.8 of this Section. Performance testing may not begin until the system is connected to all the foul air sources listed in Paragraph 1.2, Item A.3 of this Section. 8. In the presence of the OWNER and the OWNER's Representative,the CONTRACTOR shall test the operation of the odor control system. Final acceptance will not be made until after successful completion of the performance testing and receipt of the final installation report. 3.7 ADJUSTING A, Adjust parts for smooth, uniform operation. Vibration of installed equipment shall be within manufacturer's specified tolerances. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use materials or methods which may damage finish(es), surface(s), or surrounding construction. 3.9 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A, Equipment Supplier Certificates 1. Provide Supplier Certificate(s) of installation stating the equipment is installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. . Provide Supplier Certificate(s) of Performance stating the equipment meets or exceeds the performance requirements as defined herein. B, A copy of all information from functional tests including data, worksheets, and other materials shall be turned over to the OWNER at the completion of the testing program. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 44 3119-PAGE 30 OF 30 ADDENDUM 3 0537-036-01 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS SEPTEMBER 2025 APPENDIX • GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING • MATERIALS ENGINEERING &TESTING • SOILS • ASPHALT • CONCRETE e Ay A UES Company GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY COOPERS ALLEY CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ROCK ENGINEERING REPORT NUMBER: G123364 PREPARED FOR: CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI ENGINEERING SERVICES 1201 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78411 SEPTEMBER 28, 2023 PREPARED BY: a ROCK ENGINEERING & TESTING LABORATORY, LLC. 6817 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS78409 .: P: (361) 883-4555; F: (361) 883-4711 TBPE FIRM NO. 2101 + j ti # Y GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING c • CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ENGINEERING&TESTING 'Toq SOILS •ASPHALT• CONCRETE A UES Company September 28, 2023 City of Corpus Christi Engineering Services 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 Attention: Ms. Romy Doherty SUBJECT: SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION, LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM, AND GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY COOPERS ALLEY Corpus Christi, Texas Rock Engineering Job No. — G123364 Dear Ms. Doherty, In accordance with our agreement, Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, LLC. (Rock Engineering) has conducted a subsurface investigation, laboratory testing program, and geotechnical evaluation for the above referenced project. The results of this investigation, together with our recommendations, are presented in the accompanying report, an electronic copy of which is being transmitted herewith. Often, because of design and construction details that occur on a project, questions arise concerning soil conditions. Rock Engineering would be pleased to continue its role as the Geotechnical Engineer during the project implementation. Rock Engineering also has great interest in providing materials testing and observation services during the construction phase of this project. If you will advise us of the appropriate time to discuss these engineering services, we will be pleased to meet with you at your convenience. If you have any questions, or if we can be of further assistance, please contact us at (361) 883-4555. Sincerely - James P. Bauer, P.E. Corpus Christi Branch Manager ROCK ENGINEERING& TESTING LABORATORY,LLC. Corpus Christi San Antonio Round Rock Office:361.883.4555 Office:210.495.8000 Office: 512.284.8022 Fax:361.883.4711 Fax:210.495.8015 Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St. 10856 Vandale 7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi,TX 78409 San Antonio,TX 78216 Round Rock,TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION, LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM, AND GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY COOPERS ALLEY CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ROCK ENGINEERING REPORT NUMBER: G123364 PREPARED FOR: CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI ENGINEERING SERVICES 1201 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78411 SEPTEMBER 28, 2023 PREPARED BY: ROCK ENGINEERING AND TESTING LABORATORY, LLC. 6817 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78409 PHONE: (361) 883-4555; FAX: (361) 883-4711 TEXAS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING FIRM NO. 2101 g�P.�EOF rF'�gs�� • .JAMES P. BAUER C A. 129201 �; (���,oF loo S BENS��•G�l►�'�� ONAL James P. Bauer Joshua A. McCann, E.I.T Corpus Christi Branch Manager Project Manager < ' I e ay'Y c Oq Y A UES Company TABLE OF CONTENTS Paqe INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................................................... 1 Authorization...................................................................................................................................................... 1 Purposeand Scope........................................................................................................................................... 1 General ............................................................................................................................................................... 1 SITE DESCRIPTION...............................................................................................................................................2 FIELD EXPLORATION...........................................................................................................................................2 Scope..................................................................................................................................................................2 Drilling and Sampling Procedures...................................................................................................................3 Field Tests and Observations ..........................................................................................................................3 LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM ..................................................................................................................4 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................4 General ...............................................................................................................................................................4 SoilConditions ..................................................................................................................................................5 SeismicSite Classification...............................................................................................................................6 Groundwater Observations..............................................................................................................................6 OSHA Soil Type Classification.........................................................................................................................6 FOUNDATION DISCUSSION.................................................................................................................................7 ProjectDescription............................................................................................................................................7 Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) Discussion........................................................................................................7 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS..................................................................................................................7 Straight Shaft Drilled Pier Foundation Recommendations...........................................................................7 Group Effect on Deep Foundations.................................................................................................................8 Structures Supported on Deep Foundations..................................................................................................9 LateralPier Analysis.........................................................................................................................................9 SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS .......................................................................................................................10 Concrete Flatwork Construction Considerations ........................................................................................ 10 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS................................................................................................................11 SitePreparation...............................................................................................................................................11 SelectFill..........................................................................................................................................................12 Drilled, Cast-in-Place, Pier Construction with Slurry Displacement Method............................................12 Utilities..............................................................................................................................................................13 Expansion and Control Joints........................................................................................................................13 GENERAL COMMENTS.......................................................................................................................................13 APPENDIX Site Vicinity Map Boring Locations Plan Boring Logs B-1 and B-2 Key to Soil Classifications and Symbols September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of a subsurface exploration, laboratory testing program, and geotechnical analysis for the proposed Boat Haul Out Facility project planned for a site off Coopers Alley L-head in Corpus Christi, Texas. Authorization The work for this project was performed in accordance with Rock Engineering proposal number CGP072023B dated July 26, 2023. The scope of work and fee was approved by the City of Corpus Christi Engineering Services by issuance of Task Order No. 07 dated August 9, 2023 in accordance with Master Services Agreement. The Task Order was sent to Rock Engineering via email. Purpose and Scope The purpose of this exploration was to evaluate the soil and groundwater conditions at the site and to provide geotechnical recommendations suitable for the proposed project. The scope of the exploration and analysis included the subsurface exploration, field and laboratory testing, engineering analysis, evaluation of the subsurface conditions, provision of geotechnical recommendations, and preparation of this report. The scope of services did not include an environmental assessment. Any statements in this report, or on the boring log, regarding odors, colors, unusual or suspicious items or conditions are strictly for the information of the client. General The exploration and analysis of the subsurface conditions reported herein are considered sufficient in detail and scope to provide geotechnical recommendations for the proposed project. The recommendations submitted herein are based on project details provided by the client and the soil information obtained at the boring locations. If the designers require additional soil parameters to complete the design of the foundation systems, and this information can be obtained from the soil data and laboratory tests performed within the scope of work included in our proposal for this project, Rock Engineering will provide the additional recommendations requested as a supplement to this report. The Geotechnical Engineer states that the findings, recommendations, specifications, or professional advice contained herein have been presented after being prepared in a manner consistent with that level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by reputable members of the Geotechnical Engineer's profession practicing contemporaneously under similar conditions in the locality of the project. Rock Engineering operates in general accordance with "Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction", (ASTM D3740). No other representations are expressed or implied, and no warranty or guarantee is included or intended. Page 1 of 14 September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of City of Corpus Christi Engineering Services and the project designers for the specific application for the proposed Boat Haul Out Facility planned for a site located at the southwest corner of the intersection of Coopers Alley and S Shoreline Boulevard in Corpus Christi, Texas. SITE DESCRIPTION The site for the proposed new Boat Haul Out Facility is located at the southeast corner of the intersection of Coopers Alley and S Shoreline Boulevard. At the time of our field investigation, two existing buildings occupied the western portion of the site while the remainder of the site featured concrete pavement. The site location is depicted on the Site Vicinity Map provided in the Appendix. As indicated on the Flood Insurance Rate Map of Nueces County dated October 13, 2022, the project site appears to be located in an area categorized as "Zone VE". The designers should select the appropriate foundation system and project elevations that complies with all applicable local and federal regulations regarding VE Zones. FIELD EXPLORATION Scope The field exploration performed to evaluate the engineering characteristics of the subsurface soil materials included reconnaissance of the project site, performing the test boring operations and obtaining relatively undisturbed Shelby tube samples and disturbed split spoon samples. During the sample recovery operations, the soils encountered were classified and recorded on the boring logs in accordance with "Standard Guide for Field Logging of Subsurface Exploration of Soil and Rock, (ASTM D5434)." Two (2) boring was performed at the site for the purpose of providing geotechnical information. The table below provides the boring identification, boring depth, and approximate Global Positioning System (GPS) coordinates at the boring location. Summary of Boring Information Boring Depth (ft) Approximate GPS Coordinates B-1 60 N 27.79113' W 97.39174' B-2 60 N 27.79103' W 97.39181° Approximate GPS coordinates were obtained at the boring locations using a Garmin eTrex model GPS and are provided in this report and on the boring logs. Rock Engineering determined the number and depths of the borings and performed the drilling and logging operations. Page 2 of 14 September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas Upon completion of the drilling operations and obtaining the groundwater observations, the borings were backfilled with excess soils obtained during drilling operations, soils underwater were allowed to collapse on themselves, and the surface was patched with similar material. A Boring Location Plan is provided in the Appendix of this report. The borings performed for this project were used to determine the classification, strengths and plasticity of the subgrade soils. The information provided on the boring logs includes boring location, boring depth, soil classification, soil strengths, and laboratory test results. The boring logs are included in the Appendix. Drilling and Sampling Procedures The test borings were performed using a drilling rig equipped with a rotary head turning hollow stem augers to advance the boreholes. Disturbed samples were obtained by employing split- barrel sampling procedures in general accordance with the procedures for "Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils", (ASTM D1586). Relatively undisturbed soil samples were obtained using thin-wall tube sampling procedures in general accordance with "Thin Walled Tube Sampling of Soils", (ASTM D1587). The samples obtained by this procedure were extruded by a hydraulic ram in the field. The samples were visually classified, placed in plastic bags, marked according to boring number, depth and any other pertinent field data, stored in special containers and delivered to the laboratory for testing. Field Tests and Observations Standard Penetration Tests (SPTs)—During the sampling procedures, SPTs were performed to obtain the standard penetration values of the soil at selected intervals. The standard penetration value (N) is defined as the number of blows of a 140-pound hammer, falling 30 inches, required to advance the split-barrel sampler 1 foot into the soil. The sampler is lowered to the bottom of the previously cleaned drill hole and advanced by blows from the hammer. The number of blows is recorded for each of three successive 6-inch penetrations. The "N" value is obtained by adding the second and third 6-inch increment number of blows. An automatic hammer was utilized when performing SPTs. An automatic hammer is usually taken as having an efficiency of close to one. The results of standard penetration tests indicate the relative density of cohesionless soils and comparative consistency of cohesive soils, thereby providing a basis for estimating the relative strength and compressibility of the soil profile components. Water Level Observations — Water level observations were obtained during the test boring operation. Water level observations are noted on the boring log provided in the Appendix. In relatively pervious soils, such as sands, the indicated depth is usually a reliable groundwater level. In relatively impervious soils, such as clayey soils, a suitable estimate of the groundwater depth may not be possible, even after several days of observation. Seasonal variations, temperature, land-use, proximity to Corpus Christi Bay, and recent rainfall conditions may influence the depth to the groundwater. The amount of water in open boreholes largely depends on the permeability of the soils encountered at the boring locations. Page 3 of 14 September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas Ground Surface Elevations — The ground surface elevation at the boring locations were not provided at the time of this report. Therefore, the depths referred to in this report are measured from the existing ground surface at the boring locations during the time of our field investigation, unless specified otherwise. LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM In addition to the field investigation, a laboratory testing program was conducted to determine additional pertinent engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials necessary in analyzing the behavior of the foundation systems for the proposed project. The laboratory testing program included supplementary visual classification (ASTM D2487) and water content tests (ASTM D2216) on the samples. In addition, selected samples were subjected to Atterberg limits tests (ASTM D4318) and percent material finer than the#200 sieve tests (ASTM D1140). One grain size distribution test including a hydrometer for silt/clay size particles (ASTM D7928) was also performed on a select sample. The laboratory testing program was conducted in general accordance with applicable ASTM Specifications. The results of these tests are to be found on the accompanying boring logs provided in the Appendix. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS General The types of foundation bearing materials encountered in the test boring have been visually classified and are described in detail on the boring log. The results of standard penetration tests, water level observations, and laboratory tests are also presented on the boring log. Representative samples of the soils were placed in sealed polyethylene bags and are now stored in the laboratory for further analysis, if desired. Unless notified to the contrary, the samples will be disposed of three months after issuance of this report. The stratification of the soil, as shown on the boring log, represents the soil conditions at the actual boring location. Variations may occur and should be expected beyond the boring location. Lines of demarcation represent the approximate boundary between different soil types, but the transition may be gradual, or not clearly defined. It should be noted that, whereas the test boring was drilled and sampled by experienced drillers, it is sometimes difficult to record changes in stratification within narrow limits. In the absence of foreign substances, it is also difficult to distinguish between discolored soils and clean soil fill. Page 4 of 14 September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas Soil Conditions The generalized soil conditions encountered at the project site have been summarized and soil properties including soil classification, strength and plasticity are provided in the following table. Surficial materials consisting of 6 and 51/ inches of concrete were encountered at Borings B- 1 and B-2, respectively. Soil Profile Table D Description LL PI C ye 4200 N P 0.5-3 CLAYEY Sand 28 16 125 -- 115 30 1 -- 3-6 CLAYEY Sand -- -- 125 -- 55 -- 1 -- 6-8 Silty SAND & Silty 23 3 -- 25 50 37 WOH Clayey SAND 8-11 Silty CLAYEY Sand -- -- 200 -- 55 -- 1 -- 11-13 Silty SAND -- -- -- 25 50 -- WOH-1 -- 13-18 Silty CLAYEY Sand -- -- 250 -- 55 -- WOH -- 18-23 Fat CLAY with Sand & 625 -- 55 73 5 4.0 Sandy Lean CLAY 23-33 Sandy Lean CLAY& 2,500 -- 60 -- -- 3.0-4.5+ Fat CLAY with Sand 33-38 Sandy Lean CLAY -- -- 1,000 -- 60 50-61 19 1.5 38-44 Silty SAND and Silty -- 29 50 18-29 7-11 -- Clayey SAND 44-46 Lean CLAY with Sand -- -- 2,000 -- 60 74 16 -- 46-50 Silty SAND and Silty -- 32 55 25 19 Clayey SAND 50-53 Fat CLAY with Sand -- -- 2,000 -- 60 -- 27 -- 53-58 Silty SAND -- -- -- 34 55 -- 24 -- 58-60 Fat CLAY with Sand -- -- 2,600 --- 60 -- -- 4.0-4.5+ Where: D = Depth in feet below existing grade LL= Liquid limit (%) PI = Plasticity index C = Soil Cohesion, psf(undrained) � =Angle of Internal Friction, deg. (undrained) ye = Effective soil unit weight, pcf 4200 = Material passing #200 sieve, % P = Hand penetrometer value range, tsf N = SPT N-value (bpf) WOH = weight of Hammer Exceptions to the above generalized soil profile do exist. Most notably is the presence of non- cohesive layers in Boring B-1 at depths of 44 to 46 feet and in Boring B-2 at 1/ to 13 feet, and again at 491/ to 53 feet. Detailed descriptions of the soils encountered at the boring locations are provided on the boring log included in the Appendix. Page 5 of 14 September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas Seismic Site Classification In accordance with the International Building Code (IBC), "When the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the site class, Site Class D shall be used unless it is determined that Site Class E or F soil is likely to be present at the site." Since our field investigations have not included a 100-foot deep boring, by definition the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail. Site Class E soils should have an average Standard Penetration Resistance less than 15 blows per foot (bpf), or an average undrained shear strength of less than 1,000 pounds per square foot (psf). Considering the soil conditions encountered in our borings, as well as our knowledge of the deeper soils in the general area of the site, it is our opinion that the site should be classified as Seismic Site Class E. Groundwater Observations Groundwater was encountered at a depth of approximately 3 feet during drilling. Upon completion, groundwater was observed at a depth of 3 feet and the borehole caved at 5 feet. Water levels in an open boreholes may require several hours to several days to stabilize depending on the permeability of the soils and groundwater levels at this site may be subject to seasonal conditions, proximity to water bodies, recent rainfall, drought, or temperature effects. The contractor should verify the ground water depth before construction starts and be prepared to implement dewatering procedures, if needed. OSHA Soil Type Classification The table below provides a summary of the OSHA Soil Type Classification based on the soils encountered at the boring location. Soil Type Classification Table Depth (feet) Description OSHA Soil Type Classification 0-20 Non-cohesive soils and submerged soils Type C It should be noted that the contractor's "competent person" shall make the final determination of the OSHA Soil Type during excavation of the soils at the jobsite. Slope protection for excavations greater than 20 feet needs to be designed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Texas. The maximum allowable slopes during construction for soil OSHA soil types are provided below. Guidelines for Maximum Allowable Slopes Soil Type Max.Allow. Slopes for Excavations < Than 20' Deep Type C 1'h Horizontal : 1 Vertical Page 6 of 14 September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas Guidelines for maximum allowable slopes were obtained from OSHA documents, but do not take into account any recent revisions or the stability of long-term unprotected slopes, which will likely require much flatter slopes. The guidelines presented herein for slopes do not imply Rock Engineering is taking responsibility for construction site safety; this responsibility falls entirely upon the contractor and his responsible person. The contractor shall comply with all rules, ordinances and other requirements to comply with safe construction practices. FOUNDATION DISCUSSION Project Description Based on information provided to Rock Engineering, the project will include the construction of a new boat haul out facility with an anticipated footprint on the order of approximately 6,000 square feet. Anticipated structural loads or grading plans were not provided to Rock Engineering at the time of this report. Rock Engineering should be provided with this information, once it becomes available, so that we may review and revise our recommendations if warranted. Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) Discussion Differential vertical movements associated with the shrinking and swelling of clayey soils are often a concern that needs to be addressed during the design and construction process. However, due to the relatively shallow seasonally active depth at this site, and the low to non- plastic nature of the soils encountered (sandy soils), the site can be considered as non- expansive. The expansive potential of the soil at this site is considered to be negligible and is not a controlling factor in the design. FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS Straight Shaft Drilled Pier Foundation Recommendations The structural designer can utilize the allowable unit skin friction values for the range in depths included in the following table for straight shaft drilled piers to resist the axial loads given the strengths of the subsurface soils encountered. Page 7 of 14 September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas Allowable Unit Skin Friction Values Depth Below Existing Grade (ft) Allowable Unit Skin Friction (psf) 0-6 Neglect 6-13 50 13-18 75 18-23 200 23-33 650 33-38 300 38-44 325 44-55 350 All depths are referenced from the existing ground surface elevations at the boring locations during the time of our field investigation. The allowable unit skin friction values provided above are based on the strengths of the in-situ soils and utilize a design safety factor of 2 against shear failure. The straight shaft drilled piers should be proportioned to be founded at a depth no greater than 55 feet. Settlement of a properly designed and constructed straight shaft drilled pier is estimated to be on the order of 1 percent of the shaft diameter of the pier and differential settlements of equally loaded same size drilled shafts tipping at the same elevation should experience differential settlements on the order of'/ percent of the pier shaft diameters. Straight shaft drilled piers should be spaced no closer than three (3) pile diameters apart measured center-to-center, to avoid bearing capacity reductions for closely spaced piers. If groups of piers are required to support concentrated loads, an appropriate modification of the estimated bearing capacity must be made on the basis of the group efficiency factor, as further discussed in the "Group Effect on Deep Foundations" section of this report. We recommend that a structural floor slab be utilized in conjunction with the drilled pier foundations. Group Effect on Deep Foundations The supporting capacity of a group of deep foundation systems could be considerably less than the sum of the capacities of the individual members comprising the group. The capacity of the group varies as a function of change in size, spacing and stiffness. Axial group capacity may be estimated from the following: P = E * N * Q Page 8 of 14 September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas Where E is the group efficiency, N is the number of piles or piers in the group and Q is the single drilled pile or pier capacity. Values of group efficiency E increase from about 0.65 at a spacings of 2.5 diameters to about 1.0 at a spacing of 6 diameters for cohesive soils with a shear strength (cohesion) less than 2,000 psf. For the cohesive soils with a shear strength exceeding 2,000 psf, the group efficiency may be taken as 1. For non-cohesive soils (sands) values of group efficiency E increase from about 0.8 at a spacings of 2.5 diameters to about 1.0 at a spacing of 5 diameters. Detailed analyses of foundation-soil interaction for a specific group spacing would be necessary to define actual efficiency. Detailed analyses of foundation-soil interaction for a specific group spacing would be necessary to define actual efficiency. Structures Supported on Deep Foundations We recommend that a structural floor slab is utilized in conjunction with the proposed deep foundation systems. The site grade within the footprint of the proposed structure should be raised using properly compacted select fill as required to achieve final subgrade elevations. Structural beams should be used to stiffen the structural floor slab. Beams spanning between the piers or piles should be structurally connected to the piers or piles in both directions (longitudinal and transversal). Lateral Pier Analysis Deep foundations supporting the structure for this project may be subjected to lateral loads. Lateral pier analysis programs such as L-pile will require the following soil parameters for this site. The designer should use check both cases of the near surface soils and utilize the controlling case. L-Pile Design Criteria: CLAY Dominant D Description C Ye K E50 0-6 CLAY Neglect 6-8 SAND -- 25 50 20 -- 8-11 CLAY 200 -- 55 30 0.02 11-13 SAND -- 25 50 20 -- 13-18 CLAY 250 55 30 0.02 18-23 CLAY 625 -- 55 100 0.01 23-33 CLAY 21500 -- 60 1,000 0.005 33-38 CLAY 1,000 -- 60 500 0.007 38-44 SAND -- 29 50 20 -- 44-46 CLAY 21000 -- 60 1,000 0.005 46-50 SAND -- 32 55 60 -- 50-53 CLAY 2,000 -- 60 1,000 0.005 53-55 SAND 34 55 60 -- Page 9 of 14 September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas L-Pile Design Criteria: SAND Dominant D Description C Ye K Eso 0-6 SAND Neglect 6-8 SAND -- 25 50 20 -- 8-11 SAND -- 28 50 20 -- 11-13 SAND -- 25 50 20 -- 13-18 CLAY 250 55 30 0.02 18-23 CLAY 625 -- 55 100 0.01 23-33 CLAY 21500 -- 60 1,000 0.005 33-38 CLAY 1,000 -- 60 500 0.007 38-44 SAND -- 29 50 20 -- 44-46 CLAY 21000 -- 60 1,000 0.005 46-53 SAND -- 32 55 60 -- 53-55 SAND -- 34 55 60 -- Where: D =depth (ft) Y = effective unit weight, pcf C =shear strength, psf K= modulus of subgrade reaction (pci) 0 = angle of internal friction, deg. Eso= 50%strain value K and E50 values were estimated from known correlations. SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS Concrete Flatwork Construction Considerations Provisions in the site development should be made in order to maintain relatively uniform moisture contents of the supporting soils. A number of measures may be used to attain a reduction in subsoil moisture content variations. Some of these measures are outlined below. • During construction, positive drainage schemes should be implemented to prevent ponding of water on the subgrade. • Positive drainage should be maintained around the structure and site flatwork through roof/gutter systems connected to piping or directed to paved surfaces, transmitting water away from the foundation perimeter and site flatwork. In addition, positive grades sloping away from the foundation and site flatwork should be designed and implemented. • It is recommended to establish the final concrete slab a minimum of 11/ feet above the average surrounding grades at the site to promote positive drainage away from the foundation. Page 10 of 14 September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas • We recommend that an effective site drainage plan be devised by others prior to commencement of construction to provide positive drainage away from the site improvements and off the site, both during and after construction. • Vegetation placed in landscape beds that are adjacent to the structure and site flatwork should be limited to plants and shrubs that will not exceed a mature height of 3 feet. Large bushes and trees should be planted away from the foundation and flatwork at a distance that will exceed their full mature height and canopy width. • Individual concrete panels of site flatwork should be dowelled together to minimize trip hazards because of differential movements within the flatwork. • Site flatwork should be designed to drain quickly with a minimum positive slope of 1 percent. All project features beyond the scope of those discussed above should be planned and designed similarly to attain a region of relatively uniform moisture content within the foundation and flatwork areas. Poor drainage schemes are generally the primary cause of foundation and flatwork problems in South Texas. CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS Site Preparation In areas where straight shaft drilled pier foundations are used in conjunction with a structural floor slab; no site preparation is required. Instead, stripping of the site as discussed below and compaction of the subgrade to attain ordinary compaction should be performed to provide adequate support for formwork and construction equipment. In areas where soil supported flatwork is to be constructed soil, foundation remnants, vegetation and all loose or excessively organic materials should be removed to a minimum depth of 1 foot below the existing site grades and should extend a minimum distance of 5 feet outside the perimeter of the proposed flatwork. After stripping the site, the upper 1 foot of exposed subgrade soil shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698), and the moisture content shall be maintained at or above the optimum moisture content. If any soft areas are identified, the soils should be removed and recompacted in place. Upon completion of the subgrade preparations as described above, "Select Fill" soils should be placed as required to achieve the desired finished concrete floor elevation, which we recommend being at least 11/ feet above the average surrounding grade elevations. The "Select Fill" pad shall be constructed to achieve uniform select fill beneath all slab and flatwork areas. Page 11 of 14 September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas Select Fill Imported select fill material used at this site should be homogenous, free from organics and other deleterious materials and should have a maximum liquid limit of 40 percent and a plasticity index (PI) between 7 and 18. The select fill soils shall have a minimum of 35 percent passing the#200 sieve and no soil particles exceeding 1'/ inches will be permitted. The select fill should be placed in no greater than 8-inch thick loose lifts and then compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698) with the moisture content at or above the optimum. Prior to compaction, the soil may require moisture adjustment. During warm weather, moisture reduction can generally be accomplished by disking or otherwise aerating the soil. When air drying is not feasible, a moisture reducing chemical additive, such as hydrated lime, could be incorporated into the soil. During dry weather, some addition of moisture may be required to facilitate compaction. This should also be done in a controlled manner using a tank truck with a spray bar. In addition to the minimum density requirements listed above, the soil must be stable, i.e., not "pumping" or rutting excessively under construction traffic, prior to placing additional fill or constructing foundations, floor slabs, or flatwork. Field density tests should be performed on each lift of fill to document that proper compaction is achieved. Drilled, Cast-in-Place, Pier Construction with Slurry Displacement Method For deep drilled pier construction at this site, the slurry displaced method will be necessary to prevent groundwater and soils from infiltrating into the pier excavation. With the slurry displacement method it is essential that there is a sufficient slurry head available (or that the slurry density can be increased as needed) so the inside pressure is greater than that from the groundwater table to reduce the tendency of the soil to cave into the pier excavation. Bentonite is most commonly used with water to produce the slurry ("bentonite slurry"). Some experimentation may be required to obtain optimum percentage for a site but amounts in the range of 4 to 6 percent by weight are usually adequate. The bentonite should be well mixed with water so that the mixture is not lumpy. The slurry should be capable of forming a filter cake on the shaft wall and to carry the smaller (say, under 6mm) excavated particles in suspension. With the slurry method it is generally desirable to: • Prevent having the slurry in the shaft too long to prevent an excessively thick filter cake that is difficult to displace with concrete during shaft filling. • Pump the slurry and screen out the larger soil particles in suspension then the "conditioned" slurry can be returned to the shaft prior to concreting. Page 12 of 14 September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas Care should be exercised in excavating clay through the slurry so that pulling a large fragment does not cause sufficient negative pore pressure, or suction, to develop and collapse a part of the shaft. As an alternative to the bentonite slurries the utilization of polymers, or a combination of bentonite and polymer slurry may be considered. The selection of the proper slurry is considered "means and methods" and hence is the sole responsibility of the specialty contractor. When the shaft is complete, the rebar cage is set in place and a tremie is installed (this sequence is usually necessary so that the tremie does not have to be pulled to set the cage and then reinserted, almost certain to produce a slurry film discontinuity in the shaft). Concrete is pumped with great care, taken that the tremie is always well submerged in the concrete, so a minimum surface area is exposed and contaminated with slurry. Studies have shown that the concrete will adequately displace slurry particles from the rebar cage so a good bond can be obtained, and as previously noted, if the shaft is not open too long the filter cake on the pier wall is reasonably displaced as well. The success of a drilled pier foundation system is highly dependent upon the expertise of the drilled pier foundation contractor and upon the expedient placement of concrete. A test pier excavation should be performed at the building site prior to drilling production piers to verify the drilling subcontractor's construction methods and to identify any potential installation problems. The Geotechnical Engineer, or his designated representative, should be present to witness the installation of all the drilled piers, including the test pier excavation. Utilities Utilities that project through a floor slabs or walls should be designed with either some degree of flexibility, or with sleeves, in order to prevent damage to these lines should vertical movement occur. Expansion and Control Joints Expansion and control joints should be designed and placed in various portions of the structure. Properly planned placement of these joints will assist in controlling the degree and location of material cracking that normally occurs due to material shrinkage, thermal affects, soil movements and other related structural conditions. GENERAL COMMENTS If significant changes are made in the character or location of the proposed Boat Haul Out Facility project, a consultation should be arranged to review any changes with respect to the prevailing soil conditions. At that time, it may be necessary to submit supplementary recommendations. Page 13 of 14 September 28, 2023 BOAT HAUL OUT FACILITY Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas It is recommended that the services of Rock Engineering be engaged to test and evaluate the soils in the foundation excavations prior to concreting construction to verify that the bearing soils are consistent with those encountered in the boring. Rock Engineering cannot accept any responsibility for any conditions that deviate from those described in this report, nor for the performance of the foundations if not engaged to also provide construction observation and testing for this project. If it is required for Rock Engineering to accept any liability, then Rock Engineering must review and agree with the plans and perform such observation during construction as we recommend. All dewatering, sheeting, shoring, and bracing of trenches, pits and excavations should be made the responsibility of the contractor and should comply with all current and applicable local, state and federal safety codes, regulations and practices, including the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Page 14 of 14 APPENDIX r�sr�4v,c GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING 444 • CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS � c ENGINEERING&TESTING r °A,. 6 SOILS •ASPHALT• CONCRETE A UES Company SITE VICINITY MAP tRAI Z. �ht - .a � 356'n3�•� y x� „U� VAN .o k September 28, 2023 Boat Haul Out Facility Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas ROCK ENGINEERING& TESTING LABORATORY,LLC. Corpus Christi San Antonio Round Rock Office:361.883.4555 Office:210.495.8000 Office: 512.284.8022 Fax:361.883.4711 Fax:210.495.8015 Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St. 10856 Vandale 7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi,TX 78409 San Antonio,TX 78216 Round Rock,TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com r�sr�4v,c GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING 444 • CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS � c ENGINEERING&TESTING r °A,. 6 SOILS •ASPHALT• CONCRETE A UES Company BORING LOCATION PLAN 1 � i. J� r i w + i September 28, 2023 Boat Haul Out Facility Attn: Ms. Romy Doherty Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123364 Corpus Christi, Texas ROCK ENGINEERING& TESTING LABORATORY,LLC. Corpus Christi San Antonio Round Rock Office:361.883.4555 Office:210.495.8000 Office: 512.284.8022 Fax:361.883.4711 Fax:210.495.8015 Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St. 10856 Vandale 7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi,TX 78409 San Antonio,TX 78216 Round Rock,TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com LOG OF BORING B-1 SHEET 1 of 2 CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi °�Ne�P a, resr�N Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLc. PROJECT: 21028 Boat Haul Out Facility 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 LOCATION: Corpus Christi Texas °q'r Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G123364 Fax: A UES C°mp—y DATE(S) DRILLED: 8/24/2023 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Hollow Stem Augers LIMITS X Lu GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: w 0 w Groundwater(GW)was encountered at 3 feet during drilling. w ? y, GW at 3 feet and caved at 5 feet upon completion. z r J H F LLLL 0 3 J r � > O O � ���0 U U U cn LLLL N LL z rn rn�W to � o Z W H d 0 W Lu U' In z a o o o a a ? Z Z) SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A w 0 u¢i z a o 2 LL PL PI 0 EL ° � DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ————— ———— ———— —— —— —— CONCRETE(approximately 6 inches) i ss N=1 18 28 12 16 30 CLAYEY with shell, brown, moist,very ft. S-1 SAND(SC), rY so SS N=1 31 S-2 Same as above, 5 ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ SS N=WOH 26 23 20 3 37 SILTY SAND SM , gray, moist, very loose. S-3 ( ) 9 Y, rY ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ SS s-a N=1 30 SILTY CLAYEY SAND, gray, moist,very soft. 10 ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ SS gray,N=WOH 26 SILTY SAND,dark 9 Y , very moist ve loose s-5 ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ SS N=WOH 29 S-s SILTY CLAYEY SAND, dark gray, moist, very soft. 15 ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ ss N=5 30 73 FAT CLAY WITH SAND,dark gray, moist, firm. sa g Y� zo N lf] N ST P=4.5+ 20 F S_8 SANDY LEAN CLAY,with calcareous deposits, light gray, Y, 25 moist, hard. 0 a C7 J Q o S s P=4.5+ 21 Same as above. M 30 m N 0 N -STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qc-STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations were performed by Rock Engineering at GPS coordinates p N 27.79109 W 97.39174 CD P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 LOG OF BORING B-1 SHEET 2 of 2 CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi °Ne�P a, resrN Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLc. PROJECT: 21028 Boat Haul Out Facility 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 LOCATION: Corpus Christi Texas °q'r Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G123364 Fax: A UES C°mp—y DATE(S) DRILLED: 8/24/2023 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Hollow Stem Augers LIMITS X Lu GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: w 0 w Groundwater(GW)was encountered at 3 feet during drilling. w ? y, GW at 3 feet and caved at 5 feet upon completion. z OJ LL HFLLLL O 3 � > N� 7 U LL�W zn n t or Z W O H C7 a CD u) z J a CL� g -,001 a EL y ? CL z w o u¢i z a o LL PL PI o EL ° U) DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM SS N=19 19 61 Same as above. 35 S-10 ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- —————————————————————————————— N=7 26 29 SILTY CLAYEY SAND, brown, moist, loose. S_1 1 40 SS N=9 25 S-12 Same as above. 45 ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ SS 1�I —— 25 SILTY SAND, brown, moist, medium dense.S-13 =?� -- --- 50 FAT CLAY WITH SAND, brown, moist,very stiff. ---------------------- ---- ---------------------------------- SS N=24 23 N S-14 SILTY SAND, brown, moist, medium dense. 55 W ' U : Q _ - ————— ———— ———— —— —— —— —————————————————————————————— ST P=4.0 28 S-15 FAT CLAY WITH SAND, brown, moist very stiff. 60 � Boring terminated at a depth of 60 feet. Q 0 m M m N C7 0 N -STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qc-STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations were performed by Rock Engineering at GPS coordinates p N 27.79109 W 97.39174 01 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 LOG OF BORING B-2 SHEET 1 of 2 CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi °Ne�P a, resrN Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLc. PROJECT: 21028 Boat Haul Out Facility 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 LOCATION: Corpus Christi Texas °q'r Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G123364 Fax: A UES C°mp—y DATE(S) DRILLED: 8/24/2023 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Hollow Stem Augers LIMITS X Lu GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: w 0 w Groundwater(GW)was encountered at 3 feet during drilling. w ? y, GW at 3 feet and caved at 20 feet upon completion. z rw CD J H F LLLL Q J r � > O O � ���0 U U U cn LLLL N LL z rn rn EQ W to oro Z W H d 0 W Lu U In z a o o o a a ? Z Z) SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A w 0 u¢i z a o 2 LL PL PI 0 EL ° � DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ————— ———— ———— —— —— —— CONCRETE(approximately 5.5 inches) i S S-1 N=4 24 SILTY CLAYEY SAND,with shell, brown, moist, loose. SS N=3 27 20 17 3 18 Same as above, very rY loose. (SC-SM ) 5 SS N=WOH 30 S-3 Same as above, gray. ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ SS SILTY SAND,gray, moist, very loose. S-4 N=3 25 13 w 10 SS S-5 X N=1 28 Same as above. --------------------- ---- -- -------------------------------- SS N=WOH 26 29 SILTY CLAYEY SAND, gray, moist,very soft. S-6 9 Y rY 15 ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST S-7 P=4.0 15 SANDY LEAN CLAY,light gray, moist,very stiff. 20 N lf] N F q ST P=3.0 18 s-s Same as above,with calcareous deposits. wi 25 U O a C7 J o s s P=4.5+ 23 FAT CLAY WITH SAND,light gray, moist, hard. M 30 m N N -STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qc-STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations were performed by Rock Engineering at GPS coordinates O N 27.79103 W 97.39181 01 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 LOG OF BORING B-2 SHEET 2 of 2 CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi °Ne�P a, resrN Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLc. PROJECT: 21028 Boat Haul Out Facility 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 LOCATION: Corpus Christi Texas °q'r Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G123364 Fax: A UES C°mp—y DATE(S) DRILLED: 8/24/2023 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Hollow Stem Augers LIMITS X Lu GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: w 0 w Groundwater(GW)was encountered at 3 feet during drilling. w ? y, GW at 3 feet and caved at 20 feet upon completion. z rw CD J H F LLLL Q J r � > O O � ���0 U U U cn LLLL N LL z rn rn EQ W to oro Z W H d 0 U Un z J a CL� g -001 a EL y ? 2 W z w 0 0 u¢i z a o LL PL PI 0 EL ° U) DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST s-0 P= 1.5 21 50 SANDY LEAN CLAY,light gray, moist, stiff. 35 ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ ss N=11 25 18 SILTY SAND, brown, moist, medium. 40 S-11 14 Ss X N=16 zs —— —— 74 SILTY SAND,with gravel, brown, moist, medium. i S-12 45 LEAN CLAY WITH SAND, brown, moist,very stiff. ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ SS N=19 20 S-13 SILTY SAND, brown, moist, medium. 50 N SS N=24 21 N s-14 Same as above. 55 F .. LLll :' U'; —— —— —— —————————————————————————————— ST s-5 P=4.5+ 29 FAT CLAY WITH SAND, brown, moist, hard. 60 Boring terminated at a depth of 60 feet. Q 0 m M m N 0 N -STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qc-STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations were performed by Rock Engineering at GPS coordinates p N 27.79103 W 97.39181 CD P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 U.S.SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S.SIEVE NUMBERS HYDROMETER 6 4 3 2 1.5 1 3/4 112 3 4 6 810 1416 20 30 40 50 60 100 140 200 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 2 w 60 >- 55 m w 50 z LL H 45 z w 40 w a 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS COBBLES GRAVEL SAND SILT OR CLAY coarse fine coarse medium fine Specimen ID Depth Classification LL PL PI Cc Cu • B-2 13.5' Silty Clayey Sand 9.67 14.90 M N r m F Q Specimen ID Depth D100 D60 D30 D10 %Gravel %Sand %Silt %Clay C • B-2 13.5' 0.094 0.075 0.006 9.7 ZD C7 J J Q mm O 0] V N GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION cD Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLC. N 6817 Leopard Street Project: 21028 Boat Haul Out Facility 7 I Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 Q Telephone: (361)-883-4555 Location: Corpus Christi Texas � Fax: Number: G123364 Rock Engineering&Testing Laboratory ��"� yFs 6817 Leopard Street 1.161 r�hc Engineering&Testing Corpus Christi,TX 78409-1703 <, Laboratory, LLC Telephone: 361-883-4555 o Fax: 361-883-4711 Oq'ya yVG ey A UES Company KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND SYMBOLS UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM TERMS CHARACTERIZING SOIL MAJOR DIVISIONS SYMBOL NAME STRUCTURE OW GW 0 Well Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures, SLICKENSIDED-having inclined planes of ' little or no fines weakness that are slick and glossy in appearance GRAVEL GP Poorly Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures, AND o p little or no fines FISSURED-containing shrinkage cracks, GRAVELLY frequently filled with fine sand or silt; usually SOILS GM ° Silty Gravels,Gravel-Sand-Silt mixtures more or less vertical LAMINATED(VARVED)-composed of thin layers of varying color and texture, usually grading from COARSE GC Clayey Gravels,Gravel-Sand-Clay Mixtures sand or silt at the bottom to clay at the top GRAINED CRUMBLY-cohesive soils which break into small SOILS SW Well Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands, little or no blocks or crumbs on drying fines Poorly Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands,little or CALCAREOUS-containing appreciable quantities SAND Sp no fines of calcium carbonate,generally nodular AND SANDY WELL GRADED-having wide range in grain sizes SOILS SM Silty Sands,Sand-Silt Mixtures and substantial amounts of all intermediate particle sizes SC Clayey Sands,Sand-Clay mixtures POORLY GRADED-predominantly of one grain size uniformly graded)or having a range of sizes with some intermediate size missing(gap or skip ML Inorganic Silts and very fine Sands, Rock Flour, graded) Silty or Clayey fine Sands or Clayey Silts SILTS Inorganic Clays of low to medium plasticity, SYMBOLS FOR TEST DATA AND CLAYS CL Gravelly Clays,Sandy Clays,Silty Clays, Lean Clays LL<50 _ a — GroundwaterLevel Organic Silts and Organic Silt-Clays of low - (Initial Reading) FINE OL plasticity GRAINED 1 — Groundwater Level SOILS JH Inorganic Silts, Micaceous or Diatomaceous fine - (Final Reading) Sandy or Silty soils, Elastic Silts ' SILTS — Shelby Tube Sample AND CLAYS Inorganic Clays of high plasticity, Fat Clays LL>50 ® — SPT Samples Organic Clays of medium to high plasticity, Organic Silts m — Auger Sample HIGHLY ORGANIC Rock Core SOILS PT Peat and other Highly Organic soils n — TERMS DESCRIBING CONSISTENCY OF SOIL COARSE GRAINED SOILS FINE GRAINED SOILS DESCRIPTIVE NO. BLOWS/FT. DESCRIPTIVE NO. BLOWS/FT. UNCONFINED STANDARD PEN. STANDARD PEN. COMPRESSION TERM TEST TERM TEST TONS PER SQ. FT. Very Loose 0-4 Very Soft <2 <0.25 Loose 4-10 Soft 2-4 0.25-0.50 Medium 10-30 Firm 4-8 0.50-1.00 Dense 30-50 Stiff 8-15 1.00-2.00 Very Dense over 50 Very Stiff 15-30 2.00-4.00 Hard over 30 over 4.00 Field Classification for"Consistency"is determined with a 0.25"diameter penetrometer • GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING • MATERIALS ENGINEERING &TESTING • SOILS • ASPHALT • CONCRETE e Ay A UES Company GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE COOPERS ALLEY CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ROCK ENGINEERING REPORT NUMBER: G123410 PREPARED FOR: RICHTER ARCHITECTS 201 SOUTH UPPER BROADWAY CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78401 OCTOBER 26, 2023 PREPARED BY: a ROCK ENGINEERING & TESTING LABORATORY, LLC. 6817 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS78409 .: P: (361) 883-4555; F: (361) 883-4711 TBPE FIRM NO. 2101 + j ti # Y GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING c • CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ENGINEERING&TESTING 'Toq SOILS •ASPHALT• CONCRETE A UES Company October 26, 2023 Richter Architects 201 South Upper Broadway Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Attention: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh, AIA SUBJECT: SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION, LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM, AND GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE COOPERS ALLEY Corpus Christi, Texas Rock Engineering Job No. — G123410 Dear Mr. Huynh, In accordance with our agreement, Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, LLC. (Rock Engineering) has conducted a subsurface investigation, laboratory testing program, and geotechnical evaluation for the above referenced project. The results of this investigation, together with our recommendations, are presented in the accompanying report, an electronic copy of which is being transmitted herewith. Often, because of design and construction details that occur on a project, questions arise concerning soil conditions. Rock Engineering would be pleased to continue its role as the Geotechnical Engineer during the project implementation. Rock Engineering also has great interest in providing materials testing and observation services during the construction phase of this project. If you will advise us of the appropriate time to discuss these engineering services, we will be pleased to meet with you at your convenience. If you have any questions, or if we can be of further assistance, please contact us at (361) 883-4555. Sincerely - James P. Bauer, P.E. Corpus Christi Branch Manager ROCK ENGINEERING& TESTING LABORATORY,LLC. Corpus Christi San Antonio Round Rock Office:361.883.4555 Office:210.495.8000 Office: 512.284.8022 Fax:361.883.4711 Fax:210.495.8015 Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St. 10856 Vandale 7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi,TX 78409 San Antonio,TX 78216 Round Rock,TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION, LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM, AND GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE COOPERS ALLEY CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ROCK ENGINEERING REPORT NUMBER: G123410 PREPARED FOR: RICHTER ARCHITECTS 201 SOUTH UPPER BROADWAY CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78401 OCTOBER 26, 2023 PREPARED BY: ROCK ENGINEERING AND TESTING LABORATORY, LLC. 6817 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78409 PHONE: (361) 883-4555; FAX: (361) 883-4711 TEXAS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING FIRM NO. 2101 g�P.�EOF rF'�gs�� • .JAMES P. BAUER C A. 129201 �; (���,oF loo S BENS��•G�l►�'�� ONAL James P. Bauer Joshua A. McCann, E.I.T Corpus Christi Branch Manager Project Manager < ' I e ay'Y c Oq Y A UES Company TABLE OF CONTENTS Paqe INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................................................... 1 Authorization........................................................................................................................................................ 1 Purposeand Scope............................................................................................................................................. 1 General................................................................................................................................................................ 1 SITE DESCRIPTION...............................................................................................................................................2 FIELD EXPLORATION...........................................................................................................................................2 Scope...................................................................................................................................................................2 Drilling and Sampling Procedures....................................................................................................................... 3 FieldTests and Observations.............................................................................................................................. 3 LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM ..................................................................................................................4 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................4 General................................................................................................................................................................4 SoilConditions.....................................................................................................................................................4 SeismicSite Classification................................................................................................................................... 5 Groundwater Observations..................................................................................................................................6 OSHASoil Type Classification ............................................................................................................................6 FOUNDATION DISCUSSION.................................................................................................................................7 ProjectDescription............................................................................................................................................... 7 Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) Discussion............................................................................................................ 7 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS..................................................................................................................7 Straight Shaft Drilled Pier Foundation Recommendations.................................................................................. 7 Structures Supported on Deep Foundations....................................................................................................... 8 LateralPier Analysis............................................................................................................................................ 9 SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS .........................................................................................................................9 Concrete Flatwork Construction Considerations................................................................................................. 9 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS................................................................................................................10 SitePreparation................................................................................................................................................. 10 SelectFill ........................................................................................................................................................... 11 Drilled, Cast-in-Place, Pier Construction with Slurry Displacement Method..................................................... 11 Utilities............................................................................................................................................................... 12 Expansion and Control Joints............................................................................................................................ 12 Dewateri ng......................................................................................................................................................... 12 GENERAL COMMENTS.......................................................................................................................................13 APPENDIX Site Vicinity Map Boring Locations Plan Boring Log B-1 and B-2 Key to Soil Classifications and Symbols October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh,AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of a subsurface exploration, laboratory testing program, and geotechnical analysis for the proposed Cooper's Boat Facility Structure planned for a site located on Coopers Alley L-head in Corpus Christi, Texas. Authorization The work for this project was performed in accordance with Rock Engineering proposal number CGP120122A (Revision 3) dated September 13, 2023. The scope of work was approved by Ms. Elizabeth Chu Richter, representing Richter Architects, by signing Rock Engineering's proposal on September 13, 2023. The signed proposal was delivered to Rock Engineering via email transmission. Purpose and Scope The purpose of this exploration was to evaluate the soil and groundwater conditions at the site and to provide geotechnical recommendations suitable for the proposed project. The scope of the exploration and analysis included the subsurface exploration, field and laboratory testing, engineering analysis, evaluation of the subsurface conditions, provision of geotechnical recommendations, and preparation of this report. The scope of services did not include an environmental assessment. Any statements in this report, or on the boring logs, regarding odors, colors, unusual or suspicious items or conditions are strictly for the information of the client. General The exploration and analysis of the subsurface conditions reported herein are considered sufficient in detail and scope to provide geotechnical recommendations for the proposed project. The recommendations submitted herein are based on project details provided by the client and the soil information obtained at the boring locations. If the designers require additional soil parameters to complete the design of the foundation systems, and this information can be obtained from the soil data and laboratory tests performed within the scope of work included in our proposal for this project, Rock Engineering will provide the additional recommendations requested as a supplement to this report. The Geotechnical Engineer states that the findings, recommendations, specifications, or professional advice contained herein have been presented after being prepared in a manner consistent with that level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by reputable members of the Geotechnical Engineer's profession practicing contemporaneously under similar conditions in the locality of the project. Rock Engineering operates in general accordance with "Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction", (ASTM D3740). No other representations are expressed or implied, and no warranty or guarantee is included or intended. Page 1 of 13 October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh,AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of Richter Architects and the project designers for the specific application for the proposed Cooper's Boat Facility Structure planned for a site located on Coopers Alley L-head in Corpus Christi, Texas. SITE DESCRIPTION The site for the proposed new Cooper's Boat Facility Structure is located approximately 750 feet west of the intersection of Coopers Alley and S Shoreline Boulevard along Coopers Alley. At the time of our field investigation, the site vicinity currently features two (2) existing buildings and asphalt pavement. Overhead and underground utilities were present at the site. The location of the site is shown on the Site Vicinity Map provided in the Appendix. FIELD EXPLORATION Scope The field exploration performed to evaluate the engineering characteristics of the subsurface soil materials included reconnaissance of the project site, performing the test boring operations and obtaining relatively undisturbed Shelby tube samples and relatively disturbed split spoon samples. During the sample recovery operations, the soils encountered were classified and recorded on the boring logs in accordance with "Standard Guide for Field Logging of Subsurface Exploration of Soil and Rock, (ASTM D5434)." Two (2) borings were performed at the site for the purpose of providing geotechnical information. The table below provides the boring identification, boring depth, and approximate Global Positioning System (GPS) coordinates at the boring locations. Summary of Boring Information Boring Depth (ft) Approximate GPS Coordinates B-1 50 N 27.79059' W 97.38999' B-2 80 N 27.79080' W 97.38985' Approximate GPS coordinates were obtained at the boring locations using a Garmin eTrex model GPS and are provided in this report and on the boring logs. Rock Engineering determined the number and depths of the borings and performed the drilling and logging operations. Upon completion of the drilling operations and obtaining the groundwater observations, the borings were backfilled with excess soils obtained during drilling operations and the surface was patched with similar material. A Boring Location Plan is provided in the Appendix of this report. The borings performed for this project were used to determine the classification, strengths and plasticity of the subgrade soils. Page 2 of 13 October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh,AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas The information provided on the boring logs includes boring location, boring depth, soil classification, soil strengths, and laboratory test results. The boring logs are included in the Appendix. Drilling and Sampling Procedures The test borings were performed using a drilling rig equipped with a rotary head turning solid stem augers to advance the boreholes. A bentonite slurry was introduced when groundwater was encountered to maintain the integrity of the hole. Disturbed samples were obtained by employing split-barrel sampling procedures in general accordance with the procedures for "Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils", (ASTM D1586). Relatively undisturbed soil samples were obtained using thin-wall tube sampling procedures in general accordance with "Thin Walled Tube Sampling of Soils", (ASTM D1587). The samples obtained by this procedure were extruded by a hydraulic ram in the field. The samples were visually classified, placed in plastic bags, marked according to boring number, depth and any other pertinent field data, stored in special containers and delivered to the laboratory for testing. Field Tests and Observations Standard Penetration Tests (SPTs)—During the sampling procedures, SPTs were performed to obtain the standard penetration values of the soil at selected intervals. The standard penetration value (N) is defined as the number of blows of a 140-pound hammer, falling 30 inches, required to advance the split-barrel sampler 1 foot into the soil. The sampler is lowered to the bottom of the previously cleaned drill hole and advanced by blows from the hammer. The number of blows is recorded for each of three successive 6-inch penetrations. The "N" value is obtained by adding the second and third 6-inch increment number of blows. An automatic hammer was utilized when performing SPTs. An automatic hammer is usually taken as having an efficiency of close to one. The results of standard penetration tests indicate the relative density of cohesionless soils and comparative consistency of cohesive soils, thereby providing a basis for estimating the relative strength and compressibility of the soil profile components. Water Level Observations — Water level observations were obtained during the test boring operations. Water level observations are noted on the boring logs provided in the Appendix. In relatively pervious soils, such as sands, the indicated depth is usually a reliable groundwater level. In relatively impervious soils, such as clayey soils, a suitable estimate of the groundwater depth may not be possible, even after several days of observation. Seasonal variations, temperature, land-use, proximity to Corpus Christi Bay, and recent rainfall conditions may influence the depth to the groundwater. The amount of water in an open borehole largely depends on the permeability of the soils encountered at the boring locations. Ground Surface Elevations — The ground surface elevation at the boring locations were not provided at the time of this report. Therefore, the depths referred to in this report are measured from the existing ground surface at the boring locations during the time of our field investigation, unless specified otherwise. Page 3 of 13 October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh,AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM In addition to the field investigation, a laboratory testing program was conducted to determine additional pertinent engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials necessary in analyzing the behavior of the foundation systems for the proposed project. The laboratory testing program included supplementary visual classification (ASTM D2487) and water content tests (ASTM D2216) on the samples. In addition, selected samples were subjected to Atterberg limits tests (ASTM D4318) and percent material finer than the#200 sieve tests (ASTM D1140). Select samples were chosen for unconfined compressive strength tests (ATSM D2166) while the unit dry density of these samples was also determined (ASTM D7263). The estimated shear strengths of cohesive soils sampled with Shelby tubes were obtained using a hand penetrometer. The laboratory testing program was conducted in general accordance with applicable ASTM Specifications. The results of these tests are to be found on the accompanying boring logs provided in the Appendix. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS General The types of foundation bearing materials encountered in the test borings have been visually classified and are described in detail on the boring logs. The results of field strength tests, water level observations, and laboratory tests are also presented on the boring logs. Representative samples of the soils were placed in sealed polyethylene bags and are now stored in the laboratory for further analysis, if desired. Unless notified to the contrary, the samples will be disposed of three months after issuance of this report. The stratification of the soil, as shown on the boring logs, represents the soil conditions at the actual boring locations. Variations may occur and should be expected between and beyond the boring locations. Lines of demarcation represent the approximate boundary between different soil types, but the transition may be gradual, or not clearly defined. It should be noted that, whereas the test borings were drilled and sampled by experienced drillers, it is sometimes difficult to record changes in stratification within narrow limits. In the absence of foreign substances, it is also difficult to distinguish between discolored soils and clean soil fill. Soil Conditions The generalized soil conditions encountered at the project site have been summarized and soil properties including soil classification, strength and plasticity are provided in the following table. Page 4 of 13 October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh,AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas Surficial material consisting of approximately 2'/ and 3 inches of asphalt was encountered in Borings B-1 and B-2, respectively. Approximately 6 inches of a base material consisting of silty clayey sand with gravel was encountered in Boring B-1; whereas no identifiable base materials were encountered in Boring B-2. Soil Profile Table D Description LL PI C ye 4200 N P 0.5-3.5 CLAYEY Sand -- -- 600 -- 115 41 5 -- 3.5-10.5 CLAYEY Sand and Silty 250 -- 55 48-49 1-4 -- CLAYEY Sand 10.5-13.5 Silty Clayey SAND 22-25 4-7 -- 26 55 17-33 1-2 -- 13.5-23 Fat CLAY and Fat CLAY 52-75 36-53 250 -- 55 81-94 1-5 with Sand 23 28 Sandy Lean CLAY and 32-35 20-21 1,000 -- 60 51 8-10 -- CLAYEY Sand Sandy Lean CLAY, 28-43 CLAYEY Sand, and Fat -- -- 2,500 -- 60 31-81 20-25 4.5+ CLAY with Sand 43-48 Silty SAND -- -- -- 34 55 16 23-30 -- 48-58 Silty SAND -- -- -- 38 55 19 50-80 -- Fat CLAY, Lean CLAY 58-72 with Sand, and Sandy 30-38 16-25 3,000 -- 60 52-74 -- 4.5+ Lean CLAY 73-78 Silty Clayey SAND -- -- -- 36 55 36 48 -- 78-80 Fat CLAY -- -- 3,000 -- 60 -- -- 4.5+ Boring B-2 terminated at a depth of 50 feet. Where: D = Depth in feet below existing grade LL= Liquid limit (%) PI = Plasticity index C = Soil Cohesion, psf(undrained) + =Angle of Internal Friction, deg. (undrained) ye = Effective soil unit weight, pcf 4200 = Material passing #200 sieve, % P = Hand penetrometer value range, tsf N = SPT N-value (bpo Exceptions to the above generalized soil profile do exist. Most notable, is the presence of a non-cohesive layer in Boring B-2 to a depth of 3 feet, and a non-cohesive silty clayey sand from 38 to 43 feet. Detailed descriptions of the soils encountered at the boring locations are provided on the boring logs included in the Appendix. Seismic Site Classification In accordance with the International Building Code (IBC), "When the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the site class, Site Class D shall be used unless it is determined that Site Class E or F soil is likely to be present at the site." Since our field investigations have not included a 100-foot deep boring, by definition the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail. Page 5 of 13 October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh,AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas Site Class E soils should have an average Standard Penetration Resistance less than 15 blows per foot (bpf), or an average undrained shear strength of less than 1,000 pounds per square foot (psf). Considering the soil conditions encountered in our borings, as well as our knowledge of the deeper soils in the general area of the site, it is our opinion that the site should be classified as Seismic Site Class E. Groundwater Observations Groundwater was encountered at a depth of approximately 31/ and 4 feet during drilling in Boring B-1 and B-2, respectively. Water levels in an open borehole may require several hours to several days to stabilize depending on the permeability of the soils and groundwater levels at this site may be subject to seasonal conditions, proximity to water bodies, recent rainfall, drought, or temperature effects. The contractor should verify the ground water depth before construction starts and be prepared to implement dewatering procedures, if needed. OSHA Soil Type Classification The table below provides a summary of the OSHA Soil Type Classification based on the soils encountered at the boring location. Soil Type Classification Table Depth OSHA Soil Type (feet) Description Classification Cohesive Soil Above Water with Shear Strength Less Than or Equal to 500 psf 0-20 and Type C Non-cohesive soils and submerged soils It should be noted that the contractor's "competent person" shall make the final determination of the OSHA Soil Type during excavation of the soils at the jobsite. Slope protection for excavations greater than 20 feet needs to be designed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Texas. The maximum allowable slopes during construction for soil OSHA soil types are provided below. Guidelines for Maximum Allowable Slopes Soil Type Max.Allow. Slopes for Excavations < Than 20' Deep Type C 1'/2 Horizontal : 1 Vertical Guidelines for maximum allowable slopes were obtained from OSHA documents, but do not take into account any recent revisions or the stability of long-term unprotected slopes, which will likely require much flatter slopes. The guidelines presented herein for slopes do not imply Rock Engineering is taking responsibility for construction site safety; this responsibility falls entirely upon the contractor and his responsible person. The contractor shall comply with all rules, ordinances and other requirements to comply with safe construction practices. Page 6 of 13 October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh,AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas FOUNDATION DISCUSSION Project Description Based on information provided to Rock Engineering, the project will include the construction of an elevated structure with a footprint on the order of approximately 3,000 square feet. The structure will be supported by structural piers and elevated to a base flood elevation of 14 feet above sea level. The structure is anticipated to contain four climate controlled restrooms for tenant use, one laundry/ice/vending machine room, one large meeting room/common space, one work room, one mechanical room, one non-climate controlled public restroom, a green space around the building with outdoor sitting area, and an outdoor storage area. Anticipated structural loads were not provided to Rock Engineering at the time of this report. Rock Engineering should be provided with this information, once it becomes available, so that we may review and revise our recommendations if warranted. Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) Discussion Differential vertical movements associated with the shrinking and swelling of clayey soils are often a concern that needs to be addressed during the design and construction process. However, due to the relatively shallow seasonally active depth at this site, and the low to non- plastic nature of the soils encountered (sandy soils), the site can be considered as non- expansive. The expansive potential of the soil at this site is considered to be negligible and is not a controlling factor in the design. FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS Straight Shaft Drilled Pier Foundation Recommendations The structural designer can utilize the allowable unit skin friction values for the range in depths included in the following table for straight shaft drilled piers to resist the axial loads given the strengths of the subsurface soils encountered. Allowable Unit Skin Friction Values Depth Below Existing Grade (ft) Allowable Unit Skin Friction (psf) 0-5 Neglect 5-23 75 23-28 300 28-48 640 48-58 700 58-75 760 Page 7 of 13 October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh,AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas All depths are referenced from the existing ground surface elevations at the boring locations during the time of our field investigation. The allowable unit skin friction values provided above are based on the strengths of the in-situ soils and utilize a design safety factor of 2 against shear failure. The straight shaft drilled piers should be proportioned to be founded at a depth no greater than 75 feet. Settlement of a properly designed and constructed straight shaft drilled pier is estimated to be on the order of 1 percent of the shaft diameter of the pier and differential settlements of equally loaded same size drilled shafts tipping at the same elevation should experience differential settlements on the order of'/ percent of the pier shaft diameters. Straight shaft drilled piers should be spaced no closer than three pier diameters apart measured center to center. If groups of piers are required to support concentrated loads, the supporting capacity of a group of vertically loaded drilled piers closely spaced could be considerably less than the sum of the capacities of the individual members comprising the group. The capacity of the group varies as a function of change in size, spacing and stiffness. Axial group capacity may be estimated from the equation below, where E is the group efficiency, N is the number of piers in the group and Q is the single drilled pier capacity. P = E * N * Q Values of group efficiency E increase from about 0.65 at a spacings of 2.5 diameters to about 1.0 at a spacing of 6 diameters for cohesive soils with a shear strength (cohesion) less than 2,000 psf. For the cohesive soils with a shear strength exceeding 2,000 psf, the group efficiency may be taken as 1. For non-cohesive soils (sands) values of group efficiency E increase from about 0.8 at a spacings of 2.5 diameters to about 1.0 at a spacing of 5 diameters. Detailed analyses of foundation-soil interaction for a specific group spacing would be necessary to define actual efficiency. Detailed analyses of foundation-soil interaction for a specific group spacing would be necessary to define actual efficiency. Structures Supported on Deep Foundations We recommend that a structural floor slab is utilized in conjunction with the proposed deep foundation systems. The site grade within the footprint of the proposed structure should be raised using properly compacted select fill as required to achieve final subgrade elevations. Structural beams should be used to stiffen the structural floor slab. Beams spanning between the piers or piles should be structurally connected to the piers or piles in both directions (longitudinal and transversal). Page 8 of 13 October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh,AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas Lateral Pier Analysis Deep foundations supporting the structure for this project may be subjected to lateral loads. Lateral pier analysis programs such as L-pile will require the following soil parameters for this site. L-Pile Design Criteria D Description C ye K Eso 0-5 CLAY Neglect 5-10.5 CLAY 250 -- 55 30 0.02 10.5-13.5 SAND -- 26 55 20 -- 13.5-23 CLAY 250 -- 55 30 0.02 23-28 CLAY 11000 -- 60 100 0.01 28-43 CLAY 2,500 -- 60 1,000 0.005 43-48 SAND -- 34 55 60 -- 48-58 SAND -- 38 55 125 -- 58-72 CLAY 3,000 -- 60 1,000 0.005 72-75 SAND -- 36 55 125 -- Where: D =depth (ft) yE = effective unit weight, pcf C =shear strength, psf K= modulus of subgrade reaction (pci) 0 = angle of internal friction, deg. Eso= 50%strain value K and E50 values were estimated from known correlations. SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS Concrete Flatwork Construction Considerations Provisions in the site development should be made in order to maintain relatively uniform moisture contents of the supporting soils. A number of measures may be used to attain a reduction in subsoil moisture content variations. Some of these measures are outlined below. • During construction, positive drainage schemes should be implemented to prevent ponding of water on the subgrade. • Positive drainage should be maintained around the structure and site flatwork through roof/gutter systems connected to piping or directed to paved surfaces, transmitting water away from the foundation perimeter and site flatwork. In addition, positive grades sloping away from the foundation and site flatwork should be designed and implemented. • It is recommended to establish the final concrete slab a minimum of 11/ feet above the average surrounding grades at the site to promote positive drainage away from the foundation. Page 9 of 13 October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh,AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas • We recommend that an effective site drainage plan be devised by others prior to commencement of construction to provide positive drainage away from the site improvements and off the site, both during and after construction. • Vegetation placed in landscape beds that are adjacent to the structure and site flatwork should be limited to plants and shrubs that will not exceed a mature height of 3 feet. Large bushes and trees should be planted away from the foundation and flatwork at a distance that will exceed their full mature height and canopy width. • Individual concrete panels of site flatwork should be dowelled together to minimize trip hazards because of differential movements within the flatwork. • Site flatwork should be designed to drain quickly with a minimum positive slope of 1 percent. All project features beyond the scope of those discussed above should be planned and designed similarly to attain a region of relatively uniform moisture content within the foundation and flatwork areas. Poor drainage schemes are generally the primary cause of foundation and flatwork problems in South Texas. CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS Site Preparation In areas where straight shaft drilled pier foundations are used in conjunction with a structural floor slab; no site preparation is required. Instead, stripping of the site as discussed below and compaction of the subgrade to attain ordinary compaction should be performed to provide adequate support for formwork and construction equipment. In areas where soil supported flatwork is to be constructed soil, foundation remnants, deleterious material, vegetation and all loose or excessively organic materials should be removed to a minimum depth of 1 foot below the existing site grades and should extend a minimum distance of 5 feet outside the perimeter of the proposed flatwork. After stripping the site, the upper 1 foot of exposed subgrade soil shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698), and the moisture content shall be maintained at or above the optimum moisture content. If any soft areas are identified, the soils should be removed and recompacted in place. Upon completion of the subgrade preparations as described above, "Select Fill" soils should be placed as required to achieve the desired finished concrete floor elevation, which we recommend being at least 11/ feet above the average surrounding grade elevations. The "Select Fill" pad shall be constructed to achieve uniform select fill beneath all slab and flatwork areas. Page 10 of 13 October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh,AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas Select Fill Imported select fill material used at this site should be homogenous, free from organics and other deleterious materials and should have a maximum liquid limit of 40 percent and a plasticity index (PI) between 7 and 18. The select fill soils shall have a minimum of 35 percent passing the#200 sieve and no soil particles exceeding 1'/ inches will be permitted. The select fill should be placed in no greater than 8-inch thick loose lifts and then compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698) with the moisture content at or above the optimum. Prior to compaction, the soil may require moisture adjustment. During warm weather, moisture reduction can generally be accomplished by disking or otherwise aerating the soil. When air drying is not feasible, a moisture reducing chemical additive, such as hydrated lime, could be incorporated into the soil. During dry weather, some addition of moisture may be required to facilitate compaction. This should also be done in a controlled manner using a tank truck with a spray bar. In addition to the minimum density requirements listed above, the soil must be stable, i.e., not "pumping" or rutting excessively under construction traffic, prior to placing additional fill or constructing foundations, floor slabs, or flatwork. Field density tests should be performed on each lift of fill to document that proper compaction is achieved. Drilled, Cast-in-Place, Pier Construction with Slurry Displacement Method For deep drilled pier construction at this site, the slurry displaced method will be necessary to prevent groundwater and soils from infiltrating into the pier excavation. With the slurry displacement method it is essential that there is a sufficient slurry head available (or that the slurry density can be increased as needed) so the inside pressure is greater than that from the groundwater table to reduce the tendency of the soil to cave into the pier excavation. Bentonite is most commonly used with water to produce the slurry ("bentonite slurry"). Some experimentation may be required to obtain optimum percentage for a site but amounts in the range of 4 to 6 percent by weight are usually adequate. The bentonite should be well mixed with water so that the mixture is not lumpy. The slurry should be capable of forming a filter cake on the shaft wall and to carry the smaller (say, under 6mm) excavated particles in suspension. With the slurry method it is generally desirable to: • Prevent having the slurry in the shaft too long to prevent an excessively thick filter cake that is difficult to displace with concrete during shaft filling. • Pump the slurry and screen out the larger soil particles in suspension then the "conditioned" slurry can be returned to the shaft prior to concreting. Page 11 of 13 October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh,AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas Care should be exercised in excavating clay through the slurry so that pulling a large fragment does not cause sufficient negative pore pressure, or suction, to develop and collapse a part of the shaft. As an alternative to the bentonite slurries the utilization of polymers, or a combination of bentonite and polymer slurry may be considered. The selection of the proper slurry is considered "means and methods" and hence is the sole responsibility of the specialty contractor. When the shaft is complete, the rebar cage is set in place and a tremie is installed (this sequence is usually necessary so that the tremie does not have to be pulled to set the cage and then reinserted, almost certain to produce a slurry film discontinuity in the shaft). Concrete is pumped with great care, taken that the tremie is always well submerged in the concrete, so a minimum surface area is exposed and contaminated with slurry. Studies have shown that the concrete will adequately displace slurry particles from the rebar cage so a good bond can be obtained, and as previously noted, if the shaft is not open too long the filter cake on the pier wall is reasonably displaced as well. The success of a drilled pier foundation system is highly dependent upon the expertise of the drilled pier foundation contractor and upon the expedient placement of concrete. A test pier excavation should be performed at the building site prior to drilling production piers to verify the drilling subcontractor's construction methods and to identify any potential installation problems. The Geotechnical Engineer, or his designated representative, should be present to witness the installation of all the drilled piers, including the test pier excavation. Utilities Utilities that project through a floor slabs or walls should be designed with either some degree of flexibility, or with sleeves, in order to prevent damage to these lines should vertical movement occur. Expansion and Control Joints Expansion and control joints should be designed and placed in various portions of the structure. Properly planned placement of these joints will assist in controlling the degree and location of material cracking that normally occurs due to material shrinkage, thermal affects, soil movements and other related structural conditions. Dewatering Based on the groundwater observations made during the drilling operations and based on our experience with other geotechnical investigations performed in the vicinity, dewatering may be required for shallow excavations at the site. It should be noted that the depth to the groundwater is subject to change due to tidal conditions. Page 12 of 13 October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh,AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas Significant rainfall events will result in groundwater close to the ground surface and may warrant alternative construction means and methods in order to proceed with construction. Therefore, it should be made the responsibility of the contractor to verify depths to groundwater and appropriate construction methods. A unit cost price for dewatering should be included in the contract documents. Subsurface water that flows in an upward direction into an excavation area that is being dewatered imparts a seepage force that tends to loosen the soil, reducing the soil strength. The change in strength should be considered in designing excavation bracing and foundations. GENERAL COMMENTS If significant changes are made in the character or location of the proposed Cooper's Boat Facility Structure project, a consultation should be arranged to review any changes with respect to the prevailing soil conditions. At that time, it may be necessary to submit supplementary recommendations. It is recommended that the services of Rock Engineering be engaged to test and evaluate the soils in the foundation excavations prior to concreting construction to verify that the bearing soils are consistent with those encountered in the borings. Rock Engineering cannot accept any responsibility for any conditions that deviate from those described in this report, nor for the performance of the foundations if not engaged to also provide construction observation and testing for this project. If it is required for Rock Engineering to accept any liability, then Rock Engineering must review and agree with the plans and perform such observation during construction as we recommend. All dewatering, sheeting, shoring, and bracing of trenches, pits and excavations should be made the responsibility of the contractor and should comply with all current and applicable local, state and federal safety codes, regulations and practices, including the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Page 13 of 13 APPENDIX r�sr�4v,c GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING 444 • CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS � c ENGINEERING&TESTING r °A,. 6 SOILS •ASPHALT• CONCRETE A UES Company SITE VICINITY MAP of r 1211 t w, �� ��1-r1■i� October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh, AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas ROCK ENGINEERING& TESTING LABORATORY,LLC. Corpus Christi San Antonio Round Rock Office:361.883.4555 Office:210.495.8000 Office: 512.284.8022 Fax:361.883.4711 Fax:210.495.8015 Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St. 10856 Vandale 7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi,TX 78409 San Antonio,TX 78216 Round Rock,TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com r�sr�4v,c GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING 444 4 • CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS °� c ENGINEERING&TESTING r °A,. 6 SOILS •ASPHALT• CONCRETE A UES Company BORING LOCATION PLAN SEA- •.[atiyTiWG L; iAT " f 'AT v - - A ' a October 26, 2023 COOPER'S BOAT FACILITY STRUCTURE Attn: Mr. Toan Q. Huynh, AIA Coopers Alley Rock Engineering Job Number: G123410 Corpus Christi, Texas ROCK ENGINEERING& TESTING LABORATORY,LLC. Corpus Christi San Antonio Round Rock Office:361.883.4555 Office:210.495.8000 Office: 512.284.8022 Fax:361.883.4711 Fax:210.495.8015 Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St. 10856 Vandale 7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi,TX 78409 San Antonio,TX 78216 Round Rock,TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com LOG OF BORING B-1 SHEET 1 of 2 CLIENT: Richter Architects °Ne�P a, r°srN Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLc. PROJECT: Cooper's Boat Facility Structure 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 LOCATION: Coopers Alley, Corpus Christi, Texas °°"r Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G123410 Fax: A UES C°mp°y DATE(S) DRILLED: 9/25/2023 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Solid Stem Augers/Mud Rotary at 7.5 feet LIMITS X W GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Ld w F 0 w Groundwater was encountered at 3.5 feet during drilling. w z F r J H F LLLL 0 3 J r � > O 0 W 0 U U U cn LLLL N LL Z rn rn EQ W to � o Z W H d 0 W Lu U In Z a o o o a a ? z Z) SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A w 0 u¢i z a o 2 LL PL PI 0 EL ° � DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ASPHALT(approximately 2.5 inches thick) JI SS N=5 1s 41 IBA SILTY CLAYEY SAND_VV H GRAW Grown, moist. S-1 ((approximately 6 inches thick) CLAYEY-SAN6 brown,—moist,—firm. SS N=4 24 48 5 3_2 Same as above, greenish gray. ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- —————————————————————————————— SS s 3 N=4 23 SILTY CLAYEY SAND,with shell, greenish gray, moist, firm. At SS N=3 37 10 S-4 Same as above, soft. ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- —————————————————————————————— SS X s 5 N=2 18 25 18 7 33 SILTY CLAYEY SAND(SC-SM),with shell, gray, moist, very loose. SS ——— 22 _22 1——4- —— —— _17- Same as above. (SC-SM) 15 S-6 36 52 16 36 81 FAT CLAY WITH SAND(CH), gray,moist,very soft. ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- —————————————————————————————— SS N=5 52 63 19 44 89 20 S_7 FAT CLAY(CH), gray, moist,firm. ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ SS N=10 17 32 12 20 51 g_8 SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL), brown, moist, stiff. 25 ST P=4.5+ 19 N 30 3_9 Same as above, very stiff. a i= w� K 35 S-0 P=4.5+ 17 109 3.5 Same as above, very stiff. a C7 U5 w CL o ———— —— —— —— —————————————————————————————— O L SS S-11 N=21 22 SILTY CLAYEY SAND, brown, moist, medium dense. m 40 0 N -STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qc-STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations were performed by On-Point Geophysical LLC.at GPS coordinates p N 27.79059 W 97.33999 01 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 LOG OF BORING B-1 SHEET 2 of 2 CLIENT: Richter Architects °Ne�P a, r°srN Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLc. PROJECT: Cooper's Boat Facility Structure 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 LOCATION: Coopers Alley, Corpus Christi, Texas °°"r Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G123410 Fax: A UES C°mp°y DATE(S) DRILLED: 9/25/2023 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Solid Stem Augers/Mud Rotary at 7.5 feet LIMITS X Lu GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Ld w F 0 w Groundwater was encountered at 3.5 feet during drilling. w z F r J H F LLLL 0 3 J r � > O O ���0 U U U LLLL N LL Z Un Un EQ W to oro Z W H d 0 Un Z J a CL� g -,001 a a y ? 2 W z w 0 0 u¢i z a cr LL PL PI 0 EL ° U) DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ---------------------- ------- -------------------------------- SS 45 S-12 N=30 24 SILTY SAND, brown, moist, dense. SS N=52 21 50 S-13 Same as above, very dense. SS N=80 22 19 Same as above. 55 S-14 ---------------------- ---- -- -------------------------------- ST 60 s-15 P=4.5+ 24 FAT CLAY, brown, moist, hard ST 65 s-16 P=4.5+ 29 Same as above. ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST 13 38 13 25 74 S-17 P—4.5+— 14 30 14 16 —— —— 52 LEAN CLAY WITH SAND(CL), brown, moist, hard. SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL), brown, moist, hard. m N F Uj 75 S 18 N=48 zi 36 SILTY CLAYEY SAND, brown, moist, dense. Y U' ' O CL 7 u� a s 19 P=4.5+ 25 FAT CLAY, brown and greenish gray, moist, hard. 0 80 Boring terminated at a depth of 80 feet. a m N C7 (7 0 N -STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qc-STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations were performed by On-Point Geophysical LLC.at GPS coordinates p N 27.79059 W 97.33999 01 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 LOG OF BORING B-2 SHEET 1 of 2 CLIENT: Richter Architects °Ne�P a, r°srN Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLc. PROJECT: Cooper's Boat Facility Structure 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 LOCATION: Coopers Alley, Corpus Christi, Texas °°"r Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G123410 Fax: A UES C°mp°y DATE(S) DRILLED: 9/25/2023 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Solid Stem Augers/Mud Rotary at 5 feet. LIMITS X W GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Ld w F 0 w Groundwater was encountered at 4 feet during drilling. w z F r J H F LLLL 0 3 J r � > O O W 0 U U U cn LLLL N LL Z rn rn EQ W to � o Z W H d 0 W Lu U In Z a o o o a a ? z Z) SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A w 0 u¢i z a o LL PL PI 0 EL ° � DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ————— ———— ———— —— —— —— ASPHALT_a(approximately 3 inches thick. pp __Y _ _ _ __J S 1 N=8 37 SILTY SAND,with shell and clay seam at 1 foot, brown, moist, ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- loose. SS N=3 25 49 CLAYEY SAND,with shell, brown, moist, soft. 5 S-2 SS N=2 27 s-3 Same as above, very soft. SS N=1 29 10 S-a Same as above. ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- —————————————————————————————— ss S 5 N=1 27 27 SILTY CLAYEY SAND,with shell, brown, moist,very loose. ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ 15 SS N=1 54 75 22 53 94 FAT CLAY(CH), greenish gray, moist,very soft. SS N=1 70 3-7 Same as above. 20 ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ SS N=8 18 35 14 21 CLAYEY SAND, brown, moist, stiff. 25 S-8 SS N S-9 N=25 17 31 Same as above, very stiff. a 30 c� i 0 S-o X N=21 21 FAT CLAY WITH SAND, brown, moist,very stiff. 35 a C7 U) w a. o ———— —— —— —— —————————————————————————————— SS N=20 22 81 m 40 S-11 LEAN CLAY WITH SAND, brown, moist,very stiff. N 0 N -STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qc-STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations were performed by On-Point Geophysical LLC.at GPS coordinates p N 27.79080 W 97.33985 CD P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 LOG OF BORING B-2 SHEET 2 of 2 CLIENT: Richter Architects °Ne�P a, r°srN Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLc. PROJECT: Cooper's Boat Facility Structure 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 LOCATION: Coopers Alley, Corpus Christi, Texas °°"r Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G123410 Fax: A UES C°mp°y DATE(S) DRILLED: 9/25/2023 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Solid Stem Augers/Mud Rotary at 5 feet. LIMITS X Lu GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Ld w F Z w Groundwater was encountered at 4 feet during drilling. w z F r J H F LL O 3 J r � > O O LL LL O U U U cn LL N LL Z rn rn EQ W to orZ W H d O cn Z J CL IL 1-,0 ? Wa � 0 2 z o0 ¢ z EL °w LL PL PI o U) DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ---------------------- ------- -------------------------------- SS 45 S-12 N=23 24 16 SILTY SAND, brown, moist, medium dense. SS N=50 21 s-13 Same as above, dense. 50 Boring terminated at a depth of 50 feet. N N O H LU WI 0 O Ir C7 UD LU 0 0 U 0 V m N 0 N -STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qc-STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations were performed by On-Point Geophysical LLC.at GPS coordinates 0 N 27.79080 W 97.33985 01 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 Rock Engineering&Testing Laboratory ��"� yFs 6817 Leopard Street 1.161 r�hc Engineering&Testing Corpus Christi,TX 78409-1703 <, Laboratory, LLC Telephone: 361-883-4555 o Fax: 361-883-4711 Oq'ya yVG ey A UES Company KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND SYMBOLS UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM TERMS CHARACTERIZING SOIL MAJOR DIVISIONS SYMBOL NAME STRUCTURE OW GW 0 Well Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures, SLICKENSIDED-having inclined planes of ' little or no fines weakness that are slick and glossy in appearance GRAVEL GP Poorly Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures, AND o p little or no fines FISSURED-containing shrinkage cracks, GRAVELLY frequently filled with fine sand or silt; usually SOILS GM ° Silty Gravels,Gravel-Sand-Silt mixtures more or less vertical LAMINATED(VARVED)-composed of thin layers of varying color and texture, usually grading from COARSE GC Clayey Gravels,Gravel-Sand-Clay Mixtures sand or silt at the bottom to clay at the top GRAINED CRUMBLY-cohesive soils which break into small SOILS SW Well Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands, little or no blocks or crumbs on drying fines Poorly Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands,little or CALCAREOUS-containing appreciable quantities SAND Sp no fines of calcium carbonate,generally nodular AND SANDY WELL GRADED-having wide range in grain sizes SOILS SM Silty Sands,Sand-Silt Mixtures and substantial amounts of all intermediate particle sizes SC Clayey Sands,Sand-Clay mixtures POORLY GRADED-predominantly of one grain size uniformly graded)or having a range of sizes with some intermediate size missing(gap or skip ML Inorganic Silts and very fine Sands, Rock Flour, graded) Silty or Clayey fine Sands or Clayey Silts SILTS Inorganic Clays of low to medium plasticity, SYMBOLS FOR TEST DATA AND CLAYS CL Gravelly Clays,Sandy Clays,Silty Clays, Lean Clays LL<50 _ a — GroundwaterLevel Organic Silts and Organic Silt-Clays of low - (Initial Reading) FINE OL plasticity GRAINED 1 — Groundwater Level SOILS JH Inorganic Silts, Micaceous or Diatomaceous fine - (Final Reading) Sandy or Silty soils, Elastic Silts ' SILTS — Shelby Tube Sample AND CLAYS Inorganic Clays of high plasticity, Fat Clays LL>50 ® — SPT Samples Organic Clays of medium to high plasticity, Organic Silts m — Auger Sample HIGHLY ORGANIC Rock Core SOILS PT Peat and other Highly Organic soils n — TERMS DESCRIBING CONSISTENCY OF SOIL COARSE GRAINED SOILS FINE GRAINED SOILS DESCRIPTIVE NO. BLOWS/FT. DESCRIPTIVE NO. BLOWS/FT. UNCONFINED STANDARD PEN. STANDARD PEN. COMPRESSION TERM TEST TERM TEST TONS PER SQ. FT. Very Loose 0-4 Very Soft <2 <0.25 Loose 4-10 Soft 2-4 0.25-0.50 Medium 10-30 Firm 4-8 0.50-1.00 Dense 30-50 Stiff 8-15 1.00-2.00 Very Dense over 50 Very Stiff 15-30 2.00-4.00 Hard over 30 over 4.00 Field Classification for"Consistency"is determined with a 0.25"diameter penetrometer saDtijaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a - eli3N,3a9o„s N 133HS d3AOJ NI z a«i lslaN)I,— o=L31sNAll SVX31 -- IlSldHJ S(1daoi to A110 lVdIN39 � M w b91NWMd = - b6Z06T #1J3f0�ld U110 I ~ =x S2IlVd3d NOIld1S 131l 341MU11D NOIId1 3— F8 3Ltl0 'ON N01— NOIlald— 1 11 IN NOS d �' W1�ON3170V Why 9Z 6D Es - o �a Q� i Lv lo w Ic zo i F F w ® _ Cl w z J �bfj voxx ao zz Q� �O a N m 0 LL _ m �V) OZ 16. OZ 1- Ul K p a =O 6 bti� J Ey Q AlQ J 3 = �7i �� z� �z U WZ J WO U F-~ m z O O .1C `n wo O W W F U m En J W�- H W N [n� Q� UrJ 0 �F- W J U1 (n J ZQ �n rV 6 SOy Z� w o �w a w Q- Wit- J Q = 0 2 r n m O= Q r J U J ,URLI vJ NE o Q D-H O � - m Q e, a In m M w N o 5�pe s e'er uj s cn z CD m _ O 0 'o W oSah Q N ~ W Ct Cl) LU 'U Z LL W O L.L > I..LI W o Q 1 1 1 a- J L a Cr CL LU 21 O W ram" =J an3ai4V 30r -G 77, rc S9[wi 1lpXN]OB oa Nmos Nawon aaaa 4z? x z a Do 0< O I as 71IM313H to H p ❑ a N w a m � p p a� OF o a ❑ p p 1w vxi i ? o I J z r as laioU Y W o ❑ w o a w o 0 U O avoa 3lltl0]illt0 U Ln a «AYMHOryy Q Z w ❑ a Z p � n O �., p w J rc z M ° a °o 3 o o J a u z SZOZ/S/9 :031VOdn saDtijaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a wNe' e1 sa 3N13aso s a 'a SD'X31 X30N1133HS z o �A N IlSRIHJ sn4=ra0i to A110AmoNk va3N3� M -__ - �� ` - V6Z06T #1J3FOU AilD Nf S2IlVd3d NOIld1S 1313 341MA11D N01-353O F8 31tl0 'ON NOISV3L NOIIEItlO530 A9 3lW 'ON NOGIAM 8 WaaN3aM KW 9Z/6D L 9 wnMaatl VEW 4Z/OL Z c �o w --- ---> - 0 o G a cfl �I J w w z z >= o s J >z z 0 o a¢a w a a a a a a o o - o z > N Y Y W a ¢a a o w o w z~6' z z ~ p 0 a a F o o a p p p o a a a a a a w z o p o a a>o z z w w LL s z u'333� '"3333a �3ogoi��Z�io�aa raga m m m mm m m am mm m maa a > a a Z Z Q 3 Y Q O pz o o O � Li- OO Z 2� - dZd� - a p O Z O O O O z h z W 0 0 0 u 0 0 0 O Q n a - z Z O z F ¢4 z v�i O Z ¢6 z O z o ¢a O p O O o adz <¢a�a , gwga�w� r �Fo�W�as w �,g�wo, c, o�o� J oo�o� �ooG ono '^a��� -�00000Zo'"��� 0 o F w o 0 o a u u`� u a a a'i o a - F o_ w o z d o o o z o o F a o a ago�� pow- __ F3ez 0000a?x�a _ i3o�Goo �o¢o�o _ ogo�00000 = Fow - Ggu u �o� vQo� a�x °�o�doo� xQ�i FFOFQQF - ��-,�000�,wwxwwxwwwwwwww� - a�4aw��, Lm 3 �o - �� w� ay�J�JBS0000BWawaao�w o��u�w�ww��wwwwww F a���ggg��ggg��ggg���g o3333333333333333 ¢tom --- ------ ------ ------1....1 ti 11- ....�.� 3°.� ...ti .....ti-.........� . �...�.....� .....-....ti w� 3z -p o Lfl Z Y a z p a o o o o ate. a o N o a o 0 o - 0 0?g z z Y o o a a w w a a h z a z o>� a s z o z a z ol. a s a p s w p o a a w ,U"„ o a LL d w w w max �oo_w �'.,�.,F w YYo� w x w o� `-' ? F l o o z o o o u<�w F z - o z o o o =z D 11 o�o o W w G w o d o� a� a o o a w o o d o ?oo�o>o-p - -off oo_ LLgo�zoo�� ?�o - go�zoo?"�o�o - go�ooz�o�o tI - W-�oFoa w>000>w w Few>��F--w a�i 4w�w-��Fa�w a�i �r�F��¢ w a�x p a d o o w d d a w w w o--a--p x-p a o p o o--a-p w ti c z a o U z o x 3 Z w w z o z z o z g aa`w' wg �w z Fd aFo_ _ D a or w 0 - o _ c �����w5g��5�g�2 00 � goo'z � o0 x o a< p o f o_g o o 0 o_ - zo o f z0 0 0 0 `-o _ o x x o J o? p ??p d o caa< W Faao�a_ _ - ' aQaaa�oo�¢ aF oo�a o w w F g o w o G G F g F o o g g F w a F g o w o g g F w o w a o 0 o i� o a o �, zo i - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3-3 3-3 3 3 SZOZ/9/6 a31vadn ^''°� sa�wag 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawa�odad µn6 ryeu'b, _ Ye ¢ °ei i3Nn3aons°E �� SVX31 GN3931 ONV SN011tlln32199tl o IlSldHJ S(1d2100 }o A110 M b91NWMd - b6Z06Z #1J3f0U A110 S2IlVd3d NOlivis 131l 341MA11) X NO-ItlOSM F8 3— 'ON NOISWtl NOIIEld— A9 3W ON NOGIAM W1�ON3170V W1V 9Z 6D I x z - w --- _ _ - -_ " 0 Es z o epp= 0-1$ A. Ed - a- - - _ - - -- — - Ell '> __»»»» »»»»»> > HK'�.'i= »> »» a z z o = - _ = K'6 _ _ 5n > - - - _ 22 — - - — — _ _ _____ — _ o� __ 9ZOZ/LL/9 :031V'Idn sa�ti�as 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawa�Odad T dVVq NOUVD01 n 0 - exy aaewnN waN aaaasi�sa saeilszsasss'cse a eu usarosnatmloceaso-,a3N3a0N3N SVX31 Mo IlSldHJ Sndaoi Jo A110 ,Vl13N39 � M N ; o2x SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAil NO-IrSM F8 31tl0 'ON N01— N01-d— A9 3lW 'ON NOGIAM �' W1�ON3170V Why 9Z 6D i `zl a s ZN o ,a o �c 3I w dI GAIG w ��� w J _ o C3NI3 H—0NS��CJ J = ]D O �')H/3HS = m �❑ 4 ❑❑❑❑ / H 7 N` J InLLJ N ❑�` N O a O w 10y ❑O �� NI)3a�S� w O w o O 2 w _j W ❑ O J ❑❑�❑❑ w� ❑ ❑� ❑O � O �cnw �s Q ❑� —= J ��� ❑ ❑❑❑ ❑❑� -W UJ(n '� �❑ a00 J W A A ❑❑ W J O UJ `�O w J o 15 1tl212fddtlHO HLn(5-- oLU) � ❑❑ ❑❑ l❑ CD ❑ ILLJ ON ]O� a❑❑❑❑❑ ❑O J a _1�0�❑❑ ❑0� O O❑ Q��❑�a❑❑❑a�❑tlnHv�Nva1❑O❑ a ON��1� 0❑❑ C) N OOOr1s w ❑E\qll ❑❑ ❑ ®Z Z z pp F- V) ❑ z � tl 4 ` O Zc U) / � F sh CO3A J 3N aON S Hi.f ^ G / L�O o �❑❑❑❑ D ❑N1bD/V Q o �i JO F O " OO�wOw N ❑ Ob S3,y0 w zw. �❑❑❑❑ ❑: ❑r � .0 O O NS 0 15 ltl— J 2fdddbH7 p Q� w pp �NOb= CD v 00❑❑❑ 3��❑ y ❑w btb0 dJ� ❑ 0p�. Ln� U� $O O QOO�J ° ^❑ �� ��❑ z N O❑❑�0�00 '�❑ A\/ e OHO 00 , ❑❑❑ a❑❑❑❑❑ ❑❑❑ O g ��❑ ❑❑ `� ❑J > ❑❑❑C❑❑O❑ LLJ ❑ r 1S tln Hb'JNtll N Zi ❑❑a a❑❑ E Ll-0 L bZOZ/OZ/9 631VIldn sa�ti�as 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawa�odad Z dVVI NOliVDOle a - fLda39W ON WNN a3a3151933'011 9113101LSE Nlx eulusarosnatmlocealso-,a3N3aoNsN SVX31 v n IlSldHJ Sndaoi Jo A110 ,ba3N39 � M o N A3MMdV6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD WIC ; o2x SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAil X W NO-ItlOSM F8 3Ltl0 'ON N01— NOIIEld— A9 3lW 'ON NOGIAM W1�ON3C Cl'v W,y 9Z 6D k _ i �s ^V as ino ONOWtllO= p a� ? l) L Q 71 I ' / J O W cCA J c % J O W a 3 O z � O \ V 021 S1tl213NIW Nd3H1f10s L o� 3oaawwoo g Q Ln Z H Z O F O uJ JNO �p \� �'� �Lo x O O - \ y �—�o _ w 08 OoomAdvio 5� Y 0 Ln w�� O O 0 3 v bZOZ/OZ/9 :631VOdn sa�ti�as 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawajodad - exya3ewnN waN a1a11,1",3aei l........ Nlz « ;aN sN to 0 3 SDX31 £db W NOIlb�Ol �= N 3aoN3 N Ln o IISIdHJ Sndaoi Jo A110 lVH3N3D m s=y Sblbd3b NOIld1S loll 3aIMAiD NO-1-30 F8 31tl0 'ON NOISWtl N01WIdM30 A9 3lW 'ON NOGIAM �' W1�ON3t70V W7y 9Z 6D i �a V Z O H Z \ / o can V" 7jo� LLJ ° \ J LL cn— $r y° \ \ \ Z Of \\ ob NObp 0_ 0 rc \O \ \� � 00g N � Z 00 .Q �O— H�CC - '� L� 0 II f J w y =I °� \ �° J JpQ Z \ LLJ W�Q i aU o < J\Q J o c \ N7 o Z O t,ZOZ/OZ/9 :631tlOdn saDtijaS 6uuaauj6u3 Jo auaLuPDdad a - ael l3Ni?3a9ons N Y &310N IVU3N39 NI z SV'X31 o IISIdHJ S(1daoi to A110 113MMdV6Z06Z #1J3FOU AilD '�a=x S2IlVd3d NOIld1S 1313 341MA11D A W NOIIdI 3— 777777'ON N017 NOIlEld— A9 3lW 'ON NOGI— VW2N� OV W7d SZ./°Q mt prc U�w3 pOr U�pm m ss� < sb NGg3 o < F o on o N a - o v a s6w` Ga = § 9 0- ° iz� w Z�— w z,allo «z N� ma ra b z NY o-Q=m `o w < a Z mozU?Mx <o o° - Ypm a w� w 3 o UN� < 3 b g. o -3 30�°- 1- o o 5 m o CNN-izw� om H G o zN°ax 5 z z <or�?�K" o 'a $ h� v14 Am - zo 5 n s & o dam uz oN - F o -I. o z U ui o a%z. . �°6w wm N _ �a iw a= _ a o �oGm�o N ww za 3 a'ai � N z u Vz oy om km m o p w�� �&z�� w1 p .. 6 p� zzwmW�w w m w m °< o �SW Noa Nadp a5 - o _ s� _w�p -zw w c� w - ? = <`H5W w"rco Po mg w o ¢ o K arwwt0 0 :mz~ din �_ o 'gp tz awl°° x w 3 O - Np0 u�O-Vr m"aw p0 ua H xi �(°i1 Hqz,� rco a O� o >ow °gs€� pza� �= Y p o3 wwg- < o m o ozU 3 Gw mu =-. =w oa � w aN r aW,z wz 3 u as zww�w� a� �. gwzE sg ` � ao< �o N < 3 4 m a 8f IMRF.�8 83u`r3i' �wzW �a a� pff Y£$ �9 Y 3 � a8 w u< z �- W �+ g°< Sw m i3 Ql on.o�zN i °'a E 6< < p5ow o 'w^ m soo W`^oW <z a� ztzpx35 xuz3 of<mG mG�za�. �` - n z- a€W "�'pa MR F AMER'. z� cdm°rc�a26m limo ~Sdzw _258 C! � o�z 0.d� sW $p�z. �'ma wo xo` g'a wo w 'wowJoow' Nuw�p w o a� N a° =U�QLLjQo�Qz >.Nw �o� � >o - d '�oG18 30 �6p G s��pm� ;o w�uz-�'�a�3 <w�� $o� 3� Gma8° Nzo r ��°€p°m g�oU��:m���m o�owm - S z z�wo_ - �� uWmo aoa L �$�N=oga NoS�w L - =�< ?�$N - �,3 m �w� i� mam w - go_ Sao° Yw �m "�p�g= ram w � wr�W gp u �� Iwo„ $ to- zz �a 1w �o � W= _----� ova `ro oo� �w ��p` ta�� � p po to `z 8w<o< t C] sm� mmN _ O oQ _ ��U ¢3''15wrcNK U'm��U _ �mwJ3U'U �r rci z U zor. a� - 26a m °° _ _ mm= �o�o z5<N �3w�m No i6- >6 < LL - dN� p3pF _ --oo N o��oorzo�N - _ end �No �o Z. - WN = &a�'"m N z� aoo `w5 _ K'wosa - - &,p`w Gw -� <oa U aGa m ww W_ p 3=or &�mm _ �deU>o8d ud 9;m igz r w gfv� - Gia- Nrra w �o _ 5 ��w -w3ua< _ oe oq�� - o - w5> "C�o� s$3 Leo zNpaa°a�°� o =s ` - �w - &oNwzo _ w _z � zzzU�:3 = o0 - a x�am t��°w z20�p m5c°ix�zoU _33U tzz a��U`n-ua �w� m0 �i oOrcw y�iz po= aaw j did - rz mo m��r d<"'i �_ .. z3puK .L ���j jo- �a ¢a0at\mow via as - _ - - m°wa U� Z 3�YUwo im�. Jai osz ��?wd ain Z �10 Gd (n3 dN N mm o5mz� wSO4rc�o IN- UU �i�[wio6�z°LL xa u ��ZFZoin meow rcvalp d w3h 5 ,Z.K� Z s sw ¢ K Q d _ a� K ¢� - 2p z- a z�0�3�0<Kw NV°r w�60m wwg riles r� o Z G�G� a - oGa �N- oaOz r jz S—M W,'oa z offi oaa-<�uw�w°m e�N�ozr m�wz Kw` oo dew 'L^¢u �F ~ x0 r <w U izm-O <K�2 ampm tt uwi�Coz I �] o,,-; o. �d pj nw mg wow to ` `g� m�wm tz O L aw oimw oON a m' ljw rzw'Fw to ru ��w��r-,E � myw5 umc°io u�auw ao ¢ rauwrc o`>>Jrc rrro u rw rZio msa o'xa rrrara3m`aciu° uovlYm ar=S3zv`1 arc�um wvls ¢ 50 U V V V V V V V O p O p p p w w w w U U z z J �3Q O � r2dia� wzGja °Y z zm o, Uo Sw ro `�' -.5 a 3l >"5= No am' �m�& 5;a�`°�=zpKN �m&ems zz LL��g -om o _< oo <w s awz New w'mLL �s�m 3,ww P. da m t� CI° _ Ju� z0 -� V~ Nwo<� N ;Or ttwilFNm43� ��mopwmz Nv�cwi0 O r -$N _ a� - g_ Z��rc rc�� w a W 5� Ot�ili�i K° < w0� ;~z�pF U ;V �co Y Qz a �m0 � �J °mow ww KWKaN im�m `w�w�m u �oa� - u� KSU 3uzo HYI�wO �wz wwp �m X. 5p3 w u Yzwai oz� 5 w a�i 3 - is x 6 pz p < 115 z�818 �aa� - NO — - - �w�arcVamFNS J`u�i�2�nL�Q ow mom ° �� A. rn - W^ � _. mew w6——W w3 apm _ �x S pro N <t 3g — aGBz im z � pmz z ' ='omo.wLL o. w � V zN o_ p w� U <o j6 L wd Sw ea`' _W p�Qx a �a<m3Jm zrm <-O-we&TW �K s��'a�3 z3 mp & J�= rv5 m ' ¢� - ���" ko g --Wz�w46 -F si��w��o z~ a8o'~ 5 - wz� � ~Z% z� `� aGx m -mGz-ow` Cm w�E am u < 1 oo _ < r,g _ LLou wG�`ci�o wwrc ro �a o�o Z. wa o-6340— g� =m��� �pmOrc m � 3aF3o�o a3ier uFz ac`S pa oro[4i cs w mv1 z _ _ �i Sap c'��szo wwp- Wrz Z� - _ -� c5 3oa� o Wg w o Nszo �prz.`"Ej � W< o oo p z_-5 �oz� ' =wy mp ,.g o`5�-'a -m-z z ��� _ N8w-,ldNo`W$ 0i'_&5n'owl P 8 - - - mz-ozg. LO xd -Z. - u9Ja wi re N 3 iaUotmFawU -N3�O=Orc�m _ZOMt &jW 3U wgFut?�� wK s w a �a - - Ham- ok� -o<� zu1 o �'<?�� na wr?m�Nnog a�>za,np�zi w _ a z - emu_ r _� a owSN�W��w'aag z pm ? - - '"� 8� Sao < �$w _ - <C5 zoC - a�ouF�NU�T �zzdorc�LLp�+a SU _ ` i oo x o 8= � Z c3NN $&8'� �� �J �< � w wg I <G<irz <3 - G __ - - p3J rc�rcp 'o�<>==w� J awpu�wo wz&wo Gz o wap _� -per o4—8 �$wim< xsoo sa Wo�pd N °z _ o�` o m �mw <� w°m w�iz"w za - =aw z Qo < _ - o _ po 5m a rc3oN �SZ -asp _' >gz�rc m �rc�zz zi omoi`^or Wgo� 53� �WNX �Ne_ p$m-�-w un, �m oa8ioa = � a � a=o or(j�wa4o° a� w�� - '�� uzw; �w �opLL<ss <'� �. p�'b Wa a a a r <��wz �d`" ��ao< -0 3�1e�ap 5_N a�wpo Z ono = N Nm- w� o� as m � $; o�OR aos w -�<wwa�=��� oU�o�zwa� �6 w ��W _ �a J a A& � - --al w � -�aw��u� c� uu aa�n I m a rsp �a au <3muxi au a w a M uamm� Uaww> >rcxa a runr rN r3n<soi3w�an� uwm�m ra a s a a a s a a a s a a a a m m m m m m m m m 9ZOZ/LL/9 :O31V'Idn sa saomJas 6uuaaui6u3 �o ?uawpodaa o a ewnN wei3 a3a�lsi we3ael szse'esecse _ pb8L X1tlI1SIHH]Sfld'd0] OIL 31S'Ml93Nf13 HOH5'N 00 SVX31 N Z I S31DN Wd3N391Vl n1:MnS z o I1S21H� Sl1d210� 1 A16j w3WWfl'ld b 6Z06i #103 f021d A110 m� - _ SbIVd321 N011b'1S loll 301MAlIJ NO-83S30 F8 31W 'ON N2ISIA3N NOI1-3130 A9 3100 'ON NOISIA3N � i NOON300tl 5202/S/8 N00N300tl ZOZ i 0� Z Z O �W t/1 W Z Z❑ K �❑W D W =-__ _ `8 G .1 z Z Z 0 ¢O NX J w >m Z p y W m ❑w r Z W ¢O I O W U O W m K ¢0¢w¢ o O x y ®E p m W W o Wp Y w w Q= 1 F p ❑=p O N LL W w w a ¢ w x LL x Q m 0>m h m r O O 0 ¢r W❑I OW a��LLa¢gzor w�orr3 o❑- moi¢°J ¢J�wm¢z D - aSmWJ-3m xo ozW >Jz rr r - ❑ _ W W LL(YJFd�Zw rF-Hod¢ LLamQ a�wa`iLL F-J�oIOU o a a�o¢JW¢OZ wW0¢Um w m sc❑r>> W.KFW�W LLNO'U J wyw-wmu)o0 FWUrw D Q mZ - Q O m r m m W J m W ❑Q w o W❑= F w N LL D 0 >o W r K W ❑ J -- W W¢ Z TO ¢ W O Z xLLx UFO ¢mZ W ZtnZttD¢?�W pmr Y¢N N(rWY WaJd jWUoN'-cQLLW rZOtr U❑Z¢C7 NxUZ] OrZUC7 ZO❑Wm 7 7"Q WttO 1❑m mW ZU ZW ZpW mw6 WLL �OZW rW�❑WJ QOK rLL 0,❑W Z 70p Ww°WZO JOwCUL J>oa'wr x�> LY 0 W.ZW ZQ tt WUpr/ � ¢ Z DW Z DdO=SQLL m> Z❑Jw❑¢ ~ 2�LY Z W OUI�O arm W W¢K p U W ❑ i[ �Or°❑Z XX r20Q FOLLLLZN L7 ¢ U'R Z w 0' m�U�=O�o_�Z Wr�tt=O W wQrW OU °OWF �QOU2WF W - ❑ w mLL p❑0'r�O ❑w[r W>U D W rFQZ��N N ¢ (Y ❑ a Z ¢ ¢❑¢ O W>o ¢ '>°z pwQ¢Le Wi]a wcz�-�Zo-a�F�m JNz mwa UZ¢¢LLw Y¢W rm ZD ZrJp> O-uZd XO¢OU[JY WW❑ Q W U ZO-ZU' Wr ¢aF00- Q Iy W z,op a 0S`-' Nor¢ zSQ0F�° �owacw3�000 Lem ¢�� n o❑a� o�ow¢�a m�izoz J'nmw z z rcz �c>iz ar�z N-0r 0 2LLo DF Qazz '�w o > w LL p Q¢h r W w O z Z D O O W w W 0 K 0 OU>O m w w tr r J 0 K Z W W❑ O m C7 U' Q Q U D 0'U1 Z� p W l7r QUQ-U' -J Z O'QUQr mZ W 0' W = d J_Q W W°m J(7-U �JZ�Z❑U Z W pJ OFJ J C7 Z(Y �att W J F r Z Q ud ~F tY r 0 W Z W¢ r W D❑F w¢ O¢ r 0' ❑W❑Z O° ❑W W wQ❑-duo wowo azo�o�z wm��z wx�mz>oa wm�>o c�Q�w 'a W,� m 7 a ° ¢ m Wzw�waFOFo o❑mU a ���oo ��NooLe Le �Wo�W�w� Wmuwi - m w o a LL¢ U LLo¢oQoo o ❑w oaLL ¢ LL C7 w W FLL m izoz'o wwW�> > azzLL oo o ° ❑ rr WWo zw- �xWx� iwQ> J�oQ aco3 QW�W�L�r WLFC-L"Fe'-�❑Nzo�¢a�mw iro ow> wWa<o=w~m❑_U wrc Jo �oa � �J❑ >J Foa wo¢ ❑ �tto 7,7 U�Qw mz W a ¢ Omj jm D�¢ =��mWw 3¢z zip UQa�wam QJ �Wax��Wm~Z ❑yam Wwzc�wcw3�w�x ��aFWw�z ¢aQ LL pzow �ww '>o zUQomLro o¢ ❑�¢ zF❑z❑raz=Fmk ¢wW iF��wam�mrc a�zcnozLL> >"5 �wn�zc7Wz 77 77U2 mzow�iwom0 ❑�¢Wzpw ww> mraWW iw� �w7 3aw�¢ > owwWy> 2 oww-owowr(7�N�m_W 0m�te oWo❑�wUJrD0ZO mWQ❑LL ❑wwxwo �N O-m�2�gz0r' 7w Waw gF 0O>-0r¢dW oci mcwi�-�Wz o�omW<o>W " ID >z r 0 m❑I m r >p m❑F y I_ w w w m m W Q W U 7 z.F a = w r N W O m o Z ¢W O Z ul U w w z¢ ❑Q Jwz �»wcn w> w ¢a�r�m °off oam�aoo'W wrxo�m=� zos �3rWzw owc� �¢w zc3wLL�Fow r¢m❑ o Z w m w Lr w w J w =w a z❑Q c�w r s x w D W F.w z F�w ❑o z>>m .-I rz i_z_ rz�r❑Q❑JLLzr o yN� wWNsa�oFowz aQLe c]�Q¢� Q3� csiatiw�N ywaW, �o'i�Z WQ=Qro�w w'w ¢- pr OJ UrNI D razJr°oo m- ❑ w � U W = U (7 uWj W m O w ❑ N r W ❑W >¢❑� ❑Wo�a a¢ma° oxw �W�parwLL� ❑ W¢zm W❑LL ¢w waooa❑ zWm WWI Fpww�'�oi 0 0 o w W O "-r❑w mw ❑- cam w WFrc ❑wz z oxJ ❑¢fir >-xQ1Dor w W Oo W= w W zm W wJzwz U W N �ZmL] z °LL U QZ°�?Le Q W xp�Q r� O zaF-C7>Ug ,wffi ❑ U1¢Z- ❑ "Z Ntm W w xo° wr w K ww d W�m Y�t wQ�za o �O o oW N m N�¢ apwwmxo�°3 77 z o Oayo w �mLL mLLo o?T wa 2 w ONZ Oo OW O rui a LL w m Z zQ -❑ -w w.1 E OWo0 U -C-Z<¢Ora7 OOLLQ wWU ❑¢y 0 0 Z= ForQa zx �~oo'o�i spa w¢zmm�z��z> o°��csi�¢W ���� owo°❑W zoo a�o� 07"zwzoO ¢W ztJ ¢W-w_Uzr-Lr ow az �o �Q�Nw �om�wi9�W�r LL x �LLU ax°Qww«N�w oNNQQZwx rrQ oFazQm w p¢ ❑�"❑ Wo�ozom Z❑m Q zo aFYmHQ= o Qo❑ LCr7 U]=F❑ ZQ CQ]❑ ¢Z_m(wll LLjm ¢OOU QLL(7Y U' WO W OwZ ZOm SQ U p¢wP Qw pa�W� �F�azwiQr w YW- wWz�s�w�oLL� wWJ�mo°¢ ��po wozaz� VFW Ywrw owooQ�oa ❑= a=�w� ❑-3-wNrz,r��J o: aN� o:��ao�wo¢oo' Wo�?o��'3 n��w wzwzw� wWo� 0~W� w o°C) 0 J cn� W w�JOOJ ❑ U U ¢ Omw�fy�W���U (7ap�J W w u�wwm OaUwUr m�y2 >oa-I �o-Nwg"'x om ?wrwQ xmJm wo'xrwmxLr om>tZ��dW z z =� zwD❑ amW>zp zc3 r� ¢aam��>rc zzJ w>orDz ozao zQa� ww¢In r o r❑ mmromSommSa D rMp , omL. ❑a m LLws�LL�_ ¢c7 c7p raaoao moan �pxa rwLLoxooS z o W o W J z z orc zx Fo aw J zz o ¢ ¢ 1O z x N ❑- D D U Z D N W U N I Q O ¢r m U Z z W w w>U a J r W ¢ F w=0= Z Z Z W r J W ❑F❑ Swm o�ppw❑p Zo x3J'� oWN zQxU-Wz-o zWwzw mipUz Z�wr2W-o>r �WW -mo oomJ J xpu1 r Dm wca WOz O>Yaw °❑ Ow w�LLo¢LL r S o'xrw ❑-m�OZpz q O �F ¢= O ¢,>o OW wQ¢ 16 w mZow W 2 O o 0Q70a o0w'aO r❑woJ pLLN i arm QoW o Zm J¢m °3 mw❑Z. aarog w a� ° >m Onr W aZr�° wpW ¢ 3Z mz mQ0 0- -o ao °D o a ohm a❑ aW Le WF W w (7 F Y O I O ❑Z Q x o W m O t WOZ srWZ 4riwo 7QLLUQrl o❑KWm NWQ mW~JK¢mp ZQD JU mZ Zo W 0>F m=Ni FU>xJU WQW❑pW=Y?Q pOr LLWS w ri10W¢W❑UW DU°Wo m� Z W a OwZ wx QwF Z¢ZQm dWO mOLLW Wm m ZQ oorLL m r N m Z ❑ ¢ ¢ �QpZ _ G 2 tKJ O U mOm ¢Z 2NU ¢r Z ❑ mWD U N WW OO W md ?Ka U Z ¢U' J>WQJmWWS J❑z¢Z Z[z�JZe SO0IQrwza O0wwaWuwSi dNZo�rO❑°Zuz¢az �❑>Wp rQWa ZwroO uJoa°i JLL LLrW Wd�w°WGFZ rmQ =Nmy LLLL°0 OWz W�U¢o mZ¢mmw K>(rzY wrr am¢jr pp Wo Za"' =Oo KcQ1 OKO ZuWm1 02 mW Nbp>w(Y WUJo'2SZo=WZ(Y❑OW WC'❑7 O 1KQ OZWIU Z ❑UZOpwam D wJO¢aO¢QW I, JFZ W Jr OQ Wm ¢ OZW wUw mOW i ZZo 0- 0 OZJNwLLdaaw Z r DO p YQ o ¢ wZr pr¢ Oo U r W CQ Z N ❑00 ?O F CIO o f I m0Z ❑ DLLpUwm Z D¢Z = Z: ❑O ❑ U � 7Z N �Wr ro o o . 0z ¢= a ON G� �z a I o�u w p > D ¢z oNW2 LLz Dp 1w o S S s S a j Z¢ro° LLz wo� � � D N Q❑-r ¢ r r r0 � ro Z. rZ�Qw=3LLo SZOZ/£/OL :031tlOdn sa saomJas 6uuaaui6u3 �o ?uawpodaa o a ewnN wei3 a3a�lsi�e3ae1 szse'esecse _ pb8L X1tlI1SIHH]Sfld'd0] OIL 31S'Ml93Nf13 HOH5'N 00 SVX31 N Z - -- o II S310N lVd3N3!D in lnnuiS z o I1S21Ho sn yaoo 1 A16� 213vywmd b6Z061 #103f021d A110 - _ SbIVd321 N011b'1S loll 301MAlIJ NO-83S30 F8 31W 'ON N2ISIA3N NO-83S30 A9 3100 'ON NOISIA3N � i NOON300tl 5202/S/8 N00N300tl ZOZ i 0� Z G L S u¢i w z o zi0 w z z Qw rpw a z mJaJa❑ mram 0LL w a �,� m> > oLLQ¢o¢ ow = p❑�cnM oa g m SF c� z I LL� zr0mao ww �ze> o FOW 3mwWwr o—�Q a�o�o aW <r W3f�� z zJ zw Fpw �Wa� �¢ .0100 rw > � ¢ ��'� ❑Q oft❑ � W U' O ¢ Z ¢NOWj 2 OrO�Z� JtON� Wp❑2m a U w = t m z c=ll o N O >U m F O W F p P U Q y0 O LL O W ° Z O O U'w m 0❑U m W_ F y W W[t wa o o z oo m o mow 5 Z Q�o <iawLL °o¢wa am LLa W �LL W (7 °m Z per❑ Z om�—O d°Um iqa W Zw Wa QmW 2w U CW❑7 ¢2 mZ❑ Cco 7 _at Z❑UZ� mO o ZWw(Y w WO w¢ Y2mY a Zc W<,U'J=Wa 0 w mO 0WQ (7 > W J r(7 a mF m �nx �¢ a m c� z F ❑ " �sg wJ za 0wzo aro� z J w� ._w ¢ i a Aso o Uzw w a N mwaZ No3 7o a0& ❑W ¢ W LL r m U Z-¢W S ❑ W a W Z m z m m JO - Z c a¢ A m w a Z O ¢ m m ¢ w p w m O O g (7 Q r W Z Q mZ Urm O� u=i a rtY° C0 �w�0wo ❑w W J� N°u1Km O w I w W W w K a U O D O W tt Z a tpiL a Q m LL o S o m W LL 0 Z p y w ❑p d Q 30 O °F m W U Z J Z O W W 4]F J m 2 N m❑Lr U O Q Z LL z 7 Q a x J O ? U Z ¢ W x 0 r m o N W O - zZ m W ° p "o < Z ZQ C] Z Ul7¢ p_pF-Oz m W w W rp❑°n G ❑ Z N ¢ O >Z m Quo [Y°U C0 » ]Fa W J � Fi3 W ¢ �Q trw UZ'wLLr.;ZOZOT� wa �w i c7 H ¢W 0U2m?Z❑[C 0�2�JLLC �mH� wmo�aJzQW>2 Y<o CO Uw ¢¢ cz�i mpoxYw¢ozJo�w❑Q° JJoOx aNaQr w ¢ z LLz Ww ¢ wp¢LL❑ a ,wm�.0 wo a m U LL a wJW oU❑ z¢w - W O m O J ❑W W� F m a Z O p p m c O ❑ m >O tt ¢ J > ~ m o r �_O w w N LL >Q Z m umi pw O ¢ w < a ~ W z U W m W ¢Z z C0 ¢ O 5 O Z a m< W ❑t=Il Q z �� rz o w�F c7� =W tt z o J�¢mLLW WW�KQ❑Z LLJm>a�0�(0 °U�° ❑ZK Z JW wLL rZQo°❑Qy wmKm I0' Z¢ JFIo�0WO o2tt mmO¢O�W0 Wp¢❑mOm WWm¢ f°�ui rO za d�S�?¢>OpZ �Fo F0fmI w¢�jW z❑> <¢< 0< m o ¢ � O r(mUQ7 c�Q�W O wUm OmaO ❑LLOIF o Q Q Z owULL p� 0< I ° J 4 a. C0 0 , ,I Z I l ❑ 0 O JQ0 0LLZ °OZ _mw�WfY f Q Z Z w O N J Q❑ w > Z m O m ¢ m a wm =LL�i Qaw� r ~ p`UZm wci Zw i QwYr¢y wr wQ z ¢w � i ZozUUw?r c�j mm�=¢t7 wZa 0Um m�m Zz w mz Wm mo QJ>K c c° mW OW <Z <m oF m w xxz r IzF o�a J OWw ZQ mOz w w pro < uWi Q z_ww w o w wr am mm z o 0—�¢�g ❑0¢ a am 0F� ° ❑w�oo3 z o�N ❑o woo <ow�o�?oir� pazcai - m¢ a� ie o a W w IJi W<Wa o W o O U a a Z m Q W w a W m Z W a (7❑ Z I U W F m CL °zio�z #975�aJcamZi�wZv¢pcWi�wzNcW7 swt¢�/l WmW(NWm7 mLY—�Ud— �zr Nwyo =rmF oWWo❑ zr d mUa�ow❑m-NoW ma 2 w>=°❑0g?�dwm w gZ wZ 0, w ❑ W NWm ¢❑Z2U z=W�mwa g °�❑❑Z�OO CZL Fo~ZaO Zrc�3 a�c❑NJ7 jW�0❑F�wupap(aWw)l OCZW0 o0ww[CzL7 q � a ¢ w.Z Q < 0w ° 00 y r U aa�W ¢ Q Q LL z zw_ m ¢ � o0 ¢ z oo o� x � Q115 O< o <� N>m wW m � ¢ KmWr U ¢W x a Q ¢o a _ ¢zLL✓w w ¢ w 71 a o ozwo Z<- m O <Z rjQJ < mO <aJ T, � ¢ZOo U¢ <O w< �rWzUoJ <-U mmm ¢z W z zm m o w SZOZ/£/OL :031tlOdn �ww.�mas m mxs drsnaµnxam-.vn� wax an wmi�n l—!AIAS buwaaauibu� �o 4uaw4aodar� 3 �� ECN SON3�9319S310N1V213N3,9SVX31=ws IISINH.j snddoi la Ally7t0210373 b'6Z06Z#Nd�1110ShcVd3d NOLVE Al 301MUDNO1dIa D A9 3_HO N011dl?J— AB 31bO£vInON300tl Nar sz/SO/so N N`�sln 9 wnaN3aav WBf 52/OL 2 X o _ �LL��oSG •zm CID U7 Koko x oS�ssL^o p a 54 _� N ti �6'oa o0 w o CW o $ �az� a - _ _ o o = a�oo3 0 ui _ - z 8o=C o�rW"o oit tw Li 0 oho G° s w 8 gc pz -o Rx �s3o8�Wa zG�� _ p - LL i x 8� Cd a8 oy`o'C o8<z e�# _- �s, 92 as ,..o SW - z W _ _o_ =w - - _ = o _ x O ® o ® o © ® � V Ott, Ej-, z� o gS og_ o RE. ��ov _ O18 & 90 rca rcz rcf �03 rco� "- "8 rc z� w a ktz k k o W NS r k6 as w w LL spa ws D k t LLJ 20N A = off`=� — s� R. dz _ 91oz VLAO mivaan _ 6usa�ti�as 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawa�odad a sy aaewnN waN aaaasi�aa'01,a3aoN1 l 111 3101s NLSE inOAF19 311S a wr o 0 USn, SVX31 ` a o IlSRIHJ S(1d210i to d110 LOOT#01 Sl NOIlV1S 1311 S380HS VNf19Vl o M SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3(11AA � N01-3— 19 3Ltl0 'ON NOISV3L NOIIEld— AA 3lW 'ON NOGIAM 9 WaaN3aM YIN 92/8D L on 9 WaaN3aatl Vl1V 4Z/OL 2 35,G2 XO21ddY gg<e 99 �3 s3aoNs INAOti q t t 1€1€ wl 4I - 1I14111 �_ IN FLO OZ Q LL i z z o Az - w � ® O � TI• �E Q E g d _ ° � a w =z = o IZ zpf ga = — — IZ ace c_.u. to —o-° °a—° - a Dm 34, °I � U SE I IH = _ r M p �A 3dma I _ Lj $ 3 Co U 3 ° I ' ° °CLoC w 0-oN. o ON ezaz/Z/OL 631tladn _ 'sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Job auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a31;193tl 3d01Y923d'93E'iOEY eue ro.b, - re e e � r� li l 111j5Ndto3 io 3l;o,,a3N 310N3 N SDX31 NVId N011110AM NI V «pw o IlSIdHJ S(1daoi to A110 LOOT#01 Sl NOIlV1S 1311 S3lIOHS VNf19Vl o M b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f0U AlIJ "I ~ =y SblVd3b NOliV1S 1311 3aIMAilD X W N01-3— F8 3Ltl0 'ON NOISINtl NOIlEld— A9 3lW 'ON NLSI. i Wfla N34aV W�V SZ 60 � w N J O O O O a C 6W622¢W ZWp � g � s � o a a O M W h O O y z _ M a w O LLJ O O J M — h C, C-) 0 W h 0 N h 9ZOZ/ZL/9 :631VOdn _ saDtijaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a30Wf1N Wtl3a3a315193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i0E m L li u5111-1 t)IOILU;0-3NI3HOH5 N SpX31 NVId NOIlIlOW34 a000 vl z V «pw o IlSRIH� S(1d210� to A110 LOOT#01 Sl NOIlV1S 1311 S3lIOHS VNf19Vl M b91N nld b6Z06Z #1J3f0U AlIJ of ~ =x SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAlI:) 'R w N01-3— 19 31tl0 'ON NOISINtl NOIIEld— AA 3lW 'ON NOGIA3tl W 0N300V W V SZ 60 � O Of J J Z 0' W 2 p Z I I � o Z o y E J D m Y J n D/ H SZOZ/6l/9 :631VOdn _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a315193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i0E u -- - wn ems. - e e e s� � dto3 i OIL 33;o,,a3N131015N SVX31 1N3W3�0l1dW1311S li 111jSN NIA o IlSRIH� S(1d210� to A110 LOOLq 01 Sl NOIlV1S loll S31JOHS VNf19Vl o M b91NWMd It V6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD �I SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAlI:) 'R w N01-3— 19 31tl0 'ON NOISINtl NOIIEld— AA 3lW 'ON NOGIA3tl W 0N300V W V SZ 60 I� z` > J N � z w a- DEH / I a I = Q I W Lli T.9,9z > zz wo L� o z J o � !r W �l 1 — _ m 1 VI Z w w� I t L-- —------ —— w � n VI —N 5 A._� u' —5 to—c3 Vi G //-J��_3 in /—�T [ ^S h a �Lj m Z O O w V O O OZ o f O V/l w L'/� Om Om Z a M > Z 3 0 n J _ N - O O O _ 0 _ G n — — ,N — pk _ h _ 10 fd r t.9-,ZZ SZOZ/6l/9 :631VOdf) _ saD,mjaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ V NVId1N3W3AOUdAl e ere s a exy a3ewnN waN°3a3si°3a 3aei 3"sz13sse'cee "°'s'a"'sN°t°,i°"3°;•° ° 31°N1 N $pX31 9NIOlIf19lVJIalJ3l3 2i01li31X3 ONV 2i000 NI z VIISIdHJ S(1daoi to A110 LOOT#OI Sl NOIIVIS 1311 S3NOHS VNf19Vl n° b91N nld b6Z06Z #1J3f02�d IklIJ NIA ~ "=y SblVd3b NOliV1S13113GIAAki NOIIdI3— 19 31tl0 'ON N01— NOIlEld— AA 3lW 'ON N051A3tl E maMuatl 92 60 L o 71 12 } J z �4 z Ld W Z o W _ m J � Q (n C] v Li CD o z o I W t m J Q U_ ch H C; U W 's W J 'v '"d j Q t /•w4 LJLI w o' j _ s CD ,:A � o � z U 82 - I J C� - m g, z r U I � z 1 I - — H W -- - e ' < = y U V W ue w SZOZ/6L/9 :631VOdn sea/1/e:mms a.n'imrs4uo\^.nws un•au A�am\a m smeN/s muwa ,� _ sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o luaw#.r�da� ��mrxwr,a mrs��" � ¢ _� - - Wd N0111106➢30 IV01810313 a 2 al xl a.iaN�suaum a.c 31s ama,m 3uoNs N SVX31 LOOT#01 Sl N011V1S ljll S32i0HS VN(lOV1 ,< ?¢ IISI8H3 Sndaoj Jo Aijo - wuW', F 213WWf17d == ME#Nd AID N J SUIVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA11D N s NOLLdl21�534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N -1-530 AB 3_W 'ON NOISIn3tl f-� r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l �d b a Ism c� LL Q 10 JR 1 M, Wirw :< n now A 19 US, to CEO \ _ �\w�„t's O _ w % oso — --_ — � z 3 a W aM c"n fm 01 N � - = -son w 3 WAR "S 3 Z - - <& h o o WHO 03z _„—u� _ x3= LLJ d MIKE NOR ilia! sh '< �c H � 000 —0 A 'xiit d Q W J a �• U W is r. ohm I � II I IF---S 7 II I II I II?�Y II-�„' I�gll 9n3 LUE a-c 6C� _ _ —1 r--__�c__—i W 1 —' I � �� �zo i a I His o a — U a U J E:1 EL 9lOZ/bl/£0�031tl4dn sea/�/e:mms a.n'imrs4uo\^.nws un•au A�am\a m smeN/s muwa ,� _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luaw#.r�da� ��mrxwr,a mrs��" � ¢ _� - - Wd N0111106➢30 IV01810313 a N f 2 a�xi a.IaN�suaum a.c 3is ama,Nl 3uoNs N S"31 LOO 01 Sl N011V1Sljll S32i0HS HN(IOVI ,< w� - ?¢ IISI8H3 Sndaoi Jo Aijo T# - wuW', F 213WWf17dqP == b6Z061#Nd A110 N __ J Salbd3N N0IlV1S1311301MA110 N s NOLLdl21�534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d d�530 AB 3_W 'ON NOISIn3tl f-� r nnwaav %BP SZLSa/w l �d b a Izm "Not 0 1 R _ ■ wm o &MEN"gin NN13 9NI_SIX3 �0 - x — — 03 m �n o J �u Z Nov U W c z p 3 z�n z o\ m¢ tt — —p _bar - y� �Y o b ono - z o �� — 2 N T e o r — —J _ � — m � � J En . 0 m : o mNw w9R21 o _ J p Z - 111 no — Ld _ J U O O = n 0 0oo s� ro 11 �H LLN m M a O a� C C O O O O O oLj _hi O U — 1 Q z� OT o� La Ll w 0 0 g �n3 X O 9a3 — X z O X —— cn Egg Now \33 33 \ m 3 Z _ \ O -- -----_ III J in Ili II II III II II Ili X � mQ liI ICI a li J. I� VI i Q F1 UN Gm c w w ~ 4 a d w�u 9laZ/bl/£0�a3ltladn sea/�/e:mms a.n'imrs4uo\^.nws un•au A�am\a m smeN/s muwa ,2 sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luaw#.r�da� ��mrxwr,a mrs��" � ¢ 901OH6N0I1110 "1 N.�NN,s,d�o3io�3,s-a�,a,N�3voNsN SVX31 VV3O1V01L110313 N � wp 2001#CISl NOI1V1Sljll S3HOHSVNnovi ,< ?¢ IISIaH3 Sndaoi Jo Aijo ` 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd AID N J Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N s NOLLdl21�534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d d�530 AB 3_W 'ON NOISIA3tl f-� r nnaN3aav %Bf SZ/SO/60 l b a mo irw�Wm s 34 � FS== wJ P�� W z LL 4 ® J W O � c so - / W \ � ' Of J J W U ) U f W U U W W O — W W w �a Wzs woo i U U W' ww== W. W Q — Z J tY Q W U_ z Z J � W — <�y g woc \ a 1 , a x o w U� A w z F- x LLJ $ U �$ J Q F— Flf c.0 W W z. Gc oZ. o �5 e�oz/roe/to aaivaan sea/�/e:mms a.n'imrs4uo\^.nws un•au A�am\a m smeN/s muwa ,2 _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luawl.r�da� ��mrxwr,a mrs��" � ¢ _� - - NC7d1N3W3A02idW1311S770Ri10373 a f 2 a�xi a.iaN�suaum a.c 3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N SVX31 LOOT#Cl Sl N011V1Sldll S32i0HS VN(IOVI ,< wo - ?¢ IlSI8H3 Snda0o Jo Aijo - w uW', F SgWtAMd qp VK061#Nd AID N J qp Salbd3N NOIlV1S1311301MA110 N s ,� NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d d�53O AB 3_W 'ON NOISIn3tl 11 r nnaraaav %BP SZLSaLfia l ;� b a z 1� it w _ h/ LLJ z z O F a Z CD - 3 F- U a Q'o 0. U ., nA3 u, a O o&gco Z. LLJ s� — z3sa w I z 6�4ozU Lj z ;o F- 3 3 w O O O O O O O off= z H 3 N N 3 w 13 r f i U W ' 3sa e�oz/roe/to:a3ivadn sea/�/e:mms a.n'imrs4uo\^.nws un•au A�am\a m smeN/s muwa ,2 sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luaw#.r�da� ��mrxwr,a mrs��" � ¢ _� SD`X31 Nb"id 9NI1H911 N� wp _ 2004 CI S1 NOUV1S?¢ 1311 S3HOHS VNnovi ,<IISIaH3 Sndaloo Jo Aijo SgWtAMd qp VK061#Nd AID J �F Salbd3N NOIlV1S1311301MA110 N s NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl f-� r nnaraaov "or SZ/Sa/fia l ;� b a z 1� J� Cl) z L J Y = � O - LL c U U — — F- z = ffi w a U 0. Z z zz z C) 000 w ¢ 0 Om i O1-7 L— 0 F—T7-1 00 nil -- �o II II \ _ . e�oz/roe/to aaivaan \ems»�\/�~ " / MF m SA3 agog m so_� ~ « \§ ) �zm37Am » 20 S]WtAMd qp Aqg#NdAID \2 \ \ ~ ( qlq a N@1 a 21]E7#O ) \ \ \ : , _ : oN g .__ _ * L \ �i ® w \ \ ) `E : a , oR myae: / @ : e : z J ; / / . :-- k z § maK: e Lu z j : ! z G of ) 3 00 0O S g \ ° � � � I } � \ . � � � �(\ ( � � g ® /. m± c \ �\ O . _ . / m SA3 agog m so_� ~ « \§ ) �zm37Am » 20 S]WtAMd qp Aqg#NdAID ~ (/ qlq a N011 a 21]E7#O : , _ : oN g .__ _ * L \ �i yy E yL I \ 9 \ / -I f § : B �- - z § } - e 2 : d Gz \ \ \ \\ d )\ \\ \ \ z > > > > >: : > _ ,, _ R / //\(D C S � \ƒO 0 / o � \ })( 0 0 (\ S \ , EEI S � \2 \\ /\ _\\ \ C : § ® bLLJ \ \ : > \ y ^ sea/�/e:mms a.n'imrs4uo\^.nws un•au A�am\a m smeN/s muwa ,2 sa�lnaas 5uuaa ul6 u3 �o luaw#.rNda� ��mrxwr,a mrs mau � ¢ f PQ e�x,w11 11�o3io�3sa�,a-NI3voNSN SVX31 SYVVtlOV103N17-3N07VO2I1O373 w O _ - 2001#01 Sl NOIl VlSljll S3HOHS VNnovi ,< ?'¢ IlSIaH3 Sndaoi Jo Aijo 213WWf17d == VK061#Nd AID N J H Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N s NOLLd1213534 AE 31W '"1 7ISIA3N -17 N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl r-I £NnON34ntl %Bf SZ�SO/eo 1 b a Ism c� __ irw�Wm 7 o Ld U Z — K Ln Ld o = 0 o Z0OU -----1 A 1 I I I I ' r—r ON I I I I I I � I � I dmnd 1J 1 I I I ' I I ' I I ' I I ' x 1 I tlJ bC � n j—L — { ON ' dmnd 1J 1 I I I I I I I I I I � tl1J bf ' Z'ON I dNld lilt I I � I I ' I I � I I IN'oN£ I n n dNnd 1Jl ' I I I I I � � � I I I I <� I dzr�Z � I 1 I I I I I ; I I I I ddivo I I i I 1 I - 1 �4 a dr,vooc �.. ' Q s z N z I I z O eloz/rol/to Naivadn s—!AIAS bwaaauibu�j o 4uaw4aodap "°'3 mm Inc szoz a anws szez deg I secs 9se SVX31 SDUVPV3H0S 7VJ18lJ3U T3MLL l i'led ndm�3 OIL-'-0-13HCHS N a - IlS21H7 w Sndaoa la All? L001#QISlN011V1S1jIlS380HSVN(19V7 on AIML VK06T#Nd AID J J _ ShcVd3d NOUV1S Al 3O1MA11D N NO1dI-D 19 N011dl?JJ534 AB 31b4 p r v38 n... var sz/so/so N Nl sl s s 3 za Lu 3 CD JLi _ o ` J w U a LL ` LL J 3 � O oo 0 o U U a z _ - o NIT I J C w rc a �E s x T o — a J E [f� 9loz bl/20:03ivadn sea/�/e:mms a.n'imrs4uo\^.nws un•au A�am\a m smeN/s muwa ,� sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� ��mrxwr,a mrs��" � ¢ o f PQ e�x,wNN�s,d�o3 o�3s a�,a=N�3voNs N SVX31 9OIIVW3HOS W01810313 IlSI8H3 Sndaoo )o Aijo 200401S1NOUV1S13nS3HOHSHNnovi w uW', F 213WWf17d qp V6Z06T#Nd A110 " N J 1` Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N s N0LLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON N0ISIA3N N0lld N3530 AB 3_W �'ON N0ISIA3tl f-� toy r nnar�aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l �1 b a Iz COOK! 01 SEN�IN8 0NLLNrD4Y n351\M NO Sb3N'tl3N ino]0 3o F cn ® _ a � o®�a QPAW �o LL m o a a i jW HAO Otl m SdJQ19 a o AHM371/M -_ --- lbNl%a31 � �pr ------ J 0 0 ❑ x - 3 L 3 3 3 O ❑ � Z a� o a � _ z �� ❑ �a� - U co z a L oo� J ® play d F— ALL BALL mF- L 7 J � U o (9F Tu7 0 00 0 k Ea 0 DDo O O TH � aL mL m 9�nZib�i£o:a31�dn sea/�/•:mms a.n'imrs4uo\^.nws un•au A�am\a m smeN/•muwa ,2 _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luaw#.r�da� ��mrxwr,a mrs��" � ¢ - - - 911V130�3NVd iod1N00 dand 2 SVX31 LOOT#Cl Sl N011V1Sldll S3dOHS VNnOVI ,< IISI8H3 Sndaoi Jo Aijo 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd AID N J H Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 to s NOLLd121— AE 31W '"1 7ISIn3N -17 N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIn3tl f-� r nnarr3aav I %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l b a Izm irw�N o s. U � O � z 3 wz z z z z z w o u u ci ci z z z z z z z z U U F ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a a a a 0 0 oz u u u u u u u u u u u u u u w G k o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 > > > > > > ] ] ¢ a a a a u u < ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ a a a a a p ry ry ry ry u u u u u ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ a a a z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z y a a a a > z z o o o o o z z z z O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Z Q U U U U < F F FU U U U U O O O O U U U U U U U 7. .77. 7 7 7 U U U U > > > > > > > > > > > > Y > Z Z Z W W W W N f9 X X X X K K K K K K K K 0 W W W W Q O O O U U U U U U U U 5 5 3 5 5 a a a a 5 5 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 — w O F F F F Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z R R R R R a a a Q R R R R R R R R R J v� v� v> > > > > > O O O O > > > > > > > > > a a a a a a a a 2 2 2 2 a a a a a a a a a z Q a 0 U o U C a W w 0 z z z z U p a w w w w rc o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q > > > > > > > > > > a a a a > Z u u u u a z w ti rn rn rn w cn w a s g a m m a > 0 0 0 0 R z z z z ci ci u u 2 O O O o > j z z z z z z z z 0 0 0 0 Q w < p tt K K a' a' 2 2 2 2 ry m v ry m c J O F d m m m a w z = a m m m d a a a d a a a w w w "��' "��' d a m m z z zz z z z zz zmz r m o a a 5 3 3 3 w ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ o 0 0 0 0 0 0 o b o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O F 1 Mlit�. - 411VIYlYIVIkIUrIVIVIr `-=- �1MN W zz Q N ... ., <... = o r „.. U) N o Z m — W - w w Ol a 9�nZib�i£o:a3��dn sea/�/e:mms a.n'imrs4uo\^.nws un•au A�am\a m smeN/s muwa ,2 _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luaw#.r�da� ��mrxwr,a mrs��" � ¢ _� - - - S37(103HOS 7 mio373 a 2 a�xi a.IaN�suaum a.c 3is ama,Nl 3uoNs N SVX31 T#LOO Cl Sl N011V1Sljll S32i0HS VN(IOVI ,< _= IISI8H3 Snda0o Jo Aijo w uW', F 213WtAMd qP VK061#Nd AID N J _ ShcVd3N NOLV1S 1311301MA1I N s NOLLdl21— AE 31W '"1 7ISIn3N Noli 77 AB 3_W �'oN tools-a r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l b a Izm rc ■_ wm ^� z it w N a o o o O o z < wall Y o f o a ¢ w w w w > � ¢ N Q a a a o ° j a x a x a x a x m m a a a N—U a V = - _ 4 0 J m oo > > > o F > > > > >O o >O > oo � K c U U rn d x W o O o O ❑ a ❑ o o � Q a o y u U In U Z a a o u� RcD LL s w d Z W 2 z U N ❑_ ❑ N v1 w w w pF N z z y m m m m ~ o 7 G Z K K Z K K w w w N W u3 w w ¢ z z z °z z i z z ¢ z w 7 � o Q l z V J w w w w F W z z z rc z w w w w 'da 'da 'da 'da 'da _ ] o w ~ u cn cxi u cxi u rc & rc & - � rc w ~ "li rc rc �' �' �' �' z z z z J o J z a a a a W w w H w w�w�w�w o o o 0 n o o d d d W w o o o o u U u U U y h y h h ¢ H �❑ � � z ❑ a o O ~ z +_Inn V m K V W d � J n w� w U � W W ❑ © V x ¢ m ¢ m ¢ Q m ¢ Cry (7 u a � 9 M U w w � S g � ❑ Y � e oz/ro/to oliwdn sea/�/e:mms a.n'imrs4uo\^.nws un•au A�am\a m smeN/s muwa ,2 sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luaw#.r�da� ��mrxwr,a mrs��" � ¢ NPa "1 wnN�s,d�o�io�3,3a�,a-N�3voNsN SVX31 SlIV1301V0R110313 �� � =F Il SIbH3 Sndaoi )o lll7 2004 Cl Sl N011V1S 1311 S3a0HS VNnovi w uW', F 213WWf17d == VK061#Nd AID N J Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N s NOLLd1213534 AE 31W '"1 7ISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl r nnaN3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l �d b a Izm `= irw=wm Ld ---------------- CD -+ z i m a v � N _m X W ____ 3 m H w zz 5¢o d M W �m 3 � lV3S SA3 � z QOfw zc n a N No ui Li -61 — — (SOS TV) — s z p N M0330 ONV n009 J nods 3noen @ y H G — z zro � wN� � 1J 9lOZ/bl/£0�031tlOdn sea/�/e:mms a.n'imrs4uo\^.nws un•au A�am\a m smeN/s muwa ,� m.� _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luaw#.r�da� ��mrxwr,a mrs��" � ¢ _� m =`3 pLL„y SVX31 wo - a�xi a.iaN�suaum a.c 3is ama,Ni 3uoNsN L001#01Sl NOI1V1S13n S3HOHSVN(1°JV7 ,< i1S18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ a qp R, Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 s NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W ON NOISIn3tl f-� r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l �d b a mo w o - _ - � Ll- w � a L Hl_ N 18, Nn ONnaNVH AN iiNn ONiSN C[ — z 0 I z I LU — J z = Q w — U � W � H Z Z � a — O Z W z 0 Z xr o N u - - z ---- - g_ - o -- z HE ----- wo z IIA Z. L4 �¢ 9lOZ/bl/£0�031tl4dn saoti�as 6uuaau16u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a w„� eiy a3ewnN waN a3a3lsi1—lscsa 9SE'csE 1f10AV1311S 3ls Yee e Nlo w^= m OIL 'o,,,a3111aoN 3S NOOs $DX31 £TOT#41 Sl NOIIVIS 1311 OV3H-1133diS S31d03d M IlSldHJ S(1daoi to A110 b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iDlFO�d loll SblVd3b NOliV1S 1311 3aIMAlID N0IIdI3— F8 3Ltl0 'ON NOISWtl NOIlEld— A9 3VW 'ON N-1A3d 8 WaaN3aM WN La/Go L on 9 WaaN3aft I vfw 4Z/aL a _ III tAT♦ E R — M 5 �, 5 X _ a u K z o Q z z �z - ,- o -- a8 wS 2 ;z oc till g FM FM O W J Q \ — 0o 1S 53�d036 I — SZOZ/b/6 :631VOd0 _ saDtijaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a exy aaewnN waN aaaasi�sa sael l szsa'sss'cse N o,io 131;n,,a3N 3aoNs N SV'X31 p Ntfld NOIlIlOW30 vl z i O = he £TOT#01 Sl NOIlV1S 1311 dV3H 11332115 S31d03d M _ IlSRIH� S(1d210� }o A110 b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU loll I� SblVd3b NOliV1S 1311 3GIAA I� NOIIdI 3— 19 3Ltl0 'ON N01— NOIlEld— 1 AA 3lW 'ON N051AM £ Wf1a N3aaVI WCV lq7 60 l nMi n) N .M M M 0 _ 0 ¢¢ U w N w w0 s N ry n 7VAI 1.. U) 0 —ro Q zz z W — Nz a NN a M N33NJ5 Y49 om M O ,I h t„9—,L 2 W J 2 h h � _ ap � h > w — W " 4 a F o O w — w - ELIO o a s a w m� o D F L i cJ Ci O u a 1 CD U. n r r M z M O — 9 C)a Cl)6 G 9ZOZ/£l/9 :O31tlOdn _ saDti P Q jaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo JuaLuDda a exy aaewnN waN aaaasi�sa saellszsasss'cse u 3 ,a3N3aNN SDX31 = IlS RH� S(d20� 11 3321S S31d03dM 1N3W3A0ldW1311S O toA110 vlz M b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f02�d IklIJ MIS =y SblVd3b NOliV1S 13I1 3GlAA ID NOIIdI 3— 19 3Ltl0 'ON N01— NOIlEld— AA 3lW 'ON N051AM £ Wf1a N3aaV lSZ 60 l W � h .hOl-.l.%0l-,l 4 O W � N " z Z - 0 « U w wo * Q LL ro W�a h W u` "') U�o NO z oU W Q 2 2 > -� - cn - `� « Z Q ", s M « r9-,9 rot-,f ,1 ;9 F9 F.Z-,l = t - Tl Po w_ n Z_ _ O m Z >F m z T.9 r9 - IN 17 O i - �r SZOZ/Ll/9 631tlOdn _.T. saDtijaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a eiy e3ewnN wuN a3e31;i93e 3e01I5Ysa NVId NOIl lOW3O 11004 • e e Nlo z o o o 3l;a,,a 3N 31015 N SVX31 _ p usiaH� sndao� }o dll.9 £TOT#dl Sl NOUV1S 1311 OV3H 11332115 S31d03d M b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f0U AlIJ I ~ °x SblVd3b N0IlV1S 1311 3(11AMA � 40NdItlO53O 19 3Ltl0 'ON NOISWtl 401lEItlO53O AA —0 ON NOGIAM £ WnQN3aaV I SZ 60 l L1 Z w = J � J 0 N o z a � Lnm 11 r; H �� LL I J 1 C C) �1 I 1 . Z J I z J � Q Fa V) zz � z *' oa f f f o0 ~ will � °° 0 J I� 9Z0Z/f L/9 6RV(Idfl saDtijaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a i 1,111jSn,o)IOILl3SVII 11131 15 1 S31n(13HJS d000 z o o o 3l;a,,a 3N 3aoNs N SDX31 _ p us1aHJ sndaoi }o tllg £TOT#dl Sl NOIlV1S llll OV3H-1133211S S]dOdo M €: - b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f02�d IklIJI ~ ¢ °x SblVd3b NOliV1S 1311 3GlAA N01-3— 19 3Ltl0 'ON NOISWtl NOIIEld— AA 3lW 'ON NOGIAM £ Wf1a N3aaV WCV SZ 60 l on 00o a t - _w55 cC 0 eu w = J Z a O Z (D ~ J z a ®o 0 � LLo - u) m N LL 10 J I }� > o > C) IF� Lu I I — LuQ �� rJ •®� w a w - z } � � oo ffI o mill m ®❑ w - In w • I-mm � R I - - R 9Z0Z/f L/9 :631tlddn INe _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o Iuaw#.r�da� >ma wwe msn w.we.0 m�m.w� v 's NV Id N011MY30 a " SVX31 w o g _ a�xi a.iaN�s�aum a.c..s.ma DHS N EIOI#01 S1 N011H1S l�Il OH3H11S S.31d03d ,`2 Lit 1108H3 Snwoj 40 A113 =a _50 213WWf17dqp == AME#Nd Ally N sww Sa1Vd3N NOLV1S 1311301MA11D NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl e nnarS& %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l �� a U'm g � �?=wm o M - _ o irwa n LL m o w� zm = oo ;� zs o yzza _ �2� �� � ,� 3 �� 5 0. o dz co U�zN� "' � _ a ?o ac "Asp Y& oz o a� a" 36 "zooh-" uj! a sih ,,,� � a k5 CD to gig M! coal ?w - - - N 5� goo 9p a No - - - 2 _ Ks _ Al ld; Z - - 11 - � z - to ISM _z.z .1, W 1 �z.+� -_- - -_ - - - oo�- TQ4 ass AT Z _is - ojw = o �� 3� ZO - �� z= _ 11 my N V oK 9L xo a Mg ^LJ w ry« _ Him'„ ;wLL s_ �w1 aw0s o O O O Hum 15 m g R O(D O w HUE o LLwR a2 Z wl 4- o F O a � w 0 ��vn�ais C) U w . w N z Z i e�oz/roe/to aaivaan sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.rt7da0 >ma wwe msn w.we.0 m�m.w� io ¢ _ W w� SOlOHd N011170UUCI a d' a w o .°w� ecxi wiaN�saum a cats ama-m auoNs N SD`X31 0 0401 Sl NOUV1S 1311 OV3H 113 S.31d03d e IISI8H3 Sndaoi J� lll� =a wH ; Wu _ 213WWf17d == V6Z061#Nd AID N sww Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIn3tl r nnaN3aov "or S Sa/eo l (\J a 1 — a ��w r� a � k ,., w P e x a W� a a • O O a O O g CL �\� IL � \ Of U \ \ U w \ \ w J � J W \ \ W S \ LO EE I p _ - O J Q O IFuur. • W J W O O O O } a- J ` U_ U U U Ld W J J W W eioz/roi/to aaivaan sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� >ma wwe msn w.we.0 m�m.w io ¢ _ ww, Nb'1d1N3dV3A021d4V1311S a w o __ .°w� ecxi wiaN�saum i a cats ama-m auoNs N sD`X31 EIOI#DI Sl NOI1H1S 1311 OV3H11S S.31d03d 1108H3 snwoj Jo Aijo 213WWf17dqp == VKOK#Nd 20 N s sww SUIVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIn3tl r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l �d a z m j9 _ irw��m 4"S is RUN Z _ d �d 12 NMI 1 A: mow -all a O '� — m8 Wig O U O O O O O O w O G O v(D i cD\ a Z 1 N LLI/ �c4 gw rc� O s� � � 3 E pit 3 0 O SIR,< o o � W W m �a �N--------------- mO Z 9lOZ/bl/£0 031tl4dn sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� >ma wwe msn w.we.0 m�m.w� io ¢ _ w w, 9NOUV,1JU 9 N011039 d' a w o .°w� ecxi wiaN�saum l a cats ama=m auoNs N SD`X31 00401 Sl NOUV1S1:111 OV3H 113 S.3ldO3d IISI8H3 Sndaoj Jo Aijo =a Wu _ 213WWf17dqp == VK061#Nd AID w N SalVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLd1213534 AE 31W '"1 717,3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON t4 I 1 3tl r nnaraaav "or SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a z 'a Q t ED72 U S • U 4 a _ Z O w �w H P& 0 LUI 000 000 00 0 000 o cn a o' c� • �m 2 i o ° o� 3LL , 7 U • W °= J LLJ O CJ n v J u 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn _ - _ S«az ,�� r = _ m:=_, , A3 lez m o w as a \ } ƒ ` gzm37Am » 20 s / m �/ \ \ EgWtAMd •_ Aqg#NdAID \\ \ : 2 - qlq a N011 a 21]E7#O _ ,tl-l= g .__ _ * \ �i ( 22 = e > ® + © r 3 0 ) / @ \ % 5 ® < © @ % < 2 / \ m / j / e y \ \ \ y J § \ q\ q - � F I \ \ \ } \ / k \\ o sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� >ma wwe�asn w.we.0 SJI17W3H�S o ��n ¢ � d 3a N . ecxi saum i a cats ama-m auoNs N OOSSD`X31 EIOI#DI Sl N01171S 1311073H11S S.31d03d Lit IlSI8H3 Sndaoi J Allo o =o �N Wu 213WWf17d == V6Z061#Nd AID N SalVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W 'oN NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W oN tl-1 3tl r nnaraaov "or SZ/Sa/eo l (\J a z 'a Z ■—� M - _ p'd U HE J ifFl-ILnl-' �y � W W9 9 9J a c 0 x a Q u J (+l S a z 0 a L j j a� 3 a5_ a5� d 9laZ/bl/£0 aliwdn sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o auaw#.r�da� >ma wwe msn w.we.0 mwm rn.wa io a = ww, SlIY130l3NYdY0b�S a � d' a w o __ .°w� ecxi wiaN�saum i a cats ama-m auoNs N SD`X31 EIOI#DI Sl NOI1H1Sl�llOV3H11S S.3-Id03d Lit IlSI8H3 Sndaoi J Allo o a =a �N w - 213WWf17d == V6Z061#Nd AID N ='v Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOI7In3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOI 1— r nnaraaav "or SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a z 'a Q o o OJ 3 3 C] z > > c 0 a s a UU UU a a O U F F U Z o < < chi chi O O a a chi chi 5 3 3 5 u chi chi u a a s rc a a a a. z d d z z x o o z z ° x x x x z z z z 5 d N F F o o u u u o o z u u u u o o o o 0 3 3 ti w w O O 3 3 w w y 3 3 3 3 0 V > > o > > > > n O O O o > > > > a fn a a a a o o ¢ ¢ a a a a Q 0. Q w H LL F � w O a a W F o 0 o a z N u a U z z o o w Lu Lu > > a s LL > J a a d U . J o o z z w w 0 w w W w O O w . . > > w w n O O U U d w o o F u! _ - N - N M O O O O O O O O O O O O O G z z LL J z z z z z z z J J z z z z J J o w w w w O a a a a o O w o a Q J F O H W AL Q a Y �a _ R. O a U a J W a m ® a a o - La N m W z o - Zdz a�a cam W a 9lOZ/bl/£0 a31tl4dn 11VI30�_\owo dand \ _ _ _ m:=_, , SA3 lez m o w as a \ } ƒ ` gz8H37Am » 20 s / m �]W�d •_qp Aqg#k& Ilo 2 - qlq a N011 a 213E7#O _ : ,717_ : ,t41= g .__ _ * L \ �i / cL _ r ,(: \ ® ` I IVNIVI�{� , q ( E ( Ej _ \ _ Ej ±_ � ° / ` ( 2 EL ij § (()Pole O/� (D j (D� (()Hole # (D §�d ) | 2} 21 sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da3 >ma wwe aasn w.we.0 33ino3HJS d'3a v . w o .°w� ecxi a_iaN�saum a cats ama=m auoNs N sD`X31 EIOI#DI Sl NOI1H1S 1HIl OV3H11S S.31d03d IISI8H3 sndaoi Jo lllo =a Wu _ 213WWf17d qp V6Z061#Nd AID N SalVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W '"1 717,3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'oN t4-1 3tl r nnaraaov "or SZ/So/eo l (\J a z 'a Q t 72 J� V 0 a 0. w O z Z 4 ui U � O � 2 2 O z y W � Q Z U 0 o ¢ U y Z w J N W W W W W W W Z w W F > > O O O O O J O U N V (D tp O N Q a a a d a a F j ¢ a > w > > > > > > o O < o > W ni d' oN h y b in LU c7 w �j�j w co co co � LL W �J W z ¢ a v 3 J o y s N w M Q w 0 u u z W z z w = U U a a a 2 3 J U ¢� w w W N N Cj y m w w U o 0 o N > w o V) � u u ix Q O Y U M F c\jC � m O O 7 W m F a X o p LL � w w p w m Y U U o o o ~ Z o M M M V w U o a n L J x z w 0 > a xN_c � < U) U) N w d M N o K N N N N N N Y Y W Q Y w J a a Y F a Q m U Q m U J U 0 N N w Z W W IL ¢ 4 N O O O O O O Wd O wW ZW ZWZ W W Q Q Q Y N N N N N N > > > m M o z o 0 o S Z o o o z O O o U a O a a J ¢ ¢ ¢ J O W O ON o o o U a C27 N J (O N N Q V l0 rc p w = W Ld fn m > w 'm a Z a ? ¢ o0 o z j Q/� M O W W w o 0 0 lw LL o� u) u) rn W Z ¢ p O p a a a a a a Q _ d d d > ~ = w F F U w J O O o o o o J > W w w p o z rc w rc rc w o U t] t] p (n U N w O o a o o o o o o a � O O O 5 w > w U a a a a a a oco o J J J w N 7 cQ N - o G O Y W N N N F N p W o0 2 w Z Q z p H e�oz/roe/to aaivaan sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� >ma wwe�asn w.we.0 m� SlIY130 0 ��n ¢ � C. _ ; =F ecx�wau�s,aum o cis ama-N�3 oNs N SVX31 aW Il SIbH3 sndaoo )0 All7 EIOI#aI Sl N011H1S 1311OH3H11S S.31d03d =a - 213WtAMd qp VK061#Nd AID N s SalVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLd1213534 AE 31W '"1 717,3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON t4-1 3tl r nnaraaav "or SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a z 'a Q / - O z z w\ AS (n aP mho W Ld 0 -t3s 5�3 �3s sO — 3a N �� U 4� z� — d FCD LU N Z U F Q 71. _ F a J8 fl fl G 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn _j._6u3 } ____ e : _ :OIL_0 1111 A s x! JGm±s :o ; - - ° gse� sd m g �Ia magmGaana,agl�,*ate, \® _ \\ \ \ d Z A3MM V6ZO I #1]f Ud O . ~ - S Id]u N OIl 1 1 m ]OIM�1D a ; § \ f � . ; �?« . |� c | ; j ^ 7 ` ® " fib ® T > ° \ c g / . _ - � } \ U- /d\ vd: /9Ra6» ^2b: . » \ / \ / ( / \ ) y/ w y Sy222: %»y< ;}: } : :_:\ : -- / � / // . r-- 7=} - _ \ . z 40 � yy \ 4M & . \\- z� / . . . . � . � = a . g � / ; $ § o • - � - - - © > } � \ � } _ [ !� } - 4 } : - «9w g - d} GZOZ /Z/O. » _ saDtijaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdad a £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a31;193tl 3d01 9i3d'93E'i0E„ [V - s<«��;�aN�sNdto3lOILUS a,.,a3111310N3 N SD'X31 NVId N01111OW30 NI O = p a bTOT#Y 41 Sl N011V1S llll dV3H-1133a15 3�N321MV1 0 M v IlSldHJ Sndaoi Jo A110 b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAilD NOIIdI 3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISINtl N0IlE1tlO531 A9 3lW 'ON N-1- 2 MUN30OV WV SZ 60 l _W O ;N W h W_ U) N 3 W - Z W Z U — NNNO a W Z � W 2� J W w — O w , w — J. o �3 Z 2 = H v O — r9 C)a C)e'D, 9ZOZ/OL/9 :631VOdf) sa�ti�as 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawaxodad _ µn6'ryeu'b, _ Ye er e ¢ — y£iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a31;193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i0E m o3iOILUS01,a3N13EION3N SpX31 NVIdNOIlIlOW302i000 NIz i O :p; bLOL#41 Sl N0IlV1S 1311 OV3H 1 133 4115 3JN311MV1 M V _ `YLw¢ I-LSldHJ Sndaoi Jo A110 113M i'ld V6Z06Z #iD]FOU loll I� SblVd3b NOliV1S 1311 3aIMAlID �j NOIIdI 3— F8 3Ltl0 'ON NOISINtl NOIlEld M A9 3lW 'ON N-1- 2 MUN30uv n7v SZ 60 l ? J Z W O 1 c5 Z o p o J _ m Z - - O H LL F- Ln 1'1 J u z J J J J Q Q W W H cn W \�u C) N r C) N —j o _j o Z Z O O H H Cf) cn L~i L~i 9ZOZ/£L/9 :631tlddn _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdad a LliUearol-I OIL US 1N3W3AOadW13115 SVX31 Vi?YW IlSRIH� Snd210� Jo A110 bTOTri 41 Sl NOIlV1S loll dV3H 1133a15 3�N321MV1 A3MMdb6Z06Z #1J3f0U IklIJ �I ~ a= SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAil N01-3— 19 3Ltl0 'ON NOISWtl NOIIEld— AA 3lW 'ON NOGIA3tl F MUN30aV WV SZ 60 l .ion-d.N,] N �) M M _W h ,h z g _ _0 r w O „ Lj > N o cf) . LLJ .1c 88 N .. z - ` ro Ln J z z .. a z W - j - h z N33d]5� M I h _ T.9-,Zl t.9-,L - - FFO-,l i„0-,[ - - n _ - o - W 11 zot5 Z C H C� W M M U) N Q l o Q I � D C 0 F - � w i9 _ 1 Z C 6) C, C C�D C, Szaz/LLA :631b'ddn _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawa�odad a £iy a3AWf1N WNN a3a31;193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i0E u� -- - wn� ems. - e e e s � it1 - _ s<«��;�aN�sNdto�iOIL 33;a,.,a3N�3aoNsN SD'X31 S31n(13H7SU000 �vl i0 bTOL#41 Sl NOIlV151311 aV3H-il332llS 3JN3HMVl uSldHJ sndaoo }o A110 b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f02�d AlIJ =y SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3GlMAilD NOII 1-30 F8 31tl0 'ON Wl— NO1Wld 530 A9 'ON N-113d F Wfla N30aV W�V ; 60 l — ` t � \�tr - ' z / LU ZZ w N ELI � Q Z o W ii m =— O z Q --- — - O K H F- En - z 0 0 J lilpi"i,iV I � ` iil z ry w F- w z o z z m Z O L F- t J I - J J Q Z W - H Vl - W 0 d u D m m o -- _ - _- ^ zoo i J Y " 9Z0Z/£L/9 :631tlddn sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o Iuaw#.r�da� Nl�aanwum�s , o ¢ - - NY-Id N011MY30 a SVX31 � __ ,ae ����F ecxi wiaN�s�aumia.cais ama-m auoNSN 6101#OISl N011V1S1jn OV3H11S 3,�N3tJM b'l � IISI8H3 Sndaoj Jo A113 _ F= SgWtAMd == V6M6T#Nd AN o N Salb'd3N N0IlV1S 1311301MA11) � N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl � r nnwaav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l b Jil s a Ism S a- N - - _ o irwa n A� F��= _=No - _ M - - _ Jo a _ � w in 65 - sync 211 gin L _ - Q _OR! -1 w0w do - cn o Ks --- - n2 A - LL z lLE yz -" ���, zs Q. OW — =r+ z 5 19 Z _jaw = z _ - J o8 - 1LLdoK zC'S0 oL�a� �`n 3 - oaw � t Oi � o L+� �,,.,� ��� u �, WHO M �a 11�`3z zo all � - - O w O G O OU O O~ O w a ¢ =o to �LL -- ---------- ------------LL ------------------------- ----------, 1 �w �o No 5 g z 0 4 i & \ Q i _o 0 w ----t7 r --------------------------------------------------- I h IIIII J NTdM301S U i W � T W x s ®Z e�oz/roe/to aaivaan ,o sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� Nl�aan�wum�s�, o � ¢ _� SO.LOHd N0LLOOPV30 a c = da 'g°aF e x,waN s,d o, o 3,s a,a-N 3voNs N SVX31 N64 OI Sl N0UV1S1jn OV3H11S 3,ON3HA4VI =u1 I1S18H3 Snciaoi 40 A11.3 213WtAMdqp == VK061#Nd All) o N Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N o NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W 'oN NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'oN NOISIA3tl r nnaraaov "or SZ/Sa/w l �� b s ir¢�Wm o =N�mn Z 2 - o Ld Y a Z ffi z� a 0. O LL & 0 gill? - U U L LI J - 0 = a k 0 p = W 6 J U a . tl' U W J Q U 0 W — C J — J Q U_ J 0 2 a\ w 0 ��� w 0 e e�oz/roe/to aaivaan sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da0 Nl�aan�.a.w u m�mu.0 io ¢ J NVld1N3dV3A021d4V1311S Fe x,waN s,d o, o 3,s a,a-N 3voNs N SVX31 w0 _ w N6401 S1N011V1S1jIl OV3H 11S 3JN3HM VI IISI8H3 Snciaoi 40 A113 213WtAMdqp == VK061#Nd All) o N Sa1Vd3N N011V1S1311301MA110 N o NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl r nnaN3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l �� b s a Ism S a- J a5ia71irw�N n wag W W - - - - Se 0 On¢— 00 U w - U o O `^^/ Ul U cD S / Z d AL ci K 1 1 O \J Y3 = J3 �o w way o N z ow o g - \ wl USR I g I of uj O g �m �= I I o I OI I I ti I I I I ". I �'I � o m W W I I I I --------o�--------- o- ------------------------------------------------=z--------� -w =w I Z 9�nZib�i£o:a3��dn sa�inaag 6uuaaul6 u3 �o luaw�.r�dap �������N01103S � ��� ¢ � ay g4a=F ex,N_nN ,do,lo 3,sa,a=N3voNSN SVX31 v . w0 _ w N6401 S1N011V1S1jn OV3H 11S 3,ON38M VI =w _, ils18H3 sndaoo 40 Aiio 213WtAMdqp == VK061#Nd All) o N Sa1Vd3N N011V1S1311301MA110 N o N0LLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON N0ISIA3N N0lld N3530 AB 3_W �'ON N0ISIA3tl r nnaraaav "or SZ/Sa/w l �d b s a Ism S ua- ■ it w 3 v 42s uj 74 s 0au n a = z u it — 1 �z W o9 0 w rs a zg Ld w F- �� o soEn a a o r �� � O 000 00 o O� OOOuw o Ld LLJ s g a` �w L__J 66 H 0 v e I a J Li ZL Ugo V Q 11 9l0Z/bl/£0�a31tl4dn _ `-- _+\ — / \§ \ : . m:=_, , SA3 moz;m w s� e \ �zm37Am » 20 \jm E]Wdqp Aqg#k& Ilo \2 \ \ ^ §\ qlq a N011 a 213E7#O ) \ \ \ N : , _ 7= : oN 2 .__ _ * \ { \ / ® 2 / 2 / \ ! [ � \ cL \ � /------- � e, < ƒ k | �~ Li § _ / IK o ,o_ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da0 Po��Wawa S0117W3HOS o gn co -_n da g4a=F e x,wnN ,d o, 0 3,s a,a-N 3voNs NOOSSDX31 N . N6401 S1N011V1S1jn OV3H11S 3JN3HM7l I1S18H3 Snciaoi 40 A11.3 213WtAMdqp == VK061#Nd All) o N ° = Sa1Vd3N NO11V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W 'oN NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'oN NOISIA3tl r nnaraaov "or SZ/Sa/w l �d b s a Ism 72 w 3 a c T Q u QJQ i S rrr � rrr d a = � d 0 of n J I`o O Z tL—o d Z ffi j j Q H J 5 3 a� 3 a5_ a5� d 9laZ/bl/£0 aliwdn sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o luawl.r�da0 Nl�aan�wum�s�, o � ¢ _� 911V130 UNVd V0703 a g4a=,c e x,waN ,d o, 0 3,s a,a-N 3voNs N SVX31 N6401 S1NOUV1S1jn OV3H 11S 3,ON38M VI IISI8H3 Sndaoi 40 lll3 _ 213WtAMdqp == VK061#Nd All) o N Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N o NOLLd1211530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W ON NOISIA3tl r nna av "or SZ/Sa/fia l �d b s a Ism S ua- ■ it w O S( J J _ o a a Q d F F y y F W ¢ F F ¢ ¢ rc Q , R R b 6 u x x zo b 6 b 6 1 6 N 3 U U U U U U U U U U d g S( < S( Q W W a g w w a g rc a g g g U 9n Q 0. LLI Q 2 a H Z O W a o o a U ¢ ZLLI u z z z ¢ a a Z Z O O O Z Z z z z z z z ❑ z 0 0 z Y Z Z a ❑ _ _ w a } O F O Ld J Z Y g Re O S QJQ U J � Z a F a o 0 — O owz o 5w w �w L —1 ¢ m a Viz= _ 4c z� W d� macs¢ cam 2 w t9 f 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da0 Nl�aan�.a.w�u m�mu.0 io ¢ J 911V130-13NVd iod1N00 dand ex ay g4 ,waNd o, , 0 3,s a,a=N 3voNs N 00 a='c SDX31 N6401 S1N011V1S1jIl OV3H 11S 3,ON38M VI IISI8H3 Sndaoi 40 lll3 — `'` 213WtAMdqp == VK061#Nd All)Ax o N Sa1Vd3N N011V1S1311301MA110 N o NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl r nnaraaav "or SZ/Sa/w l �d b s a Ism S ua- ■ it w 72 3 v ds ® � a saea1d3AOslo a n /saolTrlNOo ,vNiwa3i .YM3d/lM 5 o O e ❑ e r 3 LL _ 3 O O ❑ 3 Z O 0 0 J W 2 if J r� Z C) U d oLI 6 � 0 �o �o 0 o z O �O o O D � s z� w� zz c 00 �w 0 0 w� NN Z �4 qa s& W iY ¢a 2 W � � � N slat/bl/£0 aliwdn ,o_ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da3 Po��Wawa 33ino3HJS o gn ¢ OD -_n da g4a=F e x,wnN ,d o, 0 3,s a,a=N 3voNs NOOSSDX31 N . w0 _ w 6101#OISl N011V1S1jIl OV3H11S 3,7N3aM b'l 213WtAMdqp == VK061#Nd All) o N ° = Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl r nnaraaav "or SZ/Sa/w l �d b s a Ism S ua- ■ it w t 72 3 v T LL Lu K Q Q J U U Q O z Z c 7 z J F Z w w w w w w z w w w w Y W o 05 w N 0 0 0 O 0 0 J O O J u) 0 0 ~ 7 W ro ro ro ro m W N O. ¢ N U` O x O O O O O O w N O W Iw n W J co co J v D z a a a W U � CO) p O O N 9 w it it xk w z 3 r N ¢] O N z Q U U w y V 7 W a w 0 0 Z v v v = v 3 p w U a w w w F w w Q W W z W. F- H ° o o W M M M O_ O_ N_ X Q w z W 3 i LL w w w > o IL ~ Jr~ J Q o F = LU m a _ o 5 CO) W J U U ¢ u w ca Y U U O W O wth U o t w > U 0_ D OJ W W W W 2 H Q W J O a a U " zQ ZQ ZQ U ¢ a a a ¢ ¢ a U J O z z w ae a a z w a a a o Q Y o 0 0 0 0 0 ~ p O Q z > j w o o o O u) Uyd a OU _ == ¢Q- WN Y Z¢U mxam aoN moN UaN ¢ U U U H D w d ; ; ;wF QN moN U0N 0 0 0 0 w d V N O O O O O O N O O _ z w z z z z J w m > O °o 0 a a a a a a o o m W = �z a m u Q p a Z Ir z w of (r th of of of w U b �, Q `� ai w w F �' ~ Z z0 Q rG rG Q W a U O = = S = a N a n u a o o o o o o a a a o a > a x LL W U y U U U U U U > W w c7 Qo p > U 0_ o U p o o . U J O > > > > > > o O o m N u) ¢ x Z� o Qa o N f V V V V N V ¢ O > N N N N O Z Q O 3 ZN c+, v �n co n co rn � ¢ F 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da0 Po��nawu SIIYl30 0 gn OOS SDX31 e�x1 1�NN1s,d�o1 o.�3u a�,a=NI 3voNs N _ Il SIbH3 sndaoo 40 ADDLU 6101#OISl N011V1S1jIl OV3H11S 3�N3aMb � � � 213WtAMdqp == VK061#Nd All) o N Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W 'oN NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'oN NOISIA3tl r nnaraaov "or SZ/Sa/w l �� b s a Ism S ua- ■ it w Q r5 V W .«. Lj - WE SA3 - N wJ/ o� z� - - g? cn za W N Cl- 0- ZD cn _ O J z }d II III sr e�oz/roe/to aaivaan _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Jo JuaLuPDdaQ a fLd a39WON WNNa3a31s193a 3W1 92E3101LSE n o � - s1«��;�aN,sN�to,io��31;'a,,,a3N�3aoNs N $p'X31 1f10AVl 3115�JNIlSIX3 NI z `� NFp? o IlSRIH� S(1d210� to dll� SLOT#41 Sl NOIlV1S 1311 OV3H-1 A311V SU3dOOJ o M =a A3 V6Z06Z #1D3fOdd kill SblVd3b NOliV1S 1311 3(11AA I� 'R w N01-3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISWtl NOILAmn 3O A9 3lW 'ON NOGIAM � virluN_OCJV AlV 57 60 6 zZ F i F m �z z Tim w G LL 4 - 17 r - ui 5 7I I i 0 o i E� tz wE\ I LLJ u� D �_� aD /J� I •1 cn .W p o w G (' g �ry Ln / \s, \ X W EM ff y F.t ,, 4� 4� •�FM.�e O p D . . - �.FX FMP • ! a 1q m gyp\ a 9ZOZ/6l/9 :631VIldf) _ 'e sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Joe auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a31;193tl 3d01Y9i3d�93E'i9EY eu ro.b, - re e � z= NFp? « ;aNSNdo, 3aoNSNof SVX31 NVldN01111OW30 l A 3llV Sl3dOOJoU IISIdHJ S(daoi to A110 SLOT#(11 Sl NOIVIS Idll 0V3H Iz M =a Fa` €'y �� V6Z06Z #1D3fOdd kilD =y SblVd3b NOliV1S13113aIAAki NOIIdI 3— F8 31tl0 'ON N01— NOIlEld— A9 3lW 'ON N051AM HrIUN_Uuv AlV 57 60 Q w Z Lr..l cn Z U A 7�� w z O \ F— LLJ � - _ w s (n R W L-,Ll o � � aw w > N ►O o o zo � ao m A A Q o _ (' p a1}11 Z z x x w 9ZOZ/OZ/9 :631VIldn _ M sa�ti�as 6uuaau�bu3 �o•auawa�odad a £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a31;193tl 3d01 9i3d'93E'i0E m o lOIL 3l;0111311 31015 N SpX31 1f10Xtll 3115 03SOd0lld vl z o IlSldHJ S(1daoi to A110 SLOL#41 Sl NOIltl1S 1311 Otl3H l A3lltl S213dOOJ o M b9MMd V6Z06Z #1D3fOdd kilD ~ SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAi D N0IIdI3— F8 3Ltl0 'ON NOISINtl NOIlEld— A9 3lW 'ON N-113d L: HrIUN_Uuv Wlv iqZ 60 ® \ 2 2 — Iffil, W � � N Z W a, ZW { o p e as U ❑❑ \a LdWa o n Jw w w \ J U) S <aN Wo a > o� a Iwo 003H -,.3��tl 5,2i3d00� J - a wry \ o \ 91 _ LOC LOC LOC LOOl C � /0 �., \ a ss EX o /J \ o Li 11 -N1W�N-s :�I \ cn O I Ta a = w w EM D 9ZOZ/OZ/9 :631VOdn sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdad - ft i 1,111N WNN°3a OIL U 3W1 9113101L9E Nl x "°'1s.a"'sN°t°,i°"3°;°''°3""'a°NSN $pX31 W31SASd0119A13 1N3W3AO'ddW131lS zo p ° uSldHJ Sndaoi Jo A110 SLOL#41 Sl N011b'1S 1311 CIV3H-1 A3llb'S'd3dOOD 0 M SblVd3b NOIld1S13113aIAAki NOIIdI 3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISWtl NOIlEld— A9 11 IN N05113d � HrIUN_Uuv WlV 5Z 60 6 m p � ° IIIIII W a 1=11 J >> III —I m z III wm �� w � IIIIII J o �� IIIIII >> N J jQ = IIIIII > J> o z IIIIII �� W > 9 II II I U)u > ko ° IIIIII J IIII ii II p 8 �z41 W 74== wt - p a a IIIIII -IIIII Wa _I a w (IIII m > o (IIII �o _ _ W a o ° IIIIII F W U � a W wC Q a� v � Z Q p ° W a 6 4 W� o >a w >W a �p a F~ o Of_ o J ° wp p D W z ° �J Q J v J Li ° t o P p F a WLd H p ° oe 9ZOZ/OZ/9 :631VIldf) saDtijaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdad ftda39W°N WNN°3a315193a 30 NI 310151 N - "°'s.aN,s°°t°,i°"3°;'°^'°3""'a°NsN $pX31 S310NaNySl1b134NOIlt11S1jll03SOIJOU i� m V Ypw¢ uS1aHJ sndaoo }o A110 SLOL#41 Sl N011b1S 1311 Ob3H l A3llb Sb3d00� =a a € : _ �� V6Z06Z #iD]FOU AM SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAi N01-3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISWtl NOIIEld— A9 3lW 'ON NOGIAM L: HrIUN_Uuv WlV 57 60 6 GLLo _- _ pF - - - _ - w �3 ss) css� 551A,� z s <59 5S SS sf - "s,ss s, a e,� x�a O \ z Z\: g 9ZOZ/OZ/9 631VIldn sa�inaa5 6uiaaauibu3 fo auaw}mda4 .� ya3aw Nwuuo3a3ul�a3ds is sa9sEz9E M31A Nb'ld a _ _ oea�xitsslarosnauwlocc3is'w�s3NnsaoNsNaos SVX31 F o ILSIaHJ sndboo }o AII� N0IlV1S 13 1 A311V S,l13d003 o N a _ 213WWfrld _= V6Z06Z #i3YOU AiD _¢ w S211b'd321 N011b'1S loll 301MAlIJ NOLdIE10530 AB 31�01 ON N015IA3tl NOLdIi-1 18 3LH0 'ON NOISI— f N SZOZ/S�fi x \J 4 \ \ \ b AhL V \ „9-,Z „9-,Z \ z \ o \ I � \ a \ o \ y \ L \ U z ` / o N rV, J w * ILaLo N L O >< > \`�— yam✓ Z w w aL) a> W f \\ z o> FU � ¢ N W a 1 z > N J ` o� in — L — ; — I W J } ¢W Jd > Ld0- > w3 N \ M _ U F .0 z �s H z N O Z Z C Z 00 U U W I U uzi A-1 ZA D D D a a a D a 6 GzWUs-23id23n .a aw Nwu o3a3sl�a3ds iszsa9sEz9E MIIA NOUAS a N _ _ oea[xi'Isslarosnauwlocc3ls'w�s3NnseoNsNaos $b'X31 , o' 3 z6d �o r NOIlVlSldll A3llV0�l13d003 C0 I � IlS21H,� sndboi JO d110 � a N a =' 213WWfrld _= V6Z06Z #i3YOU AiD U S211b'd321 N011b'1S 1311 301MklIJ NOLdIE10! f N DN N015IA3tl NOLdIN—1 1E 3LH0 'ON NOISI— SZOZ/S/fi ��6y aq NIA „9 w w ww N H W =U dU W U O H Y U W Qf n O UZ mpQ o w acacxcn� "'� `--��I' II Q o v II w III w w_ U r.T Ijj= a w J j II ��Q� opw— H 1 U L cn Z 7 m m h W W m m m [b _ Woo IIII O O J il- IIIII >N O =o # # 1 III II �l _� J IIIII LU `W —I V ui o— W¢ cA U ¢mm = v/cn H o I—I �o 0 v q —I �N _ dII II ID= fl X — 4] — z z a w mom u) U �H� O I pwcn w w ¢a Nw<C) C)0Lu Lo p>03 O�cwn Q Lu U U w fl m m 00 H fV 6�1 U_ M M O W ##=(n GZ1Z/LVH-231V23n sawin.ra5 6.uaau,5u3 Jo auaw}mda4 a o,a nu wain oaaesl�aa aaai szsassczsc o eY1 -_ oea�xiaiisiaro snaaw locc ais'wae aNnaaoNs Naos SVX31 SlIV13 O c.I O 3 N011V1S Id11 A3l1V S,b3d0ODco I1SIaHJ Sndboo JO .1110 Q a wao 213WWfrld V6Z06Z #i3YOU AiD U =¢ S211b'd321 N011b'1S loll 301MAlIJ NOLdIE10530 AB 31�01 ON N015IA3tl NOLdIN—I 18 3LH0 'ON NOISI— f w SZOZ/S�fi I - = a s a m W w W >Z J O w W NIW Q zw s F W >n w U O a Q O W? U �� w W W� " U)//�/� ~ Z� H O '^ W U m a O LU ,w a F- U O W € Z L) Z —�� Z M H J Z W =o a ❑ w �M w a� J - J W • O w ¢ z U _ __________ W W o z oa� _ __________� Q Ha J W V W a w � W m O z o a y Z Z • N aJZ N fV Q m NIA U u) O K O N I I I I NIW GZ1Z/LVH-231V23n �mst .w:naie:i9 a3nvs ro .:o szaz/•/e news ero'rma nrs nvavo\i•+•b\•wrs\+•wrva\®u o.laa�n�-/aio-•�.eee��o-sro-�ssa�•.w?a•ro..ww.w�•.mrrvVa�aev��ws�•+•n�n na z:o szaz/o/e a � - Bell ssssssczs > saainuas buuaau�6u3 �o auaw.7Jodap a a NVld311SllVd]A0 v . a«1 15ah s ea OIL o,a3NN3ao s N I1S121HO S!]b00 {o J113 SLOL#41 Sl NOIlV1S 1311 0V3H-1 A3l1V SU3dOOJ M b3wwmd == OZOZ-6ZOZAJ - �u blVdRl N011b'1S 1311 341MAil NO 111-310 3W 'ON NOi5i A3N _d1-21 'ON NO 111 ZOZ/6 - 0 z z a �/ 2 iG9 w m�oC I �p P• aa�`_' I I�}i+ 8E Wo 00 4dvio1 109 3NI13410HS S Y o gotI.c—� -U✓^—mw— w— • o F - .. 9=/s/S 4nLvuan .9 u35l1 .e.negl:fig 43nK m BfVe SLOE/f/°e n 6.PnMa Hm 3]n.11.1\eMevS\.. III\^ pgeeWf- W!beh rrWya\see0]]o1'U '.wne deep\° N w„�� °eilsssssscee saain/as buuaau�6u3 �o auaw.7Jodap � a NV1d smBlun CNb'1N3AN`JIIV NIVA 33il03 LN . O 50 U a"I`s'a"'°°a°' °"" °"'°3N13a°"s" SDX31 SLOL#41 Sl N011b1S 1311 0V314 l A3llV S213dOOJ M a WASHO S!] oo {o ill, _ N LLW to H 1=4 b3wwma == ozoz-6iozAJ b11VIJ I N011VIS iJil 341MAilD rv01diM]�3° 3W 'ON NOi5i A3i1 _di21�53° 'Ory NO II II 8 WlION300Y w1v G2/60 L 9 Wf10N300tl Vl1V 4Z/OL 2 ENO u f- ZZH� �zzvui oQ�o G� 0 az~ o0 M��3 zo ' — M v - _ w It a - 0 0 o� Iam =a,w �GE o a _w w m woN mlzw a o a� - o°.z a� Pool qyyy oil all d o a o� — w T oz F3 3i n0 � zd p >om ooro QEE 5 In— 3 - aavn o — = w 0 z =az o � �oa+s w � •� s I„ �Hlow Sul- � L 0 b F = �S3 c Nj/yJl bW — 4ZOL wu�3Lvodn nlsll ew,:�:M asnvs m.41—AM, m zs:,,sxaz/f/a, a M WN¢., de1�gss,gsf.tgE saainuas buuaau�6u3 �o aua w.7Jodap � a SVX31 S310N(INV S]lV13(l Nlb'W 3MIOJ 43SOdOld IlSINHO SnJ&00 {o A110 M - b3wwrn == 77 77 T 7 1 J - OZOZ-6TOZAJ n c r _ blVdRl N011b'1S lJll ]GIMkilD N NO ldin]�3° - 3W 'ON NOi5i A3N _d i21�53° 'ON NO 111 4 WUUNiM Wltl SUM L 9 mnUN3aaW vnv 9Z/UL Z U LU 5� =aaa ~goJ p H - = U / QO O , - �I w Y N U< Ln Ln a a z cod d G - � � 3 J k g z z o Q LUow OLL z W zz =Oz O v � �� }I a a co } c }1 Q m m (. 0 1 w - g [,� )UnYJt9)xWJ ,ZI X u m N s oo� H25 - w p � r Ip- - - zip - � SM/f/OL 43LVGdO msn v..nega.�as•os xa sx�x sm AIA rims axo nx xa"ro seae/o/x a c-I - °eiisssssscec saainuas buuaau�6u3 �o auaw.7Jodap � a AVIiJIAO 4NV 111 W 43SOdOH N SDX31 SLOL#41 Sl NOIlV1S loll OV3H l A3llV S213dOOJ M p IlSINHO SnJ&00 {o A110 = N b3wwmd OZOZ-6TOZAJ Q b 32 lbdl N011b'1S 1311 341Ml�llp U NO 1diM]�30 3W 'ON NOi5i A3N _di21�53° 'ON NO 111 %q 1 O Z Z H J N W 0 L z N s l � Syr m�zw o = ab \ e° — � 1 p Goo - o oe d F) \ aN. z �? a r 0 3: 1 — Y 3�0 a - a o \ VA 3NIl32fOH 5 0 LIj zg 2y o 1. zG al gzoj « m osx m s p S b1S N SM/sL/c 4nLvuan aan •Wne9e:ie ovos n :•5zoz/si/e:a awsoxixavn ui 3nva\ws\•Wrs\+•wrva\®u wlaaVv-/aio-•..aeer:o-sro-�na�•.w?e.ro..ww.w�•.aarrv4�a�aav:a,,:�ws�•�••n�n na rc:o seae/o/n a s, saainuas�6uuaau�6u3s�o �uaw.7Jodap � a - eli3Ns3ssf NVId S9NI)I"A 1N3W3AVd N . p„a xl l lslax snaax 0�L31S xn1e oxs N I1S121HO S!]b00 {o Jll7 SLOT#41 Sl NOUVE ldll OV3H l A311V S213dOOJ o M wa € y b3wwmd OZOZ-6TOZAJ V blVdRl N011b'1S 1311 341Ml�il: NO 111-310 3W 'ON N0111— _d1-21 'ON NO 111 ,yam ZOZ/6 H 0 Z Z H J o0� —o = LL� �---\`bps\>yO �bW ci U � t_� � QJD ■ �!� ® - o _ o o B Gi Ga o W a� 0 0 u Hill 4 9 Y /I-Z�� \ 3oc� - Gr � Njl b �V SM/sL/c anwan �iva,a wsa�� un•Pu,x,�aoes�b m sws > a _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� �Na wee aasn������ � ¢ NV7d N011170PM W01810373 SVX31 wo g _ a�xi a.iaN�suaumia.c 3is ama,Ni 3uoNSN EI0I#OIS7NOI1V1S1H170V3H 7A377HS,83d000 ,< =s s ;d =0 3 LL ilsiaH,� Sndaoo 40 ADD3 � � _C) �. __�� EgWtAMdqp =Y�=J VK061#Nd Ally Salb'd3N N0IlV1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N°Ild N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIn3tl N r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/60 l b a Izm � irw�Wm = w N� Q = U �o ww o O _ 55Li CL p� O W w I — O LLJ o _ X �� a U a V o J (n W a FLu _ U _ W w � c� Ell _ - - "C = o Z og� _ w /1 I Ld I I ❑ I Y — — o Z — Ej� gw o -- LL o 1� w — � 9�nzib�i£o:a3ivaen s Wd ,z 75 \/ ƒ \ gzms s/moo » 20 e lez m v >s : _< �]Wd , _ . : . , m w: \ » ! Aqg#k& Ilo \\ \ \ `� ~ qlq a N@1 a 21]E7#O 2= g .__ "or & \ 2 ° \\ Mmf \ R(G\ ® /2 + i�:\\: 2 _ \� / § WAS VIM"- ig �O-\� \ VIq ` EP- \ \ 55 ®t E z!e!W zz - � WPM! >! Q ® \ ` 8 : M:z \\ \ „ }, R \§:±/:; ;t `;: k: R §:\2:= J§ \; § 0.9101a 0 (S) : G 2: / ^ \ ` \ } ƒ : k \ � . 2 \ \ / \ / Of / j d \ d45 !a#§ « ( \ \ C \ 1 � � � }\ 2 >\ � :\ � �iva,a�wsa����un•Pu,x,�aoes�b m sws�»� a az€= 3i-ia3-aai szses-a'zaa sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� �Na wee aasn������ � ¢ SDX31 NV7d IV0181031331IS ms 9�ooF e�xiwaH�s,auoaia-'caisamaeNrauoNSN w aw -PE a Il SIbH3 Sndaoi )o lll7 C401#OIS7NOIlV1S13170V3H 1A377VS83d000 3 w a _ 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd AID �U N aw qp Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 zuY NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl �v r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/60 l b a Izm -EL w Er CL CD w z LL 0 w wo zy o = Jo — o z w w o: oO O OO O OOO ® Q c� u, a d M� � 1 Om 1 i X ® \ / J W , 1 e�oz/roe/to aaivaan �i�,a wsa�� un•Pu.„�aoes�b m sws > a �ul�= 33��a-aai ersee-e'tae sa�lnaag 6uuaa u16 u3 �o luaw�.r�dap ���������� � ¢ _� Na�x,N.IVN,s,d�oaio-'�3,s-a�,a=NI-3voNSN SD`X31 N01103S9SNOI1V�13137V01t110373 N � wo mE E101#01S7N011V1S13170V3H 1A377VS83d000 ~o 2 IlSI8H3 sndaoo jo Aijo w a VK061#Nd AID N �U z N ns �a qp Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLd1213530 AE 31W 'ON NOI 3_Etl ON NOISIA3tl N r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l b a Isom irw��m a _ q 55 -= s O 0 w Ln i �Q 1 U H U J W a o U U Z d II Q - C� II I II I II I I II I II I II I II I II I II I 0 II I o II I II I II I ^ II I w a 0� a J O II I o� O II I II I II I W J J -� J W II I W II I II I u Y Y N3 U. II I U. Q Q o II I - II I � J u � J II I Q � Q 3 U wIL 3 N II I U J J W W I `� LL N o/ 9lOZ/bl/£0�031tl4dn , w _ j ,/ d _\ : :&%:^®` =z, ` SA3 \n } w =o m ± \, _ e lez m v >s : _ � gzm37Am » 20 qpAqg#NdAID \\ \ \ ^ \ qlq a N011 a 21]E7#O ) ) \ \ : ,NO,_ : ,2= . g __ "or \ > : \ 33 © © _ } + » » \\ \ / / � ( } § 9 ( v / / \ - ° o \ \ o u ( ( � a f _ _ § n s � /§\ � F--] < 0 § }» � ( - \ e | �iva,a wsa�� un•Pu.„�aoes�b m sws » a an€= 3i-ia3-aai szses-a'zaa sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luawl.r�da� �Na wee aasn� � �� ¢ �� a�x,N.�NN,s,aaoaio-'�3,sa�,a=Nr3voNs SVX31 7lol133HSS011VdV3HOS N wo mE E101#OIS7NOI1V1S13170V3H 1A377VS83d000 o ' ~o 2 IlSI8H3 sndaoo jo Aijo w aqp VK061#Nd AID nw Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W '"1 7ISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON t4I1 3tl N r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l b a Isom � 0 s a 's 's I as o�sa r r p _ I I I El El LJ LJ Li CL 5 S 3 S 3 gII 0 yI - I z 0 a a J E E ws =� 5 EMS da o- p - �aa pLL pwo Li Li Li Li Li E C fT ITT IT Li Li Li Li I I� I Ig IqH � w s E-FC J J J H 9lOZ/bl/£0�031tl4dn ,z� j a SA3 \n } w ,o R ± \w e lez m y >s : � - gzma7Am » 20 EgWtAMdqp •= Aqg#NdAID , - qlq a N011 a 21]E7#O _ _ =777 ,2= g .__ "or & \ 2\} Mi§ : / \ a &IMI j � _ { z o S °u § ° �} \ P \ ) \ o \ ; ,.* :� ;4° ,� §\(o }c /j `T— a\ `T— 5j / \) ^� K —_ z> : !§, ,T !. �T `T ,T /) ,_L_ /) ,T ); �iva,a�wsa����un•Pu.„�aoes�b m sws�»� a az€= 3i-ia3-aai szse s-a'zaa sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� �Na wee aasn������ � ¢ _� a1x,N.CNN,s,aaoaio-'�3,sa�,a=N�-3voNSN SVX31 SlIV13073NVdlOd1N00dW(ld N wo mE C401#OIS7NOIlV1S13170V3H 1A377VS83d00O IlSI8H3 Snciaoi 40 AIIJ w a __° _ 213WWf17d == VK061#Nd AID N pw Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W '"1 7ISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'oN t4-1 3tl N r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l b a Ism 0 os- = a Q Q Ln " a sovoINIho Isdo-DIIND3 sMle IVNiwa� ,(UM3aM /�may 3 0 3 ❑ 3 z o — s r ❑ EL m G s ❑ N - - 0 0 0 ❑ � � W Z Q a J O O U a F a m O OD O� e o0 z a z o _ o� — o 0 0 — z — — z s�oz/roe/to aaivaan �iva,a wsa�� un•Pu.„�aoes�b m sws » a an€= 3i-ia3-aai szses-a'zaa sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o auaw#.r�da� �Na wee aasn������ � ¢ _� a�1 CNN,s,aaoaio-'�3,s-a�,a=Nr3voNSN SVX31 SlIV130l3NVdVOVOS N � wo mE C401#OIS7N011V1S13170V3H 1A377VS83d000 ~o 2 IISI8H3 Sndaoo j° Aijo Q w aqp VK061#Nd AID = N nw Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd121— AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W ON NOI 1— N r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/60 l b a mo z d Q z z - ��■—�FS.— F > U ¢ ¢ n Z m h Q Q U O r r j U z chi chi chi O O a a chi u chi chi chi u 5 3 3 5 < < a w d d O Z O O O O O O O O F U U U F F a ¢ ¢ ° ° ¢ a ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ° w w m rc a ¢ ¢ a w w O a > > > > > > >. > > > o 0 0 0 < < ¢ 4 ¢ y N O O ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ 4 ¢ ¢ 4 \ 0. W Q a 0 0 o 0 Q o 0 U } O o o m LLI w o o v° °° > > a s J O LL Q Q Q Q 0 0 O O Q Q Q U z z N % J J w a x x rc O O w w W w W w LLI U) ry ry ry ry ry ry ❑ 2 ry a0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o w g i o 0 0 w o U U a a E � o R 3 O - - - - - - - - - - - - w a o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ¢ ¢ O O d�? w z a ® 5 of s U a J W a ® ® a a W L —1 a a -- W W u_ ace¢ mm 2 � N n 9lOZ/bl/£0�031tl4dn �iva,a wsa�� un•Pu.„�aoes�b m sws » a az€= ai -aai szses-a'zaa sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da3 > ae�sn� � S37(103HOS me Q a x,N.a,,aao"o'3,s a,a=N 3voNs N SDX31 w00 o mE C401#OIS7NOIIV1S1H70V3H 1A377VS83d000 o ' IISI8H3 Sndaoi Jo Aijo w a __° _ 213WWf17dqp == VK061#Nd AID N nw Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl N r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/60 l b a m cz 0 -; s a k z G ~ yY w w w C) C) z tt �: �: �: z_ z_ W o a a a U w w w M M °a °a w of m m a a 0 rn w c c c > > o a > R(D Y N V o o N z w r1 rn h rn z (WLUW S � � z LLI d' W w O r ? _ Of 7 z — a 0 z O W (n U o W z z o o Q 0 a Cl a u u u u u u w D_ - ❑ JQ o �7 sn w oN F J F w U x Z QQ W W ❑ Y U C) 0 0 0 o LL iri in in = 3 00 J � T 0 Q of .0 w J ¢ a m (V/1 J U a Q m 0 Q co H fn W x Y N g m U Q Q Q Q Q Q J x x = ZwZ ZwZ ZwZ Q Q Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O Z W m m F a a a co�/I > > > y U Q JO O 0 ❑WOOU OW y U d d U U U W LrQ 0 0 J O w (O N C a. CO > Q 0O z w z Q m U d v sn w w Ed w EdO 00 z z V M O W o z _ a a a > = 9 U o W J o 0 0 o J o (U W w z w o U) W W J p qo qo o w Q U ~ W ❑w 0U O O O O a 0 J > Q Q 0 Q a a W U y U U U U U w 1, fD 1 00 J J J Q U O W •.. 00 O (n a' U l 9 N = C C = _ C ^ O W 0 Li O Z Z H S LaVt L/£0:a]iwdn �i�,a wsa�� un•Pu,rm�aoesvb m sws » a az€= 3i-la3-aai szses- sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� �Na wee aasn������ � ¢ _� m wme a�xia.IaN,s�auoaia-'csisama=NrsuoHSN $D`X31 SlIV130 N s w — IlSIaH3 sndaoo )o ,lll.0 E[0[401 Sl N011VIS ldll OV3H l AMIV S,2i d000 3 wa AL,= 213WtAMd == b6Z06T#Nd AID ' qp 'w Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W '"I NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W ON NOI1— N £NnON3nntl %Bf SZ/SO/60 l b a Ism 0 1A (sari w1 � ^Z1 W13H ONV A009 9£ W U .Hb _o �a d h m�8 \ oz �a �o �a a z WNWINIW n0 d oa 3a➢,N MONO y _ 3ddOD 8,180 ON 01 F l]tll3 a3dd0�N3/Jan'NIW,01 O� 0 OER — U U � Y d o WnWINIW no sp Sava 3aiw aNnoao w 'WV"Z aoa awnoao 3/,IaO' w Otlla a3d1.NNIW z M g fTTF ZO � C xv/1„9.S Ol,9,b ,9£ o UL U ¢U\ r J\ 9lOZ/bl/£0�031tladn saDmjaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuDda a w„� eiyaaewnN waN aaa3isi�sa saeiiscsasss'csee P Q inOAF19 311S Yee a c\Iz w^= n usaN sNetm OIL US'0111111113a0Ns NOOs $DX31 i O 3 '6 SZOT#dl Sl NOIlV1S loll H1f10S OOOMmVIJ M IlSldHJ S(1daoi to A110 _ - - b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f0U AlIJNw- I SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAlI:) X NOIId rSM 19 31tl0 'ON NOISV3L NOIwld- AA 3lW ON N051A3tl 8 WaaN3aM Wltl 9Z/601 L on 9 WaaN3aatl VEW 4Z/OL z N J i 7 s 1 a Z � � e w - w Q d �y....,. F w 0 c �IL i = _-- - -_ LL oo 1 0 N r - oNl— o< < 6C La. o - v SSA SS c rub a 3rc.apzz 'z cS" � 5o i ®z r °1 oOn On Zl- -- Q - -- Lj - > o o, 3 _ a T � - a� aooroyy�e�� _ z _ _ Qz - z�0-=- UL • �..- FM99FM FM 3 U a2�oXr wm Nadar SZOZ/V/6 :631VIld0 _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawa�odad a £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a31;193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i0E' wn ro.b NI Z zo « ;aNSNdto,iot3t;a,,a3N3aoNSN SDX31 NVIdNOIlIlOW30 IlSldHJ S(1daoi to A110 SZOT#01 Sl NOIlV1S 1j11 H1f10S 000MAJVID M € b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD WIC SblVd3b NOliV1S 1311 3aIMAilD N01-3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISINtl N0IIEItlO531 A9 3lW 'ON NOGIAM VW(IN3(Ob' Wlv �Z 60 l M r„'JSS a W_ 47 �� os g°h sr V m Z _ t9 Q wO am N I u s= Q w 6 \ m zo i -- — g g _ - - - - w LLJ 4 � 4 l7 � o M w a w J s m Qz k N � U Z adu Q W U W ,h N hQ SZOZ/6/9 :631VOdn _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a31;193tl 3d019i3d'93E''ie9E —— — aun „e, — �I ch « ;aN sNdto,io 33;a,,a3N 3aoNSN SV'X31 1N3W3AOddW1311S v o `� p„a IlSldHJ S(1daoi to A110 SZOT#41 Sl NOIIVIS iJIl H1f10S OOOMA21V10 M _u €'__¢ b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f02�d IklIJ W -` _ =x Sblbd3b NOIld1S loll 3aIMAlID N01-3— F8 31tl0 'ON N01— N01wItlO531 A9 3lW 'ON NOGIAM VWON3aab' Wlv W6C l _days LLJ « d N Q U _ o U 30 w _ o V oGl z O O 0 Cc3 O Cma� Owc. -zz ------------ y < ry q Ni z f Q w w J o W J o U Z 2 _ U LLJ . I SZOZ/6l/9 :631VOdn _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdad .......... O sMr ¢ exy a3ewnN waN a3a3si�3a 3aei I Szsasss'csF � kf « SaN sN I''I IIu 3 nI I3131-1 N SDX31 SNVId 3JNIJ(INV 9NIAVd NI O =off = hnh? SZOL#dl Sl NOIlV1S ljll H1f10S OOOMNlIVIJ o M IISIdHJ S(1daoi to lll� A3MMdb6Z06Z #1J3f0U IklIJ �I az SblVd3b NOliV1S 1311 3aIMAilD NOIIdI3— 19 31tl0 'ON N01— NOIlEld— AA 3lW 'ON N051A3tl VWON�aQd AIV I�Z 60 X X $S �� O©- OOg E � ■ I M1 - 55 mkz Q _ = o a 1_- LLJ Li } o Ll o��, �k 000�4 INb J S C -- ss O I - ILI o — ss � w �o u . o �o .. a a:� aoo n Ian T z FM FM _fM —FM99 FM FM n 44 a O o — M — SZOZ/8Z/9 631VOdf1 w., sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� Nl�aan�w.w u m��({" � ¢ NVId NOUl]On30 a =w a x,N INN,,d o310 3,s a,a N13voNs N SVX31 N aw - _ IISI8H3 sndaoo Jo Aijo g7oI#ci si nouviSlfnHinoS000vNavio v� SglNtA 17d qp VK061#Nd AID to R - Sa1Vd3N NO11V1S 1311301MA110 a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3-W �'ON NOISIA3tl r nnaraaav "or SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a Ism 'n =Nm F o O wGw97 Z = — o� o,� ��c� -8 �Sgs� �—= c�<m� YwLL ^���_ �V ^o ^m� Q U � II U r u K V w /z y �yo3 u o a� x f LL z w Z O *�z 1 LL W J LL 'ab QO�,NNL'Vl�'S 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn w., sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� Nl�aan�w.w u m��({" � ¢ _� �a =w a�x,N�NN,s,d�o3 o�3,s-a�,a N�3voNs N SO.LOHd N0LLOOPUCI N wo - = SD`X31 5701#01 Sl NOI1V1S ldll HllIOS OOO�LINbVl0 ,2 IISI8H3 sndaoo jo Allo _ _Ch 213WWf17d qp V6Z061#Nd AID Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 a NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W '"1 7171 3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'oN t4-1 3tl r nnaraaov "or Se/So/so l �� a z 'n �n— a o� 5 a: �a >> o \\ U_ U � ` O w � W U W al J W �a o� w� pia tea � E / w gz o ��o wQo Y j w�zz 1 C) C) d J J CaJ � U U W W J J � W e�oz/roe/to aaivaan wy. sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luawl.r�da� Nl�aan�w.w u m��({" � ¢ _� �a =� a�x,N�NN,s,d�o3 i o�3,s-a�,a N�3voNs N Ntfld s1N3W3r102iddVl311s N - = SD`X31 9701#01 sl vouvisifn H-inos coomNHVlo ,2 IISI8H3 sndaoi Jo Aijo _ a SgWtAMd qp VK061#Nd AID SaIVd3N NOIlV1S1311301MA110 a NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W '"1 7171 3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'oN t4-1 3tl r nnaraaov "or SZ/Sa/eo l (\J a LJ it w � ry VI 8 O p Oo�ao��oNw 0� �O O(r(r (D(D d � m ZQ 2 w � O \J a U b N> m a a ,To 03 ;. 7)� JLU � J. I Jw l J 4- Z Q xv niaa uO ® a�aonoo .. � O e oz/ro/to aaiwdn w., sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o 1uawl.r�da� Nl�aan�w.w u m��({" � ¢ _� N011039YJ JH0111019 N w o _ _ - = SD`X31 97ol#01 sl ivouvls 131l Hinos coommHvio - 2 IIS18H3 sndaoo Jo Aijo _ a 213WtAMd qp VK061#Nd AID Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W '"1 7ISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON t4-1 3tl r nnaraaav "or SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a Z c } L - - Y w Y t R, _ ZO o= 0 a s o e a. m 61 a w c> s d a 0 a 0 o - _ - LL LLJ O J_ U � > F . U 8 W W 9laZ/bl/£0 aliwdn �a =w a�x,N INN,s,d�o31 o�3,s-a�,a NI 3voNs N 9NOUV1I3UA3V8'HJIMS N SD`X31 9Zol#OI sl ivouvis1Hn H-inos OOommHVIo — ,2 o IIS18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ a 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd All) Sa1Vd3N NOLVB 1311301MA110 N NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W 'oN NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'oN NOISIA3tl r nnaraaov "or SZ/Sa/eo l (\J a z 'n o O� e O'er C) U S d II � N U � Jo - I I I I 00 o - I 1 — a Q I I - zl � I I I I - I I 0 I I m __ o ff--- . J I I e I I I I i--I I I - i w Z CDzw O I I I I �- o� I I z r o O O W I I I I Y Y Q Q I I 0 I I e J J I I o, n H ♦— w LU U �I I I W � W J J W W \1) \1 UJ N NIJ zL c�a c� O 9IOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn w y�. sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o auaw#.r�da� Nl�aan�w.w u m��({" � ¢ _� �a =� a�x,N�NN,s,d�o3io�3,s-a�,a N�3voNs N WMo07103N11-3N0 N wo - = SD`X31 97ol#01 sl ivouvisifn H-inos OoommHVIo ,2 IlSI8H3 sndaoi Jo Allo _ a SgWtAMd qp VK061#Nd AID Sa1Vd3N N011V1S1311301MA110 a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W '"1 7171 3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON t4 I 1 3tl r nnaraaav "or SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a z 'n r � � pp p F-1 S N a _^ 5>> ------------ L' U 7 0 a- a a f i i i n i F I I I I i I -CHi I - L----------- L- a -1sc - z i W p s LazItl/£0 aliwdn �a��w a�xiuiau�suauo3ia Isis ama Ni suousN sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� Po���w.wu So�17W3HOS N � ¢ � wo _ _ = = SD`X31 9701#01 S1 N01171S1HIl H-inoS OoommH7lo ,2 IISI8H3 sndaoi J� lll� _ a w uw', _ 213WtAMd == V6Z06T#Nd A10 Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA1I N a NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W '"1 NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'oN t4-1 3tl r nnaraaov "or SZ/Sa/eo l (\J a z 'n C J 3 = V a cD x � m � � Q FE a J � d UU} oo� o� 0 pL—o pL—o m �m Z Iz J d d N o o a <� 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn �a =� a�x,N�NN,s,d�o3io�3,s-a�,a N�3voNs N SlIY130l3NYdY0b�S N wo SD`X31 5Z01#01 Sl NOI1V1S loll HllIOS OOOiLINbVI.7 ,2 o IISI8H3 sndaoi Jo Aijo _ a 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd AID Sa1Vd3N NOLV1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl r nnaraaav "or SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a z 'n o U K K o a a c Z O ¢ ¢ U C U D m N Y F F F w w Z _ U ¢ Q O > F z m m U w0 Z Z M M > O O r r g > > > > 5 > > U U F F F H F F F F ¢ ¢ Z U ¢ ¢ U U U U w w w w U U U U C7 ¢ ¢ ¢ H H ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ K K w w z z z z z z z z _ _ _ = z z z z V O R R 8 8 . O O O Z U U U. U O O O O N m o U < '¢ 0 p U U U U O F F F F U U U U U U 7 w w o o W W m 3 F � 3 3 3 3 F F 3 3 3 3 w w 0. R ¢ Q w w R R R R 0 0 0 0 R R R R a a F F > > > > > > O > > > > Q J W Z LL a Q O o 0 0 Q d w J U w w U a s 0 0 ¢ U) U) O O K K w w W w w a W p m N o o > > O O LUdFQ' ULIC to m ¢° ¢° Y Y O O 2E2E LLw z> z wK K O O> > > > > Ua~ Ua~ O>O O O O w _ mp U) N >O ti ry x I ry ry O O p O O O w a Oa O ZZZZZ Z Z Z ZZa ZOa ZOa ZW >> J O pp a mOLL � � � � � � 11o � =w LLLL " L a — — — — — a Oa _ _ d o 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o a a O J O H J w Z a Q m J W Z d ® QA U — C-) K __ zozir — O — w O <�a � J � Z �w Z Z Lq N 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn w., sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� Nl�aan�w.w�u m��({�" � ¢ _� �a =w -a�,a N�3voNs N sl@'130�-qWd lodiwo dand N wo _ _ - = sD`X31 9701#01 sl vouvis ifn H-mos OoommHVl.O ,2 IISI8H3 snda0o Jo Aiij _ a 213WtAMd == V6Z061#Nd A10 `' s Sa1Vd3N NOLV1S 1d11301MA110 N a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W '"1 7ISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON t4-1 3tl r nnaraaav "or SZ/So/fia l �d a z 'n w 3 ~ - 5 Z s �5 - V 0. � � N 0MFFF o" 0 0V g]a o a saao3aW /wiDviwc s�eo3e ,ewwa3i eM�vyf Ll I ❑ 3 j O O ❑ 3 w i1 g ❑ z o O � J W Z Q d J O H Z O U d m3 _ _- 0�1 of o� 3 � ())go O 5 � ())go ® 5 9io S z� z z O O� �LL 4� �O 9lOZ/bl/£0�031tladn ,.. sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da3 Po���w.wu 33ino3HJS Q Cl ,na ;F a�xi a.iaN�suaumia c3is ama,m 3uoNSN $D`X31 5701#01 Sl NOI1V1S 1HIl HllIOS OOOiLINbVI.7 a Z IlSI8H3 sndaoi Jp Allo ` w uw _ 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd AID `' s ShcVd3N NOLV1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIn3tl r nnaraaav "or SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a z 'n 72 5 V 0 m a: s rc a w O m � � m z � p, U U U O z z a d w w w w w w w w w oZ Q Q >w a a a a a a a a a u) w rc m w w a m w 4 LU rc ¢ � w a J u) co m J U M U U M W O ry N N a o ro u J co o m ry o o ry N.. U) ai tt # x tt tt tt tt tt S�S y w M c ~ G F tt u = J x w a z Z ¢ m a = w U rc 2 a of M J k 7 ya 0 U N Y U C) O O n w O O 65 g 0 z r cn u) g Y w w w w w O v w Q Q o o �. w z j m a a w a o w Qo a ry J w u) U m z a a m m p w m M U a Q m Q m U r o z w z > > o z x p Q Y a 3 m a U ~ J U w Q Q Q Q o 0 0 0 5 a u) a>� u) V of ¢ ¢ w N N ry ry M Y J d J W a w w > > w m m w p m z a p z o 0 0— — J 0 J O J � 1 � Q Z r' u) 63 W u m > rn zu) w W W W W a = zam e�e55 p z m z z 0 O zQ w zQ w zQ a a O w w w w ih z w o D m m a a a a of O O i z w 2 o z w w z z z Q z Q z Q w a a W a > w w v o 0 o a a a a a v a ¢ ¢ N a g p F U a a O g p g w 0 0 u rc w p v O a N - M N N N M a M M w p Z r � 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn w., sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� Po���.a.w um� SlIY130 � � - Via ; a�xi a.iaN�suaumla c3is ama,Ni 3uoNSN SVX31 5701#01 Sl NOI1V1S loll HllIOS OOOiLINbVI.7 Z IlSI8H3 sndaoi J0 lllD ` SgIMA 17d qp VK061#Nd AID s Sa1Vd3N N011V1S1311301MA110 a NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W ON NOISIn3tl r wnaraaav "or SZ/Sa/eo l (\J a 72 z 'n — 5 mow V ` J o ww -- --- X O '\��\%\\ yrj lV3S SA3 z rsc(r J a � w , (AaWN0 d) VIINIA (taswlad)wnwwlw,aro o tn Ova CL SE d - s Q (SIM TV) z m n � VU O c U Ut 3 ADO 3/09V az e�oz/roe/to aaivaan sa�ti�as 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawa�odad a £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a315193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i9E - , OIL 3 saN sNdto3l a,,aN1 3 1 N SDX31 lnonm 3115 NI U o IISRIHJ S(1daoi �o dll� TOOT#41 Sl N011b1S loll 3NIN AVMH9IH =z € b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU loll _ SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3GIMAlID N01-3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISINtl N0IIEItlO531 A9 3lW 'ON NOGIAM £ AAClN3(1OV A7V 9Z 60 l o _ I J II 3c a Fu Ia I Lz 71 LO 0 a I F - g — 7 zoz „ F wLL � I o 0 F ss/ d/a1 rc Iss/�nr/a� w nc/�" J nn �o s H 3H o x— - "7r o If�IIfYi - I W a ti o N Lac C � O C l� T,60T �,Z-.T9T J SZOZ/8Z/9 :631tlddfl _ _, s !x ` w\o�on « \\ °_ \ ^ ^ gse� sd m gAI0 I #=gm2aans&a#ew ` \ƒ } m ) A3mrndV6ZO I #1]f U AM ( - S Id]u N OIl 1 1 m ]OIM�O a@ § ` ON w ,_M \ / » _ b/ z \ E2 � aE� & . ^ 2\ � --- -j � � r o c\ > / ? ® |w _ _ \ -72 � ! ! \ \\ = ui j ) )~ : _ \) ! _/ } \ j .2 : . . w � . . . < ; . . . . . � . . , . . . . . . , . . . . . « !/§ | /gZ/, » _M «pw3 y 3d01 ! ti 6aau16u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a,a33oSNo o SVX31 1NIMwn AroM.bi dW1311S U lz a IISldHJ S(1daoi to A110 L£OL#01 Sl NOIIVIS ill 3NIN XVMH!JIH M 119WWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD _ SblVd3b NOliV1S 1311 3aIMAilD N01-3— 19 3Ltl0 'ON NOISINtl NOIIEld— AA 3lW 'ON NOGIAM £ AACIN3rJOV A7V sz 60 l > O O OLw & Z � a o J d ® Q Q M M Z o g M 0 h U z Ld L o I i.99'S( I 0 s � 0 W -- w Q - Z O Q w W �3 W � .+,s w o� g J z 2 c) U W �g z zi fs R �W k SZOZ/Ll/L :631VOdn _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a315193tl 3d01Y925d'93E'i0E e -- - aun u,e� - xe sx e � � « 111jSNdto3lou3iS o,,a3N1310N3 N SV'X31 SNV1d 3JN3J ONV 9NIAVd NI O k TEOT#4I S1 NOIIVIS 1311 3NIN AVMH9IH M v pw 11S1dHJ S(1daoi to A110 b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f0U AlIJ a? a¢ _ SblVd3b N0IlV1S 1311 3aIMAil N01-3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISWN NOIIEId— A9 3lW 'ON NOGIAM £ AA GN300V A7V 9Z 60 l a �r M NIpI J LJ LLJ ILL I O 8 Z El Lj ,Fw - - - 7 Sm 3 3 3 3 a p m O Z $ k g. H Iw— w Y z F F F F F F FLj S. J G h Z w w w 0 O ff - _ SZOZ/8Z/9 :631VIldn H:s swL/./e nuvu ea rexbxo\^Aws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa Nb'7d N0 SDX31 11170W30 � = e�x�wNN�s,d�o� o.�3,3 a�,a=N�3voNs N Mj DI Sl NO�lYiS ��3N1N bMH91. - ' - 1108HO snwoo 40 A113 L o - 213WWf17dqp == V6Z061#Nd A110 o== SUIVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl r nnar�aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l �� a � en _ RM 101 rTcm a - _ -- gig M do - - zo ss ! -z�_w " Ton zoo w Jw�S " Rol z woo '=" "� - An Ego - -Sal a - -- _ 0 w� �z o J o8� a �3z _ OKI � a Quw — o o w LJ pw" -r ��<m" �wy ��LLa- �1,121a zo Qo� o O O O O O w � Ell T a a d c� �o Ell I - SS3 O z g z 0 0 v o 0 s - W L J � w v 3p3. W oLL e�oz/roe/to aaivaan H:s swL/./e nuvu ea rexbxo\^Aws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa - sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� Nan.xa a3sn����� n � ¢ S010Nd N011170N130 a� � SVX31 o - � u o ����w�NN�s,d�o�io.�3ua�,a-N13ll0H5N S94 0 S7 NO�1YiS 1 3NIN,VWIDI IISI8HO sndaoo Jo Aijo 7�7 213WtAMdqp = = VK061#Nd AID N _ o=? Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3-W �'ON NOISIA3tl = r nnaraaav %BP SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a z m en W� irw�Wm N Ld z _ o Y 3�w z -- o �N wo of Soo a Act AM Af Ld Q er•[ s �s.�.° N � IZ � �. �41111,111,(II8 e a O J(I11 I, r � L) Q 1 r � m U N S� 30 G 3 o� Ga Z zx8 - O C) Z U O LLI Q J \ a- W � w /� < o w J w r : e�oz/roe/to:a3ivadn H:s swL/./e nuvu ea rexbxo\^Aws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa SNrd 1N3W3 OadWl 3-)S N� SVX31 SO4 DI Sl NO�lYiS 127, 3MN bMH91. - ' - IISI8H3 sndaoo Jo Aijo 213WtAMdqp = = VK061#Nd AID o=L Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3-W �'ON NOISIA3tl = r nnaraaav %BP SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a en Ld _ t o L _ - - - O O' U rp U d Q K U o� IIa I - 3 H N W u �Da J i 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn H:s swL/./e nuvu ea rexbxo\^Aws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa N77d a3�?JV7N3 �� � SVX31 SO4 DI Sl NO�lYiS 127, 3MN bMH91. - 0 IISI8H3 sndaoo Jo Aijo w� 213YVtAMdqp = = b6Z061#Nd A110 = N o=? SaIVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl = [NnaN3aav "or S Sa/eo I (\J a Ism en — wo Es o 72 CL 2 U ©Ij z m 00000 (a000� G0� 0 0ElEp s zs zt a u I ' , _ II ono 3 — m rm 33 33 _ _ on — LU U dz r z 3D-3f I 111 / zn — s ��� Uw zLLaa e e oz/ro/to aiwdn H:s swL/./e nuvu ea rexbxo\^Aws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa _ - sa�inaag 6uuaaui6u3 �o �uaw�.r�dap ���� N011335 v . SDX31 SO4 DI Sl NO�lYiS 127, 3MN bMH91. - 0 IISI8H3 sndaoo Jo Aijo HaY Wf dqp = = V6Z061#Nd AIDr_ N _ o=? Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 N a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl = r nnaN3aav %BP SZ/So/fia l �d a Ism en _ irw=wm 3 LL p 5 so zN w m N a 000= 0000 w J a oil o 0 zwr - W W82 m O ww-,,- --� O�-2L zo � � - _ a �oW0000 �o I yG a II 1 I'III �=II �-- II 1 - - 1 m� - J 00 � MO 1 < II � LL - 1 z � II A II � LLo 1 — II a f(f � I z� IIII I J u..�� 1 -- m8 Jo 0 I �m I I O W z � J - = 1 Y 1 I u �o 1 1 o O a u Q a 1 � u HW U u o Q w � o� o ---�- � W J I U ___ W o w_ , W U. Q Ld V � J � J N O W 1 z - 9laZ/bl/£0�a3ltladn H:s swL/./e nuvu ea rexbxo\^Aws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa we�.wia awn-3wo N� SVX31 SO4 DI Sl NO�lYiS ��3MN bMH91. - IISI8HO sndaoo Jo Aijo 213YVtAMdqp = = V6Z061#Nd A110 oz? SaIVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3-W �'ON NOISIA3tl = r nnaraaav %BP SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a z en q o � _ P, P, 72 5 s o z o w-1 _- L------- ----1— 4------ �=w LJ JJ ES J W Z d 9laZ/bl/£0 aliwdn H:s swL/./e nuvu ea rexbxo\^Aws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa - sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� Nan.xa a3sn����� n � ¢ s�Ilvw3H�s N� SVX31 SO4 DI Sl NO�lYiS �� 3MN bMH91. - IISI8HJ sndaoo Jo Aijo w� _2 - 213WtAMdqp = = V6Z061#Nd A110 o=L Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 N a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3-W �'ON NOISIA3tl = r nnaraaav %BP SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a z en W J 3 = V x � m � � Q y U a = � d Ci EL EL z -� a co J a� d5_ a3� a 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn H:s swL/./e nuvu ea rexbxo\^Aws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa S7IV130 73NVd VGVJS a� 00 _ e3x3 wNN3s,d�o3 o�3,3 a�,a-N�3voNs N SDX31 SO4 DI Sl NO�1ViS ��3MN VMH91. cD - IISI8H3 sndaoo Jo Aijo ` w� HaY Wf dqp = = V6Z061#Nd A110 N 4Zz ~ N SdIVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3-Etl 'ON NOISIA3tl r nnaraaav %BP SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a z en ❑ o o � = x U K K j ° a a !a Z 7 7 O a s U C d Y Y Q a a z Y U r r m m OU V w0 ZO ZO M o > Z U y a a U U U U U U U U U F ¢ ¢ Z Z z z p z z z K r r r r N Z o o Z Z z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z O R R U U O O Z O O O U o o o o 5 U Q Q ❑ ❑ U U U U U U U U U U K K K K K K N K K K a o o a a a a a a a s R ¢ Q R R R R R aO > > R R R R w w 7 7 7 0 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 OLu m J 0. Q d rc Q z ❑ ❑ S S (aj a w w N u) O O z z Z cl U ¢ ¢ o o a s Z u rc rc z z j w rc rc o o w w ° o o2200 2S rn o 2 LL 'a z'a za za za o'a o w ° ° Z ° z z z Ed w ' J M o 3 ❑ < p o _ _ _ _ _ _ o a 0 w a Q O F >o W a III IIIII I IIII ��r � Y �a 0 s a U a J W a ® ® a a W L —1 a a -- W z r5a yy — _`-z — W u_ ace¢ mm 2 � N n 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn H:s swL/./e nuvu ea rexbxo\^Aws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa STVL30 UNVd JO�LNDJ dwnd N� _ e3x3 N_�NN3s,d�o3 o�3,3 a�,a-N�3voNs N SVX31 SO4 DI Sl NO�lYiS ��3MN bMH91. - IISI8H3 sndaoo Jo Aiij ` HaY Wf dqp = = V6Z061#Nd A110 N 4Zz ~ N SalVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3-Etl 'ON NOISIA3tl r nnaraaav %BP SZ/So/fia l �J a z en -- _ a w =� 3 -g 5 — V 0. � � N k7Ea 3no /wsaoiDvmvlwc s�eo3e ,ewwa3i eM�vyf Ll I ❑ 3 j O O ❑ 3 w i1 g ❑ � z o O � J W Q d O O U d Jmo 0 0 ())go (D ^ O � z O Z z Z O O� �LL 4� �O 9lOZ/bl/£0�031tladn H:s swL/./e nuvu ea rexbxo\^Aws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa _ - sa�inaag 6uuaaui6u3 �o auaw�.r�dap ������ S37nQ3H�S � ��� � � SVX31 v S94 IlSIbH� S(1d210� J� lll� 0Sl NO�lYyS 127, 3N1N lb'Mh91. o w LLJ a o== EgWtAMd == VK061#Nd AID V _ o N o=N Salbd3N N0IlV1S1311301MA110 to a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIi N N011d N3530 AB 3-W �'ON NOISIi tl r nnaraaav %BP SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a z en _ q 72 5 s a Z of w of of U U U O F p Q u! w w w w w w w w LL w 0 w 's Q a a a a a a a a U a J t > > > > > > > > w > A t w o 0 0 0 ❑ o 0 o w (19 o Q A v a v v a v a v = u) v(� W K d Q y� N $ J z z Z W N �„ r 0 r Z Ld J Q LU w d z W r D U W ¢ m ¢ w } g En Z LU r n WN of of N ............................................. x q i , i i i u 7x a W W o x e� " w o z } m x u) u3 ........ 47 2 Z 4 N a... ....<...¢. J a z — x W m a z x x C7 o z z z o_ O m m J J w w w `" U s ¢ m ¢ m & z z z p w o z z I o o a a a J U D S U 1 z a a cn u) u) eY z o u-, ❑ N U O " a [n o W j m .....................�.................... Q d S Z w z m m a a a I z a a a o w Lu m 0 z w z U z0 z0 a a a z O OU w - O O O Q O O T _ _ Q U w z U U o' o' a w o' o' V w o z z z z z z Q z z 7 W. CL d W } N `d w U O O O O O U O C] N V o w w Y S2 o U>w> >w> U U o z_ a f¢'J Q caS ~ of > > M M m d' J J J 0 U O a a a a a a a N u) .. N Q 2 .. ...N...N.... w J N L L� z Z 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn H:s swL/./e num ea rexbxo\`Aws un•au A�am\a m smeAh muwa _ - _ _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� Nan.xa a3sn.ww.�ramrNs sl�1�� n �ma ¢ � r a�x�N.au�s,duo3la.c3,san,aN3uousN SVX31 r S94 01 Sl NO�lYiS 127, 3NIN VW-ID1.f 0-0 IISI8H3 sndaoo Jo Aijo ISY Wf dqp == V6Z061#Nd A110 4Zz ~ N SalVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N a NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3-Etl 'ON NOISIn3tl r nnaraaav %BP SZ/Sa/fia l (\J a z en _ q �Q Y z —z _ w I r\ a o� Ln 8 t N8 U (A8V0NON3s)moluIW„9£ (ANtlWRId)Wn WINIW„8b 1'7 — ��ow - � o� +may W in �m U �' ••Z�M119 OW A009 UAo09 3AOBtl IS d i c> CIF o 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn sx! Java; \± ==w=_,� gse� sd m g �Ia o mGgm232g,a em ® \\ / } �3 V6ZO I #1]f Ud O ` - S Id]u N 011 1 1 m ]OIMAiO a ; § ` ON = w ,a :z ,_� : IV - & ! & _ \- - [ ^ C) \+ - \ 0 m _ Lo ~ Q// \ \ } \ \ m\ \ / d © / ` Ld w �`( = 2 /Ef ` : p/ / ( \ q /w/ Q/ ` /9GCtjdddd /®S: N. 4- - � � < ( � %� � / § _ \ ~ § 5 = / \ UC LOC ^ $ \ s }. } f i It - GZOZ /gZ/, :» ,/ d w : _ :__ _, s x! wm�on« j± !\ % / gse� s d m g AI0 o m G g m2a ag,a em \ ■ b \ i\ } � » (\) �] V6ZO I #1]f Ud O - S Id]u N OIl 1 1 m ]OIMAiO a ; § ` ON = w ,a w :z: ,_� \ � � �) �}} }` * _ « 2 \\&{ \| / / d Lu 4 \ e \ : � « © \ s \ < \ ^ \ � - � � / _ - ® §| & = ? acc Cl, ? a GZOZ/LL/9 m £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a31;19;309i3dY0E ti 6uaau16u3JD auaLuPDdaQ « o 3aa3N3oSN o SVX31 -- 1N3-Wau3n A0dWedi W -3 11S U NIZ a IISldHJ S(1daoi to A110 OSOL##01 Sl NOIIVIS 1311 AUVd 3103 M „u €_` A3 V6Z06Z #iD]FO�d kilD rA =x SblVd3b NOliV1S 1311 3aIMAilD NOIIdI 3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISINtl NOIlEld— A9 I IN N05113d 4' Wf10N300V WlV SZ/60 6 a=-T a w w M J o � 0 � N J � x F ~ x z LL w o a aG — ffi W — Q o 4 z o a m� d x — o m ° o — W$� ? ?o' ?c. ?vi➢ �s ?ci ?�i w ? SZOZ/b/6 :631VOdn m.- _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da0 aan.waver Ae me��' � ¢ ? - NV'IdN011MY30 gm w b vp = SVX31 wo a�xia.iaN�suaum a.c3isama,Ni3uoNsN 090P01S1NOIIVIS1311NNVd3100 2 _ IIS18H3 sndaoo jo Ail.o w a 213WWf17d == V6Z06T#Nd A110 U y N qp a qp SUIVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLdl21�534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d d�530 AB 3_W 'ON NOISIn3tl [V c nnarr3a. %BP SZ/SO/fi0 l a Jim: !till ngis - qirw-Nma 4 0 = go 2N -_ — - REMhow '81 gn A 3z i Congo z z z od�a� ada���s LL �� sd�zzs No o_ m��soo�., m� �N fam. lac - �o 92 in - - a Y o ES g' w - o� Alot q V 2 O — ~O Z Z — EVE Z z> Sgp = W Hs is - W Z oa Nam oil H L., �i U' U n L O O� G O O LL - ME z a � zo �O x� 0. U. W _ \ W of oit= " ooa a \ s \ wm \ d \ o y _(D gig �o o 9�aZib�i£o:a3��d� _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� aan.waver Ae me��' � ¢ ? _ 3010Hd N011170W30 N g=m web vpz a x N.au s,auo3la.c3,sama_N 3uousN SVX31 w o D901#OI S7 NOIIVIS ldll N2 Hd 3700 0 Z IIS18HO sndaoo jo Aiio w a '= V6Z061#Nd A110 w _¢ = w Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 N NOLLdl21�534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d d�530 AB 3_W 'ON NOISIn3tl [V r nnaN3aov "or SZ�Sa/fia l a a it w o w ® b z a 72 3= a O "- Of -- — —Of c r — O Of LLI ma y- x w Of z W z of w � = z F- — U) W W 0 t D zdv Z �f5 J W w z i 0 z U O ;. F Y W CL �U eroz/ror/to aaivaan dad _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�dad aan.waver Ae me�SNVId wab vp j N . wo 4 s a�xi a.IaN�suaum a.c 3is ama,Nl 3uoNsN SD`X31 090 P 01 Sl NOU V1S 1311 NNVd 3 100 2 IISIaH3 sndaoo jo Aijo w a '= V6Z06T#Nd A110 U ¢y N I a Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 a � - NOLLdl21�534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N -1-0 AB 3_W 'ON NOISIn3tl [V r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l a - w) irw-Nma all =w} �a Q Ll LLJ z o X_ w J o Y w ��w - -_ � am w 2 - - - n w I_ w ciOw ED / o /T.( Z / r \ - / bo W " S o\J \ W < 3 \ \ o o " 3 g3 9lOZ/bl/£0�031tl4dn m.- _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� aan.waver Ae me V01103S �sr� ¢ � wab vp j v . w o 4=m s a�xi a.iaN�suaum i a.c 3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N SD`X31 0901#0I Sl NOIIVIS ldll N21Hd 3100 2 IISI8HO sndaoo jo Aijo w CL 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd AID " Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLdl21�534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N =77 ON NOISIn3tl [V r nnaraaav "or S Sa/60 l a L �m_ uj 0 0L 2 - _ - -__a o O0¢ 00 (D z00 L � J a m 0 z U a�u 0 � U w — J z -- W d � O z Z Z O O >Q 'Q > J w LLJ C J Q ro U �. U ¢ W w 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn �a� _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� aan.war Ae me��' � ¢ _? _ WMd97103N11-3N0 " 'n gb vpz=v a x,N.NN,,d o3 0.3,s a,a,N 3voNs N SVX31 wo 090 P 01 Sl N011 V1S 1311 NNVcl 3100 0 Z IISI8H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ w a 213WtAMdqp == VK061#Nd AID " _¢ = w Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W 'oN NOISIA3N =77 oN NOISIA3tl [V r nnaN3ov "or S Sa/eo l a it w = o 72 s i °a I _ 1-Q W a M � o> Q a Z Ap m w a d - -F-7 o I swzzd i sw^ I n — F------ I I J I — w z 0 e oz/ro/to aaivaan dad _ _ sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o auaw#.r�da� aan a~warr Aa S0117W3H0S Asa` wab vp j v . wo 4 s a�xia.iaN suaum a.c3isama,m3uoNsN SD`X31 090P01SlN01171S1311NN7d3100 2 IISI8H3 sndaoo jo Aijo w a '= n ' _ _ 213WWMd == V6Z06T#Nd AID " _¢ ==w Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 N NOLLdIaO53O AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d d�530 AB 3_W 'ON NOI 1— [V r nnaN3ov %BP Sa/fia l a oL 72❑ L3 T' oT ❑ Y ❑ ��" _' 3 O a p �n 72 �❑ - mom❑ �° s o��❑ dam❑ �89 'T— ��❑ r- ❑ �T "� pL❑ &o `L❑ d� a =T UL3 a T p s a� as o�so r r p I I � Li 5 Lj 3 ILJ 4 3 J LJ �lR Ll L, Li 4 IL sg gI �I IL 0 IL T o I I Z 0 co Li Li Li u Li u as �w — ,qH a as 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn m� _ sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o auaw#.r�da� aan.wa"r Ae me��' � ¢ _? wab vp j SlIY130l3NYdY0bOS a w o 4 s a�xi a.iaN�suaum a.c 3is ama,m 3uoNs N SD`X31 0901#0I Sl N011V1S ldll N21Hd 3100 2 AOIL IISI8H3 sndaoo jo Aijo 213WtAMdqp == V6Z061#Nd A110 Sa1Vd3N N011V1S1d11301MA110 N NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N =77 ON NOISIn3tl [V r nnaN3ov %BP S Sa/fia l a mo a o C] Z U � a a N r U U U h H Zp > 0 0 r r ¢ Z Z a 5 a a K K F F F F 0 K K K K F F F F b y 3 5 O O O O z a a a a r r r r Q a a a < < a a > > > > o 0 0 0 0 > > > > a a a a a a a a a a p. Y a w o 0 J a a a z U m o 0 O U ¢ z z LU W U U d d z U K K y N Y Y Z Z LL LL Q O O Z Z W W W w a a O ❑ a Q 0. 000000. 0000 0000 z z z z z z z z z z r Z Z z z z J W ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ 0 0 w z a Jm n 10 - QY CO �. SO _ r a W Z 0-1 co ® ® U (if 0 J l Z o a o L -1 d U u o Q c� — K 2 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn dar sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� aan.war Ae me��' � ¢ ? dand_ Sl@'130�3N7d lod1N0,o 41 0o gb vpz= a x,N.NN,,d o3 0 3,s a,a,N 3voNs N SVX31 wo pow y3a D901#OISl N011V1S 1dIl NNHd 3�00 — IISI8HO sndaoo jo Aiij wa '= 213WWf17d =Y�=J b6Z06T#Nd A110 N + _¢ w qp Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N =77 ON NOISIA3tl [V r nnaN3 OV %BP S Sa/fia l a 5 C] N VI _ O � K _ — 72 W o ¢a no W M 0. 4E tl� Wj Ell swore WN Nd31 .1 YJ13HGN Ll ❑ 3 j ❑ 3 O Z ❑ � — Z � p ❑ O J W d U d amp Do �m 6mF - Do 0 go 3o z IO Z Z C iZ O O� w� p O 9lOZ/bl/£0�a3ltlNdn m� _ _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da3S3l(103H0S �sr� N . =m web vpz=v a�x,N.�NN,�,d�o3�o.�3,sa�,a,N�3voNSN SDX31 - wo 0901#OISl NOIIVIS1311YHVcl3100 0 Z AOIL IISI8H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ 213WtAMdqp == V6Z061#Nd A110 _¢ = w Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 N NOLLdl21�534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N =77 ON NOISIA3tl [V r nnaN3ov %BP Sa/fia l a it w 0 72 s a U U � z z w (D w w w K = g o a a a w o d Q a ¢ Q a a a a a ¢ z o a a a a u v u LL a W N a N � w N s w LU Q (p (p F Z R R O O N V V. tk tk tk © N N N v m F 52 F QJQ kl W 0 F O O fir. z 7 is r r wJ.......................................... W z w = o r © w w z Lu d i z a A A N w 3 N 0 pavv M M Q a LL r a LL r ti ti J J d 2 2 z z z O U N a 0 w a a a a a m ¢ m r g W ~ Q z w w 0 0 o Q z 8 J a Ua 0 0 ¢ ¢ ¢ O r W ¢ m ¢ m ¢ ¢ U ? LL a (� 5 § N N N N N N Q r � g 0 w w 0 D m d J J J J J m o w w w w w W m o g Z a a a i i J wf z d m J J a a J a a a [/�] c� w w Q w J K K J K iI = Cn �Il F a i z z i z z z V a d a a Lu w a s a a a J o w g w ZN .... ........ ...... w N _ _ nN iV < w N N N fA r r M M ILR i 2z J r Q w p � 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn dad _ sa�lnaas 5uuaau16 u3 �o auaw#.r�da� aan.war Ae me SlIY130 �sr� ¢ � �w v . Cl g=m Wgep�ry ecxi waN�suaumia.cais ama-Ni auoNSN $D`),'31 D901#OISl N011V1S 1dIl NNHd 3100 _ IISI8HO sndaoo jo Ail.o w a 213WWf17d == V6Z061#Nd A110 " _¢ = w SaIVd3N NO11V1S 1d11301MA110 to NOLLd121O53O AE 31W '"I NOISI ON NOI1— [V r nnaN3ov %BP S Sa/fia l a it w o _ < Q U /\ f W O U a - �7— ado .f U r7 G N (uroallo33s)wnwiNin,ef 1J (A?JNNlild(INf VI NIIN,Bb w\ 'NIA „9�: a a wLD .� z; o EA p o ^ CL Y c — ` — wxS Z = — U y ZLVs U J z ffi U .bz - (C-4 o o 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn e sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 P JuaLuPDdaQ a £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a315193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i0E eue ro.b• - re e e � - li 111j5Ndto)I OIL U;W11111131015 N SDX31 inonm 311s NI o us�aH� snd2lo� Jo A110 sot#ai s�Noilvls l�n amn�alNno� o M 219WWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU AM "I ~ SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAlI:) NOIIdI 3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISWtl NOIldld— A9 11 IN N01113d F HnUNIOUV WlV �Z 60 l G i w U' S w w 0 N Q oLL ? of a o N J u S G d 1 h S ao�z o = 0� - �o OLO a w cOfi U - , . w o 3mi . a �z J w m o k - D ? m a LL - w _ iLL z J - -�w? - �0 0 0 wr z a w �� .moo _ 992. Tw w ow z Q d-e-v see e0--ADD amNnG3 � ems--ADD 0 o p O 5a G� i Lj _ 4 o QG�Nm W x • O � 1 55 m u, 'AS GAS—GAS 4`GAS GAS=GAS,Z{]55 GA -� /—'=�' '�^ GAS��--GA- � y 3H0 ss rv� �n_ rv� wi ws w�I w� ws WJ/dp/DZ O H� rc 3 �ws u { ego GZOZ/Ll/L :631ticdfl saOti�aS 6uuaau,6u3 JO auawPDdad a - £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a315193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i0E Y e -- - aun u,e� - xe sx e s<«1,111j5Ndto3l OIL 3 S a, o.,e11111310N3 N SD'X31 Nb'ld N011110W30 NI `� _ "'p IlSldHJ S(1daoi to Ally £SOT#OISl NOI1V151dI18f113Ab1Nf10J M 219WWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f0U IklIJ ply ~ °=x SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3(11AA D N0IIdI3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISINtl NOIlEld— 31 N N-1A3dW F WnaN3aav W 60 l =4 e � a " a i O Y p w o o ° ` o J I 1 3: z L a > z Z 0 s F- r w w i u t2 s W how w e w --------- .� � Gov r aw r� 7,2 - _ a o 0 w w - s - j - Z o a _ _ - - z 01 - gLl \ F _ w' D S'D ® 0 �o) w N n Z � It !I � IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIISI w �@�� Q t - J e "fin b =�l / o v`ae N E U o Q �f O 7Y E S SS s sLd e� SS/S/ GAS GAS GAS 'GAS GAS GAS G GAS - •, o \ 11/555 S `� 0 _ nJ�rvf n3 Nf rvJ/ NB 0 /i 9Z0Z/£L/9 631Vll. sa�ti�a5 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawa�odad a - £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a31;193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i0E e -- - aun u,e, - xe sx e � m .11Ndto, OI3l;a,,a3N3aoNSN SDX31 1N3W3�02idW1311S k"` m o IISRIHJ S(1daoJ 1� d11J £SOT#OI Sl NOIIVIS iJll enl:)A211NnOJ o b91NWMd 2�d b6Z06Z #1J3f0 IklIJ ~ az =y SblVd3b NOliV1S 1311 3GIMAlID N0IIdI3— F8 3Ltl0 'ON NOISINtl NOIlEld— A9 31W 'ON N-113d F INnUN3QOV My 9Z/60 vtN Y m N $ w d Lo w p O w LLj 0 lz_ > p 2 � j J Z C U 0 Ld W C, n tz 7, 31 u ' - a - - K a ® W >LLj _ = s o Q z _ 8 ss.s� 1 w w W 1� 55 O O O E O DO O<D DO y o - '� o �.o J FM Q O w 55 III -SS O .... S SS .. gl Qaw •\ 55 - _ - 5 u a 1f SS s `�� _ 11J Ni Ni NB NUMB N�4 55 tz �Wa O is�o-,aa SZOZ/6l/9 :O31VOdf) _-T. saDtijas 6uuaau'bu3 �o auawa�odad ]03 STV130 N000 H01l131X3ONV 3JN33 31R°"'°'°"°'""'°°" SVX31 £SOT#01 Sl NOIIVIS1311 8f113 Ab1Nf1v ° 11S1dHJ S(1daoi to A110b91NWMdb6Z06Z #1J3fO2�d I�lIJSblVd3b NOIlV1S1311 3G1AA NO1-1-S30 F8 31tl0 'ON NOISWtl N011E1d— A9 3lW IN N051A3d 2HACN3aaV WlV 9Z/6C, l - w 0 - N Wz- H _ � Q 3 - j W o Z. C� _Z H W O U I� Z g Q d o Z o W Z S H D U jj { N 0 TAM 13NPo mW ,L N 1� U o iitl r� 1 � ii � i 1 C) a II l 1 I LLJo al l� �1 �� jib L I J{_,..,,1 W �; { CD t Ul z "7 Tlmqq '1 w X W it 1illl III 111 i 1 ICI II1 ^�{. , 4 i I 'I 1 il, 11 lip SZ6Z/S/6 631v13dn saDmjaSs a ___= : \ �s a saoj Es#o g m23 a gema mmso9mam mm // \± §\ ƒ A3MMd V6ZO I #1]f U AM )| E \ . S Id]u N OIl 1 1 m ]OIMAiO a ; § ` ON : w/\a :z(,! \\ \ \ W \ \ \ _\ - \ ` / \ \ \ \ \ \ 9 / \ \ \ci \ \ \ \ / _ - _ _ %/ : : / j � d - « / / //§ Z - « » / dC,I= S \ d/ � } , ® . . . . \ ° \ LO • _ 0-! o r 2 § � \ �u _ O 2 ) ° _ < \ \ ^� * w \ o s \ 3- 0 )�~ -3 \ - \{ < /( amp» saDmAsa ___= », � ,«f,= soemam mm j± © ®_%=w _ gse� sna�oj g �Ia Es#o g m23 agema mm _ \\ d} A3MM V6ZO I #1]f Ud kilD . SId]uNOIl 1 1 m ]OIMAiO a ; § ` ON wis wa : ,_� u: \§ � ! r / b § \ � � Z lz _ | j \ !� / < � ° KL � � \ - - _ _ - \\ \ ^ � ( 1 /6/9 » saoin�aS buuaau16u3 �o �uaw�afldap N011D3S(INV NVId NOIlV4Nf103 OHLewneld 03—si D3e 3-1 sass'...... xI UN wSIMID SO,!— OIL-'w,e arunaeoeS N oo Sb'X31 1N3Wdin'0310?IiNOJ 21040 5F a _ IlSRIH.O sncia00 d° AIIJ ESOL#01 Sl Nouvis 1311 ani:)AUNnOD 213WWfYld == V6Z06Z #103FOU kill f' Sbldd3b N011b1S 1311 3alMAil: NO JR3J534 18 3H0 IN N0151�3d NOIJ I2Y— AE 31F0 'ON N111— e OraN3aw �xw ezoz/e'e Wf1aN3QOF/ HMS 4Z 60 l U .8 w w Z5 �g�>as'SFN w F U N O 11 HE Z_ Oa z O i ° S z m U� wLL x W Qw x LL wa J w U//) > w w z ti LL U Z F F 00 Z 3�Z W z w O O F F m Z ¢ mw O Q O w F U J O LL W° I I �O O o��J 1� NIW =z Q fop aa O.,L f ,�9'�� Q uoLLiz oo¢ v F¢ 8 0 N p a ow x p Q F F Z Q Z W Z W Q oU > QZw J W m Q z >W z¢a O Q F U Z W a d d J Z w Q m O w QW� =UZ F Z W W = W U F Z NU- O z o .01 LL w L ~Z W U =Z Z Z w w Q a w LLw W ~O Z j W LL D �D N zo a'� wz wa¢ F U w Ul K Q U W m W a M x w D ° z ry z i. Qw ° W a ° 1z J J z z pw O a w a 10, Z O w O O a \ UO9 O � cl OLLNLL CC-4 w ,A-,£ „9-,LL „C-,E U Z LL � m a Y If w w w �p 0 a O CD m m J F w W w W a w o gO n z'O Z a W a aP 0 O W z i9 Wuj l'.vt V�U LL T Jm 3w= z U S F d O Z D .00 O U w GZOZ/LZ/R :mivud1 _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� we aan.war�a me�� � ¢ _? - s - - - NV7d311377OIN1J373 a SVX31 o p' ax,N.IVN,,do3o 3, a,a,Nl3voNSN eeoals7Nouvisi�nanro aiNnoo z w i1S18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ a w 213WtAMdqp == VK061#Nd AID =W IYMAJ i+ ShcVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d-30 7 3_W 'ON NOISn3a r nnar�aav PIBP SZ/SO/60 l a njz N ozz irw 4 o w LLOLL o =N o= =�o �w W _ — �� - �ju - _ _ ❑ a Sao - 8 S 2 , - - sw v w wH w oLL msLL_o_ w _Had oAS! w_d _ - U � Z j m - N 1 DEii Ali m t II - - L: �� w I oNFo�= w Q ryl Y oozo�� I O -o N II I - I I - I I I I II z I I - I n II R II I II I Y < 9i 'Ll, � Z o \ W LLJ w ❑ w i 4� Z 9�nZib�i£o:a3��dn sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� we aan.waver Ae me�� � ¢ _? Nb'�d N0111706ll30 1Y0R110313 a W o - p�� a/xi a.iaH�suaumia c3/s ama,Ni 3uoHs N $D`X31 E901#al Sl NOI1H1S llll B(1 YJ,tb1Nn00 2 w 11SAH3 snwoo jo A113 _ a =U ___ 213WWf17dqP == VKOK#Nd 20 p U = SUIVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W 'ON NOISIn3tl �� r nnaraaav "or SZ/Sa/fia l a W dim —go aeon Doi W}d o i wLL ■] 5�� U 911 to to in ag Na Z — — — — — n m A 8y gyp_ SI — _ w� SWIT SS on , O w M" —lip AN jR± A ?a v log HIT - �_ � O IT log 'ode ah g- i d? aco O S Ow O O O = O O O O O LL U GO ut _U S d d L n O HSL -d \HSL � Z O w U sw HT \ W J= in e/oz/ro//to:a3ivaan sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� we aan.waver as me�� � ¢ ? N77d N011170MG ON11H017 pa,xi a.IaN,s,aumia c3is ama,m 3uoNs N $D`X31 E901#0l SlNOI1H1SllllB(1YJ,tb1Nn00 2 w i1S18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ a 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd AID � 'zw L, = Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N°Ild-30 7 3_W 'ON NOISn3a r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l a Izm 52 CL w o W I — 0. o Lu L.I.A � z s Ut v o w L J = o wo J. .I C2 72 II in — — LL — O 3f j w b o w� _ = o - Z J J o Lj LIj a Z\ _ O 9�nZib�i£o:a3��dn _ uaumia sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�daN we aan.waver Ae me�� � ¢ _? 9010H6 N011110W301V0R110313 a a�xi a.iaN�s c3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N SVX31 E901#al Sl NOI1H1S llll B(1 YJ,tb1Nn00 2 w IIS18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ a w 213WWf17dqp == VK061#Nd AID M p _ Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W 'oN NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W 'oN NOI5 r nnaN3ov "or S Sa/eo l tL LL Nzo — p ys W oa OO Q Om O OO O O Ooz. O Oz O O ma 0 0. C o \\ U LLJ - p m� o � U LLJ o ti Q W Ld r W -- p O < W e�oz/roe/to aaivaan _ a.IaN�sfdumla sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luawl.r�daN we aan.waver as me�� � ¢ _? NC7d1N3W3A02idW1311S770Ri10373 a W o - p a�xi c3is ama,m 3uoNs N sD`X31 E901#OI Sl NOI1H1S kill B(1 YJ,tb1Nn00 2 w ils18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ a 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd AID v p _ Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d-30 7 3_W 'ON NOISn3a £NnON30ntl %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l a - a �.¢ wm o wpm sad C7 N - - - - o La t o Z �S,� - 3 w ✓� -w �n cY ✓� L LLI —La � z - 3 w m z m� o Z wo =z< O o o O 0 o _ 0 a w U1 U7 g z z z z z�sz z z� z z� z� o 0 0� 0 1� 0 OOOO G(D O O O O O� 0 O� O N) U S z� d d L n d� 3LL o�w O L L INS'. f wm J 0 0 o _ m � � m 0-3-3 Ynd - 3—_ o - —-33— -33 w a 3N0'aO I r ONUSI%3 01 a O oI Z-dWnd s � mV3e iaoddns eood'3NOs' - -- - 0 C s—dwnd 3 U Z �3J U Z� \ Sx O \ _� � W I aj 9�nZib�i£o:N31�dn sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� we aan.waver Ae me�� � ¢ _? SNVId 9NIIH91I a a.iaN suaumia c3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N SVX31 E901#al Sl NOI1H1S llll B(1 YJ,tH1Nn09 2 w IIS18H3 sndao9 jo Aii9 _ a 213WWf17dqp VK061#Nd AID W. _ + Salb'd3N N0IlV1S 1311301MA110 § to NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W 'ON NOISIn3tl �� r nnaN3aav "or SZ�Sa/fia l 4 • a 0 o w m< n a w � � O Z = xa W o m z , o O C000000 wm s O m3 � o a 0 — 9 K- g g g Z $ xx CD J J >W LJ J 3 \ 21^ Q r - J V � 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn _ � sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�daN we aan.waver Ae me�� � ¢ _? N01103S IVOI711-0313 a pa�xi a.iaN�suaumia c3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N $D`X31 E901#al SlNOI1H1SllllB(1YJ,tb1Nn0� 2 w IIS18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ a 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd AID _ Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W 'ON tl-1 3tl r nnaraaav "or S Sa/fia l a M. o' 2 a w H o M � w a N EL s a m UUJ v, 3 c� 4 e i w o ----- - - -- - - — - -- - - - - �w W� m 3 / O U o N ua — U Of W QU\ 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn _ � sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 3o Iuawl.r�daN we aan.waver Ae me�� � ¢ _? SNOI1Vi1313 N01810313 N W o - p a�xi a.iaN�suaumia c3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N SVX31 E901#al Sl NOI1H1S llll B(1 YJ,tb1Nn00 2 w IIS18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ a 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd AID p _ Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W 'ON tl-1 3tl r nnaN3aav "or S Sa/fia l M. w ■7 ti��� U a _ ocn z w 3- z o U — w — a OU O OO OOO O O w 0. U ut _U S d ¢ d L n OOP _ __ _ Z Z U L< 33 E�-� a — �F V V'J 3 3 so IT I o��ozx w c 3 3L9 .4 O 3 O LU J w �3 - � w � w U5 W S " L,W '" _ _ J J W W / O \ 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�daN we aan.waver Ae me�� � ¢ _? WYN9Y103�VI7-3No l7JINlo3l3 a W o - a�xi a.IaN sudum i a c3is ama,m 3uoNs N sD`X31 E9ol#ol sl Nouvisljll8(1 r AH-tNnoo 2 w ils18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ a 213WWMd =Y�=J VK061#Nd AID _ + C) � Salb'd3N N0IlV1S 1311301MA110 § to NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W 'ON NOISIn3tl r nnaN3OV "or S Sa/fia l a e-day o z a NN110 L -- --------- ----- z IN � I � I r x LLTw¢ 1 11= OJo I i I �w I I �— N I IA tl1j8/4d l/An£Z NVi lSnisviodn AK3 �n L J dZ/Ob I Z Nvj a3Mal9 d£/b'C9 o l Ntl3 i i a3Mol9 II Sind 36A8 l-1 aNI. li f-' I aV3Ha3/•o Vnd SCI dlNON nd L'll w dove LL i o d£/Voss i O3 sai dVo ,emu, do/Voss I li =iTl� L-------- I i I L ON T,' I I i vtd cm n L i I dJW o dN'nd L'll 1 w L—JLLJ - O 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o luawl.r�daN we aan.waver Ae me�� � ¢ _? Z}o{133HS 2011VYV3HJS IV3RI1J3U N O - ' a�xi a.iaN�suaum i a c3is ama,m 3uoNs N SVX31 E901#al Sl NOI1H1Sllll B(1YJ,tb1Nn0� 2 =u, i1S18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio w_ci 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd AID =W IYMAJ R LO i+ ShcVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W 'ON tl-1 3tl r nnaraaav "or S Sa/fia l M. cn O 0 .a 3 S W Lt H NJ O Z K — W C9 — Z �z Q �o U w EE O EE O El G� �� oG }U Es E� F — J ■ = ■ rc ■ ■� 0 Z Q ■ U d oT - a o a J a� I� ■ _� ,� �I I �I o� G= wd a�m o e�oz/roe/to:a3ivaan a S z; l� �s "a \ ` \\m»zz m at e,�zm37Am » 20 \jm �\ Aqg#Nd20 \2 \ \ ~ / qlq a N@1 a 21]E7#O ) \ \ .__ _ * • § �i \\pop oil \ � \\ \ / » _ \1t !° / ) ) \ � 2 e � � \ 2 § § sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o auaw#.r�da� we aan.waver as me�� � ¢ _? 911VI30�3N7d lod1N00 dand a N - p $D`X31 E901#OI Sl NOI1H1S llll B(1 YJ.ld1Nn00 2 =u, IIS18H3 sndaoo jP Aiio _ a =ci ___ 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd AID p _ Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d-30 7 3_W 'ON NOISn3a r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l a A�isna�w}� o wall J w oo a a ¢ R U V p�2p� 2 F2 0 Lu LLJ U U U y v p z U U z z r z z i P P P © a © 3 fi a a a a a a a a a z z z a U P P 4 P P P P P P P P 8 PpP w w = � w z z ~ rc a Q p x x x w w rc rc & 3 w ® © CUB? QQ d ¢ a c ¢ a a < 3 QQ 33Q R 5R 5 5 5 S 5 5 5 Q S 5 3� 4 _ FV tQi d S 7 y N 7 7 ? B a a g ] S S g g g g g g g S S 9 - U U} d d ( d d h H H ( Q © O 4 Y � � H d ( ( H H d ( 4 d Q d ( H O L � N d � w m w F F 9 LL LL 5 g a J o z z �_ 2 2 [] U w w a d a P r3 p 9 p P w w w a ¢ w w W w a Nr� y N N F F 9 Z W P O 9 H 7 w w x w & z z u ¢ ¢ d a s a a a a a r1 a a P oo on o a o on o 0 6 o a 0 a On On a a On On a o n a o 0 o On a 0 0 K3 ry �5 p� ry p� :41 o p�o ❑ r❑ �° J W J❑ z In" � � a❑ d ❑ Y ❑ m 3 0 s J }d F J Z c -it 1 _ a - 0 o F-- - - - - o - � w e�oz/roe/to aaivaan sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�daN we aan.war Ae me�� � ¢ ? N.�NN,s 7o�3,s-a�,a,N�3voNs N SVX31 93l(103HoS 1YJRi1o3u N E901#al Sl NOI1H1SllllB(1YJ,tb1N11O� 2 =u, ils18H3 sndaoi jo Aiio _ a w_ci 213WWMd =Y�=J VK061#Nd AID _ + C) � Salb'd3N N0IlV1S 1311301MA110 � to N0LLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON N0ISIA3N N0lld N3530 AB 3_W 'ON tl-1 3tl r nnaN3 GV %BP S Sa/fia l a o _ M. w C U 3 3 o z U cn w o a J � < 3 n m o m x m a m a a m a m x x m a m a U Q O >> S a mm p ww m F r z � NJ I as 0 = gYN N N N Uo < < oZQ� � " wow a z �w f U yF zt~n t~nh O Zy y N t j a w 2 0 2 ~ K U U N 2 W W z w> W W Q ¢ f2 f2 K ❑U U to w Q J w tt K ao � ¢ � o W J O oE z rc ZQZ O ¢ o a a o o a 8 O a a a a a w o N OQ ry a a a a a > > > >z z Q > > > > > O O y 2 U d N N N O N w Q i i Ul O x F mt m w U UX U UO U(>oa U(>oo U ao Uo Us z¢ 2 U U UO F U 53 N Z ry U ry y O � Z Q LL' W Z f7 N W X w 5 5 o ¢ Y Y x W a 2 U w a a ¢ a tw ¢ ¢ F w w z Q Q Q Q o w Q Q 7 z y U o w N N M < rc � y N y Z s uUi j O O a 0 uUi Z s O y O O O U N y N rn 4z F U rn F �n O o f o o z z z W LL o 0 0 0 ° mwo m w o o w z > z z z w o o z U U o 'a z U o 3 o o o 0 o rc � � o O o w o 0 o a o 0 0 0 0 o } P a . � � w w w w, ti w Q Q ti ,w w Q w Q Q w, O lw w w w w w w w w U U w w w U w < Z Z Z U w U O Z N y y N ~ f7 N f7 N Q Q Q y U U U U U U U U U K U OLL s _ s O O O O O O O O w O O Q F U F U F U F U ¢ rc O o rc O O O rc zo y C C C C ti ti ti ti ti O ti ti ti ti ti z z z z z w w z z z w z w w z z z z 'a a z U U U 'a a y N rn m y O O O O O rn O O O O O z O F U U U U U z¢ O O U U U O U o O U o y O O O O K rc U U rc K U U O O O U rc O O O O O F O O O o 0 o O r ¢ ¢ ¢ a F F F F F F F o F O O O F o w N N OZ m R q n �q NN R F9 R 9l0Z/bl/£0�a31tl4dn sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�daN we aan.waver as me�� � ¢ _? S71713a l7oltllo3l3 a - p a�xi a.IaN�suaum i a c3is ama,m 3uoNS N sD`X31 E9ol#ol Sl Nouvisjin Hn7o AH-tNnoo 2 =u, ils18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ a w_ci 213WtAMd == VK061#Nd AID zw IiY1J i+ ShcVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d-30 7 3_W 'ON NOISn3a r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l a z w\ 4s� m z_ a J u� CD O o n Q O X a om m LL� LLJ 3v3s sA3 J= I i -J m - J z 18 \ W o 0 0 W rK o 0 0 so O o 000 X 00o p] v'- F o 0 o VI 2 0 0 ® ® ZD ZJ o Q = o00 Zc, O O v J Q CCD v Q� cv J L LLJ U N - _ 15 Lu Q LD Z \ - O d - 0 \ O z m J adz 9lOZ/bl/£0�031tl4dn _ sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o auaw#.r�da� cww�s aan.war Ae me�� � ¢ _? - - - - SIIYl3o 9 sWCa97Io'3Ino3Hos IYJINVHS3W a SVX31 o - a�x,N.IVN,�,d�o31o�3,�a�,a,N13voNSN eeo��alslNouvisi�nanro,�aiNnoo z IISI8H3 Sndaoi Jo Aijo 219WWMd == VK061#Nd AID U -- Salb'd3N N0IlV1S 1311301MA110 NOLLd121O53O AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W ON NOI l— r nnaN3 OV %BP S Sa/fia l a mo a M. - z '15 mw 3 i 3 ti s $� IN LJ e z n 0 I_ E ba F— E_ U W J Q JI IL r Z Q 2 � W O � z4 _ o GN moo? z� Gig W O wx LLo Y = W o Z � Q U = W 0 F— H Z m W _. _ d U t CIO < x = W W J C' z W Z N g 0 W Q� n2 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn -T. e. sa�wag 6uuaau�bu3 �p auawa�odad - µn6'ryeu'b, - .> e e ¢ fLd a39w F,WNH a3a31;193a 3d01 911 3—L9E w - o o 3;a,,a3N 3aoNs N SVX31 lnonm 3115 NI IlSRIH� S(1d210� �o dll� 090T#OISINOIlb'1S1J112MSN-A2viniW M _ - b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU AM �I SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3(11MAiD X NONd rSM 19 31tl0 'ON NOISWtl NOIIEld— AA 3lW 'ON NOGIAM 8 WaaN3aM I Wltl I 9Z/601 L on 9 WaaN3aatl VnV 4Z/OL Z ® LCAw Z w 2 I wLL z k�_ z 3 3 c _ 9 - V2 OH �_ E 0 8�6Fglk` Q OHEa a H C- I - _ _ loln m y3 _ O LQ 2 0 - zw , � Fw 6O OO w O I� HO 3HO 3H0 — 3H0 — 3H0 3H0— _ w =II N! rv.i/dIO/OI a \ w SS%OA/Ol O SS ss ss� �s �3153. — m < - - � LLJ � L - O WE II[, CZ9S5 ON J'SV 1 NJ9 CH i eI YI owl "ronvN S3l>1bH0 30 yy* L1a a zO� �Xa ' Ld OHE = — — � a o OHE w — OHc OHE OHE C Ot�i. Xu�i _ O - J W Ic o m • - lia- � Q uq _ n � Ll to o kdd � � a - w a L �oaS� o> o 0 o o� of o vIHO P,'3 r3 HO (J 3HO 3H0 3HO 3H0 0 m 0 u oz m Nf �Z `BLOC LOC \ LOC IF ro� ig a m S ss ss ss ss�r 55 O 55 SS SS- ss/dx�/o� - o, 4 ss/e�n/al �41! - w x GZOZ/L/OL 631tladn _ saDtijaS buuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdad a ex-3 a3ewnN waN aaa3sl�sa saes szsasss'cse cv «I;IaNSNto,io 3;'n,,,a313aoNSNoos SV'X31 NV1dN011110W30 vo 090LH 41 Sl NOIlV1S ljll 2131S3f A21VlIlIW o M CJ `Y_LL3 IlSldHO Snda00 to A110 b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f0U IklIJ Sblb'd3bNOIldlSlJll3alMAllD A W NONdI 3— F8 3— ON NOISWtl NOILAItlO530 A9 3W ON NOGIAM 4 Wr1aN30aV F, 3Z/60 l w - C _ W - - — o zy , �.. 6, ,WNm z w 0 u u U o� Lwl \ � o Li i0-.[ F.O-.[ TFO-,6, „9-,! 7F 9-,Y of 2 u � 0 I h d M z N J O LLs w h i6 m SZOZ/SL/9 :631VOdn sa ___= �almmea«s j± }/ :_ ; s a� snaaoj g �Ia o m e g m 23 a ram s-a2:w \$ } (ƒ) A3MMdV6ZO I #1]f Ud kilD )§ ( ) - S Id]u N OIl 1 1 m ]OIMkiO a ; § ` ON wa w :z: ,_M : $ - .w : : .e - Li: o a \ j \ I.. s » \ � vi 2 z j 0 k j� ,lz� F. !t \(¥ ! »� 05, • w . . .« - \ t , /, . : , » \| ! ) w® z. _ ��}k �/� \ \ §z�\ k \ \} \ \ \ \ �)\k2 ~_ t /¥ _ )§\f )_ ;®§§ 2§} ®_ - !�$!§ ]!A 2$ I `) \ - GZOZ/BL/S » � bs a -LuP°= sows a,mmwm«; j±}/ \ m _ :_ ; s a� snaoj g �Ia o m e g m 23 a ram s-a2:w \$ } (ƒ) A3MMdV6ZO I #1]f U AM )§ ( ) - S Id]u N OIl 1 1 m ]OIMkiO a ; § ` ON : wa w :z: ,_M } w2� _ : : s . �|■ \� M U � „ ■[ : _ `\ � : \ j T! !} T \ « \ ! §(§ z 52/ ■ � ( z - \f f! %o -r § \ ld �: �N y!� way - 4%@ kk2§B 2 & ■ �A U) - % '\ \\\ ? }\) \ j ( / G \\\ / \ q\o 00 ( �� SZOZ/Z/6 _� � s a ___= �ywgln j±}/ \ m _ :_ ; s a� sna�oj g �Ia o m e g m 23 a ram s-a2:w \§ } ( �� V6ZO I #1]f Ud �O )§ ( ) - S Id]u N OIl 1 1 m ]OIM O a ; § ` ON = wid- ,_M \ \ j \ j \ jj } jjjjjj /- «j - \ / _ - /» §§:-\tK± >t}\§ § »/} 2 \ « �\/ . � . tz w�w � \ O d ®mod~ o—0 7 . — — — — � � }- ƒ 2 ° \} / e \ . - - � -3HO- _~ y , . - \ w �\ :2s` , ,�, , _ \ � » a�= _ SaDIAJaS 6uuaaui6u3 ?uawpoda4 w�^�"�'� Jt8LX1tl I1SIHH]Sfld'd0]a30IL 31i30A A3NIl3HOH59N 00 Sb'X31 NVId i �c '=' �:p=� NOUVEIJIIlOiS3f-AdVlIIIW °' iisiaHo gnyaoO 10 Aiij 213WWfl"ld _= V6Z06L #103 FOU AID gw SbIVd321 N011b'1S 1311 301MA11J NO-83S30 M 3M ON NOISI NOI 83S30 a aw ON NOISIMS i NOON300tl 5202/S/8 G L 8 G E � f � a � a W L J OZ L J W a.UILL C7 ri 30 ti E � Of f � a W F 1 1 0 LL- 3 SZOZ/LZ/O :031vcidn a�= _ SaDIAJaS 6uuaaui6u3 ?uawpoda4 N w�^�"�'� Jt8LX1tlI1SIHH]Sfld'd0]a30IL31i30AA3NIl3HOH59N00 Sb'X31 NVId i 5c '=' �:p=� NOUVEIJIIlOiS3f-AdVlIIIW g�v iisiaHo gnyaoO 10 All, 213WWfl'ld _= V6Z06L #103 f021d A110 ~ N w W gwFw SbIVd321 NOliV1S 1311 301MAil € NO-83S30 M 3M ON NOISI NO-83S30 a aw ON NOISIMS i NOON300tl 5202/S/8 L S G 0.61 U 0 O z O Z¢ d WDO U 1 p N N W W} F W O @ F W, N X a #O Y #On cef WF #W O r\IF F 012 K Q �O N _ — �t-Iflf — 4E I-I - -1_ flf_ 1-4 k- 1-1 — Oz FTF �.�I_I -W� � � LU wxz a >o Qw TIT k ffi fk t a LL W T1 T FT I 1 x 0 w F ❑S U Z g O 91 _ w �W x K p� u �F 4 U O �a nF 0•,6l SZOZ/LZ/O :431tlddn =t SaDIAJaS 6uuaaui6u3 )o ?uawpoda4 ewnN well a3a33s1�e 3ae3I erse ssecse M =., a;Qo ona�z3tlusluN�snaam ou3is'wie 3Nn3eons Noo SVX31 NOIlJ3S j z �c ' ' �:p NOUVEIJIIlOiS31-AdVlIIIW °' IlS21H� Sl1d210O 10 A16� 213WWfl"ld _= V6Z06L #103 FOU AID gw SbIVd321 N011b'1S 1311 301MA11J 401 83S30 M 3M ON NOISIA3N NOIWINO530 a 3100 ON NOISII i NOON300tl SL02/S/8 �8 s G A-.6 W U W p U W O yy Z U F Li I I_I I I—I I I pp 3 — J1 w II V �y W E � �x00 0 U 1{1 �= Y 30 3 Q°m I pq .11 ui W :III W Q ui k 0, �pLL f III f LO p �z 1 l O m k � �a 0 k � om om #� � kU .--. III III {R. III IIIII IY U as IIIII III m r 1 Oz O �� aZ =w A ow w U0 ki 4 fl U ka k1 f l Li II IIIIIIIIII�I SZOZ/LZ/O a31vadn ww, _ SaDIAJaS 6uuaaui6u3 )o ?uawpoda4 w�^ w oes�xltliisiuH�snaema3occ 3i�3o��e�arun3eoHs9N oo $�yX31 NOUDIS z �9 - I1S121H,7 S11d210,7 10 A11,7 NOUVEIJIIlOiS31-AdVlIIIW s _- 213WWfl"ld gw _= V6Z06L #103 FOU AID SbIVd321 N011b'1S 1311 301MA11J NO-83S30 M 31W ON NOISI NO-83SW a aw ON NOISIMS i NOON300tl SL02/S/8 „0",£Z O 00 0.Z U = = W W O Q yy Z_ m �, m L w 9 W x V 0 y �OO O 4 !� Z� Z Z a o 4 f _ w V Q w m a °z O W WOf Of U / V C? �❑ _ = 1,1111E � O O OW �� W _ _ N U W aalll llJlL==` O OF� aZ y Of C n 0' W n,n x0 F U # ❑❑ O Z F ## Q Z = O Q m K SZOZ/LZ/8 03rvadn a _ _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� �.we msn.�r�mxs mcu � ¢ _� - - NVId NOlInOPY3O a wO _ a�xi a.iaN�suaumia.c 3is ama,Ni NOOS SVX31 0901#O1 S1 N011 y1S llll 7S N31S3PIAHVI IlIDV ,< lit IISI8H3 SndaOo Jo Aijo _� w 213WWf17d == VK061#Nd AID to J Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 13113O1MA11O s NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W 'oN NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'oN NOISIn3tl N r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l ^� b a Ism irw��m a - nML9'ZL 303 w�" X ■] F 5.^ _ X � Q X x a x � X nLL 72 x� x 3NIl3dld Sd`J X 5 wo X / X X o w X x x N LLg� a X T 0 o- x ?noU 79 4a � wo \ "X Q z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9n3 9 3 X � \ O x - - - - E X x X x w xo _ - X X X x �U� x Z aaaoa O r J 3 O - X 111 X � wE X - J a Q o - lh X w� U f u = x W — w w X ~O - Ep o X — X X X X X X X <�� — _ — z s o EC-0 e�oz/roe/to a3Lvaan a -� sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� �.we msn.�r�mxs m�cu ¢ 3010Hd N011170H30 Wo a�xi a.iaN�suaumia c3is ama,Ni 3uoNSN SD`X31 0901#01S1 N011 y1Sldll 1S 2131S3f/.12iH11lIDV ,< IlSI8H3 sndaoo jo Aijo 213WWf17d == ' qp b6Z061#Nd A110 W N Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 s NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N353O AB 3— �'ON NOISIn3tl N r nnaN3 OV "or S Sa/fia l ^� b a Ism W V 0 a U i 0 U � Q U U J f� � 5 O Vkl Q J — = Q fx d U J W . W � N ffi z� �t J O 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn a -� sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luawl.r�da� �.we msn.�r�mxs m�cu ¢ NVId 1N31MA0bdW1311S W MO a�xi a.iaN�suaumla c3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N sD`X31 0901#01 S1 NO11 y1S ldll1S 2131S3f/.12iH11lIDV ,< lit _ IIS18H3 sndaOo Jo Aiij nw, -�� 213WWf17dqp == VK061#Nd AID N J Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 13113O1MA11O s NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIn3tl N r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l <\ b a I0m cis o .0-,2 ullos dol,.9 wallw ra Q o Y r� It aO I z NW W 791 �E!3 ��� �� I/ 0. n� - ,A-,ro o I a I I X I I I I I I I I I I �I I I z m � i m I LL�w i w X n 4X wl � - s a I X � � Xw X o X oy o X sm s O O X' oKoOL /T dX Lj CL w LJ z = zo==x - U - - sE a w g U = I I I I I I w� H w�zm li o Lu O Z oz o ®I W " � X `X �l eloz/rol/to a3ivaan a - sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� �.we msn.�r�mxs m�cu � ¢ _� Nh'ld 03921Y1N3 a � wo a�xi a.IaN�suaumla c3is ama,Nl 3uoNSN SVX31 0901#alSl N011 y1S 1i117S 2131S3f/.12iH11lIDV ,< lit IISI8H3 sndaoi Jo Aijo qp w Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 s NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N353O AB 3_W ON NOISIn3tl N r nnaN3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fiO l ^� b a Ism irw=wm a Y ■ 3 CD a i 9�*j (D 9f1 _ d z d X L_ _J � z ¢ X > X - Z I■ go a ■ O X ■ U —VAJ Z W W o8"LL V m o UU - EE, boos o 0 I I 3 J w — I X s zso m ono U�nK o 0 s z w 3 w ooU © lld dlN 9lOZ/bl/£0�O31tl4dn a - sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luawl.r�da� �.we msn.�r�mxs mcu � ¢ _� N011033 0NV SNOI1VA373 a wo a�xi a.laH�suaumla c3is ama,Nl 3uoNSN SVX31 0901#01S1 N011 y1S 1�117S 2131S3f/.12iH11lIDV ,< lit IIS18H3 sndaoi Jo Aijo nw, 213WWf17dqp == VK061#Nd AID N J Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 s NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIn3tl N r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l <\ b vq aiP ---------------- in Lu a Ism a O d w Ow wYd � OEn En W U = a O oO�O00GG OO U — J W \) 6 II _ II — II II II II II II II II II - II II O OEll Q II J J II W W II Y Y II U U o II II _ Z Z W � W II cnf II W o _ WOf o 00 U a U J J W j s 9lOZ/bl/£0 aliwdn a -� sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luawl.r�da� �.we msn.�r�mxs m�cu ¢ WYN9Y103NI1-3N0 � � W o a�xi a.iaN�suaumia c3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N sD`X31 0901#t71 S1 N011 y1S loll1S 2131S3f/.12iH11lIDV ,< ils18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio nw, -�� 213WWf17dqp == VK061#Nd AID N J Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 s NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3— �'ON NOISIn3tl N £NnaN3aOV "or S Sa/fia L ^� b Mm a Ism -� --- ��-6 W}, Q N N N O M M V t p p p 2 tin EL aaa � =�I w N ---------------- MILLI z I r------------- maw I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I _ I I L o - I � I I I I w x i I I I I I I I I I � I I I I _ _ I I > Qa = o SQN a I L �x�ns s3 �z zo = I---------------- Oz__ w WNz _ O I I W I a I I J I I I I -1 I I I I 1 I L---- -- — — " —, — � (, l -- a /r 2 W eLoz/roL/to a3ivaan a -� sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� �.we msn.�r�mxs m�cu ¢ S�IlYdV3H.�S � � W CDa�xi a.iaN�suaumia c3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N SVX31 0901#01 S1 N011 ylS 1SI71S 2131S3f/.12iH11lIDV ,< lit _ IlSI8H3 Sndaoi Jo Aijo MIMA dqp == V6Z061#Nd A110 N J Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 s NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W 'oN NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'oN NOISIn3tl N r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l ^� b a Ism z L a L ,o a w z —m J � EL m c7' 1 J JmTI —m� - J 0 IL IL IL W No` Z O 0 0 o Z o W W U 7F P 71- io a 1 Q� (fCl 9lOZ/bl/£0 aliwdn a -� sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o auaw#.r�da� �.we msn.�r�mxs m�cu ¢ SlIY130l3NYdY0b�S � � w o a�xi a.iaN�suaum is c3is ama,m 3uoNs N sD`X31 0901#al S1N011 y1S loll1S 2131S3f/.12iH11lIDV ,< ils18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ a nw, -�� 213WWf17dqp == VK061#Nd AID N J Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 s NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3— �'ON NOISIn3tl N r nnaN3 GV "or S Sa/fia l ^� b a mo it w z o Qo o W z U U U U O < < < w Y O O O r z w U U U U U U U U U U U U U m U U U m U 72 r r U U U U U U o U U U U o U U U U o U U U J o 0 o F o ¢ ¢ ¢ z z z J d z F O O O z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z L1J Q Q O z R R R U U U O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O V u O u u u o u u u u o u u u u o u u u z U U U < < < O O w o Q V U W W W a K O O O K < ¢ K ¢ K a < < ¢ ¢ ¢ < w w w < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < d g g W w w W Q R o < < Q j j j < < < Q a rn rn O O O Q < Q Q Q Q Q Q < Q Q Q Q < Q Q Q Q U U) LU a H U LLJ z w 3 O O } L n C) < ~ w J w z z ~ LL Q Q Q <Lu C) K W Y Y Y ¢ w (q U) (q < < < W W W O O O O w w w W > > > w O w w w w x x x w O w m m m m < < J > J000J > > > z z z z W z Jw Jw Jw ww Oxd aOx a aU� aw U� w a < O w a a a a a a a a a a a a a a O w g g a a a a a a 3 3 a a a Wl a a a a a o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O J O H PAZ NNin y,ow ac�Nz t= - -'AA: LL 5 JLE - _m - W 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn a - sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� �.we msn.�r�mxs m�cu ¢ 91IVI30�3N7d lod1N00 dand W o a1xi a.iaN—aumia c3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N OOSsD`X31 0901#01 S1 N011 y1S 13171S 2131S3f1.1dH11lIDV ,< IIS18HO snddOo Jo Aiij 213WtAMdqp == VK061#Nd AID N J Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 s NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIn3tl N r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l ^� b a Ism irw��m o N�mn Y 0 0 a CN1( 0. MS, M�No dWNv: He 1WoHlo O1 n sL� A O 3 O 2 91 El? �m O O O a SndnlL'm 5`JO1�tl1NQo SN.Ol9 �vAlWm lmivia31 ❑ oe�� - ❑ - 3 5 ❑ 3 3 J o ❑ 3 z FTH FTTI FTfl ❑ m ❑ �¢s o � 5 J W Q a m� NO O O U � � a a �o m° o go j 0 �0 O)He �� o O0 z� zz ())NO je ® �o c r c O 9lOZ/bl/£0�031tl4dn a -_� sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da3 �..�e msn.a�r� 33ina3HJS me d o = w a x N.tiN,,d o3 0 3,s a,a,N 3voNs N SDX31 v zW IISI8H3 sncia0j )o ,lll.7 0904#0I SI N0I1Y1S1H177S 2131S3f/.BiH11lIW n o = 213WWf17dqp == VK061#Nd AID N Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 s NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl �v r nnaN3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l ^� b a I0.10 - Q t 72 a a o � s 0 W o w w w w �- �- w w w J Z d ° o w o a Y S S S S S S S S W C) O a a a a a a a o ¢ N ¢¢h y F NS > > > > > > > > o O Q O w O O W d w d d � m m m m m o 0 o ry ry ry LL LL �35 rc F +S w.. W a w w N J O J g� Lou N F o 0 0 i O mQ 7 r r [J 52 m U M LU ~ F m U o Yk o 2 .................................. LU Ul #m# #m Yk a a # Z u & u & u & u C] 4 4 J V _ F w 4. J a F B z N ............. ............................ _ LU c) Q Z u w u � � 0 8 S J u o r d w o s CL r J a W w ¢ m 111 Z } .............................................. LY_ Y w Z U ® o Q w o o d m M rc u ¢ Z O O 0 m m m a w o 0 a W ON m N ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ �. U p w w rc w ry n ¢ > ¢ ¢ w Q Q o N c�v nl N o z a a a a 7 7 z rc u °a .... .... .... W w o a > > > o o w o o Q � � o o �... f~A u w 1.L Uj ti N o g g W a z [ 7 T Q 3 } a 9 ^'1 . � _ ....................................... Q w 2 Z e( m 2 Y ZZ ZZ ZZ ZZ Z Z 0- = N w 0 'o ¢w ¢w ¢w ¢w JJ ¢w ¢w ZJ W r Q Q U F a L w uj z O rc tt U O z Z� Z� rc tt rc Z Z Z p tt p Q a- t� }� N o w w 0 W j 0 o z ti D a w ................. v "a v "a v ry ry ry m m m m m ry ry r J M' Z ._.r'......................................... F z M u M1 2 � W d 9lOZ/bl/£0 aliwdn a -a _ _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.rMda� �..�e msn.�r�mxs SlIY130 �me w gLXaaswnN wau a3a3i�la3a=aai-NI N aN s,aao l n c3,s an,a-Nl—DHS NOOSSVX31 N i p _ Il SIbH3 Sndaoi )o ,lll.7 0901#al Sl N011 y1S 13177S 831S3IAHV11lIDV o ,< 213WWf17d == VK061#Nd AID N J Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 s NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIA3tl N r nnaN3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l <\ b a Io pp _ CL Q LLj LL / s n LL 0.a — m 1 m I cxi5;oa Lr) " _ _ �J Ld UAh 3 Enna IV35 SA3 a S U z ao LL �w a a m rc (I'VIlo035)VIMINI/1„9f 1V35 w w zw 65 (unwlad)wnurlNlw,eb wl z — d s �o a m 'do � jj\ s3als nnv) s Q _W --------------------------- ZL I— S101Ad3S„99 N kdv,HlNd,9ro ca J ago J Nip d s _ z a mow — LL Q w W qM M O On O N ONno21 0'NIO olM � gg LLj Iu 'xw,9 ,g J z o C N 91oz/rol/to a3ivadn _ 6u sa�ti�as 6uuaau16u3 Jo auaLuPDdad exy a3ewnN waN a3a3si�3a 3aei szsasss'cse w 3-1 N1 OIL US n o sN to3 i ,,a3N N SDX31 1nOAVl 311s NI j _ o IISRIHJ S(1daoi JO A110 Z90L#!dl Sl NOIIVIS loll NO210lVM o M N wo - b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU loll SblVdTJ NOIld1S ldll RI MAID NOIId-SM F8 31tl0 'ON N01— NOIlEld— A9 3VW 'ON N-1A3d 8 WaaN3aM ' L2/Ba L 77 on 9 WaaN3aatl vfw 4Z/OL Z zw �w�x wz w - \ z O + - �c w Ewa LLG �0 3103 - — — No — E onE aNc J — d i NJ c 'Ei Cn _ oc o 1 0 0 V 1. V� - a ° aCE - Mo -w = - °�C a�d N0?Ja-dM AExw�� 83E —3ao—3vo 310 3 a— 3No 3NIHI allo a — — oHE NE NE oNE oHE=oHE HE oNE_ Q H Lac Loc L LOc L c O a so oo } g e; o L33 O �g I o0 = N� 10 — ss �� o d4/ss/fZ E 00 a s O O O O 0 o � 8 sc�ix ]Ol Ol 331 ]Ol — ��383 �a I El SZOZ/L/OL 631tlOdf1 _ asaDti P d jaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuDda 011 exy aaewnN waN aaa3si�sa saeiyl szsasss'cse � w O « ;aN sN to io 3;n,,a3N 3aoNs N SD'X31 NVId NIlIlOW30 NI j IISIdHJ S(1daoi to A110 Z90L#!OI Sl NOIIVIS loll NO2JOlVM M - b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD Sblbd3b NOIld1S loll 3aIMA,] NOIIdI 3— F8 31tl0 'ON N01— NOIlEld— A9 3lW 'ON N051AM 8 WN0N3fM WIV 9Z/60 L on f Wf10N300tl VEW 5Z/OL Z m M W W of Oo U W y �S tj ffi LJ h J gW °a so , M W W M ^ h h Q, O O r 2 ~ T 7 _ 0 O,I _ � sw _ z a� a SZOZ/Z/OL 631VOdn _-T. sa�ti�as 6uuaau�bu36�o auawa�odad _ µn6'ryeu'b, _ Ye e ¢ ex-3 a3ewnN waN aaa3si�sa saes szsassecse wO « ;aNSNto io 3;n,,a3N3aoNSN SD'X31 1N3W3A0lldWI311S NIA j o IISIdHJ S(1daoi to A110 Z90L#!dI Sl NOIIVIS lJIl NO2JOlVM o M - _ - b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAill X N01-3— 19 3— 'ON NOISWtl N01lEId— AA 3W 'ON NOGIAM 8 WaaN3a0Y IWltl I 9Z/60 L on 9 WaaN3aatl vnv 4Z/OL z oL " ,�-- ry - i i S I � I > i Li N m J z U z (Z W h � 5 FO-,Ol �Z-,Ot i0-,t T.Z-,➢Z r3� O $b o -w O EF N Sg y� Q rr<xm s�a2 inn e RRRU s t� x n w w� o2 W O n O O =t.dh t 5,02 _ _ _ z c.U ")<�) L> a SZOZ/Z/al �a3ltladn m=a ewnN well a3a3 �e erseeeecse SaoiAJaS 6uuaaui6u3 )0 ?uawpoda4 o w OHL xltlu IUN SO,!— oI 'OAIO c3ls'wio3Nn3eaNs Noo SVX31 111jADd9 llflbA aNb 1llOddflS 1b21f11Df1N1S 3dld 5 Il S21H� Sndbo,� eo All, Z90T#41 Sl NOlb'1S loll NOb4lb'M o b3wwmd V6Z06L #103 f021d A110 SbIVd321 NOliV1S 1311 30IN\AilJ € NO-83S30 M 31W ON NOISI NO-83SW a aw ON NOISIA3N i NOON300tl SL02/S/8 G J S n ui W y S Z ®3 W. F L F p0, Q ZO J ti s u N 0 w W O W Z�yQ = U ~W J W W K O a¢¢F = O YZO U Z LLOFy>¢ 0- F K F F F F a w ¢¢w w w� O a w = >U w¢a Zz U ¢ J w W F ¢O� a0 w¢w �0- z(J� z u� N YT y/. Z =„z LV w N¢w �LL N OA. N a. . o s W w d 0 10 a LL a 0 O 0 = z iJ I �II O I II I a I �o U L---- w a w JELL r SZOZ/SZ/O :431tlddn _ _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o Iuaw#.r�da� a�����msx � ¢ _? - - - - NY-Id NOUnOPY30 a S"31 o _ _ ax,N.NN,,do3o.3, a,a,N3voNSN 7901#01S7A1011eisldnN0H07VjV1 w o IISI8H3 sndaoo jo Aijo _ a wo ryw ;` 7,-- 213MAMd == b6Z06T#Nd 210 Salb'd3N N0IlV1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d d�530 AB 3_Etl 'ON NOISIA3tl � r WON3 av %BP SZ/SO/fi0 l �d b a gog oil W, 00 vt w z w~ ¢ pig w z Q w oer �QN - �z win_On -01 Z So -� lipslyw so ;x 1,z V 12 Z o - - - 31 - zw- � � - - x M. w w w N 2 H 11 1, x = o 0 0 0 �( (D � ( (D c¢e � n �3 x ----------- x ---------------- ______________ s - _ - god w I x _____-___- -- `__-shim - w x �I I; - -!tl _ ox --------- -- - - _ oil - m, i i o ww i I I 00 3 wE T o¢ 41 zN A m �o\ oo X Z K 2 c� 3 ✓ U - a - 9 U 0@1 1 too : -o2 a e 11is is Oils 2ong l " -� 1 / w� mn3 W _ oo o_so u m 00.28 z _ -�a�w �a X ®Z N I _ Xn X DX X X 9lOZ/bl/£0�031tl4d0 _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� a�����msx � ¢ _? - - - - 3010Hd N011170H30 a SVX31 w oN.NN,,d o3 0.3, a,a,N 3voNs N zsolr a1 s7Noueisl�nNoaa7yul w 7 i1S18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ a 213WtAMdqp VK061#Nd A110 SaIVd3N NOIlV1S 1311301MA110 N m N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d d�530 AB 3_Etl 'ON NOISIA3tl � r nnwoov "or SZ/So/eo l �d b a Izm co � z ■¢� AmlW e � a Q o m Z W�U 0 p n Q Ld 3 0 C 3 O U w ..� -. J 0 N Z o M xm it uj M � 0 � 1 N zJ ww .. Q c, W J 31: x o U W w 6 _ Ln J a m J U � \ o � \ - p U �¢ w \ a w J ao LL c 9loZ/bl/£0�031tlodn _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� a�����msx � ¢ ? - - - - Nb'1d1N3dV3A021d4V1311S SVX31 zsol alsi o _ _ ax,N.NN,,do3o.3, a,a,N3voNSN NoueislJ n Noaa�yui u1 o IISI8H3 sndaoo jo Aiij _ a w o ryw ,v 213WtAMdqp == VK061#Nd AID - _ _ �Y1J i+ ShcVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d d�530 AB 3_Etl 'ON NOISIA3tl � r nnaN3 ov %BP S Sa/fia l (`J b a s �� -g�agz = m - w �m =o =�'wp o Lc -- _ _ 00 Om w00 O 00 O O � O O� a w _ U a ¢ 0 i r_ --________-- r---- X i w 0 F NwY - X - ------ _ o r " X ooz ------ --------------- --------------- -------------- Liu --------_ - en � X S O d N d p Jo LLj J L X U W 9laZ/bl/£0 a3lvadn « . /a ® »=mom ,/ y\_ �] � v �= SA3 . zw« :_ ,o 7= w= «aee�m���, gzma7Am » 20 s { m { Wedqp •= Aqg#NdAID \ : .7H qlq a NOL a 21]E7#O _ ,2= p .__ "or & y : § , &IMI 2 / / )/( a(, Fo �\ $� � } ~ \) ! �s= - -j\ OR ) � . \ /j )(q ° a �(() E S : � : 2 OFCD�( SC S OSSO O� SXS \ E 2 S \ Un § ® _ o3o_ - sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� pan����;VOIIJ3S �me ¢ � SVX31 o _ _ ax,N.NN,,d .3, a,a,N3voNSN zsolalsinou n eisl� NoaaIyui w o IISI8H3 sndaoo jo Aijo _ a w o ryw ,v 213WWf17d == VK061#Nd AID _ _ �Y1J Sillb'd3N N0IlV1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d d�530 AB 3_Etl ON NOISIA3tl � r nnaN3 ov "or S Sa/sa l b a C] 5 V 0 a 0. ut ry U ut _U S d 3 d L n V� I » w O Li J ,o U w Eo a o) _ 3 e oz/ro/to aaivaan _ _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� a�����msx � ¢ _? - - - - SNOI1CI1313 a SVX31 w o - a x,N.NN,,d o3 0.3, a,a,N 3voNs N zsolr aI siNoueisl�nNoaa�yul IISI8H3 SndaOo Jo Aijo a 213WWf17dqp == VK061#Nd AID o �Y1J i+ ShcVd3N N011V1S 13113O1MA11O N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d d�530 AB 3_Etl 'ON NOISIA3tl � r nnaN3ov "or Sa/eo l b a IU•Wwm o Mr i c 0 Y �k wm 72 CD o a O J ZZ J o U W J T i U� a � c3 H a O L � W c of N 1 O wm V ooz 4�0 '- >Q LLjj 0 � ? �ILI U\ ZO � o— af e�oz/roe/to aaivaan _ _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� a�����msx � ¢ _? - - - - HbWVU3N11-3N0 a SVX31 wo _ ax,N.NN,,do3o.3, a,a,N3voNSN zsoalsiNoueisl�nNoaa�yul IISI8H3 Sndaoi Jo Aijo a 213WtAMdqp == b6Z061#Nd AID Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 N N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d d�530 AB 3_Etl 'ON NOISIA3tl � [WnaN3aov "or S Sa/eo 1 b a ��Wowm o I C] ' c I I Y I I � i a ------ 72 ' � 5 `� I � � x I --- o a O x M M M L----- � -- 1 1 N 1 I w o i i 1 p R to i R 2 R N i I I I 1 I I i 1 I I 1 I I 1 I I 1� I I I I I i I 1 ' I I ' I I I 1 I 1 ' i a 1 — ' I I 1 �iNl —I I �I Ili zl 1 I I tllj 9b w ,0 1 dWnd 13f1 don 1 1 I _ 8 d4'/votlOSI c> 1 I I O3 s o a � r-- U I!1 ___ vld 96 1 ________ ____ z ON djW e 1 dW nd-jIl dF/tlOSI j I � 1 I I 1 1 I v 1 I I 1 I _nn d ---------- 'ON 96 ____ ____ I dWnd Lia dJW do/v�sl 1 la -x a Q 01 d�OOf sc uj H' Z � I w O 91oz/rol/to a3ivadn _ _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� pan��� ��17W3HJS �me ¢ � SDX31 o _ _ ax,N.IVN,,do31o.3, a,a,Nl3voNSN zsoaisinou n 7isl� Noaa]7ui aw IISI8H3 Sndaoj Jo Aijo _ a w d wy WEINtA 17d qp VK061#Nd Ally - IiYMAJ i+ ShcVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA11D N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d d�530 AB 3_Etl 'ON NOISIA3tl � r nnwoov "or SZ/So/eo l �d b cD a J W L a L N � Z o Et o ■ ■ ■w ■a - � 4 � En a8 0 0 0 8 ■ fP U W 3 = N o � H Z a c) �ocA Zi W 88 v d sLWtl/£o:031vodn _ _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luawl.r�da� a�����msx � ¢ _? - - - - 91IY130UlWdY0709 a SVX31 wo - ax,N.NN,,do3o.3, a,a,N3voNSN zsolalsinoueisldnNoaa�yul i1S18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio _ a 213WtAMdqp == V6Z061#Nd A110 Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 NN N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d d�530 AB 3_Etl 'ON NOISIA3tl � r nnaN3aav %BP SZ/Sa/fia l b a IUMA �W?N�rv}' �. wall m C] z o 0 a -- o z N o F _ ._72 0 a 5 w Z U U U O Ov ❑ Q (7 C7 C7 W N O O O K K rc U U U F F F F F F F F F F F H F F F F F Z U Q Q Q U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U OJQQ aaK K KK Zz Z Z O OF ZaF0 ZaF0 ZaF0 a0 ZaF0 ZaF0 a0 ZaF0 a0 a0 ZaF0 ZaH0K a0K ZaF0K a0K a0K Z O O O O O OO a a ¢wo > > >W O a a aZ aa K K K K K K K K K a a a a a a a O O O a a aaaaaaaaa a a Q a o 0 a a a a a a a a a a aaF0Ka 0. a a 0 Q U Q W z z IL z 0 U O J w Q W w a a a z z z '� ❑ LL a a a N w K U U U x O O O > > > a a a w w a a a a a a a a a a z z z J N w o 0 o r r r r > > > rc z z z z z z a a a x x x c rc rc LL o a 3 a w w w w a a d a d a a d a a o f N d a d a a r F ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q J 0 f 0 000= o a. ,.................... ��zs adz G , - 0 :F V�lIU1VIVllIIVIVIit Ld W O m3 " ML— Q z � !, ir Q Z Jco 0 e�oz/roe/to:a3ivadn s ��_/o��a i� y ®� - SA3 q \ a & = IIzma7Am » 2o \{ ) \\ E]WtAMdqp Aqg#NdAID \2 \ \ ( ^ \ qlq a N011 a 21]E7#O N \ \ ,2= p .__ "or & y \ ) \\\ / §}§ @ Ld § /\ °/- c // a \\ § § (Z \ � o / \ § o / \ \ ° / o / k o / , moliwdl sa!naas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� panes S3l(1O3HJS me o3 0.3,s a,a,N 3voNs N SVX31 aw IISIaH3 sndaoo Jo Aijo zso aiSinoueiSlJnNoaa�yui = h _ _ 213WW(7ldqp == VK061#Nd AID N Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIA3N N011d d�530 AB 3_E° 'ON NOISIA3tl � r nnaN3 ov %BP S Sa/fia l (`J b uM • a 0 0 0o 2. - x z z z z Q x 3 3 3 3 3 � J LL al 3 p' 8 �� rc d 3 d d� a } 5 F w z x u u u V c3 N a@a J ? A A A 2 J O w z O m J � �a a ce J2 C w a. z Y o O Y c5 w J z d N W ❑O = oJ u) - 7 o, o w O J J o o o 7 O �O o O Z 0 . O Z - m 2 o o w W Q 'L W O U ~ Z z ° o o J o F - , o N w w w m� w W o I o o _ d W m ❑ LL y ........................ 11 Q 8 a z N g W cif 8 w o W Q m Q m Q m a m 2 o J a Q dam -m o Q17 O O ,$ 4 � m J J e m J N w i K o Y ry N N N Q O 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn - - _ : _ q / 7 a _ . _ m:=_, , SA3 mane m , gzm37Am » ADD \/ m \ \\ \ \ U3WtAMdqP AME Nd2lo qlq a N011 a 213E7#O _ 2= p .__ "or & y nit All 2 » , "MI 2 \log gossips \ � \} \N \ / LLI » u ( � oil / \5 §` ® _ -\\ a ` g \�------ \ \\ a _ o= : / \---- -------------------------------- q - /) )// ------------------------------------ \ ( �. . . � a �\ \ � 6� ` � » - § �\\ �j � ED } , e.sa�ti�aS 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawa�odad a — eiy a3ewnN waN a3a3isi�3a 3aeiiscsa!sss'cse inOAF11�3115 s n usaN sNetm o 3�s o,,a3N 1 3 1 N SVX31 O = = h nhe £SOT# (11 Sl NOIlV1S 1311 3 3211 21VDns 0 M _ I_LSRIHJ S(1daoj to A110 b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FO�d kilD N =y SblVd3b NOliV1S 1311 3aIMAilD 40IIdItl0530 F8 31tl0 'ON NOISWtl 40IlEItl0530 A9 3lW 'ON NOS13d 4 Wf1aN3aaV W�V SZ/60 l X. J� w v Z _ J V \ II - = a a r I ru/ a � � w z= cn J o❑ — — — — a oz Ull 0 - ul 71 LLJ - - ffiww ys s w 22 -wIf = m� LLJ k;r, o N� / L y y � JO) Hg> 2 it Z523' _ / �mc SZOZ/9/6 :63ivadn _ 6u sa�ti�as 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawa�odad a £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a31;193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i0E m -- - wn vw - xe a3ee � I�;Ia.1sNdto]iOIL33;0111311111 31015 N 00SD'X31 NVId N0I1I10W30 �vl £SOZ##41 Sl NOUV1S 1311 33Ui1 JvDns M _ IlSldHJ sndaoi }o .l110 €'_ ¢ b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f0U AlIJ SblVd3b NOIlV1S 1311 3aIMAllw NOIIdI 3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISINtl N0IlE1tlO531 A9 3lW 'ON N-1- 2 HAUN3aaV hiv SZ/60 l Y J \ � w - w \ c� w II O O >> -: - -/ J ui - \ w R w - _ - n \ J w w \ > o YY�2 U¢ W M o 0 CC R3 �3 M w_ a 3 M M M q O 'll w Ln I SZOZ/8Z/9 :631tlddfl _� buu_6u3 JD ____ anwamwm«s j± // } \ _ :_ \ s a� snaoj g �Ia m G g m 25 an,e!#ws A3MMdV6ZO I #DI FO U AM )§ ( ) . - S Id]u N OIl 1 1 m ]OIMAiO a ; § 2 2 - \§ < | ! ! d 6 G - � ` /6 § n » \ J w ( ( a - , E _ / � \ `S� \ : ( \ ^ � ^ / � y . j / ® / / z ` } \ \ < g e y ( § 4—t LET a9 • ! \ � / - § \ � » aN smz/i/e asxs uwttorss4uo\^.nws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa ,� _ - _ sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da0 xam.war��m � ¢ - NVId NOUl]On30 SVX31 W{O ¢gw ov a�xi a.iaN1suaum a.c 3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N E80401 Sl NOUV1S 131133HI 8vons ,< i1S18H3 sndaoo �� �iio 0 a _E 213WWf17d = = bKOK#Nd 20 �= N nN Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N g NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N N011d N3530 AB 3_W �'ON NOISIn3tl f-� r nnarr3aav %Bf SZ/SO/fi0 l b a INotsm - M.47 o Ma J irw J m 19 fly! g w o o ko os 5 - Q it U3�o 3Fr q. N - S n-1 sign — g Val, W w R— _a _ � — — — AV— Ed a 3 ~O — wG SAW PE .11 82 1 Nod �� ^���� lag o (D (z 0 0 G(DRtn u, a RAV w�3 ILL j/ \ O J O Q o U U bi .. J e�oz/roe/to aaivaan aN smz/i/e asxs uwttorss4uo\^.nws un•au A�am\a m smeAh muwa ,� _ - sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da� xam.war��m � ¢ _� ` 1010Hd N011170H30 a W CD ¢gW ov a�xi a.iaN�suaumia c3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N SVX31 E80ltJ OI S7 N011V1S ldll33b121b:J(iS ,< �° AMIL i1S18H3 sndaoo jo Aiio - w� o �= 213WtAMd == b6Z06T#Nd AIDN a nN Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 N NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N =777 N011d N3530 AB 3— �'ON NOISIn3tl f-� r nnaN3 OV %BP S Sa/fia l �d b a mo _ irw�Wm 0 CL ti 9 Eli U � a U W 0. J W \� M �m s'a z W � W z � O Co � O O U U W � W 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn aN smz/i/e asxs uwttorss4uo\^.nws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa ,� _ - sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o luawl.r�da� xam+w«wv w mms m � ¢ NV]d 9LV3W21lO8dW13119 W MO ¢gW ov a�xi a.iaN�suaumia c3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N SVX31 E80ltJ OI S7 N011V1S 1�1133b121b:J(iS ,< IlSI8H3 sndaoi Jo Aijo 213WWf17dqp = = VK061#Nd AID `= N nN SaIVd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N =777 N011d N3530 AB 3— �'ON NOISIn3tl f-� r nnaN3 GV %BP S Sa/fia l �d b a mo co) �> o CD i IA IA � $ III III u u = I I I I r a I I I I LL o = I I � G� - I I I I x Dr J ` � rr �f �n w El — J Z 8 — — LU w 0 0 (S) 0 06 8 0 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn SNOUVII313ONVN01103S j CDy \_ zms sn j » 2 0 EgWtAMd •= Aqg#NdAID \ ~ qlq a N011 a 21]E7#O _ 1_ : oN g .__ _ * L \ : § yal . : - z En . a � o zm, :sw± ot :l :: ® S 0 / \ / O 0 o(D _ §> ƒ 771 , ®(� ,! y �,O : O --- a ° \\ 0 g \®`f Q � . \ T8 o uj Ed 8 �7z Ck::\ \� � / : 4 0 > ®_ u Ld m \ - : } � z / - - �» ° /\ \ / aN smz/i/e asxs uwttorss4uo\^.nws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa ,� - sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�daN xam.war��m � ¢ � HbWVU 3N11-3N0 _ a wp ¢26 wv a�xi a.iaN�suaumia c3is ama,m 3uoNSN I1SI8H3 S(1d210j )o ,lll.7 E80ltJ OI Sl NOI1V1S 1�I133b121V:J(iS o 3 ,< w 213WWf17dqp == VK061#Nd AID Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N =777 N011d N3530 AB 3— �'ON NOISIn3tl f-� r nnaN3 GV %BP S Sa/fia l b a Ism c� irwma 3 5 N O J H I I - rld ex I - Z o w 0 e�oz/roe/to:a3ivaan aN smz/i/e asxs uwttorss4uo\^.nws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa ,� _ - sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�da0 xam.war� S0117W3HOS ��n v . W o ¢gw ov a�xi a.iaN�suaum a c3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N $D`�'31 E804#01 Sl N01171S131133b1 Hvons ,< IISI8H3 Sndaoi Jo Aijo 213WtAMd = = b6Z06Z#Nd AID `= N nN Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 N NOLLdl21o53o AE 31W 'oN NOISIn3N =777 N011d N3530 AB 3— �'oN NOISIn3tl f-� r nnaraaav "or S Sa/eo l �d b a Ism z irwWm U �g J w 3 = U a cD x � J J a Q u J rl S 5� o jLp fLp �� r m J c`Vi Z Z O a_ r — — J — 3 5 111 111 o� o 3 — a u 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn aN smz/i/e asxs uwttorss4uo\^.nws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa ,� - sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o luawl.r�daN xam+w«wv w mms m � ¢ _� ` S11V13013NYdVOVOS a wp ¢2Wa�xi a.iaN suaum is c3is ama,m 3uoNSN I1SI8H3 S(1d210i )o ,ll l.7 E804#01 S1 N011V1S131133b1 NVJ(1S w 213WWf17dqp == VK061#Nd AID Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1311301MA110 N NOLLd121O530 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N =777 N011d N3530 AB 3— �'ON NOISIn3tl f-� r nnaN3 OV %BP Sa/fia l �d b a Ism c� O 0 0 =���whr� O 3 3 C] z > > o S a a _ a F F Y Y ¢ ¢ Z F F m m .,". Z Z > a a 5 �2 �2 �2 Y �2 �2 �2 �2 a JdQ Z¢ o.w�an FO F o UKR UaR po UKR UKR UKR w�p UKR UUKR uUR U Z z z z z z z zO aO O U U O O O O O O O O OQ Q a a a aW aa z a a a ww UrcR 'Q 0. Q U N W W Z 0 O O a U z z O O w rc w h o o o 0 N 0 > a a LL 00 V rc N h Z Z O O tt tt � K O O � z Z W w U U O O a O O O O O O 0 O O O O LL ? Z J J J J w w w w O 2 2 a a LL a a a a a a U J a a a a a O J O H J W Z a Q m O s U a J W Q A U � N � J Z o w � W z�? oxo inn W IN U 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn aN smz/i/e asxs uwttorss4uo\^.nws un•au A�oast\a m smeAh muwa ,� _ - sa�inaas 5uuaa ui6 u3 �o auaw#.r�da� xam+w«wv w mms m � ¢ ` IIIV13013N7d lod1N00 dand w p ¢g W ov a�xi a.IaN�suaum l a c3is ama,Nl 3uoNS N $D`�'�1 E804tJ OI S7 N011V1S 1HI133d1 db:JnS ,< IISI8H3 Sndaoj Jo Aiij 213WtAMd = = b6Z06Z#Nd AID `= N nN Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N =777 N011d N3530 AB 3— �'ON NOISIn3tl f-� r nnaN3aav %BP SZ/So/fia l �3 b a I0m n ■� < C] i 3 w a W LL � 0. r N � o V OWE o a 0 0 0 a SOV'J1N3A0 /..ilO1�tl1NbJ S`3�039 �tlNI Nli131 6GY/lN Ll I ❑ 3 j O O ❑ 3 w i1 g o O � J W Q d O H Z O U d �m3 m3 m O j)g ())go ® 5 9io Oo O O z� z z z O O� �LL 4� �O 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn aN smz/i/e asxs uwttorss4uo\^.nws un•au A�am\a m smeAh muwa ,� sa�inaas 5uuaaui6u3 �o auaw#.r�daN xam+w«wv w mms m ¢ Al 93l(103HOS7YJRd103u a -S W o ¢gW o a�xi a.iaN�suaumia c3is ama,Ni 3uoNs N SVX31 E80ltJ OI S7 N011V1S 1Hl133b121b:J(iS ,< �.° IISI8H3 sndaoi Jo Aijo 213WtAMd = = b6Z06Z#Nd AID = N nN Sa1Vd3N N011V1S 1d11301MA110 N NOLLd1213534 AE 31W 'ON NOISIn3N =777 N011d N3530 AB 3— �'ON NOISIn3tl f-� r nnaN3 GV %BP S Sa/fia l �d b a mo F-1 3 a [� 0. "L pZ F d o! F)) .0 0 0. of of w w j O O O O F a a a a m v v a v w w 0 U x x x x O O J 0 O g w p a a M a a p w z 0 > > > > M M U Q u) J a ¢ w Q � OU N N N N N N � S � (n 4(n EL N w N LL� J K w z U) cL LLI 2 w z W r, a7 W LLI J 7 W U v, wop U W 'U N z W,�y LL Z z o 0 0 v v Z r r J O Oiii — W w W Q co Y W m Q x = Q J (� v U w a Q 7 w z X X fn z ¢a m m 0 w J J W O w OU z w O N 0 a a a J W` Q Q Q r = 0 0 Q z O O J O 0 0 d` w J S � o. w U W O a a w Q Q Q S o a U a a J (UiJ W 4 b 6 m 9 4 4 O �n = � CC7 r r > ........... Q ❑ _ _ J J J J W W Cn C£] U) 0 0 w O U J a a a a a V S ] a a w ; Q p w w z w of of of � J o 7 W. z o Z Z z z z ww OU a O O O O a O U Q ❑�C, e❑,L a Q a O J Y of O > > > > > a N J J J F g � U < Q U N N cV CV N W C4 5 J ZN m a in o r m m H d I— 9lOZ/bl/£0�a31tl4dn \\ - - C leggy m �!�s 126\ � \ �zmasnj » 20 :e 2 {S E]W d g k Aq # & Ilo \2 \ \ �_ - » Ah. qlq a N011 a 21]E7#O , = g .__ _ * L \ ( \\ \ , . x --© o _ \—- 2 . ` a ± : «/ § z u\ \( 7 > / } � CIO ?S i a - / k. = K 63 L _ \ : / _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawa�odad µn6i6uiie _ .......... ¢ exy aaewnN waN aaaasi5sa saes szsasss'cse rI - s<«�r;�aN,sn�to,ioIL3�;n,.,a3N�3aoNSN $p'X31 SlIVl34dlJVdNV15 N O m k AIVM301S ONV dii-L 19'au D JJOJ I m pw 11S1dHJ S(1daoi to A110 SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3GIMAil X 40NdItlO53O 19 31tl0 'ON NOISINtl 40IIEItlO53O AA —0 ON NOGIAM 8 AACN301V IMV SZ 60 l F a `r-7—1 p; e o P.�F 2,n Fk F� jH - - c uF io77 m - 04��� w � 5 U W - V ` Ewa iw o� a �W= LLo� + W C z z ArL Wos d =Np Aso - 2 � ; wq-.k 41 uo � YI ~ rtT (13LON 1335) J 3 W 3aenM s m w n i 011 m_ C p- m 1.2 o m� y W ;mzw ogo y 3 w = W O W k w W oz� Q W � y Q NW .alp'( sn7„a� Nw \ � I QFp �Jw O .5 N�eM3105 S 5 \ € v Q ° WLu M V Q O 2 8 2 po p 2y J _ or /i ova Q N am Lu n o o: � x i V N na k W W M c V« ca uj _ 00 — _ h s i W _ 47 j N SZOZ/6/9 431tl(3df) _ saDtijaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a3AWf1N WNN D3a31;193a 3d01W9i5d'95E'i0E sun 7.�e - xe s .� ('V - s<«��;�NN3sDdtD�lou3i;o�3e3nIr3aDN3 N $p'X31 SlIVl34 4ilb'4NV15 AVM3 ANG ��z =cw D IISIdHJ sndaoi Jo A110 � M ~=u €_ b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f0U AlIJ a¢ SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAilD NOIIdIa0530 F8 31tl0 'ON NOISING NOIlald— A9 3lW 'ON NO6IA3a 8 AACNICCV IMV SZ 60 l mot^ .2 .8 m s'8-x �o� ��F Np �A g _ �v 2 53avA 031avA Ca) �D31115 DA] Ca) J3eM3D15 331avA (len5fl) f�e11511J,S (JJ (51s (5) a i Z j rc a0 3ND3 i 113 a03 Z� 1N3WLSDfD1 31— w 3 g - � a'Jf 003a 54 a G G� 03tIIna03Dea3 03aIN03tl a31 - _ w e7n -NIw 5318e1 u Q z _ W x3 cl Lu a u iw 5 (,j 11P p s3laen w e N (e) 'NM .0-f (D3aJI>3�rin0l, .0-.f sW SZOZ/6/9 :631V(Idf) _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a30Wf1N Wtl a3a31;193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i9E m.n 7.�e - xe s .� M - OKL«U51119sNdto,io=—;a,.,a3N1 3aoN5 No SV'X31 II SlIV13O(hJVONV1S AVNUAING0 NI z = wz IISldHJ Sndaoi Jo A110 � � M u €_ b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f02�d AM ~ a¢ SblVd3b NOIlV1S 1311 3aIMAilD X NONdNOSM F8 31tl0 'ON N01— NO—d2S30 A9 3lW ON NOGIAM 8 AACN3aaV IMV SZ 60IIIE l 1�I1 W -(u) �= p 3NI11N9-MYSN J �O v QW 1111` W J nlnl'II'Inn W I` Q IIIIIIIIIIIIO;II N 214 14 . -11 F IIII' .9 III. 111. Z oa✓ ti c jaw TIF 3Ni,LLa3doad a 3NIi Ala3dOLdIx O = _W — pr z� z O -=c o =z SZOZ/6/9 :631VOd0 _� JD ____OIL j& # m m\ , _ w =„ sx! me�namgaammm ® :g . z . ^ gse� s d m g AI0 ` \\ \ \\ A] V6ZO I #1]f Ud O j) \ , \ - S Id]u N OIl 1 1 m ]OIMkiO 'R § ` ON zwa i :z, ,_M = ± / ;min;&{j //} ~ �j m,- LU / U § m _ \ § ; 12 \ - / ( � ( _ \ 3 oo ; , � k77- \3 SZOZ /6/9 » .b eiy aaewnN waH aaa3 si�aa adeliscsa sss'cse sa�was 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ µ^I'IY•b - � SV'X31 silvl3a aavaNvls NI= c O n usiaH sNdtm oia3l;N,,a3Ni 3aoHs N 1N3 W3nVd 31RIDNOD m pw IISIdHJ Sndaoi Jo A110 =u €_ N3mrndV6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD NIA a¢ SblVd3b NOliV1S 1311 3aIMAlI:) NOIIdI 3— 19 3Itl0 'ON N01— NOIIEld— AA 3lW 'ON NOGIAM 8 AA(IN3aaV IMV SZ 60 l � Ss3nA—IN—Ald=I -=_-- - SS3NN]IH11N3N3nOd-1° ~ b.l-,9/l Z/1 z �Z LLL b/f- _ v > ? SS3 MJ 1N3N3ngd=I —NAOIHI IN3V—d=I Q ) Z 7/q, s Z 2 ° z - - O n sW dLL�� me oa - Kw �5 fr o � owa oo New em`�o wmm� a _ ONOI g - mo S3a°A S� �\ �a u Q � a L m = S31— LU _ I � 9ZOZ/OL/9 O31tlOdn _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawa�odad a £iya30Wf1N WNNa a31;193tl 3d01923d'93E'i0E m.n 7..e - xe s .� tD - s<«��;�aN,sNdto,io��33;a,.,a3N�3aoNs N SVX31 I STV'134(IMINV1S U32 M NI > No F, =cw� `„. M 0 11S1dHJ S(1daoi to A110 3 M ti b'6Z06Z #1J3f0U AlIJ SblVd3b N0Ild1S 1311 3aIM '�AilD 'N W NOIIdItlO530 19 31tl0 'ON N01— NOIlE1 30 AA —0 ON N051AM 8 AMIN501V IMV SZ 60 l 'swo��h as �: 'apw worm Q �µ�' - ``(1N3W3/iHd N30NN 3dId tl011 Iry _ O 'W _ o WW lam cc �C�` ' iSNMld 335)t3NMA rOd30 sg Q Ja waaU ry, � 2vi �¢ -•y m� � a 8� aN r e w / %% W h day Q Q wU H a y'o =� � Qp`F���¢�o .wwww.cmo m � nd a zt M go ow. a h �� peo a II W oho 1 Ra oa w II s x Q7 ill o� Pit is °off o oa3 "a ws 80 oil F¢ ¢ J I ' 6% w� y Gz I C Septo w - g � I a w`¢ e 3 not o, TO I I W a�° I I �E �R a N Im_U to� 14 in! ww �oF p aj� t 1wo u t h �y� Qa R �w� os it a II sWQ��so W A � 3 ww� Wwl G 2 ���� mwF z � Q�o _;°� o �a w o w4 a wgamrcZ oW� LLi w4>o is ° Goa �Ew - w� � z �F - 000J p UU �w my Qo My °z �� _ !.Q �w�www � �_ azG zH k' k' Q4 °ffiQm u a �' t 9 ivae��> 3w" '� pro° 1 rin n moo aLL ° WIN �,II ° p za; w; z J wo o Q sW o 00 A? ;1 m 0 May o zw OM � oo '� 1 2 � m p>¢O yw _3 �Qa o w�N Q��� Um W � �3 � R° ti 2 Q w 'p kg"o o i��¢� to! a� min M. a9w� t,w3 �p w ap ea e Q >z a tik? r z zoQ g¢ z`° I 090 - Rill wo W o •^x �i�mo wm f9b wma aoz ' �, 2 0o Oti m U�U y2 hC~i OmS 4 W �> a 0 0z was zo i�Na �ijW w ow tag a W o Q Q oz ¢ �m_`mzmp p m w=iw �� o g ow aG o�U �i camp k'a �QGo _o� owz a aw 1 wawg alp, "1 Q Sh 031 31 _0 3 �O�U F� _ 0 U m ti y 'o kz -k' ¢ " m WE 9 11PW w z a Q;mac oo y m� wa oow �� S�_3 SA_o! 011;11 tog � o `r _ ° ww zI zg �m WAR Wn HOW Q-3 z e E � ¢ ; `ra z Qwe s w a C HOW oa 3w� ai a ¢ ai ff P°_� pz °NQ za a � a Fa a hm w a o =o �wsZ z Q 21 oz>,_ Q azZ pwu-- _ qo!! gas R1 1a pig: a - , >my N m w 1914 www mloapp w 112 4 W° t tit a woi p z ¢mv '""�� wo`¢ to towns pa�zu �w -kp'mz ,< azw w Iwo `oo � om 2 JjQm z ow a w J o va w o WK�✓ti wp_ aw a�� a pe .� a -� z o 'oaaWo q 3-a te w >o Q _a a�za -o gk'xU Soo o° 1 of u� Kok' �� �a ✓;'m3o oa � ��cQ : Qaaw6 41 Paz i _w o Q� i W >3 SMZA/9 MMdn _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a30Wf1NYWNN a3a315193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i0E w 7.�e - xe s .� I� - s1<1 15lll-ld-101—;o, NO .I—I3HOH5 N Sp'X31 II SINE(]°421VONViS 2MVM NI =cw� IlSIdHJ S(1daoi to A110 M u €_ b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f0U AlIJ NI ~ a¢ SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAlI:) NONdI 3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISINtl NOI1Eld— A9 3lW 'ON NOSI. 8 AACNICCV IMV SZ 60 l qL s s sans a�n Y � W an rr mT o 0 Hna m z.� C) csrsv � h� u' W a8 ` a�§w p w mamp 30� o J F � a W e ww otN w p� ti em€ o 2 0 4j W • 90p h szoz/6/9 :631tlddf) _ saDtijaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a31;193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i0E m.n 7..e - xe s .� 00 o o 3;a,,a3N 3aoNs N Sp'X31 III SlIVi34(IMINH1S 831vm =cw o IlSldHJ S(1daoi to A110 u M =u € A3MMd =— V6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD =a¢ SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAilD A W N01-3— F8 3— 'ON-ITT11-11— NOIlE 110 1 A9 3W 'ON NO61A3tl 8 W'C', d IMV SZ 60 l e � a u Q 3 W J C � IQ.4: W L m Q „ V ° =N =H� a� Wo w aaw POR x �a Ryp � myw ohmw�o o� W N Q v m � aw wow w3m aw ]2 a y t! aa°� pw w"zo amk ado c"-w�8 a°zq wz s O = o s E <ao�zzo�LL O WLu W s 2 w h Woo,=>=� W v a �` a gc�ea m y 4 y h �m '°�mza��ama, o�Wzop 7 h w `rwwg �g A3w W '�LL � H , 'ate h IN SZOZ/6/9 :631VOdf) _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a30Wf1N WNN a3a31;193tlY3d019i3d'93E'i0E m.n 7.�e - xe s .� rn « ,s;aNNdto, o 3;a,,a3N NO 3aoNs N Sp'X31 Al SliVi34 CMCINV1S 2131HM =cw� IISIdHJ S(1daoi to A110 M =u €_ b91NWMd b6Z06Z #1J3f0U AlIJ ~ SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAilD X NOIIdI 3— F8 31tl0 'ON N01— NOIlEld— A9 3lW 'ON N051AM 8 AACN3aaV IMV SZ 60 l €jg y c C 5 z O W e A �o; - w �% m m �S m r w m m d o ^" wp° e W °A$ s Oo O oz V V V N ° d G Q o ° S � w41 _ LU yw a W E 2 2 w � m r 0 3 oWw w 2 95 W Qu a ws O 1: 3 0 , `` w J lac tI Q y � y V \ pmw ct pw - V 3 p � o�a3 Nora SZOZ/6/9 031tlOd0 _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a39Wf1N WNN a3a31;193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i0E m.n 7.�e - xe s e .� c o o io 3l;a,,a3N 3aoNs N SVX31 I SlIV134 021V4Nb'1S U31V'M31Sb'M NI 0 NO USldHJ S(1daoi to A110 M „u €_ A3 V6Z06Z #iD]FO�d kilD SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3GIMAi NONdI 3— F8 3Ltl0 'ON NOISINtl NOIlEld— A9 3lW 'ON NOSI d 8 AACNICCV IMV SZ 60 l i N m a V W z W w O \ z Z U xW 'o z Z UU U o H w \ w �_ s fr p \ fr Q > m� O W ma p- 534en \ 2 F gh - �� w o O 9,2_`_ sk-aaLL� oo J ao w> �o�m Qo _ \�:g & �j ZO o zoo \\ w Q UUoom� o� ohm m M. \ fi fi mfw e -i Z �w w �o _ O o - a w - CL _ Q �zNo��oJ�w=��"o=w z _ =�� �fv�No�>�aSE o� Qzo s Joao_ =w www --_ - Uz` w - o 3p - �7x _ z - F J �e a O aK' _. Z Cw'S \ o Q `c _ a fr w w U V) 00 .P o Q a wp w \\� 0�0 r Nlw s sx oQ i w Qd .. C>oa� w Z \ as m J 3 ow F < � SZOZ/6/9 :631V(Idf) _ sa�tiaas 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auawaaodaQ a £iy a3AW°N WNN°3a315193tl 3�019i3d'93E'i0E m.n 7.�e - xe s e .� "°"'°"'°°t°' °"'°'°''°'""'°°" ° SD'X31 II Sl1v134(1UVONv1S d31vM31svM = wz IISIdHO S(1daoi to A110 =u €_ b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAilD X NOIIdI 3— F8 31tl0 'ON N01— NOIlEld— A9 3lW 'ON N051AM 8 AACN3aaV IMV SZ 60 l -`,-,gm - - w � #o �6 J _ t Q ° '��U� _ ova cc IL w oho 5 IL a mason - a _F� FF awp Kiwi - 3z� O cn z w " " a °3aino3a sv riffs 3aevNoae I Lu 139a0J dQL 3nOW3aw 531aCA 11 - J - o O I Z F \o X - w O LL � O sw 4 �o O W w F w� w > i arc HUI in ir LL w OC o O � o O J� $� W cn ,I Lim - - / \ u w�l \• IIIII^IIIII� w y SZOZ/6/9 :031VOdn _ saDtijaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a30W°N WNN°3a315193tl 3d019i3d'93E'i0E m.n 7.�e - xe s e .� -� "l's'°"'sNdt°'i°"3l;°''°'""'°°NSN SDX31 SlIHl3a421b4Nb1S?J31bM31SVM vl� NO IlSldHJ sndaoi }o A110 M b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAlI:) N01-3— 19 3— 'ON NOISING NoLl—0131 AA 3W ON NOGIAM 8 W'C', V IMV ST/601 l \ xVIN.b a3J330 aO;3 __- v c i ii W $ $ O~ F %.� m W O cn z Z m Wi2 // M O O Q OR U �VAtom i O tr N � cn V \\ Z ® \ Z w O Li U LL a g \ \ W U w � az VAVA, tn � a � z - J a z og F o - o aa Z o a �3 '=a Y fr a oo O 4 m C) f U gN - W � ~_ - W x - Cl) Q LU a U) ode oq m w No - o a� -4 prc F��� u N�" m}a j �r 03mnC3tl 50 H1d30 - - �rc Cm wo ��w a rc z rc 2� \ a u u Q'T • • i J • \ O w J \ ciQ = w \ w \\` `i ❑ -V ❑ a > ol �Uo O W Q _ � \ C� O W sw U z jr Q - - W tr Q � s3iavC NN s SZOZ/6/9 :631V(Idf) _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a £iy a30Wf11N WNN a3a315193tl 3d019i5d'95E'i9E µ� ���e - xe s e .� L li 15lll-ld-101—;0 I—I 3a°N3" SVX31 Al Sl1V13(l GdV4 NV'1S 2 HV'M31SyM NI A =pw NO IlSIdHJ S(1daoi to A110 =VI Wu 1E t u €_ N3mrndV6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD a¢ SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAilD A W NONdI 3— F8 3Ltl0 'ON NOISWtl NOIlEld— A9 3lW 'ON NOSI d 8 AACN3aaV IMV SZ 60 l 2 - �, Q _ oio cl - zw w _ E f H 3 _ ---- J �w fn _ Z m <�oa,��owa_as LL W xw>sy�Ww - x x Q o -ow=oo moK� o�m w m a�oLL= �a - mkQOWa Ovs W Z oki�z�mo� �� °°z_au2 W W W = o 3�_ °� _« Qwww�a�ms"� xo < H D wm< cn cr _ 3iaen Q O cr * O Q C7 mom a y _j ir W z z Q who t: W - - va3 _ mm - oaw z LLJ - (S 3a4 03A4dNf1) 4 W311-Z 31941 335 llli N]49�4NIJ Q `p Z Z J =m� a cn Q g N Q =a Q O W > \ O O w N a M w $w C31 J °_ d ,jJ2 0 O O N ziD ° - r (aJ w� - --- ��� W .qz g - - Oa-12WWmo>---_te775 p U "N n°"aim Na. SZOZ/6/9 :631VOdn " sa�wag 6uuaau�bu3 �o auawa�odad t Jo I S31ON NVId a exy aaewnN waN°aaasi°sa saei szsasss'cse Hp s"°"�'a"'�°°t°'�°"'°'°''°'""'a°"�" SVX31 NOUN3AHd Nounii0d?31V'M M]O1S � 1.LS1aHJ sndaoo }o A110 1SMHD SnddO:)dO A113 o i w"' g a , w 2191NIN(1'ld b'6Z06Z # Nd A110 SblVdRl N01lb'1S lJll MIA lIJ 4ONdItlO53O F8 31tl0 'ON NOISWtl 40IIEItlO53O A9 3lW 'ON N0GIAM 8 AnCN3aaV ACJ SZ 60 l o w m - ca _ wN rc° Nox J o¢ E - a op��j�z ou N N r w o w _ _ >a w N ;Ja�wm Of z 0 z - o� rw _W� wz Z arc — Q R° �o bo — �3a J Z z w u ao o— �zzw�' F _az �Q J zIj Z Ij boa O w u _ c�i wa i �u,� .. —a I Z Jz F ,ifw > Z a W sar o — c�aooz�� u i Boa o a XX Iwo' �v;s� � ax z o 3aom i — `?� o rc a 0 w (n 0 Z Q =7 Z oa Lj O t N C , O a � a _ w o� a° N W - o w =_ aJ U -- z�°w uo - H as - rcN w W osq� o aZ sm a�° Z U ..E J Zw Oa _ d __ _�_ 030z wo¢ar INw m000�j��? m a�� a -� IH I I I I I-I I I IHII1 1 1-1 a =a LL ON u) z N Q�N a'° _ O a LLI d N o� _W19 Nay —71 — �J_ - lc_ z gI �oFa m �a - w Qo� a a o LO > a a o< a o o a o I. WE5 3 x u z 910Z/b1,/f0:031tlOdn exy aaewnN waN°aaasi°sa sael szsasss'cse sa�wag 6uuaau16u3 Jo auaLuPDdad t Jo z (�Id31 S1N3 W WOJ ONb 43nSSl a N SVX31 SlIM13d IV'1N3WNOIIAN3 2131V'M WdOlS "o w F IISIdHJ S(14daoi JO A110 lSMHD SnddO:)3O A1I3 rn g . W = 219WIN(Yld V6Z06Z # Nd A110 Ln SblVdRl NOliViS 1311 301MAilD NOIIdI 3— F8 3Ltl0 'ON N01— NOIlEld— A9 3lW 'ON N051AM 8 AACN3aaV ACI SZ 60 l EYa = -p - a£n E uE oE °jm - _ ❑ £ ❑ c� uEau ono na s°n� u a S a -tea = cfr ❑ n ❑ ❑ -vo Eu Ea v E u E �s 9 mE E � H El El E v'o k c 8 E m b El El E e z nfr fi a ❑❑❑❑❑®❑❑❑ 02 d E e v� �" �. E E- a• - t Et - S a 5 E £ 6 d e E E' o'E §g g °Es E € € a S a E m v E m c g>S fr E g' �kk ❑ ❑®:]❑❑ rc�1° _ ..i .s e m w` ®❑®❑❑❑❑❑❑ 91OZ/tL/t0:431tlOdn saDwa Q S 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDda a �ya3ewnry waN a3a11,Ia11 3aei l9csa..... W Moio i;n1,a3N13a0N3 N SVX31 SINE(]4NM INM1S dddMS _ F= IlSIdHJ S(1daoi to A110 V6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3GIMAilD X NOIIdI3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISWtl NOIlEld— A9 3lW 'ON N051AM 8 AACN3Qad Fll S7/6 0 l wK per" oz `I R, Na pa _ _ se - 2 FN z J w " 2 =e:was pop I CL IA € <Q€ o W wzop 4z N w a w =€oFzp P= _ cc yg �. oa �i—g i OptiCQ g QV off_ "ALL oa"uww WC lu elk »j aaa i�C r4 tj C� e g W p �<" c 2 3= _xuUFW�tao =o LU � 0 1Q. p6p� o - W W�m�<=ate Ci du F J aoop� a #moo w_ 'G jw 4 �` "L�LfIJ m yLL �dp�ewN�m� mW:€=_ nw =mot N� SZOZ/6/9 :631VOdn sa�in�aS 6�uuaau�6u3 �o �uaw7Jodap a - ayaaewnN wain aaaasi�aaaeilszsassecse � � , � " 'a"' °°' 0�L31i SV'X31 I SlIVAC]GUVGNV'1S TAI N 11SINHO SnJ&00 {o A1I0 = M w o € =a¢ 2l3WWrnd == b 6Z06Z #1J3 fO2�d AMN SblVd3b NOIld1S 1311 3aIMAil NO 1diM]�30 3W 'ON NOi5ih3N _d1-21 'ON NO 111 4' AACNICCV V 9Z 60 l > Z w Z ¢ z 9 O p ¢ o4Wz z C7 0 30 dFi3 i> ar _ Z Z 0 ago Aa > $ o U ¢m u z O a �a - Z z v 0 O a vri 0 a LL O w CJ r ~ � in w � O m Y a w w O r U u 0 _ zF N F u ¢ m v) a a 0a ? x 0 - e P Z } a Q � � mO Q s Ou 0 m z z w p fg -i St _� w m OZ C w w a at � w tWn r0 S J Q = Q w n U wa `^ = au u z m in p w Z <n z w u om `° O Q= z � J o z z u 0 w a Q m wQ Q r u 2 w Q vi r z °� a w0 a z m = ¢Z ¢ Z Z > 01 s m z= = wp O v~i O a z o Q V o 0 r a r Z a O Nz a�n z0 O Q Q O 0 z)z r v Q mu z �z as ¢ > m z O'[ > > w wz a mu zm ( J O w H Ou Q Q m uu 0 a > a r m 0 Z N M 4 Lf1 l0 -- r y<� eo-�- ". ' yy• y ,• O lir Q == -l-p". Il uj 1 1 11 1 I P mO z 111 111 z z0 ICI IL w U Lu w o =111-1 z z O �w III=III= u a ,1 —M-1 cn w IIII mix IIIIII- to z III—III- s a O O a co w o �> ;� � � IIIIIIIIII1 zo a c� —Ili=, o a w c� V) Lu °C =111 of a o IIIII Q w y?N �: z w a III—III- N > JO mN 1111111111� cos Ili—Ili- Z a m� • Q « 1111111111 a O U _ IIIII a 11111111II } =III=1 =- III III= 11I1 1 I—III—I FIM L sn7/6/9 '131-,1 do _ sa�ti�as 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuPDdaQ a cN _ £iya1,111N WNNa3a3ILU 3W10111310E'i0E L111'a"'N°°' OIL US SD'X31 II Sl ViM 4a'd4NV1S llnl� _o wz IlSldHJ S(1daoi JO A110 wo €_` b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU kilD a x SblVd3b NOliViS 1311 3aIMAilD N0IIdI3— F8 31tl0 'ON NOISWtl NOIIEld— A9 3lW 'ON N051AM 8 AACNICCV HIV SZ 60 l tx � C _ D N r7 M 7 Q w l7 Q a D G 7 3 D - w � o'a` ti O n � Z ^N age= 3a zo¢ a° _ cn ate= x>< ❑ 0 m < lJ K z d Z m z �w ❑ \ H Y d Q a m a ni�we wlwj ,zr r H 5311 ayn I 9ZOZ/6l/9 :631VIldn _-T. saDtija 6uu au'6u uaLuDda S a3 P aPQ a M _ - - aya3ewnN waN a3a3si�a3ae a�szsa ssE'cse � � Ye �,j S D'X31 III SllV13Cl aaHaNb'1S IIAID IlSldHJ S(1daoi 1O A110 w V) €_` b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU AM a x SblVdIJ NOliViS ldll RIMA,01 A W N0IIdI3— F8 3Ltl0 'ON NOISWtl NOIlEld— A9 3lW 'ON N-113d 8 AA(IN3Qad IMV SZ 60 l 9 Q Na J - �m O u~ N �g w LLj 5 0� sM o ® a 4u So sa ° a :m o �s w x S x< a 4< d " fl l z w j LJ wLh zz ag / Lo w � � :w� a s Q w w zs.o £ u) P r= S W W & m Ain V 51J s _ c n w o w z l a W „ a � 'g i „H d ng D & J. .u<< W o W Lf) w o° 3 VUD ll 0 ION 00 ¢s=5 w H.L °q qOq°q°q a0a w w w 3 V x3 'up)q q�g0q�q�q° p 0 w" Q ws W 0 NOTSTE7 GRATE o �� 9ZOZ/LL/9 :631V(Idf) saDti P Q jaS 6uuaau'6u3 Jo auaLuDda a � - ayaaewnN waN aaaasi�aade�I szsassE'cse - S - of io 3l a, D'X31 AlAI SIIVAG aaHaNb'1S IIND IISIdHJ S(1daoj 1O A110 �^ b91NWMd V6Z06Z #iD]FOU AM I; a= a x SblVd3b NOliViS 1311 3aIMAlI:) NONdIGOG3O 19 3Ltl0 'ON NOISING NO-Id. M AA 3lW ON NOGIAM 8 A (IN3aav IMV SZ 60 l s 3 T r7N oFs O a¢ o m - „ e, _ o 3 o ¢ - Y� I "a m `aW 0 NIIIIIr @ Sin"I $ msPit em IT 4 y §ate- m Owl „8 e"' - ��3 ogm as 91 IN \ C o w �� z - a w s 1 �w a >a a LL m a u R z }¢ Bali "s Ro, IP owi8 �r ua3dOad smvs > o =s M�r Sao J H. w= m - gwa o � w LLHLL o m w sw goo Vo $a w I, 9ZOZ/OL/9 :O31VOdn � bs a -�°= " \/ }- _ :__ _, s ! !xems n,ae#s,m, \± d \ ^ ^ gseHJ s d m g AI0 ` �\ � 1 ) �� V6ZO I #1]f Ud �O j\ / j - S Id]u N OIl 1 1 m ]OIMAiO A § ` ON zwa i : 60 ,_� co L il : g: \ A \ ! \ \ �\ . \ Ld \ / / o iNn § < / \ \ r ( g / ; ~ 2 \ o ` / ^ \/ c ; } / I 2 z 6 } ^ § % ` j \ u Lu _ - \ : : § cc \ j / e ` IN \ \ � s - \ \ { Al " } - § : \ / E: � � � � { OW GZOZ amp» webs a ___= - _ :__ _, sx! agm«:a,#zwt )f ^ w^ gseHJ s d m g AI0 ; § ( } ) A3MMd V6Z I # ] U 2 ~ ^® Sd I ]u N OIl 1 1 m ]OIMAiO () ° \ / O 1 f A O ` ON zwa i :z, ,_� 2 �- > \ m 7 \\ \ ` AMtA %N z � Az 8 . /§ } } \� § \\ } } \\ z 6j-Hl Hl § § : ! l •, � ! | /. . . � � \ Ld 1 1` \ a . , ! a = . \§ e� 2� \ \ i \ ee ~ \; / z 3 ! ! ~ \ . / ; \ § � ® � ~ / / \ . ON GZOZ /gZ/, » ewnN we1�a3a�1s1�eedel szse'esecse sao)n�aS�fiuuaau)6u3 �o��uaw�afldaO�� o ¢� pbBL Xltl I1SIHH]SNd'd0] OIL 313'OAl03NN3HOH5'N 00 SVX31 N c p °p 113RIH.O snciaoi d° AIIJ I STVAG IVJIdAllV21f1nn'diS o =- 219PYtNr d == b 6Z06Z #1J3 fONd l�ll� N� - SblddR NOliViS 1311 3011 AilD NO 1-30 18 1 11 1 IN 10151 ON N111— �raN3aw HWN3OOV HMS 4Z 60 l "n a U) Z o F p N ° Z w W p� W O ¢ m IS7 d c �� Kw Q UV p¢ = Wo Oui Q m W = _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ <w. mm p J w0 zw Sava o ¢z w z z `� o¢ 3 w zz aw 031d�aa wz o� om ❑ c� Fzm F° o Z ow mF zg z� �p m Q Y�° o mz � � TTT7 � ¢w =a w ° = z NLL— NU YCl) m ° w0 = U� w ? w ti W ❑ K°K KZ II o z O F m mF W� W o 'wCL z N Ox�> oz o° LL�iw W ¢�n �" l l lip w mo zw x p z �w O�Q �p F w W � o p_ OZ t- w Na CO u u u u u # H ¢vi z! F j W w J ~J wr 1. w a zz Q Q m N �/ O _p W ' Oy r^ U U O Q 1 X N Q W Z � NZ V S✓ III//tymJLt�L' m o K o¢�0 W N F W W, Z LL 1F N O Z a XF ii w o� 0< w W o f J� ` �O Ym 3 O CQ ti Cn z -- �Q w o w¢ LL mmQ 1w ry iz op Z J Y = 2< < tn W 0 0 0 mcwi o� o ww J OU wJ * � of as a o5QW m ~Wz'- III Q; N° Z p UJ° z WDo= gWw� aU O= 1 ¢ �w z N �rz ,I{, .I{, ,{I, ,{I. .Iy, .Iy (d 1) w� >O to w �' p� Z w S Q z J wWa ¢� as a s #a O N F w Uw0 z rn d, dQ oti (n Qz z a ,�0 dVl OaVONV1S F w a J xNF J — m l w z W Q W pU O p�OwO'� m Z N0= Z QO�OQK F NN mLL F ¢ Q¢ z O Zwm��wU m 2 z S ¢WW W Z Z �F OLLF -wo F m awW m 0 NLL J W Z 3 W¢ OZ °ZOpw OUO ww Z w. wz �Z >�� z W g.,.oYzw zo °W ¢mow apO w Z ��- mOow w 0; �- LL °a�� Jwz U O ampa LL °�' w 5FU .. ¢0 F O ww:j q� Y III LL W o W w w w W F¢ = D W F m W J w= OUp xU wZ> ¢ > Q Ou�Q2)Q#w m m Z N z U w O CL ¢ N m o z } ° W H z — O w U Q o NOOH .06 O1S a dVI OaVONV1S O o m w N_ 0 ¢ W Q NLL O U w Z p�' = a ¢ U p N � � Y �w �J m F N o p Q O z° J p Z Q W z LL z w w¢ LL W m m J S w Q W O w 00 O� W owg O N¢ xoo °a <° Z H z o,W>j J Z J #<OO WO w WW a ¢Z W 2 �j �J S w W L.I..I W W mLLU \ Z [if LL O wz UZ Z ~ 492 \ pO Z W U) Ny ¢Z U LJ. www J �m� Q �� jI Q W m S¢ w O J w gw U s. u a¢ wa, u¢oi Z j z c¢i NOl1V1IH1SNl dO1Sa31VM w w m r ° d O O H z z HOd ONH 0032i OLL uwi w IIVM a31aV1S.23£ gZr.zA/fi :mivudn _. a r—N sq± ;\ ) _ ? ^ 2m m+m @ wo iym«�I��nsna ° $ )9 \ ^ _ 119PYtNrnd - dGZOG! #1]f�d O \\ / . ^ SIB R NOLd Sl m ]gIMA O ( } r : z % ; , 1�1, : w a H, , a :: . c.! | : :- i.q i, // / \ u �y - tƒ 2 g CD o o } / oc oo07 : \ ww < z < � » z ( \ 7 : §/ \ j z ; : § v . ww'\\ \ j) ( \wM �I ® r ' :: / g { > _ - ofo e~ . / G ~ § \ LU E � � � { j w < cl 1 z - \ } § : / ! [ \ j . ` ^ / \ w- z : e <« w w ¢ ors 0- cc - N a W ° cc 2z Q c pJ � Lu j rn ¢a v v cc WCL a CL � w O � w z o = - 0 w p OZ z WW L - W uj a - - - Ln z z - ' - - -z o a o¢ u o o w - Ul) = U � C� z - - - - - - - - - W - J cc uj d F- C) Lti Q211 0 ti Z WW .., Wp LU Lij w¢ z - _ W2 ,,t tiJ Yj O W Wz �U O] n z J,d sso a -� ------------------- • anao]e4 rtaotl rtl e ioJ i,�xi;9 ale {M e•/a.i a iei a1J ]-V -e+d- 3 _.aU a. iana _ P - :4�' 0 341 W moh W ¢ Q Ohs 0 a ry a W ° cc JI W y - O Wz - W� ° Z ODU w v W _ a Lrl Lrl Q U- CL - - ------------ \ - - a Q III\ �^ w61 71, LU - aQ i ati i n¢ 0 x i :ll °- i ° c _ / c� •! .-------------- - y z �c -------------- 4 c a Ln ' --------------------- Z i - LU F-w _ ¢ - W s ------------ ry -------------- o _ ulz o w ° W O x -- - m W 2Q W " o v y W M - ° °eve - U Q'L 4141 LU ❑� pLU U z I L z W - Uj � CL - _- g a = ccccLn - °^ - o Ln z = a 0 z U CC z z ° Wa -------- o i4- - p o z / p i m 3ars nao�a�4rt�otl rtl �e�oJ i,4'i;9 ale .M e'Ja.i� iie,aN kV e+d- 3 se•a�a�,aU a. Cana _ P �.J' 341 i m`oh J Ln W0 0 _ - _ _ _ _ - — _ - Q U- Cc O °LLJ uj � Lu _ n o a z o ca o v W Q � - _ Ow x OL O O 00 O Wz = J = � ° zLU m CC _ —1 u Naz - _ U _- Liu, LU Lu o + Z w U l 9-f H - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ° LLJ J C[ N b W - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Q _ !m - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - add. °,6 - - - - - - - - - - - - ydol5 3llj anao]e4 rtaotl rtl �e ioJ i,Uxi;9 ale {M e•Jo.i a�iei a1J ]-V -e id- �3 _.a4 a. iana _ P - \'4�' 0 341 A Z O R = \ p o r x0¢ wON 2 wi �O _ i 3moN O @- fFJ m ; 3NI� 3NI� ¢ ro—o u o r rc o vo w w U) F�'�-1 'M'0"a ; •M'0'a z p m N O tt x aG - z o w w W _ I~ _ m v Y O�zuO zm o o z a o _ _ _ z 0 m 0 o 0 o�xzO�o r aalloo 0 om is7 s3Ns m m �� J O -oz '� zm so wo -'Y C $o a s o< o a = o� - d� ou v;oEl oa� m Nom= _ om_ ❑ o o N N s w LLO _ o J Nip maw a - mNw NX\ m Jc+� w r t7 <` W J _ w w o 3 LL a o- o u z 0 a Z Jum z X N z ws r oN - O �z a - 3 � o N m LL O a f u O u U ❑= LL � N 40 _ _ �OO J O > - 3latln 537aVA O Al av S31BVA h # - S318Vn - Poti�o I a I a - ;00 a a a a a a w . x xw a o0 oa J ♦ im 3Oo 0 2 X 3Q 0 R x 3dOlS - a S3latln o000 ® w Q io•z 3OIS Wa' 4 4 ♦ 4 mi ^aw ® y a�w =o v Q z v Q a ® ate= fd� 4 Q o11 oZ ® G 0 z o o So *moo Q x o�arc _ w w a u a _ I cwr1 ioe� IJ `o � r I uw o@ 3 w os� o $ 0 o w o o z i 1. a z - x?1. - N l• �w�r �o p a I �00 = IVI.b � � O ww _ f1Sf1,S _ o� - I 31 atln S31HVA = N v 31atl S31avn w > � I I I w Q of I r � 3iav s31 1.avA - fOl tih• O s p I I - _- a z - y J = O h ya99 Iwo .~. w J � � Iwo ♦ w � � i w � �* _ � wow Ln x w w w 3 H W _ - � O a z w w > O AGM3nIiid �* a ~.ow ca I a > Z > � ® � Q N ww a � v yE7 6 r o —6. 0-1 z ® * ER d ®* „l It a _ w� Z la Z 3 la Iw I a 3�0 �_ IL - lao a g E r g'o YB H. 9 6z g co Z fib o'ou c o " Q M a a 4 O C s o u -a ° 8 ob W 8 o �' 8� w $ �figgq• � rvmvrv0000000 `-� g� he&oEoBb ' - «� �$$�€ - 'S UZU ^� su - c } i g ag mo�$n94o+ = s - o$;,! c La_ W� F m mfig x ao ;�� _ 918o3ES t° .ygO°fi. . . . ..bZn6o o ��o, �oEg'g•'bffi'Gfi�m' " gr a r a�V_m u 8 « $gam �c a b«�2g8 ` §€ r@g o•c--� $ ofic c. t a- St X 8" ° i ci « ��roo�om,mn n,.12o °•s ~ ° «`Qie6-«0 o Spn�3 Q -ao M1. T s ' o°Pb EA`� o b P �E8€ o no no4 5 o b$« tic, cbi fibc11* 8 oogl oE �oFh 8 -L .o- P sg� °��. o000000 �t� 8 aLgcogzY'-°b�' o5afi`� Egx�afio"°' « <Eoc«b. �Y° 20 = �g«•E sae°g$D b P 'gam "�oo.BEggor �'o rv� W8N }o4gogo * W S=.`.-� ih W U F N Q K< Gv 00 s ox'o °L �oLL� o z 3 w a o �x � oc _c xc e oox oo x" Ld o \ yPb"a N OZ. LL \ �P�r 6uiootls .OZ .. ~ 2 ao sa°;nap H + `�N xoW ,OOI W 'OSI so4O5 A—m 0 um •OS x x (�j Z �2 \ pF Jo ;a W as ■ Kw Leg CC PTCa , O WLO pPdl O O YO E LS C Uo N 3m - CEO CL of W 3•-.__g00o Qc s— ♦yE"PM P 4 yy N UN� lWxl&�W�o OrCOV«N XuOo=♦ W O Po '3•-w 00- .-O � � «"co°" g oxg x �x ox 7xog 'arm: -s a wee we Nx o�W ¢o:w o•-L z F 32 mOmP O LO- {n U' } 6u;DDtls ,OZ ao sao�na0 Q N C 'xoff ,OOI p1 6u�ootls ,OL ulY1 •OSi aootl5 x�oM 8 uiW ,OS .Sl % X aD saDinap •xoltltlV .001- LJ cli L f —� — �— ■— •— 14 ~ O a J $ N v ~ W Z O O } "a 00, r 3 a _ b T Z yr ,«n` ZU m Oa3 O J D ofw god -`m o o m oxg a" " 1- n0N "-"o EE LbO 3•-N O e •asn sa;uala W;ainsal sa6ouDD n eainsa/aoal/oou; IDI Io aaownl/auao oa alo°uoae s;ua to t3l13 u0;4�eAW0 843�O/Ri;1;O;8uotl88a W 98 .TO 1ppxy •gn8093D4a 89001b[u0 a0I lOpxl RO eDPu 8;Du;x 31Vp luo io Flu-1—ON •..aOy--!a-ad 6u;aaW;6u3 soxal_Wa RO Pa—.6 s;O4DO,nas s;44 Io a n W1 :M3NIv30Si0 Ld ''n" Q a N - - - -- - - - S I S.F - N = O O p _ a °moo o — _ - - c Io U W UNo � U z - w - - - - - o W J O a w o _ -- — —- — — _ ro � U = kl w z — a u u� r ` V txx X: < w X. �V X� ¢ eoodS �oM E l Z/. X o�cdp 'u.VV JJ Q Ln _apino4S ® : O a a'. 9 .�•••� ' a• a W •• • a •..+•• a Z •• . :............. .... u Q ~ J yap mo _ p - x Q z 3 ry FwW w¢ i Q C W w O o c �v O t� i ax x xdr xo oa �.w "ap�noy5 �.pI no45 W <33 �. . • • .i_ • •_ •••• p J a a _ W a a S L J �J W ap m=Us aap mnus Z o ¢ - - 0 'n�o Z3 6 O o a_A}Io�;bui;I-sa_sabpwcp_ s}�nSdJ} o;_ ... }..ppuo}s s W F1111Q�5_o0sa_o o 1o0x1 os}oym asoO;nOwFuo ap;+100x1 FQ aDoy sluPu iy :31V0 Funs;o^F}uo_�pn oN „A-otl e ,;pad bus aeusbuj soxel Jaa+Fq pew�ano6 s; p�ppup}s s,a};o s a'i :""3 Vljsio M W H fi N Z 0� x d' 4 o O=W N o t� p Q � a w c Q W W LLI Z m in W p o Q �Z a s a N m 161 ® ' a E.O+D 0 O D ❑ 7 O C O 7 Ov-1 sI LY C N a ❑ O O i O N 0 J Y D ^ C a L O O aDN - 0•- + O -O- C 0 + O E E n c o L O a a+ N O V L C 0 ul DZM a a v ^ OEl U T O¢N C N O a O O O+OC 00 y U U� Q ZO w .. ? Uf O O C _ - U 17 0 0 U y 0 > Fn O � > O_ 0 O O W U O > O X m-0 O O n V O U•-O O O a m L J W D O O ¢ O +L N Y L O . - I 0: W OOP+D O L 0 ] - m } Z O +L Z O 3 D Z O U L Z O LL U N O O a N +O LO c0 N Y E '� U -3 N ^ w K N U C- ] O U U x 4 a 0_ z D 3•-a.- Ul Vi O N i•-iO ✓i+ L 0 d ¢ p ¢ .-0✓I C L ul+ .>Q W O-E•-M> O a 0¢ > X L= O L +•C Q O N Ul L O w 0 U J -0 H Z W J Z N Z Z ¢ w ++ r L Z O K ¢ J 0 O O D] O. L O W r w N o✓CN - 0 0 3 S N ¢ U ¢ z W 0 3�O N+ y D W 0 c D D Y � O Z 3 O H i -N 0 Z a•- O L U O U O L O O 0 O O U J YO D O O xO S U J N J r 'E, aL O•- 0 D c 0 0 O a wivov v•- r ]cy y a a x w N O+ ] a E C O Q N O C c OU N C O O E - J U O a-- W a•-+ N E 0,O O•- u O+O a i0 C U O (L T O D L d) L a 0 0 X L O C L C 0 ul 3 3 3+¢a 0 w 3 U OH O ¢ N � N O L 0 a C O L 0 - N O O v -L0 0 L L C x C O N 1inD- U L C 3 UJ 0 O 0 O U 3 x •- 0 W D C^ 0 0 •- U•- D U + +N N UJ E L•-O w r 0 0 0 -> w 0 y O N- 4 C- } '�L N VI T C U N - D EU ON LC 0 O w0 O- O - - 0 O'erN nwV1 O C m 0 O n O O w E C K u_O w ❑ 0 + ❑ Z 0-C 41 O ¢ -O L L O N D+0 . 0 0-^U O 0 D +o d•-� 0 T +0 0 .U-- Cr D L O 0 D O C O O D O C�L -E 0 ] U >O L J C L•- J + D O L 0•-O+ - -E J D C 0 0 0 O Y U L - +O Q •- y O- c E 0 O+ -L+O ~ J .+N c m 7 O -L U1 c Y E J L X+ U N J C 0 ❑ +E L N z U .O N++O - C O J C•- O L.G N D O } 0 O O O O L x x 3+U O•- C O D'C+ O E 0 C L O O O✓1 W L U C N - D O }0 u1¢¢ K y 0 0 Ul 0> u1•-w U -L w O• 0 X 0 L y >O L Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 DO N ¢ O,._L L - ❑ +0 N•-•-r J w 0•- •- + -O W U N L U d cc C C- 0 0-0 3 C 0✓I w D U - 0+ O+ D c m w a Z C ] U f.7 -�•- - U D - O aL L -O 0•- O L ] LO C7 O O I - a L U)E Y+ -P C T> +N+ C+-d J E'E +C }D J L O L N O Ln Dv 41w -00 C - ¢aO-U- vC O . C+¢a�OL 0 0 O•- 0 0 0 v O O E L 0 m O= O•- E O 172 0 0 D O L E ]- D.O E O 3 �n L O L 3 0 c 0 a L O - CC y L L L -O -- C .-Y L 3++ L O L W L} 0- 0 0 c t O. 3 U U) O N O X +} 0} N - - ---¢} O O 0 O s 17 0 W N - O - O L -O O L•-+ 0 L } +•-�/1._ ._ 3 0 O ._O C - t] = TO 0 0_ 0+ U+0 ZL+ r CD D C Z ]min 3¢D •- c LD U L U } E U O D ]w 0 w+ O X O C O O C O L co C 0 0 L O O-0 N m 0•-L c O O L - D O L O+ _ U L -O L O U)U U _C +L 3 3 J L a00 O L- DL J 0'E+UW m +a•- +0 •-m COS UO OD O -OT U }O C++ O0 c0 L•- O+ C+ y C a.-ZO T O Or ma++ L OC+ L-O 4)L 1, d•- 300 C•-D Yy -N" u� - U C41•- Q E O U c O.O 0 J u1 a.-D +N J}0 U -E L O -D'0 O D N U O C C O •- L O OODv•- O U L PU O J+C + COCLOC yl 00+L CtD O 0 w D 0 - DTO Z L+a E w U ~d C 0+ L O+O O E- C U i0 O P a C C+ 3 w J 3 0 a mJ m L0 N 0 0 ]L n Q VfE N O U O U N -L•- ]E L N O N•- 0 0 rq C 0= •-0 0 0 0 0 ]J 0 U L U D F O - L - } 0 -1 3 O O T O 0¢•- -- D - L L L n U 0 a or O + C 0 N D ul 0 + L O O C a 0 . T D'C L O O D C- C O b+ cc L Q)W O+-•- - •- L+O 0 w O C 0 N•-y 3+ O C O+L C[ L•- 0 0 3 w O O+ o f a C O _ 0 C C L E 0 0 0 N N 0 D C L C E.- U 0 0 3 U x 0 0 uJ - C ¢N L - O -N U DO•-Ni L L CC•- D000 C }ZC 3 UOLn OT} OTO,w u6 y- C ul00 U C E Y O L U •-O> D O t -E +C�O L O r y U L u1 +n L Vi Z+ C O C. m O O t 0 I N O -0 c C+x 0 y O O N O U N 0+ L -0 0 C O -N� N O -0 +U U N•- 0 O O D L a D O•- D �'3 0 L +n C L O O >N U -D VI w E C U1 0+ U-L 0 0 E V C L O+C O O O D D J <?•-C W.i' O•- •-O n+ 0✓1•- 0 0 N Z - U E ✓� O Z L O C•- +0 ++C O•^ O O a+3 L U 3 `� U D O E C C.-.0 - - L- C a++ +L o cu L C C O 0 0 0 0 0 0 - D -O U O -I N D U 0 0 L O_ O C C �E 0 L C a 0}O �E 0 C O C C DLL 3 -C O N-L -OD I 1 -NLL 1 y -0 0 >>1 0 -L O C O 0 0 U 0 0 -U T O'C -O N O y a 0 }C O+ O C O O N LL N Y C ] D O-0 H O E•- C DC+ L O•-•- O>O+ 0 J•- UD' C L - D U¢U�O O D t L C U U 0 - C._ 0-a - -0 y 0 3 N L w D 0 0 N + D D J•-0 O 0 O C +Z U O•- L O - Y+ - - D J >D U 0'F N O c •-L 0 0 U L-❑ 0 +ul U c¢L O y•-..ti 0)3, UJ 0 0 O ✓�u +N d C C ✓-w O.cO L0 0 3 c0 E N O O C O L O E N N L E E y w 0 0 OO .c -0 E w+O 0 y C c 3 EO o w O•-+ a 0•- O+2 U•- L O 1'O C 0 a -0 C J L ul O U tll-¢Z ¢0 0 0 + D L a (n C a C 0� D O O L L U DC O J L O C C+ U O U J C O'�O a U+ C'� 0 Z O E 0+ L a✓1 0 O 0 0 L O L C O - - L O 0 U U O + O D N O O_O -•- 0 O ✓i L O U O•-C 0 c+ 0 L U U++0 _0 3 N 0 Ot a O L d, •-E O w a U •-UI Y >C + O+ U x+0 0 C 0 0 O 0 0 - C a 3 C 0 UI E•- N+U w Y 0 0 0 0•- o DODUX O' OOC 00- C+EL ]DO Dw N 00'r CO C30T C J 0 O E L 0 C DO 0 0 O C L+C T u1 C T•-- L X O L -0 0 C w•- 0 ✓� 0 0 C n 0 O-L C� a U W 0 ❑.- 0. 0 0+U•-0 3 .1 O -O L•- +0 C U O N 3 0 n _D O E Z ❑+0= c T L L v+ -U1+U= O C L O E❑•- -3+❑ L a 0 0 D O O L a D-D Q OUN - 0+ OD- OUO 100 - m ..D L+L 3N OL T0+ TO OF O'OCE 0 - 0 0 D•-C+v E•- }0 0 -E O D C O w C 0 0 y L L L D'C O L L O L O 0 L ]Y'T> W O a 0 E+ O OO C u0i O O X D O O O C O m O a 3 a 0 W.-O=L N=•-D O O v L-0 +C O O O 0 0 0 3 E O L -L L O L D O 0-•- T O O+ T C L+ N C O O U1 O O•-O D•-O v_ O C a i a Q L+ OC 0•- +UD + L -a+U: OOU C+LD+ - CD3 a+•- •_L -.0 N - a U 3 41+•- N C•-C C- L 0 0. O C O 0 D a U !T L O 0 E O L L 0-N O D U . O N O N 0 0 0 o o v c m'C O-❑ 00,n o•--c a Doh+v c v w -OLD v v a E o- v¢m -v w v •-n mLU.-C DO U ULO 0.- UOO NC Uu10✓1 D-- 0-1N.- LO 0 LUG+�+ DEL U 0 >0 0 O n 0 O d N c v O a N 0_y O Z DLwD U 1> 0>41 -O+O O y a O O C m 0 Z E 0 0 0> O N O O Q H+O F L H D N H U+ U O¢a 0 3�1 L O C D sL1 H D O L L U a L L O C¢L O•- t t L O C J•-L m ¢N C a +m 0 3+U O J O U- r a H D E L O O N 8yi u%J i 6u14.nsa.sa6puUp s}1 nsa�yoa»oou; 'o; syowuo4�ay.o Oy p�opuoys s;y.;o •311i say. 1 A �;w SyppS3J o o 100x1 .oya a p Fuo ♦100x1 Rw apow s1 pu;N 3140 FuDs;o^F.uo��om oN ..intl a,.odd 6usi,aaausi,6u3 soxal..Ja fa pa ,o6ns1 puo.s s,w.;O a n awl :N3NIV�OS10 o 0 o 0" oom o `^ Ic o Z w a�io�a w c a W V n4 Z o 0 o n5oo N u C La v as pfr o I a x o N z o o 0, ' o P- N ts Ca a m v c o h b ao In W b a T w w o L o6c o _UES - - U D UUUUU UUc3iU UUUU p 01 0�o 1 - a z° oa °: N � y o3N °a - o, N N y E ao * - a 0 * OP p0 WL�a+ w'O w ¢�m ❑crvi p � ONu O� x 0 O ❑NC L I I 1 1..1 3 E� _ Iu w - -o��: U "a�v �3 dN 3 1 0— u N C. [ r 0 L 0 1. o - m o a 'c ooc oc J 0 - k * # Z r+ar+z r L m'�nE T- uE aou u+ o 4 a =X * � VFUI U�i _ f - _ mIo 0. 0._ N g m �o O ; w ®o m w c w E u oho Z cl - - X. — C� .70 ❑ry - Q o f . O X. _ •6r 1-0i i i�W�, Ln o I V fro _ - - - 4 10 1u - nE I lo 2. O X o3a MO Lg a$g oeo` = F z Pfr` o € =_ggo_ z oow = - m o g°fit Ou �� X; t v v o �X= _cl 8 o _ a �4 _wq JL— _ofr - a z a oc o a - go -? $yo_ S � N m - oa QQ InI — « m= r a—r.lm° c a Y Yo - J n sin u N uau;5,141,90,sab,mp 0 sylnsau y0-00,! o;u ";uagyo oy Duod pys s;qy;o •311i moo;4, I!q:suposal° D 1o0x1 °Rup 1.4 100x1 4q appw s;puffy 3140 Fuos;o�F4u°uu°x.ON .01 a ,y°ld 6ul usi,6u3 91-81•agy°Fq Dauaa�o6ns! Du°pu°ys slgy}o a all :d3N141]S10 � a.NpH r H w oUJ J g O tl tO.1 La u a m ^� 4 V1 MSS - o Z 8 La a � cN 4 z •_ : 00 4 O O O E - �N N o _ E - _ y E o ¢ 4- V) of TC) u o y Eo w a 1°w •C •O N > o Uo - wo - o o o o N+ U Q E D oU o s' a w rim a' + L w nn n _ c 3"w J N o o + — o e L O O o T Q �c L } p C -"� o a � 3Q - o0 30� m•- O } o o - a v c +i W �« } - O o o F om - So ooF IW/� UwU3 C O C of o0 0 - a�_� Do LL O C. E N 4 L = N L W e N T - o �E E I c _- Z t G7 a N c .-o w w at .o t -E c O ;v O O +N + E� I N a L V E.- E _++ c 2 D �E �} �N o Ea n ao Y pO tJ L + % _ w + 00 o � no o--a o. T L N 9 E+ _ _ L -E Io O N _ - S E c o _CC +N+ n L 0 0 O O L F t _ 3 a - w Y•- O N O 3 N 3 - N- C O O+ C ww "O C O' �, Z T3 - 'o'o owe +oN-3 o'� 11 . .€g O O t N c E E � 'o oN= _ Qaci o n mo �c Z off Co C �z ='0nn Q ov o - o`o. oY+ - co�a`000 o' Ew O m� _C O N •L �� �n LY w do d o ol u7w 1P�., �n ��o �o v¢mc�o.., �n� ooN ] Z E L 9 tW.7 � o U a } 3 °' ac N > T 0) W o l > J Q O O U) U }o u 0 Y O J �} U L ` > Of 4- 4 w L 09! O c oN o.N+ - N a o 0 o - - N o E O L Y _ yT y Day o 0 3 3 Y w — _ W xu, WFO w o 3+ 0 3 v y �- o l/1 y m 3 w L `ro o i O o w oN - - �a W f w Z — - N� - a3 Duo o = N + Eon + Y � �+ o o+ _J w o v nyE in O W o w+a w E w o u + w vni D o y N 0 0 I �+ E N o ...N C}E o E 3 3 S o'+ tD V W t- H > c ZD _ E_ >yppm ✓� 3 o O O w cJ E o W - - N n H O: w- -oE o 'o w y `�- - yQ O o Nn v�"Eo cy� oNn 3 w - - ooDc �`- 3 Y oc o o n o o+v o o o n o 3 3 r co W w 3 0+0, +n "o + c w y w 3 T Eo__ ¢ Z Z _ no n>N + n F O U E o 9- oo "o O 0 yo y -Z +a oN ONE wog;Euly�nsaJ sa6u sy�oax y �o; Ao;�aV ap oy D�opupys s!Va;o :311a Sdyyyuo;R1!I!Q!4uotl4au o o 100x1 +py,x a4otluntl[uo uo;100x1 x4 aDow 4i poly31v0 /.uo4;o^A-11ox.oN ..+v ,+oud�3dJua/atuSW3 9oxal��udy�Rtl-UJ3Ao5 Si Dip Duoy4 s,y+,a ayl •tl30143]sia y0N H {A ) LLI (L O- « e € - fi = _ o � Z x °vN � � N CA N egoap�O 0 3 « T8H �o a H o Z _ g av s =� o tOi� o xo _ - « W a �o Jb.� r- - wIo Ly I=ll L a W w _ ug� - « - -« _maa 0 a o �: - - o y N t�l W u ESP ego a v �� « va�o - v n \ m �® 5«F E. -'ham o =oo ° _° t� - o�' boo g� _ o .�.y _ _ v a _ 9; -ea1 =-11 _ = o Tg� gv 6€ _ exaaosv = 14 -- oa =- apo - - _ �o '- -o n_g _ « oP v�g �a -oo - �3� ' moo �' " _ ` � of ogy _- - -c � _ - o€ -off - do- - _ - - - - _ - o� ocI - aF'o 1 =oE'o - = o'n'' 8' e�`°o vv - _ _-_ 02' a it m aZ ary_ -- '2o = _ _$g.`° - -Y � � _ o.go � m off ° u$D� .o FBF= ogc - o o PgN _ :iJ o "- o��'$w,,,- - - ° z,°, - _ =°ks'- N - - ° [ r - --« - U « - n- - - a vo8�- _oso _ o�o�$° `w" vP' rc� o�Pwo° °'Fgo 08� - N - c o LL _- I I I - -_ _E„lo ���sO ENO -- --.�'� - ' - a'gd�d ��v�o «osa � a a � - o 'w _ _ P. L :[��v� - 3 Igo�r000go[ -_ 1. n���«�a_W �¢¢ .�� Do gati�`°�«�,na ���°. <.�y -,�3 aW �«:_,�o�amop�3on°���,n._�o:�«�a,nPa2. tY -rvnv v .o n m F Q- N N nv va �N� rvn °R¢ ®®a 1, 0.10 o c '�n���oc � N i €o'g-� o tv o oy _ ai�Q xz \ o .�`� Z �s c 9. e. N o moo ° - * i oo�'moos= yNo w � Ty o�« goo- in6 cn"'- wa �L 2 a - o- -oo v w w = __ - - Leo I-I.._ SR oz.,- _ - - ao of og_o�.�E €v �'a _ - - -v «g - - i oa w d vl OF - oD - �o oy $a�" -wo ec a ado c o �om� - �aF o _Aga 4, - o u w DB�ga _ o cr a c m J - w _ __ r Qp o = _ om i w It aBPa alai IanPal h �o � 0 � o�o �� l g i- �� � � F. T > 2 aBPa awl la-1 m -°« - n o :3llj uq,6,,l s S 15—P sFlnsa�F �1 toy F PJD—S s F;o 31v0 uIN/.F!I!q!Suotlsdu P o 100x1 Sgtluntl/.uo uq;F100x1 Atl daSn S�!jPu!x luoS;on,(�uoa1ox.IN .3°v a ,F o1d But azusi,6u3 soxal��Jaa /.q Pauaan08 s; PIopuois s,JF;o a aul :83miviisia uo Ix Gov oo Z z _ va U8 my o a x Jos _zPn O �a° � Na ;J ucl 1 N N oao Tc_ a€a o - g8 0 �Vf (NJ Qo�a��'6 p o'rc�e „r I _ Q C7o �"v= W Egg Ln po a = os o 8 3 n La F 3oNa9o` g5 a ` v48�vw i - via m o Ud N .._... o ............. .. a........ ............. o„ a w g ' a _ O: H %...I......`........` Cr.... � a o@ N o �Eo to ova ob y" LLI a EOE oZk Z i; - y -r a o _ �v .8 O moo �d C)hoc ............. --$ ..................«.o O E SO N c a 3 x 21 o ................................................. .............................. Es t n o k a G ao �8 N 8 c 2/1 1£1 a n o c b8 - 1b z/1 oz a t1 p 2 ,aw 8 %e N N H J wo oo _ _ — o 0 ` x _ � III y - - ..2/` oZ W �+ a I W m - _ - W ✓` H 8 o Ir w m M a o. -a tv = SO N om 0 M a� o-ao -moo � w L _ _x x x .- U m - 8 - -rr r m O ot 3 * p a W c 00 a w z w � Z o Z P P N ° O o a o o N w � �� 8 Ll No N W + ow o a 5 o __- Pvv vaP._vo S} up;6u!;Inga�-bomp s}Insa,}Pa 11oou! -1 g1-4.ay;o o;P,opuo;S a R1!I!9!suotlsau o o foxy J sotluntl A—uo;looxl AQ aPow s;Pu!x :31 Va RUDg;o^A;uoIIon ON -.1otl ao10-d bug aau s%6u3 goxal„ al;RQ Pauaan05 g! PIo 4U g;l}}o a all :d301V33510 `w nL O S Y F-!npN F I.IJ _ u cw maw z¢r zxxc a �x W �� fi o m a s X �� car xa x'^ aoo_ x_c> a o H a CJ ¢ o jX axa wo w¢ rxx z� z�x ox vi N Ned x$ B m� ms CV .10 L W W �+fl�R` LL, toU � ✓aix vwix oNx ¢ xU o� o�u R.1 LLI Of E * o& ° ° \ m Sw U c6 - o 0 + w x o N w �xx xox zox doo N = - ocr •- uo Z O - d�o 1 a n N c W � Ch Lno00 - °J o W a : - u zXx u, x u. xE a �x ox- w �x� YWX FoY u¢ x�� www FZQ i 3g° a<`-11 ° c cz — c0 O - Ny � � J oaxxc ?max owe o¢x zax o�x .. xw� a- - - ��x -- i >O CO Q ot v w Js X Nw CO o ax x W.� �zx v� x m mac- �n ua. ,o - `"za�LL J u5 _ p a m W - Z o¢ o _Jo o � ov Jo x�a W to N ¢ n" �" ¢ u m u� z u FN .82 - U o H yJ r «S x o� oox oox xzo woo 'x-'¢<n Qo xo >o o -g mp o���H � 6 ¢cyx mx.a gc av 1 - wo-- rS Jr -may 8 --- 8 m v g �F €, '_� "_ _ ._-«o b �° Vim_ E � o g cl �o� -' - $mom_ «vi - - --r � 'qq 'o' � - - o _ o m g$ 1. _ wr o� -�° � o alb �gQ� w _ �Eoig�go_o€�S 8vab o 5��" mE y fi 6o6 - If �°mw. 10 '. °-",a.--°aoyo oogo -_Ida J yo Dxy Duo uopyws ss!i y sn nsa1 yoayuoou o;u sya ;ua 3311410a ug 00x a11111d A Fq puix ;yod b u,u3 oal„ iR0�aua6Duo 0 R1640A410110x ON 0a } p i :dWI4l7SI0 LA r ti e N ••• o a« - �zo o P. L+I F o d' me _ �_ t LLn- N CA J o 0 « �.E - 07 W Q N o � efl R 0 0° yb - _ s�rca� € Q2-2 a� o t`g o . N� cn N c a J cl coc _ so •. .• 6 F _ .�� 3 m 3 e "5€6sa ••• _ a as p as° _. ~ o Q 5rw _ - _ �s b IF 1 oa ado = Zlht - _-o o - .fin _-sa=g.a _ _ a42 ol As L.lu .2 1! lo - 2 V 0 .671. o z = E 01 �- � u _ cl xn E�,'a N - a€ a El i _ oW3 0 _van O vggt z D o - - a-0 1dd u - O1 - u00 �No Nti - F - - �ba`oo e N $ g P a o o1 p afiP'� °' E g g• _ - g d o Q SC- 8.1go u w o NGZ moo' aoo - - - « °PE coo Q 'o- W L O O n¢C_i oamaao O 1 Neu rc y w _ _; . _ _ _ �« ozo u _W � N -- v Pg8- _ w - bra i i a 9-v .-I 2E= N 5 = 1. o - = O U 5 =-- - - N - _-_ �bow�� a ooc. l Li —L.I > -- -ol c I S,E-1 - - E N o W W �/1 -- E_o a �'P �' o a E ccc u"2'a. O o -h� w8 - 7-3 u€oL v = c z oB og«- c B. - = 7 = _ -mL3 sg N - a&�. Zp --_ - ~Pg - tim- zaa -_�M -on`o�rd�Z o -- _ - _ �g� o zzrcas u. -an€- `3PM3U gE�o $ LLA z o V, A -o--ao- m,o�- 1. m--- _ _; _ a - o - rvuu o V U « ogNmO muuva P. o who t _ c' g -g m _v90 uE€� o l :3l l sn�s ups;Bui;In saBounp� s; ; 4 ;pJouo;s s' }o 314a 4VsuOdgau° s p 10011 JasiP 0510<uo 10}100x1 R°OPOI s;pulx 11o1o (u1 111 IN '..a'a , ad B ausu3 R°P-1115 s; PuPuols s,a _ "1 1, Bd3Y11tl1]S 10 Y a r `whC La Q. cc a €v L j =U F v � 0 v ahT- c c o� a - Sk ""§o Z C N � o n = E€a �' fr� _ maw a 7 -O o o �� - mo o" a 3fr O m V 2 S w - - 'Ea m Cp _ " - - fr a ° _ G 0 0 L „Pio- - `9 c ZN EEZD c° � 6 ->I 5oD. C_u £fry E`° _ - La La a J cw zJ o frog w0 ao. "fr .-2-- -2c' - b'o L� - ' QZ o a�n Rio Yua�'a ba°o o ._ - _7. f.JQ mE-''fry ra u lea v -a- a a- oaCbo - m J 1 tt Is 1 C . L - = =g` - ° _ Dg F °g _ aD` o S.a - a g1p8°0.Z. - - _ c lu,E -- - 3 w°°����D - - �.Doom U W m _ _ 2 > i _- _ _ c -- 11 N _ _1 lz _22 o gk - a - o - w 'Cl.- $o D. `o" a° o Dec° a o' vfr .D m_ �_I-- o } o W ws a -- -_ 15 g �v w r a "� € vo- m - - 2� - - - - a9 - &o - a€ o_ � �m ova' xv � ngn vex' _ �IDDS � a = go _ - 'sv E' _ _ - _ �v afryE. N '-- - - tea " �8€0 �oY _ .�a _ € p = ".g =€: o o5 - _ - - ' u o DE. �2' �v` .. CEEB W -J-2 v8" - -- -- - _ egg- ?gam - °° o Efr"&', - ° - - N z - afra -__ --c;� 'S _ _ _ - o$oo5 - cD - _ - - - _ _ - o 1.'h> €cl _- - aEn o8aaov -aaEfr. fr� Dor m _ -- 8a - _ `� o i -o�wa�-oyo°oo�°bo �Do.�> -��fr ._ .L°�° �M�20 DI ��Da,< W a :3�13 %I!—I 6u{}1Daal S06DMD 10 S}IDShc -1 10 SI—O;Jdy}O 04 DIDMD49 Siy}}O :31tl0 oi5uanuoOS111-1 l}il!0!S 1-1 o Sawn loo.1 anaDS}DyM asoountl AID 104 loa.i FG aDO,a!Duly AID;O Fy.D.1On ON „}Otl d,}Did 6u!�ddui6u3 SDxal��Jay}A0 Daulan06%! DJODUD}S S!y}10 911 ad30IV3osia �� _ 000000Noo�o C r .`L°`Oa' SQ " L �` C. mmo - .p u _ off+ ZQ LLI J =1C� C. .2. _- �'g °, 8 0 °`°g o n o'v+ a Vy � fi -off N a N IA W x$ B N �om�n0000mom0000 >Q ZC N - G ~ O m m x i LLI m ° G? S L - 3c- v ti99 n m m = W O Z N E N =o w� � o oNo�ovoio C JJI vii a J _ �� chi~ N cmp'- W La W W _ - o_- a�i Rc " ry �a H = 0 Z N ``-8v -c�" - alp a oo° W Q 3 cl V Q 3 ++oar v _ _a o_ �� o 0 17 m _ v€o �E v~€� A = Z \ S «fie= - - i - _ 3 g=P- ">g o@ �8 a "gam 1.0. LLI o 00 0 LA 008 + - c t'a-- ago - ° > CIP IS I _- `jaws a oV C. . v m - a z voa p z m c -ono - W og oEa '�v «M Q J u - - -.�- --- O p, �+ _ a - - -«$c ao m Z o>c ��oo.ncm �w �,.�o�� ,�+"o = O u ,.o = _� ---- N N�"f�- - v�_ Q x G - v - - 3 0 E�fravoa + 0. W - - E I O U a° o _ w_ _ J Z ���co 8'woo J1. N$"a o g _ J C 8O�8 8`SogORER C. Fox�anD�y anogo...... 6Z -_ m a + K. -- �- LAL o - P€ o_ _ -rg� E�40F!-, ova nt � - _ �D o OR v�ot m� " o s_ + - J oL d8y �EvPE o&" �Fwn C El Cc L N�a E��v A..1-11 anogo -4i !P .92 >+>�oo o�«> o">" min-�n� `a c.o Z -'0 La J Q "III g LL a• LL ~ W Z m 4N Tc c a V mY I m� I :3113 y bu{yinsa,sa6ounp0 S-o;—uyo oy D—puoys siyy;o 3140 4d4ay�;11!I!o!suo°sau o o loa.1 aou,x a O A—u-;1oa-i AO apow si Du iy luo4}On/.�uo."I ON ..+OO .a odd Wj ddu4i,W3 Soxdl„Jdu1Ol.O Da.I.A.5nsi -u 41ua}O a dUl :d3N1413S10 ~ N o� -w [ - L)W ba g Z G __ _ _ J W o OV Z p s w 3T o zN E- w E Z W U a - ;.E NLa LAI J w _ cl m a Z o a {��71'71-III _ Y 9J_Jl - F Iew e I Eg C� � > W c Oc. 0 Q G E cc 2 E r a t ///J •xqw,ol •xow,ol •xow,ol a 3 a o o - •oalo ygOm ayy s4oJDD Dasn a4 y 0 E •�° c� °_'g' 1�DUS un�0 omy;0 w ,w p - c -- w E n � C _ _"o t T o o o m o o IL Q (..) vE Lo law «0�3 1 � � > 030 � 'E•E'E'E'E'E c o" �2 S°Mv�nowNw. �aF° a. rm 0 3 ~ U o Lo F�E�'j NE a, > a m r -- o cc g ER 8d 'crD oho - M �� a La 9 Ep a = o w W F WI La La E ' £�na _ 0 0 c a- _ �a t'��-u W �n - - pp" `.80 «g�io � _ _ C Ew'o _� id i- .4 .OZ .02 g a $E ❑ J In o ° � Do - �ow�n cDvaac o� J o W y {� Yes = o '- y- a = Z~ o�v _ _ - a N age gN_ 3 - v - a IL ° r u ar --9 o -_o ��gDR - 2 Pg°o-w -_ ohm -oo N o o } w as`a3 a ` me :31la wok; 1!.!-4a�sa6DuuD� syln4a�..... �q;�ayyq qy D�Dp'JDys 4!4y;o 31v0 7y!I!q!SuooSdu o o 100x1 Sooun.luD uo;1DOx1�q dDow 4 ,x luoS;on•(�uou�ox.oN .3°v a ,y o�d Bul�u��i,6u3 soxal��Jay�/.q Pauaano6 s; Puopuois 4!yy;o a ayl D :"miv3J5!0 N M � iP ` N o 0 0 0 0 0 o u 1.Npwt IA O E.w 0 w 4A (V x q - o aLLI In W W p o as m - k D LL _ - = c o _m 1 IEa 0 I - w' wo <ca w w c [ [ w y Y t N o o 2. - ' 2=v v €P 4 n n N O — F°o - 9 R co id a� " ac - 4 T I W ° � c� _ __ N w~ E Im a - J LOto` I u as `-gm mo �o- u = ` -- _ w€ & _ = t v - -- E I I I I_ o gdox c«- n ° = 7a g --- - � w k P&a . a lo _ Y 8 ? -- - _ - -� x o J -°& 8 'g"- P - a s �Wo m Z W o _ a4 oo o w ` o o _ D G p E W 5+ o. - _ a' % - o z w n: ao- E o - _ W c C - i = + -y�2 c J C. - o a - -- ° z _-2 2 p - W awe as � � :-+a._ a� = ° <+5 4 �o + ? �+� �o-o a a a SF!wok;6u!;�ngau 4a6DUDD a BFlnsa�FDd JJODU! uo; eFaguo;1...of PIDDUOF.B!ql;o •3,a ga4F uoa/.F!I!°!suo0sau o °100xy aosio4.x asotlun0[uo uo;100x1 F°aPow s!Pw!�l3140 Ruos;o^RFUDIIon oN '.1otl ao!Fooud bug aaus6u3 goxal��Jay4 Rp Dauu8106 s! Duoouo;g g!yF;o a a11 :d3NIcl35I0 ❑❑o 0 0 0 ytty❑ qq F.yoN H W ❑ ❑ o o ❑❑ +o;n H J o o ❑ n o o ff°o� I � � � a' Q fi Q a o o o ° 0 ° o m Y Vf a�o �° r o o i - o o ❑ Q O O O °° O LJ ❑ ❑ o ❑❑ ° ❑❑ ' Ell o 0 a W $ gH Q - o o m Y ❑❑ _ m V LLI F r,Lo o- o�� =�o o E - 3 W o o tx o o° N _ x ff�� w ° � ❑❑ ' hog a Y o3 pv3 Z w � 5� ❑❑ � 0 zW Z z wo Z d3 Y3 _ Ss z E I I 0 ¢ o d W d W K w ✓r a. o a Q Oz gg a w J p J J ¢ W = a'^a E opygo E p — x p z J LA Ln LLI -8 O Z m Z 03a ofr,w — oL,c rc n n— �3.., V 0V0. 0 8 °V00 8 vev0o S. o Jn 0''° N ° 0 n „ $ 8 08a 8o 8 g � } a 8 Oo y ooa — 8 a818a 8 iz 3 _ `moo o a a0. o 0 o } � cc 01r0 �¢�yyW $� a� W a W o 3 a °Ya 3 8 ° 3 } 8a 8 3 ' a W W ;80 n O O Q 3 W = 0 0 5 i U ° o 3 W } o 00. = F a Oo! moo° a x rp8 Rti = o r° °°�,00 — 00 1 a W y o c° o ° u O 2 o P o C o 0 > 'a a0. D o p 0 o a o0 o Z S a8 a8a S Z Q g " 40 8 ° > B� oO W 8 o08h8Q Scc tA Z8 a� F QQ 0°`u' w cc 0 0`v' 40 W ° 00QSQ 8 08 8o Q8 Q J � Z Z b pg W a LA W m Z I I J I I Z o Wm a o i = K 01 a -A,- - m - ~ - U I II � � — W I I - - � � w 2 .1I23 } Z ot 9 Z L 3 3 0: E. W � LLo r } W Z LL c s W L 3 3 rc ; ¢ :31Ia uro�;BUI1�nsaJ sa6ounP� salnsa�a �o;� �o;� a;o :31v0 SayaauP;li!I!°!SuoOSa�P P 100x1 iPyM a5o0untl lop uo}a100x1 l°OaP w 5�!yP°!�I loos;onl�uouuox.IN ..ao0 a ,a oua BugusBu3 spxalJaViolO pauuanoB s! pao0u14s S!Va}o an yl :830Iv30s IB ce c a � c m ] - PL Nw Q UL - N W a C F{ c E "- c W c w �a flT fl v a� a LL Q LL aCE Lj w m N+ w a U O D O+ E~ ^ � m a m S c a LLI o °m c a c° ,�` _ c° "i e a F U W f "rLLr N-.,b-. N•° UG�°F NL DN Uf Ow CU -n -m W a-C CrZ L) W J + �° s m1 u DD m0> V w �-O= Sd s, J N E w E I _ >E -O n L L o F NQ ° W z } m � 3 w Z f V y m M 1.2 v - Im > ^N — PL:N 1w U D° I 1 \ F a 3 \I N m o O p L D 7 L o t 02 -p O O z 2 2 3 LL I I I I E b O L b w,• U DL C y a3 � L L S O I I i F t C d O C L M N O C e ow N C eC NPn4 W JQ O I I IX ° 3 3 G] 1 6"L R -° U 1161 '�90 3 , _ O Y O er Z > O ° O Z m - no m a A C Z N Z N 3 d u "- nt Q °~ W z W W o+ nD+ Z nu a Z a w O a - o m 3 z 3 I I mJ �ua I JmJ 48 U E° a } W F — It = lr Ea 0 012 �o w : cr w I I Q Q 3 0 a W — _ O O Z J � W FU p v 'A b .L a L°c as°u b b vim` 'Ebt m o- _m --_ Q m, 3144 si!ualo—I Inv BJ 4 j wpp J silna1. {oeJJoM Joy J siawJo;..Ol 01 pJopup{s s0V!;o u o ey{Jo3 1M 3!�suoAaeJ O p 1UIU Janeosipw.esoAJnd.Gn Jo;ypdxy Je ePPa s!pu!J Jup{o µinJ�x.oN '..{ov eo!{xJd 6u!Jaeu!6u3 spxelanaVl Je PeuJano6 s!pJppup{s s!y;{ose n ayy �a3!Nlvl�sla - N x COh ai + ,.OZ °c mm �n wm �- w -« - ` c m m W S gg a E � .4 a Z o N E a' U W C D O+C} ±L o � V o > d - F a Z c aL I IC a ~ asIc+a 11 ma ir iL a .3m mm no`mc9 z } 3� ro- r. Oc O rd H ro- 11 _bP o > = O bl Z LA b pL f r n z U 3 °c a �' a f o °" ° o< u11 - O curvo >m a• N a o +a °On o mcg a a 0 z o _ f _ _- I I — o I I � I I a P I , m — — _ i o i mb J > � o z h r>b > I s zw w s F- Li r `� r Li r- ~z b o aZ >m az v I I N — I I w >b a I I } ~ o i m�L ;b M —_ N m p u!d bu!puag sP�d Z9 Curio — 1 v —vFLo v _ I I aim I v � O e I I � m m F~ N — — L z r ------ a - > > zW ------- b 0 I z = ca C t = z bo c — wE _ o - L m : (1avH] 33S) 53I M4A m¢ o m M y a > _ > z z :3 31va4p si!wool 6 Inv BJ sB6oa.l J silnaI- {oeJJoou! Joy J -ON;Jay{o 01 pJ°pup{s 16V4;o u o ey{Jo; Ob I!qllUOdl6J O p yppxl Janeosipw.esodJnd.too Jo;yppxy Jp ePPw s!pu!tl Rup{o µtnJ�x ON '..{ov eo!{xJd 6u!Jaeu!6u3 spxelanaVl Rp PeuJano6 s!pJppup{s s!y;{oae n ayy �a3!NlvlJslp Signature: Ike-Vise-C.�� Signature: OLW A ,4 reevae Crenshaw(Feb 17,2026 15.C9 00 CST) Gilbe Sanchez(FJQ 17,2026 15:17:42 CST) Email: revaec@corpuschristitx.gov Email: GilbertS2@corpuschristitx.gov Signature: Cgltig Moreno Signature: Caltlyn Moreno(Feh 17.2025 16.15.24 CST) Sarah Hrunkenhoefer(Feh 18,2026 11.16.44 CST) Email: caitlynm@corpuschristitx.gov Email: citysecretary@corpuschristitx.gov -� CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI + FINANCE & PROCUREMENT (361) 826-3160 1 1201 Leopard Street, Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 February 2, 2026 Sill Simpson, President Associated Construction Partners, Ltd 215 W. Bandera Rd. Ste. 114-461 Boerne, TX 78006 jill@acpartners.orq RE: NOTICE OF AWARD RFB/Contract No. 6687 1 Project No. 19029A Citywide Lift Station Repairs (FY 2019-2020) Dear Sill Simpson, Congratulations! On January 27, 2026, the Corpus Christi City Council approved a motion to award your firm the base bid for the above-referenced project, in the amount of $16,811,532.00. The Contractor is instructed to execute all necessary forms and submit all required documentation as outlined in the contract document. All required documents are due within 10 calendar days of receipt of this letter. The following document submittals are required to execute the contract: • Form 1295 Certificate of Interested Parties - Must be filed online with the Texas Ethics Commission. On Box #3, please ensure to enter the project name and number as listed above. • Performance and Payment Bond - Required bond forms have been provided to you for execution. The contract will not be routed for signatures until one original hard copy set of the performance and payment bonds are received. However, an electronic copy may be submitted for review purposes. • Insurance - Refer to the contract documents, Section 00 73 00, for insurance requirements and submit proof of coverage. Submittals will include a Certificate of Insurance referencing the project name and number and all applicable endorsements to the policies. Please contact the project's Procurement Officer, Betsy Roque, if you have any questions regarding this information. Sew to Wlasana Sergio Vi asan a(Feh 3,2D2608:51:12 CST) Sergio Villasana, 3r, CPA, CGFO, CIA Director of Finance & Procurement RETURN DOCUMENTS TO: Betsy Roque, MPA, CPPO, CPPB, CTCD City of Corpus Christi — Procurement 1201 Leopard St. - City Hall, First Floor Corpus Christi, TX 78469-9277 19029A NOA - ACP Final Audit Report 2026-02-03 Created: 2026-02-02(Central Standard Time) By: Betsy Roque(betsyr@corpuschristitx.gov) Status: Signed Transaction ID: CBJCHBCAABAAae6mM5TLYYrn2QpMF_eglbRx8lxEwVpn "19029A NOA - ACP" History Document created by Betsy Roque (betsyr@corpuschristitx.gov) 2026-02-02-4:56:54 PM CST Document emailed to Sergio Villasana (sergiov2@corpuschristitx.gov)for signature 2026-02-02-4:57:58 PM CST Email viewed by Sergio Villasana (sergiov2@corpuschristitx.gov) 2026-02-03-8:50:26 AM CST Document e-signed by Sergio Villasana (sergiov2@corpuschristitx.gov) Signature Date:2026-02-03-8:51:12 AM CST-Time Source:server Agreement completed. 2026-02-03-8:51:12 AM CST Adobe Acrobat Sign 72/5/2026 E(MM/DD/YYYY) A�" CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Sarah Mharlwa Acrisure South Insurance Services, LLC PHONE FAX 1317 Citizens Blvd A/C No Ext: 214-989-7100 A/c,Noy 210-696-8414 Leesburg FL 34748 ADDRESS: Service@Ib-tX.com INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# License#:BR-1796553 INSURERA: Hartford Fire Insurance Company 19682 INSURED INSURERB:Trumbull Insurance Company 27120 Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. INSURERC: Hartford Casualty Insurance Company 29424 215 W. Bandera Rd. Ste. 114-461 Boerne TX 78006 INSURERD:Texas Mutual Insurance Company 22945 INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:829221081 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR INSD WVD POLICYNUMBER MM/DD MM/DD A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 46UEABJ5URP 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR PREMISES DAMAGE TO PREMISES Ea occurrence) ccurrence $500,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $15,000 X XCU PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 POLICY PRO- JECT LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 OTHER: $ B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 46UEABJ60GL 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 Ea accident X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED X SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS X HIRED X NON-OWNED FIR ERTYDAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident C X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR 46HHABJ60JW 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 EACH OCCURRENCE $10,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $10,000,000 DED X RETENTION$1 n nnn $ D WORKERS COMPENSATION 0002120491 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 X PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY Y/N STATUTE ER ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE FN] N/A E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICE R/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 A GL-Ltd Pollution Liab Worksites 46UEABJ5URP 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 Per Occurrence 1,000,000 General Aggregate 2,000,000 Deductible 10,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,maybe attached if more space is required) The General Liability and Auto policies include blanket additional insured endorsements(HG0001 06/05&HA9916 03/12)as required in a written contract with the Named Insured.The General Liability,Auto&Work Comp policies include a blanket waiver of subrogation endorsement(HG0001 06/05, HA9916 03/12& WC42030413)as required in a written contract with the Named Insured. Primary Non-Contributory per attached(HG0001 06/05& HA9916 03/12).Cancellation provisions-see attached(IH0307 06/11 &WC420601). Umbrella is follow form of the General Liability,Auto and Work Comp policies subject to policy terms and conditions. No exclusion for boom and overload coverage. Additional Insureds as per Written Contract: Plummer Associates, Inc.and City of Corpus Christi—Engineering Services. Contract#6687; Project#19029A-RFB-Citywide Lift Station Repairs(FY 2019-2020). CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Plummer Associates, Inc. 500 N. Shoreline Blvd, Suite 700 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi, TX 78401 f -- --di y Irwin ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD NAMED INSURED:Associated Construction Partners,Ltd. POLICY NUMBER:46UEABJ5URP COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM Various provisions in this policy restrict coverage. Read (2) The "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurs the entire policy carefully to determine rights, duties and during the policy period; and what is and is not covered. (3) Prior to the policy period, no insured listed Throughout this policy the words "you" and "your" refer to under Paragraph 1. of Section II — Who Is An the Named Insured shown in the Declarations, and any Insured and no "employee" authorized by you to other person or organization qualifying as a Named give or receive notice of an "occurrence" or Insured under this policy. The words "we", "us" and "our" claim, knew that the "bodily injury" or "property refer to the stock insurance company member of The damage" had occurred, in whole or in part. If Hartford providing this insurance. such a listed insured or authorized "employee" The word "insured" means any person or organization knew, prior to the policy period, that the "bodily qualifying as such under Section II—Who Is An Insured. injury" or "property damage" occurred, then any continuation, change or resumption of such Other words and phrases that appear in quotation marks "bodily injury" or "property damage" during or have special meaning. Refer to Section V—Definitions. after the policy period will be deemed to have SECTION I—COVERAGES been known prior to the policy period. COVERAGE A BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY c. "Bodily injury" or"property damage" will be deemed DAMAGE LIABILITY to have been known to have occurred at the 1. Insuring Agreement earliest time when any insured listed under a. We will pay those sums that the insured becomes Paragraph 1. of Section II — Who Is An Insured orany "employee" authorized by you to give or legally obligated to pay as damages because of receive notice of an "occurrence"or claim: "bodily injury" or "property damage" to which this insurance applies. We will have the right and duty (1) Reports all, or any part, of the "bodily injury" or to defend the insured against any "suit" seeking "property damage" to us or any other insurer; those damages. However, we will have no duty to (2) Receives a written or verbal demand or claim defend the insured against any "suit" seeking for damages because of the "bodily injury" or damages for "bodily injury" or "property damage" to "property damage"; or which this insurance does not apply. We may, at (3) Becomes aware by any other means that our discretion, investigate any "occurrence" and "bodily injury" or "property damage" has settle any claim or "suit" that may result. But: occurred or has begun to occur. (1) The amount we will pay for damages is limited d. Damages because of "bodily injury" include as described in Section III — Limits Of damages claimed by any person or organization for Insurance; and care, loss of services or death resulting at any time (2) Our right and duty to defend ends when we from the "bodily injury". have used up the applicable limit of insurance in e. Incidental Medical Malpractice the payment of judgments or settlements under Coverages A or B or medical expenses under (1) "Bodily injury" arising out of the rendering of or Coverage C. failure to render professional health care No other obligation or liability to pay sums or services as a physician, dentist, nurse, perform acts or services is covered unless explicitly emergency medical technician or paramedicshall be deemed to be caused by an provided for under Supplementary Payments — "occurrence", but only if: Coverages A and B. (a) The physician, dentist, nurse, emergency b. This insurance applies to "bodily injury" and medical technician or paramedic is "property damage" only if: employed by you to provide such services; (1) The "bodily injury" or "property damage" is and caused by an "occurrence" that takes place in (b) You are not engaged in the business or the "coverage territory"; occupation of providing such services. HG 00 01 06 05 Page 1 of 18 ©2005 The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. with its permission.) (2) For the purpose of determining the limits of d. Workers' Compensation And Similar Laws insurance for incidental medical malpractice, Any obligation of the insured under a workers' any act or omission together with all related acts compensation, disability benefits or unemployment or omissions in the furnishing of these services compensation law or any similar law. to any one person will be considered one "occurrence". e. Employer's Liability 2. Exclusions "Bodily injury"to: This insurance does not apply to: (1) An "employee" of the insured arising out of and in the course of: a. Expected Or Intended Injury "Bodily injury" or "property damage" expected or (a) Employment by the insured; or intended from the standpoint of the insured. This (b) Performing duties related to the conduct of exclusion does not apply to "bodily injury" or the insured's business; or "property damage" resulting from the use of (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of reasonable force to protect persons or property. that "employee" as a consequence of b. Contractual Liability Paragraph (1) above. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for which the This exclusion applies: insured is obligated to pay damages by reason of (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an the assumption of liability in a contract or employer or in any other capacity; and agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability (2) To any obligation to share damages with or for damages: repay someone else who must pay damages (1) That the insured would have in the absence of because of the injury. the contract or agreement; or This exclusion does not apply to liability assumed (2) Assumed in a contract or agreement that is an by the insured under an "insured contract". "insured contract", provided the "bodily injury"or f. Pollution "property damage" occurs subsequent to the 1 "Bodilyinjury" or "property damage" out execution of the contract or agreement. Solely ( ) g arising for the purposes of liability assumed in an of the actual, alleged or threatened discharge, "insured contract", reasonable attorney fees and dispersal, seepage, migration, release or necessary litigation expenses incurred by or for escape of"pollutants": a party other than an insured are deemed to be (a) At or from any premises, site or location damages because of "bodily injury" or "property which is or was at any time owned or damage", provided: occupied by, or rented or loaned to, any (a) Liability to such party for, or for the cost of, insured. However, this subparagraph does that party's defense has also been assumed not apply to: in the same "insured contract"; and (i) "Bodily injury" if sustained within a (b) Such attorney fees and litigation expenses building and caused by smoke, fumes, are for defense of that party against a civil or vapor or soot produced by or originating alternative dispute resolution proceeding in from equipment that is used to heat, cool which damages to which this insurance or dehumidify the building, or equipment applies are alleged. that is used to heat water for personal C. Liquor Liability u by the building's occupants or their guests; "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for which any (ii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for insured may be held liable by reason of: which you may be held liable, if you are a (1) Causing or contributing to the intoxication of any contractor and the owner or lessee of person; such premises, site or location has been (2) The furnishing of alcoholic beverages to a added to your policy as an additional person under the legal drinking age or under the insured with respect to your ongoing influence of alcohol; or operations performed for that additional insured at that premises, site or location (3) Any statute, ordinance or regulation relating to and such premises, site or location is not the sale, gift, distribution or use of alcoholic and never was owned or occupied by, or beverages. rented or loaned to, any insured, other This exclusion applies only if you are in the than that additional insured; or business of manufacturing, distributing, selling, serving or furnishing alcoholic beverages. Page 2 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 (iii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" (e) At or from any premises, site or location on arising out of heat, smoke or fumes from which any insured or any contractors or a "hostile fire"; subcontractors working directly or indirectly (b) At or from any premises, site or location on any insured's behalf are performing which is or was at any time used by or for operations if the operations are to test for, any insured or others for the handling, monitor, clean up, remove, contain, treat, storage, disposal, processing or treatment of detoxify or neutralize, or in any way respond waste; to, or assess the effects of, "pollutants". (c) Which are or were at any time transported, (2) Any loss, cost or expense arising out of any: handled, stored, treated, disposed of, or (a) Request, demand, order or statutory or processed as waste by or for: regulatory requirement that any insured or (i) Any insured; or others test for, monitor, clean up, remove, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in (ii) Any person or organization for whom you any way respond to, or assess the effects of, may be legally responsible; "pollutants"; or (d) At or from any premises, site or location on (b) Claim or suit by or on behalf of a which any insured or any contractors or governmental authority for damages subcontractors working directly or indirectly because of testing for, monitoring, cleaning on any insured's behalf are performing operations if the "pollutants" are brought on up, removing, containing, treating, or to the premises, site or location in detoxifying or neutralizing, or in any way connection with such operations by such responding to, or assessing the effects of, "pollutants". insured, contractor or subcontractor. However, this subparagraph does not apply However, this paragraph does not apply to to: liability for damages because of "property damage" that the insured would have in the (i) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" absence of such request, demand, order or arising out of the escape of fuels, statutory or regulatory requirement, or such lubricants or other operating fluids which claim or"suit" by or on behalf of a governmental are needed to perform the normal authority. electrical, hydraulic or mechanical functions necessary for the operation of g• Aircraft,Auto Or Watercraft "mobile equipment" or its parts, if such "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of fuels, lubricants or other operating fluids the ownership, maintenance, use or entrustment to escape from a vehicle part designed to others of any aircraft, "auto" or watercraft owned or hold, store or receive them. This operated by or rented or loaned to any insured. Use exception does not apply if the "bodily includes operation and "loading or unloading". injury" or "property damage" arises out of This exclusion applies even if the claims against the intentional discharge, dispersal or any insured allege negligence or other wrongdoing release of the fuels, lubricants or other in the supervision, hiring, employment, training or operating fluids, or if such fuels, monitoring of others by that insured, if the lubricants or other operating fluids are "occurrence" which caused the "bodily injury" or brought on or to the premises, site or "property damage" involved the ownership, location with the intent that they be maintenance, use or entrustment to others of any discharged, dispersed or released as part aircraft, "auto" or watercraft that is owned or of the operations being performed by operated by or rented or loaned to any insured. such insured, contractor or This exclusion does not apply to: subcontractor; (ii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" (1) A watercraft while ashore on premises you own sustained within a building and caused or rent; by the release of gases, fumes or vapors (2) A watercraft you do not own that is: from materials brought into that building (a) Less than 51 feet long; and in connection with operations being (b) Not being used to carry persons for a performed by you or on your behalf by a contractor or subcontractor; or charge; (iii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" (3) Parking an "auto" on, or on the ways next to, arising out of heat, smoke or fumes from premises you own or rent, provided the "auto" is a "hostile fire"; or not owned by or rented or loaned to you or the insured; HG 00 01 06 05 Page 3 of 18 (4) Liability assumed under any "insured contract" working directly or indirectly on your behalf are for the ownership, maintenance or use of performing operations, if the "property damage" aircraft or watercraft; arises out of those operations; or (5) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out (6) That particular part of any property that must be of the operation of any of the equipment listed in restored, repaired or replaced because "your Paragraph f.(2) or f.(3) of the definition of work"was incorrectly performed on it. "mobile equipment"; or Paragraphs (1), (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not (6) An aircraft that is not owned by any insured and apply to "property damage" (other than damage by is hired, chartered or loaned with a paid crew. fire) to premises, including the contents of such However, this exception does not apply if the premises, rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer insured has any other insurance for such "bodily consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance injury" or "property damage", whether the other applies to Damage To Premises Rented To You as insurance is primary, excess, contingent or on described in Section III — Limits Of Insurance. any other basis. Paragraph (2) of this exclusion does not apply if the h. Mobile Equipment premises are "your work" and were never occupied, "Bodily injury" or"property damage" arising out of: rented or held for rental by you. (1) The transportation of "mobile equipment" by an Paragraphs (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not "auto" owned or operated by or rented or loaned apply to "property damage" arising from the use of to any insured; or elevators. (2) The use of "mobile equipment" in, or while in Paragraphs (3), (4), (5) and (6) of this exclusion do practice for, or while being prepared for, any not apply to liability assumed under a sidetrack prearranged racing, speed, demolition, or agreement. stunting activity. Paragraphs (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not i. War apply to "property damage" to borrowed equipment "Bodily injury" or "property damage", however while not being used to perform operations at the caused, arising, directly or indirectly, out of: job site. Paragraph (6) of this exclusion does not apply to (1) War, including undeclared or civil war; "property damage" included in the "products- (2) Warlike action by a military force, including completed operations hazard". action in hindering or defending against an k. Damage To Your Product actual or expected attack, by any government, sovereign or other authority using military "Property damage" to "your product" arising out of it personnel or other agents; or or any part of it. (3) Insurrection, rebellion, revolution, usurped I. Damage To Your Work power, or action taken by governmental "Property damage" to "your work" arising out of it or authority in hindering or defending against any any part of it and included in the "products- of these. completed operations hazard". j. Damage To Property This exclusion does not apply if the damaged work "Property damage" to: or the work out of which the damage arises was (1) Property you own, rent, or occupy, including any performed on your behalf by a subcontractor. costs or expenses incurred by you, or any other m. Damage To Impaired Property Or Property Not person, organization or entity, for repair, Physically Injured replacement, enhancement, restoration or "Property damage" to "impaired property" or maintenance of such property for any reason, property that has not been physically injured, including prevention of injury to a person or arising out of: damage to another's property; (1) A defect, deficiency, inadequacy or dangerous (2) Premises you sell, give away or abandon, if the condition in "your product" or"your work"; or "property damage" arises out of any part of (2) A delay or failure by you or anyone acting on those premises; your behalf to perform a contract or agreement (3) Property loaned to you; in accordance with its terms. (4) Personal property in the care, custody or control This exclusion does not apply to the loss of use of of the insured; other property arising out of sudden and accidental (5) That particular part of real property on which physical injury to "your product" or"your work" after you or any contractors or subcontractors it has been put to its intended use. Page 4 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 n. Recall Of Products, Work Or Impaired kind to persons or property which would not Property have occurred in whole or in part but for the Damages claimed for any loss, cost or expense "asbestos hazard"; incurred by you or others for the loss of use, (b) Arise out of any request, demand, order or withdrawal, recall, inspection, repair, replacement, statutory or regulatory requirement that any adjustment, removal or disposal of: insured or others test for, monitor, clean up, (1) "Your product'; remove, encapsulate, contain, treat, detoxify (2) "Your work"; or or neutralize or in any way respond to or assess the effects of an asbestos hazard"; (3) "Impaired property"; or if such product, work, or property is withdrawn or (c) Arise out of any claim or suit for damages recalled from the market or from use by any person because of testing for, monitoring, cleaning or organization because of a known or suspected up, removing, encapsulating, containing, defect, deficiency, inadequacy or dangerous treating, detoxifying or neutralizing or in any condition in it. way responding to or assessing the effects o. Personal And Advertising Injury of an "asbestos hazard". "Bodily injury" arising out of "personal and Damage To Premises Rented To You — Exception advertising injury". For Damage By Fire, Lightning Or Explosion p. Electronic Data Exclusions c. through h. and j. through n. do not apply Damages arising out of the loss of, loss of use of, to damage by fire, lightning or explosion to premises damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with inability to manipulate electronic data. permission of the owner. A separate limit of insurance applies to this coverage as described in Section III — As used in this exclusion, electronic data means Limits Of Insurance. information, facts or programs stored as or on, COVERAGE B PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING created or used on, or transmitted to or from INJURY LIABILITY computer software, including systems and applications software, hard or floppy disks, CD- 1. Insuring Agreement ROMS, tapes, drives, cells, data processing a. We will pay those sums that the insured becomes devices or any other media which are used with legally obligated to pay as damages because of electronically controlled equipment. "personal and advertising injury" to which this q. Employment-Related Practices insurance applies. We will have the right and duty "Bodily injury"to: to defend the insured against any "suit' seeking those damages. However, we will have no duty to (1) A person arising out of any "employment— defend the insured against any "suit' seeking related practices"; or damages for "personal and advertising injury" to (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of which this insurance does not apply. We may, at that person as a consequence of "bodily injury" our discretion, investigate any offense and settle to that person at whom any "employment- any claim or "suit' that may result. But: related practices" are directed. (1) The amount we will pay for damages is limited This exclusion applies: as described in Section III — Limits Of (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an Insurance; and employer or in any other capacity; and (2) Our right and duty to defend end when we have (2) To any obligation to share damages with or used up the applicable limit of insurance in the repay someone else who must pay damages payment of judgments or settlements under because of the injury. Coverages A or B or medical expenses under Coverage C. r. Asbestos No other obligation or liability to pay sums or (1) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out perform acts or services is covered unless explicitly of the "asbestos hazard". provided for under Supplementary Payments — (2) Any damages, judgments, settlements, loss, Coverages A and B. costs or expenses that: b. This insurance applies to "personal and advertising (a) May be awarded or incurred by reason of injury" caused by an offense arising out of your any claim or suit alleging actual or business but only if the offense was committed in threatened injury or damage of any nature or the "coverage territory"during the policy period. HG 00 01 06 05 Page 5 of 18 2. Exclusions (2) Slogan, unless the slogan is also a trademark, This insurance does not apply to: trade name, service mark or other designation a. Knowing Violation Of Rights Of Another of origin or authenticity; or "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of an (3) Title of any literary or artistic work. offense committed by, at the direction or with the j• Insureds In Media And Internet Type consent or acquiescence of the insured with the Businesses expectation of inflicting "personal and advertising "Personal and advertising injury" committed by an injury". insured whose business is: b. Material Published With Knowledge Of Falsity (1) Advertising, broadcasting, publishing or "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of oral, telecasting; written or electronic publication of material, if done (2) Designing or determining content of web sites by or at the direction of the insured with knowledge for others; or of its falsity. (3) An Internet search, access, content or service c. Material Published Prior To Policy Period provider. "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of oral, However, this exclusion does not apply to written or electronic publication of material whose Paragraphs 17.a., b. and c. of "personal and first publication took place before the beginning of advertising injury" under the Definitions Section. the policy period. For the purposes of this exclusion, placing an d. Criminal Acts "advertisement"for or linking to others on your web "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of a site, by itself, is not considered the business of criminal act committed by or at the direction of the advertising, broadcasting, publishing or telecasting. insured. k. Electronic Chatrooms Or Bulletin Boards e. Contractual Liability "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of an "Personal and advertising injury" for which the electronic chatroom or bulletin board the insured insured has assumed liability in a contract or hosts, owns, or over which the insured exercises agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability control. for damages that the insured would have in the I. Unauthorized Use Of Another's Name Or absence of the contract or agreement. Product f. Breach Of Contract "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of a unauthorized use of another's name or product in breach of contract, except an implied contract to use your e-mail address, domain name or metatags, or another's"advertising idea" in your"advertisement". any other similar tactics to mislead another's g. Quality Or Performance Of Goods — Failure To potential customers. Conform To Statements m. Pollution "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the failure of goods, products or services to conform actual, alleged or threatened discharge, dispersal, with any statement of quality or performance made seepage, migration, release or escape of in your"advertisement". "pollutants" at any time. h. Wrong Description Of Prices n. Pollution-Related "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the Any loss, cost or expense arising out of any: wrong description of the price of goods, products or (1) Request, demand, order or statutory or services. regulatory requirement that any insured or i. Infringement Of Intellectual Property Rights others test for, monitor, clean up, remove, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in any "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of any way respond to, or assess the effects of, violation of any intellectual property rights such as "pollutants"; or copyright, patent, trademark, trade name, trade secret, service mark or other designation of origin (2) Claim or suit by or on behalf of a governmental or authenticity. authority for damages because of testing for, However, this exclusion does not apply to monitoring, cleaning up, removing, containing, treating, detoxifying or neutralizing, or in any infringement, in your"advertisement", of: way responding to, or assessing the effects of, (1) Copyright; "pollutants". Page 6 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 o. War (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of "Personal and advertising injury", however caused, that person as a consequence of "personal and arising, directly or indirectly, out of: advertising injury" to that person at whom any (1) War, including undeclared or civil war; "employment-related practices" are directed. (2) Warlike action by a military force, including This exclusion applies: action in hindering or defending against an (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an actual or expected attack, by any government, employer or in any other capacity; and sovereign or other authority using military (2) To any obligation to share damages with or personnel or other agents; or repay someone else who must pay damages (3) Insurrection, rebellion, revolution, usurped power, because of the injury. or action taken by governmental authority in v. Asbestos hindering or defending against any of these. (1) "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of p. Internet Advertisements And Content Of Others the "asbestos hazard". "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of: (2) Any damages, judgments, settlements, loss, (1) An "advertisement"for others on your web site; costs or expenses that: (2) Placing a link to a web site of others on your (a) May be awarded or incurred by reason of web site; any claim or suit alleging actual or (3) Content, including information, sounds, text, threatened injury or damage of any nature or graphics, or images from a web site of others kind to persons or property which would not displayed within a frame or border on your web have occurred in whole or in part but for the site; or "asbestos hazard"; (4) Computer code, software or programming used (b) Arise out of any request, demand, order or statutory or regulatory requirement that any to enable: insured or others test for, monitor, clean up, (a) Your web site; or remove, encapsulate, contain, treat, detoxify (b) The presentation or functionality of an or neutralize or in any way respond to or "advertisement" or other content on your assess the effects of an "asbestos hazard"; web site. or q. Right Of Privacy Created By Statute (c) Arise out of any claim or suit for damages "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the because of testing for, monitoring, cleaning violation of a person's right of privacy created by up, removing, encapsulating, containing, any state or federal act. treating, detoxifying or neutralizing or in any way responding to or assessing the effects However, this exclusion does not apply to liability of an "asbestos hazard". for damages that the insured would have in the COVERAGE C MEDICAL PAYMENTS absence of such state or federal act. r. Violation Of Anti-Trust law 1. Insuring Agreement „ a. We will pay medical expenses as described below Personal and advertising injury arising out of a for"bodily injury" caused by an accident: violation of any anti-trust law. S. Securities (1) On premises you own or rent; "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of the (2) On ways next to premises you own or rent; or fluctuation in price or value of any stocks, bonds or (3) Because of your operations; other securities. provided that: t. Discrimination Or Humiliation (1) The accident takes place in the "coverage "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of territory" and during the policy period; discrimination or humiliation committed by or at the (2) The expenses are incurred and reported to us direction of any "executive officer", director, within three years of the date of the accident; stockholder, partner or member of the insured. and u. Employment-Related Practices (3) The injured person submits to examination, at "Personal and advertising injury"to: our expense, by physicians of our choice as (1) A person arising out of any "employment— often as we reasonably require. related practices"; or HG 00 01 06 05 Page 7 of 18 b. We will make these payments regardless of fault. e. All costs taxed against the insured in the "suit". These payments will not exceed the applicable limit f. Prejudgment interest awarded against the insured of insurance. We will pay reasonable expenses for: on that part of the judgment we pay. If we make an (1) First aid administered at the time of an accident; offer to pay the applicable limit of insurance, we will (2) Necessary medical, surgical, x-ray and dental not pay any prejudgment interest based on that services, including prosthetic devices; and period of time after the offer. (3) Necessary ambulance, hospital, professional g• All interest on the full amount of any judgment that nursing and funeral services. accrues after entry of the judgment and before we have paid, offered to pay, or deposited in court the 2. Exclusions part of the judgment that is within the applicable We will not pay expenses for"bodily injury": limit of insurance. a. Any Insured These payments will not reduce the limits of insurance. To any insured, except"volunteer workers". 2. If we defend an insured against a "suit" and an b. Hired Person indemnitee of the insured is also named as a party to To a person hired to do work for or on behalf of any the "suit", we will defend that indemnitee if all of the insured or a tenant of any insured. following conditions are met: c. Injury On Normally Occupied Premises a. The "suit" against the indemnitee seeks damages for which the insured has assumed the liability of To a person injured on that part of premises you the indemnitee in a contract or agreement that is an own or rent that the person normally occupies. "insured contract"; d. Workers Compensation And Similar Laws b. This insurance applies to such liability assumed by To a person, whether or not an "employee" of any the insured; insured, if benefits for the "bodily injury" are payable c. The obligation to defend, or the cost of the defense or must be provided under a workers' compensation of, that indemnitee, has also been assumed by the or disability benefits law or a similar law. insured in the same"insured contract"; e. Athletics Activities d. The allegations in the "suit" and the information we To a person injured while practicing, instructing or know about the "occurrence" are such that no participating in any physical exercises or games, conflict appears to exist between the interests of sports, or athletic contests. the insured and the interests of the indemnitee; f. Products-Completed Operations Hazard e. The indemnitee and the insured ask us to conduct Included within the "products-completed operations and control the defense of that indemnitee against hazard". such "suit" and agree that we can assign the same counsel to defend the insured and the indemnitee; g. Coverage A Exclusions and Excluded under Coverage A. f. The indemnitee: SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — COVERAGES (1) Agrees in writing to: A AND B (a) Cooperate with us in the investigation, 1. We will pay, with respect to any claim we investigate or settlement or defense of the "suit"; settle, or any"suit" against an insured we defend: (b) Immediately send us copies of any a. All expenses we incur. demands, notices, summonses or legal b. Up to $1,000 for cost of bail bonds required papers received in connection with the "suit"; because of accidents or traffic law violations arising (c) Notify any other insurer whose coverage is out of the use of any vehicle to which the Bodily available to the indemnitee; and Injury Liability Coverage applies. We do not have (d) Cooperate with us with respect to to furnish these bonds. appeal bonds or bonds to release coordinating other applicable insurance c. The cost of a pp available to the indemnitee; and attachments, but only for bond amounts within the (2) Provides us with written authorization to: applicable limit of insurance. We do not have to furnish these bonds. (a) Obtain records and other information related d. All reasonable expenses incurred by the insured at to the "suit"; and our request to assist us in the investigation or (b) Conduct and control the defense of the defense of the claim or "suit", including actual loss indemnitee in such "suit". of earnings up to $500 a day because of time off So long as the above conditions are met, attorneys' from work. fees incurred by us in the defense of that indemnitee, Page 8 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 necessary litigation expenses incurred by us and However, none of these "employees" or "volunteer necessary litigation expenses incurred by the workers" are insureds for: indemnitee at our request will be paid as (1) "Bodily injury" or "personal and advertising Supplementary Payments. Notwithstanding the injury": provisions of Paragraph 2.b.(2) of Section I — Coverage A — Bodily Injury And Property Damage (a) To you, to your partners or members (if you Liability, such payments will not be deemed to be are a partnership or joint venture), to your damages for"bodily injury" and "property damage" and members (if you are a limited liability will not reduce the limits of insurance. company), to a co-"employee" while in the course of his or her employment or Our obligation to defend an insured's indemnitee and performing duties related to the conduct of to pay for attorneys' fees and necessary litigation your business, or to your other "volunteer expenses as Supplementary Payments ends when: workers" while performing duties related to a. We have used up the applicable limit of insurance the conduct of your business; in the payment of judgments or settlements; or (b) To the spouse, child, parent, brother or sister b. The conditions set forth above, or the terms of the of that co-"employee" or that "volunteer agreement described in Paragraph f. above, are no worker" as a consequence of Paragraph longer met. (1)(a) above; SECTION II—WHO IS AN INSURED (c) For which there is any obligation to share 1. If you are designated in the Declarations as: damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the injury a. An individual, you and your spouse are insureds, described in Paragraphs (1)(a) or (b) above; but only with respect to the conduct of a business or of which you are the sole owner. (d) Arising out of his or her providing or failing to b. A partnership or joint venture, you are an insured. provide professional health care services. Your members, your partners, and their spouses are also insureds, but only with respect to the If you are not in the business of providing conduct of your business. professional health care services, Paragraph (d) C. A limited liability company, you are an insured. does not apply to any nurse, emergency medical technician or paramedic employed by Your members are also insureds, but only with you to provide such services. respect to the conduct of your business. Your managers are insureds, but only with respect to (2) "Property damage" to property: their duties as your managers. (a) Owned, occupied or used by, d. An organization other than a partnership, joint (b) Rented to, in the care, custody or control of, venture or limited liability company, you are an or over which physical control is being insured. Your "executive officers" and directors are exercised for any purpose by insureds, but only with respect to their duties as you, any of your "employees", "volunteer your officers or directors. Your stockholders are workers", any partner or member (if you are a also insureds, but only with respect to their liability partnership or joint venture), or any member (if as stockholders. you are a limited liability company). e. A trust, you are an insured. Your trustees are also b. Real Estate Manager insureds, but only with respect to their duties as trustees. Any person (other than your "employee" or "volunteer worker"), or any organization while 2. Each of the following is also an insured: acting as your real estate manager. a. Employees and Volunteer workers c. Temporary Custodians of Your Property Your "volunteer workers" only while performing Any person or organization having proper duties related to the conduct of your business, or temporary custody of your property if you die, but your "employees", other than either your "executive only: officers" (if you are an organization other than a partnership, joint venture or limited liability (1) With respect to liability arising out of the company) or your managers (if you are a limited maintenance or use of that property; and liability company), but only for acts within the scope (2) Until your legal representative has been of their employment by you or while performing appointed. duties related to the conduct of your business. d. Legal Representative If You Die Your legal representative if you die, but only with respect to duties as such. That representative will HG 00 01 06 05 Page 9 of 18 have all your rights and duties under this Coverage 5. Nonowned Watercraft Part. With respect to watercraft you do not own that is less e. Unnamed Subsidiary than 51 feet long and is not being used to carry Any subsidiary, and subsidiary thereof, of yours persons for a charge, any person is an insured while which is a legally incorporated entity of which you operating such watercraft with your permission. Any own a financial interest of more than 50% of the other person or organization responsible for the voting stock on the effective date of the Coverage conduct of such person is also an insured, but only Part. with respect to liability arising out of the operation of the watercraft, and only if no other insurance of any The insurance afforded herein for any subsidiary kind is available to that person or organization for this not named in this Coverage Part as a named liability. insured does not apply to injury or damage with respect to which an insured under this Coverage However, no person or organization is an insured with Part is also an insured under another policy or respect to: would be an insured under such policy but for its a. "Bodily injury" to a co-"employee" of the person termination or the exhaustion of its limits of operating the watercraft; or insurance. b. "Property damage" to property owned by, rented to, 3. Newly Acquired or Formed Organization in the charge of or occupied by you or the employer Any organization you newly acquire or form, other than of any person who is an insured under this a partnership, joint venture or limited liability company, provision. and over which you maintain financial interest of more 6. Additional Insureds When Required By Written than 50% of the voting stock, will qualify as a Named Contract, Written Agreement Or Permit Insured if there is no other similar insurance available The following person(s) or organization(s) are an to that organization. However: additional insured when you have agreed, in a written a. Coverage under this provision is afforded only until contract, written agreement or because of a permit the 180th day after you acquire or form the issued by a state or political subdivision, that such organization or the end of the policy period, person or organization be added as an additional whichever is earlier; insured on your policy, provided the injury or damage b. Coverage A does not apply to "bodily injury" or occurs subsequent to the execution of the contract or "property damage" that occurred before you agreement. acquired or formed the organization; and A person or organization is an additional insured under c. Coverage B does not apply to "personal and this provision only for that period of time required by advertising injury" arising out of an offense the contract or agreement. committed before you acquired or formed the However, no such person or organization is an insured organization. under this provision if such person or organization is 4. Mobile Equipment included as an insured by an endorsement issued by With respect to mobile equipment registered in your us and made a part of this Coverage Part. name under any motor vehicle registration law, any a. Vendors person is an insured while driving such equipment Any person(s) or organization(s) (referred to below along a public highway with your permission. Any other as vendor), but only with respect to "bodily injury" person or organization responsible for the conduct of or "property damage" arising out of "your products" such person is also an insured, but only with respect to which are distributed or sold in the regular course liability arising out of the operation of the equipment, of the vendor's business and only if this Coverage and only if no other insurance of any kind is available Part provides coverage for "bodily injury" or to that person or organization for this liability. However, "property damage" included within the "products- no person or organization is an insured with respect to: completed operations hazard". a. "Bodily injury" to a co-"employee" of the person (1) The insurance afforded the vendor is subject to driving the equipment; or the following additional exclusions: b. "Property damage" to property owned by, rented to, This insurance does not apply to: in the charge of or occupied by you or the employer (a) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for of any person who is an insured under this which the vendor is obligated to pay provision. damages by reason of the assumption of liability in a contract or agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability for damages that the vendor would have in the absence of the contract or agreement; Page 10 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 (b) Any express warranty unauthorized by you; c. Lessors of Land or Premises (c) Any physical or chemical change in the Any person or organization from whom you lease product made intentionally by the vendor; land or premises, but only with respect to liability (d) Repackaging, except when unpacked solely arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of for the purpose of inspection, demonstration, that part of the land or premises leased to you. testing, or the substitution of parts under With respect to the insurance afforded these instructions from the manufacturer, and then additional insureds the following additional repackaged in the original container; exclusions apply: (e) Any failure to make such inspections, This insurance does not apply to: adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor 1. Any "occurrence" which takes place after you has agreed to make or normally undertakes cease to lease that land; or to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of the 2. Structural alterations, new construction or products; demolition operations performed by or on behalf of such person or organization. (f) Demonstration, installation, servicing or repair operations, except such operations d. Architects, Engineers or Surveyors performed at the vendor's premises in Any architect, engineer, or surveyor, but only with connection with the sale of the product; respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property (g) Products which, after distribution or sale by damage" or "personal and advertising injury" you, have been labeled or relabeled or used caused, in whole or in part, by your acts or as a container, part or ingredient of any omissions or the acts or omissions of those acting other thing or substance by or for the on your behalf: vendor; or (1) In connection with your premises; or (h) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising (2) In the performance of your ongoing operations out of the sole negligence of the vendor for performed by you or on your behalf. its own acts or omissions or those of its With respect to the insurance afforded these employees or anyone else acting on its additional insureds, the following additional behalf. However, this exclusion does not exclusion applies: apply to: This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury", (i) The exceptions contained in Sub- "property damage" or "personal and advertising paragraphs (d) or(f); or injury" arising out of the rendering of or the failure (ii) Such inspections, adjustments, tests or to render any professional services by or for you, servicing as the vendor has agreed to including: make or normally undertakes to make in 1. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare the usual course of business, in or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, connection with the distribution or sale of reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or the products. drawings and specifications; or (2) This insurance does not apply to any insured 2. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or person or organization, from whom you have engineering activities. acquired such products, or any ingredient, part e. Permits Issued By State Or Political or container, entering into, accompanying or containing such products. Subdivisions b. Lessors of Equipment Any state or political subdivision, but only with respect to operations performed by you or on your (1) Any person or organization from whom you behalf for which the state or political subdivision lease equipment; but only with respect to their has issued a permit. liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or With respect to the insurance afforded these "personal and advertising injury" caused, in whole or in part, by your maintenance, operation additional insureds, this insurance does not apply or use of equipment leased to you by such to: person or organization. (1) "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal (2) With respect to the insurance afforded to these and advertising injury" arising out of operations additional insureds this insurance does not performed for the state or municipality; or apply to any "occurrence" which takes place (2) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" included after the equipment lease expires. within the "products-completed operations hazard". HG 00 01 06 05 Page 11 of 18 f. Any Other Party c. Persons or organizations making claims or bringing Any other person or organization who is not an "suits". insured under Paragraphs a. through e. above, but 2. General Aggregate Limit only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", The General Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay "property damage" or "personal and advertising for the sum of: injury" caused, in whole or in part, by your acts or omissions or the acts or omissions of those acting a. Medical expenses under Coverage C; on your behalf: b. Damages under Coverage A, except damages (1) In the performance of your ongoing operations; because of "bodily injury" or "property damage" (2) In connection with your premises owned by or included in the "products-completed operations rented to you; or hazard"; and (3) In connection with "your work" and included c. Damages under Coverage B. within the "products-completed operations 3. Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit hazard", but only if The Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit (a) The written contract or agreement requires is the most we will pay under Coverage A for damages you to provide such coverage to such because of "bodily injury" and "property damage" additional insured; and included in the "products-completed operations hazard". (b) This Coverage Part provides coverage for "bodily injury" or "property damage" included 4. Personal and Advertising Injury Limit within the "products-completed operations Subject to 2. above, the Personal and Advertising hazard". Injury Limit is the most we will pay under Coverage B With respect to the insurance afforded to these for the sum of all damages because of all "personal additional insureds, this insurance does not apply and advertising injury" sustained by any one person or to: organization. "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and 5. Each Occurrence Limit advertising injury" arising out of the rendering of, or Subject to 2. or 3. above, whichever applies, the Each the failure to render, any professional architectural, Occurrence Limit is the most we will pay for the sum engineering or surveying services, including: of: (1) The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare a. Damages under Coverage A; and or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, b. Medical expenses under Coverage C reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or because of all "bodily injury" and "property damage" drawings and specifications; or arising out of any one "occurrence". (2) Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. 6. Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit Subject to 5. above, the Damage To Premises Rented The limits of insurance that apply to additional insureds To You Limit is the most we will pay under Coverage A under this provision is described in Section III — Limits for damages because of"property damage" to any one Of Insurance. premises, while rented to you, or in the case of How this insurance applies when other insurance is damage by fire, lightning or explosion, while rented to available to the additional insured is described in the you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of Other Insurance Condition in Section IV— Commercial the owner. General Liability Conditions. In the case of damage by fire, lightning or explosion, No person or organization is an insured with respect to the the Damage to Premises Rented To You Limit applies conduct of any current or past partnership, joint venture or to all damage proximately caused by the same event, limited liability company that is not shown as a Named whether such damage results from fire, lightning or Insured in the Declarations. explosion or any combination of these. SECTION III— LIMITS OF INSURANCE 1. The Most We will Pay 7. Medical Expense Limit Subject to 5. above, the Medical Expense Limit is the The Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations and most we will pay under Coverage C for all medical the rules below fix the most we will pay regardless of expenses because of "bodily injury" sustained by any the number of: one person. a. Insureds; 8. How Limits Apply To Additional Insureds b. Claims made or"suits" brought; or If you have agreed in a written contract or written agreement that another person or organization be Page 12 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 added as an additional insured on your policy, the (3) Cooperate with us in the investigation or most we will pay on behalf of such additional insured is settlement of the claim or defense against the the lesser of: "suit"; and a. The limits of insurance specified in the written (4) Assist us, upon our request, in the enforcement of contract or written agreement; or any right against any person or organization which b. The Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations. may be liable to the insured because of injury or Such amount shall be a part of and not in addition to damage to which this insurance may also apply. Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations and d. Obligations At The Insureds Own Cost described in this Section. No insured will, except at that insured's own cost, The Limits of Insurance of this Coverage Part apply voluntarily make a payment, assume any separately to each consecutive annual period and to any obligation, or incur any expense, other than for first remaining period of less than 12 months, starting with the aid, without our consent. beginning of the policy period shown in the Declarations, e. Additional Insureds Other Insurance unless the policy period is extended after issuance for an If we cover a claim or "suit" under this Coverage additional period of less than 12 months. In that case, the Part that may also be covered by other insurance additional period will be deemed part of the last preceding available to an additional insured, such additional period for purposes of determining the Limits of Insurance. insured must submit such claim or "suit" to the SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY other insurer for defense and indemnity. CONDITIONS However, this provision does not apply to the 1. Bankruptcy extent that you have agreed in a written contract or Bankruptcy or insolvency of the insured or of the written agreement that this insurance is primary insured's estate will not relieve us of our obligations and non-contributory with the additional insured's under this Coverage Part. own insurance. 2. Duties In The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim f. Knowledge Of An Occurrence, Offense, Claim Or Suit Or Suit a. Notice Of Occurrence Or Offense Paragraphs a. and b. apply to you or to any additional insured only when such "occurrence", You or any additional insured must see to it that we offense, claim or "suit" is known to: are notified as soon as practicable of an "occurrence" or an offense which may result in a (1) You or any additional insured that is an claim. To the extent possible, notice should include: individual; (1) How, when and where the "occurrence" or (2) Any partner, if you or an additional insured is a offense took place; partnership; (2) The names and addresses of any injured (3) Any manager, if you or an additional insured is a persons and witnesses; and limited liability company; (3) The nature and location of any injury or damage (4) Any "executive officer" or insurance manager, if arising out of the "occurrence" or offense. you or an additional insured is a corporation; b. Notice Of Claim (5) Any trustee, if you or an additional insured is a If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against any trust; or insured, you or any additional insured must: (6) Any elected or appointed official, if you or an (1) Immediately record the specifics of the claim or additional insured is a political subdivision or public entity. "suit" and the date received; and This duty applies separately to you and any additional (2) Notify us as soon as practicable. insured. You or any additional insured must see to it that we 3. Legal Action Against Us receive written notice of the claim or "suit" as soon as practicable. No person or organization has a right under this C. Assistance And Cooperation Of The Insured Coverage Part: a. To join us as a party or otherwise bring us into a You and any other involved insured must: "suit" asking for damages from an insured; or (1) Immediately send us copies of any demands, b. To sue us on this Coverage Part unless all of its notices, summonses or legal papers received in terms have been fully complied with. connection with the claim or"suit"; A person or organization may sue us to recover on an (2) Authorize us to obtain records and other agreed settlement or on a final judgment against an information; insured; but we will not be liable for damages that are not payable under the terms of this Coverage Part or HG 00 01 06 05 Page 13 of 18 that are in excess of the applicable limit of insurance. (7) When You Add Others As An Additional An agreed settlement means a settlement and release Insured To This Insurance of liability signed by us, the insured and the claimant or Any other insurance available to an additional the claimant's legal representative. insured. 4. Other Insurance However, the following provisions apply to other If other valid and collectible insurance is available to insurance available to any person or the insured for a loss we cover under Coverages A or organization who is an additional insured under B of this Coverage Part, our obligations are limited as this coverage part. follows: (a) Primary Insurance When Required By a. Primary Insurance Contract This insurance is primary except when b. below This insurance is primary if you have agreed applies. If other insurance is also primary, we will in a written contract or written agreement share with all that other insurance by the method that this insurance be primary. If other described in c. below. insurance is also primary, we will share with b. Excess Insurance all that other insurance by the method described in c. below. This insurance is excess over any of the other insurance, whether primary, excess, contingent or (b) Primary And Non-Contributory To Other on any other basis: Insurance When Required By Contract (1) Your Work If you have agreed in a written contract, written agreement, or permit that this That is Fire, Extended Coverage, Builder's Risk, insurance is primary and non-contributory Installation Risk or similar coverage for "your with the additional insured's own insurance, work"; this insurance is primary and we will not (2) Premises Rented To You seek contribution from that other insurance. That is fire, lightning or explosion insurance for Paragraphs (a) and (b) do not apply to other premises rented to you or temporarily occupied insurance to which the additional insured has by you with permission of the owner; been added as an additional insured. (3) Tenant Liability When this insurance is excess, we will have no That is insurance purchased by you to cover duty under Coverages A or B to defend the insured your liability as a tenant for "property damage" against any "suit" if any other insurer has a duty to to premises rented to you or temporarily defend the insured against that "suit". If no other occupied by you with permission of the owner; insurer defends, we will undertake to do so, but we will be entitled to the insured's rights against all (4) Aircraft, Auto Or Watercraft those other insurers. If the loss arises out of the maintenance or use When this insurance is excess over other of aircraft, "autos" or watercraft to the extent not insurance, we will pay only our share of the amount subject to Exclusion g. of Section I — Coverage of the loss, if any, that exceeds the sum of: A— Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability; (1) The total amount that all such other insurance (5) Property Damage to Borrowed Equipment Or would pay for the loss in the absence of this Use Of Elevators insurance; and If the loss arises out of "property damage" to (2) The total of all deductible and self-insured borrowed equipment or the use of elevators to amounts under all that other insurance. the extent not subject to Exclusion j. of Section - Coverage A - Bodily Injury And Property We will share the remaining loss, if any, with any Damage Liability; other insurance that is not described in this Excess Insurance provision and was not bought specifically (6) When You Are Added As An Additional to apply in excess of the Limits of Insurance shown Insured To Other Insurance in the Declarations of this Coverage Part. Any other insurance available to you covering c. Method Of Sharing liability for damages arising out of the premises or operations, or products and completed If all of the other insurance permits contribution by operations, for which you have been added as equal shares, we will follow this method also. Under an additional insured by that insurance; or this approach each insurer contributes equal amounts until it has paid its applicable limit of insurance or none of the loss remains, whichever comes first. Page 14 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 If any of the other insurance does not permit insured will bring "suit" or transfer those rights to us contribution by equal shares, we will contribute by and help us enforce them. limits. Under this method, each insurer's share is b. Waiver Of Rights Of Recovery (Waiver Of based on the ratio of its applicable limit of Subrogation) insurance to the total applicable limits of insurance of all insurers. If the insured has waived any rights of recovery against any person or organization for all or part of 5. Premium Audit any payment, including Supplementary Payments, a. We will compute all premiums for this Coverage we have made under this Coverage Part, we also Part in accordance with our rules and rates. waive that right, provided the insured waived their b. Premium shown in this Coverage Part as advance rights of recovery against such person or premium is a deposit premium only. At the close of organization in a contract, agreement or permit that each audit period we will compute the earned was executed prior to the injury or damage. premium for that period and send notice to the first 9. When We Do Not Renew Named Insured. The due date for audit and If we decide not to renew this Coverage Part, we will retrospective premiums is the date shown as the mail or deliver to the first Named Insured shown in the due date on the bill. If the sum of the advance and Declarations written notice of the nonrenewal not less audit premiums paid for the policy period is greater than 30 days before the expiration date. than the earned premium, we will return the excess to the first Named Insured. If notice is mailed, proof of mailing will be sufficient c. The first Named Insured must keep records of the proof of notice. information we need for premium computation, and SECTION V—DEFINITIONS send us copies at such times as we may request. 1. "Advertisement" means the widespread public 6. Representations dissemination of information or images that has the purpose of inducing the sale of goods, products or a. When You Accept This Policy services through: By accepting this policy, you agree: a. (1) Radio; (1) The statements in the Declarations are accurate (2) Television; and complete; (3) Billboard; (2) Those statements are based upon representations you made to us; and (4) Magazine; (3) We have issued this policy in reliance upon your (5) Newspaper; or representations. b. Any other publication that is given widespread b. Unintentional Failure To Disclose Hazards public distribution. If unintentionally you should fail to disclose all However, "advertisement" does not include: hazards relating to the conduct of your business a. The design, printed material, information or images that exist at the inception date of this Coverage contained in, on or upon the packaging or labeling Part, we shall not deny coverage under this of any goods or products; or Coverage Part because of such failure. b. An interactive conversation between or among 7. Separation Of Insureds persons through a computer network. Except with respect to the Limits of Insurance, and any 2. "Advertising idea" means any idea for an rights or duties specifically assigned in this Coverage "advertisement". Part to the first Named Insured, this insurance applies: 3. "Asbestos hazard" means an exposure or threat of a. As if each Named Insured were the only Named exposure to the actual or alleged properties of Insured; and asbestos and includes the mere presence of asbestos b. Separately to each insured against whom claim is in any form. made or"suit" is brought. 4. "Auto" means a land motor vehicle, trailer or semitrailer 8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To designed for travel on public roads, including any Us attached machinery or equipment. But "auto" does not a. Transfer of Rights Of Recovery include "mobile equipment". If the insured has rights to recover all or part of any 5. "Bodily injury" means physical: payment, including Supplementary Payments, we a. Injury; have made under this Coverage Part, those rights b. Sickness; or are transferred to us. The insured must do nothing c. Disease after loss to impair them. At our request, the sustained by a person and, if arising out of the above, mental anguish or death at any time. HG 00 01 06 05 Page 15 of 18 6. "Coverage territory" means: rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with a. The United States of America (including its territories permission of the owner is subject to the Damage and possessions), Puerto Rico and Canada; to Premises Rented To You Limit described in b. International waters or airspace, but only if the Section III — Limits of Insurance; injury or damage occurs in the course of travel or b. A sidetrack agreement; transportation between any places included in a. c. Any easement or license agreement, including an above; or easement or license agreement in connection with c. All other parts of the world if the injury or damage construction or demolition operations on or within arises out of: 50 feet of a railroad; (1) Goods or products made or sold by you in the d. An obligation, as required by ordinance, to territory described in a. above; indemnify a municipality, except in connection with (2) The activities of a person whose home is in the work for a municipality; territory described in a. above, but is away for a e. An elevator maintenance agreement; short time on your business; or f. That part of any other contract or agreement (3) "Personal and advertising injury" offenses that pertaining to your business (including an take place through the Internet or similar indemnification of a municipality in connection with electronic means of communication work performed for a municipality) under which you provided the insured's responsibility to pay damages is assume the tort liability of another party to pay for "bodily injury" or "property damage" to a third determined in the United States of America (including its person or organization, provided the "bodily injury" territories and possessions), Puerto Rico or Canada, in a or "property damage" is caused, in whole or in part, suit on the merits according to the substantive law in by you or by those acting on your behalf. Tort such territory or in a settlement we agree to. liability means a liability that would be imposed by 7. "Employee" includes a "leased worker". "Employee" law in the absence of any contract or agreement. does not include a "temporary worker". Paragraph f. includes that part of any contract or 8. "Employment-Related Practices" means: agreement that indemnifies a railroad for "bodily a. Refusal to employ a person; injury" or "property damage" arising out of b. Termination of a person's employment; or construction or demolition operations, within 50 feet of any railroad property and affecting any railroad c. Employment-related practices, policies, acts or bridge or trestle, tracks, road-beds, tunnel, omissions, such as coercion, demotion, evaluation, underpass or crossing. reassignment, discipline, defamation, harassment, However, Paragraph f. does not include that part of humiliation or discrimination directed at a person. any contract or agreement: 9. "Executive officer" means a person holding any of the (1) That indemnifies an architect, engineer or officer positions created by your charter, constitution, surveyor for injury or damage arising out of: by-laws or any other similar governing document. 10."Hostile fire" means one which becomes uncontrollable (a) Preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or or breaks out from where it was intended to be. approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders 11."Impaired property" means tangible property, other or drawings and specifications; or than "your product"or"your work", that cannot be used (b) Giving directions or instructions, or failing to or is less useful because: give them, if that is the primary cause of the a. It incorporates "your product" or "your work" that is injury or damage; or known or thought to be defective, deficient, (2) Under which the insured, if an architect, engineer inadequate or dangerous; or or surveyor, assumes liability for an injury or b. You have failed to fulfill the terms of a contract or damage arising out of the insured's rendering or agreement; failure to render professional services, including if such property can be restored to use by: those listed in (1) above and supervisory, a. The repair, replacement, adjustment or removal of inspection, architectural or engineering activities. "your product" or"your work"; or 13."Leased worker" means a person leased to you by a b. Your fulfilling the terms of the contract or agreement. labor leasing firm under an agreement between you and the labor leasing firm, to perform duties related to 12."Insured contract" means: the conduct of your business. "Leased worker" does a. A contract for a lease of premises. However, that not include a "temporary worker". portion of the contract for a lease of premises that 14."Loading or unloading" means the handling of property: indemnifies any person or organization for damage a. After it is moved from the place where it is accepted by fire, lightning or explosion to premises while for movement into or onto an aircraft, watercraft or "auto"; Page 16 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 b. While it is in or on an aircraft, watercraft or "auto"; 16."Occurrence" means an accident, including continuous or or repeated exposure to substantially the same general c. While it is being moved from an aircraft, watercraft harmful conditions. or"auto" to the place where it is finally delivered; 17."Personal and advertising injury" means injury, but "loading or unloading" does not include the including consequential "bodily injury", arising out of movement of property by means of a mechanical one or more of the following offenses: device, other than a hand truck, that is not attached to a. False arrest, detention or imprisonment; the aircraft, watercraft or"auto". b. Malicious prosecution; 15."Mobile equipment" means any of the following types c. The wrongful eviction from, wrongful entry into, or of land vehicles, including any attached machinery or invasion of the right of private occupancy of a room, equipment: dwelling or premises that a person occupies, a. Bulldozers, farm machinery, forklifts and other committed by or on behalf of its owner, landlord or vehicles designed for use principally off public lessor; roads; d. Oral, written or electronic publication of material b. Vehicles maintained for use solely on or next to that slanders or libels a person or organization or premises you own or rent; disparages a person's or organization's goods, c. Vehicles that travel on crawler treads; products or services; d. Vehicles, whether self-propelled or not, maintained e. Oral, written or electronic publication of material primarily to provide mobility to permanently that violates a person's right of privacy; mounted: f. Copying, in your "advertisement", a person's or (1) Power cranes, shovels, loaders, diggers or organization's "advertising idea" or style of drills; or "advertisement"; (2) Road construction or resurfacing equipment g• Infringement of copyright, slogan, or title of any such as graders, scrapers or rollers; literary or artistic work, in your"advertisement"; or e. Vehicles not described in a., b., c. or d. above that h. Discrimination or humiliation that results in injury to are not self-propelled and are maintained primarily the feelings or reputation of a natural person. to provide mobility to permanently attached 18."Pollutants" mean any solid, liquid, gaseous or thermal equipment of the following types: irritant or contaminant, including smoke, vapor, soot, (1) Air compressors, pumps and generators, fumes, acids, alkalis, chemicals and waste. Waste including spraying, welding, building cleaning, includes materials to be recycled, reconditioned or geophysical exploration, lighting and well reclaimed. servicing equipment; or 19."Prod ucts-com pleted operations hazard": (2) Cherry pickers and similar devices used to raise a. Includes all "bodily injury" and "property damage" or lower workers; occurring away from premises you own or rent and f. Vehicles not described in a., b., c. or d. above arising out of"your product"or"your work" except: maintained primarily for purposes other than the (1) Products that are still in your physical transportation of persons or cargo. possession; or However, self-propelled vehicles with the following (2) Work that has not yet been completed or types of permanently attached equipment are not abandoned. However, "your work" will be "mobile equipment" but will be considered "autos": deemed completed at the earliest of the (1) Equipment, of at least 1,000 pounds gross following times: vehicle weight, designed primarily for: (a) When all of the work called for in your (a) Snow removal; contract has been completed. (b) Road maintenance, but not construction or (b) When all of the work to be done at the job resurfacing; or site has been completed if your contract (c) Street cleaning; calls for work at more than one job site. (2) Cherry pickers and similar devices mounted on (c) When that part of the work done at a job site has been put to its intended use by any automobile truck chassis and used to raise or person or organization other than another lower workers; ; and contractor or subcontractor working on the (3) Air compressors, pumps and generators, same project. including spraying, welding, building cleaning, Work that may need service, maintenance, geophysical exploration, lighting and well correction, repair or replacement, but which is servicing equipment. otherwise complete, will be treated as completed. HG 00 01 06 05 Page 17 of 18 b. Does not include "bodily injury" or "property 22."Temporary worker" means a person who is damage" arising out of: furnished to you to substitute for a permanent (1) The transportation of property, unless the "employee" on leave or to meet seasonal or short- injury or damage arises out of a condition in or term workload conditions. on a vehicle not owned or operated by you, 23."Volunteer worker" means a person who and that condition was created by the "loading a. Is not your"employee"; or unloading" of that vehicle by any insured; b. Donates his or her work; (2) The existence of tools, uninstalled equipment or abandoned or unused materials; or c. Acts at the direction of and within the scope of duties determined by you; and (3) Products or operations for which the classification, listed in the Declarations or in a d. Is not paid a fee, salary or other compensation by policy schedule, states that products- you or anyone else for their work performed for completed operations are subject to the you. General Aggregate Limit. 24."Your product": 20."Property damage" means: a. Means: a. Physical injury to tangible property, including all (1) Any goods or products, other than real resulting loss of use of that property. All such loss property, manufactured, sold, handled, of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the distributed or disposed of by: physical injury that caused it; or (a) You; b. Loss of use of tangible property that is not (b) Others trading under your name; or physically injured. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the "occurrence" (c) A person or organization whose business that caused it. or assets you have acquired; and As used in this definition, computerized or (2) Containers (other than vehicles), materials, electronically stored data, programs or software are parts or equipment furnished in connection not tangible property. Electronic data means with such goods or products. information, facts or programs: b. Includes a. Stored as or on; (1) Warranties or representations made at any b. Created or used on; or time with respect to the fitness, quality, durability, performance or use of "your C. Transmitted to or from; product"; and computer software, including systems and (2) The providing of or failure to provide warnings applications software, hard or floppy disks, CD- or instructions. ROMS, tapes, drives, cells, data processing devices c. Does not include vending machines or other or any other media which are used with electronically property rented to or located for the use of others controlled equipment. but not sold. 21."Suit" means a civil proceeding in which damages because of "bodily injury", "property damage" or 25."Your work": "personal and advertising injury" to which this a. Means: insurance applies are alleged. "Suit" includes: (1) Work or operations performed by you or on a. An arbitration proceeding in which such damages your behalf; and are claimed and to which the insured must submit (2) Materials, parts or equipment furnished in or does submit with our consent; or connection with such work or operations. b. Any other alternative dispute resolution b. Includes proceeding in which such damages are claimed (1) Warranties or representations made at any and to which the insured submits with our consent. time with respect to the fitness, quality, durability, performance or use of "your work", and (2) The providing of or failure to provide warnings or instructions. Page 18 of 18 HG 00 01 06 05 NAMED INSURED:Associated Construction Partners,Ltd. POLICY NUMBER:46UEABJ60GL COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE HA99160312 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE BROAD FORM ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM To the extent that the provisions of this endorsement provide broader benefits to the "insured" than other provisions of the Coverage Form, the provisions of this endorsement apply. 1. BROAD FORM INSURED d. Any "employee" of yours while using a A. Subsidiaries and Newly Acquired or covered "auto" you don't own, hire or Formed Organizations borrow in your business or your The Named Insured shown in the personal affairs. Declarations is amended to include: C. Lessors as Insureds (1) Any legal business entity other than a Paragraph A.1. - WHO IS AN INSURED - of partnership or joint venture, formed as a Section II - Liability Coverage is amended to subsidiary in which you have an add: ownership interest of more than 50% on e. The lessor of a covered "auto" while the the effective date of the Coverage Form. "auto" is leased to you under a written However, the Named Insured does not agreement if: include any subsidiary that is an "insured" under any other automobile (1) The agreement requires you to policy or would be an "insured" under provide direct primary insurance for the lessor and such a policy but for its termination or the exhaustion of its Limit of Insurance. (2) The "auto" is leased without a driver. (2) Any organization that is acquired or Such a leased "auto" will be considered a formed by you and over which you covered "auto" you own and not a covered maintain majority ownership. However, "auto"you hire. the Named Insured does not include any D. Additional Insured if Required by Contract newly formed or acquired organization: (1) Paragraph A.1. - WHO IS AN INSURED (a) That is a partnership or joint - of Section II - Liability Coverage is venture, amended to add: (b) That is an "insured" under any other f. When you have agreed, in a written policy, contract or written agreement, that a (c) That has exhausted its Limit of person or organization be added as Insurance under any other policy, or an additional insured on your (d) 180 days or more after its business auto policy, such person or acquisition or formation by you, organization is an "insured", but only unless you have given us notice of to the extent such person or the acquisition or formation. organization is liable for "bodily Coverage does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused injury" or "property damage" that results by the conduct of an "insured" under from an "accident" that occurred before paragraphs a. or b. of Who Is An you formed or acquired the organization. Insured with regard to the B. Employees as Insureds ownership, maintenance or use of a covered "auto." Paragraph A.1. - WHO IS AN INSURED - of SECTION II - LIABILITY COVERAGE is amended to add: ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 1 of 5 The insurance afforded to any such E. Primary and Non-Contributory if additional insured applies only if the Required by Contract "bodily injury" or "property damage" Only with respect to insurance provided to occurs: an additional insured in 1.D. - Additional (1) During the policy period, and Insured If Required by Contract, the (2) Subsequent to the execution of such following provisions apply: written contract, and (3) Primary Insurance When Required By (3) Prior to the expiration of the period Contract of time that the written contract This insurance is primary if you have requires such insurance be provided agreed in a written contract or written to the additional insured. agreement that this insurance be (2) How Limits Apply primary. If other insurance is also primary, we will share with all that other If you have agreed in a written contract insurance by the method described in or written agreement that another Other Insurance 5.d. person or organization be added as an additional insured on your policy, the (4) Primary And Non-Contributory To Other most we will pay on behalf of such Insurance When Required By Contract additional insured is the lesser of: If you have agreed in a written contract (a) The limits of insurance specified in or written agreement that this insurance the written contract or written is primary and non-contributory with the agreement; or additional insured's own insurance, this insurance is primary and we will not (b) The Limits of Insurance shown in seek contribution from that other the Declarations. insurance. Such amount shall be a part of and not Paragraphs (3) and (4) do not apply to other in addition to Limits of Insurance shown insurance to which the additional insured in the Declarations and described in this has been added as an additional insured. Section. When this insurance is excess, we will have no (3) Additional Insureds Other Insurance duty to defend the insured against any "suit" if If we cover a claim or "suit" under this any other insurer has a duty to defend the Coverage Part that may also be covered insured against that "suit". If no other insurer by other insurance available to an defends, we will undertake to do so, but we will additional insured, such additional be entitled to the insured's rights against all insured must submit such claim or "suit" those other insurers. to the other insurer for defense and When this insurance is excess over other indemnity. insurance, we will pay only our share of the However, this provision does not apply amount of the loss, if any, that exceeds the sum to the extent that you have agreed in a of: written contract or written agreement (1) The total amount that all such other that this insurance is primary and non- insurance would pay for the loss in the contributory with the additional insured's absence of this insurance; and own insurance. (2) The total of all deductible and self-insured (4) Duties in The Event Of Accident, Claim, amounts under all that other insurance. Suit or Loss We will share the remaining loss, if any, by the If you have agreed in a written contract method described in Other Insurance 5.d. or written agreement that another person or organization be added as an 2. AUTOS RENTED BY EMPLOYEES additional insured on your policy, the Any "auto" hired or rented by your "employee" additional insured shall be required to on your behalf and at your direction will be comply with the provisions in LOSS considered an "auto"you hire. CONDITIONS 2. - DUTIES IN THE The OTHER INSURANCE Condition is amended EVENT OF ACCIDENT, CLAIM , SUIT by adding the following: OR LOSS — OF SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, in the same manner as the Named Insured. ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 2 of 5 If an "employee's" personal insurance also 5. PHYSICAL DAMAGE - ADDITIONAL applies on an excess basis to a covered "auto" TEMPORARY TRANSPORTATION EXPENSE hired or rented by your "employee" on your COVERAGE behalf and at your direction, this insurance will Paragraph AA.a. of SECTION III - PHYSICAL be primary to the "employee's" personal DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended to provide a insurance. limit of $50 per day and a maximum limit of 3. AMENDED FELLOW EMPLOYEE EXCLUSION $1,000. EXCLUSION 5. - FELLOW EMPLOYEE - of 6. LOAN/LEASE GAP COVERAGE SECTION II - LIABILITY COVERAGE does not Under SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE apply if you have workers' compensation COVERAGE, in the event of a total "loss" to a insurance in-force covering all of your covered "auto", we will pay your additional legal "employees". obligation for any difference between the actual Coverage is excess over any other collectible cash value of the "auto" at the time of the "loss" insurance. and the"outstanding balance" of the loan/lease. 4. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE "Outstanding balance" means the amount you If hired "autos" are covered "autos" for Liability owe on the loan/lease at the time of "loss" less Coverage and if Comprehensive, Specified any amounts representing taxes; overdue Causes of Loss, or Collision coverages are payments; penalties, interest or charges provided under this Coverage Form for any resulting from overdue payments; additional "auto" you own, then the Physical Damage mileage charges; excess wear and tear charges; Coverages provided are extended to "autos"you lease termination fees; security deposits not hire or borrow, subject to the following limit. returned by the lessor; costs for extended warranties, credit life Insurance, health, accident The most we will pay for "loss" to any hired or disability insurance purchased with the loan or "auto" is: lease; and carry-over balances from previous (1) $100,000; loans or leases. (2) The actual cash value of the damaged or 7. AIRBAG COVERAGE stolen property at the time of the "loss"; or Under Paragraph B. EXCLUSIONS - of (3) The cost of repairing or replacing the SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE damaged or stolen property, COVERAGE, the following is added: whichever is smallest, minus a deductible. The The exclusion relating to mechanical breakdown deductible will be equal to the largest deductible does not apply to the accidental discharge of an applicable to any owned "auto" for that airbag. coverage. No deductible applies to "loss" caused g, ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT - BROADENED by fire or lightning. Hired Auto Physical Damage COVERAGE coverage is excess over any other collectible insurance. Subject to the above limit, deductible a. The exceptions to Paragraphs BA - and excess provisions, we will provide coverage EXCLUSIONS - of SECTION III - PHYSICAL equal to the broadest coverage applicable to any DAMAGE COVERAGE are replaced by the covered "auto"you own. following: We will also cover loss of use of the hired "auto" Exclusions 4.c. and 4.d. do not apply to if it results from an "accident", you are legally equipment designed to be operated solely liable and the lessor incurs an actual financial by use of the power from the "auto's" loss, subject to a maximum of $1000 per electrical system that, at the time of"loss", "accident". is: This extension of coverage does not apply to (1) Permanently installed in or upon any "auto" you hire or borrow from any of your the covered "auto"; "employees", partners (if you are a partnership), (2) Removable from a housing unit members (if you are a limited liability company), which is permanently installed in or members of their households. or upon the covered "auto"; (3) An integral part of the same unit housing any electronic equipment described in Paragraphs (1) and (2) above; or ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 3 of 5 (4) Necessary for the normal If another Hartford Financial Services Group, operation of the covered "auto" or Inc. company policy or coverage form that is not the monitoring of the covered an automobile policy or coverage form applies to "auto's" operating system. the same "accident", the following applies: b.Section III — Version CA 00 01 03 10 of the (1) If the deductible under this Business Auto Business Auto Coverage Form, Physical Coverage Form is the smaller (or smallest) Damage Coverage, Limit of Insurance, deductible, it will be waived; Paragraph C.2 and Version CA 00 01 10 01 of (2) If the deductible under this Business Auto the Business Auto Coverage Form, Physical Coverage Form is not the smaller (or Damage Coverage, Limit of Insurance, smallest) deductible, it will be reduced by Paragraph C are each amended to add the the amount of the smaller (or smallest) following: deductible. $1,500 is the most we will pay for "loss" in 12. AMENDED DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF any one "accident" to all electronic ACCIDENT, CLAIM, SUIT OR LOSS equipment (other than equipment designed solely for the reproduction of sound, and The requirement in LOSS CONDITIONS 2.a. - accessories used with such equipment) DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF ACCIDENT,CLAIM, that reproduces, receives or transmits SUIT OR LOSS - of SECTION IV - BUSINESS audio, visual or data signals which, at the AUTO CONDITIONS that you must notify us of time of"loss", is: an "accident" applies only when the "accident" is known to: (1) Permanently installed in or upon the covered "auto" in a housing, (1) You, if you are an individual; opening or other location that is not (2) A partner, if you are a partnership; normally used by the "auto" (3) A member, if you are a limited liability manufacturer for the installation of company; or such equipment; (4) An executive officer or insurance manager, if (2) Removable from a permanently you are a corporation. installed housing unit as described 13. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE in Paragraph 2.a. above or is an HAZARDS integral part of that equipment; or (3)An integral part of such equipment. If you unintentionally fail to disclose any hazards existing at the inception date of your policy, we c.For each covered "auto", should loss be limited will not deny coverage under this Coverage to electronic equipment only, our obligation to Form because of such failure. pay for, repair, return or replace damaged or 14. HIRED AUTO -COVERAGE TERRITORY stolen electronic equipment will be reduced by the applicable deductible shown in the Paragraph e. of GENERAL CONDITIONS 7. - Declarations, or $250, whichever deductible is POLICY PERIOD, COVERAGE TERRITORY - less. of SECTION IV - BUSINESS AUTO 9. EXTRA EXPENSE - BROADENED CONDITIONS is replaced by the following: COVERAGE e. For short-term hired "autos", the coverage Under Paragraph A. - COVERAGE -of SECTION territory with respect to Liability Coverage is III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, we will anywhere in the world provided that if the pay for the expense of returning a stolen covered "insured's" responsibility to pay damages for "auto"to you. bodily injury' or "property damage" is determined in a "suit,"the "suit" is brought in 10. GLASS REPAIR -WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE the United States of America, the territories Under Paragraph D. - DEDUCTIBLE-of SECTION and possessions of the United States of III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, the America, Puerto Rico or Canada or in a following is added: settlement we agree to. No deductible applies to glass damage if the 15. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION glass is repaired rather than replaced. TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY 11. TWO OR MORE DEDUCTIBLES AGAINST OTHERS TO US - of SECTION IV - Under Paragraph D. - DEDUCTIBLE-of SECTION BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS is amended by III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, the adding the following: following is added: ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 4 of 5 We waive any right of recovery we may have c.Regardless of the number of autos deemed a against any person or organization with whom total loss, the most we will pay under this you have a written contract that requires such Hybrid, Electric, or Natural Gas Vehicle waiver because of payments we make for Payment Coverage provision for any one damages under this Coverage Form. "loss" is $10,000. 16. RESULTANT MENTAL ANGUISH COVERAGE For the purposes of the coverage provision, The definition of "bodily injury" in SECTION V- a.A "non-hybrid" auto is defined as an auto that DEFINITIONS is replaced by the following: uses only an internal combustion engine to "Bodily injury" means bodily injury, sickness or move the auto but does not include autos disease sustained by any person, including powered solely by electricity or natural gas. mental anguish or death resulting from any of b.A "hybrid" auto is defined as an auto with an these. internal combustion engine and one or more 17. EXTENDED CANCELLATION CONDITION electric motors; and that uses the internal Paragraph 2. of the COMMON POLICY combustion engine and one or more electric CONDITIONS - CANCELLATION - applies motors to move the auto, or the internal combustion engine to charge one or more except as follows: electric motors, which move the auto. If we cancel for any reason other than 19. VEHICLE WRAP COVERAGE nonpayment of premium, we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured written notice of In the event of a total loss to an "auto" for which cancellation at least 60 days before the effective Comprehensive, Specified Causes of Loss, or date of cancellation. Collision coverages are provided under this 18. HYBRID, ELECTRIC, OR NATURAL GAS Coverage Form, then such Physical Damage VEHICLE PAYMENT COVERAGE Coverages are amended to add the following: In addition to the actual cash value of the "auto", In the event of a total loss to a "non-hybrid" auto we will pay up to $1,000 for vinyl vehicle wraps for which Comprehensive, Specified Causes of which are displayed on the covered "auto" at the Loss, or Collision coverages are provided under time of total loss. Regardless of the number of this Coverage Form, then such Physical autos deemed a total loss, the most we will pay Damage Coverages are amended as follows: under this Vehicle Wrap Coverage provision for a.lf the auto is replaced with a "hybrid" auto or any one "loss" is $5,000. For purposes of this an auto powered solely by electricity or natural coverage provision, signs or other graphics gas, we will pay an additional 10%, to a painted or magnetically affixed to the vehicle are maximum of$2,500, of the "non-hybrid" auto's not considered vehicle wraps. actual cash value or replacement cost, whichever is less, b.The auto must be replaced and a copy of a bill of sale or new lease agreement received by us within 60 calendar days of the date of"loss," ©2011, The Hartford (Includes copyrighted material Form HA 99 16 03 12 of ISO Properties, Inc., with its permission.) Page 5 of 5 NAMED INSURED:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. POLICY NUMBER:46UEABJ5URP,46UEABJ60GL&46HHABJ60JW it THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. NOTICE OF CANCELLATION TO CERTIFICATE HOLDER(S) This policy is subject to the following additional days of the cancellation effective date to the Conditions: certificate holder(s) with mailing addresses on file A. If this policy is cancelled by the Company, other with the agent of record or the Company. than for nonpayment of premium, notice of such If notice is mailed, proof of mailing to the last known cancellation will be provided at least thirty (30) mailing address of the certificate holder(s) on file with days in advance of the cancellation effective date the agent of record or the Company will be sufficient to the certificate holder(s) with mailing addresses proof of notice. on file with the agent of record or the Company. Any notification rights provided by this endorsement B. If this policy is cancelled by the Company for apply only to active certificate holder(s) who were nonpayment of premium, or by the insured, notice issued a certificate of insurance applicable to this of such cancellation will be provided within (10) policy's term. Form IH 03 07 06 11 Page 1 of 1 © 2011, The Hartford TeX,qSMutuar WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND WC 42 03 04 B EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Insured copy TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ( ) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization (X)Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: All Texas operations 3. Premium: The premium charge for this endorsement shall be 2.00 percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s)or organization(s)arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium: Included, see Information Page This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on 10/4/25 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no.0002120491 of Texas Mutual Insurance Company effective on 10/4/25 Issued to: ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS LTD This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 9/22/25 PO Box 12058, Austin, TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com 1 (800)859-5995 1 Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 03 04 B TeX,qSMutuar WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND WC 42 06 01 EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Insured copy TEXAS NOTICE OF MATERIAL CHANGE ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A. of the Information Page. In the event of cancellation or other material change of the policy, we will mail advance notice to the person or organization named in the Schedule. The number of days advance notice is shown in the Schedule. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. Schedule 1. Number of days advance notice: 30 2. Notice will be mailed to: PER LIST ON FILE This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on 10/4/25 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no.0002120491 of Texas Mutual Insurance Company effective on 10/4/25 Issued to: ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS LTD This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 9/22/25 PO Box 12058, Austin, TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com 1 (800)859-5995 1 Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 06 01